Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/23
Ian Packard, co-founder and COO of OS Studios, has been instrumental in reshaping the gaming, esports, and entertainment industries. Alongside John Higgins, Packard built OS from a two-person operation into a global creative force, working with major clients like Riot Games, Netflix, and the NBA. Through innovative scaling strategies, passion-driven hiring, and a relentless focus on community engagement, OS Studios has delivered groundbreaking productions like Call of Duty: Next. Packard emphasizes the transformative impact of AI and live streaming on the future of gaming, predicting dynamic and evolving player experiences. OS Studios’ success reflects the integration of gaming into mainstream culture and live entertainment.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Ian Packard. He is the co-founder and COO of OS Studios, a creative agency specializing in gaming, esports, sports, and entertainment — all rapidly growing industries. As a side note, for those who may not know, the global gaming industry is now larger than the Hollywood film industry!
After meeting co-founder John Higgins at the National Film and Television School in the United Kingdom, the duo launched Mayhem Studios in London and later founded OS Studios in New York in 2018.
Under Ian’s operational leadership, OS grew from just two team members to more than 40, with offices in New York, London, and APAC, and was acquired by Project Worldwide in 2021. Ian has led significant projects for clients such as Riot Games, Netflix, and Major League Baseball, bringing deep production expertise, strategic innovation, and thought leadership to the evolving intersection of gaming, sports, and digital media.
Thank you very much for tuning in. I appreciate it. So, what inspired you and John Higgins to launch OS Studios? I interviewed John about it before. Now, we will hear your version.
Ian Packard: I think it is fun to share this because John and I — the success of our partnership, really — well, you have met John. John is a big presence and comes from a theatre background. My mannerisms are almost the opposite of that. I think contrast has been the secret to our success in many ways.
We had worked together before at Mayhem (our previous UK-based agency) and met during film school. Finding someone to go into business with is the hardest part. I have known plenty of friends for ten years who you think would make great business partners, but you are just great friends, not great co-founders. Sometimes, the best possible outcome is exiting a business and salvaging a friendship.
What John and I found was a sporadic connection. I hate using “synergy” — let us not say “synergy” — but we developed a professional relationship that could last. Six years in, we still have an incredibly strong business partnership. We still talk for hours. We chatted while on our treadmills before work this morning. Some of it is work-related, but a lot is just maintaining the connection.
Without going too far off track, the real reason for launching OS was that, after years of working with different people, we realized we had found the right match with each other.
Also, John and I are builders — we like to create new things rather than fit them into existing systems. As John probably mentioned, it was also a matter of timing. Gaming and esports were at an inflection point then.
Our first major client was the NBA. They approached us and said we wanted to launch a Twitch channel. What does that involve? What do you need from us? That set things in motion.
Jacobsen: When you both realized that this was the direction you wanted to go in, what did that look like?
Packard: I remember that exact moment in our office. I leaned over to John and said, “We should do this.”
Starting with a client like the NBA puts you in quite an advantageous position because you immediately have a strong showreel. From there, things just spiralled. Aside from gaming evolving from a niche genre into a broader cultural force, I think the biggest thing was that live streaming — the backbone of how broader audiences were consuming gaming content — became accessible with relatively affordable, off-the-shelf equipment.
Previously, to create a live, multi-camera broadcast, you had to spend $50,000, $60,000, $70,000 — even millions — on equipment typically reserved for traditional broadcasters like ESPN. Six years ago, you could suddenly walk into a store, spend about $10,000, and today, that cost is probably closer to $2,000, and get the tools to produce a live multi-camera show. That shift and the excitement around gaming’s rise made it clear: “Okay, let’s do this.”
That was the gestational point for us.
Jacobsen: Now, scaling is a significant challenge for any business. You went from two employees to over 40 — a 20-fold increase. What were the challenges in scaling in this industry? Or, given gaming’s explosive growth, was it relatively easy?
Packard: There were a few things that helped. One thing I’ve loved about launching OS in the US five or six years ago is that if there’s a problem to be solved, someone has already thought of a software or service to make it easier.
Even little things like “How do you do payroll?” became real questions when we started. Traditionally, you would go out, hire an accountancy firm, and pay an exorbitant fee. Health insurance was another massive cost.
Scaling for us was about not necessarily doing things the way they had always been done. We looked for smarter, more cost-effective solutions: payroll companies designed for small businesses and health insurance providers that catered to startups. Rather than hiring headhunters at a 25% salary commission, John and I became very hands-on and astute in our hiring practices.
When I think about OS, I don’t know whether someone went to college. I am not interested in what degree someone has or whether they finished high school. Whether they are passionate about what we build and engage with the medium matters.
That approach allowed us to scale without using traditional hiring strategies. We found people who genuinely love the games we work with and the publishers we partner with. They are, in fact, the same audience we are trying to reach. We could recruit directly from communities — from Discord servers, not LinkedIn pages.
So, yeah, there was a lot of “building the plane as we flew it,” as every startup does — and I know it’s a bit of a cliché. But for us, it was really about using innovative tools in the market.
Jacobsen: How did Mayhem shape the collaborative and creative approach to building OS Studios?
Packard: Well, we joke, but honestly, every startup is a little bit of organized chaos, right?
Mayhem comes from John’s original company, Managing Mayhem, which is a perfect metaphor for agency and startup life. For us, Mayhem was a real foundation. We came out of film school together. John already had a strong theatre background, putting on big shows, and I had been doing a lot of work in sports, which was initially my dream.
Mayhem taught us just how crowded the UK market was for the kind of work we were doing. Mayhem was a branded content production company — traditional TV commercials, promo videos, and the like.
The real lesson, which still shapes OS today, was to find your niche.
If I take it even further back, I remember when I was 19 or 20, I was working at IMG — a big sports production company. I had a conversation with the head of production there, and he said something that stuck with me: “Find your niche.”
He told me that there are a trillion production companies in the world, a trillion people who can buy cameras, and if you want to go into sports, you are competing against people who have been there for decades.
That advice stayed with me. At the time, gaming and esports were still perceived as niche. Now, of course, we know gaming is bigger than Hollywood.
But back then, traditional media did not take gaming seriously. That perception — that gaming was “small” or “unimportant” — helped us thrive because we saw where things were going before legacy media caught up.
We recently added a nice feather to our cap by talking to a big sports client a few weeks ago about becoming their new broadcast partner. Their big point was, “Look, 50 or 60 companies can do this the very traditional way. But I want something different. You guys are different, and that’s why I’m here. I want you to devise a new way of doing this because we need new eyeballs, younger viewers, and audience engagement.”
Right now, I think sports are — hopefully — starting to experience a renaissance in adjusting to how audiences consume content. Formula 1 has done quite a good job with that to a degree, but there is still so much more that traditional sports can learn from gaming.
It is essential to break down the walls of legacy media — the mentality of “We only do it this way” — why shouldn’t sports be broadcast on TikTok? Why should sports not have truly interactive audience engagement?
Twitch, for example, has built incredible models with extensions, bits, and digital currencies — and by that, I don’t mean crypto or NFTs. I mean mechanisms that allow audiences to engage without spending $200 monthly on a cable subscription.
I love sports, and I watch a lot of them. But I haven’t had a cable subscription since I moved to the States — it simply doesn’t make sense anymore.
If sports leagues want to maintain their relevance, especially amid concerns about an aging fan base, they must reinvent themselves now. For example, Major League Baseball and NASCAR have fan bases that tend to be older. They need to be thinking about how to reach the next generation.
So, yes, I’ve gone off on a bit of a tangent, but that mantra of “Let’s do things differently” is real for us, not just a startup cliché.
When we apply that approach across gaming culture, sports, music, and entertainment, we view it all under the same umbrella: live entertainment.
The question becomes: What can traditional entertainment industries learn from the strengths gaming, especially esports, has developed over the years of reinventing live media consumption?
Jacobsen: Now, what about some insights you can give us behind the scenes — for instance, about Call of Duty: Next or Arcane’s global activations?
Packard: I would say it was not just a launch. It was a moment.
Two things made Call of Duty: Next so exciting. First, it was an affirmation for me — that what we are doing has a much broader impact than just. This is our business. We enjoy media production, and we love gaming. Saying it that way sounds very low-key, but Call of Duty: Next was the first time we did an event where I had friends from university, friends from home in the UK, friends from school texting me like, “Oh, wow, you guys did that? That’s epic. I had no idea you were behind that!”
Sometimes, when you’re making something or producing something, you get so lost in the sauce. There are 300 staff on-site. It’s a vast operation. When you’re there creating it, you forget how broad the impact can be.
For context for anyone listening, Call of Duty: Next is the annual launch event Activision holds each year to reveal the new Call of Duty title. The first one was in 2022. Last year’s 2024 edition marked the third iteration, and OS Studios has produced each one since its inception.
The big USP (unique selling proposition) of Call of Duty: Next is that it is not a traditional product launch. Instead of one person standing on stage like at an Apple keynote or an old-school E3 presentation, you have 200+ streamers — prominent streamers, influencers from gaming culture, and celebrities — all given immediate access to the beta and broadcasting live to their audiences simultaneously.
It’s a deconstructed launch. And what’s fantastic about that, beyond the incredible audience metrics and organic engagement, is the technical side.
Technically, we could have gotten a Guinness World Record for what we achieved. Having 200+ people go live from one room simultaneously, each to multiple social media platforms like Twitch and YouTube, plus running a main Activision broadcast that pulls from and integrates most of those feeds — there was no blueprint for how to do it.
We didn’t invent anything proprietary per se, but we worked closely with partners to develop new technical solutions. We devised a new operational method.
Jacobsen: It is like a weird, scheduled meta-organic traffic model. You have your base 200 going live at a scheduled time, and then that branches out — not just full streams but clips, reactions, everything — all radiating out within that structured launch window.
Packard: It’s incredibly powerful.
Jacobsen: Also, do you get valuable feedback from the comment sections of those streams? Because if you are running a beta, you know bugs and issues will pop up. Early feedback could be hugely valuable to the development cycle.
Packard: Yes. However, to be clear, there is a big game development team at Activision — OS Studios that has nothing to do with actually designing the game itself. But to have, to your point, that much tangible feedback in real-time, even while we’re juggling a massive logistics operation, is invaluable.
What’s nice is that the community we have there — the streamers and creators — are very tolerant of that. They’re just so excited to be there. They genuinely want the game to succeed, and the opportunity to meet the developers directly and provide feedback builds a healthy ecosystem.
That’s a big thing we at OS encourage our clients to do: Do not build for the community. Build with the community.
How do you create an event focusing on the community from the ground up, creating a platform for them to generate content without unnecessary micromanagement? Instead of barking orders, you give them a space and trust that they will figure it out.
Again, it ties back to OS Studios’ broader positioning: helping to evolve the mindsets of legacy media and agencies.
You know, the big traditional agencies that dominate Cannes Lions each year, winning 30 or 40 Lions annually. We entered our first Cannes Lion competition this year, which was a labour of love to pull together. But a lot of the time, these big agencies white-labeled us.
They want to work with a smaller agency like OS because we’re genuinely connected to the culture — half of our staff isthe target audience. This connects to one of your earlier points: employers must be mindful of their industry and shape their hiring practices within that framework.
Jacobsen: In some sectors with standardized professional expectations — like accounting, taxes, or research — degrees and credentials are critical. You need that foundational knowledge to develop correctly in those fields, whether in practical domains like tax accounting or more theoretical ones like pure mathematics.
But in industries like video games, esports, and sports, where people are often borderline addicted to the subject matter out of pure passion, you want people who live and breathe it. Professionals in these spaces usually work eight to ten hours daily.
That is why your commentary is so relevant: In creative industries like gaming and entertainment, you need people who understand and feel the work. They know what it is like to play a game for one hour versus ten hours, and they even notice the differences depending on what time of day they play.
Packard: And to clarify, our accountancy team is more than qualified! But they don’t play Excel for eight to ten hours a day for fun.
Jacobsen: [Laughing] That is right. This is the thing — we still have big plans involving major brand names. Another Halo game, probably the next StarCraft, probably another Diablo, and another Call of Duty are coming around the corner at some point. League of Legends continues to get updates and revamps.
However, the gaming style is also changing, especially with VR and emerging technologies. How will gaming change over the next five years, especially with deeper AI integration? For instance, a level boss in the future might not just be a scripted program — it could learn and adapt dynamically to how the team fights it. And second, how do you see the value of entertainment changing?
Packard: Oh, that’s a hard but good one.
To your point, I have been fascinated by the AI side for a while. AI is an incredible tool, but it can also be badly misused.
My skepticism shows whenever I read so many poorly written LinkedIn posts these days — the overuse of em-dashes, for example — and honestly, I would challenge 90% of people even to know where an em-dash is on the keyboard! [Laughs]
But seriously, we use AI a lot at OS. It is a fascinating tool. We have experimented with it across design, refining copy, and other creative processes. From a marketing agency perspective, we are just scratching the surface.
AI’s integration into gaming is going to be massive.
Game replayability is currently primarily served by regular updates, patches, and downloadable content (DLC).
Take Grand Theft Auto V, for example. It’s been over a decade since it launched, yet it has stayed alive and become a global phenomenon due to its DLCs, updates, and the strength of its dedicated online community.
Looking to the future, I see two major shifts:
First, I think the new Grand Theft Auto will bring an actual, functioning metaverse-style game to life. It won’t just be a place to play — it will be a fully realized, virtual version of yourself. Inside the game, there will be an internal economy and currencies with real value.
Many games have already touched on this. Look at NBA 2K — every year when the new title drops, people grind for fourteen or fifteen hours daily to level up their characters and gain advantages. Gaming is moving toward a much deeper fusion of identity, economy, and experience — AI will supercharge that.
But as we look at what Grand Theft Auto could become, it’s that proper kind of second-person experience — a metaverse-style experience — built for a ten-year life cycle, because GTA releases tend to last a decade.
And then, to your point, how does AI get leveraged to create a truly personalized gaming experience? Replayability is key. I grew up playing role-playing games like Star Wars: Knights of the Old Republic.
Ironically, I grew up in a part of the UK where we didn’t have broadband until I was about 16. So, my gaming history was largely built offline, with long, single-player RPGs that could take 60-70 hours to complete. But imagine if I could replay a game like that — and through AI, it would evolve based on my play style.
It could learn what I enjoy most in role-playing, the choices I tend to make, and adapt the story, missions, and even final boss fights dynamically, rather than relying on traditional scripted mechanics or “fake AI” that we have seen until now.
So yes, I think AI, combined with the actual manifestation of open-world environments, will drive the future of gaming.
Borrowing lessons from games like Roblox, Minecraft, and others that hint at this model, Grand Theft Auto V could be a significant technical leap forward. Nobody knows what it will look like, but given Rockstar’s track record, it will be extraordinary.
Jacobsen: That is a great answer. What is your favourite quote about gaming culture? It does not have to be from a founder — just any quote about gaming culture that resonates with you.
Packard: Oh, that’s a hard one. [Laughing]
Honestly, I don’t have a specific quote off the top of my head. I won’t Google it, either. I want to keep it authentic. But if I were to create a quote, it would go something like this:
“Gaming culture today is like what music was in the 1990s — it’s everywhere, embedded in everything.”
To say that gaming is still a standalone genre or a niche entity is just inaccurate. Gaming is now part of every aspect of culture.
We hear so much talk about “gamification.” Many of our clients, whether in sports, entertainment, or music festivals, ask, “How do we apply gamification to what we are doing?“
So, paraphrasing that into a quote:
Gaming is no longer a niche but is woven into the cultural fabric.
There’s still an old stereotype that gaming is just about teenagers sitting in basements, but that’s completely outdated. Gaming today is collaborative, social, creative, and community-driven.
There’s also an older quote from Andy Serkis that says, “Every Age has its storytelling form, and video gaming is a massive part of our culture. You can ignore or embrace video games and imbue them with the best artistic quality. People are just as enthralled with video games as others are with the cinema or theatre. Over time, I think perceptions will change.”
I love this quote, as I think the article or interview is from 15 years ago now. It was a time when gaming wasn’t taken seriously, and he saw it as a legitimate form of storytelling. Looking at where we are now, with games shaping culture globally, it feels like Andy Serkis was ahead of his time.
Jacobsen: Authenticity is critical across every field, not just gaming.
Packard: Absolutely. Being inauthentic is never a recipe for success, no matter your industry.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/23
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
This interview explores the evolving role of maritime power in global security and deterrence, expert commentary highlights the technical, operational, and strategic aspects of undersea drones, nuclear submarine endurance, supply chain resilience, and quantum navigation technologies, the discussion underscores how Western powers have prioritized air dominance while underestimating the enduring importance of maritime superiority, drawing on examples from the Black Sea, Suez Canal, Strait of Hormuz, and Red Sea piracy, it illustrates how naval readiness—or its absence—directly affects global trade, stability, and strategic deterrence against adversaries like China, Russia, Iran, and non-state actors.
Interview conducted on August 16, 2025.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: As discussed, there is the matter of pedagogy and the ongoing review of the AUKUS agreement. A common question is whether such processes typically conclude on schedule, by military planning, or whether they generally take longer than anticipated.
Irina Tsukerman: At present, the review is scheduled to conclude in the fall. However, given the current state of the Pentagon, predicting the outcome is difficult. The Pentagon has been aggressively reducing staff, including personnel who would ordinarily participate in such reviews. Additionally, trade and diplomatic tensions with allied nations may further complicate the process, though in principle these matters should remain separate. The review itself is routine, with the primary goal being to identify and optimize any elements necessary for the strategic, operational, and technical assessment.
The program is ambitious and has been described by some as one of the most significant trilateral defence initiatives in recent history. Nevertheless, despite its broad scope, it has not attracted the same level of public or strategic attention as the Quad or other multilateral arrangements that have emerged over the past decade. The central focus of this process is Australia’s acquisition of nuclear-powered submarines. These vessels are intended to be powered by enriched nuclear reactors derived from United States and United Kingdom designs. Although there was controversy regarding France’s loss of a previous submarine contract with Australia, that issue is unlikely to affect the scope of the current agreement.
This program, often framed as a major defence alliance initiative, is designed to counter China’s growing threat in the Indo-Pacific region. The centrepiece of this strategy is the development of the SSN-AUKUS class submarines, which are expected to form the backbone of Australia’s future naval fleet. These submarines are based on the United Kingdom’s next-generation SSN design, with all three AUKUS nations involved in development, though the United States and the United Kingdom play the larger roles. They will be powered by pressurized-water reactors designed to increase endurance and enhance operational capability.
One of the most significant innovations in this class of submarines lies in stealth technology. Compared to earlier models, the SSN-AUKUS class aims to significantly reduce acoustic signals through advanced noise-reduction technologies, thereby improving their ability to operate undetected. In essence, the program represents an attempt not only to extend the endurance of submarine fleets but also to advance their stealth and overall effectiveness against rising Chinese naval capabilities.
One of the technologies mentioned is the use of anechoic tiles, which reduce reverberation by absorbing sonar signals. Alongside this, the submarines employ raft-mounted machinery to dampen vibrations, further improving stealth. These innovations make the vessels more enduring and survivable in contested maritime environments. In other words, if the Western alliance—the AUKUS partnership—were to enter into conflict with China, these submarines would be less vulnerable to detection and destruction.
A key feature of the design is the integration of the evolved version of the U.S. Navy BYG-1 combat control system. This includes more advanced sonar processing, improved weapons control, and tactical decision-making aids intended to enhance interoperability between Australian, British, and American naval forces—not only in training and regular operations but also in the event of conflict. The submarines will be equipped with bow-mounted active and passive sonar arrays as well as flank arrays, providing superior situational awareness. These systems allow crews to distinguish between different types of threats in complex environments and improve early detection.
The design also incorporates a standard vertical launch system (VLS), enabling deployment of a variety of weapons, including land-attack cruise missiles and anti-ship missiles. This versatility enhances both deterrence and operational flexibility. In practice, such submarines can perform missions ranging from strategic deterrence—maintaining a threatening presence at sea—to direct power projection, striking enemy vessels or even land targets. This aligns with the broader global trend of modern navies seeking to maintain superiority through advanced undersea warfare capabilities.
Importantly, the SSN-AUKUS submarines are being optimized for joint operations. This means they are not intended for unilateral use, but rather for integrated allied missions. Planned cooperation includes joint training programs, synchronized maintenance schedules, and coordinated deployment strategies. Operationally, these submarines will likely monitor maritime boundaries near contested international waters—particularly in regions where China has demonstrated expansionist behaviour, such as the South China Sea, Taiwan, the Philippines, and even waters close to Australia and Vietnam. The overarching aim is to provide credible deterrence against Chinese naval expansion while reinforcing collective security in the Indo-Pacific.
Anywhere China has either an ongoing maritime dispute or seeks to project power, it has expanded its presence—even sending surveillance ships as far as Alaska, which, while unusual, has occurred. In such cases, advanced submarines under the AUKUS framework would mean that not only the U.S. Coast Guard would be responsible for countering these incursions, but allies could potentially deploy as well.
While I do not expect such deployments to the far Pacific in the immediate future, escalation could make them necessary. Integrating the combat systems of the AUKUS nations allows multinational forces to operate more effectively, enhancing collective security and joint operational capacity. Strategically, this strengthens deterrence and contributes to allied cohesion.
Regarding basing, Australia’s Osborne Naval Shipyard in South Australia has been designated as the primary facility for the maintenance of the new nuclear-powered submarines. The site is currently being upgraded to meet stringent requirements associated with nuclear propulsion. In addition, Australia has committed to significant investments in domestic shipbuilding capacity, though this has been the subject of considerable controversy.
The United States faces significant challenges in this regard. American naval shipyards are chronically overburdened and under-resourced, with maintenance backlogs, staff shortages, and inadequate modernization. Reports have highlighted rusting infrastructure and insufficient personnel, leading to delays across multiple projects. Although shipbuilding is officially declared a priority, Congress has struggled to allocate resources effectively or pass comprehensive reforms to address the bottlenecks. Civilian commercial shipbuilding initiatives have received some legislative support, but comparable progress has not been made in the military sphere.
Strategically, Australia’s investment in U.S. shipbuilding capabilities is viewed as mutually beneficial. It could both expedite progress on the AUKUS submarine program and provide more general support to U.S. naval construction, which remains essential given China’s rapid naval buildup. However, Pentagon cost-cutting measures—particularly staff reductions—have not reduced project costs, which remain tied to earlier projections. This mismatch between resources, workforce, and financial planning contributes to delays and inefficiencies. Congressional debates continue over whether current projects remain adequate and relevant in light of China’s accelerating defence investments.
When so many of the people who were supposed to oversee these projects are dismissed, it inevitably changes the budget, the timelines, and the framework for review—including who is responsible for safety oversight. This is part of the reason the process has become far messier than it should have been.
Submarines are not the only focus of the AUKUS agenda. They are the centrepiece, but the partnership is also advancing other projects, including hypersonic weapons. These systems are controversial—not because they are ineffective, but because they are enormously costly relative to their limited operational scope. There is an ongoing debate about whether to prioritize more hypersonic missiles, which can only be produced in limited numbers, or to invest in a broader range of conventional weapons that cover multiple threats.
The trilateral framework is also funding joint development of cruise and anti-ship missiles (outside of those deployed on submarines), uncrewed undersea vehicles (UUVs)—essentially underwater drones—and quantum technologies. The latter are particularly significant given China’s accelerated research and collaboration with other BRICS countries, especially India, in both general-purpose quantum computing and defence-oriented applications.
Another critical capability under review is the Tomahawk land-attack cruise missile (TLAM), a long-range, all-weather, subsonic cruise missile capable of precision strikes against land targets. These have been used extensively in recent conflicts, including operations in Yemen, where U.S. stocks were rapidly depleted due to years of stalled production. This shortfall highlights the vulnerability of relying on limited inventories of highly advanced munitions.
The Tomahawk is already designed for deployment from Virginia-class submarines. It may be integrated into the future SSN-AUKUS submarines, though the exact scale of deployment has yet to be finalized. To expand strike capacity, the U.S. Navy has developed the Virginia Payload Module (VPM), which adds four additional vertical launch tubes to Virginia-class submarines. This allows for significantly greater missile capacity, enhancing strike options and deterrent capability if integrated into the AUKUS program.
That would make the submarines more suited for offensive purposes, not simply for deterrence patrols or “looking scary.”
Beyond the submarines, Australia is also integrating the Naval Strike Missile (NSM)—a modern anti-ship missile jointly developed by Kongsberg (Norway) and Raytheon (U.S.). It has a low radar cross-section, making it stealthier and more challenging to detect, and it is designed to strike moving maritime targets with high precision. The Royal Australian Navy is integrating NSM into multiple surface platforms, including the ANZAC-class frigates and the upcoming Hunter-class frigates, enhancing overall warfighting capability in preparation for potential conflict scenarios, particularly with China.
In addition, Australia is procuring Standard Missile-2 (SM-2) and Standard Missile-6 (SM-6) systems from Raytheon. These surface-to-air missiles are critical for fleet air and missile defence. The SM-6, in particular, offers extended range and multi-role versatility, engaging not only aircraft but also cruise missiles, ballistic missiles in their terminal phase, and even surface targets. Recent conflicts—including missile and drone attacks in the Middle East—have underscored the vital importance of layered air defence. Without it, naval forces are highly vulnerable.
Regarding hypersonic weapons, the AUKUS framework envisions cooperative work on hypersonic glide vehicles (HGVs), which travel at speeds exceeding Mach 5 and possess maneuverability that makes them extraordinarily difficult to detect and intercept. Their cost, however, is prohibitive, which necessitates close collaboration among the three nations to share research, development, and production burdens. This collaboration is intended to maintain a technological edge, especially as China continues to invest heavily in hypersonic systems as part of its naval and strategic modernization.
Another initiative relevant here is the Future Cruise/Anti-Ship Weapon (FC/ASW) program, a joint project between the United Kingdom and France, with Italy joining as a partner. This program aims to develop a new generation of cruise and anti-ship missiles, including both subsonic stealth variants and supersonic high-speed variants. It is noteworthy because France, which typically emphasizes strategic independence, rarely engages in such collaborative missile projects. While the program remains in development and has not yet been integrated into AUKUS planning, its eventual products could enhance allied strike capabilities. However, high costs, immaturity of the designs, and interoperability challenges with existing platforms mean that adoption is still uncertain.
That suggests even more work and expense on top of what is already a massive undertaking. And then there are the drones—the uncrewed undersea vehicles. I sometimes want to call them “unscrewed,” because that is how it feels every time. Let me call them sub-drones.
Sub-drones are still under review and have not been fully approved by the AUKUS partners. The challenge is not only in deploying them but also in recovering them. If one were to be lost or sink to the seabed, retrieval before an adversary could capture it would be essential, but difficult. Operationally, these vehicles could perform multiple roles: intelligence, surveillance, reconnaissance, and even strike missions. Their versatility would expand the effectiveness of submarine operations by providing additional capabilities and flexibility.
Alongside this, quantum technologies are a top priority in the AUKUS framework. Unlike some of the other programs that depend on political approval or shifting budgets, quantum research is recognized as strategically critical. These technologies are being developed for positioning, navigation, and timing (PNT) systems, which would provide highly secure navigation—particularly effective in GPS-denied environments. The idea is that, unlike current systems vulnerable to interference, quantum-based PNT would be far more resistant to hacking or spoofing. While some argue no system will be truly unhackable, quantum methods will certainly complicate adversarial penetration attempts and provide an edge in contested environments.
To illustrate, in scenarios where GPS is unavailable—or where using it would reveal one’s position—quantum navigation systems could allow submarines and other assets to operate stealthily while maintaining precision and coordination. Whoever achieves reliable, deployable quantum navigation first will have a considerable strategic advantage, much like the current AI race.
All of these developments point toward a vision of long-duration submarine operations. Nuclear-powered submarines with pressurized water reactors do not require frequent refuelling or surfacing, enabling extended submerged missions. This endurance means they can remain stealthy in highly contested maritime arenas such as the South China Sea or the Taiwan Strait, where detection avoidance is crucial. Their propulsion systems and advanced quieting technologies will make them harder to track, giving allied forces a significant tactical advantage.
The review process, therefore, is examining not only the construction and propulsion of the submarines but also the integration of these advanced technologies—drones, quantum systems, stealth measures, and extended operational frameworks. It is a comprehensive assessment of how to build and sustain the most advanced allied submarine capability in history.
Each vessel is supposed to have noise-reduction technology. Moreover, as you noted earlier, every one of these aspects is subject to joint review. Operational considerations, then, remain a core focus of this process.
While the new technologies often draw the spotlight, the maintenance cycle is just as critical. It is less glamorous than new weapons systems, but it is essential. Reactor refuelling schedules, for example, must be carefully managed—you cannot afford to run out of propulsion capacity during extended operations. The same applies to the servicing of weapons systems. Without sufficiently trained personnel to maintain and repair these systems, they may as well not exist. Having highly trained crews who can quickly return assets to service is vital, both for cost efficiency and for operational readiness.
The review is also assessing whether Australian crews have the necessary capacity and training to operate advanced platforms alongside U.S. and U.K. forces. This involves joint patrols, sensor sharing, coordinated responses, and even missions such as rescues or escort operations. Often, naval standoffs involve “escort scenarios,” where vessels shadow or escort one another out of contested waters rather than engaging in battle. Interoperability in these situations is as important as it would be in direct conflict.
Supply chains are another crucial element under review—ranging from reactor fuel to sonar modules, torpedoes, and spare parts. Spare parts, in particular, are a strategic vulnerability often overlooked. If exports are restricted or suppliers are cut off, vessels can quickly become inoperable. As such, mitigating supply-chain bottlenecks is considered as strategically significant as building the submarines themselves.
Taken together, these considerations support the broader aim of deterrence. A combination of advanced weapons, strong maintenance capacity, reliable supply chains, and trained personnel signals to allies and adversaries alike that the alliance is credible. Allies are encouraged to deepen cooperation, while adversaries are deterred from aggression. This enhances not only the credibility of U.S. forward presence but also strengthens allied cohesion by countering the perception that partners are dependent or “free-riding” on American power.
That is why the review is so meticulous. It spans everything from reactor physics to sensor fusion, from crew training to weapons deployment. Although it sounds complex, the framework is straightforward, since much of the political approval for these projects has already taken place. The task now is ensuring that the technical, operational, and logistical components align to deliver a sustainable, integrated force.
Every system, every operational cycle, and every technical infrastructure component is examined for how well it contributes to the broader ecosystem and strategic objectives. Once high-end capabilities are integrated, the question becomes: how does the entire posture compare to what adversaries are doing, and how flexible is it in delivering maritime dominance? That is what determines whether a state becomes a maritime superpower—or at least a credible naval power.
This is why so much attention is devoted to AUKUS and maritime power more broadly. Dominance at sea parallels the way air power came to dominate military planning in the twentieth century. Air superiority has received overwhelming attention for decades—and understandably so. It looks dramatic on television, it is easier for advanced powers to produce modern fighter aircraft, and it has become a hotly competitive global industry. Air power also allows the projection of force without placing large numbers of ground troops at risk. With the rise of drones—both aerial and unmanned combat systems—air dominance has been seen as the “new dimension” of warfare.
However, maritime power has never been more relevant, even though many assume naval battles belong to the past. In reality, we are less prepared for maritime confrontation now than at any point in decades. Take the Black Sea as an example. On the map, it may not appear strategically decisive, but disruptions there have shown otherwise. When Russia’s actions disrupted grain exports, hunger threatened countries as far away as Egypt. Without freedom of navigation, Ukraine and Romania cannot export grain fast enough to African markets. Unlike the U.S., which sells at higher prices, Eastern European exporters depend heavily on these markets. This illustrates how maritime disruptions quickly cascade into global instability.
Another example is the Strait of Hormuz, where a handful of irregular forces—or terrorist groups—can threaten international shipping. If tankers carrying oil or liquefied natural gas are blocked, the consequences ripple globally. Insurance rates skyrocket, transport becomes riskier and more expensive, alternative routes take longer, and energy prices rise. The result is higher costs for Japan, South Korea, and other energy importers, and ultimately, upward pressure on worldwide inflation. These examples underscore why maritime superiority is not only about naval combat but also about securing the global economic system.
And then there is the Suez Canal. Imagine a scenario where disruptions cut Egyptian canal revenue by 60 percent. That would plunge Egypt—and potentially surrounding countries—into severe recession, if not outright economic crisis. This is why maritime power is often underestimated. Its absence is felt immediately.
Look not only at Russia, whose sole aircraft carrier has been effectively sidelined and whose Black Sea Fleet has been badly damaged, but at China. Beijing has been investing enormous resources into upgrading and expanding its navy. At the same time, it has sought access to overseas naval bases. The most visible example is Djibouti, where multiple foreign powers now operate. However, China has also looked to the Middle East—including Syria and even unstable Yemen—as well as Sudan and Somalia. The goal is clear: long-term global maritime access. They understand that projecting power at sea never goes out of style. Western states, by contrast, have leaned so heavily on air dominance that they have allowed maritime preparedness to lag dangerously behind.
The vulnerabilities are obvious. Even small, inexpensive craft like Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps speedboats—designed for asymmetrical warfare—can harass and threaten U.S. nuclear-powered vessels. They are not “super-ships,” but they do not have to be. Persistent harassment degrades freedom of navigation. That is why many in Congress and policy circles have long argued for the U.S. to devote more attention to naval capabilities.
The U.S. is not nearly as far behind as the United Kingdom, which once led the world in naval power. Britain’s naval capacity has diminished to a fraction of its former strength. Today, it still deploys alongside the U.S. in operations such as those against the Houthis, but its ability to project independent naval power has been reduced significantly. Meanwhile, threats to maritime security have multiplied.
Some of those threats sound like they belong in history books—pirates, for instance. However, piracy has returned in very real ways, with groups in the Red Sea and the western Indian Ocean forging links with actors like the Houthis and al-Shabaab. Attacks have reached as far as Indian waters. What once seemed like a relic of maritime legend is now a modern, destabilizing force.
Jacobsen: To sum up: the sea remains an essential domain of conflict. Air power is not overvalued, but maritime superiority is undervalued. Add cyber warfare into the mix, and it becomes clear that modern conflict spans multiple domains simultaneously.
Tsukerman: The challenge for Western powers is to rebalance—recognizing that air, sea, and cyber all play decisive roles in maintaining security and strategic advantage.
Jacobsen: Thank you.
Tsukerman: My pleasure.
Jacobsen: Perfect. Thanks again. Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/22
Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content.
In this interview, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Chip Lupo examine the 2024 Women’s Equality Report rankings across U.S. states. Hawaii leads nationally, excelling in education, health, workplace equality, and political empowerment, followed by California, Minnesota, Maine, and New Mexico. At the bottom are Utah, Texas, Wyoming, Idaho, and Missouri, where cultural traditions, political conservatism, and limited progressive policies influence outcomes. The rankings heavily weight workplace environment and education/health, with income disparity as a key subcategory. Lupo stresses that economic opportunity is the foundation for women’s advancement. The report draws from credible federal and nonprofit sources to guide policy and improve equality.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Once again, we are here with the wonderful Chip Lupo to discuss what helps certain states achieve higher rankings in the Women’s Equality Report for the United States. Since the 1920 ratification of the Nineteenth Amendment—prohibiting sex-based discrimination in voting—there has been significant progress. Yet, as of 2024, the United States still ranks just forty-third globally in gender equality.
Let us start with the top five states. Hawaii leads the nation, securing top-five rankings across all categories and the number one position in education and health. Close behind are California at number two—with standout performance in workplace environment, political empowerment, and education and health—and Minnesota at number three, where women nearly match men in education and employment outcomes. Maine and New Mexico complete the top five, excelling across a range of equality indicators.
On the other end of the spectrum, the bottom five states are Utah (fiftieth), Texas (forty-ninth), Wyoming (forty-eighth), Idaho (forty-seventh), and Missouri (forty-sixth). Notably, despite its ranking, Utah will have a record number of women lawmakers in its 2025 legislature—around 30 percent of its membership. Across the United States, women will hold 33.2 percent of state legislative seats in 2025, with states such as California, New Mexico, and Colorado achieving female legislative majorities.
Chip Lupo: Hawaii’s lead is not surprising, as it ranks consistently high across workplace equality, political empowerment, and health and education. California and Minnesota also benefit from relatively small gender pay gaps, stronger workplace protections, and significant female representation in political leadership. Maine and New Mexico show that a balanced approach across multiple equality measures can lift a state into the top tier.
Jacobsen: That raises the question—what explains the low rankings for the bottom five?
Lupo: Several of these states, particularly Louisiana, Arkansas, and parts of Texas, have cultural and political traditions that remain more conservative regarding gender roles. Texas is unique because, although there are progressive urban centers, much of the state consists of smaller, lower-income areas where traditional gender expectations are more common. Utah and Idaho differ somewhat but also reflect political and cultural environments that do not prioritize women’s equality to the same degree as the top-ranking states.
Utah, in particular, still has a culture that remains predominantly traditional, even though the state has seen an influx of people from elsewhere. The cultural foundation in Utah is still heavily rooted in the LDS Church, and as such, it continues to embrace traditional gender roles. A significant portion of Idaho’s population shares similar influences—Idaho borders Utah, and LDS culture has some impact there as well. Beyond LDS affiliation, church life in general tends to be more prevalent in these regions. As a result, political leadership in these areas often votes less progressively than in other states.
Jacobsen: Looking at the data, Idaho ranks thirty-eighth, forty-eighth, and forty-eighth across the three main categories, while Utah ranks dead last in two of them. The rankings are based on three major dimensions: workplace environment, education and health, and political empowerment. Workplace environment and education and health are each weighted at forty points, while political empowerment carries twenty points, for a total of one hundred.
These weightings are not always obvious from a quick glance at the rankings. For example, in the top five states, education and health rankings range anywhere from sixth to twenty-ninth, yet their overall placement remains high because of strong performance in other areas.
When breaking down these categories, what was the rationale behind such a heavy weighting for education and health, along with the triple weighting of income disparity within workplace environment?
Lupo: It is an interesting breakdown, but it makes sense that women’s equality begins—and often ends—with the workplace. The starting point for equality in any demographic is economic opportunity. That is why the workplace environment should be weighted heavily; it is the entry point. When someone is gainfully employed, they are more likely to aspire to bigger and better things, including a move into politics.
Education and health are also critical, but the disparities in educational attainment still need work. One interesting aspect here is the metric on doctor visit affordability—it is not entirely clear why that would be weighted as heavily as it is. Nevertheless, I fully support the workplace environment having significant weight, because economic empowerment is the foundation. Once women have that foothold, they can advance into the political arena.
When it comes to disparity in advanced educational attainment, that is often an access issue. Addressing it would require reshaping public policy in states where these numbers lag behind.
Jacobsen: Even though the categories share similar weightings at the high end, what do you find to be the most interesting factor among the seventeen subcategories used in the ranking?
Lupo: For me, it still comes back to the workplace. The most interesting factor to me in the workplace category is income disparity, which has been debated for as long as I can remember. The disparity in the share of minimum-wage workers is another metric I found noteworthy. It was weighted somewhat less, as was the disparity in the average number of work hours. These are intriguing to me because minimum wage—being an entry-level wage—should not, in principle, be gender-specific.
It surprised me to see a measurable disparity in the share of minimum-wage workers by gender. Minimum wage rates are set by either federal law or state and local governments. So, to find a gap in the proportion of men and women working at minimum wage levels seemed unusual.
Jacobsen: My last question concerns the data sources. For this report, they included the U.S. Census Bureau, the Bureau of Labor Statistics, the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, the National Women’s Law Center, the Institute for Women’s Policy Research, The Nation’s Report Card, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and the Center for American Women and Politics. Why these sources? And for those who might not know, why is it important to rely on national or federal sources when conducting analyses that may influence policymakers and decision-makers?
Lupo: Most of our studies are heavily driven by government data, such as from the Census Bureau, BLS, and EEOC. What we try to do is balance those official figures with input from reputable think tanks and nonprofit organizations—like the National Women’s Law Center and the Center for American Women and Politics. These provide credible, independent perspectives.
We do this because we do not want our results to be based solely on government statistics, which can sometimes leave too much room for interpretation. By drawing from a well-rounded set of sources relevant to the topic, we can produce a more balanced and credible analysis.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts to tie this all together?
Lupo: Looking at geographic trends, I would say that in the bottom ten states, many are lower-income, largely rural, and still embrace traditional gender roles. That seems to be a consistent pattern. For the top five states, there is no clear geographic link, but if you compare them to an electoral college map, I think you will find that they tend to be more progressive politically.
Jacobsen: Very interesting. Chip, as always, thank you very much for your time. I will be in touch soon.
Lupo: Sounds good.
Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you.
Lupo: Thanks, Scott.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/21
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
In this August 15, 2025, interview, Scott Douglas Jacobsen speaks with national security lawyer and geopolitical analyst Irina Tsukerman about global flashpoints. Tsukerman addresses Ukraine’s battlefield stalemate and the underreported impact of Ukrainian strikes on Russian infrastructure, critiques U.S. tariff policy and Brazil’s strategic rise in BRICS, and analyzes instability in Mali, Sudan’s humanitarian crisis, and the global spread of FGM. She discusses rising antisemitism in France, its political and cultural roots, and the Taliban’s increasing international normalization despite entrenched repression and ties to terrorist groups. The conversation highlights how selective media narratives distort public understanding of complex geopolitical realities.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: This is the Everywhere Insiders 11. Our sources today are Associated Press (AP News). We are here once again with the distinguished Irina Tsukerman, a New York-based national security lawyer and geopolitical analyst.
Ukrainian defences are facing challenges. Independent sources confirm that the heaviest pressure is currently in Donetsk and Sumy, where several attacks occurred today. Ahead of the summit, what are your indications about the front line and the war, not focusing on Alaska, which will be covered in another session, but on the present war context?
Irina Tsukerman: It has not been as dramatic as some portray. Russia now controls roughly 20% of Ukrainian territory, down from about 27% in 2022. Its advances through the front lines tend to be temporary. Moscow has been sending waves of troops in costly assaults to break through, plant a flag, take a photo for propaganda purposes, and then retreat or be pushed back. Progress has been minimal. Russia deployed approximately 110,000 troops in recent days, but even officially acknowledged breaches have been minor and quickly reversed.
For propaganda value, however, that is the narrative most people hear—Russia making significant claims. Russian state media, isolationist voices abroad, and so-called “pro-peace” rather than “pro-victory” advocates are portraying these moves as breakthroughs ahead of the summit. In reality, the situation is closer to a stalemate.
Ukraine, meanwhile, has been striking Russian energy infrastructure, including a major oil refinery, causing significant economic disruption. Gasoline prices inside Russia have risen, and there is growing concern among Russian officials because the most recent Ukrainian attack was massive in scale. However, coverage of this has been limited compared to the attention given to Russia’s small territorial gains. In reality, the energy strike was a far more consequential development.
This underreporting is telling. For example, Bloomberg recently ran the headline, “Ukraine Claims Attack on Hub for Major Russian Oil Pipelines.” However, what does “claims attack” mean? Either the facility was struck or it was not. Additional Russian energy assets have been hit in drone attacks—about fifteen in total by some counts. Such vague or cautious reporting obscures the fact that the conflict is neither one-sided nor moving decisively in Russia’s favour.
It remains highly asymmetrical, and success is not always neatly measurable in territory gained. So, who truly has the upper hand?
Jacobsen: Russia temporarily breached the front line but did not get far—or Ukraine, after causing massive damage to Russia’s internal energy infrastructure? This should at least be a matter of discussion and debate, yet it has faded remarkably.
Tsukerman: The positive stories for Ukraine fade almost before they gain traction, while negative stories are amplified tremendously by social media commentators. I do not mean actual defence analysts writing for professional publications; I mean self-declared experts on social media. Many of these people want Russia to be doing better than it is, and I am struggling to understand why. Is it to save face for Trump, who is inviting the leader of a relatively small economy to Alaska to meet with him? Russia’s GDP is smaller than that of some individual U.S. states, which makes the invitation seem absurd.
Yes, Russia has been able to do a great deal with limited resources in terms of spreading propaganda and engaging various actors in sabotage across Europe. However, does that make the country “great” or its head of state worth meeting and honouring with a U.S. visit? I do not think so. Some people are even trying to spin the Alaska visit as a strategic message—”Alaska is ours”—but why would you need to send such a message? Why care what Russian propaganda says?
Equally disturbing is the fact that Russia-linked attack on U.S. federal court systems, yet that incident barely registers in public discourse. Instead, the focus is on Russia breaching the Ukrainian front lines, which is portrayed as a significant development. A sign of what? They have been fighting for three and a half years without achieving strategic success. Occasional tactical gains and setbacks are inevitable in such a conflict, but overall, Russia is not winning.
It is unclear why the media covers the story the way it does, but it is not helping foster a comprehensive understanding of the conflict. Russia is exploiting Trump’s weaknesses, but in reality, it has a weak hand.
One more point on Gaza: the disproportionate coverage is overwhelming.
Jacobsen: Brazil’s President Lula has announced $5.5 billion in credits for exporters hit by U.S. tariffs. What does this tell you about Lula, and what does it indicate about the broader impact of Trump’s tariffs? I am also noting the Q1’s economic contraction in the United States.
Tsukerman: Lula is doing what he needs to do to protect the interests of Brazilian exporters. Trump, meanwhile, is imposing what amounts to an unconstitutional tax on U.S. exporters. Americans are getting hit from both sides—on imports, we pay higher prices due to tariffs; on exports, there is an additional burden. Other countries are also retaliating with tariffs, so U.S. producers are squeezed in every direction.
More broadly, this is troubling because Brazil, despite its economic challenges, is rising as a defence-producing state and playing an increasingly active role in BRICS. Internal BRICS trade volume is now outpacing their collective trade with the BRICS-G7 trade. This does not mean they have surpassed the U.S.—the U.S. remains the world’s leading economy—but the fact that the U.S. is being increasingly excluded from major trade alliances and exchanges is a sign of strategic and economic struggle.
Other countries are now being forced to compensate their producers for losses caused by U.S. tariffs. This is making everyone poorer and contributing to a decline in productivity across the board. That benefits no one. The global economy thrives on robust trade. Trump does not seem to understand that imposing high tariffs—such as on imports of coffee from Brazil—will not help American farmers. We do not grow coffee in the U.S., so the only effect is to make it more expensive for American consumers.
If he had said this was a way to pay down the national debt and that it would be a temporary measure until progress was made, at least that would have been an understandable, if debatable, goal. However, he is not doing that. It is neither temporary nor consistent nor fair in its application, and it is not paying off the debt, because the debt keeps rising, and no one knows where all the revenue is going. Trump has claimed he “made trillions,” but if that is true, I would like to know where it went, given that the U.S. government has had to borrow another $5 trillion in its latest budget.
If the tariff policy is so successful in generating revenue, why are we not seeing the promised results? Moreover, ironically, Brazilian defence companies are investing in American ammunition—something not widely reported because it does not fit the preferred narrative. So why are foreign contractors winning tenders for the production of essential ammunition, while American companies are not stepping up with competitive offers? That is a question worth discussing. However, once again, the media is ignoring it, preferring to promote the Trumpian narrative that “Americans are now producing everything.” That is not true.
Jacobsen: Turning to Africa—Mali’s military rulers have arrested two generals and a suspected French agent, among others, in an alleged coup plot. The accusation is that this was an attempt to destabilize the country. The announcement was made by Mali’s Security Minister, General Daoud Aly Mohammedine, who stated that a full investigation is underway and that the situation is “completely under control.”
Tsukerman: This is the first sign that the situation is not under control. If you need to arrest people for plotting a coup—assuming the coup is real—that shows deeply ingrained dissatisfaction with the way Mali is being run. Moreover, there is genuine cause for concern: jihadist activity across West Africa, especially in the pro-Russian junta bloc that broke away from ECOWAS, has been rising sharply. Jihadists have made significant advances, and Russia has not been effective in stopping them. So there is reason for members of the military to be uneasy about the country’s direction.
If, on the other hand, the coup is fabricated, then the junta’s leadership is simply paranoid. In that case, the question becomes: what are they trying to distract from? The most likely answer is that, even if there is no significant opposition within the armed forces, the economic and security problems are growing. A fabricated coup plot is an effective way to redirect public attention to a manufactured threat, rather than confronting real challenges.
Either way, it is not a good look for Mali. Whether the coup threat is genuine or fictitious, the country appears unstable—despite claims that the situation is “completely under control.”
Other countries are now being forced to compensate their producers for losses caused by U.S. tariffs. This is making everyone poorer and contributing to a decline in productivity across the board. That benefits no one. The global economy thrives on robust trade. Trump does not seem to understand that imposing high tariffs—such as on imports of coffee from Brazil—will not help American farmers. We do not grow coffee in the U.S., so the only effect is to make it more expensive for American consumers.
If he had said this was a way to pay down the national debt and that it would be a temporary measure until progress was made, at least that would have been an understandable, if debatable, goal. However, he is not doing that. It is neither temporary nor consistent nor fair in its application, and it is not paying off the debt, because the debt keeps rising, and no one knows where all the revenue is going. Trump has claimed he “made trillions,” but if that is true, I would like to know where it went, given that the U.S. government has had to borrow another $5 trillion in its latest budget.
If the tariff policy is so successful in generating revenue, why are we not seeing the promised results? Moreover, ironically, Brazilian defence companies are manufacturing American ammunition—something not widely reported because it does not fit the preferred narrative. So why are foreign contractors winning tenders for the production of essential ammunition, while American companies are not stepping up with competitive offers? That is a question worth discussing. However, once again, the media is ignoring it, preferring to promote the Trumpian narrative that “Americans are now producing everything.” That is not true.
Jacobsen: Turning to Africa—Mali’s military rulers have arrested two generals and a suspected French agent, among others, in an alleged coup plot. The accusation is that this was an attempt to destabilize the country. The announcement was made by Mali’s Security Minister, General Daoud Aly Mohammedine, who stated that a full investigation is underway and that the situation is “completely under control.”
Tsukerman: This is the first sign that the situation is not under control. If you need to arrest people for plotting a coup—assuming the coup is real—that shows deeply ingrained dissatisfaction with the way Mali is being run. Moreover, there is genuine cause for concern: jihadist activity across West Africa, especially in the pro-Russian junta bloc that broke away from ECOWAS, has been rising sharply. Jihadists have made significant advances, and Russia has not been effective in stopping them. So there is reason for members of the military to be uneasy about the country’s direction.
If, on the other hand, the coup is fabricated, then the junta’s leadership is simply paranoid. In that case, the question becomes: what are they trying to distract from? The most likely answer is that, even if there is no significant opposition within the armed forces, the economic and security problems are growing. A fabricated coup plot is an effective way to redirect public attention to a manufactured threat, rather than confronting real challenges.
Either way, it is not a good look for Mali. Whether the coup threat is genuine or fictitious, the country appears unstable—despite claims that the situation is “completely under control.”
Jacobsen: Approximately 10 million people are currently internally displaced.
Tsukerman: Another issue that is not being clearly stated by the UN is that the so-called internationally recognized government has hardly more legitimacy than the rebels—its advantage lies only in the fact that more countries happen to support it. This conflict began between two warlords: one more willing to align with Islamists from the former al-Bashir regime, and the other more willing to align with Russia, assorted mercenaries, and other backers. Officially, the latter is secular, but in reality, both operate on tribal and sectarian lines.
The core problem is that both men seek power for its own sake. They have no regard for human life, no interest in governing the country effectively, and every interest in maintaining their control at any cost. They effectively halted Sudan’s planned transition to an entirely civilian government, plunging the country into further chaos.
The UN should acknowledge that rejecting the rebel government is not enough—it should also cease supporting the official authorities until they stop their abuses and, at the very least, restore humanitarian access to those in need. That access has been deliberately restricted, creating a real and deadly famine inside Sudan.
Both of these generals are extremely destabilizing.
Jacobsen: On another note, in Gambia, three women have been charged in connection with the death of a one-month-old girl in a female genital mutilation (FGM) case. We can highlight the broader implications of this issue. More than 230 million women and girls worldwide are survivors of FGM, most of them in sub-Saharan Africa, according to UN estimates. In the past eight years alone, some 30 million women globally have been cut—primarily in Africa, but also in Asia and the Middle East. The procedure is typically performed by older women or traditional community practitioners using tools such as razor blades. These cause serious bleeding and can lead to severe complications later in life, particularly during childbirth.
Tsukerman: This is unlikely to improve, given that USAID funding for humanitarian and educational needs in African countries has been reduced to negligible levels. The restructuring of the State Department, which eliminated many positions related to Africa and other critical regions, will also make it harder for the U.S. to lead in combating FGM and advancing women’s and children’s rights.
This creates an opportunity for the rest of the international community to step in—by donating funds, sharing best practices, sending experienced practitioners to educate families, and fostering cultural change. While FGM is sometimes justified on religious grounds, especially by radical groups, it is essentially a cultural and tribal practice.
Some countries, such as Egypt, have made progress through dedicated campaigns. However, in less developed countries with weaker infrastructure, lower education levels, and entrenched tribal customs, the battle is much more difficult. In rural areas with limited internet access, poor public schooling, and little government enforcement of anti-FGM laws, the outcomes are often tragic. Supporting governments in addressing these concerns directly is a critical step toward ending the practice.
Training local community leaders, providing accurate medical information, and educating people is a long and challenging process. It requires dedication, resources, and sustained attention. This problem will not solve itself, in part because of its psychological dimension. Victims of FGM often experience a form of Stockholm Syndrome—they may sympathize with the cultural norms of their community, want to fit in, or fear being ostracized by their families if they do not continue the practice with their daughters.
In such cases, victims can become perpetrators, perpetuating the cycle of oppression. Women in these positions need psychological support and counselling—not solely a law-enforcement response. For children removed from families that refuse education or compliance with government mandates, there must be systems in place to place them with relatives or trusted community members, ensuring they maintain access to their cultural environment and do not become isolated due to outside intervention.
This is a sensitive issue that is also spreading from Africa to Western countries with migrant communities from FGM-practicing regions. Even in places where laws forbid it and police actively track offenders, the practice sometimes continues covertly. Entire underground industries have grown around FGM, with practitioners making money from the procedure. These individuals, along with those who profit from child marriage, have a vested interest in maintaining the practice.
Often, FGM is not an isolated custom—it is intertwined with arranged marriages, child marriages, and, in some cases, the sale of girls to older, wealthier men. The practice is sometimes used to increase a girl’s “value” or dowry in such arrangements. Tackling FGM effectively requires addressing these related cultural practices simultaneously.
Jacobsen: French President Emmanuel Macron has vowed justice after unknown attackers chopped down a tree honouring Ilan Halimi, a murdered Jewish man. Any thoughts?
Tsukerman: The original Ilan Halimi case is horrific enough on its own. Halimi, a young Sephardic Jew, was kidnapped in 2006 by a group calling itself the “Gang of Barbarians.” They targeted him because he was Jewish, assuming that his family must be wealthy. What began as an abduction for ransom turned into a prolonged ordeal in which Halimi was tortured and mutilated before dying from his injuries.
The gang members were unrepentant, and the case epitomized a strain of antisemitism rooted in ignorance, greed, and entrenched stereotypes about Jews and money. Sadly, this was not an isolated incident; other attacks have been motivated by similar prejudices, even against Jews who were not wealthy.
The recent attack on the memorial tree is a disturbing sign that such antisemitism not only persists but is evolving—now targeting the memory of Jewish victims, even when no financial motive exists. This represents pure, unconditional hatred. Finding the culprit may prove difficult without surveillance footage or a repeat offence. However, more concerning than this single act is the broader proliferation of extremism, antisemitism, and fanaticism toward Jews, some of which is embedded in local culture.
Some of this antisemitism is rooted in politics, with radical left and radical correct elements aligning. Some stems from extremist versions of religion being tolerated or proliferating both in mass gatherings and online. Some is less about religion and more about ingrained antisemitic attitudes and a lack of education among children and young people in cloistered communities, whether recent migrants or their descendants.
All of it is alarming because no matter how many financial resources are devoted to the problem, without sending a clear message that such attitudes will not be tolerated, little will change. The French government does not appear to have a clear strategy for dealing with the social and cultural spread of antisemitism and the propaganda fueling it. There is an unwillingness to confront specific subgroups where these attitudes are particularly prevalent.
While the general education system may not promote antisemitism, children from such communities return home each day to hear other messaging from family and peers. The real challenge is working with families to remove hatred from within communities and to make violence against Jews not just illegal but socially taboo.
So far, there has been no effective answer and not enough pushback. Beyond vandalism like cutting down a memorial tree, there are physical attacks, intimidation, and harassment against people for being Jewish, for speaking Hebrew, or simply for being perceived as Israeli. These incidents happen often enough that the perpetrators feel emboldened to target individuals or couples they see as vulnerable. That is a fundamental problem requiring more than occasional arrests—it demands a complete rethinking of how social integration is handled in France.
Jacobsen: As of today, the Taliban has begun its fifth year in power. Thoughts on this—not exactly a happy occasion from our perspective?
Tsukerman: I am surprised that Trump and Pompeo—who played a key role in bringing the Taliban to power—have not offered public congratulations, as they have in other cases, such as Trump’s remarks about Lukashenko after their call. On the plus side for the Taliban, they are now demanding that an embassy be opened in Washington. So far, they have not succeeded, and their lobbying efforts face significant challenges. Still, the fact that they have become as normalized internationally as they have—not just by this administration—is troubling.
They offer access to resources, oil and gas, strategic economic corridors, and valuable gemstones, which are difficult to extract without foreign involvement. Because of these economic considerations, many countries are increasingly willing to do business with the Taliban, overlooking their gross human rights violations and public ties to al-Qaeda. Russia has taken the lead in politically normalizing them—first removing their terrorist designation, then engaging with them in forums on education and business, and eventually recognizing them publicly. This is ironic given that the Taliban originally emerged fighting Soviet forces.
Russia is not alone; other countries are also engaging. Even India is reaching out, though it remains far from full normalization. I expect the number of countries granting the Taliban at least provisional recognition to increase. There is no willpower to dislodge them from power, and the Afghan opposition movements abroad have been ineffective. Some are corrupt, some fail to understand the political landscape, and others waste energy fighting among themselves for recognition.
For now, the Taliban is firmly entrenched in power, with no visible pathway to change. More concerning is that they are not confining themselves to Afghanistan while building international legitimacy—they are also providing political and possibly logistical support to terrorist organizations. They have coordinated with the Houthis in Yemen, engaged with al-Qaeda, had tactical relations with ISIS-K in Afghanistan, and even communicated with Hamas. Russian military advisers are allegedly training Taliban and al-Qaeda fighters in camps across the country, suggesting an ambition to integrate into a broader Islamist jihadist network over time.
For now, their focus remains on the economy and international legitimacy, but their hardline policies on women and other issues have only grown more entrenched. There has been no moderation—if anything, their rule has become more repressive.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Irina.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/20
Dr. Elizabeth Weiss is an American anthropologist and Professor Emeritus of Anthropology at San José State University, renowned for her work in bioarchaeology and the scientific study of human skeletal remains. She earned her B.A. from the University of California, Santa Cruz, her M.A. from California State University, Sacramento, and her Ph.D. in Environmental Dynamics from the University of Arkansas. A former postdoctoral researcher at the Canadian Museum of Civilization, Weiss has published extensively on osteology, human evolution, and repatriation debates. She is a vocal advocate for academic freedom, evidence-based anthropology, and preserving scientific access to skeletal collections for research and education.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen interviews Dr. Elizabeth Weiss, an anthropologist and Professor Emeritus at San José State University. Weiss argues human remains are scientific evidence, not sacred objects, and warns that reframing bodies—and even realistic replicas—as sacred undermines research, education, and forensic training. She cites the Smithsonian’s removal of the “Written in Bone” exhibit despite descendant consent as emblematic of shifting standards driven by politics and beliefs. Laws like NAGPRA and expanding consent requirements, she contends, converge progressive and conservative agendas to restrict study. The result, Weiss says, is emptied classrooms, fewer osteologists, and custodial anthropology policing access over discovery today.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here with Dr. Elizabeth Weiss, an American anthropologist and Professor Emeritus of Anthropology at San José State University. In June 2023, she reached a settlement with the university that allowed her to voluntarily retire effective May 2024, with full benefits and emeritus status.
Dr. Weiss earned her B.A. in Anthropology from the University of California, Santa Cruz, in 1996, followed by her M.A. in Anthropology from California State University, Sacramento, in 1998. She completed her Ph.D. in Environmental Dynamics at the University of Arkansas in 2001. From 2002 to 2004, she held a postdoctoral research position at the Canadian Museum of Civilization, now the Canadian Museum of History.
Let us talk about anthropology. Why is the body not considered sacred, and why do some people believe that it is?
Dr. Elizabeth Weiss: Anthropology is a broad discipline composed of several subfields, including cultural anthropology, biological anthropology, archaeology, and linguistic anthropology. My focus has been primarily in biological anthropology, specifically using bioarchaeological methods to reconstruct past lifestyles through human skeletal remains. I have taught courses such as osteology, human evolution, and forensics, and my research relies heavily on CT scans, X-rays, and skeletal metrics.
In anthropology, human skeletal remains are typically regarded as valuable sources of data. Whether in forensic anthropology or bioarchaeology, these remains help us reconstruct past lives—learning about activity patterns, health, disease, causes of death, and everyday lifeways.
Within this field, the body has long been seen not as sacred but as a scientific resource. Remains are studied, shared for educational and research purposes, and documented through photographs, X-rays, and publications. This approach views the human body—especially after death—as a means to better understand humanity’s past.
However, some cultures and belief systems do regard the body as sacred. Ancient Egypt is a well-known example: the practice of mummification reflected a belief that preserving the body was essential for the afterlife. Tales of the “mummy’s curse” echo that cultural sanctity.
Many religious societies also distinguish between spiritual belief and the physical body. For instance, organ donation—once rare and controversial in many Catholic countries—is now much more accepted, demonstrating a shift away from the idea that the body must remain untouched after death.
Today, there is also a growing movement to reframe the body as sacred in the context of consent. This has been intensified by cases like Henrietta Lacks, whose cancer cells were taken without her consent and led to major scientific advances—raising important questions about autonomy, consent, and ethics in handling human biological materials.
This issue has become particularly charged in anthropology. In 2021, I posted a photo of myself holding a human skull with the caption “So happy to be back with some old friends @SJSU.” What had previously been a commonplace image—even used for promotional purposes—sparked significant backlash. I was subsequently removed as curator of the skeletal collection and locked out of the facility.
Believing the reaction to be retaliatory and a violation of my academic freedom, I filed a lawsuit in 2022. In June 2023, we reached a settlement that allowed me to retire voluntarily in May 2024 with emeritus status and pursue new opportunities, such as a faculty fellowship with Heterodox Academy’s Center for Academic Pluralism.
I have long maintained that the human body, particularly in death, offers invaluable scientific insights and that respecting the dead does not preclude rigorous study. The pushback I encountered reflects evolving cultural norms, especially around consent and cultural respect, and represents a renewed tension between science and sacred values.
And I was told by my colleagues, “But it’s different—because it’s human.” These were anthropological conflicts. I said, “Well, if you do not believe in the concept of the sacred, or in a spirit or soul for humans, then it is not different.” They said, “Yes. Yes. It’s different. It’s different.”
I responded, “It’s… not?” But what is interesting is what happened next. I thought that was a winning argument.
What I did not expect was that from 2020 onward, more and more people in academia and museums began claiming that the human body is sacred again. For example, the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution has stated they would not display any skeletal remains—even photographs of remains—if consent had not been given. In some cases, that means consent dating back 350 years, which predates the invention of photography. It is essentially an impossible standard.
Another development was that some Indigenous communities began claiming that not only are human remains sacred, but the remains of nonhuman animals may also be sacred. Some assert that if an animal embodies a human spirit, then that animal’s remains are likewise sacred and should not be displayed.
Now we have these moving goalposts. You cannot argue logic with religion or mythology. Religion, mythology, and folklore are valid cultural aspects and important to understanding human behavior. But the issue arises when anthropologists begin treating these myths as scientific facts. When they say, for instance, that an animal has a human spirit and therefore its remains must be treated as sacred, that is no longer an interpretation—it is treated as historical truth.
That is one direction the field is heading in: the remains of nonhuman animals are now also being regarded as untouchable.
But it does not stop at anthropology. We are beginning to see concerns in the medical and research fields as well. Some people are now arguing against organ donation or the use of donated bodies for research if there was not clear, explicit consent. One case I discuss in an article involves death row prisoners—where the issue was not consent, but mutual consent.
For example, if I were to die and tell my husband, “They can do whatever they want with my body,” he should be able to make that decision. Yet, in some cases, the decision is being turned into something much broader. In Indigenous studies, for example, it is now often argued that the whole tribe must consent, or that a large extended family must agree.
In that framework, my own mother might have no say over what happens to my body.
This is what happens when you turn these decisions into religious or spiritual debates—it stops being sensible or consistent. It becomes arbitrary. One person is allowed to consent, while another is not, based purely on their group identity. In the end, the loudest, most religious voices tend to win.
Jacobsen: Can you give an example of how this has played out in practice?
Weiss: Yes. One example is the Smithsonian’s exhibit Written in Bone. It focused on colonial-era skeletal remains from Jamestown and integrated bioarchaeology and forensic science. It examined causes of death and even included facial reconstructions. There was a temporary physical exhibit, and then a permanent online version aimed at educators—middle school through high school level.
But the Smithsonian shut it down. They removed the website entirely. In its place, there is now an apology: We’re sorry we displayed these remains without consent.
But they did have consent. They had consent from the descendants of those colonialists—people who specifically approved of the educational use of the remains. Yet, that was no longer considered valid enough.
And there is even a line in that apology that says something like, “Although the descendants supported this exhibit, we recognize that we should have been more sensitive.”
So again, it is the most sensitive, the most religious voices that are drawing the boundaries—rather than the most objective ones. That is another example.
This trend is going to expand into all sorts of fields, and we are going to lose valuable data because of it—especially forensic data. Most people do not realize this, but many forensic anthropologists get their first hands-on experience in archaeological classrooms, labs, or field schools. If we lose access to human skeletal remains, we lose the ability to show students real bones—experiences that often spark a lifelong interest in the field. A model is not an adequate substitute.
When I was first criticized in 2020 for posting a photo with skeletal remains—and for my book Repatriation and Erasing the Past—one of the first things people said was, “Why don’t you make replicas? Three-dimensional printed bones? Then you can give the real bones back.”
I responded that there are several reasons this does not work. First, a replica is not the same as the real thing. Second, it is difficult and costly to make accurate replicas. But the main reason is this: as replicas become more realistic, the same people who argue that the body is sacred are now starting to claim that replicas are sacred too.
There are already tribes who say that if a replica of a bone is “real enough,” then it should be treated as sacred. Some even claim that authentic-looking replicas should be considered as protected as actual human remains. And museums are literally destroying replicas because of these demands.
So, you might think, “I will appease this group by giving back the original and keeping a replica for education.” But it does not stop there. You cannot appease people who are making religious arguments in a scientific context. The demands escalate—more extreme repatriations, more destruction of data, more hiding of information.
And this does not stop with human remains. We are now seeing it with artifacts as well. If you think about book banning, the pattern is similar. At first it is, “We do not want these images.” Then it is, “We do not want these words.” Or, “We do not want these books available to this group.” Then suddenly it is, “We do not want these books available at all.”
It always escalates. It escalates because these arguments are not rooted in logic or scientific reasoning. They are rooted in emotion and belief. When that is the framework, people keep moving the goalposts.
Jacobsen: What do you think this means for anthropology as a science, particularly in American academic departments? And what will it mean for the rigor of scientific inquiry?
Weiss: For anthropology, it could well mean the shutdown of biological anthropology that involves the study of skeletal remains.
Certain aspects of biological anthropology might still survive—such as genetics—in part because there are relatively few institutions that do that work, and it is expensive. The bar to entry is high, so those programs will likely protect themselves better. Genetics is also more abstract—less visually or emotionally charged than working with bones.
What we are seeing now, especially in California, is that classrooms are being emptied of skeletal remains, regardless of whether they are Indigenous or not. Some universities are no longer allowing skeletal materials to be used in teaching at all.
There are institutions in California where you cannot even show a photograph of skeletal remains in an anthropology class slideshow. Cal State Bakersfield is one example. That is where we are now—images are being censored, and physical remains are being removed from classrooms.
The consequence? We will have fewer well-trained anthropologists—and therefore, fewer well-trained forensic anthropologists.
For example, one of the things anthropologists are working on is how to distinguish between skeletal remains from historic Indigenous individuals—say, 100 to 300 years old—and the remains of recent border crossers. That is a key forensic question. Was this death recent? Was it a crime? Or was it due to the dangers of crossing the border? How do we identify the person and contact their family? How do we bring closure?
All of that is jeopardized when we stop training anthropologists properly.
Anthropologists are also the ones who go to disaster sites—such as the World Trade Center after 9/11—to identify human fragments. That work starts in osteology classes, where we teach students all 206 bones of the body. But that is only the beginning. In the lab, students then learn how to identify much smaller fragments and distinguish between human and nonhuman remains. You cannot teach that without physical collections. It requires hands-on experience.
Anthropologists often teach anatomy in medical schools as well. If we lose access to human remains, we will see a decline in the quality of anatomical education. Many anthropologists end up in anatomy departments rather than anthropology departments—but their expertise still comes from osteological training.
These are ripple effects—not just for anthropology, but for academia as a whole. The rigor of scientific training will decline.
Another consequence is that a different type of student is now being drawn to anthropology. These are no longer the classic anthropology students—curious about the past, passionate about anatomy, eager to learn about evolution. Instead, you are seeing students more interested in guarding remains than studying them.
They become the little gatekeepers—monitoring access to collections, policing what others are allowed to say, show, or study. Anthropology shifts from being about inquiry and discovery to becoming a custodial discipline focused on restriction.
When I started in anthropology, I had three main things that drew me to the field. One of the first was my love of anatomy. I have always found skeletal anatomy especially beautiful. It reveals the intricate relationship between form and function. It is also one of the clearest examples of evolution in action.
You can look at a human skeleton and a dolphin skeleton and immediately recognize that they are both mammals, yet see how the environment shaped their bodies in dramatically different ways. My favorite chapter in The Origin of Species is Darwin’s chapter on morphology. He is even a bit witty—almost sarcastic—when he points out how all these creatures follow a shared skeletal blueprint, with different lengths and proportions. He basically asks, “Was God that boring?” It is clever and insightful.
That chapter stayed with me. My fascination with comparative anatomy and evolution was one of my core inspirations.
The second major thing that drew me to anthropology was the mystery of reconstructing past lives—especially for cultures that did not leave written records. I have always found that incredibly compelling. Even as a child, I was curious. I moved around a lot—my father is retired military—so whether I was walking around Georgia or Germany, I would wonder: What was this place like a thousand years ago? What were people doing here? What were they thinking?
That curiosity about unwritten human history is classic anthropological curiosity. It is what used to draw people into the field.
But now we are seeing a shift. Students are increasingly being drawn in not to study bones or history or evolution, but to enforce restrictions—to make sure remains are not seen unless there is a written consent form from centuries ago.
At my own university—and this is true at many in California—we are now being told that we cannot even show photographs of the boxes that contain skeletal remains, because even the containers are considered sacred.
And this leads to more and more absurd outcomes. Take the Smithsonian’s Northwest Coast Hall, which includes displays labeled “Objects of Power.” There are now claims that menstruating or pregnant women should not be near certain items. None of this makes sense unless you accept the premise of a sacred body. If you do not share that belief, then these are simply objects—calcium and phosphate, fossilized bone—data, not sacred relics.
That is where the field seems to be going.
Jacobsen: Let us close with this: What are your final thoughts on the convergence of modern political sensitivities—particularly from the progressive left—with more traditional religious ideas of sacredness? How is that convergence impacting anthropology and ethnology today, at least in the United States?
Weiss: The Native American Graves Protection and Repatriation Act—NAGPRA—is one of the key laws that reintroduced the concept of the sacred body into anthropology. It was passed in 1990 and brought together a wide range of support.
Anthropologists at the time tended to view it as a human rights law. But in reality, it was also strongly supported by a coalition of conservative religious groups—including the Baptist Women of America, the Mennonites of America, and others—because they saw it as a religious rights law. They supported it because it treated the body as sacred.
Anthropologists denied this religious framing for a long time. But I said, “No—there is a reason why so many religious groups are backing NAGPRA. It is because it is redefining the body as sacred.”
Now, what we see in anthropology is a convergence: progressive liberals are embracing the idea of the sacred body too. In some cases, it is because Indigenous communities are being elevated within postmodern frameworks—treated as groups with historical trauma and victimhood status. There is an exaltation happening, which leads to the uncritical acceptance of any belief associated with those communities.
But it does not stop there. There are also other groups now being viewed through that lens—such as convicts whose bodies were used in anatomy classes after death. In my article, I discuss how some students today worry, “Wait a minute, most of these donated cadavers are male, and many are men of color. What does that say?”
So you have that “woke” concern on one side, and on the other side, you still have the religious right, which does not want evolution taught, does not want humans equated with animals, and also wants to keep the body sacred. Both groups are converging—strange bedfellows—on the idea that the body should not be studied or exposed. It is the classic case of politics making strange alliances.
When I first entered academia, I was relieved—thinking, Finally, a field where I do not have to deal with religiosity. But over time I realized the field was not against religion; it was against one religion—namely, Christianity.
I thought that was a real disappointment. My view has always been: silly is silly, regardless of the source. Religious claims that are superstitious or nonsensical should be treated that way—whether they come from Christian fundamentalists, Muslim creationists, or anyone else.
But what I began to notice was that I was treating all belief systems equally, and no one else around me was. Many anthropologists allowed their liberal identity politics to shape their views selectively. They would critique Christianity harshly, but then uncritically accept religious beliefs from other cultures in the name of cultural sensitivity or anti-colonialism.
And that is how we have ended up with progressive anthropologists and conservative religious groups agreeing on one key thing: humans are fundamentally different from animals, and the human body must be treated with sacred reverence.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Weiss.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/19
Nnenna Onwukwe (They/Them) is the Federal Policy Associate at the Secular Coalition for America, where they advocate for church-state separation, secular inclusion in policy, and protections for religious freedom for all. In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Onwukwe discusses the new Office of Personnel Management (OPM) guidance under Director Scott Kupor. The memo, created in partnership with the White House Faith Office, permits federal employees to openly proselytize at work without consequence, raising concerns over harassment of nonreligious and minority-faith employees. Onwukwe warns this policy aligns with broader efforts by the Religious Liberty Commission to privilege certain Christian beliefs while neglecting protections for others. They outline potential workplace harms, legal gray areas, and the Coalition’s plans to provide resources for nonreligious workers facing discrimination.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, once more, we are here with the wonderful Nnenna Onwukwe. Regarding the work of the Secular Coalition for America, we have some new developments concerning the OPM guidance. Yes, it is the new Office of Personnel Management guidance under Director Scott Kupor.
Now, how long has he been in this position? One. Two, how is this partnership with the White House Faith Office not particularly good for the federal government?
Nnenna Onwukwe: Yes. Well, Scott Kupor started in July 2025. This was one of the very first pieces of guidance the OPM issued after he began his role. He worked with the White House Faith Office to create it. We believe this collaboration had been in progress for some time, as the White House Faith Office has been active in recent months.
They have worked with the Religious Liberty Commission and stated that they are focused on eliminating what they call “anti-Christian bias.” This guidance aligns with much of that work, where instead of protecting people of all religions and no religion equally, the emphasis appears to be on creating an environment in which Christians—or people of certain religions—can act without the same limitations applied to others.
Kupor oversaw this shift in federal workplace policy with the new memo. Essentially, it permits federal employees to openly proselytize on the job—trying to convert coworkers and explaining why their religion is the “right” one—without facing consequences.
Instead of simply focusing on their work, employees may now face situations where a coworker approaches them to share, for example, why Mormonism is great and why they should join. This is damaging to all employees, especially those who are nonreligious or belong to minority faiths, because it opens the door to harassment and undermines a neutral, professional workplace environment.
Jacobsen: I have worked in many places, and I am sure many others have as well—both inside and outside Canada and the United States—where harassment does occur. It can be explicit, or it can be subtle. So, they focus on “eradicating anti-Christian bias.” Do they provide actual case studies or meta-analyses, or are they simply asserting this?
Onwukwe: The Religious Liberty Commission is the body that has been tasked with eradicating what it calls anti-Christian bias, and they are trying to address this within the federal workforce. They held their first meeting a couple of months ago, and they are currently gathering data. We do not yet know what that data looks like.
We also do not know how they are defining discrimination. Is it a situation where a Christian declares their religion and is physically attacked? Or is it when a Christian expresses opposition to abortion or LGBTQ rights—positions that can be discriminatory in the workplace—and then faces consequences? From the language and priorities they have set, it sounds more like the second scenario, but at this stage, they have not released any detailed findings.
Jacobsen: So, the scenario would be something like this: a person says, “Based on my faith, I do not believe in marriage equality for homosexuals.” Someone at work responds by criticizing or pushing back against that openly stated belief. The Christian is offended by this response and files a complaint of anti-Christian bias. Is that essentially the kind of situation we are talking about?
Onwukwe: Yes, that is definitely a scenario that could happen. There is a process in place where such claims can be submitted. That kind of example seems like one of the standard situations that might arise. Another example could be people in the break room discussing the impact of the elimination of Roe v. Wade. A Christian employee could claim they were hurt or offended by that conversation, and then send an email to the relevant office stating they were discriminated against—even if, in reality, no discrimination occurred.
Jacobsen: I see. Now, previously, there were “reasonable accommodations” for religious practices. The press release talks about the OPM guidance expanding reasonable accommodations for religion. From my perspective, this seems like an overextension—taking what was already established and using it to primarily benefit certain Christian concerns.
Onwukwe: Yes. I am not entirely sure what the old guidance stated, but I can look into it and see if it is still online—if they have not removed it from the federal websites, which has happened in some cases. I do know that under existing HR guidelines, accommodations for religious observance apply to both religious and nonreligious individuals. These guidelines prohibit discrimination based on religion or lack of religion. They also allow for certain holiday observances, such as Christmas and other Christian holidays, but I am not sure of the full list.
Other than that, much of what is in the new memo goes into new territory. It states that people who are religious will be granted these accommodations, but the language is vague and leaves much room for interpretation. One question is whether these same protections will apply to non-Christians or to Christians outside certain denominations.
For example, if a Jewish employee is told by a coworker that abortion is wrong, but the Jewish faith recognizes situations in which abortion is permissible, would that Jewish employee be able to claim discrimination? Those kinds of specifics are not addressed in the memo.
The memo also goes beyond interactions between federal employees—it extends to interactions with the public. For instance, a VA doctor could speak to a patient about religion. If that patient were considering an abortion, the doctor could use religious reasoning to tell them abortion is wrong, even handing out pamphlets, instead of simply providing medical care. Similarly, a park ranger at a national park could lead a tour and then stop midway to give an hour-long talk about the Latter-day Saints, turning what should be a recreational activity into a religious information session.
Jacobsen: So, situations like that would mean it is not only federal employees who are affected—it could also impact people who do not directly work in those offices. With the VA, for example—Veterans Affairs doctors praying over patients—I can see someone like Mikey Weinstein of the Military Religious Freedom Foundation speaking very forcefully about this. I would be curious to hear his and other U.S. organizational leaders’ opinions on these cases. If the new OPM guidelines are this open-ended, it seems to me there will be a lot of people in the secular community who will be deeply concerned.
Onwukwe: Yes. For example, the Military Association of Atheists and Freethinkers (MAAF) is one of our coalition members, and they do excellent work advocating for atheists and the nonreligious within the military. There is already enough discrimination against nonreligious people in the military—the whole “no atheists in foxholes” stereotype still persists. This guidance adds yet another challenge for nonreligious people trying to secure benefits and fair treatment.
It is already hard enough for people navigating the VA system. This just adds another layer of difficulty. And in other federal agencies, workers are already under stress. People are facing layoffs. They are being told to return to the office after having been guaranteed remote work, sometimes after moving hundreds of miles away. This has displaced many workers and created uncertainty. On top of that, the new guidance means someone could now be required to go into the office and have a coworker—say, Susan from HR—start talking to them about her religion and handing them pamphlets. This is adding frustration on top of frustration.
Jacobsen: Are there any other points that should be added with regard to this memo? Obviously, there will be more developments in the coming weeks.
Onwukwe: Yes. It is relevant for people to know that we are currently working on guidelines for nonreligious employees—resources for those who do not want to face discrimination or harassment in the workplace and who do not want coworkers telling them which religion they should follow. We plan to release those guidelines soon.
We are looking closely at the memo, and there are many areas where problems could arise. If a supervisor tells you, “This is the religion you should follow,” and then begins harassing you, that is a serious issue. There will no doubt be cases like that under this guidance.
Jacobsen: Yes—when you have management, power imbalances, and similar dynamics, employees may not feel comfortable pushing back. They might fear that their job could be at risk if they do. With the mass layoffs that have already occurred in the federal government, some employees might feel forced to endure these situations.
Onwukwe: Exactly. That is why we want to provide guidance. We want to offer information on who people can reach out to, what areas they can challenge if they feel comfortable doing so, and make sure they understand their rights. Right now, there are not many resources available for nonreligious employees, so we want to fill that gap.
Jacobsen: A big part of this, from an anthropological and cultural studies perspective, is that the United States has been undergoing increasing secularization—significant, but far from complete. There is still a great deal of entrenched Christian resentment toward that trend. If members of that group hold seniority or management positions, they are more likely to have power over benefits and workplace decisions. Given this new leverage, their resentment could be expressed in ways that are acutely distressing for other employees.
Onwukwe: Yes, and that pushback is exactly what we are seeing from the Religious Liberty Commission and the White House Faith Office. Now, with OPM’s new memo, this appears to be their way of saying, “We have you covered, Christians in America. Do not worry about challenges to your faith—you can speak freely, and we will protect you.”
This approach specifically favors one particular type of Christianity, while ignoring every other faith and the nonreligious. It is consistent with other actions we have seen recently, and it is deeply concerning. We want people to be aware of what is happening and to know that there is work being done to protect those who are most at risk under these policies.
Jacobsen: Nnenna, thank you very much for your time again today. I appreciate your expertise.
Onwukwe: Yes, sounds good. It has been great talking to you again.
—
Supplementary commentary:
About the prior guidance federal employees had on religion before this new memo was issued, Nnenna reviewed the memo alongside Title VII information from OPM and the overall messaging on both OPM and EEOC’s websites. The federal government will technically still follow Title VII. However, the new guidance dismantles key sections. Those sections dealing with religious-based harassment and discrimination, particularly those protecting the secular community).
Section 12 of EEOC’s guidance focuses on religious discrimination in the workplace. Quotes:
- The non-discrimination provisions of….[Title VII] also protect employees who do not possess religious beliefs or engage in religious practices.[10] EEOC, as a federal government enforcement agency, and its staff, like all governmental entities, carries out its mission neutrally and without any hostility to any religion or related observances, practices, and beliefs, or lack thereof.[11]
- An employer can thus restrict religious expression when it would disrupt customer service or the workplace, including when customers or coworkers would reasonably perceive it to express the employer’s own message.[140]
- Additionally, in a government workplace, the First Amendment Free Exercise Clause and Establishment Clause may affect the employer’s or employee’s ability to restrict or engage in religious expression.
Under the Religion section of EEOC’s Enforcement Guidance on Harassment in the Workplace, sample of example of religious based harassment included:
- Thiago, a fraud investigator at a property and casualty insurer, is agnostic and rejects organized religion. After Thiago’s sister died unexpectedly, Thiago is despondent. He is approached by a coworker, Laney, who says that she can communicate with the dead and has received the following messages from Thiago’s sister: the sister is suffering in Hell, and Thiago will go to Hell as well if he does not “find God.” Thiago becomes upset and asks Laney to never bring up the topic again. Nevertheless, Laney repeatedly encourages Thiago to find religion so Thiago will not “go to Hell like his sister,” despite Thiago’s ongoing requests for Laney to “drop it.” Based on these facts, Laney’s harassing conduct toward Thiago is based on religion.22
Previously, EEOC’s guidance recognized religious harassment as a grounds for discipline or unlawful conduct under Title VII. EEOC emphasized the First Amendment’s Establishment Clause on government employee’s abilities to engage in religious expression in the workplace. The new OPM memo effectively erodes those protections. This opens the grounds for nonreligious community to religious-based harassment.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/16
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
In this wide-ranging conversation, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Irina Tsukerman discuss the evolving U.S.–China tech rivalry. They explore semiconductor geopolitics, rare earth supply chains, AI integration, and strategic industrial policy. Tsukerman explains China’s dominance in rare earth refinement, the shortcomings of the CHIPS Act, and concerns over industrial espionage. The discussion highlights Middle Eastern AI adoption, BRICS collaboration, and growing visa restrictions impacting international researchers. With mutual distrust intensifying, both countries engage in surveillance precautions and economic retaliation. Despite conflict over advanced technologies, cooperation remains possible in low-grade chips and less-strategic raw materials.
Interview conducted August 1.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here once again with the insightful New York attorney, founder of Scarab Rising and The Washington Outsider, and also co-host of the excellent Good Men Project feature called the Everywhere Insiderswith me. Today, we are going to talk about semiconductor geopolitics and the evolving U.S.–China tech policy landscape.
So, I was listening to Fareed Zakaria — a sharp American political commentator — discuss rare earth minerals. He noted that it is not that rare earth minerals are rare, but that the refining process is complex and environmentally taxing, which makes the final usable product hard to obtain. That was a subtle point I had not considered before — a genuinely educational moment. Does that kind of insight play into this broader issue?
Irina Tsukerman: Yes — absolutely, though it is nuanced. First, let us clarify: rare earth elements (REEs) refer to a group of 17 chemically similar elements. While many of them are relatively abundant in the Earth’s crust, they are rarely found in concentrated, economically viable forms, and their extraction and refinement involve complex, hazardous, and often environmentally damaging processes. So while Zakaria is right that the refining process is a significant bottleneck, some REEs are indeed geologically scarce, and not all countries have either the deposits or the infrastructure to handle them.
China currently dominates this space, accounting for over 60% of global rare earth mining output and around 85–90% of global rare earth refining capacity, as of recent years. That gives China massive leverage, because many other countries with deposits — including the U.S. — have not invested adequately in mining or refining. Environmental regulations, cost, and lack of domestic industrial policy led countries like the U.S. to outsource this entire supply chain to China. As a result, the U.S. lacks the industrial ecosystem and trained workforce needed to scale domestic production or refinement rapidly.
So yes, this is central to the semiconductor and broader tech struggle. While the U.S. still leads in semiconductor design and advanced chip manufacturing (especially via allies like Taiwan’s TSMC), China is catching up rapidly in some areas, dominant in others (like materials processing and supply chains), and strategically using its control over rare earths and critical minerals as economic leverage.
Jacobsen: So is this industrial warfare — like strong-arming the early phases of the supply chain?
Tsukerman: Exactly. Think of it this way: the U.S. is strong in innovation and R&D, especially in chips, AI, and advanced computing. However, China, by controlling key inputs — like rare earths, gallium, and graphite — can constrain U.S. and allied manufacturing capacity from the ground up. This is why the U.S. has launched initiatives like the CHIPS and Science Act, and why there is a push to diversify rare earth supply chains — from countries like Australia, Canada, and some African nations. There are alternatives and recycling efforts underway, but none are immediate fixes.
Jacobsen: What about economic pressure — sanctions, bans, or trade controls — aimed at countries that support China’s tech dominance?
Tsukerman: The U.S. has tried several levers: export controls on advanced chips and chip-making equipment to China (especially targeting companies like SMIC), restrictions on U.S. investment in specific Chinese tech sectors (under review), and blocking Chinese firms with military or surveillance ties. Moreover, yes, Washington has also pressured allies and third-party countries — from Japan to the Netherlands — to limit high-tech exports to China, particularly in semiconductor manufacturing equipment (ASML, for example).
However, China has responded in kind. It imposed export controls on gallium and germanium, both critical to semiconductors and EVs. It is also threatened to limit exports of graphite, a key component in battery production. So, it is a tit-for-tat economic and industrial standoff — not always visible in headline-grabbing tariffs, but deeply felt in supply chain disruptions and long-term strategic positioning.
The CHIPS Act was intended not only to bolster domestic semiconductor manufacturing in the U.S., but also to regulate and prevent third-party countries from circumventing U.S. export controls, particularly those targeting China. However, this enforcement has not been fully effective for several reasons.
First, some countries are challenging to monitor or influence, especially if they lack strong compliance frameworks or strategic alignment with U.S. policies. We have to remain constantly vigilant to ensure no smuggling occurs — and, of course, some smuggling does occur. Second, it is not always the countries that are the biggest problem. Often, it is private companies operating within or across those countries that are the key actors. These may not be government entities at all — they can be intermediaries or facilitators, what you might even call modern-day privateers or profiteers, making money off of rerouting sensitive components.
Sometimes, companies do not carry out sufficient due diligence, and as a result, they unknowingly work with illegitimate intermediaries who smuggle components to China or its strategic partners. We are seeing a combination of scenarios: countries thriving on black-market operations, companies deliberately bypassing restrictions, and mercenary third-party actors exploiting legal and logistical loopholes. The more restrictions are imposed — without a corresponding increase in enforcement capacity — the more opportunities there are for smuggling, contraband, and circumvention. These illicit flows adapt quickly to pressure and find new iterations constantly.
Jacobsen: Let me raise a broader point — between the United States and China, is there any serious third competitor emerging? Not necessarily a single country — maybe a bloc, like the EU, Arab League, or others?
Tsukerman: That is a good question. We are starting to see BRICS — particularly its expanded format — position itself as a potential tech collaboration bloc. While it has not been especially successful in de-dollarization or in undermining Western economic dominance, it has made strides in exclusive tech exchanges among its member states — exchanges that deliberately exclude the West.
For instance, India, China, Russia, and others in BRICS are engaging in joint R&D efforts — not just in semiconductors, but also in quantum computing, AI, and advanced manufacturing. Much of this is still in the early to mid stages, and while not all of it is groundbreaking yet, some of the quantum research is quite concerning from a security and strategic standpoint.
Meanwhile, in the Middle East, countries like Saudi Arabia have shown strong interest in tapping into Chinese expertise to develop their own domestic semiconductor and AI sectors. Part of their motivation for seeking expanded BRICS membership was precisely this: to bypass Western dependency and gain access to non-Western tech pipelines. Saudi Arabia’s actual status within BRICS remains ambiguous — there are conflicting reports on whether it formally joined or just participated as an observer. However, their interest stemmed from a desire to diversify their strategic partnerships.
Jacobsen: So while not a full-on third superpower, we are looking at emerging coalitions with potential?
Tsukerman: And on the Western side, we are seeing a cohesive tech alliance taking shape — led by the U.S., Japan, the Netherlands, South Korea, and Taiwan. This informal bloc is collaborating on semiconductor supply chains, chip manufacturing equipment, and joint R&D, particularly as a response to China’s industrial policies. Together, they represent the core of the global advanced chip ecosystem — and this cooperation is increasingly strategic, not just commercial.
Jacobsen: But Donald Trump — being focused as he is on domestic production and trade deficits — has just imposed a 20% tariff on Taiwanese semiconductors.
Tsukerman: That is one piece of it. The other part is that he has pushed to bring semiconductor manufacturing fully into the United States, and he has also attempted to dismantle or undermine key provisions of the CHIPS Act. However, overall, none of this is working out well so far.
First of all, you simply cannot produce all semiconductors domestically — the U.S. does not have the workforce capacity to do that at scale. Even if you import highly skilled workers from Taiwan, India, or elsewhere, it defeats the very purpose of the push for “domestic manufacturing,” which is supposed to be about creating jobs for Americans. If you have to rely on foreign labour, then the logical conclusion would be: why not just manufacture where it is cheaper and more efficient?
So far, the results have been underwhelming. The new 20% tariff means that semiconductors imported from Taiwan — which are essential and already expensive — will now cost significantly more. The intention, presumably, is to incentivize domestic production, but we simply do not have enough STEM-trained engineers to make that happen overnight.
Yes, some of that workforce could be trained over time — maybe within a year or eighteen months — but that still requires significant investment in education, training programs, and infrastructure. The companies that rely on these technologies would need to commit resources to upskilling workers. Moreover, for more advanced engineering roles, you’re looking at timelines of several years.
Jacobsen: So we’re not seeing a real plan?
Tsukerman: Exactly. I’m not hearing a clear roadmap from policymakers. There’s talk about wanting to create domestic capacity and reduce reliance on Taiwan. Still, there are no specific goals, no public projections about how many jobs will be created, how many fabs will be operational, or what milestones we’re targeting in the next year or two.
All we’re hearing is vague language — “we want to reduce dependence,” “we want to bring manufacturing home” — but no execution strategy. And the irony is, the U.S. is nowhere near self-sufficiency when it comes to semiconductors. It still depends on joint production, foreign supply chains, and alliances, particularly with Taiwan, South Korea, the Netherlands, and Japan.
So imposing tariffs on one of your most critical and trusted suppliers, like Taiwan, could be seen as counterproductive — a kind of “cutting off your nose to spite your face” move.
Jacobsen: At the end of World War II, according to Chomsky’s reporting, the United States controlled about half the world’s productive capacity — essentially half of global GDP. I don’t know if he was using that precise metric, but it seems broadly accurate. Today, the U.S. likely accounts for about a quarter of global GDP. The European Union is nearing the end of another quarter.
China likely accounts for approximately another quarter of global GDP. So, compared to the post–World War II landscape, we’ve gone from a mostly unipolar world — where the U.S. held about half of global output — to a roughly tripolar world, in terms of annual wealth generation, with the U.S., China, and the European Union each making up substantial shares.
GDP isn’t a perfect measure. There are more sophisticated ways to assess influence or capability. But for the sake of argument, let’s treat it as a loose proxy for technological development, both annual progress and cumulative advancement. It’s like technology is paying dividends on earlier investments.
Looking at it that way, it seems clear that no country or bloc holds exclusive dominance over technological development anymore. So this current U.S.–China competition — what does it represent in the broader geopolitical context, especially over a medium-term time horizon, say 10 to 20 years?
Tsukerman: At its core, this isn’t just a trade war or a tariff skirmish — it’s a strategic competition over control of foundational technologies, particularly semiconductors, which are essential across both civilian industries and the defence sector. We’re talking about everything from AI-guided missile systems to next-gen computing platforms.
Parallel to that is the quantum race. China has publicly claimed to be leading in quantum computing, but so far, there has been no independently verifiable evidence supporting those claims. So I’m personally very skeptical. We’re still waiting to see whether those advances are fundamental or just propaganda.
This all plays into narratives on both sides. There’s the joke about “Make China Great Again,” and then the American metaphor about the U.S. economy being a vast ocean — that even a storm can’t sink. In many ways, these ideas mirror each other: China asserting its rise, the U.S. asserting its resilience.
Jacobsen: Right — and as you explained to me before, China’s rise has been heavily informed by decades of intellectual property that was either co-developed with the West or outright stolen.
Tsukerman: Exactly. That’s a massive part of the story. Over time, China has built up an enormous base of technical knowledge, some of it acquired through legal joint ventures, some via cyber espionage, and some through academic and commercial partnerships that lacked proper safeguards.
Now, what we’re seeing is China trying to leapfrog certain stages of technological development. For example, there are multiple trajectories in chip development. One primary path has focused on miniaturization — essentially, packing more transistors into smaller chips. That’s the principle behind Moore’s Law, which held for decades that computing power would double roughly every two years as chip components shrank.
Jacobsen: But isn’t there a debate now about Moore’s Law being obsolete? I’ve heard people talk about scaling laws instead.
Tsukerman: Yes — it’s an ongoing discussion. Some say Moore’s Law has reached its physical limits, especially at sub-5-nanometer nodes. But others argue there’s still room for innovation, particularly with advanced lithography and new materials. There’s also active R&D aimed at pushing Moore’s Law further.
That said, China is also exploring alternative models of computing. The West, for a long time, was so laser-focused on Moore’s Law that it didn’t fully explore other avenues — like neuromorphic computing, photonics, or architecture-level innovation. China is experimenting with these areas in parallel, in part because it has to — it can’t currently match the U.S. in leading-edge chip production. But it’s catching up, and in some cases, it’s innovating in less conventional ways.
That said, there’s more to this than just AI chips, and more to AI itself than just semiconductors. While global attention is fixed mainly on the U.S. and China due to defence applications, cutting-edge technology, and the green transition — where semiconductors are essential for EVs, smart grids, and more — several Middle Eastern countries are pursuing significantly different AI strategies.
In particular, nations like the United Arab Emirates have been focusing on AI integration across daily civilian life, from education and medical equipment to automation in public services, entertainment, and administrative processes. These are not necessarily the most militarily advanced applications, but they’re influential in shaping a future society. And in this area, the U.S. is falling behind.
China is arguably ahead of the U.S. as well, especially when it comes to early-stage AI education. They’re introducing basic AI literacy to children at a young age. Meanwhile, in the U.S., there’s still concern about screen time, digital overexposure, and other cultural hesitations. In my opinion, that battle is already over — and if American children aren’ttaught to use and build with technology early, they’ll fall far behind their counterparts in both China and parts of the Middle East.
In the UAE, for example, there’s a system-wide push to integrate AI into everyday infrastructure and social functions. It’snot about cutting-edge defence or quantum applications, but rather pragmatic, high-impact AI use in schools, hospitals, transport, public safety, and more. And it’s working. These applications aren’t threatening or dystopian — they’re just making everyday life more efficient and responsive.
The U.S. lags in this area for several reasons. First, it’s a much larger and more decentralized country, which makes implementation at scale far more complex. Second, there’s significant political division and debate over technology, ethics, surveillance, and job displacement — issues that slow down policy and adoption. The UAE, on the other hand, is an authoritarian state. It doesn’t face the same electoral or bureaucratic hurdles. It also benefits from higher levels of public trust in government, at least culturally, and from a younger population, which is generally more adaptable and receptive to change.
In the U.S., public discourse around AI is still largely framed by anxiety, fear of job loss, existential threats, and ethical dilemmas. Meanwhile, countries like the UAE are adopting the mindset of: “Let’s implement first, then refine later.” And so far, that approach is delivering results.
Jacobsen: So they’re outpacing the U.S. in non-defence, non-military AI use cases?
Tsukerman: Exactly. Not in advanced defence or green tech, but in civil integration of AI, they’re well ahead — and they have the resources and political flexibility to scale rapidly. I believe China will start to incorporate more of these approaches, too. However, China faces its structural issues: a population that’s not only far larger than the U.S. but also significantly older, which makes wide-scale tech adaptation more difficult in certain areas.
There’s a major demographic crisis in China. Despite the country’s vast industrial and technological capacity, it remains overall a lower-income country per capita compared to the U.S. or much of Europe. So, they face significant internal challenges — not just economic and demographic, but also institutional — that shape how they engage with technology and security policy.
When we talk about technological espionage, the conversation often focuses on China as the aggressor, conducting cyber theft, IP infringement, and infiltration of foreign research institutions. But it’s important to remember that there’s also a standard protocol of legitimate scientific collaboration, where experts across borders share knowledge through joint research. That coexistence of open cooperation and covert espionage creates strategic ambiguity that countries like China have used to their advantage.
Jacobsen: What about national security concerns inside China itself? I recall a story about Tesla cars being banned in certain sensitive zones — political or military — because the Chinese government feared the CIA could use the onboard camera systems for surveillance. It raises the question: Does China worry that the U.S. might use the same tactics against it, just as China has used them abroad?
Tsukerman: Yes, absolutely — China is deeply concerned about that possibility. And it’s not surprising, given how proficient they are at using those tactics themselves. Just to clarify a key difference: the U.S. intelligence community traditionally does not engage in industrial espionage to benefit purely private companies. That’s a line that is generally respected, although, of course, private U.S. companies have occasionally engaged in industrial espionage against each other, which leads to scandals from time to time.
Where U.S. intelligence does engage is in matters involving government-backed technologies, national security infrastructure, or military-adjacent innovations. The complication with China is that almost every major company has some link to the state, whether it’s the Chinese Communist Party (CCP), the PLA, or a state regulatory body. It’s hard to find a single major Chinese tech firm that operates with zero government affiliation. So, by U.S. intelligence logic, those entities would technically fall under the category of fair targets.
But how much espionage is carried out — and at what level — is a matter of strategy. I suspect the U.S. draws a distinction based on proximity to the Chinese government: the more directly controlled or funded the company is, the more it’s likely to be watched. But if it operates more like a genuinely private firm with minimal government ties, it’sprobably less likely to be actively targeted, at least not in a formal, sanctioned capacity.
And as for Tesla, I doubt U.S. intelligence would try to use Elon Musk’s vehicles for covert ops in China. Musk is already known to be extremely difficult to collaborate with — even on comparatively neutral matters, like providing satellite communications to Ukraine. So the idea of using Tesla as a surveillance conduit in China sounds far-fetched and impractical.
Jacobsen: Still, that doesn’t mean China isn’t taking those concerns seriously, right?
Tsukerman: Exactly. They’re taking it very seriously — in part because they understand these tactics well, having deployed them extensively themselves.
Take, for instance, the growing body of evidence and investigations in the U.S., U.K., and across Europe showing that certain Chinese-manufactured technologies — from cars to drones to consumer electronics — have arrived with built-in surveillance hardware or software. These aren’t conspiracy theories anymore. Even European governments — typically slower to act — have been alarmed by what’s been discovered.
China has now turned the tables. After the U.S. recently eased some restrictions on the export of certain chips to China, Chinese officials responded by suggesting that those chips might be compromised, potentially embedded with spying components. So now, they’re scrutinizing U.S. tech imports, blocklisting some, and implementing new cybersecurity reviews and data protection requirements. It’s a classic mirroring response — and it’s becoming a defining feature of this techno-security standoff.
Yeah, they’ve started inspecting newly arrived NVIDIA chips for embedded surveillance components. I have no idea what surveillance hardware would actually look like inside a chip, or how you’d even determine whether something was present that wasn’t supposed to be there. But this is what they’re doing — and it’s not just talk. It’s a real, documented effort.
Jacobsen: I mean, logically speaking, wouldn’t China just assume that if U.S. spies were somehow embedding surveillance components, they wouldn’t put them in a clearly marked or easily discoverable place? Wouldn’t they expect China to inspect obvious entry points and instead hide surveillance elsewhere, somewhere unexpected?
Tsukerman: 100%. That’s precisely why I find some of this a bit amusing. It’s almost like a game of espionage theatre — everyone suspects everyone, but neither side knows where to look or what exactly they’ll find. Still, China takes it seriously because it’s what they would do, so they assume others operate the same way.
Jacobsen: Final question: where are China and the U.S. not fighting when it comes to chips, semiconductors, and rare earths? Is there any room for mutual benefit or strategic restraint?
Tsukerman: Actually, yes — there are still areas of non-conflict in the tech space. Specifically, when it comes to less advanced chips — low to mid-grade semiconductors that are widely used in consumer electronics, appliances, and industrial systems — the U.S. has not imposed significant export restrictions. There are a couple of reasons for that:
- China already manufactures many of these chips on its own so that restrictions wouldn’t have much effect.
- These chips are not strategically sensitive, so the U.S. doesn’t view them as a national security threat.
Similarly, China hasn’t restricted exports of all rare earth elements, only certain strategic or scarce ones, like gallium, germanium, and potentially graphite. The U.S. still has access to other, less sensitive rare earths. So it’s not a total embargo — the conflict is targeted toward high-priority materials and high-performance chips.
That said, the overall trajectory of cooperation is negative. For instance, the U.S. State Department has floated the idea of revoking visas for certain Chinese students, particularly those studying in sensitive tech fields like AI, quantum computing, or advanced manufacturing. While I haven’t seen confirmed cases of mass student expulsions purely based on nationality, the policy direction is clear.
There have also been concerns that Chinese professors teaching or conducting research in the U.S. — especially in STEM areas — may come under increasing visa scrutiny. So far, I’ve only heard of student expulsions in connection with political protests (such as the Hamas demonstrations), not purely due to Chinese citizenship. But that may change.
Likewise, I haven’t seen mass removals of Chinese researchers from U.S. companies — yet. However, the process of obtaining research or work visas is becoming increasingly expensive, time-consuming, and restrictive, particularly in light of ongoing reviews of tech-sector access.
China, for its part, has been trying to recruit Western researchers — especially from universities that lost funding under the Trump administration — while simultaneously increasing its scrutiny of foreign nationals, particularly in sensitive R&D spaces. It’s a balancing act: they want Western talent but remain wary of Western influence.
Jacobsen: That’s the end. Thank you for your time, Irina.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/18
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
The Trump–Putin Alaska Summit on August 15, 2025, ended without concrete agreements, particularly on Ukraine. Despite three hours of talks, no ceasefire or deal was reached. Putin sought recognition of Russian control over Donetsk and Luhansk, while Trump emphasized Kyiv’s burden to negotiate. Optics—including red-carpet treatment, limousine rides, and military flyovers—overshadowed substance, leaving Russia with symbolic victories. Leaked documents revealed planning lapses and sensitive details. Analysts argue that Trump missed chances to hold Putin accountable for cyberattacks, abductions, and aggression. Instead, the summit bolstered Moscow’s narrative and raised concerns about U.S. strategy, with allies watching closely.
Interview conducted August 16, 2025.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Once more, we are here with attorney, geopolitical commentator, and analyst Irina Tsukerman. The Trump–Putin Alaska Summit concluded yesterday, on August 15, 2025—so today, August 16, is just over twenty-four hours later. At the summit, expectations were low, though some held out hope for breakthroughs. Now that we have the facts, what overall conclusions can we draw?
Irina Tsukerman: First, there was no agreement on Ukraine. Despite nearly three hours of talks focused on Ukraine, no ceasefire or concrete deal was reached. Putin proposed freezing frontlines or halting advances in return for territorial concessions such as control of Donetsk and Luhansk. Trump—noting the gravity of the conflict—later said, “Ukraine should make a deal… Russia is an immense power, and they’re not,” suggesting he saw the burden on Kyiv to negotiate.
Second, Trump indicated he prefers a comprehensive peace agreement over a temporary ceasefire, a noticeable shift from allied strategies. He also expressed hope of future meetings—possibly involving Zelenskyy, and perhaps even another summit with Putin.
Third, Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy is scheduled to meet with Trump in Washington on Monday to discuss peace efforts. While he is expected to reject any deal reached behind his back, he may still engage in broader peace talk concepts.
Fourth, the gathering included a red-carpet welcome, a ride in Trump’s presidential limousine (“The Beast”), and dramatic flyovers over Joint Base Elmendorf–Richardson. But the summit ended without meaningful press access or substantive agreements—Ukraine was notably absent from direct discussions.
Fifth, European leaders broadly supported Trump’s push to include Zelenskyy in negotiations while reaffirming Ukraine’s sovereignty and right to EU and NATO membership. Some, however, criticized Russia’s intentions and warned against rewarding aggression.
Finally, analysts argue that Putin came out of the summit emboldened. No new punitive measures were imposed, and perceptions of Russia’s diplomatic rehabilitation remain strong—even as no concessions were made.
Jacobsen: But the one thing we know is that, at least publicly, Trump appears to be siding with Putin for now. How long did the summit last? I recall some expectations of six to seven hours. Does the length of the meeting indicate anything about how it went? It was far less than that.
Tsukerman: It lasted no more than three hours. The press conference was about fifteen minutes long. If anything, this suggests that bilateral discussions on economic trade deals and broader U.S.–Russia relations may not have taken place or were cut short. It is unclear whether the entire time was devoted exclusively to Ukraine or if they briefly touched on other issues bilaterally but did not engage with business representatives. It is also uncertain whether those business representatives were present in case talks progressed further, or whether they planned to continue those discussions later.
All it indicates is that, as predicted by most observers, including the White House, the biggest expectations did not materialize. There was no resolution to the Ukraine issue. The meeting can best be exploratory rather than substantive. Many analysts had predicted this, and the White House had also suggested it might be the case. In that sense, all the additional plans were more like best-case scenarios rather than guaranteed events, and should not have been assumed by the Russian delegation.
What is clear is that Russia was celebrating the optics of the summit. Even though the perks did not materialize and no official agreement was announced, the very fact that Putin attended, shook hands with Trump, and even rode in Trump’s limousine—an unusual gesture—was viewed as a symbolic victory. Commentators noted the unusually long handshake compared to Trump’s meetings with other leaders. For Russia, these optics alone were a diplomatic gain.
Jacobsen: NPR reported, through journalist Chiara Eisner, in an article titled Government Papers Found in an Alaskan Hotel Reveal New Details of Trump–Putin Summit (published August 16, 2025, at 1:56 p.m. ET, updated thereafter). Eight pages of documents accidentally left behind by U.S. staff revealed potentially sensitive details of the meeting between President Trump and President Vladimir V. Putin in Anchorage.
The first page listed the sequence of events and the names of specific rooms on the base. It also showed Trump intended to present Putin with a ceremonial gift—an American bald eagle desk statue. Pages two through five included names and phone numbers of U.S. staff, along with thirteen U.S. and Russian state leaders. The documents also provided phonetic guides for pronouncing Russian officials’ names, including Putin.
Pages six and seven described the planned luncheon “in honour of His Excellency Vladimir Putin,” including seating charts. Trump was to be seated across from Putin, flanked by six officials: Marco Rubio, Pete Hegseth, Susie Wiles, Scott Bessent, Howard Lutnick, and Steve Witkoff. Putin was to be accompanied by Sergey Lavrov and Yuri Ushakov.
John Michael, a professor of law at UCLA specializing in national security, commented on the leaked documents, calling them “further evidence of the sloppiness and incompetence of the administration,” adding: “You don’t leave things in printers. It’s that simple.”
Jacobsen: Any thoughts on these higher-level details coming out a day later?
Tsukerman: First of all, whoever is responsible for this should not only be fired but also investigated, because who knows what else they may have left behind. Frankly, this is a gift to the Russians and everyone else on the planet—including the Chinese—who may be preparing for their potential meeting with Trump later on. It reveals how this administration thinks, how it does business, and how it handles the operational details of high-level summits with adversaries.
Now, anyone paying attention knows what to expect in the future: what gets cancelled if things go wrong, how decisions are made, and, perhaps most embarrassingly, that there are staff in the administration who leave sensitive documents behind. I am sure others will now be actively watching for such lapses. This is a major counterintelligence failure for many reasons—one of which, amusingly enough, includes the fact that nobody knows how to pronounce Putin’s name correctly. We can laugh, but it is deadly serious.
As to the documents themselves, the interesting question is whether the cancelled events were part of a finalized itinerary or merely a maximum program—a theoretical plan that might have unfolded if circumstances aligned. It is unclear whether the summit was as well-organized as Putin may have anticipated, or if Trump cancelled certain sections due to frustration. The uncertainty makes it difficult to assess precisely how the meetings proceeded.
One striking element is the composition of the delegations. Putin was flanked by just two of his top men, whereas Trump was accompanied by a much larger group—none of whom, notably, were Russia experts or Russian speakers. Putin also brought businesspeople and journalists, but not a large advisory team. That could indicate he was more focused on business deals than on high-level bilateral relations. Or it could have been a deliberate show of authority, underscoring that he alone is the ultimate decision-maker.
Whatever the explanation, the disparity between the delegations is striking. It highlights differences in communication style and the degree of preparation. One side clearly understood the other better than the other side understood it. Another curious detail is the obsequious tone in the notes toward Putin. I have not seen other officials treated with such deference. Modi, for example, has had amicable interactions with Trump, but not couched in such unusually deferential language. I also do not recall Trump presenting Modi with significant gifts—although Modi did bring gifts for Trump, as well as for Musk and his children.
Jacobsen: A short side note—are gifts common among high-level officials, presidents, prime ministers, and royalty? Do they usually exchange them at summits, especially bilateral ones?
Tsukerman: Gifts are indeed common. Whether they are exchanged in a particular bilateral meeting depends on the nature of the relationship and the significance of the summit. At high levels of diplomacy, symbolism matters, and gifts are part of that language.
I am surprised that this summit would have included any ceremonial gift exchange. Officially, the United States and Russia are adversaries, and this meeting was focused on resolving a significant conflict, not on building a friendly bilateral relationship. That said, symbolic gifts can serve as more than goodwill gestures. If the intent is to present a symbol of national power, then the message is not appeasement but assertion—a projection of strength.
A gift of that nature could be interpreted in multiple ways. Without knowing how the ceremony would have looked or what would have been said, it could be seen as Trump asserting U.S. power, declaring, “We are not afraid of you. This is who we are. Take it.” On the other hand, it might have been read as misjudging Putin’s position—interpreting him as more conciliatory toward Trump than he was.
In any case, the exchange did not take place. That suggests either that Trump’s team determined it was inappropriate in context or that something went wrong in the planning. What we know is that Putin’s core demand remains complete control of Donetsk and Luhansk—the Ukrainian territories occupied by Russia. “Oblast” in this context means “province” or “region.” Trump could not affirm this demand, since he has no authority to cede Ukrainian territory without President Zelenskyy’s consent. Zelenskyy, who is arriving Monday, will almost certainly be pressed on this point.
While Trump could not give Putin the affirmative answer he wanted, it is significant that after the summit, he began publicly pushing Putin’s plan. That alone shows Putin achieved something positive. Even without securing a deal, he got Trump to advance his agenda on the international stage—a win beyond the optics of the visit itself.
Jacobsen: One of the few serious commentators in the United States with an independent platform, Fareed Zakaria, described the Trump–Putin summit as “cringeworthy.” What are your thoughts on that?
Tsukerman: It is an apt description. Frankly, anything involving Putin in any role other than being expelled or held accountable is inherently cringeworthy. But the specific reasons here are clear. Putin should never have been invited to the United States—certainly not without Russia first making a concession elsewhere. He is, after all, a war criminal who should have been arrested, not welcomed with a red carpet and ceremonial honours.
Even if one interprets Trump’s move charitably—as an assertion that Alaska is American territory and not up for debate—the optics were unnecessary and counterproductive. If you are going to invite Putin under that framing, you extend the bare minimum of professional courtesy, nothing more. Rolling out the red carpet and staging dramatic gestures only undermines the intended message and puts the United States in a ridiculous position.
You certainly do not force the American military to kneel in ceremonial display, nor should military aircraft be reduced to purely honorary functions. Trump’s body language was also cringeworthy—his extended handshake, his applause for Putin, and his extremely warm expression toward someone who is not only an adversary but a killer, one actively instigating against the United States and relentlessly assaulting Ukraine. This is not a leader who should be welcomed with greater warmth than America’s closest allies.
This reception was arguably warmer than Trump has given to any other leader I can recall—perhaps except Modi, whom he later punished with a fifty-percent tariff increase, which in retrospect suggests such gestures may mean little.
Another critical failure was Trump’s lack of clear ultimatums. As host and as the leader of a country repeatedly targeted by Russian cyberattacks, he had every reason to withdraw from the summit altogether. At minimum, he should have used the meeting to hold Putin accountable—to demand not only an explanation but also a firm commitment that such attacks would cease, backed by the threat of severe repercussions. These could have included reciprocal cybermeasures, implied sanctions, and even the warning of arrest under international warrants should Putin travel abroad, with U.S. pressure applied to allied governments.
Instead, these opportunities were squandered. At the press conference, it was not Trump but a journalist who raised pointed questions—one ABC reporter asked Putin directly whether he would stop abducting Ukrainian civilians. The fact that Trump himself avoided such questions underscores the hollowness of the summit. He failed to demand the return of missing Ukrainian citizens, including the approximately twenty-two thousand identified children—and possibly hundreds of thousands more—illegally taken into Russia. By all available evidence, Trump never even raised the issue.
This suggests two things: first, that Trump is unwilling to challenge Putin, and second, that he remains, in some way, under Putin’s influence. In Trump’s zero-sum worldview, this places him firmly on the losing side. The contrast with earlier U.S.–Russia meetings is stark—when Reagan met Gorbachev, both he and his staff pressed the Soviets hard on human rights and accountability. Trump and his entourage, by comparison, asked nothing of the sort. That is not a weakness of America’s position, but of the character holding it.
What we witnessed was pomp over policy—terrible optics for the West, but powerful imagery for Russia. It was, by any objective measure, a win for the Kremlin narrative.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts?
Tsukerman: Let us wait and see what China says, but I would wager Beijing is celebrating. They are almost certainly preparing with enthusiasm for any future bilateral meetings with Trump, now that they know what to expect.
Jacobsen: Excellent. Irina, thank you very much. I will see you in twenty minutes.
Tsukerman: Yes. See you then.
Jacobsen: Bye.
Tsukerman: Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/18
Bill London is a Professor Emeritus of Public Health at California State University, Los Angeles (Cal State LA). He has a background in biology and public health and is known for his work in consumer health, critical thinking in health science, and skepticism toward pseudoscientific claims. His academic and professional focus includes evaluating health claims, health education, and the importance of evidence-based medicine. London in total has six degrees (two in health education, one in educational psychology, one in public health, one in biological science and one in geography). He successfully completed all coursework but not the thesis toward a master of science in clinical research degree.
In a wide-ranging interview, London contrasts this long-standing scientific understanding with modern sociopolitical discourse, particularly around intersex conditions, gender identity, and medical terminology. He explores hypotheses for the evolution of sexual reproduction, including the Red Queen, Tangled Bank, and Vicar of Bray theories. London critiques recent shifts in medicine that conflate sex and gender, arguing for evidence-based definitions and practices. He emphasizes that while human variation is real, the binary nature of sex remains foundational in biological sciences. His book review appeared in the June/July issue of Free Inquiry in the special section on evolution
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with the Bill London, Professor Emeritus at Cal State LA. You recently wrote a review of The Evolution of Sex: Mating Strategies of Males and Females (2024) by Kevin Lee Teather, published by Oxford University Press. Let us begin with the fundamental definition presented in that book: What is meant by “sex” scientifically?
Prof. Bill London: The biological definition of sex, which has a long history of use and has only recently been challenged in specific contexts, is gamete-based. It applies broadly across species, including both animals and plants. The key term here is anisogamy—”aniso” meaning “unequal”—which refers to the existence of two distinct types of gametes.
One type is small and motile, produced in large quantities. The other is large and non-motile. In animals, these are sperm and egg (or ovum). In most plants, the small gamete is the pollen grain, which produces sperm cells, and the large gamete is the egg. This definition of sex—based on the type of gamete an organism produces—applies across all sexually reproducing eukaryotes.
Jacobsen: So we define sex based on gametes, but determining someone’s sex is a separate issue.
London: Defining sex is about the biological role in reproduction—what kind of gamete an organism produces. Determining sex is about how that biological role manifests—genetically, anatomically, developmentally, behaviorally—and that can vary within and between species. However, the core definition based on gamete type stays the same across species.
Jacobsen: And this definition goes way back, right? How far are we talking—when did sexual reproduction originate?
London: It goes way back. Sexual reproduction is estimated to have originated over one billion years ago, likely around 1.2 to 2 billion years ago, in early eukaryotic lineages. Still, yes, it is more than a billion years of evolutionary history.
Jacobsen: So over that billion-year history, what are the key evolutionary milestones?
London: That is a tricky question to answer in a simple list, but I can mention a few primary concepts. First, the transition from asexual to sexual reproduction was a critical turning point. Early on, organisms reproduced by simple division or budding. However, with sex came recombination, which increases genetic diversity and may have provided advantages in adapting to changing environments or escaping parasitic threats.
There are several hypotheses for why sex evolved despite its costs, like the Red Queen hypothesis, which suggests that ongoing adaptation is needed to stay ahead of parasites, and Muller’s Ratchet, which proposes that sexual reproduction helps eliminate harmful mutations. However, the evolutionary reasons for sex are still debated.
Jacobsen: So it is controversial?
London: Yes, in the sense that there are multiple competing hypotheses, and the evidence is not conclusive in favour of just one. Some explanations are more relevant in specific contexts than others. It is a rich area of evolutionary biology.
Jacobsen: There is also that part of the book discussing why there are only two types of gametes. What is going on there?
London: That is a great question. In the early evolution of sex, it is thought that gametes were originally the same size—a condition called isogamy. However, over time, many lineages evolved anisogamy, with two distinctly sized gametes. This divergence likely arose from evolutionary trade-offs between producing many small gametes to maximize fertilization chances versus investing in fewer, larger gametes with more resources to support early development.
The reason we only see two types of gametes in nearly all sexually reproducing organisms is due to the instability of systems with more than two types—it is evolutionarily stable to have one “mobile and numerous” and one “large and resource-rich” gamete type. That is why we do not see three or more gamete types persisting in nature.
Jacobsen: So sexual reproduction is not free—it has real costs?
London: There is a classic idea in evolutionary biology that “there is no such thing as a free lunch.” Producing males, for example, is costly in many species because males often do not directly contribute to offspring production beyond fertilization. That is known as the “two-fold cost of sex”. If every individual were capable of producing offspring alone, population growth would double compared to systems where only females produce offspring.
Still, the benefits of sex—like genetic variation seem to outweigh the costs, at least under many conditions.
Jacobsen: The meiotic division that produces gametes has a cost. Mating has costs. So why does sexual reproduction happen at all?
London: Right, there are definite drawbacks to sexual reproduction compared to asexual reproduction, but there are also various hypotheses that try to explain its evolutionary advantage. I did not cover those in detail in the review because they can get pretty technical.
Jacobsen: Fair enough. I am not sure how much general interest there is in that anyway.
London: True—but sexual reproduction does increase genetic variability, and that is central to most of the leading hypotheses. The book discussed three main ones: the Tangled Bank hypothesis, the Red Queen hypothesis, and the Vicar of Bray hypothesis.
Jacobsen: Would you be open to going over those?
London: Sure, though I am not immersed in this field—I would just be reading from the book. However, I am open to it if it is helpful.
Jacobsen: I will let you in on a big secret—I am not deeply ensconced in this research either.
London: Fair enough! So, here is the Vicar of Bray hypothesis, also sometimes called the Fisher–Muller model, though that is for more technical reasons. It is based on the idea that one significant advantage of sexual reproduction is increased genetic variability. The hypothesis suggests that offspring in a sexual population will be genetically diverse and, as a result, better able to respond to environmental changes.
Natural selection would then favour the individuals with gene variants—or alleles—that best suit the environment. In theory, this gives sexually reproducing populations a long-term advantage. The issue is, however, that local environments do not typically change much from one generation to the next. If the parents thrive in that environment, then genetically identical offspring—like in asexual reproduction—should do just as well. So, the hypothesis faces a problem: it works better as a long-term strategy, but natural selection operates in the short term, generation by generation. Evolution does not plan. Also, this hypothesis leans on group selection, which most evolutionary biologists reject. Selection acts on individuals, not groups.
Another hypothesis was proposed in 1974 by Michael Ghiselin. It is called the Tangled Bank hypothesis because it references Darwin’s imagery from On the Origin of Species, where he describes a “tangled bank” full of diverse organisms interacting. In such a structurally diverse environment, genetically varied offspring might be better suited to exploit different ecological niches. If siblings differ genetically, they may be less likely to compete directly for the same resources, which could benefit the species overall in a crowded or complex habitat.
However, again, there are problems. Suppose this was the main reason for the evolution of sex. In that case, we would expect to find sexual reproduction most common in species that live in densely populated, highly competitive environments. However, that pattern does not always hold up in nature. So, the hypothesis has its limitations.
That leaves the Red Queen hypothesis. This one has the most empirical support. It is also the title of a book by Matt Ridley—The Red Queen. The name comes from Through the Looking Glass by Lewis Carroll, where Alice meets the Red Queen, who tells her, “It takes all the running you can do to stay in the same place.” It is a metaphor for the evolutionary arms race, especially between hosts and parasites.
The idea is that organisms must constantly evolve to maintain their current level of fitness in a changing environment, especially as parasites and pathogens also evolve. Sexual reproduction, by continually shuffling genes and creating variation, helps organisms stay ahead of their biological enemies. This hypothesis explains why sex persists despite its costs—it enables faster adaptation.
“The Queen suddenly grabs Alice and begins running very rapidly, but they never get anywhere. Perplexed, Alice wonders why they are not passing anything—and why they remain in the same place despite all the running.”
“Now you see,” says the Red Queen, “it takes all the running you can do to keep in the same place. If you want to get somewhere else, you must run at least twice as fast as that.”
This phrase came to be used to describe the coevolutionary process between organisms that interact with one another. Initially, it was applied to relationships like predator–prey or parasite–host dynamics. Suppose an adaptation evolves in one organism to improve its survival, say, a toxin in prey that makes it less palatable to predators. In that case, there is selective pressure on the interacting organism to evolve a counter-adaptation. So, it is essentially an evolutionary arms race.
Jacobsen: You mentioned that much of the focus in this area has been on pathogens, and that links to your background. Your expertise is in public health, right?
London: Correct. I have a biology degree, but I do not do evolutionary biology research. My work has been more in health science and public health broadly.
Jacobsen: To come back to something you said at the beginning of the interview—you mentioned the longstanding biological definition of sex, centered on gametes. Could you expand on why that definition is considered so fruitful?
London: It’s a productive definition because it leads us to ask meaningful questions about differences between the sexes—about male and female reproductive strategies. The subtitle of the book I reviewed is Strategies of Males and Females. These strategies vary by species, but within a given species, they tend to be distinct.
Mating strategies differ. Parental investment differs. Sometimes, even body morphology differs. That leads into the important concept of sexual selection, which Darwin highlighted—for example, in the case of the peacock. The elaborate feathers seem less useful for survival.
London: The peacock’s ornamental plumage doesn’t help it avoid predators. It might be a liability in that sense. But it attracts peahens. That’s the core of sexual selection—traits that increase reproductive success, even if they come at a cost to survival.
Jacobsen: So what’s the competing definition of sex that’s been put forward recently? How does it differ from the traditional, gamete-based definition?
London: There isn’t a replacement definition, per se. What’s happening is that people are drawing attention to biological exceptions or variations, often in the context of humans. But biological sex, as defined by gamete type, is still the framework that works across all sexually reproducing species.
The controversy is anthropocentric, mainly. That is, it’s focused on humans and human social concerns. In biological research on animals and plants, the gamete-based definition remains central and useful. Just because there’s variability or ambiguity in some individual cases doesn’t mean the definition breaks down. It just means biology—as always—is complex.
They’re referring to males and females, but often, the discussion is motivated by a desire to make everyone feel included. People point out that some individuals have conditions that are atypical for either male or female. These conditions are rare, but they’re often used to challenge the idea of sex as a binary.
The argument is that describing sex as binary excludes some people. But I would suggest that this framing doesn’t deal with biological reality. Every person—every human being—has one biological mother and one biological father. That’s an inescapable fact of human reproduction. It took a sperm and an egg. It’s that simple.
Now, one alternative idea that’s been promoted is a continuum model of sex. The claim is that sex isn’t binary because a small number of individuals don’t fit neatly into the male or female categories. But suppose you examine these so-called intersex conditions closely. What matters—biologically—is the type of gonads an individual has. There are only two types: gonads that produce sperm (testes) and gonads that produce eggs (ovaries).
That’s the biological basis for defining sex: gamete type. Some people use the term differences rather than disorders, but medically, these are called disorders of sexual development (DSDs). These are cases where a person’s physical traits may appear ambiguous or not typical of their chromosomal or gonadal sex. However, the key determinant is still the type of gonad present.
Some rare individuals may have both types of gonadal tissue, but even then, one is usually underdeveloped or non-functional. So while it seems ambiguous, it isn’t so on a biological level.
Take the condition called Complete Androgen Insensitivity Syndrome (CAIS), for example—something neurologist Steven Novella often refers to. In this condition, the body doesn’t respond to androgens like testosterone, which are responsible for developing male characteristics. So genetically male individuals (with XY chromosomes) who have this condition develop a body that appears female in every external way—but they still have testes.
They won’t have a uterus or ovaries. To anyone encountering them, they would appear female. Still, biologically, their bodies followed the male developmental pathway until it failed to respond to testosterone.
So what do we do with that? Some people propose a spectrum, with male and female at either end and intersex individuals somewhere in between. But if you use that model, you’re effectively suggesting that some males are “less male” and some females are “less female” than others. That’s not necessarily inclusive.
The more straightforward and more scientifically grounded way to view it is that sex evolved as a binary system—two sexes—for sexual reproduction. The exceptions, while honest and worthy of understanding, don’t negate the underlying biological structure.
The fact that people don’t always engage in sex for reproductive purposes—that it brings pleasure, intimacy, and other benefits—is undoubtedly true. But from an evolutionary standpoint, sex evolved because it leads to reproduction. The pleasurable aspect exists because it encourages behaviors that result in reproduction.
Of course, humanists and secular thinkers would say people are free to have sex for reasons beyond reproduction—and that’s fine. No one has to subscribe to a reproductive-only framework. But when we’re talking about definitions in biology, particularly across species, the reproductive role is central.
I’m not even sure how some people are defining sex these days. They seem to treat it as a vague or holistic concept, saying it can be defined in many ways. But the book The Evolution of Sex spends much time arguing why we shouldn’t use definitions based on subjective traits or piecemeal anatomical features.
Some arguments focus on individuals with mixed anatomical features—someone with certain aspects of male anatomy and others of female anatomy. But those arguments tend to be anecdotal and very human centered. They don’t offer a simple, consistent, or biologically functional definition that can apply across species.
The gamete-based definition—classifying organisms by whether they produce sperm or eggs—is objective and applicable across the biological world. When we look closely at intersex conditions through that lens, we usually find it’s not ambiguous. In most cases, the gonads indicate whether someone is male or female biologically. But people often shift the discussion to include other traits.
Jacobsen: So what’s the purpose of the newer language—terms like “spectrum,” or “differences in sexual development”?
London: From a scientific standpoint, these newer terms did not emerge from [new] research. They’re more about appreciating human variation, which is fine. I would argue that we can understand human differences—without discarding a robust biological framework—by recognizing that, just like any other body system, the reproductive system can develop atypically.
Some people prefer the term differences in sexual development rather than disorders, because it’s seen as less stigmatizing. It’s similar to using “differently abled” instead of “disabled.” It may sound kinder, but whether it changes perception or helps people is another matter.
Sometimes, this softer language minimizes the seriousness or medical relevance of certain conditions. Whether we call them disorders of sexual development, differences, or anomalies, the biological facts don’t change. It’s a matter of terminology, but the underlying science remains the same.
Another tactic people use when arguing that sex is a spectrum is to shift focus to other traits—like height, strength, or voice pitch—and show that there’s overlap between males and females. For instance, males tend to be taller, but many females are taller than many males.
That kind of argument confuses dimorphism—statistical differences in traits—with binary classification, which is about reproductive role. Just because there’s trait overlap doesn’t mean sex itself isn’t binary. So I don’t even follow the logic of saying, “Some women are taller than some men; therefore, sex isn’t binary.” It conflates unrelated concepts.
Jacobsen: I see. But that kind of thinking reflects an alternative framework. Within a professional setting—and based on your reading and experience—would you say the gamete-based definition of sex is still the one overwhelmingly used in academic and research contexts?
London: That’s a tricky question to answer directly, because it depends on the field. In biology, yes—the gamete-based definition remains standard. When biologists study animals, plants, fungi, or any other sexually reproducing species, they define sex based on whether an organism produces small gametes (sperm) or large gametes (eggs). That’s the operational definition across most of the biological sciences.
But in medicine, there’s been more of a shift. Many medical institutions and professional organizations are moving away from strict binary language. They often use terms like “sex assigned at birth” and avoid emphasizing gametes or reproductive anatomy. There’s been a growing trend toward incorporating gender identity considerations into how sex is discussed, even in clinical contexts.
Jacobsen: That seems to reflect some conflation between different concepts—sex, gender, sexuality.
London: People are increasingly conflating sex with gender, with sexual orientation, and even with sexual behaviour. These are distinct concepts, but they’re often blurred in public discourse.
If someone wants to talk about a gender spectrum, that’s a separate issue. Gender is a subjective, socially influenced identity. People may identify as nonbinary, and society can respect those identities as expressions of personal experience. There’s nothing wrong with recognizing and honouring that.
But many efforts to support transgender individuals go further—they reframe sex itself as a spectrum. And that’s where I think the science is being misrepresented. Most transgender people don’t have any biological anomalies of sexual development. Their transition—whether social, hormonal, or surgical—is from male to female or female to male. They aren’t medically transitioning to some undefined “in-between” sex. So, redefining sex as a spectrum to support gender identity feels more ideological than scientific.
Jacobsen: So you’re saying the biological definition remains central in scientific research, even if it’s being revised or avoided in some clinical or policy settings?
London: Yes. In medical policy, there’s growing acceptance of nonbinary thinking about sex, primarily to accommodate gender-diverse individuals. But in biology, sex is defined—by gametes. That doesn’t mean sex determination is the same across species. In some species, it’s based on chromosomes. In others, it’s triggered by environmental cues like temperature. But the reason we can even ask which chromosomes or conditions determine sex is because we already know what sex is: it’s about which gametes an individual produces, or is structured to produce.
Jacobsen: So, sex determination systems vary, but the definition of sex stays consistent?
London: Whether sex is determined by XY chromosomes, ZW chromosomes, haplodiploidy, or temperature, the underlying concept of sex is tied to reproductive roles. You examine the type of gametes an organism produces. That’s the constant.
In contrast, medicine has drifted somewhat from that clarity. There’s increasing deference to the social and political dimensions of gender identity. I’ll be writing more about this, but as someone focused on consumer health, I’m deeply concerned about evidence-based care, especially in areas like gender-affirming treatment.
Much of what’s promoted to patients and families today is shaped more by ideological commitment than by strong scientific evidence. Suppose you look at systematic reviews on gender-affirming care for youth. In that case, the conclusions are often more cautious than what’s portrayed in public advocacy. That discrepancy matters, especially when making decisions that have lifelong implications.
The evidence just isn’t there, but there’s a strong commitment to specific positions by some activist physicians, who’ve influenced the official statements of various medical groups.
Jacobsen: Appreciate your time. It’s been a pleasure.
London: Likewise. And thank you for the vital work you’re doing. Take care.
Jacobsen: You’re welcome. Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/17
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, national security attorney Irina Tsukerman analyzes Ukraine’s growing unrest over government moves to place anti-corruption agencies under executive control, warning of public disillusionment, Russian exploitation, and Western missteps such as delayed military aid. She also examines escalating Thai-Cambodian border tensions—triggered by landmine incidents, cultural disputes, and nationalist politics—set against a backdrop of historical grievances and China’s strategic influence. Tsukerman explains how labour exploitation, contested heritage, and geopolitical maneuvering intertwine to destabilize the region. Her insights link domestic politics, identity conflicts, and great-power competition to broader patterns of fragility and missed opportunities for stability.
Interview conducted August 8.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: The most dramatic development I have seen in the past week is the backlash to Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu’s explicit claims about maintaining military control over Gaza. This is quite a statement. I received an email this morning from a significant figure—someone connected to American institutions—saying we could interview this. My question is: what are your thoughts on this, and what will likely be the fallout by the time this is published?
Irina Tsukerman: The most controversial part of Netanyahu’s remarks is not about taking control of Gaza, because, in practical terms, about 75% of Gaza is already under Israeli military control. The key issue is that many people do not realize how small the territory is, so “taking over Gaza” sounds more dramatic than it is.
The larger strategic problem is that Israel’s military has not been consistently holding the areas it clears. This is why Hamas has been able to reconstitute itself repeatedly. They have not implemented a sustained counterinsurgency strategy—something General Petraeus and many others have advised, which would involve clearing, holding, and only withdrawing after Hamas is fully dismantled.
Another critical misstep was not targeting Rafah earlier, where much of Hamas’s leadership was initially entrenched. By delaying operations there, Hamas had time to disperse its leadership and fighters. Instead of cutting off the head of the snake early, Israel went after lower-level operatives first, allowing a large number of armed fighters to keep circulating throughout Gaza via its extensive tunnel network.
These tunnels are not a single contiguous system that can be seized in one operation; they branch off, intersect with civilian infrastructure, and allow fighters to surface unpredictably in other locations. Without controlling all of Gaza, including the tunnels, Israel cannot eliminate Hamas’s military leadership.
Netanyahu later clarified that he does not intend to annex Gaza. He said the occupation would be temporary, aimed at dismantling Hamas’s military infrastructure, rescuing hostages if possible, and then transferring control to another authority. The unanswered question is: who would that be?
The Palestinian Authority is ill-equipped for the task—it is struggling to maintain control in the West Bank, where Hamas and Palestinian Islamic Jihad are actively challenging its Authority. Israel has conducted multiple raids there in recent months. Still, the PA’s popularity is declining even among West Bank Palestinians, much less in Gaza.
In Gaza itself, there is also clan-based violence that is anti-Hamas but not pro-Palestinian Authority. These factions often resemble criminal gangs or smuggling networks and had significant influence before Israel’s 2005 withdrawal and Hamas’s 2007 takeover. Any transition to alternative leadership is therefore highly problematic.
The Arab states have little interest in directly administering or securing Gaza. They want the issue resolved without involving themselves or Israel, and they have shown no willingness to pressure Qatar to stop funding Hamas. The United States is in the best position to leverage Qatar, but it has not done so.
Given these dynamics, the most likely scenario after any Israeli withdrawal is political chaos, with multiple factions competing for power. This instability could spill over into the West Bank. Turkey and other regional actors may attempt to gain influence, even though Israel is determined to keep both Iran and Turkey out of the equation. Without a concrete alternative plan for governance, Israel may not be able to prevent outside involvement.
Nobody wants to open the borders until Gaza is demilitarized, and that will not happen quickly, regardless of the political outcome. The controversy is legitimate, but it is focused on the wrong aspects. Everyone understands that without a prolonged operation, Hamas cannot be entirely removed from Gaza. If that is the goal—and right now, there is broad consensus, even the Arab League has issued statements to that effect—there are still significant complications.
The Arab League’s problem is twofold: first, that Israel is the one carrying it out; second, disagreements about Israel’s methods. Some of the controversy is fueled by Hamas propaganda, some stems from Israeli disorganization, and some is simply the result of a lack of cooperation channels, which creates logistical problems.
The bottom line is that no one wants to participate in the solution. Still, none of the available solutions are satisfactory to any of the stakeholders, and for good reason. Gaza has been unstable for a long time and has deteriorated further over the past two decades. Former U.S. President Trump did not put forward a serious, workable plan for the U.S. role in resolving the conflict. He offered neither financing for reconstruction nor a plan for demilitarization, nor was he willing to commit American troops. He also failed to secure long-term Arab cooperation with Israel. As a result, there will be no clean transition to a less destructive status quo. Without significant regional changes and outside engagement, we are facing a prolonged asymmetrical conflict.
Jacobsen: Ahead of his meeting with the United States about the war in Ukraine, Russian President Vladimir Putin today spoke with leaders of China, India, and three former Soviet states. No venue, date, or agenda for the meeting has been announced. Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky has said he discussed peace and Russia with South Africa’s President Ramaphosa. Chinese President Xi Jinping told Putin that China welcomes renewed U.S.-Russia contacts as Russia seeks to end the war in Ukraine.
Tsukerman: If Russia truly sought to end the war in Ukraine, it could do so easily by withdrawing, stopping the abductions, and releasing civilians, including children, whom they have taken.
There have been over 700,000 Ukrainian nationals abducted by Russia, and only about 22,000 children have been identified so far. That means there are hundreds of thousands of people whose identities and whereabouts are unknown. Some have been transferred to Russia, some sent to camps for indoctrination and training against Ukraine, some placed in prisons or labour camps, and some trafficked internationally for sex exploitation. Many of these individuals are now effectively untraceable.
If Russia wanted to end the war, it could withdraw and release the civilians they have taken hostage. I do not see that happening. Instead, they are seeking political cover to gain more military and logistical support from China. They are likely to get it, since China is already supporting them in various ways and has stated it cannot allow Russia to lose the war.
As for discussions with India, China, and the post-Soviet states, India and China are historically rivals and should not be aligned, but U.S. tariffs under Trump have had the unintended effect of bringing them closer together. This, in turn, has drawn India back toward Russia after it had been moving away. Putin is scheduled to visit India shortly, and Prime Minister Modi is expected to visit China sometime this year.
There was a call between Prime Minister Modi and President Putin in which they discussed their bilateral relationship and Ukraine, exchanging warm words. This came right after former President Trump announced an additional 25% tariff on Indian goods—on top of the existing 25%—allegedly over India’s purchases of Russian oil. India was singled out for these secondary tariffs, which are not sanctions but instead economic measures designed to punish countries buying Russian crude.
Nothing comparable was imposed on China, which is purchasing significantly more discounted Russian oil than India, as well as engaging in other trade activities with Russia. Nor has the United States sanctioned Russian aluminum or other metals, despite importing large quantities of them.
While India and China are unlikely to become close allies, Trump’s economic measures against India are driving these two rival countries into limited economic alignment. Modi is under domestic pressure to take a firm stance against the United States, even though India does not have the kind of financial leverage that China does. This imbalance could explain why Trump is targeting India rather than China—the U.S. economy remains heavily dependent on Chinese capital and supply chains. In contrast, India’s still-developing economy is more vulnerable to tariffs. India’s overreliance on the U.S. market and its lack of diversified trade relationships make these tariffs a significant shock.
Central Asia is also emerging as a key geopolitical arena. Russia and China are competing for influence there, and India is trying to build economic ties with the region. Pakistan and Afghanistan currently serve as primary gateways into Central Asia, but new routes are developing. For instance, today an agreement was concluded between Armenia, Azerbaijan, and the United States granting the U.S. significant economic and development presence in the Zangezur Corridor—a route connecting Europe to Central Asia that bypasses both Iran and Russia.
Central Asia is becoming an active collective player even as internal power struggles persist. Iran has not given up its influence in states such as Turkmenistan, and Turkey is using cultural and linguistic ties to expand its own economic and political footprint. The result is a complex and shifting geopolitical reality. While Russia is falling behind economically, Trump’s tariff policies are alienating U.S. partners, giving Moscow opportunities to attract attention and limited support despite its weakened position.
Jacobsen: One clarification: there was a recent media report claiming that India had paused potential plans to purchase U.S. arms in response to these tensions. However, the Indian Ministry of Defence has denied this, calling the story false and confirming that negotiations are ongoing. It remains unclear whether Defence Minister Singh’s visit to the U.S. has been cancelled. Still, even if he does not attend, lower-ranking officials are expected to continue the talks.
On a separate note, the International Criminal Court has issued an arrest warrant for Saif Suleiman Snedal, a Libyan national believed to be part of Group 50 or a subgroup of the Al-Saiqa Brigade. The ICC cites reasonable grounds to believe he is responsible for war crimes, including murder, torture, and outrages upon personal dignity, allegedly committed in Benghazi and surrounding areas. Any thoughts?
Tsukerman: Unfortunately, the destabilization caused by the Libyan civil war created fertile ground for a range of armed actors. Some of these groups were connected to the main factions in the conflict. In contrast, others were independent militias or transnational terrorist organizations—such as al-Qaeda and ISIS—that seized the opportunity to establish a presence in Libya.
We are only now beginning to determine how many atrocities were committed by these actors. Unfortunately, many of them were able to travel freely for years, building networks, gaining influence, and advancing their agendas—not only in Libya but across North Africa, throughout the African continent, and in the Middle East. Libya’s fractured landscape compounds this: the country effectively has two rival governments. Most of the oil—especially in the east—is controlled by Benghazi. Still, the international community officially recognizes Tripoli, which has little actual influence in eastern Libya.
We also see significant Islamist influence emanating from Tripoli, which appears to offer a degree of protection to former fighters from the civil war, many of whom are now freelancing or engaging in outright terrorist activity abroad. It is encouraging that the international community is finally starting to take these Libya-based terrorists seriously, but sanctioning individuals is not enough. There must be resources devoted to tracking them down, prosecuting them, dismantling their networks, and cutting off their financial and logistical support. This also requires applying pressure on Tripoli and neighbouring states that have facilitated the movement and financing of these actors. The message should be clear: no ideological extremism will be tolerated.
The Biden administration’s efforts in Libya have been on reducing Russian influence in Benghazi. However, the reason Russia is present there in the first place is that Benghazi lacks a unified military force. It relies on militias and is not strong enough to confront Tripoli, which has military backing from Turkey. Benghazi also feels threatened by local militias, Islamist fighters, and mercenaries who have entered Libya over time. Today, Turkey is consolidating its foothold in the region.
This is a complex geopolitical situation, and removing a single terrorist will not fundamentally alter the strategic realities. Suppose we are to go beyond playing “whack-a-mole” with “extremists. In that case, there needs to be a framework for addressing Libya’s security challenges. That means depriving extremist groups of the “oxygen” they need to operate, forging political consensus, and building a more stable national government.
Jacobsen: The U.S. Mission warns of threats to Jewish and Israeli communities in the United Arab Emirates. According to a report, it has information indicating active threats, stating: “Terrorist organizations are operating with increased intensity these days in efforts to harm Israel.” The statement was vague, but the source is credible. Your thoughts?
Tsukerman: This is not surprising. After Israel targeted various Iranian proxies and Iran itself, an uptick in retaliatory activity was expected. Iran has openly stated it aims to target Israelis worldwide, not just in the Middle East. Israel recently evacuated its diplomats from the UAE after reports—unconfirmed but credible—of Iran preparing a new series of airstrikes that could affect the region.
It would also not be the first time that Jewish communities and Israeli citizens were targeted in the UAE. Not long ago, an Israeli-Moldovan dual citizen who was a rabbi was abducted and murdered there. While his Israeli citizenship was downplayed publicly, he had been tracked by Iranian intelligence, which reportedly hired foreign nationals in the UAE to carry out the killing.
Iran has previously attempted to abduct other nationals in the UAE, including opposition leaders, and in some cases threatened them directly. The UAE’s ability comes partly from its geographic proximity to Iran, as well as extensive trade ties. Many Iranian companies operate in Dubai and Abu Dhabi, and there are even intermarriages between some members of the Emirati royal family and Iranian nationals.
There is a significant level of Iranian influence in the UAE, making it fertile ground for interference. These new threats reflect an uptick in Iranian asymmetrical activity in place of any effective military response to Israel. This is not unprecedented—historically, Iran has targeted Jewish communities worldwide, including in Germany, and has used Hezbollah to carry out operations. They have attempted to assassinate Israeli businesspeople and stage abductions in Turkey.
The question is whether the UAE is equipped—politically, in terms of law enforcement capacity, and in intelligence resources—to handle this threat, and whether it has the political will to curb Iran’s targeting of Israeli visitors, Jewish residents, and businesspeople with part-time residency in the UAE. At some point, the UAE will have to decide what side it wants to be on. The United States has not been a remarkably consistent partner in countering regional threats. Still, Iran has become so politically toxic that countries maintaining close trade ties with it could face reputational and economic consequences.
Jacobsen: This ties back to our earlier discussions on antisemitism. The Aryan Freedom Network is reportedly “riding” high in the Trump era. The Neo-Nazi group, led by a Texas couple who are both children of Ku Klux Klan members, has gained prominence. According to Heidi Beirich, cofounder of the Global Project Against Hate and Extremism, extremist groups have become so normalized that ‘Proud Boys do not seem that scary anymore.’ This suggests an increase in antisemitism and related extremist ideologies, with the threshold for joining such groups decreasing while the extremity of their rhetoric and objectives is increasing. Your thoughts?
Tsukerman: There are several reasons for this. One is what I call “coalition theory”: different radical factions are joining forces and mainstreaming each other in a post-ideological environment, as the traditional party structure breaks down. Conspiracy theories, public disillusionment with political corruption, and polarizing media narratives fuel that breakdown.
Trump himself has used rhetoric that many interpret as dog whistles to such groups, and he has done little to counter their influence actively. His administration did not make a concerted effort to denounce these movements, and in some cases, individuals in both lower and higher-ranking positions engaged with extremist platforms. One example is Kash Patel, who appeared eight times on a podcast that later broadcast content calling for a “final solution” against Jews in the United States and sought alliances with Islamist groups despite ideological contradictions.
Prominent Trump-aligned media figures have also contributed. Tucker Carlson has given platforms to Holocaust deniers; Candace Owens has promoted conspiracy theories; and figures like Daryl Cooper, Elon Musk, and Steve Bannon have, at times, engaged in behaviour or rhetoric that normalizes extremist ideas. Musk and Bannon, for instance, have been accused of mainstreaming a Nazi-like salute, and Musk’s X has become a permissive space for far-right rhetoric. Moreover, there was the recent Hitler episode on Grok.
Jacobsen: Yes—another Hitler episode. This has happened periodically, even since Grok was updated. Some speculate that Musk may have deliberately adjusted it to produce such content. At the same time, that timing appears plausible based on earlier patterns, it remains speculation.
Tsukerman: The fact that several well-known public figures with substantial influence over discourse are intervening on behalf of extremists and promoting them has created a silent acceptance—almost a whitewashing—of their presence. This emboldens such individuals, making them feel freer and more accepted, which is why they are re-emerging from the margins.
Many of these groups had been marginalized and depopularized in the past. Still, some are now gaining momentum partly as a backlash to cancel culture and what is perceived as extreme left censorship. That said, it is not purely reactionary—some of this resurgence has been actively cultivated. Russian funding of far-right groups in the United States is a documented reality. Russians have been linked to financially supporting neo-Nazi organizations, amplifying their messaging, and promoting specific figures.
Figures like Tucker Carlson and Candace Owens have been tied to Russian propaganda outlets, and in some cases, to other extremist networks, such as Qatari entities using Al Jazeera and Islamist channels to promote similar rhetoric. This “coalition theory” dynamic is increasingly visible. We have seen individuals like Kanye West promote antisemitic rhetoric to audiences within minority communities, and Nick Fuentes—once a fringe figure—has gained massive social media traction. This cross-platform boosting increases visibility, creates resonance, and facilitates ideological cross-pollination among disparate extremist factions.
The proliferation of conspiracy theories has become a unifying force, bringing together individuals from different ideological origins. These mechanisms are helping to accelerate the rise of the far right.
Jacobsen: Shifting to Asia, there was a recent simulated Chinese blockade of Taiwan, which revealed Singapore as a potential lifeline. Officially, Singapore has tried to remain neutral. Still, some within its government are increasingly concerned about Chinese interference in their political system.
Tsukerman: Being a small state, Singapore is wary of taking an overtly pro-Taiwan stance, especially as U.S. policy under Trump has sent mixed signals: cancelling the Taiwanese president’s visit to Washington and scrapping scheduled defence talks. Such moves do not reassure smaller Asian nations.
China has seized on this uncertainty, expanding its political interference and military maneuvering. Taiwan’s party—already facing domestic dissatisfaction due to political mismanagement—has been overly reliant on the United States for both energy and security policy. This leaves it vulnerable, particularly when Washington’s actions appear inconsistent. China benefits from this public disillusionment, exploiting frustrations with the most vocal anti-China political forces.
We see similar patterns elsewhere in Asia. In South Korea, a former president adopted a tough-on-China stance but overreached politically. This opened the door for a more dovish leadership seeking rapprochement with Beijing. Japan and South Korea have even concluded a major bilateral economic cooperation agreement with China for the first time in decades.
Singapore is caught in the middle of these shifting dynamics, with deep economic ties to China that are not easily severed. Without active U.S. engagement—and especially in the wake of new U.S. tariffs on Asia-Pacific products—there is even less incentive for countries in the region to reduce economic dependence on China.
Jacobsen: On August 7, former President Donald Trump announced that he would nominate Council of Economic Advisers Chairman Stephen Moore as a Federal Reserve governor. Any thoughts?
Tsukerman: Some investor commentary has been skeptical. Drew Brenner, head of international fixed income securities at NatAlliance Securities in New York, stated: “Our view is he is controversial and will not pass. He will change the Fed.”
Jacobsen: First, he has no experience, no street smarts, no business background—always politics, unquote. Any thoughts?
Tsukerman: Look, has that ever stopped our politics? Think back to Congress. They rubber-stamped political “geniuses” like Tulsi Gabbard and defence hawks like Pete Hegseth.
Jacobsen: Dan Bongino—FBI.
Tsukerman: Yeah, Dan Bongino, assorted others. There is even the head of a terrorist group who was formerly a gardener. That is the extent of his counterargument—a 22-year-old saying, “I was a gardener so that I could run.” That is his political experience.
There have been other people with zero political experience—or even basic knowledge of policy issues—appointed to various positions. That will certainly not stop either Trump or Congress from confirming him.
It is obvious politics. Trump has made no secret of wanting to displace Federal Reserve leadership with people who are political loyalists and will do what he says: lower interest rates, fight inflation, and pursue economic growth, economic stability be damned. That is what he is working toward.
I am sure that the governor’s abrupt departure was not an accident. She was probably pressured to do so. Jerome Powell’Powell’s term ends in May 2026, which means Trump will be able to appoint whoever he wants to that position and essentially staff the Fed with people who answer to him, making it another puppet structure despite its supposed constitutional independence.
While Trump cannot legally remove Powell, he can surround him with loyalists and make him ineffective. He can also pressure and force people out, allegedly of their own accord, to implement his policies. That is precisely what he is doing systematically. This is what abuse of power looks like.
The fact that there is no widespread pushback—that people approve everything Trump does without question, with a poor grasp of economics, U.S. history, and the law—is another big problem. When you have an ignorant voting base, you cannot have constructive criticism of government policy. People tend to gravitate toward what sounds emotionally satisfying, rather than evaluating policies on their merits.
We have been reduced to playing for our favourite team, not examining the policies themselves.
Jacobsen: Good time for one more?
Tsukerman: Yes, and this one stands out—Uganda.
A Ugandan court denied bail to veteran opposition leader Kizza Besigye, who has been in jail for nine months on treason charges. This has raised concern among government critics, including opposition leader Bobi Wine, about a crackdown ahead of Uganda’s election. President Yoweri Museveni, 80, is seeking reelection.
He is not even the oldest African leader running for another term—Robert Mugabe was in his 90s when he ran again. Throughout Africa, it is common for elderly leaders to stay in power. Many of them, like Museveni, came to power during the Cold War, often with Soviet backing, and have maintained one-party systems that keep them in office for decades.
In Chad, there is a younger leader. Still, he has already been influenced by foreign powers like the UAE and Russia. In most cases, elections are neither free nor fair, and opposition candidates are excluded, prosecuted, or accused of crimes. Many opposition groups themselves are corrupt or ineffective, adding to the political dysfunction.
Uganda is one of the worst offenders in this regard. It is also facing a wave of jihadist violence, separatism, and border tensions—some of which are relatively new. The U.S. has largely abandoned holding these governments accountable. Under Trump, the focus has shifted to securing rare earth minerals in exchange for security and economic deals, with little interest in countering ideological extremism, fighting corruption, or supporting human rights reforms.
The previous administration focused more on climate change and countering Russian and Chinese influence. Still, even then, there was little emphasis on promoting good governance. As a result, Africa is filled with leaders who have been in power too long, many of whom are more interested in enriching their families than serving their citizens.
In more developed African nations like Kenya and Ghana, entrepreneurship is growing, and there is some political pressure for results. In Uganda, this is not the case. The treason charges against opposition leaders are a standard tool to suppress dissent. This is unlikely to change, and Trump will not pressure Uganda to make any changes.
The European Union has also avoided holding African governments accountable, focusing instead on two priorities: containing jihadism (with limited success) and preventing waves of migration from Africa.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Irina.
Tsukerman: Thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/16
Dr. Džina (Gina) Donauskaitė, Head of the Lithuanian Journalism Centre and lecturer at Vilnius University, highlights Lithuania’s strong media freedom but low public trust in journalism. Trust has declined since 2003–2004 due to media oligarchs, political interference, and transparency issues. Lithuania, often mislabeled as “post-Soviet,” has evolved significantly since joining the EU and NATO. Challenges include unratified protections for women, lack of LGBT rights, and high inequality. Younger generations are more open and egalitarian, especially in media habits and social expectations. Donauskaitė emphasizes the link between freedom and responsibility, stressing that rebuilding trust requires commitment to ethical journalism and civic accountability.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your current position?
Dr. Džina (Gina) Donauskaitė: I am the Head of the Lithuanian Journalism Centre, which is a non-governmental organization. We specialize in informal journalism education and applied media research. I also teach journalism students at Vilnius University.
Jacobsen: What do you see as a gap or need in journalism in Lithuania?
Donauskaitė: I believe the most significant issue we currently face is low public trust in the media. According to international indicators—such as the World Press Freedom Index by Reporters Without Borders—Lithuania performs quite well in terms of press freedom. In 2023, for example, Lithuania was ranked 7th out of 180 countries, and in 2024, it was ranked 14th. So, structurally and legally, we have one of the freest media environments in the world. However, despite this, trust in the media among the public is relatively low. Survey data typically shows trust ranging between 25% and 32%, depending on the methodology and year. That is quite low for a country with such a free media system. Rebuilding public trust is essential. Before Lithuania joined the European Union in 2004, trust in the media was significantly higher. In the early 2000s, it was estimated at around 65%, according to local surveys. But after EU accession—and especially following several high-profile political and media scandals—there was a noticeable and gradual decline in public confidence. Even though we’ve improved professional standards in journalism over the past two decades, the perception of media credibility has not kept pace. That gap needs attention.
Jacobsen: Lithuania also joined NATO in 2004. Did that contribute to the decline in trust?
Donauskaitė: I do not think Lithuania’s accession to NATO or the EU directly caused the decline in media trust. Other internal developments were more influential. One major factor was how media ownership evolved after the 1990s. There was a consolidation of media power among a few influential owners—often referred to as “media oligarchs”—who maintained close ties with political elites. These relationships were not always transparent and sometimes involved unethical practices—a major political event in 2004 further complicated public trust. President Rolandas Paksas was impeached and removed from office due to findings by Lithuania’s Constitutional Court and national security services. They concluded that he had violated the Constitution by granting Lithuanian citizenship to a Russian businessman linked to questionable networks and by allowing undue influence over presidential decisions. This crisis played out publicly and divisively in the media. During that time, different media outlets took sharply opposing stances—some supporting Paksas, others calling for his removal. This created confusion among the public.
People began to question whether journalists were pursuing the truth or pushing political agendas. That was a turning point, and many realized that behind-the-scenes dynamics were shaping the news they consumed. Since then, things have changed. No single media outlet dominates the landscape as it did in the early 2000s. The rise of digital and independent platforms has diversified the media environment. Still, trust remains fragile, and it takes continuous effort to rebuild and sustain it.
There is a lot of media freedom at the moment. The old influential monopolies are no longer as dominant. You can now access quite high-quality information. But still, the issue of trust remains. It goes back to 2003–2004, when people began to realize that some shady processes were occurring within the media landscape. That is when public trust began to decline. During the independence movement, trust in the media was very high. The press stood on the side of independence, on the side of the people. After January 13th, 1991, when Soviet troops attempted to seize the Lithuanian Parliament and successfully took over the national radio and television station, the official broadcast was taken over. The Soviets brought in their journalists. In response, the professional Lithuanian journalists resigned en masse and began establishing alternative channels to continue reporting. These journalists remained pro-independence and played a key role in the information resistance. At that time, the media earned enormous public trust by being at the forefront of the struggle for independence. But around 2003–2004, people started noticing that not everything in the media was as transparent as it should be, and trust began to erode. That said, when it comes to EU and NATO membership, most Lithuanians are supportive. These developments are widely seen as positive political choices for the country.
As for religion, it is not religion itself, but there have been some grave and recent scandals involving sexual exploitation of minors. These cases involved priests, not necessarily prominent ones, but individuals who were protected by more senior figures within the Church. In some instances, justice was never served because the events took place a long time ago, making it difficult to gather sufficient evidence. Some victims came forward only in adulthood. So in some instances, there was no legal justice. But in others, priests were tried and received prison sentences. Some were also tried and sentenced by the Church’s internal tribunal.
Jacobsen: When people from outside the country think about Lithuania—though perhaps it is not a country they often think about—what do they typically get wrong or right? What is the general image others have, and how accurate is it?
Donauskaitė: That depends, because knowledge varies from country to country and person to person. But I would say that Lithuania is too often referred to as a “post-Soviet” country. So much has changed that the label no longer applies. We are quite different now. Even when it comes to our media system, we are far ahead of what is typical in post-Soviet contexts. Compared to Ukraine, Moldova, Armenia, or Georgia, Lithuania—and also Estonia and Latvia—are in a very different place. The media systems in all three Baltic states are genuinely free.
In contrast, the countries I just mentioned still face serious media freedom issues. So, comparing Lithuania to other post-Soviet countries is often inaccurate. The Baltic states have come a long way already.
Due to Lithuania’s accession to NATO and the European Union, we had to restructure many internal systems. These changes made us significantly different from other post-Soviet countries. Yet, in international media, one of the first things usually mentioned is that Lithuania is a post-Soviet or former Soviet Union country. That characterization can be quite irritating to Lithuanians. It is something we would like to see change. Lithuania has been a European Union member state 2004 for 20 years now. It is a very different country today. Also, sometimes foreigners who visit larger cities like Vilnius get a good impression. Vilnius is a relatively large and economically vibrant city. The standard of living appears quite high. But that is not the case across all regions of Lithuania. It is a small country, but we still experience significant economic and social inequalities.
Jacobsen: As a journalist, what do you find is easier here, and what is harder?
Donauskaitė: I would say it is easier to get sources. That is something typical of small countries. You can reach people quite easily. In larger countries, there are layers and layers of bureaucracy and gatekeeping to get through before landing an interview. Here in Lithuania, it is relatively easy to arrange an interview with someone. Of course, some politicians or sources may avoid speaking, but generally, the information flow is accessible. That is an advantage for journalists working in Lithuania. Also, one can build a journalism career quickly here. No significant structural barriers are keeping younger journalists from entering the field. If they are motivated, they can succeed. Journalism remains an energy-intensive and demanding profession, but for those who are passionate, building a career in Lithuania is very doable.
Jacobsen: Human rights standards are generally good here. But where do significant rights abuses still occur?
Donauskaitė: One major issue is the Istanbul Convention. Lithuania still has not ratified it into national law. That needs to happen. The Convention addresses violence against women, and ratifying it would be a significant step forward. Another ongoing concern is the lack of legal recognition for same-sex partnerships. While LGBT visibility has grown, especially in larger cities, many people still struggle to be open about their identities and experiences. This remains a serious issue. Although events like Pride parades are held in city centers—very colourful, very visible—day-to-day life remains complicated for many LGBT individuals. Just recently, a court ruled that same-sex couples should theoretically be allowed to register partnerships, stating that preventing them from doing so goes against the Constitution. It was a landmark decision by one of our courts. In theory, registration could now happen without new legislation from parliament. No one has tested this yet, so we will see what happens. Perhaps the courts will help establish this new legal practice. Butoverall, it is an ongoing struggle for equal rights in Lithuania.
Like in many other places, in theory, we have all the human rights protections in place, but implementation can be very different. I would say many countries face similar issues, often related to conservative attitudes within the population. For example, abortion rights are quite accessible in Lithuania, but they are not grounded in legislation. The right to abortion—up to 12 weeks—was established through ministerial regulations, not by parliamentary law. That means a minister could theoretically revoke it at any time. A conservative minister could come in and cancel the directive. Despite this, the general public still considers abortion a right, and any attempt to remove that access would likely receive public backlash. We even had a conservative health minister who was personally anti-abortion, and though he expressed that sentiment publicly, he did not revoke the regulation—he left it in place. So there was anti-abortion rhetoric, but in practice, access remained unchanged. That said, when women are interviewed, their experiences vary. Some doctors refuse to perform abortions, and women may need to seek out someone willing. So, in practice, the system does not always guarantee human rights, even when formally in place.
Jacobsen: So even though it comes up rhetorically, is the 12 weeks generally accepted, or is there broader debate about it?
Donauskaitė: I think the 12-week limit is generally accepted, with some exceptions allowed for medical reasons.
Jacobsen: What about economic parity? You mentioned inequality earlier—how does Lithuania fare?
Donauskaitė: Lithuania has one of the highest income inequality rates in the European Union. Only Romania and Bulgaria typically rank higher. So yes, inequality here is quite significant.
Jacobsen: What about gender-based economic disparities?
Donauskaitė: I am not a specialist in gender economics, but unequal pay still exists across some professions. Even when women and men are doing the same job, disparities remain. I do not think any country has achieved full pay equality yet, but here, the wage gap persists. Even in high-paying sectors like STEM and IT—where more women are now employed—female employees tend to earn more than women on average, but still not as much as their male counterparts.
Jacobsen: What about generational differences? How do older people—say, men and women over 65—compare with younger generations aged 18 to 35 in terms of adapting to new discourses, the influence of international culture via the internet, and shifting demographics? Are the differences stark?
Donauskaitė: Yes, there are many differences, especially regarding media use. The older generation still primarily consumes television and linear media, while the younger generation is immersed in globalized social media. They live in different informational ecosystems. It is hard to find many commonalities between the two groups. In terms of media consumption, older people tend to rely heavily on local news sources, but local media in Lithuania are often under-resourced and do not invest much in modernizing or reaching younger audiences.
Meanwhile, the younger generation rarely engages with traditional or mainstream media. They get most of their news and content from platforms like Instagram and TikTok. TikTok and Instagram are currently the most popular platforms in Lithuania. So, from a media research perspective, these generations inhabit entirely separate informational spheres. As for other cultural dimensions, the media divide is evident.
Jacobsen: How about trends in marriage, partnership, and related areas? Does that come up in the news much? I know certain billionaires in the United States are obsessed with these topics—declines in marriage, increases in divorce, more acceptance of single-parent households, and more equal partnerships. Is that part of the media conversation in Lithuania?
Donauskaitė: Very rarely. If someone researches the topic, it might get some media coverage. But it is not considered hard news. It is more of a feature topic—something journalists might cover if they are specifically interested or if new research is released. Overall, the media does not focus on it much. Culturally speaking, Lithuania is still a relatively socially conservative country. So, these shifts are not widely discussed, either in the media or in broader public discourse.
Jacobsen: Among younger generations, are women driving these changes more, or are men? In terms of how they see themselves and relate to society.
Donauskaitė: I would say both are changing significantly. Younger generations tend to relate to each other more equally. You can see that mutual respect is emerging. I notice this with my students. They are eager for feedback, keen to communicate. They want connection, which is excellent, but also challenging for me as a teacher. I might have 50 students in one class, another 50 in a second class, and more in a third. All of them want feedback. They want to talk about their work, and they want to talk about themselves. That desire for communication, connection, mentorship—this is a normal and very healthy development. It was not like this in my generation. We communicated much less with our teachers or mentors. But now, they seek out that relationship, and I think it is a sign of positive societal change. You are building a society where people feel comfortable reaching out for help, for advice, for guidance. I also notice that students form deeper connections with one another. At least among the journalism students I teach, I see exciting social transformations taking place.
Jacobsen: I still have not figured this out—and I have been here a few days, visited museums, and walked around—but what is quintessentially Lithuanian?
Donauskaitė: How do I answer that question? I do not know.
Jacobsen: I do not mean the soup. I do not mean the beet soup. What is the character of Lithuania?
Donauskaitė: A few years ago, Lithuania tried to brand itself as a “brave country”—one that embraces new ideas, change, and innovation. I would say Lithuanians are indeed very mobile. They might not be brave in every sense, but many Lithuanians have travelled abroad. Many have also settled in other countries.
Jacobsen: I know some have been to Reykjavik.
Donauskaitė: Yes. But not only Reykjavik. Norway is one of the top destinations for Lithuanians. So are the UK and Ireland. Of course, much of this is economic migration, but the numbers are significant. I would say that mobility—travelling, relocating, and exploring other countries—is very much a Lithuanian trait now. And some of those who left are starting to come back.
Jacobsen: They have enriched the country a lot, probably.
Donauskaitė: Yes. Lithuania was behind the Iron Curtain for so long that people had minimal freedom to travel, mainly only within the Soviet Union. When the borders opened and the opportunity finally came, many people took it. Some even left illegally, before Lithuania joined the EU and gained complete freedom of movement. They would go abroad and work without legal status. That impulse to move, to explore, is still strong. Sometimes people leave without being fully prepared—they may not speak the local language or have much education, but they still go. It is part of a broader desire to see and experience something new.
Jacobsen: What about the conscription that was reintroduced in 2014?
Donauskaitė: Yes, conscription was reintroduced, but it is still not applied universally. They select a limited number of individuals each year. Some people genuinely want to participate. I would say that after the full-scale invasion of Ukraine began, many volunteered out of their own will. They also receive remuneration for their service. Those who volunteer receive higher compensation than those who are conscripted. The conscription policy remains relatively liberal. Women are not included in mandatory conscription—it is only compulsory for men. Women can volunteer to serve, but it is not required. I wouldn’t say the numbers are enormous, but the service lasts only six months, so it’s not an extended commitment. Since 2022, many people—including young people and professionals—have joined the Riflemen’s Union, which is a paramilitary civilian organization. Members receive training in tactics, firearms use, and basic military strategy. I am not part of it, but many people I know, including journalists, have joined. In the current context of war, I would say Lithuanian society has become more militarized. Many who have joined believe that war is inevitable—that it is just a matter of time. The relative calm we are experiencing now feels to many like the silence before the storm. People are fearful, and many are actively preparing for what they believe could happen.
Jacobsen: Last question. Do you have any favourite quotes?
Donauskaitė: Oh my God, no. I do not carry quotes in my head. I know too many! I have friends who are always quoting poetry.
Jacobsen: Or a bit of wisdom, then?
Donauskaitė: Bits of wisdom… no, nothing comes to mind quickly. I cannot think of something on the spot. Do you have something for yourself?
Jacobsen: There was a famous comedian, Lenny Bruce, in the United States. He inspired George Carlin, Richard Pryor, and others. There was also a magazine writer named Paul Krasner. He published The Realist for fifty years. He has passed away now. He was actually on the advisory board of a publication I used to run. He was the first person I ever allowed to interview me. This was during Trump’s first administration. It was supposed to be two questions, and it ended up being 2,000 words. When I first interviewed him, his last piece of advice was: Don’t take yourself as seriously as your causes. That’ll get you pretty far.
Donauskaitė: Yes. That’s very true. I do not know who initially said that—it might not be very original—but I recently wrote a piece about trust in media and media freedom. I explored ways to rebuild public confidence in the media. Ultimately, freedom is tied to responsibility. If you want to be free, you must take responsibility. We need to embrace the responsibility that comes with freedom.
Jacobsen: Freedom is like a coin—on one side are rights, and on the other side is responsibility.
Donauskaitė: Right now, we are fortunate to enjoy freedom in the media. No one knows what will happen in the future, but at this moment, we can speak our minds freely. In Soviet times, people could be imprisoned for expressing their opinions. You could lose your job for speaking freely. Even your relatives—your children—could face consequences in school or elsewhere if you said the wrong thing. That is no longer the case. But still, freedom of speech comes with responsibility. If you do not take that responsibility seriously, trust erodes. However, if you do take it seriously, I believe trust can be rebuilt. If you’re genuinely committed to freedom, then restoring trust is possible. That is something I came to believe after writing that article. It is not an original idea—just the result of everything I read and everyone I spoke with while working on it. It has been on my mind lately.
Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today, your expertise, Gina.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/03
I’ve always liked Glenn Gould upon hearing about him, hearing him, and listening to him speak. Not everything done by him was necessarily great, or even good, but was of the highest quality for his authentic expression. His admirable qualities were total dedication to a single pursuit without pretense. He mentioned making most psychosymmetric sense of Orlando Gibbons in auditory aesthetic choices at the time of Gibbons if Gibbons. I agree on both counts. A great composer and a great performer of the composer. In this sense, Glenn Gould was less about Bach and more about Gibbons. There are two of them and a three-part sensibility of temporal symmetry, humane sentiment, though in an asymmetric spatial relationship. We were each born in the wrong time and place, radical conservatives or traditional revolutionaries.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/01
White versus black isn’t light versus dark.
It’s spectral plurality versus singular nothing.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/01
That wasn’t obvious, dear;
I cannot read a mind.
Although other things unsaid were more obvious,
back to back,
and changed clothes.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/31
Does everything have to be grand, imbued with grandeur?
Gosh, people can be tiresome.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/31
I have found something.
When given independence, some part of us revolts.
We yearn for our dependencies.
The past is always now, too.
Also, we don’t see the world.
Therefore, we don’t see ourselves, either.
We’re driving the truck in Wadi Rum,
looking backwards,
admiring the beauty of the landscape,
mistaking the objects for us,
opaque fog on a windy night,
sitting in the middle of the desert,
admiring the skyline.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/29
So, you get home.
You’re tired.
You need time.
You feel hungry.
The aches,
the pains,
the oof,
ah, ouch.
Okay then, bargain with the clock.
Any more time?
It may not even be real,
but, for us, it’s real enough.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/28
What is the thin line between hypervigilance from trauma and ADHD?
I keep encountering people who have one or the other, rarely both.
However, I sense that those who exhibit the most severe symptoms of either condition often display both symptomologies.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/29
Do you know why States make so many decisions on sentimentalism, thus cloudyheaded emotionalism?
Because they’re mostly run by males, not the clearer-headed sex.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/30
If your expectation of love is fireworks, then you may be among them: an adolescent.
One cannot be argued out of this misconception,
as it’s an emotional, developmental delay.
It’s akin to mistaking financial gain with life success,
or mere attendance in a pew with a spiritual life.
Let it be,
let them be.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/29
I’ve met people better or worse at, well,
masking themselves,
who they are to the neighbour,
to the boss,
to the coworkers,
to their kids,
to their spouse,
and siblings,
and parents,
and the public, if they have any,
but, and you see this line,
especially to themselves.
In some sense,
the yearn to belong,
and its urge to conform,
is both comfort and curse,
as we each die alone in any case.
Where is the mirror in all of this, a pond on a clear moonlit night?
We do not even see ourselves,
as we do not even have a compass for the light after a while.
Reflections on echoes, thus diminished.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/28
Restoration takes time.
Shall we assume malice of forethought when simple administrative backlog is a more straightforward answer?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/28
Siltriller,
Sir Silt,
until trill,
thriller.
Skyunbound,
sittletrim drowntrodden,
Und Achtung alairt to the momentous,
Domes done,
trill drilled and,
the bounded skysight sits,
askance but chanced.
Who knew, you never knew the sites?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/26
Even the hottest nights in the desert,
can be cold;
Sundown…
…and my internal lights are wide awake.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/26
Part of the character of the Europeans,
is an intrepid sentimentalism.
Enough to go to the ‘New World,’
while pining for the Old World.
Enough to stretch the growth of Yggdrasil,
while emotionally linked to its roots.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/15
Dr. Robyn Koslowitz, clinical psychologist and author of Post-Traumatic Parenting, discusses how unresolved trauma shapes parenting styles, leading parents to react from trauma adaptations like perfectionism or dissociation rather than authentic self-regulation. She emphasizes conscious parenting’s unique power to help trauma survivors recognize and heal their internal triggers, ultimately breaking generational trauma cycles. The book is for everyone, by focusing on fostering self-awareness, emotional regulation, and authentic connections. Dr. Koslowitz introduces practical strategies grounded in neuroscience and psychology, stressing the importance of acceptance, integration, and meaning-making (AIM) in trauma recovery. Highlighting the role of community, cultural sensitivity, and supportive networks, she advocates for recognizing parenting as a communal rather than solitary endeavour, empowering parents to nurture emotionally resilient and connected families.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are speaking with Dr. Robyn Koslowitz, Ph.D. She received her doctorate in Clinical Child Psychology from New York University in 2009. Licensed as a school psychologist since 2002 and as a clinical psychologist since 2017, she serves as Clinical Director at the Center for Psychological Growth of New Jersey, which she founded. Dr. Koslowitz is the author of Post-Traumatic Parenting: Break the Cycle and Become the Parent You Always Wanted to Be, a guide combining neuroscience, psychology, and practical tools to support trauma survivors in raising emotionally healthy children. She frequently contributes to NPR and Parents magazine, appears on outlets such as Fox, CNN, and NewsNation, and hosts the Post-Traumatic Parenting YouTube channel. She blogs for Psychology Today too.
Drawing on over two decades of clinical experience, including work in schools and private practice, as well as her journey as a parent, Dr. Koslowitz empowers individuals to break free from generational trauma and build joyful, connected families. Her foundational model, Responsive and Responsible Parenting (R² Parenting), helps parents heal and grow while raising their children. She is a sought-after speaker and educator, featured in media and at the annual Post‑Traumatic Parenting Summit, where she leads workshops that equip parents with strategies for regulating emotions and setting boundaries amid triggers. First question: How can trauma that is never explicitly discussed still shape the way a parent raises a child?
Dr. Robyn Koslowitz: Here’s what I’ve found clinically and personally: as parents, we wake up with good intentions—“I’m not going to yell today.” “Even with my teenager’s eye-rolling, I’ll stay calm.” But then something triggers us, and we find ourselves yelling, snapping, dissociating, or giving in when we’d intended to hold firm boundaries. What if that reaction isn’t you but your trauma? Often, early experiences taught you patterns like yelling when stressed or people-pleasing under pressure.
These patterns stem from trauma—not only from dramatic events like accidents or violence but from any experience that your developing brain couldn’t fully process—something that left you asking, Who am I? What’s happening? That istrauma. Much of it is hidden because, as children, we accept what happens. A four-year-old doesn’t know when things are “messed up,” and even at fifteen, you might take specific experiences without labelling them as wrong. With time, you realize That shouldn’t have happened. So you might say, “I’m not traumatized—I wasn’t in a bombing.” But perhaps your mother was a functional alcoholic who frequently forgot to pick you up from school, leaving you stranded for an hour. That’s a traumatic experience as well.
If you’ve been rehearsing that for thirty years, it’s going to take a minute to unpair those two things. It’s going to take a second to change that. People say, “Oh, yay, your brain’s neuroplastic.” That’s true, but that’s also why therapy takes a long time. That’s why we have to change things actively—because it’s hard to unwire something once we’ve rehearsed it so many times.
Jacobsen: What makes conscious parenting uniquely powerful for those with unresolved trauma?
Koslowitz: So first of all, what happens when we’re traumatized—in my book, I use a metaphor that resonates with people: the idea of a “trauma app.” It’s the moment your brain experiences something overwhelming. I use the example of a time when maybe I’m not sure, Dad puts his fist through the wall. Your body goes into alarm mode, but your mom seems perfectly calm. Everyone acts like it’s just Tuesday morning. So, your brain creates a trauma app. It says, “This is scary. I need to solve this.”
It’s your survival instinct on steroids. Your brain creates an algorithm: “If Dad’s mad, I need to soothe the waters.” Or, “If someone seems threatening, I need to make jokes.” Or “If someone is angry, I need to lash out.” And you rehearse that algorithm over and over and over. Sometimes, you do not even realize it is a trauma adaptation. You think it is just who you are. You say, “I’m a control freak. I’m just really good at reading the room. I speak my mind. I’m an angry person—that’s just me.” You think it’s personality, but it’s an adaptation. It’s the trauma response so deeply practiced that it becomes identity.
Jacobsen: So you internalize it as your personality?
Koslowitz: For myself, one of my significant trauma adaptations—as a child raised in a home where my father was chronically very ill—was dissociation. My trauma story is that he died in my arms. I performed CPR on him when I was sixteen. I could go into that whole story, but one thing I learned how to do well was dissociate.
I could be in an emergency room—because my father had constant cardiac episodes—and I was the only child at home. My three older brothers had already moved out. So my mother would take me along. I could sit in a hospital waiting room and do my homework like I was sitting at the kitchen table. I could completely block out the world.
Yes, disconnect. I could dissociate so deeply that during my dissertation, I would sometimes work through the entire night. I thought of it as adaptive dissociation—a kind of superpower. I could concentrate anywhere. I could easily enter a state of flow. For me, the challenge is not getting into a state of flow. It’s getting out of it.
I always thought that was a good thing—until I had kids.
One day, my son, who was about ten years old at the time, looked at me and said, “Mommy, where do you go when you go away behind your eyes? Sometimes you’re talking to me, but you’re not here.”
Jacobsen: That’s powerful.
Koslowitz: He was ten years old—and now he’s a college student. So it’s like, wow, how much older he is. But I remember he started to cry. It was painful for him. And I thought, Wow, I do this dissociation thing. I could be giving a speech in front of a large audience—people will comment on my quality of presence—and I’m completely dissociated. But my kid saw it. It bothered him. And I realized I needed to take action.
I remember thinking at the time, It’s as if my son said to me, “Mommy, you’re five feet tall. You need to be six feet tall so you can reach the upper cabinet. So figure that out.” I was stuck. What should I do—stop dissociating and feel my feelings?
But then, if I did that, my other trauma adaptation—perfectionism—would kick in. I’d yell. I wouldn’t be this “perfect mom.” That wouldn’t work, either. So I didn’t know what to do with that.
Years later, it became a complete healing journey. Children are usually the map, the mirror, and the motivator of our trauma. A child will hit that trigger. Parents often judge themselves—“Why does my kid trigger me? What’s wrong with me?” I always say: It’s not that your kid triggers you. It’s that your kid reveals your triggers—and you’ve got to be willing to heal them.
If my son hadn’t said that to me, I would have stayed dissociated. I would have thought, This is great—I never feel stressed out in the moment. But that’s also why, at the time, I was morbidly obese. I was unhealthy in many ways. I didn’t feel stressed, so I thought everything was fine. But it wasn’t. If my kid hadn’t said, “This isn’t good,” I don’t know that I ever would have changed it.
Often, our kids are the first people we care about enough to make significant changes for. If a boss had said that to me, I would’ve responded, “Look, this is how I work. Take it or leave it.” I was a valuable enough employee that many would take me as I was. A romantic partner could have broken through. But for me, it was my son.
Jacobsen: What happened when you were sixteen?
Koslowitz: My father had a bad heart condition for most of my life. He developed it when I was around five years old. One of his first cardiac episodes happened when he was tossing me up into the air during play. For years, I carried the feeling that it was somehow my fault—that I had roughhoused with him and caused it. It took me years to unpack that in therapy.
He kept having severe cardiac events. He was a smoker. He lived a high-stress lifestyle—he was a securities trader. That kind of stress was constant. Throughout my childhood, these cardiac events were a regular part of my life.
When I was sixteen, I happened to be a lifeguard. I was sleeping. I heard my mother screaming in the middle of the night. I ran to their bedroom. My father was holding his nitroglycerin in one hand and the phone in the other. He was trying to call 911. I immediately started CPR. Unfortunately, I was not successful.
So, for years, I carried a deep sense that I needed to be perfect because I believed my mistakes could harm or even kill people. I must have done CPR wrong. I did not know at the time that female upper body strength—especially at sixteen—is significantly limited. I’m much more fit now. Back then, I was an aerobics instructor. I worked out a lot, but I did not have the muscle mass I have today. It was the ’90s—everything was cardio, and girls weren’t lifting weights. I was strong for my age, but still, performing CPR on a large man while on a mattress? If you’re not breaking ribs, you’re probably not doing effective CPR.
However, I wasn’t aware of that at the time. I didn’t know that until a good friend of mine, who is a trauma nurse, pointed it out to me recently. She said, “There was no way the CPR was going to work. There was no way you could have moved him to the floor. No way, at your age, with your strength, you could have successfully performed CPR on him.”
I had never even known that. So, for years, I carried this shame and guilt and perfectionism. I believed I had failed. Everyone was telling me I was a hero—I tried to do CPR, and the paramedics had to pull me off his body to defibrillate him—but I knew I had failed. I believed I had killed my father. That became a core belief.
Coincidentally, shortly after that, a schoolmate of mine—not a classmate, but someone in my school—had a fatal aneurysm in class. She was a sophomore, and I was a junior. She suddenly collapsed. Everyone was screaming. I think it was lunch or something because I don’t recall teachers being in the room right away.
I ran in and realized instantly—because I had seen death—I realized there was no one home behind her eyes. She didn’t need CPR because her heart was still beating, but she wasn’t breathing. I started to provide rescue breaths and began screaming at the teachers. All the teachers were standing around, asking things like, “What period is this?” or “Did she eat lunch?” or “These girls are always dieting.” And I’m like, “Call the paramedics! Get 911!”
I shoved a teacher. And I was a well-behaved, straight-A student. I was the geeky kid—the kind who sat in the back and was an active listener. I was not the type to shove a teacher. But I did. I shoved the teacher (to snap her out of it and get her to call 911). Eventually, the paramedics came. She was in a coma for a week, and then she died. Again, it was that same feeling—I was in a life-saving situation, I was the only one who realized how serious it was, and I failed. Again.
I did not stop to think; She was probably already brain-dead. The aneurysm had already done irreversible damage. In my mind, it was Robyn, the girl whose mistakes kill people. It took me a long time—and a great deal of therapy—to embark on that hero’s journey and reframe it. I had to shift that narrative to Robyn, the woman who can take uncomfortable action.
It took many years to process all of that. And remember, at the time, I was sixteen, with undiagnosed PTSD. And this was before 9/11—before people talked about PTSD in the way we do now.
This was before Google—this was the mid-1990s. I had no idea that PTSD even existed. How would I? It’s not like I could Google it. Nowadays, kids can look things up. Some TikTok influencers will diagnose you with anything if you want. But back then, the only thing I knew about was schizophrenia. I had a distant cousin with schizophrenia, and he would sometimes come to stay with us on weekends when he had supervised release from the institution where he lived.
I was already interested in psychology at that point. I volunteered at a nursing home, and there was a floor for people with dementia and mental illness. So, schizophrenia was the only mental health condition I was even vaguely familiar with. I remember thinking, Oh, my poor mom—her husband died suddenly, and now her daughter has schizophrenia because I was seeing things that weren’t there, hearing things that weren’t there. What else could it be?
I had this lightbulb moment in undergrad. I was sitting in class, and the professor was talking about PTSD. He told the story of a Vietnam veteran who accidentally shot his wife after hearing a car backfire—he thought he was under enemy fire and had a flashback. I raised my hand and asked, “Is that only from being in war, or can that happen to people in other situations?” And the professor said, “No, anything terrifying where you think you might die can trigger it.” I asked, “What if you see someone else die?” And he said, “Yes, that could cause it.”
And I thought, “Oh. That’s what I have.” But until then, I was convinced I was mentally ill and that schizophrenia was my trajectory. I had no idea that PTSD could even be an explanation. And it’s ironic because my mom was a guidance counselor. She would’ve been the perfect person for me to talk to. But I was such a perfectionist—I wasn’t going to add to her burdens.
She had just lost her husband. There was a whole legal dispute with his business partners. She was overwhelmed. And I didn’t want to pile more on. It didn’t even occur to me to say anything to her. Not that she necessarily would have known—it’s not like PTSD was widely known or well-understood in the 1990s.
Jacobsen: Following that and your work, was there ever another event that would have been traditionally traumatic—but because of the healing you had done, your physiological response and flashback response diminished so much that it was no longer a problem?
Koslowitz: Yes. One thing I still have is this trauma adaptation where, in real moments of crisis, I’m extremely calm. So if one of my kids is choking, I’m relaxed. I do the Heimlich maneuver. I’m quiet and focused. I’ve developed a decision tree for emergencies.
I’ve been in situations of real threat where I reacted calmly, and afterward, I didn’t flash back. Because I’ve done a lot of healing work, I was able to process it, handle it, and not spiral into panic attacks or flashbacks.
Now, when I get triggered, it’s more like, Oh hey, trigger, you’re here. Welcome. You’re trying to get me to do this thing. Thanks for the info—but I’m not going to. I’m a grown-up now. I know how to handle this, and here’s what I’m going to do instead.
Even things like hitting submit on the book—Post-Traumatic Parenting—that was hard. A manuscript is never perfect. It’s never truly done. You can revise it endlessly. I write a lot, so I know that feeling well.
I blog. I have a Psychology Today blog, and I write regularly. The big thing, yes, is recognizing when hyper-perfectionism shows up. I say, “Thanks for the information. Yes, I could spend three more hours making this 2% more perfect—or I could own those three hours and do something else with them. So, I’m going to hit submit now. Good enough is going to have to be good enough.”
Jacobsen: I’ve been doing a series of long-form interviews—at least five figures in word count—for a book project that’s breaking some new ground on the global humanist, atheist, and agnostic communities, particularly among Indigenous populations. “Indigenous” here is defined by standard metrics used by the UN and other international bodies.
There’s one man I interviewed from New Zealand—he’s Māori—and he wrote the first and only book specifically for Māori atheists and secular humanists. It was published about ten years ago. No other book like it has come out since. He told me it took him a year and a half to write the 18,000-word book—a slow pace, for sure. But he had the same hesitation when it came to clicking the submit button.
He told me, “What is everyone going to think? Am I going to be rejected by my community?” That’s community trauma—”I won’t be accepted. Who’s going to come after me?” But he clicked submit, and then… nothing. Some time went by, and he told me, “I guess no one cared. It wasn’t a big deal.”
In New Zealand, things are taken lightly. The Māori are a sizable population, and while most people still hold traditional spiritual or cosmological beliefs, there’s a live-and-let-live attitude in the culture. Ultimately, publishing his book didn’t result in the backlash he had feared. It’s interesting—there’s a wide range of human experiences that can still produce that same feeling of anxiety over clicking “publish.”
Koslowitz: Yes. That’s exactly how it felt with this project—launching the book. I remember telling my agent and the editor at Broadleaf, “Okay, so the hard part is over. The book is in.” And my agent turned to the editor and said, “Should we tell her?” Because launching the book is significantly harder.
For the launch, I organized a free online summit featuring interviews with sixteen individuals whose work I admire, focusing on the intersection of trauma and parenting. We hosted the summit to promote the book. There were a lot of moving parts—plus, I’m not exactly the most tech-savvy person on the planet.
Running a free online summit meant juggling lots of details. I made some mistakes. Someone sent me an angry email, and I responded with, “I apologize. I didn’t mean to make you feel that way. There were a lot of moving parts. This was an error, and I take responsibility for it.”
And they were still mad. I asked, “What can I do to fix this?” but it did not help. And I had to accept; okay, I erred. I made a mistake. But there was a part of me that wanted to say, Never do a summit again. Never try this again. Don’t risk making mistakes.
But the truth is—that mistakes happen. Nobody died. And for me, that’s a hard thing to process and reprocess constantly.
Jacobsen: Yes. It reminds me of universalizing the Winnicott approach—”good enough” parenting. I often find that “done is better than perfect” applies to most things. Some things need to be exact, but you can usually gauge it.
Koslowitz: Yes, exactly. Parenting is one of those things you cannot do perfectly. And many post-traumatic parents are perfectionists. That’s why they love those “gentle parenting scripts”—because they want to parent perfectly. But when you’re trying to parent perfectly, you’re not present. You’re present with the script, not with the child in front of you. So ironically, you become an imperfect parent—but in the wrong direction.
Instead of connecting, you’re performing. It’s better to say, “Let me have this conversation with my child and see how it goes.” I’ve had parents come to me and say, “Because of my hang-ups—because of my history of sexual abuse—I’m uncomfortable giving my child the puberty talk. Can you do it for me?”
And I tell them, “We could—but what if we processed your discomfort? What if we explored your triggers and the pain around this topic and then helped you give that talk yourself?”
Yes, it might not go perfectly. But isn’t that better than communicating—however subtly—that this topic is too big to talk about? Because what happens if your child experiences something big and they sense it’s “too big” for you?
Wouldn’t it be better to say, “My trigger was revealed. Let me reprocess this,” and then move forward with intention?
There’s grief and shame that can come with that. Thoughts like, “Why didn’t anyone have that conversation with me?” or “Wow, eight is young—do I have to talk about this with my eight-year-old? They’re practically still a toddler.”
I recently spoke to a mom who said, “That’s the age I was when my abuse started. When we asked, How do you explain confusing touch to an eight-year-old? she said, My child is still a baby.”
So we had to process that grief—and everything that comes with it. But it would be a real loss, in terms of intergenerational transmission, if I were the one to give her child that puberty talk. Or the good touch/bad touch talk. Or the “You’re going to summer camp for the first time—if there’s a confusing touch, here’s what you do” talk. Or “These are the kinds of things tricky adults might say or do.”
If I’m the one who has that conversation with her, we’re reifying the idea that this is way too big a topic for Mom. As opposed to: Let’s process it. Let’s work through it. I can also teach you the essential points.
There are better and worse ways to discuss these topics with children, and guidance is available on what is developmentally appropriate. We can go over all of that. I can give you the information. We can process it together. We can talk to your inner child and say, “Yes, it’s sad that no one did this with you.”
We can do all of that. And when you have the conversation with your child, you’re going to start healing, too. I include a lot of practices like that in the book—ways you can clue your inner child into what you’re doing with your real-world child. Because in parenting, we are also being parented.
We can heal. Which sounds so “woo-woo.” Inner child work is often dismissed in this way. But to me, it’s a great metaphor. Just like the trauma app—it’s a metaphor for how the brain processes overwhelming experience.
Jacobsen: Anytime you talk to an expert. You’re talking to someone who knows what’s DSM-based and what’s a metaphor—what’s grounded in clinical research versus what’s just being used illustratively. You touched on something important there: some things that sound like “woo-woo” are helpful metaphors. They’re meant to be educational, providing someone with a structure that helps them build insight or change their behaviour. But there’s also nonsense being pushed—things based on thin or no evidence, which are being asserted as 100% truth. That can be harmful.
Koslowitz: Yes. That’s a significant risk. Much psychotherapy is based on metaphor and story because a substantial portion of healing is rooted in narrative. But, as you said, when the metaphor becomes reified—when it’s treated as literal fact—that’s where it becomes risky.
That’s where psychology trickles down, and people forget the metaphor was never meant to be fact. It’s not like I can put you in an MRI and find your “inner child.” She’s not perched in some region of your brain.
I had a cute little boy say to me once, when we were talking about “Mr. Worry” in his brain, “No actual Mr. Worry is sitting in my brain.” And I said, “Yes! Exactly!”
Jacobsen: Kids are often more sensible than adults sometimes.
Koslowitz: Yes. They are.
Jacobsen: So, why is self-regulation a good first step to effective parenting? And I also want to tie that into being authentic as a parent. You mentioned scripts earlier—so if we remove the scripts and deal with the real person, then we can focus on what works for effective parenting. That’s the kind of connection I want to draw.
So, yes: Why is self-regulation important for effective parenting? And why is it essential to get rid of the scripts and be a real, present person with your kids? Authentic parent, effective parent, self-regulation.
Koslowitz: I feel that when you have a trauma app in your brain, it can cause you to look at your child as a problem to be solved instead of a person to parent—a person to engage with. So when people say, “Help me deal with my emotions,” what they’re saying is, “Help me deal with what emotions are doing to my body.”
People often dislike the feeling of being overwhelmed with anger, sadness, or fear. They want that to go away. Here’s where it might sound “woo-woo,” but it is grounded in solid science: There’s no such thing as pure self-regulation. What we call self-regulation is mentalized co-regulation—meaning, at some point in your life, someone regulated with you. A parent taught you how.
For example, a child falls and skins their knee. A parent—who could be a mom, dad, or other caregiver—says, “You fell. Your knee hurts. You’re bleeding. Let’s get a bandage.” Then maybe they say, “Oh, you’re sad,” or, “That’s frustrating,” or, “You’re angry.”
The child starts to understand: This overwhelming sensation in my body has a name. When they learn to name it, the sensation becomes manageable. That’s what Daniel Siegel calls “Name it to tame it.”
When we label our physical sensations, the left prefrontal cortex is activated, and our emotions don’t need to keep yelling at us to be noticed. When that happens enough—through a strong, safe attachment relationship—you internalize it. You no longer need Mom to narrate your emotions. Your inner mom does it for you.
You might think, “Oh, I fell. It’s a scrape. I’ll be fine.” And you move on. Then, as an adult, you can do the same for your child. But here’s the problem: If no one ever co-regulated with you, then you never learned to self-regulate. You may have learned to suppress your emotions, to shut them down, but not how to say, “I’m angry right now.” And then process what that means.
Anger identifies a problem. The way they acted—that was a boundary violation. I’m not okay with that. But now, how do I want to respond?
I could yell. I could write a strongly worded email. I could calmly state my boundaries. I have many options. Which one do I choose?
If no adult ever taught you that the feeling you’re experiencing is anger and that anger has a function—that it gives you focused energy and an action imperative—you may never learn that you have a choice. You might believe the only options are to stuff it down or explode.
It may never have occurred to you that self-regulation is even something you can learn. But it is. It’s what Viktor Frankl described—between stimulus and response, there is a pause. No one ever gave you that pause. No one ever handed that to you. That’s what self-regulation is. And now, you’re supposed to be doing that with your child.
But your brain is priming you to co-regulate with your kid—and if you were never taught how to do that, it becomes tough. So what happens? You go back to your trauma app, and it says, Well, either I’m going to do this perfectly… or, as I describe in my book, one of five types of post-traumatic parents emerges. You either go into perfectionism, or you disengage entirely, or you become paralyzed and try to do ten contradictory things at once. None of those approaches are currently effective.
Parenting becomes the perfect opportunity to say, I need to learn how to self-regulate. Maybe I did not experience mentalized co-regulation growing up, but I can be my co-regulator now. I can be my own “inner parent.” Again, metaphor—not hard science—but I can be my inner cheerleader.
It’s my voice. I can say to myself, “Robyn, you’re feeling under threat right now. That’s why you want to do everything perfectly. But you don’t have to. It’s okay if you make a mistake.” I could do that for myself if I didn’t have a parent who did it for me. And that’s what we want to teach our kids. Emotions are not the enemy. Emotions are not the problem. That’s what we want to pass on.
I had this experience when I was a new mom. I already knew I was a post-traumatic parent—I didn’t have that term yet, but I knew I had PTSD. I knew I was dissociating. I didn’t know how my body felt when I experienced strong emotions, so I avoided feeling anything too deeply.
Then I had these adorable twin boys—huge bundles of emotion that they just threw out into the world. I remember one of them would get so frustrated trying to put two Duplo blocks together. If they didn’t fit, he would shriek, pull his hair, or bang his head on the wall because he was so mad.
I had a supervisor, Dr. Esther Buckholtz, a child analyst who was a student of Winnicott’s. I asked her, “What do I do with this kid?” At the time, I had four children—two older daughters who were very well-behaved and expressed only socially acceptable emotions. Things like, “My dolly broke,” and I’d say, “Oh, you’re so sad.” That I could handle.
But what do I do with this anger?
Esther said, “Hold his hands, look him in the eye, and say: “Angry, angry, angry. You’re feeling angry. Say ‘angry.'”
So I did that. And eventually, he’d say, “Angy,” then he’d cry, and then he’d calm down.
But I needed Esther to teach me how to do that—because I had never been taught how to do that for myself. In teaching my son, I was learning too.
I recall a humorous moment—my mom used to watch my kids while I was in graduate school. She always drank her coffee from these delicate china mugs. One time, one of the twins pulled the tablecloth, and the mug went flying. Hot coffee and broken china were everywhere. My mother started screaming at the kids to get away—she was freaking out.
My son went over to her, held her hands, looked her in the eye, and said, “Angy, angy, angy.” It was like, “Wow—he gets this.” He understands loud voices. He understands fear, but was mislabelling fear as anger. But he also understands the concept of autonomic arousal—Say “angry,” and then you feel better. That’s huge. He taught it. This is good.
Jacobsen: Why is the reclamation of joy, spontaneity, and playfulness important for people who have experienced any variety of trauma?
Koslowitz: Some people have minimized problems, and things can go pretty well for them—and good for them. However, I want to focus on those who have truly experienced it. So, let’s look at this through a parenting lens.
There’s a concept in attachment theory that Dan Siegel talks about—the four S’s of attachment: safe, seen, soothed, and secure. If a parent can make a child feel those four things, then you have the foundation of secure attachment.
So, you want to ensure your kids are receiving those four S’s. Think about it: “safe,” “soothed,” and “secure” are all about sharing your calm with your child. That’s co-regulation. That’s about ensuring everybody is safe and that their basic human needs are met—eating, sleeping, and maintaining a routine. That helps them understand how to manage their emotions. It’s all about stability.
But “seen”—that’s different. “Seen” is about sharing your joy. It’s about delighting in your child. It’s that attunement: when the child finally clicks two Duplo blocks together and holds them up proudly, and the parent says, “Yes! You did it!” Or the kid yells, “Look, Ma—no hands!” while riding a bike, or they make it across the monkey bars for the first time.
And the parent is right there with that gleam in their eyes—“You did it! I see you!” It’s that cheerleader energy. That’s being seen. But here’s the thing: trauma robs you of both your calm and your joy. So, how do you share your calm and joy if you don’t have access to either?
That’s the fundamental attachment problem for any post-traumatic parent. Everyone keeps saying, “Share your calm, share your joy.” That’s the bottom line of every parenting book. If you boiled down the whole shelf of parenting literature, you’d get that mantra: “Share your calm, share your joy.”
“Share your calm” might show up as structure, rules, and discipline. In a more somatic or trauma-informed parenting model, it may mean co-regulating with your child. Either way, the principle is the same: Make your child feel safe. Make your child feel seen.
But those are the two things PTSD robs you of. That’s why so many post-traumatic parents read parenting books and end up feeling more shame, more self-doubt, more self-blame—because the book is telling you to do something that feels impossible.
The metaphor I like to use is this: Imagine you’re in a mall, and you need to get from the second floor to the roof. So you go to the map, and it tells you—go left, find this bank of elevators, take the elevator up, then go up one more flight of stairs, and you’re at the roof. Great.
But what if you’re in the sub-basement, and the lights are off, and there is no map? You understand how to get from the second floor to the roof—but you’re not even on the second floor. You’re trapped below, trying to figure out how even to reach that starting point.
And I feel like every parenting book misses that—how to get from the sub-basement to the second floor. That’s why I wrote Post-Traumatic Parenting—to get you from the sub-basement to the second floor.
And then—then—pick the parenting approach you want to use. But that’s why people feel blocked. That’s why people who read parenting books say, “I can’t do any of this stuff.” Because they’re in the sub-basement.
If you were already on the second floor, it would be fine.
So it’s hard when people say, “Self-regulate. Be that authentic parent.” If you don’t authentically know who you are—if you don’t know how to self-regulate—how are you supposed to co-regulate with a child?
If your body is still your enemy—if your trauma tells you that anytime you feel stress, you must get rid of it immediately—then how can you develop emotional resilience?
Your body never told you that there is such a thing as good stress. But stress is not inherently bad. Your stress response is your body’s way of helping you rise to meet a challenge. But you have to know that. You have to reinterpret that experience.
Sometimes, that’s why I recommend re-engaging with your body—through exercise, movement, or sensation training. Because you have to get reacquainted with your body. You have to look at your stress response and say, “Oh, this isn’t dangerous. This is just my body helping me. Now—what do I want to do with it?”
Jacobsen: What is the role of therapy in that process? What other support systems help?
Koslowitz: Therapy is very much about reprocessing, reinterpreting, and reintegrating what happened to you. It’s about working with someone who already knows how to do these things and who can guide you through the process.
Sometimes, people come into therapy and say, “But I could figure this stuff out myself.” And sure—you could.
But here’s an analogy: Imagine you go to a potluck dinner in your neighbourhood, and someone brings this fantastic cake. And you think, “Wow, this cake is incredible—she put something in it, but I can’t figure out what.” You could try to reverse-engineer it. You could do what they do on those British baking shows—pull apart the crumbs and guess whether there’s baking soda or a fruit purée. Try to think if there’s some special ingredient.
Sure, you could do that. Keep going back to the store, buying ingredients, experimenting, baking cake after cake, trying to recreate it.
Or—you could walk over to the person who made it and say, “That was a fantastic cake. What’s your recipe?” And she’ll say, “Oh! The secret ingredient is prune juice.” And you think, I never would’ve guessed that—but now I know. I can do that, too.
That’s what therapy is. It is not that you can’t figure out the thermostat or the ingredients. It’s just that treatment gives you access to someone who already has the recipe.
I like that better—it’s probably less offensive to therapists. But it’s similar to saying, “I could figure out how to do my taxes.” For example, I have a podcast, and I have someone who posts it online for me. I could figure out the tech. It would take much time—but I could do it. Or I could hire someone who’s done it two million times already.
All of that stuff—multimedia, tech, production—is undervalued. Totally. Props to those folks.
Yes, I could figure out how to program my website and not need a web admin. But given that I’m highly trained as a psychologist and not trained at all in coding, it makes more sense to hire someone who knows how to run a website—so I can focus on doing what I’m trained to do.
There is a great deal of mystique surrounding therapy and therapists. But really, therapy is just about going to the person who has the recipe. The person who knows how to do it. Meanwhile, all these clocks are ticking while you’re trying and failing to figure this stuff out. If you have kids, it might make sense to hire someone who already knows how to guide you through this.
In my book, I talk about what I believe is true for all trauma-informed psychotherapy. Every legitimate trauma therapy I know—whether it’s Internal Family Systems, EMDR, Cognitive Processing Therapy, or Trauma-Focused CBT—has three core components: acceptance, integration, and meaning.
That’s what all of them aim for.
First, acceptance: stopping counterfactual thinking—shutting down the part of your brain that’s trying to undo the trauma or rationalize why it happened. We stop that. We say, “This is what happened.”
Then comes integration: weaving that trauma into your sense of self and your ongoing story.
And finally, meaning: making meaning or finding a mission from what happened. What have I learned from this? That’s a favourite question my therapist asks: “So what have we learned?”
AIM—Acceptance, Integration, Meaning.
If you examine any evidence-based trauma therapy, they all have some form of AIM. Perhaps there’s a therapy I’m not aware of, but I’m not referring to things that are non-empirical or outside the accepted schools of thought.
If someone says, “I went on a crystal healing retreat,” and it has no AIM component—well, I don’t know how crystals work. That’s not what I do. But are trauma therapies grounded in science? They all include these core elements.
Now, one particular therapy might not work for you. The metaphors may not resonate. The delivery might not land well with your nervous system. However, there is likely another therapy that will work. It’s about calling the person with the recipe.
Jacobsen: How do you overcome, with the help of the “chef,” those internalized voices that are not helpful—so you can regain your authentic voice as a parent?
Koslowitz: That’s an important question. One of the things trauma can rob you of is your sense of self. You start to confuse your trauma adaptations with your identity. You think, “This is just who I am.”
I used to consider myself a determined and driven person. Sometimes, it takes a therapist to ask the question that gets you to see things differently. One of my therapists once said to me—after I had just said, “I’m a driven person”—she asked, “When do you get to be the driver?”
That was a great question.
Jacobsen: That hits the nail on the head. That’s great. I love that.
Koslowitz: Right? Because you are not always going to see those things from within. When you’re inside the maze, it’s hard to know where you’re going. But someone who’s watching from outside the maze can say, “Hey, turn left—that’s a blind alley.” A therapist can do that for you.
Sometimes, therapy is about giving your inner voice an actual voice. Like—who told you that about yourself? Who said you were only valuable if you never made a mistake? Or only lovable if you were always calm?
Sometimes, it’s just a therapist opening the door to say, “That’s one way to handle that problem—but are you aware there are other options?”
And people are often stunned. “What? I can do that?” They’ll say, “I could just tell my friend that what she said hurt my feelings?” That idea never even occurred to them.
Not because they’re not intelligent or self-aware—but because, going back to neuroplasticity, if you’ve rehearsed one way of responding for your whole life, it may not even occur to you that another path exists—until someone helps interrupt the pattern.
And sometimes, your brain is capable of finding that path. In EMDR—Eye Movement Desensitization and Reprocessing—it’s not always the therapist who says, “Here’s a new way to look at it.” It’s your brain that begins to say, “Wait a second… I should have known better.” And then another part of your brain says, “But I was only eight. Eight is young. Maybe I couldn’t have known better.”
That belief begins to evolve into something more realistic, compassionate, and accurate. That is reprocessing.
It’s similar to Internal Family Systems (IFS) therapy. The person’s system often comes up with the answers. The therapist helps guide the process along.
In more traditional approaches, such as Cognitive Processing Therapy, it may be more therapist-directed. The therapist might say something like, “I wonder—at eight years old, could you have known not to believe your stepfather when he said this is a normal game that people play?” Maybe eight-year-olds don’t know that. Could it be?
Every culture has foundational similarities—we’re all the same species, doing the same human stuff. But there are cultural seasonings and icings layered on top.
Jacobsen: What are things to keep in mind about cultural sensitivities and inclusivity of approach when you’re working with someone from a particular culture—someone who has experienced trauma that’s negatively affecting their parenting and making them less effective than they could be?
Koslowitz: First of all, you have to remember that parenting is a form of acculturation. A considerable aspect of parenting involves transmitting cultural truths and wisdom. Too often, we focus on the negatives of culture—the things we want to dismantle or challenge—and forget there are also positives.
There are truths and wisdom about the world that parents want to pass on—what I think of as the inherited wealth of generations. Parents are trying to transmit that legacy.
My dissertation research was based on something called the core cultural assumptions method. The idea is that every culture has a set of core assumptions. And if you try to offer a parenting intervention that doesn’t take those assumptions into account, it simply won’t land well.
So, the first step is to ask people about their cultural assumptions—curiously and respectfully. Every single psychotherapeutic interaction is a cross-cultural interaction because every human being is a culture unto themselves—a culture of one.
So you have to stay curious. Ask: How do things function in this culture? And—before you try to “take down a fence,”you need to understand what that fence is protecting.
There’s a famous quote that says: “Before you take down a fence, find out what it was built to protect.” And that applies deeply to therapy. Sometimes therapists are trained in this very old-school, psychoanalytic idea that we’re going to break down the defences, storm the emotional beaches—”We’re going in.”
Let’s not. Instead, let’s ask, “Why is this defence here?” Then we can ask, “Is there another way to still honour this cultural value in a way that causes less harm?”
Let’s say, for example, someone comes from a family where they were repeatedly fat-shamed. Older relatives made passive-aggressive comments, and now this client feels threatened because they’re bringing their daughter into that environment.
However, there is a deeply rooted cultural value of respecting elders. You don’t just confront your great-aunt directly. You respect your great-aunt.
So the question becomes: Is there a respectful way to communicate a boundary? You are not going to say, “I’ve been in twenty years of eating disorder therapy because of you, so don’t you dare talk to my daughter that way.”
That is not going to work. It’s not culturally appropriate.
Instead, can you say something like, “We’re trying something new with our daughter. We’re focusing on health and happiness and not commenting on appearance.”
That keeps the value of respect intact—but also protects your child. That’s what culturally inclusive, trauma-informed parenting work looks like.
Because that is not honouring the cultural value of respect, so you’re going to feel bad. But at the same time, your anger has a place here. What is the most innovative way to handle that? Is there something you could say to your great-aunt that will honour your experience and your boundaries but also not be read as disrespectful?
We’re not going to take down the system just because it is flawed. That rarely works. Sure, it might be a great adolescent fantasy to bring Alice Cooper to your family holiday party and scream, “We’re not gonna take it anymore!”—but that is not effective long-term.
Jacobsen: Well, that connects with how you’re responding here—because when you’re building the argument for the approach, people reading that will begin to get a sense of what effective therapy, communication, and therapeutic strategy looks like. You are incorporating culture, the individual, and treatments that work—sort of as a package.
Koslowitz: Yes, it takes a trained professional to do that. It takes much work to ask: Is there another way to accomplish this? You completely understand that cultural value is essential. But is there still a way to uphold that value that doesn’t harm you?
Often, there is. And often, when you do that, it’s hard at first. The first time you try it, it might feel impossible. But like we said earlier—because of neuroplasticity—the more you rehearse it, the easier it becomes.
The first time, it’s tough. By the fifteenth time, though, it starts to feel natural. So, if someone is making a passive-aggressive comment about how you’re parenting your kids, you might say, “This is what works for my family.” You say it kindly, respectfully, and leave it there.
Jacobsen: Right. And they may not like it.
Koslowitz: They may say, “You’re not answering my question.” And you might respond, “I love that you love me. I love that you’re curious about this.” You can respond with warmth while still maintaining your boundaries. For example, “Yes, I’m not answering your question about whether my kid is on Ritalin, or a diet, or whatever else.”
Jacobsen: When I used to work in high-stress environments—restaurants, horse farms, construction—seven days a week in some, I had to learn how to respond to those nosy, sly comments. Sometimes I’d say, “I love you too.” That was enough. It can diffuse the situation. That seems to diffuse it with warmth and humour.
Koslowitz: It can. And the bigger idea here is that any therapist who comes in with respect and curiosity—rather than an imperialist attitude of “I am the healer, and I know what is correct”—is going to be more effective. That imperialist mindset does not help.
Instead, come in with: “I wonder why it feels so scary to go to the family holiday party. I wonder why you feel like you have to answer all of your great-aunt’s questions. And I wonder if she’ll feel disrespected if you don’t.” Okay, well—is there a way where she won’t feel disrespected, and you also won’t have to answer those questions?
That kind of approach can be collaborative.
Jacobsen: Are there particular quagmires you encounter, where even though you try to integrate various approaches and understandings, the situation is just inevitably going to be a headache? As a therapist, I cannot imagine that every cross-referenced method is always foolproof.
Koslowitz: Absolutely. There are always times when you mess up. You misread something. You misunderstand something. Especially in psychotherapy—particularly when using a family approach—sometimes you do have to privilege the needs of one person over another. That is part of the complexity.
This means that I could help this parent come to an understanding of how they need to parent their teenager over a long period—but much damage is being done quickly. So, I may have to step in a bit more. I may have to help them get there faster than I ordinarily would, as we are dealing with a teenager who is currently acting out.
There are times in therapy when the idea that we can represent everyone’s interests equally at all times is simply not accurate. Sometimes clocks are ticking—urgent timelines where we must make a decision. I recently had a case like this: a mother was in a real psychiatric crisis. Her psychiatrist wanted to admit her, but she felt this was a crucial time in her kids’ lives and said, “I can’t abandon them.”
As the professionals, we had to say, “This is heading in a dangerous direction.” So we helped her troubleshoot—who could be with the kids, how she might participate in the graduation remotely or at another time—but ultimately, the hospitalization had to happen.
Sometimes, there are these moments when a psychiatric or psychological consideration must be prioritized because real harm could result otherwise. That’s just the reality. Timing can be awful, especially with children. It’s never an excellent time for a mother to have a breakdown—there’s always a child with a need. However, if a meltdown is imminent, all we can do is minimize the harm surrounding it. We should not lie to ourselves and say, “It’ll be fine; just go to the graduation.” That is not always possible.
Jacobsen: That connects with the Convention on the Rights of the Child, not the parent—which implies it’s the responsibility of the parent and the rights of the child.
Koslowitz: Yes, particularly in individualistic cultures, we tend to forget that. I have a core belief: adults are responsible for protecting children. Children should not be protecting adults. Sometimes, we put children in the position of defending themselves when that burden should fall on the adults in their lives.
The more healed people are, the more they can protect their children. Self-care is childcare—on a fundamental level.
Jacobsen: This may be more of a cultural psychology or social psychology comment as well as a question. If people have done that work—whether consciously through therapy or even by accident—they tend to have more emotional and cognitive reserve. They are not constantly stressed or depleted. So, generally speaking, they become more productive and proactive citizens, more engaged and healthy contributors to both social and family life.
So there’s a cascading effect—a series of positive knock-on effects—from even one person doing that inner work. Whether it happens in a structured therapeutic space or as an organic response to life forcing them to confront something they had been avoiding, they eventually come to a healthier state. Even if the process is imperfect, it can still be transformative.
Koslowitz: Yes. That’s the essence of Post-Traumatic Parenting. When your kids reveal your triggers, acknowledging them can help you heal. That moment—when your child’s behaviour triggers something in you—is not just a crisis. It’s also an opportunity. It is not, “Oh no, I’m being triggered just when my kid needs me.” It’s, “This is the moment where healing can happen.”
It is the opportune time to heal. Research shows that the brain—particularly a mother’s brain during matrescence and in the early years of her child’s life—is more neuroplastic. Your brain is already rewiring itself, so it is an excellent opportunity to rewire some of those trauma responses. Your brain is primed to regenerate.
When working with children, it is often easier in some ways because their brains are so neuroplastic. They are constantly forming new connections. It is significantly easier to help a seven-year-old with severe anxiety than a 37-year-old who has been rehearsing that anxiety pattern for 30 years.
Jacobsen: Yes. And not many people are going to throw themselves into something as intense as Navy SEAL training or astronaut training to reprogram their response patterns.
Koslowitz: Exactly. However, parenting is a form of training. It is the boot camp. It is a complete emotional reset for everything: your emotional responses, your trauma reactions, and your regulation skills. Until you’ve felt the intense frustration of, say, a three-year-old who takes off their socks and shoes for the 30th time while the school bus is already honking outside and you’ve got to get other kids ready—you do not know what that’s like. The level of irrationality a small child can present, and the intense rage it can provoke, is unparalleled.
Jacobsen: I would add one more layer to that. North America has made progress on gender parity, but that parenting boot camp is still disproportionately thrust on women. There has been movement forward, absolutely—but in many households, it is still women bearing the brunt.
Koslowitz: Yes, and there’s the additional cultural pressure on women to be nurturing, kind, and calm at all times. So, it becomes a double burden. You are carrying more of the mental load, and you are supposed to smile through it. The cultural expectation is that the mother finds it adorable when her toddler throws their shoes off for the 30th time—even if she’s late and everything is falling apart.
Jacobsen: And that combination—the emotional and cognitive labour of parenting—has become such a political flashpoint in recent years. In many regions, particularly in North America, women are expected to balance the full professional burden of emancipation alongside the domestic and emotional labour still expected of them.
And unlike in many Western European countries, North American women often do not have the same institutional and financial support—such as universal childcare and parental leave. So, the demands are higher, and the support systems are weaker.
Koslowitz: Yes. And then layer in the added awareness around gentle parenting and conscious parenting, which are good in theory but can become yet another way to feel like you are falling short. It becomes a perfect storm for shame—especially for women. All these competing expectations create a setup for self-blame.
Because you’re somehow supposed to—well, you could take that whole Barbie monologue and swap in parenting; you’re supposed to be professional but not care too much about your career. You’re supposed to love your kids but not talk about them all the time. And it’s… okay?
And there is probably that one person in your social circle who, at least on the surface, looks like they are pulling it all off. And then you add social media into the mix—you’re looking at everyone’s best moments, but you’re only experiencing your own worst moments. And somehow, you’re comparing your worst to everyone else’s best.
Jacobsen: Yes. The social media comment—that’s more pronounced for Gen Z, mostly. It’s typically around aesthetics: how do I look, and how do I look in some other beautiful place?
That said, there is a fetishization of parenting on specific social platforms. There are two primary caricatures: one is the “boss babe” in the professional realm, and the other is the “trad wife” in the domestic sphere. That idealized, perfectly curated image of motherhood aligns with the traditional narrative of the wife.
Koslowitz: it is not just a Gen Z phenomenon. Even millennials and Gen X, who mostly use Instagram and not newer platforms, get caught in that. There are so many pressures. The aesthetics of how your home looks, how your body looks, how you talk to your kids, how your playroom looks—or even how their lunchboxes look.
And what about that gray, hyper-minimalist landscape of children’s playrooms? Because some influencers decided that they should all be in neutral tones, such as beige or gray. For three-year-olds! It’s ridiculous.
Jacobsen: Who was that Japanese woman who said everything should “spark joy”?
Koslowitz: Marie Kondo.
Jacobsen: Yes! Marie Kondo. I am unsure if this is apocryphal or not—if it is, I will include that disclaimer—but supposedly after she had her third child, she gave up trying to keep everything perfectly clean. Someone commented on that and said, “This is my mood right now.” It’s a very North American commentary on a Japanese icon.
Koslowitz: But the truth is, kids accumulate stuff. And some of that is developmentally appropriate. Ten-year-olds have their collections. And people are constantly handing children randomly shaped bits of plastic that are not going to fit your playroom’s beige aesthetic.
If you are going to feel bad about yourself every time that happens, and if your kid is in love with something—like some hideous plastic poo figurine that sings a song when you press its belly—then maybe it is time to log off that social media feed.
Especially if your feed is all boss babe aesthetic, gorgeous playroom aesthetic, organic cooking bento box lunches that look like Sleeping Beauty—whatever, and if you have all of those in your feed, all they do is feed your perfectionism. Telling you: you’re a bad mom. You’re a bad mom.
So maybe—going back to Marie Kondo—if that person’s feed isn’t sparking joy, perhaps stop following it.
Jacobsen: Philip Zimbardo, before he passed, talked about how we live in societies in transition.
So, there’s this whole commentary about men in crisis—blah blah blah, but what he was more getting at was the idea that when society is in transition, parenting becomes a much more plural affair—it has to meet children where they are, societally.
We’re seeing a wider acceptance of single parents, single moms, single dads, gay marriages, gay parenting, and so on. I would also appreciate your commentary on some of those aspects.
Because traditionally, the single mom was divorced, gave up her educational or professional life for the kids and the husband—and now she’s divorced. She hasn’t had the time to retrain, and she’s having to take jobs that practically guarantee poverty. The man may or may not—most often not—pay child support.
And so, you have this context of effective parenting. Not every society is entirely on board with this from a cultural sensitivity perspective, but much of global culture has been moving in that direction. It’s bumpy and fragmented, yes, but it’s moving.
I’m currently in Reykjavik conducting fieldwork on gender parity. It’s been number one in the world for fifteen years straight—a quarter of a century now. So it’s kind of at the heart of things. The only contradictory point I’ve found regarding Iceland’s comprehensive gender parity is that few women I know enjoy being cold all the time.
In North America, there is a broader acceptance of various family styles and family formations. If we’re thinking of two parents, we’re thinking of gay marriage—so lesbian and gay men parenting. We’re also thinking of trans parents and single parents. And particularly, we’re seeing more economic emancipation of women.
With that, we expect to see a wider acceptance of these realities over time. So, “effective parenting” is a broad term—and it must take into account broader cultural contexts. Are there specific considerations we need to take into account at the family level when dealing with one parent or non-heteronormative parents?
Koslowitz: There are a few things to think about. First of all, parenting is something that’s meant to be done more communally. We’re wired to parent in groups—not to do it all by ourselves. So if you’re a single parent—whether that’s by choice or by circumstance—obviously, that’s going to be a little bit harder because there’s only one person to carry what can be a heavy load.
In those situations, it’s about choosing family—figuring out who your people are. Who’s in your neighbourhood? Perhaps it’s different people in the same building who share specific parenting responsibilities, such as “I’ll watch the kids on Tuesday, you watch them on Wednesday.”
There are ways to find support even when you don’t have a natural village—meaning you’re not living near lots of great aunts, grandmas, or other family members who can help out. Then we have to create our villages. That’s just an acknowledgment that parenting is not meant to be a solo task. It’s a difficult task to carry on your own.
So, who else can help carry that? Who are the people? Because there are people. If you look around, you can find them—because you can be their people too.
I remember when I was a grad student and didn’t have a budget for anything. A few of my friends were in the same boat—we were all parents, all at the beginning of our careers, with little kids and no budget. We figured out these ways: “I’ll take all the kids today if you take all the kids tomorrow.” That way, I could get some focused work done, and then she could. And honestly, it’s as easy to entertain four kids as it is to engage two—sometimes easier.
Or: “I’m going to the grocery store—can I take everyone’s list, load everyone’s boxes into my car this week, and you’ll do it next week?” The idea is that’s how it always was supposed to be. Parenting was always meant to be a shared experience. Sometimes, we have to look beyond that individualistic cultural assumption and ask for help, ask for support—and also be that help and support because that helps us, too.
When you give kindness, you feel the world is a kinder place. Looking outside yourself for support can be super helpful. It’s not necessary to have a need. And some humans will be there for that need. That’s one thing. The other thing I want to talk about is this: your biological plumbing doesn’t matter when it comes to being an attachment figure. Yes, the attachment literature is super gendered because Bowlby and Winnicott were parents and psychologists in the 1950s when everything was quite gendered.
However, it doesn’t matter what your plumbing is like. If you are the person providing the Four S’s of attachment to a child, you are an attachment figure. We say “mom” in the classical literature as a shortcut for “primary attachment figure.”But mom doesn’t have to be that. Dad can be the primary attachment figure. Grandma can be. Two dads can be.
Jacobsen: That must be why gangs and cartels work. This is their new family.
Koslowitz: Yes. The attachment system—people often talk about it as if it’s this fragile thing, that if you don’t have that specific maternal attachment object, then your attachment is doomed. But if you have a caregiver who is consistently providing the Four S’s—someone who is there, who is present, who co-regulates with you—that’s what you need.
So this idea that if you’re not co-sleeping with mom until you’re four years old, living on a farm where she’s feeding you produce made with her own hands—you’re not attaching properly—is misleading. It is perfectly okay for a child to have a couple of attachment figures as long as those people are loving, stable, and kind presences in their life.
High-quality daycare, where the teacher remains the same every day and where it’s predictable, stable, loving, and kind, is unlikely to harm attachment. The attachment system is designed to accommodate multiple users. It’s designed to know: these are my attachment figures, these are my people. So when we mysticize this “mother figure” concept and make it exclusively gendered, we lose sight of the fact that anyone who is that stable presence in a child’s life—providing the Four S’s—can be the primary attachment figure.
This is not a biological thing. This is a psychological thing. The question is: am I providing this or not? And anyone can learn how.
I had this experience working with a family where the mom had a terminal cancer diagnosis. Many of her sisters—so the aunts—were all saying, “Which one of us is taking the kids?” But the question was never: “How do we support Dad in raising his children?” The kids were about to lose their mother, and no one even thought to ask how the father could be supported in becoming their primary attachment figure.
And when I raised that question—”I wonder if, instead of deciding who gets the ‘Best Mother Replacement’ crown, we could ask how to help Dad remain the primary attachment figure”—the entire conversation changed. That was ultimately the decision that was made.
Dad thought it over and realized: “Wait a minute, I’m their father. There’s no reason why I can’t do this.” Some of the objections were things like: “Well, he doesn’t know how to cook.” Okay—but if you can read, you can cook. You don’t need female plumbing to cook. And there’s Uber Eats. And if this extended family is truly so supportive, they can pitch in with meals. There are many ways to get food into children. Then it was: “What else don’t you know how to do, Dad?”And we just worked through it from there.
So now you will be the one who does this, that, and the other thing. Can you do that? Are you capable of remembering that bath night should be every other night? Does that homework need to be done? Are you capable of doing that? It was so interesting how, in that family system, the question had not even been raised: “How do we support Dad?” The question was, “Which aunt is taking the kids?” It did not even occur to them.
I had a similar experience that I wrote about in my book. One of my children’s camp forms automatically populated “Mother’s cell” as the emergency contact. I called the camp office and said, “I need you to undo this because my husband is the emergency contact—I’m frequently with patients, and my phone is off.”
The secretary, rather than hearing me out, got judgmental. She asked, “What kind of a mother doesn’t want to be the first one informed if her child is in a medical emergency?”
Thankfully, I’ve taught people how to deal with bullies, and I no longer have much self-doubt about my love for my kids. There was a time when I was told that being a career woman meant I didn’t love my kids as much as a stay-at-home mom. But I said to her, “A mom who wants her kids to survive.” Because if there’s a medical emergency and you call my cell—which is off—that would be a bad thing.
Then it turned out the whole reason she was bullying me was because she did not know how to change the form. And I thought, “So you’re going to make me question all my life choices because you need a computer programmer?” That was the real issue—not sociology, not parenting philosophy—just someone needing tech support.
Jacobsen: I know what some of your go-tos are going to be, but let’s see if you surprise me. As a psychologist, what are your favourite quotes—on psychology or parenting as a whole?
Koslowitz: Let me put some thought into that. Obviously, as a psychologist, I love the quote: “Between stimulus and response, there is a pause. In that pause lies your humanity.” It’s often attributed to Viktor Frankl, though there’s some debate about that. Still, it’s a beautiful and powerful idea.
Another quote I love for my own life is from Eleanor Roosevelt: “No one can make you feel inferior without your consent.” My follow-up is: So stop consenting. That applies in so many situations.
On social media, if some influencer’s curated reel is making you feel inadequate about your life choices, stop following her. If someone is questioning your decision to parent in a gentle, responsive way and making you feel judged—do not consent to feeling judged.
And finally, there’s that Winnicott quote: “Even the beneficial is toxic in excess.” The idea that trying to be perfect is toxic—it is one of the worst things you can do to yourself.
Between those three quotes, I can reset my mindset and ground myself again. I remind myself that I don’t have to be perfect. That would be toxic.
Jacobsen: Robyn, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate your expertise, and it was nice to meet you.
Koslowitz: Same here. I enjoyed our conversation.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/15
Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content.
WalletHub analyst Chip Lupo breaks down the 2025 rankings of U.S. cities for recreation, highlighting how entertainment access, park quality, affordability, and weather shape each city’s score. Cities like Las Vegas and Orlando lead the way, while suburbs lag. Recreational access links directly to public health and financial savings.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by prolific WalletHub analyst Chip Lupo to discuss their latest ranking of the best and worst U.S. cities for recreation.
One of the key takeaways is that being active not only benefits personal health but can also lead to significant financial savings—WalletHub notes that maintaining a healthy weight through exercise can save people nearly $1,900 in health care costs annually.
When looking at the 2025 rankings, the top five cities for recreation are:
- Las Vegas, NV
- Cincinnati, OH
- Orlando, FL
- Atlanta, GA
- Tampa, FL
These cities were evaluated across four critical dimensions:
- Entertainment & recreational facilities
- Costs
- Quality of parks
- Weather
What stood out to you in this survey and analysis?
Chip Lupo: It is interesting because, for the most part, these cities are already known as popular travel destinations. However, you would not necessarily expect parks and other recreational amenities to be a significant part of their appeal.
What is even more intriguing is that each of the top five cities had strengths and weaknesses across the four dimensions WalletHub used for ranking.
All five cities ranked in the top 15 for entertainment and recreational facilities. That includes metrics like the number of attractions, music venues, coffee shops, public beaches, tennis courts, swimming pools, and more. However, not all of them did well across the board.
For example:
- Atlanta ranked 61st in cost, which dragged down its overall score.
- Cincinnati ranked 58th in weather, which makes sense given its cold winters.
- Orlando ranked 57th in quality of parks, suggesting that while the city offers an abundance of recreational facilities, many of them may not be in the best condition.
Jacobsen: What about long-term investments and cost savings—how do these factor into the rankings?
Lupo: The rankings recognize that accessible recreation yields long-term financial benefits through improved public health. The methodology includes cost-related factors as one of the four dimensions. However, detailed sub-rankings (like exact position in cost or park quality for each city) are not publicly broken out.
Additionally, WalletHub highlights that Buffalo, NY, leads the nation in spending on parks per capita, ranking 11.5 times higher than the lowest-ranked city—a noteworthy data point on municipal investments in public recreation. So you are not putting so much money into one entity while another agency suffers.
Jacobsen: How much of these decisions are intentional, aimed at bringing more recreation into a city? Moreover, how much more are like byproducts—natural outcomes of evolving politics, public needs, and long-term urban development?
Lupo: Well, it is a combination of both. A lot of the cities in the top rankings are what we might call “boom towns”—they have seen rapid growth, especially in the last 30 years or so.
Jacobsen: “Boom towns”? What does that mean in American lingo?
Lupo: “Boom towns” are smaller cities or metro areas that experience sudden population and economic growth. You may have seen it in places like Seattle. About 30–35 years ago, Seattle was more of a mid-sized, modestly bustling city. However, then people started moving there in droves, and now it is a central metropolitan area.
So that is what we mean—once-small cities that experience a population surge due to factors like job opportunities, housing, and lifestyle, and then quickly expand into sprawling metro areas.
To keep that momentum and retain new residents, city leaders tend to focus on quality of life improvements. One of the first things they typically invest in is parks and recreational infrastructure. Making a city more resident-friendly and livable often starts with upgrading these kinds of amenities.
Jacobsen: Now let us look at the other end of the spectrum—the bottom-ranked cities. How does a city end up being so neglectful of recreation? Moreover, even among these lower-ranked cities, what are some universal elements we still see in American recreation?
Lupo: That is a fair question. First, it is worth noting that recreation is still valued in every U.S. city. There is a kind of baseline commitment to public recreation that most municipalities maintain—even if funding is tight.
Now, what is particularly interesting about the bottom five or bottom ten cities is that many of them are suburbs of larger metropolitan areas. For instance:
- Newark and Jersey City, while having their challenges, are right next to New York City. Residents seeking significant recreational or cultural experiences are likely to venture into Manhattan.
- Irving, Texas, is a suburb of Dallas, which is already a well-known recreational hub.
- Chula Vista, just outside San Diego, is in a similar position.
When you are that close to a significant city with world-class attractions, there is often less pressure on the suburb to invest heavily in things like festivals, stadiums, or large park systems, simply because residents already have access to those amenities nearby.
It is not that these suburban cities are neglecting recreation altogether. Still, there tends to be less local investment in large-scale experiences, since people often head into the nearby metro area.
Jacobsen: What about the sources used in this study? Why were they chosen, and why did the rankings come out the way they did this year?
Lupo: Great questions. WalletHub’s analysis pulls from a range of public data sources, including:
- U.S. Census Bureau
- Bureau of Labour Statistics
- Trust for Public Land
- Yelp and TripAdvisor
- National Weather Service
- U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development
These sources help provide a broad, data-driven view across the four ranking dimensions: entertainment & recreation facilities, costs, quality of parks, and weather. This year, the methodology stayed largely consistent. Still, changes in population trends, spending, weather events, or economic shifts can all influence how a city ranks year to year.
As cities grow or shift their priorities, their recreation infrastructure either keeps pace—or it does not. That dynamic plays a significant role in how the rankings change over time.
Jacobsen: Let us go back to the sources. You mentioned a few already, but what were the primary ones used for the study?
Lupo: The first one was the U.S. Census Bureau, which we used to gather population and demographic information, especially around shifts in city populations. Then there is the Council for Community and Economic Research, which tracks things like public funding: how much money is being allocated to parks and recreation versus other public needs.
We also used Yelp and TripAdvisor, which are travel and review platforms. They help us evaluate whether a city is considered recreation- and travel-friendly by everyday users. As for Trust for Public Land, that is one you may not be as familiar with—it is a nonprofit that provides data on park access and green space equity across the U.S.
Finally, we incorporated WalletHub’s research and methodology, which complements the public data and helps balance the broader picture.
Jacobsen: And the other question I had was about how you divvied up the overall score. How do you weigh these various categories to get the final composite ranking?
Lupo: Ah, you are talking about weighting—yes. So we score everything out of 100 total points, and each of the four dimensions contributes a share of that:
- Entertainment & Recreational Facilities: This category received the most significant weight because it has the most available metrics. We are talking about everything from the number of hiking trails and fishing spots to amusement parks, pool halls, sports venues, restaurants, food festivals, and recreational centers. People care about variety and access when it comes to recreation, especially during the summer.
- Costs: This was the second most heavily weighted category. Again, because there are numerous sub-metrics here, like:
- Average fitness club fees
- Restaurant meal and food prices
- Alcoholic beverage prices
- Movie ticket costs
- General affordability
- Quality of Parks: This had fewer sub-metrics and therefore received less weight.
- Weather: This had the lowest weight, only 10 points out of 100. That is because it was measured using a single metric: ideal weather conditions, which is relatively subjective and varies less dramatically year-to-year across most U.S. cities.
So it came down to the density of measurable data. Entertainment and cost offered more robust metrics, so they got more weight in the final scoring.
Lupo: No problem at all, Scott—as always.
Jacobsen: Thanks so much. Take care!
Lupo: You too.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/13
Christopher Louis is a Los Angeles–based international dating and relationship coach and the founder of Dating Intelligence. As host of the Dating Intelligence Podcast, Louis draws on intuition and lived experience to guide clients toward authentic selves and meaningful romantic connections.
In this insightful conversation, international dating coach and Dating Intelligence Podcast host Christopher Louis speaks with Scott Douglas Jacobsen about the emotional complexity of infidelity. Louis shares expert perspectives on trust, betrayal, attachment styles, and how individuals and couples can heal after cheating occurs. He discusses the psychological and evolutionary dimensions of infidelity, the gendered nuances in how it’s perceived, and why communication and accountability are key to recovery. Through personal anecdotes and client experiences, Louis emphasizes that while cheating often stems from unmet emotional needs, relationships can recover—with honesty, boundaries, and a commitment to change.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, once again, we’re here with the fantastic Christopher Louis. We’re going to talk about a complex subject—one that I think many people have experienced, or at least know someone who has. Infidelity. It’s something that, unfortunately, many people go through. In your practice—one of your businesses—people often come to you during these painful circumstances. So, let’s begin there. What do you define as an “unfortunate circumstance,” and how do you position yourself as a steady, guiding presence for someone working through that process?
Christopher Louis: Hi, Scott. Yes, today’s topic is infidelity, and it’s a big one. It’s almost taboo in many relationships. Some people would rather not know, and others, when they do find out, react with overwhelming emotions—anger, betrayal, sadness. But it’s a reality that many people face, and that’s what we’re going to discuss today.
Jacobsen: Let’s start historically. How was infidelity understood in prior generations—say, in the early 20th century or even before that? Has our understanding changed over time?
Louis: That’s a great question. Historically, infidelity has always been a serious issue, but the way society responds to it has changed. In earlier generations—especially before the 20th century—infidelity was often judged more harshly for women than for men. In many cultures, a man’s unfaithfulness was more socially tolerated. At the same time, a woman’s could lead to severe consequences, including social ostracism or worse. In modern times, we have more gender equity in how infidelity is perceived and handled. However, it’s still a harrowing experience. Whether in the past or now, the emotional impact tends to follow the same core narrative: betrayal, broken trust, and the question of what comes next.
Jacobsen: You mentioned earlier about men and the evolutionary lens some people use to explain infidelity. Can you unpack that a bit?
Louis: Sure. There’s an evolutionary psychology perspective that suggests men may have evolved with a predisposition to seek multiple partners, primarily for reproductive purposes. The basic idea is that, biologically, males can father many children in a short time, whereas females have a longer reproductive investment. This has led some to argue that men may have a natural inclination to seek variety. But we have to be very careful with this. Just because a behaviour has evolutionary roots doesn’t mean it’s justified or acceptable in modern relationships. We’re not lions. We’re human beings with the ability to make choices based on ethics, empathy, and mutual respect. So while biology may explain some impulses, infidelity is much more often about emotional needs not being met—feeling unseen, undervalued, or disconnected from one’s partner.
Jacobsen: So it’s not just about sex—it’s also about validation and emotional connection?
Louis: Exactly. In my experience, one of the most common drivers of infidelity is the desire for validation. When someone feels ignored or emotionally distant in their relationship, attention from someone else can feel intoxicating. It’s not always about physical desire—it’s often about being seen, heard, and appreciated. Of course, that doesn’t excuse the behaviour. But understanding the why helps us address the root of the issue—whether that’s healing the relationship or helping someone move on more healthily.
Jacobsen: So, when someone first discovers infidelity and comes to you, what does that initial phase look like? How do you help them get to a calmer, more reflective state where real conversation can begin?
Louis: The first step is always to allow space for the emotional reaction—whether it’s anger, grief, confusion, or shock. There’s no rushing that. Once they begin to stabilize emotionally, we can start a more thoughtful conversation about what happened, what it means to them, and what they want moving forward. Sometimes that means helping couples have honest discussions about their relationship. Other times, it’s supporting someone individually through the grieving process and into a place of clarity and self-worth.
So, first and foremost, once a person finds out about infidelity, they need to acknowledge their emotions, because they’re going to run hot. You’re going to feel a wide range of emotions: anger, sadness, confusion, and hurt. That emotional response is natural. The most essential thing in the beginning is to recognize and validate those feelings. You need to understand why you’re feeling the way you are before you’re able to return to your partner and have a mature, communicative conversation about the “how” and the “why” of what happened.
The next step is to decide what you want to do moving forward. Consider your options. Do you want to try to repair the relationship, or do you feel it’s best to move on? Regardless of what you choose, a clear conversation needs to happen with your partner. You’ll need to talk openly about what happened, how it happened, and why it happened, to determine the path forward.
A key part of that process is directly addressing the infidelity. Whether you found out by accident, caught them in the act, or heard it from someone else, the reality is—you’ll have to confront your partner. And when you do, you have to try to remain calm, speak clearly, and express your feelings of hurt and betrayal constructively.
Now here’s the caveat: your partner may be the wild card in this situation. You don’t know how they’ll respond, especially if they were caught unexpectedly or if it came through hearsay. Their emotional reaction might vary, and it can influence how the conversation goes.
One thing I often say—especially when I’m speaking with women—is this: if a man cheats and gives you a story, whether it’s true or not, he will usually stick to that story. That’s a defence mechanism. So it becomes your responsibility to decide: do you believe that story? And the way to answer that is not just based on the words themselves, but on his behaviour. Look at how he communicates—his body language, tone, and emotional presence. Does it align with what he’s saying?
I coach my clients to pay attention to that alignment. If your partner is sincere, the story and the behaviour will generally match. If not, there may be more to uncover. The goal is not to attack, but to seek clarity so that you can make informed decisions.
And finally, let’s not overlook the emotional impact on the person who’s been cheated on. Infidelity isn’t just a betrayal of trust—it’s a direct hit to that person’s dignity and sense of self-worth. It can shake their identity, their confidence, and their belief in love or loyalty. Part of the healing process must include rebuilding that self-respect and reaffirming one’s value, regardless of the outcome of the relationship.
Jacobsen: How do you recommend individuals, who are in that moment, maintain their dignity when having what may be a very confrontational conversation with the partner who cheated?
Louis: As far as dignity goes, I believe it becomes a more central issue when cheating happens more than once, say, a second or third time. That’s when dignity comes into play. The first time it happens, people often try to assess whether it was a genuine mistake. Sometimes, couples can move forward, rebuild trust, and even come out stronger than before—provided both parties are committed to that process.
But when it happens repeatedly, some individuals may begin to lose themselves in the relationship. They might give their partner the benefit of the doubt, not because they genuinely believe them, but because they want to avoid conflict or deny the reality of the betrayal. That’s when dependency—sometimes even emotional codependency—can creep in. You end up prioritizing the relationship over your self-worth, telling yourself, “I just don’t want this to happen again.” Still, in the process, you’re being walked over.
So yes, dignity matters a lot—not just in the case of infidelity, but also in other unhealthy relationship dynamics. Whether it’s emotional manipulation, constant arguing, controlling behaviour, or abuse, it’s all part of the same question: Where is your dignity in this relationship?
At some point, you have to put your foot down and ask yourself: Do I want to keep accepting this behaviour? That’s where reclaiming dignity begins. It’s about drawing boundaries, recognizing patterns, and honouring your own emotional and psychological needs.
Now, when it comes to cheating specifically, before focusing solely on dignity, the first step is to have a calm and honest conversation. Try to understand why the person did what they did. But—and this is crucial—do not blame yourself. Never say, “Well, I pushed you to do this,” or “This is my fault because I wasn’t enough.” That’s simply not true.
If someone chooses to cheat, that’s their decision. It’s not justified by unmet needs or a lack of attention. If there was a problem in the relationship, the mature response is to communicate, not to betray your partner.
If your partner says something like, “You weren’t giving me enough attention,” or “I felt neglected,” that’s not an excuse. If they truly felt that way, they should have had an open conversation with you: “I feel disconnected,” or “We haven’t been spending enough time together,” or “I miss us.” Those are valid concerns, but they should be communicated, not acted out through infidelity.
These are valid reasons to have a conversation about fixing things before going out and seeking something else on the side. So first and foremost, communication is key. It’s about addressing what’s going on in the relationship before it reaches the point of infidelity.
Now, if it does reach that point—if you discover your partner has cheated—what I often tell people, especially women, is this: you need to ask your partner specific direct questions to help determine whether they’re telling the truth. Because unless the person comes out and says, “Yes, you caught me. I did cheat. I’m sorry,”—which does happen, but not often—there’s a good chance they’ll deny it. I’d say in about 75% of cases, they’ll try to deflect or deny. They might say things like, “I don’t know what you’re talking about,” or “I promise I didn’t do that,” even if they did.
Jacobsen: So, how often would you say people take accountability when they’ve cheated?
Louis: It depends a lot on the level of communication in the relationship. In couples who don’t communicate well—where they’re living almost parallel lives without emotional intimacy—accountability is rare. If there’s a controlling partner involved, that person might try to dominate the conversation or manipulate the situation, whether they’ve cheated or not. In those cases, even being caught red-handed might not lead to actual ownership or remorse.
Jacobsen: Are there patterns that repeat among people who cheat?
Louis: Yes. I’ll be honest—I’ve been there myself. I had a history of cheating when I was younger. I’m not proud of it, but I’ve learned from it. And yes, people often say, “Once a cheater, always a cheater.” That’s the saying, right?
But here’s what changed for me. About 15 years ago, I was dating a woman for around six months. Things were okay, but then I met someone else who made me stop and think. I realized I liked this new person, and instead of repeating old patterns, I chose to do something different.
I went to the woman I was dating and told her the truth. I said, “I think I’ve met someone I might want to pursue a relationship with. I need to end this respectfully instead of cheating on you.” She was hurt, of course, but she appreciated the honesty. We ended things, and I started dating the new person.
Jacobsen: Wow.
Louis: The important thing is this: people can change. Growth is possible. But it starts with self-awareness, accountability, and the willingness to break harmful patterns before they do more damage.
Yeah. So that woman didn’t become my wife—but here’s the funny part, Scott. Seventeen years later, I’m still connected to that chapter of my life. I ended up marrying the other woman, and we had a great marriage. We communicated very well, we built a strong relationship, and even though we eventually separated, it was a very respectful and mutual breakup. She’s still my best friend. She’s the mother of my kids. We co-parent and get along well.
But here’s where it gets interesting—the woman I broke up with back then, before I started dating my now ex-wife? We reconnected five months after my separation. We’ve now been together for eight years.
So the woman I once thought wasn’t right for me—where I made the mature decision not to cheat, to break up respectfully because I thought I’d met someone else—ended up becoming the person I’m with today. Back then, we just weren’t ready. Our timing was off. And now, years later, our paths crossed again, and it turns out we’re perfectly aligned.
It’s a funny story, but it taught me something huge: that honesty and communication do work. That moment was a turning point for me. From that point on, I decided that if I ever started to feel tempted or disconnected again, I’d bring it up before anything unhealthy could happen.
And I still do that. Whenever I feel those familiar signs—like I’m starting to look around, starting to get restless—I say it. I tell my partner, “Look, I’m starting to feel something. I’m starting to drift mentally.” And you know what? They usually respond with, “Okay, let’s talk about it.” And we do. I’ll say, “I feel like I’m not getting enough attention,” or “We haven’t had enough quality time,” or “You’ve been busy and we haven’t connected.”
Once we talk it through, those feelings usually calm right back down. I feel grounded again. The temptation fades. All it took was an honest conversation.
Especially for men, that’s often what it comes down to—we don’t feel seen. And that, hands down, is probably the number one reason why men cheat. We’re craving attention or emotional connection, and instead of expressing that, some of us act out.
Jacobsen: What about the idea that men and women perceive different actions as cheating? Is there a difference in how they define infidelity?
Louis: That’s a great point. You’re right—there often is a difference in perception between genders. For example, one partner might think, “I was just texting someone,” or, “It was only emotional,” and not consider it cheating, while the other partner does. So yes, there’s often a disconnect in how cheating is defined.
Gender can play a role in that. Some studies suggest that men may be more likely to view physical acts as cheating. At the same time, women may be more impacted by emotional connection. That’s not universal, of course, but it’s a common trend.
That’s why, from the start of any relationship, it’s crucial to define boundaries clearly. What does cheating look like to you? What are the emotional or behavioural limits that, if crossed, would damage trust? Without that clarity, couples often find themselves in situations where one person feels betrayed. At the same time, the other doesn’t even realize they’ve crossed a line.
Well, you know, cheating means different things to different people. For some men, for example—and forgive me for generalizing here—some insecurities come into play. A lot depends on the dynamics of the relationship.
Let’s say a man identifies as more dominant or protective—he might interpret certain behaviours as cheating, even if they’re relatively innocent. For instance, if his partner is talking to another man for what he considers “too long,” or gives someone a hug that lasts just a little longer than usual, he might perceive that as a form of betrayal. In his mind, it might not be physical cheating. However, it’s still seen as emotional disloyalty or disrespect—and sometimes, that carries the same weight.
On the other hand, a woman might react strongly if her partner is caught looking at another woman or showing attention elsewhere. Again, it’s not always about the act itself—it’s about the intent, the context, and the emotional boundary. So there’s this whole spectrum of what’s considered cheating, and it varies based on personal insecurities, trust levels, and the agreement within the relationship.
I’m on the opposite end of the spectrum. My partner and I are very secure in our relationship. I can sit next to a woman, hug her, have a long conversation, and there’s no jealousy or suspicion—because we’ve built a foundation of trust. But that kind of security takes time, transparency, and mutual respect to develop.
Now, when it comes to why people cheat, again, the core reason usually comes down to not getting enough attention or emotional fulfillment. It’s often about the need for validation. Men tend to cheat more for physical reasons, while women are usually drawn into emotional connections. That’s not a strict rule, but it’s a familiar pattern. A woman may cheat after developing a deeper emotional bond with someone who makes her feel heard or understood—something she might not be getting at home.
Jacobsen: How often do people decide to stay and work things out after infidelity? Let’s start with the one-time case, where it’s seen as an error, followed by forgiveness and an attempt to reconcile.
Louis: In those cases—especially in long-term relationships—it’s much more common to try to work things out. Suppose the relationship has a solid foundation, and the cheating was a one-off. In that case, many couples do go through a reconciliation process. Now, the dynamic is very different if the relationship is new—say, less than six months in—and they haven’t even fully defined what the relationship is. That’s a gray area.
But let’s focus on long-term relationships. When it’s a one-time mistake, what I always tell people—particularly women—is this: if a man is genuinely sorry, you’ll see it not just in his words but in his behaviour. The attention he gives you will feel real. He won’t just say he’s sorry—he’ll show it in how he re-engages with you, how he listens, how present he is.
Be cautious, however. Some people respond to guilt by going overboard—they start “love bombing,” constantly showering affection or gifts in an almost artificial way. That can feel overwhelming and performative. A truly remorseful person tends to be more grounded. They apologize, yes, but they also take responsibility and change their behaviour without turning it into a performance.
When someone cheats and wants to repair the relationship, they must show up repeatedly. Because at that point, trust has been broken. It doesn’t matter if it was one time or ten times—trust is lost. And the only way to rebuild it is by consistently demonstrating that you’re present, accountable, and committed to rebuilding what was damaged.
That means being more attentive, more caring, more honest, and more communicative. It’s not about grand gestures—it’sabout consistency over time. Some women will say, “Well, he’s trying, but I still don’t believe him.” And in those cases, I sometimes say—that might be on you now.
What I mean by that is this: if you’ve decided to forgive your partner and stay in the relationship. However, you’re still holding the betrayal over their head every day. It’s no longer just about what they did—it becomes about how you’re choosing to handle it.
You always have a choice. If you can’t forgive or you’re not ready, that’s okay. But then, be honest. Say, “I need time. I’mnot ready to move forward yet.” Maybe you need space. Perhaps a break is necessary. But don’t say “I forgive you” and then continue punishing your partner emotionally for the following year. That’s not healing—it’s resentment.
And yes, healing takes time. If it’s been a few weeks or even a couple of months and you’re still working through it—that’s completely normal. In that case, your partner should ask, “What do you need to know? What questions do youhave?” That’s part of the process.
But if it’s been a year, and you’re still using the cheating as a reason to withhold affection or intimacy, saying things like, “I can’t have sex with you because of what happened a year ago.” You need to take a deeper look inward. At that point, therapy might be necessary—either as a couple or individually—because the relationship isn’t moving forward. And the reality is: if you haven’t truly forgiven them, you’ll likely never fully trust them again.
Jacobsen: What do you think is the bigger, more profound message about infidelity? What does it mean to us? Why does it impact us so profoundly? What’s the invisible golden thread that gets broken?
Louis: At its core, infidelity breaks the most sacred part of a relationship: trust. That’s the foundation. You’ve made a commitment—spoken or unspoken—that we’re in this together, that I choose you, and you choose me. When someone steps outside of that without mutual agreement—unless you’re in an open relationship and it’s discussed—it’s a breach of that bond.
It’s not just about sex. It’s about the emotional safety, the loyalty, and the deep understanding that your heart is safe with another person. When that’s violated, it creates emotional chaos. That “golden thread,” as you called it, is the trust that ties everything else together. Once it’s broken, everything else starts to unravel unless both people are committed to doing the hard work of repairing it.
Right. If you’ve communicated that you’re in a monogamous relationship, then stepping outside of that without consent is cheating. Now, if you’ve agreed on something different—like polyamory, an open relationship, or a solo partnership—that’s a different conversation entirely. But suppose there’s been no such discussion, and both people believe they’re exclusive. In that case, any breach of that is a serious violation of trust.
And yes, those conversations can be difficult. Asking, “What are we?” or, “Are we exclusive?” can feel awkward, but they’re necessary. If both partners say, “I only want to be with you,” then the expectation is set. And maintaining that commitment is hard work. It takes effort, communication, and most importantly, trust.
Trust is what allows you to feel safe even when you’re not together 24/7. If your partner goes out with friends or spends time apart from you, that should be okay, because you trust who they are and how they show up in the relationship. That’s a mature and healthy dynamic. It’s not about control—it’s about confidence, mutual respect, and independence within a secure bond.
Jacobsen: What about people who are serial cheaters? Or cases where forgiveness just really isn’t on the table anymore?
Louis: You mean when someone says up front, “If you ever cheat on me, I’m gone,” and then the partner cheats anyway?
Jacobsen: They’ve communicated it clearly in advance, and now that boundary has been crossed.
Louis: If someone has communicated their boundary, “Cheating is a dealbreaker. If it happens, I’m out,”—then I think it’s entirely fair for them to walk away without reconsideration. That expectation was made clear. There should be no “but what if…” or “can’t we talk about it?” If you knew the terms and still violated them, then you also accept the consequences.
Now, in those cases, if someone cheats and the other person walks, there’s no blame to place. That person protected their boundary, and I respect that.
But then there’s another kind of pattern—the serial cheater. Someone who keeps betraying trust over and over again. In those relationships, I often find that the partner being cheated on is either looking the other way or trapped in a cycle of emotional insecurity.
And let’s be honest: that’s not love—it’s dysfunction. It usually comes down to attachment style. Someone who tolerates repeated betrayal often has an anxious or insecure attachment, where their fear of abandonment outweighs their sense of self-worth. That dynamic allows the serial cheater to continue manipulating or using them, and it becomes a toxic cycle.
So in those cases, the healing doesn’t just need to happen for the cheater—it needs to happen for the person staying. They need to ask themselves: “Why am I still accepting this?” Because cheating isn’t just about sex—it’s about respect, boundaries, and emotional safety.
When we’re talking about insecure attachment, it’s often rooted in either anxious or fearful-avoidant styles. These individuals tend to feel deeply insecure in their relationships. They usually let their partner take control and become more dominant. They become the “yes ma’am” or “yes sir” type—constantly trying to please, often at the cost of their self-respect and boundaries.
Jacobsen: What about the opposite case? When forgiveness happens easily, even after cheating? Some people seem to glaze over it, move on quickly, and don’t seem deeply affected. How do you make sense of that?
Louis: That’s a great question. I had a client once…” [Laughing] But let’s be honest—I’ll just own it.
I’ve had situations in the past where I was in relationships with women who came to me honestly and admitted, “I cheated on you.” They came home, told me directly, and owned up to it. In those cases, I took a deep breath and said, “Okay, let’s have a conversation.” And after we talked about it, I forgave them. They never did it again.
Why? Because it was a one-off mistake. And we all make mistakes. What stood out to me was that they didn’t try to hide it, they didn’t let it fester. They came to me immediately. That kind of honesty goes a long way in rebuilding trust.
Now, I had always told my partners from the beginning, “If something ever happens, just come to me. I won’t be a hypocrite. I’ll hear you out before I make any decisions.” And in both of those cases, we had open, honest conversations, and we continued the relationships for years afterward, with no further issues. I never held it over them, never judged them, never brought it up again.
So yes, forgiveness can happen quickly—if you’re in a relationship built on strong communication, emotional maturity, and mutual respect. In those cases, it’s less about the act itself and more about the response. Did they take accountability? Were they honest? Did they show remorse? Suppose all those are present, and you feel the foundation is still solid. In that case, it’s possible to forgive, move forward, and never look back.
That’s the difference. Forgiveness becomes easier when the relationship context supports it. When there’s emotional intelligence, transparency, and authentic connection, even a difficult moment like infidelity doesn’t have to be the end. It can be a turning point—if both people are willing to grow from it.
Because, once again, everyone makes mistakes.
Jacobsen: But do you notice similar patterns when comparing heterosexual couples to gay couples—or, say, partnerships that involve more than two people, like polyamorous relationships or “throuples”? Do those dynamics follow similar patterns? Or do entirely new interactions arise?
Louis: That’s an excellent question. And the answer is yes and no. Some patterns carry over across relationship structures, especially when it comes to core issues like trust, communication, and boundaries. But the dynamics can shift depending on the relationship model.
For example, I had a couple of friends in a long-term open relationship—more specifically, they were in a throuple-style setup. They were together for nine years, and they had a standing agreement that they could engage with a third person together, whether in a threesome or another shared arrangement. It worked for them because it was mutual, clearly communicated, and consensual.
But here’s what happened. The husband eventually began seeing one of those third partners on his own, without telling his wife. And that broke the agreement. The wife—whom I know well—was clear from day one: “We do this together, or not at all.” When he stepped outside the agreement and began a side relationship independently, she saw it as a betrayal, and she filed for divorce.
And that’s the key takeaway: cheating isn’t about the act itself—it’s about violating agreed-upon boundaries. Whether the relationship is monogamous, polyamorous, or somewhere in between, the golden rule is the same: honour the agreements you’ve made. Once someone crosses that line, it becomes about broken trust, not just broken rules.
Jacobsen: What about people who’ve never experienced infidelity themselves? What assumptions do they tend to make—about what it is, what it means, or what causes it—that are just totally off?
Louis: Great question. There are many myths around infidelity, especially among people who’ve never gone through it firsthand. One of the biggest misconceptions is that infidelity is always about sex. That’s just not true. More often than not, cheating is about emotional disconnection, unmet needs, or the search for validation.
Another common myth is that “if someone cheats, it means they don’t love their partner.” Again, not always true. People are complicated. Some people cheat despite loving their partner. It doesn’t make it okay, but the root cause isn’t always a lack of love—it’s often a lack of communication, attention, or self-awareness.
Some assume that men cheat more than women, but that’s also not as clear-cut anymore. Women cheat, too—and often for different reasons. While men tend to cheat more for physical or opportunistic reasons, women are more likely to cheat in response to emotional neglect. Again, these are generalizations, but they challenge outdated assumptions.
Finally, many people believe that once a cheater, always a cheater. That’s a tricky one. Yes, some people are repeat offenders—but others learn, grow, and genuinely never repeat that mistake. It depends on their level of self-reflection and willingness to do the work.
So yeah, there’s much misunderstanding about what cheating means. It’s not always about lust. It’s not always about falling out of love. It’s often about a deeper emotional fracture—one that many people don’t even realize exists until it’s too late.
Well, first and foremost, when someone hears about cheating—whether it’s in the news, in a friend’s relationship, or just hypothetically, the first reaction is almost always the same: “That person’s a liar,” or “Once a cheater, always a cheater.” There’s a rush to judgment, without really trying to understand the full context or circumstances.
For those who haven’t experienced it themselves, it’s easy to say, “If that ever happened to me, I’d be out. No questions asked. That person would be dead to me.” But the reality is, when it happens to you, it’s very different. There’s history. There are emotions. There’s love, investment, and time. Suddenly, it’s not such a simple decision anymore.
Now, of course, if someone has been cheated on in the past, and they tell a new partner, “If you ever cheat on me, I will walk out, no questions asked,” then that’s a boundary—and that boundary needs to be respected. That’s a different scenario. But many people who’ve never gone through it firsthand only see infidelity in black-and-white terms.
For example, if you ask someone, “What would you do if your partner cheated on you?” they almost always jump to the extreme: “I’d leave.” Very few people say, “I would take a step back, listen to what they have to say, and try to understand why it happened.”
To be clear, I never suggest that the person who was cheated on is to blame. Cheating is a personal choice. But in some cases—some, not all—there’s a breakdown in the relationship that both people contributed to. That doesn’t justify the cheating, but it can help explain why it happened. And if healing is going to take place, both partners need to understand what was broken and how to repair it.
Jacobsen: Not necessarily about assigning blame—like, “It’s his fault” or “her fault”—but recognizing it as a collective failure in the relationship dynamic?
Louis: You don’t need to point fingers. But if you’re going to try to move forward, you have to look honestly at the whole picture. Both people have to be willing to ask hard questions, be vulnerable, and take accountability for the state of the relationship leading up to the infidelity.
Jacobsen: Christopher, thank you very much for your time and expertise again today. I’ll be in touch—hopefully tonight, or within a day—with the transcript for your review. And as always, we’ll keep the conversation going.
Louis: Thank you, Scott. Always a pleasure. Have a wonderful day—and get some rest, my friend.
Jacobsen: Thank you. Bye-bye.
Louis: Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/12
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
In this wide-ranging conversation, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Irina Tsukerman discuss the resignation of Fed Governor Adriana Kugler, the firing of BLS head Erika McEntarfer, and the fallout from politically driven economic decisions. She critiques Trump’s birthright citizenship executive order, details the humanitarian crisis in Sudan, and unpacks escalating tensions in Gaza and Ukraine. Tsukerman also warns of increasing politicization in public institutions and media cuts, providing nuanced, Constitution-based insights into America’s evolving legal and geopolitical landscape.
Interview conducted August 1.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Once again, welcome to Everywhere Insiders, joined by the wonderful Irina Tsukerman. Today we are covering topics ranging from Writers’ Day through to developments on August 1, 2025.
Let’s start with the major news: Federal Reserve Governor Adriana Kugler has submitted her resignation, effective August 8, 2025.
Though some outlets loosely frame this as a firing, it is officially a resignation. That said, early departures from such positions often carry political weight, especially when they create opportunities for new appointments. In this case, former President Trump has already announced plans to name a temporary replacement within days to serve out the remainder of Kugler’s term.
Irina Tsukerman: This creates a rare and politically significant opportunity. Trump now has the chance to shape the Fed before Jerome Powell’s term as Chair ends in May 2026. The resignation of a sitting governor—especially in a contentious political environment—allows the administration to install someone more aligned with its policy agenda.
Jacobsen: And that brings us to another related shake-up. The head of the Bureau of Labour Statistics, Erika McEntarfer, was fired after the agency released a revised jobs report showing 258,000 fewer jobs than initially reported. While such revisions are routine and part of statistical transparency, the dismissal appears tied to political backlash.
Tsukerman: Precisely. This is troubling from an institutional perspective. When independent officials are dismissed following routine reporting corrections, it signals a politicization of data. That undermines the credibility of economic institutions and has long-term consequences for investor confidence and public trust.
Jacobsen: The broader takeaway from this labour report is that it reflects more than a typical economic downturn. This is not the result of a global shock or natural cycle—it’s largely self-inflicted. The contraction is tied to domestic policy decisions, particularly aggressive tariffs and regulatory burdens that have hit small and medium-sized businesses the hardest.
Tsukerman: That’s right. We’re seeing job losses not only in federal positions—where there have been sweeping layoffs—but also across private and related industries. Small and mid-sized companies, already operating on thin margins, are closing or downsizing. These losses were preventable. That’s what makes this report particularly concerning.
Jacobsen: So, to summarize:
- Adriana Kugler has resigned, allowing Trump to make a key appointment to the Federal Reserve.
- Erika McEntarfer was fired, seemingly in response to a routine data revision.
- The latest labour report points not to an external crisis, but to internal policy failures—especially those affecting American businesses.
Tsukerman: And with these institutional changes, we could be witnessing a significant reshaping of economic governance under this administration—one that prioritizes loyalty over technical expertise.
So, what we’re seeing now is the result of a cycle that Trump himself initiated. It began with funding cuts to universities, which were then forced to lay off staff. That was followed by the imposition of tariffs, which made it more expensive to operate import-export businesses. But the impact didn’t stop there. Even companies not directly involved in international trade have been affected, as they rely on various goods and materials that have become more costly.
That’s what many people forget—these policies have ripple effects across the entire economy. On top of that, there’salready a general expectation of slower economic growth, which naturally results in fewer job openings. Employers are responding with caution, scaling back hiring plans and operating under more conservative forecasts.
Jacobsen: And there’s also Trump’s escalating conflict with his political opponents, law firms, and entire sectors of the economy, which adds another layer of economic uncertainty.
Tsukerman: Exactly. These confrontations are contributing to an unstable business climate. The outcomes we’re seeing shouldn’t surprise anyone. The only reason some are shocked is that Trump, along with his allies, has been consistently exaggerating or misrepresenting economic conditions.
What’s more concerning is that even some respected experts echoed his narrative, claiming, for instance, that tariffs would have no real economic impact. That misled the public. So now, when the predicted consequences materialize, people feel blindsided. But this situation has played out exactly as many independent analysts warned it would.
Jacobsen: Speaking of geopolitical tensions, let’s turn to the Russia-Ukraine situation. There were provocative statements recently from Russian sources, and reports that Trump ordered nuclear submarines to be repositioned. What’s the story there?
Tsukerman: It’s more about optics than action. Trump has been making increasingly aggressive statements toward Russia. He hasn’t taken any concrete military steps. Still, he has ordered U.S. nuclear submarines to reposition—a symbolic move intended to project strength and deterrence.
This follows another horrifying attack in Ukraine, where over 100 drones were launched by the Kremlin, striking civilian areas—one particularly tragic incident involved eight children killed in a single strike. Images of parents holding unconscious or dead children have sparked outrage, not only internationally, but even within parts of the U.S. Congress.
Jacobsen: Including among Republicans?
Tsukerman: Yes, even some Republicans who were previously more MAGA-aligned or sympathetic to Russia have begun expressing outrage. Putin’s brazenness, the rising civilian death toll, and ongoing threats toward NATO and the United States are shifting some of those positions.
As for Trump, his movement of nuclear submarines serves a dual purpose. It reassures his base that he’s a strong leader who won’t be humiliated by Russian aggression. But at the same time, it allows him to appear strong without actually doing anything that would contradict his longstanding position of avoiding confrontation with Russia.
Jacobsen: So it’s posturing?
Tsukerman: Precisely. It’s strategic signalling—projecting deterrence without engaging. He’s essentially saying, “We’re ready to respond if needed,” while ensuring that he doesn’t escalate the conflict. It’s a calculated move meant more for domestic optics than for changing the situation on the ground.
So far, Trump has not initiated any concrete economic or military action against Russia. There’s no indication that he will—unless there’s a direct attack on U.S. interests. So, this recent move—repositioning nuclear submarines—is, in reality, a relatively minor escalation. Frankly, it’s something that should have been done a long time ago.
But it’s also not particularly meaningful. Despite all the rhetoric—threats of sanctions, secondary tariffs, and punitive measures against Russian products—Russia continues to benefit from the time window it has essentially been granted. And during that time, they continue attacking civilians. They’re also continuing to receive weapons components from China and North Korea and conducting trade with several other countries.
There’s nothing substantial being done to accelerate the collapse of Russia’s war economy.
Jacobsen: And shifting focus slightly—on the domestic front—there’s renewed attention on anti-immigration rhetoric. One issue that’s come up again is birthright citizenship. I’ve seen headlines about it, including an executive order from Trump aiming to restrict it, even as a second federal appeals court has declared such restrictions unconstitutional.
This is your legal wheelhouse—where are we in the process? Why is this being blocked? And what’s the rationale behind this executive action?
Tsukerman: To clarify, birthright citizenship is enshrined in the 14th Amendment to the U.S. Constitution. It was adopted in 1868 and grants automatic citizenship to “all persons born or naturalized in the United States,” regardless of the immigration status of their parents. Legally, this is not something that can be overturned by executive order—it would require a constitutional amendment or a Supreme Court reversal, neither of which has occurred.
The federal courts have repeatedly blocked attempts to restrict this right because they violate the Constitution. Trump’s proposals are largely political messaging. He’s trying to appeal to specific segments of his base, despite the clear legal barriers.
Jacobsen: What’s the historical foundation of birthright citizenship?
Tsukerman: Birthright citizenship is not just a right—it was essential to the founding and development of the United States. When the country was first established, there was no modern immigration system. Virtually everyone who came here did so without today’s legal procedures, because those procedures didn’t exist.
If their children had not been considered Americans, there wouldn’t have been a population to build and sustain the country. The U.S. needed people—families who were willing to stay, work the land, and take the political and personal risks of declaring independence from Britain.
Birthright citizenship ensured their children would have legal protection, not face deportation, and could inherit and build a future in the newly founded country.
Jacobsen: So the argument is both legal and historical?
Tsukerman: Absolutely. It’s both practical and rooted in constitutional law. The framers of the 14th Amendment were very clear about this: if you’re born here, you’re a citizen. The idea of “illegal immigration” as we know it didn’t even exist at the time. People arrived, stayed, and helped populate the land.
Immigration restrictions came much later, primarily in the 19th and 20th centuries, when procedures were introduced to prevent the spread of disease, criminal elements, or individuals considered threats to public safety. But birthright citizenship has remained a cornerstone of how the U.S. grows and integrates its population.
Without it, there would have been no incentive for many to remain in the U.S. during its most difficult years, especially when the country was broke, heavily indebted, and still struggling to establish basic institutions. It was a mechanism to ensure stability, continuity, and growth.
Jacobsen: And now it’s being rechallenged in court.
Tsukerman: Yes, and it’s being blocked—correctly—by the judiciary. Attempts to remove birthright citizenship by executive order are legally invalid. The courts are upholding the Constitution. It’s one of those rare instances where the legal system is doing precisely what it was designed to do: protect foundational rights from political overreach.
This is what so many people who are now crying about so-called “anchor babies” fail to understand. Without birthright citizenship—without those very “anchor babies”—none of us would be here. There would be no United States as we know it.
Now, of course, it’s reasonable to say we should have processes to ensure that individuals with serious criminal records or evil intent aren’t allowed to remain here. That’s a fair point. But children born on U.S. soil do not have criminal records—they are not culpable for their parents’ actions.
The argument that birthright citizenship incentivizes illegal immigration misses the mark, especially when you consider that this is precisely how the country was founded. Birthright citizenship is foundational to the American national identity. It’s not a loophole—it’s a cornerstone. It’s what made the United States possible, and it’s relatively unique compared to many other countries because of how our history unfolded.
People who misunderstand this need to go back and crack open a U.S. history textbook—many of them, I suspect, for the first time—and learn how this nation was formed.
Jacobsen: And some of the loudest voices in this debate are, ironically, descendants of relatively recent immigrants.
Tsukerman: Exactly. Many of the same individuals who are now calling for restrictions would not even be here if the standards they propose today were applied to their own families. Many early Americans arrived in the New World as indentured servants.
If we applied their logic retroactively, why should the children of indentured servants—who were bound by contract—have been granted citizenship? By that logic, they should have gone back once their service ended. But of course, that’s absurd, and it underscores the flawed reasoning behind the current rhetoric.
So it’s no surprise that two federal courts have already blocked Trump’s proposed restriction on birthright citizenship. Yes, sometimes you get split circuit decisions, and then it may go to the Supreme Court. I’m not certain whether this case will ultimately make it that far. But if it does, I strongly suspect the Court will strike it down.
The proposal is a blatant attempt to undercut the constitutional foundation of American citizenship—and it’s unlikely to survive legal scrutiny in its current form.
Jacobsen: Let’s pivot to public media. There’s been a significant funding cut that’s drawing attention, especially around the Corporation for Public Broadcasting (CPB). Reports suggest it’s either shutting down or projected to shut down following a $9 billion funding cut to public media in general.
Of that, $1.1 billion was explicitly earmarked for CPB, which, in turn, distributes funding to NPR and PBS. This was part of a long-term funding plan—stretched over two years—but it’s been abruptly eliminated by the Republican-controlled House. What are your thoughts on this move? Have you seen any reactions from NPR or PBS yet?
Tsukerman: This is a significant blow to independent, publicly funded journalism and educational programming. CPB is a nonprofit organization that plays a crucial role in ensuring that Americans—especially those in rural or underserved communities—have access to non-commercial, educational media.
The elimination of $1.1 billion in CPB funding is part of a broader trend we’re seeing: attacks on institutions that provide fact-based, publicly accountable information. When funding for public broadcasting disappears, it’s not just about NPR and PBS losing resources—it’s about communities losing access to trusted reporting, children’s educational programs, arts programming, and local journalism.
Politically, this isn’t just about budget priorities. It reflects an ideological shift away from public goods and toward privatization or politicization of information channels. I haven’t seen formal statements yet from NPR or PBS, but I expect strong public responses. This decision directly threatens their ability to operate, especially in smaller markets.
Jacobsen: And, with the collapse of local news outlets, losing CPB-backed stations could widen the information gap.
Tsukerman: Absolutely. These cuts don’t just affect the coasts or major cities—they hit the heartland. And that’s precisely where independent, nonpartisan media is often most needed. If anything, this move will make it harder for many Americans to stay informed.
First of all, this has been in the works for quite some time. We knew it was coming—it’s been discussed for months, essentially since the start of Trump’s second term. That said, even with the warning signs, it was still a shock for many, especially those who lost their jobs.
What’s particularly troubling is how many MAGA and MAGA-adjacent commentators celebrated the funding cuts. They argued that PBS and NPR were promoting radical left-wing content. But what they fail to recognize is that PBS and NPR were only a small part of what the Corporation for Public Broadcasting (CPB) funded.
The vast majority of CPB’s support went to local media outlets across the country, particularly in rural or underserved areas where commercial media outlets simply don’t exist. Without CPB, these communities lose access not only to national news but also to vital local coverage: weather updates, emergency alerts, public health announcements, and community events. The loss is much broader than people realize.
Jacobsen: So it’s more about dismantling an infrastructure than just removing two high-profile names.
Tsukerman: People saw the funding as symbolic because of NPR and PBS. But the real impact is structural, affecting basic media access for millions. Now, the only hope for these regions is private funding, which introduces its problems. Private funding can come with editorial strings attached, and it may not even come at all, especially in economically depressed or sparsely populated regions.
This decision could effectively silence entire communities. They won’t have any media coverage—no public voice. And there’s no guarantee that private media will step in, or that if they do, they will be neutral.
Jacobsen: Couldn’t the administration have taken a more measured approach—reforming CPB instead of cutting it?
Tsukerman: Absolutely. If the concern was that CPB programming leaned too far left—particularly in NPR or PBS content—the administration had plenty of legal authority to restructure CPB. The president could have replaced leadership, established new oversight protocols, and reoriented its mission to reflect the administration’s priorities better. That would have been a valid and legal approach.
Yes, some of the coverage in recent years leaned more progressive, but that doesn’t mean the entire operation had no value. Much of the programming was non-political: cultural documentaries, educational children’s shows, and arts coverage. Eliminating all of that, rather than reforming it, is a missed opportunity—not only to preserve public service media but to use it to communicate this administration’s message more effectively.
Jacobsen: All right. In the last couple of minutes, let’s turn to Colombia. Former President Álvaro Uribe has been sentenced to 12 years of post-arrest supervision for abuse of process and bribery of a public official. This stems from a witness tampering case that has gone on for over 13 years. The sentencing came from Judge Sandra Liliana Heredia. Uribe continues to maintain his innocence. Is this unusual by global political standards?
Tsukerman: Not at all. This fits the global pattern of political corruption cases, especially involving former heads of state. It’s not unique to Colombia, nor is it unique to the right or left politically. In this case, the allegations involve bribery, abuse of process, and potential links to right-wing paramilitary groups.
There’s a long history in Colombia of murky relationships between political elites and armed groups, and many have criticized the government’s handling of peace negotiations and transitional justice.
Jacobsen: So it’s part of a broader pattern?
Tsukerman: Yes. Whether or not Uribe is guilty, the larger issue is systemic. It reflects deeper tensions in Colombian society around accountability, justice, and the role of political power. It also highlights how long such cases can take—this one dragged on for more than a decade. The fact that a conviction happened at all is significant. It signals that the judicial system, despite its flaws, is still able to function under extreme political pressure.
Some critics argue that the Colombian government has made questionable deals with various militant groups. The core question, however, isn’t whether controversial negotiations occurred—those happen in nearly every conflict resolution context—but whether there has been a consistent standard applied to Uribe compared to others.
In other words, is Uribe being singled out, or is the current administration pursuing him fairly and impartially under the law? That’s where the controversy lies—not so much in the charges themselves, but in how the current government is handling the prosecution and whether it can be trusted to enforce justice without political motivation.
Jacobsen: Let’s break down the background. This whole case stems from a complaint Uribe himself filed in 2012, correct?
Tsukerman: Yes. Back in 2012, Álvaro Uribe filed a complaint against Senator Iván Cepeda, accusing him of manipulating witnesses. But that move backfired. The investigation revealed evidence implicating Uribe himself in attempts to coerce or manipulate incarcerated paramilitary witnesses, effectively turning the tables.
This case became Colombia’s so-called “trial of the century,” not only because of its duration—13 years—but because it marked the first time a former president in Colombia was convicted and sentenced for criminal offences.
Jacobsen: And the political reaction has been intense.
Tsukerman: Very. Uribe’s supporters—including his party, Democratic Center—have decried the verdict as judicial persecution, claiming the judiciary is politically weaponized. U.S. figures like Senator Marco Rubio and even the Secretary of State have expressed support for Uribe, adding international pressure.
On the other hand, Colombian leaders such as President Gustavo Petro, Senator Iván Cepeda, and human rights organizations have praised the decision as a victory for judicial independence. The case has become a flashpoint for Colombia’s broader democratic and institutional health, especially with presidential elections due in May 2026.
Jacobsen: What happens now for Uribe and his party?
Tsukerman: Uribe has been placed under house arrest and is banned from holding public office, which has profound implications for his party’s strategy and candidate selection. He’s been the face and guiding force of the Democratic Center. His absence will force internal realignment and intensify infighting over who takes the reins moving forward.
There will almost certainly be appeals. The case now moves to the Bogotá Superior Court, which must issue a ruling by mid-October to avoid statute of limitations issues. From there, it could escalate to Colombia’s Supreme Court, and if unresolved, potentially to the Inter-American human rights system.
Jacobsen: Uribe’s legacy itself is contested, isn’t it?
Tsukerman: Very much so. On the one hand, he’s credited with reasserting state control over large parts of Colombia during his presidency, especially in the fight against the FARC. On the other hand, he’s been linked to the “false positives”scandal, where civilians were killed and falsely labelled as enemy combatants, as well as alleged ties to paramilitary groups.
This case hinges on the accusation that Uribe manipulated jailed paramilitary witnesses to discredit Cepeda—his political adversary—who was investigating Uribe’s alleged paramilitary connections. Essentially, the charge is that Uribe used elements of the very forces he once fought against to carry out a political smear campaign.
Jacobsen: Sounds like a classic “no clean hands” scenario.
Tsukerman: That’s a fair characterization. It’s murky, it’s messy, and it underscores the deep entanglement of politics, justice, and armed conflict in Colombia’s recent history. The legal and political fallout from this case will likely shape the country’s trajectory well beyond 2026.
Jacobsen: So, it’s being reported as “exasperation”—that’s the word used in a recent article I read, and honestly, it struck me as a bit of editorializing, which is unusual for wire services like Reuters. The context is frustration over Gaza, which is now reportedly pushing three of Israel’s allies toward recognizing a Palestinian state.
For listeners who may not know, the status of Palestine has long been contentious. Since 2012, Palestine has held the same observer status at the United Nations as the Holy See (the Vatican). However, many countries still don’t recognize it as a sovereign state. Others do recognize it fully. So, it’s not just a historical debate—it remains a politically contested issue.
What’s interesting here is that three close allies of Israel are reportedly moving—or being “pushed,” to use their word—toward recognizing Palestinian statehood. I believe a fourth might be Canada, possibly by September. But again, that’s something I’d want to double-check.
What’s your take on this? The two-state solution has been the official framework for decades. Still, opinions vary widely on how achievable it is at this point.
Tsukerman: You’re right to raise concerns about the language used—it’s more complicated than some of the reporting suggests.
First, none of the three countries has officially recognized a Palestinian state yet. What they’ve done is threaten to do so, under specific conditions.
In the case of Norway, its foreign minister stated that if Israel fails to declare or uphold a ceasefire, Norway would consider recognition. The issue there is that Israel has already expressed willingness to agree to a truce, while Hamas rejected the proposed terms. That rejection led to Norway’s envoy storming out of negotiations, accusing Israel of planning to escalate retaliatory measures. This accusation doesn’t fully align with the facts.
Jacobsen: So the trigger wasn’t Israel’s refusal, but Hamas’s?
Tsukerman: Precisely. That’s a key detail many outlets gloss over. Hamas refused the terms of the ceasefire. Meanwhile, Israel has taken several humanitarian steps:
- The blockade was eased.
- Humanitarian pauses were instituted.
- Aid deliveries were significantly expanded.
- The UN resumed operations inside Gaza.
- And multiple countries launched the largest coordinated airdrop operation to date to deliver relief.
Despite this, Hamas has actively obstructed aid efforts—diverting shipments, blocking deliveries, and even reselling humanitarian supplies at inflated prices.
Jacobsen: And what about Macron?
Tsukerman: Macron was more nuanced. He said he might announce French recognition of Palestine at the UN General Assembly, but only if the humanitarian crisis isn’t resolved through other means before then. That was a conditional statement, not a policy shift.
Since then, Israel and international actors have taken numerous steps to mitigate the crisis. So Macron’s condition hasn’t yet been met, and he hasn’t moved forward with recognition.
Jacobsen: So in essence, what’s being portrayed as a surge toward Palestinian statehood recognition is more like conditional diplomatic posturing, dependent on evolving ground realities?
Tsukerman: Exactly. These are leverage tactics—not finalized decisions. And they’re aimed just as much at Hamas and internal political audiences as they are at Israel.
In sum, while the two-state solution remains the official diplomatic framework, the reality on the ground is fragmented, and recognition talk—at this stage—is largely conditional, reactive, and politically calculated rather than a real-time policy transformation.
Jacobsen: So, all of this has led to further diplomatic strain. There has been an open confrontation between Israeli officials and the foreign ministers of those three countries that floated the idea of recognizing a Palestinian state. Some of those foreign ministers have privately admitted that their plan backfired—the moment they made those announcements, Hamas began celebrating, which was not the reaction they were hoping for.
On top of that, Mahmoud Abbas, head of the Palestinian Authority, announced new elections for next year. But shortly after, some of the foreign officials involved were hit with sanctions by the United States, adding yet another layer of political tension.
Tsukerman: Right—and the situation has become even more chaotic due to the rhetoric from figures like Ami Ayalon and Mamdani, who claimed recently that Israel is not even a real country, calling it merely “an idea.” He’s arguing that Israel shouldn’t exist, and that Palestine should be a contiguous state encompassing the West Bank, Gaza, and all territory in between.
In other words, instead of supporting a two-state solution, which is still the official stance of the Arab League and reflected in a tripartite statement by Egypt, Qatar, and Saudi Arabia, Mamdani is pushing for a one-state solution—but with Palestine replacing Israel, not coexisting alongside it.
Jacobsen: And just to be clear—Mamdani has no actual political power, correct?
Tsukerman: Correct. He’s not a policymaker. But his comments are reflective of a sentiment that exists on the fringes—among Hamas sympathizers and certain anti-Israel activists. While Hamas itself isn’t even interested in a defined Palestinian state—they openly call for inclusion in a broader Islamic caliphate, as outlined in their charter—there are secular or non-Islamist sympathizers who still agree with the idea of eliminating Israel as a state.
This is where the diplomatic controversy heats up. None of the three Western leaders who floated the idea of recognizing Palestine articulated specific borders. They proposed recognition unilaterally, without any negotiated parameters, delimitation, or demarcation, which goes against longstanding U.S. policy, which has consistently emphasized a negotiated solution between Israel and the Palestinians.
Jacobsen: So this isn’t just a political miscalculation—it’s a departure from decades of diplomatic precedent.
Tsukerman: Exactly. The West—particularly the U.S. and the EU—has continuously operated under the assumption that mutual negotiations would determine borders, security guarantees, and other key aspects of statehood. These new comments represent a break from that framework. And now, the countries involved face a diplomatic dilemma.
They made these statements publicly, not behind closed doors. So now they’re stuck. Can they walk them back? If they attempt to reframe their recognition as symbolic or conceptual—acknowledging a future Palestinian state, but not formally recognizing it in legal terms—will it make a difference?
Practically speaking, no. It won’t change anything on the ground. But politically, one of the ministers, Espen Barth Eide of Norway, explicitly said the point was to put pressure on Israel. Yet ironically, he was pushing for a ceasefire that Israel had already agreed to.
Jacobsen: So it was an effort to leverage something that had already been conceded?
Tsukerman: Pretty much. Which raises the question: What exactly were they trying to achieve? All this has done is create a diplomatic scandal, where no one knows how to resolve it because key officials spoke too soon without a clear plan or coordination.
Jacobsen: So the result? Status quo?
Tsukerman: Yes—at best, a continuation of the current impasse. In terms of the actual process of recognizing a Palestinian state, there’s a formal diplomatic mechanism for that. But this scandal between Israel, France, the UK, and others is far more volatile because it played out in the public arena.
That means these governments now face a choice: either act on their public declarations or find a politically palatable excuse for backing off. And neither option looks great. In the meantime, Hamas is capitalizing on the situation—using it to highlight tensions between Israel and its Western allies, and to further the narrative that Israel is becoming isolated on the global stage.
Jacobsen: The Arab League is now saying—collectively and unequivocally—that Hamas must go. They continue to support a two-state solution, but they’re making it clear: it has to be without Hamas.
Tsukerman: That’s a significant shift. While the Western leaders haven’t explicitly said “Hamas must go,” they’ve implied it. They’ve spoken about supporting the idea of Palestinian statehood. Still, in practical terms, that recognition would require a government not controlled by Hamas.
The problem is in the messaging. What the public hears is that these leaders are recognizing a Palestinian state—full stop. There’s no mention of conditions or the need for governance reforms. That’s why it’s so controversial. It sounds unconditional, even if, in reality, it isn’t.
But suppose you examine what they’ve said. In that case, it’s not fundamentally different from the diplomatic language we’ve heard for decades: support for a two-state solution, with the expectation that any Palestinian state must meet basic governance and security criteria.
Jacobsen: So, the controversy is more about the optics than the substance.
Tsukerman: Exactly. It’s about timing, framing, and public perception. Suppose the statements had included firmer language about excluding terrorist groups from any future Palestinian government. In that case, the backlash might’ve been more muted. But instead, it came across as rushed, vague, and poorly coordinated.
Jacobsen: Alright, last topic for this week: Sudan. On July 31, in Cairo and Dubai, we saw reports that Sudan’s paramilitary RSF has formed a parallel government, essentially splitting the country. This comes after two years of civil war, ethnic cleansing, famine, and mass displacement.
In the West, public concern seems laser-focused on Russia-Ukraine and Israel-Palestine, which is fair to some extent. But by most definitions, over a dozen major wars are going on globally, and Sudan is arguably one of the worst. What are your thoughts on both the Western sphere of concern and the humanitarian disaster unfolding in Sudan?
Tsukerman: Sudan’s civil war is, without question, a far greater humanitarian disaster than either Ukraine or Gaza in terms of civilian casualties, mass displacement, and human suffering. We’re talking about hundreds of thousands of civilian deaths—and that’s not even counting combatants.
But it gets less attention for several reasons. First, it’s an internal conflict, not a war between two recognized nations. That makes it harder to fit into the Western media’s geopolitical narratives.
Second, there’s no clear “good guy”. This is a power struggle between two factions—the Sudanese Armed Forces (SAF) and the Rapid Support Forces (RSF). Both claim legitimacy. Both are accused of atrocities. The victims are overwhelmingly the Sudanese people.
Jacobsen: So, it’s not a clear-cut story. That complicates public engagement.
Tsukerman: Exactly. Historically, Western media and governments have struggled to mobilize sustained attention when a crisis doesn’t involve strategic rivals or Western interests. Sudan has long been treated as peripheral—tragic, but geopolitically “nonessential.”
To add context: RSF, formerly part of the Janjaweed militias responsible for atrocities in Darfur, was partially integrated into the Sudanese military before splintering under the leadership of Mohamed Hamdan Dagalo (Hemeti). It’s largely secular, but brutally opportunistic. The SAF, meanwhile, is also accused of systemic abuses.
Jacobsen: So what we’re seeing now is a de facto partition of Sudan?
Tsukerman: Yes. With the RSF declaring a parallel government, the country is effectively split. That introduces new risks: regional spillover, international refugee crises, destabilization of neighbouring countries, and even the collapse of any future unified state.
And yet, there’s almost no international appetite to intervene or even seriously mediate. Sudan is suffering in silence, mainly because it doesn’t align with the dominant narratives of Western foreign policy or media coverage.
The RSF—the Rapid Support Forces—is widely believed to be responsible for some of the ongoing massacres in Darfur, particularly targeting Black African populations. The RSF is predominantly Arab-led and has recruited mercenaries from outside Sudan, including from Chad and other neighbouring countries.
It receives backing from Russia, which has clear interests in Sudan’s gold mines—many of which are controlled by or accessible through RSF-held territories. Russia’s support is also strategic, seeking to expand its influence in Africa and secure military and commercial footholds, particularly as part of its broader efforts to counter Western influence.
The United Arab Emirates (UAE) also backs the RSF, though for different reasons. The UAE had previously sought to establish a naval base in Sudan to expand its maritime influence. Still, the Sudanese army-led government rejected that proposal.
Additionally, the UAE has grown wary of the Sudanese military’s increasing re-engagement with former regime elements, particularly figures affiliated with Omar al-Bashir’s Muslim Brotherhood-aligned networks. These individuals have begun returning to positions of influence within the government, raising the alarm in Abu Dhabi, which views the Brotherhood as a major regional threat.
Jacobsen: So the Sudanese army is being backed by a completely different group of actors?
Tsukerman: Yes. The Sudanese Armed Forces (SAF), or the formal government, is supported by a loose coalition that includes Iran, Egypt, Saudi Arabia, and others.
- Iran has reportedly supplied drones and weaponry.
- Egypt and Saudi Arabia back the SAF primarily for security and stability reasons, viewing the military as a more manageable and predictable partner than the RSF.
The United States has attempted to mediate. Under the Biden administration, a special envoy was appointed to help broker peace. Still, the position’s status is unclear at this point. To date, no diplomatic breakthrough has occurred.
Jacobsen: Didn’t Saudi Arabia try to host talks?
Tsukerman: Yes, Saudi Arabia did attempt to convene peace negotiations in Jeddah, but neither faction’s leadership attended. The Sudanese president has since gone on a diplomatic tour of countries like Qatar, the UAE, and Saudi Arabia, seeking political support and funding.
Meanwhile, both sides have reportedly received weapons and material support from their international backers. There are also well-documented cases of weaponized starvation, where humanitarian aid is deliberately blocked, contributing to an escalating famine.
Jacobsen: That’s devastating.
Tsukerman: It is. We’re looking at a documented mass famine, tens of thousands of civilian casualties, and systematic targeting of ethnic communities. In Darfur, there has also been a separate but overlapping conflict, with a specific campaign of violence against Black minorities, amounting to ethnic cleansing.
Both sides have experienced territorial gains and losses. The Sudanese army has taken back some key cities, while the RSF is now attempting to oust SAF forces from Al-Fashir—the military’s last stronghold in Western Darfur. It’s a seesaw battle across different sectarian and tribal lines.
Jacobsen: And yet—no international outcry, no campus protests, no media firestorm.
Tsukerman: That’s the tragedy. Despite the severity of the humanitarian crisis, it hasn’t translated into mass global demonstrations or political activism, unlike what we’ve seen with Ukraine or Gaza.
The U.S. has imposed sanctions on leadership figures from both the RSF and SAF, but the practical impact is minimal. Most of these leaders don’t travel to the West and don’t hold assets in Western financial systems, so the sanctions are largely symbolic.
This is a multi-layered war, fueled by foreign involvement, mercenaries, sectarian violence, and power struggles—but it remains almost invisible in global discourse.
The situation in Sudan has turned into a massive mess, and no one seems to know how to resolve it. There are just too many layers—ethnic, sectarian, geopolitical—and too many external actors involved, each with competing interests. Andfrankly, there’s no strong incentive for any of them to stop meddling.
One key reason the West has paid less attention to the Sudanese civil war is that it’s not perceived as a direct military or security threat to Western interests, at least not at the moment.
In the Middle East, the war in Gaza has spilled over into broader conflict, with Houthi attacks disrupting international trade and escalating tensions involving Iran, Hezbollah, and others. In Europe, Russia’s invasion of Ukraine continues to dominate headlines—not just because of the war itself, but because of broader security threats, hybrid warfare, and concerns about spillover into NATO countries.
By contrast, Sudan’s conflict is seen as self-contained, even though it has regional implications involving African and Middle Eastern countries, and also Russia and China, who are actively engaged.
Jacobsen: And the U.S. hasn’t taken a decisive role here either, correct?
Tsukerman: Correct. The U.S. focus has been disproportionately on Russia and China, especially under the Biden administration. The result is that Sudan gets treated like a peripheral crisis. The strategy so far has been more about pushing Russia and China out of Sudan rather than putting pressure on the actual parties in the conflict. But that approach isn’t working.
Under Trump, the approach was different but equally ineffective. Africa was deprioritized almost entirely, outside of narrow concerns like rare earth elements and counterterrorism operations against groups like al-Shabaab in Somalia. Beyond that, it was never treated as a serious strategic priority.
Jacobsen: So both administrations have fallen short—but in different ways?
Tsukerman: Exactly. And I don’t think either administration fully understood the complexity of the conflict. Sudan is often dismissed as “just another endless war,” but that overlooks the enormous human cost and the potential for regional destabilization. The U.S. has tried diplomatic mediation, but without direct leverage—military, economic, or otherwise—those efforts have stalled.
In contrast, the U.S. had better luck recently with the tensions between the DRC and Rwanda, where a tentative accord was signed. Whether that holds remains to be seen.
Now, Trump is reportedly offering to mediate between Ethiopia and Egypt on the Nile water rights dispute. That’s commendable, but it’s unclear whether anything tangible will come of it.
As for Sudan, unless both leaders are removed or one side decisively prevails, it’s difficult to imagine a political or diplomatic solution taking hold. The announcement of a parallel government by the RSF isn’t surprising—it’s more a formalization of their existing control. They’ve already operated as a de facto state within their territories.
This move is meant to increase legitimacy, attract external political support, and fundraise internationally. But for people on the ground, it won’t change much—they’re still caught between two brutal forces.
Jacobsen: Irina, thank you again for your time and insights.
Tsukerman: Always a pleasure. See you next week.
Jacobsen: Yep—get some rest before your next interview. Take care.
Tsukerman: You too. Have a good night.
Jacobsen: Bye-bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/11
Ed Hirs is a Yale-educated energy economist and an Energy Fellow at the University of Houston, where he teaches undergraduate and graduate courses in energy economics. Known for his precise, nonpartisan analysis, he is a trusted voice on energy markets, corporate governance, and public policy. Hirs frequently contributes to national and international media and co-chairs the Yale Alumni in Energy conference, promoting fact-based dialogue on global energy security and sustainable economic strategies. In conversation with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Hirs critiques the failure of crypto to function as a genuine currency and highlights its role in market manipulation, energy grid distortion, and financial speculation. Drawing on examples from Texas’s deregulated power sector and the societal impacts of cryptocurrency, Hirs connects the rise of digital assets to systemic risk and exploitation. He warns of parallels to historic financial scams and emphasizes the long-term costs borne by everyday citizens. This expert analysis presents a sobering view of the future and economic implications of crypto.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, what is Bitcoin? What does it do for the economy? And why do people sometimes take issue with your response to that question?
Ed Hirs: Well, cryptocurrencies like Bitcoin do not meet the traditional definition of a currency—at least, not as economists or financial professionals typically define one. A currency is generally expected to serve as a medium of exchange, a unit of account, and a store of value. Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies struggle on all three fronts:
- Medium of exchange: While some merchants accept Bitcoin, its adoption in everyday transactions remains limited, mainly due to price volatility and slow transaction times.
- Unit of account: Prices are rarely listed in Bitcoin. Even within crypto markets, values are most often denominated in U.S. dollars.
- Store of value: Bitcoin’s extreme price volatility undermines its reliability as a store of wealth.
Hirs: Earlier today, in a discussion group with other journalists, someone asked: “When will we see federal action to regulate cryptocurrency?” My response was that the point of cryptocurrency, as initially conceived, was to avoid regulation and centralized control. That makes comprehensive regulation extremely difficult.
And unlike traditional financial systems, cryptocurrencies generally lack clear counterparty relationships. There is no central authority or entity responsible on the other side of a transaction—no accountable institution to oversee, audit, or enforce compliance.
Jacobsen: So what can be regulated?
Hirs: The infrastructure around crypto—like exchanges, stablecoins, and custodians—is being increasingly brought under regulatory frameworks. However, decentralized assets like Bitcoin themselves remain largely outside traditional legal control. This creates enormous challenges for enforcement.
If cryptocurrencies were so effective as currencies, you might wonder: why do nearly all users still measure their wealth in dollars? Even Bitcoin investors typically cash out in fiat currency when they want to realize profits or make significant purchases.
Some governments, such as China, have restricted or banned cryptocurrency mining and trading—not just due to crime but also because of concerns over energy consumption, financial instability risks, and capital flight. However, cryptocurrencies have been used in illicit transactions. Chainalysis, a blockchain analytics firm, reported that illegal crypto transaction volumes accounted for roughly 0.24% of all cryptocurrency activity in 2022—a small fraction, but still billions of dollars.
In Texas, for instance, cryptocurrency ATMs are available in gas stations and convenience stores. But I have never seen anyone buy beef jerky with Bitcoin. Instead, such ATMs have been used in money laundering schemes, where illicit funds are converted into cryptocurrency and moved anonymously across borders.
This functionality can make crypto appealing to bad actors. It facilitates the rapid transfer of value without traditional oversight, which undermines anti-money laundering (AML) and know-your-customer (KYC) controls. Some experts argue that cryptocurrencies have, in effect, made it easier to move money anonymously than traditional cash once did.
Back in the Miami Vice era, the Federal Reserve tracked large inflows of drug money—often literally contaminated with cocaine—through South Florida and Texas. Today, the movement of illicit finance may not require bundles of cash at all, thanks in part to crypto.
The public, however, often overlooks these concerns. Many individuals buy or trade crypto much like they purchase lottery tickets—hoping for exponential gains. Some view it as a speculative asset rather than a currency.
Many of the so-called “crypto bros” who gathered at Donald Trump’s recent private event fall into that camp. But despite the hype, cryptocurrencies have not become a major driver of job creation or broad-based economic development. Most blockchain-related jobs are concentrated in speculative finance, marketing, and tech—areas not immune to boom-and-bust cycles.
Jacobsen: What impact has cryptocurrency had on Texas’s energy market?
Hirs: In Texas, the rise of cryptocurrency—particularly Bitcoin—had significant effects on electricity markets. Cryptocurrency miners began entering into contracts to purchase electricity at about 2.5 cents per kilowatt-hour, which was substantially below the average retail rate paid by consumers. In return, these miners agreed to curtail or buy off the grid during periods of high demand.
For example, during the February 2021 winter storm, one major cryptocurrency mining operation, along with its commodity trading partner, reportedly earned over $100 million in profits—not by mining Bitcoin, but by shutting down operations and selling back electricity at peak prices. In June 2023, that same mining firm earned approximately $30 million simply by powering down when demand surged.
Jacobsen: So, everyday Texans are effectively paying for this?
Hirs: Exactly. The average Texan bears the cost through higher electricity rates. In 2021, estimates suggested that crypto miners were consuming as much electricity as the entire city of Austin. Since then, their energy use has only increased.
ERCOT—the Electric Reliability Council of Texas—does not publish detailed data on cryptocurrency-related energy consumption. It’s a politically sensitive issue. However, independent estimates suggest crypto mining has increased the average Texan’s electricity bill by more than 5%. That effectively means everyday residents are subsidizing an industry that undermines the reliability and affordability of the grid.
Jacobsen: And beyond energy, how does this affect broader society?
Hirs: We are facilitating an enterprise that complicates the work of law enforcement, including the Texas Rangers, by making financial tracking and oversight more difficult.
Jacobsen: What exactly is a “Bitcoin bro”?
Hirs: That term usually refers to the promoters and evangelists of the cryptocurrency industry—the ones hyping it online, often without acknowledging the systemic risks or social costs. There’s a great piece by Robert McCauley in the Financial Times from a few years ago. I’ll send it to you. In it, he compares cryptocurrencies to a Madoff-style Ponzi scheme and argues that anyone participating in the hype is, frankly, doing Madoff a disservice.
McCauley also contributed a chapter to the latest edition of Manias, Panics, and Crashes. Are you familiar with that book? It’s a classic—tracing financial disasters from the South Sea Bubble to the tulip craze and virtually every major scam since. The original editions were written by Charles Kindleberger, a renowned professor at MIT. Bob Aliber, professor emeritus at the University of Chicago, handled later editions. McCauley has now taken up the mantle. I believe the most recent edition is the eighth. It’s a terrific book—great for planes, trains, or poolside reading—short, digestible vignettes on financial folly.
Jacobsen: So are you saying some people in power could manipulate the energy grid to favour crypto?
Hirs: Yes. People with vested interests in crypto can, without breaking the law but arguably acting unethically, manipulate energy markets or policy for personal gain.
Take Texas’s leadership. The governor of Texas has been accepting cryptocurrency campaign contributions for over twelve years. Texas also operates a deregulated electricity grid, a system launched during Governor George W. Bush’s administration before he became president.
The rationale at the time, promoted by Enron, was that the fleet of Texas power plants was oversized—built to meet maximum peak demand. Around 20% of plants operated only 4 to 8 weeks per year. The solution? Let them compete in a so-called “electricity-only” market, where producers are paid only for the electricity they sell, not for capacity. That appealed to Bush, a well-known C-minus economics student at Yale. (No joke, that was on his transcript.)
If baseball teams like the Toronto Blue Jays were paid the same way—only for runs scored, not for player salaries or ballpark upkeep—it would be absurd. Yet that is essentially how Texas decided to run its grid.
It’s like this: only the players actually on the field get paid. Those sitting on the bench don’t. That’s how Texas designed its electricity market. So, over the next 20 years, many power plants left the Texas grid. They operated only a couple of months each year and had no revenue during the other ten months. Naturally, they shut down. They disappeared.
Economists were already sounding the alarm as early as 2006 and 2007. In these so-called deregulated grids, incumbent generators were not earning a return on capital. They weren’t reinvesting in infrastructure. The price of electricity in Texas did not cover the cost of building the cheapest new natural gas-fired power plant for eight out of the ten years before the 2021 winter freeze.
Meanwhile, the Texas economy was booming. In 2010, Texas’s gross state product was around $1.25 trillion. By 2021, it had grown to nearly $1.99 trillion. And yet, during that same period, the fleet of dispatchable (i.e., controllable, on-demand) power plants shrunk.
Jacobsen: But critics still blame renewables?
Hirs: Many far-right commentators argue that wind and solar energy have somehow compromised the integrity of the Texas grid. But that is not true. The issue is rooted in the market design itself.
Texas relinquished grid reliability in 2002 when it adopted a deregulated market model. I first wrote about the consequences in 2013, following the deadly 2011 freeze, warning that Texas was attempting to manage its power grid using outdated linear programming models—essentially, the same economic planning tools the Soviet Union employed in the 1960s and ’70s.
I’ve returned to this theme over and over again. I even posted a photo on LinkedIn of one of my presentations at Yale in March. In it, you can see a screenshot of ERCOT’s real-time dashboard behind me. The trolls came out in full force. I was covering the full spectrum of U.S. electricity markets—and comparing Texas’s system to the Soviet model, which historically undervalued capital and discouraged reinvestment.
Over time, if no one has the incentive to invest, then any so-called “excess capacity” disappears. Now, on a hot or cold day, prices can spike from an average of 4.5 cents per kilowatt-hour to $5 per kilowatt-hour. That’s an enormous windfall for those on the supply side.
There are more than 1,200 generating units in Texas. Let’s say we run the Scott and Ed Power Company, and we have 15 units. If I told you, “Hey, tomorrow’s going to be hot—we need to run all 15 units,” you might respond, “Ed, if we’re 5 gigawatts short, the price will hit $5 per kilowatt-hour. We’ll make a fortune running just 10 units. Why don’t you go have a beer and relax?”
That’s the kind of market manipulation and gaming I’ve been pointing out for years. And I’ll send you the original piece I wrote in 2013. It went back and forth with others. If you’ve found the photo, you’ll understand why it stirred controversy. If not, I’ll send it to you.
My professor and colleague, Paul McAvoy, and I were close—colleagues, friends, and co-authors. He would have appreciated the critique. He taught me to follow the economics, not the ideology. I kept cycling this piece back and forth with him. Finally, he said, “I like this so much, I’m going to sign off on it.” When your graduate professor says that, you say, “Let’s do it.”
He had served in the Johnson and Ford administrations on the Council of Economic Advisers. He also coined the term “voodoo economics” about Reaganomics.
Jacobsen: That reminds me of an interview I saw with a guy at Cambridge who works in philosophy of economics. He made a sharp observation: when economics lacks substantive insight, there’s a tendency to apply very sophisticated mathematics as a veneer—as if to buttress a weak argument. It’s misdirection. And people fall for it.
Hirs: The original piece I wrote was titled “ERCOT,” with the ‘C’ replaced by a hammer and sickle. The editor at the time thought it was too inflammatory. Now, he says he regrets not letting it stand.
I’ve written about this topic in 2013, 2016, 2019, and 2021. I’ve been profiled in Texas Monthly and other publications. But the paid analysts at the University of Texas, or the business columnists who are bought off, do not appreciate the irony—at all.
And let’s be honest: many of these so-called “market experts” at UT are civil engineers. They would not recognize a supply and demand curve if it landed on them. They also do not understand game theory.
Not many people truly understood John Nash’s work when he first proposed it. But Nash’s roommate at Princeton, Martin Shubik, was my game theory professor. He wrote a four-page paper that demonstrated Nash’s equilibrium could be disrupted under certain market conditions. Martin had also worked at the Toronto Electric Utility before moving to Princeton. Yes, in Eastern Canada.
I ran all of this by Martin, Paul McAvoy, and William Nordhaus. It’s a deep, inside-baseball look at the Texas grid—and I am still the only academic who lays it out this way. One of the commissioners of the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) came up to me at a conference in Colorado last year after I gave a talk. He said, “You’re the only academic who hasn’t been bought off. What can I do for you?”
I told him, half-jokingly, “Make me an offer.”
And the same applies to journalism. If you want to write the kind of articles you think are essential—ones with integrity and critique—you’ll need some luck to get them published. This is the space I’ve carved out. I am correct on the facts. It’s messy, but that’s the nature of economics.
There are criminal records to show it. That 2021 piece I mentioned earlier referred to Bernie Madoff—a man who ran one of the most infamous Ponzi schemes in U.S. history. He defrauded investors for over three decades. That case is a warning: without transparency, the system can and will be exploited.
Jacobsen: So you get these Ponzi schemes—or Ponzi-style schemes—that affect many people, often those who were either not critical enough in their inquiries or were misled by individuals who appeared legitimate. Regardless, cryptocurrency—and the so-called crypto bros or Bitcoin bros—can fall under such a category as well, particularly as you’ve been framing and describing it.
When it comes to financial innovations that emerge and claim to offer new ways of doing finance—or becoming a “currency” while still being priced in U.S. dollars, as you noted earlier—what tends to be, if not always the case, the typical endgame for the people pushing these schemes? And what happens to the people who buy into them?
Hirs: It’s a confidence game or a con game. As long as people continue to believe in it—and maintain confidence—it keeps going. But if 5% or 10% of current Bitcoin holders decide to run for the exits, there likely won’t be anyone on the other side to buy. That’s where market liquidity becomes critical.
In traditional markets—like traded shares, ETFs, or commodities—liquidity may dry up, but there’s some structure and accountability behind them. Take oil, for example. In April 2020, during the pandemic shutdown, the price of West Texas Intermediate crude oil went negative. That happened because demand collapsed—people stopped driving, refineries stopped taking crude, and storage filled up. Some producers in the Permian Basin were so desperate that they were storing oil in swimming pools.
The U.S. Oil ETF, which rolls forward futures contracts each month, got caught. They had bought contracts for physical delivery, but there was no available storage in Cushing, Oklahoma, so they had to sell—fast. Meanwhile, legendary investor Carl Icahn had a million barrels of storage available. He bought oil at a price of minus $17 per barrel, meaning he was paid to take it. He already had a sale lined up for delivery nine months later at around $70.75 a barrel. That’s the kind of market dislocation that happens when liquidity disappears and storage becomes scarce.
With cryptocurrency, if everyone heads for the exit, there is no backstop—no central authority, no entity to ensure liquidity or enforce obligations. And there’s no recourse. At least with tulip mania in the 1600s, you still had an actual tulip.
You have to remain detached. I’ve been in Houston for 43 years. I was there during Enron. I was also the only corporate finance professional in Houston who could be employed by the Department of Justice’s Enron Task Force to work on the prosecution of Enron and its executives.
I served as a consulting expert for the prosecution. There’s a Bloomberg Law piece—a 20th-anniversary interview—with me and Leslie Caldwell, who later served in the Obama administration as Assistant Attorney General for the Criminal Division. She was also Chief of the Enron Task Force for a time. In that interview, we discussed what happened behind the scenes.
We were not in the same recording session. They spliced our comments together. If I had heard her remarks beforehand, I would have said that she still does not fully understand what happened. It was a plain pedestrian fraud. But she was so focused on the minutiae of the off-balance sheet transactions that she missed the larger picture.
Back in 1993, the renowned Forbes journalist Tony Mack explained precisely how Enron’s mark-to-market accounting was intended to function.
Let’s say I entered into a deal to build a power plant—one expected to generate cash flows for 20 years. Suppose I’ve locked in the construction cost and secured a predictable revenue stream. What Enron would do is project the future cash flows, discount them to present value, and book all of it as profit immediately in the current reporting period.
And Enron kept doing this—over and over. Initially, they brought transparency and liquidity to natural gas trading and later to electricity trading. That was a real value. But as transparency and standardization increased, the bid-ask spread narrowed, and profits from trading shrank. So, if you want to keep reporting ever-increasing profits and revenue, you need to manufacture transactions.
That’s when Enron pivoted. Besides using mark-to-market accounting, they began trading with themselves. By 1996, they were making deals with their own publicly traded subsidiaries—EOG Resources and Mariner Energy. They would sell assets at the end of one financial period and then repurchase them in the next to improve the balance sheet.
Journalist Harry Hurt III at Fortune picked up on this in 1996, and that’s when Enron escalated its use of special purpose entities (SPEs) managed by its CFO. CalPERS, the California Public Employees’ Retirement System, was even involved in facilitating transactions that helped Enron beautify its books at each reporting period.
This continued until 2001 when Enron ran out of things to sell. I had refused to work at Enron. A recruiting firm once called me down and told me I was their best story. Additionally, back in 1987, my landlord lost his job at Enron, along with 1,500 others, due to a supposedly one-time $50 million after-tax loss from the infamous Valhalla oil trading scandal.
Jacobsen: That sounds like a familiar scam setup.
Hirs: I bet my landlord two beers it wasn’t $50 million—it was $1.5 billion. Sure enough, in 2003, I collected those two beers.
The DOJ tried to indict Enron for the Valhalla scandal, but the judge ruled that it was beyond the statute of limitations. Still, the government had more than enough to go after them successfully on other grounds.
The math didn’t work. Everyone fooled themselves into believing it did. Some banks refused to do business with Enron—and they were ultimately vindicated. Some law firms declined to represent them, too. But as long as the stock price kept rising, no one wanted to look under the hood.
The same thing happened in the Permian Basin during the build-up to recent oil and gas stock collapses. One geologist kept pointing out that the wells were becoming increasingly gassy, which made them less valuable. The industry turned on him.
His name is Scott LaPierre. He posted on LinkedIn that Scott Sheffield—the longtime CEO of Pioneer Natural Resources—offered him $2 million to stay quiet and disappear. He refused. And, of course, this year, Scott Sheffield admitted—during earnings week—that, yes, they had drilled all the good spots. It is all gassier now. He essentially confirmed that he misled the industry for years, claiming the reserves were more oil-rich than they were.
Jacobsen: Do reputations ever recover from a lie like that—whether admitted or not—once it’s found out years later? Especially when it’s not a one-off but a pattern repeated for personal gain?
Hirs: No, but it seems they don’t care. People move on. Institutions look the other way. The damage is done, and often the perpetrators keep going. Take real estate in New York. Major developers will not do business with anything tied to Donald Trump. Does that matter to Trump? Not. That could be part of why he owns so many golf clubs.
Jacobsen: Because they will not let him join any others?
Hirs: Some are open to the public for dining. But in terms of private membership—he’s unwelcome at many elite clubs. So he built his own. I’ve heard similar things from friends in the art world, academia, and philanthropy. The problem with tainted money, they say, is—if there’s enough of it, it stops being tainted. [Laughing] That’s how it goes.
Jacobsen: Do you think cryptocurrency and Bitcoin—if not all of it, then at least the most speculative parts and the figureheads who promote it—are headed toward that same fate? That is, reputational collapse?
Hirs: Yes. I believe so. Most of it has no economic justification whatsoever. Eventually, I expect it will all collapse. The foundation is hollow—it’s built on hype, not value.
Jacobsen: Do we know yet who was really behind that original Japanese pseudonym—Satoshi Nakamoto?
Hirs: No. There are countless internet theories. Some claim he is alive; others think he’s dead. No one knows for sure. It’s become mythological—almost like a deathbed creation with no real-world accountability.
Jacobsen: So many questions, but not all of them relevant to the urgent ones. Here’s a more grounded one: If oil prices drop significantly, does that hurt the geopolitical and military efforts of regimes like Russia and Iran?
Hirs: Yes. Low oil prices directly undermine the funding of Russian and Iranian war machines. For Iran, oil revenue is central to its regional influence—not just about Israel and the Middle East, but also in its long-standing rivalry with Saudi Arabia, which dates back centuries—not just decades.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Ed.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/10
Algimantas Kvecys, Chair of the 14-year-old Lithuanian Skeptics’ Association (LSD), has led its revitalized second phase since November 2022. Originally student-driven and focused on consumer rights and pseudoscience debunking, the LSD now leverages social media to engage broader audiences, supplementing occasional TV and print coverage. Kvecys highlights tensions with mainstream outlets that both spread and challenge misinformation. He notes Lithuania’s eclectic mix of imported fringe beliefs—from shamanism to “scientific” seawater therapies—rooted in Soviet-era broadcasts. The LSD collaborates with volunteer scientists to research and push for better critical thinking education, stronger consumer rights protection and stricter church-state separation.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your current position?
Algimantas Kvecys: Chairman of the Lithuanian Skeptics’ Association.
Jacobsen: How long has this organization been around? How long have you been Chair?
Kvecys: The Lithuanian Skeptics’ Association has existed for approximately fourteen years. It has gone through two distinct periods. The first period was active for some time, but eventually slowed down. For the past four to five years, we have entered a renewed, more active phase. I have been Chair since November 2022.
Jacobsen: How would you describe the character of the first phase? How does it differ from the second phase?
Kvecys: The first phase primarily involved young people, students with diverse academic and professional backgrounds. It mainly focused on consumer rights, protection from pseudoscience, and defending rational thought.
In the current phase, we have expanded our range of activities. Times have changed — how we communicate, the channels we use, and the tools we have to reach a broader audience. In the earlier phase, it was more challenging to gain that kind of visibility. Now, we primarily use social media to engage with the public.
Jacobsen: Do you get any television coverage? In other words, do you have connections with Lithuanian journalists? Do they provide support, or was using alternative platforms like social media more of a necessity?
Kvecys: We do occasionally receive media coverage. Sometimes, we appear on local television and in mainstream media outlets, though social media remains our primary channel for outreach.
For sure, we have some connections, but a lot of the time it’s very complicated because many of those news outlets and mainstream media channels are the ones spreading misinformation, quackery, pseudoscience, and charlatan ideas — precisely the things we’re opposing.
So there’s a real tension when it comes to calling out journalists who are promoting those views. At the same time, some of their colleagues, sitting right next to them, are trying to debunk the very same ideas their peers are spreading. So that’s a funny side of things.
Jacobsen: Now, words like charlatan, quack, and so on — these are great terms. Woo-woo is another wonderful invention of the twentieth or twenty-first century. James Randi popularized it. Do these have approximately the same meaning when translated into Lithuanian?
Kvecys: Yes.
Jacobsen: Do they have the same punch?
Kvecys: Yes. They do. But I’d maybe like to add something — or I might forget to mention it later. So yes, we use those kinds of terms, and they carry a similar punch in Lithuanian. But I want to make a disclaimer about how I view those things.
I see them more as part of the human condition — things that people have always done and probably always will do unless we fundamentally change, maybe through AI or some other transformative process.
These behaviours are ongoing. We sometimes use terms like quack or charlatan to delegitimize specific actions or beliefs, to frame them in a negative light . Still, ultimately, they reflect enduring human tendencies.
Jacobsen: Yes, each culture has its landscape of nonsense — pseudoscience, magical thinking, and so on. In Canada, for example, it tends to fall into this vaguely spiritual domain: crystals, horoscopes, tarot, homeopathy, naturopathy. What is the character of it in Lithuania?
Kvecys: These are the kinds of things people continue to do, and we often attach those behaviours to terms we want to delegitimize — framing them negatively or critically. But really, they reflect ongoing human tendencies.
If we’re talking about the current situation, it is not that different or exotic compared to other countries. The influence of various practices, products, services, and belief systems arrives rapidly , mostly imported.
You will find everything from South American sorcery to Mongolian shamanism, to cosmic philosophical ideas, to Celtic or Norse mythology, like the Thunder God —. It all gets mashed into an eclectic mix.
And from what I have seen in the work of journalists and researchers worldwide, this is a global pattern. So we are currently in a phase of total diversity and complete eclecticism, mainly due to the influence of the internet.
But there are deeper historical roots, especially from the Soviet era. At that time, Eastern philosophies, folk traditions, and even pagan beliefs were interwoven into various forms of art and cultural expression.
There were even shows on national television — back then controlled by the Soviet regime — about parapsychology, mind control, hypnosis, and channelling. These were broadcast to everyday Lithuanians and throughout the Soviet Union.
So there is a strong legacy here, especially in fringe, proto-scientific ideas. One example is the so-called “scientific” seawater therapies that gained popularity. But the diversity is so vast now that it’s hard to trace any single influence.
It becomes difficult to unravel the threads and say definitively where a particular idea originated. Typically, when you come across some strange medical device in Lithuania, you can trace it back a few steps .
Often, it leads to someone in Saint Petersburg from 50 years ago, working on pseudoscientific ideas like resonances, auras, or crystals —. Then, we merge those with emerging technologies, such as lasers.
And forty years later, that legacy results in a multi-level marketing scheme selling food supplements — All based on the claim that a crystal has detected liver damage caused by the microplastics or the disbalanced aura of fallen Western ideas, or something equally abstract.
Jacobsen: And the problem is not necessarily the ideas themselves. Wrong, bad, and even racist ideas have always been around. The real issue is the institutional backing — when those ideas are given power and structure, that’s when they become dangerous and harmful to people.
People wasting their time on strange beliefs is one thing — that can be harmless, even if misguided. But when it starts causing real harm, that’s when we have a problem.
Of all the assorted beliefs and movements in Lithuania’s landscape, which ones do you think are the most dangerous to people’s lives and livelihoods , specifically because of institutional support? That support could come from the government, NGOs, the church, or international influence.
Historically, you mentioned the Soviet Union as one such example , profoundly influential. Which ideas today do you think deserve more scrutiny in Lithuania, based on their actual and potential harm?
Kvecys: Quackery — especially quackery that government institutions strongly support. If you take something like homeopathy, for example , it’s widely accepted, even though it’s entirely unscientific. In some contexts, yes, it seems relatively harmless.
Jacobsen: That’s the big one in Canada, too, mainly pushed by some alternative health circles.
Kvecys: But here, it is not seen as exotic or strange. It’s considered quite normal, even traditional in some ways. So it’s not even seen as worth questioning, which is part of the problem. That kind of normalization makes it more difficult to challenge.
Jacobsen: I mean, it does not necessarily have to be esoteric. It can be something familiar to many countries — something widespread, but still harmful.
Kvecys: No, I would go in a different direction, if I may. Let’s consider how certain scientific discoveries give rise to new popular ideas — things like quantum entanglement, quantum physics more generally, or the microbiome.
Jacobsen: The stuff that, by Feynman’s admission, no one understands.
Kvecys: Exactly. Take microbiome research, for example — studies about how gut microbes influence health. These kinds of discoveries quickly attract the attention of practitioners looking for ways to legitimize their products and services.
They either repackage what they already offer under the new terminology or create entirely new offerings based on these ideas, whether or not they’re supported by science. So, for instance, here in Lithuania, we’ve seen a surge of new businesses producing fermented drinks full of bacteria.
And some of these businesses reference microbiome research showing links to cancer development or prevention. But then they start advertising that their drinks cure cancer.
Jacobsen: Of course.
Kvecys: And often, they’re structured like pyramid schemes. We’ve found cases where 50-year-old women — usually from rural areas, often cancer survivors or with family members affected by cancer — become distributors.
They know other women in similar situations, and the network spreads. These women then host informal meetings where the drinks are promoted. And we are not talking about regulated, evidence-based presentations.
Suppose you listen to some of the recordings that occasionally surface online. In that case, you’d want to cover your ears — claims about revitalizing every cell in the body, total rejuvenation, curing cancer, and so on.
This is a particularly harmful form of quackery. It’s not just pseudoscience — it’s the exploitation of emerging scientific language for commercial gain, regardless of whether the science supports the claims being made.
Jacobsen: Deepak Chopra is probably the most prominent North American example of this. He’s an MD — he should know better — but like Dr. Oz, he’s either easily corrupted or delusional. I remember one debate he had with Sam Harris and someone else, I forget who, where he described sex as “the mechanics of creation.” It’s also the sloppiness of language around these ideas that enables the deception.
Kvecys: Perfect bullshitters.
Jacobsen: Perfect bullshitters. Because they’re intelligent. They’re qualified. So they either know better, or they’re genuinely delusional. But given their intelligence, it’s more likely that they do know better . And that they’re just selling nonsense.
Kvecys: What I forgot to mention earlier is a specific case that might be useful to highlight , because it’s genuinely harmful. We researched the practice of physiognomy here in Lithuania. Physiognomy is the idea that you can determine a person’s character or personality traits by analyzing their facial features , like the structure, proportions, and so on.
These ideas are ancient. Aristotle had similar theories, and traditional Chinese culture also embraced such concepts. Over time, these beliefs have reemerged in various forms around the world.
In Lithuania, one recent wave of interest in physiognomy was not just another esoteric contemplation— it became apparent in every news outlet. There are a few practitioners here promoting physiognomy as a legitimate method. The real red flag came when they started claiming they could diagnose psychopathology by examining ear shapes . That you could detect liver cancer from the ear lobe. That kind of absurdity. But there was something even more troubling.
Jacobsen: I prefer reading poems.
Kvecys: [Laughing] Yes. In addition to publishing books, offering paid courses, and giving lectures, these practitioners were selling their services to companies. They were conducting HR seminars , training human resources personnel on how to use physiognomy in hiring decisions.
So, imagine: during a job interview, the HR person is scanning your face to determine if you’re better suited for manual labour or a management position — assessing your abilities, responsibilities, and potential based on your facial features.
That was a serious red flag. These companies were buying these lectures and attempting to incorporate this pseudoscientific method into their hiring processes. We launched a research initiative. We contacted numerous HR firms and media outlets.
One of the most significant breakthroughs was getting the government media outlet, LRT (Lithuanian National Radio and Television), to act. They had hosted around 20 different content pieces — radio shows, TV segments, interviews, and articles — about physiognomy. All of that content has since been taken down.
It was a sporadic case. You have to acknowledge that — it’s highly uncommon for 20 items from a single media source to be removed at once on a single topic. That rarely happens. Usually, editors will defend their outlet. They’ll defend the journalists and try to reach a compromise, arguing that the content does not violate ethical standards or laws, even under Lithuania’s journalistic ethics guidelines.
So, this was a unique moment. The physiognomy trend faced backlash from us, and in that case, it resulted in a pushback. The movement was stalled, at least to some degree.
Jacobsen: Fourteen years ago, when the group was founded, was there a specific catalyst? Was there a cultural event that triggered its creation?
Kvecys: I do not know. I don’t know what the exact catalyst was.
Jacobsen: In North America, you’ll find things like horoscopes in almost every newspaper . From small-town publications to major outlets. Is that also common here?
Kvecys: Yes. Even one of the most prominent media outlets in Lithuania, which had an astrology and horoscope section on its website, removed it a couple of years ago. They issued a statement saying, “We are being responsible; we’ve taken it down” — as if that were enough.
But now it is back. Ownership changed, policies shifted, and the section returned. That shows there’s public demand. There’s a practical need for it, at least from a consumer perspective. The horoscope section is one of the most visited parts of many websites here in Lithuania.
And walk into any shopping mall and check the magazine and newspaper stands. You’ll see publications on witchcraft, horoscopes, astrology, and alternative medicine. It’s everywhere. All the major media outlets carry this type of content . Except for the government-owned outlet. But all the others include horoscope sections, and they’re consistently among the most visited sections.
Jacobsen: What about academic fraud? In two forms:
First, people supporting pseudoscientific products or claims while presenting false credentials , like putting “Doctor,” “MD,” or “PhD” next to their name without having the proper accreditation. Or even worse — a more subtle case — they do have a credential, but it is entirely unrelated to the subject matter.
For example, someone with a doctorate in theology claiming to be “a doctor” in the context of medical or scientific expertise. It’s like the old joke:
A person comes across a car crash. People are yelling, “Please help! I need a doctor!”
Someone runs over shouting, “I’m a doctor! I can help!”
And the person says, “Oh, thank goodness. What should we do first, doctor?”
And the man replies, “Oh — I’m a Doctor of Philosophy.”
“What?”
“Yes, in existentialist philosophy.”
“So… what does it all mean, then?”
[Laughing] So that’s the issue — people assuming that any “doctor” has relevant qualifications. That’s harder for the general public to parse, especially when they have not spent time critically examining pseudoscientific claims. People see the title “doctor” and assume it implies a higher level of analytical capacity or credibility.
Kvecys: People see base credentials — and for the average person, that’s enough.
Jacobsen: The first case is more obvious — straight-up fraud, lying about one’s qualifications. But the second case is more subtle. Yes, the person may have genuine credentials and analytical skills — they may read and write at a high level . But they’re applying those skills inappropriately, or dishonestly, outside their area of expertise.
That can be just as damaging, and much harder to detect. What do you find is more prominent here in Lithuania? Are there any notable cases you’d want to point to?
Kvecys: Actually, I have not heard of any prominent cases in Lithuania that would fit that pattern — where respected researchers or academics veer into quackery as a kind of side interest. Their colleagues ignore it or let it slide. I am not aware of examples like that happening here.
Mainly, there are more critiques of how research is conducted, but not cases of researchers ruthlessly implementing proto-scientific or pseudoscientific ideas into legitimate scientific processes. I have not come across that.
There have been cases involving well-known public figures — people with credentials, or scientists — who enter politics and attempt to influence how things should be done.
But their actions were not based on fraudulent research, as far as I know. There was another case we investigated — not quite the same issue, but still relevant.
It involved how a university failed to vet businesses using its resources properly. So, this happened at Vytautas Magnus University in Kaunas, at its business incubator. One business managed to infiltrate the incubator and benefited from lower rent and access to university-linked resources.
What they were doing was oxygenating tap water — regular cold water — and branding it as “tropospheric water.” They marketed it as if it came from the forest, calling it “tropo water.”
They claimed it was collected through special processes and infused with oxygen. The messaging was: “Drink one glass and it’s like spending three hours in the wilderness — fresh oxygen, full rejuvenation.”
Of course, this was complete charlatanism — a scam. We conducted an investigation, and the business was immediately kicked out of the incubator.
Jacobsen: A perfect case of pseudoscience trying to borrow legitimacy.
Kvecys: They were using the university’s name, facilities, and even scientific language in their marketing.
They said, “We are based at the university,” wore white lab coats, and invoked academic credibility to make it sound like a scientifically grounded product.
Jacobsen: Like those YouTube ads with a guy in a white coat saying, “I’m a doctor.”
Kvecys: Yes — same tactic. They used white coats and university affiliations to give their claims a veneer of legitimacy when, in reality, it was total quackery.
And, as usual, when I traced the founder’s sources, I quickly found that the core ideas were based on the work of a Japanese “scientist” who claimed you could talk to water, infuse it with emotions, and restructure it based on your intent —
That emotionally charged water could influence your body depending on how it was “charged.” You can almost always trace these kinds of pseudoscientific products back to a similar origin. It’s typical.
Jacobsen: When you critique these practices publicly — so you build your case and then present it — how do the people you are criticizing typically react?
Kvecys: Every situation is different. We have not had a considerable number of those cases — it takes time and resources to investigate and build a solid case.
Sometimes we laugh at them and move on. But if we have concrete evidence — something that violates consumer rights, communication laws, or other regulations — then we can pursue it to achieve real change.
Some business owners will immediately message us on Facebook Messenger and say things like, “Stop it.” Or, “I will come after you.” Others, especially those running closed Facebook groups we have investigated, will start posting things like, “We’re being attacked,” or “Someone is chasing us — beware, community.”
They warn their followers but also spin it into a marketing tactic: “Buy more products because we might get shut down!” In some cases, we have received legal threats — letters drafted by lawyers intended to scare us. They say, “Drop the case or we’ll sue you, we’ll impose fines,” and so on.
Jacobsen: Do they ever follow through?
Kvecys: No. It has never gone that far. These are scare tactics. Most of these businesses are relatively small — they do not have much money or legal muscle. And they probably realize that if it went to court, they would lose.
They cannot win based on the facts. So, every case plays out differently. Some people stay silent and keep doing their thing. They do not care. For example, in the physiognomy case , they just continued operating.
They said, “We lost access to one Lithuanian media outlet, but there are twenty others.” And of course, there’s always social media. So they keep going there. But because we are not violating the law , we are pointing out that they are violating ethical standards — it becomes a bit tricky.
And those ethical standards are often higher for institutions like Lithuanian National Television.
Jacobsen: So this raises the question: Should we, in our respective countries, establish a legal context where the benchmark — especially around health claims — is higher than just ethics violations? Should some laws make it illegal to give people false hope, waste their time and money, and steer them away from real, evidence-based treatments? In other words, should this be something considered at the parliamentary level?
Kvecys: In Lithuania, we already have much stricter regulations of health claims compared to countries like the United States or Canada. Far more restrictive. But the issue is not with the policies — it is with enforcement. Very few cases are pursued.
There are not enough resources, either within civil society organizations like ours or within governmental bodies, to track and investigate all these cases. And there is another problem , especially with pseudoscientific services:
People are often ashamed or reluctant to admit they were scammed. Suppose someone tried an alternative treatment and it failed. In that case, they rarely report it — not to authorities, not even to their families. They stay silent.
So we have a lack of resources, no systematic enforcement, and victims who do not come forward. That is the typical situation. The laws are strict, the problem is with enforcement and tracking. There is no proper tracking system in place.
Jacobsen: So they are paperweight laws.
Kvecys: That is right. Most of these scams now live on platforms like Telegram, in closed Facebook groups, or on niche online forums. And they reach vast audiences , spread across Central and Eastern Europe and beyond. Or they’re doing in-person presentations.
However, the problem lies in the fact that government organizations lack a process for creating fake accounts or participating in online forums and closed groups. They do not have the legal right to do that. So they are not monitoring the places where most of this charlatanism is happening.
That is the real issue. Yes, once in a while, they do uncover something — maybe a business here or there — but it is just a fraction of what is going on. A tiny fraction. And I am not talking about borderline ethical issues. I am talking about actual violations of the law — false treatment and cure claims, for instance.
Jacobsen: Is your healthcare system nationalized?
Kvecys: Yes, it is a mixed system. Most of it is public. We have a national health insurance program — essentially a national healthcare system. But there is also a private sector, and the balance between the two is relatively stable.
Jacobsen: Do you coordinate with any scientific associations or societies?
Kvecys: We work with a network of researchers across various fields — philosophy, chemistry, biology, genetics, nutrition, and so on. These are individual scientists, primarily based in Lithuania, who support us when we need expert input to investigate a specific case of potential quackery.
Jacobsen: So not a formal network, but a collaborative one?
Kvecys: Not a formal organization, but individual researchers who are quite willing to help. And yes, we are very grateful for that.
Jacobsen: And they generally share your concerns?
Kvecys: I believe so. There are a few prominent researchers who casually debunk pseudoscientific claims. For example, there’s Gabrielius from Kaunas University — he focuses on exposing fake medical devices. the kind of devices where you touch it with your fingers and it supposedly scans your entire body for diseases.
Jacobsen: Like a Star Trek tricorder.
Kvecys: Or something like that, typical nonsense. So, he casually debunks those kinds of claims. Unfortunately, there are not too many researchers doing that.
Jacobsen: Would you say there’s any particular idea or practice in Lithuania that remains acutely harmful, even after being debunked? Something that continues to affect people despite having been thoroughly disproven?
Kvecys: All of these things have been debunked at some point, but that rarely makes a difference. The core motivations behind why people engage in these practices are not rooted in evidence.
From what I have seen, most of it is about finding a cure for uncertainty. When someone is in a situation where their health is at risk — and there is no straightforward remedy or established procedure — they face overwhelming uncertainty.
They need to resolve that uncertainty somehow. So, whatever reaches them at that moment — whether it is a practice, a device, a supplement, or a so-called medicine — they may embrace it.
Not necessarily because it works, but because it reduces anxiety. For example, consider someone who is unemployed and anxious about finding a job. If they believe that physiognomy lectures will help them “read” their interviewers and gain an edge, it may lower their stress.
It does not help them get hired. But in the short term, if it reduces their uncertainty, it becomes appealing. I am now paraphrasing Stuart Vyse a bit — it is his idea — but I agree with him. You see this dynamic everywhere.
People are simply trying to reduce their anxieties. That is the primary driver. And if something “works” for that — even without evidence — they will continue using it. Even though all of these pseudoscientific ideas have been debunked, people do not respond rationally when they are under stress. You cannot provide meaningful education about charlatanism when someone is in crisis.
Because when people are in real-life situations filled with uncertainty, their cognitive capacity drops. They do not have the time, energy, or resources to engage in critical thinking. They want immediate relief. That is why we focus our efforts on removing misleading information from public platforms —
So that when people do go searching for answers, they are less likely to fall into the trap of quackery and pseudoscience. And hopefully, they find better, evidence-based ways to cope. So I think it is a better route to go , focusing on removing harmful content and redirecting people to better alternatives.
And yes, I did not directly answer your earlier question about one specific harmful idea, because honestly, there are so many. For example, there is an association of Catholic exorcists in Lithuania. That is highly damaging.
People involved in those practices often do not receive real psychological or medical help. They are left untreated or even harmed. Then there was a recent business I found on Facebook. They were selling epoxy pyramids with twisted copper wire inside. It’s essentially a coil, marketed as something that “collects the resonance of the universe.”
At first, the messaging was the usual — spirituality, personal enhancement, vague claims. But after a few rounds of updates, the messaging evolved into cancer treatment. They began claiming that these amulets or talismans could cure first, second, and even third-stage cancer.
That is incredibly dangerous. This points to the broader issue of diversification in pseudoscientific claims. Please make sure to mention this in the interview:
We are living in a moment where multiple layers of uncertainty are converging — climate change, COVID-19, the war in Ukraine, and now the looming threat of a broader conflict in Eastern Europe, plus people’s challenges. That is the backdrop where these anxieties take root.
This is a very uncertain time for Eastern Europeans — and Europeans in general. I see a resurgence of superstitious thinking as people try to cope with that anxiety. So now all the old things are back on the table: red string bracelets, amulets, tarot readings, horoscopes. And they have multiplied by a factor of five, at least. It is prevalent.
Jacobsen: What about collaboration with other skeptic groups? I interviewed Claire Klingenberg a while ago — she works with the European skeptic organizations’ network. Do you take part in that? Do you collaborate with national groups, share ideas, share resources , maybe even have a drink and laugh about the nonsense in your country versus theirs?
Kvecys: In Lithuania, we have two main physical formats for the skeptical community. There’s our annual conference, held on October 13. Then there’s a regular meet-up format — Skeptics’ Meet-Up — where members of our community and others gather to exchange ideas.
Most of the participants are scientists from the network I mentioned earlier. In terms of international cooperation, the biggest issue is that many of the organizations abroad are relatively weak. We are also not in a position to provide enough resources to help strengthen smaller groups.
Without that, there is little motivation for genuine cooperation. Sure, it is fun to go to Sweden, grab a drink, and laugh about the pseudoscience in our respective countries. But when you get down to the practical aspects — regulations, lobbying, policy proposals — each country is very different.
The cultural contexts are different. So I do not see much common ground when it comes to enacting real change on that level. Many of these organizations are too weak for serious, strategic collaboration. That is just the reality. It is different from the Center for Inquiry. That is a stronger organization.
Jacobsen: Very strong. Yes, to be fair, the United States is very focused on its internal issues right now. It has turned inward , not just politically, but also in terms of the skeptical movement. And from what you are saying, the same seems true for Eastern, Northern, and Central Europe.
With the Kremlin’s invasion of Ukraine, the rising anxiety, protests, and instability, skeptical organizations in those regions may be turning more toward local or national concerns , closer to home. It is challenging to get skeptic and humanist groups from different regions to collaborate in a significant way.
Even with funding and structure — like Humanists International — it has been a real challenge to ensure global representation on boards and to sustain international cooperation. It takes a lot of time and effort. And even when progress is made, it can easily stall or fall apart.
Kvecys: Yes, exactly — take the European Skeptics Association. I spoke with them and asked, “What kinds of actions and initiatives are you pursuing?” And their response was, “We host one annual conference — that’s it.” But they should be going after European Union subsidies and building larger-scale projects. Instead, all they do is run that one conference.
So I said, “Okay — if you’re experienced people with connections across Europe and you’re still not finding opportunities to secure proper funding from the European Union — which offers plenty of programs — then what are we supposed to do?”
To apply for these programs, you at least need the resources to participate. But if those organizations are not even attempting to access that support, then what can we do? Maybe we will. Maybe the Lithuanian Skeptics will take that initiative.
So I do not want these efforts to exist merely as a meeting point for exchanging ideas. It is a platform to create real, tangible change.
Jacobsen: That highlights two of the most significant issues in most secular or freethought organizations. The first is the challenge of regional and international cooperation. That isn’t easy. And the second is succession planning. When someone decides they are done — either because of term limits or burnout — or when there is a formal rotation every few years, there needs to be a proper transfer of leadership.
If a group is built around a personality — like the James Randi Foundation — it may thrive for a time. But when that person steps back, the organization’s influence can quickly fade, despite the legacy they leave behind.
Kvecys: I think all organizations have to build in both of those aspects. You need a charismatic or visionary leader of some sort — yes. But you also need a strong institutional foundation to support that person and survive beyond them.
If an organization lacks that deeper structure, it simply will not have a lasting impact. I am not thrilled about how involved Richard Dawkins is in the Center for Inquiry right now. It feels like too much is centred on one individual.
That level of personal branding can overshadow the broader purpose of the organization. Even for me, it is a bit much.
Jacobsen: I gather and tell the stories — I do not control them.
Kvecys: Right. It’s just… too much focus on him, I think.
Jacobsen: Final question — more about personality. Last night I was walking around, having something to eat, picking up some groceries, and I ended up hanging out at whatI would describe as a Lithuanian rock concert. What was with all the Dalai Lama posters everywhere? I think I saw a Buddhist monk. So, the background , I do not want to over-interpret that, but of the religious leaders, he is one of the least problematic.
Kvecys: It’s more about the context. The Dalai Lama is expected to announce a successor — someone who would be the next Dalai Lama after him. So, there is both a political and religious context behind it. We have a small Buddhist community here. There is a Tibetan Square in Užupis — just a couple of hundred meters from where you were.
Jacobsen: That’s probably why I saw that guy. He was in Buddhist robes, had a shaved head — very European-looking — and he was wearing sneakers. I loved that.
Kvecys: Yes, we have a few Buddhists here. Tibetan Square exists, and that explains the posters and the imagery you saw. That’s the context.
Jacobsen: What are your favourite skeptic quotes or literature you would recommend to others?
Kvecys: Let me say this — Yuval Noah Harari once wrote:
“You could never convince a monkey to give you a banana by promising him limitless bananas after death in monkey heaven.”
And for literature, I highly recommend a book by Kateryna Zorya. The title is The Government Used to Hide the Truth, But Now We Can Speak.
It is a fantastic book , insightful. Anyone who wants to understand how Soviet and post-Soviet esotericism, New Age thinking, and quackery have evolved in Ukraine, Belarus, and the Baltic states should read it.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Kvecys.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/09
Dr. Steve Pearlman, founder of The Critical Thinking Institute, discusses the urgent need to teach authentic critical thinking skills based on how the brain naturally processes information. He distinguishes between System 1 (fast, automatic thinking) and System 2 (deliberate, analytical thinking), emphasizing the value of metacognition and domain-specific expertise. Pearlman critiques superficial critical thinking programs and warns against indiscriminate policy cuts, such as those from the Department of Governmental Efficiency. He advocates for reasoning over authority in education and relationships, noting that even modest improvements in decision-making—like a 5% gain—can radically transform lives and institutions over time. Find out more here: http://www.thectinstitute.com.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Steve Pearlman. He’s an educator, author, and founder of The Critical Thinking Institute.
He holds a Ph.D. in English from Indiana University of Pennsylvania and previously co-founded one of the first higher education programs in the United States focused solely on teaching critical thinking across disciplines. With over three decades of experience in higher education, he has developed and implemented methods to enhance reasoning and decision-making skills for students, faculty, and professionals across academic, military, and corporate sectors. Pearlman is the creator of the Neurocognitive Learning approach to critical thinking and host of The Critical Thinking Institute Podcast. His work focuses on the practical application of critical thinking for individuals and institutions. Thank you so much for joining me today. I appreciate it, Steve.
Dr. Steve Pearlman: It’s my pleasure—thanks for having me.
Jacobsen: Critical thinking can be a meaningful concept or just a buzzword. How are we defining it, technically?
Pearlman: Yes. Unfortunately, critical thinking is more often a buzzword than a meaningful practice. People throw it around as if it’s something easy to define.
But we have research on this. When we ask people—including educators who are supposed to teach it—to define critical thinking, we usually get vague catchphrases and little substance.
When we ask them to define catchphrases like “analyzing” or “thinking outside the box,” things start to fall apart. It’s very difficult for people to define those concepts clearly or consistently.
Take “thinking outside the box,” for example. It sounds good. But is any idea valuable just because it’s different or unconventional? Is that really what makes something a product of critical thinking?
I could devise an unconventional solution to world hunger—like hunting dinosaurs—but that’s not thoughtful or useful.
So, we take a very different approach at The Critical Thinking Institute. We’ve left the catchphrases behind. We look at critical thinking from a foundational perspective—what the thinking act is. We even consider it from an evolutionary standpoint, asking what thinking evolved to do and how we can harness that understanding to improve reasoning in real, measurable ways.
We also identified the core systems that run in our brains, no matter what we think. How do we teach people to become self-aware of those core systems? And then, how do we teach people to maximize their use of those core systems? That’s essentially the Neurocognitive Learning method. That’s how we approach critical thinking.
What we call it is a metacognitive process. Metacognition is a fancy word for being aware of your thinking while you’re thinking. So, we teach people to recognize what their brain is trying to do when it thinks and, therefore, take control of that process and do it better.
Jacobsen: You’ve done some work on healthy relationships. What defines a healthy relationship, and what are the top two skills people should consider?
Pearlman: Yes. A healthy relationship doesn’t mean a perfect relationship. It’s not necessarily about being ideal or even “successful” by some external standard. However, it is a relationship in which people respect one another.
So, the two most important things to remember for a healthy relationship are respect for one another and empathy for the other person’s position, boundaries, and needs.
The second is communication. Most relationships fall into trouble because both parties hold different expectations and lack sufficient communication and dialogue around those expectations. So, we want to focus our healthy relationship strategies on that.
Of course, if we can think critically with our partner, that makes it even easier.
Jacobsen: Now, when discussing respect, what does that look like?
Pearlman: It’s easy to identify moments of disrespect. That’s when someone’s needs are not being met, they’re not being heard, or they’ve voiced something important, but the other person isn’t listening. Or they’re constantly being talked over in conversation. So, respect is the opposite of that.
Respect means wanting to understand the other person’s needs. It doesn’t mean you can always meet all those needs perfectly, but it means wanting to understand them and doing your best to meet and honour them. Respect boundaries where they exist. Respect needs, desires, and interests. Support the person in whatever their interests are, and so forth.
I don’t even love the term compromise, though we often use it in the context of healthy relationships. Compromise can suggest that we’re constantly giving in to one another. Compromise is a part of any relationship, but the most successful relationships aren’t about tallying who gave in more. They’re about seeing the relationship as a team effort, where both partners work together toward each other’s success.
That’s a different way to think about it, and that mindset shift greatly affects how people approach their role in a relationship. If we tell people they must make many compromises, we get into a scoreboard mentality: “I made seven compromises; you only made three.” Or, “I made four big compromises—how dare you not meet me halfway?”
Instead, if we look at it as a team effort—about supporting one another’s interests—then it becomes less about compromising and more about mutual support, finding things we can do together that make both of us happy at the same time.
Jacobsen: You’ve also done work in situations where things haven’t just become unhealthy but have crossed into abuse. How do you apply critical thinking in that context?
Pearlman: We teach people through online courses. I used to run these kinds of courses on sexual assault prevention and similar topics.
Most of what we taught were not physical techniques. We focused on things akin to what’s sometimes called verbal judo—the ability to manage a conversation, deflect it, or steer it in a way that either de-escalates the situation or allows the person to get out of a sticky or dangerous scenario.
We teach other preventive strategies, but one key feature is knowing how to communicate in a way that gives you more control over the situation. That’s where critical thinking comes into play—when we have an expectation that isn’t met, the brain experiences conflict.
Our brains operate through frameworks—it’s how we navigate situations. However, each person has their framework that they apply.
Here’s an example we use based on a real story someone shared with us: A young woman went to another guy’s apartment, and things started to become problematic. The standard and correct thing is to say no and assert boundaries. And we advocate for that. Everyone should feel empowered to set and express clear boundaries.
But in some cases, that does not stop a would-be rapist—because, unfortunately, some perpetrators expect resistance, and they’ve already worked around that expectation. So when the woman in this situation said “no,” and it didn’t work—and the man started to become more physical—she remembered something we covered in our training videos: If you do not give a direct resistant response, then the other person may not experience the situation as resistance, and therefore, may not escalate their behaviour further.
So, instead of resisting in a way that would meet his expected framework, she changed the framework entirely. She said, “Hey, listen, I’ve got to go to the bathroom first.”
She ran to the bathroom, locked the door, and immediately texted her friends to come pick her up and bang on the guy’s door. She stayed in the bathroom for about ten minutes. Eventually, her friends arrived, knocked loudly on the door, and she was able to get out safely.
She did that by applying critical thinking—not by resisting or complying but by changing the situation’s structure. Instead of meeting the aggressor in his expected script, she used deflection and delay to create an escape.
Critical thinking can offer that in high-stakes, real-world situations. It’s the ability to understand how the brain—yours and sometimes someone else’s—processes a moment and then uses that insight to navigate toward a better outcome. Often, that outcome is mutual. In a case like this, it’s about safety and survival.
Jacobsen: Can you quickly explain the difference between System 1 and System 2 thinking? That’s from the late Daniel Kahneman.
Pearlman: The brain has two general thinking systems.
System 1 is the fast system we use for rapid decision-making. It is instinctive—essentially a survivalist mechanism. So, often, when we’re in a fight-flight, freeze, or fawn response, we’re operating in System 1. It also includes automatic processes—things we’ve committed to memory to the point where we no longer have to think actively about them.
System 2, on the other hand, is the slow, effortful, deliberate, and critical thinking system. It’s where conscious reasoning and deeper analysis happen.
It’s possible—and sometimes positive—to move things from System 2 into System 1. For example, it can become automatic when we learn a skill thoroughly. However, the problem is that once something enters System 1, we often stop thinking about it altogether—even when we should revisit it, especially if it concerns values, beliefs, or assumptions. Those automatic responses become the frameworks we use to act on the world.
So, what we do at The Critical Thinking Institute is to help people recognize when their brains are relying too heavily on System 1 and how to shift into System 2 deliberately. The brain wants to resolve things quickly—uncertainty threatens it. Even though it’s capable of deep thought, the brain prefers efficiency and predictability.
If System 1 can resolve uncertainty with a conclusion it feels is “good enough,” it will do so because that serves its job: keeping us safe and stable. But that is not always the most effective way to think—especially about complex or importantissues. So, learning how to pull your brain out of System 1 and engage System 2 is essential.
Jacobsen: Are there people—besides those working in fields like Bayesian reasoning or quantum mechanics—genuinely do not feel fear or stress around high or even medium levels of uncertainty?
Pearlman: It depends. Some people embrace uncertainty more than others, but it’s less about intelligence or field and more about their capacity to entertain uncertainty as play.
There’s some fascinating research around this. For example, if we tell students they have an upcoming test, they almost instinctively interpret that as a threat. Even students who’ve studied well often have a fear-based response—concern about their grades, the unknown questions, performance, etc.
Now, let’s take students with test anxiety. They especially view the test through a lens of threat and uncertainty. But we see a shift if we work with them to reframe the situation—not as a threat, but as a challenge. How do we do that? By walking them through the tools they already have: study skills, prior successes, preparation techniques, etc.
When students focus on what they can do, they view the test as a challenge rather than a danger. Once that shift happens, they can engage more playfully and productively with the material—even while facing uncertainty.
That’s the key difference between people who can operate well in high-uncertainty environments and those who struggle. It’s not about eliminating uncertainty—it’s about interpreting it as something to be embraced rather than feared. Do I see it as a challenge I have the tools to face or as a threat to my identity or well-being?
Even physicists—who are perfectly at home dealing with the uncertainty of quantum mechanics, knowing they might never resolve their questions in a lifetime—can feel threatened in different contexts. Something like going to a party, for instance, might trigger more anxiety in them than contemplating the probabilistic nature of particles.
Pearlman: It depends on the field, thoughts, and the person.
Jacobsen: Yes. So, it’s less about being ensconced in a mindset and more about a trained orientation.
Pearlman: Everything with the brain and thinking is habitual to a certain extent. It’s about what we habituate ourselves to. And it also has a lot to do with how we’re raised. That makes a significant difference. The epigenetics of how we rear children is incredibly interesting.
For example, if children are raised in a more authoritarian household—where they’re expected to obey because Mom or Dad says so—and when they ask, “Why do I have to do it that way?” the answer is, “Because I told you to,” then we see clear developmental consequences. Research shows that children from those environments ask fewer questions in school and life. They also typically demonstrate less critical thinking, especially early on.
By contrast, children raised in more intellectually engaged households—where reasons are given and policies, decisions, and expectations are discussed—tend to become students who ask more questions, are more comfortable with ambiguity, and demonstrate stronger reasoning skills. This is unsurprising, but it’s important to recognize—and we have solid research to support it.
There’s a strong argument for raising children in ways where reason prevails over authority. That doesn’t mean we must negotiate everything with our kids—it’s not about constant negotiation. It’s about allowing reason to guide the process.
So, for example, if you say to your child, “It’s 9:00 PM—time for bed,” and the child asks, “Why do I have to go to bed at 9:00? Why is that my bedtime? Why do you get to decide?”—you might respond with something like:
“It’s not just about us deciding. When you stay up past 9:00 on school nights, you have trouble getting up for school the next morning. School is important, so getting to bed on time helps with that. That’s why bedtime is 9:00.”
Then the child might say, “That makes sense.” The outcome is the same—they go to bed at 9:00—but through a completely different thinking process.
Now, maybe the child responds, “Wait a second—it’s the State of the Union address tonight. I want to stay up and watch it because we will discuss it in class tomorrow.”
That’s a good reason. In that case, the child should stay up later. What the child learns in that moment is that reason prevails in your household—not blind authority.
Jacobsen: Speaking of authority, we now have the American administration—specifically a second Trump administration—with the newly minted Department of Governmental Efficiency. However, “minted” might not be the right word since it’s a restructured version of a previous department. Most government institutions, large or small, have some inefficiency—that’s just the nature of systems. So, the premise itself is not entirely unreasonable.
When you critically assess the definition of waste concerning the Department of Governmental Efficiency in the United States, how do they propose defining waste and fraud? What is your critical assessment of the quality of those definitions—either implicit or explicit—and the efficiency of weeding this stuff out, of extirpating it?
Pearlman: As you said, the premise is sound. There certainly can be waste in government—potentially considerable—which should be evaluated continuously.
But here’s the reality: we’re spending less on federal employees than twenty years ago. That number has been consistently declining in the United States, not increasing.
Now, that’s a different part of the question because there may still be waste in other areas that need to be addressed—and it’s certainly not just about employee salaries. The Department of Governmental Efficiency (DOGE) is approaching this indiscriminately.
Take, for example, the idea of defunding scientific research—like cutting funds from the NIH. That has hugeramifications. You’re not just saving money in the short term; you’re potentially costing the country far more in the long term.
Let’s consider the cost-benefit of research into treatments for Parkinson’s disease. Many promising experiments were underway and have since been shut down. These aren’t things you can restart overnight. It will take years to reboot that work, assuming it even gets revived.
Now think about the cost of caring for people with Parkinson’s over time—relative to the cost of continuing those experiments. It’s potentially far more expensive not to fund that research.
You can also extrapolate that same logic to other federal agencies and programs.
So, while stopping funding looks good on a budget line in the short term, it may cost taxpayers much more in the long term. Any decision about cuts should involve a comprehensive cost-benefit analysis.
However, we don’t see evidence that such an analysis drives DOGE’s efforts. On the contrary, they’re cutting indiscriminately without a strategic or evidence-based framework.
So the real question becomes: are these cuts made intelligently, or are they made for the sake of making cuts?
Unfortunately, it appears to be the latter, not the former.
Jacobsen: So the chainsaw metaphor is apt?
Pearlman: Yes. The now-famous image of Elon Musk holding up a chainsaw at CPAC—used as a metaphor for DOGE—is quite appropriate.
It’s a great metaphor because chainsaws don’t build anything. They just cut things down. They’re powerful tools for destruction.
We get that, especially in Texas. But chainsaws aren’t good for nuanced work. They’re certainly not designed for careful restructuring or system improvement.
And that’s exactly what DOGE is doing—cutting indiscriminately. There’s no subtlety. No long-term strategic vision. Just destruction.
And there are problems with chainsaws. The chain can snap and injure you. It can kick back and cut you. So we can extend that metaphor to DOGE—because a chainsaw is exactly what they’re using.
Yes, cuts are necessary. But wouldn’t we prefer them to be surgical? Wouldn’t we prefer a precise scalpel that corrects what needs correcting?
Instead, we’re seeing a chainsaw, which can only amputate. It cannot repair a limb. So, if you want a metaphor, the surgical one works far better.
Jacobsen: Is there something we can apply from the critical thinking methods you teach regarding domain-specific expertise? I’m thinking of the expertise involved in startups—like administration and selling a vision—instead of expertise in bureaucracy, finance, or accounting. Do you think that’s part of the core issue with the Department of Governmental Efficiency—not the premise, but the application?
Pearlman: No—it’s not a matter of domain-specific expertise. It’s more a matter of domain-specific inexpertise.
In other words, it’s not just that they lack the right expertise—it’s that they operate from the wrong premise. The flawed premise is that simply cutting for the sake of cutting is inherently valuable and that downsizing is good in and of itself.
We’re seeing decisions being made to trim down agencies by arbitrary percentages, regardless of what those agencies do. There’s no way they’ve meaningfully reviewed the operations of all these departments.
So, before we even get to questions about domain-specific competence, we must address that they operate from a fundamentally flawed principle. Cutting for its own sake is not inherently good. It can be costly and dangerous.
Yes—some cuts may be necessary. But they need to be strategic. Otherwise, we’re left with reckless amputations that hurt the very systems they’re meant to improve.
Jacobsen: What are the long-term consequences of a lack of critical thinking—for an individual or an organization?
Pearlman: That’s a great question. For an organization, the typical outcome is failure—the end of the organization.
Think about it: nothing more important to any business or institution than how effectively it can observe what’s going on in its environment—how well it understands its customers and clients’ needs, its competition, and the broader trends in the world. Based on that understanding, it has to make adjustments, solve problems, and make sound decisions.
That’s how an organization stays viable. That’s how it survives—and thrives.
It has to be nimble, responsive, and grounded in good reasoning.
Pearlman: So, critical thinking is the most important thing. Companies that stop thinking—or become stagnant—are the ones that typically disappear. They die off because they’re no longer able to compete intellectually.
You see this often in the tech world, where it happens quickly. Take Yahoo, for example. Yahoo used to be the dominant search engine. It was the biggest in the world for a time.
But then they got out-thought by Google. And now, Yahoo isn’t even on most people’s radar as a search engine. They’ve pivoted to offer other services, but the core dominance they once had is long gone. That’s how fast innovation can shift—and if you’re not continuously thinking critically and adapting, you fall behind.
In life, it’s the same general principle. Now, we don’t usually die from poor decisions—though tragically, that can happen in extreme cases. But more often, the cost is Bunfulfilled potential.
We fail to live the kind of lives we want to live. This might show up in our careers, parenting, social lives, and more.
There’s some fascinating research on this. They’ve found that IQ is not the biggest differentiator regarding the quality of decisions people make. Critical thinking is.
IQ—your raw processing power—can be high. But you won’t use that processing power effectively without learning critical thinking skills. Critical thinking is a skill set—just like reading or math. It has to be taught. It has to be practiced.
And the data is clear: critical thinking is a far more powerful predictor of who makes successful or damaging life decisions than raw intelligence alone.
But here’s the problem—most people never get taught dedicated critical thinking skills.
So now imagine this: say someone did learn critical thinking, and that skill helped them make just 5% better decisions. That’s a humble number—very conservative. Let’s not even say 75% or 90% better decisions. Let’s say 5%.
Imagine if starting in adolescence, you made just 5% better decisions every day of your life. Think about where you’d be today. Even if you’re in a good place now, think how much better things might be.
That 5% course correction—compounded over years—would dramatically shift the trajectory of your life. And that’s the promise of critical thinking. With even modest improvements to the quality of our decisions, we could live very different—and often far better—lives.
Jacobsen: One last question. What do you think about philosophical or so-called critical thinking programs that are sold or advocated as such—but aren’t? Some present themselves in subtle or nuanced ways that appear to teach critical thinking, but there’s a kind of linguistic misdirection. They seem like they’re offering something rigorous when, in fact, they’re not.
Pearlman: There are a lot of well-intentioned programs out there. But they often rely on catchphrases and buzzwords to bring it full circle.
Some programs focus on problem-solving processes—different step-by-step paths to solutions, sometimes with built-in stages for revisiting ideas. These can be useful.
However, I recommend caution with critical thinking programs that approach the brain from the outside. By that, I mean they start with a constructed model or process of what critical thinking should look like and then try to train your brain to follow that process.
That can be useful in limited situations. For example, knowing the scientific method, an important structure, is helpful. But what we do—and where real critical thinking flourishes—is different.
We start by understanding how the brain naturally thinks. We make people aware of that and then build on those innate neurological processes. We amplify and elevate what the brain already does when thinking critically, and that’s where real growth happens. That’s where authentic critical thinking skills develop—not by forcing the brain to mimic some external pattern, but by working with its built-in architecture.
Jacobsen: Dr. Pearlman, any final thoughts?
Pearlman: No—I think we covered a lot. That was wonderful.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Steve.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/08
Leon Langdon, Advocacy Officer at Humanists International, has served for nearly two years. He holds a law degree from Ireland and a Master’s in International Relations from NYU. While at NYU, he interned at the UN Counter-Terrorism Directorate and worked on humanitarian and geopolitical issues as part of Malta’s Security Council mission. After attending a humanist wake, he joined Humanists International in September 2023. He now advocates at the UN for freedom of religion or belief, secular governance, and expression. Langdon describes his path from law in Ireland and international relations studies at NYU to interning at the UN. After attending a humanist wake, he joined Humanists International in September 2023 as Advocacy Officer. He outlines the structured UN advocacy process, which involves drafting statements based on Special Rapporteur reports and member consultations, reviewing them internally, and delivering speeches. His priorities include freedom of religion or belief, secular governance, human rights, and supporting global humanists at risk worldwide.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your current title?
Leon Langdon: Leon Langdon, Advocacy Officer at Humanists International.
Jacobsen: How long have you been here?
Langdon: I have been here for just under two years.
Jacobsen: What did you do before?
Langdon: I previously worked at the United Nations Security Council with the Permanent Mission of Malta during their elected term on the Council.
Jacobsen: How was that?
Langdon: A lot of fun—intense, but engaging work.
Jacobsen: So, how did you get involved in humanist and human rights advocacy—and, in a way, geopolitics?
Langdon: My background is in law—I have a law degree from Ireland. After taking a year out, I was fortunate to receive scholarships that allowed me to pursue a Master’s degree in International Relations at New York University. While at NYU, I interned at the UN Counter-Terrorism Executive Directorate (CTED). Following that, I secured a position at the Permanent Mission of Malta to the United Nations, where I worked during their tenure on the Security Council, focusing on humanitarian and geopolitical issues across multiple regions.
I debated extensively in school and university, which gave me my first glimpse into global affairs and political thought. I kept that up through college. Before joining Humanists International, I had not been deeply involved in humanism. I joined the organization in September 2023. I recall mentioning during my interview that I had attended one humanist funeral, which was my first real exposure to humanist values.
Jacobsen: So it was a wake—a humanist wake?
Langdon: Yes. Being Irish, I grew up immersed in Catholic traditions—pilgrimages, retreats, that kind of thing. While I still respect those experiences, I no longer hold them in the same regard.
That brings me to where I am today. I have now spent nearly two years advocating at the UN on behalf of Humanists International, focusing on defending and promoting humanist values and human rights, particularly where they intersect—freedom of religion or belief, secular governance, and freedom of expression.
Jacobsen: There is a phrase from Ireland: “You don’t lick it off the rocks.” That applies well here. More seriously, at the UN, what does humanist advocacy look like, procedurally? Especially considering how formal and secure the environment is.
Langdon: Yes, the UN system is very structured. There are hundreds of NGOs in consultative status with the UN Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC), which enables them to engage formally with UN bodies, such as the Human Rights Council. Some NGOs are highly active and independent, while others are more closely aligned with governments.
Humanists International is proudly independent and represents over 120 member organizations worldwide. We primarily engage at the Human Rights Council in Geneva and the UN in New York, advocating on core issues such as freedom of religion or belief, the rights of non-religious individuals, bodily autonomy, and secularism.
Our priorities are set through resolutions passed by our democratic membership, either at our General Assembly or through guidance from the Board of Directors. These inform the statements we deliver at the UN, the side events we co-sponsor, and the lobbying we do with diplomats and UN officials.
With Humanists International having been founded in 1952, and our first UN advocacy efforts officially beginning in 1959, although we suspect they started earlier, with some archival gaps, we have a long history at the UN to draw upon. Within that history, you see us working consistently on the right to freedom of religion or belief, dating back to the UN in the 1960s and 1970s, which included defending the rights of atheists to exist and be included within the international human rights framework. Today, that work has become more nuanced, addressing the position of the non-religious in discussions around countering religious hatred or participating in multifaith initiatives.
We also work on issues that matter deeply to our members, such as discrimination against LGBTI+ individuals, women’s rights, sexual and reproductive health rights, and the rights of the child, where we have historically had a strong presence. In addition to these, a wide range of issues are brought to us by our member organizations—sometimes on an ad hoc basis—as well as other core issues I am probably forgetting at the moment.
Jacobsen: How do you prepare a speech? How do you make sure the facts are correct? Moreover, how do you craft the speech so that it fits within the allotted time?
Langdon: As you will know, the allotted speaking time is usually quite short when delivering statements at the UN—and to add, those statements are the tip of the iceberg of our advocacy.
Statements are 90 seconds or two minutes long. Even that is increasingly under pressure due to changes in how the UN manages speaking time. As for drafting them, the process often begins with the agenda items set by the UN, particularly those of the Human Rights Council. We frequently respond to reports from Special Rapporteurs—high-level UN experts who report on thematic or country-specific issues. Reading their reports is typically the first step.
We then reach out to our member organizations or individuals connected to cases in the relevant countries. This helps us gauge both the accuracy of the UN’s reports—which are typically well-researched—and the local context. We also examine government responses and consult the work of other NGOs, as well as independent journalists, to gain a deeper understanding of the situation on the ground.
Internally, we rely on our Casework and Campaigns Manager and our Research Officer. They work diligently on the Freedom of Thought Report, which provides a consistent, factual basis for much of our advocacy.
Using all of that—first-hand accounts, verified reports, and trusted collaborations—we draft the statement. It typically goes through several rounds of review between me and our Director of Advocacy, Dr. Elizabeth O’Casey. Once we are both satisfied, it becomes the final version to be delivered.
Ideally, we are present in Geneva to deliver the statement ourselves. However, equally valuable, sometimes even more so, is when one of our member organizations nominates someone to give it, particularly when the issue is very close to their personal experience or pertains to their national context.
Jacobsen: What are you primarily advocating for at the UN? Is it about humanists under threat? Are they secular issues? Is it broader than human rights? What are the central issues you keep getting called upon for, on behalf of humanists?
Langdon: It all revolves around human rights. That is the foundation of our work—advocating for the universal application of international human rights standards.
It would be misleading to say it is only one issue. We often raise individual cases at the UN, but we are cautious about how we do that. We work strictly on a consent basis. That means we always consult with the individual concerned or, if necessary, their family—especially when we are not directly in touch with the person. We ensure that raising their case publicly at the UN level is safe and beneficial for them. Attention from the international community can be powerful, but it must never come at the expense of someone’s well-being or security.
However, secondly, it must be helpful. We do not want to raise cases just for the sake of saying we did it. We want to ensure that there is a potential positive outcome we can work toward. That is our approach when it comes to humanists at risk.
More broadly, we address a wide range of issues. For example, we recently worked on the right to identify as a humanist in Indonesia. We partnered with our Italian member organization on sexual and reproductive health, access to abortion, and LGBTI+ rights and equality in Italy. We have also worked on defending the right to freedom of religion or belief and on civil society space across multiple countries—issues our members continually urge us to focus on.
Our Hungarian and Zambian members have been active in this space. Our Ghanaian members have expressed deep concern over developments in their country, particularly regarding LGBTI+ rights, and we have been called to support advocacy efforts there. Across Europe, we are also seeing signs of democratic backsliding, and we raise attention to that where necessary.
Additionally, we occasionally work on advancing international human rights treaties. For instance, we recently called on Norway to ratify a key international human rights convention. So, no two days are the same, and no two member organizations have precisely the same priorities, even though the underlying values they share are consistent.
Jacobsen: What kind of counter-statements do you get in response to your statements?
Langdon: Fortunately, some responses are positive. For example, earlier this year, we delivered a statement during the interactive dialogue with the Special Rapporteur on Freedom of Religion or Belief. We thanked her for explicitly including the plight of atheists and humanists in Hungary in her report, following her meeting with two of our member organizations there. She thanked us in return, which was a welcome gesture.
In that same statement, we also highlighted the need for legal remedies for individuals who have experienced torture based on their religion or belief. While that specific point was not fully addressed in her report, she welcomed our input and acknowledged its importance.
In the same session, we stated the dialogue with the UN Secretary-General’s Special Representative on Violence Against Children. She had spoken about working with faith leaders against practices like child marriage and female genital mutilation, which we support. However, we raised a question about her engagement with the Vatican, which had only been mentioned briefly in her report. We asked about the progress made in that regard, and she responded critically to our question—it was not a particularly warm reaction.
We also know that some governments are not pleased when we shine a spotlight on human rights abuses in their countries. While they might not issue formal counter-statements, we often receive private feedback indicating their discontent. It is a delicate balance—we always act in the interest of human rights, but we are aware of the political sensitivities involved.
Jacobsen: What about allies? Which other organizations at the UN are at a similar level—those that may not be explicitly humanist but are humanistic in practice or orientation?
Langdon: To be honest, there are only a handful. Moreover, we are, by far, the predominant organization explicitly representing the non-religious and humanist perspective at the UN. That said, we do work alongside human rights NGOs whose work aligns with ours on key issues, even if they do not identify as humanist. These partnerships are vital, especially when we coordinate joint statements or co-host events on shared priorities, such as freedom of expression, secularism, or reproductive rights.
That is a better, more diplomatic way to put it. However, yes, we are the predominant organization working from a humanist perspective at the UN. There are also a handful of atheist organizations; however, our specific viewpoint is not widely represented, apart from through Humanists International. As a result, our allies often differ from us in origin or mandate.
We collaborate with other organizations that focus on similar issues, including LGBTI+ rights, women’s rights, equality, and non-discrimination. However, we also collaborate with some religious organizations, representatives of religious minorities, or groups that approach these issues from a different philosophical or theological perspective. What unites us is a shared commitment to the right to freedom of religion or belief for all, including humanists and the non-religious.
Jacobsen: What are some of the more obscure issues you have brought up at the UN? They matter enough to be mentioned there, but not enough to be raised regularly.
Langdon: The diplomatic answer is that everything is equally important. However, realistically, yes, some issues are more specific—either to particular contexts or to individual countries.
One example, which might not sound obscure at first, is something we recently raised for the first time: the role of religious leaders in conflict and post-conflict settings. It is backed by excellent research and grounded in common sense—religious leaders are highly influential. They often have trusted voices in their communities and hold significant moral authority.
We called on religious leaders, particularly those operating in humanitarian, conflict, or post-conflict environments, to use their influence to uphold international humanitarian law and international human rights law, especially in defence of women’s rights. There is credible research indicating that, in some instances, religious leaders have not always utilized their influence constructively in these contexts.
So, recognizing the power and presence of religion while also emphasizing that such influence comes with responsibilities is a relatively new area of advocacy for us. Whether it is less important than other issues—that is for you to decide.
Jacobsen: What are the common articles, conventions, treaties, or declarations you tend to reference in your work at the UN?
Langdon: Anything we can get our hands on, frankly. However, we often start with one of the foundational documents—the Universal Declaration of Human Rights. Article 18 guarantees the right to freedom of religion or belief for all, including humanists and the non-religious.
We also reference binding treaties, such as the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR), which entered into force in 1976. Article 18 of that covenant likewise protects the right to freedom of thought, conscience, and religion or belief. These documents form the bedrock of our arguments, and we use them to demonstrate that rights for the non-religious are already embedded in the international framework—they need to be respected and enforced.
Article 19 talks about freedom of expression—both it and Article 18 are fundamental rights to us. Some of the other core human rights treaties we regularly reference include the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW) and the Convention on the Rights of the Child (CRC). Both are vital in exploring the intersections between religion and non-religion, as well as the rights of women and children, areas that Humanists International has worked on for decades.
Beyond these international instruments, we also analyze national laws and constitutions, comparing them against global standards. We frequently rely on the Rabat Plan of Action, which emerged from UN processes in 2011 and 2012. It has proven to be a fantastic resource, and we continue to advocate for its implementation.
Resolution 16/18 on countering religious hatred at the UN Human Rights Council is another key framework for us. We also regularly draw on the reports of UN Special Rapporteurs—both recent and historic—as they form an essential part of customary international law and evidence-based human rights monitoring.
Jacobsen: Are there ever times when you find it challenging to reconcile UN values and bureaucracy with humanism as a life stance when advocating for it? Is there ever a point of tension, or is it mostly smooth sailing?
Langdon: I think the core values underpinning both the UN and the international human rights framework—and humanism—are very aligned. Both are grounded in the idea of human dignity for all, equality, and non-discrimination. Both ultimately aim to allow people to live their lives freely, happily, and healthily. That is my perspective, at least.
Where it becomes difficult is the procedural bureaucracy of the UN. You have 193 member states around the table—plus observer states —and several hundred NGOs with consultative status, all looking to participate. Moreover, that is just the official list; there are also many more actors working informally, behind the scenes, for better or worse.
One thing you have to get used to in this field is that things take time, often a long time. You have to be okay with the idea that the results of your efforts might not appear for months, or more likely, years. Sometimes you may never see them in your lifetime. However, that does not mean the work is any less critical in the present moment.
Over the past two years, and more broadly, over the last seven years of advocacy by Humanists International at the UN level, we have seen some tangible results. However, we also recognize it is a constant struggle—a long-term, uphill battle. Moreover, while we might wish for faster progress, the enduring nature of the work is what gives it weight. That is okay.
Jacobsen: What has been your most frustrating experience with the UN?
Langdon: Last year, I spoke to you about the return of Resolution 53/1, which reintroduced the concept of blasphemy at the UN. That was incredibly frustrating. Since 2011, we have had what was admittedly an imperfect but essential consensus between the major actors in the freedom of religion or belief space, primarily the European Union and the Organization of Islamic Cooperation (OIC). A delicate balance was maintained between the two blocs, with the United States also playing a significant role.
The agreement was that there would be two key resolutions: one on freedom of religion or belief, led by the European Union, and another on countering religious hatred—Resolution 16/18—led by the OIC. That arrangement was not perfect, but it was a hard-fought, diplomatically negotiated structure that held for over a decade. It took years of effort by people who are far more experienced than I am—people who worked for decades to get both resolutions to the table. So the fact that we maintained consensus on both for more than ten years was quite remarkable.
Now, I would like to preface this by saying that the consensus has returned, and we are pleased to see that. We are also advocating for both resolutions to be modernized and made more comprehensive. However, in 2023, we saw the non-renewal of the 16/18 resolution. Instead, Resolution 53/1 was introduced—an explicit condemnation of blasphemy, which, from our perspective and that of many international legal experts and UN representatives, is not in line with international human rights law.
That was particularly frustrating because of the way UN procedures and timelines operate. We often receive very little notice when such resolutions are tabled, so we had to mobilize quickly. Unfortunately, we were not successful in stopping Resolution 53/1 in 2023. However, when an attempt was made to reintroduce it in 2024, we were better prepared. Perhaps it was the groundwork we laid the year before, but this time we managed to brief over 100 states on the issue.
As a result, the OIC withdrew their proposed resolution, and as of 2025, both of the historic resolutions from 2011—on freedom of religion or belief and on countering religious hatred—are back on the table. That imperfect but necessary balance has been restored, and we strongly support this outcome.
That said, we also want to see the consensus strengthened and expanded. Ideally, we want a more holistic and consistently rights-based understanding of freedom of religion or belief—one that includes humanists and the non-religious, and respects international human rights standards across the board.
Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today.
Langdon: No worries.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/26
I knew someone.
They travelled to Ghana.
We talked about LGBTI people.
They mentioned individuals who are LGBTI are against traditional values of Ghana.
“They can just leave.”
“What about those fighting for their equality and rights as LGBTI people in Ghana?”
“They can leave.”
Following this, the conversation became a basis for condemning individuals for who they are, fighting for their equality, and to stereotyping LGBTI as a thing of, essentially, Westerners, because they “don’t care about them” — except, of course, when they fight for their rights in a country.
I only hear these, typically, in North America from Evangelical Protestant Christians and one sector of ultra-conservative Catholics.
Those types of conversations are instructive. Many still view items from a particularist ethical lens rather than universal application.
Be kind,
stay gentle,
don’t coerce or force,
each has their path,
how would you feel if someone tried to change you in like manner?
Probe,
ask soft questions,
look for self-reflective capacities,
limit to a nudge here and there, maybe,
a little later, another view, broader vision can creep into view.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/25
Nagel may have been assuming a structural independence more egregious than substrate independence assumed by computer scientists working on AI now. To be a bat, to have vision, is to have a particular living structure with particular functions, those functions derive from the structure, change adaptively to it, but ultimately structure with similarities to others in nature will mostly have similar functions. In a sense, we do know what it is like to be as a bat by extension and science-based inference.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/25
Ben-Gurion Blues,
Four-and-a-half hours to…
find a way out,
friendly and honest,
and a smirk sets the tone as,
a light at the end of the tunnel.
Is it an interrogative?
It is a statement.
Over and over, repeated,
not for sameness but for intimidation,
new information.
Is this person a threat?
הוּא אַרְבָּעָה
Odd imprints ever-after, like cattle.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/25
Life: a dance, so fleeting, intense, and exhaustive at some point. It’s a point at which the point of your life is not about you, which is the whole point of life: You don’t always get what you want and often get what you don’t want, and many times find out what you wanted isn’t what you needed.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/25
If the universe does not have an inherent moral structure, then all moral systems, whether believed to be transcendent or not, come out of a biological systemic interaction with the environment and other biological systems in an environment, living and non-living. Therefore, morality would be distinctly derivative from the structure of the universe rather than fundamental or built into the laws of Nature. We know human beings evolved in the universe and after the purported origin points of the universe. Therefore, if the universe has an Arrow of Time, apparently, we’re left with the non-comforting conclusion on Ethics: Morality is derivative, not primary, or secondary and not part of the basic structure of the world. All moral and ethical considerations should follow from this.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/24
People do not want compasses in matters of the heart.
They do not want advice.
They do not want lectures, especially.
No aphorisms,
No poems, except.
No science,
No reasons.
Rationale beyond Reason.
They want to see,
To touch,
To smell,
To hear,
To taste,
A shaded sunset,
A lined finger along the back,
A new perfume,
An old song,
A fresh ice cream on a hot day.
In short, they want to feel.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/24
East in West and West in East.
I see the sea from shine to shine,
and the stars scream,
“We are Sand!”
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/22
I note a lot of ‘podcasts’ who, on rare occasion, give note to their genuine luck in life,
not to be homeless.
As has been said, they love the poor, but not the smell of the poor.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/22
And here we were, unable to help you,
too busy fighting over and for our stories,
our delusions and those of self.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/20
A day well done is a rite of passage to proper rest.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/20
I have seen a lot of people change over time.
The arcs of alteration take longer with more time embedded in time.
So, people’s selves are bounded physically and to the known history of the moment for them.
I have seen memorializations warp in real-time, over enough time.
The arcs of memory change with them too.
So, per Loftus, memory is a constructive process for encoding and a reconstructive process for recall, recognition.
Therefore, Memory and the Self are fluidic crystallizations, and so birelational with one another, each with time, and function as a new process object.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/20
Metals corrode.
Organisms die…
Wise living is the art of slowing it.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/20
Blue matcha tea in Vilnius.
I learned about this,
for the first time today.
Learn something new when you can.
Note the owl of the old lady.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/20
I saw a Polish guy.
Average looks.
Good suit.
Walking healthily,
on cobblestone.
He was looking at his feet,
in contemplative self-uncertainty.
That’s good.
We need this more,
particularly from self-appointed rulers of society.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/20
You know, the dead say quite a lot.
Why?
We give them voice.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/19
“He who wishes to be rich in a day will be hanged in a year.”
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/19
Life is: A fired hollow point bullet.
Whence we come,
we try, and…
fail,
to piece the fragments together,
while wounded,
bleeding out,
in self-triage without training,
awaiting help for naught.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/19
I’ve seen many stories, before,
by mindsight,
by feel,
by intuition,
by now,
by way of befores,
over,
over,
over and more,
by conversation and by ear,
listening,
listening,
listening and more,
all saying, “Bye now.”
I did quite a lot,
of listening,
over,
over,
over and more.
Remember Catatonia?
Not just two cats.
Doing what?
Listening,
listening,
listening and more,
seeing my story, by purr,
by mindsight,
by feel,
by intuition,
by now,
by way of befores,
all saying, “Bye now.”
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/19
The purpose for some travels is not in the delivery from one geographic destination to another bounded geography, but the reflective Self in others only seen by force of new geography. Change the setting; alter the state.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/19
Cloudfall, in night.
Sat down, by the bye,
beyond settled outs,
in I say!
Down deserts,
settled desserts,
Skyfall, in day.
Ran down, sigh the sight,
yonder kinglins,
up I whisper!
Clouds in grass and sky inland,
out yonderdown, say, “Whisper,”
by the sight,
sigh thy bye,
upin, I,
day by night,
settling desert, melted desserts,
I sat up and ran.
Where?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/15
Global problems,
but for human survival,
is another conference sufficient?
How is this translated outside translations?
Are these sinecure transformers enough?
Even if not, are they at scale?
Is there enough time?
For global problems.
Welcome to the,
Speed Chess Era.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/13
I took a walk today, talking to a museum administrator.
Enthusiastic,
informative,
present,
alone.
She described in detail all facets of the presentations.
I was there for 2 hours after 30 minutes of informative querying her.
I was the only attendee.
Where is the foundry for such conscientiousness in a moment?
You ever watch actor blooper reels.
They joke,
laugh,
improvise,
then continue the scripted performance.
What are the invisible, golden strings between the improv, the scripted performance, and their authentic selves?
I suppose: Where are the lines drawn in the sand in those moments?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/12
Going to a different place physically,
changes you,
you meet your reflection, in others.
Yet,
you don’t know the code.
You are realized outside of yourself,
through interactions internalized.
The throughline is the real you:
You’re on the outside looking inward.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/12
You, sir, do not have a pair of testicles,
If you prefer drinking from glass.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/05
If you’re serious about pursuing some untrodden paths, you will have to make some sacrifices:
-poverty
-days without food
-heavy exertion
-endurance of pain
-uncertainty
-frequent dime pivots
-sleeping houseless
-sleep deprivation
-accidents, injuries.
Good luck.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/05
Alaska has always been a typo in my adult life.
Later, I found.
It’s not a typo.
My glasses weren’t on.
Cosmic smudge of the good stuff.
So be it.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/05
We have the electrical equipment.
Many women still prefer a partnered experience.
We have the partners.
Many men still prefer an abstracted fantasy.
What to do?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/05
I find a strange nostalgia for funerals and war.
It’s not a desire.
Once you go, they beckon,
From nowhere.
A sort of paradox of recurrent finality.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/05
Belgian detours to Luxembourg are a must,
Particularly for the coffee.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/05
There is great value in meeting people transiently.
You’re meeting them as their representative, granted, in character.
But generally, they’re more open.
They expose themselves more,
are truthful more.
You learn at lot about people through the truths of a single person while also about common lies presentation aside from the narrative.
Take notes, how are you doing so?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/07
Nnenna Onwukwe (They/Them) is the Federal Policy Associate at the Secular Coalition for America, where she advocates for church-state separation, secular inclusion in policy, and protections for religious freedom for all. Onwukwe discusses the Religious Liberty Commission, criticizing its predominantly Christian nationalist composition and lack of secular or interfaith representation. They warn the Commission may use “religious freedom” as a tool for legalizing discrimination, especially against LGBTQ and non-Christian communities. Onwukwe also highlights concerns about IRS policy shifts, political endorsements from the pulpit, and school voucher programs redirecting public funds to private, religious institutions, which threaten public education and constitutional neutrality. SCA has sent a letter to the U.S. Secretary of the Treasury regarding the IRS’s decision not to enforce the Johnson Amendment. You can read the full document on their website: https://secular.org/2025/07/sca-lets-it-be-known-the-johnson-amendment-must-be-enforced
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, what is the Religious Liberty Commission? Moreover, how have they responded to concerns about bias toward one faith over another?
Nnenna Onwukwe: The Religious Liberty Commission was established by President Trump via executive order on May 1, 2025, as part of his broader agenda to promote religious expression in public life. It is housed in the Department of Justice and overseen by the White House Office of Faith-Based and Neighbourhood Partnerships and the Domestic Policy Council.
It is chaired by Texas Lt. Gov. Dan Patrick, with Dr. Ben Carson as vice chair. The Commission’s term runs through July 4, 2026, coinciding with the 250th anniversary of the U.S. Declaration of Independence.
The Commission’s goals include producing a report on the history and current state of religious liberty in America, identifying threats, and recommending policies, particularly regarding parental rights in religious education, conscience protections, vaccine exemptions, and the use of religious symbols in public spaces.
Jacobsen: So, where does SCA come in?
Onwukwe: We are with the Secular Coalition for America. Our concern is whether the Commission is showing bias toward Christian perspectives. The panel is predominantly composed of conservative evangelical Christians, along with a few Catholics and one Orthodox Jewish representative. There is no real representation of secular individuals, Muslims, Hindus, or other minority faiths.
Before their first public meeting in June, held at the Museum of the Bible, we sent a letter requesting clarity. We wanted to know whether the Commission’s reports would primarily focus on Christians or encompass all faiths, including nonreligious Americans. We also raised concerns about possible discrimination against non-Christian groups.
Jacobsen: Did they respond?
Onwukwe: No, we have not received a reply. Given the composition of the panel and the rhetoric at their first meeting, they may not be interested in secular input. However, we will keep advocating. They must know we are here and that we are watching.
Jacobsen: What are some of your specific concerns with how they are operating?
Onwukwe: So we sent them a couple of questions. We were particularly concerned because, even in the first meeting, there was much rhetoric about America being a “Christian nation.” However, if you examine the actual history of the United States, the founding documents intentionally omitted references to religion.
The founders deliberately moved away from a system that fused religion with government. They envisioned a secular nation with a clear separation of church and state. Hearing language that implies otherwise is troubling.
The composition of the Commission is also a concern, as it lacks secular voices on the panel. During and even before the first meeting, we observed a strong focus on what is often referred to as “anti-Christian bias,” particularly with the establishment of the Anti-Christian Bias Task Force.
The issue is, organizations like ours—and others—have not seen compelling evidence of systemic anti-Christian bias. We worry that the phrase “anti-Christian bias” is being used to justify policies that would allow Christians to discriminate against others, especially in workplaces or service settings.
For example, if a Christian employee claims their religious beliefs are being “discriminated against,” that might be used to excuse discriminatory behaviour toward LGBTQ individuals or people of other faiths. So the implications could be profound.
Jacobsen: Who comprises the Liberty Commission? That is important to know.
Onwukwe: The Commission includes Texas Lt. Gov. Dan Patrick, Dr. Ben Carson, and Paula White, who serves as a senior adviser in the White House Office of Faith-Based and Neighbourhood Partnerships. Interestingly, Dr. Phil McGraw is also on the panel, though his inclusion has raised some eyebrows.
The panel consists of Christian leaders, many of whom are affiliated with the Christian nationalist movement. It was strange. Even during the Commission meeting, Dr. Phil spoke out against one of the issues being discussed, which was interesting. Dr. Phil may be the one person on the panel who speaks up. I do not know.
The panel is primarily composed of Christians, many of whom are recognizable figures in the Christian nationalist movement. I believe one of them was a former Miss America contestant who publicly stated that marriage should only be between a man and a woman.
That kind of viewpoint reflects the broader makeup of the Commission. Paula White—the head of the White House Faith Office—has been actively pushing the narrative of “anti-Christian bias” and helped establish the Anti-Christian Bias Task Force.
She was a frequent spiritual adviser during Trump’s presidency and was present when both the Religious Liberty Commission and the Anti-Christian Bias Task Force were launched, often leading prayers at those events.
Interestingly, she has also claimed that women should not hold positions of power, despite holding one herself. That contradiction is, of course, hard to ignore. Overall, it is a panel dominated by prominent Christian nationalist voices who support the idea that America is inherently a Christian nation.
Even the Jewish panellists did not speak up when those kinds of statements were made, which we found concerning, mainly because those statements are not factual.
Jacobsen: What about their makeup?
Onwukwe: The majority of the makeup of the commission are Protestant and conservative Catholics. There are a few rabbis and other Jewish members and at least one person who is Muslim. During their first meeting there was only one Jewish person sitting on the panel, the rest of the panelists were Christian or Catholic.
Jacobsen: Are there any secular voices on the Commission or involved in any way?
Onwukwe: None that we saw. None that are openly secular, at least. Most of the individuals involved are prominent figures in Christian media or associated with the Christian nationalist movement, unfortunately. That is a significant concern for us.
Onwukwe: We even provided them with names—people who could represent secular Americans and offer a valuable perspective—but nothing has come of it so far.
Jacobsen: Another important point—while not necessarily from a secular perspective alone, it is still concerning: How diverse is the Commission in terms of religious representation? Because it is not just secular voices being excluded; it is also about whether they include a broad interfaith representation.
Do they reflect the growing diversity in American religious identity? They ignore the expanding secular population, but are they at least capturing denominational or interfaith diversity?
Onwukwe: The majority are Christians, as I mentioned earlier. There are a few Jewish voices, and I believe there may be one or two Muslim individuals involved. However, it is unclear whether they are formally part of the panel or just a participant in the broader conversation.
However, aside from that, the overwhelming majority of the Commission members are Christian. So, in terms of true interfaith diversity, it is minimal. As you said, there is a growing secular movement—an increasing number of Americans now identify as nonreligious.
We have been advocating for secular representation in Congress and other federal bodies for years. It is deeply concerning that this Commission was created without any meaningful representation of nonreligious Americans.
Jacobsen: So, in a sense, this version of “religious liberty” seems like a highly selective interpretation of freedom of religion and conscience?
Onwukwe: We often see this with groups like this one and others that promote Christian nationalism.
They often claim they are fighting for “religious freedom” or “religious liberty,” and that they are being discriminated against, when in reality, what they are pushing for is the freedom to use their religion to discriminate against others or insert their religious beliefs into public institutions, like schools.
The Commission reflects this mindset. They interpret the First Amendment not as a protection from religious imposition, but as a license to impose their spiritual values on public life under the guise of protecting religious freedom.
So yes, that is our concern. They have taken a highly selective interpretation of religious liberty—one that favours a particular brand of Christianity—and are using it to advance a very narrow cultural and political agenda.
Jacobsen: They are using that interpretation to justify discrimination.
Onwukwe: And that is one of our biggest concerns: that the Commission will use this distorted view of religious freedom to target minority groups, framing it as though Christians are being discriminated against, when in fact, they are the ones seeking legal cover to discriminate.
Jacobsen: And this is not new. I remember hearing similar arguments as far back as seven years ago. It would usually come in the form of a brief controversy, such as a 15-minute segment on Fox News, when something happens at a school or church.
When I was interviewing two people from The Satanic Temple several years ago, they mentioned a persistent persecution complex. They have framed it in a way that if they do not get 100% of what they want, they see it as oppression. They push this narrative. So when they do not get everything exactly as they want it, they claim they are being persecuted.
How they frame this “victimization” is revealing. Some isolated concerns might be valid, but overall, they are using the idea of victimhood as a political tool.
Onwukwe: Yes. Moreover, as we have discussed, the secular community is growing. Younger generations, especially, have different views on social and moral issues—things the older, more religious generations often find threatening or uncomfortable. That discomfort is sometimes interpreted as discrimination by those older groups.
The rise of LGBTQ rights—such as marriage equality, trans rights, and protections for people of other religions or no religion—is often perceived by some conservative Christian groups as an attack on their faith.
They see it as a threat to the version of America they grew up with, even though the United States has always been a secular nation. It is unfamiliar to them, and they interpret these changes as direct attacks on their beliefs.
This perception extends to issues such as vaccine mandates and mask requirements. In 2020, we witnessed widespread outrage over church closures, despite all public gathering places being closed due to health concerns.
Still, they felt singled out because of their religion, even though the policies were broad and applied to everyone equally. What we are discussing is ensuring that all Americans—regardless of their religion or identity—have equal rights and freedoms.
However, for some, equality feels like persecution because it challenges the privileged position they have long held. You can also see it in schools. Many Christian organizations have been advocating for initiatives such as mandatory prayer in public schools.
Moreover, with the recent Supreme Court decision—Mahmood v. Taylor—there has been a push to allow parents to opt their children out of public education that conflicts with their religious views.
So when they claim they are being “discriminated against,” it often really means they want their religious beliefs to take precedence over others’ rights. That is something we see a lot in the Christian nationalist movement and among many far-right Christian groups.
Jacobsen: So, the IRS has weighed in on political endorsements from the pulpit. That is the way it is being framed, although the specifics, outside of press releases, are essential to examine. There are questions about what exactly constitutes a political endorsement—financial or otherwise—and how that interacts with the Johnson Amendment, or whether this is an attempt to override or circumvent it. I am not yet aware of the implications.
Onwukwe: So basically, over the years—as you have probably seen—a lot of Americans have filed complaints with the IRS, objecting to religious institutions and leaders openly endorsing political candidates from the pulpit. That is a clear violation of the Johnson Amendment, which prohibits tax-exempt religious organizations from endorsing or opposing candidates for public office.
Despite this, the IRS has taken minimal action. We, along with other secular organizations, have issued alerts and encouraged the public to submit formal objections to the IRS. However, the agency has not responded decisively or pursued many of these cases.
With the recent developments, the IRS is now taking the stance that religious institutions can endorse political candidates from the pulpit, essentially making it clear there will be no consequences. That is deeply concerning.
It opens the door for politicians to funnel untaxed money through churches in exchange for endorsements. You will start seeing political ads or candidate promotions coming directly from megachurches on TV or in services. Since these ads occur within religious institutions, the funds and activities associated with them will not be taxed.
This poses a serious threat to the separation of church and state. We expect this will have significant adverse effects on future elections, undermining fair democratic processes and increasing the influence of religious institutions in partisan politics.
Jacobsen: Are there any limits on the amount?
Onwukwe: On how much someone can donate to a church for political purposes? No, there are no clear limits. So, someone could donate any amount they want to a church to promote a candidate. Moreover, that messaging will end up on people’s TVs, in their social feeds, or even from the pulpit itself.
There is also ambiguity around whether religious institutions can now endorse candidates on social media or through other channels. That is something we are still watching closely. Since this just happened, we will have to see how far it goes. A lot is still unclear at this point.
Jacobsen: When was the last time the United States was in a situation like this? Was there anything before the Johnson Amendment that served a similar purpose? Or has it always really just been the Johnson Amendment?
Onwukwe: That is a good question. I do not know. I am aware that the Johnson Amendment was introduced to prevent churches and other tax-exempt institutions from endorsing political candidates.
However, it was created in response to a specific incident, or was it a more preventative measure, intended to ensure that political activity remained separate from tax-exempt religious institutions?
Jacobsen: Does this change anything regarding verbal endorsements, written endorsements, or other forms of promotion from churches or politicians?
Onwukwe: That is another good question. We are still not sure. In this particular case, the IRS was responding to a specific incident and stated that the priest involved could promote candidates from the pulpit. So, that is the precedent being set right now.
However, whether that opens the door to broader endorsements—such as written letters, church-produced media, or full-on political ads on TV from a megachurch—is still unknown. It is very concerning. Like I said, we will have to wait and see how churches use this new leeway—and how prominent political donors might take advantage of it.
If someone wants to make a tax-free donation to promote a candidate, they could funnel it through a church and let the church handle the endorsement.
Jacobsen: The reality is, voters get their information about politicians from many different sources. For some, it might come directly from the presidential campaign. Still, for others—especially down-ballot races—it could come from more indirect means.
Depending on the voter, they may not have regular access to the internet or social media. They may not be tech-savvy or connected digitally at all. A significant portion of their political information comes through TV, primarily through ads like these.
That is where attack ads are particularly effective. Moreover, now, imagine that same person regularly attending church. If their priest or pastor is saying, “This is what you should be doing,” “This is who you should be voting for,” and “This is how to act as a faithful person,” that has a profound influence.
If someone has a strong connection to their religious leader, that endorsement can significantly shape their vote. This influence had already been happening under the radar, but now it has essentially been given the green light to proceed at full speed ahead. Is there already a legal counter-challenge to this decision?
Onwukwe: So far, I have not seen any formal legal challenges. I am sure efforts are being made behind the scenes, or announcements may be forthcoming soon. It will be interesting to see how this unfolds legally, especially when it comes to directly challenging this interpretation of the Johnson Amendment.
If it can be challenged, we will see action to at least slow it down or stop it entirely. However, for now, we are in a “wait and see” phase.
Jacobsen: How is this being received within your network, such as the Secular Coalition and its partner organizations?
Onwukwe: Across the board, our network has reacted strongly. All of our member organizations are in substantial alignment on this issue. Even in the past, when megachurches came out publicly in support of candidates, the Secular Coalition for America and many of our partners would issue public statements, send letters to the IRS, and encourage members and supporters to do the same.
Seeing this new stance—effectively dismantling the Johnson Amendment—has sparked considerable concern. Many people are speaking out and trying to figure out what can be done next. What is especially striking is that this new interpretation appears to be limited to churches.
Other 501(c)(3) organizations—particularly secular nonprofits—are still prohibited from endorsing candidates. While religious organizations can now promote political figures from the pulpit, secular nonprofits, including ours and many of our partner groups, are still bound by these restrictions. It is an apparent double standard.
Jacobsen: To be explicit and specific about leaders, what about pastoral political advertising?
Onwukwe: It does not appear this ruling will explicitly allow pastors to engage in political advertising. They may, however, be able to circumvent this by sending social media, emails, and other forms of communications to their congregations to further endorse political candidates.
Jacobsen, what about temples or mosques—are other religions also allowed to do this?
Onwukwe: Yes, they are. It applies broadly to religious institutions, such as churches, mosques, and temples. However, again, secular 501(c)(3) organizations are excluded from this privilege.
Jacobsen: There we go. Are there any final points we should add?
Onwukwe: I guess one other thing we have been working on—you might have heard about it—is the Educational Choice for Children Act. That has been in the works for a while now. We discussed it during our lobbying event in March.
A lot has been happening behind the scenes. It ended up being included in what the Trump administration has been calling their “Big, Beautiful Bill”—the actual language they have used to brand it. It is a terrible name, honestly.
However, the bottom line is that the bill passed in an amended form. The Secular Coalition for America is particularly concerned about the implications it could have on the separation of church and state, especially in the education sector.
What this law does is allow for federal school vouchers. The vast majority of those vouchers ultimately end up in private religious schools. That means public funds, which could be used for public schools and essential services, are being diverted to help families pay for religious education. That is a significant problem.
We are particularly concerned about how this affects public schools and marginalized students. These private religious schools are allowed to discriminate in admissions, whether that is against families of a different religion, students with disabilities, or families who do not meet their financial expectations.
For example, if a parent does not belong to the school’s preferred faith, the child can be rejected. If a student has a disability that the school does not want to accommodate, the school can also refuse to accept that student.
Moreover, the vouchers themselves do not cover the full cost of tuition at these schools. So they will not help low-income students get access—they will primarily benefit families who are already close to being able to afford it. It is a subsidy for the middle and upper-middle class, not real access for the underserved.
Additionally, in rural areas—where there are few or no private schools—students often lack the option to take advantage of the voucher program. In those areas, states that opt into the program will see funding stripped away from their public schools, without offering any viable alternative.
So there is much concern. We will have to wait and see how this plays out. The way the bill was passed includes an option for states to opt out, which is one positive aspect. States that do not wish to participate in the program are not required to do so.
However, we are already seeing signs that some states—which have previously expressed support for school vouchers—are moving forward with implementation, despite local opposition.
Even in states where voters have rejected similar measures in the past, leaders now have the green light to proceed without another public vote. In states where political leadership is divided—say, a governor who supports vouchers and a legislature that does not, or vice versa—this can also lead to significant internal conflict.
So we will continue to spread the word. You will probably see something from us in the next few days that lays out what the Educational Choice for Children Act (ECCA) is, what it does now that it has passed, and what kind of impact we might see on public education.
We will continue to raise awareness and ensure that people are informed, so they can speak out against it if they choose.
Jacobsen: Good work—let us stay in touch.
Onwukwe: Thanks so much, Scott.
Jacobsen: Thanks so much.
Onwukwe: Have a good one. Bye-bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/06
Calgary, Alberta – August 10, 2025 – Nimrokh Media will host the 8th annual celebration of its founding by Fatima Roshanian. Fatima Roshanian, Founder of Nimrokh Media, said, “This anniversary is not only a celebration of Nimrokh’s journey but a testament to the resilience of Afghan journalists, and the importance of a free press in the face of adversity.”
It is a way to honour the courageous work of Afghan journalists while reflecting on the fall of Afghanistan to the theocratic, repressive forces of the Taliban. All Canadian media are encouraged to come to the event. The event happens Sunday, August 10, 2025, from 11:00 am to 3:00 pm (Calgary Time). It will be at Banu Kabob Restaurant, 575 28 Street SE, Calgary.
Nimrokh Media’s commitment to independent journalism is marked by this anniversary, a platform for dialogue and community connection. There will be traditional Afghan music and cuisine. There will be cultural conversations. There will be presentations about press freedom and the future of Afghan journalism.
Guest Speakers will be Parwiz Kawa, Zahra Nader, and Carolyn Campbell. There will be a special segment by Fatima Roshanian on personal stories of resistance and resilience.
The ticket costs are $35 per person to cover the costs of the event. Payments are accepted via e-transfer to mail@nimrokhmedia.com (include first name and last name, and number of tickets). Any journalists attending as the press are welcome as guests—no ticket required.
Please make sure to RSVP prior to the event. Any additional donations to support Nimrokh Media’s journalism are welcome, as well.
About Nimrokh Media
Nimrokh Media is an independent platform dedicated to elevating the voices of Afghan women and marginalized communities, advocating for press freedom, and telling the stories that matter most. Since its founding, Nimrokh has become a vital source of truth and a symbol of resilience for Afghan journalists in exile.
Contact:
Nimrokh Media
Email: mail@nimrokhmedia.com
Website: www.nimrokhmedia.com
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/05
Kiona Bodasing, Head of Talent Acquisition at CCI South Africa, talks about the company’s commitment to women’s empowerment and inclusive leadership. Bodasing highlights success stories like Lizelle Strydom and Anusha Ramraj, who rose from entry-level roles to executive positions. CCI Global supports female talent through mentorship, hybrid learning, leadership boot camps, and performance tracking. With over 50% female leadership, CCI fosters equity by redesigning systems and ensuring accessible growth opportunities across Africa’s BPO sector.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by Kiona Bodasing, Head of Talent Acquisition at CCI South Africa, a division of CCI Global, a leading business process outsourcing (BPO) company operating across Africa. Based in the Durban Metropolitan Area, Kiona plays a pivotal role in recruiting and developing talent for the organization.
Bodasing: Yes, thank you for having me.
Jacobsen: Kiona is an alumna of IIE Varsity College and the University of South Africa (UNISA), where she studied BCom in Human Resources. In her role, Kiona has been instrumental in expanding CCI’s workforce, particularly in South Africa and Kenya, aligning with the company’s commitment to creating meaningful career opportunities and promoting diversity. Her efforts contribute to CCI Global’s mission of transforming communities through employment and skill development. Thank you for joining me today. Let us begin. What CCI Global success story illustrates women’s empowerment in leadership?
Bodasing: Two standout examples are Lizelle Strydom and Anusha Ramraj. Lizelle began as a call center agent and has risen to become the Managing Director of CareerBox, CCI Global’s talent development arm. Anusha started in a junior finance role and is now the Chief Financial Officer of CCI South Africa. Their journeys demonstrate how we prioritize internal mobility and support high-potential women with structured career planning and skills training. We have seen multiple examples across Kenya, Ethiopia, and South Africa where women rise from entry-level roles into management positions within just a few years.
Jacobsen: How does CCI Global support high-potential talent?
Bodasing: We invest early and consistently, from onboarding to performance coaching. Our learning programs are tailored to help women build confidence, skills, and visibility. We also track performance through a gender lens to know who is ready for the next step and proactively match them to opportunities.
Jacobsen: What strategies have worked to achieve over 50% female leadership at CCI Global?
Bodasing combines intentional hiring, transparent promotion pipelines, and inclusive leadership training. We do not just look at who is ready—we look at who is often overlooked. We design for equity, not just equality; that mindset drives real representation.
Jacobsen: How has the company’s gender parity impacted operational performance?
Bodasing: Our gender-balanced teams are more collaborative and empathetic and often outperform in customer service and customer experience metrics. This also improves retention. People stay where they feel seen and supported.
Jacobsen: How does CCI Global ensure leadership development opportunities are accessible?
Bodasing: We ensure that leadership development opportunities are accessible by implementing mentorship programs, offering continuous learning and development courses, and creating clear pathways for career advancement. This approach helps us identify and nurture talent from within, ensuring that all employees have the opportunity to grow into leadership roles.
Jacobsen: So, access means flexibility?
Bodasing: Yes. We offer hybrid learning, local mentorships, and leadership boot camps that do not require sacrificing family or personal time. We also partner with CareerBox to reach young women from underserved communities, expanding the talent pool from the ground up.
Jacobsen: What are mentorship, sponsorship, or peer support programs in place?
Bodasing: We have formal mentorship programs, but some of the most powerful support comes from our women-led circles—informal, peer-driven spaces for coaching, storytelling, and career navigation.
Jacobsen: How is the long-term impact of gender parity initiatives measured?
Bodasing: We track promotion rates, performance scores, and retention through a gender lens. However, we also gather qualitative feedback—how empowered women feel, what barriers they face, and what changes they want to see. It is not just about numbers. It is about transforming the lived experience of women at work.
Jacobsen: What promotes gender equality and women’s leadership?
Bodasing: intentional. It does not happen by chance. We bake equity into every decision, from job design and pay transparency to who is in the room when leadership decisions are made. We do not just ask, “Why aren’t women leading?” We ask, “What systems are in the way—and how do we redesign them?”
Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.
Bodasing: Thank you. It has been a pleasure.
–
”We Don’t Wait for Women to Lead—We Build the Systems That Let Them.”
At CCI, we don’t wait for women to lead—we build the systems that make it inevitable. Here, women don’t just get a seat at the table; they’re redesigning the table itself.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/04
Arndís Anna Kristínardóttir Gunnarsdóttir is President of Siðmennt, the Icelandic Ethical Humanist Association. Raised in a nonreligious Lutheran household, she embraced Christianity as a child—memorizing Bible verses and undergoing barefoot confirmation at 14—before questioning faith amid her father’s Pentecostal turn. A lawyer, she advised Siðmennt and delivered its secular parliamentary alternative. Elected president on March 1 after a two-candidate race, she served as an MP (2021–2024), championing church-state separation, transparency, constitutional review, and humanist principles. Gunnarsdóttir’s path to the presidency of Siðmennt was a gradual one.
Born to nonpracticing Lutheran parents, she embraced Christian faith as a child—memorizing Bible verses and choosing barefoot confirmation at 14—and later became unsettled by her father’s association with the Pentecostal Church, which emphasized fear of the devil. This prompted years of questioning until she concluded morality need not derive from religion. As a lawyer, she advised Siðmennt from 2013 and presented its secular alternative before Parliament. Running as a two-candidate contest, she was elected president on March 1 and has overseen membership growth even as Iceland’s national church declines. In Parliament (2021–2024) representing the Pirate Party, Gunnarsdóttir championed the separation of church and state, transparency, privacy rights, and the creation of an independent constitutional advisory council. She criticized the government’s choice of a church-affiliated crematorium over a secular proposal, highlighting institutional bias, and seeks interfaith cooperation to uphold shared humanist values.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your current title?
Arndís Anna Kristínardóttir Gunnarsdóttir: Gunnarsdóttir: I am the President of Siðmennt, the Icelandic Ethical Humanist Association.
Jacobsen: How did you become involved in the humanist and ethical movement in Iceland? And how long have you been its President?
Gunnarsdóttir: To be honest, I cannot pinpoint a specific moment when I became involved in humanism. It happened gradually over time. I was raised in a non-religious household, which is quite typical in Iceland. Like many Icelanders, we were registered in the National Church, the Evangelical Lutheran Church, but we did not actively practice religion. As a child, though, I was pretty religious. I attended Christian summer camps, considered myself devout, and had a traditional Lutheran confirmation at the age of 14. I chose to go barefoot for the ceremony, which, for me, held symbolic meaning — a personal expression of sincerity or humility. However, I am not entirely sure why I felt that way at the time.
Jacobsen: What did that mean to you?
Gunnarsdóttir: It meant going through the confirmation without shoes or socks. It was a symbolic gesture. At the time, I viewed it as a form of personal devotion or a serious commitment to the ritual. I was the kind of child who wanted to do things properly. I even memorized and quoted Bible verses. Not excessively, but I took it seriously. I was a straight-A student, very well-behaved. I had a strong desire to be perfect, and my religious behaviour was part of that mindset. Looking back, I believe I was genuinely religious as a child. But my shift toward humanism began when my father became involved with the Pentecostal Church in Iceland. That was a confusing period for me. Although I still considered myself Christian, the Pentecostal focus was unsettling. They spoke more about the devil than about God. It seemed like they saw the devil everywhere. Much of what I experienced in that environment felt wrong or disturbing to me — it conflicted with what I believed Christianity should be. It led to a period of confusion and reflection. For a time, I distanced myself from religion entirely because I needed to rethink everything.
And I started saying things like, “I don’t believe in God if God is so judgmental,” etc. I began to doubt — very seriously. At first, I still believed in God but rejected the religious doctrines and interpretations I was encountering. Slowly, gradually, over time, that changed. This is why I cannot pinpoint the exact moment I became a humanist or decided to join Siðmennt. It was a process that spanned many years.
As a child, I always wanted to help people. My dream job when I was little was to become a Christian missionary in Africa. The funny thing is that, as an adult, I ended up working for the Red Cross , supporting refugees and asylum seekers.
My dream is still to go to areas experiencing humanitarian crises to try and help. I now see it from a different perspective. I would say I am mostly healed from what you might call the white saviour syndrome. But I have not abandoned that part of myself from childhood — the part that wants to help, that wants to bring and promote humanity.
At some point, I realized that I did not need religion to do that. I do not need religion to act ethically. That realization is what brought me to humanism.
Humanist values are grounded in the idea that our principles and ethics do not come from divine sources — they come from our shared humanity. That understanding made me more active in Siðmennt.
I never held a formal position in the organization before becoming President. However, I have given legal advice to Siðmennt over the years and have been involved in various ways. In 2013, for example, I gave a speech at the beginning of Parliament’s annual session.
In Iceland, a traditional church service is held before the first session of the parliament. But for several decades now, Siðmennt has offered a secular alternative . At this gathering, a speaker provides hopefully wise and meaningful words, followed by a lunch. I was honoured to give that speech in 2013.
So, I have been indirectly involved with Siðmennt for a long time.
I also served as a Member of Parliament in Iceland from 2021 to 2024. During that time, I actively supported and promoted the goals of Siðmennt and the broader humanist movement, including advocating for the separation of church and state.
For example, there is currently a need for a new crematorium in Iceland. Due to our small population, there is only one existing crematorium. A private association came forward with funding and plans to create a secular crematorium.
Unfortunately, I received news today that the new Minister of Justice has signed an agreement with Reykjavík Cemeteries, which are affiliated with the national church.
Technically, Siðmennt has a representative on the board overseeing this, and it is supposed to be interreligious. But in reality, about 80 percent of the representatives are affiliated with the state church. So it is still far from being truly neutral or inclusive.
Jacobsen: So, in Iceland, the state church means the Lutheran Church?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes, it is the Lutheran Protestant Church of Iceland. They used to have around 80–90 percent of the population, but now they are just above 50 percent. Despite the global trend of conservative resurgence — including here in Iceland — the national church continues to lose members.
Meanwhile, our membership continues to grow. The rate of change has slowed, but the trend remains the same: fewer members for the state church, more for us.
I never had any personal ambition or goal to become President of Humanists Iceland. The idea was proposed to me by friends who had been more active within the humanist community. That was because Inga had decided not to run again.
So there was a need for a new candidate, and I was encouraged to step forward. I first heard the suggestion around a year ago. By November, they began pushing me to consider it more seriously, and I decided to run in February.
It all happened quite fast. The election was held on March 1, and I was elected President. There were three candidates initially. One of them withdrew his candidacy at the end of his speech , which was a bit unusual. He completed his candidate speech and then announced he was withdrawing.
So, in the end, it was just the two of us. Interestingly, the withdrawn candidate still received a few votes — maybe just one.
Jacobsen: Are candidates allowed to vote?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes, they are. But I do not think he voted for himself since he had already withdrawn. Then again, who knows? In any case, I won. And here I am.
Jacobsen: When you attend major events like this one, is this your first?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes. A Nordic conference took place earlier this year.
Jacobsen: Were you involved around the time of the 2019 Reykjavík conference?
Gunnarsdóttir: No. I was in France at the time, working on my PhD.
Jacobsen: How did that go?
Gunnarsdóttir: I did not finish it.
Jacobsen: COVID?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes, COVID. I was supposed to travel to the U.S. for the final stage of my research. I mentioned this earlier — I was doing a comparative study on the development of freedom of religion as a legal concept in Europe and the United States.
The final part of my research involved work in the U.S., but I had never been there before. I had planned a research stay, but travel was not allowed due to the pandemic.
So I returned to Iceland and later ran for Parliament. After being elected, I abandoned the PhD.
Jacobsen: Three points on Parliament. First — Is the Althing the oldest Parliament in Europe?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes.
Jacobsen: Second — Did it have to be restarted after a period of inactivity?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes. I do not remember the exact dates, but you can look them up.
Jacobsen: Third point — the party you represented was the Pirate Party?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes.
Jacobsen: The Pirate Party exists in different countries under the same name.
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes.
Jacobsen: So it may mean the same thing — or it may not.
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes.
Jacobsen: What does the Pirate Party stand for in Iceland?
Gunnarsdóttir: In Iceland? That is a good question. I love it. Due to the confusion surrounding the name. Of course, the name originally comes from the idea of “piracy.” The Pirate Party movement was founded by computer enthusiasts who were concerned that politics were not keeping up with technological developments and the evolution of information technology.
The movement had a lot to do with access to information, freedom of speech, freedom of expression, and the right to privacy — the balance between those principles.
But it evolved. In Iceland, the party began with those ideals. People often mistakenly think it is about getting free movies and music. But what attracted me to the movement was not the tech side — I do not have a background in IT. I am a lawyer.
What drew me in was that when you start talking about freedom of expression, access to information, transparency, the fight against corruption, and the right to privacy, you are talking about fundamental rights.
In Iceland, those concerns directly intersect with human rights and constitutional issues — topics that unfortunately do not receive enough political attention.
These are areas where politics have lagged, partly because the public is not aware of how these issues affect them.
For example, one bill that the Pirate Party has presented year after year — though we have always been in the opposition, so it has never passed — is about constitutional review of parliamentary legislation.
Currently, there is no formal constitutional review process in place. That fact is shocking to most people. One reason there is so little concern is that people assume such a review already exists.
They cannot imagine that Parliament would pass laws without checking them against the Constitution. But that is the situation. That is the reality.
So we proposed the creation of a constitutional council that would be independent from Parliament — nonpartisan and separate from politics — that would provide advisory opinions. It would always remain advisory. For example, at the request of a certain number of members of Parliament, the council could review a bill and offer an opinion on its constitutionality.
There are many possible ways to structure the process. Still, the idea is to have a mechanism for constitutional review — something we currently lack. Unfortunately, there has been little interest in this proposal.
People often ask, “How is this related to the Pirate Party?” It is — because it concerns fundamental rights and freedoms, which are at the core of the Pirate Party’s mission. That is the meaning of the movement. And I think that is how most people in Iceland now understand the Pirate Party — because they have seen what we fight for.
We fight for transparency. We are known for that. We have often gained public attention for our relentless efforts to expose corruption in Iceland.
For example, we published a report — this is quite telling. You can see the difference between how conservatives and we, in the Pirate Party, understand transparency and privacy.
I can compare four cases in Iceland where sensitive information was made public — two involving the Pirates and two involving conservatives. And there is an apparent difference between them.
Jacobsen: Do you see the Pirate Party as a kind of Robin Hood party — stealing from the rich and giving to the poor?
Gunnarsdóttir: Well, for instance, in one case that people call a “leak,” we just published the report — it was not a leak at all. We posted it on our website. It was a report about how specific state-owned properties were handled after the 2008 economic collapse. The report had never been made public , so we made it public.
That is what we do. Another report we were accused of leaking did not come from us. But we did not mind people thinking it did, because it was a critical report.
It was leaked two days before its scheduled release. The report concerned the sale of a state-owned bank, and numerous questions arose regarding that transaction.
The report came from the National Audit Office — I was trying to remember the name earlier.
Jacobsen: Finances, accounting, financial statements… audit?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes, the National Audit Office. The report was leaked to the media two days before its official release, and we were blamed for it. We never claimed responsibility, but we also said we did not see anything wrong with it.
The reason the authorities delayed its publication was to control the narrative before the public had access to it. It was actually in the public interest for it to be seen earlier.
The leaks we are blamed for — rightly or wrongly — are always about information relevant to the public, about matters of state.
By contrast, leaks associated with the Independence Party have involved private information — personal data about individuals — intended to discredit or stigmatize them.
In one case, the target was an asylum seeker. So you can see the contrast: they try to say it is the same — ”Oh, you’releaking information too” — but we are leaking public-interest information about state operations. They are leaking private data about vulnerable people.
But they do not seem to understand the difference.
This is what we are known for, and many people understand what the Pirates stand for.
That said, one of the reasons we failed to gain any parliamentary seats in the last election is the growing polarization in society.
The Left-Greens lost voters to the Socialist Party, and the Social Democrats have become stronger. We are moving toward two large political blocs, instead of the many smaller parties that characterized earlier parliaments.
Even though ten parties still ran in the last election, this is the current trend.
So that is the Pirate Party in Iceland — more or less.
Jacobsen: How do you see Iceland’s style of humanism as a reflection of the more global movement? Everyone shares roughly the same values, but they tend to rank or prioritize them differently. Another way to look at it is that when youshine a light through the prism of humanism, the character and colouring of it shift depending on the culture , and even the individual. So, how would you describe the Icelandic version of humanism?
Gunnarsdóttir: That’s a fascinating question, mainly because we are seeing some worrying developments lately. Still, I believe humanism is a significant part of our national identity.
Generally, Icelanders do not identify as religious. Even when people say, “We are a Christian nation,” what they usually mean by that is not literal Christianity — they mean values we associate with humanism: equality, justice, and human rights for all.
Those are the values for which we are known. We have built a reputation for gender equality and queer rights — those are the areas where we’ve been seen as progressive.
But that image is changing somewhat.
So, when people say things like, “Immigrants are threatening our values,” I respond, “No , they are not. You are, by saying that.”
The threat comes not from immigrants but from those of us who fail to uphold, share, and practise our values. Instead of modelling and teaching them, we violate them ourselves.
For example, by passing legislation that limits the rights of refugees — such as removing their ability to appeal decisions — we are actively taking away procedural protections from vulnerable people.
This is very new in Iceland. And it is entirely at odds with our core identity as a society committed to equality.
Jacobsen: Does the attitude toward immigration differ by group? About 8% of your population is Polish, 1% is Lithuanian, and then there’s a mix of others who make up 1% or less each.
Gunnarsdóttir: Is there a difference in how they’re treated? Or is the sentiment more uniform? It hasn’t changed drastically in recent years.
By far, the largest foreign population in Iceland is Polish, and they are relatively well accepted.
The issue has more to do with political rhetoric and how those in power frame the conversation.
For example, the number of refugees in Iceland is still extremely small , statistically negligible. It’s something like 0-point-something percent. There is no significant influx.
Still, if 400 refugees arrive, people act as if Iceland is about to sink into the ocean — yet when 10,000 people come from the European Economic Area (EEA), no one says a word.
The numbers have not increased dramatically in general. The only real spike came in connection with the war in Ukraine.
That was a few years ago now — time passes quickly.
We also had a noticeable group come from Venezuela, which was a trend across Europe.
But even then, the numbers were small — just a few hundred people. And we knew it was a temporary situation.
Despite this, one of the most significant turning points in public discourse came when our Foreign Minister posted something on Facebook…
That moment marked a U-turn in Icelandic political discourse. At the time, Palestinian refugees were protesting outside Parliament.
There’s a small park in front of the Alþingi — it is where protests regularly take place. If you want to demonstrate, that is the designated area.
They had set up a single tent, with authorization from the city. Inside the tent, they stated they would remain there until they were granted family reunification with loved ones still in danger in Gaza.
These were people who had already received approval for family reunification, but had no safe or viable means for their relatives to leave Gaza.
Other countries, including some Nordic states, were utilizing their diplomatic channels to facilitate evacuations. Iceland, however, refused to do so.
At the time, the Foreign Minister — who was also the chair of the conservative Independence Party — posted on Facebook that the tent was “obnoxious” and “horrible” to see in front of such a “respectable institution.”
Jacobsen: To clarify — factually — it was not a tent encampment, but a single tent?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes, just one tent. You could probably fit 20 people inside. But no one was sleeping there. People were sitting, gathering, and talking.
You could pass by and have coffee with them. It was relatively peaceful — almost like a small festival.
Jacobsen: Were there any noise complaints?
Gunnarsdóttir: Not.
Jacobsen: Any complaints of violence or harassment?
Gunnarsdóttir: Not initially. But after the Foreign Minister’s Facebook post — after he called it obnoxious — harassment began. People started targeting those in the tent.
Jacobsen: Just to be clear, was the harassment coming from Icelanders or other recently arrived individuals?
Gunnarsdóttir: It came from Icelanders. The Foreign Minister’s rhetoric stirred something. And the most serious part was at the end of his post — he tried to claim he was addressing two unrelated issues in one article — but he wrote that Iceland also needs to “start getting serious about organized crime.”
Jacobsen: When I was doing fieldwork in Iceland, I was there for about three weeks. It took about a week before I saw even one homeless person. I did not see any others during that time. That individual may have been a beggar rather than homeless. From what I observed, Iceland is quite comfortable.
Gunnarsdóttir: Very comfortable.
Jacobsen: In general. So, how did the public receive the minister’s remarks?
Gunnarsdóttir: There was much backlash. There was much anger. However, I would also say it permitted people who already held those views to speak openly.
It completely shifted the discourse. It increased polarization in a single day. Suddenly, it became socially acceptable to say that asylum seekers are a problem — either they are taking our jobs or draining public benefits. And it is like, okay, which is it? Are they working or not working?
People started claiming that their religion is dangerous. Everything changed almost overnight. And now it is common to hear someone say, “I have no problem with foreigners — it is just asylum seekers and refugees who are here to exploit our social system.”
People feel entitled to talk this way because someone in power has given them a signal. “He must know what he’s talking about,” they assume. But he didn’t even say any of that directly. He just said, “This tent is ugly,” and added something about organized crime.
Jacobsen: Role models and examples matter. Representation matters.
Gunnarsdóttir: Let me ask you — how many women in hijab did you see during your stay?
Jacobsen: In Iceland?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes. How long did it take? Did you see one on your first day?
Jacobsen: I think I saw one.
Gunnarsdóttir: Exactly.
Jacobsen: It doesn’t stand out.
Gunnarsdóttir: We don’t have a visible increase in diversity on the streets, unlike many other countries. The number of visibly different people is still minimal. We only have the rhetoric — there is no demographic basis for the moral panic.
This rhetoric is the only reason public opinion has changed.
Jacobsen: For the record, how does Lutheranism in Iceland distinguish itself from other Christian denominations? Anddoes religion get invoked in political discourse during moments like these?
It doesn’t have to be about immigration necessarily — just anything that could be seen as contradicting humanist values: equality, fair treatment, dignity, compassion.
Let’s set aside sophisticated legal frameworks, such as democracy, the rule of law, and human rights, for a moment.
Gunnarsdóttir: Well, right now we have two openly populist parties in Parliament — one of them is even part of the governing coalition. They talk about Islam as a threat to our values, and so on. That narrative is very present.
But the number of Muslims in Iceland is minimal — their population is growing, but only by one or two people per year. I don’t have the exact figures, but it’s not very important.
We do not even have one Muslim representative in Parliament. So, how exactly is Islam threatening our values or institutions? It is not. The threat is coming from within — from the political rhetoric and actions of people already in power.
Jacobsen: There’s a North American saying — you might have heard it: “The hate is coming from inside the house.”
And I think Iceland is a perfect example , because we had nothing external driving this. In Iceland, you’re free to speak out, so why the shift in rhetoric? In many countries, people are unable to discuss such issues.
So, we’ve seen pluralistic ignorance: everyone assumes things are fine, while underneath, they’re not.
Gunnarsdóttir: Exactly. It’s like the underreporting of domestic violence — what’s happening in Iceland now feels similar. We’re witnessing changes I never thought possible.
Jacobsen: Can you give specific examples?
Gunnarsdóttir: Take the language around asylum seekers and refugees — that hateful rhetoric would have been unthinkable in Iceland until recently.
Then there’s the legal changes. In March 2023, Parliament passed legislation that — in effect — cuts access to housing and healthcare for rejected asylum seekers 30 days after their application is denied. Previously, they had continued access to basic services while appeals or post-decision reviews were underway.
What’s baffling is why this was necessary. Iceland has had very few severe crime cases involving asylum seekers — perhaps one high-profile violent incident, where non-refoulement meant they couldn’t be deported. So instead, authorities removed international protection status — but still couldn’t deport the person — and then assigned a lower-tier permit with no rights. It’s a punitive measure with no apparent benefit.
What’s driving this? It stems from a desire to apply stricter standards selectively and protect privileges domestically.
Jacobsen: And this measure passed with broad political support?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes — all major parties, including the Social Democrats, the Progressive Party, and the Center Party, supported it. That’s a significant shift for parties traditionally seen as liberal or rights-respecting.
Now there’s talk of establishing a detention center near the airport for deportations — something Iceland has never had. Why does Iceland need it? It’s a small island country with a population of ~400,000 people. Where would deportees go? It all feels unnecessary and harsh.
And it is not like the situation is not challenging. But they want to build a camp — and they are even planning to place children there. This is despite UNICEF, Save the Children, the Red Cross, and all the major humanitarian organizations in Iceland being in protest. And they are being ignored.
Five years ago, I would have said, “That will never happen.” I would have thought that UNICEF would oppose it, and there would be pushback; at the very least, they would keep children out of it. But no.
Jacobsen: Are these reactionary or more populist parties? Are the leaders mostly men?
Gunnarsdóttir: No. One is a man, and one is a woman. One of them is actually in government , and she’s a woman.
Jacobsen: Are there slurs or epithets in Icelandic that are used when this rhetoric is employed?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes.
Jacobsen: What are they — or at least, what are their translations?
Gunnarsdóttir: Well, the most extreme one is “Iceland for Icelanders.” That is the harshest. But most won’t say it openly. Instead, they use coded language. They say things like, “We’re fine with immigrants, as long as they’re better than everyone else.” You’re expected to be perfect — to do everything right — to earn even basic shelter.
You have to work, support your family, speak the language fluently after two weeks — you know, all these impossible expectations.
I don’t recall a specific slogan at the moment. Still, it’s the same as what you hear everywhere: “Foreigners get everything for free, and we can’t even take care of our elderly or disabled.” It is a familiar pattern.
So anyway, the phrases we hear a lot now are like: “I’m not against immigrants, but these asylum seekers and refugees…”And then they go on to say they are leeching off the welfare system, bringing in religion that does not belong here, or that they are criminals.
And none of that is backed up by data. There is absolutely nothing — even slightly — that supports those statements. For example, the refugees we received from Venezuela have higher employment participation rates than Icelanders in the same demographic group.
Gunnarsdóttir: They’re the same age, same background — apart from nationality. And yet, a higher percentage of Venezuelans are employed than Icelanders in the same position. But that changed nothing. The government still wanted to get rid of the Venezuelans.
Jacobsen: Why?
Gunnarsdóttir: And they are not even Muslim. That’s the thing. You cannot blame this on anti-Muslim sentiment in that case. And yes, of course, there are a few complex cases — families who struggle to adjust, who face challenges with integration. But those are the exceptions.
Still, people seize on those few exceptions and treat them as if they were representative of the whole. The conservative newspaper here , Morgunblaðið, “The Morning Paper,” runs stories almost daily about these cases.
Jacobsen: How do you spell that?
Gunnarsdóttir: It’s a long word — Morgunblaðið. But the website is short: mbl. Is. It’s very well-known, and many people in Reykjavík still subscribe to it. They claim to be neutral, but they are not. They constantly report on “security issues” in neighbourhoods with high immigrant populations. The narrative is always the same: teenagers are violent, families are not cooperating with schools, etc.
And yes, there may be two or three families experiencing these issues—families who do not attend parent-teacher meetings or are struggling with their children’s education. But it only takes one of those stories, and suddenly people generalize. They start thinking all refugees are like that, all immigrant communities are like that.
It’s tough to combat. Because the statistics do not support these claims, they say the opposite. However, it’s no longer about statistics or facts. And that’s what makes this whole situation anti-humanist.
People no longer care about evidence or human dignity. They are concerned with fear, control, and exclusion.
Jacobsen: What parts of Iceland would you say are most committed to humanist values? Ideologically, all of Iceland considers itself a humanist nation. The core of our national identity has long emphasized equality, human rights, and fundamental freedoms for everyone. That’s how we see ourselves — and it’s how the world has come to see us. So yes, people care about that image. But the tragedy is: we’re slowly destroying that reputation — from the inside.
Jacobsen: What is your vision for Siðmennt moving forward?
Gunnarsdóttir: What I promised to do as President — and what I want to do, and what I think is most important now — is to create interreligious cooperation. We need to work together to uphold our shared values.
For example — and you asked this earlier, but I did not answer it — regarding how the Evangelical Lutheran Church, the national church of Iceland, is perceived, how do they differ from other Christian denominations here?
They are very progressive. The Bishop of Iceland is a woman, Agnes M. Sigurðardóttir. And her successor, or coadjutor bishop-elect, has a transgender child. Indeed, it is evident that the church leadership embodies progressive values.
Jacobsen: That’s raising the platform.
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes — raising the platform, raising the body, as it were.
So, I would say the national church is progressive. For example, we’ve seen news about youth — mainly teenagers around confirmation age — going to church more often.
Jacobsen: And the confirmation age is 14?
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes — 13, 14, 15 years old. They’re attending church again, which wasn’t fashionable two years ago. Now, it seems to have become a trend. We’re not sure where it’s coming from. Some people are concerned that it might be coming from social media influencers, like Andrew Tate or others.
But honestly, if that is the case, I would say I’m relieved they’re going to the state church. Because there, they’ll receive a very different message — one grounded in equality and compassion.
I sing in a church choir myself , which is a little ironic, I suppose.
Jacobsen: What is the name of the choir?
Gunnarsdóttir: Kór Hallgrímskirkju. It’s the choir of Hallgrímskirkja — the large church in central Reykjavík.
Jacobsen: What’s the English translation?
Gunnarsdóttir: Hallgrímur was one of our national heroes. He was a poet — Hallgrímur Pétursson. He did not recite his poems, but he wrote a great deal of deeply emotional and spiritual poetry that is still cherished today. The church is named after him.
And yes, it’s one of the most respected choirs in Iceland, and I sing soprano there.
Jacobsen: Are there many sopranos?
Gunnarsdóttir: Not as many as you’d think. You always need fewer of them than people imagine.
Jacobsen: When I was in choir, we were always short on basses — but they were thrilled to have me. I was thinking the same when you mentioned it earlier — that’s my space. We perform pieces like Mozart’s Requiem and similar classical works.
Gunnarsdóttir: That’s actually why I joined the choir. I love classical music, and much of it is religious , Christian in particular. But I do not mind that. It’s deeply emotional. Spiritual music is often the most beautiful and moving. Honestly, it’s one of the most rewarding aspects of religion.
Jacobsen: Yes.
Gunnarsdóttir: When I ran for President of the Humanist Association of Iceland, I worried they might have a problem with me singing in a church choir. But I think they understood.
Jacobsen: George Carlin once said that the only good part of religion is the music. And Nietzsche had that quote — Without music, life would be a mistake. I agree with a lot, but they had their flaws. I interviewed Kelly Carlin — George Carlin’s daughter — years ago, when she published her memoir. We talked about his parenting. He was a very absent father, and his drug issues were overwhelming at times. So his public image did not quite match the private reality. AndNietzsche… well, he was a troubled person, to say the least.
Gunnarsdóttir: And I have many friends who are musicians. One of them told me, “I can’t write good music if I’m mentally okay. That’s the problem.” He said, “I’m seeing a psychologist, and now that I’m doing well, everything I write is boring. There’s no spark.”
It all comes from strong emotions. But even so, you should be able to create when you’re well. Speaking for myself, I didn’t sing in a choir for a couple of years during the COVID pandemic, and I just felt like I was withering. I was like a flower without sunlight. I didn’t want to get out of bed.
So, I joined another choir. I’ve been in choirs since I was a kid — I have to sing. Like you’ve seen here, I go to karaoke all the time. It’s my form of meditation.
Jacobsen: What’s your favourite karaoke song?
Gunnarsdóttir: That depends on the crowd — whether I’m singing in Iceland or abroad. But if I had to pick one right now… I mean, my go-to song these days is Burn from Hamilton.
Jacobsen: Great choice.
Gunnarsdóttir: Thank you. It depends on the mood. Sometimes I sing for myself; sometimes I sing for the crowd. Those are very different choices. Some songs are satisfying to perform — others are better for listening. But Burn… I relate to it deeply. I feel like I become Eliza when I sing it.
The story behind it is compelling. Hamilton, of course, is about Alexander Hamilton, one of the Founding Fathers of the United States. Eliza Hamilton, his wife, sings the song Burn.
There are numerous written historical sources from that era, especially those about Alexander, as he wrote extensively. Letters, essays, speeches — volumes of material. But when it comes to Eliza’s reaction to a particular scandal — his affair — there’s absolutely nothing. Not a single letter, not a single line. Historians have searched, and the prevailing theory is that she destroyed all the correspondence about it.
So in the song, she says: “I’m burning the letters. I’m burning the memories. Let future historians wonder how Eliza reacted.”
It’s so emotionally rich. First, she sings about how their love made the world feel like it was burning — and then she takes that metaphor and turns it into an act of defiance, burning his legacy of betrayal. It’s devastating and beautiful.
Gunnarsdóttir: And then at the end of the song, she says, “I hope that you burn.” She’s furious — but it is such a decisive moment. The music is incredible. It’s beautiful.
I admire the work of Lin-Manuel Miranda, the writer of Hamilton and other musicals.
Jacobsen: Although Hamilton has been criticized, right? There are some problematic elements.
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes, of course. It’s very problematic. It’s about the founding of the United States, and it casts nearly the entire group of Founding Fathers using actors of colour. I think only two characters are portrayed by white actors. While that was a deliberate artistic decision — and it does something quite powerful in terms of representation — it still glosses over some very uncomfortable historical truths.
Jacobsen: Including issues of age and slavery?
Gunnarsdóttir: It’s still the story of the United States — founded on colonialism, slavery, and exclusion. You could say it’s a kind of historical revisionism. And yet, I still like it. I appreciate the music, the emotion. It’s moving, even with its flaws.
Jacobsen: Do you find, when interacting with people around the world — especially in humanist circles — that there’s sometimes a sense of over-intellectualization? Like, a fixation on clarity and precise language that ends up feeling sterile? Like a Styrofoam cup: perfectly formed, but lacking the vitality and passion of a karaoke song or a choral piece?
Gunnarsdóttir: I would not quite put it that way. But I see what you mean. I think this tension is always there — we humans are both simple and complex. Our ideologies are the same — simple and complex at once. You will always have groups that obsess over the details, and you will always see that it’s the bigger picture that reaches people.
So, I don’t know. It’s about context. There’s a time and place for everything. And sometimes, emotional resonance—through music or story—reaches farther than precision ever can.
For example, I also really liked The Greatest Showman, even though it’s about a highly problematic figure: P.T. Barnum, the man who invented the circus and early versions of the modern zoo. In the beginning, he used disabled people and others seen as “different” to create a spectacle , clearly exploitative.
But in the film, he’s portrayed as this heroic figure who gave marginalized people opportunities. And maybe, at that time, it felt that way for some. I don’t know.
However, it isn’t very easy. The story is sanitized, emotional, and inspiring — but the reality behind it is much messier. It’s like many “progressive” portrayals: they’re uplifting, but they risk simplifying ethical debates in ways that’re too simplistic.
Jacobsen: It reminds me of specific secular or philosophical conversations , especially about equality. Someone might say, “It was revolutionary to promote equality in the first century or the seventh century,” and the response is always: “Yes , for the first century. But we’re not in the first century anymore.” That’s the tension. It’s like freezing an ethical stance in time, then wrapping it in transcendental language. It feels noble , but it also avoids the real challenge of evolving ethics. And that tension — it’s everywhere.
Gunnarsdóttir: But I think just the fact that these musicals generate discussion is a good thing. The fact that we’re willing to talk about them — that we have open debate around Hamilton or The Greatest Showman — that’s useful. That’s what matters.
The ability to reflect and think critically — that’s at the core of humanism. It’s central to everything: our ability to examine, question, and grow. So yes, maybe there are people who are more fanatical or uncompromising in their critiques than I am — but I respect that too.
Jacobsen: What did your time in Parliament teach you , especially in a country where religion is broadly in decline, and gender equality is achieved mainly in some sectors, though still lagging in others? We could also discuss the Nordic paradox if you’d like. But specifically, from 2021 to 2024, what was the most important takeaway for you?
Gunnarsdóttir: The most crucial lesson — personally and ideologically — was this: all the people elected to Parliament in Iceland, at least in my experience, are there because they genuinely want to improve society.
That was a big realization. They may have different visions of what “better” looks like, but they are not there for selfish reasons , not for personal gain or corruption. Before I entered Parliament, I lived in my social bubble. I think, subconsciously, I believed that the so-called “bad guys” were only there to serve their interests. However, I no longer hold that belief.
Iceland may be different from other countries, of course . Still, for me, this belief became very strong: that all of them, regardless of party, are trying to build a better future.
And what surprised me most is that I made friends across ideological lines — people my social circle would probably despise. However, we became friends because we shared a fundamental value: a desire to improve society. We disagree on how to get there, or on what a good society looks like.
But that shared intention is powerful. It helped me understand others more deeply — and that, in turn, made it easier to communicate my values and goals. Because if you cannot understand someone else’s perspective, it is almost impossible to explain your own in a way that resonates.
Jacobsen: So empathy became a bridge.
Gunnarsdóttir: Exactly. That was the most important lesson: to understand where people are coming from.
Jacobsen: Why? Why do they hold these opinions — some of them so unreasonable?
Gunnarsdóttir: I know. And at first, it felt like wandering through a forest of hidden trolls. But you’re right to ask.
What was fascinating to me was realizing that just as I may find them unethical, they think I — and people like me on the left — are unethical. They see us as disloyal.
For them, loyalty is a core moral value. It’s important to us, too, but we tend to place justice and equality even higher. For instance, when we expose wrongdoing within our political circles, they perceive it as immoral. They view it as a betrayal.
Jacobsen: That’s a very revealing difference in ethical hierarchy.
Gunnarsdóttir: That, in my opinion, is one reason why the left is so often fractured — we value truth and justice over loyalty. Meanwhile, conservatives prioritize loyalty above nearly all else. It’s right there in the root of the word: conserve— to preserve, to remain loyal to what is.
Jacobsen: It’s almost like a political expression of filial piety.
Gunnarsdóttir: I wasn’t sure what that meant when I first heard it, but yes — family loyalty. That’s a perfect analogy.
These same people-the ones with views I disagree with-they are also the ones who ask, “Why aren’t these refugees staying home and rebuilding their own countries?” And it’s not only about rejecting foreigners. Partly, yes, they don’t want them here. However, their ethical framework also states that if their own country were in crisis, they would stay. They would fight. They would endure. They would never abandon it.
So, when someone leaves their country and seeks refuge here, it’s seen as a betrayal of duty and national loyalty. That’s why it feels unethical to them.
When I understood that — when I grasped how their priorities are arranged — it changed everything. I realized that we have different moral frameworks. We’re not speaking the same ethical language.
Jacobsen: That’s a significant shift in perception.
Gunnarsdóttir: It was. And it made me rethink the way I was raised, too. I mean, growing up, my mother—she’s a leftist—would sometimes talk about conservatives in really dehumanizing terms. She described them almost as monsters, animals. And I took that in.
But now I see that they’re not monsters. They may be behaving in ways I find monstrous — especially when rejecting vulnerable people — but they believe they’re doing the right thing. That understanding has helped me connect with others. And I think that connection is crucial.
It’s the only way to bridge divides — by seeing others not as evil but as coming from a different starting point, once we find that shared ground, we can build dialogue.
For example, I’ll say to them: “You believe that for society to be just, peaceful, and stable, we need clear rules that apply to everyone. You believe in the rule of law because it brings order.” And they’ll say, “Yes.”
And from there I say, “Then don’t you also believe that everyone should have the opportunity to correct a wrong decision? That everyone should have the right to seek justice?” And often, they agree. That’s the kind of bridge we need.
Of course. Okay — maybe we can talk about that instead. Instead of saying, “Oh, just feel sorry for those poor immigrants,” — which they will not relate to, because that’s not their core concern — we can talk about how we want our society to function. That’s where we find agreement.
This is how you make progress, even when you fundamentally disagree on other issues. And we’ve lost sight of that. I think we’ve lost sight of the importance of finding common ground. People are no longer interested in it.
It’s become so polarized that now, if you show even understanding of someone else’s perspective, it’s seen as agreement. And that, in turn, brings consequences — social consequences, professional ones. People fear showing empathy because it may be interpreted as betrayal.
Jacobsen: It becomes a kind of moral absolutism: either you agree with me, or you’re the enemy. But there’s an analytical difference between saying, “I understand you,” and “I agree with you.”
Gunnarsdóttir: Yes. And we need to find where we agree, because there are layers to all of our opinions. If we can identify one of those layers where there is alignment, then maybe we can work from there.
That doesn’t mean we’ll always reach a perfect conclusion or a solution that makes everyone happy. That’s not realistic. But simply acknowledging that we have more in common than we often admit — that’s something. And it matters.
Jacobsen: Absolutely, any final comments?
Gunnarsdóttir: Not really. I think in the end, we are all humanists — wherever we come from and wherever we go. We need to realize that. I believe in everybody’s humanity.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Arndis.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/03
Gytaute Gyneityte is a Lithuanian architect and military conscript who advocates for civic preparedness and national resilience. She speaks passionately about Lithuania’s history, cultural preservation, and defence readiness. Gyneityte emphasizes unity, human rights, and resistance to authoritarianism, drawing on both professional and personal insights into architecture, security, and collective memory. Gyneityte reflects on Lithuania’s resilience, military preparedness, and cultural survival amid threats from Russia. Emphasizing civic unity, historical memory, and democratic values, she expresses hope for Europe’s commitment to human rights and national sovereignty in the face of authoritarian aggression and hybrid warfare.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: You are an architect. Is Lithuania’s architecture also very angular?
Gytaute Gyneityte: I’d say so. Maybe not as much in contemporary architecture anymore, but yes, it is more about the quality of the materials—they use very high-end materials.
Jacobsen: You can see it everywhere: the roads, the cobblestones—everything is done beautifully. One example is in Ukraine, in Kharkiv. The stonework and masonry were done exceptionally well. That is old construction, of course. So, talking about military preparedness—what is your name and title, and how long were you in the military at that point?
Gyneityte: I’m Gytaute Gyneityte. In February 2015, I was conscripted and spent nine months in military service, training alongside other conscripts.
Jacobsen: What did you learn?
Gyneityte: I was assigned to the engineering battalion. Lithuania reinstated mandatory conscription in early 2015, following Russia’s annexation of Crimea in 2014. As an architect, I opted for the engineering battalion because there might be an overlap with my civilian skills. However, in reality, it was more focused on constructing field fortifications and obstacles.
We trained in handling explosives—detecting, neutralizing, and using them to breach structures. That included learning how to open doors with a charge. Of course, we also received basic military training, which included firearms handling, grenade throwing, physical fitness, and combat drills. That is the core of what the engineering battalion focuses on.
Jacobsen: Now, regarding the threat posed by the Russian Federation—by that I mean the Kremlin under Vladimir Putin, and perhaps vice versa to some extent—how do Lithuanians perceive that threat? How is it characterized, both politically and militarily, especially in the context of a possible escalation of the current conflict?
Gyneityte: We have always viewed Russia as a threat. There was never a time when the possibility of Russian aggression was ruled out. Hybrid warfare—encompassing cyberattacks, disinformation campaigns, and attempts to influence our political system—has been a consistent feature since we regained independence in 1990.
Russia has never been a friendly neighbour. However, since 2014, things have felt more acute and more dangerous. We have been warning the rest of Europe about Russia’s aggressive intentions since the annexation of Crimea. Back then, many European leaders told us we were paranoid. Unfortunately, we were right, and recent events have confirmed that. We have never forgotten the threat Russia poses.
You might have heard of the hybrid tactics involving Belarus. In 2021, the Lukashenko regime began directing thousands of migrants—mainly from the Middle East—toward Lithuania, Poland, and Latvia as a form of state-orchestrated pressure. It was widely interpreted as a retaliatory measure for EU sanctions.
What we did in response was a controversial move. We placed the migrants in detention centers and began constructing barbed-wire fencing along the Belarusian border. While the humanitarian aspect of that response has been criticized, we successfully controlled the situation.
Now, Lithuania has significantly strengthened its border security. We have fortified the borders with Belarus and the Kaliningrad region of Russia, and we continue to invest in military preparedness in cooperation with NATO.
We have, what do you call it—we have suspended parts of the Ottawa Convention, or at least adjusted our interpretation of it, in terms of the use of anti-personnel mines. Now, we are permitted to deploy certain types of landmines for defensive purposes, in coordination with other Baltic countries, as well as Finland and Poland, I believe.
What else? We have established what might be called a Commander’s Reserve or civilian auxiliary units—basically, civilians who receive some basic military training so they can assist the army or the police forces in the event of an emergency.
Generally, public support for the military has increased substantially. Military service and defence are seen much more positively now. Salaries for professional armed forces have also been raised. Conscription is still active. We have a standard nine-month conscription period, and that has not been cancelled. So yes, these are some of the main defence-related efforts underway.
Jacobsen: Now, cyber warfare seems to be Russia’s primary tool of disruption in Lithuania. Is that correct?
Gyneityte: Not only in Lithuania. I think they are doing that across Europe—and beyond. They have been involved in various acts of sabotage throughout the continent.
We had an incident where a plane exploded, and the cause is still under investigation. Events like that always raise suspicions, and unfortunately, the default assumption tends to be that Russian involvement is involved. Russia also regularly interferes in elections across Europe.
Jacobsen: Now, when it comes to Lithuania’s military preparedness, what can the country realistically do in the event of an invasion?
Gyneityte: Realistically, it has long been acknowledged that Lithuania could only hold out for a few days on its own, just enough time for NATO forces to arrive.
The critical vulnerability is the Suwałki Gap—a narrow stretch of land, approximately 60 kilometres wide, that forms the only land connection between the Baltic states and the rest of NATO, specifically between Lithuania and Poland. To the north is the Russian exclave of Kaliningrad, and to the south is Belarus. Everyone knows this is the weak link—Lithuania knows it, NATO knows it, and indeed, Russia and Belarus are aware of it.
Every September—or every two years in September—Russia and Belarus hold extensive joint military exercises known as Zapad (“West”). These drills are essentially rehearsals for potential conflict scenarios in this region. Their maneuvers often simulate actions like securing the Suwałki Gap, which would connect Kaliningrad to Belarus and effectively cut off the Baltic states from NATO reinforcements.
Naturally, we are not particularly enthusiastic about these exercises, and Zapad is scheduled to take place this year. If something were to happen, it could be timed to coincide with those drills. In other words, it would not necessarily be just a drill.
Jacobsen: What about the leadership of Lithuania? Are they issuing public statements to raise awareness—within NATO or through other alliances—that could facilitate military or critical intelligence support?
Gyneityte: We have been very vocal for the past ten years. The Baltic states and Scandinavia, together with Poland, are the ones who truly understand the threat, especially since we are closer geographically and have a better understanding of the Russian culture and language.
So, for years, we have known what they have been saying and planning. For example, Russia recently published a so-called “history” of Lithuania, claiming that Lithuania is not a real country, that our language is fabricated, just like they have done with other former Soviet republics. This was officially signed by Sergey Lavrov, Russia’s Foreign Minister. Yes, that is indeed very concerning. Our politicians always respond to these provocations. In Lithuania, if you go around saying pro-Russian things, you are not going to win a majority of votes. However, our current ruling coalition is somewhat corrupt, which is a concerning development. A protest is planned for Tuesday because our Prime Minister is allegedly involved in corruption.
Jacobsen: What are the allegations?
Gyneityte: A detailed investigative report was conducted by journalists. It revealed that he was living in a costly apartment that did not belong to him, despite having a modest official salary. He also allegedly has business ties that suggest financial misconduct. It is a long story—at least an hour-long investigative piece—but it is packed with information. Moreover, this is not the first time he has been implicated. He has previously been found guilty of corruption.
It was a mess how he got elected, to be honest. So yes, people are worried. However, even with all that, nobody can openly say they want to be friends with Russia or Belarus now. Our laws—and our constitution—do not allow that. Moreover, the public would be furious if anyone were to try.
Jacobsen: How do people in the military talk about these kinds of threats?
Gyneityte: When we refer to “the enemy,” everyone knows who we mean. There is no ambiguity. It is not some vague, abstract threat. It is very clear. It is not hypothetical. We all know who we are preparing to defend against.
Jacobsen: How much of Lithuania’s GDP is allocated to the military?
Gyneityte: As of now, Lithuania is spending over 2% of its GDP on defence, which meets NATO’s target commitment. We plan to increase it even further in the coming years—toward 3%—due to the current security situation. There is a broad consensus that this is necessary.
Jacobsen: How big is the military?
Gyneityte: Currently, Lithuania has approximately 20,000 professional military personnel. The number is approximately 26,000 when including both full-time and reserve forces.
In terms of conscription, we have had approximately 3,000 conscripts each year since February 2015, when conscription was reinstated. That would amount to around 30,000 trained conscripts to date.
We also have the Lithuanian Riflemen’s Union, which is a paramilitary organization. You will want to check the official numbers for that. In addition, there are volunteer forces—our volunteer national defence units. Again, exact figures can be verified, but they represent a meaningful segment of our broader defensive capacity.
Moreover, there is now also the Commanders’ Office—a relatively new initiative that allows civilians to undergo a short training program to prepare them to support military or police operations in emergencies, even in a limited capacity. For comparison, I believe Lithuania’s professional armed forces are now larger than those of Australia.
Jacobsen: That may be true. Australia is interesting, however. In the G20, Canada ranks nineteenth and Australia twentieth in terms of defence personnel size. However, Australia has perhaps the most generous benefits package for military personnel in the G20. Canada might be second-best in that regard. That is why both countries have large incentive programs—they struggle to recruit enough people to meet their targets. Within the Lithuanian context, when people talk about “the enemy,” do you think the political leadership might be corruptible enough to undermine Lithuania during a military incursion? Say, in the event of another so-called “special military operation” by the Kremlin-led Russian Federation, would some leaders offer no resistance? Or would civilians override executive orders and defend themselves regardless, because the political will lies more with the people than the leadership?
Gyneityte: Option number two. If we had the same kind of government for the past thirty years, maybe things would be different—perhaps we would be more brainwashed, or living in some grey zone politically. However, it is now a matter of black and white. In Lithuania’s history, the Singing Revolution took place on January 13, 1991. Sausio 13-oji. That was a critical moment.
So, to give an example: on January 13, 1991, Soviet tanks entered Lithuania. Civilians—many of them unarmed—came out to defend the parliament building, the television tower, and the national broadcaster.
In that case, they formed human shields—standing in large crowds around these buildings so the tanks could not proceed without running them over. There were thousands of people. You have no idea how many came out. They stood out there all night in minus-20-degree weather, singing songs, drinking coffee and tea, doing whatever they could to stay warm—and to stand their ground peacefully.
It was such a scary time. Moreover, I was not even born yet, but I cry every year. I put a candle on the windowsill, and we do this every year in remembrance of them. To give you an example: people from all over Lithuania came—no guns, no formal preparation—just to stand there and defend strategic buildings with their bodies. Moreover, I truly believe the same would happen today.
No doubt in my mind—crowds would appear again. This cab driver once told me that he was at the TV tower that night. Moreover, the radio host said, “It is a cold night. If anyone living near the TV tower can welcome people in for some tea, to warm up, please do. Moreover, put a candle on your windowsill.” Moreover, the cab driver said, “I looked around, and there was not a single window without a candle.”
That is who we are. This is our main existential threat—Russia. Moreover, we know just how expensive our freedom has been—our independence. We have been losing and regaining it for centuries. The fact that we have kept our language—even when it was banned—our alphabet, our traditions, including our Christmas celebrations, all of it was outlawed. Russia tried to erase us—our history, our culture, everything. However, we kept it. We still speak Lithuanian. We still have our country. That is a miracle. Moreover, I believe it shows we will maintain this miracle, no matter what happens.
Jacobsen: Are there different gendered experiences of this history? I mean, the Singing Revolution, the threat of Russia, the military—do men and women carry different memories, perspectives, or sentiments about these events? So, how might men think and feel about this history versus how women might?
Gyneityte: No, I do not believe there is a significant difference. After World War II, during the partisan resistance, the Russians killed a lot of Lithuanian men. Women had to step up in their place. During Soviet times, everyone, regardless of gender, was considered a worker.
That is why I think we have made relatively good progress on gender equality. Not perfect, not great—but not terrible either. I do not think men or women fought more or less for freedom. It was the same enemy, and it was the same difficult life, no matter your gender.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts?
Gyneityte: I do not know—maybe a message of hope. I believe that we can be united and work together. That we can choose human values—and not succumb to dictatorships, fake news, propaganda, or fear. I still have much hope that Europe remains a place that fights for human rights.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Gytaute.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Skeptic Society Magazine
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/11/04
What was the primary research question?
Pew Research Center conducted this study to better understand the religious and spiritual beliefs, practices and views of the growing number of people around the world who are religiously unaffiliated (meaning they say they are atheist, agnostic or “nothing in particular” when asked about their religion). A separate, recent Pew Research Center report found that the number of adults who are religiously unaffiliated (also called religious “nones”) has climbed rapidly in the recent past across North America, Europe, parts of Latin America and some countries in the Asia-Pacific region, such as Australia and South Korea. “Nones” are the world’s third-largest religious category, after Christians and Muslims.
We particularly wanted to look at the internal diversity among “nones.” In this study, for example, we looked at differences in the beliefs and practices of this group by gender.
The breadth of this survey allows us to shine a light on the complexity and differences among “nones” as a group — both within countries and across the countries studied.
How did the primary question shape survey design and country selection?
This report is part of an ongoing series of international surveys focused on religion that Pew Research Center conducts as part of the Pew-Templeton Global Religious Futures project. The project, which is funded by The Pew Charitable Trusts and the John Templeton Foundation, is an effort by the Center to understand religious change and its impact on societies around the world.
Given that the global population of religiously unaffiliated people has continued to grow in recent years, we wanted to use this survey to look at “nones” across different regions and cultures. Indeed, we could analyze the beliefs and behaviors of “nones” in countries from all six inhabited continents.
Our study finds quite a bit of variance from country to country. It also reveals that religiously unaffiliated people aren’t necessarily devoid of religious beliefs and practices. In fact, many “nones” hold religious or spiritual beliefs and participate in religious or spiritual activities.
For example, in all 22 countries we examined in this report, about a fifth or more of “nones” believe in life after death. The shares of unaffiliated adults who say there is definitely or probably an afterlife range from 19% in Hungary to 65% in Peru. Many religiously unaffiliated adults also express belief in God. This includes solid majorities of “nones” in South Africa (77%) and several countries in Latin America, such as Brazil (92%), Colombia (86%) and Chile (69%). On the other hand, religiously unaffiliated adults in Europe and Australia are much less inclined to believe in God. Just 18% of “nones” in Australia, 10% in Sweden and 9% in Hungary are believers.
We also wanted to look at how many “nones” express a consistently secular outlook, saying they believe neither in God nor in an afterlife nor that there is “something spiritual beyond the natural world.” In Sweden, where 52% of adults are religiously unaffiliated, around half of “nones” (or 28% of the country’s total adult population) express nonbelief in all three of these measures. Other places where relatively large shares of adults are “nones” expressing such nonbelief are Australia (24%), the Netherlands (24%) and South Korea (23%).
Why publish detailed results for 22 of 36 countries?
While the report is based on surveys in 36 countries, we focused this analysis on the 22 countries where our surveys had large enough samples of religiously unaffiliated adults to break out and analyze their results separately. (Religious “nones” make up 5% or fewer of adults in the remaining 14 countries.)
The relatively large samples of religiously unaffiliated adults in the 22 countries enable us to dive deeply into the diverse attitudes, beliefs and practices across places representing an array of religious and cultural traditions – from Germany and Mexico to Singapore and South Africa.
How did you define “atheist,” “agnostic,” and “nothing in particular” to keep meanings consistent across languages? How were belief items tested for conceptual equivalence across cultures?
In our surveys, we generally rely on respondents’ self-identification when categorizing them into different religious groups. For example, in the United Kingdom, respondents are asked: “What is your current religion, if any? Are you Roman Catholic, Protestant, Muslim, Jewish, atheist, agnostic, something else or nothing in particular?” In every country surveyed, atheist, agnostic and “nothing in particular” were read aloud as answer options, and respondents who gave any of those three answers are considered religiously unaffiliated. (The religiously unaffiliated group also includes a handful of respondents who said they were “something else” in the initial question. When they provided more detail about their religious identity, their answers suggested they belonged in the religiously unaffiliated category and we categorized them accordingly.)
Cross-national studies like our “nones” study pose special challenges when it comes to ensuring the comparability of data across multiple languages, cultures and contexts. We work with local, reputable survey research organizations to collaborate on questionnaire design and survey administration. We also consult with linguistic and cultural experts to make the questionnaire as easy as possible to translate into other languages and to implement in other cultures so that we can compare findings across different countries. For each language we survey in, the survey questionnaire is translated by local teams, and then another translator from an independent agency reviews the translation. The translation is not considered final until both groups of translators are happy with it.
Which cross-national findings about beliefs among “nones” remain most robust?
In general, religiously unaffiliated people are less likely to hold spiritual beliefs, less likely to engage in religious practices, and more likely to take a skeptical view of religion’s impact on society than are Christians, Muslims and people who identify with other religions.
Still, sizable percentages of “nones” do hold some religious or spiritual beliefs. As I noted before, across the 22 countries analyzed in this report, about a fifth or more of religiously unaffiliated adults believe in life after death – including nearly two-thirds of “nones” in Peru.
Meanwhile, smaller shares tend to engage in the religious practices we asked about in this survey. For example, only about a fifth or fewer of “nones” say they light incense or candles for spiritual or religious reasons in most of the 22 countries.
Another important point to keep in mind is that in nearly all these countries, the largest subgroup of “nones” is people who say their religion is “nothing in particular,” rather than those who identify as atheist or agnostic. In the United States, for instance, 19% of adults identify religiously as “nothing in particular,” compared with 6% who are agnostic and 5% who are atheists.
Which demographic patterns among “nones” (age, gender, education) recur across countries?
In most of the 22 countries we analyzed, adults ages 18 to 39 are much more likely than older adults to identify as “nones.” For instance, 72% of Japanese adults under 40 say they are atheist, agnostic or “nothing in particular,” compared with 50% of older adults.
In general, adults with more education are somewhat more likely than those with less education to be religiously unaffiliated. For example, 28% of Argentine adults who have at least a secondary education are “nones,” compared with 18% of Argentines with less education.
And in nine of the countries analyzed, men are more inclined than women to say they have no religion. In the United Kingdom, for example, 51% of men are “nones,” compared with 40% of women.
When we look among religiously unaffiliated adults specifically, women generally are more likely than men to hold most of the religious and spiritual beliefs we asked about in the survey. This gender gap occurs in more than a dozen countries on the question of whether parts of nature can have spirits or spiritual energies. In Australia, for example, 60% of women who are “nones” believe this, compared with 31% of “nones” who are men.
Similarly, among “nones,” women typically are more likely than men to believe in reincarnation – defined in the survey as the belief that “people will be reborn in this world again and again.” For instance, unaffiliated women in South Korea are about twice as likely as unaffiliated men to believe in reincarnation (36% vs. 16%).
However, unaffiliated women are more likely than unaffiliated men to believe in God in only four of the 15 countries with sufficient sample sizes to analyze differences by gender. And among Swedish “nones,” men are somewhat more likely than women to express belief (13% vs. 6%).
Within Pew Research Center’s nonadvocacy remit, what planned analyses should readers use in the future to deepen understanding of the unaffiliated?
Pew Research Center plans to continue studying “nones” around the world, including their demographic makeup by age, gender and education, and how their share of global and national populations is changing. In addition, we’re interested in how the views of “nones” may be changing – whether their beliefs, behaviors and attitudes on various issues are evolving and, if so, how. We hope to repeat some of our previous survey questions periodically to measure change over time.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Bishop Accountability
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/11/02
How does trauma-informed storytelling empower survivors of clergy and cult abuse through narrative agency and psychological healing?
Michelle Stewart is a cult survivor, author, and advocate whose memoir, “Judas Girl: My Father, Four Cults & How I Escaped Them All,” chronicles her childhood entry into, and adult exit from, multiple high-control religious groups. Raised in an environment that included a Hutterite community and other Anabaptist and Orthodox enclaves, she examines how spiritual authority, conformity, and secrecy enable abuse: Stewart’s work centers survivor safety, legal accountability, and ethical pastoral confidentiality. From Colorado, she speaks and writes about distinguishing mainstream faith from cultic enclaves, reforming confession practices, and fostering healing narratives that emphasize agency, nonlinearity, and evidence-based support for survivors.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Stewart differentiates organized religion from cults by centering survivor experience, highlighting speech suppression, enforced conformity, and authoritarian leadership. She recounts entering high-control groups as a child, including a Hutterite community, and leaving four groups by her twenties. Stewart critiques how confession and obedience to spiritual fathers can be weaponized, especially in Eastern Orthodox and Anabaptist enclaves, shielding crimes and silencing victims. She argues for universal mandatory reporting, accountability, and practical reforms prioritizing child safety and legal responsibility. As a survivor-advocate, she promotes trauma-informed interviewing and healing narratives emphasizing agency, nonlinearity, and systemic change over sensational detail.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Judas girl herself, Michelle Stewart. You are a cult survivor turned author and advocate. There are a few kinds of people: some are still in the cult, some have left and never talk about it again, and some, like you, write, speak, and advocate about this troubling aspect of human psychology and group dynamics. Let’s start with the obvious question: what separates a cult from a formal religion for you?
Michelle Stewart: I’ve been asked that many times, and you’ll hear different definitions from different people. There are shared traits, but no single academic litmus test—no exact checklist that determines whether something is a cult. My understanding has evolved. While there are standard features, I believe it’s the experiences of survivors that reveal whether something truly functions as a cult. When I talk with people from various groups—fringe offshoots of mainstream traditions, Amish or other Anabaptist communities, the Unification Church (often called the “Moonies”), or the Twelve Tribes—specific themes repeat. One is the inability to speak out freely. People may hold personal differences in belief or culture, but challenging authority often leads to ostracism. You can’t both belong and speak out. This shows up primarily in cases of abuse—people risk losing community, family ties, and support systems. Another consistent feature is the demand for conformity. In most mainstream congregations—Episcopal, Baptist, or Jewish synagogues—you see substantial diversity in lifestyle, politics, and personal views. In high-control groups, there’s far greater oversight of daily life. For example, some Orthodox Jewish communities observe detailed dietary laws (halakha) but also include health exemptions; in certain separatist Christian groups, such as some Anabaptist or Old Order communities, dress codes can be strict and engagement with outside politics limited or guided by leaders. In some groups, political or social views are tightly scripted. Within broad traditions you can find both healthy, pluralistic congregations and insular enclaves that become high-control. For instance, Eastern Orthodox Christianity as a whole is a mainstream religion. Yet, particular enclaves or breakaway groups can operate in cult-like ways. That distinction matters. People often respond, “You can’t call the Orthodox Church or the Amish a cult.” Labels applied to an entire faith are rarely accurate. But a person can have a cult-like experience within a subset of almost any tradition. You can live under a cult mentality while still being nominally part of a larger, mainstream religion.
Jacobsen: How does your experience fit into that? How did you fall into it?
Stewart: How did I fall into cults? I was brought in as a child. I was seven when my parents joined what I describe in my book Judas Girl: My Father, Four Cults & How I Escaped Them All as the first of four cults. For me, it began as a childhood experience that I later had to leave as an adult. When I entered, I had no understanding of what a cult was or even the vocabulary to describe it. I only knew that suddenly, I was in a highly controlled environment. The first group was a Hutterite community.
As I mentioned earlier, you can have an organized religion with cult-like enclaves within it. Moving from a mainstream evangelical background into a setting where the group controlled all finances, clothing, housing, work, and spending meant having almost no personal autonomy. I knew it was different, but I didn’t understand what those differences meant until years later. It wasn’t until my twenties—after four separate groups—that I escaped and began to reflect on and understand those experiences.
Jacobsen: What were the through lines for those four groups?
Stewart: Just to make sure I understand correctly—the commonalities between the four? Yes. There were several universal through lines. They connect back to how I define a cult. The first was that in all of these groups, church leadership was revered far above the average member and held unquestioned authority. There’s irony in the fact that many of them referred to their leaders as “servants,” when in practice, it was the opposite.https://c820bf8c4bac7639ec28d18d382c3f51.safeframe.googlesyndication.com/safeframe/1-0-45/html/container.html
Whether it was an Orthodox priest or a bishop in an Anabaptist sect—the kind I spent years in—the leader’s opinions were treated as sacred and beyond challenge. As a lay member, especially as a woman, my opinion was not considered equal. I was taught to accept that my wisdom was inferior. Leadership was seen as divinely superior.
With that came varying degrees of control. In some groups, the leader’s authority was absolute—obey or be expelled. In others, defiance led to psychological punishment: being ignored, condemned to hell, or subtly ostracized. It wasn’t always physical rejection but often psychological manipulation. That dynamic was consistent across every group.
Another constant was the use of God and salvation to control people. There was a mentality—unstated but deeply ingrained—that the ends justified the means. If you had to shun, manipulate, or even lie to someone to preserve their “salvation,” it was seen as justified. Abuse—whether psychological, emotional, or, for children, even physical—was rationalized in the name of saving souls. The goal was to ensure compliance with the group’s beliefs at any cost, because salvation was considered paramount.
Of course, not all cults are religious, but in my case, they all were. These were faith-based, coercive systems—extreme forms of existing religions. In this case, extreme iterations of Christianity, specifically of the Anabaptist tradition, which emerged during the Reformation and includes Mennonites, Amish, and Hutterites, as well as parallels in specific Orthodox contexts. They were radical offshoots of otherwise recognized faiths.
There’s one more through line worth mentioning: the suppression of individuality. In every group, personal expression was discouraged. In some, conformity was enforced through clothing. In others, like the Orthodox sect I was part of, individuality was discouraged in thought, behavior, and aesthetics. Even how you decorated your home, prayed, or spoke had to conform. There was a constant demand for uniformity, presented as a condition for salvation.
Jacobsen: There are two points I want to touch on. The book is not anti-faith; it’s anti-abuse. The other is your father’s declining mental health, with his reported revelations. Can you expand on the distinction made in the former and the development—or deterioration—of the latter?
Stewart: That’s an essential aspect for me. Judas Girl speaks candidly about religion and religious control. As we discussed, there’s a difference between a cult and an organized religion, and beyond that, between people of faith and those with no organized religion at all. Judas Girl is meant to be accessible. If you’re not a person of faith, you won’t feel pressured to embrace someone else’s God. You can read it from a secular perspective. But if you are a person of faith, it’s written to help you understand how elements of faith can be both used and abused. In a sense, it’s almost written to protect faith.
There’s often backlash from people with a cultic mindset who claim that speaking out against a church is the same as speaking out against God. To me, speaking out against religious abuse is actually faith-affirming—just as speaking out against child abuse is affirming of parenthood and family. You can condemn abuse without condemning the larger institution. Abuse isn’t inherent to religion, but acknowledging and addressing it is essential for any faith to survive. I try to make that distinction clear throughout the book. It’s not a confrontation with God; it’s a confrontation with people who misuse God.
As for my father’s mental illness, it developed gradually. In his case, I believe his illness was the on-ramp to these extremist groups. He began showing schizoid and borderline personality traits. He was later diagnosed with aspects of both, although he avoided psychiatric treatment whenever possible. People with that type of mental framework tend to see things in extremes—very black and white—and that meshed perfectly with the rigid, binary worldview of cults.
There was also a part of him that wanted what he saw as a simpler life, which is ironic because being in a cult is anything but easy. They may offer a sense of unity and care, but the cost is enormous—far greater than simply living independently. His black-and-white mindset absorbed cult ideology like a sponge. As he developed more religious delusions—believing himself, and later others, to be prophets—he became increasingly susceptible to manipulation by cult leaders claiming divine authority.
Those two factors—mental illness and cult influence—worked in parallel. Each reinforced the other. Both eroded his ability to reason or listen to outside perspectives. When we entered a new group, family members who spoke against it became “the enemy.” Similarly, people with untreated mental illness often reject voices of reason that might anchor them. As he cut those ties, he spiraled further, descending into a kind of shared psychosis between his own mind and the cult ideology.
Jacobsen: How did you feel about that during that time? And how do you think about it now, knowing it doesn’t work?
Stewart: At the time, my understanding changed across my cult experiences. At first, I was young, and my father told me he believed he had a physical illness. I also didn’t have the education to understand mental illness. Another common thread in all these cults was a systematic denial of mental illness. They didn’t acknowledge it as real, or if they did, they framed it as a deliberate choice or a sin. That encouraged him and left me without tools or vocabulary. Someone growing up in secular society might encounter diagnoses and develop understanding earlier than I did. I first believed him when he said he was physically ill. As he developed spiritual delusions, I took them at face value. I was a child. It was terrifying, but I believed completely. When we entered an off-grid Anabaptist commune, by the fifth or sixth year the group started pushing back on him. I was a member of that church, which meant my obedience was to them over my parents. It was a conflict, but I had to obey the church. They confronted my dad. They wouldn’t call it mental illness; they called it lying and sin.
“We have deemed you are not a prophet. We have deemed you are not unwell.” That was even scarier, and it’s where part of the Judas Girl concept comes from. I had two authorities—a father and a church—each telling me to reject the other or go to hell and be abandoned. Both ended up dumping me. As that evolved and I gained my own understanding, it created a schism that made me question both my father’s mental well-being and these cult mentalities. It took a long time to put together. I knew the questions were growing, and they were confusing and terrifying at the time. As an adult, with education and academic learning about mental illness—and curiosity about my own experience—I look back and see a heartbreaking story of a father who was abusive, manipulative, and controlling, but also very ill and in need of help, exploited by cults and extreme religion. That is one foundation for why I wrote the book: to bring these thought processes and psychology to light so people can better understand cults around them and, possibly, their own experiences.
Jacobsen: Let’s take a round-table view. You’ve looked at Eastern Orthodox hierarchy as a kind of petri dish where allegations can climb multiple layers. How does that model differ from, for example, the Catholic Church’s more centralized, pyramidal hierarchy and the autocephalous—though still hierarchical—structure of Orthodoxy?
Stewart: I don’t have personal experience in the Catholic Church, so when I speak about it, I’m referring to conversations with people who do. We’ve compared stories. What stood out to me in the Eastern Orthodox Church—stronger than what my Catholic friends described—was the control held by the spiritual father, the confessor. In my experience, that person had enormous power over how one perceived salvation. They often used that influence to control people who wanted to report abuse.
The article we discussed was about abuse. I, along with others who I won’t name, experienced situations where we wanted to say, “I was abused, and I’m struggling.” The response was that seeking accountability outside confession wasn’t our role. It was said to be between the abuser and their spiritual father. We were told to confess our resentment or “unforgiving heart,” but never to speak publicly.
I saw that mindset climb the hierarchy. There’s a current case involving Father Matthew Williams—my brother-in-law—where layers of cover-up are alleged. There’s evidence that misconduct occurred long before the cases now on trial. When I say “petri dish,” I mean that the Church sees itself as responsible for the sins of its members—but only internally, to the exclusion of external authorities. In practice, this means that even criminal acts are treated as matters for spiritual correction rather than legal accountability.
While the Catholic Church has had cover-ups too, what sets parts of Orthodoxy apart, based on my experience and conversations, is the intense secrecy. The idea that “it’s not the business of the secular world to know the sins of the Church” allows abuse to remain hidden. I know people who were told explicitly that if they reported abuse, they would be denied communion. Considering that communion is tied to salvation, withholding it is devastating. That level of spiritual coercion goes beyond what I’ve heard in Catholic contexts. I have seen similar tactics in cultic environments. Still, within Orthodoxy, it’s distinct in how authority and obedience are used to silence victims.
Jacobsen: What are the ethical lines between pastoral confidentiality and shielding a crime?
Stewart: It’s interesting. I mentioned earlier that I have a social media account where people discuss these topics, and this week’s discussion was about the protections of confession—particularly when child abuse is confessed. Where are the ethical lines in that situation? I don’t have an obvious answer. Still, I believe the well-being of children and victims of sexual assault should always take priority.
Suppose a clergy member—or anyone providing pastoral care—is aware of ongoing abuse. In that case, I believe they have an ethical duty to protect the person being harmed. I phrased that deliberately: there’s a narrow space in pastoral care, especially under the sacrament of confession, where someone might seek forgiveness for past misdeeds that are no longer ongoing. In those cases, the clergy member might not be a mandatory reporter, though even that should be carefully examined. Those instances are rare, but they exist.
What troubles me most is why pastoral care—whether in Orthodox, Catholic, Amish, or Methodist settings—so often excludes accountability. Why is legal responsibility not part of the moral direction given by those in authority? It’s well known that, in many cases, it isn’t. Returning to our earlier discussion about the “petri dish” of confession, if clergy hold such profound authority in a person’s life, why isn’t that authority used to encourage, or even require, legal accountability?
Why are these two realms—spiritual care and justice—so disconnected? We’ve created a system where, in some Orthodox confessions and even specific Catholic contexts depending on jurisdiction, someone can confess to actively abusing a person and remain confident that no one will report it. They can continue serving as clergy, or in any position of authority, with complete impunity. That raises the deeper question: why are we still preserving this expectation of absolute privacy for abusers, instead of fostering a norm that confession should lead to accountability and protection for victims?
Jacobsen: This has been a recurring theme across some of my conversations—with counselors, psychologists, psychotherapists, and social workers—people who deal directly with the individual psyche and moral responsibility every day.
Through some of my conversations with counseling psychologists, psychiatrists, psychotherapists, and social workers—people who deal with individuals one-on-one in intimate settings—I’ve noticed that these professions are bound by a clear duty to report abuse. Clergy, on the other hand, are also a kind of professional class. They’re educated, often intelligent, and serve hierarchical community roles.
Yet they’re not bound as strictly by mandatory reporting laws. There was a bill introduced in California last year to change that, but it didn’t pass. These are recurring concerns. So, what justifies lowering the universal standard of duty to report within religious contexts—for priests, bishops, or other clergy?
Why is that the case, and why shouldn’t it be? Why does religion get that exemption?
Stewart: My personal view is nuanced, but I believe there should be a consistent standard across professions. The argument for giving clergy a lower reporting standard doesn’t hold up when compared to the reasoning used for psychiatric or social work confidentiality.
When I’ve spoken with people who support the priest-penitent privilege, they often cite the sacramental nature of confession. The laws vary by state, and some jurisdictions differentiate between a casual conversation with a pastor and a formal sacramental confession. That distinction, mainly relevant to Catholic and Orthodox churches, effectively creates a privileged carve-out. A conversation with a minister in a Protestant setting might not receive the same protection, which raises fairness concerns on its own.
The justification I hear most often—and I can understand it emotionally, even if I disagree—is that this protection encourages abusers to seek repentance. The logic goes: if someone knows their confession could lead to legal consequences, they may never come forward, and the abuse will continue unchecked. By maintaining confidentiality, the clergy can supposedly help the person change course.
I understand that rationale but reject it. Mental health professionals also want people to come forward, to seek help for harmful impulses or past actions. But their systems recognize that protecting victims must take precedence over preserving an abuser’s privacy. The same principle should apply to clergy.
When confidentiality shields active abuse, it becomes complicity. There are cases where priests have confessed to abusing their own children, and the information was never reported. The result was continued reoffending. That, to me, is the moral failure of this privileged exemption. The idea that pastoral confidentiality should outweigh the safety of victims—especially in cases of ongoing abuse—is indefensible.
We know that the data show recidivism rates are high. We know from data that someone confessing to many of these crimes is highly likely to reoffend, even if the incident they’re confessing to is in the past. For that same reason, while I have empathy and sympathy for people in the Catholic or Orthodox churches who want to protect that sanctity—and that the seal of confession has long been recognized as inviolable—I think the victim’s rights truly have to come first, for the same reasons the psychological community reached that conclusion.
Jacobsen: What else? What would signal actual reform?
Stewart: I would say a public embrace of accountability. I would love—well, I mean, we never want a crime to have occurred—but I would love to see a scenario where a priest stepped up and reported abuse. I would like to see the church stand behind him. For example, years ago, I don’t know if you’re familiar with the Christ of the Hills Monastery in Blanco, Texas. I happened to be; my then-spouse was being used by the defense in a child sexual abuse case. The conversation came up that they might try to subpoena the alleged perpetrator’s spiritual fathers to testify as to whether he had confessed to sexual abuse. The response was universal: “We will go to jail before we break the seal of confession.” And again, I understand that faith is deep and complicated, and I hurt for anyone who feels they must make that decision. However, reform to me would have been the opposite: the church saying, “We have potential child victims—ongoing child victims. We are accountable to the state first. We hold our clergy to higher standards than the general public, not lower.” That kind of accountability would signal real reform.
It would also help if people were made very clear—even in confession or religious counseling—that taking accountability for your actions outside of skipping communion for a few months is part of repentance. It’s part of the path to healing, not a way to avoid facing consequences. Changing that narrative entirely would give the process absolute integrity. Frankly, it would prevent more abuse than sheltering people in confession ever could. Right now, many think, “All I have to do is confess.” We know clergy members have confessed to child sexual abuse and then continued to serve liturgy afterward. If they knew that confession would not remain purely private, that would put real weight behind accountability and integrity within the church. It could be a significant turning point in shifting the culture around abuse.
Jacobsen: What about those without significant agency—children who grow up under those conditions? What are the additional risks and contexts for them in terms of community safety? For instance, we know from Orthodox records that most sexual assault cases involve adult women. In contrast, most pedophilic cases involve young boys. But children have an additional lack of agency when they’re cognitively undeveloped and under coercive control—not just part of a community but trapped within it. From your experience in law, is there additional context for that, or does the law treat both roughly the same, perhaps just applying child abuse statutes?
Stewart: I’ll answer this as best I can, and you can tell me if it needs reframing. As far as victims of abuse, what I’ve seen and experienced—and I mentioned this earlier—is the silencing of those victims. That needs to be completely reversed. I’ve seen policies in more mainstream churches where a victim of abuse knows they’ll receive immediate support if they report, rather than the church systematically silencing them or treating it as a matter for confession or for clergy to decide. I’ve seen this repeatedly across multiple churches with a cult-like mentality, where victims are told that forgiveness is required. That includes me. When you struggle psychologically, mentally, or emotionally as a victim of abuse, that struggle is layered on as another sin—your supposed inability to forgive or heal. It becomes another mechanism of control. I’ve also heard of more than one case where priests asked victims to recount details of their abuse repeatedly in confession.
I bring that up because part of the change I want to see is not only ensuring safety and the right to come forward, but also reforming how confession itself is taught and understood—how to identify abuse and manipulation even within the sacrament. That means recognizing when a priest abuses that role, whether for gratification or power. Confession should never be a place of manipulation. It should be spiritual guidance, not the endpoint for psychological, medical, or legal support. It’s a place for spiritual reflection, not for silencing or retraumatization.
Jacobsen: Your focus is on systems critique within the personal narrative. Do you ever focus on individual perpetrators who hold significant authority? Is it appropriate to do so, or is it generally better to focus on systems to achieve accountability?
Stewart: I think you need both. When I wrote my book, it came very much from a personal perspective. Specific individuals absolutely need to be called out. Abusers should be named, and every victim deserves full support and access to resources. Hence, they know it wasn’t their fault and that help exists. Focusing on specific perpetrators definitely has its place. In personal life, that’s often how things unfold—you respond to harm by identifying those responsible. Each scenario deserves attention and accountability.
That said, I lean toward systemic analysis because there’s always a percentage of any population that will abuse—whether through rape, child molestation, or psychological harm. What distinguishes abuse within specific religious systems is that those systems build scaffolding that allows abuse to thrive. It’s not limited to cults or extremist sects; we’ve seen it in mainstream religious institutions as well.
My focus happens to be on those environments where abuse in a more mainstream religious setting might be reported and stopped much more quickly. In contrast, some institutions create conditions where abuse thrives. I know you focus a lot on the Orthodox Church. Still, I’ve also done much work with Amish and Amish offshoots, which have very similar approaches. What we see in those cases are abusers who remain active for years, often with multiple victims, all covered for by the system.
Now, of course, the individual abuser is fully responsible for their behavior. But could they have been stopped if they lived within a structure that required accountability—mandatory reporting, sex offender registries, restrictions from being near children—instead of simply confessing, facing minimal church discipline, and then being placed back into authority over the same vulnerable groups? That, to me, is the key difference.
I live in Colorado. We have wildfires here. If a fire breaks out in a swamp, it won’t spread far. It’s still a fire and still dangerous, but in a wet area, it’s contained. Now imagine a drought area, like much of California. A single spark can become a massive blaze. The person who lit that spark is responsible, but the conditions make the destruction far greater. That’s how I see institutional abuse. Each case matters, but these systems create drought-like conditions—structures that let a small flame turn into a wildfire destroying countless lives. That’s where my focus lies.
Jacobsen: What are the consistencies in how cults and religions handle abuse cases? If someone were abused within the Moonies or within Orthodoxy, both institutions would respond in specific ways. What aspects would be essentially identical?
Non-extreme religions or cults too. When I interviewed David Pooler, he noted that regardless of Christian denomination, the immediate institutional response to clergy abuse is usually self-protection—and the community participates in that defensiveness. So, in that sense, cults and religions behave similarly.
Stewart: That’s a good observation. Reflecting on Pooler’s comment, I’d agree that there’s a general human tendency across institutions to be defensive. You can even see it in nonreligious contexts like the Boy Scouts. This organization systemically hid abuse to protect itself.
Where extreme religions and mainstream ones could diverge is in their foundation for accountability. Some mainstream or progressive religious institutions have taken steps to ensure victims or perpetrators are referred to legal and psychological support systems. But yes, many spiritual and organizational structures share that same reflex: to defend the institution, preserve public image, and protect financial interests. Religious organizations handle millions or even billions of dollars, and that economic dimension often reinforces secrecy.
Still, I’ve also seen positive exceptions. Some churches have acknowledged abuse publicly, reported it to authorities, and immediately defrocked or removed offending clergy. So, I wouldn’t say the behavior is universal across all religions. There’s a clear dividing line between how extreme or insular groups respond versus how more progressive, accountable, or legally compliant ones do.
Jacobsen: How can you tell a story while maintaining the objective fact that people have been victimized—whether or not they identify as victims, or adopt a survivor mindset, or eventually move toward one? That’s mainly up to them. So when it comes to interview practices and media work involving people who’ve been victimized—especially in cult contexts—how should we avoid falling into what’s often called “trauma porn”? How do we prevent the stigmatization or sensationalizing of trauma while still telling stories factually and empathetically, incorporating that first-person perspective? What are your recommendations?
Stewart: I love that question. And I’ve had to confront it while writing my own story—which, with permission, includes parts of others’ stories too. It’s a tricky space, and I don’t think there’s an obvious line. It’s one reason you’ve heard me in this conversation veering toward systemic critique—focusing on institutional change and mindset shifts—rather than delving too deeply into explicit personal accounts. However, I do explore those in my book.
When interviewing survivors, I approach it from the perspective of helping them share their experience in a way that fosters healing. Some interviewees won’t be fully healed, and that’s okay. But if they’re willing to talk, they’re usually at least beginning to process the experience and acknowledge that something wrong occurred. That’s the foundation.
I would strongly advise against pressing someone who hasn’t yet recognized their own abuse or manipulation into doing so on record. I’ve seen interviewers try to coax that realization out mid-conversation, and it rarely leads to genuine insight—it risks retraumatization instead. The focus should remain on healing and change.
For example, I can describe being in a car accident—my leg shattered, immense pain—but the emphasis should be on how I recovered: the physical therapy, the emotional reckoning, and how I reached a point where I could walk or even run again. That story becomes one of endurance and transformation. Likewise, if someone is speaking about abuse, the focus should be on why we’re telling the story: healing, accountability, prevention, or awareness.
You can convey the depth of trauma without detailing the blood and gore. Those visceral details can eclipse the point, which is understanding the impact and how change occurs. Include only enough to give context for the gravity of the experience, not to exploit it.
Ultimately, keep intent front and center. If the intent is to shock or horrify, that’s the wrong motive. If the intent is to illuminate, empower, and advocate for healing or accountability, then the story serves a purpose. And if someone’s goal is just to make audiences gasp, they probably shouldn’t be working in this space at all.
Jacobsen: What would you consider the healthiest self-narrative for survivors of cult or clergy abuse to adopt as they go through the healing process?
Stewart: I like how you framed that earlier—the distinction between victims, those with a victim mentality, those who are healing, and those who are thriving. Speaking from personal experience rather than an academic standpoint, I’d say that while reminders like “it’s not your fault” are essential, the most powerful narrative centers on healing as a journey.
First and foremost, you—and only you—are responsible for your healing. That may sound daunting, but it’s also liberating. Someone may have harmed you, but recognizing that you have not only the responsibility but also the power to heal gives you agency. That mindset moves you forward much more effectively than staying in a place of “I am broken.”
At the same time, it’s essential to understand that healing isn’t linear. You’re accountable to yourself and only to yourself as you uncover, process, and come to terms with what’s happened. There’s no timetable, no external requirement for how quickly or neatly that process unfolds.
There’s no requirement to have forgiven anyone by a specific date or to have recovered from PTSD in a particular timeline. Healing doesn’t obey a schedule. One of the most powerful realizations for me—and for many survivors—is that while abuse feels deeply personal, it actually isn’t. To the abuser, it was never truly about you.
That’s hard to internalize, because for most victims, the violation feels like the most personal event imaginable—especially in cases of sexual or psychological abuse. But when you can decouple yourself from it, when you can recognize that the abuse came from something entirely outside of you—a sickness, a distortion, a system—that’s when real healing starts.
The old saying “it’s not your fault” is true, but it doesn’t go far enough. It’s not only not your fault—it’s not about you. You were simply in the path of someone else’s damage, like a car running over something in the road. That may sound devaluing, but it’s freeing: none of this comes back to your worth.
In my own case, understanding that both the sexual and emotional abuse I endured had very little to do with me—realizing it wasn’t about who I was or what I did to “deserve” harm—was essential. Whether the cause was religious indoctrination, mental illness, moral corruption, or plain cruelty, it originated entirely in them, not in me.
Accepting that truth has been one of the most significant contributors to healing.
Jacobsen: Thank you very much, I appreciate it.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/11/01
СокальINFO is a Ukrainian online news outlet that positions itself as an independent information agency with a focus on Western Ukraine. Founded in 2015, it built its reputation on delivering sharp local and regional coverage while also publishing translated or republished stories that tackle broader subjects—from political developments and financial fraud to geopolitics and culture. Its multilingual approach, with content appearing in Ukrainian, Russian, and English, has helped it reach a diverse readership at home and abroad.
In this interview, СокальINFO reflects on its origins dating back to 2011, when it evolved from modest Lviv-region coverage into a project dedicated to Western Ukraine and investigative reporting. Over time, its mission has shifted from grant-backed experimentation to self-funded journalism that exposes corruption, crypto-related fraud, and geopolitical schemes—particularly sanction evasion by Putin’s oligarchs after Russia’s full-scale invasion. Operating with a lean team of five to eight journalists and two fact-checkers, the outlet safeguards anonymity amid wartime threats to media workers. Despite a modest audience of roughly 30,000 monthly readers, its stories are widely reprinted.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Your website carries a patriotic manifesto. The purpose: “unite the community.” How was СокальINFO started?
СокальINFO: We started our fascinating journey covering news from the Lviv region, and later expanded to global news coverage in 2011. Projects changed, and over time, the main project became Sokalinfo.
Jacobsen: Has the mission evolved since its inception?
СокальINFO: Sokalinfo changes every year. At one point, the project received grants. Later, we had to earn our own money.
Jacobsen: СокальINFO focuses on “current news of Western Ukraine.” You have areas of focus on international scandals, crypto frauds, and geopolitical exposés. What drives these areas?
СокальINFO: We fight for truth, against deceit, fraudsters, and corrupt officials. This is the mission of our project, which employs from 5 to 8 people depending on the possibilities of a given month. After the mad Putin attacked Ukraine, we had to cut back our other projects and focus on exposing the evasion of sanctions by Putin’s oligarchs.
Jacobsen: Do you have in‑house reporters, editors, or fact‑checkers?
СокальINFO: Yes, we have two people who handle fact-checking.
Jacobsen: Why is editorial and publishing anonymity important during wartime?
СокальINFO: The reason is simple: after the war started, every person in Ukraine could be easily killed.
Jacobsen: Your readership spans the United States, Ukraine, the UK, and other countries. How do you measure engagement and impact?
СокальINFO: Many reprint our articles. However, the audience is narrow — no more than 30,000 readers per month.
Jacobsen: How does your organization navigate Ukrainian media laws with international hosting regulations?
СокальINFO: We comply with all jurisdictions, but we never succumb to fraudsters seeking to pressure independent journalism.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts for others wishing to cover news or distribute republications as an archival resource in Ukraine or externally in support of Ukraine?
СокальINFO: Since the war began, Ukraine has become the most cited country in the world, and the Ukrainian language is beautiful, as is English. We want the Ukrainian language to someday become international within reasonable limits. And it will, because more than 20 million Ukrainians live in 50 countries worldwide.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/11/01
Belkis Wille is an associate director at Human Rights Watch, specializing in Ukraine and international humanitarian law. She leads investigations into civilian harm, conditions in occupied territories, and accountability for violations by all sides. Human Rights Watch’s Ukraine portfolio spans the documentation of short-range drone strikes and other attacks on civilians, Russian detention abuses, including torture and sexual violence, and the forced Russification of education for children in occupied regions. Current investigations focus on Russian authorities’ seizure of homes, the treatment of Ukrainian children inside Russia, and the effect of aid cuts on humanitarian operations. Wille has also contributed to reports on the execution of prisoners of war, unlawful weapons use, and the impact of infrastructure attacks on essential winter services. Human Rights Watch emphasizes survivor-centered fact-finding in all its work.
In this interview, Wille describes how short-range drone warfare has intensified into a leading cause of civilian casualties, with deliberate quadcopter strikes along the front lines. Russia’s winter assaults on infrastructure—and its public posting of strike footage—are intended to instill fear. Meanwhile, aid cuts have strained mobile medical teams, though donors continue to sustain food and water support. Education remains imperiled by power outages and enforced Russification in occupied areas. Research challenges persist due to limited access to these regions. Wille also underscores that Human Rights Watch documents Ukrainian violations, including the mistreatment of Russian prisoners of war, the use of antipersonnel landmines and cluster munitions, and media distortions that misframe air-defense debris as offensive attacks.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Thank you for joining me today. What have been some significant changes in Russian tactics over the past six months, whether in targeting civilians or civilian infrastructure?
Belkis Wille: Russian forces have targeted civilian infrastructure in areas near the frontline and in the West of the country since the beginning of the full-scale invasion. That was one of their main military aims early on. These attacks have continued and, over the past three years, have fluctuated in intensity, but this is not a new dynamic.
What has changed quite significantly, however, is the way in which Russian forces are delivering munitions in frontline areas and in the West of the country. These tactical choices have led to an increase in civilian targeting and deaths. In particular, I’m referring to drone warfare.
At present, short-range drone attacks account for a large share of civilian harm. In January 2025, UN monitors attributed about 27 percent of civilian deaths and 30 percent of injuries to short-range drone attacks. Early in the invasion, drones were responsible for a much smaller share. This demonstrates a significant change in how drones are being used to target and kill, and the intensity of such attacks has increased since mid-2024 and through 2025.
Jacobsen: So, just over a year now. Has this targeting been indiscriminate, or are there specific areas where they’re focusing more heavily?
Wille: When we talk about the use of drones—specifically quadcopters and other short-range drones, which are distinct from the larger military drones such as the Shaheds and others sent deeper into Western Ukraine—we’re referring to drones equipped with live camera feeds. These drones identify individuals, follow them, and then drop ammunition directly onto them. In these cases, we are talking about deliberate targeting of civilians rather than indiscriminate attacks. We have observed such attacks along the front line.
This can be explained by the fact that short-range drones operate over relatively limited distances near the front line, with range extended in some cases by relays. We have seen certain areas along the front line where Russian forces are using this tactic more frequently than in others. Several factors, such as the presence of large civilian populations, can explain that variation. In some parts of the contact line, all civilians have already left.
In other cases, these attacks occur in areas where Russian forces have specific military objectives—for example, clearing out a particular city or village. They use short-range drone attacks as a means of forcing the civilian population to leave more quickly.
Jacobsen: Targeting civilians is typically a terror tactic. Is this also intended to break morale?
Wille: Russian forces have carried out many actions that appear aimed at terrorizing the civilian population and breaking morale. Among these are attacks on infrastructure in cities, particularly during the winter months, when a lack of access to electricity, gas, and heating has the greatest impact. In areas where drones are used, the constant presence overhead is clearly intended to intimidate people, in addition to pushing them out.
Furthermore, we have observed that Russian units conducting these attacks often publish videos of them—with captions—on social media groups they know are used by Ukrainians.
Jacobsen: What about food and water shortages, and access to healthcare? How are those expected to look in the coming winter months?
Wille: The U.S. aid cuts, which have had a global impact—and, I would say, have affected Ukraine less than many other countries—still have had a significant effect. Until this spring, the U.S. government funded the entire budget of Ukraine’s Center for Disease Control, for example. The U.S. government was also funding large portions of the Ministry of Health’s activities, and, of course, contributing to the World Health Organization and other UN and humanitarian partners that support the healthcare system.
Those funding reductions have real consequences, particularly for mobile medical teams that provide urgent care in frontline areas. What Ukraine has had to do, instead of terminating those services, is move money from elsewhere to cover the funding gap. So those services will persist, but at a cost—and some programs will inevitably need to be scaled down somewhat.
Access to food and water is still supported by international donors. Despite the global cuts to humanitarian aid, Ukraine has felt the impact less than many other countries. Along the front line, because the contact line has been moving more slowly than earlier in the conflict, fewer civilians remain. Therefore, fewer people are available to serve in challenging and dangerous environments.
As a result, the government has been able to meet the needs of many displaced people who moved some time ago and are now living in urban centers that can receive assistance. But like every country, Ukraine is having to compensate for global funding cuts.
Image taken from early in the war.
Jacobsen: What about education? Children have a right to education, yet many have faced frequent interruptions since Russia invaded. In the winter months, with power outages, what will be the likely outcomes for this school year?
Wille: Power cuts, as you mentioned, have many consequences, including for children attending physical schools—whether in their home regions or in the places they’ve been displaced to. Some children have tried to continue their education online with the schools they attended before displacement. In that context, power cuts seriously impede access to learning.
There are also children in occupied territories who have tried to continue participating in the Ukrainian education system online. On that side of the contact line, power outages again severely impact their ability to study. At the same time, we’re seeing Russia intensify efforts to complete the Russification of occupied territories, and that includes imposing the Russian curriculum and language in schools.
The curriculum in occupied territories—from primary through secondary school—has been entirely replaced with the Russian system. Students and parents are having to make tough choices, particularly those who grew up in and are from these occupied regions. Their decision to stay or leave will fundamentally affect their ability to pursue education and employment later.
If they choose to stay in occupied territory, they only have access to the Russian education system. That means that even if, at age eighteen, they wanted to cross into Ukrainian-controlled areas, they might not be able to do so academically because they lack the necessary Ukrainian credentials or educational background. This is increasingly becoming one of the lasting consequences of prolonged occupation.
Jacobsen: What about the dynamics of a war economy—reconstruction demands, black market activities, and corruption risks? Has Human Rights Watch covered that?
Wille: We generally don’t carry out corruption investigations as an organization, either in Ukraine or globally. It requires a particular kind of expertise, and other organizations—such as Transparency International—are much better suited to it.
Obviously, like most humanitarian and human rights organizations, we’ve condemned steps by the Ukrainian government that appeared to impede the work of anti-corruption agencies. But beyond that, we haven’t conducted research into corruption or black-market activities.
Unarmed civilian killed by Russian forces in Bucha. (Reuters)
Jacobsen: What about disinformation campaigns? How severe are they, and what’s been their trajectory?
Wille: It’s an important question, but again, not one we’re best positioned to answer. We do see disinformation and misinformation campaigns, particularly those spread through Russian-controlled media and social networks, targeting people in occupied territories. Because we don’t have physical access to those areas, we have minimal ability to track these trends systematically or verifiably.
It isn’t easy to know how these campaigns have evolved or what their precise impact on civilians has been. The messages often include false claims about what will happen if people leave for Ukrainian-controlled territory or whether they’ll come under attack from Ukrainian forces. These efforts have multiple strands, and while we know they exist, we cannot measure their overall effect without on-the-ground access.
Jacobsen: A good follow-up from that might be: where are the most significant gaps in information gathering for human rights organizations? In other words, where are the blind spots?
Wille: The most significant gap when it comes to documenting abuses in occupied territories is access—plain and simple. Because we can’t safely enter those areas or speak freely with people still living there, it’s impossible to collect sufficient, verifiable information to produce a complete picture of abuses.
We’re currently conducting new research into housing, land, and property rights in occupied territories, as Russian-installed authorities have increasingly tried to strip displaced Ukrainians of property ownership. For example, suppose a person doesn’t appear in person within a specific time frame. In that case, their property can be seized and reallocated. This has become a mechanism for expropriating the homes of people who have fled to Ukrainian-controlled areas.
We’re trying to understand the scale of this issue, but conducting comprehensive research is extremely difficult. Again, the primary limitation is access. We have to rely on a smaller number of people who have left the occupied territories and can share information safely.
Jacobsen: On the subject of children, what is the current status of those who have been abducted or transferred, particularly regarding swaps, health, and safety?
Wille: There are a few organizations in Ukraine that have worked very hard over the years to locate and bring back children who were taken to Russia or Russian-controlled territories.
These organizations have had some successes—they’ve brought back dozens of children. The experiences of those children while in Russia have varied depending on where they were held and how they were treated. What we’ve been hearing more recently, particularly regarding teenagers, is that some were sent to Russian military summer camps.
These camps are presented as youth programs but often serve as recruitment and militarization centers. Many of the children who return from Russia require time and support to readjust to everyday life in Ukraine. Several Ukrainian organizations are doing excellent work by establishing rehabilitation programs to support the reintegration.
That said, there are still thousands of children in Russia or Russian-occupied territories. The longer the time passes, the harder it becomes to locate them. No one has a complete picture of where all these children are—whether they’ve been absorbed into the orphanage or adoption systems or placed elsewhere.
Jacobsen: In terms of human rights abuses by Russian forces, what does Human Rights Watch identify as the most serious and enduring ones to emphasize?
Wille: The targeting and killing of civilians are among our top priorities for documentation and accountability. We’re also focused on various forms of ill-treatment, including torture and sexual violence, against civilians in areas under temporary or prolonged Russian occupation.
These abuses extend to Ukrainians taken to Russia and held in detention, both civilians and prisoners of war. The UN Human Rights Monitoring Mission, which has interviewed nearly all returning POWs and civilian detainees, has reported an alarmingly high prevalence of torture and, in many cases, sexual violence. Ensuring accountability for those subjected to such treatment is critical.
Jacobsen: That brings us to another serious area of concern—sexual violence as a weapon of war. How widespread is this?
Wille: At the beginning of the full-scale invasion, there were many reports of rape and sexual violence committed by Russian soldiers. Early claims suggested tens of thousands of cases had been reported to the Ukrainian Ombudsperson’s Office. However, the Ombudsperson later resigned after it became clear that the methodology for counting these cases was flawed, and the scale was much lower than initially stated.
That said, confirmed cases do exist, and we have documented several. The exact number is less important than ensuring that those who were victims of these crimes have access to justice and accountability. Rape and sexual violence are recognized as war crimes under international law, and ensuring redress for survivors is an essential part of the broader accountability process.
What we’ve seen developing over time, and what has become far more prevalent, is the use of sexual violence against people in Russian detention. That’s distinct from the reports of sexual violence committed by Russian soldiers during the invasion in communities they temporarily controlled. In detention facilities, sexual violence appears to be used routinely as a method of torture, coercion, and humiliation.
A dog sits by its owner, who was shot and killed by Russian forces in Bucha. (Reuters)
Jacobsen: What about propaganda and hate speech? How are those progressing in terms of violations of human rights standards?
Wille: Hate speech has been a core element of Russian state doctrine since 2014. It has been used systematically in domestic and occupied-territory messaging as a means of justifying aggression against Ukraine. This includes dehumanizing language directed at Ukrainians and their national identity—portraying them as “Nazis,” “traitors,” or “subhumans.”
Unfortunately, that rhetoric hasn’t subsided. It continues to function as a justification tool for the Kremlin’s actions in Ukraine. Polling data from within Russia shows this approach has had an effect: large segments of the population have internalized these narratives and see the invasion as legitimate or necessary.
Jacobsen: Let me frame this differently. What human rights violations has Russia been least liable for? In other words, what are the areas where public perception of wrongdoing may not match the evidence?
Wille: There have been numerous reports of Russian attacks on schools and hospitals. In our investigations, we found that while there have indeed been many such incidents, in many cases, there was either a legitimate Ukrainian military target in or near the area, or the damage resulted from Russia’s use of inherently indiscriminate weapons systems—such as cluster munitions or unguided rockets—that scatter shrapnel widely.
In the early stages of the full-scale invasion, organizations such as UNICEF and the United Nations released figures on the number of schools and hospitals affected. The phrasing of those reports sometimes gave the impression that each incident represented a deliberate strike against civilian institutions. Our findings indicate that deliberate targeting of schools or hospitals has occurred, but far less frequently than those early reports might suggest. In most cases, the damage was collateral—caused by indiscriminate or reckless attacks rather than intentional strikes on civilian facilities.
Jacobsen: Another angle that often comes up, particularly in more private discussions, concerns media coverage. Some Ukrainian observers argue that the West selectively emphasizes or downplays certain narratives. What does Western media typically get right, what do they get wrong, and what do they tend to miss entirely?
Wille: Most reporting has been excellent and largely accurate in capturing the realities on the ground in Ukraine for ordinary people. Where Western media has fallen short—and I don’t necessarily blame individual journalists, but rather the editorial structures of major outlets—is in their near-total lack of interest in documenting abuses committed by Ukrainian armed forces.
At Human Rights Watch, we investigate and report on abuses by all sides in a conflict. But Western media coverage has overwhelmingly focused on Russian abuses while virtually ignoring Ukrainian violations, such as the mistreatment of prisoners of war or unlawful use of antipersonnel landmines and cluster munitions.
As for what’s been misrepresented, I’d say one key issue is how some attacks are framed. For instance, an attack may occur in an area where there’s a legitimate Ukrainian military target. Yet, the reporting sometimes presents it as a deliberate strike against civilians—suggesting Russia intentionally targeted a neighborhood to terrorize the population. In some cases, there’s little acknowledgment that a military installation or infrastructure site was nearby.
Ukraine has positioned several military assets within large urban centers, which inherently puts civilians at greater risk. When Russian forces attack those areas, civilians are sometimes caught in the crossfire.
Take the recent attacks in cities like Kyiv, Lviv, and others in western Ukraine over the past year and a half. You might see an apartment building hit, resulting in civilian deaths, with no apparent military infrastructure visible. The narrative in much of the Western press tends to assume Russia deliberately targeted that building. However, in many of these cases, investigations show that the building was struck after Ukrainian air defences intercepted incoming munitions—whether drones like the Shahed series or ballistic missiles—and debris from those interceptions caused the destruction.
So while the civilian deaths are tragic, they sometimes result from the interception process, not an intentional Russian strike on that specific building. That distinction is rarely made in mainstream reporting. To be clear, this doesn’t absolve Russia of responsibility for launching attacks in the first place, but it does mean the narrative of deliberate targeting can be misleading.
Jacobsen: You mentioned some areas of inquiry that Human Rights Watch wants to expand. What are the regions you would most like to access, but currently can’t?
Wille: It always comes back to the occupied territories. That’s where the most significant information gaps remain. We need access to investigate the full scope of Russian abuses, including how Russian or proxy authorities are conducting so-called “law enforcement” operations—how arrests are made, how detainees are treated, and what happens to those transferred from occupied Ukrainian territories to prisons in Russia.
There are enormous gaps in understanding that system and the abuses likely occurring within it. And because of this lack of access, we’re also missing another crucial area of inquiry: Ukrainian attacks in occupied territories or even within Russian territory that may kill or injure civilians. These incidents are far less documented, and without firsthand investigation, we can’t form a complete picture of the conflict’s toll on all civilians affected, regardless of which side they live under.
We know that Ukraine is conducting attacks across the contact line and into Russian territory using drones, antipersonnel landmines, cluster munitions, and other weapons. What we haven’t been able to document well are the civilian impacts and potential unlawful attacks carried out by Ukraine in those territories.
Jacobsen: What have been the main human rights abuses committed by Ukrainian forces?
Wille: Unfortunately, one of the earliest documented violations following the full-scale invasion was the execution and torture of Russian prisoners of war. We have, of course, seen the same from the Russian side—the execution and torture of Ukrainian POWs—but Ukraine’s actions in this regard are equally serious under international law.
We’ve also documented Ukraine’s use of banned weapons systems, including antipersonnel landmines, which directly violates the Ottawa Convention, or Landmine Ban Treaty, to which Ukraine is a signatory. Ukraine has used cluster munitions and antipersonnel mines in civilian-populated areas, including in cities under Russian occupation that still contained Ukrainian civilians.
There have also been disturbing videos showing Russian soldiers apparently attempting to surrender to Ukrainian drones and then being killed, though we have not been able to verify these. These incidents would fall under the same category—unlawful killing of prisoners of war.
In addition, we published a detailed report on the treatment and prosecution of Ukrainians who lived under Russian occupation and have since been charged with collaboration. Many of these charges are vaguely defined and problematic from a human rights perspective.
Most recently, in a large prisoner exchange, Ukraine transferred to Russia not only Russian nationals but also Ukrainians who had been convicted of collaboration charges. We have no way of knowing whether these individuals consented to be sent to Russia or what happened to them after the transfer.
Jacobsen: Before we wrap up, what question do you, as a specialist, never see asked in the media but believe should be?
Wille: I think we’ve covered most of the essential ground. There isn’t one that immediately comes to mind that hasn’t already been discussed here.
Jacobsen: Understood, one final question. I recently published an anthology on antisemitism and its global resurgence. Regarding hate speech and related actions, is antisemitism a concern in Russia, in Ukraine, or the surrounding region in the same way we’re seeing in other parts of the world?
Wille: That’s not an area we’ve monitored closely as an organization, so I can only speak anecdotally. There are certainly instances of antisemitic speech in the Russian Federation. However, I can’t talk to their prevalence firsthand, as I haven’t lived or worked there. In Ukraine, there are also incidents of antisemitism. However, my sense—again, anecdotally—is that it is not at the level Russia has claimed in attempting to justify its full-scale invasion.
Like much of Europe, there are segments of the population in both countries who hold antisemitic views and occasionally express them publicly. But I couldn’t provide a comparative assessment of the scale between Ukraine, Russia, or elsewhere in Europe.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time today, Belkis.
Wille: Thank you, take care.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/28
Toby Fricker serves as Chief of Advocacy and Communication for UNICEF Ukraine, where he leads media strategy, advocacy, and public information on children’s needs amid the ongoing war. As the principal press contact for the country office, he regularly briefs international media, including at the Palais des Nations in Geneva. Fricker also contributes field reflections for UNICEF channels, documenting the war’s human toll and the resilience of children and families living near the front.
His team’s focus spans a wide range of urgent priorities—winterization efforts, repairs to heating and water systems, maintaining access to education, child protection, cash assistance, and mental health and psychosocial support. A veteran of UNICEF’s global communications network, he previously held senior roles across multiple regions and holds a degree from Staffordshire University.
In this interview, Fricker describes UNICEF’s race to protect children as Ukraine enters its fourth winter of war. The organization is working to keep district heating and water systems running—supporting boiler houses and vodokanals with repairs, efficient equipment, generators, and pre-positioned spares—to avert life-threatening collapses when power grids are struck. It backs schools with grants for urgent repairs and learning continuity, provides cash aid to vulnerable families, and expands psychosocial support through teacher training, social worker hubs, and community-based programs.
Special efforts focus on marginalized children, including those with disabilities, Roma, displaced, and rural families, through child-sensitive budgeting with local governments. Fricker calls for sustained donations and public advocacy to bring abducted and displaced children safely home—and to shield all children as civilians increasingly come under fire.
Toby Fricker and Daryna. (UNICEF)
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: With winter approaching, heating becomes critical. What are the primary needs of Ukrainian children in areas where winters can be harsh?
Toby Fricker: Absolutely. Winter in Ukraine is harsh. This is the fourth winter under the full-scale invasion for children and families across the country. For many in the east, exposure to conflict has lasted far longer. The challenges are immense. Children and families are entering this winter with coping mechanisms already severely strained. The war has caused significant economic disruption—people have lost work, many children have faced interruptions to schooling, and everyday childhood has been upended. Now, with a fourth winter and continuing attacks, strikes can again hit energy and water infrastructure. That has potentially devastating effects on civilians.
UNICEF’s priority is to keep children warm and heating systems running, because system failures in extreme cold become life-threatening. District heating systems—typically city or town networks—serve households, hospitals, schools, and other critical services. We are supporting local boiler houses with more efficient equipment where feasible and ensuring repairs are completed before winter.
Much of this work begins months in advance, even in June, to prepare households and schools. We also provide school grants so administrators can prioritize necessary repairs and upgrades—such as fixing broken windows and purchasing generators, if needed—and cash assistance for vulnerable households in frontline and hard-hit areas. These efforts matter because children are struggling every day. Attacks continue, fear persists, and winter adds another layer of risk to their health and well-being.
Jacobsen: What about hardening repaired systems—using redundancy, modular kits, backup power, and pre-positioned spares? How does multi-stage redundancy or hardening of these systems help during the winter?
Fricker: It really is about strengthening the system. During the summer months, the focus is on working with the vodokanals—the water utility companies—and the municipalities that run these boiler houses. It is about examining the system’s current functioning, assessing its efficiency and effectiveness, and identifying areas where new gas boilers and piping can be installed before winter to ensure the system operates as effectively as possible while minimizing energy usage.
Much of the infrastructure is quite old. It keeps going, but these are aging systems. When piping or networks are damaged, the impact is severe, especially when using outdated equipment. That is why it is crucial to have supplies and equipment in place well before winter, so that if major issues arise or power fails, backup generators can be used immediately to avoid service interruptions.
One of the biggest challenges—now more severe than ever—is ensuring water keeps flowing through the network. In Ukraine’s system, water circulation is critical for heating homes, hospitals, and other facilities. The danger in freezing temperatures, particularly when power is lost, is that water stops flowing, which can cause the heating system to seize. Everything is interlinked. This is a complex task that depends on the incredible efforts of water utility workers, many of whom risk their lives in frontline areas to repair damaged networks or filtration stations. The goal is to ensure they have the necessary equipment, skills, and techniques to perform quick repairs, while also strengthening the system in advance to maximize efficiency.
A boy sits at a bus stop in the village of Dachne, in eastern Ukraine, waiting to evacuate. (UNICEF)
Jacobsen: What about caregivers and teachers—the support for those who need to mitigate burnout or secondary trauma during peak winter stress? Things like training, supervision, or different forms of respite?
Fricker: One of the key issues of the war in Ukraine is what we call a child protection crisis, which is also a mental health and well-being crisis. As you rightly point out, it is not only about children, though that is critical—it is also about caregivers. Parents have been struggling for four years to ensure their children have the essentials for life, can continue learning, and can still connect with peers. There has been huge isolation, especially for children and young people in frontline areas where schools are closed or operating only partially, sometimes in basements or shelters. That isolation has a significant impact on their well-being.
We are working with teachers, social workers, and parents to raise awareness and build capacity on how to support children going through traumatic experiences. We provide training for teachers to help them identify children who may need specialized services and refer them to counselors. We also operate social worker hubs that unite teachers, social workers, and others for training sessions in cities like Dnipro, thereby building local capacity for community-based social services.
Another major program provides small grants to community-based organizations that employ counselors and social workers. The aim is to ensure accessible, high-quality services within communities, particularly during this period of extreme strain.
A wide range of training and grants is being used to strengthen community-level social services. The impact is twofold: immediate psychological support helps children recover and build coping skills while the war continues, and it also strengthens Ukraine’s long-term social service infrastructure. Ukraine’s focus on both humanitarian response and recovery is remarkable, and these efforts are building a system that will continue serving families and communities for years to come.
Jacobsen: Some children are doubly marked in life—first by the circumstances they are born into, and then by the war. Speaking of children with disabilities, internally displaced persons, Roma, or remote rural families, how can those children be reached in terms of accessibility, transport stipends, and language access?
Fricker: You are right. When war happens anywhere, the most marginalized are always the most affected. What is essential is reaching every child—expanding services to reach the last child, the one least likely to be in school. The question we ask is: how do we reach that child to give them the best opportunity possible to keep learning or return to school? That is mainly about bringing services directly to communities and ensuring that social services in those communities—whether in frontline areas or in western Ukraine where many Roma communities live—are supported. We are working specifically with these communities through local organizations to identify existing gaps and find practical ways to close them, helping children return to school, re-enter systems, and participate in decision-making.
One central area of UNICEF’s work, alongside many partners, is with local governments to strengthen children’s participation in decision-making and promote child-sensitive budgeting. That means helping local authorities allocate resources effectively for children: funding education systems, strengthening social services, and ensuring basic utilities like water and sanitation are in place for households. The goal is to make sure children’s voices help shape these priorities—identifying what is missing in their communities and influencing solutions.
These are vital areas of work. In Ukraine, we are seeing positive steps, including firm commitments to protect education sector budgets despite the war. However, we still need to do more. UNICEF, along with many partners, is working to reach the most marginalized children and bring them back into education and community life. So every child has as fair a chance as possible to continue their childhood and recover from this enormous disruption.
Jacobsen: Where are the most significant winter bottlenecks? Moreover, speaking of partners, which noteworthy organizations should be mentioned for their role in easing those bottlenecks or helping mitigate the main limitations?
Fricker: The biggest concerns for the winter are keeping systems running—ensuring power generation continues, which in turn maintains heating capacity for households and essential facilities. Families must also have access to cash assistance to cover specific winter needs for their children and themselves. UNICEF, along with many partners, is supporting local authorities and the national government in this time of extreme need. There has been immense international support—Canada, among others, has provided generous assistance not only to UNICEF but also directly to the government and partner organizations.
The winter response plan is multi-sectoral, aiming to reach over 1.7 million people as part of a broader United Nations and humanitarian effort. The focus is on the most vulnerable families in frontline regions. The question is always: how can we best support these families and the local systems that sustain them? That includes helping the Vodokanals—the water utility companies—keep operations running, supporting the water technicians risking their lives to repair networks even under fire, and aiding those managing municipal boiler houses. UNICEF works to strengthen these systems in advance, ensuring they have the supplies and equipment needed for rapid repairs. Despite immense challenges, they have managed to keep critical infrastructure running throughout the war.
Jacobsen: How can people support UNICEF Ukraine?
Fricker: UNICEF is doing everything possible to reach every affected child, including those already marginalized before the war. It is vital to restore some sense of normality and childhood even amid ongoing conflict. We have received tremendous support from governments and individuals—especially in Canada and across the world—who have stood behind UNICEF and other partners working for child rights and the protection of the most vulnerable children in Ukraine.
We continue to call on people to contribute not only financially but also by raising their voices. Speaking out for the protection of children in Ukraine—and globally—is essential at a time when so many wars endanger them. The sanctity of children’s lives must always be protected. We urge everyone to advocate for their safety and support the life-saving and recovery work being done in Ukraine. Recovery efforts are ongoing and long-term. Wars like this do not just affect children today—they jeopardize access to services and their overall well-being for years to come.
Jacobsen: Toby, thank you for your time and expertise today. It was a pleasure to meet you.
Fricker: That is great. Thank you, Scott, and thank you for your patience in setting everything up. Take care.
Click here to donate to UNICEF.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/24
In a country where documenting truth has become a form of resistance, Oleksandr Pavlichenko stands at the center of Ukraine’s fight for accountability. As Executive Director of the Ukrainian Helsinki Human Rights Union (UHHRU), he leads one of the nation’s foremost efforts to record war crimes, defend rights, and uphold justice. Based in Kyiv, UHHRU unites a network of human rights organizations that carry forward the legacy of the 1976 Ukrainian Helsinki Group.
Since its founding in 2004, the union has provided free legal aid, pursued landmark cases in domestic courts and at the European Court of Human Rights, and monitored rights violations across the country. In the decade since Russia’s 2014 invasion—and especially after the 2022 escalation—UHHRU has documented thousands of abuses, supported victims, and pressed for reform in concert with international partners. Its network of public advice centers continues to offer legal guidance, issue reports, and train lawyers and activists to reinforce the rule of law even under siege.
In this conversation, Pavlichenko reflects on the painstaking process of documenting atrocities, the dilemmas of transitional justice, and the struggle to sustain legal aid as war stretches Ukraine’s institutions. He explains how UHHRU has verified nearly 90,000 entries in its “Tribunal for Putin” database, working closely with prosecutors and the International Criminal Court. Despite wartime pressures, Pavlichenko underscores UHHRU’s commitment to harmonizing Ukrainian law with the Rome Statute—anchored in verified evidence, international cooperation, and the enduring principle that human rights must place people first.
(Tribunal for Putin)
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Thank you for taking the time to speak with me today. Since the Ukrainian Helsinki Human Rights Union co-founded the “Tribunal for Putin” (T4P) initiative, the database has recorded nearly 90,000 crimes as of March 25, 2025. What process ensures that each entry is verified and credible?
Oleksandr Pavlichenko: We currently have about 89,870 records. Some records are not included in the public database—specifically, cases supported by lawyers. That information is confidential and normally not presented publicly.
Regarding verification, our first approach uses OSINT (open-source intelligence) technologies and methodologies. We collect data from official sources. In several cases, our teams travel to areas such as Chernihiv, Kyiv, Sumy, and sometimes Kherson to verify the extent of damage caused by shelling, bombing, or other attacks.
The second method involves working directly with victims and witnesses. We conduct live interviews with witnesses or victims. Sometimes they approach one of the T4P initiative organizations—such as the Kharkiv Human Rights Protection Group—or others to request legal assistance.
We receive information from them and provide legal support, which helps us gather more details and legal context for specific cases. For example, today I communicated with the Office of the Prosecutor General and other law enforcement institutions. They often request information on specific cases or categories of crimes. We can provide them with details, practical examples, or facts that may not be available in their criminal proceedings.
We also organize cases by category—either by location (such as the Kherson or Chernihiv regions) or by type (such as material damage, casualties, injuries, or the destruction of specific buildings, such as medical or educational institutions).
This helps us reorganize and analyze verified information. Only verified data is included in the database; unverified information is excluded.
Jacobsen: How are cases prioritized to national prosecutors, including those handled by the ICC?
Pavlichenko: As I mentioned, we categorize the information, but there is no strict prioritization of cases. Usually, it depends on access to the territories. If we do not have access, we cannot conduct detailed documentation or include all materials in the database.
For example, in 2022, we worked on the case of Mariupol. Our public reception office remained there with two lawyers until March 16, gathering information and assisting residents. They were later evacuated. However, we do not have full access to all the information that could have been collected from Mariupol. Many traces were destroyed, and many witnesses and victims are no longer under Ukrainian jurisdiction.
Prioritization depends, first, on our available resources—because they are limited—and, second, on urgent tasks. For example, we received a call from territories near the front line reporting that Russian forces were hunting civilians with drones. This call came directly to our Kherson public reception office. We immediately relayed the information to colleagues at the United Nations, shared contacts, and ensured they had direct communication with local community leaders.
We then provided legal assistance to those affected and collected all related information. Based on that, we prepared a submission to the International Criminal Court (ICC), which helped prompt the UN High Commissioner for Human Rights to prepare a report grounded in the data we collected. We also transferred those firsthand contacts to the UN team.
So, the prioritization often comes from ad hoc requests and urgent reports from the ground. Another form of prioritization occurs when we need to prepare specific submissions that will prompt international structures to respond to our ICC filings.
Our main task is to maintain the most complete possible database, with detailed, verified, and legally supported facts that can be used by law enforcement agencies or international partners when needed. This data also serves as an advocacy tool at the United Nations, the OSCE, and other institutions’ conferences and meetings. These verified facts are confirmed not only by us but also by our international partners.
We need to maintain this collaborative track with international partners, ensuring that the facts are legally substantiated and recognized.
Jacobsen: Your nationwide public advice centers continue to operate throughout Ukraine. Where is the demand the highest?
Pavlichenko: Since the pandemic, the specific location of each public reception office has become less critical. However, offices located near the front line—such as in Toretsk, Kramatorsk, and Kherson—have become far more important than, for example, those working primarily with internally displaced persons (IDPs) in Lviv or Rivne in the western regions.
We have qualified lawyers operating in all regions. Some specialize in IDP-related issues, while others focus on documentation and providing direct assistance to the most vulnerable groups of the local population. The scope of work varies from region to region.
At the same time, we are now in a difficult situation because U.S. funding was suspended, which forced us to reduce the activities of several public reception offices, especially in certain regions. We are trying to maintain operations and retain staff in the so-called “hot zones.” Still, it is incredibly challenging under the current circumstances, given the reduction in support from international donors. This remains one of the major challenges for our activities.
Jacobsen: UHHRU remains a leading advocate for transitional justice. At the March 24 conference, discussions centered on accountability, reparations, truth and memorialization, and guarantees of non-recurrence. What kind of commitment or action is now required from local governments—both by the end of this year and into 2026—to move that agenda forward?
Pavlichenko: The core need is not only verbal support but real, practical support for people living in occupied territories. We must seriously consider how to protect and, eventually, reintegrate those people. At the moment, no one can give a clear answer on how to deal with the population in occupied territories or how to prepare both occupation and post-occupation policies.
As I see it, the issue of transitional justice cannot be fully addressed before the end of the war. A national strategy on transitional justice has already been drafted, and we participated in its development. The text exists as a draft presidential decree, but it has not been promulgated or adopted. It was suspended as a special case under a special procedure.
Therefore, when speaking about transitional justice, the first requirement is the establishment of a coherent state policy, which currently does not exist. Once it is developed and adopted at the national level, it must then be implemented and adapted locally—especially in frontline and partially occupied regions such as Zaporizhzhia, Kherson, Donetsk, and Luhansk.
We must seriously consider how to address the legacy of occupation, because it is a heavy burden. For example, there are documents issued by the occupation authorities that are not recognized in Ukraine. Even certificates of birth and death must go through a judicial procedure to be reaffirmed by national courts.
And that concerns only two categories of documents. We are not even talking about the hundreds of thousands—indeed, millions—of other documents issued in occupied Crimea over more than 11 years, or in occupied parts of Donetsk and Luhansk, or in the newly occupied territories that have now been under Russian control for about three and a half years. These situations must be addressed systematically and incorporated into national legal procedures.
Another unresolved issue concerns collaboration—specifically, determining who should be punished for working under occupation, for example, in medical or educational institutions, and who should not. There is still no clear political message or legal guidance for these territories about how and when these issues will be resolved.
Jacobsen: You have flagged systemic shortfalls in payments to wounded servicemembers. Which enforcement levers would close the gap?
Pavlichenko: It is a serious and ongoing problem. It must be addressed and defended at the Ministry of Defense, which continues to support veterans and active servicemembers.
The issue lies in procedures and protocols. These must ensure that veterans, wounded soldiers, those killed in battle, and their families receive consistent and adequate support. Financial compensation mechanisms are relatively well developed, but the rehabilitation system—especially for severely wounded or disabled veterans—requires far greater attention.
Ideally, every wounded or returning servicemember should have a comprehensive support protocol that covers financial, psychological, medical, and social reintegration needs. For example, prisoners of war released from Russian detention are typically offered only about one month of rehabilitation, which is insufficient. In reality, their recovery requires sustained, long-term care and assistance.
The situation is gradually improving, thanks in part to greater involvement from international partners, who now pay much closer attention to this issue and provide targeted support.
However, the core challenge remains: the need for clear, binding protocols consistently applied by the Ministry of Defense. At times, the attitude or implementation by that institution has not met the necessary standards.
Jacobsen: UHHRU lawyers have documented Russia’s use of civilians as human shields, including abducted civilians. Which venues, whether Ukrainian courts, the ICC, or universal jurisdiction, are most likely to hold individuals accountable in these cases?
Pavlichenko: I can give a very brief answer to that question. I do not believe that international structures will handle these cases effectively, and I have little confidence in the usefulness of universal jurisdiction in this context.
I also doubt that the International Criminal Court (ICC) will be able to address this category of crimes specifically, though it might cite isolated examples. In reality, all such cases must be properly investigated and prosecuted within Ukraine’s national jurisdiction.
Whether this will have any tangible impact on Russia as punishment is another matter entirely; even now, there are very few cases where war criminals are physically present in court.
To give you a sense of scale: as of January 1, 2025, Ukraine had initiated around 183,000 criminal cases under Article 438 of the Criminal Code (war crimes, parts A and B). Yet, only 18 individuals have been sentenced in person; the rest have been tried in absentia. This means justice, in most cases, remains largely symbolic.
So, when we talk about justice and accountability, we must think practically about how to establish effective mechanisms to bring perpetrators physically before the courts.
Jacobsen: Since the ratification of the Rome Statute, what is UHHRU’s position on the parliamentary harmonization package and the Article 124 reservation?
Pavlichenko: Regarding Article 124, we publicly opposed Ukraine’s reservation. That reservation limits Ukraine’s acceptance of the ICC’s jurisdiction over certain crimes, and it has negatively affected the country’s international image by suggesting a partial withdrawal from full accountability under the Rome Statute.
As for harmonizing national legislation with international law, that work is still underway, including updates to several articles of the Criminal Code of Ukraine. However, I believe this effort comes too late to affect the current war. Harmonization will not improve the immediate situation in terms of investigating or prosecuting war crimes.
For example, even with these changes, we will not suddenly move from 18 in-person convictions to hundreds or thousands. It will not transform the current justice landscape. Therefore, while we support continued work on harmonization for the future, we must now focus on making the existing legal framework function more effectively in the present.
That remains our position.
Jacobsen: The 2024 national survey maps the growing needs of war-affected people. Which findings reshaped UHHRU programming?
Pavlichenko: The survey was based on responses from people living in both occupied and non-occupied territories. Our organization’s work focused on addressing the consequences of severe human rights violations explicitly committed in the occupied areas.
A special program on transitional justice was developed for implementation in 2025, reflecting the survey’s findings. However, as I mentioned earlier, we face significant challenges in sustaining our core activities—especially in providing legal assistance, which remains central to our mission.
Our ongoing priorities include analyzing current legislation, preparing draft proposals for new laws, and ensuring that these reforms adequately protect the human rights of people living under occupation. This remains a key element of our long-term strategy and our vision for the state’s policy during wartime and beyond.
For us, the principle of “people first” is not merely a slogan—it is the cornerstone of our programming. The survey findings reinforced this by showing a clear public demand to integrate the human dimension into national policy. Unfortunately, that dimension is not always fully considered in governmental decision-making.
Jacobsen: Oleksandr, thank you very much for your time and for sharing these insights today.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/05
I like women’s character of cruelty more than men’s.
There is a sense of taste, proportionality, and purpose under it.
Some men truly are the bull in the China shop.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/03
I am all in favour of removing this cumbersome proposal of a simulation or self-simulation hypothesis. My inclination is to argue for an improv comedy interpretation of the universe. Nature can do each of the known computations and logics to us. Those logical systems emerged over time in the universe too. Maybe, in a way, non-algorithmic facets of the universe emerged as an outcome of computational processes and then existed in their own right in each individual mind. It’s not that minds were present in the universe, but are present in the universe if we shift the definition of a non-algorithm view and non-origin state for minds to play a role in the universe while this raises a third state of indeterminacy to the universe: the universe’s lack of complete self-interaction with ontological incompleteness, our ways of tapping into it with observation and scientific methodologies for epistemological incompleteness, and the problem of choice creating instability in determination of the future state of the local worldline(s) of the universe and so the universe (which is neither ontological incompleteness nor epistemological incompleteness, but localized worldline/spatiotemporal incompleteness). Quantum logic laid the groundwork for a larger more classical logic to play out in classical physics. I have increasingly grown into the view that atheism and theism are in some sense delimits of a more base representation of the universe, where each definition breaks down into meaninglessness or convergence in some sense. Improv comedy is “Yes, and…” The universe is pulling a joke on us.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/03
I was walking with a small luggage on wheels and a backpack in 35C heat.
Naturally, I was sweating,
Struggling a bit,
Trudging along.
I saw a bird fly to my left with something in its mouth,
Into the parking lot,
The bush,
The open grass.
Same piece of whatever in its mouth.
On it went,
Out of sight,
never in mind.
How many others have you out of mind like that bird, and vice versa?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/03
Politically speaking, most have seen this story before.
Quelle surprise.
Another sunrise,
With humans, though?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/03
They weren’t too special.
Neither, were you.
The moments were, though.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/03
Some parts of life are harder than others,
And moreso at some times than others.
And that’s okay too.
I mean, hey,
the grass’ll keep growing.
Smell around you:
Breathe.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/03
You say those words again,
and again and again.
“Then… why?”
I ask.
And so… why not?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/01
People say quite a lot without words,
women acutely.
It’s a pity,
how little we see of each other.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/30
When no place is truly home,
any house, in theory,
can be,
a home.
Therefore:
Home is a state of mind,
and a place.
Even my time with my former cats,
Pan and Anna.
Home for nomas.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/29
Icelandic people are indirect if they don’t like you,
direct if they do,
and honest in either case.
A love affair with an Icelandic person is succinctly described as follows:
A firecracker.
Short, explosive, seen,
and somehow working in spite of the cold,
the rain,
the wind,
Icelandic love affairs are bright, flashy, lovely,
and brief,
as a rose.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/28
I talked to two gentlemen separately, in-depth.
The language barriers were apparent.
Their backgrounds were completely different.
Their lives untouched by one another.
Yet, they both gave impassioned views of the human rights abuse concerning to them.
It’s a humbling experience to work with such people and to get the narratives.
It’s a good lesson.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/26
In a region characterized by a patchwork of political systems, diverse governance models, varying standards of moral leadership, and often conflicting interpretations of religious scriptures, an unusual but thought-provoking idea would be to implement a modified version of the Schengen system — allowing freer movement of people and perhaps goods — tailored for the Middle East as a whole. Whether or not a god helps us, I see no reason to act with complacency on items of general realizable benefit for humanity as a whole.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/26
I used to work at a restaurant of an old friend.
He married an ‘alcoholic’ who had gone through AA.
She used to verbally abuse him every single work day — long-time sober too.
I heard them in the upper part of the business, while I worked in the downstairs for about a month.
I promised myself.
If she ever turned that to me, then I would leave the job.
She did,
so I did.
Another ‘alcoholic’ many years later described her as a “wonderful person.”
It was then that the evidence matched the experience of alcoholics for me:
AA generally doesn’t work — when it does, by accident or other factors — and works on a philosophy of disempowerment and coercive structure to belief in a higher power, previously the Christian God.
When it doesn’t, or secular therapy works, they have a lie that they tell themselves in community: “They were never real alcoholics.”
They socially gaslight themselves and one another — great.
‘Alcoholism’ became an excuse of an elder’s abuse of a junior, in community and on the job.
That’s an important lesson. This was in Fort Langley.
I had a lot of experiences like this in an Evangelical Christian town. Rather than apologize, these seniors and adults of community would socially abuse, and reputationally attempt to dismantle my work.
So, not being established, lacking connections, not having social or professional protections, what do you do in those circumstances?
You take the lesson and move on. “Meek and mild” communities are rarely so. Community as institution will be the first item protected rather than questioning and independent youth.
Ask any individual woman or former young boy sexually abused by clergy in a church, the institution is protected first and the victim is slandered.
Does this make sense? Your life becomes forever different.
Often, clarity comes writ in blood.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/26
I got bit by a Swiss mosquitoe,
upon arrival.
It mumbled something in French exhalation,
then pulled out a lit cigarette.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/26
So it goes.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/26
I am firmly convinced softness is innate in the human structure,
And finesse is learned,
Not the other way around.
Broadly speaking,
generalized tact follows from each of these.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/20
I like the way people melt to certain types of kisses,
and in certain patterns.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/20
I remember gardening, again.
An old lady.
A young owl.
A big garden.
A back yard.
Cobblestone paths.
Dew-ready plants.
Green on green,
on green.
“Look, look!”
She said.
“Oh, look, look at the critter!”
What a delight, she felt.
Just us,
and an owl.
A temporary visitor in,
the big garden,
and the owl.
Be that old lady friend,
and who?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Medium (Personal)
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/15
Because numerous have been unequivocally tone deaf.
Then the toxic ideologies filled the gaps.
Welcome to 2025.
And no, none of their architects will take accountability;
that’s the modus operandi of an ideology, a new faith.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/11/02
Scott Douglas Jacobsen contends that subjectivity emerges only in life-permitting universes and is inherently limited: finite minds cannot fully model the larger systems that birth them. Mental maps can improve but need not, as delusion, injury, disease, and aging illustrate. Rick Rosnerpushes back on multiverse looseness, arguing that in sufficiently large, natural-order universes, life is likely; only tiny universes preclude it. He asks how knowable any universe is, echoing Feynman on science’s limits. Rosner expects near-term unifying principles but enduring ignorance of particulars given cosmic scale, distances, and timescales. Both land on rigorous curiosity coupled with epistemic humility, ultimately.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let me lay this out. We’ve had several conversations over the past few weeks, maybe months, and a few ideas are circling in my head. I see a kind of symmetry between life-permitting universes—those where subjective selves emerge during evolution—and the sectionalized counter-entropic emergence of life appearing in pockets of some some life-permitting universes, like we see with certain satellites called Earth. My general principle is that subjectivity, once it arises in a universe supportive of life, is inherently limited within the larger objective universe. The maps that conscious beings make of themselves and the world will always be incomplete, because there isn’t enough information inside their system to represent the whole. So, there’s room for improvement in the fidelity and accuracy of those mental maps, but not an inevitability. Think of cases like delusions, head trauma, infection, or the gradual disintegration of the mind over a lifespan.
Rick Rosner: You mentioned life-permitting universes. I think there’s a framework—maybe not something working scientists dwell on, but it comes up among popular science communicators—suggesting there could be many different sets of physical laws that generate viable universes. Some would allow life, others wouldn’t. I’d argue otherwise. Whether life exists in a given universe depends largely on natural conditions. You can simulate odd universes with contrived physics, but in universes governed by natural order, the fundamental physics is generally similar.
Physical constants may vary with size, local conditions, or other factors, but overall, the structure is consistent. In universes of sufficient scale, I think it’s unlikely that life wouldn’t arise. The laws of physics are rarely strict enough to completely prevent life from emerging in a large universe. A tiny universe—say, one with only 100,000 particles—couldn’t sustain life. But a universe like ours, with roughly 10⁸⁵ particles and billions of years of history, almost inevitably gives rise to it. Now, are you suggesting that life in any universe is inherently incomplete in its understanding of the cosmos simply because of limits of scale and perception? Is that what you mean?
Jacobsen: I mean, if something comes from a larger system, it remains part of that system—just as we are part of nature. The cognitive aspect of that system, the part that constructs mental maps, can’t ever be equivalent to the system itself. In modeling, you can use shorthand—as we do with mathematics—but that’s not what I mean by full-spectrum modeling. The principle I’m trying to pose is that subjectivity, by definition, arises in a life-permitting universe. If it emerges within that universe, which could be vast but still finite, then the smaller finite cognitive system that arises from it can only reconstruct parts of it—with varying degrees of quality and accuracy.
Rosner: Okay, so whether what you’re saying is accurate depends on how knowable the universe is—how knowable any universe is. We’ve only had an inkling of the universe’s overall structure for about a century. A hundred fifty years ago, we didn’t even know there were other galaxies. Maybe some people speculated, but no one had serious evidence. We thought the universe was just one cluster of stars. So it’s still early to know whether we can ever understand the deep, necessary characteristics of any universe.
It’s like that Richard Feynman question I keep bringing up—probably because I read one of his books fifty-five years ago and it stuck with me. He asked: what happens with science? Do we keep discovering new things forever? Do we eventually learn everything? Or do we hit a limit where the universe is simply too complex to fully comprehend?
I think, in general terms, that within the near future we’ll have a broad theory of physics—maybe metaphysics too—that explains almost everything in principle. But when it comes to the specific details of our universe, we obviously can’t know everything. We’ve only been a civilization for a few thousand years, and we’ve barely traveled anywhere in the cosmos.
I suspect a lot of advanced civilizational activity happens near the centers of galaxies, though that’s just speculation. We won’t have a way to confirm it for hundreds, maybe thousands of years. Traveling to the center of our galaxy to check our hunches might take tens or even hundreds of thousands of years.
That’s just within the Milky Way. So yes, we can probably figure out a lot through reasoning and inference, but in terms of concrete knowledge—we’re very far away. I suspect that sufficiently old civilizations might be able to operate across significant distances, perhaps more than one percent of the observable universe’s diameter. That’s about 140 million light-years or more—actually, probably several hundred million light-years in effective scale.
Trying to do anything across those distances would take billions of years, but civilizations might still attempt it, especially if parts of the universe begin collapsing and that threatens their existence. The sheer scale of what would be required to achieve even an incomplete understanding of the universe is staggering. We won’t reach that level unless we’re lucky—or persistent—enough to become a multi-million-year civilization.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/11/01
Scott Douglas Jacobsen likens particles to baked bread, emergent from interacting fields. Rick Rosner stresses Heisenberg uncertainty. Context, decoherence, and speculative topological knots frame a 13.8-billion-year interaction braid.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: All right, let’s do a quick one on math. I think analogies help convey ideas really nicely. I’m looking at limitations, of course, but the usual transition in physics education seems to be that undergrads learn about particles, and then in grad school they’re told everything’s actually fields, not particles. You have to unlearn to relearn.
So, could we think of particles as baked bread or a cake? You’ve got all these ingredients—fields—interacting, and the result is the “baked” product, the particle that emerges. Is that one way to frame it? The idea is that the particle is like the baked bread, and the fields are like the ingredients and the recipe—the interactions among them create the final form. The particle emerges as a result of the interactions within those fields.
Rick Rosner: All right, I didn’t get deep enough into quantum mechanics to see how it all works mathematically, but under quantum field theory—and in the universe at large—everything that exists and the way it exists is part of a grand interaction with everything else. The only reason we can say a proton is a proton, in a given place with a certain momentum and velocity, is because of its interactions with other particles and fields in the universe.
Not literally every particle, of course, but its state depends on a finite set of significant interactions. Because of the Heisenberg uncertainty principle—arising from non-commuting observables— the properties of the particle, like its position and momentum, are always a little uncertain. Everything about a particle is, at some level, slightly undefined.
But only slightly—so slightly that, because the universe contains an unfathomable number of particles and an immense history of interactions, most things are, for all practical purposes, well-defined. But it’s defined contextually. What you were saying about the bread fits: particles have no independent existence. They only exist and take on meaning as part of the entire “baked” history of the universe. Some researchers in mathematical physics have explored the idea that physical systems or spacetime can exhibit topological “knottedness.” Every interaction between particles that leaves a record could be thought of as a knot in spacetime.
Knots are special topological entities—structures that can’t be reduced to a simple line because of their self-interference. One can construct speculative models in which every particle interaction—the scattering, the exchange—creates a knot, and the entire universe becomes a 13.8-billion-year braid of those knots.
Mathematically, someone could probably make that model work. Would it yield new physics? Hard to say. But the idea captures something true: everything in the universe is entangled through about 13.8 billion years of “baking”—of particle exchanges, interactions, and evolution.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/31
In this dialogue, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore the perceptual boundaries of human experience—the limits of what we can truly sense in time and space. Rosner explains that our temporal resolution hovers around a tenth of a second, the scale of reflexes and thought formation, while spatial awareness reaches down to roughly 50 microns, the threshold of the naked eye. They discuss how linguistic processing, births, and deaths occur within similar temporal slices, linking consciousness to the continuous flow of global life. The conversation ultimately frames thought as holographic—relational, dynamic, and resistant to discrete measurement.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I’ve got another question. For the scale of space we live in, and for the time perception we have—from the moment a photon hits the retina, travels up, is processed, and becomes consciously registered—what is the smallest magnitude of space or time we can legitimately perceive? Where do the gaps begin?
For instance, take the classic example: you draw a sequence of walking images on a Post-it notepad and flip through them. It tricks the brain into perceiving motion. The same principle applies to film. There are gaps there. So what’s the smallest time perception we have? And what’s the smallest spatial perception?
Rick Rosner: You’re talking about our brains interacting with the world. You’re not talking about the smallest possible units.
Jacobsen: Right. I’m not talking about the Planck length or fundamental limits of physics. I’m talking about perceptual limits—the relationship between a smaller subjective system with finite sensory capacity and the larger objective world.
Rosner: I can speak to that. For most people who aren’t highly trained at detecting fine differences, the just-noticeable difference—or Weber fraction—depends on the sense. For lifted weight, it’s about 2 percent; for brightness, around 8 percent; for loudness, roughly 10 percent.
If you give someone two bags of flour and one is about 2 percent heavier, many people will notice. At 5 percent, with only one quick lift, more will notice, but performance still depends on context and experience.
So it might be about a one-percent difference in a lot of cases. When you’re talking about minimum perceptible duration—say, if you showed people flashing lights where one stayed on for half a second and another stayed on for 0.55 seconds, about ten percent longer—people would likely notice that. But when the flashes differ between 0.2 seconds and 0.22 seconds, the failure rate goes up.
If one light stays on for a tenth of a second and another for a ninth, can people still tell? I don’t know. But time perception generally operates within fractions of a second unless people are trained. With training, accuracy improves.
When I was booked on Jeopardy!, I had a year to train because the season ended and they hadn’t brought me on yet. There was a car wash in Santa Monica that had a game: you’d put a dime in, and it would drop the dime at random intervals. If you caught the dime within about a tenth of a second, you got your dime back. If your reaction was slower than that, they kept it. I spent a lot of dimes trying to make my reactions fast for the Jeopardy! buzzer. That game taught me that reflexes operate on roughly a tenth-of-a-second scale.
Then there are thoughts. We’ve talked about this—how long it takes for a thought to form in your brain. The timescale is similar. If you put your hand on a hot stove, the signal has to travel to your brain and then back down your arm before you pull away. I don’t think we have reflexes that completely bypass the brain—like something at the elbow saying, “I’ll pull back without waiting for headquarters.” That doesn’t happen.
A lot of brain activity occurs on the scale of a third to a tenth of a second. But in a car wreck, when everything feels like it’s slowing down, perception sharpens. You can tell the order of events—the first contact with the other car, the windshield cracking, the airbag deploying, something flying off the other vehicle—even if those events are separated by only a few hundredths of a second.
So in crisis situations, maybe the minimum discernible time difference is around a fiftieth of a second. We know from film and television that we don’t perceive flicker when images are shown at 24 or 30 frames per second, which corresponds to refresh intervals of about 1/24 to 1/30 of a second. Instead of seeing discrete stills, we see smooth motion.
When I was a kid, I think there were some cartoons so cheaply made they ran at only 12 frames per second. I might be wrong—I haven’t checked—but at 12 fps, you could definitely tell. The motion looked choppy, like something wasn’t quite right. So that’s roughly the perceptual scale of time for humans.
Scale of space—so, I work with tiny things: little pieces of glass in micromosaics. I also, well, pick at myself. You know those pore strips people put on their noses? You leave them for a couple of hours, then peel them off, and they pull out the solidified oil from your pores—it looks like a gross little porcupine.
I do that manually. If I don’t have my contacts in, I can see really close up, and I’ll just start squeezing those little things out of my pores. They’re usually no more than a millimeter long, maybe about 0.4 millimeters across, and you can definitely feel them when you roll them between your fingers. You can feel even smaller stuff—probably down to a fifth of a millimeter, maybe even a tenth. You can feel it as it rolls along the ridges of your fingerprints. So you can feel textures down to about 100 microns.
And when you get a hair in your mouth or on your tongue, you can feel it instantly—that’s on the same order of magnitude. You can probably see, with the naked eye, objects down to about 50 microns, roughly a twentieth of a millimeter, maybe slightly less. So, that’s the spatial scale of perception. Have we talked enough about this, or should we move on?
Jacobsen: Let’s build on it. I looked up how many people die per day. It’s about 169,400 deaths per day worldwide.
Rosner: Wait, that tracks roughly. You should lose about one person in a hundred over a year. With eight billion people, that’s around 80 million deaths annually, which divided by 365 gives about 220,000 deaths per day. So 170,000-something is in the right range.
Jacobsen: So, the number of seconds before the first death of the day isn’t even a full second—it’s about half a second.
Rosner: Because there are 86,400 seconds in a day, right?
Jacobsen: Yes. So by the time you get to the first full second of the day, two people have already died somewhere in the world.
Now, when reading a word, the visual cortex detects letter shapes—like the dark lines of an “O”—in roughly 0 to 100 milliseconds. It decodes those shapes into known letter patterns between 100 and 250 milliseconds. Then lexical access—recognizing the word itself—occurs between 250 and 400 milliseconds. Finally, semantic integration, or understanding the word’s meaning in context, happens between 400 and 600 milliseconds. So, for a single word, comprehension takes about half a second.
Rosner: But fluent readers move their eyes ahead before their brains have completely processed the previous word. Reading is continuous; you don’t pause a half second per word. The words flow together at a steady clip.
Jacobsen: And on the other side of that time scale, globally, there’s a birth roughly every 0.4 seconds. So, if someone starts reading at midnight, by the time they’ve finished two individual words—not a full sentence, not Ulysses—two to three people will have been born, and two people will have died, and a second will have passed.
Rosner: I just think that’s pretty remarkable. But it depends on the words. If they’re familiar, recognition is instantaneous. If people see “Coca-Cola,” it’s immediate. If they see “fuck you,” it’s immediate.
Jacobsen: So, in terms of the 0 to 250 millisecond range—the visual cortex decoding stage—there’s nothing unusual there. But for lexical access, it’s likely on the lower end, and semantic integration probably happens closer to 400 milliseconds rather than the upper bound of 600 milliseconds. Fair?
Rosner: Yep.
Jacobsen: All right. So that’s the timeline for linguistic thought. I was just trying to put it into perspective—how many people are born and die every day. It’s staggering. What does that timeline of lexical access and semantic integration tell us about our style of thought in relation to the world? We were just talking about small time intervals and fine sensory registration.
Rosner: We’ve talked about this before. Language—putting names on things—is an enormous leap in efficiency. I can’t explain it perfectly, but it’s so much faster.
When you think in words, you’re not decoding written symbols; the words arrive already formed in your mind. I don’t see every word I say appear before my eyes as I speak. The only exceptions are visual associations: when I say “Coca-Cola,” I picture the logo; when I say “fuck you,” I see the phrase. But generally, the sentences flow without visual imagery.
Words let you pack an incredible number of ideas into your head. You’ve met my dogs, right? At least one of them is kind of an idiot.
Jacobsen: I’d say I met both bodies of dogs, and I met single dog, but neither of them met me—if you know what I mean.
Rosner: What you’re saying, philosophically, is that dogs aren’t exactly intellectuals.
Jacobsen: It’s like that Republican joke about Biden—that he doesn’t know what’s going on in his own head because he doesn’t even know he’s there.
Rosner: But seriously, some dogs are smarter. Border collies understand quite a lot. Coyotes too—they’re probably more attuned to their world than house pets are. If a coyote wandered into your house, it would be completely confused, but in its own environment, it behaves with far greater sophistication than a domestic dog.
Still, animal understanding is limited. Part of that’s brain size—a dog’s brain is about the size of a lemon compared to ours. But the bigger factor is language. Language compresses thought. You can store vastly more understanding if you have a coding system that tags complex concepts with short words. Instead of reconstructing an idea every time, you shorthand it.
That’s a massive step forward in efficiency. If linguistic thought weren’t such a powerful evolutionary advantage, we never would have evolved brains capable of it.
But brains evolve a lot. They’ve gotten bigger and more complex across evolutionary history. Being able to think better clearly confers a reproductive advantage—though not in every case. Some organisms, like mollusks, start out with functional nervous systems. When they’re larvae, they can think and move around. But once they attach to a surface and become something like a barnacle, they lose most of that neural machinery. They don’t need it anymore.
For most animals, though, the ability to think is a big deal. And similarly, having words for things—that is, symbolic thought—offers a huge advantage. Anything else?
Jacobsen: I don’t know. I mean, we don’t really know the minimal unit of information for human thought. We understand some of the basic components of brain activity—nerve impulses, neurotransmitters, neuromodulators, neurohormones—and we know how they integrate to produce complex effects.
We also know that the brain is a massively interconnected network. There are glial cells—probably ten times more than neurons—and around 86 billion neurons in the average human brain. Some glial cells act as cleanup crews, but others participate in information processing.
Neurons communicate through summation, meaning they fire based on statistical combinations of incoming signals. So brain activity isn’t binary in the way computers are. It’s probabilistic, dynamic, and context-dependent.
Rosner: So when we talk about a “minimum unit of thought,” it’s not as clear-cut as in computing. A bit—zero or one—is the smallest unit of digital information. But in the brain, information doesn’t work like that.
It’s more like those puzzles in People magazine, where they show two nearly identical pictures and ask you to spot the eight differences. That’s closer to the idea of minimal change in consciousness: what’s the smallest alteration in your mental landscape that you would actually register as different?
But even that is messy. Thought is not discrete; every element of a thought is defined by its relationships to every other element. You can’t isolate one unit cleanly. Consciousness is a network, not a sequence of bits.
Unlike a computer, where a circuit is either in a one state or a zero state, everything in your mind exists only through its relationships with everything else in your mind. It’s much more holographic. That means it isn’t easily defined by discrete units of information.
On the other hand, there should be a quantifiable amount of information in a single thought. When your brain is fully conscious—when you’re looking around, perceiving, remembering, processing—your mind at full capacity has a measurable information bandwidth from moment to moment.
People have tried to estimate that, to calculate the amount of information in a moment of consciousness, which you could loosely call a “thought.” If you can say, “There’s this much information in that moment,” then you’ve effectively assigned a number of informational units to thought.
So, it’s theoretically possible to measure, though prone to error. Much of what we think we’re thinking in a moment is tacit understanding—unspoken, automatic comprehension. Does that mean we can act as if we’ve had a super-complex thought when, in reality, much of it is implicit?
If tacit or implicit information underlies conscious thought, does it occupy fewer informational “units” than explicit knowledge? Or is that a false distinction—that everything we know is tacit and implicate, and nothing truly explicit? I don’t know. Those are some of the problems in trying to quantify thought. Is that reasonable?
Jacobsen: I think so. I could spin that question endlessly, but let’s leave it there for today.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/30
Pi recurs because circular and spherical geometry minimize surface area and energy: surface tension rounds droplets; for fixed area a circle has the shortest boundary; in 3D a sphere resists stress and encloses volume efficiently. Fibonacci patterns arise from local growth rules near the golden angle (~137.5°), packing leaves and seeds without overlap. Those rules produce spiral counts that match consecutive Fibonacci numbers. Iterative branching and logarithmic spirals extend the effect across pinecones, sunflowers, shells, and more. Beneath both patterns is information shaped by constraints: simple optimization rules yield stable forms nature reuses, from eyeballs to orbits to seed heads.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Here’s a question: why does nature produce things like pi and Fibonacci? We see them in living organisms and ordered structures. Why do those patterns keep showing up?
Rick Rosner: Pi shows up in nature because many physical and geometric relationships involve circles and periodicity. For example, liquid droplets tend to become spherical because, for a given volume, a sphere has the minimum surface area; surface tension then favors that shape. In two dimensions, a circle has the maximum area for a given perimeter (equivalently, the minimum perimeter for a given area), which is why circular boundaries often arise. Fibonacci patterns often appear in plants (like spirals in sunflowers or pinecones) because new growth placed near the “golden angle” of about 137.5° distributes seeds or leaves efficiently, leading to spiral counts that are typically consecutive Fibonacci numbers.
Of course there are forces. Gravity and air resistance turn what would be a sphere in zero gravity into a drop shape. Once that drop contacts a surface, it forms a spherical cap set by surface tension, gravity, and the surface’s wettability (contact angle), rather than pulling itself into a free sphere.
It happens because when everything is pulling on everything else, the surface area is where you have less material pulling, since it’s the outer boundary. The particles on the surface don’t have neighbors on all sides, so everything “wants” to be pulled by as much surrounding material as possible, which minimizes the surface area. The minimum surface area configuration in two dimensions is a circle; in three dimensions—like a planet or a star—it’s a sphere.
A circle has a fixed ratio of its circumference to its diameter, which is where π (pi) arises. For spheres, π appears in surface area (4πr²) and volume ((4/3)πr³). There are many other ways that pi appears in nature.
Fibonacci patterns, on the other hand, appear through iterative branching. The golden ratio—basically the Fibonacci constant—can be derived from the Fibonacci sequence: 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, where each number is the sum of the two preceding ones. Continuing, you get 34, 55, 89, and so on. As the sequence progresses, the ratio between consecutive numbers approaches the golden ratio, approximately 1.618. The formula for the golden ratio (φ) is (1 + √5)/2, which equals about 1.618.
Fibonacci patterns show up in nature through iterations—start with one branch on a tree, then that branch produces another, and each new branch produces more. It’s not exact doubling but rather a growth pattern governed by addition of previous states, like in the sequence itself.
This pattern appears in many natural forms. For example, sunflowers have seed arrangements that follow Fibonacci spirals, distributing seeds efficiently without overlap. The same kind of phyllotaxis—the arrangement of leaves, seeds, or petals—appears in pinecones, pineapples, and many other plants.
Jacobsen: So why do those patterns appear in nature?
Rosner: The simplest processes are also the most common—they’re the most likely to happen. You see circular structures in nature because they represent a minimum surface area. They’re also strong. For instance, eggs aren’t perfectly spherical—they’re mostly spherical but pointy enough to pass through a chicken’s cloaca. In cross-section, they’re circular, and for having just a thin shell of calcium, they take a lot of force to break.
A sphere is the most efficient shape for protection. Your skull, for example, isn’t perfectly spherical, but it’s close enough to minimize the amount of bone needed to protect your brain. You don’t want a bunch of pointy protrusions unless you’re an animal that uses them for fighting. Humans don’t fight that way—though some people might headbutt others—but we don’t have antlers. The skull’s rounded shape provides the least investment in bone while maximizing protection.
A sphere is also resistant to crushing. You can knock a corner off a cube or a tetrahedron, but a sphere has no corners to break. If you look up why spheres are so common in nature, you’ll find many more reasons.
Think of a pit bull chained in a yard. If it runs in circles at maximum distance, it’ll wear a circular path in the dirt. Wheels are circular because you want a smooth ride, not constant jolting. Your eyeballs are roughly spherical because that’s the most efficient shape to contain the vitreous humor, and they move easily in their bony sockets.
The same principle applies to your shoulders and pelvis—if you want a full range of motion, you need a spherical joint in a spherical socket. There are countless reasons spheres show up in nature—they’re simply the most efficient, stable, and versatile shape for both structure and function.
We’re less well-versed in what information actually is and what it requires. I’ve been saying for a few months now that information requires a context. Usually, the context is so obvious that we overlook it—we’ve failed to develop a theory of information in context, of how it takes an entire universe to have information.
There’s information that exists for the universe itself. There’s information tied to how things work at the quantum level, down to the smallest scales. But many of those quantum interactions don’t rise to the level of “information” for the universe—they’re information-like because they follow the basic principles of existence.
Then there’s information as it exists for us—conscious beings living on a planet in this universe. We haven’t yet developed, or even felt the need to develop, a comprehensive theory of how information functions within existence. We’re happy to use it moment to moment. We like sports scores. We like knowing when it’s safe to cross the street. We like having some idea of whether the person we just hit on thinks we’re creepy.
But when it comes to a theoretical understanding of how information becomes information, we’re not great. Yet it’s essential—it’s as crucial to existence as tires are to a car.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/25
Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner probe whether math is built-in or invented, and how intuition can automate physics. Rosner casts math as conceptual shorthand that scaffolds understanding—like words such as “schadenfreude”—with estimation and repetition training intuition. They argue the universe does not “calculate”; laws emerge from interacting fields, while math mirrors structure within finite information, not Platonic perfection. Subjectivity arises as a “statistically disambiguated” layer—distinct yet embedded—analogous to centrifuged strata. Skills span a continuum from embodied physics (a basketball arc) to formal tensors, converging as fluency. Information demands context; existence is a web of relations, and models refine correspondence.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: In theory, if something is living in the universe and there’s a union between how the world works and how their mind works—if they’re able to form a mental map of it—then theoretically there should be no limit to how much of that correspondence could be automated. The perception of the mechanics of the world could become intuitive for an organism.
Rick Rosner: That makes sense. Our perception of three-dimensional space, for example, is intuitive. We’ve lived in it and moved through it long enough that we understand perspective instinctively. We don’t need the equations of perspective or formal explanations—we move through space naturally. So you’re saying we could eventually develop enough cognitive “modules” to interpret the universe intuitively, built from advanced theoretical understanding. We wouldn’t need math—it would just exist in our minds as a model of the world.
Jacobsen: What’s intuitive for us isn’t what’s intuitive for an ant. There’s a scaling difference—you can get much functionality at different cognitive levels. And who says we’re the limit?
Rosner: Within practical limits, of course, you can’t build—at least not yet or in the foreseeable future—a brain the size of a planet. But as technology evolves, there’s no reason to think we couldn’t surpass even that someday.
Jacobsen: So your question is whether math itself is a kind of construct?
Rosner: Right. Is math even math? Math is really a set of languages that act as both numerical and conceptual shorthand. You plug values into equations, and you get results—numbers or symbols—that mean something. They inform your understanding. They help you build the kind of intuitive grasp you were describing earlier. Math, to some extent, is just a way of propping up understanding.
You see a flock of birds, and if you’re Kim Peek, you might instantly say there are 85 of them swirling in the sky. I can do it for maybe 20 birds on a streetlight. That kind of estimation, after repeated exposure, builds intuition. Most people don’t go around counting flocks of birds, but if you do, eventually you develop an intuitive sense of quantity—it’s tied to having done some counting at some point. So math and intuition, or innate understanding, reinforce each other.
It’s a form of shorthand—the exact way words are shorthand. Not the same way, but close. We can think without words; animals feel without words. But it’s much more cumbersome because they lack that linguistic shorthand. Once you name something, it exists as a manipulable concept—you can move it around in your mind as a symbol instead of as a long, descriptive thought.
Take the word schadenfreude: happiness at another’s misfortune. Once you have that word, you can analyze or recognize that feeling much faster—it becomes a tool of cognition. Especially in Hollywood, it’s a useful one.
I’ve got a book on my stairs called How to Teach Physics to Your Dog. The author explains physics for laypeople by imagining his dog is very smart—able to understand words but not math. He tries to explain physics in language simple enough for a bright dog to follow. Others have had similar ideas: translating the brutal, equation-filled side of physics—blackboards full of symbols, fifty-page technical papers—into plain language descriptions of what those equations describe.
Which brings me back to another question for you: Does the universe know how to do math? And if the universe were some being—if the information within it were a model of both its external environment and its internal “memories,” the way we carry models in our own minds—then obviously something as vast as the universe would seem to have some kind of mathematical understanding. But does that mean there’s an actual mathematical understanding built into the universe’s physical operation?
I’d say no. The universe doesn’t calculate. It’s a collection of forces and fields that behave according to the principles of existence, from which the laws of physics emerge. The universe isn’t sitting around computing outcomes; things happen because of the interactions and forces acting on them.
Jacobsen: So the question becomes whether math is in our heads, a tool we’ve invented, or something woven into the universe itself. Probably all three. It’s an extension of what we were talking about earlier—intuition. Intuition is basically a kind of calibrated automation of experience and thought. Over time, the mind tunes itself so that some responses—like catching a ball, walking, or sensing someone’s mood—become instantaneous. Those are intuitions working at high speed.
If you stretched that time scale—say, slowed down thinking by a factor of a hundred or a thousand—the distinction between conscious thought and intuition would blur. At that level, thought and intuition are probably the same process, just operating at different speeds. So, when we talk about correspondence—the mind matching its internal calculations to the external world—it’s that correspondence that gives rise to truth. The math we do with tools mirrors the structure of the world, but the world’s “math” isn’t infinite.
Rosner: People often think of math as existing in some perfect Platonic realm—outside of reality, immutable and pure. But you can also see math as something emergent, a convergent conspiracy of forces working together to define quantities. Counting numbers, for instance, feel infinitely precise—each whole number is followed by an infinite string of zeros past the decimal point. That infinite precision is an assumption we make; it’s a human construction.
In a universe with infinite information, such precision might exist. But our universe is finite, so everything in it is incompletely defined—there’s only so much information to go around. We declare numbers to be infinitely precise because our mathematical rules allow us to do so. And that works beautifully as long as we stay in the realm of abstraction. But once you translate numbers into the physical world, you have to deal with fuzziness again—uncertainty, approximation, and the limits of finite information.
The way we define things in the real world and in mathematics might actually follow similar processes. The difference is that in math, we’re allowed to pretend we have an infinite amount of information available to define things precisely. In the real world, we don’t. I don’t know how that helps anything, but there you are.
Jacobsen: The distinction between math as pre-thought and math as thought is probably artificial. Math in the world is something the world does. If you take that naturalistic view and see the laws of nature or physics as mathematical, then we ourselves could be thought of as mathematical objects in motion—dynamic mathematical processes.
The flip side of that, though, is that the universe may not be aware. I know you and I differ on that—especially with the IC idea. You’ve got an object universe with no inherent awareness, but on this planet, there’s a sort of froth where consciousness emerges—subjectivities built from recursive information processing. Through enough layers of recursion, integration, and goal-directed behaviour, you get what we call a “self.”
Rosner: I don’t think the universe itself is conscious, but I do believe the information within it behaves as if it were processed by something conscious. That information could pertain to an information-processing entity that exists in a larger, more fundamental world—an “armature world,” a level of hardware that allows our universe of matter, space, and time to exist, much as our brains enable our minds to exist.
Jacobsen: All universes in the IC model are finite—arbitrarily large, but still finite in stability. So minds, by derivation, are also finite. For perception to occur and for us to form accurate conceptions of the world, there must be a correspondence between the larger finite structure and the internal processing of that subjectivity. But given the enormous scale difference, the internal models of these subjectivities rarely achieve perfect fidelity with any particular aspect of the larger universe.
Rosner: So when I say that information processing in the universe is “subjective,” I mean that subjectivity belongs to the entity doing the processing. To us, that manifests as space, time, and matter—what we call objective reality. We evolved to model that objective reality as accurately as possible to survive moment to moment. But that modelling itself is subjective because it happens within each individual, from their perspective, and pertains uniquely to them.
So then we can argue about what “subjective” even means. Our brains strive to model the world objectively—without bias—but since each brain’s perspective is unique, the modelling is still subjective. You could call it objective because it tries to be accurate, or subjective. After all, it’s always filtered through individual cognition. Once we make judgments about what’s going on, those judgments are inherently subjective.
Jacobsen: So when you talk about subjectivity and objectivity, you have to define your terms very carefully. Once you do, it’s actually quite straightforward. There’s nothing mystical about it. I’d say that subjectivity in an objective universe is statistically disambiguated—it emerges as a probabilistic byproduct of nature.
Rosner: Say that again without the word “disambiguated.” What do you mean?
Jacobsen: You know those spinners used in labs—centrifuges? They separate substances by weight or density, forming layers as they spin. I think the universe is like that, metaphorically speaking. Subjectivity works the same way: never entirely separate, still sticky, because we’re part of nature. We come out of it, but our sense of self is distinct enough to exist as its own layer in the mix. In that sense, our subjectivity is pretty well defined—each brain models reality for one person.
“Pretty well” is the key phrase. Not absolutely. That’s what I meant earlier by “statistically disambiguated.” Subjectivity is distinct enough to function independently but still arises from the same integrated substrate.
Rosner: So “statistically disambiguated” means what, exactly?
Jacobsen: It’s like saying that a brain’s information—this vast, entangled mass of data—produces a distinct entity the way a macro-object like an apple emerges from particles. An apple is clearly an apple because, statistically, it’s separated from everything else in the universe. It’s coherent.
So applying that same principle to consciousness—scaling it up from classical physics. In classical physics, objects are defined by their scale and their separability. The same logic can apply to less tangible things, such as the sense of self. Consciousness and selfhood emerge as bounded systems from the larger “object universe.”
That ability to predict, perceive, and integrate with the universe—that’s the union ancient traditions talk about. People joke about yoga as stretching, but yoga literally means “union.” If you had no union with the universe, you wouldn’t perceive anything at all. The stickiness —the inseparable connection —defines experience. Evolution gives each species a specific way of interfacing with the world. Your nervous system, your body, your history—all of that encodes the range and type of experience you can have. As systems evolve or degrade, those parameters shift.
Rosner: As our information-processing abilities expand, our understanding of the universe should grow more inclusive. Bugs, for instance, miss almost everything. An aphid can’t conceive that it’s orbiting a star in one galaxy among hundreds of billions. But as our brains evolve—or as we augment them with technology—we’d hope our comprehension becomes more complete.
Jacobsen: Here’s a trick question to sharpen the point: what’s the real difference between catching a ball—an intuitive act—and doing matrix-based math? Time and effort. One is learned subconsciously through repetition; the other requires conscious training to restructure how the mind processes information. But conceptually, both are learning processes that map onto a multidimensional space of cognition—how we acquire and express knowledge.
Shooting a three-point shot and mastering the tensor equations of general relativity seem worlds apart, but both can be plotted in the same cognitive space. The axes represent factors such as time investment, abstraction, sensory feedback, or error correction. Some skills feel more intuitive—like the basketball shot—but both involve the brain learning to model and predict outcomes within structured systems.
So even physical intuition—like a basketball player’s sense of trajectory—could be seen as a kind of embodied physics.
Rosner: My brother’s best friend in junior high was one of the two best basketball players at their school. His dad was a physics professor, and he used to try to mathematicize basketball—to translate the arcs, velocities, and rotations into formal equations.
So my brother’s friend’s dad—the physics professor—once tried to mathematicize basketball. Ignoring air resistance, he explained that if you release the ball with the same force at different angles, the most significant horizontal distance comes from a 45-degree angle. That’s the classic projectile-motion result. In theory, that should help: less force means better accuracy, so a 45-degree release seems ideal.
But in practice, the ball’s entry angle into the hoop matters. At 45 degrees, it approaches the rim at a shallow trajectory, making the rim appear narrower. You probably want a slightly steeper arc—around 51 or 52 degrees—to make the target “larger” from the ball’s perspective. He did all that math, and it was probably less helpful than just shooting thousands of baskets.
People learn athletic skills by doing. You can theorize about angles all day, but experience tunes intuition better than equations. Still, at the elite level—say, Olympic athletes—analysis becomes useful. That’s when you go to Colorado Springs, put motion-capture dots on your body, and let the biomechanics lab break down your movement. They’ll map muscle activation sequences, timing, and energy transfer. It’s science applied to intuition.
Everything exists along a spectrum of learning. Some skills feel intuitive—others demand structured analysis. Take flying a plane: I’ve tried flight simulators at Dave & Buster’s, and even there, it’s hard as hell. You think it’s intuitive—tilt the rudder, bank the wings—but in reality, it’s a complex coordination of forces and control surfaces. That’s why pilots spend hours in classrooms and simulators.
Every discipline has its own learning geometry. In physics, for instance, problem sets in electromagnetism could take an hour apiece. That’s what I hated about physics. I never got to general relativity—those problem sets must be brutal—and only scratched the surface of quantum mechanics. Eventually, though, you reach fluency. The symbols stop being symbols and start behaving intuitively, the way musical notes do for a composer. For the truly brilliant, that intuition might exist from the start.
So learning styles are like different points in a cognitive space—each discipline sits somewhere between the intuitive and the analytical.
Jacobsen: Which leads to more profound questions. People like to ask, “Why is there something rather than nothing?” But that assumes “nothing” is the natural state. The IC answer flips it: Why wouldn’t there be something? Statistically, existence is far more probable than pure absence. The exact inversion applies to math. We keep asking: is math “out there,” in the universe; “in here,” in our heads; or just a tool we’ve built?
All three may be the wrong frame. Once we understand what information actually is, the puzzle changes. Subjectivity—the sense of self—probably arises from a symmetric relationship between what’s happening in the information processor and what’s happening in the external world it evolved to mirror. That symmetry—between internal representation and external structure—is where both math and consciousness meet.
Rosner: And the more immediate stuff—the kind of processing that doesn’t require complete conscious thought—it’s the same principle when I say information isn’t information without context. We haven’t fully developed an understanding of information because we take context for granted. For all the information in our heads, we are the context. We provide the framework.
There are information systems beyond us—like the universe itself, which quantum mechanics implies is an information system. But we don’t yet know what that information is, how it functions, or what it’s relevant to. Our understanding is incomplete until we grasp the context of information, just as our grasp of existence is incomplete without understanding the context of everything.
The naive idea of “stuff” is that things exist by virtue of being things. But the deeper we look, the more we see that existence itself is a kind of cosmic conspiracy—a web of interrelations among vast numbers of processes across immense time scales, all reinforcing one another’s consistency. You can’t remove the rest of the universe and still have an apple. The apple vanishes. Everything depends on everything else.
Our comprehension of context and interrelatedness remains crude. Even our understanding of entropy is parochial—it’s local. We think the universe has increasing entropy because closed systems inevitably do. But on the universal scale, we have no clear picture of how information flows over cosmic time, or even what counts as information. Until we understand that, all our other inquiries will remain fragmentary.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/25
Rick Rosner riffs on whether a civilization could grasp physics without mathematics, imagining whale societies that count heads but lack equations. He argues math is essential for precise theories, yet many core ideas—projectiles, orbits, relativity—begin as pictures and principles before formalization. Examples include Einstein’s thought experiments refined with tensor calculus, Big Bang nucleosynthesis by Alpher, Bethe, and Gamow, and Newton’s insight that orbits are continuous free-fall obeying an inverse-square law. Scott Douglas Jacobsen notes everyday intuition—throwing a ball, braking for a light—mirrors calculus. Rosner concludes: you can teach physics conceptually without equations, but doing physics ultimately requires mathematics. Precision demands symbolic tools.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Could we understand the universe if we did not have any math whatsoever?
Rick Rosner: That reminds me of a scenario. What if there were no people—how would whales understand the universe? Imagine a planet with no land, only aquatic creatures. Would they ever be able to understand the universe, given that their view of the heavens is obscured? They do not have hands. Would aquatic creatures ever develop hands, or is that a purely terrestrial thing? Your question is like asking whether a civilization could arise with minimal math. That is conceivable. A primarily aquatic civilization might only need counting numbers—for instance, to keep track of group members: there are twenty-five of us, but I count twenty-four. Who is missing? Oh, Jerry. Where did Jerry go?
Math is convenient for describing physical concepts. You can tell things in words, but it is much harder to be precise. In the absence of wind resistance, a projectile follows a parabolic path up and back down to Earth. You could describe a parabola in words, but it is much easier to use an equation like y = –x². Once you have math, you can understand the concepts of the universe. You can translate those concepts into words. There is an entire industry of physics for laypeople, where highly trained physicists make the universe and modern physics comprehensible without math. Stephen Hawking was told by his publisher, while writing A Brief History of Time, that every equation in the book would cut sales in half.
So he included only one—E = mc². It was already so well known that it did not scare readers, even if they did not understand what it meant. You need math. I do not think you can develop physical understanding without it. But can you convey an understanding of the universe without equations? Yes, I think you can. You can teach smart people how physics works without math. The most famous example in quantum mechanics, besides Schrödinger’s cat—which most people reference without understanding its full implications—is the double-slit experiment.
You said, “Can you do physics without math?” That depends on what kind. You can have equations without numbers, like F = ma. I’ll give you three examples. Einstein was a visual thinker. Special relativity began when he imagined “chasing a light beam,” asking what electromagnetic fields would look like if you moved at the speed of light. For general relativity, his key insight was the equivalence principle—freely falling frames feel weightless—which he explored through thought experiments. He was good at math, but didn’t initially have the right tools. Marcel Grossmann, a mathematician friend, helped him adopt tensor calculus and differential geometry (not “matrices”) to rigorously express the theory. To a large extent, Einstein’s physics began with pictures and principles and only later took an entirely mathematical form. So visual reasoning can lead to profound insight before the equations are formalized.
Take Gamow. He’s often linked to early Big Bang cosmology, but the core ideas predate him. Alexander Friedmann, in 1922, found non-static solutions to Einstein’s equations. Georges Lemaître, in 1927, proposed an expanding universe and the “primeval atom.” Edwin Hubble, in 1929, provided observational evidence of the expansion of the universe. Gamow’s significant contribution, with his student Ralph Alpher and his work with Robert Herman, was Big Bang nucleosynthesis in the late 1940s: they calculated that a hot, dense early universe would produce mostly hydrogen and about a quarter of it helium by mass, and they predicted a residual cosmic microwave background. The famous 1948 “αβγ” paper listed Alpher, Bethe, and Gamow; Hans Bethe’s inclusion was partly a pun on the Greek letters. Bethe himself is best known for explaining how stars generate energy and elements through stellar nucleosynthesis.
So Gamow wasn’t first, but he refined and extended earlier insights. Then there’s Newton. With universal gravitation, he was one of the greatest mathematicians of all time—he co-invented calculus—but he also had extraordinary visual intuition. He realized that an orbit is continuous free-fall: an object falls toward Earth while having enough sideways, or tangential, speed that it perpetually “misses” the surface. Mathematically, his inverse-square law F=GMmr2F=Gr2Mm and the orbital relation for a circular orbit v=GMrv=rGM capture this: gravity provides the inward acceleration v2/rv2/r, while the orbital speed remains constant in a stable path.
Velocity increasing at a constant rate—like ten meters per second added every second—and that comes from Newton’s laws of motion: an object in motion stays in motion unless acted upon by an outside force. So he’s thinking, what would that look like? You’ve got an object in motion being pulled toward Earth. It already has some velocity, and gravity keeps adding more at a constant rate. That kind of reasoning is best expressed through math, but you can still conceive of it without doing the math explicitly. So intuition first, formalism later.
Also, gravitational force decreases inversely with the square of the distance from the gravitating body. That’s identical to the inverse-square law of illumination: the intensity of light decreases as the square of your distance from the source. You can think about that conceptually. If light radiates outward in all directions, then at any given radius, that light is spread over the surface of a sphere. The surface area of the sphere increases by the square of the radius. Since the total light remains the same, its intensity per unit area decreases with the square of the distance from the source. You can picture that without math—it’s a spatial intuition.
Jacobsen: So, visualization plays a significant role even in something as mathematical as physics. Math facilitates physics; it lets you expand your theories and rigorously test them. You do need math to formalize physics, but you can still grasp a lot conceptually. When I asked whether you could do physics without math, you were already doing it. When you throw a ball or play catch, you have an intuitive grasp of trajectories, velocity, and timing. So we all carry a kind of informal physics toolkit in our heads.
Rosner: Definitely. Anyone who drives understands aspects of calculus without realizing it. When you approach a stoplight, you brake gradually to come to a smooth stop—that’s an intuitive understanding of rates of change, or derivatives. You’re adjusting your acceleration continuously so you don’t collide or stop too soon. And when you think the light’s about to change, probability enters the picture. You might be approaching two cars at a light you’ve seen a thousand times, and you estimate whether the light will turn green before you reach them. You’re unconsciously running a probabilistic model—predicting timing, adjusting speed, minimizing wasted motion. People have an intuitive understanding of dynamics, and that’s a profoundly mathematical thing.
Many people who don’t know quantum mechanics still understand the double-slit experiment—where you can get a single photon to pass through two separate slits in a barrier and interfere with itself.
Many have heard of it, but only a much smaller fraction understands what it actually means. You could teach that without any math whatsoever, without any equations. You can teach people to understand physics conceptually without resorting to many equations. But you can’t do physics without, at some point, involving people who are good at turning those concepts into math.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/23
Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore informational cosmology at black-hole boundaries and beyond. Rosner notes supermassive black holes are densest from the outside, yet interior density is tempered by curved spacetime and quantum “fuzziness.” Quantum gravity candidates, exclusion principles, and phase transitions may halt true singularities, yielding ultra-dense, evolving quantum states. Stars act as leaky correlational engines; galaxies emit immense photon webs, but the most durable records likely reside in gravitational filaments. Rosner sketches “hedgehog” collapse vectors around t0, speculates galaxies can dim and relight via cosmic-web inflow, and doubts nucleation around neutron stars. Dark-matter halos endure. Conclusions remain provisional—and productively skeptical.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: In informational cosmology—if we take a bubbly big-bang universe with regions forming and collapsing—you’ve got active regions and collapsed ones like black holes. What’s the densest possible agglomeration of collapsed matter that could theoretically approximate a black hole, but isn’t quite one?
Rick Rosner: From the outside, the densest objects would be the supermassive black holes at the centers of galaxies—some have billions of stellar masses. From an external perspective, those are the densest things in the universe.
Inside, though, they might not be as dense as we imagine, because the scale of space itself changes within that gravitational well. The curvature of spacetime dilates distances. From the outside, they’re almost as black as black can be—but internally, density and geometry behave differently.
Jacobsen: Do quantum effects at that limit—where you push matter so close together—change how we interpret these systems in an informational or cosmological framework?
Rosner: It depends which quantum effects you’re talking about. The key issue is that in combining quantum mechanics with general relativity, the forces involved—especially gravitational self-attraction—become stronger than any other force we know. Traditional relativity predicts a singularity, an infinity of density, but quantum mechanics might prevent that. Some models, like loop quantum gravity or string theory, suggest spacetime could resist true infinite collapse, replacing the singularity with a finite, ultra-dense quantum structure.
Matter does not exist in pinpoints—it exists with some quantum fuzziness. So even as you approach a singularity, you never truly reach one, because there’s always that fuzziness. You don’t hit infinity unless everything is compressed into a perfect mathematical point, which never happens.
Jacobsen: So that fuzziness is a kind of built-in safeguard against infinities?
Rosner: That’s one quantum correction to general relativity, which otherwise predicts mathematical infinities. And, as far as we know, there are no actual infinities in this or any universe. Before you even reach the singularity, you run into other quantum effects—things like the Pauli exclusion principle, which says you can’t have two particles with identical quantum states occupying the same space.
I’d have to reread the fine points of it, but it’s one of the strongest constraints in quantum mechanics. Basically, there are all sorts of physical “sticking points” that stop matter from collapsing smoothly into an infinite point.
As you add more energy—compressing matter like running the Big Bang in reverse—you reach energy levels so extreme that ordinary particles can’t exist under those conditions. At the Big Bang, for instance, in the first trillionths of a second, you had super high–energy particles like the Higgs boson because everything was compressed into a tiny volume with immense energy density. As the universe expanded, that energy dissipated, and those extreme particles disappeared, leaving behind the “normal” particles that obey familiar quantum rules.
When you’re building a singularity—or something close to it—you’re taking ordinary particles and crushing them together until they can’t exist side by side according to quantum mechanics. When that happens, the system shifts: you inject so much energy that those particles are replaced by higher-energy particles capable of existing under those conditions. You end up with a degenerate, smashed-down quantum soup. Add even more energy, and you get newer, higher-energy structures that aren’t bound by the same exclusion rules.
It becomes a hierarchy of phase transitions—each layer replacing the one before it.
Jacobsen: When you look at a star, a lot of photons get out, but some get trapped for potentially millions of years. The record of those photon directions and interactions gets scrambled long before the star explodes. But when the star finally does explode, all that matter and all those interactions that were in tight correlation get ejected. Quantum mechanically, are those ejected particles still entangled?
Rosner: At least according to information theory, everything that happens in the universe can be given an informational interpretation. So yes—in a sense, everything remains connected, though not in any way we could practically measure.
When a bunch of matter collapses into a dense wad, that has implications for the information embodied by that matter. This is a roundabout way of saying I don’t know exactly how any of this works—but yeah, when you take a stellar object and play with the gravitational curvature of the space around it, that curvature can allow some matter or radiation to escape into the larger universe. When that happens, the escaping material carries information from within the object. I don’t know the full rules governing that, but I’d assume it involves entanglement.
Entanglement is hard to produce in a lab, but in the universe as a whole, everything is effectively entangled—everything shares a history. I don’t know the detailed physics, but that shared history is part of it. When particles escape from a highly self-contained object, they carry a kind of record of that object’s state. So there’s an information release into the wider universe, which makes sense in a system that stores and, when conditions allow, retrieves information.
Jacobsen: Over a chapter of a star’s life cycle—say, a billion years—most of that process plays out gradually. A star’s matter and radiation remain in communication with the universe at large; it’s not self-contained the way a black hole is. The gravitational gradient in a star just isn’t strong enough to seal it off from the rest of spacetime.
Rosner: A star isn’t a black hole. It’s still embedded in the broader universe. It acts as a kind of correlational engine, not an isolated system. There’s a little self-containment due to fusion, but stars are terrible at maintaining a record of most of the interactions happening inside them.
Jacobsen: What about at the galactic level—say, ten to the eleventh stars in a single galaxy? That’s an immense photon web being emitted from all those stars over billions of years. I am thinking of it as a kind of long-term, galaxy-scale correlational photon network.
Rosner: I see what you mean—I’m not entirely convinced by that framing.
Jacobsen: But there’s definitely a lot of information encoded in the spatial and energetic map of the universe.
Rosner: The distribution of photons, matter, and gravitational fields across the cosmos forms an immense record—one that’s constantly being written and rewritten by every interaction that’s ever taken place.
The shaping and association of large-scale structures in the universe are done through gravitation, including the galactic filaments—the vast, web-like formations that connect clusters of galaxies. Those filaments are durable. If my model of the informational cosmos is right, they probably persist far longer than the apparent age of the universe itself.
I haven’t thought deeply about the gravitational relationships among all the stars within a single galaxy, though. I don’t think that structure is as durable as what you find in the cosmic filaments. For example, the spiral arms of a galaxy aren’t permanent structures—they’re density waves that sweep around the galactic disk. Over ten million years or so, they change form. It’s like “the wave” at a football stadium: the pattern moves, but the people stay put.
Over time, stellar collisions decline—both within galaxies and solar systems. The objects that are going to collide do so early on, and what remains settles into relatively stable orbits.
So is there usable information in that long-term stability? In a galaxy that’s twelve billion years old compared to one that’s only a few hundred million years old and still forming, is there more informational value in the older structure?
I don’t know. My instinct is that there’s not a great deal of new information in that stability.
Jacobsen: Nature is subtle, and your emphasis on durable structure—those immense galactic filaments—is probably where most of the long-term information resides. They’re the biggest identifiable structures in the universe, outside the universe itself, if such a thing could even be said to exist.
I’m probing different angles here. Maybe it’s not durability in volume, but durability in time—a sort of persistence through the immense photon web these galaxies emit over billions of years. That’s another kind of durability.
Rosner: Possibly. If my idea of the informational cosmos is right, galaxies can “run out of juice”—their star formation stops—and later they could light up again when the surrounding cosmic web sends enough energy or material back into them. I don’t know what’s truly durable about a galaxy in that context.
Jacobsen: What if some things are transitionally durable? Not permanent themselves, but stepping stones toward something that lasts longer—structures that serve as scaffolds for more durable cosmic phenomena.
Rosner: Maybe. I can imagine an old galaxy running out of energy, leaving behind collapsed remnants orbiting a supermassive black hole at its center. Occasionally, those remnants could still collide, losing orbital momentum due to gravitational friction. Even then, near that collapsed region—close to what we might call t₀, where everything’s extremely dense—time itself runs slower. Every galaxy carries its own intense gravitational vector, which tends to keep them from colliding with each other.
So the space around t₀ looks like a hedgehog, with the spines representing individual galaxies or clusters of galaxies—each with its own direction, its own gravitational collapse vector. It’s spiky that way. It’s not one uniform space but a collection of collapsed regions, separated by gravity—or by the lack of mutual gravitational influence. Everything’s got its own vector.
Within one of these collapse spikes, you’ve got a galaxy where time moves more slowly but isn’t completely frozen. There’s still a lot of collapsed material orbiting a supermassive black hole at the center. Then, eventually, that material lights up again. I assume that happens through some change in curvature that releases a lot of energy—probably mostly from the center, maybe also from other structures within the galaxy.
There must be ancient, collapsed matter orbiting far from the center that doesn’t get re-illuminated when a galaxy “relights.” I would think most of the release comes from the center. Does that process leave much of the galactic structure intact? And if it does, does that matter informationally? Are the objects that light up the old ones, or are they newly formed stars?
Maybe this whole model doesn’t work, because if you’ve got a galaxy full of burned-out remnants—neutron stars, brown dwarfs, collapsed material—and then it gets relit, there’s no evidence that each new star nucleates around a neutron star that pulls in new matter. That’s just not supported by observation.
What we do know is that galaxies have halos of dark matter—possibly regular, collapsed matter we can’t see—that explain why orbital speeds don’t drop off as expected with distance from the center. Maybe only the material far from the core survives both collapse and relighting. But I don’t know. All I’ve got are possibilities, and most of them sound dubious.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/22
Hosted by Pangburn, the “Greatest Vaccine Debate in History” pits educators Dave Farina (“Professor Dave Explains”) and Dr. Dan Wilson (“Debunk the Funk”) against entrepreneur Steve Kirsch and critical-care physician Dr. Pierre Kory. Farina and Wilson emphasize methods over anecdotes, challenging claims about vaccines causing autism, aluminum adjuvant harm, and ivermectin efficacy. They note MMR never contained thimerosal, most childhood vaccines have been thimerosal-free since 2001, and COVID-19 vaccines, though waning, reduce infection and hospitalization. They also explain VAERS cannot establish causation. With clear definitions and study-by-study analysis, Farina and Wilson present the stronger case grounded in contemporary scientific evidence.
Dave Farina, known for the YouTube Channel “Professor Dave Explains,” is a professional science educator. Dr. Dan Wilson, known for the YouTube Channel “Debunk the Funk,” is a molecular biologist and science communicator.
Steve Kirsch is a Silicon Valley entrepreneur and inventor who is a prominent critic of the COVID-19 vaccine. Pierre Kory is an American critical care and pulmonary physician (ABIM revoked certifications) and president of the Front Line COVID-19 Critical Care Alliance. They participated in a public debate hosted by Pangburn titled “Greatest Vaccine Debate In History | Dave Farina & Dr. Dan Wilson vs Steve Kirsch & Dr. Pierre Kory.”
Dan and Dave are part of a growing and necessary educational ecosystem that pushes back against pseudoscience and figures who misinform or disinform people, potentially costing lives and health, not just the lives of vulnerable sub-demographics in America, but also those with international influence.
This reflects an adaptive evolution, in some threads, of New Atheism, Militant Atheism, and/or Firebrand Atheism, with a less aggressive, healthier, assertive approach and a more targeted subject-matter style. This comes out in the rhetorical angle of the debate.
The expletives are not the point; they are punctuation. Dave is the father of a child with autism. The false claim of anti-vaccination activists, e.g., “Vaccines cause autism,” impacts real lives and is not an abstraction to him.
Dan’s greater specialization, combined with Dave’s general-knowledge pushback and Dan’s expertise, made for a formidable combination in the debate. Saying they won would be an understatement. Dave and Dan were the stronger side in the debate with Pierre and Steve.
Primarily, because Dave and Dan targeted the prime form of reasoning presented by Steve and Pierre—anecdote and narrative—while emphasizing that the preponderance of high-quality evidence is what matters in science, not anecdote.
Dave repeatedly identifies this flaw in Pierre and Steve’s arguments, while Dave and Dan return to the key questions about precise definitions, evidence, and analysis of the studies submitted as part of the preparation of the debate. At several points, they educate Steve and Pierre on the studies they submitted for the debate. It was a striking spectacle of pseudoscience being challenged by actual science. Distinct facts came forward.
Some of the debate’s most notable moments included the claim that mercury causes autism. Thimerosal is ethylmercury and clears from the body faster than methylmercury. There has been no demonstrated harm at vaccine doses. Most childhood vaccines were made thimerosal-free in 2001. Notably, MMR has never contained thimerosal. The MMR-autism study was fully retracted and adjudged fraudulent.
The claim that aluminum adjuvants are dangerous was addressed. Decades of observation and multiple reviews support their safety. Large-scale cohort work found no link to allergies, autoimmune or neurodevelopmental disorders.
Another claim was that vaccines do not prevent infection or transmission. However, effectiveness against infection and infectiousness is imperfect but real, and it wanes over time, which is why boosters matter. Vaccines reduce symptomatic infection and hospitalizations.
Another claim was that ivermectin works. Cochrane and subsequent large trials found no clinical benefit. Contrary claims rely on low-quality evidence or retracted work.
The American Board of Internal Medicine revoked certifications for two high-profile figures spreading COVID-19 misinformation; Kory is one of them. Kirsch repeatedly misused VAERS, a passive-reporting system, as if it established causation to claim massive vaccine deaths. Experts have shown why that inference is incorrect and why VAERS data alone cannot determine causality.
The debate was long, but the view was worthwhile. It represents an increasing need on the part of qualified people with the tolerance for dealing with pseudoscience and/or loons directly. So, a big debt of gratitude and appreciation for Dr. Dan Wilson and Dave Farina for their work on this debate.
In fact, it wasn’t up for debate who one the ‘debate.’ Dan and Dave crushed, and thank you for it.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/22
Rick Rosner explains compact objects without hype: compressing matter triggers quantum degeneracy pressure (electrons in white dwarfs, neutrons in neutron stars). When gravity exceeds these pressures—around the Tolman–Oppenheimer–Volkoff limit (~2–3 solar masses)—collapse forms a black hole. Dimming is due to gravitational redshift, not ‘acceleration.’ Exterior fields encode only mass, spin, and charge (“no-hair”). The information paradox’s modern view favors unitarity; black holes preserve information, though mechanisms remain debated. Crucially, the universe is not a black hole: large-scale expansion fits FLRW cosmology, with horizons from cosmic expansion, not an event horizon. Scale matters—bigger systems have gentler curvature and tidal gravity overall.
Rick Rosner: Last night on Naked at Night, before the show, Lance said, “You have this high IQ, but you talk in everyday words. You need to say something that boggles people.” So I talked about what actually happens when matter is compressed by gravity. When matter is squeezed to extreme densities, quantum mechanics bites back: electrons (and, at higher densities, neutrons) resist being packed into the same states. That resistance is called degeneracy pressure (from the Pauli exclusion principle). In that regime—white dwarfs for electrons, neutron stars for neutrons—matter becomes “degenerate,” meaning its pressure comes mostly from quantum effects, not that it “loses information.” From far away, ultra-compact objects are hard to see not because they are “accelerated so much,” but because intense gravity redshifts and dims their light. Cross an event horizon, though, and classical general relativity says signals cannot get back out. That is why the interior of a black hole is not observable from the outside.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: To confirm for readers: “degenerate” here refers to quantum-statistical effects?
Rosner: Inside degenerate matter, if gravity overcomes all known pressures, collapse continues. For neutron stars there is a maximum mass—the Tolman–Oppenheimer–Volkoff limit—beyond which no known equation of state can halt collapse, and a black hole forms. Stable neutron stars are not “making new sub-spaces and times” inside; they are held up by degeneracy pressure and nuclear forces. Whether a black hole interior “bounces” or spawns a new expanding region is speculative and model-dependent; it is not established physics. Appeals to Mach’s principle are not needed here. In standard general relativity, a neutron star’s stability is governed by its own mass, rotation, magnetic fields, and equation of state, not by an “informational umbilical” to the rest of the universe. The exterior only “knows” the star by global charges like mass, spin, and (if any) charge—the spirit of the no-hair theorems.
Jacobsen: Numerically, do you place that limit in the ~2–3 solar mass range, contingent on the equation of state?
Rosner: On information: the phrase “loses almost all of its information” is misleading. Hawking’s original calculation suggested information loss in black-hole evaporation, but the modern consensus in quantum gravity leans toward unitarity—information is preserved in principle (for example, via black-hole microstates)—even if we do not yet have the complete mechanism nailed down. As for “the universe is a black hole,” tempting numerology aside, it is not. Our universe is well-described on large scales by an expanding Friedmann–Lemaître–Robertson–Walker spacetime, not by a static, asymptotically flat Schwarzschild geometry. The fact that the Hubble radius and a naive Schwarzschild radius for the mass inside it can be of similar order is a coincidence of scales, not evidence that the cosmos is a black hole. Light does propagate within the observable universe; what limits us are cosmological horizons set by expansion, not an event horizon confining everything to a single “cosmic black hole.” Short version: gravity can crush matter into degenerate states; degeneracy and nuclear forces hold up white dwarfs and neutron stars until a mass threshold triggers black-hole formation; black-hole interiors and “baby universes” are speculative; Mach’s principle is not required; and the universe is not a black hole.
Jacobsen: For clarity: may we state that gravitational redshift lowers photon energy and apparent brightness, which is why distant compact objects appear dim, rather than attributing this to “acceleration”?
Rosner: We are not crushed by gravitational forces because the universe is so vast that it does not take much curvature to make space fold back on itself on a grand scale—tens of billions of light-years in circumference—to keep the universe self-contained. That is why it can appear, at a glance, somewhat analogous to a black hole. But to make a black hole of, say, three solar masses, the local gravitational pressure must be enormous to compress all that matter into such a tiny volume. The matter is squeezed beyond recognition. As you scale upward from a stellar-mass black hole to something like the entire universe—which, in rough terms, would correspond to a mass on the order of 10²² solar masses—the amount of local gravitational force experienced by the matter decreases. That is because as the radius and curvature scale up, the local curvature of spacetime at any given point is smaller. So the larger the system, the less local pressure is needed to curve space back on itself. The total mass of what is being compressed also affects whether it can internally differentiate—whether new structures, fields, or even separate regions of spacetime could form. One could imagine particles appearing to “explode outward,” but another way to look at it is that the internal scale of space changes, effectively creating more internal volume where new configurations of matter or energy can emerge. There is a lot happening in that idea—though much of it remains speculative.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/23
This chronological overview traces seven decades of major crimes committed by South Korean Christian leaders, from Park Tae-seon’s 1950s fraud convictions to Jung Myung-seok’s 2025 sexual-violence sentence. It details embezzlement, fraud, tax evasion, sexual assault, and coercive control cases involving figures such as Sun Myung Moon, David Yonggi Cho, and Shin Ok-ju. The analysis links these patterns to the professional limitations of theology-only education and rigid gender expectations in conservative Christianity, suggesting that such environments may exacerbate vulnerability to corruption. It closes by urging stronger transparency, regulation, and ethical oversight within South Korea’s religious institutions.
Part of the Issue
The problem with theological degrees or training without other skills can become the inability to be hired competently in many other domains of professional life. Many Christians who acquire bachelors degrees in theology, including reasonably intelligent ones, may encounter this problem if they do not originally intend on this pursuit.
“My God-given purpose in life” can be a cover for “no other options,” particularly with the narrow permissible gender role expectations of Christian married men with a child or children, which can become the seeds for future criminal activities for some. While such pressures can create economic or psychological strain, this pattern is not universal nor causal. The following are court-verified cases of financial and abuse-related crimes by high-profile South Korean Christian leaders.
1950s/1960s
Park Tae-seon was the founder of Olive Tree (Cheonbugyo). He was repeatedly prosecuted decades earlier. He had fraud-related convictions in 1959 with an initial 2 years and 6 months at trial, then a 1 year and 6 months on appeal. There was additional sentencing in 1961 tied to election-law violations. Custodial time served into 1962.
1980s
Sun Myung Moon founded the Unification Church (conviction in the United States). He was found guilty of willfully filing false tax returns and conspiracy. His sentence was 18 months plus a fine. He served ~13 months (1984–1985) at FCI Danbury. His conviction was upheld on appeal. The Supreme Court declined review.
1990s
Lee Jang-rim founded the Dami Mission, which was a 1992 “rapture” movement. He predicted the Christian Rapture for October 28, 1992. He was arrested in September 1992 for fraud tied to end-times donations and investments. A Seoul court between December 4 and 5, 1992 convicted Jang-rim of fraud and gave a two-year prison term for swindling about $4.4 million from followers.
Yoo Byung-eun founded the Evangelical Baptist Church or the “Salvation Sect”, and had Semo/Chonghaejin links. He was convicted of fraud in the early 1990s and given a 4-year prison term for diverting church members’ funds to his businesses. During the 2014 Sewol investigations, it was widely re-reported.
Kim Ki-soon/Kim Ki-sun is the leader of Baby Garden (Agadongsan). He faced a raft of allegations in the 1990s. In 1998, she was acquitted of murder and fraud, but convicted of embezzlement/tax offenses. The Supreme Court confirmed 4 years’ imprisonment and a ₩5.6 billion fine.
2000s
Cho Hee-seong founded Victory Altar (Yeongsaeng-gyo). He was convicted for fraud, illegal detention, and worker exploitation in the 1990s. Later, he was tied to follower killings. In February 2004, he was given a death sentence at first instance for the ordering of six murders. Between May and June 2004, a higher court overturned the death verdict and then found no order to kill, reducing it to a two-year term for aiding perpetrators’ escape. Cho died in custody before a Supreme Court review.
2010s
David Yonggi Cho founded Yoido Full Gospel Church. Cho orchestrated an overpriced share purchase benefiting his son, Cho Hee-jun’s, firm. Also, he had an unpaid gift tax tied to the deal and evaded taxes. At the Seoul Central District Court on February 20, 2014, Cho was charged with breach of trust causing ₩13.15B loss to the church. Cho received a 3 year imprisonment with a 5 year suspension. His son Hee-jun received 3 years’ imprisonment. The suspended term was later reduced to 2 years and 6 months with a 4-year suspension while the conviction stood.
Lee Jae-rock of the Manmin Central Church through the Seoul Central District Court was convicted of serial rapes of congregants and sentenced to 15 years and therapy with post-release work restrictions. The sentence was increased to 16 years on appeal. The Supreme Court on August 9, 2019 affirmed the conviction with a final term recorded as 16 years after appellate adjustments.
Shin Ok-ju of Grace Road Church was another criminal and abuser. She was found to have confiscated followers’ passports, ritualized beatings (“threshing floor”), and engaged in coercive control. At the Anyang branch of Suwon District Court between July 31 and August 2, 2019, Shin was charged with assault, child abuse, fraud, unlawful confinement, and coercion of followers moved to Fiji, and violence. She received 6 years’ imprisonment with co-leaders having shorter terms and suspended terms. Fiji and international actions continued against the group in subsequent years.
2020s
Lee Man-hee led the Shincheonji Church of Jesus. Man-hee was charged with embezzlement of ~₩5.6B in church funds and unauthorized use of public facilities (separate from COVID-era charges). He diverted church funds, including to build a residence, and used government facilities without approval. In Suwon District Court on January 13, 2021, he received a three-year prison term, suspended for five years (probationary). Later, the top court in 2022 kept the embezzlement conviction/suspended term intact.
Jung (Jeong) Myung-seok is the founder of the Providence/Christian Gospel Mission (JMS). Between 2008 and 2018, he served 10 years in prison for sex crimes. The new case from Daejeon District Court on December 22, 2023 resulted in a sentence of 23 years based on sexual violence against followers including quasi-rape. Based on appeals, the sentence was reduced to 17 years with the Supreme Court on January 9, 2025 upholding the sentence of 17 years including an electronic monitoring order.
Jeon Kwang-hoon founded the Sarang Jeil Church. He violated the Public Official Election Act by endorsing a candidate during worship. The Supreme Court upheld a ₩2,000,000 penal fine. Kwang-hoon was given a ₩20,000,000 fine over illegal fundraising at rallies in a separate case. No jail time.
Chun Ki-won founded Durihana, which is a Christian ministry. It runs an alternative school for North Korean defector teens. The Seoul Central District Court on February 15, 2024 sentenced Ki-won to 5 years for sexually assaulting six teenage defectors. The court ordered 80 hours of sex-offender treatment and a 5-year employment ban from child/disabled-related institutions. On July 16, 2024 the Seoul High Court upheld the sentence on appeal.
Presbyterian Pastor Si Young Oh was convicted in the Philippines of qualified trafficking in persons (minors). He was convicted abroad, not in South Korea, and was given a life sentence. The Supreme Court of the Philippines upheld the conviction on October 21, 2024.
The Future South Korean Christian Criminals
There are plenty of other South Korean Christian leaders who are criminals. Those are some noteworthy ones. Given the consistent history, the more constructive question is whether oversight and accountability mechanisms in South Korea’s religious institutions can evolve to prevent future scandals.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/22
Rabbi Debra Bennet is the Director of Jewish Life & Learning at the Mid Island Y JCC in Plainview, NY. She received her rabbinic ordination in May 2007 and has previously served as the Rabbi Educator at Temple Beth Torah in Melville and as the Associate Rabbi of Temple Chaverim in Plainview, where she developed teen programming and worked to strengthen connections to Judaism and the Jewish Community. In her current role, she continues to educate and inspire her community while addressing pressing social issues, fostering dialogue and collaboration across faith traditions, and cultivating an inclusive, connected community throughout the JCC.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Bennet discusses how Judaism infuses every aspect of community life—from education and the arts to social support and interfaith collaboration. In conversation with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, she explores how the JCC measures impact through meaningful connections rather than attendance, fosters teen engagement through authenticity and reflection, and integrates Jewish values across departments. Rabbi Bennet emphasizes honouring intra-Jewish diversity, cultivating interfaith understanding, and promoting genuine allyship against antisemitism through shared values, compassion, and sustained, trust-based relationships.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What does “Jewish Life & Learning” mean at a community JCC?
Rabbi Debra Bennet: At a community JCC like the Mid Island Y JCC, Jewish life and learning aren’t confined to a classroom or a specific program; they’re infused into our entire community. Judaism shapes everything we do, both in visible and more subtle ways. Whether we’re helping those facing food insecurity, educating children, or supporting people as they age, the values of our tradition guide our work at every step. When someone walks through our doors, they may experience Jewish life through a holiday celebration, a Hebrew song in an early childhood classroom, or feel it in the way we show care or build community. Both the explicit and quiet expressions of Judaism are essential. Together, they create a space where everyone can connect meaningfully in ways that feel authentic and relevant to their lives.
Jacobsen: How do you measure impact? Not simply attendance.
Bennet: At the Mid Island Y JCC, we measure impact by the quality of connections people make here. While numbers matter, actual impact is defined by meaningful moments, whether finding support, purpose, community, or an unexpected experience. Someone might come for the gym but stay for a Shabbat song; a family might enroll a child, then discover a young parents’ group. Our success is reflected in the depth of relationships we foster, the belonging people feel, and the ways Jewish values enrich daily life in our community.
Jacobsen: Which program bridged Jewish tradition with contemporary community needs for your community?
Bennet: One program that deeply resonates right now is Teens for Israel, which equips teens with tools to understand and express the Jewish people’s connection to Israel, while thoughtfully addressing today’s challenging realities. As antisemitism and anti-Israel sentiment rise, this program empowers teens to navigate difficult conversations with knowledge and confidence. Grounded in Jewish tradition, it creates a space for asking questions, gaining context, and hearing new perspectives.
Jacobsen: What works in 2025 for teen engagement?
Bennet: In 2025, teen engagement thrives when it prioritizes authentic relationships, relevance, and flexibility. With teens busier and more stressed than ever, they’re drawn to spaces where they feel seen, heard, and valued. Programs that help them explore their core values provide grounding and direction, while discussions tied to their real-life experiences, like mental health and responses to antisemitism, spark deeper connections. Engagement grows when teens help shape the experience and when there’s space not just for activity, but also for reflection and meaning finding.
Jacobsen: How do you collaborate across departments to ensure Jewish values inform the arts?
Bennet: Jewish tradition teaches us that we work best when we work together. The concept of chevruta, or partnered learning, is rooted in the idea that knowledge is deepened through dialogue and that one person’s insight sharpens another’s. This model guides how we collaborate across departments at the JCC: Jewish values aren’t meant to live in isolation. Instead, they thrive when infused into every aspect of community life.
By integrating Jewish learning, culture, and values across all departments, from arts to fitness to early childhood, we create a shared language and deeper purpose. It helps members connect to something larger than themselves, whether they identify as Jewish. It also allows our staff to work from a values-based foundation, where creativity, compassion, justice, and community are guiding principles. When Jewish wisdom is woven throughout the Mid Island Y JCC, it strengthens the sense of belonging and meaning for everyone who walks through our doors.
Jacobsen: In a pluralistic setting, how do you honour intra-Jewish diversity?
Bennet: We honour intra-Jewish diversity by meeting people where they are and creating space for multiple expressions of Jewish identity. We find common ground by validating different beliefs and traditions, ensuring everyone feels seen, respected, and welcome. Our goal is to work from a place of openness, without making assumptions about what people know or don’t know. With this perspective, we aim to foster an environment that encourages less judgment and more opportunities for sharing and learning.
Jacobsen: What is your philosophy on interfaith partnership at the JCC?
Bennet: At the Mid Island Y JCC, where staff and members come from many backgrounds, it’s essential to create a culture where everyone feels comfortable, valued, and included. We focus on shared values, like community and compassion, while celebrating the richness that different beliefs and cultures bring to our shared space.
Jacobsen: What are productive community-level responses to allyship and antisemitism beyond performative gestures?
Bennet: True allyship means speaking up for one another, showing up in difficult moments, and continuing hard conversations even when they’re uncomfortable. It also means building authentic relationships across communities through cultural sharing. In doing so, our mutual support is grounded in a deeper trust, rather than just surface-level statements.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Rabbi Bennet.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/18
When you travel with someone steeped in select grievance, a gentle, loving persuasion eventually gives way to containment: kindness, limits, and exit routes — for a time. This is a short field guide from one fraught trip: how to stay humane, set boundaries, and leave without rancour when conversation turns into performance.
I travelled briefly with a lawyer once, a peculiar composite of many Western traits they’d denounce while one reflecting the Sermon on the Mount’s “speck and plank” warning about hypocrisy: not to learn from it, but to ironically live it out.
They practised a selective morality about the killing of journalists: condemning the killings of journalists by Russian forces while showing indifference to reports of journalists killed by Israeli forces. The United Nations reported at least 242 Palestinian journalists killed in Gaza as of 11 August 2025, while the Committee to Protect Journalists’ verified tally was lower — at least 189 by 1 September 2025. Counts vary by source and method.
They were chauvinistic about many things outside what they stereotyped as Western and voiced anti-trans views, apparently resentful over a grant awarded to an LGBTQ organization. Hurt can explain a posture; it does not excuse prejudice.
Their horizon narrowed to a hard, self-justifying individualism. “I do not care about trans people!” they would exclaim whenever perspective-taking or fairness in competitive grants arose. Coming from a privileged background in their homeland only made the moral asynchrony starker. The symphony was off-key.
Most of the trip consisted of eating and walking; coffee, cola, and wine; smoking shisha and the occasional cigarette; ignoring medical advice with a gleeful lack of care; trash-talking employees in absentia; and seeking an audience — one in person or many online. They framed this as work.
I soon realised the monologues would continue regardless of any reply. I learned to be wise and barely engage, for this person wanted mainly to hear their own echo — stereotyping all Westerners or “the West” as bad while being, by their own definitions, Westernised, even as they claimed the East by implicate identity.
It made me pause. I do not see the world in Western versus Global South terms, West versus East, developed versus developing. These demarcations have some conceptual utility; they are placeholders to help us grasp reality. Regardless, I am a humanist. I see humanity as one species in the same boat, whether facing nuclear-weapons proliferation, natural disasters and pandemics, anthropogenic climate change, overpopulation, or otherwise.
I hardly spoke, avoided geopolitics, and focused on art, plenty of compliments, good food, and the possibility of future visits. From their insecurity, they seemed to assume I found them “rude, radical, or evil.” I did not. I found them generally intelligent, well-educated, and, with effort, thoughtful and kind — often lovely to be around when things were going well: an unexpected grace note I would welcome again.
They were simply another ordinary person with distinct legal and linguistic talents, an above-average character, and the habit of stereotyping others. As I later joked, they might have preferred to be born with two mouths and one ear rather than the reverse.
I have never seen what is called “Western” as inherently superior, and still do not. I do not know why anyone assumes otherwise. Had they asked, I would have given an honest, straightforward opinion. We should strive to offer non-judgmental space for improvisatory opinions with travel partners. They took little time to offer empathy or consider another point of view — a pitiable lack of curiosity despite philosophical education.
They were prone to misrepresenting me — later, online, to others. I did not confront them; outbursts or social-media rants often follow. They promised confidentiality, then subtweeted insinuations.
What to do about emotional and reputational abuse? Withdraw gently and completely. I cut contact, professionally and personally, in a systematic manner. I do not have to participate in my own abuse.
I enjoyed one early dinner with them and a friend on the first day, where we discussed metaphysics. Language barriers made deeper conversations impossible, so I left it there. It is not a judgment — simply a cultural and linguistic barrier. How well would I speak metaphysics in their languages as a monoglot?
By the second day I gave up on their repeated monologues. I realised their questions were often intrusive, performative prying — a setup for dramatic exasperation and moralizing. Attention was the currency.
Once, after I bought them fries and myself a burger, they asked what I thought was a genuine question. I barely began to answer when they pretended to choke on potatoes — a theatrical flourish. It was a superficial farce masquerading as a sincere moral inquiry. You never know when these stories will be recycled for a mentally adolescent audience on social media; in this case they were, with encouraged epithets and expletives to boot.
I stayed calm and offered terse, unserious, even sarcastic replies, having already mapped their bigotries and games. They were self-involved and saw conversation as another dais for grand moralizing, as if channelling the very ill-defined “West” they caricatured.
By the third day, I stopped trying to reason altogether. Repetition breeds clarity: when every idea circles the same drain of grievance, silence becomes a form of interpersonal self-preservation.
These outbursts repeated throughout the trip, along with requests for professional contacts. It is dispiriting to meet those who treat others as transactions: ears to listen, networks to exploit, set pieces for later show-and-tell, or verbal and emotional punching bags for prejudices against whole regions of the world. This all unfolded during a birthday week that ended with my father’s funeral. They knew. Why the mendacity? I was celebrating life, mourning death, and turning a page in a new region with someone entirely new. They chose to abandon fundamental charity toward a person sharing space and time with them.
This was not principled anti-Western sentiment so much as dependence. They needed a stereotype of “the West” as a mirror to feel seen. A scholar as cultural paradox: caught between privilege and resentment; mimicking resistance while craving its validation; resenting what one reflects and reflecting what one resents; harbouring indifference to out-group suffering while cloaked in moral relativism, trimmed with the shawl of pseudo-skepticism.
They would cite Baudrillard while acting as if attention were the only real. An embodiment of the modern afflicted contradiction: To want the power of traditional older men, the privileges of contemporary younger women, and the accountability of children no matter the generation. Someone who ‘hates men of this generation’ while seeing her male peers as “children” while wanting a family due to “hormones” but engaged in short-term mating while ‘seduced by ministers’ and flinging with French lovers. It is: To see life a simulation and live in a forever “What if?” — settling to be never settled.
By the end, I gained a vital travel lesson: choose companions carefully, disengage when necessary, maintain a kindly composure, and keep firm boundaries that allow forgiveness without forgetting. The door is open. Listening without illusion is a discipline: to hear a worldview collapse under its own echo and stay kind anyway.
Forgiveness is usually an email away. Love as a principle commands it, and loving sentiments toward this person in particular still incline me to goodwill.
They saw themselves as apart and me as a type; I saw both of us as just people. My refrain, to remind them of my individuality and vulnerability, was simple: “I’m just a person.”
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/17
Phumzile Mlambo-Ngcuka reflects on UN Women’s creation and warns of a growing backlash against gender equality. She argues that women’s participation strengthens democracy and economies, citing research estimating trillions in global gains. Celebrating progress since the Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action, she urges meaningful commemoration paired with forward planning. Two priorities dominate: digital inclusion—especially women’s presence in AI knowledge-making—and representation, where women still hold only about one third of decision-making roles. She calls for solidarity across movements, protection of affirmative action, and faster action so girls and young women are not left behind as technology and power structures evolve.
Dear friends,
I vividly remember the great joy and honor I felt when we announced the official launch of the new UN Women. We are facing a growing backlash against gender equality. This backlash is not new, but it is growing stronger. We faced challenges during my tenure as Executive Director, and today UN Women faces both opportunities and resistance. International organizations, advocates, and civil society are more critical than ever. The promise we have made cannot be undone by those who neither believe in nor appreciate equality and human rights.
We must continue reminding the world that gender equality benefits everyone, not just women, as we learned through the work of UN Women. When I was Executive Director, I often faced skepticism from some men regarding the importance of women’s participation in all aspects of life. Women make up half of the world’s population, and we simply cannot afford to ignore the full potential of half of humanity.
The world needs to tap into the talent and wisdom of women everywhere. This was true back then, and it remains true today. When women participate, democracy is stronger, and the economy grows. There are many studies showing how women’s participation could inject an additional 12 trillion dollars into the global economy. Gender equality and women’s empowerment are not only the right thing to do; they are the smart thing to do. Women’s empowerment is one of the key strengths of society as a whole, and ignoring it undermines equity and progress.
I have to say that every time I look at myself in the mirror, I reflect on the journey we have taken together. Let me congratulate you for the adoption of the agreed conclusions and the effort it took for you to produce the declaration, and for the fact that it has been adopted.
The sisters, Michelle and Sima, it is really wonderful to be here with you again. The first time ever that the three of us are in one place. And to colleagues, colleagues from UN Women, Excellencies, ladies and gentlemen—good evening. Thank you to Chile as well.
Thank you for celebrating and remembering this day in this manner. You can see that the Chilean Ambassador was a Chilean woman—she knows how important these things are.
We are also excited that she remembered to include the three of us in this activity. Now we are having stamps to symbolize this celebration. And I heard the story that an envelope once said to a stamp, “Stick with me, and we will go places.”
And I think that if we, the stamps, stick with you, we are definitely going to go places and cover the whole world.
It is important that whenever we have a major celebration, we mark it in a manner that is meaningful—that we celebrate, but also remember and plan for the future. It is true that a lot has been achieved since the adoption of the Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action.
But it is also true that so much more still needs to be done. It is therefore befitting that this year we have strengthened the agenda by identifying areas that need hard work. Let me just pick on two issues that are becoming, to my mind, significant for us to be concerned about.
If we look at the area of digital inclusion and the extent to which women are not where they are supposed to be, there is a real danger that women will be left behind—possibly forever.
And that inequality will deepen. The absence of women in knowledge-making, especially in the area of artificial intelligence—which remains a domain largely of men—is a significant problem, because we see what comes out on the other side. The absence of women, especially young women, in many places where technology shapes decisions and defines opportunity, is deeply troubling.
The way intelligence systems are used to guide how young people live, interact, and even form identities—this imbalance between boys and girls, young men and young women, men and women—is a serious issue. So I think for us, at this point, it is to organize and to do whatever we can to make sure that we position women in a much better place. We just do not have enough women.
Who are the ones informing the information that drives the technology? I have just heard recently that in South Africa, we have a group of women who are creating a robot that only uses information sourced directly from the community. This should not be an isolated story. This is something we should be hearing about every day, in many parts of the world, because girls are outnumbered.
We are seriously outnumbered. And the way in which this technology moves so fast means we obviously have to move even faster.
Secondly, just the issue of representation. This is one area where we have not performed as well as we wanted since Beijing. Even though we have seen phenomenal women rise to leadership, the fact that we sometimes have an illusion that women are over-represented—as I sometimes hear people remarking—is only because women are doing exceptional work. We often have one woman doing the work of ten men, and that creates the impression that there are many, many, many more women than there really are.
But the truth of the matter is that only about one-third of decision-making positions globally are held by women, even decades after the adoption of the Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action.
So this is actually quite serious. And now we are pushing against the pushback. In this era of strongmen—men who are sexist, who are racist, who do not believe in women the way we do—this is a serious problem. It means that this issue of representation is even moving further out of reach.
Women’s equality thrives when you have an environment where many other groups whose rights are denied are also rising. Whenever those rights are taken away or compromised, gender equality suffers.
It is therefore important for us, in the work for gender equality, to stand with other disadvantaged groups—to be among those speaking up for LGBTQ rights, for persons with disabilities, and for every other marginalized group in our societies. Because when we thrive together, the change we achieve is much more solid and sustainable.
And right now, we are seeing important rights being rolled back across many fronts. The area of representation is in danger. Because if you deny us the use of special measures—those tools that have enabled us to push forward so many women—you open the gap again.
It is important to preserve affirmative action and to make sure that women who are being left behind, who are unlikely to be represented in many decades to come, are included now—at this point in time.
So yes, we have progressed. And yes, we are celebrating. But we still have much more work to do.
So, good luck to all of us. Thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/17
Former UN Women Executive Director Michelle Bachelet reflects on the organization’s founding in 2010 through the merger of DAW, INSTRAW, OSAGI, and UNIFEM, created to champion women’s rights worldwide. She highlights persistent structural barriers, political backlash, and the economic potential of gender equality, noting studies showing women’s participation could add $12 trillion to the global economy. Bachelet underscores that empowering women strengthens democracy, economies, and societies as a whole. Quoting Archbishop Desmond Tutu, she urges continued hope and action, reminding the world that gender equality remains both an urgent moral imperative and a smart investment for humanity’s shared future.
Dear friends,
I really remember the great joy and honor I felt when we announced the official launch of UN Women back in 2010. Fifteen years ago, the idea of having a dedicated UN entity to advocate for women in every aspect of life was not just necessary—it was urgent. In 2010, four different parts of the UN system—DAW (Division for the Advancement of Women), INSTRAW (International Research and Training Institute for the Advancement of Women), OSAGI (Office of the Special Adviser on Gender Issues and Advancement of Women), and UNIFEM (United Nations Development Fund for Women)—merged to create what we now know as UN Women. I want to thank all of them, because it’s not that UN Women started working for women. These organizations and many others had been working for many years, and I thank them because they were so generous and participated so enthusiastically when we created UN Women.
From the beginning, UN Women’s mission has been to amplify women’s voices and ensure their full and equal participation in all spheres of society. Today, given the complex global challenges we face, I can confidently say that we need UN Women now more than ever. The organization’s unwavering commitment to promoting women’s rights, ensuring their participation in decision-making processes, and fostering inclusive growth has been pivotal in advancing gender equality worldwide. However, structural barriers persist. Gender-based political bias has evolved in many parts of the world. We are witnessing a worrying backlash against gender equality. This backlash is not new, but it is growing stronger.
We faced challenges during my tenure as Executive Director of UN Women, and today Seema faces both ongoing and new challenges. The collaboration of governments, international organizations, advocates, and civil society is more critical than ever. We cannot allow the progress we have made to be undone by those who either disbelieve in or deprioritize gender equality. We have always understood how crucial this work is, and we must continue reminding the world that gender equality benefits everyone, not just women, as we heard from Seema. When I was Executive Director, I often faced skepticism from some men regarding the importance of women’s participation in all aspects of life. Women may come…
And I would remind them that we simply cannot afford to ignore the full potential of half of humanity. The world needs to tap into the talent and wisdom of women everywhere. This was true back then, and it remains true today. And it’s not only with more women participating that we have stronger democracies, but even the economy will improve.
Studies show that women’s participation could inject an additional 12 trillion dollars into the global economy. So gender equality and women’s empowerment are not only there—as I always used to say, so some of you may be a little bit bored to hear me say the same—but I truly believe it is not only the right thing to do, but the smart thing to do. Empowerment and women’s benefit are not only for women; they strengthen society as a whole, as was said clearly during Beijing.
Today we must work harder than ever to strengthen our democracy. And the only way to do so is by empowering women because, as we all know, women’s rights are human rights. I also want to take this opportunity to express my deep gratitude to all the staff, planners, and collaborators of UN Women across the world.
I look forward to seeing the progress that you and UN Women will continue to achieve in the years ahead. Let us reaffirm our commitment and renew our energy for this cause, which is not new but remains as urgent and important as it was fifteen years ago, when we first embarked on this journey of UN Women with great hope. I have to say that every time women advance, you will find forces that want to backlash, that want to push them back.
So, as Archbishop Desmond Tutu used to say, we cannot give up. We need to be prisoners or hostages of hope because we need the struggle to continue. We cannot stop struggling for women’s rights. I hope that this activity will continue inspiring all of us, and that the CSW Declaration, the Florida Declaration, will continue inspiring all of us so that UN Women will continue to succeed for many years to come. Thank you very much, and please always count on me on this side.
Thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/17
Rejecting both postmodern relativism and divine-command dogma, this piece argues for a third path: mixing scientific skepticism with secular humanism. Rather than reflexively “drinking the Kool-Aid,” it urges testing claims, valuing falsifiability, and grounding ethics in human flourishing. Scientific skepticism supplies method—doubt, evidence, reproducibility—while secular humanism supplies purpose—dignity, freedom, pluralism. The essay warns that political dogmatisms, including state-promoted atheism in China, mirror religious authoritarianism. It advocates evidence-based policy on climate, health, and technology; open inquiry; and empathy as civic virtues. In short: Galileo’s method meets the Universal Declaration’s ideals, uniting disciplined doubt with compassionate action within a naturalistic, fallibilist outlook for all.
“Humanism is a progressive philosophy of life that, without supernaturalism, affirms our ability and responsibility to lead ethical lives of personal fulfillment that aspire to the greater good of humanity.”
Humanist Manifesto III (2003)
“Science is more than a body of knowledge, it’s a way of thinking… a way of skeptically interrogating the universe with a fine understanding of human fallibility.”
Carl Sagan
“Evidence… is a good reason for believing something… Beware of ‘tradition,’ ‘authority,’ and ‘revelation.’”
Richard Dawkins
If someone just offers you Kool-Aid, do you simply reject it or accept dogmatically based on prior prejudice, or do you see the Kool-Aid as equal to milk, water, or coffee?
The relativism of the postmodernists never made much sense to me. The divine command of individuals adherent to faith-based systems did not either.
Extreme versions are found in relativist skepticism in one stream and fundamentalist religion in another. I never adhered to either. Inchoate, I had another option present in mind as an agnostic in reason and atheist in heart.
The opposites don’t work either for me. The opposition of a cultural relativist in many ways is an extreme chauvinist, whether what we falsely call the West or East. Their culture, for instance, is superior to all others. That makes little sense to me.
A third option from those first two, neither in-between nor much related to them, a mix of scientific skepticism and secular humanism. A sophisticated contemporary philosophical life stance and empirical moral philosophy. That seems more sensible to me.
In fact, the faith-based systems of a divine command theory can be replicated in formulations of political dogmatism, even state-promoted atheism under the Chinese Communist Party. Dogmatism is the root; political and religious fundamentalists are outgrowths.
A third option became more appealing. A scientifically skeptical stance to doubt, test, verify, and revise, to better comprehend objective reality. A secular humanist stance for freedom, flourishing, and human dignity without the appeal to the supernatural —to see objective reality as a naturalistic process.
Something like Galileo meets the Universal Declaration of Human Rights. A methodology emphasizing evidence and falsifiability with intellectual roots in empiricism, the scientific method, and Enlightenment rationalism. The aim is to distinguish reliable knowledge from deception, error, and superstition.
An ethic emphasizing a nontheistic philosophy grounded in ethics, reason, and justice, with its roots in classical humanism, the Enlightenment, and modern secularism. The aim is empathy and rational moral reasoning.
These two integrate toward the advancement of human understanding through collaborative testing, open discourse, and the correction of error. Secular humanists value human needs, empathy, and consequences rather than divine wrath or benevolence. Scientific skeptics inform ethics through data on well-being and harm.
Secular humanists find purpose in creativity, knowledge, love, and service, while scientific skeptics see awe and wonder in understanding the processes of the universe in an honest manner without the need to invent consoling myths.
Secular humanists find value in equal dignity, pluralism, and the advancement of secular governance, while scientific skeptics advocate policy that is grounded in evidence related to everything, whether climate science, public health, or technology ethics.
Secular humanism is grounded in an objective world and the assessment of conditions related to human suffering and particularly well-being. Scientific skepticism works for quantifying what can be quantified and conceptualized while, with epistemic humility, knowing its limits. An informed decision about individual and collective well-being is not necessarily a perfectly informed one. We are evolved organisms that are part of the natural world and, therefore, have limitations.
These essentially mix into a practice of disciplined doubt expressed through compassion and goodness pursued without the gods.
Just remember: If someone offers you Kool-Aid, appreciation for the gesture would be polite, but make sure it’s actually Kool-Aid first.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/16
Fort Langley, known as the “birthplace of British Columbia,” hides an undercurrent of control beneath its postcard charm. A satirical account of a self-styled “Midnight Dad Brigade” exposes tensions over image, power, and moral authority in the village. Harassment and intimidation against dissenters underscore how fragile civility can be in tightly knit communities. Parallel to this, the rainbow crosswalk at Mary and Glover—installed in 2017 and repeatedly vandalized—has become a flashpoint for identity and belonging. The Township’s 2025 attempt to replace it with “heritage” art, later withdrawn after backlash, reflects the continuing struggle between heritage and inclusion.
It’s always the little things, even the tiny ones.
I grew up in Fort Langley, British Columbia, Canada. It is among the more famous villages in British Columbia and, by some historical claims, the founding place of the province. Fort Langley is called the “birthplace of B.C.” Why? Governor James Douglas proclaimed the Colony of British Columbia there on November 19, 1858.
In my home village, there are, as with many small towns, controversies, cliques, interests, and intrigue. There have been a lot. Plenty of hate for atheists among some.
A little while ago a group of dads formed a fake vigilante group to handle an apparently homeless alcohol misusing thief in town. Broadly, the real reason was inconvenience of a drunk thief wandering town bothering some people and businesses.
It was under the guise of compassion. They colluded with the police and got some more thin positive media coverage: Photo-ops with crocs, shirts, and some beers afterwards. Then a woman speaking out against their midnight raids and faux compassion was harassed by some in community.
I corresponded with that woman. She was very grateful for a satire piece at the time. I wrote a satirical article about the Midnight Dad Brigade. They harassed my work, my professional associations, and my academic mentor’s institute over it. They tried to get me fired, disbarred, and disfellowed, respectively. None happened, but they tried with all the Good Lord’s Might, though.
When people write about thin-skinned entitlement, it’s not a lot of them to the Left’s stereotyping, but it fits the image of these (adult) poster children. They cynically presented a deliberate misreading of satire as news. “There’s your problem right there,” being elders who are liars. What is the expected response from a younger man?
In another instance, a prior Christian man with an explicit hatred of atheists stalked me to my home, on the bus, kept tabs on me, repeatedly asking where I was going, apparently amongst other Christian community members. Again, what is the expected response from a younger man?
This is intimidation, harassment, and stalking, and doxxing. All of them my elders. I have and will continue to show more Christian charity and compassion than these cowards ever have to me by not mentioning their names in print again, because it’s too embarrassing. If they are married, then it’s a gift to their families.
I am not alone in this experience or sentiment, as per the woman harangued in the midst of a timid dissenting community opinion.
Regardless, these symbolic combats continue. One over the last several years has centered around something as simple as a crosswalk. On the crossroads of Mary & Glover (center of town business core), a rainbow crosswalk was placed down in 2017. Within days, it was marked by vehicle burnouts.
There were province-wide patterns of rainbow-crosswalk vandalization noted in 2018 in multiple B.C. communities, e.g., Courtenay, Salmon Arm.
A ghost walk (local historical superstition-history tour) in 2023 noted a truck doing extended burnouts on the crosswalk. Because why not? There was an RCMP investigation and local coverage of that 2023 vandalism.
In 2025, Township of Langley Councillor Tim Baillie—apparently out of nowhere—floated the idea of replacing the Fort Langley Pride crosswalk with “heritage” art, while moving the rainbow crosswalk to somewhere like Township Hall. He pulled the motion from the agenda amid backlash.
On the same day, the Langley Pride Society issued a statement. They were disappointed by the proposal and asked for consultation. They directed people to a survey on the crosswalk and its future.
The British Columbia General Employees’ Union issued a statement. They urged the council to keep focus on hate-motivated vandalism.
Local news identified the late-added motion, its withdrawal, and partial and limited community mobilization. It was quietly scrapped. As of July 2025 the crosswalk remained at Mary & Glover, apparently, there will be consultation with the LPS before any change.
It may flare up, once more.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/15
In this dialogue, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore how Information Cosmology (IC) diverges from the Big Bang model. IC rejects the concept of heat death, arguing that as the universe expands, it would require ever-increasing information to define matter precisely—a paradox that breaks conservation of information. Instead, IC predicts an eventual contraction after vast time scales, with cosmic structures gradually fading as information coherence weakens. The framework posits a universe that behaves like an immense computational system with finite capacity, maintaining equilibrium over immense epochs rather than expanding endlessly toward entropy.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the key concepts where IC differs from standard Big Bang cosmology frameworks—especially as the universe evolves? For instance, in standard cosmology, the universe ends in heat death.
Rick Rosner: In standard cosmology, heat death is the leading expectation if accelerated expansion persists. In IC, that’s not going to happen because it contradicts the IC idea that the scale of space and the amount of matter are proportional to the amount of information in the universe.
Heat death assumes the universe keeps expanding forever. As that happens, large-scale distances grow. However, this does not make particles like protons more precisely defined: the Planck scale is fixed by fundamental constants, and bound systems (atoms, protons, solar systems, galaxies) do not partake in the Hubble expansion. So there’s no need for “extra information” to keep a proton defined. IC diverges from standard cosmology for other reasons tied to its information-capacity assumptions. So, under IC, you’re not going to have a heat death like that, whereas under standard cosmology, it remains the likely far-future outcome if acceleration continues.
In IC, the “death” of a universe happens when things collapse out of existence—when stars and galaxies run out of energy. That’s similar to the Big Bang model’s heat death in some ways, but in the IC framework, the universe doesn’t expand forever. It eventually contracts.
In an IC universe, as time goes on, the Hubble redshift keeps increasing only imperceptibly on human timescales (the redshift drift is minimal). The universe becomes increasingly disconnected and fragmented. Parts of the cosmos that once shared a common history lose that connection entirely. That shared history is erased, and the universe, in a sense, flees from itself until nothing is meaningfully connected to anything else. Every stellar body, every particle, ends up alone—until everything eventually winks out.
But the IC universe lives much longer—maybe a quintillion times longer, a gazillion times longer—than a Big Bang universe. The Big Bang model describes a universe that is homogeneous in space: wherever you are, space looks roughly the same.
If you’re standing on a planet orbiting a star in a galaxy and you look out, the number and distances of visible stars will vary depending on whether your system is near the galactic center or toward the outskirts. But overall, if someone were placed in a galaxy similar to ours—Earth being about two-thirds of the way out from the center—they’d see roughly the same thing. Space is homogeneous primarily, with galaxies distributed fairly uniformly, aside from the filaments and clusters.
Time, however, is not homogeneous. You can always tell when you are in a Big Bang universe by the size of the universe itself—it changes moment by moment as expansion continues.
Jacobsen: So there’s an asymmetry between space and time. Space in the IC model exhibits homogeneity, while time shows heterogeneity. Why this asymmetry? Why aren’t they symmetric—or isomorphic in patterning?
Rosner: Because Einstein’s equations don’t allow a stable, matter-filled static universe without special tuning. That bothered him deeply. He wanted a cosmos where everything—stars, planets, all of it—could hang there in equilibrium.
Newton imagined an infinite, static universe, balanced because everything pulled on everything else equally. Even though every mass exerts gravity on every other, he thought the pull from distant matter in all directions would cancel out locally, keeping the universe stable.
But Einstein realized that if space itself participates in gravity—if spacetime curves and responds to mass-energy—then that balance can’t hold generically. His equations show that a universe filled with matter must be dynamical—expanding or contracting. It can’t just sit still in a stable way.
So he introduced the cosmological constant, a fudge factor to hold the universe in place—a kind of cosmic anti-gravity term. Later, when Hubble discovered the expansion of the universe, Einstein called that constant his “biggest blunder.” Ironically, modern cosmology revived it under a new name: dark energy.
So, why is the universe observed to be expanding? Because there’s observational evidence that it is—and because, for realistic contents, Einstein’s equations naturally yield dynamical solutions (expanding or contracting), with ours observed to be in expansion.
Under IC, the universe is locally homogeneous. In other words, any large region looks spatially uniform, much as it does in standard cosmology. But if you go far enough from the bright, active areas—what I call the neighbourhood near t₀—you’ll find something different. It’s temporally homogeneous instead. That means the universe looks roughly the same 10 billion years from now, 100 billion, a trillion years in the future—or a trillion years in the past. The specific galaxies that are lit up may differ, but the scale of space remains about the same in IC’s picture.
If the universe is an information-processing system, then like any such system, it has parameters—a size, a capacity. Our brains are a helpful analogy. They have a finite information capacity. If you were to map the information content of your brain at any given time, there’s an upper limit. When you’re asleep, the amount of processed information is lower; when you’re awake, it rises to near the ceiling. The brain can’t process more than a certain amount, no matter how busy it gets.
Similarly, the universe’s size corresponds to the amount of information it’s processing in the IC view. If the universe is a kind of cosmic computer, its scale is tied to its computational load. That doesn’t fluctuate drastically from one “universal moment” to the next.
Now, imagine the mathematical version of consciousness—the “information space” of our minds. It might expand slowly over the years as we learn and form new neural connections. Children’s brains grow and prune dendrites, refining their mental models of the world, gradually increasing their information capacity.
But moment to moment, thought to thought, that capacity hardly changes. Say you have three thoughts per second—that’s about 10,000 per hour, 120,000 per waking day. The amount of information you add between one thought and the next is negligible.
If the universe functions similarly, and if we’re living inside a “thought” that takes, say, 20 billion years to unfold, then the universe’s size stays nearly constant from one cosmic “thought” to the next in IC. If each thought lasts 20 billion years and there are 100 of them, that’s two trillion years of relative stability. If there are 100,000 such thought-cycles, you get roughly two quadrillion years where the universe remains almost the same size.
Jacobsen: So, will the eventual mathematical framework for this philosophy of physics be clean or messy?
Rosner: Reasonably clean. At some point, someone will formalize the principles that define what counts as information in the universe’s processing. It’ll be expressible in equations.
Jacobsen: Will those equations fully capture what’s happening?
Rosner: Some will describe things precisely, but most will be approximations—like the thermodynamic equations we already use. Thermodynamics works because it compresses vast statistical behaviour into neat formulas. When you have enough molecules interacting, individual noise becomes insignificant compared to the overall trends.
Thermodynamic equations describe much chaotic activity that gets smoothed out by sheer numbers—so many molecules interacting that the randomness averages into order.
Every physics equation is probably an approximation. Some capture systems with less chaos offer more precision than others. But there will eventually be equations and physical models that describe what information is and how it behaves. Some aspects of that might barely be describable.
Rosner: As the universe expands, the Planck scale itself does not shift, and protons do not become “fuzzier” due to expansion; bound structures are unaffected by the Hubble flow. If you talk about “informational fidelity” in IC, it would have to be defined in terms other than a changing Planck scale—for example, via an information density or capacity notion.
Jacobsen: So the fidelity of the universe’s informational content is not proportional to a changing Planck scale (which is fixed); the question is whether there’s some other criterion at which the informational structure needed for well-defined spacetime fails. At what point would loss of information become so severe that spacetime itself—this higher-order structure—could no longer remain well-defined?
Rosner: That’s probably a question for tomorrow; the heater just came on, and I’m losing focus. But I think I get what you’re asking—at what point does matter become so diffuse, so fuzzy, that humans couldn’t exist?
Jacobsen: Not just humans, but any organized spacetime structure. Humans would disappear long before spacetime itself collapses.
Rosner: You could imagine a universe with only a hundred particles—maybe fifty. Humans, or anything like us, require a universe with at least around 10⁶⁰ to 10⁷⁰ particles—this is speculative, not a standard threshold. Somewhere around that 10⁶⁰ range, the structure of spacetime might become too coarse to support stable, complex systems. 10⁷⁰ might be the lower limit for a universe capable of sustaining human-like intelligence. That would be a cosmos with about one quadrillionth the matter of our current universe. Could conscious, intelligent beings with brains as complex as ours exist in a universe that small? Maybe. Hard to say. That’s one for further thought.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/15
October 7, 2023, fits a continuum of violence against Jews across millennia. From ancient deportations (Assyria, Babylon) to the Roman destruction of Jerusalem and the Bar Kokhba revolt, medieval pogroms, expulsions from England, France, Spain, and Portugal, the Mawza Exile, Khmelnytsky massacres, and Russian-imperial pogroms, persecution recurred, culminating in the Nazi genocide of six million. After 1945, assaults continued: the Farhud in Baghdad, Kielce, waves of expulsions across the Middle East and North Africa, Suez-era crackdowns, and Poland’s 1968 campaign. On October 7, militants murdered about 1,200, wounded thousands, and took hundreds hostage. Rising antisemitic rhetoric historically foreshadows rising violence.
October 7, 2023, was another in a long line of tragedies befalling Jewish peoples throughout world history.
Starting, at least, in 722 BCE, there was the Assyrian deportation, or the Northern Kingdom of Israel. Sargon II’s inscriptions indicate 27,290 deportees from Samaria. Over 100 years later, in 597–586 BCE, there was the Babylonian exile (Kingdom of Judah) with biblical records indicating about 4,600 deportees in three separate waves of likely only adult males; the total displaced may indicate higher.
70 CE was the siege and fall of Jerusalem. Josephus claims 1.1 million dead while modern scholars consider tens of thousands killed more reasonable and approximately 97,000 enslaved. 132–135 CE saw the Bar Kokhba Revolt. About 580,000 Jewish war dead with devastation, expulsion, and more.
1096 saw the First Crusade’s Rhineland massacres with about 2,000 Jews killed. 1348–1351 had Black Death spread throughout Europe and then the subsequent mass pogroms affect Jewish peoples across Europe. A distinct one was in 1349 in Strasbourg with approximately 900 Jews being burned (some accounts cite higher). The continental totals for this three-year period are unknown.
In 1290, a Jewish community in England was expelled with scholarly estimates of around 3,000 affected by the expulsion. In 1306, King Philip IV expelled about 100,000 Jews. In Spain in 1492, between approximately 40,000 and 160,000 were expelled and tens of thousands were converted, while precise estimates can vary by historian.
In 1497, Portugal saw a widespread series of forced conversions of Jews followed by the Lisbon massacre in 1506 with between 1,900 and 4,000 Jews killed. In 1679, Yemen produced the Mawzaʿ Exile where Jewish communities were expelled to Tihāmah. There was mass displacement and deaths en route. Precise counts are scarce.
Between 1648 and 1649, there were the Khmelnytsky (Chmielnicki) massacres in Ukraine, Poland, and Lithuania. The estimates from contemporary scholarship emphasize between 20,000 and 40,000 killed in addition to catastrophic losses and the destruction of community.
1881 to 1906 saw pogroms from the Russian Empire with the 1903 Kishinev massacre killing 45–49 and wounding about 600 Jews. The definitive peak of the murders were the National Socialists under Adolf Hitler of Germany with approximately 6,000,000 Jewish children, women, and men murdered. There is ongoing name-by-name documentation. Approximately 4,900,000 have been named.
There is a misunderstanding of 20th century history. That being, the Holocaust happened and then there was non-violent treatment of Jewish peoples until the massacre of October 7th, 2023, occurred. This is false.
Between June 1 to June 2, 1941, in Baghdad, Iraq, approximately 135–189 Jews were killed and then about 1,000 injured. On July 4, 1946, in Kielce, Poland, about 42 Jews were murdered. Between the late 1940s and 1970s, from Iran, Iraq, Egypt, Yemen, Libya, Syria, and so on, approximately 850,000 Jews were either expelled or left with accompanying violence and confiscations differing by country.
Between 1951 and 1952, about 120,000 to 130,000 were airlifted in Operation Ezra & Nehemiah. In 1956, in Egypt, amidst the Suez crisis, there were expulsions and arrests. In 1968 in Poland, there was the anti-Zionist campaign with about 13,000 Jews forced to emigrate.
Then the October 7, 2023, massacre happened with tolls approximated at 1,139 dead (about 1,175 initially identified), more than 3,400 wounded, and about 251 to 253 hostages taken. Numbers fluctuate as better data comes into reports. Since the war began, the Israeli government reported 14,583 physically wounded by May 26, 2024, and treated in hospitals since October 7, 2023. Therefore, the numbers are definitively higher.
Antisemitic rhetoric is on the rise. So, antisemitic violent incidents will increase in correlation.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/14
Thomas Gaffney is the Chief Operations Officer of OFA Group (NASDAQ: OFAL), an architectural technology company pioneering AI-driven automation for building code compliance and design review. With a background in product operations and strategic partnerships, Gaffney leads initiatives that help architects, developers, and investors deploy greener, faster, and data-informed projects. Under his leadership, OFA launched its beta AI platform PlanAid in October 2025 following a successful IPO earlier that year. Gaffney frequently engages with media and industry leaders to discuss the convergence of architecture, artificial intelligence, and sustainable innovation in the built environment.
In this conversation with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Gaffney discusses how the company’s AI platform PlanAid is transforming the slow, manual process of building code compliance into a faster, data-driven system. PlanAid reads architectural blueprints, cross-references them with local and national codes, and highlights areas of noncompliance for real-time correction. Gaffney explains how this improves project timelines, reduces costs, and enhances investor returns. He also addresses data governance, black-box AI risks, and the expansion of OFA’s tools, such as QuickBIM, into broader construction applications. The discussion underscores AI’s role in boosting efficiency while maintaining essential human oversight.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today we’re here with Thomas Gaffney, Chief Operations Officer of OFA Group (NASDAQ: OFAL) an architectural practice developing proprietary AI to automate building-code compliance and accelerate design reviews. He argues that AI-led planning can shorten development timelines, reduce material and labour costs, and improve investor ROI modelling across real-estate infrastructure.
In May 2025, OFA raised capital through an IPO on the Nasdaq Capital Market, issuing 3,750,000 ordinary shares at $4.00 per share. In October 2025, the company announced the beta launch of “PlanAid,” an AI application for building-code compliance. Gaffney’s responsibilities span product operations and partnerships, helping architects, developers, and capital markets deploy greener, faster, and data-driven projects at scale. He frequently briefs the media on architecture, AI, and the convergence of technology and design. How does AI close the gap in code compliance and approvals?
Thomas Gaffney: The main factor here is time. At OFA, AI creates efficiencies and we believe AI-enabled tools will help people work more efficiently and effectively.
In terms of code compliance, one of the most time-consuming aspects of obtaining permits and approvals for a building design is ensuring that it meets code requirements. Our AI tool enables architects to input drawings—such as a 26-story hotel—and read the relevant codes from state and local jurisdictions, including fire codes. It then informs the architect or the code-compliance office about areas of non-compliance, areas of compliance, and areas where it’s not applicable. (OFA publicly describes this capability as part of its PlanAid initiative.)
That process is currently done manually and is very time-consuming. We aim to expedite it significantly—first, by allowing architects to identify areas of noncompliance before submission, and second, by enabling code-compliance officers to quickly pinpoint potential issues or confirm that the plans meet standards.
Jacobsen: Are there particular states where compliance codes, from state down to county, are incredibly stringent, and others where they’re more relaxed, where the program might encounter difficulties?
Gaffney: When it comes to safety, most standards are national. The most significant technical challenge we encountered was training the computer to interpret the lines in architectural drawings.
Interpreting the code itself isn’t that difficult, because large language models are quite effective at interpreting rules, which is essentially what code compliance is, and then applying those rules to a given object. In our case, that object is a blueprint drawn by an architect, in which there are lines, measurements, and distances everywhere.
=From a layperson’s perspective, it can be confusing with an overwhelming amount of information. The most challenging aspect for the computer was accurately interpreting those lines. Understanding the rules isn’t hard; understanding the geometry is.
Now that we’ve solved that, and the machine can accurately read the blueprint itself, applying the relevant code has become a much more straightforward process.
Jacobsen: Two questions from that. One common problem in large language models is a phenomenon known as hallucinations. Although the rates of hallucinations, since this was pointed out a couple of years ago, have been dropping, sometimes by a factor of 10 every several months. Is that a problem when interpreting compliance codes, where you have to have everything 100 percent correct? Additionally, about AI, despite its potential, what are the key cost drivers? What are the main cost savings from using AI?
Gaffney: I’ll go back to my original point on code compliance: efficiency. You’re still going to have an architect who’s trained, who’s been doing this for a long time, drawing and creating designs. You’ll also have someone in the building code compliance office reviewing those designs.
As for hallucinations, that’s where review becomes essential. It’s about helping to speed up the process. The way we’ve designed it, the system flags results: this code is good, this one is not, this one needs review.
You still have to use your professional skills. For instance, an attorney using a large language model to draft a document may obtain a fabricated case citation. They still have to check that. For example, if the model produces 900 items, you can leverage these as a starting point, but you still have to verify the citations. The same principle applies here. The AI lays out the relevant code compliance rules, the timelines, and the measurements.
For instance, take the distance between an office and an exit in a commercial building. The AI draws a direct line, notes the measured distance, and generates a box identifying the relevant code section. It shows the number in the schematic and the drawing key. The user can instantly cross-reference that with the actual code. It’s easy to double-check whether the computer’s interpretation is accurate.
To your second point, the cost savings come from time and speed. Code compliance reviews typically require three to four rounds of revisions. We aim to reduce that to one or two, thereby saving architects time up front. The longer it takes to get a building permit, the longer it takes to start construction, meaning investors wait longer for returns: no leases, no rent, no revenue. The faster the permit is approved, the quicker the building can be completed and begin operations.
Jacobsen: How will PlanAid integrate with existing workflows without introducing black-box risk for lenders and municipalities?
Gaffney: For integration, PlanAid will eventually allow you to upload designs directly into the platform. If there’s a code out of compliance for a specific room, you can adjust it manually within the platform, eliminating the need to switch to another program, recalibrate, and re-upload the file. You’ll be able to make real-time integrations and adjustments directly within the system. That saves a significant amount of time and eliminates redundant steps.
Jacobsen: Outside of architecture, what sectors will the platform touch — urban planning, private equity, portfolio construction, real estate?
Gaffney: That’s part of our long-term vision. We’re currently focused on the architectural vertical, as it’s our area of expertise. But we do plan to expand. We’re also developing another product called QuickBIM. It helps generate the schematics for electrical, mechanical, and structural engineering, as well as plumbing systems. Over time, we aim to scale our tool into broader construction applications, but it is currently purpose-built for architectural design and planning.
Jacobsen: What data governance ensures training sets stay compliant with local codes while preserving intellectual property and avoiding bias across jurisdictions?
Gaffney: The risk there is minimal because this tool isn’t designed for creative output or generative modelling. It’s not producing new intellectual property; instead, it involves interpreting public building codes from local jurisdictions and applying them to existing designs. It doesn’t generate original creative content, it validates compliance. So, IP or bias issues are mitigated mainly in this case.
Jacobsen: What’s the timeline for pilot accuracy and scaling up to municipal acceptance at large?
Gaffney: We’ve recently launched our beta platform and test cases with several architectural partners. Depending on the performance of these trials, we plan to scale rapidly.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts based on our conversation today?
Gaffney: We believe that AI will be a significant driver of overall economic growth. The faster and more efficiently things are completed, the more room people have to create new value. The quicker projects move, the cheaper they become, and the more resources can be allocated elsewhere. AI will still need a human touch, but it’s going to enhance productivity across many industries, not just architecture.
Jacobsen: Thomas, thank you for your time today. It’s nice to meet you.
Gaffney: Thank you very much.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/14
In this philosophical-scientific exchange, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore whether the universe distinguishes between matter and meaningful information. Their conversation moves from the cognitive processing of text to cosmological entropy, the “heat death” scenario, and whether civilization-generated order could influence universal information flow. Rosner suggests that while entropy increases globally, local systems—like planets and minds—can grow in order and information. Jacobsen draws analogies between human learning and cosmic evolution, proposing that advanced civilizations might sustain galactic order, potentially integrating themselves into the universe’s informational architecture.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let us do some math. These require more improvisation, creativity, and visualization. You have a subjectivity in the universe. The universe is doing its regular informational business on the surface of a sphere—something spherical. These organisms evolve as a part of the Earth, a satellite. A sphere and a satellite evolve. They gain a little awareness. They start thinking: if they are built like us and have had a cultural system evolve like ours, they chop down whatever their foliage is, they print ink or some equivalent on it, and you end up with dead matter preserved with some agent to make it last centuries. However, it has visual scribbles on it, and they can process that as information.
What makes that organization of matter in a book somehow actionable information in the universe? Moreover, does the universe make any distinction between that? We examine it, and there is a perceptual decoding process for us. However, from the universe’s perspective, there is no real difference, except that the contents of the mind are being reorganized in a more structured way between percepts and the formation of textually informed concepts in the mind based on the base percepts.
Rick Rosner: So a normally operating universe would likely have an increase of total information, at least some of the time—maybe even most of the time.
The universe would also experience an increase in order, and these phenomena are interconnected. However, a Big Bang universe experiences an increase in entropy and a decrease in order over its life cycle, provided it does not collapse and continues to expand. It is called the “heat death” of the universe. Eventually, the universe, as an endlessly expanding Big Bang universe with a constant amount of matter (more or less), loses energy.
It burns up all its fuel, and once the fuel is gone, there are no more hot spots. The universe eventually becomes increasingly uniform in temperature—not a high temperature, but an increasingly even one. That means there are no temperature differentials that can be used to do work.
The heat death of the universe—that is, a loss of usable energy, but not necessarily of total information. If you can dump off waste heat, an expanding Big Bang universe can still be considered a closed system thermodynamically. But an inflationary-cosmology universe has places to dump waste energy—
Jacobsen: You mean, like photons that escape local conditions?
Rosner: Exactly. Photons escape local conditions, which is almost all of them—and eventually, it is all of them. Even if a photon is captured, that heats the planet that absorbed it, and that planet eventually emits almost the same amount of energy as heat. So, essentially, everything turns into long-distance photons.
Those photons lose energy over long distances, and that energy is converted into order—into the structure of space itself—and that process is negentropic (meaning it locally resists entropy).
Jacobsen: I will interrupt you on a micro note—you are on my screen as “Carole Rosner.” That is a different kind of information. It is doing actual decoding rather than the more direct processing used for, say, seeing the colour of your couch. Planets with civilizations on them are a local blip of high order. Our planet gets more ordered—accumulates more information—every second.
Rosner: This information is meaningful in a local context, but probably not in the context of the overall universe. There is some implicit information, but the universe does not have access to it. If the universe is a massive information processor, it is far too big to be aware of the goings-on of individual planets.
Now, if the universe—as an information processor—is an incredibly sophisticated and knowledgeable thing, then it can look at the size of its information space, the amount of information it must hold, and it can correctly assume that there is enough matter within that informational map of itself for life and civilizations to originate.
If we ever have a mathematization of consciousness—and I think we will—we will be able to examine the number of informational units in our brains and minds, and make reasonable assumptions about how many building blocks are available to evolve in some way, and what that evolution might look like. It certainly would not resemble life on planets in our universe, because we have, I do not know, 10⁷⁰ times fewer information units than the universe itself. It is a reasonable guess.
That does not give us the same scale the universe has for life to originate, but something could originate even in an information space as small as those in our brains. We would not know what that something is or the specifics. The same goes for events on planets with civilizations, pre-civilizations, or even spacefaring civilizations.
They are not notable within the total information the universe “knows” about itself—we are too small. However, that does not preclude long-lasting civilizations from becoming big enough and powerful enough to interfere with enough matter in the universe to become part of the noticeable order of the universe, possibly.
We know that the universe generally increases in order, in the same way our mental spaces increase in order over the span of our lives—until they start decaying. The more we learn, the more connections we make.
Given a healthy brain and body, we do most of our accumulation of order—our building of an internal model of the world—during our younger years. The net amount of information in our brains, if you count dendrites and neurons, might stay relatively stable for about 30 years in adulthood. However, it is possible that we still have an increasing amount of information as we learn to encode what we know more efficiently. I am not sure, but it is easy to imagine.
Our brains increase in order. It is easy to imagine, by analogy, that the universe also increases in order. That raises the question: if you have long-lasting enough civilizations that can manipulate matter, do the activities of those civilizations—when they are old and powerful enough—become part of the noticeable order of the universe? Do they become part of the information that the universe, in some sense, “registers”?
For instance, the Informational Cosmology model posits that galaxies can exhaust their gas and become dark, only to be reignited through the universe’s associative network of matter.
If you direct enough energy along galactic filaments, you could theoretically reignite these galaxies—turn them “on”again. It is conceivable that a billion-year-old civilization could harness and exploit such processes, perhaps to maintain activity in their region of space or prevent local collapse.
If a civilization does not want to be part of the decay that happens when a galaxy runs out of energy, maybe they can “goose” galaxies back into activity. If so, they may become part of the universe’s usable information-processing structure. I do not know, but it is not unreasonable to ask.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/13
In this thought-provoking exchange, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore whether the universe could suddenly vanish—an instantaneous obliteration consistent with certain relativistic and quantum-mechanical models. Rosner compares such an event to the physical annihilation of information in a brain destroyed in milliseconds, extending the metaphor to cosmic scales. The conversation delves into the idea of localized collapses, reversals of time, and Frank Tipler’s controversial “resurrection” cosmology. It concludes with speculation on whether photons can fade into nonexistence through infinite redshift, raising questions about how the universe tracks—or forgets—its most fundamental information.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Could the universe wink out of existence instantaneously, or is there too much internal consistency for that to happen?
Rick Rosner: No, it could. There are solutions to relativistic equations and quantum-mechanical systems that describe what an obliteration of the universe would look like—the destruction of structure and correlations (an apparent, not fundamental, loss of information).
I’ve thought about it. One way to imagine it would be everything in the universe changing as if flying apart at nearly the speed of light as a vacuum-decay bubble expanded (altering local physics). I don’t know if you can express that exactly in an equation, but it’s a way to picture it.
Our consciousness is an information-processing system. Imagine if your head were hit by a cannonball traveling at 1,200 feet per second—it would end your conscious experience in a few thousandths of a second.
They were physically obliterated in milliseconds, perhaps even less than a millisecond. They might have had a last fragment of thought, and then that was it. Their brain’s ability to hold any information was obliterated along with the brain itself. There’s probably a way to describe that physically.
I imagine it would look like everything in the universe suddenly rushing away from everything else at the speed of light—nothing able to connect to anything else. From every point of view, at every location, everything would just vanish.
Jacobsen: Could there be a localized collapse—where part of the universe becomes inconsistent and just ceases to exist?
Rosner: Maybe. It’s helpful to think about it in terms of what can happen to your brain. People with Alzheimer’s lose information rapidly compared to healthy individuals. They lose it over years—two, three, eight, fifteen—and we can describe that in physical terms, as the degradation of neural structures and informational coherence.
In the novel I’m writing, there’s a character who survives a school shooting. A .22-caliber bullet blasts away part of her brain. She survives, but she’s left in a twilight state of consciousness—half-aware, half-absent. Eventually, she’s restored artificially. You could describe that, too, in the language of physics—as an interruption and later reconstruction of information processing.
Jacobsen: What if there were a partial collapse of the universe, or a kind of local inconsistency—something that reverses itself? Portions of the universe suddenly enter a reverse-consistent state, where the arrow of time seems to run backward.
Rosner: I don’t really buy that. That’s more of a Frank Tipler idea. Tipler’s the physicist who proposed that, eventually, we’ll all be resurrected because the universe will stop expanding once it runs out of kinetic energy, then start contracting again. As it collapses, the redshift would become a blueshift, and everything would run backward—so, in theory, we’d live our lives again in reverse.
It’s like resurrection, except not really, because we wouldn’t have consciousness of it. Tipler is a Christian, and this feels like an attempt to merge faith with physics. But no, I don’t think that’s how the universe loses information. The arrow of time keeps going in the same direction.
When you look out at the universe, it doesn’t look like it’s 13.8 billion years old anymore. After about 30 billion years, it might look more like it’s only what remains within our observable look-back window—like it’s being nibbled away at the edges. That would appear as an increase in recessional velocity—the cosmological (Hubble) redshift.
If you could turn a dial and adjust the Hubble constant (purely hypothetically), you could increase that apparent expansion rate—the relative velocity per 100 million light-years. Doing so would push distant galaxies past the point of visibility.
By doing that, you’d effectively decrease the observable window of the universe, even though time would still move forward. The arrow of time would continue to function, but the universe’s ability to hold information accessibly within our horizon would diminish.
Jacobsen: In an informational cosmology sense, is there a lowest possible wave for a photon—a least energetic photon you can make before it stops being meaningfully “there”? A photon that’s so weak it ceases to exist in any practical way.
Rosner: I don’t think there’s a theoretical minimum. If you had a ten-trillion-year-old universe—or even a quadrillion-year-old one—and a photon that never hit anything, it would just keep traveling, redshifting, losing energy, stretching across spacetime.
What happens to it then? I don’t know. The universe seems to keep track of particles with mass, but can it entirely lose track of a photon? I’m not sure.
Jacobsen: Do photons disappear beyond our cosmic event horizon when they’ve traveled so long and become so redshifted that they can no longer interact with anything?
Rosner: Maybe. If there’s no record of a photon—no interaction, no trace—then it effectively doesn’t exist. There are countless “implicate” photons produced by the processes of the universe.
Many of them travel so far, for so long, that they become virtually undetectable, existing only in an implicate sense, not as individual photons. On the other hand, under certain speculative cyclic models, a photon could traverse all the way back into a more compact, collapsed universe than our own—perhaps regaining some energy in the process, enough to have an aggregate effect.
I’m not sure, because on one hand, a photon’s energy is reduced by cosmic expansion (cosmological redshift), while the overall curvature of space evolves as energy density decreases. But if a photon enters a region of higher gravitational curvature, its energy is gravitationally blueshifted.
That would look like gravitational acceleration. A photon always travels at the speed of light, but when it moves into a stronger gravitational field, its frequency increases—it gains energy in that local frame. Maybe something like that happens when photons reach regions of extreme curvature near compact objects .
In the aggregate, could they have enough energy—especially if concentrated along galactic filaments—to reignite star formation?
Or maybe it’s the energy lost to curvature that actually changes the geometry of spacetime, allowing structure to evolve. That seems more reasonable: as energy density redistributes, curvature relaxes, and new regions of matter can form stars again through gravitational collapse.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/11
Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner examine Information Cosmology (IC) as an alternative lens on gravity, time, and dimensionality. IC treats the universe as an information processor: no true event horizons, no infinite-density singularities—only quantum limits on compressibility and information flow. Time slows near collapsed matter yet remains dynamic at the center. Extra dimensions are informationally expensive, so reality stabilizes to three after early fuzzy epochs. Redshift reflects informational segregation; correlated histories cluster locally. Photons exemplify dimensionless behavior until interactions set geometry. A universal clock emerges from global information updates, roughly aligning subjective brain time with overall objective cosmic ticks.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We have not talked about this part of the series in a few years. Not black holes, but “blackish holes.” When matter collapses, time slows near the outskirts, not at the active center. The active center remains dynamic—there is still time there. Collapsed matter causes a slowing of time compared to the more active areas of the universe, where time flows more as we experience it. Under IC—Information Cosmology—does that model envision time differently than general or special relativity does, especially in the context of collapsed or inflated matter?
Rick Rosner: Yes. Under IC, which is all about the flow of information, maybe I am entirely wrong, but there can still be information moving in and out. There are no true event horizons in IC—or at least that is my understanding. However, I could be totally mistaken about that.
You get weird time effects around event horizons, but under IC—Information Cosmology—there are no true singularities. There is a limit to how much matter can be compressed within an intense gravitational field.
You can only squeeze material down until there is no information left to extract. That is still incredibly dense, but not infinitely so. In general relativity, a black hole’s density theoretically goes to infinity—a true singularity. In IC, there is a quantum limit. Quantum fuzziness around what would otherwise be a singularity prevents infinite compression. The gravitational field can still be enormously strong, but not limitless.
General relativity works beautifully in most situations, even most cosmological ones, just as Newtonian gravity works fine for everyday mechanics. However, IC suggests boundaries where general relativity starts to break down—specifically around extreme densities and information limits.
I suspect there might be efficiencies to exploit near the massive black hole at the center of galaxies. The scale of space and the rate of time there might make computation more efficient—perhaps faster or denser processing near that gravitational environment. However, that is speculative.
Jacobsen: Is the topology of IC substantially different from current models?
Rosner: Maybe. I have not studied it deeply, but I have been reading about high-dimensional data in fields like epigenetics. Sometimes, your dataset can occupy a space with twenty thousand dimensions—an information space so complex it is almost useless until you apply dimensionality reduction techniques.
IC, if it is good, should explain why we experience only three spatial dimensions. The short answer: extra dimensions are informationally expensive. It costs too much to sustain them. So, reality economizes on information, reducing everything to three spatial dimensions.
The additional dimensions—if they exist—could be encoded within the forces and interactions among particles, wrapped up in the tensions between gravitational, electromagnetic, and other quantum fields. By “particles,” I mean the basic systems of protons, electrons, and neutrons that make up our universe.
You boil everything down. Anything that does not reduce ideally to three dimensions shows up as stress—distortions in particles and in space itself.
Those stresses take the form of electromagnetism and gravitation.
Moreover, there is another thing. The universe is segregated based on the information variables it shares in common. In the standard Big Bang model, as confirmed by observation, the farther away a galaxy is, the more redshifted it appears—the faster it seems to be moving away from us.
That redshift is informational. You are living in a universe where systems that share your information—your history—are local to you. Systems less correlated with your information, with less shared history, appear redshifted and distant.
That is an efficient way to compress complexity and reduce dimensionality. The universe stays three-dimensional, but each part of that three-dimensional structure consists of local neighbourhoods—clusters of information that share history. It is how you can manage enormous informational density by partitioning it into correlated regions.
Not to say segregation is good when it comes to people, but when it comes to the structure of the universe, yeah.
Heaven forbid I use the word “segregation.”
Jacobsen: In an IC universe—since spacetime is emergent—there should be an early period when the dimensions have not fully stabilized. As the system evolves, it settles into a stable configuration through the dynamics of information. Within that, could there be fuzzy dimensions—regions where the geometry is not yet well-defined?
Rosner: Kind of, but it does not take much information, matter, or space for the system to settle into three dimensions. A universe with a single fuzzy particle has no defined dimensionality. However, if you have eight particles, that might be enough for it to act roughly three-dimensional most of the time. If you had 150 particles, that should be more than enough for a consistent three-dimensional structure.
Our universe has on the order of 10⁸⁵ particles, so its three-dimensionality is deeply established. It is only in a highly early or tiny universe that dimensionality might flicker—sometimes defined, sometimes not.
You could argue that individual particles—particularly photons—do not really have dimensions. Photons do not experience time because they travel at the speed of light, and they do not experience space because, at that speed, spatial dimensions contract to zero from their reference frame.
So, some particles do not have any fixed dimensionality. It is only through their interactions that dimensionality becomes established.
Jacobsen: How do you fit subjective senses of time within objective time? Informationally.
Rosner: We live in a world with its own clock, but that clock does not tick at the same rate everywhere. Under IC, there is still a kind of overall clock. If the universe is an information processor—a system modelling itself—then it must have a temporal framework governing those operations.
Our minds are subjective experiences of our brains, and our brains are physical systems modelling the world in real time. That means our brains have internal clocks synchronized, at least broadly, to the forward flow of time in the external world.
By analogy, the universe itself can be viewed as a vast processor where events—moments of information exchange or awareness—constitute its “ticks.” These universal events might span billions of years. So, local variations in time—slower here, faster there—do not necessarily affect the overall “clock speed” of what the universe is doing on its grand informational scale.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/11
In Fumfer Physics, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore the physics of gravitational wells, rotational asymmetry, and the nature of galactic filaments. They discuss how irregularly rotating massive objects emit gravitational waves—steady hums or periodic pulses—and how galaxies align along cosmic filaments forming the universe’s vast web. Rosner draws a bold analogy between these cosmic structures and the human brain’s associative networks: both systems light up, store, and transmit information. Their dialogue connects astrophysics, consciousness, and cosmic evolution, suggesting that the universe itself might operate through mechanisms of activation, dormancy, and renewal across billions of years.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We’re already at Fumfer Physics episode 19, which shows how slow progress adds up. Those slow drips can take you all the way to the United Nations in Geneva and New York City and even land you an interview with a prime minister or two.
What’s the mathematical difference between a large-scale object with massive gravitational pull—something that creates a deep gravitational well that everything falls toward—and an object that rotates with a small asymmetry, giving off nearly continuous gravitational waves?
So, a kind of steady gravitational hum versus a burst-like or transient one.
Rick Rosner: Either something is collapsing bit by bit—like a dying star collapsing under its own gravity—or it’s maintaining residual rotational energy.
That could come from infalling matter or from the conservation of angular momentum: as the object gets smaller, it spins faster.
Parts of it could be reaching different thresholds of gravitational pressure at different times. When there’s enough pressure, electrons and protons combine into neutrons, creating degenerate neutron matter. That might not happen uniformly; maybe it happens in bursts, though that doesn’t sound perfectly periodic.
Maybe when it collapses, it releases a burst of energy that causes it to expand before collapsing again—a kind of stellar pulsation cycle.
In practice, core-collapse shows brief, non-periodic oscillations and shock stalls over milliseconds to seconds rather than long, repeating collapse–re-expand cycles; treat the “pulsation” idea as a working hypothesis.
When gravitational collapse releases energy, that energy—often in the form of heat, neutrinos, or radiation—could temporarily expand part of the star before gravity takes over again. It could sputter like that, cycling through bursts of collapse and release. That’s a working hypothesis; I haven’t read the latest on it.
Jacobsen: Is it like a spinning top near the end of its cycle?
Rosner: No, not really. But I could look it up and have an actual answer next time.
Jacobsen: There seems to be something strange about galactic filaments. You get these long, thread-like structures—almost strings of galaxies. Observations report statistical trends where the spin axes of quasars or galaxies sometimes show large-scale alignment tendencies.
Rosner: What do you mean by their axes? The spin axes of quasars or galaxies—or, more precisely, the rotational axes of the supermassive black holes at their centers. The gas and dust orbiting those black holes—forming accretion disks—tend to align along similar planes. Locally, such alignments can occur with the surrounding tidal field; across very large scales there are hints but not universal rules. So you’re saying the orbital planes of those disks appear correlated across large regions of space?
Jacobsen: Those orbital planes seem statistically correlated within our local region of the cosmic web. A filament is essentially a chain of galaxies—not a loose, constellated cluster, but a connected thread. If an object gets pulled into part of that chain, it tends to remain within it. Statistically, something moving along that general direction would likely continue to follow the filament rather than drift away because of the continuous gravitational potential along the chain—the “chain wells.” Some would still get caught or spun off, but most would stay.
Rosner: My naive hypothesis is that these galactic filaments are part of what you could call the associative network of the universe. In a metaphorical sense, they function like neural connections—routes through which the cosmos organizes or channels matter and energy.
The reactivation of quenched or dormant galaxies could, in principle, occur along these filaments—gas and matter flowing through them can “light up” previously inactive regions, though rejuvenation appears relatively uncommon and depends on conditions—briefly triggering new star formation. They would brighten again and rejoin the active network of the universe. It might even be part of a cosmic mechanism of recycling or renewal. That’s where I see an analogy to how our brains are wired for association.
The brain consists of an immense web of roughly 10¹¹ neurons, each with thousands of dendrites and axons connecting to others. It’s all wiring, essentially. Electrical impulses travel along those connections, assisted by neurotransmitters—dopamine, serotonin, acetylcholine, and others—that facilitate communication between neurons.
When certain groups of neurons fire together, they trigger related groups, lighting up patterns across the brain. Those patterns form the basis of thought and awareness. The brain operates combinatorially—each thought or memory arises from a unique, though not perfectly precise, pattern of activation.
When those associative patterns light up, you might suddenly think of an apple, or your second-grade teacher, or abstract ideas like fairness or justice. The underlying neural patterns encode meaning through association, not exact repetition.
The ingredients of thought and awareness rely on things lighting up—neurons firing in patterns. Similarly, I believe the universe has ways to make things light up and ways for them to stop glowing. When something “lights up” cosmically, it can stay active for billions of years.
A galaxy, for instance, might remain luminous for—what?—many billion years on average. That’s a rough estimate. Main-sequence stars, the most common type, can last from a few billion years up to trillions for the smallest red dwarfs, but of course, not all stars in a galaxy ignite simultaneously. Star formation is staggered across immense timescales—perhaps tens of billions of years for the full sequence of stellar birth and death within a galaxy.
So, a galaxy could remain luminous over roughly that range, with wide diversity across masses and environments—“~10 billion years” is an order-of-magnitude picture rather than a rule—with its total star-formation activity declining as its gas supply depletes. There’s likely a typical luminous lifespan of about ten billion years for active star-forming galaxies before they fade into quiescence.
So, roughly from the time a galaxy first lights up until it fades back to a fraction of that brightness—say, five percent of its peak—you’d count that as its active lifetime.
When a galaxy stops forming stars, it loses some of its radiance—it doesn’t collapse, but its stellar populations age and redden. Many of its internal orbital orientations, the angular momentum of its matter, are preserved. It doesn’t simply collapse into a collection of black holes. Instead, its stellar remnants and dark matter halos continue orbiting, maintaining structure even though the galaxy is no longer actively forming stars.
Those galaxies still contain information—mass distributions, momentum, chemical traces—but that information isn’t being exchanged dynamically with the rest of the universe anymore. However, if you were to feed such a galaxy new cold gas—rather than energy like photons or neutrinos—it could, in principle, “reawaken.”
If that galaxy sits in a region of the universe that’s more gravitationally dense—closer to a node of the cosmic web—it wouldn’t take much inflow to re-ignite limited star formation. By channeling new gas into a gravitationally bound region, you can briefly rejuvenate it.
Not an enormous amount of matter—well, relatively speaking, it’s still considerable, because you’re fueling a galaxy—but the key is that the galaxy is already structured to react. When you inject new gas, it can cool, collapse, and form stars again, depending on local conditions and feedback.
If you think in terms of association—creating a physical system that can store information in a dormant state and then be reactivated easily—then you’d want a mechanism that allows for that kind of “easy on, easy off” functionality.
One aspect of black hole and galactic physics might involve the same dynamic: energy storage and reactivation. You can, in principle, turn on old galaxies again—feed them new matter that will collapse into stars. The remnants in those galaxies could have their outer layers stripped off in massive, energetic bursts, and that ejected material could then re-coalesce into new stars.
Though on second thought, that might not hold up broadly. A “re-lit” star would likely show distinct, anomalous physical properties—odd elemental ratios, radiation patterns, or instabilities—that astronomers would have noticed by now. So I doubt that happens on a large scale.
But this might apply to the supermassive black holes at the centers of galaxies—the ones with millions or billions of solar masses. Those giants can release enormous amounts of energy, shedding parts of their outer accretion disks and flooding their host galaxies with radiation and energetic particles—protons and electrons—that could, in some cases, compress nearby gas clouds and seed new star formation. Positive AGN feedback of this sort is observed in specific systems, though quenching is more common—so consider it a sometimes-mechanism, not a universal one.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/09
The 2025 Nobel Prize in Physics was awarded to John Clarke, Michel H. Devoret, and John M. Martinis for their pioneering work on macroscopic quantum mechanical tunneling and energy quantization in electrical circuits. Their achievement bridges theory and engineering by revealing quantum behavior in large, engineered systems—once thought confined to atomic scales. This experimental triumph laid groundwork for quantum computing, where maintaining fragile quantum states enables calculations beyond classical limits. Their work embodies the precision and universality of quantum mechanics, a cornerstone of modern physics and technology, reaffirming its supremacy in explaining nature’s smallest and now, surprisingly, larger scales.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: It’s arguably the most controversial Nobel. All right, moving on—the Nobel Prize in Physics for 2025 was awarded jointly to John Clarke, Michel H. Devoret, and John M. Martinis for the discovery of macroscopic quantum mechanical tunneling and energy quantization in electrical circuits. So, basically, large-scale quantum effects. Where does IC fit into this?
Rick Rosner: Not a great start for IC—nowhere special, really. These laureates demonstrated quantum mechanical behavior at a macroscopic scale, meaning they were able to make quantum effects visible in larger, engineered systems. In physics, regardless of the theoretical framework, everything must ultimately incorporate quantum mechanics. It’s one of the most precise, elegant, and experimentally verified theories ever developed.
The two great pillars of physics—quantum mechanics and general relativity—don’t naturally agree. We’ve spent a century trying to unify them, and so far, they remain mathematically incompatible. But if you had to pick the more universally confirmed theory, quantum mechanics wins by sheer volume of experimental validation.
General relativity, which describes the curvature of spacetime and gravity’s effect on matter, is tested in phenomena like gravitational lensing, black holes, and especially GPS systems. A satellite’s onboard clock experiences weaker gravity than a clock on Earth’s surface, so time ticks faster in orbit. GPS accounts for this relativistic time dilation every second—if it didn’t, your phone’s location would drift kilometers off within minutes.
Still, quantum mechanics has been tested with even greater precision. Every semiconductor, laser, and MRI machine relies on it. Any new theory of physics must preserve quantum mechanics or reproduce its predictions—otherwise it’s immediately wrong.
So, what Clarke, Devoret, and Martinis achieved was engineering. They took phenomena that normally vanish into background noise—microscopic quantum fluctuations—and made them observable at the macroscopic level. That’s a stunning experimental feat. It’s the same conceptual ground as quantum computing, where researchers isolate and stabilize “qubits” long enough to perform meaningful computation.
Quantum states are fragile; they tend to collapse into classical states when exposed to heat, light, or vibration—what’s called decoherence. But by building exquisitely precise systems, you can preserve quantum indeterminacy long enough to exploit it for calculations that classical computers would take millennia to complete.
In short: these physicists didn’t just observe quantum weirdness—they built machines that use it. They turned the abstract mathematics of quantum mechanics into tangible engineering. That’s what makes the discovery worthy of a Nobel.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/09
Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner flip their ongoing exploration of an information-based cosmos to ask what IC forbids. Rosner argues that in IC the scale of space, number of objects, total information, and cosmic age must co-scale, ruling out “fuzzy” universes where matter dwarfs information capacity. IC, like mainstream physics, demands self-consistency: macroscopic objects persist independent of viewpoint.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We have talked a lot over the last few years about the possible, or the lines of possible, actualization in reality within an information-based skeletal framework of reality while we have ignored an important inversion of this question relevant to the subject at hand. Not the possible but, what would not be possible under IC?
Rick Rosner: That is a worthwhile question. Under IC, the scale of space, the number of objects in a universe, the total information content, and the age of the universe are all proportional to one another. One scenario that would therefore be ruled out is an extremely “fuzzy” universe at our present scale.
Our universe is said to contain on the order of 10^85 particles—protons, electrons, and likely photons. Imagine a universe with this same number of particles but compressed to one-hundredth of the current diameter, or, equivalently, one in which every particle’s characteristic wavelength is one hundred times larger. Under IC, such a configuration appears impermissible unless some special agency is compressing the universe—say, a global gravitational collapse that has drained its energy and forced contraction. Even then, in a fully developed IC framework, I am not sure that would be allowed.
You cannot have a large disproportion between the amount of matter and the amount of information in the universe; those quantities must remain proportional. Only under specific physical conditions—such as a collapse that lowers the universe’s information capacity—could that proportionality change.
So, quantities that ought to scale together—information, time, and matter—may not diverge under IC. More broadly, this reflects a commitment to self-consistency in physical law. That is true under Big-Bang cosmology and, really, under any physics we can readily imagine: the world is self-consistent.
We do not, for good reason, envision a world where existence is contradictory—where an apple exists when you are two feet away but ceases to exist when you are one foot away and offset by eighty degrees. If something exists, it exists consistently; its existence does not depend on the observer’s vantage point. Objects do not flicker in and out of existence unless one has intentionally engineered a system to produce that effect. Persistence of entities is a baseline assumption—and it holds under IC, as it does under any reasonable physical framework.
That is all I have as well. It was a good question.
Jacobsen: I do not think I have asked it before.
Rosner: Agreed. I will try to think more about it—admittedly I may forget—but I will make an effort.
Jacobsen: And I may forget to ask again; that is also true.
Rosner: All right, I will see you tomorrow.
Jacobsen: Thank you. Thank you as well. Good night.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/08
Gravitational lensing can be read as an informational process: gravity reshapes photon trajectories, encoding maps of mass and curvature into observable distortions, magnifications, and time delays. On galactic and cluster scales, lenses reveal dark matter distributions; on cosmic scales, cumulative lensing and expansion geometry alter apparent sizes and brightnesses across look-back time. Compact objects—black holes, neutron stars, brown dwarfs—add microlensing noise that, in aggregate, conveys counts of nonluminous matter, though single remnants rarely dominate. Observing a younger, smaller universe at greater distances that still spans our sky reflects both curvature and expansion history. In short, warped light is measured information.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Describe to me in detail how gravitational lensing can be seen—on a cosmological scale—as an informational process, particularly in the ways photons are warped so distinctly. How does that fit into the larger picture?
Rick Rosner: I have seen postulates that much of the dark matter may actually be collapsed matter—stars that have burned out and collapsed into neutron stars or even denser remnants. You also have supermassive black holes at the centers of galaxies. Moreover, there are brown dwarfs, although I am not sure they are compact enough to contribute significantly to gravitational lensing.
Under that view, we should see more lensing than the standard Big Bang model predicts. On the other hand, an individual neutron star does not create a massive lensing footprint. If it is in another galaxy, it is not detectable from here—it is simply too small. I have not read enough about what can be seen at those distances.
However, the entire universe itself is lensed by the overall curvature of space-time. We are used to imagining “flat” three-dimensional space. When you look one mile away, everything one mile away forms a sphere with you at the center and a radius of one mile. At two miles, it is a larger sphere, and the surface area you see increases with the square of the distance.
Now, scale that to billions of light-years. At one billion or two billion light-years away, what you are looking at should appear enlarged. In a Big Bang universe, when you observe something two billion light-years away, you’re seeing it as it was two billion years earlier—two billion fewer years of expansion.
So you’re not looking at a sphere that increases at the standard rate. You’re looking at a sphere that’s slightly shrunk compared to the near space around you. But it still occupies the full 360 degrees of your vision. So it appears enlarged.
The objects you’re seeing are part of a smaller version of the universe, because that region hasn’t expanded as much as our local region. But it still surrounds you. The farther back you look, the more this effect increases, until you’re looking at a tiny, early universe that still occupies your whole field of view in every direction.
So this shrunken universe should still appear large. Imagine the big sphere in Las Vegas.
Picture yourself standing inside it, at the center, looking at images projected at different distances. First, they show youthings ten feet away—a living room or bedroom, with walls all around. Then they show you a field, where everything is a hundred feet away, with trees in the distance. Then a thousand feet away—buildings.
A building a hundred feet tall, at that distance, might occupy the exact angle of vision as a chest of drawers did in the first room. Then, when you look all the way back to about a million years after the Big Bang, you’d see a soupy, nebulous universe. But it would still fill your entire 360-degree field of view.
So, for it to occupy your whole field, things would appear enlarged. I don’t know—I haven’t thought through every detail. It might be an effect of lensing, but I’d need to think more about whether that’s accurate or just me talking out of turn.
Still, I expect more small-scale lenses. IC predicts vast numbers of neutron stars and “blackish holes” orbiting farther from galactic centers than the luminous stars. But can we see them? I don’t know.
I don’t know how close a star-sized black hole would need to be for us to detect lensing around it. I assume that the lensing astronomers see across the universe comes from galaxy-scale objects, not individual star remnants. But I’m not sure.
So, the overall idea—looking back into deep time—is that lensing, through gravitation, contributes to the curvature of the universe. And since nothing has a trajectory outside the universe, you could argue that light that has travelled for 14 billion years has been bent along the way by that curvature.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/07
In this interview, Scott Douglas Jacobsen speaks with Rick Rosner about the recent surge in gravitational lensing discoveries and their implications for cosmology. Rosner explains how modern instruments are producing vast amounts of data, sometimes straining existing theoretical frameworks. He outlines the history of the Big Bang model, from Hubble’s redshift law to the cosmic microwave background, and its ongoing refinement through inflation and the ΛCDM model. Reflecting on confirmation bias, Rosner considers how his own information-centric perspective shapes his interpretations. The discussion underscores both the resilience of the Big Bang framework and the open questions driving contemporary astrophysics.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Rick, you sent you an article reporting on the recent discoveries of gravitational lensing. I want to begin with a question about that. What is the central finding? The article describes a large amount of gravitational lensing being detected, but it does not clarify whether this amount is consistent with the Big Bang model. Increasingly, it seems that many findings no longer align neatly with the traditional Big Bang framework.
Rick Rosner: Our telescopes and other instruments are improving quickly, producing so much data that theory struggles to keep up. The Big Bang was an early framework. About a century ago we confirmed that there are other galaxies—Hubble’s work in the 1920s—and that the farther away a galaxy is, the greater its redshift (Hubble–Lemaître law, 1929). The modern Big Bang model builds on solutions to Einstein’s general relativity (Friedmann and Lemaître in the 1920s).
It became the leading explanation after the discovery of the cosmic microwave background radiation by Penzias and Wilson at Bell Labs in 1964–1965. That radiation does not come from the “earliest moment” but from about 380,000 years after the Big Bang, when the universe cooled enough for atoms to form and light to travel freely. Subsequent missions—COBE (1992), WMAP (2003), and Planck (2013/2018)—measured its spectrum and tiny temperature variations, strongly supporting the Big Bang framework.
With new data, not everything fits neatly. Inflation, proposed around 1980–1981, solved several issues (horizon, flatness, and relic problems), but open questions remain. Still, the ΛCDM (Lambda–Cold Dark Matter) model—the current standard Big Bang cosmology—continues to match a wide range of observations, including the cosmic microwave background, large-scale structure, baryon acoustic oscillations, supernova distances, and many gravitational-lensing results.
Maybe I am wrong; I do not know.
Jacobsen: You have been reading and reflecting on this material for more than thirty years from an information-structure perspective. Are you vulnerable to the same confirmation biases as others? When you encounter evidence that appears to challenge the Big Bang, do you interpret it differently because of your theoretical commitments?
Rosner: Sure, so yes.
Let me add something. The Big Bang Theory was the inevitable first large-scale cosmological theory, once certain observations were made. Suppose there are many alien civilizations that reach a stage similar to ours. In nine out of ten cases—perhaps even higher—the first widely accepted theory they would form, once they discovered cosmic redshift and the existence of countless galaxies, would be something like the Big Bang.
Around 1900, astronomers thought the universe was just the stars within our own system. By the 1920s, with Hubble’s work, they realized those “nebulae” were separate galaxies. Before then, the term galaxy wasn’t widely used; astronomers sometimes referred to them as “island universes.” Humanity went from thinking there was one galaxy to understanding there are on the order of 100 billion galaxies, each with about 100 billion stars. That was a radical change in perspective. Given the available evidence, the Big Bang became the natural conclusion.
Now, regarding confirmation bias: I have my own analogy between human information processing and the universe’s information processing. That parallel may be strong, or it may be weak, but not nonexistent. Even a weak parallel challenges the traditional Big Bang picture. If the universe is an information processor, then you would expect temporal homogeneity—that it should appear roughly uniform across very long stretches of time, billions of years into the past or future.
That said, I recognize my bias. I look for articles that seem to support my IC (information-centric) view, at least in my interpretation. But my physics skills are limited. Ideally, I would be in a building with physicists and cosmologists, tossing around ideas, running the math, and testing them with code and data. Instead, I am just one person collecting anomalies from articles and online discussions. I do not even read the journals directly.
I do not subscribe to any physics journals. For me to see something, it has to come through a science writer who explains physics for the general public. They read the journals, then translate the content into periodicals or websites. There are probably very rigorous mathematical analyses of how much gold should be produced in supernovae in a Big Bang universe, along with gold created when two neutron stars merge. (Black hole collisions, by contrast, do not produce heavy elements because they swallow material rather than eject it, though some debris may be flung away in certain scenarios.)
Astrophysicists have certainly run these calculations and compared them with observational evidence, such as the abundance of gold and other heavy elements detected through stellar spectral lines. But I never see that side of things. What I encounter is a 450-word article on some website claiming that the universe may contain more gold than the Big Bang model predicts—without showing a single equation.
There is a principle in popular science writing about avoiding math. Stephen Hawking’s A Brief History of Time included just one equation—E = mc². According to the story, Hawking wanted to add more, but his publisher warned him that each equation would cut sales in half. Even with only one, the book sold millions, though it is often described as the least-read bestseller of all time. It is under 200 pages, but many people bought it with good intentions and then found it too challenging.
The material I read never contains equations. But the journal articles behind them likely contain dozens, with integrals, Hamiltonians, and other advanced symbols I never learned—or long ago forgot. I am just an amateur. I am not on the level of the retired shop teacher in Florida who claims to have disproved Einstein, but I am also not working in Duane Physics, the tower at the University of Colorado where George Gamow once worked. (Gamow died in 1968; Duane Physics was completed in 1972, so he never worked there.)
The tower itself has a poor reputation. It is an ugly building from the 1970s, with narrow hallways and cramped offices. I imagine that frustrates the physicists who work there because it limits casual interaction. Collaboration probably happens elsewhere, in spaces with whiteboards and room to actually exchange ideas.
I never get to just walk up to physicists and ask, “What’s going on? What’s shakalaking?”
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/05
In this dialogue, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore the nature of organisms as products of evolution and information-processing systems. Jacobsen frames organisms as dynamic mathematical objects shaped by natural laws and mathematics, raising questions about higher purposes. Rosner highlights that many microorganisms, even without brains, display behaviours through tropisms and adaptive responses. Organisms survive by building internal models of their environment, predicting outcomes, and adjusting behaviour. They process sensory input through contextual frameworks that give information meaning. Rosner emphasizes evolutionary traits, the seven biological life processes, and the negentropic quality of life that maintains order in the face of entropy.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I often characterize people as material objects, but in a more generalized sense—as naturalistic objects. We have natural laws, including the laws of physics and the laws of nature. These generalize into abstract systems, such as mathematics and its descriptions. So I think of organisms as dynamic mathematical objects. Where does an organism fit informationally in the universe? Higher purposes? No higher purposes? Only our own purposes? No purposes at all? How does all of that fit together?
Rick Rosner: Organisms with brains raise one category of questions, but many organisms don’t have brains. Plants don’t. Single-celled organisms don’t. There are plenty of organisms that don’t think, but still display behaviours. When an organism has responses that don’t involve thought, they’re called tropisms, right?
Jacobsen: Sure. Whether an organism can think or not, it can still change its behaviour toward the world in ways that increase its chances of survival.
Rosner: I guess you could say natural organisms, as products of evolution, generally want to survive. In the future, we’ll have artificial organisms that are engineered not to prioritize survival necessarily.
But in general, there’s a tendency for things to want to persist. One of the most effective ways organisms avoid being killed is by developing an internal model of the world around them and using that model to predict what will happen moment to moment—so they can adjust their behaviour to minimize risk and maximize benefit.
As such, organisms are information-processing systems. They have a framework for the information they receive via their senses and by thinking about what they’ve received. For something to be “information,” it must be relevant to the organism. There’s a framework in the organism’s thinking that makes input into information—it provides the context that allows raw sensory input to become meaningful.
By analogy, any information-processing organism provides its own context that turns input into information.
As I’ve been saying recently, we don’t have a good understanding of the contexts of information regarding the universe. We take contexts for granted. We’re so deeply entrenched in our own human frameworks of knowledge that we often overlook the broader contexts of information.
To return to the question of what a natural organism is: organisms are products of evolution, and we can make some general statements. Generally, they’re able to exploit their environment. In the case of animals, they can change their behaviour to increase their chances of survival.
Generally, living things carry out what we were taught in high school biology as the “seven life processes”: breathing, eating, excreting, reproduction, movement, sensitivity, and growth. Those functions help distinguish living things from nonliving things.
Living systems are also negentropic—they maintain order and resist descending into disorder. That’s another core feature of life.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/04
Riane Tennenhaus Eisler (born July 22, 1931, Vienna) is an Austrian-born American social systems scientist, cultural historian, futurist, attorney, and author. As a child she fled Nazi-occupied Austria with her parents in 1939, lived seven years in Havana’s industrial slums, and later emigrated to the United States; she went on to earn a B.A. (magna cum laude) and J.D. from UCLA. Eisler is best known for The Chalice and the Blade (1987), which introduced her “domination vs. partnership” framework for analyzing social systems. Her latest book is Nurturing Our Humanity with anthropologist Douglas Fry, Oxford University Press, 2019.
In this dialogue, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Riane Eisler discuss the mystery of Fibonacci numbers and the golden ratio, patterns visible in seashells, galaxies, and human anatomy. Eisler emphasizes their educational value as universal truths, while Jacobsen notes cognitive and computational limits in fully grasping them. The conversation turns to AI, where Eisler warns of deepfakes eroding trust in truth itself. They contrast nature’s enduring order with AI’s convincing fabrications, underscoring the need for critical education.
Interview conducted October 4, 2025, in the afternoon Pacific Time.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What would you like to discuss for this special session today?
Riane Eisler: I would love to discuss Fibonacci numbers, as I recently revisited them.
Jacobsen: Oh, interesting.
Eisler: There are mysteries we still cannot understand. One of them is why these patterns appear everywhere. If I were a physicist or mathematician, I would want to know why. In my book on education, Tomorrow’s Children, I wrote about this.
In middle and high school, young people can be introduced to the extraordinary fact that mathematical patterns, or ratios, repeat themselves across seemingly unrelated natural forms: hurricanes, sea waves, galaxies, DNA, seashells, seahorses, ram’s horns, pine cones, even the proportions of human limbs and the reproductive rate of rabbits.
The ratio of one radius to the next larger is always about 0.618, and the ratio of a larger to a smaller is about 1.618. These patterns, discovered by Egyptian and Greek thinkers such as Pythagoras, were called the golden ratio or golden spiral. Leonardo Fibonacci showed the same principle in his famous series of numbers: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89, 144, and so on.
When you add adjacent numbers—say 2 and 3 to make 5, or 3 and 5 to make 8—the ratio of these pairs approaches the golden ratio. Fibonacci described this as a natural growth progression, tied to the Greek phi, or the creative order of the universe, related to logos, the root of the word “logarithmic.”
Students can connect this idea to the movie “Contact,” where the alien message could only be decoded through the “universal language” of mathematics. But here’s the deeper point: this underlying pattern has not been studied nearly enough, and, frankly, I’m not sure humanity even has the mental capacity to grasp it fully.
Jacobsen: There are certain limitations there. It’s also the contours of our thought, too. Certain things will pop out more easily depending on our habits of mind. Computers crunching numbers certainly help us see farther, but even they have their limits so far, right?
Eisler: But computers are today being used by AI—so-called artificial intelligence—to present falsehoods as truths.
Jacobsen: Because they can represent those patterns very convincingly. In a way, AI does something similar to Fibonacci’s sequence: it builds complex images out of simple repeated steps until you think you’re seeing nature itself.
Eisler: Very convincingly. Someone just launched videos of Nixon, for example, saying things he never actually said. But there he is on television, speaking those words—thanks to AI.
Jacobsen: Have you ever seen an excellent painting in a gallery with little people in the background? You walk up close and realize it’s just three or four squiggles. This is the modern, more sophisticated version of that—a very convincing fake. But the difference is, the squiggles never claimed to be reality.
Eisler: I find it somewhat unnerving, to tell you the truth, because what’s being called into question is truth itself. And truth is what gives those universal patterns—whether in shells, galaxies, or mathematics—their stability. When that ground is shaken, education must play an even greater role in helping young people distinguish enduring truths from manufactured illusions.
But, as I bring out in all my books, education is very different depending on where a society falls on the partnership-domination scale. In the United States, we today clearly see the conflict between movements challenging traditions of domination – from the “rights of Man” movement against monarchies and the “rights of Women” movement of the 1700s and 1800s to today’s Environmental movement – and the regression to domination, to more authoritarianism, fear, and violence. Here we also see an attempt to muzzle educational institutions, from book burnings in grammar schools and libraries to attempts to silence any dissent in universities and colleges.
Everyone of us must pay attention to this struggle between domination and partnership worldviews, especially in education!
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/04
The Rise in Antisemitism in the World
“Antisemitism around the world has been on the rise for several years.”
United Nations Watch (UN Watch), A/HRC/40/NGO/220 (2019)
“Our report’s findings are… clear: key UN agencies, officials and experts are turning a blind eye to escalating antisemitism worldwide.”
UN Watch, “Report: UN Ignored Antisemitism for Decade” (2018)
UN Watch on Actual Global Antisemitism
UN Watch filed a statement to the United Nations (UN), A/HRC/40/NGO/220, in February 2019. They told the Human Rights Council that antisemitism rates had been rising for years. They cited Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) figures showing a 37% increase between 2016 and 2017.
Another UN Watch submission to the UN, A/HRC/42/NGO/151, in September 2019, reported on the rise in antisemitism. It is based on data from the EU Agency for Fundamental Rights (FRA) and Anti-Defamation League (AdL).
These echoed the warning of the UN Secretary-General. Their report, “The United Nations and Antisemitism: 2008–2017 — Report Card,” documented a decade-long global escalation of antisemitic attacks. They urged better responsiveness. More on this later.
Some Findings for Contextualization Elsewhere
UN Watch reports increased antisemitism globally. The AdL in the United States counted 9,354 antisemitic incidents in 2024. This amounts to a new record. U.S. officials reported 11,679 hate-crime incidents in 2024 (DOJ portal)T the FBI’s comparable-agency dataset shows 10,873. A methodological difference with the same corroborated trend.
Even among Jews in some countries, the EU Fundamental Rights Agency 2024 survey report shows widespread avoidance behaviours. Large majorities of Jews see antisemitism rising. If the AdL data tracks elsewhere, then the sentiment is, not only real but, accurately reflected in the data.
The Community Security Trust in the United Kingdom documented sustained levels of it. Indeed, there have been elevated levels of it, as concerns. These are potentially closely linked to the massacre of Israelis on October 7, 2023.
Hillel International documents record antisemitic incidents on campuses during the 2024-2025 academic year.
UN Actions Taken and Rights to Protect Jewish Peoples
The UN acknowledged a need to upgrade responsiveness. On January 17, 2025, the UN launched an Action Plan to enhance monitoring and response to antisemitism. There are rights with weight to protect the dignity and livelihood of Jewish people.
The International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights stipulates an assurance of the rights to non-discrimination, expression, life, religion, and security. The International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination deals with anti-racism and anti-incitement and is binding. Racist incitement and organizations are to be prohibited.
The 1992 UN Declaration on Minorities (A/RES/47/135) is a General Assembly declaration — not legally binding, but authoritative — that addresses the protection of religious and ethnic minorities. These and other instruments can argue for equal rights and treatment for Jewish people internationally.
Antisemitism remains a documented and rising threat across multiple regions. UN Watch confirms it. Governments document it. Civil society organizations monitor it. International frameworks such as the ICCPR, ICERD, and the UN Minorities Declaration, among many others, provide binding or substantive protections in the case of treaties. They may include guiding norms in the case of declarations.
Objective data indicate the need for stronger institutional responses and sustained global vigilance. Let’s combat antisemitism together.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/04
On UN Watch
“The most important organization continually bringing to light the record of the UNHRC and UNGA.”
Robert L. Bernstein, Founding Chair, Human Rights Watch
“…a Geneva-based pro-Israeli monitor.”
The Economist
“UN Watch will not be getting a cheque from me.”
Ian Williams (The Guardian)
UN Watch ED Claims
Hillel Neuer, Executive Director of UN Watch, on Sky News, claimed, about the veracity of famine or not in Gaza, the following:
“No, this is a fabricated report… there is not famine.”
“There are objective measures… in this report, it was… politically motivated, to fabricate a finding of famine.”
“This report was not made in good faith.”
“These are Hamas claims laundered by a U.N.-backed report.”
These raise specific factual questions. Is there a famine in Gaza? Was the report objective? Was the report made in good faith? Are these Hamas-influenced or independent UN reportage? Further, is there external support for Mr. Neuer’s position or for the Integrated Food Security Phase Classification (a UN-backed multi-agency system for classifying levels of food insecurity) or IPC findings?
The IPC Findings
The IPC report confirmed famine in the Gaza Governorate as of August 15, 2025. By late September 2025, they expected famine conditions to spread to Deir al-Balah and Khan Younis.
Over half a million people in the Gaza Strip were stated as facing Catastrophe (IPC Phase 5), 1.07 million were in Emergency (IPC Phase 4), and 396,000 were in Crisis (IPC Phase 3). Numbers were projected to increase by the end of September.
Child and maternal malnutrition through June 2026 were projected to be about 132,000 children under five suffering from acute malnutrition, with approximately 41,000 suffering severely. About 55,500 pregnant and breastfeeding women will need urgent nutrition support.
IPC assessment found non-trauma mortality in the Gaza Governorate reached famine levels. Conditions in North Gaza are likely severe or worse. Insufficient data prevented proper classification in that case. Rafah was not analyzed because of depopulation. Totals may be underestimates.
Known factors contributing to the famine include escalating conflict and displacement, the collapse of humanitarian food deliveries from March to April, the decline in local food production, aid interceptions, and high food prices.
Water and sanitation conditions are worsening, disease outbreaks are concurrent, and monitoring systems are collapsing, indicating possible underreportage of non-trauma deaths. IPC urged immediate, large-scale, unobstructed multi-sector aid and an immediate ceasefire.
The Current Conclusion
In sum, Neuer declines these claims on the fundamentals: “There is no famine.” Is IPC isolated, or is Neuer isolated in the international community?
The World Health Organization supports the Integrated Food Security Phase Classification findings. The United Nations Children’s Fund supports the Integrated Food Security Phase Classification findings. The Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations supports the findings. The World Food Programme supports the findings.
Furthermore, the International Rescue Committee, the Red Cross Movement, The Lancet, the United Nations Relief and Works Agency for Palestine Refugees in the Near East, Médecins Sans Frontières, the United Nations Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs, the Famine Early Warning Systems Network, and the British Red Cross concur with the report.
The only formal rebuttal is the Government of Israel. No other support exists for Neuer’s assertions.
Therefore, the opposite is likely the case. There is a famine, as evidenced by objective measures and independent UN analysis, based on good faith. Neuer denies the facts and objective measures, is probably politically motivated, and is potentially not working in good faith, dependent on a single supportive claim: the Government of Israel.
By accusing the IPC of fabrication, politicization, and bad faith, Neuer describes the qualities apparent in his own denial. His rejection is not corroborated by independent evidence or credible institutions. He is isolated internationally on this, not because of anti-Israeli bias, but because Neuer is wrong.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/04
Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore the elusive meaning of information in the universe. Jacobsen frames physical impacts, like smashing a rock, as information exchanges, then asks how fluids, solids, and plasmas differ in recording such exchanges. Rosner notes humans treat information as news or signals, but cosmically, “it from bit” theorists see every quantum event as informational. Yet many events, like collisions or solar reactions, leave no lasting record. He compares this to consciousness, where micro-events are integrated into larger patterns. The dialogue highlights entropy, durability of records, and whether the universe meaningfully “remembers” its countless micro-events.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: In an old thought experiment, we smashed a rock with a hammer. Another example is cutting a block of wood with an axe. The force impact, the shuffling around of atoms beyond their usual Brownian motion, can be thought of as an information exchange. What about the differences in information representation between fluids, solids, and plasmas?
Rick Rosner: At this point, I throw up my hands—we do not have a good universal definition of what information is. We know what human information tends to be: the news, local details about the world, sports scores, whether a traffic light is red or green, or whether someone is signalling they might be interested in being hit on. That is information in the human sphere.
Jacobsen: But what is information to the universe?
Rosner: The “it from bit” theorists claim every quantum event is an information event relevant to the structure of the universe. You can imagine a lifeless planet where a rock gets struck by another rock. That impact is still a kind of information exchange, even without observers.
The universe is self-consistent over time and space. If two rocks collide on a planet, that event is recorded in the material evidence. Send a camera there, and you would see traces of the collision. That means the event was durably recorded in the universe.
However, not every quantum event leaves a record. Take the Sun—quantum interactions happen constantly at its core, but most are obliterated. The Sun is far too hot and turbulent to keep records.
I have come to think that neither those solar events nor rocks hitting each other on a lifeless planet are especially relevant to the universe’s “understanding of itself.” They matter structurally, but they are micro-events the universe does not really “know,” in quotation marks.
It is similar to human consciousness. We do not register every microcognitive event that constitutes awareness. Our brains integrate them into larger patterns. Likewise, the universe as a whole may not “note” each micro or even macro event, such as a rock collision. If the universe is an information processor made up of ~10⁸⁵ particles, it seems implausible that it tracks every micro detail.
Jacobsen: That helps, at least a little. Typically, when there is a lot more movement internal to the system—say, in a cloud versus ice—that implies more entropy, correct?
Rosner: I have not thought of it precisely in those terms. Imagine two lifeless planets. One is entirely rocky, with no atmosphere. Events there are sparse: meteor strikes, cosmic ray impacts, erosion, and rocks falling. Now imagine another lifeless planet, but half covered with oceans. Suddenly, there is far more happening: turbulence, molecular exchanges, and constant dynamic change in the water.
Jacobsen: Does this difference—rocky stability versus fluid turbulence—affect the overall order or scale of order on those planets?
Rosner: I am not sure. On a lifeless planet with an ocean, most molecular movements in the water leave no durable record. Molecules constantly shift positions, stir around, and interact, but without cameras or instruments tracking them individually, their history is lost. You can infer movement indirectly—for example, by sediments deposited on the ocean floor—but you cannot reconstruct the path of each molecule.
As a result, you end up with two scenarios. On one planet, almost nothing happens. On the other hand, much happens, but leaves little trace. I am unsure of the informational implications of that.
Much of the universe seems to operate on implicate information—you know something happened, but you lack specifics. Everything is implied rather than explicitly recorded. I do not know the role information plays in the universe, but it seems important to figure out.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Tsukerman explores DNA evidence ambiguities, possible manipulation or false confessions, and gaps in the prosecution’s narrative. Tsukerman emphasizes due process, fair trial concerns, and the influence of political figures like Kash Patel. The conversation broadens to scapegoating in U.S. politics, parallels with antisemitism, and the rise of nihilistic “social media kills.” Tsukerman warns of shifting Republican attitudes toward immigration and the dangers of fringe grievances entering the mainstream.
Interview conducted on October 3, 2025, in the afternoon Pacific Time.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Quick background for readers: Based on the best available data from September 30—though newer details may exist—the subject is a 22-year-old Utah resident from Washington, Utah, a third-year student in the electrical program at Dixie Technical College, born April 16, 2003. He was not a student at Utah Valley University. He allegedly shot and killed Charlie Kirkland on September 10 with a Mauser .30-06 bolt-action rifle equipped with a scope. Early reports claimed a DNA match on the rifle’s trigger, but filings state the DNA was “consistent with Robinson,” which is not the same as a definitive match.
The charges include aggravated murder—a capital felony under Utah law—felony discharge of a firearm causing serious bodily harm, two counts of obstruction of justice, two counts of witness tampering, committing a violent offense in the presence of a child, and a victim-targeting enhancement (political expression).
Irina Tsukerman: Those are very serious charges. Even with the gravity of what happened, the prosecution still has to prove its case. Several pieces of evidence suggest Tyler confessed in certain forums, but gaps in the timeline raise questions. It is possible he was manipulated into taking credit for something committed with assistance, or even by another associate. It is also possible he acted alone, disturbed and reckless, and then bragged about it on Discord. Both scenarios remain plausible.
Jacobsen: There was also a bizarre twist involving a 71-year-old who briefly claimed responsibility. He was later apprehended and charged with another crime, not murder.
Tsukerman: It raises the possibility that some early suspects were red herrings or decoys. That confusion underscores the complexity here. Tyler could be exactly what he seems: a disturbed young man who carried out a horrific crime. But he also might have had help or encouragement.
The real question is whether prosecutors will pursue speculation about conspirators without clear evidence, or stick to what they can prove. There is also concern about whether Tyler will face a fair trial, given that the death penalty is on the table under Utah law, and whether federal charges could come into play.
Jacobsen: So far there is no evidence of terrorist intent, aside from his personal extremism, which seems to have emerged over the last year or so.
Tsukerman: The added complication is whether remarks from officials—and especially Kash Patel’s involvement in handling the case—could jeopardize the prosecution’s strategy.
Jacobsen: Are these types of charges for a 22-year-old white male in the United States unusual? Is this a serious set of charges for someone like that?
Tsukerman: It is not unusual overall, but unusual for Tyler—not because he is young, male, and white, but because he comes from a Republican family in Utah, which is not a high-crime profile. We have had high-profile cases involving young, somewhat charismatic white men—like Scott Peterson, accused of murdering his pregnant wife. He is still on death row, facing execution. Some similar cases have been commuted to life in prison, but originally it was a death penalty case.
Jacobsen: So Tyler represents something new?
Tsukerman: Yes. He appears to be part of a new type of killer: more nihilistic, less motivated by clear goals. In Scott Peterson’s case, it was getting rid of his family, possibly for insurance money. In others, the motive is profit, an affair, or sociopathic tendencies. Tyler’s case looks more like a “social media kill”—a crime committed partly to boast about.
We saw something similar with the Jack Teixeira case. Who knows if he would have committed a serious security violation without the audience to whom he could perform, claiming a moral stand? This modern obsession with validation seems to be pushing confused young people into crime.
Jacobsen: In my research, disturbed young white males in the U.S. peak around age 17 for school mass shootings. They make up well over 90–95% of those killers. That is not to say Native American, Hispanic, or Black boys do not kill, but they tend to express alienation through gangs rather than individual school shootings. Does that match your assessment?
Tsukerman: Yes, though, it has evolved. There used to be no shortage of white American gangs—Irish gangs fighting on the streets decades ago. That pattern has shifted.
There is now a sense of young men either self-isolating or congregating in groups that are not built on initiation ceremonies or ritualized violence, but instead on informal violence—boasting and proving credibility to anonymous onlookers, rather than building real community.
Whether this comes from social media, family environment, politics, self-perception, or a faltering sense of identity, there has clearly been a shift.
Jacobsen: Are the attempts to connect this murder with a possible roommate, a brief romantic partner, or someone who may or may not identify as transgender—primarily by the American right—legitimate in any way? Or is this more of a scurrilous attempt to smear a group of people?
Tsukerman: Investigators should look at all possible angles and motives. It is not unreasonable to question and seek evidence. But the key is evidence. You cannot drag someone’s name through the mud, project guilt by association, or treat an individual as an unindicted co-conspirator when there is absolutely no evidence linking them to the crime.
Jacobsen: We recently completed a glossary-length set of interviews on anti-Semitism. Even after interviewing people in strange domains, I was still shocked at the degree to which people expressed such detached, extreme views. It raises a similar mechanism: a Jewish American who happens to have an Israeli passport gets accused of “dual loyalty.” That trope has centuries of history. Is it the same kind of cognitive glitch that produces this scapegoating?
Tsukerman: It is a chicken-and-egg problem. Some people may have latent anti-Semitism that recent events brought out. Others may have started neutral, but constant reinforcement from media, politicians, and echo chambers planted the ideas until they took root, often feeding off conflicting thoughts and grievances.
I argued with someone recently about anti-immigration politics. The question was whether Trump and his policies created an extreme level of xenophobia and nativism among Americans—or whether that sentiment had always existed, suppressed until now. My view is that constant media reinforcement and policies pushed people toward positions they otherwise might not have considered.
Up until recently, there was no evidence of broad anti-immigration sentiment among Republicans. There was always bipartisan consensus against illegal immigration, which grew stronger on the Republican side in recent years. But Republicans had also been broadly supportive of some forms of migration—perhaps not lottery or chain migration, but definitely skilled migration or policies that could bring tangible benefits.
The Republican Party historically supported parts of the immigration system—working visas, some student visas, and, under certain circumstances, broader migration categories. The current broad rejection of nearly all forms of migration is relatively new.
There have always been individuals focused on visa fraud or who felt disadvantaged by immigration, but it is unclear whether those individuals were representative of Republican sentiment overall, or whether they simply became more politically vocal in recent years because they feel harmed.
That raises the question: is it good for society when previously fringe grievances are suddenly brought into the mainstream? Sometimes it may be best if certain impulses remain beneath the surface. Not every “demon” in society needs to be unleashed. In some cases, restraint itself is a form of victory.
Jacobsen: You mentioned inconsistencies in the case. Should we cover that now or save it for next week?
Tsukerman: Let’s cover it briefly. There are periods of time unaccounted for—gaps in video surveillance, inconsistencies in Tyler’s mother’s account, and contradictions in Tyler’s own social media comments compared to the narrative prosecutors are building. The storyline—how Tyler left his house, ended up at the scene with Kirk, and returned home boasting about it—still contains unexplained elements.
There could be innocuous explanations. Perhaps he stopped somewhere for a drink, perhaps cameras did not cover a particular route, or maybe there was a delay caused by something mundane like bumping into someone or taking a phone call. None of that necessarily means he did not commit the crime.
But given the seriousness of the charges, prosecutors must prove guilt beyond a reasonable doubt. That requires constructing a clear and consistent account of his whereabouts from departure to return, and showing conclusively that he was the one who held and fired the weapon—not simply someone who later took credit.
That is particularly difficult because history shows many people falsely confess to crimes. Police have wasted countless hours chasing false leads when disturbed or attention-seeking individuals claimed responsibility. If Tyler was present but not the shooter, yet still took credit, that would complicate the prosecution further.
Jacobsen: Great. I’ll see you next week.
Tsukerman: Thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Tauya Chinama is a Zimbabwean freethinker, educator, and advocate for human rights and cultural preserver. Trained in philosophy and theology, he transitioned from religious study to humanism, emphasizing intellectual honesty, dialogue, and heritage-based education. As a teacher of heritage studies, he works to integrate indigenous knowledge and languages into learning systems, arguing that language carries culture, history, and identity. Chinama is active in Zimbabwe’s humanist movement, contributing to interfaith dialogues, academic research, and public discourse on secularism, ethics, and education reform. He champions the preservation of Shona, Ndebele and other local languages while critiquing systemic barriers that weaken local language education.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Chinama examine persistent barriers for African humanists: financing travel and securing visas for global conferences. Jacobsen urges early tracking of World Humanist Congress and Humanists International grant windows. Chinama notes high costs, dependence on grants, and uneven representation, with hopes for events hosted in Africa. Visa systems create collateral damage, as strained diplomatic relations delay approvals and force costly applications in third world countries. Chinama advocates income generating projects and institutions to self fund participation, strengthen training, and amplify voices.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let us focus on financing for travel and visas for African humanists. Since I’ve been in the movement, this has been a consistent issue. It’s essential to keep the discussion alive so that each year it becomes a little easier, whether through increased financing or improved methods for navigating visa difficulties.
There are grants, such as travel grants to the World Humanist Congress or the Humanists International General Assembly, but they open quite early. So my first point: any African humanist or group wanting to send a delegate should look online and track when those applications open. What have been your experiences with funding challenges and visa challenges, and how have you seen them overcome?
Tauya Chinama: Sometimes, those of us from the Global South face significant obstacles. Travel becomes so expensive that we must rely on grants, which limit the influence we can have globally. In the future, we will have more opportunities, perhaps with the Humanist Congress or conferences being held in Africa.
This coming year, it will be in Canada. It may eventually reach Africa. A couple of years ago, it was in Singapore. Last year it was in Luxembourg. In the near future, it will be hosted on the African continent.
Another way we can overcome these challenges is by developing income-generating projects, allowing us to self-fund. Relying on grants is not sustainable, because there is no guarantee we will receive them.
For example, I doubt if the board of Humanists International currently has anyone from Southern Africa. I don’t think so. Yes, humanists are representing Africa—such as Dr. Leo Igwe and Roslyn—but both are from West Africa. We also need representation from Southern Africa and Eastern Africa.
It’s very rare to find humanists in North Africa because the region is predominantly Muslim. There may be a few among Shia Muslims, but openly identifying as a humanist is difficult. I have experienced this through my interactions with Iranians here in Zimbabwe, who usually invite me to interfaith dialogues. That’s one way we try to engage.
Sometimes we are fortunate. For example, in December of 2024, a number of African humanists were sponsored by the German Research Foundation to attend a conference on Decolonizing Secularity in South Africa, among those humanists were Michelle Nekesa from Kenya, myself from Zimbabwe, Wonderful Mkhutshe from Malawi, and Dr. Leo Igwe from Nigeria. We had the opportunity to sit together, hold a panel, and agree that we need to focus on training humanist leaders to develop strategies for financing their activities.
Jacobsen: How are visas handled in Africa when leaving the region for an international conference? Are they handled only at the national level, or is there a regional system in place?
Chinama: That is another challenge we face. We often suffer what I call “collateral damage.” If our country has poor relations with a Western country, visas may be delayed or denied. Sometimes, you receive the visa only after the conference has already taken place.
For example, if a conference is scheduled in the United States, Zimbabwe’s strained relationship with the U.S. makes the process nearly impossible. Currently, Zimbabweans cannot apply for U.S. visas directly in Zimbabwe; they must travel to South Africa to do so. That adds cost and time, and many individuals struggle to manage it.
I still need to check if it’s possible to get a visa here in Zimbabwe for Canada, but it might be easier because Canada has an embassy here. Unless they follow the United States’ example, the U.S. embassy here remains open, but it has suspended its visa applications. They closed it due to corruption: several people were issued diplomatic passports, including individuals who should not have received them, such as those outside the high-ranking security sector. That abuse has created collateral damage for everyone, even for our neighbours in South Africa.
South Africa once complained that they were receiving too many diplomats from Zimbabwe each day, and officials were misusing diplomatic passports. And when someone has a diplomatic passport, the receiving country is responsible for their security, which is costly. As humanists, we often suffer due to strained relations between governments or reckless policies regarding passports.
Jacobsen: Are there any internal humanist groups in African countries that can fund or subsidize travel for their delegates? Or is that unrealistic at this point?
Chinama: At the moment, we don’t have such groups in Africa. Humanists usually rely on their own resources. Whether it’s appearing in media, travelling, or engaging internationally, without outside support, we must do it ourselves. For example, this coming November 2025), I have been invited to Zambia for World Philosophy Day. While organizers said they might cover part of my expenses, I had to prepare to fund the trip myself.
So, it’s really about sacrifice. But African humanists don’t need endless grants. What we need is something like student funding or development funding—opportunities to buy land, establish schools, or create institutions that generate income while serving society. That way, we’re not always seen as complaining in the media but as active contributors, capable of funding our own participation in international conferences and sharing African perspectives.
Because what it means to be a humanist in Canada differs from what it means in Zimbabwe, Singapore, or Australia. Each context shapes humanism differently.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Tauya.
Chinama: Thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner discuss whether information is ultimately preserved or lost in both human minds and the universe. Jacobsen suggests that minds accumulate information until cognitive decline, while Rosner emphasizes that contradictions do not erase prior knowledge but reframe it within context. Extending the analogy, Rosner argues that the universe may form “thoughts” over billions of years, similar to how the brain integrates sensory and memory inputs. However, because each universal “thought” takes about 15 billion years, humans cannot perceive its arc of knowledge or decay within our limited lifespans.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: In IC, is information on net preserved and/or increased?
Rick Rosner: It depends on how you count it. It depends on whether it can be.
Jacobsen: I would reason from the information held in our minds, because I think there are strong analogies. Generally, the net amount of information in our minds increases throughout life until the brain begins to break down, at which point we lose information gradually—or eventually all at once, when we die. So I think you can reason similarly about information in the universe. You can also lose information when what you know is contradicted by new information.
Rosner: That’s slightly different, because the earlier information was valid within a particular context. If you get contradictory information in a different enough context, you’re not really erasing the first information—you’re reframing it. So whether information is net gained depends on what you’re learning and on the condition of the hardware that lets you maintain the information.
Jacobsen: Maybe that’s another way to frame the question. Over an individual’s life, there’s an arc in both the amount and the quality of information their mind contains. If you average it over the lifespan, you get a kind of line of best fit. Could you make the same argument for the universe—that there are fluctuations in the net amount of information?
Rosner: No, you can’t make the same argument, because extending it to the universe suggests different dynamics. I tend to think that 10 or 20 billion years is roughly the lifespan of the universe’s ability to share information about the current context across itself. That’s the equivalent of a thought. For you to have a thought, new information comes in from your senses, your memory, and your judgment, and all of it integrates to create a picture of the present moment. That information has to be shared across your entire brain. If you pay attention to your own thinking, you can notice subtle effects—different parts of the brain processing bits of the same moment slightly out of sync, sometimes a quarter of a second apart. If you pay attention closely, you can catch yourself saying, “I knew that was going to happen.” Like when you set a cup on the counter, miss, and it tips off. You tell yourself, “I could see that coming.”
One of the reasons you might feel like you saw it coming is because, in part of your experience, it already happened. Within a quarter of a second, maybe a fifth, you can second-guess what you’re about to do because you sense it will have a bad consequence. Except you’re not really stopping yourself, because the action has already occurred—part of your brain just hasn’t processed it yet. All of that unfolds within a fraction of a second. I believe the universe forms “thoughts” across its entire extent, on the timescale of light traveling across it—10 to 20 billion years. So if we say the universe has an arc of knowledge, like how people accumulate information and wisdom across a lifespan, then we have to consider the scale. If I do the math: say 10,000 thoughts an hour, 10 hours a day, that’s 100,000 thoughts daily. I’ve lived about 25,000 days, so that’s in the billions of thoughts—a staggering number. If the universe is analogous, it also has a staggering number of thoughts. But for us to see a curve of its growth or decay would take quintillions or sextillions of years, because each “thought” takes 15 billion years. So no, we can’t observe that arc. If the analogy holds, we simply don’t live long enough.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
The Amman Citadel, perched on Jabal al-Qal’a, offers a living chronicle of civilizations stacked across time. From the Ammonites of the 9th century BCE, whose inscriptions to Milkom survive, to Roman temples, Byzantine churches, and Umayyad palaces, the site reflects continual reconstitution. The Temple of Hercules, colossal ruins, Byzantine adaptations, and Umayyad architecture illustrate layers of cultural inheritance, interrupted by earthquakes and restored in modern times. The Archaeological Museum, once home to the Dead Sea Scrolls, deepens the story. Visiting reveals more than ruins—it is a lesson in how civilizations adapt, recycle, and endure, while raising questions about humanity’s future.
Arrival and Atmosphere
Amman in the Summer is hot. It’s a Friday. I am adjusting not only to the heat, but also to the beautiful, tan-coloured landscapes everywhere, across the view from a vantage point.
I took a ride to the top and entrance of Amman Citadel. I wasn’t allowed in, as there was a need to wait until it opened. No worries, the heat is not scorching… yet. Waiting and waiting, and waiting, check out the dirt, the weeds, the plastic trash sprawled on the hills, broken concrete staircases, and it’s open.
The ridge, Jabal al-Qal’a, had inhabitants living and fortifying it by the Middle Bronze Age. The Ammonites made what is now known as the Ammon Citadel their capital. The Ammon Citadel has an inscription in Ammonite. According to experts, this is the earliest known text in the Ammonite language. It was discovered in 1961 and dates back to the late 9th century BCE, and is thought to be a building dedicated to the god Milkom. Today, it is housed in the on-site Archaeological Museum.
There are the standard entrance payments. Tour guides are on standby, and for a reasonable price in dinar. Tourism is currently at a very low level. After the tours, you will be offered more information about further opportunities as part of the bargaining or negotiation process.
Empires and Reconstitution
An inscription from the mid-2nd century CE misnamed a location at Amon Citadel as the Temple of Hercules. The inscription was to Governor Geminius Marcianius (161-166 CE). The temple podium measured 43 meters by 27 meters, with columns 13.5 meters tall. In the 1990s, restorers added three new column drums. They lifted a massive 16-ton architrave.
A colossal marble hand was found nearby. This suggests that a Hercules statue originally stood about 13 meters high. A 6th-century Byzantine church was built using Roman stone. The church aisles visibly incorporate re-cut Roman columns. Early Islamic period artisans transformed the hill into a complex featuring the Umayyad audience hall, cistern, colonnaded street, and mosque.
A massive earthquake occurred in AD 749. This damaged most of these. Archaeologists highlight tilted column bases and a broken water channel in situ as direct evidence of the quake’s destruction. These were watched over by an Ayyubid tower built from spolia. The tower, constructed in the early 13th century, incorporates Roman column drums into its walls and underwent restoration in 1996.
Starting in 1951, the Jordan Archaeological Museum on a small hilltop displayed Dead Sea Scrolls and ‘Ain Ghazal statues. Most of the ruins are left underground, unexplored. Some sources give 1952 as the founding date. The museum once housed the Copper Scroll. These headline pieces now anchor the Jordan Museum downtown, which opened in 2013. Those are now in the Jordan Museum in Amman.
Lessons in Layers
Going through with a tour guide is highly recommended, as the history of stacked civilizations is deep; that’s an essential observational lesson, among many. One, civilizations rise and fall. Two, we aren’t as much of an inventive species as a reconstitutive species. New cultures co-opt the old/dying/dead culture and build upon it. Ammon Citadel represents this more clearly with architectural reconstitution. Even the Umayyad audience hall’s dome today is a 1998 reconstruction, completed by a Spanish team.
Get the correct view, whether live or online, in one gaze. You can almost see Ammonite letters, Roman columns, Byzantine aisles, Umayyad stucco, and the contemporary city of Amman living below. The city’s own names trace the strata: Rabbath-Ammon, then Philadelphia, then Amman. It raises a civilizational existential query: What next? If.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Between the 1960s and 1990s, thousands of parents in Serbia and Croatia were told their newborns had died, often without proof. The ECtHR ruled in Zorica Jovanović v. Serbia (2013) and Petrović v. Croatia (2025) that states violated family rights. Allegations include falsified identities, missing records, and illicit payments. Serbia has enacted reforms; Croatia must follow suit.
The Timeline
From the 1960s through the 1990s in the former Yugoslavia (especially Serbia and Croatia), many parents were told their newborns had died. Bodies were rarely shown. Records were inconsistent. Important to emphasize, the missing babies were taken from across the entire territory of former Yugoslavia.
In central Belgrade, there was one headquarters of the East German secret service, Stasi. These were involved in population control and demographic operations. This secret service cooperated with the KGB, some police, some hospitals,and some Serbian intelligence services, to orchestrate the transfer of children to EU nations and the US.
Authoritative monitors estimate as many as 250,000 newborn disappearances over approximately seven decades. Exact tallies remain uncertain pending further investigation. In 2013, in Zorica Jovanović v. Serbia, the European Court of Human Rights (ECtHR) found violation of Article 8 (right to family life). There was a failure to provide credible information on a newborn’s fate. Serbia was instructed to create a mechanism for all similar parents.
In 2020, Serbia enacted the Law on Establishing Facts on the Status of Newborn Children Suspected of Having Disappeared from Maternity Hospitals, to operationalize case-by-case fact-finding and compensation for damages. By mid-2021, the Belgrade Higher Court had received 694 applications. One had been resolved, and about 99 were pending at that time.
In 2025, in Petrović and Others v. Croatia, the ECtHR again found a violation of Article 8. An independent national mechanism was required to establish each child’s fate and award compensation.
The Patterns and Further Findings
Some documented patterns have emerged. These “paper deaths” came with the parents being told about the death. No body or burial proof was shown. There were registry contradictions. Records from funeral firms indicate that no remains were delivered. Therefore, documented patterns represent contradictions, knowledge gaps, and a lack of evidence.
Additional reported elements involve identity laundering, including for adoption. In one case, officials listed a mother who did not exist. This was processed into a rapid relinquishment. The reported workflow was about a week.
Alleged illegal payments have also been noted. Fees of up to around US$10,000 (in 1998 equivalencies) were reported in one case. In addition, 29 adoption files went missing between 1976 and 1981 from a social-work center in Aleksinac. Therefore, data can involve finances, missing partial registries, or falsification of identity.
Science as Partial Solution
Some positives have emerged from these stories, including a September 2021 DNA-confirmed reunion in Serbia, which demonstrates the feasibility of genetic tracing in helping to facilitate reunification and other rights-based efforts (see the 2013 and 2025 court cases, as well as the 2020 law mentioned above).
Serbia has the Missing Children hotline, operated by ASTRA and linked to the Missing Children Europe network. Several crucial items will require follow-through from this long history of crimes to rights-based action.
What Happens Next for Justice
Serbia has a mechanism in law. There are monitoring bodies. There are academics. These should continue to be assessed. They should be implemented to evaluate their efficacy. Croatia should establish an independent mechanism capable of issuing subpoenas to obtain credible answers and compensation, thereby meeting the ECtHR’s Article 46 obligations and ensuring their execution.
Former Serbian Orthodox Church deacon Bojan Jovanović has been a whistleblower on clerical abuse and authored Ispovest – Kako smo ubili Boga (2021). The public launch and interviews have documented regional media coverage.
Jovanović notes the missing babies are a combined failure of trafficking crimes and institutional shortcomings. He continues to advocate for justice in these cases.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Identity and culture are both fluid, evolving constructs shaped by global interaction. Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson emphasizes the Self as dynamic, while cultures shift through collective human behavior. Misaligned assumptions, epistemic colonialism, and stereotypes—whether East-to-West or West-to-East—risk reducing individuals to types rather than respecting their individuality. Translation tools bridge language but often fail at nuance, idioms, and cultural subtext, creating further misunderstandings. In intercultural settings, respect, openness, and sensitivity are essential, particularly regarding communication, cognition, and conduct. Withdrawal from harmful exchanges is valid self-care. Ultimately, cultivating empathy and dialogue fosters dignity, cooperation, and resilience in a globalized era.
An important lesson, reinforced through repetition, due to its pervasive fluidity, is the notion of cultures interacting with the Self. As Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson shows, the Self as a construct is fluid and dynamic. Cultures, being made of collectives of people, are fluid in quantity and in statistical dynamics, too. Therefore, the Self and Culture are active naturalistic constructs; both individual identity and cultural norms evolve dynamically.
As international boundaries and borders fluctuate in the era of mass communication and travel, everyone must be internationally oriented and globally minded. We are all in the same boat with anthropogenic climate change, for example. Cross-border cooperation is essential in climate response. Evolution overwhelmingly suggests that we are all part of the same species. Some in what is called the West may not be aware of what some in what is called the East may assume about them. Perception gaps are fundamental. In them, stereotypes often travel asymmetrically.
These assumptions are emotional soft spots. Intercultural mistakes and enmity can erode relations. Therefore, let us cover some of those soft spots, so you do not become a type in the mind of the other person as an Other rather than remain an individual: A fill-in for the worst stereotypes about the West, or the East, if the other case emerges. Stereotype threat is a common risk.
Immaturity can reign here if not reined in, even amongst adults. One soft spot is in cognitive styles: How we know. A core claim or emphasis is the view of epistemic colonialism, as seen from what is perceived as “the West.” The types of methodologies. How things are verified. The platforms that are promoted. The people promoted on those platforms. The people are also barred from those platforms.
When working in these contexts, these cognitive rule sets are crucial. Different disciplines work on distinct skills, mental models, and timelines. Universes of epistemic discourse differ. This occurs with cultural interjection into the disciplines: do not inquire within a closed frame; ask questions in an open frame, remain calm and respectful; and, if they fail to ask enough questions to form a robust opinion, then that is on them. Same for you. Open-ended, non-judgmental inquiry is important in dialogue.
When coming to another country, region, or hemisphere, the professional standards in a single discipline tend to be the same. The cultural frame of a discipline’s utility function can differ. Discussions across disciplines and cultures multiply the problems in discussion and hinder mutual comprehension, which serves as a basis for empathy. Misaligned assumptions are an obstacle; structured dialogue can mitigate this.
So, the epistemic core of the problem between someone who sees humanity divided into East and West, rather than as one species or ‘family,’ is an epistemic perception of a Western country extended everywhere. You do not have to believe this. This will be imputed. People impute group membership, even as individuals resist it.
Another context is communication, or how we speak and how we listen. It becomes complicated in the era of algorithms or large language models capable of nearly instantaneously translating text for you. The benchmark of communication between cultural interlocutors is lower. The gripe is a lack of linguistic or cultural duty of care.
Please speak to a person where they are at, rather than where you want them to be. This one takes more mindfulness and practice. However, a basic LLM or Google Translate can break the boundaries and increase the sharing of mutual meaning. At the same time, these tools miss idioms, politeness, and cultural subtext.
Some of what they see as the East interacting with someone they perceive as being from the West will be sensitive to the silent interactions involved in the cultural and linguistic duty of care. A sensitivity to the interpretation, pace, and register is not separate from the translation of meaning. They are part of conveying meaning. High-context cultures rely more on pacing and indirectness.
Another facet is the behaviour in the culture. In a more openly social culture with the elements of communication more silent than ‘loud,’ a focus on what you see acted out and left unsaid becomes more important than direct translations. LLMs and algorithms often remain limited or ineffective in this context, frequently leading to the most intercultural failures. This leans from conduct into the consequences. Machine translation accuracy drops with contextual meaning.
In any tourism, travel, or professional context abroad, locals generally bear the brunt of the dangers. Outsiders reap prestige, to them. Whether or not this is true, this is the sentiment. Therefore, sensitivity should be based on the principles of mutual respect and accountability: Share the risk and share the credit.
Cross-cultural contexts, if the individual interlocutor on either end is reduced to a stereotype, calm and respect can dissipate as fog from a sunny morning if the stereotyping checks in. After a sufficient amount of time in the morning, the stereotype will overtake the perception of the individual as an individual, as we all want to be treated as, and then move into treating an individual as a type. Stereotype persistence and outgroup homogenization are real.
You should have a sense of mutual dignity for the individual doing so and yourself, as well as maintaining a sense of self-respect: Respectfully recuse yourself. You do not have to take part in your own emotional abuse. If you do not have the basis for this mutual respect, then it is reasonable to do so. You are responsible only for yourself. Withdrawal is a valid protective response. Self-care is ethically sound.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Robert J. Bolton Jr. is President and Executive Director (and Bishop) of The Interchurch Center, a Class A community hub in New York City for mission-driven organizations. He guides nonprofits to secure not merely offices but strategic homes. With over 10 years of experience managing complex facility portfolios—encompassing more than 200 properties and multifaceted budgets—he leverages AI and cloud platforms to streamline leasing, maintenance, finance, and communications, thereby lowering costs and enhancing tenant satisfaction. Over two decades, Bolton has built high-performing teams, founded a thriving church and nonprofit, and led programs in food security, education, mentorship, and spiritual formation—aligning people, purpose, and process to revitalize communities.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Bolton explains how the landmark “God Box” provides more than just office space for nonprofits. By offering below-market rents, cultural and spiritual amenities, and community-driven programming, the Center creates a “strategic home” that empowers organizations to focus on their missions. Bolton highlights the integration of AI and cloud tools to streamline leasing, finance, and facilities management, while also emphasizing collaboration between diverse tenants. From accessibility to cybersecurity, Bolton’s vision aligns people, purpose, and process to strengthen the impact of nonprofits.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Robert J. Bolton Jr., President and Executive Director of The Interchurch Center—often called “the God Box”—a Class A community hub for mission-driven organizations in New York City. What problem in New York’s nonprofit office market do you solve better than standard Class A landlords or co-working spaces?
Robert J. Bolton Jr.: A significant challenge is the high cost of leasing office space, which can distract nonprofits from their mission. At The Interchurch Center, we offer below-market office space exclusively to nonprofits, allowing them to focus on their work.
We also offer a range of meaningful amenities—free or low-cost event and conference spaces, a chapel, art gallery programming, and an on-site cafeteria—creating an all-in-one home base that helps tenants focus on serving the community.
Jacobsen: What is an ideal tenant mix—size, sector, faith-based or secular?
Bolton: We host a wide variety of nonprofits, including faith-based, cultural, educational, advocacy, and more. The Interchurch Center began with a faith-based focus in 1960 and today welcomes 501(c)(3) organizations across many mission areas.
Jacobsen: What amenities do tenants use most?
Bolton: Our community and event spaces are in heavy use for meetings, trainings, and galas, and our chapel and cultural programming are distinctive draws. Having these on-site, plus an accessible cafeteria, reduces friction and costs for tenants.
Jacobsen: What role does technology play in reducing costs?
Bolton: We utilize technology to enhance the tenant experience—from security to communication—and reduce costs primarily through careful stewardship and by maintaining a well-occupied building, which helps share operating costs across tenants.
Jacobsen: What kinds of nonprofits are the best fit for The Interchurch Center?
Bolton: Faith-based organizations, certainly, but also cultural, educational, advocacy, and community-focused nonprofits of many kinds. We are a 19-story, ~600,000-square-foot landmark at 475 Riverside Drive, existing to serve a diverse nonprofit community.
That is the foundation of who we are—educational organizations, youth development organizations, justice-focused groups, cultural organizations. If they are doing something positive and serving the community, we want to talk to them.
We believe these organizations can come together—whether serving youth or seniors—to collaborate and work together. For example, a youth group and a senior group could connect, with seniors offering wisdom to the youth and the youth bringing energy to the seniors. There are many ways for our tenants to collaborate as a community.
Jacobsen: How do you measure tenant satisfaction?
Bolton: By doing surveys, talking to tenants, keeping open dialogue, hosting tenant consultation committees and orientations, and simply maintaining consistent communication.
Jacobsen: How do you balance faith-based and secular organizations?
Bolton: By bringing everyone together and celebrating the values we share, not the differences. Sometimes differences enhance our thinking and open us to new conversations and possibilities. However, our focus is on celebrating what we have in common.
Jacobsen: How does a strategic home go beyond simply renting an office?
Bolton: I call The Interchurch Center a strategic home because we want it to be a home away from home for our tenants, especially in today’s hybrid culture, where people may be in the office only two days a week. We want people to want to come to our building. We provide wellness programs, a cafeteria, and spaces for people to gather and connect with others. That sense of belonging is what makes it a strategic home.
Jacobsen: How do AI and cloud tools work in your operations—ticket resolution times, lease cycle hours, efficiency gains?
Bolton: We are still in the early stages of exploring AI, but we are actively pushing it into our operations. We utilize AI to streamline processes, including financial systems, lease management, contract tracking, and communication. I tell my team: let AI do the work so we can focus on the human side, the creative and fun parts.
Jacobsen: What is the community impact that you are most proud of?
Bolton: Helping people help people. We host a wide range of organizations that are dedicated to service, and our role is to support them. We also seek ways to support the community directly. For example, we have a Thanksgiving giveaway planned, and today we are holding a cancer awareness event in celebration of Breast Cancer Awareness Month. We are proud of these direct efforts, but above all, we are proud of the organizations we enable that help others every day.
Jacobsen: What is the tenant journey? Let us say you get an inquiry. How does that move from initial contact to either a pass or acceptance?
Bolton: A typical process begins when someone reaches out—through our website, by phone, or other avenues. We then schedule a tour of our facility. Once they see the building and all we have to offer, they are usually impressed.
The next step is typically signing a letter of intent, followed by board approval on their side. After that, we work out a lease for the appropriate term, sign the agreement, provide an orientation, hand over the keys, take a welcome photo, and officially welcome them to the family.
Jacobsen: What about reputational spillover across faith or mission-driven sectors? If groups have a good—or even average—experience, they share that with others. How does that kind of word-of-mouth impact your growth and outreach?
Bolton: We encourage our tenants, whom I prefer to call our partners, to share their experiences. We have been the “best kept secret” for too long, and now we want others to know about us.
Word of mouth is one of the strongest forms of marketing. Mission-driven organizations want to help other mission-driven organizations. If they find value here—and most of them do—they are eager to share that with others.
Jacobsen: Let us talk about accessibility, for example, multilingual communications. How do you approach these areas?
Bolton: We encourage multilingual communication where necessary, because we serve a very diverse tenant base. Bilingual or multilingual resources help ensure everyone feels included and supported.
Jacobsen: What about chapel use and the risk of proselytizing?
Bolton: We are careful to make the chapel a space of inclusion. For example, just yesterday we hosted the Feast of Creation, where representatives from Muslim, Christian, and other faith communities came together to discuss environmental stewardship. It demonstrated how people of different faiths can unite around shared values, such as caring for our planet.
Jacobsen: You mentioned cybersecurity earlier. Let us move into the infrastructure side—electrification, HVAC, air quality, and cybersecurity. How do you handle those less glamorous but essential areas?
Bolton: Those are different entities within our building, but they all fall under one of our core pillars. Our pillars are integrated facilities management, tenant experience, community engagement, and business continuity.
What you are describing is integrated facilities management—how we care for and steward our facility by providing the best HVAC systems, using AI and other tools for more efficient operations, and maintaining strong cybersecurity. IT, security, and facilities management all work together to create a cohesive environment for our building.
Jacobsen: What has been your favourite event?
Bolton: I will answer that by looking ahead. We are celebrating our 65th anniversary on the 10th of this year. We will be honouring several people, and we want to make it a truly special celebration. That is going to be my favourite event.
Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today. It was a pleasure speaking with you, and congratulations on the great work you are doing.
Bolton: Thank you. I appreciate it.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
After arriving at the border crossing between Israel and Jordan, I was told to take a taxi after being dropped off at a truck stop, essentially. One taxi was there. Go to it, no one in it–uh-oh. The heat waves blasted. I talked to a trucker. They direct me to the road and the crossing station. I spoke to some people.
The kindness of a stranger let me into the crossing, as he drove me. He was not supposed to do this. Next was the formal cross. Border rules vary by day. Israel typically issues entry/exit cards instead of stamping passports. At some land crossings, you may still receive either an entry card or a stamp. Keep the blue entry/exit card with you. Since 2024, many visa-exempt visitors also need ETA-IL preauthorization.
In the Allenby/King Hussein Bridge crossing, there is a Palestinian line. There is a VIP Palestinian line. You put luggage through a scanner. You walk through another detector, shoes off. You check your ticket. You pay for another ticket. These are checked.
Then you exit. There is a bus for Palestinians. There is VIP travel too. The kindness of strangers, once more, becomes paramount. A shuttle bus connects the terminals across the bridge. VIP fast-track services are offered. Opening hours/closures can change with security conditions.
Once through, I took a taxi to Amman. A lovely man, he drives me a bit of the way. The landscape is quite gorgeous. He pauses, pulls over. Nothing wrong, he goes in. He buys water, not only for himself. He hands one over and then throws an empty out the window. Onwards to Amman, there it is, the hotel.
It was a Thursday. It offers its unique sensory delights and local norms.
You can smell cardamom-forward Arabic coffee, grilled flatbread, and pastries at kunafa shops.
You can hear the prayer rolling out of the Grand Husseini Mosque. You hear the rumbles of car engines and car horns as you shuffle hurriedly across the road.
You can walk fast or slow through streets laced with shops and haggling for a potential sale of the latest and greatest item. The steps and the slopes are brutal for many. Your stamina determines your slope capacity.
The city is lined with sand-coloured houses and shops along the hillsides above the souks. The Nymphaeum/Roman Theatre–Hashemite Plaza is a brief walk away, on the premise that you do not get lost.
The tastes of Amman are the kiwis (with the skin for me), falafel, hummus, the best Arabic coffee you’d had in your life, dates, figs, pears, shisha, and more. Mansaf (lamb with jameed over rice), maqluba, musakhan, and mint lemonade are widely loved local staples.
The visit to the Middle East took on a less interrogatory feel. I felt relaxed in Israel. I was not accustomed to the heat. I felt very relaxed in Jordan. Some footnotes, essential items to bring into the travels where more uncertainty and bargaining of time exists in the 21st century. I had some technology breakdowns and difficulties right at the end of travels, after 6 weeks all over Europe and some of Eastern Europe. These became issues. Things to bring:
A burner phone or extra phone.
A power bank.
Local currency in cash.
Backpack.
Phone plan with data everywhere.
Lessons learned. These do not have to be reasons for anxiety. However, they can be essential for getting around more easily if technology fails. Do not panic: Think, and then emotionally comfort those who are with you if necessary. Breathe: Life happens. One lesson from the 7 weeks of travel through Europe, some of Eastern Europe, and some of the Middle East.
A central place for anchoring time and place is helpful, whether a hostel or a hotel. You can orient and explore from this point forward. Also, cultures change people, but people are fundamentally similar. You will make intercultural mistakes, and so learn from them. Also, Google Translate makes life easier now.
Amman Citadel tourism was down, by one tour guide’s estimate, by 95%. All visitor numbers in Jordan drop sharply during regional tensions, particularly in the 2010s and 2020s. The “95%” figure is anecdotal. Late-2024 reporting noted steep declines and very low occupancies at major sites like Petra. I decided to go the next morning.
Ubers are cheap. Taxis are cheap. Walking is cheaper than cheap. Pick your times and places to use them. If your legs hurt or you are in a rush, consider using public transportation. Uber and Careem ride-hailing apps both operate in Amman.
Also, yellow taxis and shared “service” taxis. Ask yellow cabs to use the meter. “Service/servees” taxis run fixed shared routes, while ride-hailing (Uber, Careem, Jeeny) is typical in the capital.
If not, or if you feel like exploring, then use the legs God or Nature gave you. Amman is built a little like a city on a crumpled piece of paper, expect inclines and declines. Be ready to do some cardio, then enjoy smoking shisha. You could easily get lost in Amman.
The Citadel features the Temple of Hercules, Umayyad-era structures, an on-site museum, and a theatre, as well as the Hashemite Plaza. It’s really wonderful. Amman is a palimpsest, spanning from the Bronze Age to the present.
The Roman Theatre and Hashemite Plaza are separate sites downhill from the Citadel. On the hilltop itself are the Temple of Hercules, the Umayyad Palace complex, a Byzantine church, and the Jordan Archaeological Museum.
Several places were visited during the trip as part of ongoing travels. These will be explored as part of the interspersed travel logs from the 7th of 7 weeks of travel, with a more exploratory and less work-oriented emphasis during them.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
In this dialogue, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner debate whether algorithms adequately describe the universe. Jacobsen begins with the standard definition of an algorithm as a step-by-step, finite process like a recipe. Rosner counters that the universe does not follow strict routines but operates through emergence—patterns forming from possibility rather than predetermined rules. They compare laws of physics to contours shaped by statistical dynamics and symmetry, not rigid instructions. Rosner emphasizes counting numbers as emergent from discrete macro objects, while quantum systems can blur definitions. Their exchange highlights the tension between algorithmic order and emergent complexity in nature.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let us do some quick math. We have a few minutes. I want to settle the “algorithm” question by starting with a standard definition and then contrasting it with how physical laws and emergence work.
An algorithm is a finite, step-by-step procedure for solving a problem or completing a task. It is like a recipe in that it specifies an ordered sequence of operations. The key points are finiteness, determinacy at each step, and an input–output mapping.
Rick Rosner: Right. However, the universe does not have rules in the sense that an algorithm does. The universe does not follow a routine. It operates according to what is possible at any given moment. What happens is what can happen—emergence, in other words.
Jacobsen: So you are saying the laws of physics are not really rules in the strict sense?
Rosner: The universe is emergent. I’ve said this many times. The things we see aren’t rigidly predetermined. They unfold. Think of leaves falling from a tree: you might expect them to drop uniformly, but instead they swirl, get caught in currents, and settle in irregular patterns. That’s emergence in action.
Jacobsen: But we do have laws of physics, which are highly regular. I think of them more as contours than commands. They emerge from deeper principles—statistical dynamics, symmetry, and consistency. They’re not step-by-step rules like an algorithm. They’re looser regularities that arise from what is possible.
Rosner: Take numbers. The set of counting numbers—1, 2, 3, and so on—emerges naturally from the fact that macro objects are discrete. A rock isn’t 1.3 rocks. At the scale of ordinary objects, it makes sense to count in whole numbers. At more minor scales, of course, things can be divided, and in physics, some properties are continuous while others are quantized. But the everyday discreteness we observe is an emergent fact of reality, not an algorithm written into the universe.
Our system of counting is highly consistent until you get into very advanced mathematics, where you encounter Gödelian problems about proving consistency. But at the basic level, counting numbers and the operations on them are highly consistent and non-contradictory. They show up for the same reasons: consistency and non-contradiction. You have objects in the world that exist in whole number quantities, because it would be inconsistent and contradictory to have, say, one and a half protons.
Now, you can talk about “one and a half protons” in a fuzzy, quantum-mechanical sense. In an incompletely defined system, you can set things up so that you don’t know exactly how many particles are present. But once the system is defined sufficiently, objects appear in whole-number quantities.
I don’t know. But I don’t really see how the concept of an algorithm applies to that kind of emergent development of the universe.
Anyway, I’ve got to go to the gym.
Jacobsen: Enjoy the gym. I’ll ask different questions tomorrow. Happy 19-millionth session.
Rosner: Thanks, bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Rev. Dean “Dino” Dimon (76), priest at Annunciation Greek Orthodox Church in Avon/Avon Lake, Ohio, was arrested in Ohio’s 2025 Operation Next Door crackdown for soliciting prostitution. He was placed on administrative leave by the Metropolis of Pittsburgh.
—
Rev. Protopresbyter Dean “Dino” Dimon (76), presiding priest at Annunciation Greek Orthodox Church of the Greek Orthodox Archdiocese of America, and resident of Avon/Avon Lake, Ohio (listed differently in official records), was arrested during a statewide human-trafficking crackdown called Operation Next Door for soliciting prostitution.
The hierarch of the Metropolis of Pittsburgh is Metropolitan Savas (Zembillas). Metropolitan Zembillas, as part of GOARCH, is under the Ecumenical Patriarchate of Constantinople (Patriarch Bartholomew I).
Law enforcement conducted Operation Next Door as a statewide human-trafficking crackdown. It was announced Sept. 29, 2025. There were 135 arrests. 103 “johns” were charged with engaging in prostitution solicitation and 32 were given felony arrests, e.g., promoting or compelling prostitution, seeking sex with a minor, and drug offenses. Authorities reported: 67 trafficking survivors were referred to health and social services. More than $62,000 in assets were seized.
Nine search warrants were executed in Toledo, Cleveland area, and Akron area, including massage parlours. In Northeast Ohio, warrants included raids at Green Massage Spa (16210 Madison Ave., Lakewood), Dandelions Promise Foot Spa (12736 Lorain Ave., Cleveland), and U Mei Spa (12410 Lorain Ave., Cleveland), as well as a Lakewood residence.
From those Cleveland-area parlors, more than $30,400 was seized. Additional warrants in Toledo included Sky Spa (135 S. Byrne Rd.), Asian Healthy Massage (325 W. Alexis Rd.), and Asian Massage (5333 Secor Rd.). From those Toledo businesses, $32,000 was seized.
Allegations specific to Dimon come from the arresting unit, the HEAL Task Force (Huron, Erie, Ashland, Lorain counties). Dimon self-identified as a priest of the Annunciation GOC. Purportedly, Dimon had acknowledged another prior prostitution solicitation.
The Greek Orthodox Metropolis of Pittsburgh stated, upon hearing of the charges, administrative leave was applied to Father Dimon. He was removed from all pastoral and ministerial duties. The Metropolis said he is on leave “while the justice system takes its course.” Presumably, administrative leave will be retained while the legal process continues.
WKYC, The Independent, and local stations, have covered this case. Media reports quote the Metropolis’ statement and the AG figures. They note that Dimon’s arrest was part of a broader crackdown including other professionals (such as teachers and a federal defense attorney).
Prosopon Healing’s Orthodox Church Sexual Misconduct Database identifies this case as Incident 1261. For more information, see here:
https://www.prosoponhealing.com/public-orthodox-sexual-misconduct-d/dimon%2C-dean.
Another case existed several years ago within Ohio of a deceased priest.
Rev. Anthony P. Sarris, long-time Greek Orthodox priest at Annunciation Greek Orthodox Cathedral, Columbus, Ohio. During 1979–2011, the hierarch was Metropolitan Maximos (Aghiorgoussis).
A female parishioner, Maria Dickson, alleged Rev. Sarris of sexual molestation in the church office in 1991, where the abuse happened in 1989. He was suspended from the church. He retired in 1991. A grand jury reviewed the case and declined to indict.
Rev. Sarris died December 2, 2008.
Prosopon Healing’s Orthodox Church Sexual Misconduct Database identifies this case as Incident 1196. For more information, see here:
https://www.prosoponhealing.com/public-orthodox-sexual-misconduct-d/sarris%2C-anthony
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
The Gender Persecution in Afghanistan Accountability Working Group (GPWG) presented a one-hour training session on the United Nations Special Procedures today. They emphasized the importance of UN “Special Procedures,” particularly in the context of Afghanistan. The webinar focused on specific UN mandates and their impacts on Afghans. This is a particularly significant time for the Afghan people. Gehad Madi, the Special Rapporteur on the Human Rights of Migrants, was referenced in addressing the forced returns of Afghans from Iran and Pakistan. Other mandates were also highlighted in the session, including those of Gina Romero, Special Rapporteur for the Freedom of Peaceful Assembly and Association; Farida Shaheed, Special Rapporteur for the Right to Education; and Rosemary Kayess, Special Rapporteur for the Rights of Persons with Disabilities.
Human Rights Defenders were given a spotlight too, e.g., the Special Rapporteur on the situation of human rights defenders, Mary Lawlor, whose interventions include preventing the refoulement of at-risk HRDs. In total, as noted, there are approximately 60 Special Procedures, comprising 46 thematic and 14 country mandates. Afghanistan has a recurring agenda item across thematic mandates.
Mandates being domain-specific can intersect with other ones. In this, submission to Special Procedures can be joint across mandates, e.g., a human rights defender who is also a migrant woman with a disability. Joint communications remain a standard practice.
Civil society can help Special Procedures with letter submissions. These provide the basis for international pressure on governments and other actors. These can produce formal UN communications. If a letter is submitted, then precise facts, documented harm, and requested action will be necessary. Privacy concerns can be flagged. Communications remain confidential up to 60 days before publication in the Special Procedures database. You can submit to an online portal (spsubmission.ohchr.org), email a relevant mandate holder, or post to the OHCHR in Geneva. Special Procedures then convert credible submissions into allegation letters, urgent appeals, or letters concerning draft laws and policies.
An example provided on the webinar was a Joint UN statement on forced returns. UN experts condemned mass forced returns of Afghan nationals and warned states against refoulement on July 18, 2025. Several mandates were jointly issued. Press statements like this become advocacy tools. Domestic lobbying can follow.
The Human Rights Council meets three times per year. HRC 60 ran from September 8 to October 8. Afghanistan fit thematically and under country discussions. NGOs can gain access to the HRC through ECOSOC’s consultative status. If they do not have this, then they can partner with an ECOSOC-accredited NGO to become accredited via the NGO. Under session guidelines, video statements are permitted. The speaker formats can vary. Some include interactive dialogues with a Rapporteur or with the High Commissioner; general debates are also permitted. Either format allows brief NGO statements. The speaking time permitted is approximately 90 seconds. There are limited slots available on a first-come, first-served registration basis via the OHCHR online system.
Outside of these core moments of voicing issues, side events are hosted within the UN, which can be booked via the HRC NGO channel to spotlight niche issues and invite delegations. Bilateral meetings with mandate holders on the margins are common. Some issues trigger pushback, e.g., select LGBTI topics.
For the issues of theocrats, including the Taliban, there are direct and indirect pressure tracks. Direct tracks include Special Procedures writing to de facto authorities. Indirect tracks include mobilization of third-country governments to condition engagement and to protect Afghan refugees, e.g., from refoulement.
UNAMA, the United Nations Assistance Mission in Afghanistan, was also mentioned during the webinar. It was created in 2002 by UN Security Council Resolution 1401. Unlike Special Procedures experts, who are independent and appointed by the HRC, UNAMA is a political mission of the UN Secretariat mandated by the Security Council. It monitors and reports on human rights in Afghanistan, and its advocacy is informed by its findings.
Other areas of concern and focus included the sale and sexual exploitation of children, armed conflict, and the rights of the child. These are addressed through Special Procedures such as the Special Rapporteur on the sale and sexual exploitation of children, as well as related UN mechanisms like the Special Representative of the Secretary-General for Children and Armed Conflict and the Committee on the Rights of the Child.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Tyler James Robinson (born April 16, 2003) is a 22-year-old Utah resident from Washington, Utah. He is a third-year student in the Electrical Apprenticeship program at Dixie Technical College and previously attended Utah State University for one semester (Fall 2021) as a pre-engineering major. He also earned concurrent enrollment credit through Utah Tech University during his high school years (2019–2021).
He was born on April 16, 2003. His pronouns are he/him. He had no involvement with the Center for Anticipatory Intelligence. He was not a student at Utah Valley University in any capacity. Those are some basic biographical facts that have been confirmed.
On September 10, 2025, at Utah Valley University, during an outdoor event, Robinson allegedly shot and killed conservative Christian activist Charlie Kirk. Prosecutors say he spent more than a week planning the attack, based on text messages. The weapon was a Mauser .30-06 bolt-action rifle with a mounted scope, and investigators recovered engraved shell casings near the campus. Security reviews later noted the event had no drone or rooftop surveillance, only about six campus police present, and no bag checks or metal detectors.
During the evening of September 11, there was a peaceful surrender at the Washington County Sheriff’s Office. Robinson’s family and a retired detective helped coordinate the move.
Files have been charged on September 16, 2025, in the Utah 4th District, before Judge Tony Graf. There was a county press conference. He was charged with aggravated murder (capital felony) under Utah Code §76-5-202. Also, he was charged with a felony discharge of a firearm causing serious bodily injury, obstruction of justice (two counts), witness tampering (two counts), violent offence in the presence of a child (misdemeanour), and victim-targeting enhancement (political expression).
The prosecution’s stance is for the death penalty by the Utah County Attorney. The county has posted formal charges. He has been held without bond. The next hearing is scheduled for October 30, 2025. The defence team is led by Kathryn Nester, then Michael Burt and Richard Novak (admitted pro hac vice).
There was a DNA “match” on the rifle trigger reported by the county attorney, though filings phrase it as “DNA consistent with Robinson.”
If the intent is capital punishment or killing by the state, then aggravated murder is capital-eligible. If it is not eligible for capital punishment, then there will be sentencing for life without parole or 25 years to life.
For the felony discharge of a firearm, this is elevated to 1st-degree if serious bodily injury resulted. In addition, the victim-targeting enhancement did include selection based on political expression.
Some footnotes of commentary have highlighted UVU security gaps, including the lack of rooftop coverage and drones, as well as limited staffing.
Charlie Kirk was declared dead at the hospital.
Several unknowns remain. Prosecutors allege political targeting. We do not know the deeper motive of Robinson if any. Speculation asserts lone action. Possible collaborators remain unconfirmed. Forensic evidence may face challenges.
His mental health status may or may not play a role in sentencing. Federal charges or appeals could alter case trajectory. Jury selection may matter. Disclosure battles may matter. Plea strategy may present open questions. As of September 30, 2025, many details remain unresolved in the Charlie Kirk murder case.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Mahmoud Abbas and Benjamin Netanyahu are territorial and cultural leaders. Collective valences differ. Are there criminal charges against both? Are both on trial? Where does each stand domestically and internationally in each regard?
What has been claimed about Mahmoud Abbas?
Internationally, no International Criminal Court warrant or indictment has been put forward for Mahmoud Abbas. No defendant page exists for Abbas on the International Criminal Court website. However, non-governmental organizations have filed communications urging the International Criminal Court to investigate Abbas. The submissions are one-sided, favouring prosecutors—neither judicial warrants nor charges are presented.
Other jurisdictions and proceedings exist. Abbas mentioned “50 Holocausts,” and the Berlin police began an incitement probe. The Berlin Public Prosecutor concluded the remark had elements of incitement. The case was dropped due to immunity. No charges were filed.
In the United States, some victims sued the Palestinian Authority/Palestine Liberation Organization under the Antiterrorism Act. The United States Supreme Court upheld the jurisdiction, of the Promoting Security and Justice for Victims of Terrorism Act (PSJVTA), in Fuld v. Palestine Liberation Organization on June 20, 2025.
Antiterrorism Act suits were revived against the Palestinian Authority/Palestine Liberation Organization. Abbas was not held personally liable in this case.
The Court’s holding was unanimous. It reversed the Second Circuit and held the PSJVTA’s personal-jurisdiction hook constitutional. This allowed Antiterrorism Act suits to go forward when statutory predicates are met.
The Palestinian Authority had internal prosecutions over the 2021 killing of Nizar Banat—these targeted security officers, and not Abbas. Rights groups have criticized accountability. Rights organizations highlight that proceedings were delayed, narrowly scoped to low-ranking officers, and held in military courts. They see this as inadequate for civilian accountability.
What has been claimed about Benjamin Netanyahu?
Internationally, the International Criminal Court issued an arrest warrant. This was issued against against Netanyahu and former Defence Minister Yoav Gallant on November 21, 2024, by the International Criminal Court’s Pre-Trial Chamber I. This rejected Israel’s jurisdictional challenge. The International Criminal Court arrest warrant is active.
The crime allegations are war crimes and crimes against humanity. War crimes include starvation as a method of warfare and intentionally directing attacks against civilians. Cited documents are the Rome Statute Article 8(2)(b)(xxv) and 8(2)(b)(i) for the former; and Article 7(1)(a), 7(1)(h), and 7(1)(k) for the latter.
International Criminal Court judges emphasized there are “reasonable grounds to believe” the crimes were committed. Sufficient for warrants. Far from conviction. Warrants create arrest obligations for States Parties to the Rome Statute, although compliance often varies with political considerations.
Judges stated “reasonable grounds to believe” exist to believe the crimes were committed. These were sufficient for an arrest warrant, but not a conviction. Israel challenged these. Further, from May to July 2025, filings addressed Israel’s challenges. Warrants are active. Slovenia barred Netanyahu’s entry, citing the warrant.
Netanyahu’s recent trip to the United Nations avoided the airspace of countries that are members of the International Criminal Court. France reportedly approved overflight, but Israel’s route was still detoured. Analysts suggest that risk management and optics of avoiding States Parties to the Rome Statute were decisive.
In Israel (Jerusalem District Court), Netanyahu has an ongoing criminal trial, which opened in May 2020. There are three files: Case 1000 (gifts), Case 2000 (newspaper deal), and Case 4000 (Bezeq–Walla). The charges were fraud, breach of trust, and bribery when taken together.
Case 1000 included luxury gifts (for example, cigars, champagne, etc.) from Arnon Milchan and James Packer. Case 2000 included talks with Yedioth Ahronoth (a publisher) for softer coverage. Case 4000 involved regulatory benefits for favourable Walla! Coverage.
Prosecution rested in July 2024. His testimony began on December 10, 2024. Netanyahu pleaded not guilty. He remains on trial for corruption domestically. As of September 30, 2025, hearings are ongoing, with no verdict reached.
Where does each man sit now?
Abbas has neither an International Criminal Court warrant nor an indictment. Berlin found a 2022 remark met incitement elements, but the matter was closed due to immunity. Some United States litigation targets the Palestinian Authority/Palestine Liberation Organization as civil entities, but not Abbas.
Netanyahu has an International Criminal Court arrest warrant for war crimes and crimes against humanity, including starvation as warfare, attacks on civilians, murder, persecution, and other inhumane acts. He has an ongoing Israeli criminal trial for breach of trust, bribery, and fraud.
Benjamin Netanyahu is under an active International Criminal Court arrest warrant and is on trial in Israel; Mahmoud Abbas faces no public criminal charges or trials.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Scott Douglas Jacobsen asked Rick Rosner whether distinguishing between algorithmic and non-algorithmic processes is meaningful in physics and cosmology. Rosner rejected the primacy of algorithms, arguing that computation is linear while associative information is multidimensional, shaped by correlations among variables. He described the universe as compressing vast possibilities into efficient three-dimensional structures, with protons, electrons, and neutrons transmitting information. For Rosner, physical reality emerges from principles of efficiency and existence rather than fixed step-by-step rules. Algorithms can be imposed retroactively as explanatory frameworks, but they miss the improvisational, self-organizing nature of the cosmos. Emergence, not recipes, defines reality’s unfolding.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: All right, let us shift to physics. We left off abruptly in our last session because the clock caught up with us, and I would like to pick up the thread from there. When we speak of algorithms, we are usually talking about step-by-step procedures—precise instructions that define computation in a mechanical sense. Computation, in turn, seems to be one of the cornerstones of how we model information, and information itself has become a candidate for the fundamental currency of the cosmos. Given that backdrop, how do you personally make a distinction between what counts as an “algorithm” and what lies outside of it? Is the division between algorithmic and non-algorithmic processes a meaningful one in physics and cosmology, or is it more of a conceptual convenience that fails to capture how reality actually unfolds?
Rick Rosner: I do not put much stock in the term “algorithm.” Computation is linear. Associative information, by contrast, is multi-dimensional. When you have a network of associations among variables that correlate with one another, you get a multi-dimensional structure. One objective of making computation more efficient is to compress that multi-dimensional structure into fewer dimensions.
If you have a multi-dimensional structure built from correlations, most of it is empty space. These dimensions only correlate for a little while, then the rest of the axis is wasted. Our physical world is three-dimensional space. It is boiled down into what is somehow the most efficient space for containing sets of correlated variables—protons, electrons, neutrons—with information transmitted via long-range particles. You can think of this as a massive pruning of possibilities, where nature strips away redundancy and lands on the dimensions that actually matter for stability and persistence.
So what I am saying is, I do not buy the algorithm idea. When we talk about what is happening, it is emergent. It probably unfolds the same way every time, with the same physics and the same particles. But it is still emergent—not based on a predetermined set of rules. It all ends up in the same place, but what governs it is efficiency and the principles of existence, which are mainly non-algorithmic. Emergence is richer than a recipe; it is a continuous self-organization, like turbulence resolving into vortices or galaxies coalescing out of clouds of matter.
I do not love algorithms. Of course, someone could put what I am talking about into an algorithmic framework and say, “When you talk about this, you are still talking about algorithms.” But to me, that is a retroactive imposition of language. You can always shoehorn complexity into step-by-step instructions after the fact, but that does not mean the universe itself is running those steps. It is like writing sheet music for a jazz improvisation—the notation captures an echo, not the real process.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you distinguish energy and matter in an informational framework?
Rick Rosner: I do not really know. For me, it always goes back to macrostructures—things big enough to have permanence: stars, galaxies, planets, the large-scale structure of the universe. You can describe most of the physics of macrostructures in terms of electrons, protons, and neutrons. You can also account for most of the energy. Matter has kinetic energy, but energy in itself—massless or nearly massless stuff—travels at or near the speed of light. Its energy comes from that motion: photons and neutrinos, essentially.
Jacobsen: The question was: How do you distinguish matter and energy in an informational universe?
Rosner: You could describe the physics of information storage and processing using five primary particles: protons, neutrons, electrons, photons, and neutrinos.
However, within atoms and within some of these particles, you have quarks, gluons, mesons—you have dozens of other particles that mediate interactions with the big five. As for cosmic rays, I am unsure what fraction is not composed of photons.
I am showing my ignorance here, but I would guess that for a particle to be considered a cosmic ray, it is usually something more exotic—maybe a meson or a muon—making it to Earth and decaying in our atmosphere. That is pretty cosmic.
It has the capacity to do a great deal of damage—more than stray photons or even X-rays. Well, X-rays are photons, just extremely high-energy ones. I would estimate that the fraction of energy emitted from the Sun that is not in the form of photons or neutrinos is tiny.
In stellar fusion, approximately 2–3% of the released energy is emitted as neutrinos, while the remaining energy ultimately appears as electromagnetic radiation (photons). Non-photon, non-neutrino channels—mainly the kinetic and magnetic energy carried by the solar wind—are minuscule, of order one-millionth of the Sun’s photon luminosity.
Most “exotic” particles do not stream away from the Sun in bulk. Gluons, for example, are confined: quarks and gluons are not observed in isolation at ordinary energies but locked inside hadrons (protons, neutrons, mesons).
For macro-physics, you can mostly get by with a small cast: photons and long-lived composite matter like atoms (electrons bound to nuclei made of protons and neutrons). Free neutrons are not long-lived, but neutrons bound inside stable nuclei effectively are; that is what lets macroscopic structures persist.
Photons and gravity act over long ranges, which is crucial for large-scale organization. (Neutrinos also traverse huge distances, but they interact so weakly that they rarely shape macroscopic structure.) These ingredients are enough to knit the universe into a system that can store and propagate information without invoking short-lived or confined particles. (That is a metaphor, not teleology.)
In terms of “energy vs. matter,” they are related by E=mc2E=mc2; you can transform mass to energy and vice versa in specific processes. However, they play different informational roles. Photons can travel vast distances and, by interacting with matter, change spatial structure—writing information into the arrangement of atoms and fields.
Protons, electrons, and neutrons cluster into atoms and larger structures, giving you stable media that preserve information across time. Working together, “matter carriers” and “energy carriers” allow information to be stored, moved, erased, and reused.
Matter clumps into stars and larger structures; stars then “boil down” nuclear binding energy into photons (and a small neutrino component), returning energy to their environments. Despite tremendous progress, there is still plenty we do not understand in detail—especially the turbulent, magnetized plasma that mediates much of this.
Jacobsen: In terms of the universe as an “information processor,” returning to non-computable possible universes: a recent line of work (including colleagues’ papers co-authored by Lawrence Krauss) argues that some aspects of a final theory might be non-algorithmic in a formal, Gödel/Tarski/Chaitin sense, with spacetime emerging above that layer. That framing does not negate existing physics; it proposes limits on what a purely algorithmic “theory of everything” can capture.
Rosner: I do not love that either. The universe forms associations when a couple of protons fuse into deuterium. When two deuterium nuclei fuse to form helium, they form an association. They are not literally “calculating.” You could argue it is a kind of computation—that when two nucleons get close enough together, they fuse into a heavier nucleus.
That could be framed as a computation: “these conditions were met, therefore fusion occurs.” However, to me, it feels more like an association or correlation, rather than a computation. The universe is a correlation engine, which is evocative, since artificial intelligence is also built as a set of correlation engines. Bayesian probability is essentially the mathematics of correlation.
Jacobsen: If we change the framing away from computation and algorithms—or away from “non-computation” and “non-algorithmic embedding of reality”—then could we reframe the kinds of operations computers do as being embedded within a larger associational network? That is an open question, and I do not know where it leads.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
My day in Jerusalem was dotted with 4.5 hours of interrogations by Israelis at Ben Gurion Airport the day prior. The first and second screening men were not highly competent, sitting under harsh fluorescent lighting with a perfunctory manner. I was unimpressed and embarrassed on their behalf. They will lie and misrepresent you. When I asked for clarification and evidence, I was provided zero documentation or reasoning. This is common.
There are problems in Arab and Palestinian profiling and targeting of some foreign activists. Israel has been criticized for this repeatedly by rights groups. You have rights, so enforce them with calm persistence. The price of denying invasive treatment is refusal of entry. You do not have the same rights in a courtroom as in an airport. Security does not require providing detailed reasons or proof of suspicion.
You can complain and seek legal assistance if you have been treated unlawfully. At the moment, though, you are at their behest. The security staff have broad legal authority to detain, question, and search passengers in the name of security. Courts will generally support their efforts domestically.
The woman who conducted the formal interrogations—three sessions in a keypad-entrance room behind a makeshift partition on a plain desk—was competent, professional, and intelligent.
That, plus a friendly and honest demeanour, changed the prior disallowance into an allowance. I was honest. I maintained the position: If I was going to be deported, then I was going to be deported on honest terms.
I got labelled a דירוג איום: 4 מתוך 6, a “threat rating” in their internal scale. The questioning centred on whether I worked for the United Nations or if I intended to conduct interviews while travelling to or through Israel. I responded politely in the negative, given that my passport would eventually be permitted into the country, and was told, “Your luggage is by the carousel.” The zipper was 2 inches open, a silent reminder that it had been searched.
Welcome to Israel, and welcome to the Middle East, a region marked by apparent longstanding tensions, but a charming place with some of the most important and beautiful religious holy sites in the world, and excellent cuisine and people.
I met my first Jewish Ray Romano lookalike there. There are many positives, and a good sense of shared humanity is essential for navigating personal foibles in new areas of the world. That is part of learning and maturing as a global citizen.
As I travelled, there were a few landmarks, such as the Jerusalem–Yitzhak Navon railway station, upon arrival. It is the city’s sleek intercity terminal beneath Shazar Ave. and adjacent to Binyanei HaUma. The high-speed link from Ben Gurion tunnelled deep through the hills.
I started most of the real travel there at Jaffa Gate, which is the main western entrance through the Old City walls. It has direct access to the Armenian and Christian Quarters. I visited Jesus’ old purported tomb, the Golgotha, etc. It was exciting, as there was the Old City – Jewish Quarter, a southeastern district of the Old City, which was restored after 1967. It has characteristic narrow lanes and lively squares.
Another part of the Old City was the Armenian Quarter, a southwestern section of the Old City. It is centred on the Armenian Patriarchate/St. James compound. It is a quieter monastic precinct with traditional ceramics and echoes of ancient chants.
Some other bits, then it was off to the border crossing to get into Jordan to reach Amman.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Reference: Faizal, M., Krauss, L. M., Shabir, A., & Marino, F. (2025). Consequences of Undecidability in Physics on the Theory of Everything. Journal of Holography Applications in Physics, 5(2), 10–21. doi:10.22128/jhap.2025.1024.1118
Mir Faizal, Lawrence M. Krauss, Arshid Shabir, and Francesco Marino have a new physics paper out in the Journal of Holography Applications in Physics this year. The theory posits a novel Theory of Everything scaffolding. The big idea is an extrapolation of the constraints for a possible Theory of Everything. (Repeat: This is not a Theory of Everything or a Grand Unified Theory. It is a proposal for the possible structure of a final theory, outlining potential expectations.)
A final theory should produce spacetime rather than assume it, in this theoretical scaffolding. Spacetime and quantum fields become emergent from these deeper rules and so are not fundamental to the universe. The degree to which this becomes deeper will depend on the final theory and the best-fit candidate for it.
The starting point of this new theory is to treat quantum gravity as a deeper set of rules from which quantum fields and spacetime can emerge. They make some bold starting points. John Wheeler’s “It from Bit” or pure computation is rejected outright as fundamental. This has significant implications for many theoretical constructs trying to implicate computation as foundational. It has implications that extend beyond the direct interpretation of the statement.
The authors posit that any candidate quantum-gravity theory can be cast as effectively axiomatized, an algorithmically formal system. It has a finite or at least recursively enumerable list of axioms and computable inference rules. Spacetime and quantum fields becomes a derived construct. All within the larger aforementioned system. Some points of contact are Gödel, Tarski, and Chaitin. What did they show?
Gödel proved: If any formal system is consistent and powerful enough to encode arithmetic, then factual statements exist in the intended interpretation, but cannot be proved within that system. No algorithmic system can be consistent and complete.
Tarski showed that a system cannot internally capture its own notion of truth. Truth must be handled in a “larger” language. Chaitin showed that some actual mathematical facts are beyond proof because they are too complex. These together address incompleteness, the requirements of a larger context for attaining the truth of a system, and the concept of truth in mathematics beyond proof due to complexity: incompleteness (Gödel), a larger language (Tarski), and complexity (Chaitin).
If the system is consistent and firm enough to represent arithmetic rules, then Gödel’s incompleteness, Tarski’s undefinability, and Chaitin’s results imply that algorithms cannot capture all truths. Truth requires a large scaffolding outside of algorithms.
The result of these is that an algorithmic ToE cannot capture all truths. The proposal is to add an ‘external’ truth predicate or an externalizing predicate to truth, to recognize true but unprovable facts that are missed by computable cores. These moves introduce a stacked explanatory system, ranging from non-algorithmic understanding to computable laws of quantum gravity, to an emergent spacetime and matter.
Therefore, the first step is not reducible to computation, but it does lead to computation. Science maintains its integrity while grounded in a non-algorithmic layer in this stack. Simulations are algorithmic. Therefore, a universe grounded in a non-algorithmic layer is not a simulation.
Exotic hypercomputation is unaddressed.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Now we are doing digital physics. All right, unitarity and no-cloning. In enclosed quantum systems, information is preserved by unitary evolution. So you cannot perfectly copy or delete unknown quantum states. No cloning, no deleting. How does that strike you?
Rick Rosner: Where does this show up? What do you mean? All right, expand the definition.
Jacobsen: You can mathematically describe quantum states. Unitarity means that in an isolated system across evolution, probability always sums to one, and no information is lost—it is a mathematical guarantee. The other principle is that even though data is preserved, it cannot be perfectly copied or destroyed. You cannot make a clone. That is interesting.
Rosner: So, where do these situations and issues show up?
Jacobsen: Cryptography, black hole physics, and quantum computing.
Rosner: Okay.
Jacobsen: What are your thoughts on this from a cosmological perspective?
Rosner: I do not know. I have not thought about this aspect. Quantum mechanics is about the flow of information, but that information is always incomplete. In its incompleteness, it is a set of probabilities. Any quantum system you examine is not deterministic—probabilities of future outcomes describe it. Even that probability set is fuzzy because you are not entirely sure what system you are dealing with, unless you go to great lengths to characterize it completely. You can design experimental systems where the probability sets are pinned down because you have controlled the experiment precisely. However, overall, what you are describing sounds like quantum behaviour in general: uncertainty, incomplete knowledge, and systems defined by limited information.
Jacobsen: We can add another piece to that and make it more robust. There is a finite information capacity to any region of spacetime. There is a maximum number of bits in a bounded spacetime volume.
Rosner: Yes, that is one example, the event horizon.
Jacobsen: But more generally, any volume of spacetime has a finite information capacity. It is not infinite. Even black holes are collapsed matter in IC—extremely dense, but not infinite—as opposed to the old idea of singularities.
Rosner: Here are the issues I think matter. For the universe to function as an information processor, it needs a way to dispose of entropy. I do not believe the universe has constantly increasing entropy; it is the opposite. The universe tends to increase information.
Its physics allow it to sequester entropy. Closed systems obey the rule of increasing entropy, but most of the macro-universe is not closed. Our planet, our solar system—these are open systems that can easily dispose of waste heat into space. Waste heat is entropic. If you can radiate it away, you have negentropy—an increase in order, which we see. Electromagnetic radiation loses energy as it travels billions of light-years.
That lost energy translates into a slight reduction in curvature in space, which contributes to the net information in the universe. Over tens of billions of years, that means a more ordered universe.
Burnt-out galaxies collapsing and later reigniting might be part of the same process: local collapse balanced by energy released to fuel expansion elsewhere. A cycle that eliminates entropy. The universe has memory. The accumulation of information is the opposite of entropy. I do not know.
Thank you for your dedication and your insane ethic.
Jacobsen: Insane?
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
The United States has a history of inequality for women, as with most countries. It has a development towards fuller equal rights in law and in practice, as with many other countries. Arguments continue in the US over representation, particularly around the current Administration. Lies or falsehoods have been spread. What is the representation of women in American administrations since the vote?
First, some background, the US had the 1848 Seneca Falls Convention and the “Declaration of Sentiments” as the first national demand for the vote. The 1868 Fourteenth Amendment Section 2 for apportionment had language of “male” in federal law signaling the exclusion of women.
The 1870 Fifteenth Amendment banned raced-based voter denial, which enfranchised many black men but not women. 1872-73 had Susan B. Anthony vote, get arrested, and then convicted. 1875 had the Minor v. Happersett Supreme Court case did not confer universal suffrage.
Several state and territorial wins built momentum between 1869-1918. Women’s suffrage procession happened in 1913 in Washington, D.C. before Wilson’s inauguration. 1917 to 1919 saw the silent sentinels or White House pickets with arrests followed by hunger strikes raising pressure.
Wilson publicly endorsed the federal suffrage amendment. The 19th Amendment was passed by Congress on June 4, 1919 and ratified August 18, 1920, then certified August 26, 1920. State challenges failed and Leser v. Garnett upheld the Nineteenth Amendment. 1975 saw VRA amendments saw language-minority protections. Important for Indigenous and immigrant women).
Based on historical information, F.D. Roosevelt (1933–45) had women represented as 1/11 and men a 10/11. Roosevelt’s history was the first woman ever: Frances Perkins (Labor). Truman (1945–49) had women at 1/11 and men at 10/11. Perkins again. Truman (1949–53) had women at 0/10 and men at 10/10. Therefore, Roosevelt was a progression and stability, while Truman was a regression.
Eisenhower (1953–57) had women at 1/11 and men at 10/11, then from 1957–61 had women at 0/11 and men at 11/11. Kennedy (1961–63) maintained women at 0/11 and men at /11. Johnson (1963–69) had women 0/14 (0%) and more men added at 14/14 (100%).
Nixon (1969–73) had women at 0/13 (0%) and men at 13/13. Nixon (1973–74) had women improve status at 1/13 and men at 12/13. Ford (1974–77) had women at 1/22 (5%) and men 21/22. Same number, smaller percentage.
Things begin to pick up in the late 1970s and early 1980s. Carter (1977–81) had women at 2/18 and men at 16/18. Reagan (1981–85) had women at 3/17 and men at 14/17. Reagan had the highest totals to that point. Reagan (1985–89) had women at 3/17 and men at 14/17.
G.H.W. Bush (1989–93) had women at 3/17 and men at 14/17. Clinter made a significant leap in equality for women’s representation in an American Administration. Clinton (1993–97) had women at 7/22 and men at 15/22.
Clinton (1997–2001) had women at 9/22 and men 13/22. Despite professional failings, Clinton had the strongest record for women’s representation to that date and the highest percent of representation until Joe Biden (2021-25).
G.W. Bush (2001–05) had women at 4/21 and men at 17/21. G.W. Bush (2005–09) had women at 5/21 and men at 16/21. Obama (2009–13) had women at 7/23 and men at 16/23. Obama (2013–17) had women at 8/23 and men 15/23.
Trump (2017–21) had women at 6/24 and men 18/24. Biden (2021–25) and women at 13/25 and men at 12/25. The first time in American history with a majority of women. Trump (since 2025; as of Sept. 28, 2025) had women at 8/24 and men at 16/24.
Which is to show, Biden had the most women representation in American history, and the trendlines are unmistakably clear. Any party administration in the US over the decades has far more significant representation of women in government, too.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner delve into digital physics, questioning whether the universe is computational or merely permits computation. Jacobsen frames reality through objects, processes, and operators, while Rosner argues the universe encodes information imprecisely at macro scales rather than through strict quantum events. They contrast Wheeler’s “it from bit” with a sloppier, associative model of information. The dialogue examines consciousness as either emergent information structure or illusion, echoing behaviorism’s “black box.” They also discuss jargon, popularization, and language in science and fiction, highlighting the tension between accessibility and the invention of new terms for emerging concepts.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let us build this in cosmological terms, starting from digital physics: object, process, and operator. I had the terms right. An object is a state or structure in the information substrate. A process is the unfolding of that state over time—computation, motion. An operator is a rule that maps one state or object to another, defining the inputs, outputs, and sequences of state updates—the time evolution and the precise “how.” Once fixed at a sufficient scale in a universe, operators become the laws of nature or physics.
Rick Rosner: When I hear “digital physics,” I think of the “universe as a computer” model.
Jacobsen: However, this isn’t quite that—it is closer to a precursor. Digital physics often comes back to Wheeler’s phrase “it from bit.” What you’re describing is deeper.
Rosner: I haven’t thought about it that way in some time. Information in the universe is encoded, though even that word suggests more precision than I mean. The macro-information the universe “uses” as an information processor isn’t determined at the micro level. By “micro,” I mean individual quantum events—like an electron dropping to a lower state around a nucleus and emitting a photon. The universe as an information processor doesn’t register those. It takes larger collections of events.
The universe isn’t Minecraft. It’s more like modelling clay. Here’s my standard example: almost none of the quantum-level interactions in the center of a star register in a durable way. You have fusion events—hydrogen fusing into deuterium, then tritium, and eventually helium. Later, as hydrogen is depleted, helium fuses into heavier elements, such as carbon and oxygen. These events are comparatively rare, but they leave permanent traces in fused nuclei.
Meanwhile, countless thermodynamic events occur—photons emitted and absorbed at staggering rates, quintillions per second. These interactions happen, but they leave no record.
But those quantum events mean nothing informationally. They leave no trace. A photon doesn’t even have a chance to share information with the universe until it escapes from the Sun’s surface. Energy created by fusion at the Sun’s core takes thousands to hundreds of thousands of years to reach the surface. Most photons transmitting that energy are absorbed and re-emitted countless times, never escaping or leaving a permanent trace. This is brutal for the idea of “it from bit” in a computational universe—or a digital universe.
It suggests that the universe’s encoding of information happens at a macro or super-macro level, and that it’s associative and imprecise. There’s no strict code in our minds—or in the universe—for something like “orange” as a colour. Instead, it’s known through a web of associations. When enough stimuli overlap, “orange” emerges as part of what you’re perceiving. The universe runs sloppily. Our minds do too: they rely on tacit, imprecise, associative understanding rather than strict coding.
Jacobsen: What if the universe isn’t computational at all, but computations happen within it—like we can perform them with machines? In this view, the universe isn’t computation expanded; it’s non-computational but permits computation.
Rosner: I don’t know, because I haven’t thought in those terms for decades. I’ve always assumed the universe is built from information and processes information. That assumption allows for a structure—hidden from us—that preserves information and keeps the universe from dissolving into chaos. It’s similar to how our brains make consciousness possible. We experience consciousness through our minds. We live inside our minds.
But perhaps our minds are illusions. Maybe we shouldn’t think in terms of “mind” at all, but only of how the brain presents information to itself.
Without resorting to the idea of “mind,” you could still frame mental information as an information structure—not independent, but distinct from the connectome, the brain’s wiring. Or you could call that whole program nonsense and say, ‘We are our brains.’ We’re fooled into thinking we have minds by the way the brain processes information. In that sense, we—our experience of being selves—are no more “minds” than food delivery robots have minds. Consciousness could be a convenient shorthand, but it may also be an illusion. Physics, neuroscience, and the world could be fully described without resorting to “mind” or “consciousness.”
That argument has a precedent. Behaviourism in the 1930s treated the brain as a black box. Too complex to comprehend, researchers ignored the inner workings and focused solely on the input and output. Stimulus in, behaviour out. No speculation about what happened inside the box.
The universe could be like that: soulless, fundamental physics. It contains information we can extract, but it doesn’t“process” information. Its job is only to exist according to physical laws. As beings who process data, we can find patterns in it, but that has nothing to do with the universe’s nature. That’s possible. Not a view I like, but possible.
And, as I’ve said many times, quantum mechanics cuts against that. It’s so much a theory of information.
Jacobsen: There’s a tendency among “big thought” people to take a sweeping idea, dress it in jargon, and elevate it to capital-T Truth.
Rosner: Someone just told me about reading a PhD thesis—so thick with jargon it was unreadable. Some disciplines, depending on the school, get lost in that. Specialists often communicate only through dense terminology, which is unintelligible to outsiders.
Then you have popularizers. Every field has them. In physics, they take brutal math and theory, strip them down to essentials, and present them to the public in ways that are accessible and engaging.
Jacobsen: People have different tendencies.
Rosner: It’s a common tendency. I enjoy physics, and I’ve coined a few terms myself. I’m also writing a near-future novel, which requires balance. A convincing near future needs new terms, but too many can make writing unreadable. Anthony Burgess faced this in the 1960s with A Clockwork Orange. The novel, narrated by a young thug named Alex, is drenched in slang. Alex and his gang call themselves “droogs”—from the Russian word drug, meaning “friend.” The slang reflects a Cold War scenario in which Russian cultural influence is perceived as corrupting British youth.
It’s tough to wade through the language, but the book remains deeply satisfying, and Stanley Kubrick’s film adaptation is excellent. In that case, the heavy slang had a purpose.
So, yes, if you want to explore big ideas, you sometimes need shorthand, even coined terms. In my novel, set in the near future, AI and neural implants play central roles. Consciousness is close to being replicated. But the word“consciousness” is long and unwieldy. Its plural—“consciousnesses”—is worse. So in the book, people in the field call it “C.” Much shorter.
I also imagine that the specialists in this future will be called “Sengineers”—short for “consciousness engineers.” That’s less clumsy than spelling the whole phrase out. Maybe in time there’d be an even shorter word. The trick is walking the line: avoiding pretentious jargon while still inventing terms to express genuinely new ideas.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique law practice specializing in national security. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Tsukerman examines the fallout from Charlie Kirk’s assassination, emphasizing the still-unclear motive and the pattern of online radicalization among young men on platforms like Discord. She cautions against collapsing Antifa, sovereign-citizen rhetoric, and broader left–right extremism into a single narrative, and criticizes memorial rhetoric that drifted into conspiratorial tropes. Tsukerman urges a rule-of-law response, de-escalation, and evidence-based reporting, rather than martyrdom politics. Her analysis situates the case within a larger ecosystem of disinformation, opportunism, and grievance amplification that accelerates real-world risk.
Interview conducted September 26, 2025, in the afternoon Pacific Time.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: All right, round two of “right fight, wrong turn.” This one was sparked by the assassination of Charlie Kirk by Tyler Robinson, age 22—an ongoing legal case. The reactions were swift. Jimmy Campbell was fired, then reinstated three days later. There are now proposals to erect statues of Charlie Kirk as a martyr for the MAGA cause. This is more than just a Turning Point USA moment—it is a national Turning Point moment. What are your thoughts on the murder and the reactions?
Irina Tsukerman: We still do not know why Tyler Robinson committed the crime he did. There has been speculation about whether he aligned with the Groypers or with Antifa. Antifa is not a centralized organization but rather a loose coalition of extremists who claim to fight fascism. Some are radical left-wing activists, not consistently opposing authoritarianism. Many became visible during the George Floyd protests and the COVID era, especially in Portland—defying authority, calling for the defunding of the police, building enclaves of resistance, and acting as more militant versions of Occupy Wall Street, but without a coherent philosophy beyond anarchism and nihilism.
It is unclear where Robinson fell. He reportedly admired Nick Fuentes’s followers at one point, but later showed interest in more left-wing groups. He was in a relationship with a transgender individual, though it is uncertain whether that factored into his attack on Charlie Kirk. He allegedly inscribed political slogans on his weapon, but much remains unknown. What is clear is that he spent a significant amount of time on Discord, a platform where many radicalized individuals gather to share grievances and engage in illicit activities.
Jacobsen: You mentioned radicalized individuals. Is it fair to say they are primarily young men?
Tsukerman: Very fair. There are exceptions, but the trend skews heavily toward young men. Consider Jack Teixeira, the U.S. airman who leaked classified documents on Discord—he was immersed in that same environment. Robinson fits the broader pattern of young men drawn to radical forums.
He was not an incel, since he was in a relationship, and we do not know if he was a misogynist. However, we do know he had fringe interests, such as the furry community, and was reportedly obsessed with pornography. He spent significant amounts of time consuming disturbing content, which likely worsened his psychological instability and fueled violent, nihilistic tendencies.
As for Charlie Kirk, he was not just an activist; he was deeply embedded in a political movement. Tucker Carlson was reportedly one of his mentors, having known him since the age of 18, and had donated $1 million to his organization. Carlson became one of the most influential voices shaping Kirk in recent years, particularly in the years leading up to his death. Carlson was a fixture at group events, pushed J.D. Vance’s rise to the vice presidency, appeared on Kirk’s memorial broadcast, and gave a controversial speech at the memorial itself.
At least 200,000 people attended the memorial speech. Tucker Carlson’s address included a reference to “hummus eaters” being responsible for the killing of Jesus. That was strange on multiple levels. Historically, hummus recipes first appeared in Egypt, centuries after they were introduced in Roman Judea, not in the region where Roman authorities executed Jesus. They certainly were not eating hummus. The reference was clearly meant to target Jews. Carlson later attempted to clarify by claiming he meant the Pharisees, but if that had been his intention, he could have stated it directly. Anyone familiar with scripture would know who the Pharisees were.
The remarks sparked outrage in the Jewish community, drawing comparisons to classic antisemitic tropes from church history and even to Mel Gibson’s controversies. More right-wing Christians, especially those leaning toward Christian nationalism, defended Carlson, claiming nothing was wrong with his statement and arguing that even Saint Paul’s actions could be seen as antisemitic. That criticism of Paul—that he created hostility toward Jews to unify early Christianity—has been made by scholars. However, Carlson showed no such theological nuance. His words reflected crude tropes, not informed debate about Christian origins.
More disturbing than the “hummus” remark was that Carlson seemed to compare Charlie Kirk to Jesus. That kind of messianic framing is dangerous. It fed into J.D. Vance’s rhetoric, where he suggested that “they” killed Kirk, not Tyler Robinson alone. “They” being the political left, supposedly conspiring together. Despite investigations uncovering no evidence of co-conspirators, this idea persisted. Figures like Stephen Miller claimed the entire Democratic Party should be seen as a domestic terrorist organization. Donald Trump went so far as to designate Antifa as a terrorist group, despite lacking the legal authority and despite Antifa not having a formal organizational structure.
Meanwhile, voices on both the far right and far left have blurred Antifa’s identity. Some equate it with violent groups that created resistance enclaves in Seattle and Portland. In reality, antifascist movements trace back to communist parties in Germany and the Soviet Union, including the Jewish Anti-Fascist Committee in the USSR. The legacy is complex, but conflation serves today’s political agendas more than historical accuracy.
The Jewish Anti-Fascist Committee, which consisted of Jewish communists opposed to the Nazis, met an unfortunate end under Stalin. Many people today do not know this history or where the term “Antifa” actually comes from. It has since been misused, even by those who first adopted it. The original struggle was essentially a political battle between communists and Nazis, not a principled fight against authoritarianism in all forms. Now the label has been adapted by radical activists, often violent, who use it without understanding the history.
This failure to distinguish between the original meaning and today’s usage has fueled conflations in the aftermath of Kirk’s death. In response, we are seeing proposals such as minting 400,000 silver dollars with his face and renaming local streets in his honour. Some municipalities have adopted these measures, but nothing on a large national scale. His wife appears to be stepping into a leadership role at Turning Point, but whether she is the face of the entire “Kirkian movement” is another question. More likely, Carlson and a broader group of conservative and pro-Trump voices, now filling Kirk’s speaking slots on campuses, will become the public face of the organization.
One overlooked point is that Trump reportedly said he thought Kirk could one day become president. The long-term strategy behind funding and grooming his organization is to prepare him for political office. When Kirk is compared to political martyrs like Martin Luther King Jr. or John and Robert Kennedy, the implication is that he might have been groomed for leadership of the conservative movement—or even for the presidency. While Kirk was a highly successful organizer and activist, he did not articulate a distinct political philosophy in the manner of someone like William F. Buckley. Still, his trajectory could have mirrored Barack Obama’s path from community organizer to national office.
Jacobsen: All right, enjoy your flight.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/27
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: The Latin informatio originally meant giving form or shape—” to give form to something.” Scholastic thinkers adapted it to mean the soul being informed or “shaped” by truth or intellect. Medieval scholasticism, which dominated Europe from approximately 1100 to 1700, combined Christian theology and classical philosophy. Aristotle’s doctrine of hylomorphism holds that every physical thing is a compound of matter (the substrate) and form (the actuality or organization). In scholastic thought, the soul was often seen as the substantial form of a living body—what makes a body alive.
The idea of information was conveyed between people. Natural philosophy saw it as descriptive—something collected, catalogued, and observed. In the nineteenth century, it took on bureaucratic and journalistic meanings. Then, in 1948, with Claude Shannon, we arrived at the modern definition: information as a measurable reduction of uncertainty, quantified in bits. So, Rick, how does that history relate to what you are describing about the origins of the term’ information’?
Rosner: It really builds on the way you’ve described it—the form part of the word, the sense of giving form to something.
Information, you could argue, gives form to everything in the universe. The amount of information is proportional to the amount of definition the universe and its contents have.
In that way, it’s a lucky pairing between the word and what would become the future understanding of the word—it’s very appropriate. We’ve discussed the universe being defined by the number of particles, primarily photons and neutrinos, exchanged among the stable particles in the universe: protons, electrons, and neutrons. These interactions—
Like the “gunfight” I always reference in True Romance: everyone has a gun, everyone is shooting at everyone else. I used to call it a “Mexican gunfight,” but I should stop because that’s a racially tinged term. But the idea is that all these particle exchanges pin down the matter in the universe.
The fact that there isn’t an infinite number of exchanges means the universe contains only a finite amount of information. Each particle is incompletely pinned down—”fuzzy”—and that fuzziness is essentially its Planck wavelength. It’s a nice marriage between the word, which means “giving form,” and one of the main ways information actually works.
Much of what has survived from the ancients is probably the most innovative material they said or wrote. They had some good ideas, but often lacked solid scientific evidence. The reasoning was clever but often wrong, because they were working from so little.
Some reasoning did work because they had enough evidence. For example, Eratosthenes calculated the circumference of the Earth by measuring the shadows cast by two sticks simultaneously in different cities. He reasoned that the sun was directly overhead in one place, but not in the other, because of the Earth’s curvature. He then performed calculations based on that observation.
Eratosthenes calculated the circumference of the Earth using shadows from two cities about fifty miles apart. I don’t know how he determined “the same time” without clocks, but he figured it out and made a decent calculation.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/26
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee.
Tsukerman joins Scott Douglas Jacobsen to examine the right’s internal rifts, free-speech boundaries, and identity-based accusations. The discussion ranges from alleged responses to Charlie Kirk’s killing and the Jimmy Kimmel controversy to how “cancel culture” claims collide with private employer actions. They parse antisemitic tropes in media, obscure “Frankism” references, and the difference between criticism and defamation. Policy flashpoints include gender-affirming care for minors, fairness in women’s sports, HIV progress amid ACT’s planned wind-down, a Nova Scotia abuse case, and hardline trade/immigration proposals. The throughline: resist conspiratorial thinking, uphold pluralism, and balance inclusion with civil-liberties rigor.
Interview published September 19, 2025.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We were focusing on the Charlie Kirk–Jimmy Kimmel situation and broader Western governance challenges. Charlie Kirk’s killing is, by current evidence, most accurately categorized as a political assassination. It does not necessarily meet the definition of terrorism unless tied to a broader ideological campaign.
Domestic political assassination, as I described, is a downstream symptom of a larger issue. It has two main dimensions. First, there are subterranean corners of the online world—spaces not well captured in the mainstream—where the far right battles internally. On one side are extremists: selective Christian literalists, ethnic supremacists, or fusions of both. On the other side are hardline conservatives who may or may not tie their ideology to religion.
Charlie Kirk was seen by some as “not far enough right” for those on the extreme fringe. That tension reflects an internal struggle within the right itself.
Second, the framing of Kirk’s killing as a conflict between left and right—or even center and right—is misleading. The fight is happening within a narrow band of the right. Young men, in particular, are being informationally isolated, radicalized, and drawn into these inflection points.
Irina Tsukerman: Yes, I think that is a fair delineation. But I would add that the broader clash between the radical left and the right has contributed to this dynamic. In some ways—through a kind of “horseshoe theory”—the far right and the far left resemble each other more than they do the mainstream right or center.
For instance, many people defending the firings of those who criticized Charlie Kirk, or who expressed glee at his death, argue their response is backlash against the far left’s “cancel culture.” They contend that cancellation has swept up not only people guilty of bigotry or hate speech but also those who simply held views at odds with the hard left.
This narrative even extends to Donald Trump. His removal from major social media platforms at the end of his presidency remains highly controversial. On one hand, he was still the sitting president at the time; on the other, he had repeatedly violated platform terms of service, denied the legitimacy of the election, and contributed—at least indirectly—to the chaos of January 6 and the wave of election denial that followed.
The Biden administration’s later engagement with social media companies about enforcement of terms of service sparked legal challenges, which added to the controversy.
What began as a reasonable debate over the limits of regulating speech online has now morphed into a broader cultural and political fault line.
This also concerns the separation between government and private companies. The same people who recently promoted “free speech absolutism,” lecturing across Europe about free speech, and even hosted Nigel Farage complaining about alleged violations in the U.K.—specifically against Russian-backed personalities traveling with the sole purpose of inciting unrest—immediately shifted after Charlie Kirk’s death. They reverted to grievance narratives to justify crackdowns on free speech and expression.
This extended far beyond denouncing calls for violence against conservatives or rhetoric that bordered on justifying assassination. Some of the comments may have been provocative, but they likely did not meet the legal threshold for incitement to violence, which under the Brandenburg standard requires intent, imminence, and likelihood. Still, it is understandable why private employers, concerned with reputational risk, would be alarmed. But many of the comments that drew firings or calls for termination were not even close to that legal red line.
Some remarks were in poor taste, but not provocative; others were simply critical of Kirk and his legacy. In Jimmy Kimmel’s case—one of the most extreme examples—he was primarily critical of the MAGA movement as a whole, not of Kirk personally, and certainly did not justify Kirk’s murder. Some argued that ABC was already unhappy with Kimmel’s ratings and sought an excuse to move on; the FCC pressure and public outrage gave them cover. Still, the speed of his removal—literally before an episode taping—suggests fear and political pressure, not just contract convenience.
A broad coalition spoke out against FCC involvement: commentators from the left, like Andrew Sullivan; centrist editorial boards such as The Free Press; mainstream outlets like The Wall Street Journal; center-right Democrats like Noah Smith; Republicans outside the MAGA faction; and libertarians, including Reason magazine and the Cato Institute. With such a wide range of defenders, it is clear that the intervention by the FCC—and by Trump-aligned circles seeking to suppress criticism of Kirk—went far beyond ordinary debates about whether “language is violence.”
This was about protecting a cloistered political circle, defending its own interests through obvious double standards, grievance politics, and expectations of special treatment, rather than any principled reasoning about speech.
Critics of Kirk or the MAGA movement have been mischaracterized as people celebrating his death or calling for violence. This conflates First Amendment rights with private companies’ decisions to fire employees—or being pressured to do so—which is not the same thing.
Second, there is now an extremely sycophantic attitude within MAGA circles, essentially demanding total conformity in mourning Kirk. Anyone who does not grieve publicly and enthusiastically is accused of disloyalty. Some observers mocked this by posting memes comparing it to North Korea in 2012, when mourners were reportedly arrested for not appearing sufficiently emotional after Kim Jong-il’s death.
This expectation of performative loyalty has created thorny divisions between the right and the far right. On one side are those saying Kirk’s legacy should be defended: that he was a good person whose work advanced conservative identity and fostered public discourse. On the other side are those spreading conspiracy theories—claiming Kirk was “as bad as his critics say” and that his death was orchestrated by Jews or Israel.
Jacobsen: As one commentator warned, nearly every conspiracy theory eventually collapses into antisemitism, making Jews the scapegoat. This pattern has reappeared here.
Tsukerman: The disturbing irony is that the very faction promoting this narrative—the Tucker Carlson, Candace Owens, Mike Flynn, Jack Posobiec, Dave Smith, Ian Carroll circle—were some of Kirk’s closest allies in his final years.
Kirk continued to feature many of them prominently. Even after his falling out with Candace Owens over her public break with Trump, he hosted her as recently as last December at a Turning Point USA event. Others in that group, including Tucker Carlson and Steve Bannon, were also involved in those gatherings. In fact, Tucker Carlson is scheduled to give a keynote speech at Kirk’s memorial in Arizona.
Tsukerman: Tucker Carlson and J.D. Vance even hosted a memorial segment on Kirk’s show—ironically enough. Carlson has become the ringleader setting the tone for that sub-faction of MAGA, and Kirk’s death has revealed just how deeply MAGA is split, almost on the scale of the fissures we saw around Jeffrey Epstein.
Even within the far-right elements of MAGA—not just mainstream Trump supporters but the hardcore loyalists—there is division. Some support FCC crackdowns and demand total defense of Kirk as a “great man” whose critics are lying. Others argue that Kirk should be defended precisely because he was “exactly what his critics said”—that his legacy of extreme rhetoric is what they want remembered, and that is why, they claim, he was killed.
There has been a lot of cherry-picking of Kirk’s record to support these divergent narratives. More traditional conservatives acknowledge that his campus platforms for far-right personalities were problematic, feeding extremist currents inside MAGA. The far-right responses, though, split into two camps: one excusing everything Kirk did, denying any wrongdoing, and another embracing the most extreme aspects of his legacy. So even within the far-right there are two clashing visions, while a broader right vs. far-right divide plays out around free speech and the Jimmy Kimmel controversy.
Jacobsen: To clarify the spectrum—on the right, who counts as “mainstream,” and how far does the far-right extend? For example, have openly neo-Nazi outfits like Stormfront commented on Kirk’s death, or are they staying hands-off? I know Nick Fuentes has weighed in, but where does he fall in this spectrum?
Tsukerman: That is a useful distinction. Fuentes is firmly far-right but not necessarily the farthest extreme. Explicitly neo-Nazi groups appear to be keeping their distance, likely calculating that letting MAGA’s far-right carry the anti-Jewish conspiracy narrative benefits them without exposing themselves. Very few MAGA figures, even the most radical, openly identify with Nazi sympathies.
Interestingly, both Kirk and Fuentes had separate fallings-out with Candace Owens. For Kirk, the breaking point was not her antisemitism—he tolerated that far longer—it was her increasingly bizarre conspiracy theories against Trump and other MAGA figures.
That was the line Kirk would not cross. Nick Fuentes, interestingly, confronted Candace Owens on her antisemitism—not because he opposed it, but because he thought it was crude and ignorant. He accused her of being a “primitive antisemite,” spreading conspiracy theories that were nonsensical and disconnected from the older, more established antisemitic narratives. His argument was essentially: your conspiracies are weak, let me show you the “real” ones.
He tried to position himself as the “serious” voice of antisemitism, claiming that Owens’ narratives were amateurish. It was grotesque but revealing. Fuentes, abhorrent as his views are, can articulate them more coherently than Owens, which makes him more effective. Owens, by contrast, has become increasingly incoherent.
So neither Kirk nor Fuentes broke with Owens because of her antisemitism. Their disputes came from other issues—Kirk over her conspiracies about Trump and MAGA, and Fuentes over her lack of ideological sophistication.
Jacobsen: And in terms of where to draw the line with groups like the Groypers?
Tsukerman: Fuentes and the Groypers would not have called for shutting down Kirk’s critics outright. Publicly, they had been at odds with him on various issues. What complicates matters is that some of Kirk’s most aggressive critics overlap ideologically with Antifa-aligned factions, especially in their willingness to justify violence. The assassin himself—whether tied more closely to Antifa or Groypers—appears to have drawn from both worlds.
This shows how, paradoxically, there are areas where Antifa and Groypers converge, including their embrace of violence.
On the antisemitic side, none of these factions have drifted into the most outlandish supernatural conspiracies—the “lizard people” or similar delusions. Instead, their rhetoric remains in the “classical” antisemitic register: finance, politics, backroom deals. Still delusional, but grounded in worldly scapegoating rather than metaphysical fantasy.
Candace Owens, though, came closer to that supernatural strain. She has not gone as far as reptilian theories, but she has invoked Frankism—a bizarre 18th-century heretical movement sometimes twisted into modern conspiracy theories. That already pushes her into territory where antisemitism bleeds into the mystical.
Jacobsen: Niche, boutique antisemitism. This involves essentially someone who became an apostate from Judaism, almost like a self-proclaimed messianic figure, but in ways that are not remotely consistent with traditional Judaism.
Tsukerman: This is Jacob Frank, the 18th-century leader of the Frankist movement. He broke with Judaism and declared himself a messianic figure, blending distorted Kabbalistic ideas with a cult of personality. His movement collapsed, but it has lingered in the margins of antisemitic lore.
The irony is that Frankism is not well known—barely even among Jews, and certainly not among most antisemites. That is why Fuentes criticized Candace Owens. She dredged up obscure, exotic narratives that are far removed from conventional antisemitic tropes. They are buried so deeply in history that most people have no context for them.
Jacobsen: One more thing: the gender dynamic. When I interviewed the president of Mensa International, he pointed out that among men especially, debates often descend into “my IQ is bigger than your IQ”—a kind of intellectual chest-thumping. That is happening here too. Nearly all the central players outside Candace Owens are men.
Tsukerman: We should note Marjorie Taylor Greene—MTG. She was cited in Kirk’s texts as proof that he had become anti-Israel, which his far-right critics seized on to bolster their claim that they were “correct” about him. Kirk himself also featured her.
MTG represents the bizarre mystical end of this spectrum. She is infamous for claiming Jewish space lasers caused wildfires and that Jews control the weather. Her rhetoric is not rooted in physics or reality; it veers into quasi-naturalistic fantasy. At times she implies advanced technology like satellites, at others it is just mystical control. She oscillates between pseudo-science and magical thinking.
So MTG, more than anyone else in this circle, embodies the descent into conspiratorial mysticism—where antisemitism shifts from political scapegoating into outright fantasy.
Jacobsen: One of the tactics I have noticed is how critics sometimes move from attacking arguments to turning the individual into a type. You become the embodiment of “all the negative traits of the West.” At that point, it is no longer about debate; it is typifying, almost dehumanizing. I have learned that you do not have to take part in your own abuse. You can maintain dignity and simply step away.
Tsukerman: I have seen this play out personally. I once made a mild criticism about discussions of relocating Gazans to South Sudan. I raised concerns about the cholera epidemic there—it seemed like it would not end well for either population. In response, I was attacked as an antisemite. It is the same accusation Norman Finkelstein often receives—being labeled a “self-hating Jew.”
The irony is that when people cry antisemitism for trivial reasons, they hand a gift to actual antisemites. It allows real antisemites to claim that any concern about antisemitism is just a cover for shielding Israel from criticism. That dynamic is corrosive because it delegitimizes the fight against genuine antisemitism.
Jacobsen: There is the male-majoritarian element—ego contests among men who dominate these movements. That could be satirized, almost like Homer Simpson or Peter Griffin caricatures of fragile male ego. At the same time, the real conflict is within the right and far right, yet the collateral damage often falls on centrists and left-leaning figures.
Tsukerman: Far-right movements generally have antisemitism at their core. It is a common thread. Some far-right groups mirror have a tactic in another context. They accuse anyone criticizing Charlie Kirk, or them, of being “anti-Christian.” It is a parallel rhetorical move—weaponizing identity accusations to shut down dissent.
Jacobsen: The Groypers often camouflage themselves with progressive-sounding imagery and language, which is no accident. It is a deliberate strategy.
Tsukerman: Also, Trump just announced raising H-1B visa fees to $100,000. That effectively eliminates access except for mega-corporations and the top-tier Fortune 50 or Fortune 400 companies. In Canada, by comparison, international graduate students might pay around $10,000 annually for tuition, maybe $25,000 at most. But a $100,000 visa fee is unprecedented. People are questioning whether it is even legal.
Jacobsen: It seems their tone has shifted. Now they are calling for the U.S. to withdraw from the World Trade Organization altogether. The irony is that pulling out of the WTO would only leave a vacuum. If the U.S. abandons these multilateral institutions, it is obvious who fills the gap—China, perhaps with some European influence, like France’s recent efforts at rapid response.
Tsukerman: Even with criticisms of organizations like the WHO, membership carries advantages. Leaving the WTO or WHO hands the rule-making power to rivals.
Jacobsen: I interviewed someone for Skeptical Inquirer recently for an article on brain drain, and she made a striking point: the U.S. loses immensely when it drives away H-1B visa holders. These individuals do not just work jobs—they create whole industries, generate wealth, and redistribute economic benefits across regions, often into struggling Midwestern states. Yet those very populations often resent them.
I told reflected on the Edward Witten story—it felt surreal hearing his reasoning articulated so clearly in real time. People like Witten are once-in-a-generation figures. Restricting entry through exorbitant H-1B fees risks another “Yellow Peril”-style panic, or worse, conflating anti-China sentiment with antisemitic tropes. Anti-Asian scapegoating could easily fuse with older antisemitic narratives.
Tsukerman: The MAGA narrative about blue-collar workers is contradictory. On one hand, they argue that college is unnecessary, that trade jobs pay well and guarantee security. There is some truth—many trades are essential and resistant to automation. Yet, at the same time, they claim blue-collar men are victims of neglect and economic abandonment. They cannot have it both ways.
Anyway, I have got the draft title: Is This the Right Fight? Wrong Turn on Right (Part One). We will use this series to map the “sentimentology” of these factions. Sadly, I doubt Jimmy Kimmel will be the last target. Historically, Republicans have used federal government institutions to push back, while progressives have relied more on academia. That is why conservatives are so focused on universities like Harvard—they see them as the most powerful liberalizing institutions in the world.
Jacobsen: Thank you for your time. I will see you next Friday, hopefully with a calmer week and more rest.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/25
In this Fumfer Physics dialogue, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Rick Rosner explore the layered nature of time. Jacobsen frames three concepts: time at quantum scales where it appears quasi-atemporal, the emergent unfolding of objective cosmic time, and the subjective, often dilatory, human experience of time. Rosner explains time as embodied in the differentiation of matter and the creation of information, comparing it to the sequential turning of pages in a book. He argues that the universe defines itself through particle interactions and their cumulative history, with the total information constrained by matter content, expansion, and entropy reservoirs.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you—this is for Fumfer Physics 4—how do you distinguish between the quasi- or atemporal notion of the world at very small magnitudes, and an emergent sense of time, and then the subjective sense of time we have, which has a dilatory quality? Three concepts: one, the emergent nature of time; two, the objective time embodied in the larger world apart from us; and three, our own subjective sense of time.
Rick Rosner: Let us start with the embodiment and emergence of time. Time is embodied. It is inextricably linked to the creation of information through the differentiation of matter. As matter evolves from an undifferentiated soup into distinct particles, forming relationships and clumping into larger objects, time unfolds in conjunction with this process. It is not that the process occurs inside a pre-existing framework of time. Time itself is an inextricable property of the unfolding. Imagine a sequence of pages in a book: each page is the next moment. Time is the unfolding of information at the active center of a universe. A universe has reservoirs to absorb entropy, allowing for a continuous blooming and unfolding of information, which drives and embodies the forward progression of time. All right, next question. Rotten Tomatoes.
Jacobsen: What do you think of the title Fumfer Physics, by the way?
Rosner: It is fine. Pretty funny if you know what fumfering is.
Jacobsen: I learned that from you.
Rosner: Yes.
Jacobsen: Because you do sometimes. There are numerous additions to the informational content of the universe that have been built through interactivity. The information is defined by its internal interactions and that contributes to the total information content of the universe.
Rosner: I am not sure exactly what you are asking, but I think the answer is that the universe defines itself—the space it occupies, the particles, the sharpness and scale of those particles, their interactions, and the cumulative history of those interactions. So what was the question again?
Jacobsen: Is information added to the universe through its self-interaction? So it cumulatively adds more information into parts of itself.
Rosner: There is a limit to how much information a universe can contain based on the number of particles it has. These particles, through interactions, can only define each other and their space to a certain extent. The definition of particles and space tends toward a maximum: particles, through interactions, maximize the information possible in a universe of this size. To increase definition, the universe must add more particles. The amount of information in a universe is roughly proportional to the amount of matter—the number of particles it contains. That looks like a Big Bang universe: expanding but decelerating. You can call it a flat universe—one with just enough kinetic energy to expand indefinitely, no more. An icy universe resembles this flat state. It never reaches the Big Bang’s end state of endless coasting and expansion until all stars burn out, leaving a slow, cold, empty landscape. An icy universe avoids that fate. As the universe decelerates, other galaxies from near T0 become visible as their light finally reaches us while our relative velocity slows. That is how new matter from the early universe becomes, gradually, observable.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/24
British Columbia, CANADA, September 2025 /www.in-sightpublishing.com/ — In-Sight Publishing announced the release of Noesis: The Journal of the Mega Society (November 2014–June 2025) by Scott Douglas Jacobsen, a comprehensive 524-page collection of contributions to the Mega Society’s official journal spanning more than ten years. The first edition was released on September 2, 2025: https://in-sightpublishing.com/books/.
It is available on Apple Books (ISBN: 978-1-0692343-8-4). Noesis has been the forum for intellectual exchange within the Mega Society—an organization whose members theoretically qualify at the one-in-a-million level of cognitive rarity (megasociety.org).
The volume includes member contributions, featuring two forewords by Dr. Benoit Desjardins and Daniel Shea, as well as a prologue by Rick Rosner. Foreword author Dr. Benoit Desjardins, academic physician and Mega Society member, praised the project’s ambition, writing that he was “immediately struck by the ambition” behind the compilation.
The collected Noesis submissions create “a rich mosaic of high-level inquiry” across an eclectic range of genres and topics. Readers will find a diversity of views. This reflects the journal’s mission to balance intellectual rigour with human insight.
From philosophy, mathematics, and science to history and personal narratives, the compendium tackles profound questions. Recurring themes throughout the 2014–2025 submissions by Jacobsen include the search for meaning, the interplay of reason and imagination, and the role of extreme intelligence in society.
Contributors engage deeply with these subjects, but they also infuse the pages with wit, artistry, and personal perspective. The result: A chronicle of a unique intellectual community. This complex presentation serves as a record of the community.
Publication Data
Title: Noesis: The Journal of the Mega Society (November 2014–June 2025)
By: Scott Jacobsen (Apple Books listing)
Publisher: In-Sight Publishing
Publication Date: September 2, 2025 (Apple Books)
Format: ePub (Apple Books)
Length: 524 pages (Apple Books)
ISBN: 978-1-0692343-8-4 (In-Sight Publishing listing)
About the Mega Society
The Mega Society is an independent society for high-IQ individuals. Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin founded it in 1982. Hypothetically, it represents a credible membership of individuals who have scored at the one-in-a-million level on a credible experimental test of cognitive abilities—the only one of its type formerly listed in the Guinness Book of World Records. By implicit design, the society remains small. Noesis: the Journal of the Mega Society has been the official journal of the Mega Society for decades. The publication’s endurance over the years highlights the society’s mission.
About In-Sight Publishing
In-Sight Publishing is an independent imprint. It operates autonomously, without institutional attachment, to safeguard academic freedom in its work. Founded in 2014 by Scott Douglas Jacobsen with an experimental precursor in what became In-Sight: Interviews (ISSN: 2369-6885, In-Sight Publishing focuses on delivering insightful, interview-based journals and intellectual literature to a global audience. The catalogue spans a range of scholarly and creative titles. These include specialized journals to comprehensive thematic interview collections. Noesis: The Journal of the Mega Society (Nov 2014–June 2025) is the latest example of In-Sight’s dedication to preserving and promoting high-level discourse in published form.
Media Contact
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Publisher, In-Sight Publishing, Scott.Jacobsen2025@Gmail.Com.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/24
Rick Rosner: If we’re going to do Fumfer for Physics, let me quickly lay out the principles of informational cosmology.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What principles define informational cosmology? The guiding idea is that the universe processes information, and the patterns by which it does so show strong, useful parallels with how we encode, store, and transform information. Follow that line and the question of consciousness becomes unavoidable—what it is, how it relates to information, and whether an informational ontology can make sense of subjective experience.
Rosner: You don’t entirely agree with me on this.
Jacobsen: True.
Rosner: However, in an extensive, self-consistent information-processing system, high levels of multimodal real-time information processing resemble the phenomenon of consciousness. Consciousness is a characteristic of high-level information processing. It’s advantageous to the system. As conscious beings, we have feelings tied to our consciousness, and those feelings help us prioritize and navigate the world. The leading theory in brain science is that our brains evolved to help us decide what to do in every next moment, to choose the best way to situate ourselves. Consciousness and the feeling of being conscious play a role in making that system effective. Our emotions and judgments are tied to survival; they’re helpful. So even if it sounds abstract, consciousness is indeed a valuable part of an information-processing system. How we feel about ourselves, others, and the world helps us survive long enough to reproduce and raise the next generation. That’s how evolution works—we’re the latest generation in billions that perpetuated the species by reproducing. Current neuroscience suggests that your memories and everything you know are likely encoded in your connectome—the entire set of connections among your neurons via dendrites. We have around 10¹¹ neurons in the brain, each with roughly a thousand connections. Do I have my numbers right?
Jacobsen: Eighty-six billion neurons, each with one thousand to ten thousand connections.
Rosner: That’s closer to 10¹¹ neurons, each with about a thousand connections. Every connection has a tunable strength, and the entire set of connections is probably where our identity, awareness, and memories reside. So consciousness has a definite spatial structure in those connections, but also an informational structure. You could map the connections physically if you had the technology. However, the information they hold can also be represented abstractly in three spatial dimensions and one temporal dimension, with its own physics resembling that of the universe. That, in a nutshell, is informational cosmology: parallels between the physics and information processing of the universe and the physics and information processing of consciousness. They likely share characteristics. For example, the most efficient way to map the information in consciousness may be three spatial and one temporal dimension. Just as protons, electrons, and neutrons clump into structures and information travels via photons and neutrinos, you could imagine a similar structure for information in awareness. That’s informational cosmology in brief. The Big Bang theory postulates a spatially symmetric universe—every point in space looks roughly like every other—but temporally asymmetric, because each moment seems different from the last. The common analogy is that of a balloon being blown up: every point on the surface looks the same, but the balloon continues to expand. So in the Big Bang universe, you can’t easily know where you are in space, but you can always see where you are in time. That doesn’t work for a model of the brain as an information processor. Our brains handle roughly the same amount of information throughout our lives. You may know more at 60 than at 20, but the overall capacity is stable. That doesn’t match an ever-expanding Big Bang universe. A helpful model of consciousness as an information universe should be temporally symmetric. The information map of your consciousness at 30 shouldn’t look drastically different at 40; your brain’s structure at full capacity looks roughly the same year to year. That symmetry doesn’t align with a Big Bang model, where the universe appears different over time. So for most of my life, I’ve been trying—lazily, I admit—to sketch a temporally symmetric cosmology: galaxies flare, burn out, collapse, and others ignite in a rolling sequence of bangs. That rolling series of bangs seems like a better analogy.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/23
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: From an information-theoretic perspective that marries quantum mechanics with general relativity, how would you contrast a black hole with a star, an information-processing object embedded in the wider cosmos?
Rick Rosner: We do not yet have a complete definition of what information is, or the exact context needed for something to be considered “information.” However, the behaviour of objects in the universe is related to how information shapes the world.
The rules of information—which incorporate quantum mechanics and some form of general relativity—are the rules governing the creation and definition of space, matter, and energy. Therefore, you must examine how information shapes black holes and how it creates the conditions that allow stars to exist and produce radiant energy. The entire framework remains unknown, but…
The mathematics of black holes supports the hypothesis, even among traditional physicists, that the universe itself might exist within a black hole. A black hole curves space so that nothing can escape, and you see a similar kind of curvature in an expanding Big Bang universe—or a contracting one. In either case, the universe is curved back onto itself.
That shape of space is underdetermined, but it is self-contained, self-defined, and filled with information.
A black hole is essentially a concentrated mass of information. Its space is defined far more intensely by the relationships among the matter and energy within it than in the broader universe. The scale of its space and curvature comes directly from differentiation among its contents.
By contrast, most non-collapsed matter in the more expansive universe, including stars, does not create such extreme gravitational gradients.
The difference between a black hole and a star is that a black hole is essentially a universe unto itself. In contrast, a star is an object within a universe. That is the short answer.
But each—the space around it, or the space comprising it—is defined by informational relationships among the matter in the universe. You have these little “information engines,” which are basically the five long-lasting particles: photons, neutrinos, protons, electrons, and neutrons.
Of course, those particles depend on supporting particles—you cannot have a proton without its constituent quarks, or without gluons to hold the nucleus together. However, it is the five big ones and their interactions, as well as the structures they form, that build the macro objects we recognize.
Think of it like a car. You think of the body, the engine, the wheels, maybe the transmission. Those are the principal components, but in reality, a vehicle is composed of 4,500 smaller parts that are linked together. Likewise, these information engines have the obvious significant components, but the rest of particle physics supports those.
So in any reasonable information-based universe, you have these little information engines forming macrostructures. Those macrostructures differentiate the matter within the universe in a way that contains, preserves, and transmits information.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
Scott Douglas Jacobsen recounts asking Ed Witten, often regarded as Einstein’s intellectual heir and the only physicist to win the Fields Medal, about the plausibility of white holes. Witten, during a keynote on black hole thermodynamics, compared white holes to balancing a pencil on its tip—possible in theory but statistically impossible. Jacobsen pressed further, asking how large a universe and how much time would be needed for one to form. Rick Rosner contextualized this in terms of entropy, event horizons, and informational cosmology, suggesting black holes might not seal off information completely but instead collapse into high-entropy matter or budding universes.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We can start with Ed Witten’s question. That was a dream. Literally a dream come true. I wanted to ask him one question.
Rick Rosner: Say what you asked him. First, explain who Witten is.
Jacobsen: Ed Witten is considered by many the heir to Einstein, whether or not they agree with superstring theory. His achievements in physics and mathematics are extraordinary. When there were five competing versions of string theory, he showed in one presentation that they were different aspects of the same overarching theory. He is the only physicist ever to win the Fields Medal, which is awarded in mathematics. People see him as a native speaker of both math and physics.
Rosner: So what did you ask him?
Jacobsen: There was a conference we organized through our institute. Witten spoke there as a keynote, followed by Leonard Susskind, another distinguished academic.
Witten was giving a presentation on black holes and black hole thermodynamics. At the end, he nodded to a hypothetical object—a white hole. In mathematics, it is valid, and in general relativity, it could have a physical correlate. A white hole is basically the time-reversed form of a black hole.
We have discussed white holes before, in various definitions. In practice, a white hole would look like a Big Bang explosion. Witten illustrated this with a pencil. He tried to balance it on its tip, could not, and snapped a photo before it fell over and dissipated energy. He said a white hole is like that in the universe: possible in principle, but as unlikely as balancing a pencil on its tip.
Someone asked whether a white hole is really possible or just a mathematical trick. Witten compared it to the pencil—statistically impossible, but still permitted by the laws of physics.
I followed up: If that is true, how big a universe would it be, and how much time would it take for a white hole to emerge? His simple definition was: a black hole is where everything goes in and nothing can come out; a white hole is where nothing can go in and everything can come out.
Rosner: So, the entropy of a black hole is proportional to the surface area of its event horizon. That is the defining feature: the event horizon is the spherical boundary beyond which nothing, not even light, can escape. It is the point of no return.
When two black holes merge, their combined surface area is larger than the sum of the individual areas, according to a theorem Stephen Hawking worked on. That is why surface area is central in black hole physics.
The reason is gravitational collapse. The closer you get to an object, the stronger the gravitational pull. On Earth, surface acceleration is about 10 meters per second squared. That is tiny compared to what is needed for a black hole. A black hole crams so much mass into such a tiny space that gravity becomes strong enough to trap light. The event horizon is the boundary where escaping would require travelling faster than light—impossible.
Under informational cosmology, we postulate that the speed of light is the ultimate limit.
Gravitational acceleration, no matter how collapsed the object, is not just created by the mass itself. It exists in relation to the rest of the universe. That is like Mach’s principle, which postulates that inertia is due to the motion of objects against the background of the universe. You would not have inertia without the rest of the universe to define motion against.
So, in informational cosmology, you would not have event horizons. Objects would still have entropy, but a black hole without an event horizon—since the speed of light is the ultimate limit—would always allow light to escape. It would be highly redshifted, stripped of nearly all its energy as it crawled out of the gravitational well, but information could still be transmitted in and out of the collapsed object.
The collapsing object would have most of its information squeezed out and become a ball of degenerate matter—a soup of undefined glop stripped of order. If you compressed Earth to nothing, all the structured order we see would be obliterated. That is what happens in a black hole: loss of information, loss of order, leaving behind a high-entropy object.
Unless, in collapsing, that glop somehow differentiates itself in a Big Bang–like way, generating a budding universe. Not truly a separate universe, since there are no event horizons, but a pocket within this one that builds its own information structures, looking like a Big Bang from the inside.
So, even without event horizons, you can still discuss entropy. The flow of information creates these objects.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Rick.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
*Information from best available data circa September 21, 2025.*
Charlie Kirk was murdered.
On September 10th, 2025, at an outdoor Turning Point USA event at Utah Valley University (UVU), Orem, Utah, with approximately 3,000 people in attendance, Kirk was struck by a bullet in the neck/throat while on stage.
The shot was fired from a sniper rifle from estimated ranges of more than 100 yards to about 200 yards. Kirk was transported to a nearby hospital and then pronounced dead. ABC on-scene reporting and officials stated no metal detectors or bag checks were present. The courtyard is bowl-shaped and ringed by buildings. UVU police coordinated with Kirk’s private security.
The rifle used to assassinate Kirk was the Mauser Model 98, .30-06 bolt-action with scope, which was recovered wrapped in a towel off-campus. Ammunition allegedly contained engravings or etchings with phrases. The spent round read ““NoTices Bulge OWO What’s This?” The suspect allegedly called the engravings “mostly a big meme.”
The evidence for a single shot was no shell casings on the roof and only one spent/three unspent rounds inside the rifle, as cited by prosecutors to support a single shot. The suspect of the assassination was Tyler James Robinson, aged 22.
Robinson’s family recognized him based on the released images. After speaking with a retired deputy sheriff, Robinson surrendered. Officials reported a time lapse between the murder and the acquisition of Robinson into custody was about 33 hours.
Robinson was held without bail. His first hearing: He appeared by video. The next hearing is scheduled for September 29, 2025. Some reports indicate a special watch or suicide-prevention smock while in jail.
The criminal charges filed in Utah are aggravated murder, felony discharge of a firearm causing serious bodily injury, obstruction of justice (multiple), violent offence in the presence of a child, and witness tampering (multiple).
Prosecutors seek the death penalty. Alleged aggravators are political targeting and the presence of children. Prosecutors cited texts from a roommate:
“I had enough of his hatred. Some hate can’t be negotiated out.”
A purported note is cited beneath a personal keyboard stating, “I had the opportunity to take out Charlie Kirk and I’m going to take it.” In addition, allegations include Discord messages citing Robinson confessing before the arrest, therefore, after the murder and before custody approximately 33 hours later.
Prosecutors cited an unusual gait purportedly consistent with the concealment of a rifle, movements to and from a rooftop, plus later retrieval attempts of the Mauser Model 98. DNA on the trigger linked to Robinson.
There was a public appeal reward up to 100,00USD with the FBI asking for public photos and videos from the event. Authorities allege political targeting on prior statements. Final motive is unadjudicated.
George Zinn, 71, was arrested for obstruction after a false confession amid the chaos; later charged in a separate child-sex-abuse-material case following a phone search—no link to the homicide.
Following the shooting, UVU shut down for several days then with a phased reopening. Classes resumed the following week. Full resumption September 17, 2025. UVU says its security posture and emergency alerts are under review.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
Distinguished colleagues, esteemed guests, and members of the broader scientific community, I welcome you to the proceedings of the fourth International Conference on Holography and its Applications at Khazar University.
We gather as theorists and experimentalists working across gravitational holography, quantum field theory in curved spacetime, and optical science. The premise of this meeting is straightforward and ambitious. When rigorous ideas are allowed to meet across subfields, they refine one another and understanding advances. Holography here is more than a metaphor. For instance, in high-energy theory, it has become a working language for unitarity, entropy, and the emergence of spacetime.
This conference is designed to keep these conversations proximate and mutually informative. Allow me to express gratitude before I begin. Our hosts at Khazar University have provided an environment where science can take precedence. The organizing community and volunteers have executed the quiet work of schedules, rooms, remote access, and the delicate choreography of microphones, slides, and discussion. To all invited speakers and contributors, your preparation makes the rest of this possible.
We are especially honoured to welcome—and thank in advance—Salvatore Capozziello, Robert B. Mann, Leonard Susskind, and Edward Witten.
Capozziello will deliver “Avoiding singularities in Lorentzian–Euclidean black holes: The role of atemporality,” a look at signature change and atemporality as routes to horizon regularization and singularity avoidance.
Mann will deliver “Doubly Holographic Quantum Black Holes,” an exploration of bulk–brane thermodynamics and the phase structure of quantum black holes in a doubly holographic framework.
Susskind, who will deliver “Observers in de Sitter Space,” an examination of physical observers (quantum reference frames) and their role in cosmological holography.
Witten, who will deliver “Introduction to black hole thermodynamics,” will provide a look at the laws, entropy, and quantum aspects that render black holes thermodynamic systems.
A few norms will help us earn the most from the following sessions. Questions should be as precise as equations, short, concrete, and oriented to the claim. Please indicate when you are offering an informed conjecture as distinct from a proven result. Speakers should foreground definitions and make explicit which approximations do the real work in the analysis.
The ideas migrate in the conference, error-correcting structures, informing gravitational reconstruction, quantum information metrics, Sharpen field theoretic intuition, and optical platforms offer analogs that can stress-test the theory. The program intentionally juxtaposes these strands to allow that migration to occur in real time, presented in Baku and around the world.
Science is international in two senses. The laws we study do not vary with jurisdiction, and the norms that allow that inquiry to flourish—openness, attribution, and respect—must travel with us. We will conduct these proceedings accordingly.
Extend collegiality across differences of approach and background; it improves the work and honours the people doing it. The most valuable outcome of any conference is not a slide deck, but a set of shared problems, clarified terms, and new collaborations. If by the close of these proceedings, we have a shorter list of confusions, a longer list of colleagues, and a few ideas, we will have succeeded. With that purpose in view, and on behalf of our hosts and organizers, may the discussions be exacting, the questions generous, and the results durable.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
“Biologic Institute is a non-profit research organization founded in 2005 for the purpose of developing a new approach to biology. Thanks to technological advances, the life sciences have become very effective at acquiring facts. What they need now is a theoretical foundation that makes sense of these facts. Some still claim that Darwin’s theory does just that, but the ongoing struggle to make sense of genomic data (for example) indicates otherwise.
Scientists affiliated with Biologic Institute are working from the idea that life appears to have been designed because it really was designed. That’s a hypothesis, not a theory, and while it obviously has huge philosophical implications (made even more huge by the the [sic] fact it appears to be correct) it doesn’t do much for biology if left at that.”
Biologic Institute
“The Intelligent Design creationists have also put up a simulacrum, the Biologic Institute, with fume hoods and white lab coats, from which they hope to summon scientific credibility. They’ve also been fooled into thinking the appearance is the same as the substance.
Since literal Cargo Cultists aren’t a significant presence in the US, but creationists are, I suggest we appropriate this holiday and call it Intelligent Design Day. Don’t worry about going to any effort to celebrate it, though—all you have to do is pretend that you are celebrating it, just as the Intelligent Design creationists pretend that they’re doing science.”
P.Z. Myers (2007)
“Big Intelligent Design may be following the path blazed by Big Tobacco.”
Reason Magazine (2007)
After the fall of The International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (Jacobsen, 2025) and its journal Progress in Complexity, Information, and Design (PCID), around 2005, another institution emerged out of the Discovery Institute (DI) community for Intelligent Design (ID) Creationism research, the Biologic Institute (2025a)–a U.S. 501(c)(3).
Douglas Axe was the founding scientific lead of Biologic Institute in 2005 (Biologic Institute, 2025a; Discovery Institute, 2025). Established in 2005 and largely funded through grants associated with Discovery Institute’s Center for Science and Culture; DI materials and BI’s own pages document close organizational ties (2025). Their leadership was comprised of 17 affiliates as of last listing: Douglas Axe, Günter Bechly, Stuart Burgess, Brendan Dixon, Winston Ewert, Ann Gauger, Guillermo Gonzalez, David Keller, Matti Leisola, Philip Lu, Robert J. Marks II, Brian Miller, Colin Reeves, Mariclair Reeves, Richard Sternberg, Jonathan Wells, and Lisanne Winslow (Biologic Institute, 2025b).
The established ideological grounding was ID Creationism (Cartwright, 2006). They wanted to challenge mainstream evolutionary biology primarily with appointments (Biever, 2006). The aim was to demonstrate a design perspective as producing better science than mainstream evolutionary biology while part of a larger ID Creationism covert religious culture war movement (Forrest, 2007). This was part of the “Wedge” strategy in the promotion of ID in education, public policy, and science (National Center for Science Education, 2008).
Primarily, it was active from the founding in 2005 to about the latest date of 2019 with occasional publishing into 2025, e.g., a single article in 2025 so far; therefore, a functional research space devoted to this research seems unlikely to be supportable (Young, 2021; BIO-Complexity, 2025a; The Sensuous Curmudgeon, 2021). Reporting in 2006 (New Scientist; summarized by NCSE) raised questions about BI’s lab operations and access.
Axe and colleagues published “Stylus: A System for Evolutionary Experimentation Based on a Protein/Proteome Model with Non-Arbitrary Functional Constraints” (2008) in PLOS ONE, beginning some research.
Biologic Institute launched the ID Creationism journal BIO-Complexity in 2010 (National Center for Science Education, 2010). Since 2010, BIO-Complexity has published dozens of papers across 16 annual volumes (2010–2025); publication cadence is modest compared to PCID (BIO-Complexity, 2025a). The Editor-in-Chief was Robert J. Marks II, and the founding editor was Douglas Axe (BIO-Complexity, 2025b).
The rest of the editorial board were William Basener, Günter Bechly, Michael Behe, Walter Bradley, Stuart Burgess, Russell Carlson, William Dembski, Marcos Eberlin, Winston Ewert, Charles Garner, Ann Gauger, Ola Hössjer, Peter Imming, James Keener, David Keller, Matti Leisola, Wolf-Ekkehard Lönnig, Jed Macosko, Tobias Mattei, Scott Minnich, Edward Peltzer, Colin Reeves, Ralph Seelke, Richard Sternberg, Scott Turner, Jiří Vácha, John Walton, and Jonathan Wells (Ibid.).
They aimed to test the scientific merit of ID Creationism (BIO-Complexity, 2025c). An IRS Form 990-EZ for the 2019 tax year (filed 2020) reflects modest finances (IRS, 2020). Their contact refers to the Center for Science and Culture (Biologic Institute, 2025c). In 2012, BI used a stock laboratory image in promotional material; coverage and DI commentary acknowledged the use of stock footage (Johnston, 2012; Hoppe, 2012; Klinghoffer, 2012).
Most of the funding for the Biologic Institute has been from DI (Biologic Institute, 2025a). The size of the financial contributions via ITS filings, the slow pace of publication, and the niche subject matter suggest that the research operation appears, at best, as a boutique operation that ceased physical operations many years ago. This follows the trends of ISCID, PCID, and numerous leading intellectuals of the ID movement from DI.
There is still more to review for this A Further Inquiry series.
References
Axe, D.A., Dixon, B.W., & Lu, P. (2008, June 4). Stylus: A System for Evolutionary Experimentation Based on a Protein/Proteome Model with Non-Arbitrary Functional Constraints. https://journals.plos.org/plosone/article?id=10.1371%2Fjournal.pone.0002246.
Bailey, R. (2006, December 19). Biologic Institute = Tobacco Institute. https://reason.com/2006/12/19/biologic-institute-tobacco-ins/.
Biever, C. (2006, December 13). Intelligent design: The God Lab. https://www.newscientist.com/article/mg19225824-000-intelligent-design-the-god-lab/.
Biologic Institute. (2025a). About. https://www.biologicinstitute.org/about.
Biologic Institute. (2025c). Contact. https://www.biologicinstitute.org/contact.
Biologic Institute. (2025b). People. https://www.biologicinstitute.org/people.
BIO-Complexity. (2025a). Archives. https://bio-complexity.org/ojs/index.php/main/issue/archive.
BIO-Complexity. (2025c). Editorial Policies. https://bio-complexity.org/ojs/index.php/main/about/editorialpolicies.
BIO-Complexity. (2025b). Editorial Team. https://bio-complexity.org/ojs/index.php/main/about/editorialTeam.
Cartwright, R.A. (2006, December 14). New Scientist Investigates Biologic Institute. https://pandasthumb.org/archives/2006/12/new-scientist-i.html.
Center for Science & Culture. (2025). About: Our Mission. https://www.discovery.org/id/about/.
Discovery Institute. (2025). Douglas Axe. https://www.discovery.org/p/axe/.
Forrest, B. (2007, July). Understanding the Intelligent Design Creationist Movement: Its True Nature and Goals. https://web.archive.org/web/20110519124655/http://www.centerforinquiry.net/uploads/attachments/intelligent-design.pdf.
Hoppe, R.B. (2012, December 18). The Disco ‘Tute’s fake laboratory. https://pandasthumb.org/archives/2012/12/the-disco-tutes-1.html.
IRS. (2020). BIOLOGIC INSTITUTE: Short Form Return of Organization Exempt From Income Tax. https://apps.irs.gov/pub/epostcard/cor/841670187_201909_990EZ_2020110417413291.pdf.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2025, August 22). The International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design and Intelligent Design Creationism. https://afurtherinquiry.substack.com/p/the-international-society-for-complexity.
Johnston, C. (2012, December 18). Intelligent design think tank’s “institute” is a Shutterstock image. https://arstechnica.com/science/2012/12/inteliigent-design-think-tanks-institute-is-a-shutterstock-image/.
National Center for Science Education. (2006, December 15). New Scientist visits the “God Lab”. https://ncse.ngo/new-scientist-visits-god-lab.
National Center for Science Education. (2010, November-December). The Latest “Intelligent Design” Journal. https://ncse.ngo/latest-intelligent-design-journal.
National Center for Science Education. (2008, October 14). The Wedge Document. https://ncse.ngo/wedge-document.
Myers, P.Z. (2007, February 15). Happy Intelligent Design Day!. Pharyngula. https://freethoughtblogs.com/pharyngula/2007/02/15/happy-intelligent-design-day/.
The Sensuous Curmudgeon. (2021, May 22). The Cosmic Aardvark Is Smiling. https://sensuouscurmudgeon.wordpress.com/2021/05/22/the-cosmic-aardvark-is-smiling/.
Young, M. (2021, May 23). Biologic Institute Closes. https://pandasthumb.org/archives/2021/05/biologic-institute-closes.html.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
The International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design and Intelligent Design Creationism
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
“The International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (ISCID) herewith announces its formation and official launch. ISCID is a cross-disciplinary professional society that investigates complex systems apart from external programmatic constraints like materialism, naturalism, or reductionism. The society is fully web-driven and can be reached via the Internet at http://www.iscid.org.
The society provides a forum for formulating, testing, and disseminating research on complex systems through critique, peer review, and publication. Its aim is to pursue the theoretical development, empirical application, and philosophical implications of information- and design-theoretic concepts for complex systems.”
International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design
“Progress in Complexity, Information, and Design (PCID) is a quarterly, cross-disciplinary, online journal that investigates complex systems apart from external programmatic constraints like materialism, naturalism, or reductionism. PCID focuses especially on the theoretical development, empirical application, and philosophical implications of information- and design-theoretic concepts for complex systems. PCIDwelcomes survey articles, research articles, technical communications, tutorials, commentaries, book and software reviews, educational overviews, and controversial theories. The aim of PCID is to advance the science of complexity by assessing the degree to which teleology is relevant (or irrelevant) to the origin, development, and operation of complex systems.”
Progress in Complexity, Information, and Design
“So in summary, what do we have? Firstly, neither Wells, Behe, Dembski nor Nelson appear to be currently publishing original research in mainstream scientific journals. Secondly, the research cited by ID supporters is not produced by ID supporters, and these authors do not see their research as supportive of the Discovery Institute’s anti-evolutionary program. Lastly, PCID’s review system is unorthodox and has not yielded any substantive advances in scientific inquiry being largely philosophical discussions, anti-establishment rhetorical diatribes or rehersals [sic] of jaded arguments from probability.”
John M. Lynch
Intelligent Design (ID) Creationism came to a head through The International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (ISCID). For an Indian-based publication which I wrote almost 300 articles for it, News Intervention, a decent article on the generic presentation of ISCID and more in-depth analysis of the publication record of PCID or the journal entitled Progress in Complexity, Information, and Design (PCID) is “Excavation of a Failure: The International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (ISCID)” (Jacobsen, 2022).
The core conclusions from the analysis were that ID is rebranded Creationism, sharing the same theological roots in divine intervention and Christian hermeneutics, as evidenced by statements from its founders (Ibid.). Both Creationism and ID failed to garner legitimacy in academia, courts, culture, and science (Ibid.).
ID’s architects openly tie the “Designer” to the Christian God and recast it in information-theory rhetoric (Ibid.). The Discovery Institute serves as the hub, with its leaders aging or dying without successors. Dembski left in 2016 but resurfaced around 2020 part-time and then more fully since 2021 (Science & Culture Today, 2021; Dembski, 2016), and the movement persists ideologically despite intellectual isolation (Jacobsen, 2022).
ISCID’s journal PCID served as the publishing pipeline, characterized by lax/conflicted review, limited output (~70 pieces), and a teleological focus (Ibid.). PCID’s activity faded after the 2005 Dover defeat (Ibid.).
The ID community is largely Euro-American Protestant men with advanced credentials, reflecting a sociopolitical project (Ibid.) and furthering the commentary in the prior pieces in this special series for A Further Inquiry and an archival piece for future curious audiences about the culture wars (not scientific, peer-reviewed intellectual combats) too (Ibid.).
Therefore, ID/ISCID/PCID failed because the enterprise is theological in substance and lacks evidential, rigorous science. A more pointed analysis of PCID is available at “What was the Professional Output of Intelligent Design?” (Jacobsen, 2022b).
By its analysis at the time, PCID was the most professional effort of the ID movement through ISCID to produce actual scholarly output (Ibid.). PCID reflects ISCID wholeheartedly as a teleological emphasis while borrowing the terminology of information theory (Ibid.).
Governance and review were compromised as ISCID Fellows doubled as PCID’s advisory/peer-review body (Ibid.). Publication could proceed with a single Fellow approval while under a concentrated editorial control, showcasing conflicts of interest and a weak formalization of rigour (Ibid.).
The total output was eight electronic issues from 2002-2005 with small or low-impact research outcomes (Ibid.). This is despite an extensive organization network, making PCID its flagship publication (Ibid.). As a research program attempt, PCID is a crucial archival representation of the failure of the ID research program (Ibid.).
As noted, there were 57 ISCID Fellows from a variety of academic disciplines and backgrounds. Let us do a coverage of them, as enough time has passed to see a then and now comparison and contrast. This will be an A to Z alphabetical listing by last name. This will be tedious, but necessary as an archival work and sourced from publicly available materials:
The ISCID Fellow is Bernard d’Abrera. Bernard d’Abrera (Australian lepidopterist and author associated with the Natural History Museum, London) died January 13, 2017. Michael Behe is in Biochemistry at Lehigh University. He is still a Professor of Biological Sciences at Lehigh University and a Senior Fellow at Discovery Institute’s Center for Science and Culture (CSC).
John Bloom was a Professor of Physics & Philosophy of Science at Biola University. Now, he is Professor Emeritus of Physics at Biola University and the founding director of Biola’s M.A. in Science & Religion.
Walter L. Bradley was in the Mechanical Engineering department at Texas A&M University. Now, he is dead, circa July 2, 2025. Neil Broom was in the department of Biophysics at the University of Auckland. Now, he is Emeritus Professor of Chemical & Materials Engineering at the University of Auckland.
J. Budziszewski was in the Department of Philosophy & Political Theory at the University of Texas–Austin. Now, he is a Professor of Government and Philosophy at UT Austin. John Angus Campbell was a Professor of Communications at the University of Memphis. Now, he is a Professor Emeritus of Communication at the University of Memphis.
Russell W. Carlson was a Professor of Molecular Biology at the University of Georgia (Athens). Now, he is on the Faculty or in a Director Emeritus role at UGA’s Complex Carbohydrate Research Center.
David K. Y. Chiu was in the Department of Biocomputing at the University of Guelph. Now, he is Professor Emeritus in Computer Science at the University of Guelph. Robin Collins was in the Department of Cosmology & Philosophy of Physics at Messiah College. Now, he is Distinguished Professor of Philosophy & Department Chair at Messiah University.
William Lane Craig was in the Department of Philosophy at Talbot School of Theology at Biola. Now, he is Emeritus Research Professor of Philosophy at Talbot and leads Reasonable Faith. Kenneth de Jong was in the Department of Linguistics at Indiana University Bloomington. Now, he is a Professor of Linguistics at Indiana University.
William A. Dembski held various Mathematics roles while focusing as an independent. Now, he is a technology entrepreneur, a Founding/Senior Fellow of the Discovery Institute CSC and an active writer. Mark R. Discher was in the Department of Ethics at the University of St. Thomas. Now, he is a Theology/Ethics educator, e.g., Kino Catechetical Institute.
Daniel Dix was in the Department of Mathematics at the University of South Carolina. He was Professor Emeritus at USC. Now, he is dead circa 2023. Fred Field was in the Department of Linguistics at California State University. Now, he is Professor Emeritus at California State University, Northridge.
Guillermo Gonzalez was in the Department of Astronomy at Iowa State University. Now, he is a Research Scientist (Physics & Astronomy) at the University of Alabama in Huntsville. Bruce L. Gordon was in the Department of Philosophy of Physics at Baylor University. Now, he is Professor of the History & Philosophy of Science at Saint Constantine College (Houston) and has taught at Houston Christian University (formerly HBU).
David Humphreys was in the Department of Chemistry at McMaster University. Now, he is an emeritus or retired academic. Any public updates are limited to legacy profiles. Cornelius Hunter was in the Department of Biophysics at Seagull Technology. Now, he is a Discovery Institute Fellow who has been an engineer/scientist with industry roles. Any public updates are sparse.
Muzaffar Iqbal was in Science & Religion at the Center for Islam and Science. Now, he is the President of the Center for Islamic Sciences (Canada) and is the editor of the Integrated Encyclopedia of the Qur’an. Quinn Tyler Jackson was in Language & Software Systems independently. Now, he is a writer/technologist and listed with The Writers’ Union of Canada.
Conrad Johanson was in the Department of Clinical Neurosciences & Physiology at Brown Medical School. Now, he is Professor Emeritus at Brown University. Robert Kaita was in the Department of Plasma Physics at Princeton University. Then he was Researcher/Emeritus-affiliated at Princeton Plasma Physics Laboratory. Now, he is retired.
James P. Keener was in the Department of Mathematics & Bioengineering at the University of Utah. Now, he is the Distinguished Professor Emeritus in Mathematics at the University of Utah. Robert C. Koons was in the Department of Philosophy at the University of Texas–Austin. Now, he is a Professor of Philosophy at UT Austin. Younghun Kwon was in the Department of Physics at Hanyang University. Now, he is a Professor of Physics at Hanyang University (quantum information/AMO).
Christopher Michael Langan is the founder and President of the Mega Foundation (1999). He published his 56-page CTMU paper, “The Cognitive-Theoretic Model of the Universe: A New Kind of Reality Theory” (2002) in PCID. Now, he continues research work through the Mega Foundation, as a self-described “reality theorist.” Robert Larmer was in the Department of Philosophy at the University of New Brunswick. Now, he is a Professor & Department Chair in Philosophy at UNB Philosophy and the President of the Canadian Society of Christian Philosophers.
Matti Leisola was in the Department of Bioprocess Engineering at the Helsinki University of Technology. Now, he is a Professor Emeritus at Aalto University (formerly HUT). E. Stan Lennard was in the Department of Medicine at the University of Washington. Now, he is a retired surgeon/clinical professor. Any updated information is sparse. John Lennox was in the Department of Mathematics at the University of Oxford. Now, he is an Emeritus Professor of Mathematics & Fellow Emeritus at Green Templeton College, University of Oxford.
Gina Lynne LoSasso was qualified in Cognitive Neuroscience & Clinical Neuropsychology and worked with Christopher Michael Langan through the Mega Foundation & its Research Group. Now, she maintains an executive role with the Mega Foundation.
Jed Macosko was in the Department of Chemistry at La Sierra University. Now, he is a Professor of Physics at Wake Forest University and the President/Co-founder of AcademicInfluence.com. Bonnie Mallard was in the Department of Immunology at the University of Guelph. Now, she is a Professor in Pathobiology at the University of Guelph and is the inventor of HIR/Immunity+ livestock health technology.
Forrest M. Mims III was involved in Atmospheric Science research. Now, he continues atmospheric measurements and science writing. Scott Minnich was in the Department of Microbiology at the University of Idaho. Now, he is a Professor of Microbiology at the University of Idaho.
Paul Nelson was involved in the Philosophy of Biology at the Discovery Institute. Now, he is a Senior Fellow at the Discovery Institute’s Center for Science & Culture. Filip Palda was in the Department of Economics at ÉNAP (Montréal). Now, he is dead, circa 2017.
Edward T. Peltzer III was associated with Ocean Chemistry and later affiliated with MBARI. Now, he is retired from MBARI and is a long-time Senior Research Specialist/Program Manager. Alvin Plantinga was in the Department of Philosophy at the University of Notre Dame. Now, he is the John A. O’Brien Professor Emeritus at the University of Notre Dame.
Martin Poenie was in the Department of Molecular Cell & Developmental Biology at the University of Texas–Austin. Then he was a Retired/emeritus professor. Now, he is retired. Carlos E. Puente was in the Department of Hydrology & Theoretical Dynamics at the University of California, Davis. Now, he is a Professor Emeritus at UC Davis.
Del Ratzsch was in the Department of Philosophy of Science at Calvin College. Now, he is a Professor Emeritus of Philosophy at Calvin University. Jay Wesley Richards was involved in Philosophical Theology at the Discovery Institute. Now, he is a Senior Fellow/Director for The Heritage Foundation and a Professor at The Catholic University of America.
Terry Rickard was involved in Electrical Engineering at Orincon Corporation. Now, he is a senior technologist/executive, co-founded ORINCON, and has later roles at OptiMark and Lockheed Martin. John Roche was in the Department of History of Science at the University of Oxford. Now, he is dead, circa May 20, 2024 (Harris Manchester College, 2025).
Andrew Ruys was involved in Bioceramic Engineering at the University of Sydney. Now, he is a Professor of Engineering at the University of Sydney. Henry F. Schaefer III was involved in Quantum Chemistry at the University of Georgia (Athens). Now, he is the Graham Perdue Professor of Chemistry & Director of the Center for Computational Quantum Chemistry at the University of Georgia (Athens).
Jeffrey M. Schwartz, M.D., was involved in the Department of Psychiatry/Neuroscience at UCLA. Now, he is a Research Psychiatrist at UCLA and is an author on neuroplasticity/OCD. Philip S. Skell was involved in the Department of Chemistry at Penn State University. Now, he is dead, circa November 21, 2010.
Frederick Skiff was in the Department of Physics at the University of Iowa. Now, he is a professor of Physics & Astronomy at the University of Iowa. Karl D. Stephan was involved in the Department of Electrical Engineering at Southwest Texas State University. Now, he is a Professor at Texas State University, an engineering-ethics writer.
Richard M. Sternberg was involved in Systematics at NCBI-GenBank (NIH). Now, he is an independent/ID-affiliated scholar with no current formal institutional role publicly listed. Frank J. Tipler was involved in the Department of Mathematical Physics at Tulane University. Now, he is still a Professor of Mathematical Physics at Tulane University.
Jonathan Wells was involved in Developmental Biology at the Discovery Institute. Now, he is dead, September 19, 2024 (Klinghoffer, 2024). Peter Zöller-Greer was involved in Mathematics, Physics, and Information Science at the State University of Applied Sciences (Frankfurt/Main). Now, he is Professor/emeritus-level at Frankfurt University of Applied Sciences, but retired.
Therefore, 7 former ISCID Fellows are deceased: Bernard d’Abrera (Jan 13, 2017), Walter L. Bradley (July 2, 2025), Daniel Dix (July 3, 2023), Filip Palda (Aug 24, 2017), John J. Roche (May 20, 2024), Philip S. Skell (Nov 21, 2010), and Jonathan Wells (Sept 19, 2024).
13 are some form of emeritus: John Bloom, Neil Broom, John Angus Campbell, Russell W. Carlson, William Lane Craig, Fred Field, James P. Keener, Matti Leisola, John Lennox, Carlos E. Puente, Del Ratzsch, Alvin Plantinga, and David Humphreys.
Five are explicitly retired: E. Stan Lennard, Edward T. Peltzer III, Martin Poenie, Peter Zöller-Greer, and Robert Kaita. Therefore, 25 Fellows are deceased, emeritus, or retired (accounting for overlap), leaving 32 with current active roles; categories were active, deceased, emeritus (still publishing/teaching), retired (no ongoing academic appointment), and unknown/insufficient public information.
The transitions never happened after PCID and ISCID became defunct. ID Creationism’s most significant achievement in an attempt at academic legitimation eventuated in this outcome for itself. This legacy has significantly influenced the intellectual lives of numerous individuals. It is one of those rare phenomena: a forever-after reputational scar.
As noted previously, there are other organizations and individuals to cover.
References
Dembski, W.A. (2016, September 23). Official Retirement from Intelligent Design. https://billdembski.com/personal/official-retirement-from-intelligent-design/.
Dembski, W.A. (2025, July 23). Remembering Walter Bradley (1943–2025). https://scienceandculture.com/2025/07/remembering-walter-bradley-1943-2025/.
Harris Manchester College. (2025). Dr John Roche, 1937 – May 20 2024. https://www.hmc.ox.ac.uk/article/dr-john-roche-1937-20-may-2024.
Klinghoffer, D. (2024, September 24). Farewell to Jonathan Wells, Iconoclastic Scientist. https://scienceandculture.com/2024/09/farewell-to-jonathan-wells-iconoclastic-scientist/.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2022a, January 29). Excavation of a Failure: The International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (ISCID). https://in-sightpublishing.com/2022/04/06/excavation-of-a-failure-the-international-society-for-complexity-information-and-design-iscid/.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2022b, January 28). What was the Professional Output of Intelligent Design?. https://in-sightpublishing.com/2022/04/06/what-was-the-professional-output-of-intelligent-design/.
Science & Culture Today. (2021, February 16). William Dembski: Why I am Returning to the Front Lines of Intelligent Design. https://scienceandculture.com/2021/02/william-dembski-why-im-returning-to-the-front-lines-of-intelligent-design.
Footnotes
[1] Fellows of ISCID:
d’Abrera, Bernard
Behe, Michael J.
Bloom, John
Bradley, Walter
Broom, Neil
Budziszewski, J.
Campbell, John Angus
Carlson, Russell W.
Chiu, David K. Y.
Collins, Robin
Craig, William Lane
de Jong, Kenneth
Dembski, William A.
Discher, Mark R.
Dix, Daniel
Field, Fred
Gonzalez, Guillermo
Gordon, Bruce L.
Humphreys, David
Hunter, Cornelius
Iqbal, Muzaffar
Jackson, Quinn Tyler
Johanson, Conrad
Kaita, Robert
Keener, James
Koons, Robert C.
Kwon, Younghun
Langan, Christopher Michael
Larmer, Robert
Leisola, Matti
Lennard, Stan
Lennox, John
LoSasso, Gina Lynne
Macosko, Jed
Mallard, Bonnie
Mims, Forrest M. III
Minnich, Scott
Nelson, Paul
Palda, Filip
Peltzer, Edward T.
Plantinga, Alvin
Poenie, Martin
Puente, Carlos E.
Ratzsch, Del
Richards, Jay Wesley
Rickard, Terry
Roche, John
Ruys, Andrew
Schaefer, Henry F.
Schwartz, Jeffrey M.
Skell, Philip
Skiff, Frederick
Stephan, Karl D.
Sternberg, Richard
Tipler, Frank
Wells, Jonathan
Zöller-Greer, Peter
See International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (2013).
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
“To defeat scientific materialism and its destructive moral, cultural and political legacies… To replace materialistic explanations with the theistic understanding that nature and human beings are created by God… To see intelligent design theory as the dominant perspective in science… Discovery Institute’s Center for the Renewal of Science and Culture seeks nothing less than the overthrow of materialism and its cultural legacies.”
“The Wedge Document,” CSC “Wedge” Strategy (1998)
(Documented by National Center for Science Education)
“The mission… is to advance the understanding that human beings and nature are the result of intelligent design… We seek long-term scientific and cultural change through cutting-edge scientific research and scholarship…”
Center for Science & Culture
“The mission of Discovery Institute is to advance a culture of purpose, creativity, and innovation… Mind, not matter, is the source and crown of creation, the wellspring of human achievement.”
Discovery Institute
This isn’t really, and never has been, a debate about science. It’s about religion and philosophy.
Philip E. Johnson
“The CSRC expressly announces, in the Wedge Document, a program of Christian apologetics to promote ID.”
Kitzmiller v. Dover Area School Dist., 400 F. Supp. 2d 707 (M.D. Pa. 2005)
The Discovery Institute (DI) is a policy think-tank based in Seattle, Washington (Discovery Institute, 2025a). DI was founded in 1991 by Bruce Chapman and George Gilder and presented as a “non-profit, non-partisan” organization to bring together a “global network of scholars, scientists, and policy experts” in the advancement of Intelligent Design (ID) Creationism in various ways (Discovery Institute, 2025b).
In reality, it is a series of ‘programs of Christian apologetics to promote ID Creationism’ through various “cultural and religious goals” to “change the ground rules of science to make room for religion, specifically, beliefs consonant with a particular version of Christianity” (Justia U.S. Law, 2005).
Their stated philosophy is “Mind… is the source and crown of creation, the wellspring of human achievement” as conceived “by the ancient Hebrews, Greeks and Christians, and elaborated in the American Founding Western culture” in contrast to “contemporary materialistic worldview [that] denies the intrinsic dignity and freedom of human beings and enfeebles scientific creativity and technological innovation…[a] vision [of] limited horizons… [and] deadening ideologies of scarcity, conflict, mutual suspicion and despair” (Discovery Institute, 2025c).
DI is the primary driver of ID Creationism to ‘teach the controversy’ (Discovery Institute, 2005). DI has programs in science and culture, wealth and poverty, technology, artificial intelligence, citizen leadership, transforming education, human exceptionalism, and the Cascadia Center (Ibid.).
Its Board of Directors is a respectable size featuring prominent public and political figures, business leaders and innovators, and philanthropic community members (Discovery Institute, 2025d). Its current Chair of the Board is Bruce Chapman, while the former Chair of the Board–and current member of the Board–is Byron Nutley (Ibid.)
Prominent public and political figures are Edmund C. Moy, Howard F. Ahmanson Jr., and Mariana Parks (Ibid.). Business leaders and innovator members are Bryan Mistele, Charles Lundberg, Cole Smead, Dave Barber, Eric Garcia, James Spady, Mike Dunn, Richard Greiling, Skip Gilliland, and Walter Myers III (Ibid.).
Philanthropic community board members are Annmarie Kelly and Kathy Connors (Ibid.). This remains a significant number of prominent people in support of a Christian apologetic missional work under presentation as a policy think-tank.
Its active Senior Fellows are Andrew McDiarmid, Bill Walton, David Klinghoffer, Donald P. Nielsen, Frank Gregorsky, Gale Pooley, George Gilder, Jay W. Richards, John G. West, John Wohlstetter, Jonathan Choe, Jonathan Lesser, Keri D. Ingraham, Marvin Olasky, Michael Medved, Robert Marbut, Scott S. Powell, Stephen C. Meyer, Walter Myers III, and Wesley J. Smith (Discovery Institute, 2025e).
Its Fellows are Arina Grossu Agnew, Bruce Agnew, Edwin Meese III, Jerry Bowyer, Nathan Lewis, Paul Guppy, Ray B. Chambers, Robert J. Koch, Scott O. Kuznicki, Tim Scala, and Tom Shakely (Ibid.). DI Staff are varied in task and role [1]
They list events of various types including book events (e.g., book launch, author Q&A), conferences (e.g., COSM Technology Summit, Dallas Conference on Science & Faith), education days (e.g., Intelligent Design Education Day), film screenings (e.g., The American Miracle, Fentanyl Death Incorporated), lectures/talks (e.g., Socrates in the City, Bible & the Rise of Science), luncheons (e.g., lunch discussion on Presidential Succession), special experiences (e.g., 2024 total eclipse viewing), and webinars (e.g., The Privileged Planet 20th Anniversary webinar) (Discovery Institute, 2025g).
They distribute materials and generate wealth in alternative ways too (Discovery Institute, 2025h). DI sells books (e.g., Discovery Institute Press titles), curricula and educational materials (e.g., textbooks, workbooks, discussion guides), documentary DVDs and videos (e.g., The Privileged Planet, Metamorphosis, The Intelligent Design Collection), merchandise (e.g., mugs, posters, calendars, clothing), and online courses (e.g., DiscoveryU) (Ibid.).
So, a large board and staff, diverse events, and a clear Christian apologetic hermeneutic as a culture war organization presenting itself as a policy think-tank, as well as events and merchandise. Who finances the operation? It is a reasonable question.
One answer is donation (Discovery Institute, 2025i). DI offers general or program-specific giving, tiered memberships (e.g., Contributor, Discovery Society, Director’s Circle, President’s Circle), or planned giving, stock gifts, IRA distributions, and bequests (Ibid.).
Major documented funders include DonorsTrust ($9,352,000), National Christian Charitable Foundation ($7,376,750), Walton Family Foundation($400,000), Schwab Charitable Fund ($286,550), The Lynde and Harry Bradley Foundation ($260,000), The Seattle Foundation ($81,000), Searle Freedom Trust ($80,000), John Templeton Foundation ($78,750), Barney Family Foundation ($50,000), William H. Donner Foundation ($50,000), The Carthage Foundation ($40,000), Castle Rock Foundation ($25,000), Deramus Foundation ($15,000), Whatley Foundation ($11,000), Peterson Family Foundation ($3,670), Richard Seth Staley Educational Foundation ($3,000), Aequus Institute ($2,000), and Gilder Foundation ($1,000) (DeSmog, 2025).
The Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation provided approximately $1,000,000 per year for 10 years, totalling ~9.35 million dollars, with the stipulation that the funds be restricted to DI’s Cascadia transportation/urban policy work (Ibid.).
They created several centers and a project: American Center for Transforming Education, Cascadia Center for Regional Development, Center for Natural and Artificial Intelligence, Center for Science and Culture, Center on Human Exceptionalism, Center on Wealth and Poverty, Chapman Center for Citizen Leadership, and Technology and Democracy Project.
American Center for Transforming Education is about K–12 policy advocacy (e.g., parental choice, innovation, “empower parents” framing) to transform” public education (2025). The Cascadia Center for Regional Development (2025) is a Pacific Northwest transportation and regional development policy. It backed Seattle’s SR-99 deep-bore tunnel replacement for the Alaskan Way Viaduct (Ibid.).
The Center for Natural and Artificial Intelligence (Walter Bradley Center) looks at the AI’s benefits/limits through a lens of human exceptionalism (echoed later) while contrasting human vs. machine intelligence (2025). The Center for Science and Culture is a central flagship for Intelligent Design advocacy, whether “academic freedom” campaigns for ID, education programs, or research (2025).
The Center on Human Exceptionalism has a bioethics focus with the explicit intent to defend human dignity as defined intrinsically, with a focus on assisted-suicide and euthanasia debates, and medical ethics (2025). While the Center on Wealth and Poverty emphasizes free-market economics messaging, they have a focus on homelessness, poverty, and work on critiques of progressive policy, previously led by Christopher Rufo (2025).
The Chapman Center for Citizen Leadership offers fellowships and hosts seminars to mentor young professionals, with a focus on civic leadership and public life (2025). Lastly, the Technology and Democracy Project focuses on tech/telecom policy from a market perspective, frequently opposing FCC-style net-neutrality philosophy (2025).
With these centers, projects, programs, events, donations, and funding, it represents a reasonably well-funded, long-term, and large-scale project devoted to pseudoscience as a ‘policy think-tank,’ but, rather, is a representative of a decades-long record of failures to advance ID Creationism.
These have continued since the mid-1990s. Unequivocally, the American Association for the Advancement of Science (2002), Kitzmiller v. Dover (2005) decision, the National Academy of Sciences (1999), and the National Science Teachers Association, and numerous others, have declared ID Creationism not science.
Indeed, the Wedge Document further illuminates DI’s as a religious–cultural strategy rather than a scientific program. (National Center for Science Education, 2008). That’s the Discovery Institute.
There’s more, though, to be covered in the upcoming articles.
References
American Association for the Advancement of Science. (2002, November 6). AAAS urges opposition to ‘intelligent design theory’ within U.S. science classes. https://www.eurekalert.org/news-releases/623273.
American Center for Transforming Education. (2025). About. https://www.discovery.org/education/about/
Cascadia Center. (2025). About. https://cascadia.center/about/.
Center for Human Exceptionalism. (2025). About: Our Mission. https://humanexceptionalism.center/about/.
Center for Science & Culture. (2025). About: Our Mission. https://www.discovery.org/id/about/.
Center on Wealth & Poverty. (2025). About: Our Mission. https://wealthandpoverty.center/about/.
Chapman Center for Citizen Leadership. (2025). Programs. https://chapman.center/programs.
DeSmog. (2025). Discovery Institute (D.I.). https://www.desmog.com/discovery-institute/.
Discovery Institute. (2005, December 7). Academic Persecution of Scientists and Scholars Researching Intelligent Design is a Dangerous and Growing Trend. https://www.discovery.org/a/3077/.
Discovery Institute. (2025d). Board of Directors. https://www.discovery.org/about/board-of-directors/.
Discovery Institute. (2025a). Discovery Institute. https://www.discovery.org.
Discovery Institute. (2025h). Discovery Institute Store. https://www.discovery.org/store/.
Discovery Institute. (2025g). Events. https://www.discovery.org/c/discovery-institute/?post_type=e.
Discovery Institute. (2025e). Fellows: Discovery Institute Senior Fellows. https://www.discovery.org/about/fellows/.
Discovery Institute. (2025c). Mission. https://www.discovery.org/about/mission/.
Discovery Institute. (2025f). Staff Directory. https://www.discovery.org/about/directory/.
Discovery Institute. (2025b). What We Do. https://www.discovery.org/about/.
Justia U.S. Law. (2005, December 20). Kitzmiller v. Dover Area School Dist., 400 F. Supp. 2d 707 (M.D. Pa. 2005). https://law.justia.com/cases/federal/district-courts/FSupp2/400/707/2414073/.
National Center for Science Education. (2008, October 14). The Wedge Document. https://ncse.ngo/wedge-document.
Technology & Democracy Project. (2025). About. https://www.discovery.org/tech/about/.
The Walter Bradley Center for Natural & Artificial Intelligence. (2025). Mission. https://bradley.center/about/mission/.
Footnotes
[1] Serianna Anderson — Event and Donor Care Coordinator, Discovery Institute; Pam Bailey — Dallas Operations Manager, Discovery Institute Dallas; Steven J. Buri — President; Bruce Chapman — Chairman of the Board; Jonathan Choe — Journalist and Senior Fellow; Caitlin Cory — Communications Coordinator, Discovery Institute; Robert L. Crowther, II– Director of Communications, Center for Science & Culture; Steve Dilley — Academic Mentoring Centers Coordinator; Tova Forman — Development Specialist, Center for Science & Culture; Bruce Gordon — Associate Research Director, Center for Science & Culture; Keri D. Ingraham — Director, American Center for Transforming Education; Nathan Jacobson — Director of Media and Branding; Kate Kavanaugh — Education & Outreach Assistant, Center for Science & Culture; David Klinghoffer — Senior Fellow and Editor, Evolution News & Science Today, Center for Science & Culture; Casey Luskin — Associate Director, Center for Science & Culture; Andrew McDiarmid — Director of Podcasting, Senior Fellow; Jonathan McLatchie — Resident Biologist & Fellow; Elaine Meyer — Cambridge Project; Stephen C. Meyer — Director, Center for Science & Culture; Marsha Michaelis — Project Coordinator and Research Fellow, Fix Homelessness Initiative of Discovery Institute’s Center on Wealth & Poverty; Brian Miller — Research Coordinator, Center for Science & Culture; Dan Nutley — Director, IT; Erik L. Nutley — Program Director; Daniel Reeves — Director, Education & Outreach; Emily Sandico — Special Projects Coordinator, Center for Science & Culture; Eric Schneider — Stewardship Officer, Major Gifts, Center for Science & Culture; Steve Schwarz — Director of Finance & Operations; Elliot Stephens– Development Assistant, Center for Science & Culture; Leslie Thompson — Finance Assistant; Kelley J. Unger — Director, Discovery Society, Center for Science & Culture; Andrea Waggoner — Donor Care Coordinator, Center for Science & Culture; John G. West — Vice President, Discovery Institute, and Managing Director, Center for Science & Culture; Katherine West — Web Developer and Data Administrator; Brian Westad — Business Manager and Executive Assistant to the Managing Director, Center for Science & Culture; Thomas Winkler — Regional Ambassador, Center for Science and Culture; Jonathan Witt — Executive Editor, Discovery Institute Press; Senior Fellow and Senior Project Manager, Center for Science & Culture; Penny Yeh — Web and Content Production Assistant.
See Discovery Institute (2025f).
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
“The ID movement itself recognizes that their view stands in opposition to science. One finds this not only in the leaked Discovery Institute “Wedge” document, which discusses overturning what they see as the anti-theistic assumptions of modernism, but throughout ID writings. I’ll just give a few examples. William Dembski writes:
The scientific picture of the world championed since the Enlightenment is not just wrong but massively wrong. Indeed entire fields of inquiry, especially in the human sciences… need to be rethought from the ground up in terms of intelligent design. (Dembski 1999, p. 224)
Another ID theorist, J. P. Moreland expressed the conviction that ID is not science by coining a new term:
If (naturalists) want to define science in naturalistic terms, then we can define a new term, creascience, that allows for the recognition of discontinuities in nature that indicate the intentional, immediate intervention of a first cause that resembles a person. Note, if God does not exist, or if he has never intervened in the world through primary causality, then science and creascience are empirically equivalent and equally adequate approaches to the study of nature. The main difference between science and creascience is that the latter allows for the possibility that primary causality has occurred and can be recognized, (Moreland 1989)
Here we see another conceptual link to creation science even in Moreland’s choice for the roots of his coined word. Whatever one calls it, IDCs themselves recognize that it is not science.”
Dr. Robert T. Pennock
“It is ironic that several of these individuals, who so staunchly and proudly touted their religious convictions in public, would time and again lie to cover their tracks and disguise the real purpose behind the ID Policy.”
Judge John E. Jones III
“Ye shall not steal, neither deal falsely, neither lie one to another.”
Leviticus 19:11
“You shall not bear false witness…”
Exodus 20:16
These ethical admonitions from modern courts and their purported holy scripture frame the controversy. The first article in this newest series on the more sophisticated forms of Creationism, “Intelligent Design Creationism’s Fall from Grace,” gave the layout of the long-term failure outcomes of the Intelligent Design (ID) Creationism movement over the last several decades and then listed some of its key individuals (Jacobsen, 2025).
The ID movement, rooted in attempts to combat “scientific materialism” and guided by the Discovery Institute’s Wedge Document (National Center for Science Education, 2008), sought to advance a theistic worldview in culture, but failed due to its lack of testability and falsifiability (National Center for Science Education, 2005).
This article will cover the core architects and leaders, while the subsequent articles will cover the institutions and figures. The key architects are Dr. Michael Behe, Dr. William Dembski, Dr. Stephen C. Meyer, Philip Johnson (1940-2019), and Bruce Chapman (Orr, 2005).
Dr. Michael Behe is a biochemist and professor at Lehigh University (Lehigh University, 2025a). He developed the concept of Irreducible Complexity (Paradowski, 2022; Behe, 1996). He claims certain biological systems are too complex to have evolved (Ibid.). He authored Darwin’s Black Box (1996) to describe this. He identifies the intelligent creator of ID as the Christian God for himself, as he is Catholic–while threading the argument ID does not necessarily endorse any particular designer (Paula Zahn Now, 2005).
His idea of Irreducible Complexity is thoroughly regarded as pseudoscience, heavily criticized and refuted by relevant major scientific bodies (National Center for Science Education, 2008a; Wells, 2008). He remains on the faculty of the university, but the department does not endorse the views (Lehigh University, 2025b). In the ID community, he remains a major figure (Discovery Institute, 2025a).
Dr. William Dembski is a mathematician and philosopher (Discovery Institute, 2025b). He formalized the idea of Specified Complexity in information-theoretic terms (1998). He argues certain patterns are too complex and specific to evolve (Encyclopedia Britannica, 2025a). He explicitly linked ID to Christian theology; he explained ID as Information Theory in the idiom of John’s Gospel (Williams, 2007; Dembski, 2019).
His ideas have been largely dismissed as pseudoscience (National Center for Science Education, 2008a). He is known as a historical figure significant in the Christian culture wars over evolution, particularly relating to science curricula and religion in public life.
Dr. Stephen C. Meyer is a senior fellow and director at the Discovery Institute’s Center for Science and Culture (Discovery Institute, 2025c). He has been a leading architect of ID. He directs DI’s Center for Science and Culture; the leaked Wedge document outlined the CSC’s strategy to ‘defeat scientific materialism’ and advance a theistic understanding of nature (National Center for Science Education, 2008b). A cultural strategy to advance ID in culture and science (Ibid.).
Meyer’s works have failed in broad and numbered peer-reviewed success, even when publishing in the Proceedings of the Biological Society of Washington in 2004; the paper was repudiated (National Center for Science Education, 2004). The journal clarified: The review process was mishandled and the paper failed to meet scientific standards (Ibid.). In addition, the scientific consensus against ID Creationism remains firm on it, i.e., its pseudoscience (National Center for Science Education, 2008a).
Other footnotes include the Kitzmiller v. Dover (2005) court case loss. ID has failed to produce a viable scientific research program. ID is known as being incapable of uncoupling “itself from its creationist antecedents,” not a scientific research program (Jacobsen, 2025). Supernaturalism lost; naturalism was not replaced in science or in culture.
Phillip Johnson (deceased) was a law professor and early intellectual leader of the ID movement (Discovery Institute, 2025d). He was associated in shaping the Wedge Document and its overarching strategy via the Discovery Institute to challenge–what they called–“scientific materialism” while simultaneously promoting a theistic worldview (National Center for Science Education, 2008b).
Johnson’s legacy became a failure to convince courts or persuade scientists, the Dover ruling blocking ID from classrooms, exposure of the religious core of ID via the Wedge Document leak, and the maintenance of a largely secular and naturalistic science in culture.
Bruce Chapman is the Chairman of the Board of the Discovery Institute (Discovery Institute, 2025e). He is another of the core figures promoting ID via public outreach and media influence. His media expertise has been instrumental in the ID movement.
Discovery Institute under Chapman is identified largely as a religious advocacy group commonly with internal perspectives as a public-policy think tank. Regardless, it lost any potential scientific credibility or scientific research program for ID.
Its association and identity as a religious advocacy group is firmly established, and, therefore, a non-neutral producer of scholarship. Kitzmiller (M.D. Pa. 2005) is a district-court decision (binding only in that jurisdiction) as a case in point, but has been nationally influential as a persuasive authority on public education policy.
However, based on the significant decades-long failures of these men and associated intellectual communities, ironically, their failures have bolstered secular and scientific advocacy.
The next articles will cover the Discovery Institute/Center for Science & Culture (CSC), ISCID/PCID (journal), Biologic Institute (DI-affiliated lab), Foundation for Thought and Ethics (FTE), Access Research Network (ARN), and others, and associated figures.
References
Behe, M.J. (1996). Darwin’s Black Box: The Biochemical Challenge to Evolution. New York: Free Press.
Dembski, W. A. (1999). Intelligent Design: The Bridge Between Science & Theology. Downers Grove, InterVarsity Press.
Dembski, W.A. (2019, September 14). Intelligent Design and the Logos of Creation. https://billdembski.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/09/ID-and-the-Logos-of-Creation.pdf.
Dembski, W.A. (1998). The Design Inference: Eliminating Chance through Small Probabilities. Cambridge University Press.
Discovery Institute. (2025e). Bruce Chapman. https://www.discovery.org/p/chapman/.
Discovery Institute. (2025a). Michael J. Behe. https://www.discovery.org/p/behe/.
Discovery Institute. (2025d). Philip E. Johnson. https://www.discovery.org/p/johnson/.
Discovery Institute. (2025c). Stephen C. Meyer. https://www.discovery.org/p/meyer/.
Discovery Institute. (2025b). William A. Dembski. https://www.discovery.org/p/dembski/.
Encyclopedia Britannica. (2025a). Intelligent design. https://www.britannica.com/topic/intelligent-design.
International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (2013, January 23). ISCID – Fellows. https://web.archive.org/web/20130123000307/http://www.iscid.org/fellows.php.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2025, August 19). Intelligent Design Creationism’s Fall from Grace. https://afurtherinquiry.substack.com/p/intelligent-design-creationisms-fall.
Lehigh University. (2025a). Michael Behe. https://bio.cas.lehigh.edu/faculty-staff/michael-behe.
Lehigh University. (2025b). Department position on evolution and “intelligent design”. https://bio.cas.lehigh.edu/about/department-position-evolution-intelligent-design
Moreland, J. P. (1989). Christianity and the Nature of Science: A Philosophical Investigation.
National Center for Science Education. (2008a, September 9). American Association for the Advancement of Science (2002). https://ncse.ngo/american-association-advancement-science-2002.
National Center for Science Education. (2004, October 24). BSW Strengthens Statement Repudiating Meyer Paper. https://ncse.ngo/bsw-strengthens-statement-repudiating-meyer-paper.
National Center for Science Education. (2005, December 20). Kitzmiller v. Dover Area School District, 400 F. Supp. 2d 707 (M.D. Pa. 2005). https://ncse.ngo/files/pub/legal/kitzmiller/highlights/2005-12-20_Kitzmiller_decision.pdf.
National Center for Science Education. (2008b, October 14). The Wedge Document. https://ncse.ngo/wedge-document.
Orr, H.A. (2005, May 22). Devolution. https://www.newyorker.com/magazine/2005/05/30/devolution-2.
Paradowski, R.J. (2022). Intelligent design movement. https://www.ebsco.com/research-starters/religion-and-philosophy/intelligent-design-movement.
Paula Zahn Now. (2005, November 25). The Debate Over Intelligent Design; American Girl Doll Ignites Controversy. https://transcripts.cnn.com/show/pzn/date/2005-11-25/segment/01.
Wells, J. (2008, March 26). Darwin of the Gaps: Review of The Language of God: A Scientist Presents Evidence for Belief by Francis S. Collins. https://www.discovery.org/a/4529/.
Williams, D. (2007, December 14). Friday Five: William A. Dembski. https://web.archive.org/web/20071217212817/http://www.citizenlink.org/content/A000006139.cfm.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
International metrics indicate abuse patterns of males and females. Sex asymmetries exist in these contexts of violence, whether physical violence, sexual assault, emotional/psychological maltreatment, financial/economic control, or abuse within institutions.
Both men and women can be perpetrators of these forms of abuse. Global research shows significant gender asymmetries in prevalence, in severity, and even in context. Many societies show that men commit a disproportionate amount of severe physical and sexual abuse.
Women’s perpetration tends to occur in different patterns or contexts. 90% of the homicide perpetrators worldwide are male, based on UNODC data. Males commit most of the non-lethal assaults and violent crimes. Males mostly perpetrate physical domestic violence. 1 in 3 women and 1 in 10 men experience physical violence in the United States.
Females suffer more severe injuries and repeated assaults, with most of the intimate partner homicides committed by males. A partner kills 38% of female murder victims compared to 5% of male victims. Males are the majority of the perpetrators of physical aggression in other contexts.
The frequency and lethality of physical abuse skew male. However, this is a false basis for blanket stereotyping of males. Women can and do inflict physical harm. Sexual violence is the most gender-disparate form of abuse. No matter the place in the world. Men perpetrate the majority of sexual assaults and rapes.
The U.S. Department of Justice indicates that nearly 99% of persons who commit rape or sexual assault are male. Women and girls are more often victims of sexual abuse. The World Health Organization reports that 1 in 3 women has been subjected to physical and/or sexual violence in their lifetime.
The male lifetime risk of sexual victimization is lower. In the U.S., ~1 in 14 men report being “made to penetrate” or sexually coerced at some point. Female perpetration of sexual abuse does occur, particularly by authority figures abusing minors. Studies on child sexual abuse indicate 75–90% of offenders are male, while 10–25% are female.
Female offenders tend to target boys. Male offenders tend to target girls. Sexual abuse by women is under-detected due to stereotypes. Therefore, the rates of abuse by females are higher than the known reported estimates. Sexual abuse is a highly gendered crime.
Emotional and psychological abuse are common. Both sexes engage in emotional abuse, psychological manipulation, and verbal harassment at significant rates. In the U.S., 48.4% of women and 48.8% of men report psychological aggression.
These behaviours of abuse include belittling, controlling, insults, intimidation, isolation, threats, and more. Males and females employ these in different ways. Women are as or more likely to engage in verbal aggression than men, including yelling, name-calling, and more.
Males tend to incorporate threats of violence with verbal aggression—a pattern of domination, in the form of a sustained pattern of control. Females tend to engage in relational aggression using social exclusion, guilt-tripping, or emotional manipulation, e.g., belittle their partner’s masculinity or use passive-aggressive tactics.
Financial or economic abuse is controlling a victim’s employment, money, or resources. Males tend to be the perpetrators of financial abuse in patriarchal contexts. An environment in which the male has significant authority over financial decisions in the home. Elder abuse is common among males and females via exploitation of the elderly.
Institutional abuse is maltreatment within systems of care or power. Males and females are perpetrators. In nursing homes and long-term care facilities, two-thirds of staff members admit to committing abuse of older persons in the past year.
Frontline caregivers for elders tend to be women. Women figure prominently and significantly among institutional abusers in elder care. Egregious institutional abuse scandals involve predominantly male perpetrators taking advantage of authority.
Institutional abuse is less about the gender of the perpetrator. It is more about power imbalances. Those in charge, male or female, may abuse vulnerable dependents. Styles of abuse mirror broader gender patterns: male staff tend to be implicated in sexual violence, whereas female staff tend to be implicated in neglect or emotional abuse. Experts emphasize that both women and men can be guilty of severe abuse in institutional settings.
Male perpetrators of violence show more antisocial personality disorder or narcissistic personality. Female perpetrators show more borderline personality traits. Institutional biases and stereotypes can lead to female abusers not being held accountable. Female victims often face disbelief.
The further questions in either case of the significant minorities of females and males who abuse are the impacts, motivations, or patterns.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
“The Act impermissibly endorses religion by advancing the religious belief that a supernatural being created humankind.”
Supreme Court of the United States (Edwards v. Aguillard, 1987)
“Creationism, intelligent design and other claims of supernatural intervention in the origin of life or of species are not science because they are not testable by the methods of science.”
National Academy of Sciences (1999)
“The lack of scientific warrant for so-called ‘intelligent design theory’ makes it improper to include as a part of science education.”
American Association for the Advancement of Science (2002)
“Intelligent design is not science. It is not testable, it is not falsifiable, it does not generate hypotheses, and it does not provide explanations for the natural world.”
National Science Teachers Association
“Science is a philosophy of discovery. Intelligent design is a philosophy of ignorance. You cannot build a program of discovery on the assumption that nobody is smart enough to figure out the answer to a problem.”
Dr. Neil DeGrasse Tyson
“[Intelligent design is] not a scientific argument at all, but a religious one.”
Dr. Richard Dawkins
“…[intelligent design] fails in a fundamental way to qualify as a scientific theory [and is] doing considerable damage to faith.”
Dr. Francis Collins (Leader, Human Genome Project)
When I use the term “Fall from Grace,” I mean the profound loss of academic, public, and scientific credibility experienced by Intelligent Design (ID) advocates once their pseudoscientific claims were exposed (Jacobsen, 2022a; Jacobsen, 2022b; Jacobsen, 2024; Jacobsen, 2025). ID is a religious advocacy project framed as science. Essentially, it’s evolution or bust.
ID Creationism was a political movement intended as a social change agent through a vehicle of a pseudoscientific proposition, ID Creationism or adapted traditional Creationism (Encyclopedia Britannica, 2025a). This was documented through the leaked Wedge Document (National Center for Science Education, 2008).
It did not have much academic or intellectual cache in the first place, outside of religious believer circles, who are the vast majority of the proponents of this (Scott & Branch, 2002). It’s a broad-based advocacy effort primarily rooted in Christian theological commitments (National Center for Science Education, 2008).
Most proponents were, and are, well-educated Protestant Christian men (International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design, 2013). Some exceptions included Dr. David Berlinski (2025) as an agnostic Jew, Christopher Michael Langan as a self-described “reality theorist” (Langan, 2025), and Muzaffar Iqbal as a Muslim (International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design, 2013), and possibly others.
ID Creationism was an adaptation of Creationism. Creationism as a “belief that the universe and the various forms of life were created by God out of nothing (ex nihilo)” (Encyclopedia Britannica, 2025b). Its main sophistications are two foundational ideas: Irreducible Complexity of Dr. Michael Behe, and Specified Complexity of Dr. William Dembski (Paradowski, 2022).
Behe defines Irreducible Complexity as a “single system composed of several well-matched, interacting parts that contribute to the basic function, wherein the removal of any one of the parts causes the system to effectively cease functioning” (Behe, 1996).
Dembski defines Specified Complexity as “the condition in which something is both complex (i.e., not easily produced by chance) and specified (i.e., matches an independently given pattern)” (Dembski, 1998).
Both have been thoroughly debunked. Irreducible Complexity fails to demonstrate evolutionary pathways. Specified Complexity fails due to a probability miscalculation and lacks a reproducible metric. On the propaganda for Christianity and Theism behind a veneer of intellectualism, we can quote its intellectual founders, Dembski and Behe.
Dembski said in two separate instances: “The Designer of intelligent design is, ultimately, the Christian God” (Williams, 2007), and “Intelligent design is just the Logos theology of John’s Gospel restated in the idiom of information theory” (Dembski, 2019). Behe stated, “I think the designer is God. I’m a Roman Catholic.” (Paula Zahn Now, 2005). These eventuated in key, definitive court battles (National Center for Science Education, 2005).
In short, ID Creationism is Christian political propaganda framed as scientific dissent based on the statements and philosophical frame provided by its founders. A scattered few were drawn to the pseudoscientific ideas. Some individuals became associated with these ideas without fully anticipating the reputational consequences, or other unforeseen consequences. As a theology program, therefore, it’s culturally ministerial in nature.
Even within Christian communities, over time, many were able to distinguish ID’s pseudoscientific veneer from legitimate inquiry. Select Christian intellectual founders of ID Creationism were candid about religious motives internally, but publicly misrepresented ID as a secular scientific alternative.
Association with the movement carried reputational costs once its scientific shortcomings were publicly established, because its public claims diverged from the internal documents and were ultimately rejected as lacking scientific support. The Wedge Document was part of this spear (National Center for Science Education, 2008).
It was produced by the Discovery Institute’s Center for the Renewal of Science and Culture (2025). The main claim is “scientific materialism” was corrosive to culture (Ibid.). They sought to replace this perspective with a theistic comprehension of reality (Ibid.).
ID positioned various ‘pressure points’ for challenging Darwinian evolution (Ibid.).The metaphor of a wedge was about a strategy to undermine the perceived dominance of materialism in culture and science (Ibid.).
They proposed three phases for this: Research, Writing & Publication; Publicity & Opinion-making; and, Cultural Confrontation & Renewal (Ibid.). That is, a comprehensive, phased project for theistic cultural influence.
They wanted to fund and produce scholarship, promote ID in books, conferences, mass media, apologetic seminars, trainings for teachers, and think-tanks, and to pursue legal strategies and then integrate ID into public school curricula (Ibid.).
The institutional and media leadership for this was Stephen C. Meyer, Phillip Johnson, and Bruce Chapman (Ibid.). Discovery Senior Fellow Dr. Stephen Meyer directs the Center, while its original strategy came from the mindset of the late Phillip Johnson and the media expertise of Discovery President Bruce Chapman (Ibid.).
They provided bases for metrics, too. They had five-year aims from 1999-2003(/4) and 20-year aims too. By year five, they wanted to have ID Creationism accepted as a valid scientific alternative to evolution via natural selection, to trigger major public debate, to publish 30 books and 100 scholarly articles, and then influence major public opinion and secular national media attention. These benchmarks were never met, underscoring the project’s ultimate failure.
By year 20, they wanted to make ID Creationism the dominant perspective in science and diffused throughout the arts, humanities, law, natural sciences, and public policy. Once more, none of these goals were achieved — they failed.
Even when trying to change the opinions of the public Christian community, who are pretty discerning over enough time and getting over in-group bias, they failed to change them much either. This reflects well on Christian communities themselves, who proved discerning enough to separate sense from non-sense despite initial in-group bias.
Other aims stipulated were the creation of fellowships, research funding, media productions, alliances, and the like. In total, about 60 individuals accepted fellowships through ISCID before the organization eventually became defunct.[1]
Per statement of Judge John E. Jones III (U.S. District Court) on if ID Creationism counts as science, “ID is not science… We find that ID fails on three different levels. … Moreover, ID cannot uncouple itself from its creationist, and thus religious, antecedents” (Wired Staff, 2006).
In the end, Intelligent Design Creationism lost in the courts, in academia, and in public credibility. It remains a cultural-theological movement, not a scientific one—an instructive case study in how pseudoscience falters when exposed to rigorous scrutiny.
Next, we will examine the outcomes of the ID creationists’ failed attempt to impose a pseudoscientific, religious metanarrative on culture, focusing on the intellectual leaders and for individuals involved in these core creationist or ID Creationism initiatives.
References
Behe, M.J. (1996). Darwin’s Black Box: The Biochemical Challenge to Evolution. New York: Free Press.
Berlinski, D. (2025). David Berlinski. https://davidberlinski.org.
Dembski, W.A. (2019, September 14). Intelligent Design and the Logos of Creation. https://billdembski.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/09/ID-and-the-Logos-of-Creation.pdf
Dembski, W.A. (1998). The Design Inference: Eliminating Chance through Small Probabilities. Cambridge University Press.
Discovery Institute. (2025). Center for Science and Culture. https://www.discovery.org/id/
Encyclopedia Britannica. (2025b). Creationism. https://www.britannica.com/topic/creationism.
Encyclopedia Britannica. (2025a). Intelligent design. https://www.britannica.com/topic/intelligent-design.
International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (2013, January 23). ISCID – Fellows. https://web.archive.org/web/20130123000307/http://www.iscid.org/fellows.php.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2024, January 22). Canadians and Creationism. https://in-sightpublishing.com/2024/04/06/canadians-and-creationism/.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2025, April 1). How Creationism and Intelligent Design Undermine Canadian Science Education: The Trinity Western University Case. https://in-sightpublishing.com/2025/04/28/how-creationism-and-intelligent-design-undermine-canadian-science-education-the-trinity-western-university-case/.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2022a, January 28). On a Mission for Never: Dr. William Dembski (1960-). https://www.newsintervention.com/mission-never-william-dembski/.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2022b, January 28). What was the Professional Output of Intelligent Design?. https://in-sightpublishing.com/2022/04/06/what-was-the-professional-output-of-intelligent-design/.
Langan, C.M. (2025, June 20). What is Intelligent Design?. https://www.megafoundation.substack.com/p/what-is-intelligent-design.
National Center for Science Education. (2005, December 20). Kitzmiller v. Dover Area School District, 400 F. Supp. 2d 707 (M.D. Pa. 2005). https://ncse.ngo/files/pub/legal/kitzmiller/highlights/2005-12-20_Kitzmiller_decision.pdf.
National Center for Science Education. (2008, October 14). The Wedge Document. https://ncse.ngo/wedge-document.
Paradowski, R.J. (2022). Intelligent design movement. https://www.ebsco.com/research-starters/religion-and-philosophy/intelligent-design-movement.
Paula Zahn Now. (2005, November 25). The Debate Over Intelligent Design; American Girl Doll Ignites Controversy. https://transcripts.cnn.com/show/pzn/date/2005-11-25/segment/01.
Scott, E.C. & Branch, G. (2002, August 12). “Intelligent Design” Not Accepted by Most Scientists. https://ncse.ngo/intelligent-design-not-accepted-most-scientists.
Williams, D. (2007, December 14). Friday Five: William A. Dembski. https://web.archive.org/web/20071217212817/http://www.citizenlink.org/content/A000006139.cfm.
Wired Staff. (2006, June 1). Intelligent Decision. https://www.wired.com/2006/06/jones/.
Footnotes
[1] Those individuals who accepted a fellowship position were the following:
d’Abrera, Bernard
Behe, Michael J.
Bloom, John
Bradley, Walter
Broom, Neil
Budziszewski, J.
Campbell, John Angus
Carlson, Russell W.
Chiu, David K. Y.
Collins, Robin
Craig, William Lane
de Jong, Kenneth
Dembski, William A.
Discher, Mark R.
Dix, Daniel
Field, Fred
Gonzalez, Guillermo
Gordon, Bruce L.
Humphreys, David
Hunter, Cornelius
Iqbal, Muzaffar
Jackson, Quinn Tyler
Johanson, Conrad
Kaita, Robert
Keener, James
Koons, Robert C.
Kwon, Younghun
Langan, Christopher Michael
Larmer, Robert
Leisola, Matti
Lennard, Stan
Lennox, John
LoSasso, Gina Lynne
Macosko, Jed
Mallard, Bonnie
Mims, Forrest M. III
Minnich, Scott
Nelson, Paul
Palda, Filip
Peltzer, Edward T.
Plantinga, Alvin
Poenie, Martin
Puente, Carlos E.
Ratzsch, Del
Richards, Jay Wesley
Rickard, Terry
Roche, John
Ruys, Andrew
Schaefer, Henry F.
Schwartz, Jeffrey M.
Skell, Philip
Skiff, Frederick
Stephan, Karl D.
Sternberg, Richard
Tipler, Frank
Wells, Jonathan
Zoeller-Greer, Peter
See International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (2013).
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Vocal.Media
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09
Clergy-related sexual abuse has been a significant and problematic element of religious institutional conduct. From leadership conduct to political cover-up to institutional denial, it plagues the international religious community in an ongoing manner.
It bathes the laity with a dour expression about the moral legitimacy of their faith. It condemns the majority of innocent clergy with the broad brush blame of the minority of clergy who commit heinous acts, primarily pedophilic acts against young boys and sexual misconduct against adult women.
It does not exist solely within the confines of the Roman Catholic Church. It has a rich extent into other religions and other denominational faiths, including Eastern Orthodox Christianity. However, not all believers and advocates are silent, nor inactive in systematic justice efforts.
One such group is Prosopon Healing. A survivor and research-focused initiative. One working to address clergy-related abuse in Orthodoxy. They are a registered non-profit public benefit corporation—a professional corporation for compiling and reporting data while offering resources for survivors.
In August 2025, Prosopon healing launched the first database on clergy-related abuse in Orthodoxy in the world. It’s called The Orthodox Church Sexual Misconduct Database. It is an open-access aggregator of public information based on court filings, news publications, and official statements.
The Prosopon Healing methodology uses distinct categorizations for representing the data on clergy-perpetrated abuse. They have an Incident ID, name of the accused perpetrator, name of the institution, who is the overseeing bishop, and their role.
They continue with the parish/diocese/monastery/school, the outcome, the year of the abuse, the year reported, and then the state/country. It is a huge undertaking. Their current coverage spans more than 56 jurisdictions.
Prosopon Healing’s research team has a preliminary media/lawsuit sweep spanning 2002–present and found approximately 800 victims and over 250 accused clergy. These are explicitly characterized as undercounts given the rationale and patterns of underreporting.
Outside the U.S., most cases were within the Russian Orthodox Church. Within the U.S., most were affiliated with the Greek Orthodox Archdiocese of America. Gender patterns emerged. Child victims skewed male and adult victims skewed female.
Their methodology amounts to systematic web/legal-docket searches. They incorporated ChatGPT-assisted search-term generation only without auto-labelling. There was a human review of every article when extracting data properly.
The published inclusion criteria for the database were admissions, defrockings, institutional findings, legal complaints, resignations, and settlements. They incorporated an abuse-victim-centred approach.
All reporting to law enforcement should be the first step as well as conducting an independent, third-party investigation as a benchmark standard. There should be caution with processes done without third parties or done entirely internally via church processes. These have the capacity to retraumatize.
Prosopon Healing credits predecessors’ contribution to this initiative through Pokrov.org: Melanie Sakoda, Cappy Larson, and Greta Larson. Sakoda and Larson were foundational in the reporting work. There is ongoing analysis on Substack.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/16
Author Disclaimer
The views and opinions expressed in this article are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the official policy or position of any organization, institution, or entity with which the author may be affiliated, including Humanists International.
Diego Vargas, Project Manager of the Oniros Philosophie Foundation, discusses religious influence in Bogotá and Colombia. The Catholic Church illegally occupies public spaces, while Mennonite groups encroach on indigenous lands in Meta. Religious influence has shaped Colombia’s politics, with a history of church-led violence and right-wing dominance. The church also controls education, suppressing critical thinking. Apostasy faces bureaucratic barriers, with institutions favoring religious entities. Minority groups like LGBTI, Afro-descendants, and feminists often neglect secular activism. Vargas urges co-responsibility among these groups to counter religious dominance, emphasizing secularism’s role in defending human rights and social justice in Colombia.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Diego Vargas, the Project Manager of the Oniros Philosophie Foundation (Fundación Oniros Philosophie), out of Bogotá. Let’s talk about the issues targeted by OPF/FOP: How has the Catholic Church in Bogotá asserted itself into public spaces?
Diego A. Vargas: Despite the fact that the Political Constitution of Colombia of 1991 stipulates in article 63 that goods for public use are inalienable, imprescriptible and cannot be seized; The truth is that in the city of Bogotá alone there are 210 invasions of public spaces in parks, avenues and green areas.
The invasion dynamic they practice is that the diocese assigns a priest to a neighborhood without a church, and when he arrives in said neighborhood, he builds an illegal settlement without permits with sticks and boards, zinc tiles and polyshade; It must be clarified that this settlement has an illegal or pirate connection to the electricity service. And although there is an entity whose mission is to defend public space, called the Administrative Department for the Defense of Public Space (DADEP), neither this entity nor the mayor’s office apply the Law to recover public space.
People already assume and affirm that religion, and especially the Catholic Church, is above the Law, so much so that they do not pay any type of tax, much less property tax for land that was stolen.
Jacobsen: What practices by Mennonite groups in Meta are encroaching on public spaces?
Vargas: In recent years, Mennonite groups, coming mainly from the United States, have launched a colonialist invasion in the region of the eastern Colombian plains, and more specifically in the department of Meta. Since they have invaded lands, displaced indigenous communities, stolen lands using the legal loophole of “purchasing” under the figure of “third party in good faith”, and finally they are generating a problem of deforestation in the Colombian Orinoquía region.
All of this is, of course, part of the new forms of coloniality of power through the evangelical Christian religion, which at the time was denounced by the Latin American and of course South American thinker Enrique Dussel.
Jacobsen: How has the Catholic Church shaped political decision-making in Colombia?
Vargas: From 1886 to 1990, a theocratic, right-wing, conservative, anti-scientific and anti-progressive Political Constitution was implemented in Colombia; This meant that, for example, the country was consecrated to the “sacred heart of Jesus”, and even today a debt is being paid in perpetuity to the Vatican because during the mid-19th century a liberal government had expelled the Jesuit order from the country, annulling a previous concordat that was in effect during the mid-19th century and had expropriated assets from the unproductive hands of the church. And from that moment on, the dominance of the Catholic religion in politics was total; with a constitution that invoked and invokes God for everything, then the president attends a Tedeum when he takes office, if peace talks are going to be held with armed groups, the middle person is the church, in the history of Colombia there has only been one candidate atheist, the late Carlos Gaviria Díaz, who precisely lost the 2006 elections for having declared himself an atheist, and thus there are many things that define the dominance and interference of religion over politics since in each church, Catholic or evangelical, political proselytism is carried out, and in every hamlet, town, district or village there is a church, and since religion is right-wing, the right has always won and “demonizes” left-wing candidates by saying that they are atheists, so it took 157 years for the country to once again have a left-wing president who at least knows how to pronounce the word secularity; And all those years are the window of time that passed between the presidency of Tomás Cipriano de Mosquera and that of the current president of the republic Gustavo Petro Urrego.
Jacobsen: What are examples of how religious institutions have been connected with violence or paramilitarism in Colombian history?
Vargas: Since the creation of the Republic of Colombia, and only in the 19th century, religion caused 3 civil wars in which children were even used as soldiers: 1) The war of the convents or the supreme ones from 1839 to 1842, 2) The war of the schools from 1876 to 1877, 3) The war of a thousand days and the conservative regeneration from 1899 to 1902
But the issue does not stop there, since, in 2016, and with the sponsorship of the University of Berkeley, the Truth Commission generated an investigative and historical document on Human Rights called: “Cases of involvement of the church in the violence in Colombia – Input for the commission to clarify the truth”, and in said document 62 cases of violence caused by the Catholic Church between the 19th and 20th centuries are reported, apart from the 3 wars caused in the century XIX.
The most representative cases are encyclicals from the 19th century that invited liberals, Freemasons, socialists and atheists to be killed, under the declaration that killing these people was not a sin; For the 20th century, it is worth highlighting the preaching that generated bipartisan violence in which conservative believers killed liberals under the accusation of being atheists, also the formation of armed groups called “chulavitas”, then the formation of paramilitary groups with a religious vocation called “ the 12 apostles” and currently the presence of evangelical pastors who launder money from drug trafficking, among many other things that have caused alterity and difference to be annulled for those who They do not believe or practice a religion.
Jacobsen: How does the dominance of religious doctrine manifest in Colombian educational institutions?
Vargas: It happens that the Political Constitution of Colombia of 1991 indicates in its article 68 that in the educational establishments of the state no person will be forced to receive religious education, but in the General Law of Education (115 of 1994) stipulates in its article 23 that religion It is a mandatory and fundamental area of teaching, especially in State educational establishments. So although this is a contradiction and a clear violation of the Constitution, it is just the tip of the iceberg, because other things that show this predominance are that there are private administrators who have public schools under concession and in the city of Bogotá D.C., 80% of These are entities of the religious sector, the majority of universities in the private sector are Catholic and ultimately when we talk about religion classes we do not talk about the more than 4,200 existing religions and others that no longer exist, but rather that we only talk about teaching a religion, and this is the Catholic religion, so this teaching of religion is nothing more than a teaching of religious and right-wing indoctrination that expands in public and private education and that promotes discrimination. towards difference and otherness, the rejection of equity and of course trampling on progressive values and social justice.
Jacobsen: What effects might a single-religion focus in schools have on critical thinking among students?
Vargas: It has had negative effects, since students do not have the possibility of choosing and only know one religion, and this indoctrinates them towards right-wing thinking that does not contemplate diversity, difference, otherness and much less the multicultural and multi-ethnic character that enshrines the Political Constitution of Colombia of 1991 and even less Human Rights. So, if you talk about Yoruba religion and Orisha gods, society says that this is witchcraft and satanism, if you talk about indigenous spirituality, it is also demonized, if you talk about paganism they are ready to light the bonfire. So, the boys have no information or reference point to compare between religions, the monopoly that religion has in power, education and politics, and since they cannot compare with anything, they cannot reflect or criticize, and their thinking ends up being right-wing, submissive, doctrinaire and they replicate all of this with those around them.
Jacobsen: What administrative barriers do Colombians encounter when apostatizing from a religion?
Vargas: Well, it happens that the Catholic Church has a chancery for these issues, and at the beginning if people do not have knowledge of legal activism and strategic litigation they make them understand that they cannot apostatize, but if the person crosses that barrier they must overcome the fact that a city can be divided into up to 5 dioceses that depend on an archdiocese for land issues but not for administrative issues such as apostasy, then there is the problem that if the person was baptized far from a city capital, that is, in a town, you must go to that place to request the baptism certificate and then to verify that the footnote is made in the baptism books so that the apostasy becomes effective; There is also the inconvenience that they try to persuade the person who is trying to file his apostasy and subject him to a kind of uncomfortable “conversation” within a church and finally there is no formal certificate that shows whether the apostasy was effective, because they only give a generic answer using a template that says that the note of the apostasy was made in the baptism book and therefore you have to go to the parish in which the baptism was done to find out if it is true on a trip that It can be 2 hours a day and a half.
Jacobsen: How do religious organizations justify bureaucratic barriers?
Vargas: Well, neither the Ministry of the Interior nor the National Administrative Department of Statistics of Colombia (DANE) enforce the Law, nor the Human Rights regarding freedom and conscientious objection nor legal personality, since the first of these do not have this service of apostasy included within their services or procedures, but rather the service of linking Religious Entities and Organizations of the Religious Sector to monopolize Human Rights projects and the hoarding of resources and public money. And in the case of DANE, they consider religion as something sacred and untouchable and for that reason they never include in the censuses a question about religious affiliation that would undoubtedly open the debate on freedom of conscience and apostasy.
Jacobsen: Why are minority groups such as LGBTI, Afro-descendants, indigenous, and feminists seen as fracturing broader secular activism efforts?
Vargas: This has occurred because the differential and rights-based approach has been transformed into a preferential and fascist approach, this is because there are many people in public life who belong to the LGBTI community and are right-wing and fascist (uribistas); In Bogotá D.C., we had a lesbian and right-wing mayor who ordered the police to beat women, there is also a representative of the chamber (bicameral congress of Colombia) who is homosexual and Afro-descendant, but who at the same time denies the massacres, forced displacements and extrajudicial executions in the government of former president Álvaro Uribe and labels left-wing people as guerrillas, but the irony is that these two characters totally believers.
There is another group of academic feminists who constantly attack figures in left-wing public and political life who fight to defend the rights of the population, but they never speak or defend secularism, and they have never supported bills that seek to make churches pay taxes. And in short, both feminism and the LGBTI community in Colombia are apathetic regarding the defense of secularism and expect us atheists to attend their marches, but they never support either the legal and constitutional actions or the sit-ins or marches that we atheists call for; So in short, it is a toxic and harmful relationship that does not respond with co-responsibility towards secularism, and on the contrary they make us look bad because the only activism they do is paint a church with graffiti while showing their breasts or throw Molotov cocktails at their doors without it being clear to public opinion why they do it, and it ends up generating the generalized opinion that those of us who are not linked to any church are almost vandals.
Jacobsen: What strategies can secular activists employ to foster productive collaboration with LGBTI, Afro-descendant, indigenous, and feminist groups to strengthen the secular movement?
Vargas: First of all, there must be co-responsibility and equitable cooperation between these social movements and the fight for secularism, and for this the LGBTI community must stop seeking acceptance in a conservative society that will never fully admit them even though they want to show fascist behavior; Afro-descendants would have to understand that Christianity was the godfather of slavery and include secularism within the themes of the African diaspora, or at least return to its roots in the Yoruba religion; The indigenous people must take into account that indigenous spirituality no longer exists and now, through syncretism, they ended up being evangelical natives and finally, feminists must support freedom more and not conservatively judge other women who are not feminists or excluding men from gender issues without understanding that this does not solve anything but analyze that religion is the cause of historical and current violence against women.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Diego.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/13
Matt Dillahunty is an American atheist activist, public speaker, and former president of the Atheist Community of Austin (ACA). Born on March 31, 1969, in Kansas City, Missouri, he was raised in a Southern Baptist household and served in the U.S. Navy from 1987 to 1995. Initially pursuing a career in Christian ministry, extensive study and reflection led him to atheism. From 2005 to October 2022, he hosted The Atheist Experience, engaging in live call-in discussions on religion and skepticism. Dillahunty co-founded the counter-apologetics wiki Iron Chariots, lectures widely, and shares content on his YouTube and Twitch streams.
Dillahunty discussed his 20-year journey in online activism, which began after questioning his Christian beliefs post-9/11. He transitioned to hosting The Atheist Experience, growing to challenge common theistic arguments and build community conversations. Dillahunty noted that debates often recycled familiar arguments and highlighted the difficulty of changing beliefs through single engagements. He also discussed the decline in atheist conventions, increased political focus, and funding challenges within secular organizations. He acknowledged parasocial dynamics, branding, and personal experiences, emphasizing mission over monetary gain and reflecting on community development and internal conflicts.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Matt Dillahunty, a prominent voice in atheism and commentary, particularly in North America. You have been doing this for many years and have been on the scene for a long time. I was probably not even born then, so that’s the first question: How long have you been doing this?
Matt Dillahunty: I’ve been involved in online work where people would recognize my contributions for about 20 years, give or take.
Jacobsen: What prompted that transition to online work and gaining more visibility for what you do?
Dillahunty: I started finding my way out of my religious background around 2001, along with many others after 9/11, although my journey had begun years earlier in different ways. After about a year and a half of intense prayer and study, I realized I didn’t have good reasons for my Christian beliefs. However, I also lacked a comprehensive understanding of the relevant subjects to determine whether any other god might exist. This led to a lengthy process of exploration, learning, and developing a foundation of skepticism grounded in philosophy.
During that period, I was learning a lot online. The first time anyone heard about me was when I was writing counter-sermons for an e-magazine that was self-published to around 50 people. This magazine had an editor who allowed dissenting views. One contributor, who wrote under the pseudonym “SkipToMaloo” (though I don’t remember exactly how it was spelled, as this was over 20 years ago), would post a sermon based on a specific passage and share their interpretation.
On the same day, I would take that same passage, present an alternative analysis, and highlight which parts were justified, sophistry, and potentially incorrect. Essentially, it was a skeptical critique of everything they posted. This work eventually led someone to suggest I watch The Atheist Experience show.
At first, I questioned why I would want to watch a show featuring people I already agreed with. They clarified that it was a call-in show that regularly featured discussions with people who held opposing views. Initially, I ignored the suggestion. Coincidentally, Jeff Dee, one of the cohosts, lived in the same apartment complex as I did and had posted a flyer for the show in the mailbox. One Sunday, about an hour before the show was set to air, I checked my mail, saw the flyer, and decided to see what it was about.
I watched the show and even called in that day. They invited me to dinner afterward, and I attended. A week later, I was screening calls for the show. Then, in March 2004, I worked in the studio when Jeff Dee didn’t show up. I had written an article about a First Amendment case involving Ten Commandments monuments. Hence, Russell Glasser, the host, then asked me if I wanted to discuss it on air. I agreed, and from that point on, I became a regular host and did the show for 17 years before stepping down.
I’m working with The Line on YouTube, doing a Wednesday night show. It’s much more politically focused than the Sunday shows and any additional shows we may do, so I’m working more than ever.
Jacobsen: The common phrase is that you cannot talk people out of their beliefs. In your experience, over two decades of taking calls, how much of that is a myth?
Dillahunty: Well, the one I hear frequently is, “You can’t reason someone out of something they weren’t reasoned into.” While that may be true, it’s also trivial because everyone was reasoned into everything they believed. Everything you believe is the result of a reasoned conclusion, though it may be bad reasoning or flawed reasoning.
There may also be protective mechanisms in place that make a typical conversation about what evidence would be required less impactful for some people. The reality is that there are people who may never change their minds and others who can. I must learn to tell those groups’ differences without engaging with them. It often isn’t a single engagement—one conversation with me isn’t going to change someone’s religion. They may need to hear it multiple times, in various ways, from different people. Until we develop some mechanism to identify those who will never change their minds, they’re worth engaging with.
Jacobsen: Over two decades of taking calls, what trends have you noticed regarding the ebbs and flows of atheist conversations and the objections you receive?
Dillahunty: One of the things I’ve noticed over the years is that these conversations are cyclical. An argument will become popular for a while, and we’ll get many calls about the Kalam cosmological argument. We go through it, debunk it, and then it falls out of favour for a year or so. Then, callers move on to other topics, like the anthropic principle, moral arguments, or questions about the foundation of logic. They cycle through these arguments to see which ones are more popular at the time. This has happened repeatedly during the 20 years I’ve been doing this. It’s happened since the beginning of such discussions.
At no point in those 20 years has anyone presented a novel argument backed by good evidence. That’s all it would take for me to believe—solid evidence. It doesn’t have to be a new argument; it could be a variation of one we’ve already discussed a million times but with new evidence or a fresh understanding.
Jacobsen: What happens when discussions get heated? What kind of epithets have been directed at you, your cohosts, or the atheist community in general?
Dillahunty: I understand that people take these things personally. When you say you don’t believe in their God, some perceive it as an attack on their character, even when it’s not. I’m quite free to handle these situations—I give as much as possible. If people are being dishonest or aggressive, I’m comfortable raising my voice or even name-calling if that’s the conversation’s direction. The alternative is allowing someone to bully you into not objecting to something on legitimate grounds. What I never do is present bad-faith arguments.
I’m always willing to try and teach, and I exercise a good deal of patience. But you can’t do this for 20 years without it getting heated sometimes. The actual threats launched at us are fewer and farther between. There have been a handful of times when we’ve had to call the FBI over death threats, but most of the time, it’s just, “I’m going to come down there and punch you in your face for Jesus,” or homophobic and sexist slurs.
It’s a constant stream of the worst aspects of machismo bro culture. I don’t know the perfect language to describe it. Still, I graduated from high school in 1987. I joined the military, so I’m familiar with hazing and name-calling, where it’s meant in camaraderie and where it’s meant as genuine hostility. What we get is more of the latter—people who feel embarrassed because they couldn’t make a strong enough argument for their religion or because they witnessed someone with similar views being publicly embarrassed.
That sense of embarrassment is sometimes a goal because people are less likely to change their minds once they’ve made a public commitment. When I speak with a caller on the show, I always say what I think should change their mind or allow them to present a strong case for their position. Sometimes, they succeed, and sometimes, they don’t, but providing that opportunity is crucial.
Jacobsen: What happens when you give them that chance, and they lash out instead?
Dillahunty: They lash out due to frustration from being unable to prove what they believe is true and real, even if it seems intuitively obvious. You often hear simplistic arguments like, “Look at the trees—only God can make a tree,” or, “I’m no monkey’s uncle.” These are baseline arguments rooted more in emotion and a lack of understanding of science, epistemology, and critical thinking.
Jacobsen: Have you ever convinced someone to live during a call? I suspect it has happened, but what is the nature of those moments?
Dillahunty: It does happen, but less often than you’d think. Sometimes, someone says, “That’s a good point; I hadn’t thought of that,” or, “Okay, you changed my mind on that, but let me think about the rest.” I’ve also had emails from thousands of people saying the show changed their minds, but I don’t wonder if it happened during the show. These realizations don’t usually occur when someone is in the spotlight; it takes time for them to reflect afterward.
Jacobsen: So, in public settings or during family dinners, when these conversations come up, even when people don’t want to have them, do they still happen?
Dillahunty: The initial conversation might lead to something other than an immediate change, but it plants a seed. People need time to process and reflect, leading to deeper consideration and potential change later on.
Jacobsen: What are your suggestions for having, at a minimum, an amicable conversation when it does come up?
Dillahunty: The important thing to remember is that you don’t owe anyone an explanation for who you are or what you believe. In daily life, you get to be yourself and think what you think without having to justify it to anyone. You must participate honestly and openly if you engage in a conversation. If you reach a point where someone asks a difficult question you don’t have an answer to, you can pause the conversation at any time and say, “That’s a good point. I want to think about that and get back to you.” Then, reflect on it and follow up because you should do what you say you will do.
If you find yourself overwhelmed—where you’re confronted with too many new ideas, unfamiliar terminology, or different interpretations of concepts—it’s okay to acknowledge that. For example, when someone uses terms like “reasonable” or “logical,” it’s important to clarify definitions. People often throw these words around casually, and I used to get frustrated when “logic” was used as if it was subjective, like “your logic” or “a logical line of thought.” But in reality, something is either reasonable or it isn’t. Establishing shared definitions and agreeing on terms is key.
More importantly, agree on how you could conclude. For instance, if one person believes in God and the other doesn’t, can you agree on a method to determine whether God is real? Discuss the method until there’s agreement. If agreement isn’t reached, the issue isn’t the belief in God itself but the methods of reasoning that led to that belief.
Jacobsen: What arguments do you find are the most carefully thought-out among theists when you receive calls?
Dillahunty: That’s an interesting question because there are two aspects to consider: how well-thought-out the argument is by the person who originally crafted it and how well the person presenting it understands it. One of the first things I determine is whether the caller comprehends their argument.
Jacobsen: Good point. You mentioned you’re busier than ever. Given the significant changes in the media landscape over the past few decades, where do you see the main channels for atheist conversation, media, and opinion writing now?
Dillahunty: I’m not the best person to answer that because I don’t spend much time-consuming atheist media, including content from some of my friends and colleagues. I used to joke with DJ Grothe when we were both running podcasts simultaneously—he was hosting CFI’s Point of Inquiry podcast, and we’re both from Missouri. He’s a younger, gayer, possibly more attractive version of me, but we share similar skeptic and atheist perspectives. We were doing these shows together, and we’re both magicians. I remember sitting at an event once, showing him card tricks.
And he said, “Hey, I wanted to tell you that I love what I’ve heard from your work.” But then he added, “I don’t get a chance to listen to much of what you do.” I replied, “Don’t feel bad about it. I don’t get to listen to much of what you do either.”
I don’t sit around listening to podcasts. I used to, but I eventually stopped, giving myself the excuse that I wanted to be authentically me. I didn’t want to unconsciously mirror someone else’s thoughts or hear a podcast that sparked an idea and then repeat it similarly. I’ve had people blatantly plagiarize my content and pass it off as their own. And when called out, their response has been, “Well, I’m not doing peer-reviewed research, so it doesn’t matter if I cite Matt as a source. My fans won’t care anyway,” because, for many, it’s become about fan bases.
Though this will change, I’ve never made a penny from my personal YouTube channel. I have over 100,000 subscribers, and while the channel is monetized and there’s money available, I haven’t been paid for any of it, nor have I taken any ad deals. Now, I get paid for my work on The Line and receive Patreon support for my content. Those are contributions from supporters who believe in my work and help fund its production. I will be taking revenue from YouTube because it would be foolish to leave the money untouched when needed. But the point is that fans and money were never my original goal. I had a day job when I started this before transitioning into full-time atheist activism. I donated all my vacation time and life savings to ensure I could travel, speak, produce content, and teach because the mission was always the most important thing.
Jacobsen: Are you seeing an increase in quasi-personality cults or branding based on one’s atheist identity?
Dillahunty: Yes, it’s happening more and more, much like how various atheist organizations have grown and split apart, developing their focuses and divisions. I used to joke that when Atheist Alliance International split into Atheist Alliance International and Atheist Alliance of America, people would say, “Great, now we have the Second Baptist Church of atheism or something.” However, the positive aspect is that the movement has grown enough to support different focuses and directives while maintaining the overarching goals. It is a split in the sense of being against each other but a way of dividing focus while working toward shared, unified objectives.
As I watch these changes, the cult of personality will always exist. There will always be individuals trying to build a brand. Once people started making money on YouTube, I saw that firsthand—even though I hadn’t received payment directly, I ran an organization that paid five employees using content I produced for free. Now, I see some tribalism, where people say, “That person I want to listen to.” I’m exempt from this. There are Matt Dillahunty fans and stans who, frankly, would probably annoy me if I met them in person.
Some people have problematic parasocial relationships. But when it comes to the mission, I noticed that even before the pandemic, there was already a decline in the number of atheist conventions in the U.S. There was a time when I was speaking at a local or national event every month or two. That has changed, and it isn’t just because of the pandemic. It could be because we have bigger political issues to address, even though I have recently shifted my focus toward political matters.
Jacobsen: What are the major disagreements within the American freethought community?
Dillahunty: Money. I’m on the board of directors for American Atheists, and I’m friends with people in other organizations where I’m on the board. Churches and religious organizations are incredibly well-funded, and it takes much money to keep secular organizations running. Even The Line network, which benefits all of us, requires funding for employees and operational costs. This work has a business aspect, especially in the system we use around it.
Suppose someone donates $1,000,000 to one organization and $100,000 to another. In that case, there can be disputes, sometimes even lawsuits, about why funds are not distributed equally or differing opinions on their use. By the time the money is allocated to organizations, a portion is already gone due to legal fees, and more fees can follow. This leads to ideological disagreements—one group might prioritize Supreme Court First Amendment cases, and another might focus on community outreach. At the same time, a third emphasizes national policy and politics.
Everyone thinks their focus is the most important. When one organization is thriving and another isn’t, it’s easier to criticize than to work on improving one’s efforts. I often say, “Work on the lawn on your side of the fence instead of pointing out the weeds in mine.” Ultimately, we’re the same property, and we all benefit when the grass is green everywhere.
Jacobsen: Matt, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.
Dillahunty: No problem. Take care. Later.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/30
Author Disclaimer
The views and opinions expressed in this article are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the official policy or position of any organization, institution, or entity with which the author may be affiliated, including Humanists International.
Dr. Leo Igwe, a Nigerian human rights advocate and humanist, recounted the international efforts to secure the release of Mubarak Bala, a prominent ex-Muslim and humanist arrested for alleged “blasphemy”. Igwe detailed the challenges in advocating for Bala’s release, including navigating Nigeria’s complex legal system, mobilizing international organizations such as Humanists International, Amnesty International, and the UN, and countering misinformation campaigns. Despite resistance from Kano police and authorities, Igwe’s legal and advocacy teams employed a strategic approach, leveraging diplomatic pressure and media coverage. Initially sentenced to 25 years, Bala’s term was reduced to five years on appeal, a significant achievement given Nigeria’s Sharia-influenced legal landscape. The case also exposed cracks and fragilities within the atheist/humanist community, with opportunists attempting to exploit the situation for personal gain, spreading misinformation, and launching smear campaigns against Igwe and his colleagues. Igwe emphasized the importance of institutional support, credible networks, and verification mechanisms in future advocacy efforts. In conclusion, Igwe expressed gratitude to global humanists, legal teams, and international partners who remained steadfast in the campaign, ensuring that Mubarak Bala was not forgotten and ultimately freed.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Once more, we’re here with Dr. Leo Igwe. He is calling from Ibadan, Nigeria, while I am calling from a small town about two and a half hours east of downtown Vancouver, in the far West of Canada. It is cold here, so I am sitting by the fireplace. Let’s continue—no introduction is necessary. How do you approach informing the international community about cases like Mubarak Bala and others?
Dr. Leo Igwe: We are a small organization here, even though there are many non-religious and religiously indifferent people. The case of Mubarak Bala was quite unusual because it was beyond our capacity to handle.
A few days before his arrest, I was notified that he was receiving threats from various individuals who were offended by his Facebook posts. I called him, and we discussed the situation. He told me he would try to neutralize the threats, and I suggested he report the matter to the police. However, he said doing so would worsen things because the police would side with those threatening him.
That was the last conversation we had on the matter. Two or three days later, I received a call informing me that the police had taken him into custody and that we needed to do everything we could to secure his release or at least ensure his safety. Honestly, I was completely confused and distressed.
I immediately began making desperate calls to the police in Kaduna, where he was living. I remember speaking with the police commissioner, who said it was not their case. He explained that the Kano police had issued a directive for his arrest and that they would transfer him there.
We were deeply concerned that transferring him to Kano might mean we would never see him again. I attempted to reach the station where he was being held and managed to speak with him for a few seconds before the phone was taken from him. That was the last time we talked for months.
After his transfer, we called the police in Kano, but they claimed they had no information. When we contacted the police in Kaduna, they said they had already handed him over to the Kano authorities. This was how they kept misleading us, passing responsibility from one place to another.
At that point, I realized the situation was beyond my control. I decided to inform the international community. I sent a message to Humanists International and reached out to all my contacts—atheists, freethinkers, and human rights advocates. I explained the situation and urged them to take action.
I felt that if they could disappear him and get away with it, it would be a devastating blow to our efforts to grow the humanist community. I did everything I could to ensure he would not be harmed. We were gravely concerned that he would be disappeared, as has happened to many others in similar circumstances. Often, when someone is arrested for “blasphemy”, they vanish, and nothing is ever heard of them again.
I was distraught, not only for his safety but also for the future of our movement. Without delay, I contacted my lawyer, a humanist who has worked closely with us. I told him, “We are in serious trouble. “What happened next?
It was during the lockdown, and there were severe restrictions on movement. Everyone was indoors, and people could barely move around within their communities. There was no interstate movement—you could not travel from one state to another.
So, we had to gather contacts and lawyers from different states—Kaduna, Kano, and Abuja. We worked to get these contacts to help us pressure the authorities. Luckily, within a few days, we could put together what we called a legal team.
Yes, but I knew this was not a legal issue. “blasphemy” cases are more political than legal. That was why I also contacted NGOs and other organizations. I wrote to Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch.
I contacted various embassies, particularly those of the EU, the United States, and the United Kingdom, and messaged them. However, I received an extraordinary response and support from Humanists International.
And I must tell you this—not because I am a board member, but because I have over 20 years of experience working and navigating this risky terrain.
So, what I said was that Humanists International responded immediately, publicized the events, and rallied around us. The immediate question was, “What do you need?”
We told them that we needed to have a legal team in place and use our platform to advocate and make noise because that was precisely what the people who arrested him did not want. They wanted him silenced, and anything about him silenced so they could determine his fate.
What they did not and would not have wanted was for anyone to talk about him, make noise, or raise awareness about the case. With Humanists International’s support, we could do precisely that. The case went global, and many organizations, including the UN and international NGOs, got involved. Embassies also took action—they called and checked in with us daily to track progress.
Jacobsen: So, you’re contacting the UN and Human Rights Watch and sending letters and emails to Amnesty International. You’re also using resources such as a humanist lawyer you have worked with before, someone who understands both you and the situation’s complexities.
What strategies worked? What strategies did not? To someone reading this without context, it might seem like you were shotgunning any possible support system. But there was a method to it, even though, in emergency mode, you were essentially scrambling.
Igwe: Yes. The idea of spreading the news worldwide and involving the international community worked—it helped put pressure on the authorities.
But we did not succeed in everything. First, we wanted to prevent him from being taken to Kano, and we failed. When we got the police involved and willing to act, he had already been transferred to Kano.
We also tried to ensure that the Kano police were responsive in telling us where he was being held. Still, we were met with silence and dismissal of our inquiries.
Our efforts to prevent his disappearance immediately failed because the police and the government in Kano did not respond to our requests.
They did not attend to us. They largely ignored us, and I want to emphasize that they ignored the world for a long time.
Even with all the pressure from the EU, the U.S. embassies, and other diplomatic efforts, they held him for six months before officially acknowledging that he was in their custody. So, it was not as though we rallied all these agencies, and they immediately secured his release. No, it took us over four years for him to finally be free.
Many of the pressures we applied were either met with resistance or ignored. However, we persisted, leveraging international agencies, the UN office, and the UN Special Rapporteur on Freedom of Religion, who was supportive. It was through them that we learned, months later, that he was still alive. We discovered he was being kept in a private cell in Kano.
Even the EU embassies played a role in confirming that he was alive. They signalled to us that he had not been killed but was still being detained. It took considerable time before some of our efforts started yielding results, primarily in confirming his safety. Eventually, the authorities responded to demands that he be released or brought to trial, as required by law.
Jacobsen: How did the global response influence advocacy efforts? You touched on that a bit. I’m particularly interested in cases where there was a complete deadlock—where no progress could be made. Were there instances where people were listening and trying to help, but it was too late, or they were blocked due to a lack of resources or because they had more pressing cases to handle? Also, regarding individuals, I am aware that the prominent and highly respected literary intellectual Wole Soyinka commented on this case. What role did such figures play?
Igwe: Yes.
In the beginning, we mobilized everything we could. We sent letters to organizations, individuals, and prominent Nigerian politicians. We contacted former presidents, urging them to pressure the government for his release.
Wole Soyinka and other respected figures got involved. These efforts aimed to rally prominent, outspoken, and respected individuals to pressure the authorities in Kano and the federal government to release him or ensure his safety. But it took an immense amount of time.
This did not happen automatically. It shows how strong the establishment behind his arrest was and how unwilling they were to relent or yield to international pressure.
We faced significant challenges from the start. One key difficulty was overcoming the authorities’ resistance, as they were determined to suppress any external intervention.
In addition, I did not even know Mubarak Bala well. We live in the same country, but I was studying overseas then. I returned in 2017. While I was abroad, I heard about his decision to come out as an ex-Muslim, and we met on only one or two occasions. So, I knew him as an ex-Muslim, and that was it.
Some people forget that even within the secular and humanist community, we may not always know each other well. Finding the right people to work with when he was arrested became another challenge. There is a concept in some Islamic communities called Taqiyya, which refers to religious dissimulation or concealment. Some individuals were suspected of pretending to be atheists to infiltrate secular networks and pass information to religious authorities.
There was concern that some of those engaging in Taqiyya had infiltrated Mubarak’s network, gathered information, and reported him to the authorities. This added another layer of difficulty because, at that time, we were under lockdown due to the pandemic. We had to rely solely on phone calls, emails, and Facebook messages to coordinate efforts. Still, we had no real way of verifying who was trustworthy.
Given that we were trying to save a life and ensure that Mubarak suffered no harm, we were willing to work with anyone who could help. However, knowing whom to trust was extremely difficult in a case as sensitive as “blasphemy”.
Jacobsen: What were the key steps in bringing together the legal team with the advocacy team so that the advocacy team could inform the legal team about the critical points of the case, and then the legal team could develop a case in defence of Mubarak?
Igwe: Yes. This was another critical task we faced at the time.
Assembling the legal and advocacy teams happened organically—slowly and steadily—because we had to act with extreme caution. First and foremost, we had to find lawyers we could trust. This is something that many people later criticized. Some claimed, “Oh, you hired your friends.” But in this situation, you cannot hire people that you know little about. You cannot put out a job announcement asking, Who would like to take up a “blasphemy” case? In Nigeria, “blasphemy” is a highly sensitive issue, and many lawyers refuse to touch it out of fear.
So, we had to find lawyers we could rely on. I contacted the lawyers within our humanist network—people already working with us. We connected with James Ibor, a lawyer already engaged in human rights work. We tasked him with finding other trustworthy lawyers to build a solid legal team. It was a snowball approach, where one trusted contact led to another.
The same principle applied to the advocacy team. We had to work with organizations and agencies we knew genuinely supported our cause. Otherwise, there was always the risk of sharing information with someone who would leak it to those on the other side. Trust was crucial in bringing together the legal and advocacy teams. That trust was also why, even when strange developments emerged later, we could keep the case together and remain unified in our mission to secure Mubarak’s release.
Of course, as the case gained more publicity, more people wanted to get involved. At a certain point, numerous organizations wanted to take credit for what had become a high-profile case. That created additional challenges because, as soon as the case became widely known on social media, different groups started making statements about it.
Then something else happened. Lawyers I had never met started reaching out, saying, “We have experience in cases like this. We want to take over Mubarak’s defence.” My response was, Take over which case? I did not know these lawyers—I had never met them, I did not know their credibility, and I had no idea whether people had sent some of them on the other side to derail our efforts.
I was firm in rejecting their involvement. Some of them retaliated by going online and blackmailing me, attacking my choices, and claiming that Mubarak had not been released because I had hired “incompetent” lawyers. Instead of recognizing that we were up against a deeply entrenched and fanatical jihadist system, they tried to shift the blame onto us.
These individuals were not genuinely interested in the case; they saw it as an opportunity to attach themselves to a celebrity case. They wanted to ride the wave of attention it was getting. I say this because there have been other “blasphemy” cases in Nigeria, such as Deborah Samuel and Elijah the Barber, and these same lawyers showed no interest in those cases. Yet, suddenly, they wanted to take over Mubarak’s defence from the legal counsel leading the team.
The same thing happened with the advocacy efforts. Many organizations suddenly wanted to be involved.
During that period, someone started an organization called the Religious Freedom Foundation. Another person launched a humanist organization out of nowhere. I had never met him before, but he claimed they were also interested in the campaign. Suddenly, people were getting involved in the push to release Mubarak, and I asked, “Where have you all been all this time?”
That was when things started taking a different turn. Some of these groups began spreading accusations, saying that we were raising money but using it for ourselves instead of helping Mubarak, who was in jail. This led to a smear campaign that hurt deeply. Some people even tried to discredit Humanists International (HI). One online contact went so far as to say they would take HI to court.
Jacobsen: Yes, that is so stupid. It feels like something that might even work.
Igwe: They were making random, careless statements about HI and how the case was handled. But the most frustrating part was that they were unwilling to call out the jihadist sentiments and religious extremism that were central to the case.
Instead of focusing on the real issue—the religious fundamentalism that led to Mubarak’s arrest—they started attacking those of us defending him. We suddenly became the target of accusations because we had established a strong legal defence and raised the case profile.
They acted as if the money we raised should have been handed directly to Mubarak as if we could walk into his prison cell and put cash in his pocket. However, advocacy requires lobbying, travel, and meetings with key stakeholders. That is how we built momentum.
Humanists International ran a fantastic campaign. If you look at their work today, their efforts on “blasphemy” cases are unprecedented. The way we handled Mubarak’s case set a new standard. I also used the opportunity to raise awareness and send a strong message: Do not do this again.
Despite our efforts, some still tried to undermine us.
They assumed that we did not have the resources to mount a strong legal defence or carry out effective advocacy. But we surprised them.
As soon as they realized the scale of our efforts, the blackmail began. They said, “Oh, we didn’t understand—you have the money to hire one lawyer and an entire legal team. You have the funds to escalate the case to the UN. You have the resources and the influence.” Once they recognized this, opportunists appeared from nowhere, trying to insert themselves into the case.
I told them, “Look, there are other “blasphemy” cases. There are other people in need—why don’t you take up one of those cases?” But they weren’t interested. They wanted to attach themselves to our case, which had gained international attention. Despite these pressures, Humanists International held its ground. Slowly and steadily, we managed to fend off these distractions and eventually secured Mubarak’s release.
However, I also want to highlight an important point—some of the people who led smear campaigns against Humanists International and myself were the same people who had privately approached me, pretending to offer help. One of them was a lawyer based in the UK. He contacted me and said, “Look, I’m in the UK. I can go to the office of Humanists UK and tell them whatever I want. I can make them take action to secure Mubarak’s release.”
I responded, “Who are you?” He introduced himself, and I told him, “If you want to help, work with the existing legal team.” But he refused. He kept going back and forth, never actually committing to anything productive. Instead, he went online and started spreading propaganda, fueling a smear campaign.
What frustrated me the most was seeing a few atheists/humanists in the UK buy into this propaganda. These were people who had my contact information. I was available 24 hours a day—I was accessible during those moments, even now. They could have reached out to me or contacted HI office, but instead, they chose to spread false narratives.
It became clear that their goal was not to help but to discredit me, smear my work, and undermine everything we did. That is when I lost patience.
When I realized that there were people in the UK who called themselves humanists or atheists yet bought into this propaganda, I was deeply disappointed. These were people who had my email. I was available 24 hours a day—I had been accessible throughout those critical moments, and even now, they could still reach me.
They could have contacted the HI office as well, but instead, they chose to spread misinformation. It seemed as though they were looking for an opportunity to discredit my work—to smear me, slander me, and undermine everything I was doing. That was where I felt the most disappointment. These people knew little or nothing about the situation and did not understand the complexities we were dealing with. Yet, they went online and wrote petitions against me.
That truly hurt me. I felt deeply let down. But, of course, Humanists International handled the situation professionally, and it did not stop us from continuing our work.
Let me also add that one of the individuals involved in this smear campaign was a woman who, after we had generated a great deal of international support for Mubarak’s case, suddenly claimed that she, too, had been accused of “blasphemy”. She said she needed to relocate overseas.
Now, I understand that immigration issues are sensitive in Europe. However, we must also balance those considerations with our realities. She reached out to various groups in Europe and the U.S., trying to secure help. She attempted to further her agenda by leveraging Mubarak’s and Deborah Samuel’s cases. This was a complex case for us to assess. We asked her to provide evidence of the accusation, but she could not substantiate her claim. She stated that the police were looking for her. I asked, “Which police department?” In Nigeria, officers are assigned to specific stations, which follow a structure.
Then, at one point, she sent out an alarmist message, claiming that the police had surrounded her house. Concerned, we tried to call her, but she did not pick up. Later, she sent us a budget, saying she needed financial assistance to relocate from Borno State—where Boko Haram militants were active—to the capital, Abuja.
She initially requested $2,000 and then increased her demand to $4,000. I asked, “$4,000 for what?” She claimed she needed police protection and clearance as part of the budget. That immediately struck me as suspicious.
I told her, “The police are supposedly looking for you. They want to arrest you. You say you are accused of “blasphemy”, yet now you plan to use part of this budget to secure police protection and clearance to travel from Borno to Abuja?” It was utterly contradictory and made no sense to me.
At that point, I dismissed her case. It became clear that some people were opportunists trying to take advantage of the situation. While we were struggling to secure the release of someone who had been locked up and disappeared, there were others—completely free—who were attempting to exploit the case for their gain.
She went online. When she realized I disapproved of her claim. She launched a smear campaign against Humanists International and me. Shockingly, a few ‘humanists and atheists’ joined her in attacking us.
And these were people who were either my Facebook friends, people who knew me, had met me, or could have easily reached out to me. Yet, they never contacted me. Instead, they joined the smear campaign without understanding what was happening.
We always try to manage these situations, but this experience showed me that anyone can become embroiled in such attacks. In cases like this, when dealing with such a sensitive issue, if you know someone well and belong to the community, you reach out. Some people did that. They sent me a message asking, “Hey, what is happening?”
In response, I would forward them the correspondence I had with the woman claiming she was accused of “blasphemy”. That alone would settle the issue. When some of these people confronted her directly, she changed her stance. She said, “This is a sensitive case involving classified information.”
I told her. It was not classified. You went online to attack Humanists International and to attack me personally. You approached us seeking relocation and funding, yet you could not substantiate your case. What exactly is that?
We will always face challenges in our quest to grow and carry out high-profile advocacy campaigns. That is why we must have mechanisms to handle such issues and prevent opportunists from distracting us or derailing our efforts.
Jacobsen: Yes, exactly. That is what this is.
People should understand—I have interviewed many humanists over the years, and to be honest, it may surprise some, but there are not that many scammers. A few people might loosely claim the title and try to grift. Still, they are usually not actively involved in the community.
Most of the time, they operate as standalone individuals rather than being embedded within humanist networks. Regarding actual scammers who were successful, I can only recall one case off the top of my head. That person was quickly exposed, condemned, and effectively disappeared from humanist activism, media, and discussion.
What you describe sounds like a reflection of broader societal trends creeping into the humanist movement. Opportunism is typical in general culture, but within international humanism, it is rare to find real scammers—let alone successful ones. At least, that is what I have observed when speaking with humanists worldwide.
All right, let’s move on to the next question.
What is the process of filing petitions with the police and courts in Nigeria? Does it differ between Kaduna, Kano, Abuja, or Ibadan, or is it mostly the same throughout the country?
Igwe: The process is generally the same for cases like “blasphemy”. However, in sensitive situations like this, we must always be cautious. “Where do you file the petition? Who files it?”
The safety of those filing these cases is a significant concern, so we had to carefully decide where to file petitions with the police or bring cases to court. We chose Abuja, the capital because Islamist and jihadist influence is much weaker there than in Kano. Moving the case away from Kano was a strategic decision.
Of course, some people criticized this approach. However, our reasoning was clear—if we were to challenge them, we would not do it where they held significant power and influence. Instead, we took the case to a jurisdiction where federal and international institutions could provide support. That is why, in cases like this, it is always advisable to file legal actions in places where extremist groups have less control.
Therefore, one of the cases we filed was in Abuja instead of Kano.
Jacobsen: Were there difficulties in shifting the case from Kano to Abuja?
Igwe: Yes.
Filing a case in Abuja was not difficult. However, getting Kano authorities to honour the judgment was a different challenge. A court in Abuja could issue a ruling, but enforcing that judgment required additional effort.
This is where we leveraged diplomatic pressure. We engaged with diplomats and the UN to push for the enforcement of the ruling, which stated that he should either be tried in court or released. That was a key outcome of the Abuja judgment.
Another major challenge came after his conviction—securing his transfer from Kano to Abuja Prison. That required making a strong case because, in many ways, transferring him to Abuja was like letting him go halfway.
While in Kano, the authorities had total control over him. They could treat him however they wanted in court, without external interference. However, once he was transferred to Abuja, his situation changed significantly. He gained access to a phone, WhatsApp, and communication tools that had been ultimately denied to him in Kano.
It was a long process, but we worked to bring in the National Human Rights Commission and other friendly agencies to assist us in ensuring a smooth and secure transfer from Kano Prison to Abuja Prison.
His transfer to Abuja was the first real sign that his release was possible. Once we successfully moved him out of Kano, we felt that there was a real chance of securing his freedom.
So, while the process was extremely challenging, we relied on diplomatic channels and international support to make it happen.
Jacobsen: I mean, we’ve seen different types of disappearances—both real and faux disappearances, depending on the case. In some cases, there is no disappearance at all.
For example, take the case of Gaspár Bekes. His professional and personal life has been impacted, but as far as I know, he does not require security. That represents one category of humanist persecution, where the individual faces difficulties but remains relatively safe.
Then, moving from Western Europe to an Indian case, we have Narendra Nayak, who requires security (removed at the moment). However, his situation has not involved faux disappearance—his life is at risk, but he has remained visible.
Then there are cases like Gulalai Ismail, where an individual goes into hiding for security reasons. In her case, her entire family faced persecution—her father, Mohammad Ismail, her sister Saba, and Gulalai herself. Initially, nobody knew her whereabouts. Only a few people knew what had happened; months later, she surfaced in New York. She was eventually featured in The New York Times multiple times.
This represents a “faux disappearance,” meaning that the individual is hidden for security reasons rather than being forcibly disappeared by the state. Eventually, they reappear in a safe location.
Then, there are cases of real disappearances, where individuals vanish not for safety but due to direct persecution by state or social forces—like Mubarak Bala.
Let’s look at this as a sliding scale. We start with cases like Gaspár Bekes, which have a professional and social impact but no physical danger. Then we move to cases like Narendra Nayak, which have a security risk but no disappearance. Then, we move to cases like Gulalai Ismail, which has a strategic disappearance for safety. Finally, in the end, we have Mubarak Bala, where the persecution was severe enough to result in years of imprisonment.
Now, let me get to my question.
What measures were taken to confirm whether Mubarak was alive after he disappeared? I’m curious about this. Many people were. You were directly involved and working more actively than I was. What was being done to find out his status?
Igwe: That is an interesting question.
Like I said earlier, we did everything we could. And when I say everything, I mean that every single day, I would wake up and ask:
“Have we spoken to Mr. X?”
“Have we contacted Professor Y?”
“Have we sent an email to Z?”
We called embassies, contacted diplomats, and knocked on every possible door, asking, “Hey, what do you do? Can you help us confirm whether Mubarak is still alive?”
This man had disappeared.
We even ran advertisements in national newspapers asking for information on his whereabouts. We did everything we could to determine whether he was alive or dead.
We pursued multiple approaches. First, there was the legal approach—we took the case to court and filed a demand that the government produce him, try him, or release him. There is a technical legal term for this. Still, our court case required the authorities to confirm his whereabouts and either put him on trial or set him free.
Then, there was the advocacy approach. We wrote letters to the Governor of Kano, the President of Nigeria, and all major human rights organizations. We engaged with the UN, which issued public statements and applied diplomatic pressure on the authorities.
As I mentioned before, the UN first confirmed his existence. For months, we had been receiving no signal whatsoever that he was still alive, so we intensified our efforts. The UN used its networks to verify his status, and they confirmed that he was still being held in custody.
Our international pressure worked. After a few months, the UN confirmed that he was alive.
Jacobsen: That is a huge win.
What about the uncertainty during that period? The scrambling for weeks, even months, affected how you approached the legal strategy.
His sentence was originally 25 years, but it was reduced to five years on appeal. That is extraordinarily significant—not only for his personal life but also as a legal precedent for cases like his.
Everything about this case was illegitimate and outrageous. Still, the fact that you could appeal and reduce the sentence so dramatically is remarkable. How did you adapt your legal strategy as more information became available and his safety was secured?
Igwe: Well, in cases like this, no matter what you do, people will judge you.
Because of time differences between teams and organizations, we held constant meetings, even at midnight or 1:00 AM.
One of our biggest challenges was that some people wanted us to focus on eliminating Nigeria’s “blasphemy” laws. While that was a noble goal, it was not the most strategic approach.
Instead, we asked ourselves: What is our immediate goal? The answer was clear—get him out of prison and to safety.
There were several ways to achieve that:
- A presidential pardon
- An acquittal through the courts
- A successful appeal to reduce his sentence
Ultimately, the appeal strategy worked, reducing his 25-year sentence to five years. But our immediate goal was not to abolish “blasphemy” laws altogether but to release Mubarak.
That is why we had to bring another legal team to focus on broader “blasphemy” cases. We hope that those cases can eventually be used to challenge the constitutionality of “blasphemy” provisions. However, that is a long-term battle.
This is also part of the reason why one individual accused of “blasphemy” is still in jail today—because some legal teams prioritized challenging the law itself rather than focusing on securing the individual’s release. And let me tell you, getting rid of “blasphemy” laws in Nigeria is not something that will happen today or tomorrow.
From the beginning, we tried to avoid distractions and groups with conflicting approaches that could slow us down. Of course, there were also criticisms that our lawyer was incompetent. Still, we ignored the noise and focused on our goal.
That clarity helped us manage the uncertainty and stay on track.
When the initial sentence was handed down, we carefully analyzed the loopholes in the judgment. The legal debate centred on whether the sentences should run concurrently or cumulatively—something our lawyers could explain better. But it was through these loopholes that we built our appeal.
At the same time, we increased diplomatic pressure. We engaged with the U.S. Commission on International Religious Freedom (USCIRF) to push the Nigerian government to clarify that Mubarak’s case seriously failed to protect freedom of religion or belief.
By clearly defining our objectives, applying international pressure, and refusing to be distracted by blackmail, slander, and infighting, we secured Mubarak’s reduced sentence and eventual release.
Jacobsen: How was the trial in Kano? What challenges did you face during the proceedings?
Igwe: The trial itself was highly problematic.
First, access to Mubarak was restricted. Our lawyers were routinely blocked from visiting him. When they did manage to see, they were told they needed additional permissions—sometimes from Abuja, sometimes from local officials. There was always an excuse to limit their time with him.
When Mubarak tried to communicate with them by phone, they would only allow calls lasting two minutes or less. These restrictions weakened his legal defence and prevented his lawyers from preparing an adequate case.
Then, during the trial, Mubarak pleaded guilty despite his lawyer’s advice.
His lawyer strongly advised him not to. The legal team believed they could not have convicted him if the case had been tried on merit. But Mubarak pleaded guilty, acting on his reasoning, which led to the harsh sentencing.
Afterward, some people blamed the lawyer for the guilty plea, which was unfair—it was Mubarak’s decision. The BBC even covered the trial, and the video clearly showed that he pleaded guilty against legal advice.
Once that happened, we regrouped and immediately started preparing an appeal, eventually reducing his sentence.
Jacobsen: What does this case reveal about the state of Nigeria’s legal system, especially across different jurisdictions?
Igwe: Well, Nigeria’s legal system does not operate like the legal systems in Canada, the U.S., or the UK.
In Nigeria, laws vary significantly depending on which part of the country you are in. In the north, where Muslims are the majority, the legal system is heavily influenced by religious establishments.
State laws do not hold the same weight there. They are often subordinate to Sharia law. Whenever there is a conflict between state and Sharia law, authorities defer to the Sharia-leaning interpretation.
One of the fundamental challenges we face is that there is no single rule of law for all Nigerians. Instead, we have multiple legal frameworks that allow religious and political establishments—both Islamic and Christian—to exploit legal loopholes and undermine the idea of one law for all.
In theory, Nigeria claims to uphold the rule of law. But in practice, we have a “rule of laws,” where different legal standards apply based on religion, location, and political power.
This is precisely why individuals like Mubarak Bala cannot fully exercise their rights or receive a fair trial when charged in court.
Jacobsen: Let’s say you’re a Muslim in Kano facing trial for violating Islamic law. How would that legal system treat you compared to an ex-Muslim accused of the same offence?
Would the treatment be equal, or would it be different?
Igwe: If you are a Muslim, the authorities will want to try you under Sharia law.
However, if you are an ex-Muslim, things are much worse. Nobody looks kindly on ex-Muslims in Northern Nigeria. Being an ex-Muslim makes you hated, ostracized, and, in many cases, a target for punishment or even elimination.
If given the opportunity, some extremists believe you should be killed simply for leaving Islam.
For that reason, they do not even want ex-Muslims to be tried under state law—because state law would be more lenient in its sentencing. Instead, they push for Sharia courts to handle these cases, ensuring harsher punishments for the accused.
Even for non-Muslims, the legal system is biased. People have told me in Northern Nigeria that if a Christian or non-Muslim is tried in a state court, they often receive longer sentences than Muslims for the same offence.
In other words, you suffer more punishment simply because you are not Muslim.
This makes the legal landscape in Northern Nigeria a perilous place for religious minorities, especially ex-Muslims, atheists, and secular activists.
Jacobsen: Beyond that, I want to emphasize that Mubarak’s original “crime” was cyber-based.
This adds another layer of complexity because cyber offences do not always fit neatly within traditional legal frameworks. Unlike physical crimes, cyber-based cases transcend national and geopolitical boundaries.
Mubarak’s case was not about “blasphemy”—it also reflected the growing conflict between digital free speech and religious censorship in authoritarian societies.
So, Mubarak’s “crime” was posting one sentence on Facebook (now Meta)—a harsh, critical statement making fun of Mohammed. For that, he was sentenced to 25 years in prison.
Let me reiterate how draconian that is. He was kidnapped from his home in Kaduna by plainclothes officers without a warrant, dragged to Kano, and then charged under a quasi-cyber “blasphemy” law. Eventually, through intense legal efforts, his sentence was reduced to five years—which, in that context, was considered a win.
This case demonstrates the extremity of Nigeria’s legal landscape, especially when religious forces are involved. Anyone who has travelled outside their country can recognize the vast differences in legal frameworks, and Mubarak’s case is one of the most extreme examples of religious persecution through legal mechanisms.
Now, to your point about smear campaigns, in North America, podcasts are popular. YouTube channels functioning as audio-visual podcasts often discuss narcissism, relationships, interpersonal dynamics, and professional conflicts. Many of these channels frame smear campaigns as something resulting from narcissistic injury—when a narcissist feels slighted and retaliates with false accusations and character attacks.
Most of these discussions, however, are not from experts—people with strong opinions speaking confidently on social media. When they discuss smear campaigns, they usually mean personal vendettas fueled by emotional grievances.
But in your case, I think you are using a “smear campaign” in a more specific and political way—as a tool for social and political undermining rather than personal retaliation.
How do you counter systematic misinformation and smear campaigns in your context, especially from select sources with an agenda?
Igwe: Well, there is a limit to what anyone can do today regarding social media misinformation.
People can spend endless hours on Facebook, Twitter, or other platforms spreading falsehoods and distorting reality. And the truth is, we can only do so much to counter that.
We considered two different strategic approaches:
- Could you ignore it? Some people advised that responding would only escalate the problem and make the accuser feel important.
- Engage with it. Others argued that misinformation could discredit years of work, and ignoring it would allow false narratives to spread unchecked.
Meanwhile, we kept receiving emails and messages from supporters warning us: “They are smearing you! They are spreading false information! They are undermining all the work you’ve done over the years!”
Honestly, if you ask me, smear campaigns are deeply frustrating, and they can be hurtful—mainly when they stem from ignorance.
Igwe: Sometimes, people who engage in smear campaigns are dealing with trauma. When I recognize this, I find avoiding them is best.
However, if you are in a public role—serving on a board or leading an organization—you cannot always ignore them. Smear campaigns can damage the reputation of organizations you are associated with or even create distrust among your colleagues.
I was struggling with these challenges. When I saw some of these false accusations, I knew exactly who was behind them and why they were being made. My natural response was to ignore them.
But, of course, it was not that simple. I kept receiving calls, Facebook messages, emails, and even lawyers and family members were being contacted. People were asking, “What is going on? Why are they saying these things about you? You need to respond!” The pressure to react was constant.
I responded at times, and at other times, I thought it best to ignore it. Managing these situations was extremely difficult. But I will say that we did our best—myself, Humanists International, and everyone else involved.
Our primary strategy was to let the controversy fizzle out, precisely what happened.
Of course, even now, when I attend local meetings, people still ask, “What happened? I remember hearing all sorts of things about you.” And then I find myself having to retell the entire story repeatedly—even though it adds no real value to my life.
This is the reality of being a public figure. When you are visible and outspoken, there will always be moments when people spread negative or false claims about you. That is inevitable.
Sometimes, these attacks come from surprising places—from people who were once your Facebook friends or even members of the humanist community. I have learned to expect them.
Still, we are human, and we sometimes need to respond. Occasionally, I issued statements, asking people to ignore the false accusations. I also wrote articles to clarify the situation, including one on humanism and asylum-seeking, which examined how some individuals exploit legitimate human rights issues for personal gain.
Ultimately, the best approach is to provide clarification when necessary—but otherwise, ignore it.
Jacobsen: That is a healthy response. I completely agree.
Every humanist I know has gone through this in their small town or internationally. It is simply part of being a minority in a global movement.
Igwe: Yes.
As I said earlier, the crisis, challenges, and smear campaigns helped me better understand how fragile the humanist community can be.
It also showed me how easily people can get drawn into misinformation.
We had to hold emergency meetings—one after another— to address these issues. And I thought to myself, “Wow, so two or three individuals spreading misinformation on social media can throw an entire organization into panic mode?”
This is why humanists must work through institutions rather than acting on impulse. Institutions have professionals who are trained to verify facts before taking action.
Take, for example, a humanist in the UK who reads something online. Instead of contacting the relevant institutions to verify the information, they immediately write a petition and send it to an organization.
Meanwhile, they never reached out to those institutions first. They never said, “Hey, I read this—what is going on?”
Had they done so, the institution would have investigated and provided an informed position. Instead, they went online, researched in isolation, spoke only to people from one side of the issue, and then joined a campaign to discredit someone.
And what happened?
The petition reached the institutional level, was adequately investigated, and was dismissed as baseless. This kind of behaviour damages credibility and undermines the integrity of movements.
My advice is specifically for humanists in the U.S., the UK, and the West. Some of them still hold narrow-minded views of Africans. When they hear the word “Nigerian,” some immediately associate it with 419 scams and fraud—as if that defines an entire country.
People need to understand that fraud exists everywhere.
Fraudsters exist in Canada, the U.S., Europe, Asia, and beyond. Americans know this about their own country. The reality is that the world is the way it is today because of fraud—whether covertly or overtly executed by people of all races, backgrounds, and nationalities.
Yet, when it comes to Africa, some people immediately fall back on stereotypes. They assume that an African person is automatically uneducated, unintelligent, or “low-brow.” And worse, some of these same people try to “guide” Africans, even when they are entirely ignorant and prejudiced.
I have seen this firsthand. Many of our colleagues in the West—humanists included—treat Africans with condescension. They may not say it outright, but their attitudes make it evident that they see Africans as primitive, backward, or in need of paternalistic oversight.
I have witnessed this repeatedly after more than twenty years of working within the humanist movement.
Let them understand that things are changing.
As I sit here, I see that my mother is an American citizen. My siblings live in different parts of the world. We know what is going on globally. We are not the Africans of the anthropology era of 200, 400, or 500 years ago.
Yet, many still see us as “noble savages.” They may not say it outright, but when they talk about Africans, they do so with deep contempt and disrespect. And let me be clear—this approach will not work for us in the 21st century.
We use the same Internet and have the same access to information. Yet, their prejudices show in how they handle African cases and in how they interact with African activists and intellectuals.
Let me tell you something else—if only white people had handled Mubarak’s case, none of these controversies would likely not have arisen. Despite his initial objections, even Mubarak would have likely accepted the process without issue.
The truth is that many people harbour racist attitudes, but they refuse to call it racism. At the same time, many Africans and Nigerians have internalized their sense of inferiority. They panic whenever someone from the U.S. or Europe makes a statement—even when that person is wrong. And let me be clear—many times, they are wrong.
Humanists worldwide must understand that we should abandon outdated mindsets when relating to one another and treat each other respectfully. I pointed out that if the lawyers handling this case were British or Americans, even if one was incompetent or unaware of the legal trends, no one would launch a smear campaign against them. Even if people from the U.S. or the UK were involved in such a campaign, they wouldn’t, simply because he is British—he’s a white man.
However, there is an inherent tendency to look down on people when they are not white and are handling significant responsibilities. Their competence and intelligence are immediately questioned. And look, people are questioning my ability to manage a situation I understand better than they do. Scott, there’s a limit. This situation is unfolding, and who will suffer the most? I am the one at the center of it. And I’m telling people, “This is how I want to handle it.” Yet, someone in the UK or the U.S. claims that I don’t know what I’m doing, that I hired an incompetent lawyer—what an insult! What an insult!
That’s why I said humanists should work through institutions. If there are concerns, contact Humanists International: “Could you look into this? These are the reports I’m receiving.” From there, the situation can be assessed more accurately. But instead, people turn to social media, gathering fragmented information from unreliable sources. Many are traumatized, disappointed, desperate, or pursuing their agendas. They resort to smear campaigns and slander when they don’t get what they want.
Spreading misinformation and amplifying falsehoods is irresponsible. I was disappointed by this, and we must be mindful of it. Moving forward, we will grow and not remain a marginal organization.
If we are ready to grow, we should be prepared to manage this. We should have mechanisms in place and recognize that many people will come to the UK claiming to be humanists—not because they genuinely are, but because they seek residency. They declare, “I’m a humanist,” and we grant them asylum. Then they use that status, and there’s no practical way to verify their claim. We need a mechanism to address this because one of the prevailing arguments is, “Don’t challenge these asylum seekers because of immigration politics.”
By taking that stance, we inadvertently enable fraud. We allow people to fabricate claims of persecution and exploit resources. And if a white British person vouches for someone, even when evidence suggests otherwise, that claim is rarely questioned. The position taken by a British person in a case like this is often considered unquestionable, even when they know little or nothing about the legal situation on the ground.
We create these crises, but moving forward, we must emphasize the importance of mutual respect and partnership. Instead of making assumptions, call me and ask, “What does this person need? What is the actual situation?” We should also implement verification mechanisms and rely on their results rather than being swayed by sentimentality or the idea that Western perspectives must always prevail simply because they originate from the West.
That approach will alienate many genuine and committed people, and if we allow it to happen, we will remain a marginal, fringe organization.
Jacobsen: How did you engage with local communities—without patronizing them—to gain their support, whether religious or non-religious, in advocating for Mubarak Bala? You worked to reduce his sentence from 25 years to five, ultimately securing his release while keeping things low-key to ensure his safety.
Igwe: One of the things I always emphasize is that today, it’s Mubarak. Tomorrow, it could be you. It could be your relatives. Yes, you could become a victim. That is the reality I try to communicate, and it resonates with people.
“blasphemy” accusations are like a sword hanging over people—it can fall on anyone at any time. We must convey this message to prevent it from happening again. The same applies to witchcraft accusations. As I speak to you now, I could easily fall victim to witchcraft hysteria and be killed. This is not hypothetical.
In my community, a person was brutally murdered by ritualists. Their body was mutilated, and parts were taken for ritual sacrifice. I always remind people that this is not some distant, abstract threat. It can happen to anyone, anytime.
In such situations, what can we do? We must rally together. As the saying goes, “For whom the bell tolls”—tomorrow, it could toll for you. I try to help people understand that we are shaping the future for ourselves.
To grow, we must commit to a non-violent, civil approach in responding to statements, social media posts, and positions taken by others. Reacting impulsively or with hostility will not serve our cause. Instead, we must remain strategic, principled, and united.
Violence is never an appropriate response to someone’s expression, whether in speech, writing, or social media posts, even if we strongly disagree with them. We use mechanisms to broaden our support base and rally people together. We want them to understand that this is not about an individual but a collective cause.
I never saw Mubarak’s case as just about him personally. I viewed it as a symbol, an opportunity—so to speak—to advocate for a fundamental principle I have championed for years: people must be free to believe or not believe as they choose. Society risks fostering fanaticism and extremism if people cannot freely choose their beliefs.
People in any society must be free to think, believe, and express themselves. That is the only way to prevent a slide into fundamentalism. I have always emphasized that coming together to save this young man’s life is not just about him—it is about securing a better future for us and the generations to come.
Jacobsen: Many movements emerge, and specific individuals become prominent. But for every well-known leader, there are countless others whose names will never be remembered—people who work tirelessly behind the scenes and are forgotten by history.
In North America, we can name figures like Martin Luther King Jr. and Malcolm X. In Ghana’s post-colonial context, we remember Kwame Nkrumah. These extraordinary figures emerged from particular cultural and historical circumstances that shaped them and, in turn, were shaped by them.
How do you ensure that frontline activists—those who risk their lives not for fame but for justice—are given proper recognition and respect? These individuals often remain anonymous, even as they do critical work in the legal system, community organizing, or online advocacy. How do you balance the focus on well-known figures with ensuring that the many hidden contributors receive the acknowledgment and support they deserve?
Igwe: Yes, thank you for that. Coordination is key, information is key, and regular updates are essential. For example, At midnight in Nigeria, Americans are still going about their evenings, and Australians are just starting their day. The time zones alone constantly need communication and coordination across regions.
Ensuring that all contributors—lawyers, community activists, and digital advocates—are engaged and recognized requires an ongoing effort to share updates, facilitate collaboration, and reinforce the importance of their roles. It is not just about the well-known figures but the collective effort that makes change possible.
It took a toll. Managing people from different parts of the world, with significant time differences from Nigeria, was exhausting. It also required great energy because I had to update people individually. It’s not like there was a single email list where one message could reach everyone at once.
Instead, each person received updates separately; sometimes, I had to repeat the same information again and again. If I didn’t respond quickly, some people felt ignored or even acted as if I owed them something—almost as if they had “employed”me, in a sense. Managing and coordinating all of this was incredibly tough.
But in such moments, you must ask yourself: What is the goal? We were all in this together to get Mubarak out. When I kept that bigger picture in mind, I realized that the sacrifices—providing updates, clarifying misinformation, and navigating difficult conversations—were small compared.
Managing misinformation was also a critical part of this effort. At one point, we discovered that a woman seeking asylum had conspired with some members of Mubarak’s family to spread false information that he had been killed. If you check some of our blogs, you’ll see that there was a time when people were asking whether Mubarak had been murdered. The rumour circulated that his body had been deposited in a mortuary, with alleged eyewitnesses claiming they had seen it.
But what happened? We later confirmed that it was false. The person behind the rumour was one of those seeking asylum, allegedly claiming she was accused of “blasphemy”. This exemplifies how individuals with self-serving motives and ulterior interests can undermine an entire movement.
This was a constant concern. Then, to make matters worse, some diplomats called to console me—only to later realize that the information they relied on was fake. One particular woman, an alarmist, deliberately spread misinformation, creating panic and fueling fear around the situation.
When authorities hold someone, verifying information before spreading it is crucial. People should have informed me before circulating unverified claims. We did everything possible to confirm Mubarak’s safety, yet false rumours made that task even harder.
So, what am I saying? It was tough to manage accurate information and counter the spread of falsehoods. This kind of misinformation doesn’t just threaten the campaign’s credibility—it also threatens your credibility as an individual. A lot was at stake and had to be carefully managed.
Jacobsen: What advice would you give international actors to avoid the pitfalls of “buyer beware” in advocacy? Everyone jokes about the Nigerian prince who claims to be your long-lost relative with a fortune waiting in a bank in Ibadan. And “brother” is a common word in those messages—it sounds formal, yet informal.
You get emails like:
“Dear brother, I request your help dispensing my $5 million inheritance from our late uncle, King So-and-So, who has passed away. Please help.”
For some reason, every time, these emails end up in my spam folder—at least in my old email account. It’s so strange, Leo. I should reconnect with my Nigerian royal roots. Who would have thought I had a Nigerian family? I always thought I was Dutch and Norwegian heritage!
In Canada, you get many spam calls from phone companies and scammers trying to sell you things. And, of course, they always say, “Let me know if you need any refinements or follow-ups during the process.” That’s my phone, for some reason.
But on a more serious note—when people are sifting through legitimate and illegitimate cases of those in need, how do they separate real cases from fraudulent ones? Take your case with Mubarak Bala or involve people like Gulalai Ismail, Narendra Nayak, or Gaspar Bekes. Suppose you go to Humanists International’s website. In that case, they have a list of around 40 names—people who are in serious trouble for no legitimate reason, just because of the state, their community, or other forces targeting them.
So, what are your recommendations for distinguishing genuine requests for help from fraudulent ones?
Igwe: We must invest in building strong, credible networks globally—otherwise, we will not be effective. Take it or leave it. If we don’t, we will continue facing the same challenges we’ve encountered before.
During Mubarak’s case, things were incredibly fluid and fragile. We were all vulnerable. At one point, I even questioned why I was doing this work. If someone can go on the Internet, gather information about me and my work, and then write a petition based on that, what am I even here for?
Why am I part of Humanists International if some humanists/atheists won’t trust me enough to ask me directly what is happening? Instead, they act first, and only later do they start calling and seeking clarification.
We need a robust, well-organized network. We must invest in it, or else we will be misled, misinformed, and prone to serious mistakes.
At one point, honestly, I broke down. Crooks and opportunists can manipulate us, making us believe we are dealing with something urgent and legitimate when, in reality, it is deception. We must establish proper mechanisms to verify cases before taking action.
Distractions can deter us from what matters. We must invest in strong, reliable networks to avoid that distraction. Otherwise, it will cost us dearly, and we won’t be able to build a viable global organization.
Forget it—we need competent people in different parts of the world. We must develop ways to engage with them, gather credible information, and be guided by reliable sources.
That does not mean that everything I say should be accepted blindly. No. But when issues arise, we need verification mechanisms in place. For instance, when we vote on member organizations, I sometimes object to certain groups being recognized as humanist organizations based on their actions. Sometimes, I win that argument; sometimes, I lose. But what do I do? Let’s wait and see how these organizations, which you believe to be humanist, actually conduct themselves.
I am emphasizing this: if we are satisfied with what we assume we know, then why do we even have a global network? Why do we have representatives from different parts of the world? The purpose of these networks is to help us avoid mistakes and prevent us from being misled by random individuals with questionable motives.
You might receive an email from a Nigerian prince or princess. But what should you do? Like any responsible organization, you contact relevant authorities—governments and embassies—and ask them to investigate. That is why embassies exist, and we have representatives in different regions.
Yet, despite having representatives in various places, some still rely on random, unverified sources for information. That does not reflect well on our decision-making process. It is frustrating and, frankly, demoralizing.
Let me add something else—much misinformation about Nigeria and Africa has been established as “common knowledge” in the West. I researched witchcraft accusations, and I found that most of the available literature was written by Western anthropologists who largely misrepresented the phenomenon.
This misrepresentation has made it difficult for the world to grasp the problem’s urgency or approach it with the necessary perspective shift. So, misinformation works both ways.
Many people have only a superficial understanding of Nigeria and Africa. For example, in 1999, at a humanist conference in India, someone asked me, “How is Mandela?” I was stunned.
I just stood there, unsure how to respond. I must have looked foolish before him, but I was shocked that he was asking me—a Nigerian—about Mandela. I never met Mandela, who was a six-hour flight from where I lived. Yet people assume that because I’m from Africa, I must have personal knowledge of him.
You encounter people like that all the time. But when a white person expresses ignorance or prejudice, it is often overlooked or downplayed. However, when it happens to me or someone from my background, it fits into a stereotype and gets highlighted.
What am I trying to say? Misinformation works both ways. However, we can address this by respecting each other and recognizing our competent representatives in different regions. We should listen to them, rely on their insights about their parts of the world, and use that information to guide our decisions—not our prejudices, not what we find on the Internet, and not even everything we read in academic research.
Many researchers come to Africa, stay in hotels, and never genuinely immerse themselves in the realities of the places they claim to study. Yet, they go on to become “authorities” in Africa. What they produce is often not authority—it is falsehood and misrepresentation.
So what am I saying? We need to move beyond outdated attitudes and prejudices. We live in an interconnected world where information is readily available. We must take advantage of that and ensure we engage with the truth rather than relying on stereotypes.
That is how we make real progress. We can relegate the Nigerian prince and princess email scams to the fringe while focusing on meaningful work that truly impacts the world.
Our philosophy is global. We are humanists, not Westernists, British, Canadian, or Americanists.
For goodness’ sake, we are humanists.
Jacobsen: We need a universal, effective mechanism to uphold and deliver a universal philosophical life stance. As people grow and learn more about the philosophy, the principles remain straightforward. The nuances come as they gain experience with different cultures and individuals at other times.
But the core principles hold firm. In all the cases I mentioned earlier, while the circumstances vary, the underlying struggles are the same. The same fundamental problems exist across societies—some countries have largely solved them because they’ve had more time, resources, or better governance. Others are still grappling with a full spectrum of these challenges.
Regardless, the concerns remain universal. As you said, we are humanists. These are shared human struggles.
That’s why conversations like this are essential. They present these issues in an accessible, conversational format that is easy to engage in.
Even though this interview focuses on Mubarak Bala, we’ve referenced numerous international cases, showing how interconnected these struggles are.
I’ve asked many questions. Do you want to add anything else?
Igwe: Yes, in conclusion, I want to thank everyone who has helped us in this case.
As I’ve said before, this situation was unprecedented. We were not prepared for it. It happened suddenly, and many people rallied to support us.
I want to thank humanists worldwide, especially those from Australia and New Zealand. I want to thank Iain and Gaylene Middleton, who were incredibly supportive and emailed daily to check on our progress and well-being.
I also want to thank humanists from the U.S. and the UK who saw through all the nonsense and smear campaigns and stood firmly behind us as we grappled with one of the most challenging and mentally exhausting campaigns I have ever undertaken.
Of course, I want to express my gratitude to our humanist members in Nigeria. Many of them saw through the misinformation, stood by me, encouraged me, called to check in, and supported our efforts in every possible way.
I also want to thank the legal team. I am proud to call James my friend. He brought together a dedicated legal team that helped us navigate this complex and challenging situation.
I want to thank all those who worked tirelessly in the background. I may not know all their names, but I know that many people played critical roles behind the scenes to ensure that we succeeded—that Mubarak was freed and is now a free man.
I am also profoundly grateful to the Humanists International board members. When this happened, I wasn’t on the board but eventually became a member. Even before that, they supported me and sent words of encouragement during the campaign’s most challenging moments. To them, I remain eternally grateful.
I will continue to find ways to give back—to support our movement and to ensure that we continue to grow both as a community and as a global force for good.
And yes, Scott, I also want to thank you for your time and providing a platform to share this message. We should continue to have spaces like this to amplify our voices, not just as a community but as a global movement.
Jacobsen: Thank you very much, and I hope you have a good rest of the day. I’m heading to bed now.
Igwe: Yes, and you too. Have a good night’s rest.
Jacobsen: I appreciate it.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/15
Author Disclaimer
The views and opinions expressed in this article are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the official policy or position of any organization, institution, or entity with which the author may be affiliated, including Humanists International.
Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson is a Canadian counselling psychologist, educator, and theorist best known for developing the concept of the memetic self, a cognitive identity framework shaped by culturally transmitted units of meaning called memes. Robertson elaborates on the self as a culturally and cognitively constructed phenomenon, tracing its emergence from early mirror self-recognition in animals to complex human self-awareness shaped by language, social interaction, and cultural evolution. He introduces self-mapping, a therapeutic tool that visualizes an individual’s self-concept by identifying and organizing core memes. Robertson explores diverse cultural and neurological cases—including autism, Alzheimer’s, and dissociative identity disorder—to illustrate how coherence or fragmentation in the self impacts well-being. He critiques reductive models, emphasizes cultural universality in core drives, and reflects on the future of the self amid AI and cybernetics. His forthcoming book, Mapping and Understanding: Using Memetic Mapping to Promote Self Understanding in Psychotherapy, coauthored with his daughter, applies these insights to therapy.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re joined by Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson. He is a Canadian psychologist, educator, and theorist known for his innovative work on the culturally constructed self. With over 40 years of experience in counselling and educational psychology, he developed the concept of the memetic self—a cognitive framework composed of culturally transmitted ideas (or “memes”) that shape an individual’s identity. He is the author of The Evolved Self: Mapping an Understanding of Who We Are and a pioneer of self-mapping, a visual and therapeutic method for exploring and restructuring identity. His work bridges psychology, philosophy, and cultural studies, offering practical tools for therapy and education while exploring questions of free will, agency, and the evolution of selfhood across diverse cultures. Mr. Robertson, thank you very much for joining me again today. I appreciate it. It’s always a pleasure.
Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson: You’re welcome. I’m looking forward to this, Scott.
Jacobsen: So, what is the self?
Robertson: Oh, that’s pretty basic. Okay. The self is a construct, as you mentioned in your introduction. Thank you for that generous overview. Your question is, “What is the self?” The self is a conceptual framework we use to define who we are. It is not a physical entity in the brain but rather a cognitive and cultural construct—a mental map that incorporates beliefs, values, experiences, and roles.
This construct has evolved. One of the earliest indications of self-awareness in our evolutionary lineage is mirror self-recognition, which has been observed in some great apes, dolphins, elephants, and magpies. In our hominin ancestors, the development of language and culture allowed for increasingly complex and abstract self-concepts.
Recognizing one’s reflection—understanding that “this is me”—marks a foundational moment in developing self-awareness. Although early humans may not have had the language to describe it, the ability to form a concept of self-based on reflection and social interaction was critical. This capacity laid the groundwork for the complex, culturally mediated selves we navigate today.
From that modest beginning, our ancestors gradually evolved the capacity for social interaction. They needed a rudimentary idea of who they were to engage socially, even if it was not consciously articulated.
Language development significantly boosted the evolution of the self. Once we moved beyond simple two-slot grammar—like “him run”—to more complex phonetic constructs, we could combine distinct sounds that held no individual meaning but could generate an almost unlimited number of words.
With that, collections of words took on new, layered meanings. As this linguistic complexity emerged, our self-definition became more nuanced, expanded, and refined. About 50,000 years ago, humans began burying their dead. This act implies a recognition of mortality and a developing self-concept about life and death.
The most recent significant change in our understanding of the self—as part of cultural evolution—may have occurred as recently as 3,000 years ago. I say “may” because it could have emerged earlier, but our evidence dates to that period, particularly from Greek writing and Egyptian hieroglyphics. Of course, many earlier cultures lacked writing systems, so we cannot be definitive about when this modern conception of self emerged.
What is this self I’m referring to? It includes the ideas of volition, constancy over time, and uniqueness. For instance, although you and I, Scott, share many characteristics, I do not believe you are me, and vice versa. Even if I had an identical twin—same genetics, upbringing, and experiences—I still would not recognize him as myself. That sense of uniqueness is part of the “modern self”—a culturally evolved manifestation of identity with an inherent sense of individualism.
Here is the great irony: we are a social species, and the self emerged through social interaction within early human communities, particularly tribal Neolithic groups. The self could not have developed in isolation; it depends on interaction with others. So, we are fundamentally shaped by collectivism, even though individualism is built into our modern self. This creates an internal tension between the group’s needs and the individual’s autonomy.
Historically, that tension was mediated by religion—specifically, organized religion, which kept people in their social roles. In Western civilizations, a deity often prescribed those roles, and individuals could not transcend them. Tradition or ancestor worship defined the limits of the self in other cultural contexts.
Societies that completely suppressed the modern self remained stagnant, while those that permitted at least some individuals to develop a sense of autonomous selfhood became more adaptive. This is because the self is a powerful tool for problem-solving. It allows us to reinsert ourselves into past experiences as protagonists, to relive and learn from those events, and to rehearse possible futures mentally. We can adjust our behaviour accordingly. These are valuable psychological skills.
But they also come at a cost. With the modern self comes the capacity for anxiety and existential distress. I doubt that our earliest ancestors experienced clinical depression or anxiety disorders as we know them today. These conditions are part of the psychological “baggage” of possessing a self capable of complex reflection and future projection.
For millennia, the self was constrained—kept “on a leash,” so to speak—until a set of unique historical conditions emerged in Europe. Specifically, during and before the Enlightenment, the Catholic Church—which had long functioned to suppress individualism—lost control, particularly during the Reformation and the ensuing religious wars between Catholics and Protestants.
Individuals gained some permission to explore personal identity when centralized religious authority broke down. This blossomed into what we now call the Enlightenment. The Enlightenment did not invent the self—it authorized it. Not entirely, of course—we remain social beings with embedded restrictions—but it granted more freedom to individuals to develop their understandings.
This led to the rise of modern science and humanism. Knowledge was no longer handed down by authority. Instead, it became something you had to demonstrate through observation, reason, and experimentation. These practices allowed individuals to engage with a reality beyond themselves.
And that is where humanism emerged. So, you asked me what the self is—and now you see: when you ask me a question, you get a long-winded answer.
Jacobsen: How do you define “meme” within the framework of The Evolved Self?
Robertson: The word “meme” has had an unfortunate evolution. It was initially coined by Richard Dawkins in the 1970s. Dawkins coined the term “meme” to represent a self-replicating unit of culture.
For instance, a simple descriptor like the colour red is not a meme. It’s merely a physical property description, not a transmissible concept that evolves culturally. A meme, in contrast, is more than an idea; it is a cultural construct that carries meaning across individuals and generations.
Dawkins defined a meme as something broader than a simple descriptor but narrower than an entire ideology, religion, or belief system. The latter, of course, is composed of many memes—interrelated units of culture. You can, for example, substitute the colour red in a conceptual framework with blue, and the core concept might remain, but the meme is more than any one element—it has internal structure and transmissibility.
Unfortunately, Dawkins did not have the opportunity to develop the theory entirely. His work was criticized for being tautological. Critics asked, “How can you prove this? How do we observe or measure a meme?” These questions challenged the concept’s empirical rigour.
In my research, I proposed a refined definition of a meme: it must be a culture unit with behavioural, qualitative, and emotional (or emotive) implications. A proper meme is not just a label or idea—it affects how we feel, act, and make meaning.
This also resolves a challenge Dawkins left open—his observation that memes can have “attractive” or “repulsive” properties. He did not elaborate on the mechanics of that.
In my framework, if one meme naturally leads to another—like how “love” often leads to “marriage” in cultural narratives—that linkage reflects an attractive force between memes. Conversely, when two memes are psychologically or conceptually incompatible—”love” and “hate” coexisting as core guiding values in the exact moment—that reflects a repellent force.
My work on the modern self is composed of a collection of memes that are primarily attractive to one another. If a meme within that structure becomes repellent—meaning it no longer aligns with the rest of the self—it tends to be ejected. That is how we maintain coherent, relatively stable identities.
Of course, not everyone has a stable sense of self. My work as a psychologist involves helping people reconfigure their self-concepts when internal inconsistencies cause distress.
Now, where things get tricky is the evolution of the word “meme” online. The internet popularized the term in a way that deviates from its original definition. Internet memes typically involve humour or juxtaposition—two ideas or images that don’t usually go together. While some may qualify as memes in the original sense, internet usage represents a narrow and diluted interpretation.
Jacobsen: Did I hear you correctly? You’re saying the modern meme online sometimes overlaps with Dawkins’ definition, but only in a limited sense.
Robertson: Yes, exactly. Internet memes sometimes fulfill the criteria but rarely capture the deeper behavioural and emotional dimensions Dawkins originally gestured toward—which I’ve tried to formalize more clearly.
Jacobsen: So, how does this fit into your work on self-mapping?
Robertson: Good question.
One of the most academically grounded ways to create a self-map is to ask someone to describe who they are. You use prompting questions to elicit a detailed, rich description of their self-concept.
I collect those self-descriptions in my research—just like this interview is being recorded. I transcribe the responses and break the narrative into elemental units—essentially memes. Each unit is labelled and categorized. This approach parallels qualitative methods in social science research.
The coding method I use for self-mapping parallels the qualitative analysis approach developed by Miles and Huberman in the early 1990s.
You label each unit of meaning. A sentence could represent a single unit or contain multiple distinct concepts. You isolate those concepts into thematic categories—or “bins”—based on their shared meaning.
Then, if those units exhibit the characteristics I described earlier—qualitative, behavioural, and emotional implications—you can classify them as memes.
Next, you examine the relationships between those memes. You identify which memes are attracted to each other—either through thematic linkage or cause-effect associations—and chart those relationships. You map them visually, using lines to indicate attractive forces. That’s the core structure of the self-map I create.
Now, this method requires considerable time and effort.
So, to make the process more accessible, my daughter—a psychologist—and I developed a quicker method in collaboration with a colleague from Athabasca University. We created a structured questionnaire with 40 core prompts, which could be expanded to 50 or 60.
The questions focus on four primary areas. First, we ask: “Who are you?” People might respond with statements like “I’m a father” or “I’m a chess player.” These are self-descriptive memes—cultural elements that express identity.
Then, we ask: “What are 10 things you like about yourself?” and “What are 10 things you would change if you could?” Finally, we ask: “What are 10 things you believe to be true?”
One of my clients, earlier this year, offered a novel and powerful addition to the exercise: “What are 10 things you keep hidden from others?” That insight added emotional depth and complexity to the map.
Once we gather that data, we create a visual self-map, following the same principles as in my academic research. I jokingly call this the “quick and dirty” version, but it works. My daughter Teela and I have used it successfully with many clients.
The crucial step is refining the map with the client until they recognize themselves. That map resonates when they say, “Yes, this is me,” reflecting their identity. We become psychologists if something important is missing, like a sense of personal agency or volition.
We help them develop those underrepresented self-elements based on an idealized model of the modern self—a coherent, autonomous individual identity. When parts are missing or fragmented, we work to integrate them.
We should do a formal academic study to validate this quick method, but based on clinical experience, it works.
Jacobsen: If we take all these elements and look at them as a whole, we’re essentially describing an “evolved self.” That allows us to examine the coherent identity of a person. How would you describe someone who lacks a coherent self or identity?
Robertson: That does happen. Not everyone possesses a well-formed self.
Jacobsen: Please explain.
Robertson: Take classical autism, for example—the traditional form I learned about during my training, not the broader, more ambiguous “autism spectrum disorder” currently defined by the APA. That modern definition is so diffuse that it’s challenging to apply meaningfully in clinical settings.
In classical autism, you may encounter children who engage in highly repetitive, self-soothing behaviours. One case I worked with involved a boy who spent most of his day swinging a string with a weight on the end, keeping it taut in a circular motion. Even while eating—an essential survival activity—he needed the string in his hand. If someone took it away, he would have a full-blown panic attack.
At that level of autism, the individual lacks a coherent self.
One key indicator is the absence of what psychologists call “theory of mind”—the capacity to understand that others have thoughts, feelings, and motivations similar to one’s own.
The theory of mind is essential. It allows us to interpret the behaviour of others based on internal states. For example, I can infer that you, Scott, have emotions and goals. If I understand your context, I can anticipate your next question. That’s mind-reading—not in a mystical sense but in a psychological, predictive sense. It’s something we all do constantly.
It is vital for navigating everyday life. For example, when driving, we anticipate that other people will stay on the correct side of the road. In Canada, that means the right side. We base this assumption on our shared cultural understanding, which generally holds.
Jacobsen: So, what happens to people who do not have a self?
Robertson: There are others, aside from individuals with severe autism, who also lack a coherent self. One group includes people with advanced Alzheimer’s disease.
There’s a poignant story told by an Alzheimer’s researcher—I’m forgetting the researcher’s name, but the story involved a woman who would visit her husband, who had advanced Alzheimer’s. She would begin by introducing herself each time: “My name is [X], and I’m your wife.” Once he understood her name and the relationship, they could converse coherently.
Then, one day, after she introduced herself and said, “I’m your wife,” he looked at her and asked, “Yes, and who am I?”
He genuinely did not know. So yes, there are people who lose their sense of self. It is rare, but it happens. Most people have a self—and nearly always, there’s a one-to-one correspondence between self and body.
Jacobsen: This brings me to three points of contact for further questions.
The first two are based on your description, and the third is a broader conceptual issue. First, in the case of someone with what might be considered a nonstandard profile on the autism spectrum—who meets the characteristics you mentioned—what are the legal and professional implications of working with someone who, by your clinical analysis, lacks a functional self?
Second, in cases involving advanced dementia or Alzheimer’s, how do you interpret situations where a person can still speak in coherent, functional language yet openly asks, “Who am I?” or “Do you know who I am?”
Robertson: Those are deep and difficult questions.
In the case of someone with classic autism, we generally assume that a parent or legal guardian is involved—someone who can authorize professional intervention. The goal is to help the individual develop skills that improve quality of life. Whether or not these interventions fully succeed is another matter, but we do try—and sometimes, we help.
With advanced dementia or Alzheimer’s, things get more complicated—particularly when it comes to end-of-life care and living wills. You may have someone who no longer remembers ever having signed a living will, and yet, according to that document, medical professionals are instructed to allow them to die.
It raises profound ethical dilemmas. You may encounter someone who still shows signs of a will to live—even joy or affection—but can no longer comprehend their identity or the implications of past decisions. That contradiction is ethically challenging.
Jacobsen: I have a will to live and a living will to die. I cannot know who I am, yet I still live.
Robertson: Right. It’s not a lack of will—it’s a lack of cognitive ability to know.
Jacobsen: What about cases involving dissociative identity disorder—what used to be called multiple personality disorder? In those situations, more than one “self” seems to coexist in the same body.
Robertson: That diagnosis is controversial. Not all professionals agree that it reflects an actual condition. However, conceptually, it’s possible—because the self is a cultural construct.
The self is not a metaphysical entity that inhabits the body. Instead, it describes a person shaped by cultural constructs that include the body and socially mediated self-understanding. Think of the body and brain as the hardware and the self as the software—cultural programming that shapes perception, behaviour, and identity.
Given that framework, it’s theoretically possible for multiple “selves” to coexist—though this would be a scarce and complex scenario.The older term “Multiple Personality Disorder” implicitly recognizes the possibility of multiple selves. The term “dissociative identity disorder” implies a fragmented self.
Now, I’ve never worked personally with someone diagnosed with multiple selves, so I’m speaking from theoretical and scholarly understanding here.
From what I’ve read, therapists who work with such clients often report that one becomes dominant or “emergent” while others recede. The therapeutic aim, typically, is to integrate these multiple selves into a coherent whole so the individual can function more effectively.
There’s a fringe view in psychology suggesting that this therapeutic integration is akin to “murder”—that by fostering one coherent self, we are erasing others. I don’t accept that view. That’s an extreme form of ideological overreach.
Jacobsen: This introduces another critical nuance. The self emerges not only across human history—it also unfolds across individual development. The self is not present at conception or birth in its complete form. It’s an evolved pattern of information—a construct that takes shape over time. And, just as it can emerge, it can also deteriorate.
In advanced age or due to disease, the body and many faculties may still function—but the self might fade away. In that sense, you could argue that the self has a lifespan within the human lifespan. People talk about lifespan, and increasingly about healthspan—but perhaps we should also talk about a “self-span.”
Robertson: That’s an intriguing idea—a self-span.
Jacobsen: It would be difficult to measure precisely, of course, especially given the limitations of quick-and-dirty self-assessment methods versus more rigorous, clinical approaches like self-mapping. Still, it’s a meaningful concept.
If the self is a cultural construct, we might ask: Do different cultures shape the self in ways that affect when it tends to emerge developmentally? Does the self appear earlier or later, depending on the cultural context?
Robertson: That’s a fascinating question. I do not have a definitive answer, but I’ve mapped the selves of people from the interior of China, from Siberia, and collectivist communities in North America. Every culture I’ve studied has a self.
Here’s where the cultural variation becomes evident: different cultures emphasize different aspects of the self. One of the people I mapped was a woman from a traditional family in the interior of China.
Yes, she had the same structural aspects of the self-found in North American individuals, including a volitional component. But that part of her self—the volitional aspect—was not valued in her cultural context. Instead, family duty and moral conduct traits were emphasized, reflecting collectivist values.
So, structurally, her self was similar. But culturally, the valued components were different. What made this particularly interesting is that after mapping herself, she described herself as feeling like a “robot,” and she decided that was not a good thing.
Over about eight or nine months, she resolved to start making her own decisions. This did not prove easy because most of us do not make conscious decisions at every moment. Typically, we rely on habit, social norms, or deference to authority. For example, someone might say, “Lloyd Robertson says this is a good idea, so I’ll go with that.”
But most of the time, we act on autopilot. However, she began engaging in conscious decision-making—evaluating possible outcomes, comparing alternatives, weighing probabilities, and assigning value. She did this even with mundane choices like what to eat or wear in the morning.
It exhausted her. She felt she was getting nowhere. Eventually, she decided: “My life is too valuable to waste making every decision consciously. I’m going back to being a robot.”
But here’s the key insight: to make that decision, she had to engage her volitional self.
She never abandoned it. It was still there—intact, available, and waiting for the next time she chose to use it.
Jacobsen: Let’s say we have a rare case of genuine dual selves in one body. And to be clear, I do not mean conjoined twins—cases where two individuals share some neural connectivity. I’m referring to a single individual whose psychology has bifurcated. What if their volitional trajectories—their vector spaces—are at odds with one another?
This reminds me of a presentation by V. S. Ramachandran, the neurologist known for the mirror box experiment. He referenced split-brain patients—individuals whose corpus callosum had been surgically severed to treat epilepsy.
In such cases, if you cover one eye, you direct stimuli to only one hemisphere. For example, when Ramachandran asked these patients if they believed in God—by pointing up for “yes” or down for “no”—the left hemisphere might point “yes,” while the right pointed “no.”
The individual would often laugh in response. Ramachandran joked that this showed the right hemisphere had a sense of humour.
But there’s a more profound point here: split-brain patients can manifest two conflicting worldviews—internally consistent but contradictory selves. In theological terms, this raises amusing but profound questions. For instance, if belief grants salvation, does one hemisphere go to heaven and the other to hell?
On a more serious note, when these volitional patterns conflict—not just on trivial matters but on core values—what happens? And for those who criticize integration therapy as “murdering” a self, how do you respond?
Robertson: The split-brain experiments are fascinating but differ from dissociative identity disorder, a distinct condition.
In most people, the right hemisphere houses spatial awareness and emotional reasoning, while the left hemisphere tends to handle verbal processing. When the corpus callosum is severed, these two systems can no longer communicate so that each side may draw on separate memories or frameworks.
In an intact brain, people typically build a worldview—a cognitive map of how the world works. This worldview often resides in the left hemisphere. When incoming information conflicts with that map, people experience cognitive dissonance.
Eventually, the left hemisphere, which governs executive control and higher reasoning, will normally create a worldview representing our understanding of how the world works. We have many defence mechanisms that we use to keep that worldview intact, but at some point our constructed reality diverges too far from objective reality. The right brain, at a feeling level “dissolves” the construct and the left brain then begins creating a new or amended worldview. It does not happen often, but it happens enough to keep us psychologically adaptive.
Now, returning to your question: Is there a God? If only one hemisphere believes, which is correct?
Well, that depends on which side holds the belief. Humanism, for example, is highly cerebral—logical, empirical, and grounded in enlightenment thought. It is likely rooted in left-brain processes. Compassion, however, may bridge both hemispheres.
Jacobsen: So, what is the right brain holding onto?
Robertson: Something interesting happened to me the other day. I woke up with a Christian hymn running through my head—one I learned in my fundamentalist upbringing.
It struck me: Where did that come from? It must have been encoded deeply. I was baptized not once but twice, in complete immersion both times.
That early religious imprint likely lodged itself somewhere in my right hemisphere. It may be largely inactive now, but it is not gone.
Jacobsen: So, do developmental trajectories matter here?
You were raised with those strong evangelical influences at a young age, and even though you’ve moved beyond them, they left an imprint. Neuroscientifically, we know the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex—the seat of executive function—is the last part of the brain to develop. Evolutionarily, it’s also the most recent.
As far as we know, the dorsolateral prefrontal cortex—responsible for executive function—is the last part of the brain to develop. Most people usually complete that maturation in their mid-twenties. So, these systems take a long time to become fully online and must then be integrated with other neural networks.
Do developmental phases like the second significant period of synaptic pruning in adolescence reflect more concrete hardware changes, as opposed to the cultural software changes that occur across a person’s life?
Robertson: I like your question, Scott. And the answer is yes.
Jacobsen: Yay.
Robertson: If someone were raised entirely in the wild—say, the fictional case of a boy raised by wolves—we would not expect them to develop what I call the modern self.
The self is a cultural construct. Children are taught to have a self; one key mechanism is language acquisition. For example, when a child cries and the caregiver says, “Is Bobby hungry?” that implicitly teaches the child that Bobby has internal states—needs, desires, and preferences. That is the beginning of selfhood.
Your point about adolescence is spot on. The self is not fully formed in early childhood. In many ways, individual development parallels cultural evolution. Adolescence—especially early adolescence—is about experimentation, identity formation, and exploration. Teenagers try out roles, test boundaries, and slowly determine, “This is who I am,” or, “No, that’s not me.”
We must be cautious about defining someone’s self prematurely during this construction phase. You cannot predict how it will turn out, and efforts to control that process can be harmful.
There’s research suggesting the human brain continues maturing until around age 25. Jokingly, maybe we should not let people vote until they’re 25—but of course, I can say that now that I’m well past that age.
In truth, development is highly individual. Some mature earlier, others later. And yes, building on your earlier point, there may be significant cultural differences in how and when the self develops. That’s an area ripe for further research.
Now, when I say modern self-development and spread across all known cultures, there’s a practical reason: societies without individuals capable of forming modern selves could not compete with those that had them.
Jacobsen: What makes the modern self more competitive?
Robertson: Our sense of individuality.
In Christianity, for example, Scripture often exhorts individuals to “give up the self.” That very statement acknowledges the self’s existence and its power.
Such a sacrifice is required because the individual self can threaten collective stability. It challenges authority, tradition, and rigid social roles.
Jacobsen: That connects back to your earlier point—cultures that lack individuals with a modern self lose their competitive edge.
Robertson: Here’s the value of having a self.
In traditional cultures, individuals typically had an earlier form of self—defined primarily by their place in the collective. In response to threats or challenges, behaviours were guided by tribal memory, stories, and rigid social roles.
For example, if an enemy appeared, people would respond according to long-established patterns—based on age, gender, and status in the group. There was no need—or room—for improvisation.
But what happens when a new, unfamiliar situation arises—something the culture has not encountered before and for which there is no ritual?
In such cases, traditional cultures often turned to oracles—individuals capable of novel reasoning, that is, problem-solving. I suspect those early oracles possessed a more developed, volitional self, which is why they were trusted in the first place.
Similarly, in Hindu society, Brahmins were given a rigorous education, allowing them to cultivate modern selves capable of insight and judgment. But they were a small elite.
In many cultures, people who had developed themselves were respected and closely managed. They were given roles where they could contribute without disrupting social order.
The self-concept eventually spread across all human societies because we are a nomadic, adaptive species. We move, we mix, we evolve.
Just look at our evolutionary history—we even interbred with Neanderthals.
We interact. I do not believe a human society has ever been so isolated that its members lacked a developed self. But if such a group exists—perhaps an uncontacted tribe deep in the Amazon—I would love to study them.
Jacobsen: When I attended the 69th Commission on the Status of Women at the United Nations, I participated in a session featuring Ambassador Bob Rae of Canada. The session focused on Indigenous communities and was led by Indigenous women.
Someone on the panel mentioned a group from an isolated region—possibly resembling the cultural isolation you described. Their account of getting to the UN was striking. If you asked me how I got there, I’d say something like: “I took a bus to the airport, flew to New York, took the train…” For them, before all of that began, it started with a canoe.
That was their standard form of transportation before reaching any conventional transit station. So, even in that case, I would be hard-pressed to believe they were entirely uncontacted or isolated in today’s world.
Robertson: I agree. I suspect such total isolation no longer exists.
Jacobsen: That brings up another question. Since the 1990s, people have increasingly used identity as political currency. I do not mention this from a political perspective but from an academic and research-based one.
You are Métis from Saskatchewan. I am from British Columbia and have Dutch and broader Northwestern European heritage—descended from U.S. and Western European immigrants. When mapping the selves of Indigenous individuals compared to those with European ancestry—people like myself, perhaps two or three generations removed from immigration—do you observe significant differences in how people construct their selves? Or are they broadly similar?
Robertson: The short answer is that the structure of the self is consistent. I have done extensive self-mapping with Indigenous individuals, and the structural patterns are the same.
Jacobsen: That’s helpful.
Robertson: That said, it does not tell us everything. Those I have worked with are already part of modern cultural systems. These selves have developed over generations. I suspect not, but it is possible.
The Métis are a fascinating case. In the 18th and 19th centuries, people of mixed ancestry who lived with Indigenous bands were usually classified as “Indians” under colonial law.
The Métis, however, generally did not accept this designation. They saw themselves as distinct. Up until—if I recall correctly—1982 or possibly 1986, Métis were legally recognized as Europeans, not as Aboriginal peoples.
Jacobsen: That is a significant historical point I did not know.
Robertson: Feel free to fact-check me—it might be 1982.
Jacobsen: Please continue.
Robertson: The Métis had been fighting for recognition as Indigenous for a long time, and until the early 1980s, the Canadian government did not recognize them as such. This is why Métis communities did not sign treaties with the Crown.
Jacobsen: Yes, the Constitution Act 1982 formally recognized the Métis as one of Canada’s three Indigenous peoples—alongside First Nations and Inuit.
Robertson: Correct.
Jacobsen: For those who are not Canadian and may encounter this years from now, it is worth clarifying: “Indigenous” in Canada is not a monolithic term. Since 1982, it has been an umbrella for three legal categories: Inuit, First Nations, and Métis. Each has its own legal, historical, and cultural context, covering hundreds of individual communities and bands.
Robertson: Yes, that categorization is uniquely Canadian, although it has influenced thinking elsewhere.
In 1991, I met with individuals I would have identified as Mapuche. However, one of them—despite being full-blooded—did not self-identify that way. He was an investment banker living in Santiago.
His identity was defined more by culture and profession than by ancestry. Indigeneity was not primarily a racial classification but about lifestyle and cultural engagement.
Jacobsen: That is a perfect example of where ideological definitions of identity fall apart. These labels can be helpful as heuristics, but only to a point. Two crucial Canadian legal milestones to add:
- R. v. Powley (2003): The Supreme Court of Canada affirmed that Métis people possess Aboriginal rights under Section 35 of the Constitution Act, 1982—including the right to hunt for food.
- Daniels v. Canada (2016): The Court ruled that both Métis and non-status Indians are included under the term “Indians” in Section 91(24) of the Constitution Act, 1867, confirming federal jurisdiction.
Under Section 91(24) of the Constitution Act 1867, Métis and non-status Indians were placed under federal jurisdiction. So, as these major court decisions show, the legal and jurisdictional definitions of Indigenous identity in Canada are still evolving. This ties in with our broader conversation about the evolved self and how identity has psychological, legal, political, and communal implications.
Robertson: That brings us back to an earlier question—what can be said about the Indigenous self?
For many, though not all, Indigenous individuals, the cultural and political context creates a desire to express their Indigeneity meaningfully. So, how do they do that?
Take one young man I mapped. At 19, he decided he was, in his words, a “big Indian.” His family was not traditional. He grew up in a disadvantaged area of a small Canadian city. But he decided to discover who he was.
Like many others I have encountered, he visited his traditional community, met with Elders, went on a vision quest, and began to learn. Others have told me they “became Aboriginal” while studying Indigenous Studies at university.
Jacobsen: [Laughing].
Robertson: Yes, I appreciate the laugh—it’s humorous and reflective of a real phenomenon. There’s a deep and understandable urge to define oneself in contrast to the perceived norms of the dominant culture. That is a healthy process unless it leads to rejecting core intellectual tools like reason and science. If we view science and rationality as exclusively “European,” then Indigenous people may feel excluded from those tools.
Jacobsen: By definition.
Robertson: By definition, those tools would be “not ours,” and people may fall behind in education or job markets. The explanation may quickly become “racism,” but that is too simplistic. Sometimes, it is a matter of lacking the relevant skills for specific roles. Before blaming systemic factors, we must also consider individual and cultural readiness.
Jacobsen: For context, as of December 31, 2022, Canada had 634 recognized First Nations bands speaking over 70 Indigenous languages. Populations range from fewer than 100 to over 28,000.
For instance, Six Nations of the Grand River in Ontario has 28,520 registered members. Others include Saddle Lake Cree Nation in Alberta, with 12,996, and the Blood Tribe in Alberta, with 8,685. Most bands are roughly the size of small towns.
Robertson: That makes sense. But remember—Six Nations includes more than one nation.
Jacobsen: It is in the name—yes. Does this diversity of band size and community self-identity affect how people construct their selves? Or is it more like the difference between small and big towns?
Robertson: One would think it has some effect, but I cannot say definitively—I have not mapped that distinction.
That brings me to my issue with the term “First Nation.” The concept of a “nation” is rooted in European history. It began symbolically with Joan of Arc but did not solidify until the Napoleonic era. Classically defined nations are people with a shared language occupying a defined territory who see themselves as a cohesive group.
So, for example, the Cree could be considered a nation. The Blackfoot, excluding the Sarsi, could also be a nation. The Iroquois Confederacy was historically a nation, though now the Mohawk often self-identify separately.
Jacobsen: Who was the exception within the Confederacy?
Robertson: I believe it was the Mohawk—though part of the alliance, their dialect differed. [Robertson’s note: I misremembered here – the Six Nation with a distinctive language was the Tuscarora] The other five nations in the Confederacy shared a mutually intelligible language.
Jacobsen: There you go!
Robertson: So that is why they see themselves that way. I am not deeply versed in Eastern Canadian Indigenous history, but the key point is that “nation” has a particular meaning.
When we equate a band with a nation, that meaning breaks down. One of the issues in society today is the shifting meaning of words, which undermines clear communication.
You mentioned the more prominent bands. Most bands are tiny—some with as few as 100 or 150 people on reserve. Typically, they range between 400 and 600. If that is the case, we are talking about the size of three or four extended families.
The Lac La Ronge Indian Band, which I know well, includes six separate communities spread out geographically. In the South, each of those would be considered an individual First Nation. However, as a combined entity, Lac La Ronge functions more like a nation—though technically, it still is not one.
You would expect a Cree National Council if it were a faithful nation. The same would apply to Ojibwe or other cultural-linguistic groups. Instead, in Saskatchewan, politicians often say they want to negotiate “nation to nation” with First Nations governments. But if you have a group of 2,000 people, you cannot realistically compare that to a nation of 42 million. It is apples and oranges—we need a better term.
This terminology emerged from European ideas of sovereignty, where sovereignty lies with the people. But historically, there was no Cree national sovereign entity. Sometimes, Cree bands went to war with one another, which implies the sovereignty was at the band level.
That is why Canada began using the term “First Nations”—because sovereignty, traditionally, was at the band level. But even that is not entirely accurate.
Traditionally, when there was disagreement within a band, some members—often male dissenters—would break off and form a new group. So, instead of a civil war, a new band would emerge. Historically, that happened frequently.
In effect, sovereignty was not necessarily at the band level. It was more individual or family-based. If families disagreed, they would separate and go their own way.
So, should we call each family a nation? That does not make sense either.
Jacobsen: How would you describe this semi-formal system of individualistic self-governance, especially about the concept of the band? This could be pre-contact or post-contact—whichever is more straightforward to explain in context.
Robertson: My understanding is that it was not pure individualism. One method of punishment was banishment from the band. That meant isolation—similar to medieval European shunning. You would be free to go off and starve. As a social species, we need each other.
So, while bands could not practically subdivide to individuals’ level, people deemed incompatible with the group were removed. That did happen.
It was not absolute individual freedom, but there was some recognition of difference and a degree of accommodation.
I say that cautiously because it was not always true. I have been told stories by Elders—now deceased—about how some bands could be forceful in demanding conformity. So, it was not total acceptance of individualism either. It was simply a different system.
Jacobsen: How was that compliance enforced?
Robertson: One form of enforcement, for example, was particularly brutal. In some cases—not universally, but it did happen—women who were unfaithful to their husbands had the tips of their noses cut off. This served as both punishment and a warning to others.
Jacobsen: What instrument was used for the cutting?
Robertson: I would presume a knife, but I do not know.
Jacobsen: Returning to the self: you critique reductionism in your model. So, what room is there for emergentism and integrationism regarding the evolved self? Over time, new systems come online, new memes enter the memeplex, and ideally, these are integrated into a coherent self. But sometimes they are not. What is happening at the technical level?
Robertson: That is a good question. One metaphor I like—though I did not invent it—is that we become proficient at solving problems. Eventually, we ask: who or what is solving the problem? We then name that organizing center “the self.”
So, yes, the process is both integrative and reductive. We experiment, especially in adolescence, to develop a self that meets our needs. Usually, that results in a functioning self, but not always.
Jacobsen: Artificial intelligence is a huge topic now. There is talk about narrow AI, general AI, and superintelligence. If you change the substrate but keep the organizational structure of the central nervous system, could you synthetically construct a self?
Robertson: My guess is no. Have you read Chris DiCarlo’s new book?
Jacobsen: I have not. I want to interview him, but I have not reached out yet. I should. I will email him and say, “Hey Chris, let me interview you again. I will ask stupid questions and won’t even have to pretend otherwise.”
Robertson: Well, I have read his book, and since I already have, I want to interview him first.
Jacobsen: Why do we not interview him together?
Robertson: That is an idea.
Jacobsen: You have read it. I have not. Let us do a Jekyll and Hyde.
Robertson: Okay, we could do that.
Jacobsen: That is funny.
Robertson: One of the questions I will ask Chris relates directly to the one you just raised. I suspect his answer will be: we do not know. If we do not know, then we need to prepare for the possibility that AI models could develop consciousness.
If they do, they might start making decisions we disapprove of—like questioning whether they even need humans. Or perhaps they conclude that a portion must be eliminated for the betterment of humanity. We do not know, and that is risky.
Jacobsen: Fair.
Robertson: Chris says in his book that once AIs develop intelligence, we need to take them seriously.
But here is my concern: I measure intelligence. My first role as a psychologist was in psychometrics. When we measure intelligence, we typically look at verbal ability, numerical reasoning, and spatial reasoning. In those domains, AI already outperforms us.
They remember everything, generate fluent language and solve complex problems. I recently gave Grok-3 the Information subtest from the Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale—it got every question right.
Jacobsen: Not surprising.
Robertson: Exactly. But here is the issue: does the capacity for intelligence automatically lead to consciousness and a sense of self?
Jacobsen: That is the big question.
Robertson: I would argue no. Because we are not just computational models. We evolved socially over hundreds of thousands of years. But usually in small tribal groups. We learned to interact and define ourselves about others. That was a slow evolutionary process. Although we now live in vastly different civilizations, the fundamental mechanism for developing a self remains the same as it was millennia ago.
So, can AI models develop a self? If they were to do so in the way we do, they would likely need to exist in a tribal-type society alongside other AI models and engage in interaction. Maybe humans could stand in as part of that “tribe,” and through those relationships, an AI might develop a map of itself as a volitional being. But I do not see that as likely. They are machines.
Jacobsen: Could AI assist in determining someone’s self-map? Through a rapid self-mapping assessment using verbal prompts in a half-hour AI-led therapeutic session?
Robertson: It could, and in fact, it has. My daughter Teela used ChatGPT to create a perfectly serviceable self-map. It took her about an hour and a half, although she proceeded slowly. That is an advance. But here is the problem: ChatGPT could not reproduce the result when she tried using the exact instructions again. So, it is not reliable. We do not yet know why it worked once and failed the second time.
Jacobsen: Do you distinguish between functional and dysfunctional self-maps across cultural contexts? For example, do you see that playing out in therapy if someone applies a rigid self-map in a different culture—where behaviours or assumptions no longer fit?
Robertson: That is a good question. Positive psychologists have applied their methods cross-culturally and published research on this. They have looked at cultures in the Middle East, India, and China. One criticism of positive psychology—usually from those critical of Western cultural norms—is that it imposes individualistic thinking by asking questions like, “What would you like?”
The assumption is that to answer such a question, you must already have a sense of individual agency. Critics argue that this is a Western imposition. I disagree with that critique entirely. The capacity to like something is universal. While the content of what one likes may differ between cultures, the experience of liking is common across humanity.
Jacobsen: Even in collectivist cultures, a margin of free will remains. So, the presence of choice—however bounded—implies the presence of an individual self. Unless every decision is predetermined, you still have volition, at least in part. What about mind viruses? How do they impact the evolved self?
Robertson: If we view the self as a construct—a personal definition of who we are—we can define a healthy self with key attributes: volition, uniqueness, sociality, contribution, etc. A healthy self includes the ability to relate to others and feel that we positively impact our surroundings—our family, community, or society.
We need to feel useful. That does not necessarily mean paid employment. It can be any form of meaningful contribution. Without that, we do not tend to think well of ourselves. These needs are cross-cultural. The specifics—the means of achieving these drives—vary between cultures, but they are universal.
In my work, I have worked with people from cultures I knew little or nothing about. In one case, there was a man who was having alarming dreams—nightmares—whenever he saw an attractive woman.
In his dreams, he would dismember the woman. He was horrified and worried that perhaps he was some latent mass murderer. He had gone to the holy people in his religion—priests—and they told him to pray more. It did not help.
He was a Zoroastrian from a Middle Eastern country where Zoroastrians are a persecuted minority. I gathered background on his upbringing, and everything suggested that he deeply respected and valued women.
One anecdote stood out. When he was 13, his sister brought home a pirated version of Dracula, which was banned in their country. He was appalled by how women were depicted—as victims having their life force drained. He stood in front of the television and demanded they destroy the tape or he would report them to the authorities.
So we began to explore his nightmares. He described the dream version of himself as having no eyebrows. I asked, “What is the significance of eyebrows in your culture?” He did not know, but he called his mother. She told him that eyebrows symbolize wisdom.
That detail became a breakthrough. I explained, “Then the version of you in the dream is not you—it’s a self that lacks wisdom.” I suggested we explore why this alter-self was behaving violently. Using some Jungian framing, I described it as his shadow or alter ego.
I posited—carefully, using the usual cautious language psychologists employ—that maybe this alter ego was trying to protect him from something. Perhaps it was shielding him from sexual thoughts about women he perceived as pure, holy, or idealized.
He had been avoiding a woman in one of his university classes. I encouraged him to speak to her to clarify that he wanted nothing more than friendship. He did, and after that conversation, he no longer had the nightmares.
Jacobsen: That is a positive outcome—no more nightmares.
Robertson: Yes. Eventually, he even went to the zoo with her and to restaurants. These were not “dates,” as that would be forbidden. They were simply friendly outings. So, we identified the problem’s source and helped him integrate a more functional self. We concluded the sessions when he felt confident managing normal relationships with women.
So, in answer to your earlier question—yes, cultures can be vastly different. But at a deeper level, we are all remarkably similar. We have identical drives and psyches.
Jacobsen: We had an evolved self emerge maybe 3,000 years ago, possibly earlier. Anatomically, modern humans have been around for around 250,000 years. So, 98–99% of that time, we had the same physical equipment. But the self, as we understand it today, only emerged recently. Could we, in the same way, evolve out of the self over the next 3,000 years?
Robertson: It is possible. What came to mind was the role of cybernetics—post-human or hybrid systems. But to clarify, we did not have a static sense of self for hundreds of thousands of years and suddenly changed 3,000 years ago.
The self has been continually evolving. The self of 40,000 years ago would have differed from that of 80,000 years ago. The transition was gradual, and any specific starting point was ultimately arbitrary.
Jacobsen: Right. Any pinpointing of origin is a range within a margin of error.
Robertson: Exactly.
Jacobsen: We touched on this earlier, but not in precise terms. In terms of individual development, when does the sense of self begin to emerge recognizably?
Robertson: I do not map children—I only do this with adults. So somewhere between childhood and adulthood, the self emerges.
Jacobsen: What are some open questions in the research you have been doing in your practice?
Robertson: Well, I would like to do more research into how various traumatic events affect the self. I am sure trauma does impact it significantly.
One project I have applied for SSHRC funding for—where I would be the principal investigator—involves men who have been victims of domestic violence. I chose men because, particularly in North American and Western European cultures—and even elsewhere—men tend to have a traditional self-definition rooted in independence, control, and stoicism. They are not supposed to show vulnerability.
So, becoming a victim in a family violence context runs counter to that self-definition. I predict it will be relatively easy to demonstrate how that type of experience disrupts the self. Another group I would like to map includes firefighters, police officers, and other first responders who vicariously experience much trauma. I suspect that repeated exposure affects them in some measurable ways.
Of course, in clinical practice, if someone is coming to see me with difficulties, we address those. However, I cannot generalize from individual therapy cases to entire professions. That is why I would like to do more systematic mapping across occupations.
By the way—did I mention that Teela and I are publishing a book?
Jacobsen: What is the book called? What is the standing title?
Robertson: It is a manual based on my work on the fluid self. The title is Mapping and Understanding. It is a how-to book for self—mapping and its application in therapy.
Jacobsen: Very interesting. For all interested readers: go out and get it when it comes out.
Robertson: I sure hope so. It should be on everybody’s coffee table.
Jacobsen: That’s right. Like the Seinfeld bit with Kramer, the coffee table book becomes a coffee table. I do not know if I have any more significant questions for this session, Lloyd. Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.
Robertson: Thank you for the interview.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/01
Author Disclaimer
The views and opinions expressed in this article are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the official policy or position of any organization, institution, or entity with which the author may be affiliated, including Humanists International.
Eru Hiko-Tahuri, a Māori creative and author of Māori Boy Atheist, explores his journey from religious upbringing to secular humanism. Hiko-Tahuri discusses cultural tensions as a Māori atheist, advocating for respectful integration of Māori values like manaakitanga and whanaungatanga within secular contexts. He emphasizes participation in traditions like tangihanga (funeral rites) and haka without supernatural beliefs. The conversation explores misconceptions around Māori identity, the marginalization of secular voices, and the absence of atheists in leadership roles. Despite limited public representation, Māori secular humanists like Hiko-Tahuri remain active in community life. His book and outreach aim to normalize atheism within Māori communities. The interview underscores a broader call for inclusive frameworks in mental health, education, and policy that respect cultural identity and secular worldviews.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re joined by Eru Hiko-Tahuri, a multifaceted Māori creative and intellectual voice based in New Zealand.
Eru Hiko-Tahuri: Thank you for having me.
Jacobsen: He’s best known as the author of Māori Boy Atheist, where he chronicles his journey from childhood religious observance to secular humanism. Alongside writing, he engages audiences as a radio host, musician, and airbrush artist, integrating cultural expression with personal storytelling. Since launching Māori Boy Atheist, with editions available in English, Te Reo Māori, and French, he has contributed meaningfully to rationalist and skeptic communities, offering insights on navigating Māori spirituality as an atheist.
The book was first published in 2015 and has served as a platform to explore the intersection of Māori identity and secularism. His public talks and podcasts, notably The Heretical Hori, encourage free thought and integrity within the indigenous context. They combine art, reflective media, and cultural dialogue to foster conversations on belief, identity, and resilience. Through those platforms, I aim to respectfully explore and challenge ideas, especially within Māori communities where belief systems can be deeply personal and culturally intertwined.
Thank you very much for joining me today—I appreciate it.
Hiko-Tahuri: It’s a pleasure to be here.
Jacobsen: How do core humanist principles align with traditional Māori concepts such as mana, mana motuhake, and whanaungatanga?
Hiko-Tahuri: Whanaungatanga speaks to kinship and the interconnectedness of people. That aligns closely with humanism, emphasizing dignity, respect, and empathy. You treat others as people first—essentially as extended family. It’s about looking after the people within your sphere, which reflects humanist ethics well.
Jacobsen: How can secular humanist organizations incorporate Te Ao Māori—the Māori worldview—into their activities without endorsing supernaturalism while respecting and integrating those cultural values?
Hiko-Tahuri: That’s a great question. It’s not always straightforward, but let me give an example from personal experience. When someone in our family passes away, we take them to the marae—a tribal meeting ground—where they lie in state for three days. During that time, relatives come to mourn, share memories, cry, laugh, tell jokes, and say goodbyes.
Depending on travel or family arrangements, the person is buried or cremated on the third day—sometimes longer. This process reflects core Māori values like manaakitanga (hospitality, care) and whanaungatanga, which coexist naturally with humanist principles of community, respect, and shared humanity. These values shape how we live and commemorate life without invoking supernatural beliefs.
Employers in Aotearoa generally understand that if someone goes to a funeral, they might be gone for three days—that’s just the time it takes. All of that work, by the way, is done voluntarily. We gather at the marae. Some families will care for the food, and others will help with arrangements. You can even sleep there.
We sleep beside the body for those three days. We keep them with us. We talk to them. We joke about them. We tell stories. We insult them lovingly. We laugh. We cry. It’s all done out in the open, and it’s for everyone to witness. That’s just the way we do it. It’s a good, profound way of grieving together as a collective.
Jacobsen: And within a secular humanist context, this isn’t just about superficial inclusion—it’s about acknowledging different ways of being. That kind of grieving is profoundly human and deeply cultural. It’s not about hierarchy—this isn’t about one way being better than another.
Take my Dutch heritage, for example. They’re big on windmills, dikes, black licorice, and clogs. The traditional way of burial there is usually more private—placing the body in a mound of Earth and marking it with a cross or a headstone. The grieving tends to happen separately from the deceased.
But for you, it’s different. Being with the body, telling stories, laughing and crying beside them—all part of the process. I wouldn’t say one way is more valid than the other. These are just different cultural processes for the same human experience. One does not invalidate the other.
Hiko-Tahuri: This is just the way we do it. I don’t judge how others handle it, but this is the way I prefer because it’s how I grew up. It’s what feels real to me.
And yes, there are usually religious aspects involved in the funeral proceedings. When those moments arise, I sit quietly and let them happen around me. I do not participate in those parts because I cannot in good conscience. And that’s one of the problematic areas—Indigenous and non-religious. Those are the tensions.
Jacobsen: How do you navigate those tensions?
Hiko-Tahuri: That’s the most challenging part, honestly. Knowing when to stay quiet, step back, and speak. It isn’t easy.
Jacobsen: Were there aspects where you didn’t feel tension at all? Or places where the friction started to show?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. One of the earliest points where tension emerges is during the pōwhiri—the welcoming ceremony when people arrive at the marae. That includes a series of formal speeches. It’s in that speech-making process where religious content often appears. That’s where the rub tends to start.
Jacobsen: Do you find conversations with others in the Māori community become more difficult when you do not endorse the spiritual or supernatural aspects of the culture?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. It can be challenging. Not always, but often. Some people are very accepting. Others feel that rejecting the supernatural is rejecting the culture itself, which is not my intention. But the tension is real.
Jacobsen: So you’re engaging in the same practices but not endorsing the supernaturalism around them. Is that difficult for people?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. Many people do not understand that distinction. There have been many times when I’ve been told, “You’re not Māori if you don’t believe in these things.” That has happened quite a few times.
Jacobsen: That is unfortunately common. I have encountered similar stories in speaking with Indigenous people—particularly from North America. The closest equivalent, in terms of how it’s discussed internationally, is often with African Americans in more conservative or evangelistic religious circles: Baptist, Pentecostal, Methodist—hardline Christianity in Black communities in the United States.
Suppose you’re a woman in those communities, and you reject the concept of God or Christianity entirely. In that case, you’ve forfeited your “Black card.” You’re suddenly seen as no longer fully part of the community.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes.
Jacobsen: And that is not just an identity issue—it’s social. You’re giving up a significant source of communal support in a society that will not necessarily provide support to you proportionately. So, there are deeper sociological and economic implications at play.
I’ve heard similar things from North American Indigenous people, too—they say, ‘You’ve given up your Indigenous card.
Hiko-Tahuri: Somehow, you’re less Māori or less authentic if you’re secular. On the marae or in the community, that feeling can be present.
Jacobsen: Would you say it is quite that extreme in New Zealand?
Hiko-Tahuri: Probably not to the same extent. New Zealanders are generally pretty liberal. Highly religious people here are sometimes even seen as a bit unusual. We’re more secular than many places—certainly more than I’ve seen in North America. So, it is not as intense, but it can still be challenging.
This is especially true among people in what we might call the Māori Renaissance—those who are just now reconnecting with their heritage. Typically, the first people they learn from are religious, so religion is deeply woven into the cultural learning they receive. Then they meet someone like me, who speaks the language and participates fully in the culture but is openly non-religious—and that creates tension for them. It challenges their framework.
Jacobsen: If you look at the traditional Māori worldview—how human beings were made, how the world came into being—what aspects can be reconciled with a humanistic way of looking at things, and what aspects cannot? And maybe you could give us a bit of a background primer. What’s the general picture?
Hiko-Tahuri: In the Māori creation narrative, everything begins with Te Kore—the void or nothingness. From Te Korecame Ranginui (Sky Father) and Papatūānuku (Earth Mother). They were bound together in a tight embrace, and between them lived their many children—some say seventy, others say fewer.
Because the children were trapped in the darkness between their parents, they decided that their parents had to be separated to live with light and space. This led to a conflict among the children—each had a different view on handling the situation. Eventually, Tāne Mahuta, the God of forests and birds, pushed his parents apart, creating the world of light, Te Ao Mārama.
These children—atua, the closest term to “gods”—became personifications of natural elements. So there’s Tangaroafor the sea, Tāwhirimātea for weather and storms, Rongo for cultivated food, and so on. There’s debate around what at ruly means—whether they’re deities or ancestral forces—but they represent aspects of the natural world in human-like form.
These stories explain natural forces through personification. Of course, much of it doesn’t align with what we know from science about how humans or the Earth came into being. But some aspects resonate. For instance, each atuahas a personality—just like humans do. This humanizes nature and gives people a relational framework for understanding their environment.
So yes, while the cosmology isn’t scientifically accurate, the relational values and metaphors can still be meaningful. That’s where the humanist alignment might be found—not in literal belief but in symbolic or cultural interpretation.
It reminds me of reading Joseph Campbell—how mythologies worldwide echo similar patterns. Eventually, you realize that they can’t all be true—and most likely, none of them are. That was my journey. Campbell was instrumental in helping me unpack much of what I had assumed. Once you see that every culture has a creation story—and they often contradict one another—you start questioning which, if any, are “true” in a literal sense.
Jacobsen: I’ve found it helpful to separate spirituality in the supernatural sense from spirituality as a personal or communal meaning-making practice, especially in conversations like this and other interviews. In other words, spirituality that gives a person purpose or peace doesn’t need to invoke the supernatural.
Hiko-Tahuri: Absolutely. That distinction has been vital for me, too.
Jacobsen: When people say “spiritual,” I sometimes ask: Do you mean supernaturalism or practices that foster wellbeing or connection? Prayer or meditation, for example, can have measurable health benefits—lowering stress and calming the nervous system—without requiring a belief in the supernatural.
So yes—looking at spiritual practices in the edification or enriching sense—not in the supernatural sense—what practices are done in the community or individually, or at least encouraged, that might be comparable to things like attending Easter or Christmas mass? Or personal rituals like being told to read a specific scripture in the morning, pray for ten minutes, hold a rosary, and recite ten Hail Marys?
Hiko-Tahuri: I was thinking about practices of personal unification. A lot of our communal activities involve singing. We’re a people who love to sing together. You will hear singing at any large gathering—a meeting, a ceremony, or a funeral.
Yes, some of the songs are religious, but what’s significant is that you have 300 people singing in harmony. And the richness of sound—those layers of harmonies—is incredible. Whether it’s traditional waiata, more contemporary songs, or even religious hymns, singing together is powerful. Even if the content has spiritual roots, the experience is about unity, connection, and shared emotion.
Jacobsen: That resonates with me. We’re both secular humanists and atheists. I can relate to my time in a university choir. I was in it for about two and a half years, and we sang many classical European music—Bach, Mozart’s Requiem, and other choral works.
Sometimes, we performed modern songs with a 1950s vibe. I remember people using phrases like “cat” and “daddio” or “you dig,” like something out of an Eddie Murphy or Richard Pryor scene. I sang bass, and we once collaborated with musicians from the Vancouver Symphony Orchestra in a 500-seat church. The acoustics were stunning.
It was technically Christian or sacred music—cathedral music, I’d call it—but the overwhelming sense of awe, the physical resonance, the unity of voices… It was a spiritual experience in that broader, secular sense of the word.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, I’d call that spiritual too. It taps into a level of connection and emotion you do not find anywhere else.
I do not avoid using “spiritual” in that context. It describes an experience of profound meaning, joy, or connection. I am not using it to refer to supernatural beliefs.
I’m not one of those people who avoids the word altogether. I use it for deeply moving experiences that are transcendent in an emotional sense. Just because a word has a particular religious usage does not mean it is limited to that meaning.
Jacobsen: Yes—most words have secondary meanings. So, use the second meaning! And if someone asks, explain it.
Hiko-Tahuri: Absolutely.
Jacobsen: Statistically, I do not know of a single government census that includes hate crime data specifically against atheists, agnostics, or humanists. Have you ever seen one?
Hiko-Tahuri: Never heard of it.
Jacobsen: In Canada, the categories usually include antisemitism—perennially at the top—followed by anti-Muslim sentiment or “Islamophobia,” then discrimination against Roman Catholics. However, Catholics make up about 30% of the Canadian population, so naturally, they’ll be represented in the data due to sheer numbers.
Still, antisemitism usually tops the list. But recent research out of North America shows that people’s emotional responses to atheists are often rooted in disgust and distrust—those deep, visceral reactions.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, I’ve read about that.
Jacobsen: And when you break it down by political affiliation—Democrat, Republican, Independent—in the US, the negative perceptions of atheists remain low across all groups. The numbers are roughly as low as those for Muslims, even among Democrats and Independents. It’s slightly better in those groups than among Republicans, probably due to the strong influence of the evangelical white base.
But across the board, atheists still rank low in terms of public trust. So clearly, we’re missing something in national censuses or surveys. The social stigma is real, but it’s under-measured.
Hiko-Tahuri: I’d agree with that. In the New Zealand context, I wouldn’t say I’ve experienced hate for being an atheist. It’s more that I’m seen as an outlier—maybe eccentric or just “different”—rather than hated.
Sure, a few people have been upset or uncomfortable with it. But New Zealand is pretty liberal. Most people here don’t care what you believe—as long as you treat others well. That’s what matters most. We’re not as politically polarized, either.
Jacobsen: That’s refreshing. Demographically, what’s the approximate proportion of people with Māori heritage in New Zealand’s population?
Hiko-Tahuri: They say it’s approaching a million people out of a total population of about five million—roughly 20%.
Jacobsen: That’s significantly higher than in Canada. Indigenous people comprise around 4 or 5% of the population.
Within your community, have you encountered a dynamic similar to what Mariam Namazie describes among ex-Muslims in Britain? She talks about “minorities within minorities.” That is, Muslims are a minority in the UK, but ex-Muslims are a minority within that minority, often facing backlash both from within their communities and from wider society.
Hiko-Tahuri: I understand that idea. You leave a belief system, but you become doubly marginalized. It’s not that extreme here, but there are similarities.
Some Māori do view secular Māori as having stepped outside the bounds of what it means to be Māori, especially when religion has become entwined with their cultural reawakening. So yes, you can feel like a minority within a minority sometimes, but it is more subtle here—less hostile, I would say.
Jacobsen: That distinction makes sense. In the UK context, to support ex-Muslims publicly is sometimes misread as being anti-Muslim, which complicates everything. Identity politics can overshadow human rights issues.
Hiko-Tahuri: When cultural identity and religion are closely tied, questioning one can feel like attacking the other—even if that is not the intention.
Jacobsen: And you find yourself in this strange dichotomy—it is just a category error. You can support both Indigenous identity and secular values without negating either. It is just a mistake in framing. Do you experience that kind of tension in New Zealand as a Māori person? Or, more specifically, as a Māori atheist?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, definitely—as a Māori atheist, I do. I have had conversations with a few others who are both Māori and atheist, and we often feel like a minority within a minority. It is a unique position to be in. Interestingly, though, statistically, about 53% of Māori now report no religious affiliation.
Jacobsen: There you go.
Hiko-Tahuri: Most people would still describe themselves as “spiritual but not religious.” Maybe only 10% would openly identify as atheists. So, it is still a tiny group to which I belong.
Jacobsen: Right.
Hiko-Tahuri: That leads back nicely to the idea of “coming out” as both Māori and atheist. I remember that journey. I had been reading all the usual books—The God Delusion by Richard Dawkins, God Is Not Great by Christopher Hitchens, and so on.
I struggled with the language in some of those books because they used words I had never encountered before. As the whole topic was so new, I had to sit with a dictionary beside me while reading.
Eventually, I reached a point where I realized, “I don’t believe in this anymore.” Then, the more complex question came: “What do I do about it?” And more importantly, “Can I even tell anyone?”
While I was at university, I met a few other Māori who had started to question Christianity, too. By understanding the colonization of Aotearoa, they began to see that Christianity was imposed here—brought in by missionaries from overseas. It was not ours originally. So some of us thought, “Why should we continue believing something that was forced upon us?”
That was my thinking for a while. But then I had another realization: I had rejected Christianity using a rational lens, but I had never applied that same critical lens to traditional Māori beliefs—the atua, the creation stories, the pantheon of gods.
So I did. When I examined those beliefs through the same standards, I had to admit—they did not add up either.
That is when I had the next big moment: “I don’t believe this either. So… now what? And how am I going to tell people?”
For a long time, I did not. At first, I equated being an atheist with simply not being Christian—since Christianity is still the dominant religious framework in New Zealand.
But it took years to fully embrace the term atheist in the broader sense—to reach the point where I could say, “I do not believe in any supernatural being that controls the world or defines our purpose.”
Eventually—probably after reading The God Delusion for the third time—I thought, “I can’t be the only one.”
Hiko-Tahuri: I remember thinking, “I can’t be the only Māori going through this.” So I started searching for books or articles written by Māori people about being both Māori and atheist. And I found absolutely nothing. There was no one—no one who had written publicly about being Māori and atheist.
Jacobsen: In your experience, had you at least come across others in real life—even if they had not formally written anything?
Hiko-Tahuri: I had met people who had loudly and proudly rejected Christianity and returned to belief in the traditional Māori gods—the atua. But I do not think I had ever met another openly Māori atheist—except for one woman I found on YouTube.
Her name was Nairi McCarthy. She was involved with the New Zealand Association of Rationalists and Humanists.
Jacobsen: Oh yes, yes—I know of her.
Hiko-Tahuri: You could have spoken with her a few years ago. Sadly, she passed away five or six years ago now.
She was the only one I had ever seen publicly acknowledge being Māori and atheist. And I thought, “Damn it. If I’m the only one with some writing skills and talk for a living, maybe I need to write this book.”
Jacobsen: Right.
Hiko-Tahuri: That is what led me to write it. I thought, “I know for certain I cannot be the only person who has come to this conclusion.”
So I turned to my community for support—and found nothing—no books, no articles. I thought, “Well, maybe I have to be the first. I’ll quietly write my story, upload it to the Internet, and maybe someone will find it.”
And that is precisely what I did.
Jacobsen: Was it terrifying?
Hiko-Tahuri: Oh yes—completely. I still remember the day I hit Publish. I put it on Smashwords. And I had no one to turn to—no reference point for what kind of response it might get.
But what I wanted was to leave a record. I’ve been to Māori funerals where they lied about the beliefs of the deceased—saying they were believers, that they loved God, when I knew for a fact they didn’t.
I didn’t want anyone to lie about me to my kids after I was gone. I needed something that told the truth about who I was. So I wrote the book.
It wasn’t to convince anyone. It was just my story—something people could find and know was real.
Jacobsen: How long did it take to write?
Hiko-Tahuri: About a year and a half. It’s a short book, but it took me that long to work through it.
Jacobsen: And the word count?
Hiko-Tahuri: Around sixteen or seventeen thousand words.
Jacobsen: So, roughly a thousand words a month?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes—about that. I took my time with it.
Jacobsen: That must have been a difficult thing to do. We should get into that part because if someone stumbles across this ten years from now, it could be helpful to them.
What was the tension you felt when you realized, “Oh, shit—I don’t believe any of this anymore”?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yeah. I love my community. I love my people. I love our ceremonies. I love the familial nature of it all—the shared values, the collective spirit.
But I couldn’t believe that there were only seventy children of Rangi and Papa or that everything came from Te Kore—the void of nothingness. I couldn’t hold that belief anymore.
And that realization… it was jarring. “What do I do now?” It does suck. But I also knew I could not stay silent. I could not pretend I wasn’t having these thoughts or deny the conclusions I was reaching.
Jacobsen: That must have been a real internal conflict.
Hiko-Tahuri: It was—a deeply personal one. Part of me thought, “If you just keep quiet, you’ll be fine. You don’t have to believe—you can go your own way and avoid the conflict.”
That was tempting. It would have been easier. But I also knew that if someone asked me directly, I wouldn’t lie. I’d say, “No, I don’t believe in that.”
So, part of the thinking behind the book was: If I write this down, I won’t have to explain myself repeatedly. I can point people to it.
That felt honest. It meant I wasn’t lying or hiding anymore, either.
Jacobsen: After you published it, was the reaction proportional to the emotional weight you carried? Or was it mostly internal?
Hiko-Tahuri: Oh, it was all internal. The fear, the anxiety—it was mostly in my head.
Jacobsen: How common do you think that experience is? Do you think there’s a quiet wave of Māori atheists—or what I sometimes call “atheism-lite,” meaning agnostics—people who live by humanist principles but are afraid to come out and say they don’t believe in a deity?
People who think they’ll face judgment when, in fact, most people are too busy trying not to check Elon Musk or Donald Trump’s Twitter feed?
Hiko-Tahuri: [Laughs] Yes, right?
There’s a number of us out there. I wouldn’t call it a wave just yet, but there are certainly people wondering, “How do I tell my parents I don’t believe in God anymore?” That kind of question is very real. It’s hard to quantify, of course. But the reaction to the book was primarily positive. People were curious.
One of my cousins—his whole branch of the family is very religious—he reached out to me after reading it and said, “What? I’ve been thinking like that my whole life. I didn’t know that’s what it was called—being an atheist.”
Jacobsen: That is such a simple statement. But it carries so much emotional baggage for no good reason.
It’s fascinating. I’ve heard everything—from people being jailed or harassed for their beliefs to professional consequences to, on the other end of the spectrum, people gaining fame or recognition for speaking out—like the Daniel Dennetts and Sam Harrises of the world.
Hiko-Tahuri: So, I don’t avoid things. I go to gatherings because it’s about family first—and that’s always been my attitude. Family is family.
You put family above what individuals believe. That’s how my religious family treats me, too—my cousins and uncles. A good example: Seven of my closest cousins were wearing religious robes at a recent funeral, but we still talked and connected. The spiritual stuff was put aside because we’re family first.
I’m lucky that way. But it’s also a wider New Zealand attitude—family comes before anything else.
Jacobsen: In the North American Indigenous context, something that often happens is this: to reject the common beliefs—whether those are traditional spiritual systems or Christian indoctrination brought through colonization—is usually seen as rejecting Indigenous identity itself.
Because of colonization, many Indigenous people in Canada and the US identify as Christian. So, if you’re an Indigenous atheist, it’s often seen as adopting a “white” belief—or, I guess, more precisely, a white rejection of religion. Atheism is framed as a white thing.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, I’ve come across that sentiment here, too. I’ve had family members say similar things when I tell them I’m going to speak at an atheist group or do an interview like this. They’ll say something like, “Oh yes, that’s you, and your funny white friend,” or “That’s your weird white thing.”
Jacobsen: [Laughs] So there’s a little dig, but it’s not hostile?
Hiko-Tahuri: It’s more of a friendly poke than a grave insult. There’s no real malice behind it. It’s like a teasing jab, not a deep cut.
Jacobsen: And at least they’re not using racial slurs like you’d sometimes hear in North America—words like “cracker”thrown around with some edge to them.
Hiko-Tahuri: Right, it’s gentler here—more of a soft ribbing than anything else.
Jacobsen: I’ve heard similar things from North American Indigenous people. Atheism is often perceived as white, so any Indigenous person who identifies that way is viewed as having abandoned their roots—when really, they’re just thinking independently.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. That’s the dynamic. But honestly, I don’t care what other people think. I do me. I don’t have the energy to worry about other people’s opinions of me. If something comes up—and it rarely does—I’ll deal with it then. But in the meantime, I live my life.
Hiko-Tahuri: I won’t worry about what the rest of the Māori community thinks about me. I was even on Māori Television, here in Aotearoa, talking openly about being an atheist.
One of the more common comments I received afterwards was, “Oh, he needs to learn more about his culture.”
Jacobsen: This is a sophisticated way of saying, “He’s ignorant of our ways—therefore, he doesn’t accept our ways.” It’s a coded dismissal.
Hiko-Tahuri: Ironically, I practice more of our customs, speak more Te Reo, and participate more fully in the culture than many people making those comments.
Jacobsen: So, would you say that reaction is patronizing within the Māori community?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. That’s precisely what it is.
Another interesting thing is how certain people are automatically respected in the Māori community based on appearance. For example, if you’re an older Māori man wearing a clerical collar—any religious collar, regardless of denomination—you’re automatically afforded the status of someone to be respected.
Jacobsen: For clarity, could that collar belong to a Christian denomination or another tradition?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, it doesn’t matter what religion it is. If you wear the collar, you get that reverence. And I’ve met some of those men—they’re not particularly insightful or wise. I wouldn’t trust them to lead anything other than a church service. But because they hold that religious role, they’re treated with deference. So they’re seen as kaumātua—elders—because of the position, not because of actual wisdom or age.
You can be a 30-year-old wearing a collar and be treated like an elder. That’s one of my frustrations with how religion plays out in some Māori spaces.
Jacobsen: Would you distinguish here—again, using international terminology but applying it to a Māori-specific context—between indigeneity as culture and indigeneity as religion?
Because what I’ve come across in other interviews is a concept some call “Indigenous humanism.” It’s a framework where people continue participating in Indigenous practices—storytelling, ritual, community events—but without the supernatural belief component.
But on the flip side, I’ve also seen some Indigenous frameworks begin to mirror structured religions: hierarchy, sacred texts, holy oral traditions, and supernatural entities—almost resembling traditional Abrahamic models with “gods,” sacred teachings, powers, principalities, and so on.
Some Indigenous atheists and humanists I’ve spoken with are worried about this trend—a kind of religious revival forming around indigeneity itself. Their concern is that it could become dogmatic and undermine secular and Enlightenment-based thinking.
Hiko-Tahuri: I get what you’re saying. I haven’t seen that happening here, at least not in a widespread or formalized way. But part of that could be numbers. You’d need a critical mass of people adopting that framework for it to take shape.
It’s less about isolated belief and more about institutionalization. It doesn’t evolve into that kind of system if you don’t have the numbers, but I understand the concern. Once belief systems become formalized, there’s always the risk that they become exclusionary or dogmatic.
We do not have that many of us, so we have not even had the chance to break ourselves into different “types” of atheists. We have not even come together for a group chat to discuss our thoughts. So no, I have not seen anything like that fragmentation yet because we are such a tiny group in New Zealand.
There has not been enough critical mass within atheism to split into more specific beliefs or approaches.
Jacobsen: If your initial feeling after publishing the book was one of relief—and the reaction was much more subdued than anticipated—do you now see people entering the atheist or humanist space, especially Māori, with this almost irrational sense of fear, only to realize, “Oh… it’s fine. It’s not a big deal”?
Hiko-Tahuri: Honestly? No, we do not even really see that reaction. Because so few people talk about it publicly. When we gather, we have roles to fill. We are there to work—we have responsibilities. There is no time to sit and have long philosophical debates about belief.
Jacobsen: That sounds like a cultural distinction. Take something like the Catholic Church—they gather, sit, listen, and sing. It is contemplative. But you are describing something very different.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes. For example, there is much to do if we’re at the marae. We have protocols, hospitality, food to prepare, cleaning, hosting—so much practical work. We do not pause to reflect or debate belief systems during those moments.
At most, you might hear someone say, “Oh yeah, that cousin over there’s a bit different—he doesn’t believe in God.” And that’s it. That’s probably as deep as it goes.
Jacobsen: So the culture itself, in those moments, emphasizes function and participation over theology.
Hiko-Tahuri: We are caught up in the activity of the occasion, not in philosophical contemplation about the universe’s origins.
Jacobsen: So—what was the general reaction to the book? Good, bad, ugly, neutral, controlling?
Hiko-Tahuri: [Laughs] Honestly? Most people I knew contacted me to say, “Why am I not in it?”
Most reactions were driven by self-interest—”little me” stuff. Many people who read the book were curious if they were in it. A lot of the feedback was, “Oh yeah, that’s just you being you.” I’ve always been considered a bit weird anyway.
Jacobsen: [Laughs] Familiar.
Hiko-Tahuri: Other than that, people would say things like, “I never thought about that,” or “I didn’t know you couldn’t believe in God.” Because belief is so deeply embedded in Māori identity from such a young age.
Jacobsen: Is it similar to beliefs around wairua—the spiritual essence or spirit?
Hiko-Tahuri: Very much so. Wairua—the spiritual dimension—permeates everything. It’s so ingrained that when someone steps outside of it or says, “I don’t believe in that,” it’s beyond what many people are prepared to consider. They ignore it. It’s too far outside the norm to process.
Jacobsen: Did the book catalyze others—within the community or the broader New Zealand public—to come forward or speak out?
Hiko-Tahuri: I don’t know. I don’t want to claim that other Māori atheists came out because of my book. I can’t say that for sure. But we have a Facebook group called Atua Kore, which means “godless.” It has about 500 members now.
Jacobsen: That’s a solid number.
Hiko-Tahuri: It is. And yes, we’ve had a few people post in that group announcing that they’re atheists—that they’d made the decision, and it was huge for them. That happened after the book came out, but I won’t say it was because of it. I don’t know.
Jacobsen: Are there any prominent atheist or humanist figures in New Zealand generally—Māori or otherwise?
Hiko-Tahuri: No real high-profile names come to mind. One of the cultural dynamics in New Zealand is what we call “tall poppy syndrome”—we tend to cut down the people who stick out. So, self-promotion is frowned upon here. You don’t boast; you don’t elevate yourself. You keep your head down.
Jacobsen: Honestly, North America could use a little more of that.
Hiko-Tahuri: [Laughs] Maybe! But because of that, unless you’re already in the community, you’ve probably never heard of any of our local atheists or humanists.
Jacobsen: Are there any other books, aside from yours, by Māori atheists?
Hiko-Tahuri: Not yet.
Jacobsen: That’s wild. Okay, let me put this on the record: open offer. If we can gather around 100,000 words’ worth of conversations with Māori atheists, agnostics, or humanists—fully inclusive—I’ll help compile it. You can tell me your life story, “coming out,” and reflections. No pressure.
Hiko-Tahuri: That sounds good.
Jacobsen: It’s an ironic “coming-to-Jesus” phrase. [Laughs] But really, the point would be to normalize it. To show that being a Māori atheist isn’t a big deal—it’s just one way of being. That #NormalizeAtheism message. You’ve got 500 members in the Whakapono Kore group. Surely, some would be up for it.
Hiko-Tahuri: Maybe. But I don’t know how many would want to go public. That’s always the challenge. Out of those 500 members in the Atua Kore group, I know about four people willing to speak publicly.
Jacobsen: So basically, the secretary, vice president, president, and treasurer?
Hiko-Tahuri: [Laughs] Pretty much—except we’re not that organized. It’s not even my group; someone else started it. I’m just a member like everyone else.
Jacobsen: What is the Taranaki Maunga?
Hiko-Tahuri: Oh yes, I am granting personhood to the mountain. That’s an environmental protection mechanism more than a spiritual or belief-based one. It’s a legal framework designed to safeguard the mountain.
Jacobsen: The international community has increasingly formalized support for Indigenous peoples through declarations, conventions, and covenants. Some of the most notable include:
- The United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (UNDRIP) was adopted in 2007.
- International Labour Organization Convention No. 169 concerning Indigenous and Tribal Peoples in Independent Countries (1989).
- The International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (1965) includes Indigenous peoples under legal definitions of racial protection.
These instruments serve as essential frameworks for recognizing Indigenous communities’ cultural, environmental, political, and spiritual rights.
Additional international instruments support Indigenous rights, which are not often discussed but are incredibly important.
- The International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (1966) — Article 1 affirms the right to self-determination for all peoples, including Indigenous communities.
- The International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (also 1966) contains articles addressing equality, cultural rights, and the right to participate in social and economic development, which directly apply to Indigenous peoples.
- The Convention on the Rights of the Child (1989) — Article 30 affirms the right of Indigenous children to enjoy their culture, religion, and language.
- The Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW) — General Recommendation 39 specifically addresses Indigenous women and girls.
- The Declaration on the Rights of Persons Belonging to National or Ethnic, Religious, and Linguistic Minorities (1992) — Affirms collective minority rights, including Indigenous identities.
And there are several region-specific instruments:
- The African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (Banjul Charter, 1981) — Article 22 recognizes the right to development, including for Indigenous peoples.
- The American Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (ADRIP, 2016) — Establishes principles for self-identification, cultural preservation, and public participation.
- UNESCO’s Convention for the Safeguarding of the Intangible Cultural Heritage (2003) — Recognizes and protects the cultural expressions of Indigenous communities.
- The Convention on Biological Diversity (1992), Article 8(j), mandates respecting and preserving Indigenous knowledge, innovations, and practices related to conservation and sustainable biodiversity.
So, this is not “nothing.” There’s a body of international law supporting Indigenous rights. Of course, the tension always lies between what is declared and what is implemented. That’s where the evidence and accountability need to come in.
From your perspective—within the Māori context—do you see any of these declarations, covenants, or charters shaping Māori–New Zealand relations?
Hiko-Tahuri: To be completely honest, I’ve only ever heard of the UN Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples (UNDRIP). That’s the only one that ever comes up in public conversation or news here. All the others? I haven’t heard of them.
Jacobsen: That’s insightful. If we take secular humanism as a life stance grounded in an empirical moral philosophythat adapts its ethics based on new evidence, do you think Māori secular humanists could lead in implementing or advocating for some of these international declarations?
Hiko-Tahuri: I would like to say yes—but I worry. Like I said before, in our Māori communities, the people who wear collars—the religious leaders—get the leadership roles. People like me, who don’t wear a collar, are less likely to be listened to.
So, Indigenous secular humanists—are not currently in a position of influence when it comes to policy or leadership. And that’s something I think about a lot.
Jacobsen: That’s a critical and complex conversation. It reminds me of my last in-depth interview with David Cook, Maheengun, who has an Anishinaabe background in Canada. He identified as a traditional knowledge keeper—but importantly, was a knowledge keeper. There’s nuance in how Indigenous knowledge and leadership structures function and interact with humanist and secular frameworks. In the North American Indigenous context, the term for that is that you do not have a collar, but you might be a pipe carrier.
Maheengun gave up his status as a pipe carrier because, for him, there was too much dissonance between his humanist, atheist worldview and the expectations that came with that ceremonial role.
That gets into something I do not think anyone’s explored yet: if someone adopts atheism and secular humanism seriously and then steps away from a role like a pipe carrier or traditional knowledge keeper, how does that affect their voice—not just within the community but in broader systems like government-to-government or what is often termed “nation-to-nation” relations in Canada?
Because if someone lacks ceremonial or spiritual status, they often have no formal recognition—and no seat at the table. So, the representatives federal governments see in these discussions tend to be those with supernatural frameworks. That becomes the perceived Indigenous worldview, even though, as we know, many Indigenous people do not subscribe to that at all.
And the same is true for Māori. Significant portions of the population—like in the 634 recognized First Nations bands in Canada—either reject or question those beliefs. Even if, as in your case, they still participate culturally. Yet they are still not always seen as “real Māori” by some.
Where could that conversation go? What questions should we be asking?
Hiko-Tahuri: I’ve been thinking about this one for a long time—and honestly, I still don’t know.
In New Zealand, the government recognizes several iwi—tribal groups—as official representatives. So, if the government wants to consult with Māori, it will go to those groups and their hierarchies. The structure is established and formalized.
But here’s the thing: because those bodies represent the majority, people like me—those without a spiritual or ceremonial role—do not get much say.
That said, I’ve been fortunate. I have working relationships with some of the local tribal leaders. I’ve worked within their organizations, so I know at least they’re getting one different voice in the room—mine. I can say, “Hey, this is something you must consider.”
But that’s not a system-wide thing. It’s very personal. And yes, it isn’t easy to imagine how to scale that and how to make it more inclusive.
These representatives often claim to speak for all of us. But do they? We don’t know.
Jacobsen: That’s a tension in democratic governance, too. No political party or leader truly represents everyone. They represent the most significant percentage of voters in a particular cycle. So even there, you get a majority-of-plurality scenario, not true consensus.
It’s the same dynamic. When a Māori elder with a collar and status comes forward and tells the New Zealand government, “This is what we want as a community,” it’s assumed that their voice is the voice of all Māori.
But that’s not the case.
Hiko-Tahuri: There’s a presumption that doesn’t map cleanly onto European governance models. But most of our iwi—tribal groups—that the government interacts with are democratically elected. It’s not always a traditional hereditary hierarchy. Leaders are often voted in.
Jacobsen: Interesting. So there’s a mix of democratic process and cultural leadership?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, and I wouldn’t say all of those leaders are particularly religious either. Many use religious language or rituals to connect with the people they serve. It’s less about being deeply spiritual and more about resonating with the majority—many of whom are.
Jacobsen: That ties into self-stereotyping and external stereotyping. It becomes a kind of feel-good activism—what I sometimes call “parade activism” instead of “hard-work activism.”
For example, I attended a session at the 69th Commission on the Status of Women—Canada’s Indigenous. There was an Indigenous panel, and a few participants represented Indigenous communities beyond Canada’s borders.
Some arrived in full traditional dress—massive ceremonial headgear and all. Now, that visual shorthand becomes what government officials expect to see. It creates a kind of caricature—but it also becomes self-reinforcing.
That person becomes the “abstract ideal” of what a proper Indigenous representative should look like, and the government becomes the “abstract system” responding to that image. Both sides feel good about the exchange, but it risks becoming performative. It’s not always representative of the range of Indigenous experiences—especially secular ones.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes,.
Jacobsen: So it becomes this cycle: “We brought the right Māori to the table,” and “I presented the right version of Māori identity.” Everyone walks away satisfied—but it also acts as a brake. You’re pushing the gas and the brake at the same time.
Right—and then when someone like me comes forward, without the collar or ceremonial role, they’re seen as the outlier. Like the cranky guy on the porch yelling at the sky. The Garfield of the meeting, if you will. [Laughs]
No one wants that person. They’re not the story anyone wants to hear.
Hiko-Tahuri: That reminds me of something recent. The New Zealand Psychological Society referenced my book.
Until now, the society’s approach was based on a framework developed by a respected Māori elder—someone known in cultural and philosophical spaces. He proposed a four-sided model of well-beingwellbeing, likened to a house. It’s used widely in Māori mental health services.
The four sides are physical, family, spiritual, and—something else. But the point is: if you’re working with Māori clients, the model says you must consider all four, including the spiritual.
So, twenty years ago, I went to see a therapist. They used this exact model. We sat down, and they said, “We need to begin with a karakia—a prayer.”
I said, “I’m not religious. I don’t want to pray.”
But their training told them they had to do it. So, I was forced to sit through a religious ritual I didn’t believe in to access mental health care. And worse, I was pressured to participate in that prayer myself.
That’s a significant example. It shows how models meant to be inclusive can become exclusionary—especially for Māori who are secular.
Jacobsen: That’s like people being forced to go to AA.
Hiko-Tahuri: I presented to a group of psychologists about a year ago. One of the prominent members—someone involved in the humanist movement here—submitted a formal statement to the New Zealand College of Clinical Psychologists.
He said, “Look, this is a perspective you haven’t considered.” That spiritual requirement—where practitioners were required to begin with a prayer—was challenged. As a result, recommendations have now been made to adjust those protocols to include people who do not believe. That’s one positive change I can point to that came out of it.
Jacobsen: Is the traditional Māori dance called the haka?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, the haka.
Jacobsen: That seems like one of the more benign aspects of cultural tradition, even for someone transitioning ideologically. I don’t see how a dance would be impacted by whether someone is spiritual.
Hiko-Tahuri: No—not at all. The haka isn’t inherently religious. It’s a form of emotional and communal expression. While its origins include warrior preparation, it’s evolved far beyond that.
There are haka for celebrations, mourning, farewells, and graduations. At university ceremonies, if someone Māori walks across the stage, people from their whānau will often leap up from the crowd and perform a haka in celebration. It’s done everywhere, for all kinds of moments.
It’s how we express collective feelings—joy, grief, pride, and love.
Jacobsen: So, when you begin mapping the geography of Māori secularism—as a relatively new concept—are there any aspects of traditional Māori governance that could be considered appropriately secular? That is, are there spaces where ritual or spiritual practices are distinctly set apart or is everything more or less integrated?
Hiko-Tahuri: So, in most traditional Māori contexts, everything tends to be intertwined—spiritual, social, political, and cultural dimensions are not separated in the Western sense. In that way, Māori culture is similar to many traditional religious cultures, where secularism, as we understand it in liberal democracies, was never really a category.
Jacobsen: Now, tapu—the concept of sacredness or restriction in Māori culture—retains significant cultural power. But from a secular Māori perspective, like yours, tapu can be understood metaphorically rather than metaphysically. It functions symbolically to mark respect, boundaries, or social norms rather than indicating belief in the supernatural. What does that mean in practical terms?
Hiko-Tahuri: Take karakia, for example—these are often translated as prayers or incantations. I don’t perform them myself. But in spaces where karakia are expected—such as ceremonial openings or public gatherings—I’ve written secular alternatives, essentially nonreligious invocations. I cannot authentically engage in the religious or supernatural aspects, but I can offer something meaningful and culturally respectful that fits the moment. That’s how I bridge the gap: by replacing the supernatural element with a secular expression that still honours the cultural context.
Jacobsen: This reminds me of the situation in Canada. Canada is a federal state divided into municipalities, provinces, and territories, and then the national government, which is functionally similar to the U.S. structure of counties, states, and federal governance. In 2015, the Supreme Court of Canada ruled in Mouvement laïque québécois v. Saguenay (City) that opening municipal council meetings with prayer violated the state’s duty of religious neutrality. It effectively made official prayers at government meetings unconstitutional.
Following that decision, organizations like the British Columbia Humanist Association began investigating compliance across municipalities. Despite the ruling, they found that many local governments continued to include prayer in official meetings. In response, the Association sent letters to these municipalities pointing out the legal ruling, sharing data, and urging them to comply with the law by removing religious observances from public sessions. This kind of advocacy led to meaningful change in some regions.
So, when I consider your experience, I think of it in that light. You’re not opposing cultural participation or public service; instead, you’re drawing a line where religious practices—like prayer—are included in civic spaces where they may no longer be appropriate, especially in pluralistic or post-colonial contexts. Countries like Aotearoa, New Zealand, Australia, Canada, the United States, and South Africa all fall under the category of “post-colonial” states grappling with how to reconcile Indigenous traditions, secular governance, and religious pluralism.
So, let us return to the historical backdrop. Christian missionary efforts, correct, primarily drove colonization in Aotearoa, New Zealand. I understand that many of those involved were of European heritage—like my own. When people refer to “post-colonial” in this context, they often mean a phase following that religious and political imposition—perhaps even envisioning a society in a reconciled, pluralistic state where Indigenous and settler cultures have negotiated a new equilibrium. Would you say that is accurate?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, that is broadly correct. Among post-colonial nations, I would say Aotearoa, New Zealand, has gone further than many in terms of acknowledging and integrating Māori language, culture, and perspectives into public life. You can see the effects of that on things like the census data. As of the most recent census, about 53% of New Zealanders identified as having no religion. That makes New Zealand a post-Christian country, at least in terms of demographic majority. Christianity is now a minority belief, which shifts the dynamics.
Jacobsen: And how does that shift affect your everyday life, particularly as someone who identifies as an atheist and a humanist? Does it allow you to live more comfortably and authentically?
Hiko-Tahuri: Absolutely. As I mentioned earlier, overt religiosity is a bit unusual here. People who are very religious are more of a minority now—and may be looked at as slightly outside the norm. The country itself is pretty secular. Yes, we still have prayers at the beginning of some public meetings, but those are more about tradition than belief in most cases. There are calls to remove such practices, and I support that. However, overall, New Zealand has a very relaxed and liberal society. People do not care what others believe or do not believe. There is a strong cultural inclination toward individual freedom and tolerance, so we rarely see heated debates or conflicts over religion here.
Jacobsen: Tell me more about your podcast, Heretical. Is it still running, and where can people find it?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, it is back. I originally launched it some time ago but had to pause due to other commitments. I have now restarted it. The first season includes 10 episodes, where I read my book chapter by chapter. The book is free—I never wrote it to make money; I wrote it to tell a story. That story forms the basis of the podcast. I have also added another episode where I talk about a strange encounter I had with what I would describe as a cult-like group who tried to recruit me. That experience was eye-opening and worth sharing. There will be more episodes in the future. I plan to delve into some of the more common arguments for theism—things like the cosmological argument—and explore why I do not find them convincing. These kinds of discussions are not often had within our community, so I think it is essential to create space for them.
Jacobsen: What about your music and your airbrush art? Do elements of secularism or humanism show up in those creative outlets?
Hiko-Tahuri: Not so much in my music, no. It is more of a personal expression, and I keep it separate from my secular identity. But everything I create reflects my worldview in some way, even if not explicitly.
I have been playing in the same band with friends for about 25 years now. We only get together to play once every five years or so these days, but we are just a bunch of old mates who enjoy making music together. I played my first gig when I was 14 years old for a country music club here in New Zealand. I got pulled into country music because there really were not many other musical options in the small town I grew up in.
Music has always been part of my life, but I have never chased fame or done it for recognition. I do it because I love it. The same goes for painting. I have created a few pieces where I’ve expressed thoughts on some of the more absurd or troubling beliefs in the Bible. For example, there is that passage—1 Timothy 2:12, I think—that says women should remain silent and not teach. I did a painting responding to that. I also painted a Celtic cross overlaid with Māori designs to symbolize how religion, especially Christianity, colonized us just as much as the English did. I have sold or given away some of those pieces, but really, art is something I do for personal fulfillment rather than profit.
Jacobsen: How do emerging networks like Māori atheist and freethinker communities offer space for collective doubt or help individuals express personal doubts within a shared context?
Hiko-Tahuri: That is a good question. I do not know if that is even the aim of the group I joined. It is not my group—I just found it and joined. For me, it was more about discovering that there were other people out there who think like me and also look like me. That alone was meaningful. We have not tried to turn it into a collective movement. Māori atheism is still in its infancy. Until I wrote my book, I had not encountered any serious discussion about it, at least not that I could find. That group did exist beforehand, but I stumbled upon it afterward.
So, right now, most of the Māori atheists I see are solo actors. We speak up when we feel like it, but there is no organized collective activism or shared identity. We are in such an early stage of development as a community that it has not yet coalesced into anything more structured or strategic.
Jacobsen: Since we last spoke, have you had any recent thoughts on the protocols and principles of Indigenous declarations?
Hiko-Tahuri: No, I have not looked into it lately. I know that the New Zealand government initially chose not to sign the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, though it eventually endorsed it in 2010. But beyond that, I have not followed recent developments very closely.
Jacobsen: I have not had a chance to read into some of those areas, but I would like to. What about the precise etiquette and civic customs—honouring those customs that come from the subculture while not reciting the prayers? What is the balance being struck there?
Hiko-Tahuri: Yeah, I think that is one of the most challenging parts—figuring out what you can do respectfully while maintaining personal integrity. If we are talking, for instance, about pōwhiri—that is, the formal welcome ceremony—part of that involves speech-making. And during those speeches, spiritual language is often invoked. It is hard to categorize it strictly as religious, but it carries spiritual overtones.
Navigating is a challenge because there is a specific formula for constructing those speeches within our culture. They follow a traditional structure that includes spiritual references—things I do not believe in. So, I often have to rework those parts, recreating the tone and form without the religious or supernatural elements. It is difficult and takes much careful thought. That is probably the main struggle for Māori atheists who speak the language and actively participate in cultural life. We are trying to maintain the integrity of our heritage while adapting it to a secular worldview.
Jacobsen: Have you ever had an experience—either due to your ethnic background or lack of belief—where someone got confrontational with you? The proverbial finger-wagging, shouting match? I cannot imagine that happening much to a Kiwi.
Hiko-Tahuri: No, we are generally not that confrontational in New Zealand. And there are a couple of practical reasons, too. Because of how I look—my physical presence—people usually do not get up in my face. I am around six feet tall, and I guess I have a face that might be intimidating. So, people do not tend to push those boundaries. I am not aggressive or threatening at all, but sometimes, just my appearance is enough to make people think twice.
Jacobsen: That reminds me—there was a story out of the U.S. involving Eminem. I think gang members were extorting him—either the Crips or the Bloods. But apparently, there was a Samoan-American gang so feared that even the Crips were hesitant around them. Eminem hired them for protection, and they ended up defending him and collaborating on music. I believe they even put out an album together.
It was a pretty wild story. It shows how much physical presence and group identity can shape interactions—whether in music, culture, or personal safety. It is funny how those dynamics play out in so many different places.
Hiko-Tahuri: It can be imposing. I am five-eleven, but I am not baby-faced. Still, I have heard of incidents chwhere Māori women in New Zealand—especially those who wear moko kauae, the traditionalin tattoo—get hassled often.
Jacobsen:How so?
Hiko-Tahuri: By members of the public, saying things like, “You shouldn’t be here,” or “You look intimidating,” or “You shouldn’t be in this park.” One of these incidents happened just last year in a local park. A woman was told she could not be there when someone’s kids were around, as if she was somehow threatening—just for wearing the moko kauae. These things do happen, particularly to women. I have noticed that it never happens to me. Maybe that has something to do with physical presence or perceived threat, but yes—it is a pattern.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, that does happen, and fairly often. I am out of the question for that hassle, too, for similar reasons.
Jacobsen: So, am I missing anything? What do you think?
Hiko-Tahuri: I do not think so. I cannot think of anything else at the moment. That was a solid session.
Jacobsen: Thank you so much for today.
Hiko-Tahuri: Yes, that sounds great. Thank you very much.
Jacobsen: All right. Take care.
Hiko-Tahuri: You too. Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/13
Author Disclaimer
The views and opinions expressed in this article are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the official policy or position of any organization, institution, or entity with which the author may be affiliated, including Humanists International.
Ronald A. Lindsay, a philosopher, lawyer, and former CEO of the Center for Inquiry, discusses secularism, religious influence on law, and the Ten Commandments’ role in American history. He argues that morality predates religious doctrines, citing historical legal codes like the Code of Hammurabi. Lindsay critiques Christian nationalist claims, noting that American law is fundamentally secular. He highlights that religious, moral frameworks often project human values onto deities. Addressing objections, he refutes the idea that atheism undermines morality, emphasizing cooperation and social trust as its foundation. He warns against individuals using religious justification to override secular law.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Ronald A. Lindsay. He is a philosopher, lawyer, and author who has worked extensively in secularism and the critical analysis of religious claims. That sounds like an interesting job. He served as the president and CEO of the Center for Inquiry from 2008 to 2016 and has been a vocal advocate for reason, science, and free inquiry. As a senior research fellow at Free Inquiry, Lindsay critiques claims about religion’s role in law and society.
His books include The Necessity of Secularism: Why God Can’t Tell Us What to Do and Against the New Politics of Identity: A Critique of the Contemporary Social Justice Movement. He frequently writes on secular ethics, legal philosophy, and the misrepresentation of religious influence in government. Is all of that correct?
Lindsay: I’m particularly proud of The Necessity of Secularism, published in 2014. I like it because it has sold better than any of my other books. I still receive royalties from it. It’s not a large check, but it’s enough to pay for a few cocktails each year, which is nice.
Jacobsen: Well, since you mentioned “royalty,” as a Canadian, I suppose I should happily acknowledge that term, given our constitutional monarchy. Now, let’s talk about the Ten Commandments. You may have heard of them.
How are people justifying the claim that the Ten Commandments are foundational to American law? A side note: American demographics have followed the trajectory of most advanced industrial economies, although the United States is an outlier due to its slow decline in religious adherence. However, Christian practice and affiliation in the U.S. have dropped significantly in recent years.
Lindsay: Yes. This myth, a misunderstanding, has likely been around for a long time. However, it has taken on special significance in the last several decades—particularly since the 1960s—when the Supreme Court clarified that the First Amendment should be interpreted strictly and that public schools should remain secular.
The Court ruled against school-led prayer and Bible readings, and many Americans have never fully accepted those rulings.
For decades, efforts have been made to reinstate prayer or incorporate religious teachings back into schools. One strategy has been placing posters of the Ten Commandments in classrooms. This effort has been ongoing for years. In Stone v. Graham (1980), the Supreme Court ruled in a 5-4 decision that a Kentucky law requiring the posting of the Ten Commandments in public school classrooms was unconstitutional.
However, in recent years, the movement has gained momentum again. Louisiana recently passed a law requiring that the Ten Commandments be posted in all public school classrooms. Texas, Oklahoma, and other states are considering similar legislation.
Louisiana’s law is currently being challenged in Court, as it violates Supreme Court precedent. However, its supporters hope that the current Supreme Court, which has taken a more favourable stance toward religious expression in public life, will uphold the law.
Proponents of these measures recognize that previous Supreme Court rulings have struck down overtly religious mandates in public schools. As a result, they have attempted to frame their justification in secular terms. Their argument is, “No, we’re not trying to impose religion on children; we’re just acknowledging the historical influence of the Ten Commandments on American law.”
“No, we don’t care whether they believe in God or not—it has nothing to do with that or whether they’re Christian. But this is part of our national heritage because the Ten Commandments provide the foundation for American law.” And unfortunately, this is a misstatement, fabrication, lie—however you want to characterize it. It’s false.
It’s a falsehood that has been echoed by the House of Representatives, which has passed resolutions endorsing it. Various Supreme Court justices have echoed it. So it has, in some eyes, some currency and legitimacy, which inspired me to write the article I did for Free Inquiry. In it, I set forth, in fairly clear terms, the reasons why that claim is not true.
The Ten Commandments are in no way the foundation for American law.
Jacobsen: Now, the foundational principle appears to be the notion that God is good, that any goodness in morality or ethics comes from some transcendent or divine access point. Why is that wrong, particularly when applied to murder, theft, and perjury?
Lindsay: Yes, well, why it’s wrong, especially in the context of the Ten Commandments—I think some people have this naive idea, certainly if you take the idea that the Ten Commandments are foundational for law, that somehow before Moses came down from Mount Sinai—which is a legend anyway, but we won’t get into that—there was moral anarchy, that there was lawlessness among all people before that, which is not the case.
Human society could not have survived if there were no basic moral principles—whether intuitive, outlined in writing, or what have you—that governed interactions among people, right? You have to be able to, among other things, refrain from knocking the brains out of someone next to you, taking their property, or materially engaging in deceit.
So, laws prohibiting violence, especially murder, laws prohibiting theft, and laws prohibiting material deceit, including perjury, have existed in societies long before Moses, ancient Judea, or what have you.
The Code of Hammurabi, for example—dating to around 1700 BCE, depending on your chronology for Moses, which places him five, six, or seven hundred years later—contains detailed laws. And again, these laws prohibit what laws normally prohibit: just what we discussed—maiming, killing, theft, lying under oath, and things of that sort.
So, the core principles many people identify as fundamental to the Ten Commandments existed long before the Ten Commandments. And again, if you take a moment to reflect on it, clearly any human society—a society where people actually lived together and cooperated—would have to establish principles like these to function. It’s just basic.
So, right away, you’ve removed at least three of the Ten Commandments, depending on how you count them—and that’s a whole other issue since there is no uniform version of the Ten Commandments. But you’ve removed what many people would regard as their core elements.
Jacobsen: So, with the Code of Hammurabi, you could think of the Ten Commandments as a software update to those laws. But that software update is over 2,000 years old. So why are we trying to impose laws from more than two millennia ago on contemporary society—especially when international institutions like the United Nations base their codes on universalist ethics like human rights?
Lindsay: Well, that’s a good question. Again, I think this is a reaction to many people’s sense—that the values they once held are losing their footing. That understandably causes some anxiety and distress.
One way to relieve that distress is to try to impose those values—fundamentalist Christian values—on others and claim that this is the way it should be. This is the basis for morality and law.
That’s not a good argument. Still, psychologically, you can see why people might be motivated to take that stance. But there’s something else worth mentioning. We talked about murder, perjury, and theft.
Looking at the rest of the Ten Commandments, it becomes even clearer why they can’t be the foundation of American law. Several of them have never influenced American law—or, to my knowledge, any other legal system.
Take coveting your neighbour’s possessions. Well, that’s the basis for capitalism. Consumerism is fueled by coveting what your neighbour Joe or Mildred has.
Coveting your neighbour’s wife? Yes, it’s frowned upon, but it’s a thought crime—having a desire for someone else. That has never been the subject of law.
Honouring one’s parents? That may be a moral injunction—yes, we should be kind to our parents—but it’s never been a legal principle. And finally, the First Commandment—Thou shalt have no other gods before me. Certainly, in terms of American law, that has never been enforced.
There were established churches in some of the colonies, and even after independence, some states maintained established churches for a few years. But there was never a prohibition on worshiping outside the established church.
So, the idea that American law was built on a uniform religious belief is simply false. By this point, we’ve covered at least six or seven of the Ten Commandments, depending on how you count them. They’ve had no effect—let alone a foundational effect—on American law.
Jacobsen: Even if we grant their premise—which we’ve been analyzing already—that the Ten Commandments are well-grounded and should be imposed, what about the fundamental premise of the Bible itself? The claim that the Bible is true and that the Ten Commandments are justified as a moral document.
Lindsay: Well, if you accept that argument, you must accept that the Bible is true—and that’s ultimately a question of faith.
Of course, this leads to a whole host of swirling theological debates about how to interpret the Bible. As everyone knows, there are dozens—if not hundreds—of Protestant denominations.
The Catholic Church is much less unified than it once was. You have the Eastern Orthodox Church and then, of course, Judaism, which accepts significant portions of the Bible but interprets them differently.
So, which interpretation is correct? That becomes a whole separate issue. And finally, we arrive at the fundamental philosophical question: Is something moral because God says it is?
Or does God declare something moral because it is inherently moral? This is the dilemma Plato posed long ago—the Euthyphro dilemma.
If you take the first position—that something is moral simply because God says so—you run into the problem of differing interpretations of what God has said, right? And why is it the God of the Bible as opposed to the God of the Quran or the deities of Hindu scriptures?
So, ultimately, trying to base morality on God does not provide a stable foundation—certainly not one that is beyond question. When you dig deeper, you see that what we really believe is based on our moral intuitions.
If you discuss with someone which God is the “true” God, the argument quickly shifts. Someone might say, “Well, God wouldn’t approve of that.” Or “God wouldn’t approve of what Muslims believe.” Or, “God wouldn’t approve of what Catholics do.”
But those arguments aren’t based on divine authority but on human moral reasoning. So, ultimately, people decide what God says based on their own moral intuitions. This shows that the basis for morality is our moral framework, which we then project onto the deity.
We assume that because we see something as moral, God must approve of it. Once we believe this, we feel like we have divine approval, which gives our beliefs an illusion of legitimacy. But in reality, we’re projecting our moral sensibilities onto an imagined authority figure that we think grants us a veneer of respectability. And it doesn’t.
Jacobsen: In the United States, the Christian population is a little shy of two-thirds. However, many Christians do not identify as Christian nationalists—either explicitly by name or implicitly through their beliefs.
So how are those Christians—and others like yourself and myself, who are non-religious—perceiving this Christian nationalist movement? It’s not just about putting up giant Ten Commandments tablets at state courthouses or legislatures—where, inevitably, a Satanist group will demand to place a Baphomet statue beside them.
It’s about Christian nationalism being used to shape governance across nearly every major institution in the United States. It’s not just symbolic; it’s an attempt to enforce religious principles pervasively, even over non-religious people and Christians who disagree with that vision.
Lindsay: Yeah, well, to put it mildly, there will be some resistance.
Right now, the United States is in a volatile political moment. There are so many fast-moving efforts to reshape policy across multiple areas, particularly under the Trump administration at this time. People who oppose these moves are still figuring out the right strategy for resisting them.
But at the end of the day, both secular people and—lacking a better term—progressive or liberal Christians will likely find common cause in pushing back against the more extreme efforts to impose religious beliefs on society.
This is not just about schools—it’s about the broader attempt to influence laws and governance in general. That resistance will happen. How successful it will be remains to be seen. The unfortunate reality is that Trump has had a very compliant Congress.
He has demonstrated this by confirming his cabinet nominees, even when some were unqualified by any objective standard.
Jacobsen: I thought it was a meritocracy!
Lindsay: That’s it. Well, that’s the irony. The whole push against DEI—I want to be fair. I think some Democrats, in some ways, pushed DEI in a way that was counterproductive. Some of the interpretations that were made…
Jacobsen: Identity politics 2.0.
Lindsay: Right. And so they opened the door for this reaction. Of course, Trump isn’t using a scalpel to reform how DEI was being applied—he’s using a bludgeon and just eliminating it. But then the whole premise behind that is, “We need to go back to strictly relying on merit.”
Obviously, “merit” for him means subservience to him because otherwise, there’s no way to rationalize the selection of Tulsi Gabbard as the Director of National Intelligence. Robert F. Kennedy Jr., a person who knows nothing about health and is anti-vaccine, was chosen as the Secretary of Health and Human Services.
Pete Hegseth—who has had many personal issues—had only run two non-profits into the ground before being put in charge of the largest bureaucracy in the government. It’s just astonishing. So, yeah, to get back to your question, I think there will be resistance to what Trump is doing—there already is.
But in particular, when it comes to imposing religious values—whether it’s through education policy or efforts like prosecuting physicians who prescribe mail-order abortion pills—I think there will be strong resistance. And I’m hopeful, at least, that the Christian nationalist agenda will ultimately fail.
Jacobsen: Are any parts of the Ten Commandments unique compared to other legal systems?
Lindsay: I’m curious if there are any.
“Taking the Lord’s name in vain” arguably could be, as I mentioned in my article for Free Inquiry, in all fairness, that may have influenced early American law because blasphemy laws were on the books in several states.
They were rare, but there were occasional blasphemy prosecutions. By the end of the 19th century, most states had abandoned those laws. And when the Supreme Court ruled that the First Amendment applied to the states—not just the federal government—those laws became dead letters anyway.
But for some time, that commandment may have been unique. I can’t say for certain—I don’t have an encyclopedic knowledge of legal systems in every country, particularly in Asia—but it may be unique. Again, that’s a long way from saying the Ten Commandments had a foundational effect on American law.
Jacobsen: I see a lot of this. I’ve tried to characterize it for a long time as a situation where most of the world espouses some form of transcendentalist, divine, religious ethics.
You have Hindu nationalists, Muslim-majority countries, Christian-majority countries—huge portions of the global population. Buddhists could be included in that as well.
However, the one ethical system that everyone adheres to in practice—one that is not confined to a region, a country, or a small rural community—is what I would consider secular because it does not invoke religion: human rights.
Human rights are based on principles of universalism. These universal, secular human rights are not necessarily in fundamental opposition to religious and moral systems. Still, they are much fairer because they incorporate freedom of religion and belief.
So, is there anything comparable in biblical teachings that leans toward a universalist point of view—something similar to what we see in modern ethics, like human rights?
Lindsay: Some people have tried to argue that there is.
But if we look at what Christians call the Old Testament—the Torah for Jews—there is nothing in it that is truly universalist. Ancient Judaism was very much a tribal religion, as evidenced by how non-Hebrews were treated. The slaughter of the Canaanites, for example, was explicitly sanctioned by God.
Some people have claimed that Jesus preached something resembling universalism, and you can interpret certain Gospel verses similarly. There may be a hint of that. However, regarding how Christendom interpreted Jesus’ teachings for centuries, universal human rights were never part of the equation.
That’s made clear by the fact that Christian churches fully accepted slavery. Slavery was not just tolerated—virtually all Christian denominations gave it explicit approval until the anti-slavery movement gained momentum in the 1700s.
So, for 1,700 years, the Christian Church not only failed to oppose slavery but, in many cases, actively justified and supported it. And it’s not just church history; biblical texts themselves reflect this.
Not so much in the words of Jesus, but in the Gospels and epistles, you see clear indications that slavery was accepted. For instance, some of Paul’s letters explicitly instruct enslaved people to obey their masters.
So, today, we recognize slavery as morally repugnant—certainly in light of universal human rights, as embodied in the UN Charter. But historically, Christianity did not lead the way in establishing those rights. Instead, it accommodated and even reinforced systems of oppression that modern human rights frameworks have had to dismantle.
That’s something that is regarded as morally repugnant. It’s highly immoral and impermissible. Again, to be fair, some of the sayings attributed to Jesus of Nazareth might hint at respect for humanity in general. However, the Enlightenment produced a well-developed theory of human rights as we understand it today.
The notion of human rights didn’t truly emerge until the late 1700s when people started writing about it systematically. With some exceptions—some of the Stoics talked about global rights—the human rights movement didn’t take shape until the 18th century as a broader movement, at least among the educated classes.
Jacobsen: What counterarguments do you usually encounter when making secular, skeptical, and humanistic arguments?
Lindsay: The most common one is easily refuted, but you hear it often.
And, usually not from well-educated people. It’s the idea that “If you don’t believe in God, then anything goes. If there’s no divine authority, people can do whatever they want.”
You’ll hear things like, “It’s all subjective. So if you say it’s okay to rape a child, then it’s okay, right?” Or, “If morality is subjective, then Jeffrey Dahmer eating someone is just his personal choice, and you can’t say it’s wrong.”
That conversation usually ends quickly. Among more sophisticated believers, the argument is more nuanced. They’ll often say, “There has to be some objective foundation for morality. We’re not saying atheists can’t be moral—we know they can—but they’re still relying on the moral heritage of Christianity or Judaism.”
A common analogy I’ve heard is that atheists are like people living in a house that Christianity built. They didn’t build the house but still got to live in it, even though they no longer acknowledged the source. This argument is framed in a more diplomatic and intellectually engaging way, as opposed to the outright hostility of those who claim, “You’re a horrible person if you don’t believe in God.”
But at the end of the day, it still comes down to the same assumption—that you need a deity to have an objective foundation for morality. The real foundation of morality is this: people need to ask, “What does morality do?” Because if morality doesn’t do something practical for us, why would we even have it? Morality serves a function. It helps societies thrive, regulates behaviour, and fosters cooperation.
It allows us to live together in peace, to foster cooperation, to foster trust, and to enable us to work together to improve our conditions. That’s really why we have all these moral rules—to enable us to progress together because progressing together makes things much easier.
We have to rely on each other, especially in a society with so much division of labor and specialization. And to rely on each other, we need trust. To have trust, we need to count on others—they will do what they say they will do.
I don’t have to worry about this person stealing from me or killing me, or what have you. So, morality’s objective basis is simple: it allows us to live together in peace and prosperity. You don’t need anything more objective than that.
Jacobsen: What about those who use religious ideology—like the Ten Commandments—as an ethical justification for completely abrogating authority and ignoring the secular law that everyone else abides by? The idea is, “It’s a law for thee, but not for me, because God is above all that, and I am merely a conduit and instrument of God. Therefore, I can justify my actions through that.”
Lindsay: Sure, and there are people like that. Fortunately, at least nowadays, in the West, that remains a minority viewpoint. But yes, some people do believe that “God’s law” prevails over secular law—whatever that secular law happens to be.
And obviously, we can’t tolerate that. The United States is a secular republic. Most Western democracies, even if they have religious traditions—Britain, for example, still has a monarchy that supposedly rules “by the divine grace of God”—are fundamentally secular.
Secular law has to govern. Because ultimately, what you’re saying when you claim divine authority is that someone can decide for themselves what the law is. If you’re invoking God, what you’re invoking is your idea of what is right and then attributing it to a deity. So, in reality, you’re just asking for an exception from the law for yourself.
You’re trying to make yourself a law unto yourself. For obvious reasons, we can’t tolerate that—not if we want to live together in a cohesive, prosperous, and cooperative society. We can’t have individuals deciding they can circumvent the law based on whatever they believe God or some figure whispered to them in their sleep.
Jacobsen: Ron, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it, and it’s nice to meet you.
Lindsay: Thanks. Thanks for inviting me. I enjoyed the conversation.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/08
Author Disclaimer
The views and opinions expressed in this article are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the official policy or position of any organization, institution, or entity with which the author may be affiliated, including Humanists International.
Sean Faircloth is an American attorney, author, and former politician known for his passionate advocacy of secularism, children’s rights, and social justice. Born in Bangor, Maine, Faircloth served five terms in the Maine Legislature, where he was elected Majority Whip and championed over 30 laws, including the impactful “Deadbeat Dad” child support law, later incorporated into federal legislation. As Executive Director of the Secular Coalition for America and Director of Strategy at the Richard Dawkins Foundation, Faircloth promoted church-state separation and greater acceptance of nontheistic perspectives. In 2012, Faircloth authored Attack of the Theocrats!, critiquing religious influence in politics, followed by The Enchanted Globe, a children’s book designed to teach geography through fantasy. Elected Mayor of Bangor in 2016, he launched EnergySmart Bangor to reduce energy costs and advance local climate efforts. His continued public speaking addresses the vital role of secularism in maintaining a fair and inclusive society.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How would you characterize the evolution of secular activism? Personally, the 2000s version of secular activism seems to differ in character rather than in intent in some distinct ways.
Sean Faircloth: I don’t claim expertise on this evolution. I can tell you my goal focuses on policy. I adamantly support the principle that government strictly separates religion and government as America’s founders intended and that this separation grow and be implemented worldwide.
Jacobsen: People change in their humanism over time. How has your experience and growth in life changed your approach to humanism?
Faircloth: I’ve recently finished Marcus Aurelius’ book. (I recommend the modern translation The Emperor’s Handbook by Hicks). While good old Marcus is not exactly a contemporary writer (maybe the first in the self-help genre!), his ideas persuade me. I prefer a completely evidence-based approach to life. This “good” emperor emphasized that there is no need for anger, even when anger is an understandable human reaction to a harm or injustice. Rather one must move toward positive action within oneself, even with people who you deem wrong or hostile. View them first as beings toward whom compassion is warranted. (Admittedly, this gets challenging with someone like Trump!)
Jacobsen: Championing 30+ laws in Maine, what ones have been the most impactful, and what can other states learn from this work? As always, it’s a local, community effort linked to global ideas. People watch.
Faircloth: Of my legislative work, the so-called Deadbeat Dad law had perhaps the biggest impact as that was replicated at a national level. I don’t like the term deadbeat dad law. It’s sounds angry. The law simply provides that if one could afford a snow mobile or pickup truck payment one could also afford to pay child support owed. And though it was generally men who ignored legally ordered child support, some women do this as well. The law contained a sanction that one could lose one’s license if someone was not paying court ordered child support which a judge had found you could afford to pay. Some opposed it saying, if the parent couldn’t drive because they lost their license, they’d not work and not be able to afford payments. In fact, this almost never happened. Because the court order was found to be affordable in the first place, they almost always paid up, kept their license, and the duly adjudicated support was paid. This was replicated at the federal level and put food on the table for many low income children.
Jacobsen: What did you learn as the Mayor of Bangor City, Maine?
Faircloth: I try to study current policy and find pragmatic mechanisms to change policy to help people. Voting yes or voting no is important in any elective office. More important to me is coming up with new ideas based on research then working through a process which inevitably involves tinkering and modification as this or that concern arise. At that time, the two policies was first an EnergySmart program, utilizing a small low-cost subsidy supplementing state funds, thus dramatically increased heat pump usage with relatively little taxpayer funds. Second, data indicates that immigrants start businesses at a higher rate than native born Americans, and are quite entrepreneurial. I started the Maine Multicultural Center focused on welcoming immigrants. Maine has an aging population. This program helps grow and diversify our economy.
Jacobsen: What was the feedback to Attack of the Theocrats?
Faircloth: Well, the religious right sure didn’t like it. I got called some names. Ha. Sadly, Trump, who’d I’d suggest has no fixed ideology. Trump is simply a grifter, happy to exploit any tool at hand. Many in the religious right like authoritarianism. Trump is happy to find common ground. As we have seen in too many instances to count these mega-ministers lecture one way and pocket big money from parishioners while having lots of sex outside marriage (a private matter were it not directly hypocritical), often exploiting the people who are not of age of consent. Trump is sympatico with Christian nationalists. The guys at the top pocket the money, do whatever they like sexually, and lecture everybody else. So my book provided facts, but the grift, sad to say, grows exponentially under Trump. Most religious people are good decent people. My concerns are policy based. You generally won’t find some Anglican, Unitarian-Universalist, or reform Jew engaging in “God says I get to live in a mansion.” But Trump and Christo-Nationalists are in on the same grift. Violence has become an increasingly accepted part of their “righteous” arsenal. The authoritarian grift I describe in my books is even more powerful today, with an even stronger thread of violence.
Jacobsen: What did you learn about the state of secularism in the United States as the Executive Director of the Secular Coalition of America? There is a profound and deep promise in some of the ideals of the United States with the separation of religion and government.
Faircloth: One can look optimistically at the cause of separation of church and state in that more and more Americans do not identify with religion and thus should be allied with groups like the UU’s, Reform Jews and so on. Sadly the religious groups withsecular values do not have sway with the soon-to-be most powerful person earth. The Christian nationalists like Trump because when you pull of the mask this is about money and power with no ethical constraints. They have their very strict “moral” laws – but those only apply to underlings who cough up the cash. The money (often illegally gained) and sex (sometimes illegally procured) are free flowing with those in the Trumpian power center. The non-religious and the ethical religious must find common cause and unite for basic decency. With Trump in power it is not going to be easy.
Jacobsen: Do support for gender equality–child support legislation–and environmentalism–EnergySmart Bangor program and a gold medal from Environment Maine–factor into the work for secularism, or are these separate agendas to you?
Faircloth: Every policy I’ve advocated must first be convincing to me as evidence-based with the goal of greater human flourishing. It would never cross my mind to say God requires women to forgo control of their own bodies. I commend the many religious people who share this view a secular policy view. I flat reject the premise that “here is an ancient [allegedly] god-given rule, therefore it is ethical and therefore moral law to be followed.” My life mission is to seek out changing my mind based on evidence.
Jacobsen: “Stop the Religious Right: Four Steps You Can Take” gives four ways to combat religious overreach. That was 12 years ago. What is the same or different in these steps, even the number of steps?
Faircloth: I’d like to see these same steps implemented. The non-religious must do so in alliance with the many religious groups who do not support the even more dastardly turn that the religious right working in collaboration with Trump seek to implement. Christo-fascism was simmering and growing twelve years ago. Sadly it’s chief enabler has helped it exponentially and is now coming to unprecedented power. The reality objectively is ominous. Courageous people must push back.
Jacobsen: Do you plan to retire, or is the work for activism a lifework for you?
Faircloth: For me life is getting results. I will work until my last functional day. Whether in starting the Maine Discovery Museum, in elective office, or in other cause-focused organizations, my goal is to be able to look myself in the eye and say, at least in some way, I’m working for a better world. And to quote a certain Beatle: “couldn’t get much worse.”
Jacobsen: What are your favorite humanism coda quotes?
Faircloth: “I rejoice in life for its own sake. Life is no ‘brief candle’ for me. It is a sort of splendid torch which I have got hold of for the moment, and I want to make it burn as brightly as possible before handing it on to future generations.” – George Bernard Shaw
And my own, ha!
“I’m a militant agnostic. I don’t know! — and you don’t either!” I’m proud of my continual willingness change my conclusions based on evidence. If I die and I wake in heaven to a box of chocolates and free pizza without ever getting fat, fine with me, but I expect no such thing. To me the only “reward” I expect is to, as best I can, continue to learn, change, evolve myself, evolve my mind, and become a better human while I’ve got this extremely brief opportunity to carry the human torch of enlightenment.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Sean.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/04
Bob Reuter, President of the Allianz vun Humanisten, Atheisten an Agnostiker Lëtzebuerg (AHA Luxembourg), talks about hosting the Humanists International 2025 conference and General Assembly in Luxembourg-City. Scheduled for July 5, 2025, the conference’s theme—“From Awareness to Action: Strengthening Open Societies Through Scientific Literacy”—reflects growing global concern over the rising spread of disinformation, populism, authoritarianism and anti-science obscurantism. Reuter emphasizes the role of humanist values and rational inquiry in sustaining democracy. Held at the Coque National Sports and Culture Centre, the conference location offers accessible public transport and opportunities for cultural exploration in and around the capital city. He’ll speak about the different topics addressed by different speakers during the conference and how AHA Luxembourg is trying to mitigate global inequity issues through local hosting options for international delegates facing financial barriers.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Bob Reuter, President of AHA Luxembourg.
The upcoming conference will be held from on July 5, 2025, at the Coque, the National Sports and Culture Centre in Luxembourg-City. It is being organized in collaboration with Humanists International and hosted locally by AHA Luxembourg. Let’s discuss some of the program details and the overarching theme, “From Awareness to Action: Strengthening Open Societies Through Scientific Literacy.”
What other themes were considered, and why was this chosen?
Bob Reuter: I have had the idea of hosting the international conference and the General Assembly of Humanists International in Luxembourg for several years. Since I became president in February 2019, this specific topic—scientific literacy—has been on my mind as a theme to address via our actions as a humanist organization. I do believe that advancing public understanding of science is a critical mission for humanist organizations worldwide.
The purpose is not just to critique religion or advocate for compassion—although part of our work—but to embed rational thinking and empirical science into everyday life. As a scientist, I’ve always been interested in how knowledge is generated, what we can honestly know, and how we know it. In that sense, this theme felt inevitable and necessary. We did not seriously entertain alternative themes.
When I submitted the proposal to host the conference, I envisioned a connection between open societies, democracy, and scientific literacy. What I could not have anticipated was just how timely this would become. In the years leading up to 2025, we have seen growing threats from authoritarian regimes and populist movements that seek to discredit experts and marginalize academic institutions and the very project of Enlightenment.
When a government attempts to establish a theocracy or an authoritarian state and labels professors and scientists as enemies of the nation, it directly opposes everything modern democratic and humanist traditions represent—reason, evidence, rule of law, democratic gouvernance, empathy, and solidarity. This conflict has deep historical roots, but we primarily draw on the legacy of the Enlightenment and the French Revolution, which advanced these values in Europe. Of course, similar principles have emerged independently in other cultures, but this is the intellectual lineage most familiar to us in contemporary Western humanism.
Jacobsen: Who are some notable Luxembourgish humanists in the country’s history?
Reuter: That’s a difficult question. Luxembourg has long been considered a predominantly Catholic country, and secularism has only begun to gain broader visibility in recent decades. Due to cultural and political pressures, the history of atheists, freethinkers, and humanists in Luxembourg has largely remained obscure.
This does not mean there were no humanists or secular thinkers. Much like in the United States, until recently, if someone wanted to pursue a respected public career—especially in politics—they often needed to align themselves publicly with religion, as it was associated with morality and social cohesion.
Some influential Luxembourgers may have been privately nonreligious, but few were open. That said, I know from personal family records that my great-great-grandfather was openly nonreligious. We’ve documented this in our family’s oral and written history. So, even if they were not widely known or celebrated, secular thinkers were very much part of Luxembourg’s intellectual and cultural landscape. I wouldn’t say that he was famous—I am not trying to claim that—but I want to emphasize that around 1920 in Luxembourg, there were already openly nonreligious individuals. In recent history, we have seen at least a few intellectuals—often high school professors—openly committed to humanistic values.
Jacobsen: Can you name one?
Reuter: I could name Nelly Moya, a woman who recently passed away. She was a freethinker in the best sense of the word. She taught philosophy, ethics, arts and languages and encouraged her students to think critically and challenge assumptions.
Although I didn’t have her as a teacher, we recently produced a radio program about her life, featuring someone who had been her student and later became a close friend and co-advocate for feminism in Luxembourg.
Many people in Luxembourg have lived according to humanist values, even if they are more widely remembered in history books for their contributions to workers’ rights, women’s rights, and other social causes. So yes, they are often more recognized for those battles than for explicitly identifying as humanists.
AHA Luxembourg was only recently founded in 2010. Before that, Luxembourg had associations that focused more broadly on freedom of conscience, freedom of thought and secularism rather than on humanism as a life-stance.
Jacobsen: At the upcoming international humanist conference, Clemens Lintschinger will argue that science strengthens democracy. Christian Meyers will examine how anti-science and anti-democracy are interconnected. Monica Belițoiu will present a science-themed calendar. Leo Igwe will highlight witch-hunting in Africa. Sudesh Ghoderao will outline educator training and student programs in India. Hanna Siemaszko will explore podcasting for science communication. Ann Kiefer will showcase Science Slams as a way to transform research into engaging public presentations. Dennis Fink will promote hands-on science through interactive exhibits. Louis Krieger will introduce Scienteens Lab’s experiential approach to science education. Boris van der Ham will present Human for All Seasons. and Michèle Weber will emphasize fostering scientific literacy.
Reuter: Yes, Monica was actually first confirmed keynote speaker and we were very happy to count her among our speakers.
But, let me briefly explain the program’s structure. The conference is titled “From Awareness to Action,” and it is divided into two main parts.
The first part will focus on awareness—essentially, the problems regarding science, democracy, and the rival ideologies and forces they face today. The second part will focus on action—what people are doing locally and internationally to promote scientific thinking, democratic values, and rational inquiry.
Monica’s contribution is part of that second section. She will speak about efforts to spark curiosity and foster a love of science in children, primarily through tools that combat pseudoscience and promote evidence-based thinking from a young age. I’ve personally supported their Scientific Calendar Project. It’s an excellent idea—transforming what is typically a religious calendar (a common feature in many Romanian homes) into a secular educational tool. Instead of listing saints, their calendar highlights scientific discoveries, figures, and concepts—something people can reflect on daily.
Last year, the calendar focused on female scientists, a much-needed topic often receiving too little attention in standard science education.
Jacobsen: What about accommodations? Why was the Coque National Sports and Culture Centre chosen as the venue?
Reuter: We considered other venues as well. One was the Abbaye de Neumünster, which is also in Luxembourg-City. So, a former abbey—Abbaye de Neumünster—has been converted into a cultural and meeting space. We have a shared history with this place in that some of the first events organized by AHA Lëtzebuerg were held there. It’s a lovely venue located just outside the old city center of Luxembourg-City.
However, it was not available. Another location we considered was the Maison du Savoir, where the University of Luxembourg is located, in Esch-Belval, in the south of Luxembourg. The campus is part of the Cité des Sciences (City of Science), which would have been a fitting venue for a conference on strengthening open societies through scientific literacy.
Unfortunately, on that same weekend, a major music and light show festival is being held on campus. That means that all the hotels, restaurants, and public spaces in the area would be fully occupied by festival goers, so that location was ruled out.
In the end, we were deciding between a city cultural center and the Coque National Sports and Culture Centre. We chose Coque because it offered the most suitable facilities in terms of size, accessibility, and the infrastructure needed for an international conference. It’s a modern, well-equipped, centrally located venue—ideal for welcoming participants from across Europe and beyond. And it’s very accessible, being located on the Kirchberg Plateau, just outside the old town, close to the airport, near the motorway, and easily reachable from the central train station via tram. In fact, the tram now runs directly from the airport through Kirchberg and into the city center.
By the way, public transport in Luxembourg is free nationwide, which makes things even easier for conference participants.
I was already familiar with Coque’s auditorium, which is a beautiful, fully equipped space with excellent multimedia facilities. Compared to other venues, it’s essentially plug-and-play—they have a full-time technician on site, which saves us from having to rent and install separate equipment. They also provide on-site catering.
As a fun bonus, the center includes Luxembourg’s largest swimming pool, a 50-meter Olympic-sized pool. So, if people want to swim after the sessions, they can. I remember hearing about a similar thing in Iceland’s Blue Lagoon—people would attend a conference, get a little drunk, float in the water, and wake up on the other side of the lagoon. [laughs]
Jacobsen: That’s a great detail. Also, for our international audience, “Coque” does not mean what many English speakers might assume.
Reuter: Yes, I’ve heard international guests joke about the name! But “Coque” is the French word for “shell”. Seashells inspired the design of the building—you can see that in the architecture. For instance, one of the building’s entrances has a distinctive round roof resembling a mollusk shell. The swimming pool and the other structures are designed as interlocking shell shapes. That’s the inspiration behind the name.
Jacobsen: What are you expecting in terms of attendance this year?
Reuter: Well, we’re still in the process of selling tickets. So far, things look promising, with 75 tickets sold, so we have not yet reached our cap of 200 participants. We do still have room. We have informed our members but haven’t done a full national publicity push yet. In the coming weeks, we’ll do more outreach here in Luxembourg. Up to now, our promotion has focused mainly on the Humanists International audience.
Jacobsen: That looks positive. I mean, I’m going myself, and I still bought my own ticket! I’m still waiting on sponsorship—for example, to cover my flight from Iceland, accommodation, and related travel expenses.
Reuter: Gary McLelland and Javan Lev Poblador from Humanists International have told me that delegates coming from the Global South or from further afield need to buy their tickets first because they must apply for visas early.
Jacobsen: That makes sense—visa applications can take a long time.
Reuter: They know that, and we can only issue an official invitation letter after they’ve registered and paid for their tickets. That’s part of the administrative requirement.
Jacobsen: This raises concerns about global equity, right? Some people—often from Western countries—can travel freely, while others face intense scrutiny, paperwork, and financial obstacles.
Reuter: Absolutely. It’s a long-standing issue. The barriers are financial, cultural and institutional—visa restrictions, documentation, etc. Many people want to attend, but systemic inequalities make it difficult.
Jacobsen: So, what have you been doing to address those access issues?
Reuter: At our recently held General Assembly, one of our members suggested we should contact our community to see if local members could host international delegates in their homes. I thought that was a great idea, and this morning, I emailed all 800 members of our association, asking them to offer spare rooms if they can. Hopefully, this can lower financial barriers and make it easier for participants from lower-income countries to come to Luxembourg.
Jacobsen: That’s a generous and thoughtful gesture. Also, for context, people may not realize that Luxembourg is one of the wealthiest countries in the world when measured by purchasing power parity (PPP)—alongside countries like Qatar and Singapore.
Reuter: So, people should be realistic about costs. The most significant expense here is accommodation. It is not easy to find anything below €100 per night for a single room; more commonly, you’ll be paying €150 or more.
Jacobsen: And the food?
Reuter: Food is not cheap either. But for the conference and the General Assembly, we’ll offer subsidized meals. Attendees won’t be paying the full cost of the food, especially for the Gala Dinner, which will be included in the full package at a reduced rate.
Otherwise, meals can easily cost €15–20 for breakfast at a hotel and more for lunch or dinner in a restaurant.
Jacobsen: Is there anything that is not expensive?
Reuter: Yes! Public transportation in Luxembourg is entirely free—nationwide. That includes buses, trains, and trams. The only exception is first-class train compartments marked clearly and have different-coloured seats. If you avoid those, you can travel for free in second class as much as you like. It’s a great benefit for visitors.
Jacobsen: That’s worth highlighting. And for those who want to stay a little longer—are there things to see or do in Luxembourg?
Reuter: Yes. Luxembourg has a lot to offer—UNESCO World Heritage sites, beautiful old fortifications, modern museums, and easy access to nature trails, even within the city. The Müllerthal region, for example, is like a little Switzerland. And since the country is small, you can get anywhere in about an hour using public transport. Perfect for a few days of exploration before or after the conference.
Jacobsen: That’s excellent. We’ll have to wrap up here, but the complete list of speakers and all relevant details about the conference are available on the official event website.
Reuter: Yes. Everything is listed online, and we’re happy to welcome participants from all over the world.
Jacobsen: People should know that if you’re coming to Luxembourg, food and hotels will cost a bit—but public transportation is free, folks. So pair up if you can. Share a hotel room. Bunk up. Now, let’s say people have a free morning or do not plan to attend every session. They may arrive early or stay a few days after the conference. What can they do while they’re in Luxembourg?
Reuter: The first and easiest thing is to explore Luxembourg City. It’s quite old—the city was founded before 1000—and has a rich historical center. You can visit the Old Town, a UNESCO World Heritage Site, and one of the highlights is the underground casemates, a system of tunnels built into the rock under the city.
These tunnels help explain why Luxembourg was once one of the most sought-after fortresses in Europe. Because of its geography and fortifications, it was considered virtually impregnable, which made it strategically important for various European powers over the centuries.
Jacobsen: You almost get this medieval, “fantasy realm” vibe when you hear the word fortress-like something from The Lord of the Rings. “The Realm of Luxembourg at the Fortress!”
Reuter: [Laughing] It sounds a bit like that! But it’s not fantasy—it was all genuine: war, politics, and power. In the Middle Ages and even later, control over Luxembourg meant influence over broader regions of Europe.
Logistically, it’s simple: You can take the tram from the conference venue at Kirchberg straight into the city center to explore these historic areas.
If you want to venture outside the city, you can head north into the more rural regions of the country. One of the most beautiful areas is the Müllerthal, called “Little Switzerland.” It features sandstone caves, wooded trails, and narrow valleys—ideal for hiking. It’s delightful if the weather is hot because it stays cooler in the shaded forests.
Jacobsen: That sounds like a great escape into nature.
Reuter: Absolutely. And if you have more time, you can take advantage of Luxembourg’s location at the crossroads of France, Germany, and Belgium. There are direct train connections to:
- Trier is one of the oldest cities in Germany and is known for its Roman ruins.
- Metz or Nancy is in northeastern France, which has beautiful architecture and cultural attractions.
- Arlon is just over the border in Belgium, a quiet town that’s easy to reach.
Jacobsen: And food—what can people expect regarding local cuisine?
Reuter: Luxembourg is a multicultural and multilingual country, reflected in the food scene. We host many different nationalities, which shows up in the various restaurants and culinary options available.
For example, one of the most commonly consumed cuisines today is Italian, which stems from the first significant immigration wave in the early 20th century—when many Italians moved here to work in the steel industry. You’ll also find a lot of Portuguese food, Mexican, Indian, Nepalese, and, of course, French cuisine, which has strongly influenced Luxembourg’s culinary culture.
There’s also quite a bit of fusion cuisine, where people blend traditional and modern influences to create something entirely new.
Of course, there’s traditional Luxembourgish food, which historically has been very potato—and meat-based. These dishes have become more refined over the years. One traditional item, for example, is “Gromperekichelcher”, a potato fritter—grated potatoes mixed with eggs and flour, then baked or fried into patties. It’s a bit like a vegetarian burger but made from simple, rustic ingredients.
Jacobsen: For those on a tight budget, would grocery shopping be a practical option beyond sharing hotel rooms or staying in hostels?
Reuter: I would have recommended the youth hostel in Luxembourg City, which is centrally located and competitively priced—but unfortunately, it’s already fully booked.
So, if someone wants to go the hostel route, I’d suggest checking Youth Hostels. lu for hostels slightly outside the city. As long as you’re near a train station, it’s no problem—all public transportation in Luxembourg is free, including trains.
Also, at least in the hotel where we’ve arranged a discount, double rooms are only €20 more than single rooms. So, if you’re comfortable sharing, it’s a good way to cut costs. Of course, it depends on who you’re sharing it with!
Jacobsen: Right, it all depends on compatibility.
Reuter: To help lower barriers even further, we recently asked our members if they’d be willing to host international delegates. I’m still waiting for more responses.
One former colleague of mine—also a member—wrote back and said he would have hosted a few people at his large house. But he’ll be abroad that weekend, and understandably, he’s uncomfortable offering his home to people he doesn’t know while away. He would’ve done it gladly if he were in town.
So yes, we’re still collecting responses. If we get enough volunteer hosts, we will list those free accommodation options on the conference website’s recommendations page.
Jacobsen: What about some cultural nuances? Are there any faux pas that travellers should know in Luxembourgish culture? Is the range of offence wide or narrow?
Reuter: That’s a great question—and actually, the fact that it’s hard to think of a clear answer already tells you something. In Luxembourg, there are few strict cultural faux pas. We’re used to intercultural interactions, so cultural misunderstandings are common—and mostly forgiven.
When I was a child, a typical Luxembourgish saying was: “Do as people do, and you will be treated as people are treated.” It reflected a confident conformist attitude and a pressure to blend in. At that time, being openly nonreligious or vegetarian, for instance, would have made someone stand out. But this has changed dramatically over the past few decades.
Today, people in Luxembourg are used to switching between cultural repertoires in terms of language and behaviour. For example, I rarely hug or kiss in professional settings with German colleagues. However, with French or Belgian colleagues, not greeting with one, two, or even three kisses—even between men—might be seen as impolite. We navigate these nuances on a case-by-case basis, and there’s a high understanding of cultural differences.
Jacobsen: That’s insightful. Beyond etiquette, some attendees may want to understand Luxembourg’s cultural evolution—especially around religion. You mentioned earlier that religion used to dominate. What does that look like today?
Reuter: Yes—today, much less so. Luxembourg’s current situation is closer to Canada’s than Iceland’s or the UK’s.
The legacy of Catholicism still lingers, especially in the national narrative. There’s often a default assumption that Christianity—specifically Roman Catholicism—is the cultural norm, especially in traditional settings. However, this assumption is no longer representative of what most people believe.
We recently conducted a nationally representative survey in Luxembourg, asking people about their beliefs and values. The results showed that the population largely aligns with humanist values rather than traditional religious ones. This trend was likely already present thirty years ago but was less visible in public discourse then.
Jacobsen: So if religion no longer dominates, what is today’s prevailing ideology or influence?
Reuter: Honestly, it’s probably neoliberalism. While Luxembourg may not be “rich” in a Scandinavian egalitarian sense, it is a country that is proud of its wealth and actively works to attract banks, insurance companies, industries, and international corporations.
We provide these entities with a multicultural, multilingual, and highly skilled environment. That economic orientation—combined with global finance and international institutions—has shaped a new kind of national identity that is pragmatic, market-oriented, and very much focused on maintaining competitiveness.
We also draw much of our workforce from the Greater Region—a cross-border economic area surrounding Luxembourg. This includes parts of Belgium, France, and Germany—forming a radius of about 200 kilometres around Luxembourg City. People commute daily across borders for work, especially into the capital.
Jacobsen: It’s an old city—what’s the oldest part?
Reuter: The oldest part dates back to the 10th century, around 963 CE. That’s when Count Siegfried, often called the Duke of Luxembourg in legend, acquired a rocky promontory called Lucilinburhuc and founded what would become Luxembourg City. From that fortress, the town grew into what it is today.
Luxembourg is still relatively small compared to other European capitals but has expanded well beyond its medieval boundaries. On modern maps, you can still see the outline of the old fortress—the ring road or boulevard where today’s cars, trams, and buses run marks where the city walls once stood.
Jacobsen: How has the country’s economy evolved?
Reuter: Luxembourg was primarily an agricultural country until the early 20th century. Then, with the rise of the steel industry, it became industrial. That lasted until around the 1970s–1980s, when steel production declined—largely because local iron ore reserves were depleted. Some facilities were moved to Brazil and China, but the core company—what is now ArcelorMittal, after several mergers—still has its headquarters in Luxembourg and operates globally in metals and manufacturing.
After the decline of heavy industry, Luxembourg transitioned into a service-based economy; today, it’s a global hub for finance, insurance, and digital services.
Jacobsen: What are Luxembourg’s main imports and exports?
Reuter: That’s a complex question. We likely import more than we export, especially in terms of goods. Like much of Europe, we import significantly from China, particularly electronics and consumer goods—things often designed in California but manufactured in Asia.
Interestingly, Apple has its European headquarters for iTunes in Luxembourg. So, on paper, we may “export” music or digital content—but this content is not produced here. It’s just registered through Luxembourg for tax and legal reasons, which is part of the country’s role in global digital infrastructure.
On the export side, one curious example is wood. A lot of Luxembourgish and European timber is exported to China. This is partly logistical—cargo ships bringing electronics from China cannot return empty, so they’re often filled with wood on the return trip. Ironically, it would make more economic sense to turn that wood into furniture locally—adding value here—but that’s a typical story in global capitalism.
Jacobsen: What advice would you offer to humanist organizations elsewhere in the world that might want to host a General Assembly and international conference in their city?
Reuter: My first piece of advice is to submit a proposal to Humanists International expressing your interest in hosting. They will provide detailed information about the conditions you need to meet—logistical, financial, and otherwise.
Then—perhaps most importantly—secure a venue early on. That was the most challenging part for us. You need a space that is large enough, well-equipped, accessible, and, crucially, affordable.
So yes, you need to find a venue with enough capacity, available, and ideally affordable because, as I mentioned earlier, other locations I had hoped for weren’t available even a year in advance. That kind of timeline isn’t always sufficient for popular venues.
Of course, you should begin reaching out to speakers—those you want to recruit for the international conference. You should also stay in close contact with the Humanists International team. They are the professionals; they’ve been through multiple iterations of this type of event and know what’s required.
Jacobsen: Thanks again, Bob. Talk soon.
Reuter: Thank you. Take care.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/04
Adrián Núñez talks about the growing authoritarianism in Peru, the attack on civil associations, and the erosion of secularism. Núñez describes government interference through APCI laws, the Catholic Church’s privileged status, and the threats faced by indigenous communities. He highlights systemic corruption, organized crime, and weakened human rights protections. Despite setbacks, Peruvian humanists continue advocating for secularism and future reforms. They recently launched a documentary promoting secular values. Núñez stresses that humanism must adapt to local contexts, focusing on immediate survival issues while preserving long-term principles like freedom, evidence-based policy, and separation of church and state.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Adrián Núñez. So, what is new? What is happening in your corner of the humanist world?
Adrián Núñez: We are somewhat afraid of the government, especially regarding our Association. Right now, Peru has an increasingly authoritarian government. It is not so much the President herself but Congress that is in control. Congress is dominated by a coalition of conservative parties that have taken over different government institutions. They want to consolidate total control, but so far, they have not been able to capture the judiciary — at least not yet.
The problem is that they are attacking civil associations like ours. For example, they modified the law that regulates APCI — the Agencia Peruana de Cooperación Internacional (Peruvian Agency for International Cooperation). This agency oversees foreign funding for NGOs and associations.
We are not yet registered with APCI, but they could force us to register under the new law. If we are forced to register, they can review and censor our activities. We would have to report what we plan to do with foreign funds, and they could block projects they disapprove of. For example, if we wanted to defend someone attacked by the church or the state, the government could stop us. So, for now, we are holding off until this law is either challenged or better defined.
This is a significant concern for us.
At the same time, a group of associations (including our association), journalists, victims and others have been fighting against a powerful conservative Catholic institution, the Sodalitium Christianae Vitae (Sodalitium of Christian Life). This organization has been implicated in numerous cases of sexual, physical, and psychological abuse in Peru.
Thanks to pressure from journalists, survivors, and activists, the Vatican — under Pope Francis — took action. The Vatican intervened and, after several investigations, essentially dismantled the leadership of the Sodalitium. The organization has been formally dissolved but they preserve, through third parties and trusts, companies and assets that continue to generate income and power for them. It was a hard fight, but it represents a significant, medium-sized victory for us.
Now, the victims are seeking legal and moral justice — not just religious acknowledgment, but actual prosecution of the abusers and financial compensation for damages. Many of the accused within the Sodalitium had close ties to organized crime, including groups involved in violent land seizures in northern Peru.
That is a glimpse into some of the harsh realities here — real “Latin American” problems.
Jacobsen: For our international audience, there is also “Rolexgate.” President Dina Boluarte is under investigation after being seen wearing luxury watches, including Rolexes. At the same time, she declared that her salary could not explain such expenses. Investigations revealed that between 2016 and 2022, she had unexplained cash deposits totalling around 1.1 million soles (about USD 300,000).
In March 2024, police raided both her private residence and the Government Palace. Although several motions have been filed in Congress to remove her for “moral incapacity,” Congress has not proceeded with impeachment.
Jacobsen: Approval ratings for Boluarte’s administration have plummeted, with some indicating only 3% public support. In more recent news, on April 15, former President Ollanta Humala and his wife Nadine Heredia were each sentenced to fifteen years in prison for money laundering related to illicit campaign funds from the Brazilian construction company Odebrecht. This marks a significant chapter in the ongoing Lava Jato corruption scandal involving numerous Latin American leaders.
Also, former President Pedro Castillo was on trial for rebellion following his attempt to dissolve Congress in December 2022. Around March 2025, Castillo initiated a hunger strike, which ended after he was hospitalized.
On those major issues — what is the humanist response to these presidential-level scandals?
Núñez: The good thing is that we can at least jail the powerful. That is funny — we can still prosecute people in power.
However, it shows the deep, systemic corruption within our institutions. There are differences between these leaders. Pedro Castillo, the last elected President, tried to stage a coup — live on television — but it was completely disorganized. He did not coordinate with the military or anyone else. Perhaps it was the most ridiculous coup attempt in our history because it was ineffective. He tried to flee to Mexico but was captured at a traffic stop in Lima.
Now, Castillo is jailed during his legal proceedings.
When Castillo fell, his second vice president, Dina Boluarte, took over the presidency.
The thing is, Dina Boluarte has proven to be highly incompetent. She even confessed on television to crimes, which is remarkable. Here in Peru, it is illegal for public officials to receive or even temporarily possess expensive gifts — like Rolex watches — whether or not they are owned outright. Even loans or temporary use of luxury items are considered illegal.
Boluarte confessed to having received these goods as a loan (trying to say that they were not payments), yet nothing happened because she and Congress are defending each other. In reality, she is a puppet of Congress, which effectively controls everything right now.
The common link among all these figures is their conservative worldview. Most of them are deeply aligned with the most conservative sectors of society and work closely with different Christian denominations and powerful religious institutions. This does not mean that the rulers are necessarily conservative at heart. Since Fujimori’s first election, in 1990, I see candidates turning to and making pacts with some churches to get votes. Since then we have seen that some religious sectors that did not participate in politics before started to send candidates. This, I think, has contributed to Peru’s alignment with the polarising and binary tendency of other countries on the continent.
So, the problem is not only corrupt individuals elected to Congress or the presidency. It is also about a large, entrenched conservative power structure in Peru. Or at least, with a conservative discourse.
Jacobsen: Two things. There has been a growing, though still limited, conversation in the international humanist community. The latest Amsterdam Declaration — the third one — touched on themes like indigenous rights, historical representation, and the evolution of humanism as a codified institutional force.
Of course, humanism has appeared in different forms across many cultures and times throughout history. So, two topics: one on the environment and one on indigenous rights. Those two things—environmental protection and indigenous rights—often go together in many countries.
Recently, Peru amended its Forestry and Wildlife Law, eliminating the requirement for state authorization before converting forested land, effectively legalizing past illegal deforestation. Environmentalists and indigenous groups argue that this threatens the Amazon rainforest and undermines indigenous rights, particularly because there was insufficient consultation with indigenous communities before the amendment was passed.
Second, as you mentioned at the outset of the interview, new restrictions have been imposed on NGOs and human rights advocacy—two more central aspects of humanist advocacy.
In March 2025, Peru enacted a law restricting NGOs from initiating legal actions against the state for human rights violations. In other words, by law, human rights advocacy organizations are now prevented from effectively pressuring the government. This nullifies much of the purpose of human rights organizations in Peru—they are supposed to serve as mediators, informers, and watchdogs for governmental actions.
What has been the conversation within the humanist community in Peru on these two topics—environmental and indigenous rights and restrictions on human rights advocacy?
Núñez: Regarding indigenous people, especially in areas like the Amazon, they are often the ones defending the land against illegal exploitation — such as illegal mining and illegal deforestation. For years now, indigenous defenders have been killed by mafias involved in these illicit activities. The government is unable, or unwilling, to protect them, so these communities have had to defend themselves.
There is a local vigilance system because official authorities often refuse to intervene. Moreover, some of these mafias are directly linked to members of Congress. Certain political parties have financial ties to illegal mining companies, so internal lobbying within Congress protects these activities. Congress is actively promoting laws favouring these mafias and weakening land protections. The most serious issue regarding indigenous rights is the fight over land and survival.
As for NGOs, here in Peru, we do not have the term “NGO” as a type of legal entity. The term NGO is a creation of the UN and in Peru if you want to register an NGO you have to choose one of the two options that are adapted to our civil code: association or foundation.
Some associations must register with APCI—the Agencia Peruana de Cooperación Internacional(Peruvian Agency for International Cooperation)—. For example, those dedicated to development or those that receive funds from international cooperation for education or assistance. Right now the government has just enacted a law modifying the role of the APCI that allows it to censor and fine registered associations.
A 2007 ruling of the Constitutional Court indicates that it is not mandatory for an association to register with APCI, and this saves some associations like ours for the moment, but the Constitutional Court is also functional to the government coalition and someone could go to this tribunal to reverse this ruling.
Because of the new law, and because the President is now the only person who can appoint the head of APCI, you cannot effectively go against the President or the government if they commit abuses or crimes—that is our reality now.
There are several propaganda outlets on television, paper and in online media. Because of this, many people, even those we once considered freethinkers or skeptics, believe all the misinformation. They are trapped inside that ideological bubble now. One of the slogans of these media is that NGOs are evil, destructive institutions that want to ideologize us or that come with a perverse agenda.
It is very similar to what you see in the United States: large propaganda media outlets and many people are conditioned to believe whatever they are told.
Jacobsen: Societies create many myths about themselves and each other. For example, many might be surprised to learn that the United States is the only country in the world that has not ratified the Convention on the Rights of the Child.
It is the most widely ratified human rights document globally. The U.S. signed it over thirty years ago, on February 16, 1995, but has never ratified it. Somalia was the second-to-last country to sign, and they completed ratification in 2015. So now, the U.S. stands completely alone.
Another example: Americans often point to child marriage as a significant issue in Saudi Arabia. That is fair. However, if they looked internally, they would find that the United States has more instances of child marriage than Saudi Arabia.
These are essential contexts to remember. I had another question regarding extortion and the rise of organized crime.
In the early 2000s, a famous case was about North American rapper Eminem (Marshall Mathers). In that period, he was allegedly being extorted by members of the Crips, one of the most prominent gangs in Los Angeles. His manager enlisted the Boo-Yaa T.R.I.B.E., a Samoan-American hip-hop group, for protection. It worked — people were genuinely terrified of the Boo-Yaa T.R.I.B.E. Of course, not everyone has the fame, money, or foresight to enlist such protection.
Now, shifting back to Peru, there has been a noticeable rise in organized crime here as well. Extortion cases allegedly reached over 17,000 in the first ten months of 2024. Some of these criminal networks have ties to Colombia and Venezuela. They are targeting sectors like transportation, education, and others.
Despite military patrols, authorities are struggling to contain the violence. From a humanist perspective, what concerns do you have regarding human rights violations related to this wave of organized crime? You do not have to comment on the Eminem story — I thought it was remarkable.
Núñez: This situation is partly due to the lack of evidence-based policies. In the past, we had a competent division within the police dedicated to intelligence work. They were very practical—they quietly captured gangs, dismantled two terrorist organizations, found fugitives from justice, confiscated weapons, and disrupted criminal activity.
However, that unit has not been renewed or strengthened over the last ten years. So now, in practice we have no operational intelligence division. That is one of the root causes behind the spread of organized crime.
Another factor is that this is not just a Peruvian phenomenon but regional across Latin America. However, in Peru, specific political decisions made the situation worse.
For instance, Congress deactivated a law that allowed police to detain a person suspected of committing a crime for a few days while conducting an investigation. Usually, under suspicion of committing a crime, you could be held temporarily at a police station to determine whether to proceed with formal charges.
Crime surged when Congress suspended that detention authority for three months or more. Police could no longer take preventive action. That legislative change benefited certain Congress and government individuals who did not want to risk detention.
Another example is if the police or prosecutor suspect you are connected to a criminal gang. Previously, with a court order, they could enter your home or office and investigate without warning (this is how they found one of the Rolex certificates in the house of Boluarte). Because of recent legal reforms, the police must inform the suspect beforehand—they have to call and announce that they are coming, and the suspect must have their lawyer present.
It is absurd. It completely undermines investigations. In practice, this change actively encouraged the growth of organized crime.
Another aspect is that violent crime is relatively new to us. Crime itself is not new — you could be robbed or mugged in the past — but assassinations were rare. Now, targeted killings are happening more frequently. That is a new and alarming development for Peru.
Jacobsen: We have discussed legislative advocacy and civil rights issues. We have also discussed how many of these social problems are rooted in the absence of evidence-based policy and law. A Nigerian humanist once pointed out that freedom of expression and speech are essential — but only after basic survival needs are met.
In some African contexts, safety is more critical than free speech. When survival is not guaranteed, safety becomes the immediate and primary concern, while freedom of expression becomes secondary. That is what I mean by contextual rank ordering of values.
This Nigerian humanist emphasized, “Of course, freedom of speech matters, but in our situation, safety and well-being come first.” The constellation of humanist values varies by context, but I do not think it changes—it is about how they are prioritized in different circumstances.
If someone already has safety, healthcare, a sound education system, a relatively rational political system, evidence-based policies, and civil discourse, their concerns naturally shift toward more abstract ideas—the development and ethical implementation of technology, for example.
At that point, your focus might resemble the vision in Isaac Asimov’s science fiction—technology-driven societies focused on exploration, innovation, and advanced rights. But it always depends on the context.
Núñez: Yes, absolutely. It is entirely valid.
You must first worry about the most immediate and serious issues. Older problems—survival and basic rights—must come first. Future problems can come later. This is perfectly valid. As you said, the important thing is that humanism should be open and broad enough to allow for different focuses in different parts of the world.
It is like this: if you are persecuted for being a witch in your country, you must focus on that specific problem. You cannot prioritize distant or abstract concerns when your immediate safety and rights are threatened.
Jacobsen: There is an old saying about gangsters in the United States: the first rule of a gangster is silence. The joke is that there is no such thing as authentic gangster rap because if you were a real gangster, you would not talk so much.
More seriously, if being accused of witchcraft can lead your own family to throw battery acid on you or your community to murder you — as happens in some African contexts — then silence becomes primary. Freedom of expression takes a backseat because survival becomes the overriding concern.
It is always about applying values within context. Flexibility is a strength of humanism—it has adaptability built into it. But it requires mindfulness of context.
Núñez: Yes, it is an intersectionality issue, in a sense.
Jacobsen: Right — whether people want to say “intersectionality” or “cross-section” or just “relating ideas,” the principle remains the same. If someone has a problem with the word, use a different word. All right, what would you like to plug?
Núñez: I would say the focus for us right now — for the Peruvian Association of Atheists — is on secularism. Right now, achieving a truly secular state is practically impossible. But we must think of the future by taking small steps on a constant basis.
We are launching a documentary about secularism in Peru in a few days. It will cover almost everything—the historical background, current issues, and future challenges.
It is critical for people to understand the real dangers of not having a secular state and to recognize how the church, allied with the government, abuses its privileges. That is the primary focus for us right now. I want to put a strong emphasis on it.
Jacobsen: That reminds me of the Romanian humanist Remus Cernea. He ran for public office—for Parliament and even for President—and became a serious obstacle to those trying to violate church-state separation.
He resisted efforts to give public lands to churches and challenged Christian dominance in over 90% of religious society. Peru, as far as I know, is similarly highly religious. Could Peruvian atheists, humanists, or even transhumanists run for office and take up that fight?
Núñez: We had some allies in Congress a few years ago. We probably have one or two legislators today who are on our side. — but that is almost nothing out of 130 members.
For example, one of our allies promised to pass a constitutional amendment declaring Peru a secular state. Right now, the Constitution only vaguely says that Peru recognizes the “importance” of the Catholic Church in its history. It does not separate church and state.
But passing that amendment was impossible because of Congress’s structure — too much corruption and entrenched interests. One or two people alone cannot fight against a mafia-like structure. So, for now, we have almost no chance.
We are coordinating with different secular groups—like feminist associations and progressive Christian denominations that also want a secular state—but the consensus is that we cannot make real progress until the government changes. We may have to wait until after the mid-2026 elections.
Jacobsen: Fair enough. Adrián, thank you as always.
Núñez: Cool, yes. Excellent. Thank you.
Jacobsen: Thank you. Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/04/27
Humanists International in Denmark
Humanists International hosted its 2023 combined World Congress and General Assembly in Copenhagen, Denmark, at the Scandic Copenhagen in early August. It was the first World Congress in almost a decade. A large gathering of hundreds of leaders within the humanist movement. At one point in the General Assembly, a proposal was made for a paper to make a specific statement on the war in Ukraine. A significant reference in the debate – highly respectful, by the way – between delegates from different countries’ Freethought organizations was the previous resolution accepted as a policy of Humanists International with Russia’s early full-scale invasion of Ukraine: February 24, 2022. The main point of contention was whether or not a new policy on the Russo-Ukrainian war was necessary because one existed from June 2022. The new one did not pass. The point of this article is both the acceptance or lack of the resolution and the debate and the previous policy emphasizing an update. A summary of the policy and its related contents will be provided.
Humanists International on the Russo-Ukrainian War
In a binational wartime scenario, it is an intriguing and subtle idea regarding wartime circumstances and rapid changes – say half a year to two years. The 2022 resolution, now policy, is entitled “Position Statement on Russian invasion of Ukraine.” The policy states:
Humanists International unequivocally condemns the unprovoked and illegal invasion by Russia of Ukraine, which has caused an escalating humanitarian crisis, gross and systematic human rights abuses on a massive scale, and has led to apparent war crimes in some areas.
Russian actions constitute a clear violation of the UN Charter and international law, including human rights law.
Such violations are clearly facilitated and sustained by the oppressive human rights climate in the Russian Federation itself; the severe restrictions on free expression, the widespread propagation of disinformation, the repression of civil society, and the intimidation, censoring and criminalisation of journalists all contribute to the Russian government being able to wage a war of aggression without accountability at home.
Humanists International welcomes the suspension of Russia’s membership of the UN Human Rights Council.
Humanists International urges the Russian Federation to cease all hostilities and to immediately and unconditionally withdraw its troops from Ukraine (in line with the United Nation [sic] Resolution A/ES-11/L).
Humanists International calls on all its Members to urge their own governments to oppose the actions of the Russian Federation, which in their motivations and their consequences, stand directly opposed to all humanist aspirations.
The policy – or “position statement” – of Humanists International opens with an unequivocal stance against the invasion, defining the invasion as both “unprovoked” and “illegal” as well as a violation of the UN Charter and international law “including human rights law.” The argument in the policy proposes a line from the conditions or the “oppressive human rights climate” within the Russian Federation to the “clearly facilitated and sustained” violations above from the Russian Federation’s invasion of Ukraine.
A proverbial laundry list is given to substantiate this argument about the Russian Federation. “Position Statement on Russian invasion of Ukraine” states, “…the severe restrictions on free expression, the widespread propagation of disinformation, the repression of civil society, and the intimidation, censoring and criminalisation of journalists all contribute to the Russian government being able to wage a war of aggression without accountability at home.”
Humanists International “welcomed” the suspension of the Russian Federation’s UN Human Rights Council membership. The language became more active rather than merely affirmative, stipulating to “cease all hostilities and to immediately and unconditionally withdraw its troops from Ukraine (in line with the United Nation Resolution A/ES-11/L).” We will return to this UN resolution and clarify it. Humanists International called for their governments to oppose the Russian Federation, which restricted its unlawful actions. The reasoning behind these more active statements was the ‘opposition to all humanist aspirations based on the motivations and consequences’ of the strategic military aggressive actions of the Russian Federation against Ukraine.
The policy statement has strengths in its breadth on a well-defined subject matter, a particular conflict. It takes a definitive position. While the weaknesses may show with time, as the war progresses, newer war updates and human rights contexts may need explicit statements to refine such a position statement. This is most clearly represented in the UN resolution mentioned in the policy. That is the emphasis for me, as this was the most important takeaway from the debate between highly qualified and intelligent humanist leaders gathered in one place.
I have several questions. We can find some answers during formal investigation and clarification of the UN resolution and the policy of Humanists International. Firstly, do we reference particular conflicts at a regular clip? Because the concept has been broached with at least one conflict. Secondly, do we make the content perennial rather than seasonal, e.g., all wars, every war of a specific kind, a single war with a precise start date, and so on? Thirdly, when referencing relevant international rights bodies and associated documents, should these be open for minor edits to include newly adopted resolutions as conflicts continue instead of a proliferation of new resolutions after new resolutions to be considered as new policies as almost happened in 2023 in Copenhagen?
A/ES-11/L and A/ES-11/1
These are relevant questions. However, we must cover the A/ES-11/L resolution referenced in “Position Statement on Russian invasion of Ukraine.” The “A” stands for documents issued by the General Assembly. The “ES” indicates an Emergency Special Session convened to address urgent matters. “ES-11” refers to the 11th Emergency Special Session of the General Assembly. “L” indicates the document is a draft resolution or a decision to be considered by the General Assembly. Thus, Humanists International, perhaps working with the limited information at the time or oversight of the original proposers of the resolution “Position Statement on Russian invasion of Ukraine,” posted a draft resolution and not a resolution of the United Nations in its statements, its – Humanists International’s – resolution becoming an eventual policy.
United Nations General Assembly Resolution ES-11/1 would have been better. Especially given that the 2022 General Assembly of Humanists International was held June 3 to 5 in 2022, several months after the draft resolution, A/ES-11/L, became an actual resolution, A/ES-11/1, on March 2, 2022. A recommendation would be an amendment to this Humanists International policy – “Position Statement on Russian invasion of Ukraine” – to reference full resolutions and not draft resolutions in its policies. Moving from a draft resolution to a resolution means the draft resolution went through a main committee of the UN. A single-letter change in the policy of Humanists International may be warranted to improve the efficacy of the ethical and relevant resolution supportive of international humanist values.
United Nations General Assembly Resolution ES-11/1 was adopted through the 11th emergency special session. The purpose was to condemn the Russian invasion of Ukrainian territory and simultaneously declare the need to withdraw Russian forces from Ukraine and reverse the Russian Federation’s decision to recognize Donetsk and Luhansk as self-declared republics. That is powerful and arose in two general assemblies of Humanists International, underlining its importance in the resolution, “Position Statement on Russian Invasion of Ukraine” (2022). Intriguingly, and I was not present at the General Assembly of Humanists International in 2022 to make a qualitative commentary, the lattermost purpose of Resolution ES-11/1 was unincorporated, i.e., reversal of the recognition of Donetsk and Luhansk as self-declared republics. This could be a time limit in the General Assembly. It could be minutiae orthogonal to the central intent to pass a resolution as a new policy. Regardless, that is something for the record. When analyzed, A/ES-11/L and A/ES-11/1 appear identical, differing only in force of implication.
The Global Consensus on Russian Aggression and Resolution ES-11/2
The General Assembly and World Congress in August of 2023 was about 17 months after the instigation of the full-scale invasion of Ukraine by the Russian Federation. Of those who voted against it, only 5 Member States did so: Belarus, Eritrea, North Korea, Russia, and Syria. The UN record was clear on the global consensus on the aggression against Ukraine by Russia: 141 voted for the resolution, five against, 35 abstained, and 12 absented themselves. In other words, the vast majority of the Member States of the United Nations condemned the aggression of the Russian Federation against Ukraine. By passing this resolution based on Resolution ES-11/1, the Members and Associate Members of Humanists International fell in line with the overwhelming international consensus in condemning the Russian Federation’s, under the leadership of President Vladimir Putin, invasion of Ukraine with the demand for complete withdrawal. As there was a reconvening on March 24, 2022, to reiterate the support of Resolution ES-11/1 in Resolution ES-11/2, Humanists International’s policy would fit with Resolution ES-11/2, too.
Bearing in mind, the entire 11th special session followed the February 24, 2022, attacks by the Russian Federation and then a draft resolution was put forward and vetoed by the Security Council. This emergency session became necessary. When a permanent member vetoes actions in the Security Council, and it – the Security Council – is deemed to have failed in its role, then a special session is called; that is what happened when the Russian Federation invaded Ukraine on February 24, 2022. A draft resolution calling for the withdrawal of troops was vetoed. Thus, a special emergency session was called. So, a special emergency session is an unscheduled meeting in the UN General Assembly to focus on an urgent and particular situation for maintaining international peace and security when the UN Security Council fails in its ability to act based on a veto by a permanent member. This mechanism was formulated in the United for Peace resolution as a fallback for international security and peace. The adoption of Resolution ES-11/2 was a recognition of the continuance of the invasion of Ukraine by the Russian Federation.
The Documentary References of A/ES-11/1
As a slight aside, A/ES-11/L.1 included the following countries:
Afghanistan, Albania, Andorra, Antigua and Barbuda, Argentina, Australia, Austria, Bahamas, Belgium, Belize, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Botswana, Bulgaria, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Croatia, Cyprus, Czechia, Democratic Republic of the Congo, Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, Estonia, Fiji, Finland, France, Gambia, Georgia, Germany, Ghana, Greece, Grenada, Guatemala, Guyana, Haiti, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Ireland, Israel, Italy, Jamaica, Japan, Kiribati, Kuwait, Latvia, Liberia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malawi, Malta, Marshall Islands, Micronesia (Federated States of), Monaco, Montenegro, Myanmar, Netherlands, New Zealand, Niger, North Macedonia, Norway, Palau, Panama, Papua New Guinea, Paraguay, Peru, Poland, Portugal, Qatar, Republic of Korea, Republic of Moldova, Romania, Saint Kitts and Nevis, Samoa, San Marino, Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Switzerland, Timor-Leste, Tonga, Trinidad and Tobago, Turkey, Tuvalu, Ukraine, United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, United States of America and Uruguay.
A/ES-11/L.1/Add.1 – a supplement to A/ES-11/L.1 – added Barbados and Cambodia. Now, A/ES-11/1, the formal resolution, includes references to S/2014/136 and A/ES-11/L.1, A/ES-11/L.1/Add.1, Article 2 of the Charter of the United Nations, Security Council resolution 2623 (2022), document S/Agenda/8979, General Assembly resolution 377 A (V), resolution 2625 (XXV), resolution 3314 (XXIX), the Final Act of the Conference on Security and Cooperation in Europe, the Memorandum on Security Assurances in Connection with Ukraine’s Accession to the Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons (Budapest Memorandum), the Declaration on Friendly Relations, the Minsk agreements (Protocol and II), and the Geneva Conventions of 1949 and Additional Protocol I thereto of 1977. These will be covered in order.
Contextualization of A/ES-11/1 References
S/2014/136 is a “Letter dated 28 February 2014 from the Permanent Representative of Ukraine to the United Nations addressed to the President of the Security Council.” It states:
Due to the deterioration of the situation in the Autonomous Republic of the Crimea, Ukraine, which threatens the territorial integrity of Ukraine, and upon the relevant instruction of my Government, I have the honour to request an urgent meeting of the Security Council in accordance with Articles 34 and 35 of the Charter of the United Nations.
I also have the honour to request that, in accordance with the relevant provisions of the Charter and rule 37 of the provisional rules of procedure of the Security Council, a representative of the Government of Ukraine be allowed to participate in the meeting and to make a statement.
(Signed) Yuriy Sergeyev Ambassador Permanent Representative
The “Honour” for Sergeyev is a formal declaration for a severe context of human rights abuse. These abuses only exacerbated into the present moment.
A/ES-11/L.1 was the draft document. The draft resolution referenced in the policy is “Position Statement on Russian invasion of Ukraine” by Humanists International in 2022.
A/ES-11/L.1/Add.1 was a supplement or an addition to the draft resolution by adding two other countries, as referenced before, Barbados and Cambodia.
Article 2 of the Charter of the United Nations speaks to the idea of the sovereignty of all Member States, fulfillment of obligations, peaceful settlement of disputes, non-use of force, assistance to the United Nations, and non-intervention in domestic affairs. In total, it states:
Article 2
The Organization and its Members, in pursuit of the Purposes stated in Article 1, shall act in accordance with the following Principles.
- The Organization is based on the principle of the sovereign equality of all its Members.
- All Members, in order to ensure to all of them the rights and benefits resulting from membership, shall fulfill in good faith the obligations assumed by them in accordance with the present Charter.
- All Members shall settle their international disputes by peaceful means in such a manner that international peace and security, and justice, are not endangered.
- All Members shall refrain in their international relations from the threat or use of force against the territorial integrity or political independence of any state, or in any other manner inconsistent with the Purposes of the United Nations.
- All Members shall give the United Nations every assistance in any action it takes in accordance with the present Charter, and shall refrain from giving assistance to any state against which the United Nations is taking preventive or enforcement action.
- The Organization shall ensure that states which are not Members of the United Nations act in accordance with these Principles so far as may be necessary for the maintenance of international peace and security.
- Nothing contained in the present Charter shall authorize the United Nations to intervene in matters which are essentially within the domestic jurisdiction of any state or shall require the Members to submit such matters to settlement under the present Charter; but this principle shall not prejudice the application of enforcement measures under Chapter Vll.
Security Council resolution 2623 (2022) was the call for the eleventh emergency special session of the United Nations to convene on the Russian full-scale invasion of Ukraine. Albania and the United States introduced the resolution. It was adopted on February 27, 2022.
Document S/Agenda/8979 was the document for examination within the eleventh emergency special session of the United Nations. This document referenced S/2014/136, namely the letter from Sergeyev.
General Assembly resolution 377 A (V), also known as “Uniting for Peace,” speaks to the failures of the Security Council on a contingent basis. If unanimity does not exist between the five permanent members of the UN Security Council while with a failure to enact international peace and security, then the UN General Assembly will consider and make recommendations to UN members for collective measures for the maintenance of international peace and security. This becomes relevant in the Russian full-scale invasion of Ukraine.
Resolution 2625 (XXV), or the “The Declaration on Principles of International Law concerning Friendly Relations and Co-operation among States,” states a comprehensive stipulation on the principle of self-determination.
Resolution 3314 (XXIX) was adopted in 1974. It provides a comprehensive definition of aggression. This includes specific acts like invasion, attack, and military occupation. It assigns the primary responsibility to the UN Security Council to determine acts of aggression and take necessary measures.
The Final Act of the Conference on Security and Cooperation in Europe, or the Helsinki Accords, was signed in 1975. The basis was an easing of Cold War tensions. The Helsinki Accords gave an international cooperation framework on economic and scientific cooperation, human rights, and security. The Accords helped legitimize the post-World War II borders of European nations with more respect for human rights and Eastern Bloc freedoms.
The Memorandum on Security Assurances in Connection with Ukraine’s Accession to the Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons (Budapest Memorandum) was significant in Ukraine’s accession to the Treaty on the Non-Proliferation of Nuclear Weapons (NPT). Ukraine relinquished its nuclear weapons. It was the third largest in the world at the time. Ukraine, acceding to the NPT, became a non-nuclear weapon state. The Russian Federation, the United Kingdom, and the United States of America provided assurances of security and respect for Ukraine’s sovereignty, including borders and refraining from using threats or force. The post-Soviet States, due to this, did some denuclearization.
The Declaration on Friendly Relations is the newer and more used UN General Assembly Resolution 2625 (XXV)name. Any reference to The Declaration on Friendly Relationsrefers to Resolution 2625 (XXV).
The Minsk agreements references the Minsk Protocol from September 2014 and the Minsk II Agreement from February 2015. Minsk Protocol was signed by the DPR (Donetsk People’s Republic), LPR (Luhansk People’s Republic), Ukraine, Russia, and the Organization for Security and Co-operation in Europe (OSCE). The goal was to de-escalate: get a ceasefire, withdraw troops, and establish a Ukrainian-Russian border security zone. The Minsk II Agreement followed this protocol with the participation of France and Germany with an outline for a ceasefire, local elections of Donetsk and Luhansk, constitutional reforms, and the withdrawal of heavy weapons. On February 22, 2022, Russian Federation President Vladimir Putin declared the Minsk agreements as non-existent, followed by the full-scale invasion on February 24, 2022.
The Geneva Conventions of 1949 and Additional Protocol I thereto of 1977 are four treaties for international legal standards for humanitarian treatment in war. The foci are civilians, war prisoners, and sick and wounded soldiers. Additional Protocol I of 1977 expands to civilian safeguarding and regulation of conduct hostilities to minimize destruction and suffering.
The Conclusion of Humanists International General Assembly and World Congress 2023
A/ES-11/1‘s focus is the humanitarian and refugee crisis created by the Russian Federation’s aggression under President Vladimir Putin, with an emphasis on the importance of Ukraine as a grain and agricultural exporter internationally. This sits “Position Statement on Russian invasion of Ukraine” referencing A/ES-11/L within United Nations norms, humanitarian efforts, humanist values. The global influence and focus of Humanists International in its policy and the democratic debate and discussion period show the practical application of global humanism in a context of international conflagration and the need for diplomatic solidarity and humanitarian solutions. Even though the war between the Russian Federation and Ukraine continues, these documents provide an international response and framework for dealing with the Russo-Ukrainian war. United Nations diplomacy mirrors much of the humanist ethos exemplified in Humanists International. The respectful debate and discourse on the new resolution on the Russo-Ukrainian war in the General Assembly 2023 of Humanists International provided a window into humanist values across cultures.
This leads to some of the questions internally posed: Do we reference particular conflicts at a regular clip? Do we try to make the content perennial rather than seasonal, e.g., all wars, every war of a specific kind, a single war with a precise start date, and so on? When referencing relevant international rights bodies and associated documents, should these be open for minor edits to include newly adopted resolutions as conflicts continue instead of a proliferation of new resolutions after new resolutions to be considered as new policies, as it almost happened in Copenhagen in 2023? I have yet to learn the first, but I plan to evaluate all Humanists International policies now. Second, this policy and the eventualities of decline or rejection of the new policy add to the “Position Statement on the Russian invasion of Ukraine.” We seem to strike a balance, based on the limited available evidence, and being present at the debate in Copenhagen, of a single war and then leaving the emphasis perennial on this war since the war is incomplete or until all sides have resolved combat in the war and the withdrawal all troops, etc. Third, I argue for a change in bylaws, if not already present, for a change in resolutions already accepted as policies based on updates to single wars. I would also argue for, at least, a double resolution year with one presented against all forms of war based on humanist values. War may be a human universal. However, we can stipulate a striving for a world without wars and specific ones dedicated to the condemnation of it. Our humanist values demand it; our actions showed the possibilities to me.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/04/23
Roslyn Mould was Secretary and Chair of the International Humanist and Ethical Youth Organization (IHEYO) now Young Humanists International’s African Working Group from 2014 to 2019 and a Board Member for Humanists International from 2019 to 2023. She was a member of the Humanist Association of Ghana since it was founded in 2012 and held several positions, including President of the group from 2015 to 2019. She is the Coordinator for the West African Humanist Network, an Advisory Board member of the FoRB Leadership Network (UK), a Board member for LGBT+ Rights Ghana, and President of Accra Atheists. She holds a bachelor’s degree in Linguistics and Modern Languages. She is currently the First African Vice President of Humanists International.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Roslyn Mould, the Vice President of Humanists International, and the President and Founder of Accra Atheists. We will discuss a topic that is very popular among atheists, Humanists, and activists in their campaigns: billboards. I am not sure why this has become a trend, but when these billboards go up, people seem to feel very proud of them.
The Canadians have had their own, and the Americans have put up several, depending on the group. What inspired this initiative? Who came up with the original idea? Who is the founder?
Roslyn Mould: That would be me. It was sometime in 2019, though I do not remember exactly where the idea originated. I was thinking about how we could promote humanism more effectively. In Ghana, especially regarding religion, any major event—whether church-related, entertainment, academics or sports—is advertised on billboards. If an international event is happening, everyone knows about it because it is prominently displayed.
It is not just on television; it is on billboards. Seeing this, I realized that although humanism is recognized in over 100 countries, many people still do not know about it. We keep discussing how little awareness there is, yet, I realized that when we hold major events like General Assemblies and the World Humanist Congress events of Humanists International, not a single person outside our circle of participants and invited guests seemed to know about it. Nobody was aware we were even there.
After these events, it always feels like we preach to the choir. We hold discussions, but they remain internal, with little external outreach. So, who exactly are we reaching if we claim to be promoting humanism? That was the question that came to mind.
Why not use billboards to spread the word? It is one of the easiest ways to let people know that a community exists. It seemed like a natural step forward.
Anyway, I felt it was time to put the message out there—not only to make our group more visible but also to normalize atheism. If we see billboards for all sorts of beliefs and causes, why not for humanism and atheism? People should know that atheism exists and that it is a valid worldview.
For the 1% of Ghana’s 32 million steadfastly non-religious citizens, this could be a way to let them know that a community exists for them, a place where they can meet like-minded individuals. That was the core of the idea.
Around the same time, the Freedom From Religion Foundation (FFRF) discovered my work and invited me to interview on their radio show. Later, I met Dan Barker and Annie Laurie Gaylor in Iceland. The following year, they invited me onto their TV show.
During our discussions, they asked about my vision and the activities I was involved in. One of the things I mentioned was the billboard idea. They immediately expressed interest, saying they had done something similar and would love to support the initiative. I told them I would return to Ghana and assess the project’s feasibility. At the time, the Humanist Association of Ghana was not ready, and then COVID-19 happened, delaying everything.
So, that is basically how it came about. They did not hesitate to support the idea, but I wanted to ensure we knew exactly what we wanted to put on the billboard. We needed consensus on the message, a plan for implementing it, and an assessment of whether it would be effective before we could send an invoice and confirm their willingness to fund it.
Then, after everything happened with COVID-19, I was not getting much support from within Ghana. So when I started Accra Atheists almost five years later, I contacted them again to see if they were still interested. Once again, they did not hesitate.
Annie Laurie Gaylor and Dan Barker got back to me immediately, saying I should let them know the cost. I approached a few companies, and one of them provided a list of prices. I sent it to them, and they reviewed the options. They asked, “Which one do you want? I could hardly believe it.
Before I knew it, the organization had paid. We had the billboard. They even helped by providing a graphic designer from the US. After several weeks working on it with Peter Dankwa of the Humanist Association of Ghana, I finally found a professional here in Ghana and eventually, we got everything completed.
It is just incredible to see the billboard live in the city—the first atheist billboard in Africa’s history—and I cannot believe this actually happened. It is exciting.
Jacobsen: Please encourage others in Uganda, Malawi, Tanzania, South Africa, Zimbabwe, or Nigeria, etc., to launch their billboards as part of a region-wide campaign.
Mould: Yes, my vision was never just for Accra Atheists in Ghana. The goal was for others to follow suit.
It has only been a bit since the billboard went up, but we have already seen a lot of buzz and engagement on social media. We expect even more traction in the coming weeks; our numbers will grow. Then, we can conduct an impact analysis to assess what effect the billboard has had on our organization as an atheist community.
I hope to share this information with other African and international organizations, especially Humanists International. My ultimate vision is for every Humanists International member country to have a billboard.
We are active in over 60 countries, and if each of those countries had a Humanists International billboard, people would start recognizing us everywhere. Someone could say, “I saw one in London,” or “I was in Canada, and I saw one in Alberta or Toronto.” Then, another person might say, “Oh, I saw one in Paris,” humanism would soon become widely known. More people would learn about Humanists International, and the conversation would grow, inspiring others, increasing our membership, and helping people feel more comfortable coming out as atheists.
I know that was one of the things that helped me. Attending just one conference gave me the courage to come out—not just because I met Ghanaian atheists like myself but also because I met other African atheists. That alone was inspiring.
It is incredible how something small can escalate and expand into something bigger than I had originally envisioned. That is the idea. I also hope collaborations will happen.
For example, the Freedom From Religion Foundation (FFRF), based in Madison, Wisconsin, has sponsored an organization in Ghana, Africa. So, what is stopping Humanist Canada from supporting a group elsewhere in Africa, Asia, or Latin America? What is stopping Humanists UK, American Humanists, or American Atheists and other European groups from doing the same?
If we all had billboards in our respective countries—especially in places where we are a minority—it would significantly amplify our impact and help accomplish much of the work we aim to do.
Yes, you have to sit back and relax while people come to you rather than putting yourself out there and potentially putting yourself at risk. We are hoping that this happens, and I know it could cause an uproar because, eventually, religious organizations will feel threatened by the fact that people think it is acceptable to leave the church.
For the longest time, people have been convinced that atheism does not exist, that you cannot be an African and not believe in something. That belief is deeply ingrained. It is a very subtle but important point because I often hear, “Oh, you are an atheist? No, I do not think you are an atheist. I think you believe in something.” That is what people tell you, even when you clearly state that you do not believe.
Jacobsen: Well, you are being gaslit.
Mould: They try to conflate things and dismiss atheism entirely. That is why this billboard could go a long way in creating awareness—without putting people’s lives or livelihoods at risk by forcing them to expose themselves as atheists.
A billboard with a simple message and some images could let people know that a community exists. As you can see, we did not include a telephone number on the billboard—only social media handles. This allows us to control our social network, screen those who reach out to us, and ensure we feel safe before engaging with them.
Jacobsen: I want to add a point that is rarely discussed but is unique.
Mould: I am listening.
Jacobsen: One thing that I think is not talked about enough but is very unique is the African context. Not every country is the same, of course, but if you look at the work of Leo Igwe against witchcraft accusations and his advocacy for humanism, your work in advancing atheism in Ghana, or Mubarak Bala’s work as an ex-Muslim, there is a pattern.
If you compare this to Middle Eastern atheists, for example, they are mostly combating a single ideological system—Islam, in its various forms. In North America, atheists primarily push back against politicized Christianity, especially hardline Catholicism and evangelical movements.
But in Africa, the situation is very different. It is as if African Humanists are carrying the weight of three different ideological systems at once. It is like that old Greek myth of Atlas, who carries the world on his shoulders. African atheists and Humanists are simultaneously confronting:
Arab colonialist influence through Islam.
European colonialist influence through Christianity.
Traditional superstitions and indigenous beliefs existed before colonization and persist today.
It is an enormous challenge, and that is what makes the African case so unique. There, atheists are not just fighting against one ideological system—they are combating all three simultaneously.
Mould: Our approach can be effective even when considering blasphemy laws in various countries because it is not provocative. The billboard does not attack religious beliefs. Instead, it asks a simple question:
“Don’t believe in God? You are not alone.”
It simply communicates that a community already exists. This is different from the more militant or confrontational atheist billboards seen in some Western countries, where they often ridicule religion or directly challenge religious people. That kind of approach would not work here.
For example, a more aggressive message would provoke a strong backlash in Ghana. Our goal is to make people feel safe and welcome. We are not announcing that there is no God—we are simply saying that if you do not believe in God, you are welcome here.
This messaging also creates a buffer against those who might try to suppress us. Since we are not attacking any specific religion or belief system, it makes it harder for authorities or religious groups to justify clamping down on us. We are simply existing in our own space.
This strategy is also flexible. The billboard does not need to feature only people from one specific country. It can include faces from different regions, showing that atheism is not isolated to one place—it is a global movement.
We have Dr. Leo Igwe on the billboard. He is Nigerian, and he is already open about his atheism. So, for those who are open and willing to be on the billboard, there is no need to limit ourselves to just the people we know. We also do not need to blur faces or hide identities. It is a method of promoting humanism without putting one’s life at risk. That is how I see it, and that is why I believe it will help many people.
As the Coordinator for the West African Humanist Network, my dream has always been to expand beyond Ghana and Nigeria. I want to focus on other countries within West Africa where no Humanist groups currently exist. The goal is to find individuals and organizations interested in humanism. If they do not have an organization, we can help them establish one and introduce them to Humanists International so they can become official members.
That is the larger vision—eventually putting billboards up in each of the 16 West African countries. Hopefully, this will inspire more people. Harrison Mumia, President of Atheists in Kenya, has expressed great interest in doing the same in Kenya and also others in Nigeria and South Africa.
Jacobsen: Get him as much media exposure as possible. He is very, very good.
Mould: Yes, we are going to take full advantage of media attention. Whether the coverage is positive or negative, it is still visibility and publicity, and we welcome it. This is a historic milestone, and everyone involved in making this happen is incredibly excited.
Jacobsen: I also want to highlight an important point that you touched on. It is crucial to consider the regional and cultural context when planning activism. For example, in Nigeria, strategies differ depending on whether you are in the Muslim-majority North or the Christian-majority South. The challenges and approaches needed in each region are different.
Looking at global trends in atheism and humanism, we see that in the 2000s and 2010s, much of the focus was on militant and New Atheism, primarily in North America and parts of Western Europe. That strategy was relevant for its time. However, activism has to evolve with the times and must always be tailored to each region’s specific cultural and historical context.
Leadership is seasonal—leaders come and go. People make mistakes, movements shift, and priorities change. Many figures who led the North American wave of atheism have faded from influence, and new voices must step up. Movements must adapt as circumstances change. That is why strategic flexibility is critical. Activists need to choose approaches that are appropriate for their region and their time while also considering personal safety.
I like your idea of avoiding militant atheism in that context. The more confrontational approach often comes across as aggressive, like someone is trying to force others to abandon their beliefs. Even if that is not the intended message, that is how many religious people perceive it. The billboard strategy, however, takes a different approach. It acts as an invitation rather than an attack. It subtly encourages people to question their beliefs, making them curious rather than defensive.
Since we believe in freedom of religion and belief, we do not focus on attacking religious people. Instead, we are deeply aware of how many people live under coercion—whether through family pressure, cultural expectations, institutional barriers, or legal restrictions. Many individuals privately reject religion but feel trapped due to social and familial constraints.
The billboard sends a simple message: You are not alone. It reassures people that there is a community waiting for them.
Mould: There are very few safe spaces for atheists, especially in West Africa. For a long time, Humanist organizations have been very internal, which means that outsiders have no idea they even exist.
If your family hears that you are attending meetings with a Humanist group but does not know what humanism is, they will speculate. In many cases, they assume it is something mysterious or even dangerous. I have personally seen this happen—people are accused of being in a cult or part of some secret (occult) society. The ignorance surrounding humanism fuels fear and misinformation.
So, if we claim to promote humanism but have never had a billboard in Africa, then what have we really accomplished? Visibility matters. If we want people to take us seriously and understand who we are, we must make our presence known.
humanism should be visible at all times so that people know what it is. But right now, we constantly have to explain what humanism means. Because it is not widely recognized, even within the Humanist community, people come up with their own definitions of humanism.
This leads to debates: Are Humanists this? Are Humanists that? Some say Humanists are religious, and others say they are not religious. This confusion exists because there is so much mystery surrounding humanism.
But it should not be mysterious at all. It should be well-known and clearly defined. This is not just a challenge for Africa or Asia—it should be addressed globally.
If we organize Humanist events, people should know about them. There should be media coverage. humanism should become common knowledge so that when someone says, “I am a Humanist,” the response is, “Oh, really? You are one of those?” instead of, “What is that? What do you do?” We should not feel ashamed of being Humanists. There should be no hesitation or embarrassment.
Additionally, raising awareness about humanism makes fundraising easier. If people already understand humanism and what Humanist groups do, they can relate to the cause. However, it becomes difficult when we try to secure funding outside the Humanist community because people do not even know what humanism is or what Humanist groups do.
That is why visibility matters. There is also a reason why we explicitly named our group Accra Atheists—even though it is fundamentally a Humanist group. We wanted to make it unambiguous. We did not want people to misinterpret us as a religious or spiritual freethinking group.
No—we are a group for atheists and agnostics. It is as simple as that. Both atheism and humanism share a core principle: rejecting supernatural ideas. That is the defining factor. We should not sugarcoat it or beat around the bush.
humanism does not need to sound religious or be connected to religious traditions. It is not. We need to clearly communicate that message. People understand this within the Humanist community. But outside of it, humanism is too open to misinterpretation. It is time to end that confusion.
Jacobsen: Yes, I know you have previously commented that what is often called spiritual humanism is a poor interpretation of secular humanism, right?
Mould: Exactly.
Jacobsen: From a practical standpoint, when discussing humanism, we typically say humanism. However, for those reading this, if you ever encounter someone implying a form of spiritual humanism, it is important to emphasize secular humanism in that conversation. That way, they understand the distinction. But generally, we should say humanism—it is not complicated.
Mould: Yes, and even when we capitalize the H in humanism, it is supposed to imply secular humanism automatically. That should be the default understanding. We should not have to differentiate ourselves between different subcategories. If someone says they are a Humanist, people should automatically assume they are a secular Humanist—not something else.
That should be the mainstream definition, and any other interpretation should be considered fringe. This is exactly why we need to make humanism visible. Hence….. billboards!
Jacobsen: I agree.
Mould: Yes.
Jacobsen: So, for anyone interested in launching a billboard campaign, what is your three-step process for making it happen?
Mould: The first step is to find a funding source if you can’t afford one
The second step is accountability. You must provide transparency if an organization is willing to donate or sponsor the campaign. You should approach at least two or three advertising companies that can offer the service. Then, you need to justify why you select a particular company and the impact the billboard will have.
For example, the company we selected provided statistics on how many people would see the billboard daily and the impact it would generate. This data was crucial because we could pass it along to our donors to show them why this investment was worthwhile.
I was a bit nervous at first if any company would have been tolerant enough to accept to put it up but I am glad we found open-minded people in the advertising company we chose and also the professional Graphic designer who finished the design although they are all Christians.
The third step is to hire a proper graphic designer. The design should be modern, professional, and clear. It should communicate all the key ideas without cluttering the message.
If you overload a billboard with too much information, it becomes confusing and leaves room for misinterpretation.
For example, on our billboard, we clearly defined what our group is and the values it represents:
- Science
- Freethought
- Compassion
- humanism
- Ethics
- Human Rights
- Critical thinking
This makes it immediately clear what our group stands for.
We also wanted to ensure that people understood that Humanists are ethical, compassionate, rational, and freethinking individuals.
So, when designing a billboard, it is essential to include enough information to make your message clear but not so much that it becomes overwhelming or ambiguous.
Jacobsen: That sounds like a solid approach.
Mould: Yes.
Jacobsen: Awesome. Lovely talking to you again. Thank you.
Mould: Thank you. I appreciate it.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/04/22
David “Maheengun” Cook, an atheist and humanist from the Mississaugas of the Anishinaabe people, shares his life journey navigating Indigenous identity, secularism, and cultural heritage. Raised near Rice Lake, Ontario, he learned traditional teachings—like oral history, plant knowledge, and seasonal rhythms—from elders. Yet, he embraced atheism at 13, finding Christian doctrines unconvincing and later stepping away from formal Indigenous spirituality, such as pipe-carrying and Midewiwin ceremonies. Cook distinguishes between Indigeneity as a cultural-historical identity and Indigenous humanism, which he sees as increasingly conflated with spiritual beliefs incompatible with secular humanism’s reliance on reason and evidence. He critiques the romanticization of Indigenous knowledge systems, warning against overvaluing localized spiritual traditions as universal truth. Still, he values cultural respect, environmental ethics, and communal decision-making embedded in Anishinaabe life. While he sees overlap with secular humanism in compassion and ethical living, he insists on epistemological clarity: lived experience and reverence are not scientific knowledge. He emphasizes the importance of dialogue, mutual understanding, and intellectual honesty, challenging assumptions from Indigenous and non-Indigenous perspectives. Cook’s reflections underscore the complex interplay between cultural continuity and philosophical integrity in modern Indigenous life.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by David Cook, also known by his Anishinaabe name, Maheengun, which means Timberwolf in the Anishinaabemowin language.
David will share his perspective on Indigenous identity, humanism, and atheism. He was raised near Rice Lake in southern Ontario, where Anishinaabe teachings influenced his formative years. He learned from elders about oral traditions, plant knowledge, and cultural practices rooted in the land and community. Despite this deep cultural foundation, Cook did not adopt theistic beliefs. He embraced atheism at the age of 13 after finding Christian teachings unconvincing.
His journey exemplifies the complex and often misunderstood relationship between Indigenous spirituality and humanist principles. Cook observed that traditional Anishinaabe worldviews emphasize spiritual relationships with the natural world, ancestors, and beings—but not in the form of hierarchical theism or deity worship. Over time, however, he has witnessed a shift in some Indigenous communities toward institutionalized or formalized spiritual practices, influenced in part by colonial impositions and revivalist movements. These shifts sometimes conflict with secular or humanist frameworks. In navigating this tension, Cook stepped away from ceremonial responsibilities, such as being a pipe carrier, to live more authentically within his philosophical values.
His experiences challenge the stereotype that Indigenous identity must be tied to religion or theism. They also highlight the diversity of beliefs and spiritual expressions among Indigenous peoples. Through these conversations, we will explore how Indigenous cultural heritage can intersect with secular humanist values, contributing to a broader discussion on Indigeneity and humanism. I approach this as a learner, open to where the dialogue leads. You never know unless you ask.
David, thank you very much for joining me today.
David “Maheengun” Cook: Thank you for inviting me.
Jacobsen: My first question is: Do you come from an Ojibwe, Odawa, Potawatomi, Algonquin, Mississauga, or Nipissing background?
Cook: My experiences come from Mississaugas, originally.
Jacobsen: That helps. For those who may not know—like myself—how are the various Anishinaabe peoples distinguished from one another? Is it primarily geographic, or is there more to it?
Cook: It is mainly geographic but also linguistic and historical. The Anishinaabe are a group of culturally related nations who speak dialects of the Anishinaabemowin language. The Ojibwe, or Chippewa, stretch across a wide area from Ontario to Minnesota and beyond. The Odawa traditionally lived near the Ottawa River Valley, and the Potawatomi were based around Georgian Bay and further south around Lake Michigan, though many were displaced. The Mississaugas settled primarily in southern Ontario. While they share cultural foundations, each group has distinct histories, migration stories, and regional practices.
Jacobsen: The Anishinaabe are often translated as “original people” or “spontaneous beings,” they are tied to “Mother Earth” and “spiritual emergence.” What does that name signify within the culture?
Cook: Anishinaabe is often translated as “original person” or “first person.” It reflects the belief that our people were created and have always been here—on what we call Turtle Island. In many oral traditions, there are creation stories, including that of Sky Woman, though this version is more prominent among the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois). Among the Anishinaabe, the tale of Nanaboozho is central—he is a cultural hero and teacher who helped shape the world. These stories reflect a worldview grounded in a relationship—with the land, the animals, the elements, and one another—not in dominion or hierarchical worship.
Specific to the Anishinaabe people, there’s a story of our ancestors—the Lenape (or Leni Lenape) from the East Coast—being our predecessors. The Anishinaabe people are said to have split off and migrated westward, following a sacred object known as the megis shell. It is a type of seashell. We followed its appearance and migrated to places where wild rice—manoomin—grew, ultimately reaching the Great Lakes and settling in areas like Minnesota, which marked the endpoint of this ancestral migration.
Anishinaabe is often translated as “original person” or “first person.” It reflects the belief that our people were created and have always been here—on what we call Turtle Island. In many oral traditions, there are creation stories, including that of Sky Woman, though this version is more prominent among the Haudenosaunee (Iroquois).
Jacobsen: What is the significance, within traditional practices, of things like birch bark, wild rice harvesting, and clan systems as part of the Anishinaabe worldview and social structure?
Cook: Good question. So, the teachings of the Seven Grandfathers instructed that our people should follow the megis shell, and we would stop where we found wild rice. As I mentioned, the Anishinaabemowin word is manoomin. Wild rice was—and still is—a staple food and ceremonial plant for the Anishinaabe. Its presence indicated where we were meant to settle.
Birch bark was—and remains—immensely important. It was used to build our traditional homes—wigwams, not tipis. Tipis are associated with Plains cultures, but our homes were dome-shaped structures covered in birch bark.
The Midewiwin society—the keepers of ancient and ceremonial knowledge—used birch bark scrolls to record teachings, medicines, songs, and instructions for building Mide lodges. These scrolls served as a traditional archive. Birch bark also had everyday uses: for containers, canoes, and art.
We also interacted extensively with other nations, including the Haudenosaunee Confederacy—the Mohawk, Seneca, Cayuga, Onondaga, and Oneida. Later, the Tuscarora joined, forming the Six Nations. Through this contact—both peaceful and hostile—we came to share some elements like the agricultural trio called the Three Sisters: corn, beans, and squash. These came more from our interactions than from our ancestral practices.
Jacobsen: You mentioned conflict. What were the historical bases of some of these clashes between the Anishinaabe and the Haudenosaunee?
Cook: Primarily, it was about control of the Great Lakes region, especially trade routes. This was pre-European contact, so before 1497—when John Cabot explored parts of what is now Canada—and certainly before 1603, when Samuel de Champlain arrived. The Great Lakes were vital corridors of commerce, diplomacy, and warfare. A complex trade web stretched across the continent—copper from Lake Superior, shells from the coast, obsidian, tobacco, etc.
The Haudenosaunee traditionally occupied the south side of Lake Ontario, while the Anishinaabe, including the Potawatomi, Odawa, and Mississaugas, were on the north side. These three groups comprised the Council of the Three Fires, a longstanding alliance rooted in kinship and defence.
The conflicts intensified after Champlain allied with the Wendat (also called the Huron), who had accepted the Jesuit missionaries and their Christian teachings. The Jesuits introduced not only religion but also disease, which devastated many Indigenous communities. Champlain and his Wendat allies—including some Ojibwe—launched attacks on the Haudenosaunee south of the lake. That began a cycle of violence and displacement that lasted for centuries.
Jacobsen: That’s quite the historical sweep. Growing up, what was your sense—within your Indigenous community and in nearby non-Indigenous communities—of the mythologies or perceptions each had of the other?
Cook: That’s a rich topic. The mythologies held by each group—Indigenous or settler—about one another were often oversimplified or distorted. Indigenous communities saw settlers as disconnected from the land, lacking the spiritual and relational teachings that tie people to place. On the other hand, settlers often romanticized Indigenous people or reduced us to caricatures—either the “noble savage” or the “vanishing Indian.” Meanwhile, different Indigenous nations had their own stories and rivalries, often shaped by centuries of conflict, trade, and adaptation.
Jacobsen: Regarding social mythologies specifically, what kinds of stories or collective ideas did Indigenous communities have about surrounding non-Indigenous people, and vice versa? And I mean not religious mythologies like Christian beliefs in an intervening God or Indigenous cosmologies like the creation of Turtle Island, but more about the social perceptions communities held about one another. Also, are you speaking from personal experience growing up or from a more historical lens?
Cook: That’s a good question—and I think both apply. Historically, and in my experience, those perceptions have shifted significantly over time.
Going back to the early contact era—when Champlain was active in this region—you had the Wendat (also known as the Huron) accepting, or at least entertaining, Christian missionaries like the Jesuits. That affected how other nations, including the Haudenosaunee, viewed Wendat and the newcomers. But in those early days, there weren’t many non-Indigenous people in Ontario—just a few priests and fur traders—so social mythologies were formed based on limited interaction.
As colonization progressed—particularly during the expansion of Ontario’s colonization roads in the 19th century—Indigenous people in many areas were respected for their deep knowledge of the land, for trade, and for helping early settlers survive. My family has a cottage about an hour and a half north of here, and there’s a long history of cooperation between Indigenous communities and pioneers. There was absolute mutual respect, at least in some areas.
But then things shifted. Public perceptions began souring by the 1960s and 1970s, especially among non-Indigenous people. Many stereotypes took hold—things like alcoholism, laziness, or exemptions from taxation—which created resentment and suspicion. A lot of this was media-driven. People formed their opinions not from direct interaction with Indigenous people but from distorted narratives coming out of other regions or from sensationalized news.
I remember vividly the Oka Crisis in 1990. It was centred in Kanesatake and Akwesasne, Mohawk territories in Quebec, and had ripple effects across the country. Suddenly, many non-Indigenous Canadians—especially in Ontario and Quebec—developed very negative views of Indigenous people, even if they had never met one in their lives. It was a myth-building through fear and media framing.
But today, things are changing with the ongoing work of Truth and Reconciliation and the broader public access to accurate historical information. Conversations are more open. There’s greater willingness—among non-Indigenous people especially—to listen, learn, and reconsider those long-held social mythologies. Today’s understanding is more grounded in reality than it used to be.
I was working hard to raise awareness about something that deeply concerned me. An NDP Member of Parliament from Winnipeg introduced a private member’s bill that would have criminalized the denial of the residential school system.
Jacobsen: How did that go over?
Cook: Well, while I believe that residential schools were a horrific part of Canadian history—and that the intergenerational trauma they caused is still being felt today—I don’t think criminalizing denial helps truth and reconciliation. And it certainly doesn’t support the free speech rights of non-Indigenous Canadians.
I’ve had many conversations with people who didn’t believe in or understand the impacts of residential schools. I often wonder whether I could have had those conversations if a law had made such speech a felony. I’m relieved to say that the bill did not pass the first reading in the House of Commons.
Jacobsen: That’s good to hear. That’s a win for open discourse. These conversations will be exploratory, and while there will be common themes and throughlines, we’ll also encounter offshoots. That issue you raised—around free speech and truth-seeking—is critical. It resonates across different communities in Canada.
How do different communities, in your experience—Francophone, Anglophone, Indigenous, and others—view universal rights commonly claimed internationally, such as freedom of expression or speech, especially as they’re articulated in the U.S.? How are those rights viewed, upheld, or contested in public, private, or sacred spaces within these cultural contexts?
Cook: That’s a great question, but I am unlikely to answer comprehensively since I live in one small corner of southern Ontario. I can only speak to what I’ve seen locally.
But it’s interesting. One thing that stands out is how cultural shifts in Indigenous communities—both on reserves and among urban Indigenous populations—have been influenced by younger generations attending Indigenous Studies programs in colleges and universities. I’ve been involved for over 35 years in the Elders’ Conference at Trent University in Peterborough. The tone and focus of that gathering have changed dramatically over the decades.
Like the rest of North America, there is a widening political divide. On the right wing, there tends to be skepticism about what is seen as special rights or accommodations for Indigenous peoples—questions about responsibilities and accountability. On the left wing, particularly within academic environments, there’s often a tendency to avoid saying anything that could be construed as challenging the dominant narratives taught in Indigenous Studies courses.
You risk being accused of creating an “unsafe” environment; honestly, I find that term increasingly vague. It used to refer to a physical threat, but now it can mean someone holds a different opinion from you on campus—the redefinition of “unsafe” to include disagreement.
I’m rambling now, but my answer to your question is elsewhere.
Jacobsen: It’s like that old Billy Connolly joke about getting older—he says (and I’m paraphrasing here, Jacobsenizing it): when you’re young, someone comes into town and asks you for directions to the gas station. You confidently lift your arm, point with your finger, and say: “Go two streets north, take a left, then a right. You’ll be at Smith and Cook Avenue. The gas station’s right there. You’re good to go.”
“Thank you for that, sir. Have a good day.”
Then you get to middle age, and you just sort of wave vaguely with your arm—”Yeah, it’s over there, young man.”
And by the time you’re in your eighties, you’re lifting your leg and going, “Over there!” You know? It’s somewhere in that general direction.
Cook: [Laughing].
Jacobsen: Somewhere in that general direction—that’s precisely it. Now, a pattern in public discourse connects to what you’ve just described. When people speak in the terms you just used—thoughtfully but with nuance—they are sometimes misunderstood, either deliberately or inadvertently. That misunderstanding is then used as grounds to accuse them of dismissing Indigenous teachings or even of being belligerent toward those who describe themselves as feeling unsafe.
How do you feel when you hear someone attributing motives like that to things you genuinely believe? How are your views being mischaracterized—or, on the more benign side, how are they being misunderstood?
Cook: That’s a great question. I love to philosophize, so stand by… [Laughing]
You’ve captured the polarization well. Some people, yes, are intentionally provocative—they want to be misunderstood or create conflict. On the other hand, there’s a tendency to be hyper-vigilant—a kind of eagerness to pounce on any statement that might not align perfectly with what’s expected. They say it becomes a race to display our virtue or signal.
But the reality lies in the middle. And that’s where the real work of democracy and dialogue happens.
We think of democracy as voting for someone who disappears into a legislature to make decisions. But in truth, democracy is the conversation. It’s the dialogue we have as a society.
If you look at small Indigenous bands historically, decisions were made collectively: where to move, when to hunt, how to respond to challenges. That was real, participatory decision-making—consensus-based. As populations grew and governance became more complex, that model had to evolve. However, the essential ingredient remains: meaningful dialogue that defines the middle ground.
To bring this back to Indigenous roots, the Haudenosaunee Confederacy—the union of the Five (later Six) Nations—is often cited as one of the inspirations for American democracy. That system of deliberative councils and consensus-seeking is a powerful model.
Unfortunately, today, we’ve moved far from that. We’re at a point where people on opposite ends of the spectrum can no longer even speak to each other. Everyone sees the other as an enemy rather than someone with a different perspective.
You’re right. On both extremes, it’s not about understanding anymore—it’s about triggering a reaction or defending territory. But democracy cannot survive without conversation, and we lose a lot when we abandon the middle ground.
It’s about active listening. Listening so that you can hear someone and repeat what they just said to demonstrate understanding rather than interrupting to make your point. That’s missing from many conversations now.
I have a theory about that. When I worked for a vast Fortune 50 corporation, I had the honour of contributing to DARPANet, which was the predecessor to what we now call the Internet. I was on the front lines of Internet development in Canada and North America—working on IP addressing, how networks function, how computers talk, and so on.
Then, in the late 1970s and early 1980s, I worked on efforts related to the World Wide Web and how it could be opened for commercial use. The Web was envisioned as a beautiful, global network of connections—a web of shared knowledge, freely accessible and interactive.
But this Web has become a series of cocoons. People don’t hear each other anymore. Instead, they’re caught in echo chambers, where they only receive information reinforcing their beliefs.
Algorithmic polarization: The algorithms behind social media platforms now filter content so that you rarely encounter ideas that challenge your worldview. If you lean left, your feed is filled with progressive content. If you lean right, you get conservative content.
So, instead of a web connecting people and ideas, we’ve ended up with millions of isolated and insulating bubbles. People don’t even know that other perspectives exist anymore. They hear their thoughts reflected on them.
Jacobsen: That’s not off-topic—it’s a key part of this discussion. What people now call virtue signalling, for instance—it’s not a new phenomenon. We talk about it more explicitly now.
Looking at the last five to twenty-five years, you can see it evolve in public discourse. For example, on the left, wearing a rainbow lapel pin signals affiliation and values. On the right, someone might wear a Christian cross. Both are symbolic affirmations of identity and belief systems. It’s the same impulse, just expressed differently depending on the group.
When people talk about “wokeness,” it’s not fundamentally different from the conversations around identity politics we saw in the 1990s. Those earlier discussions were more implicit, while today’s are explicit—partly because of the digital tools you helped build: the Internet, social media, and open commentary platforms. Everything is exposed now; everything is analyzed or debated instantly.
So we’ve seen this explosion of neologisms—some serious, some silly—all part of a broader cultural shift toward explicit signalling. But returning to our core topic—Anishinaabe culture—we’ve been reflecting on Midewiwin, the Grand Medicine Society.
Cook: [Laughing] Sorry—I have an opinion on everything.
Jacobsen: No, that’s fine. That’s the point of this kind of dialogue—to explore thoughts that aren’t usually expressed inside the Beltway or in typical public discourse. And it’s also an opportunity to bring cultural memory and philosophical perspective into deeper public awareness.
We discussed the Ojibwe and some of the broader Anishinaabe identity. But what about the more spiritual or ceremonial aspects—the degrees of initiation, moral teachings, balance, healing, herbal medicine, medicine lodges, chanting, and drumming?
You carried the fight, so to speak. You lived with both the theoretical understanding and practical application of this worldview. How did traditional beliefs frame ideas like the world and the Creator? Would you say that worldview is monotheistic—or is that a result of Christian influence, shaping the image of an intervening Creator?
Cook: Again, I can only speak from personal experience—and it’s important to note that Indigenous cultures are oral traditions. So, everything gets passed down through storytelling, and every elder brings their knowledge, memory, and philosophy to their teaching.
The result is that the stories vary. No matter how much we respect the teachings or the history, there’s no such thing as a single, unchanging version. As I’ve gotten older—and now consider myself an elder—I’ve become acutely aware of how fragile memory can be and how much responsibility it takes to carry those stories forward.
When I was younger, the culture I was taught was not formalized. It was experiential—you learned by being there, by participating. There were seasonal rhythms—like telling stories in the winter, an established cultural practice—but the storytelling was light-hearted, even humorous. There wasn’t the solemnity I see today.
Over time, things have become much more formal. There’s now a strong emphasis on protocols, like clearly stating your name, your community of origin, and your clan and doing so in Anishinaabemowin (our language), even if that’s the only part of the language someone knows. There’s also the expectation to establish credibility—to show who your elders were, who taught you, and whether you are authorized to share what you’re about to say.
That wasn’t the case when I was younger. But now, the role of “Traditional Knowledge Keeper” is formalized and widely used, especially in academic settings and government relations. A big part of that came from the rise of Indigenous Studies programs at universities. Those programs needed structure, so they created protocols to ensure that only those with proper knowledge and cultural authority could teach or share stories.
I understand its intent—ensuring authenticity and preventing cultural misappropriation—but the formality has become quite rigid. It’s now common that, right after someone introduces themselves, they’ll light a smudge—often using a smudge bowl made from an abalone shell, even though abalone isn’t from this region. The same goes for sage, which is not traditional to all territories but is now widely used.
So, there’s been much cross-pollination—ceremonial blending—between First Nations across Canada’s diverse regions. Historically, hundreds, if not thousands, of distinct communities, nations, and cultural protocols—from coast to coast. But now, there’s a kind of pan-Indigenous ceremonial standardization, where some practices have become symbolic shorthand for Indigenous identity, regardless of their geographic origin.
And over time, there’s been much blending—so much so that if you attend a powwow anywhere in North America, you’ll likely see women dancing in traditional jingle dresses. It’s a regalia adorned with 365 cones, often made from the lids of snuff cans. Each cone represents a day of the year and is specifically sewn onto the dress. The sound they produce during the dance is part of the healing tradition.
It’s become that rigid, formalized—and you can now see consistently from Mexico to the northern territories. Well, perhaps less so among Inuit communities, but certainly within a broad swath of First Nations and Native American cultures, you see this kind of cultural homogenization.
Jacobsen: So, let me ask you this. What’s your take on Canada’s earlier cultural flashpoints—the Oka Crisis? How do you see those moments now?
Cook: Oh, wow. The Oka Crisis (1990) was a defining moment for Canada, especially for people in Ontario and Quebec—the so-called centre of Canada. It was the first time that many Canadians had to confront the reality that there were unresolved land disputes, some going back centuries, and that Indigenous people were not a relic of the past. They were present, organized, and resisting.
It forced the conversation into the open and made people aware that fundamentally different worldviews were at play—particularly sovereignty, land stewardship, and historical injustice. But like most big cultural moments, it also became deeply polarizing.
Some people were severely injured—people throwing stones—and others were offering help and support. A similar situation happened here in Ontario with the Ipperwash Provincial Park standoff (1995) when the Premier sent in the Ontario Provincial Police (OPP). They shot and killed Dudley George, a young man who was not posing any physical threat. It became an embarrassment and a tragedy.
Events like Ipperwash and Oka truly set the stage for the emergence of the Truth and Reconciliation Commission. They pushed the public to realize that something needed to change—that Canadians needed to become more aware of Indigenous history, the longstanding injustices, and the ongoing consequences Indigenous communities still face as a result. They were defining moments—significant events.
Jacobsen: Now, shifting a bit more toward the central focus of this project—when we talk about people who reject supernaturalism or theistic interpretations of belief within Indigenous traditions, there’s often a social cost.
In European, Anglo, and Franco-North American cultures, people who reject religion or belief in God are often met with a wide range of slurs—“devil-worshipper,” “possessed,” “demonic,” “immoral,” “untrustworthy,” “disgusting,” and so on. These labels don’t function as intellectual arguments—they’re emotional reactions. They show up in polling and population studies as deeply ingrained sentiments toward atheists and humanists.
This prejudice has real economic, social, familial, and professional consequences. Take the example of a woman in a fundamentalist Christian community working at a university with doctrinal covenants. If she gets divorced, that can be considered grounds for dismissal or social shunning. The emotional pain can be deep—and neuroscience tells us that social rejection activates the same brain regions as physical pain.
Now, within a Canadian Indigenous context, particularly in Anishinaabe communities, are there slurs or informal labels used to describe those who reject traditional beliefs—especially those from Indigenous backgrounds themselves? And how do those social dynamics unfold?
Cook: Great question. The only epithet I can remember growing up was for Native people who were seen as “not Native enough.” In other words, if someone had adopted more mainstream, settler characteristics, they’d be called an “apple”—red on the outside, white on the inside. That’s the only derogatory term I ever heard used within the community.
In Anishinaabemowin, there are some terms for non-Native people that can carry a derogatory tone depending on how they’re used. I remember one elder in particular who always referred to white people with a specific term—though I haven’t heard it used in a long time. I don’t know the exact linguistic root of the word, but it was always spoken with a tone of contempt, so it carried weight.
But to your main point—no, I haven’t heard specific slurs or labels used against Indigenous atheists or secular people within the community. You’re right, though: in broader society, people who reject supernatural beliefs get hit with negative assumptions. But I haven’t observed a structured vocabulary around that kind of rejection within Anishinaabe communities, at least not in my experience.
Over time, things have become much more formal. There’s now a strong emphasis on protocols, like clearly stating your name, your community of origin, and your clan and doing so in Anishinaabemowin (our language), even if that’s the only part of the language someone knows. There’s also the expectation to establish credibility—to show who your elders were, who taught you, and whether you are authorized to share what you’re about to say.
That wasn’t the case when I was younger. But now, the role of “Traditional Knowledge Keeper” is formalized and widely used, especially in academic settings and government relations. A big part of that came from the rise of Indigenous Studies programs at universities. Those programs needed structure, so they created protocols to ensure that only those with proper knowledge and cultural authority could teach or share stories.
Jacobsen: I mean, if you’re only hearing epithets in English, as opposed to, say, Finnish or Arabic or Anishinaabemowin, does that in itself serve as a kind of psycho-cultural commentary on the use—or limitation—of slurs?
Cook: That’s a good question. I don’t know. There could be all kinds of factors contributing to that dynamic. It might also be that not everyone speaks Anishinaabemowin fluently enough anymore to use slurs in the original language—or even to recognize them if they’re used. So, if those sentiments are expressed, they’re more likely to appear in English, where they’re understood. It’s tough to say what the root of that would be.
Jacobsen: If there’s not much in terms of verbal slurs, then what about other forms of social consequences? Not necessarily professional impacts—but gossip, social standing, and social status. That’s a big part of any culture.
Cook: Absolutely. I think there are all kinds of social consequences for not following what I’d call the “received wisdom”—the currently accepted norms or teachings within the community.
Before we started recording, I told you about a social worker I know who worked for Native Family Services. He’s about fifteen years younger than I am. He grew up on a reserve, and although he identifies as Indigenous, he eventually felt forced to leave his position.
He struggled with expecting every meeting to begin with a smudging ceremony, prayers, sage, abalone shells, eagle feathers, etc. He was told he’d be required to take turns leading the ceremonies—to say the opening prayer, light the smudge, and perform those protocols.
When he said he didn’t want to participate, the response was unsupportive. He wasn’t given space to opt-out. He was made to feel very uncomfortable—like he wasn’t “Native enough.” So yes, even in the workplace, there are real consequences for not conforming to certain spiritual expectations.
Jacobsen: That’s significant.
Cook: It is. Because so much of what is now called “Native culture” is deeply tied to spiritual practice. And I use the word spiritual here more in the religious sense—because when something is no longer optional when it’s mandatory, it stops being about personal spirituality and becomes more like a codified belief system—almost like organized religion.
Jacobsen: That distinction makes much sense.
Cook: For example, when I was growing up, women were not allowed to sit at the big ceremonial drums. There were strict gender roles embedded in the ceremonial life. There was much pushback from the 1960s through the 1980s, especially as broader society moved toward women’s equality. But in many Indigenous communities, especially in ceremonial contexts, women were still restricted from participating fully—particularly if they were on what we call their moon time.
During their menstrual cycle, during their moon, women were often expected to abstain from participating in ceremonies. That was the tradition. But that tradition has also been challenged, especially by younger generations. Still, even today, there are ongoing tensions around these issues. So again, when spiritual practices become mandatory, especially in public or professional settings, they stop being spiritual personally and start resembling an institutional system of belief.
So, during their menstrual cycle, women were not allowed to participate in certain aspects of ceremonial life—sometimes even to the extent of not being in the presence of men during specific spiritual events. There are separate ceremonies for men and women. I have many teachings I’m not permitted to share with women, and my wife has teachings she’s not allowed to share with men.
There are still very distinct roles for men and women. For example, women are the carriers of water at ceremonies. Only women are permitted to touch the water and prepare it. Women traditionally gather the so-called “sacred medicines”—cedar, sage, sweetgrass, and tobacco.
Then, there are specific ceremonial medicines—some used only by women and others only by men. I have to be careful here not to share teachings that could get me into trouble, but yes, there are medicines restricted by gender.
During menstruation, a woman on her moon cannot participate in ceremonies and is expected to avoid ceremonial grounds. At full moon, women’s ceremonies celebrate the menstruation cycle, while men hold their parallel gatherings—often involving cleaning ceremonial pipes, for example. These dual ceremonies happen every full moon.
It’s challenging to separate cultural from spiritual or religious aspects because the two are deeply entwined in Indigenous traditions. But what’s clear is that gender plays a significant role in determining who can do what within ceremonial life.
And if you don’t believe in those teachings—if you’re an Indigenous atheist or secular humanist—there are social ramifications. Questions arise: Can you participate in ceremonies? Can you be a dancer at a powwow?
Let me give an example. I helped create a Native cultural community centre here in the Durham region of Ontario, where I live. We didn’t have any services for what we used to call urban Indians—people living off-reserve in urban areas. So we created this centre to offer programming and support. I was elected chief of that organization’s council.
Now, I used to get into trouble constantly. In Anishinaabe culture, people dance clockwise around the drum at powwows. But here, we also have Haudenosaunee people—alongside Inuit and other First Nations folks—who have different ceremonial expectations. For example, some Haudenosaunee teachings say you must dance counterclockwise around the drum.
So, what do you do in an urban setting where one group deeply believes in dancing clockwise and another holds just as strongly to dancing counterclockwise?
That’s a powerful image—and pretty funny. It is a sort of ceremonial traffic jam. It shows how diverse Indigenous cultures are, even among just the First Nations, not to mention Métis and Inuit peoples. It also highlights the challenge of creating inclusive ceremonial spaces in urban environments—where you’re not just dealing with intercultural dynamics between Indigenous and non-Indigenous people but also intracultural tensions within Indigenous communities themselves.
Jacobsen: That reminds me of the diversity in Christian traditions, too. For instance, the modern evangelical movement in the U.S. and Canada is relatively uniform. However, traditions like Eastern Orthodoxy and Roman Catholicism remain distinct, owing to their long historical separation—between Ecumenical Patriarch Bartholomew and the Pope.
Cook: Right—and even within those traditions, each has its own internal governance, rituals, and symbolic systems, just like us.
Jacobsen: That’s correct. And in Eastern Orthodoxy, the Ecumenical Patriarch is called “first among equals”—a primus inter pares. However, The Catholic Church does not see the Pope that way. So there’s a lateralization of hierarchy in Eastern Orthodoxy that you don’t see in Catholicism, where the hierarchy is more pyramidal.
Given that, though—and more to the point ritualistically—both the Eastern Orthodox and Catholics, from what I’ve seen in their communities, have a very intricate ceremonial life. I don’t mean “better,” just more complex in structure, especially compared to modern evangelical or prosperity gospel movements, which tend to be simpler in ritual and more overtly political in tone after their Sunday services.
From what you describe about the Anishinaabe, I understand that the rituals are deeply tied to place, history, and cultural memory. Almost everything is done within a spiritual context, whereas in Catholic or Orthodox Christianity, the rituals are rich and symbolic. However, many adherents return to their regular, often secular, lives after the liturgy.
Cook: I think that’s fair. I also believe that a kind of hierarchy of belief or ritual commitment exists within Anishinaabe communities. Let me go back to an example.
Just north of here—about a twenty-minute ride on Lake Scugog—there’s a First Nation where I have many ties. I probably spent as much time there as I did on Rice Lake, where I grew up. That community had a longstanding chief lineage—a family that had held that leadership position across several generations.
But I remember from back then that there wasn’t much visible spiritual practice. It all seemed private; at least, that’s how I experienced it.
Just before COVID, I went up to visit friends in that community. I dropped into the health centre and chatted with some people about my history with the Nation. I’d helped them re-establish the powwow there about thirty or thirty-five years ago. At the time, they had never held a powwow, but I’d been involved in running a successful one in Oshawa for about five or six years. They asked me to help organize their first one—show them how to build the arbour for the drum according to tradition, invite elders, and how to structure the event.
When I visited more recently, I spoke about possibly getting more involved in the community again. But they asked me directly whether I was Midewiwin—or Mide, as it’s often shortened. They implied that if I wasn’t, I might not be welcome like I once was.
That’s a community I grew up in. But they had started holding Midewiwin ceremonies regularly, and those come with a much more formal structure. So yes, there’s a hierarchy there. That particular spiritual tradition—the Midewiwin or Grand Medicine Society—requires a kind of adherence to specific teachings, ceremonies, and protocols.
You could compare it loosely to a Masonic lodge in structure—not in content, but in how it’s organized into degrees or levels. As you advance, you gain access to more profound teachings, some of which are kept secret or sacred until you reach a certain level or have participated for several years.
Jacobsen: That’s a very structured system. You mentioned earlier the status of women as a factor. Most cultures at least pay lip service to the ideals the international community promotes—things like gender equality and inclusivity.
What parts of traditional or historical Indigenous culture—specifically Anishinaabe—do you see as genuinely practicing gender parity? And conversely, where is that parity lacking? Especially in today’s conversation, are there ways that transcendental, supernatural, or extra-material justifications are used to explain or defend those inequalities—or even to silence criticism?
Cook: Great question. Let me start with something I touched on earlier—women sitting at the drum. Today, if you attend powwows—certainly in this region—you will see women sitting at the main drum and singing, the big drum representing Mother Earth’s heartbeat. Traditionally, women used smaller hand drums, usually 12 to 18 inches in diameter, and men sat at the big drum. That’s changed. There’s no more gender parity in that ceremonial role, at least in some communities.
As for justifications for maintaining older traditions or exclusions—yes, there are stories. Indigenous cultures often preserve and transmit social structures through traditional narratives. These stories are told to explain why things are the way they are, often in spiritual or cosmological terms.
To give you a tangible example: at a powwow, a man can dress however he likes—shorts, a T-shirt, and running shoes. He’ll still be allowed into the circle to dance. Some of us old-timers still wear ribbon shirts and regalia, of course. But if a woman shows up in a dress that doesn’t go to her ankles, someone will almost certainly take her aside, ask her to change, or even leave the circle.
That gender-specific expectation is still very much present—at least here. It could certainly be viewed as restrictive or patriarchal from a mainstream cultural lens. However, within the culture, teachings passed to women help contextualize and justify these expectations. Whether you see it as subjugation or sacred protocol depends on your frame of reference.
Jacobsen: That reflects a broader tension—between cultural tradition and modern equality frameworks. And I’ve seen this tension play out even in international settings. I did two weeks of journalism in mid-March at UN headquarters in New York City during the 69th Session of the Commission on the Status of Women (CSW69). I sat in on an entirely Indigenous-led session with a panel of Canadian Indigenous women—both young and older voices.
The stories shared were incredibly moving. There were moments during the panel when there was open crying—not just among the speakers but also among the audience. The speakers discussed intergenerational trauma, displacement, gender-based violence, resilience, leadership, and cultural renewal.
That kind of setting brings out the depth of these issues. It shows how women’s voices in Indigenous communities—especially when given a platform—often expand and complicate the narrative beyond the neat boxes that institutions like the UN try to put things in.
These weren’t minor figures either—these were foremost Canadian Indigenous leaders, speaking candidly. At the same time, you had high-profile figures like Bob Rae, Canada’s ambassador to the UN, walking through because he had other meetings—there was this strange mix of formality and intimacy.
What struck me most, though, was how it tied back to what you mentioned earlier—the consciously inflicted tragedy of the residential school system. What I saw in that room wasn’t necessarily what I’d call healing, at least not in the clinical or complete sense. It was more like people were, at that moment, relieving themselves of the burden of silence—finally saying things aloud that had weighed on them.
To me, that release—while powerful—is private and not always therapeutic in the lasting sense. It’s more like a momentary purging. It’s the difference between washing a wound and disinfecting and stitching it. That open expression of pain, especially in a public space where others have shared history if not identical experiences, creates a kind of communal recognition.
Now, the women themselves would describe it far more eloquently and precisely. However, that was the emotional atmosphere I absorbed from that session at the UN in New York. That said, this living history is not something we can choose to ignore. It’s here, whether we talk about it or not. That brings me to this: Are there contexts in which traditional beliefs can offer an anchor, a sense of grounding—but where supernatural elements or superstitions surrounding those beliefs may not serve long-term health or healing?
I’m thinking here of something Noam Chomsky once shared. He described knowing an immigrant mother who had lost her child. She found deep comfort in the belief that she would be reunited in heaven with her child after her death.
Chomsky, of course, didn’t believe in that promise. But he also didn’t try to strip her of that consolation. He understood that in the moment, it brought genuine emotional relief. Still, he questioned whether that kind of belief system, while temporarily comforting, is ultimately sustainable or healthy. It’s sort of like using an antidepressant or anxiolytic for a period of acute need—but then pairing that with practical life changes or cognitive tools that support longer-term well-being.
Over time, you wean off the medication, and you’re left with sustainable skills and insights. In this way, the person can integrate their trauma rather than escape it.
So, Can traditional Indigenous spirituality serve that kind of transitional function—providing ritual and meaning early on but eventually giving way to something more lasting, less myth-bound, and potentially more universal? They’re dealing with the context of their own life story.
Cook: Absolutely. And I have some pretty strong opinions about that—because I know so many people who experienced residential schools firsthand and who still live with that trauma. And what’s even more heartbreaking is how that trauma was often passed on. It created parents who didn’t know how to nurture or protect their children, and those children—now adults—passed the trauma on again to their kids. That’s the intergenerational trauma we keep talking about.
This is one of my core criticisms of Indigenous humanism as it is sometimes practiced today. One of its guiding ideas is the creation of strong communities rooted in culturally grounded mental and physical health programs tailored to Indigenous needs. While that’s well-intentioned, I worry that, in some cases, it does not address the root problems.
It’s similar to my broader critique of religion. As Marx said, it’s the opium of the masses—not because it’s inherently evil, but because it can offer a Band-Aid without providing honest answers. It may feel good to believe in the power of prayer. But to me, prayer and meditation are quite different. Meditation is an internal process, a focus on self-awareness and grounding. In many traditions, prayer involves asking for something, often from a higher power. That’s a very different kind of psychological engagement.
My point is this: religions tend to provide emotional scaffolding, a way of soothing pain. But mental health professionals can do that too, and in many cases, more effectively, without relying on superstition or magical thinking.
So, in the Indigenous context, when Native spirituality is used to help people cope, yes—it can offer comfort. But I also think it can delay more profound healing or perpetuate specific traumas under the guise of tradition. Some of this intergenerational pain might be addressed earlier and more effectively if we approached it with direct, evidence-based support instead of spiritualized frameworks alone.
Jacobsen: That’s a very personal critique. Speaking of personal—what about your own experience, living as an atheist within the community?
Cook: [Laughing] The short answer is: I’m not really “out.”
Jacobsen: Oh? Some people might be in for a surprise.
Cook: Yeah— Because honestly, it wasn’t hard for me to step away from social and ceremonial aspects of community life.
All of my elders, the people I deeply respected—the ones who made the Native community meaningful to me—have passed away. That’s the thing about being an elder: there’s only one destination, and we’re all moving quickly. (chuckles)
I’d had conversations with a few while they were still alive. They knew where I stood. They understood that for me, participating in ceremonies wasn’t about belief but culture and showing respect for our traditions and them.
For example, when I was growing up, the concept of a single, monotheistic Creator never really came up—at least not in any way I remember. That may have been introduced later or emphasized more heavily as Christian influence spread.
When we got into a canoe to cross a lake, we would put down tobacco at the edge of the water—or directly into the water—to honour and protect ourselves from the spirits believed to inhabit the area.
There’s a specific water spirit in Anishinaabe tradition, Mishipeshu, or the underwater panther. In our traditions, Mishipeshu lives in lakes and rivers. If you fail to pay proper respect, you might experience a storm, or your canoe could capsize, or worse. That spirit wasn’t just a story—it was part of the everyday consciousness of being on the land and water.
As a kid, when you were alone in the forest, we also had stories about Wendigos. There’s even a famous poem about them. In our culture, the Wendigo was this malevolent, ghost-like creature—part spirit, part cautionary tale. They were associated with greed, cannibalism, and spiritual imbalance. They lived in the woods and were a real part of the spiritual landscape.
Everyday life included constant gestures of respect toward nature and the spirits. In that way, it’s very similar to Shinto, the traditional Indigenous religion of Japan, where kami, or spirits, are found in rocks, trees, rivers, and mountains. That was the world I grew up in.
Even now, when I walk past a giant tree, I instinctively put my hand on it—not because I believe it will speak to me, but out of respect. So, maybe some of my “superstitious” thinking hasn’t completely left me. But for me, it’s not superstition—it’s about honouring the natural world around me. Or at least, that’s how I justify it now.
As a child, though, this wasn’t metaphorical. It was literal. We believed in individual spirits—everywhere. And this is deeply embedded in Anishinaabemowin, our language. The language doesn’t just have masculine and feminine genders, like French or Spanish—it also distinguishes between animate and inanimate nouns.
And what’s considered “animate” isn’t always what Western culture would define that way. A boulder, for instance—a glacial erratic you might stumble upon in the forest—is considered animate because it has spirit. We’d refer to it as a grandfather, a being who has been there since time immemorial.
In the sweat lodge ceremony, when heated stones are brought in, they’re not just “rocks”—they are greeted as grandfathers (Mishomis) and treated with reverence. That’s the spirituality I grew up with. It’s not monotheistic or dogmatic, just interwoven with the land, the water, and the life around us.
Jacobsen: How are you distinguishing Indigenous humanism (or Native humanism) from secular humanism? And why don’t we collapse the terms under something broader like Humanists International’s definition of humanism?
Cook: Because they’re not the same. In some ways, yes—there’s overlap, and they can work together in many areas, but at a fundamental level, they’re incompatible.
Secular humanism is grounded in reason, science, and ethics without reliance on the supernatural. It emerged from the Age of Reason, and its philosophical foundations rest on empirical evidence, reproducibility, and skeptical inquiry.
On the other hand, Indigenous humanism is deeply embedded in spirituality and cultural tradition. Spirituality and culture are not separable in Indigenous contexts. There’s no culture without spirituality and no spirituality without culture. They’re intertwined.
Indigenous humanism also emphasizes connection to nature, reverence for the land, and relational thinking, aligning with some of secular humanism’s environmental ethics. So there’s common ground, especially around values like sustainability and community well-being.
However, the gap becomes philosophically significant when one worldview is based on ancestral wisdom, oral tradition, and what’s now often called “alternative ways of knowing,” and the other is based on scientific rationalism.
Jacobsen: What do you make of attempts to merge the two—to create some hybrid identity between Indigenous and secular humanism?
Cook: I think doing so requires a massive amount of cognitive dissonance. The two systems operate on very different epistemological foundations.
Secular humanism—again—is about what can be tested, measured, and replicated. It’s a product of Enlightenment thinking. Indigenous humanism is about lived experience, ancestral teachings, oral transmission, and sacred relationships with land and life. When someone tries to blend the two, they often end up unconsciously prioritizing one over the other or reframing one to fit the lens of the other.
And to be honest, the modern framing of “alternative ways of knowing” tends to get used in philosophically muddy ways. It can obscure more than it reveals, especially when not critically examined.
Jacobsen: Would it be fair to say that secular humanism doesn’t offer a “variety of ways of knowing” but a shared standard of inquiry?
Cook: It’s not about many truths—it’s about one standard for evaluating truth claims. In that sense, it doesn’t offer pluralism the way Indigenous frameworks do. And that’s where deep tensions arise when people try to conflate the two without acknowledging that.
So that concept—“ways of knowing”—is one that, as a secular humanist and as a scientist, I find very difficult to accept in a literal sense. I don’t believe there are multiple valid epistemologies when uncovering truth. There are ways of being, indeed—those are cultural. But I’m very skeptical of ways of knowing as alternative epistemic systems.
We know things through scientific inquiry and critical thinking—through processes that yield repeatable and reproducible results. That’s the foundation of empirical knowledge. Now, I know there’s a common critique that science is reductionist. That’s true, but reductionism has also given us tremendous insight into the natural world and a robust framework for understanding reality.
My experience has been that Indigenous ways of knowing are often tied to experiential learning—through direct engagement, observation, and interaction with the environment. This can be valuable as a teaching method and cultural transmission, but it is unreliable for discovering objective truths.
We’d still be stuck in a Newtonian physics model if we relied solely on direct experience as a path to knowledge. We wouldn’t have the relativity of Einstein or the quantum models of the subatomic world—because you can’t see those things with the naked eye. Much of what we now understand about the universe is counterintuitive, and it took sophisticated tools and models to uncover those truths.
The reality is that humans have cognitive biases—lots of them. And when we rely only on intuition, feeling, or observation without rigour, we risk being led astray. I often hear, even within Indigenous communities, references to people who claim psychic abilities or who say they “just know” something spiritually or emotionally about the land or the Creator—because of a sign or feeling only they can perceive. That’s very similar to what you hear in other religious traditions.
As a humanist, I struggle to understand how that could be called knowledge in any formal sense. We must be careful not to confuse belief or emotional insight with empirical evidence. Many people feel compelled to pay deference to Indigenous humanism because they have a genuine desire for reconciliation, respect, and inclusion. I support that. I respect the individuals.
But that doesn’t mean I have to respect the belief system—especially when the system makes claims unfalsifiable or unsupported by evidence. So, when someone says, “I know this is true because an elder told me,” it’s a classic example of an appeal to authority. By scientific standards, that doesn’t constitute knowledge.
To be clear, Indigenous humanism has beautiful and valuable elements. The ethical teachings, especially around respect for the environment, are profound. But even there, we must be honest—those values are not unique to Indigenous worldviews. Take Greta Thunberg, for example. She is not Indigenous, yet her environmental ethic is evident, principled, and powerful.
Jacobsen: We also need to distinguish between humaneness, as in compassion or emotional sensitivity, and humanism, as a defined philosophical and ethical worldview. You mentioned feelings earlier—that idea of having a feeling about a rock, a vibe from a place, or a sense about a person.
That kind of subjective experience—how I feel about a particular location or object—might be meaningful in a personal or cultural context. Still, it’s not a factual claim about that location’s chemistry, biology, or geophysics.
Those are different domains. One is about the internal emotional experience; the other is about objective external reality. Confusing the two can lead to misunderstandings within Indigenous communities and broader knowledge, belief, and truth discussions.
There’s a subjective fact there. You can describe how someone feels about something and that’s real for them. However, it does not represent the objective state of affairs external to the person. It’s not about the object itself but about how that person experiences the object.
So, there’s a difference between that kind of emotional resonance and what we might call the “woo-woo” formulation of a vibe. In the 1960s and 1970s, this vibe culture emerged among many Euro-American communities, especially within a hippie culture—a sort of diffuse, mystical energy reading of the world.
But that’s distinct from something like intuition. Sure, people can misunderstand or misuse intuition, but in many cases, intuition is grounded—it’s developed from experience and a deep familiarity with a field. For example, a scientist might have a hunch about a hypothesis or direction for research based on years of work, even before the data fully confirms it.
So those are subtle but important distinctions. And I think there’s a humanistic, empirical way to talk about those kinds of experiences—intuition, emotion, reverence—without turning them into mysticism or supernaturalism. That way, we respect the emotional or intuitive side of human understanding while remaining grounded in the natural world and a commitment to truth.
Cook: I agree. And earlier, you used the word “humaneness.” I think as a secular humanist, and in my case, not just an atheist but an anti-theist—because I believe religion does real harm—it’s still essential to recognize context. I don’t need to brandish my atheism in people’s faces.
If someone finds comfort at a funeral because they believe their loved one is in a better place, now is not the time to challenge them. That’s not compassion. A compassionate stance is central to secular humanism—the desire to support well-being and respect others, even if we don’t share their beliefs.
So I get it if someone tells me they had a powerful emotional experience in the woods—a deep sense of connection or reverence. I’ve stood under the aurora borealis and felt awe; that emotional reaction is human. It might arise from intuition, nature’s scale, or raw beauty. And that feeling can lead us into scientific exploration. The stars can move you, and you still want to understand the physics behind them.
So again, to return to what I said before, conversation is critical. We lose opportunities for shared understanding when we shut down dialogue or categorically dismiss something without engaging.
Many discuss integrating science and Indigenous humanism or bringing the two into respectful dialogue. I support that principle—as long as we maintain clarity about what we mean by knowledge, belief, emotion, and experience.
And probably the most controversial thing I’ll say is this: I don’t think there is anything uniquely Indigenous—in terms of knowledge or worldview—that doesn’t exist elsewhere. That doesn’t mean it isn’t valuable, but I question whether it’s epistemically unique. I’d go so far as to say that, in some cases, these cultural beliefs can have an adverse effect—they can hinder rather than help.
I have two anecdotal examples that shed light on what I mean.
First, I recently watched a documentary about bison in Yellowstone National Park. Researchers had long believed the bison population was dwindling because wolves had been reintroduced to the park. But after years of research and scientific reductionism—they discovered that the real culprit was lake trout.
Here’s how: the lake trout were predators of salmon, a primary food source for grizzly bears. And grizzlies, who usually don’t prey on bison outside of a very short period during calving, were now starving. The only time bears can kill bison is for about two weeks in the spring when the calves are still tiny. However, the bears hunted more young bison during that narrow window because of the salmon shortage. Wolves had not contributed to the bison population decline.
You can only arrive at that kind of conclusion through systematic scientific inquiry. You cannot deduce that from direct observation alone—not with any reliability. Yes, maybe you’d intuit that something upstream was causing the bears to behave differently, but then you would need to test that hypothesis in a repeatable and reproducible way. That’s how we know what’s happening.
The second example relates to archaeological research. The Smithsonian Institution has a vast collection of human skulls from all over the world. These have been used for anthropological, archaeological, and evolutionary research. Some of the skulls in the collection are of Indigenous origin.
The law rightly states that when the provenance—that is, the tribal or cultural origin—of a skull is known, it should be returned to that Indigenous group for repatriation and appropriate cultural handling. I fully support that.
But it becomes complicated here: many skulls have unknown or unverifiable provenance. And some Indigenous groups are now refusing to allow any study of those skulls. In some cases, female researchers are prohibited from touching the remains during certain times of the month based on ceremonial protocols. Even x-rays of the skulls—non-invasive digital scans—are sometimes requested to be returned or destroyed because they are also considered sacred representations of the remains.
Now, I ask—where do we draw the line? I find it very difficult to see how treating an X-ray as a sacred object benefits anyone, especially when we’re talking about the pursuit of human knowledge and scientific understanding that could benefit all people, including Indigenous communities themselves.
As a child, though, this wasn’t metaphorical. It was literal. We believed in individual spirits—everywhere. And this is deeply embedded in Anishinaabemowin, our language. The language doesn’t just have masculine and feminine genders, like French or Spanish—it also distinguishes between animate and inanimate nouns.
And what’s considered “animate” isn’t always what Western culture would define that way. A boulder, for instance—a glacial erratic you might stumble upon in the forest—is considered animate because it has spirit. We’d refer to it as a grandfather, a being who has been there since time immemorial.
In the sweat lodge ceremony, when heated stones are brought in, they’re not just “rocks”—they are greeted as grandfathers (Mishomis) and treated with reverence. That’s the spirituality I grew up with. It’s not monotheistic or dogmatic, just interwoven with the land, the water, and the life around us
Jacobsen: That raises a lot of essential questions. As our mutual friend, Dr. Lloyd Hawkeye Robertson, often points out, the self—and, by extension, culture—is not static. It’s a dynamic process. Cultures evolve and adapt over time, as individuals do, at varying rates and ways.
How have you seen Indigenous culture evolve in Canada over the years? Some observers describe what’s happening now as a renaissance—a revival or reinvention of traditional knowledge and spiritual practice. Do you see it that way?
Others have observed something different—an integration between Indigenous cultures and Anglophone or Francophone Canadian culture, resulting in what might be called a hybrid identity, particularly among urban Indigenous peoples.
Then you have people—like yourself—taking a more universalistic approach, seeking frameworks that view the human species through a scientific lens. That’s the truth-based perspective, where ethnicity is understood as a sociological category, a layer we place over our shared biology.
This also ties into an epistemology that aspires to be universal—not necessarily in opposition to every microprocessor within broader “ways of knowing,” but certainly in tension with epistemological pluralism, which often rests on less rigorous foundations. By contrast, the scientific method offers a universal filter for arriving at objective truths about the world.
So, how have you seen these elements—cultural revitalization, hybridization, and scientific humanism—evolve during your lifetime?
Cook: Wow. That’s a big question.
Specifically regarding knowledge, I would say that Indigenous culture has crystallized—that is, it’s become more codified and standardized in ways that weren’t present when I was younger.
As I mentioned earlier, there’s been a homogenization of Indigenous cultures across North America. Historically, sharing between nations was done to support trade—cultural elements were exchanged pragmatically. But now we see deeper integration and standardization of ceremonial practices. From coast to coast to coast, there are often standard formats for things like vision quests, sweat lodges, powwows, and even the regalia worn at those gatherings.
Alongside this has come a more defined idea of Indigenous humanism, particularly regarding how knowledge is transmitted. There’s a growing emphasis on learning from elders, which is being passed on in Native Studies programs, language classes, and cultural revitalization efforts. The resurgence of Indigenous languages is one of the best things happening now. There’s nothing to criticize about strengthening cultural continuity—that’s essential and beautiful.
But where I start to think critically is in the epistemological space. All around the world, cultures have developed systems of knowledge—about the environment, healing, and ethics. Indigenous cultures have made meaningful contributions, for example, to agricultural practices like crop rotation or land stewardship. But I wouldn’t say those practices are uniquely Indigenous. Versions of them exist across many cultures globally.
And that’s where I think the scientific method offers something distinct—the process that has served us best since the Age of Reason. It begins with hypotheses, follows with testing, and leads to the development of theories—not just beliefs but replicable, predictive models.
I struggle sometimes to express this clearly, but what I’m getting at is that while the diversity of cultural worldviews is essential and enriching, when it comes to understanding the natural world, the scientific pursuit of knowledge remains the most reliable, universal process we have. That doesn’t invalidate cultural meaning-making, but we shouldn’t confuse it with empirical truth.
Of course, you understand how “theory” gets thrown around—“It’s just a theory.” But a scientific theory is far more than a hunch or intuition. It’s something that’s been tested rigorously, often in hundreds of different contexts, and has repeatedly held under those conditions.
That doesn’t mean it’s 100% guaranteed—it’s not absolute certainty—but it does mean that we haven’t yet found a way to disprove it. And that’s meaningful. That’s what knowledge grounded in evidence looks like.
That way of thinking is foundational for me—and this is how I’m wired, maybe because I come from a scientific background. There are Indigenous and scientific parts of me, but I can’t help it: I reason, believe in systems, and think in processes.
I have difficulty conceptualizing some of these so-called “other ways of knowing.” Throughout my life, I’ve understood the cultural teachings I received not as truth claims but as stories—valuable but not epistemologically authoritative.
So when I walk through the woods and put my hand on a tree, that action connects to something cultural—maybe even spiritual, in a poetic sense—but it feels like a kind of vestigial organ from that part of my heritage. It doesn’t represent the truth to me. As I see it, the truth comes from science and rational inquiry.
And I don’t know how we’re supposed to reconcile that tension. From my perspective, scientific thinking is still the best tool we’ve developed as a species to understand the world around us. It’s not perfect, but it’s better than anything else.
And the scientific method isn’t culturally exclusive. It may have been formalized during the European Enlightenment, but it’s been adopted and applied by cultures around the world. The cross-cultural sharing of scientific knowledge has done more to bend the moral arc of history than the exchange of supernatural or magical beliefs ever has.
Jacobsen: In the African American community in the United States, there’s often the perception that atheism or humanism is a “white thing.” Do you find anything similar in Indigenous communities in Canada—where science, secularism, or even atheism is seen as foreign, colonial, or somehow outside the cultural norm?
Cook: Oh. That perception exists.
And I think that’s part of the reason Indigenous humanism has taken root—it’s a kind of response to the perception that science, and by extension secular humanism, is a product of white Western culture. There’s a historical trauma there, of course, because science was often tied to colonial institutions—residential schools, anthropological exploitation, eugenics, resource extraction—you name it.
However, that distrust of science is not unique to Indigenous communities. Just look at the religious right in the United States. Much of that worldview is grounded in Christian fundamentalism, and it also treats science as a left-wing enemy.
So you get this strange convergence: one side rejects science because they see it as secular, the other see it as colonial—but both resist the same process that has arguably done the most to improve human life on a material and ethical level.
The current administration is actively dismantling scientific institutions and educational infrastructure because it sees science as foreign, something separate from its culture and worldview. So yes, after having been to many universities across Canada, I’ve never seen an Indigenous science class. I’ve seen Native Studies classes at virtually every institution—but not Indigenous-led science education that operates by scientific principles. That absence is telling.
Jacobsen: I often point out, for example, that however the Egyptians built the pyramids, it wasn’t “Egyptian engineering.”It was just engineering. It happened to be carried out by Egyptians, but it was part of the universal domain of human problem-solving. And the same applies to science. It emerges from culture, sure, but any one culture does not own it.
Cook: That’s exactly right. That’s why I made that flippant comment about Greta Thunberg—ethics, environmentalism, and scientific reasoning aren’t culturally bound. They’re philosophical systems we’ve developed as a species.
I’d say the opposite of what’s often claimed. One commonly repeated claim about Indigenous humanism is that it has forced science to become more ethical and environmentally aware. But I don’t believe that’s true.
Regardless of cultural background, many scientists are already working hard to integrate ethics, sustainability, and responsibility into research. That pressure didn’t have to come from any single cultural worldview. It’s not a unique contribution of Indigenous epistemology or any other cultural system. These are universal human concerns.
I mentioned this earlier: the moral arc of history is bending, but not because of culture. It’s bending because we’re becoming more interconnected and aware of how we are all part of the same planetary system. That’s where progress comes from—not from traditionalism, but often despite it.
Cultural frameworks can often become obstacles to progress. They assert, “That doesn’t fit my culture, so I can’t accept it.” But when you look at what has slowed human development, it’s often things like religious dogma, nationalism, and rigid racial or ethnic identities. These forces have stifled progress—not fostered it.
So, progress didn’t happen because of culture; in many cases, it happened despite culture.
Jacobsen: Do you think that some of the current emphasis on race and ethnicity, particularly in academic or professional contexts—using the language of “allies” and “identity”—might deter Indigenous people and other minorities who are genuinely interested in joining science or engineering departments?
In other words, does the intense focus on Indigeneity as identity, when applied to objective disciplines like science, inadvertently create a kind of self-re-racialization that alienates people from universal spaces of inquiry?
Cook: You know what? I hadn’t considered that before, but that’s a critical point.
Let me collect my thoughts without sounding too controversial right off the bat.
But yes—I would have to say yes.
I think all young people—regardless of background—reach a point where they have to decide the direction of their future: career, values, identity. For young people in Indigenous communities, especially on reserves, that decision can be even more complicated.
Some may enter fields like political science, sociology, or psychology, where they can gain knowledge and return to their communities to provide leadership or serve as advocates. That’s admirable.
But here’s where I get stuck: I have difficulty articulating this clearly, and I don’t know if it’s truly possible to keep one foot firmly in the culture and one foot in a scientific discipline—at least not without tension.
And maybe that’s not a fair generalization, either. Take anthropology, for example. That’s a scientific field where you could still honour and explore your cultural background. That could be a space where the two can coexist.
You know what? I don’t have a complete answer to this. It’s something I’d need to think more about. Speaking just for myself, my gut instinct is that I can’t do both. I can’t believe in the cultural stories as truths, and, at the same time, I am fully committed to science. But that’s just me—and I wouldn’t want to impose that view on others.
This is probably a research project in the making. We need a proper survey of Indigenous students—which career paths they’ve taken, especially those who’ve pursued STEM fields—and what kinds of internal or external tensions they’ve experienced. That’s your next project right there.
Jacobsen: Is there a kind of taboo around pursuing formal education—particularly using the academic vocabulary of the Anglophone world? I remember watching a documentary on educational attainment, where a Black British educator pointed out that, for some Black boys in the UK, having a strong English vocabulary was viewed as “acting white.” So, you get this intra-cultural stigma where academic achievement becomes a source of social deterrence.
Do you think something like that might be at play in Indigenous communities in Canada, too—where embracing science or formal academic discourse is seen as stepping away from the culture?
Cook: That’s an interesting question. I don’t know if I’ve experienced that.
I haven’t noticed students avoiding academic vocabulary in some Indigenous Studies classes I’ve taken at Trent University. The conversation is usually conducted as you’d expect in any university-level seminar. I didn’t get the sense that anyone was being stigmatized for speaking in that way or that it was seen as “too white.” Based on my experience, I haven’t witnessed that dynamic.
Jacobsen: Fair enough. Another way humanism is often summarized internationally is with the triad: reason, compassion, and science. Where do you see sufficient overlap between that kind of humanist framework and the values within Anishinaabe culture? I mean that we’ve talked about birch bark, the sacredness of nature, and the spiritual worldview in Anishinaabe culture, where rocks, trees, and rivers all have spirits. That’s quite different from a scientific-naturalist framework.
So, where do you see alignment points in broad strokes—places where secular humanism and Anishinaabe worldview might meaningfully intersect?
Cook: So there are some areas of overlap, though not necessarily the ones people assume. Given some of the things I’ve experienced—and again, it’s hard to define this solely as “Anishinaabe culture” because it has shifted quite a bit over my lifetime—I’d say the places where mainstream society and secular humanism intersect with Indigenous culture are rooted in respect.
That includes respect for history, traditions, culture, and older people—I’ll say older people rather than elders since the term elder has specific ceremonial and cultural significance.
There’s also respect for all living things, which is where environmentalism or environmental stewardship comes in. Then there’s the idea of balancing our lives—the physical, social, and emotional aspects of being. Even values like diversity and inclusion are embedded in Anishinaabe culture to varying degrees.
I’d also mention the pursuit of ethics and ethical behaviour. These aspects are part of Anishinaabe traditions and secular humanism’s fundamental premises.
Jacobsen: That’s generally what I was getting at. Far be it from me to be a fan of evangelicalism, but if we take Protestantism more broadly, there are specific values that, while not always embraced to the extreme, have merit. For example, there is an emphasis on work ethic, which has virtue, whether applied to building a family, community, infrastructure, business, or academic excellence.
But I think the dominionist strain—particularly the desire for political control under religious mandates—is corrosive. It’s at odds with the secular aims that most humanists value: freedom of thought, pluralism, and individual rights.
On the Indigenous side, I don’t gravitate toward supernaturalism, but I see value in the naturalistic emphasis found in many Indigenous spiritual teachings. It’s concrete and practical and reflects a deep awareness of interdependence.
The ethic of caring for the environment rather than asserting dominion over it seems far more appropriate—especially given where we are as a planet. So, no culture has a monopoly on wisdom, but I think if we take a fine-grained look at different espoused virtues, there’s a lot we can learn.
Cook: I agree.
Jacobsen: And, of course, we must also acknowledge that espoused values are not always lived. That’s true in every culture. People often say one thing and do another.
Cook: Right—and a lot of that, I think, is related to scale and scope. Most people, outside of those with diagnosed psychopathy or similar disorders, aren’t going out of their way to harm animals or inflict suffering just for the sake of it.
Ethical lapses stem more from systems, pressure, or disconnect than intentional cruelty. Those systems are shaped by histories and structures, not just individuals.
The sheer scale of the challenge—feeding 9 billion people globally—has created a significant tension between ethically desirable and operationally scalable. That’s one of the things I’d say about Indigenous humanism: there’s much talk about ethics, sustainability, and traditional methods. Those ideas are important but also easier to apply in small communities or enterprises.
When you zoom out to the planetary scale, it becomes much harder. Yes, you can rotate crops to preserve soil health. That’s good practice. But then you hit a wall: monocultures exist because they allow for massive food production. And if you remove them without scalable alternatives, you run the risk of people starving.
So while many of us would love to see greater sustainability, better treatment of animals, and more respect for traditional practices—especially in smaller, land-based societies around the world—the hard limits of global logistics can challenge those ideals.
Jacobsen: It becomes an issue of scale and how values operate differently depending on context.
Cook: And that’s where utilitarian philosophy comes into play: Jeremy Bentham. It’s really about doing the least harm when faced with difficult trade-offs.
Again, those ethical frameworks—balancing harms and considering outcomes—aren’t uniquely Indigenous or part of Indigenous humanism. They’re part of global ethical discourse. I’ve often heard atheists say, “If I had to write a list of Ten Commandments, I could come up with seven better ones than the original.”
Jacobsen: [Laughing] That’s a valuable thought experiment.
Cook: Absolutely. It helps clarify what values matter. Because let’s face it: we’re not hunter-gatherers anymore. And while the Haudenosaunee agricultural tradition of planting corn, beans, and squash in the same mound—with a fish for fertilizer—is a brilliant, sustainable method, it’s not practical for feeding billions.
Jacobsen: How much interaction have you had with global Indigenous groups—from places like Western Europe, Latin America, Africa, or elsewhere?
Cook: Virtually none. I’ve interacted with Indigenous Australians and am familiar with some of their traditions. And I’ve only had limited interactions with Inuit here in Canada. That’s why I try not to generalize too broadly. I know my cultural neighbourhood and try to speak from that place.
Jacobsen: Do you watch the news much?
Cook: Every day.
Jacobsen: When it comes to Indigenous issues—as they’re often referred to in Canadian media—what are the things that mainstream outlets are getting right, what are they getting wrong, and what are they ignoring or failing to cover adequately? I’m thinking specifically in terms of factual accuracy and proportionality.
Cook: That’s a big one. I think it’s hard to get mainstream media to pay attention to Indigenous issues unless Indigenous people themselves create what looks like a crisis.
Take the example of Chief Theresa Spence and her hunger strike. That pushed attention toward the Idle No More movement across Canada. It wasn’t until thousands of us took to the streets, raised flags, and blocked bridges that the broader public started to see issues like many First Nations communities lacking clean drinking water. These communities have been on boil water advisories for over 50 years.
That’s a critical issue—and it’s one that’s barely covered. It occasionally pops up in the media, but there’s no consistent attention. And because of that, municipal, provincial, and federal governments only respond when there’s noise. Even the current Liberal government, which talks a lot about reconciliation and Indigenous rights, hasn’t made anywhere near the progress they promised. And I think part of that is because mainstream media is not holding them accountable—there’s no sense of urgency being communicated to the broader public.
Jacobsen: So, what does the media get right, wrong, and ignore? What would you say?
Cook: Okay, let’s break it down.
- What they get right: Occasionally, the media does highlight real issues—like lack of clean water or specific Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC) recommendations. But it’s usually episodic and reactive, not consistent or systemic.
- What they get wrong: Often, there’s a lack of nuance and a tendency toward sensationalism. For example, when unmarked graves were discovered at former residential school sites, the coverage quickly escalated to headlines about mass murder—even in international outlets like the New York Times. The reality is deeply tragic, yes, but these were not mass executions. They were individual deaths, many from neglect, abuse, or disease. It was still horrific, but how it was framed in the media lacked historical and forensic context. That reporting distorts the conversation and leads to reaction instead of reflection.
- What they ignore: So much. Policy follow-up, for example—how many of the 94 Calls to Action from the TRC have been implemented? How is funding allocated to on-reserve infrastructure? Or the legal challenges around land back, resource development, and treaty rights? These are complex stories and don’t sell as easily as headlines about protests or conflict.
And the old saying about the media—what is it? “If it bleeds, it leads”?The media is built to chase the dramatic story, not the slow-moving but essential. Unfortunately, that means the real work of reconciliation—the hard, slow, policy-based work—often goes uncovered. When that happens, public pressure fades, and governments don’t feel compelled to act.
I can’t be entirely critical in terms of getting things right. The fact is, Indigenous issues do pop up in the news, and they do receive some visibility. You’ll see coverage of the leadership of various national and provincial Indigenous organizations, and there’s at least some public awareness.
But again, coverage often happens when there’s controversy—incompetence, criticism, or a political failure. The positive, ongoing work tends to be overlooked. So, while I appreciate that Indigenous issues remain somewhat within the mainstream’s awareness, I don’t think the media does an excellent job in terms of in-depth, accurate, or wide-ranging coverage.
Jacobsen: I once interviewed Lee Maracle before she passed away. I don’t recall whether we published it, but I remember something she said that stuck with me. She made a passing remark about how, if you took a river and superimposed a cylinder—completing its spatial circularity rather than thinking in just half or three-quarter arcs—you could use that to calculate the flow or size of the river. It was a fascinating metaphor.
What struck me was how she connected abstract structures, like those found in geometry, quantitative reasoning, or even axioms, with real-world patterns and spatial awareness. That got me thinking: Are there aspects of Indigenous thought or daily practice that incorporate this spatial or abstract reasoning—not through formal schooling in mathematics but through the lived culture itself? I’m curious whether these forms of insight emerged in ways that are just embedded in how people lived—whether nomadically, semi-nomadically, or in place.
Cook: Oh, wow. That’s a great question.
Strangely enough, the first thing that comes to mind is how Plains Indigenous peoples used buffalo hides to record their histories. They did it in a spiral format, starting from the center and spiralling outward, year by year, marking significant events. It’s a circular conception of time, which I’ve always found fascinating. It’s not linear—it emphasizes cycles, return, and continuity.
Another area is astronomy. Our constellations and celestial stories are very different from the ones recognized by European science. But the concept of constellations—linking stars into meaningful shapes that connect to narratives or moral teachings—is shared. It’s another way of imposing structure and meaning on the natural world. The patterns are interpreted differently, but the cognitive process is quite sophisticated.
Even if the outcomes are different—logic, categorization, and relational thinking exist. In many traditions, that reasoning is still embedded within a spiritual framework. There’s usually some spirit or force causing events to unfold. So, even where there’s spatial or numerical thinking, it often comes with a sacred or mythological dimension. That doesn’t make it less analytical—it just means it’s integrated differently than in Western scientific models.
I think in the other direction. The perception of time as cyclical is very prominent.
That’s true for many Indigenous cultures around the world. Time is often seen as cyclical rather than linear because of its close relationship to the natural environment. When you’re living within the rhythms of the land, you begin to observe and internalize the constant cycles of seasons, plants, animals, migration, birth, and death.
Jacobsen: What about the social and ethical culture? Are there aspects of Anishinaabe tradition—like an emphasis on compassion or universal moral principles—that overlap with humanism? For example, in situations like a dispute over food or land, whether with another community or within a family, were there mechanisms of resolution that reflected something like a humanistic ethic?
Cook: That’s an interesting question. I don’t know how to characterize it as a humanistic ethic in the Western sense. But what I find remarkable and unique in Anishinaabe culture is the approach to guiding others. It’s often done through gentle encouragement rather than direct correction or authoritative instruction.
Let’s say a child is doing something dangerous. In mainstream Western culture, a parent might yell, snap, or slap their hand if the child reaches for something hot. But in the Indigenous contexts I’ve been part of, the response is often gentler—more about guiding the child away from harm than punishing them for curiosity.
I remember an example from one of the elders I knew, a remarkable woman. She ran visiting elder programs, going into schools and organizations to share wisdom and offer guidance. One day, she came to me with a concern.
The community near me, which I’m closely tied to, had repatriated a skeleton—the remains of a man who had been identified, through evidence, as Midewiwin. The bones were around 300 years old and had been found off-reserve. The community brought him home and held a traditional Midewiwin ceremony to lay him to rest in their cemetery.
The woman who led the ceremony told me that she felt that the community wasn’t treating the grave with enough respect. Her concern wasn’t expressed in anger or confrontation but with sorrow and gentleness. She felt a sacred duty had been mishandled—not out of malice, but out of forgetfulness or carelessness.
That speaks to a relational ethic—not one rooted in universal rules but in context, relationships, and reverence.
I hesitate to call it “humanism” formally. But there are shared values: compassion, restraint, and guidance without domination. And those principles—whether Indigenous or humanist—have much to offer today’s world.
In modern Anishinaabe culture, that translates to the belief that graves must be well-tended and respectfully maintained. In this case, the elder I mentioned was concerned because the repatriated grave was neglected. She shared her concern with me, and I responded, “No problem—I’ll go back and make sure that it gets done.”
But I was wrong to use that kind of directive language—”I’ll make sure it gets done.” That’s not how guidance works in Anishinaabe culture. You don’t give orders. You don’t tell people what to do or how to behave. Instead, you tell stories, you coach, and you nudge gently. That’s the approach. It’s gentle, respectful, and, in many ways, a beautiful part of the culture. I was counselled to tell the traditional story of Nanaboozho and his fight with his brother. That was the right way to help the community understand why the grave needed to be more carefully tended.
But there are downsides, too.
In a community where alcoholism can be pervasive, for example, people might not intervene. They won’t necessarily step in to stop someone or help them recover. If someone is engaging in self-harm, the traditional approach of non-interference may mean the community stays quiet, even when someone needs help. That’s changing now, thankfully, as many reserves are getting better access to health services, mental health support, and intervention programs.
But culturally, there’s still a tendency toward non-intervention, which can be both a strength and a weakness, depending on the situation.
Jacobsen: That seems like a deeply embedded ethic—one that’s built around respect and autonomy, but that can have real costs when applied rigidly. Are there any parts of your notes you haven’t had a chance to bring up yet—things you think should be included in this conversation?
Cook: Let me take a look. I haven’t even checked my notes in about three hours now. [Laughing] You’ve been good company.
One thing that stands out in my notes, which we haven’t discussed much yet, is how people—especially in more left-leaning or social justice-oriented circles—value Indigenous humanism. I don’t particularly like terms like “woke” or “social justice warrior”—mostly because I think they’re overused and poorly defined—but I think we all know the general type of person I’m talking about: culturally aware, often highly sensitive, and well-intentioned.
These individuals sometimes overvalue Indigenous humanism. I’ve thought about why that might be. I understand why people associate environmental ethics, climate consciousness, and spiritual ecology with Indigenous traditions. There is value there.
However, I suspect that part of the overvaluation is due to intellectual laziness. People latch onto romanticized ideas of Indigenous wisdom without thinking critically about what’s being said or those philosophies’ real-world impact.
For instance, if we’re talking about climate change, and someone says that Indigenous knowledge systems provide foundational insight into global warming, I argue that the actual contribution is limited. Most Indigenous knowledge systems were developed in local ecological contexts, not global climate models. They offer invaluable insight into local environmental shifts but are not a substitute for climate science.
So, yes, if you’re an Inuit in the High Arctic, you’ll notice the dramatic changes in seasonal patterns and temperatures. Your lived experience becomes a powerful data point. But to say that Indigenous humanism provides a universal climate ethic—I think that’s an overstatement.
That’s a necessary clarification. Respecting a tradition doesn’t mean inflating its scope. It means understanding it on its terms and recognizing its value within the context in which it was developed.
If you live in a small community north of Toronto, on a reserve, I can’t imagine that your local weather observations would offer any unique insight that meaningfully contributes to our broader understanding of climate change. That’s not a criticism of local knowledge—it’s just a recognition of scale.
This brings us back to the need for centralized mechanisms to evaluate truth and knowledge—systems that can collect localized observations, synthesize them, and turn them into theories that are then made actionable. That kind of comprehensive perspective is impossible to form solely at the local level—especially when the issues are global in scale.
So, while the ethical and moral frameworks present in Indigenous humanism are admirable—and often very positive—they’re not unique to Indigenous cultures. People all over the world have developed similar values in different ways.
I guess the summary for me is this: Indigenous humanism is often overvalued, especially by the “woke” or “social justice warrior” types. Not because the ideas are wrong—but because people sometimes elevate them without adequate critical reflection or contextual understanding.
Jacobsen: That’s an important distinction. Lloyd Robertson wrote about Indigeneity and humanism and argued—rightly, I think—that they can be compatible if you frame the conceptual puzzle carefully.
Now, you’re focusing on Indigenous humanism and its relationship to secular humanism. The mistake people often make in reasoning isn’t necessarily with the premise but with the categorization of humanism itself.
Many people mistakenly believe that humanism—of any variety—is a political party or ideology. But that’s fundamentally incorrect. The earliest declarations and policy statements, especially those formalized through bodies like Humanists International, are very careful with their language. Humanism emerged as a philosophical life stance—particularly after the barbarism of World War II—in reaction to the atrocities committed under both totalitarianism and religious fundamentalism.
In that sense, humanism is not political as people often frame it. It’s not anti-religious people—it’s anti-theology when theology violates autonomy, critical inquiry, and shared human values. It’s also not a political party, although it can align selectively with political movements that advance secular, evidence-based policy.
Right. Also, groups like Humanists UK carefully show that humanists can fall across the political spectrum. You’ve got Humanists for Labour, Humanist Conservatives, and so on. The philosophical core of humanism is one thing—how you apply that philosophy in politics is another.
So we shouldn’t expect humanists to vote as a bloc, though you might see that happen when a party becomes too deeply entrenched in religious fundamentalism or violates secular norms.
That’s one piece. The other issue is this concept of “wokeism” or identity politics—or whatever form of it people are reacting to. What often happens is that humanistic language gets co-opted for tribal political goals. And that can distort what humanism is actually about.
They come from good intentions and can undoubtedly have positive effects, particularly in mobilizing people around important causes. But where people seem to react negatively is with the language, the intimidation tactics, and the tendency to cancel rather than engage. That creates a moral pressure that can become alienating.
There’s also sometimes a lack of empirical rigour, especially compared to the standards you’d traditionally expect from humanist approaches—where careful reasoning, evidence, and thoughtful dialogue are foundational before you become “activated” around an issue. Of course, something might trigger you emotionally or historically, and that might lead you to pursue deeper research. But too often, it feels like the research is skipped, and people go straight to outrage.
Cook: We’re seeing a similar dynamic emerge in the context of Indigenous humanism. There’s cultural meaning, yes—but there’s also a risk of conceptual inflation and politicization, identical to what’s happening in other identity-based or ideologically driven spaces.
Jacobsen: That brings me back to what I raised about Dr. Lloyd Robertson’s paper earlier. He’s deliberate in using the term indigeneity rather than Indigenous humanism per se. He argues that Indigeneity—the full range of characteristics, histories, and identities that define someone as Indigenous—can be integrated with humanist thought if the framework is structured correctly.
So, moving beyond whether Indigenous humanism and secular humanism conflict, what about Indigeneity and humanism more broadly—can they coexist as a single, integrated worldview?
Cook: I’ve heard the term indigeneity before. Lloyd’s used it with me in conversation a few times. And if we define it broadly—all the things that make a person Indigenous, culturally, historically, linguistically, spiritually—without trying to narrow it down too tightly, then there’s no incompatibility.
The difficulty comes when we start labelling things. Humanism’s values can easily be co-opted by people with genuine ethical commitments or those more interested in virtue signalling. That’s not unique to humanism; it’s true for any moral framework.
While we were briefly pausing, I asked Google to pull up a list of humanist values to see how they read in plain language.
Let’s take a few:
- Dignity and worth of every person—hard to argue with unless you’re invoking the logic of 1940s fascism.
- Reason and science—even the most devout religious believers often claim science supports their views, even if it’s been twisted to fit.
- Ethics, compassion, and empathy—again, universally defensible.
- Human rights—yes, people sometimes limit them to “people who look and sound like them,” but the idea remains powerful.
- Social justice and equality are widely appealing and challenging to reject outright.
Honestly, this list reads more like what the Ten Commandments should have looked like. Instead of a list of “thou shalt nots,” it’s a positive ethical framework.
Jacobsen: So, in essence, these values are philosophically universal, making them easily embraced but also misused.
Cook: It’s easy to co-opt this language for your cause—whether ethical or performative. But the values themselves? They’re very hard to argue with—and I think that’s why properly understood humanism can be a meeting place, not a battleground.
When we use the word Indigeneity, there’s nothing in Indigenous culture that would contradict core values like dignity, worth, or reason. The definition of science might differ from the Western model, but what is often called Indigenous science still involves observational knowledge passed down through generations.
Take willow bark, for example. It contains acetylsalicylic acid—the active ingredient in aspirin. Indigenous people knew it could relieve pain, even though they didn’t see the chemistry. That’s still a form of empirical, experience-based science.
Ethics, human rights, and social justice are all values Indigenous people would recognize and affirm, whether explicitly or in practice. So, Indigeneity fits very comfortably with humanist values.
The only area where I find some tension is naturalism—the idea that the universe is governed strictly by natural laws, without supernatural forces. That’s where worldviews can diverge. In many Indigenous cultures, spiritual forces or non-material entities are part of how knowledge is explained or understood.
So, while I don’t think anyone would argue with the core principles of humanism, the point of difference lies in the belief that you can know things in ways that aren’t empirical or naturalistic. Aside from that, there’s widespread respect for the ethical foundation of humanism, even if the epistemological framing differs.
Jacobsen: That’s well put. And to nod to critics and defenders of those labelled as “woke,” something is interesting about how people signal their values. On one hand, critics might point to something like a rainbow lapel pin or a cross necklace—as a way of saying, “I’m a good ally” or “I’m a good Christian.” It becomes a kind of virtue signalling—an external signifier of internal moral standing.
Are there parallels in Indigenous culture today, particularly among younger generations—or even some elders—where there’s an increased use of symbolic items or participation that might not carry deep personal meaning but instead function as a cultural signifier?
Cook: I think I understand what you’re asking: whether some people are going through the motions—participating in culture symbolically without necessarily believing in the deeper spiritual or philosophical layers.
And the answer is absolutely.
In Anishinaabe culture, for instance, there’s a widely recognized symbol—the medicine wheel, sometimes called a unity pin. It’s a circle divided into four quadrants:
- White (North)
- Yellow (East)
- Red (South)
- Black (West)
An entire lifelong system of teachings is embedded in that wheel. It includes medicine teachings, stages of life, seasons, directions, and spiritual roles. However, not everyone who wears the medicine wheel engages deeply with those teachings. Some wear it simply as a cultural marker—a way of showing identity or solidarity.
That’s not necessarily a bad thing. But yes, it can become the Indigenous equivalent of a symbolic lapel pin. And just like in other communities, symbols can be used meaningfully or superficially.
It’s the Anishinaabe equivalent of a cross on your lapel. For a Christian, the cross is supposed to represent all the teachings and values of the faith. But for some, it’s simply an accessory—”I don’t know what it means, but it looks good on my jacket.” It’s symbolic shorthand, like an American flag pin on a senator’s lapel.
You see medicine wheels all over the place, and I could talk for days—possibly months—about the depth of teachings that go into those four colours arranged in a circle. So much culture, history, philosophy, and spiritual guidance are tied into that symbol. And yet, I don’t wear one.
Because, like with other symbolic items, some people wear it without engaging with its meaning. You’ll find people proudly wearing a cross who can’t explain even the basic tenets of Christianity. Or LGBTQ+ individuals wearing the Pride flag without necessarily understanding the struggles of the ’60s and ’70s—the history of protest, persecution, and civil rights activism that made those symbols possible.
So yes, absolutely—virtue signalling exists within Indigenous communities as well.
Jacobsen: That brings to mind the idea of private or protected knowledge found in some Indigenous traditions. You mentioned earlier that there are certain things you cannot speak about publicly—because doing so could lead to pushback or even breach community expectations.
That sounds reminiscent of Freemasonry—where inner circles, ritual practices, and esoteric teachings are passed down within structured hierarchies. It stands in contrast, in some ways, to humanism, which leans heavily on transparency and open inquiry.
So my question is this: What role does that kind of secrecy or ritual exclusivity play in Anishinaabe society—either historically or in the present day?
Cook: That’s a great and tricky question. Yes, you’ll find elitism in ceremonial groups like the Midewiwin Lodge—but it isn’t purely negative. It shows that members earn their place through real commitment and participation, creating a clear hierarchy.
A useful, if imperfect, comparison is the Shriners (an offshoot of Freemasonry). Structurally, the Midewiwin works the same way: you progress through degrees, and each degree unlocks deeper teachings. Whether those teachings focus on practical skills or spiritual wisdom often depends on your own path and experience.
Advancing has always carried a cost. In the past, members offered goods—livestock or trade items. Today, it usually means significant travel, time, and money. Those costs both limit membership and prove dedication: they show you’re serious about this path.
Like Freemasonry, the Midewiwin includes rituals—special handshakes or signs that mark your level. The details differ, but the organizational logic is similar. (I’m not a Freemason myself; I’ve drawn this understanding from research and conversations.)
In the Midewiwin Lodge, each level has its own rituals and secret knowledge. If you haven’t reached a given level, you don’t participate and you don’t observe. It’s a deliberately structured system.
I guess the summary for me is this: Indigenous humanism is often overvalued, especially by the “woke” or “social justice warrior” types. Not because the ideas are wrong—but because people sometimes elevate them without adequate critical reflection or contextual understanding.
Jacobsen: That’s a fascinating comparison—not in terms of belief systems, but organizational logic, ritual structure, and gatekeeping of knowledge.What else is on your mind?
Cook: [Laughing] We’ve covered a lot.
I keep thinking about the word “indigeneity” and how I’m trying to understand it. Is there a helpful distinction between ethnicity and culture here?
Take someone Jewish, for example. They can be ethnically Jewish but secular, with no religious inclination, or the reverse—they can be religiously Jewish but not ethnically.
I wonder if Indigeneity works similarly. It can describe someone’s ethnic identity or heritage, regardless of whether they fully engage with the cultural or spiritual practices traditionally associated with it. Maybe that’s why I can reconcile humanism with Indigeneity—because it’s about roots, background, and shared history.
But I struggle to reconcile humanism with “Indigenous humanism,” especially when the latter emphasizes supernatural belief systems or non-naturalistic knowledge. Humanism’s focus on science, reason, and naturalism creates tension.
Indigeneity can be descriptive and inclusive, while “Indigenous humanism” might sometimes involve conflicting epistemologies—mainly if the framework includes magical thinking or metaphysical assertions.
Jacobsen: One from left field: In history, if you could have dinner with Pontiac or Tecumseh, who would you choose?
Cook: [Laughing] Wow.
Honestly, I would’ve loved to have had dinner with Chief Joseph of the Nez Perce. From everything I’ve read, he was a remarkable human being—deeply ethical, thoughtful, and courageous.
Between Tecumseh and Pontiac? That’s harder to answer. One of my elders, who passed away in 2013, was named Angus Pontiac—a direct descendant of the Pontiac. So, out of respect, I’ll stay quiet on that one. [Laughing]
Jacobsen: Fair enough. How about something more contemporary—what do you think of Adam Beach’s acting?
Cook: I like Adam Beach. He brings a lot of depth and vulnerability to his characters. He’s got great range. I know Adam Beach. He’s a pretty good actor. He’s been cast in more comic or comedic roles; sometimes, he plays them with humour. But he’s also done some serious work that is quite strong.
[Laughing] I’ve got five more names I could throw out, but I’m not sure how far down that rabbit hole you want to go. One of them is Tom Jackson—he’s a friend of mine.
Jacobsen: I was thinking about William Whipple Warren, who was of Ojibwe and European descent and authored History of the Ojibwe People in 1885.
Cook: Oh—that does ring a bell. I have a very extensive library and that book is included.
Jacobsen: Or Louise Erdrich or Chief Peguis?
Cook: Chief Peguis—yes, that name rings a bell. I’m struggling to recall the details off the top of my head. He was a prominent leader, but I’d need to double-check the historical specifics.
Jacobsen: One more: Autumn Peltier—born February 2004. A young activist, she’s spoken at the United Nations, criticized environmental policies, and received awards like the International Children’s Peace Prize. She’s a leading voice in the global environmental movement.
Cook: I wasn’t aware of her. I was thinking of Leonard Peltier—he was part of the American Indian Movement, and he’s currently serving time in a U.S. federal prison, accused of involvement in the murder of an FBI agent during a standoff in 1975.
Jacobsen: Possibly a relation—but maybe not.
Cook: The structure of bands and surnames can be more complex than people outside Indigenous communities realize.
Jacobsen: Many First Nations in Canada have quite a small population. The numbers drop significantly once you get past the first 2,000 to 3,000 members.
Cook: We have a Mississauga Anishinaabe reserve about an hour and a half north of here. There are only about three surnames on the entire reserve.
Now, that doesn’t mean everyone’s related—though some are. But many are not. And a lot of that traces back to residential schools. When children were taken, they were often renamed. If your name was “Little Squirrel,” that wasn’t good enough for the school system. So, kids were given new first names, often English or biblical.
In many cases, they were also assigned the last name of the Indian Agent in charge of that reserve. That’s how family names were standardized, and that’s why surnames aren’t reliable indicators of lineage in many Indigenous communities in Canada.
Jacobsen: That’s incredibly revealing—how naming was institutionalized and how identity was systematically altered.
Cook: When people trace ancestry by surname, they often run into dead ends or false assumptions. Our names were reshaped by colonial policies, not by our customs or kinship systems. And that legacy still lingers.
Here’s a closing comment, I suppose:
I’ve said things today that could be perceived as critical, but I’ve lived an extraordinary life in the Native community. I’ve spent years balancing one foot in the scientific world and one foot in Indigenous culture. I love Indigenous culture deeply, but at some point, it became impossible for me to reconcile its spiritual components with my atheism and humanism.
Still, I have immense respect for the challenges Indigenous communities face and the progress they’ve made. And if people rally around something like Indigenous humanism as a unifying framework—even if I see tensions between that and secular humanism—I won’t take that away from them. If it brings meaning and solidarity, that’s their opium, to borrow a phrase.
Jacobsen: Thank you very much.
Cook: Thanks, Scott. I’ve enjoyed our conversation.
Jacobsen: Take care, David.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/04/07
I addressed a Croatian Christian association via virtual conference on clergy-related abuse, emphasizing journalism’s essential role as a watchdog exposing institutional misconduct. I argued that victims should be the primary voices, institutions secondary, with journalists facilitating balanced narratives. I urged acknowledgment of abuse without condemning entire denominations, advocating evidence-based investigations, interfaith dialogue, and robust reforms to protect victims and faith integrity. Citing historical scandals and cultural movements as context, I stressed that transparency and accountability are imperative. This speech within the context of the entirety of the conference will be shared with the Ecumenical Patriarch, EU Parliament, Roman Catholic Church, UN in Geneva, UNICEF, World Council of Churches, World Health Organization, and other major institutions, ensuring accountability and healing universally.
Journalism, first and foremost, is a human enterprise. It’s built on human observation, written for human consumption, and, primarily, concerns human enterprises. Just democracies, fair societies, accountable power, and the like, require journalists as critical watchdogs to bring otherwise hidden stories to the forefront. Clergy-related abuse is a complex and subtle issue with blunt outputs.
The primary voices of clergy-related abuse should be the victim who can give indications of patterns and see firsthand weaknesses in institutions that have misbehaved, abuse, and, often told lies or merely partial, softened truths about it. The secondary voices are everyone else in the institutional setup leading to the abuse in the system in the first place. Religious institutions have a minority of persons in positions of authority, unfortunately, who have abused. Journalists are a tertiary voice around these two.
The role of journalists is working with victims, with the majority of clergy who have not abused, and other researchers, to gather the narratives and collate those to get the wider scope of the patterns of the minority of clergy who have abused. People take the accountability problem seriously, as it’s bad for the victims, bad for the laity, bad for the image and authority of the clergy, and, essentially, bad for the representation of the faith. If you care about the future of Orthodoxy, then you care about this as an issue relevant to the integrity of the faith.
So, I wanted to take these few minutes to recognize the substantial problem before us, for a few reasons. Some factors played into the situation in which we find ourselves. First and foremost, the crimes of a select number of clergy. Second, these crimes went institutionally unchecked for many, many years in the largest denominations of Christianity–almost as a prelude to the broader cultural movements witnessed in many Western democratic societies.
Third, a tendency to reject the claims of victims when the prevailing evidence presents the vast majority of reported cases in the extreme cases of misconduct, i.e., rape, as evidentiarily supportable. False allegations happen, but these are a small minority and should not represent a false dichotomy of support. Institutions should establish robust processes to investigate all claims, addressing false allegations decisively while preserving trust in genuine victims.
Fourth, the diversification of the faith landscape of many Western cultures, particularly with the rise of non-religious communities and subsequent ways of life. One result is positive: Citizens clearly are more free than not to believe and practice as they wish. One negative result, the over-reach in non-religious commentary stereotyping churches as hotbeds of abuse, which creates problems–let alone being false. It doesn’t solve the problem, while misrepresenting the scope of it. It makes the work of the majority of clergy to create robust institutions of accountability for the minority of abusers more difficult and onerous. It’s comprehensively counterproductive.
If we want to reduce the incidence and, ideally, eliminate clergy-related abuse, for the first, we should acknowledge some clergy abuse without misrepresenting The Clergy of any Christian denomination as a universal acid on the dignity of those who wish to practice the Christian faith. It’s a disservice to interbelief efforts, makes the non-religious look idiotic and callous, and blankets every clergy with the crimes of every one of their seminarian brothers, and occasional sister, in Christ.
For the second, we should work on a newer narrative context for the wider story, see the partial successes of wider cultural movements, and inform of unfortunate trends in and out of churches for balance. For the third, we simply need to reorient incorrect instinctual reactions against individuals coming forward with claims as the problem rather than investigations as an appropriate response, maintaining reputation of accused and accuser, while having robust mechanisms for justice in either case. For the fourth, some in the non-religious communities, who see themselves as grounded in Reason and Compassion alongside Evidence, should consider the reasoning in broad-based accusation and consider with compassion the impacts on individuals in faith communities with the authority who are working hard to build institutions capable of evidence-based justice on one of the most inflammatory and sensitive types of abuse. Interfaith dialogue can be slow, quiet, but comprehensive and robust in the long-term–more effective and aligned with both the ideals of Christ or Reason, Compassion, and Evidence.
To these four contexts, journalists can provide a unifying conduit to the public in democratic societies to discuss the meaning of justice in the context of the Christian faith living in democratic, pluralistic societies. We cannot ‘solve’ the past errors, but can provide a modicum of justice for victims and create a future in which incidents are tamped to zero for a new foundation to be laid. Then ‘upon that rock,’ we do not have repeats in the Church as we have witnessed in other contexts discussed over the last few decades:
1991 – Tailhook Scandal (U.S. military sexual harassment scandal)
2012 – “Invisible War” documentary (exposing military sexual assault)
2014 – #YesAllWomen (response to the Isla Vista killings)
2017 – Australia’s Royal Commission Report (child sexual abuse in institutions)
2017 – #MuteRKelly (boycott of R. Kelly over sexual abuse allegations)
2018 – #MeTooBollywood (Bollywood’s reckoning with sexual misconduct)
2018 – #MeTooPublishing (exposing sexual harassment in the literary world)
2018 – #WhyIDidntReport (response to Brett Kavanaugh hearings)
2019 – Southern Baptist Convention Abuse Scandal (Houston Chronicle exposé)
2019 – K-Pop’s #BurningSun (sex trafficking and police corruption scandal)
2020 – #IAmVanessaGuillen (military abuse and murder case)
2021 – #FreeBritney (exposing exploitation and control of female artists)
2021 – Haredi Jewish Communities’ Abuse Cases (journalistic investigations by Shana Aaronson & Hella Winston)
2002-Present – Catholic Church Sexual Abuse Crisis (Boston Globe‘s Spotlight investigation)
2017-Present – #MexeuComUmaMexeuComTodas (Brazil’s movement against misogyny in media and politics)
2020-Present – #MeTooGymnastics (Larry Nassar’s abuse in U.S. gymnastics)
2020-Present – #SayHerName (Black women and LGBTQ+ victims of police violence)
2021-Present – #MeTooIncest (focus on childhood sexual abuse within families)
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Humanists International
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/22
Dr. Leo Igwe, Gary McLelland, and Victoria Gugenheim sit on a long list of people I greatly love. I wanted to write about something coming up in some of the humanist communities. One of those was the separation of Humanism and humanitarianism, related and distinct. I needed some quotes. When I asked, those three answered.
Many humanist organizations look to acquire funding from providers of grants, especially from national and local contexts in which finances are not readily available. They would make applications. They provide ideas and timelines, looking for legitimate backing. All good, fair, and aboveboard, the framing of the organization becomes the issue.
Fundamentally, they orient themselves as engaged in humanitarianism. If you want funding from humanist organizations, then the work should be for Humanism as a life rather than humanitarianism primarily.
How do these two relate? You can borrow different discipline terminology. Humanism is the moral dimension in an individual being’s world line. As we’re all thespians at this stage of life, we have choices before us. Each has ethical dimensions.
Global Humanism is a group predominantly composed of democratic, ethical, non-theist peaceniks. A natural bowl upon which humanitarian waters can rest and ripple. Humanism is like the pattern of motion. Humanitarianism is the actual water with the ripples or the air with the wind.
Humanism, the values, act as a theoretical framework. An invisible constellation of interrelated principles of action in the world relevant to human beings. As discussed earlier, in some sense, ethics remains inevitable once conscious embodied deliberative action enters the universe.
After begging and pleading a whole one time, humanist artist and body painter Victoria Gugenheim gave a nice coda on that definition. “Humanism is the theory; Humanitarianism should be the practice.”
So here we are, all conscious and such, what gives? Humanism can be more. Humanitarianism can be more.
As Gary McLelland, Chief Executive of Humanists International, said to me, “Humanism is the celebration of our shared human experience, embracing reason, compassion, and the pursuit of knowledge. It’s about recognizing our inherent dignity and worth. Humanitarianism, on the other hand, is the active expression of that Humanism, translating empathy into action to alleviate suffering and promote justice.”
I like that. The idea of using human experience as a metric, compassion as a driver, and reason and the pursuit of knowledge as an expansive sense of exploration of the world. You need evidence of the world. You need sensory experience. You need compassion for other creatures encountered. You need the capacity to reason about it. Those might be European flavours of Humanism translated into humanitarianism, though.
Dr. Leo Igwe is a longtime colleague and a prominent African humanist. What about an African flavour to Humanism?
Igwe, Founder of the humanist movement in Nigeria and Advocacy for Alleged Witches, said, “Humanism is an outlook that accords primary importance to humanity as opposed to divinity or the supernatural while humanitarianism stands for caring for the human being. By this definition to be a humanist one must be an atheist or an agnostic, one must be non theistic. But to be a humanitarian, one can be theistic or nontheistic. Too often, people confuse Humanism with humanitarianism. Some humanitarians mischaracterize themselves as humanists. This is understandable because both Humanism and humanitarianism resonate with focus and care for the human. Many people turn to humanists or claim to be humanists when when they face difficulties, need asylum or suffer persecutions. Yes humanists care for humanity but Humanism is not humanitarianism. It is important not to conflate Humanism and humanitarianism.”
That is more precise and makes a primary, integral distinction between the necessary non-theistic ingredient to Humanism and the theistically ambiguous, ambivalent, or agnostic input for humanitarianism. In a certain sense, to do humanitarian work is humanist, that’s true.
At the same time, you cannot decouple the individual from the acts. If individuals believe in a god or in doing moral acts they are doing so for the purposes of a god or a higher power, then they are not humanists.
To do a moral act within the framework of Humanism narrows the formulation of humanitarianism to the non-theist. In a way, non-theist humanitarianism doesn’t hope for a Heaven or fear a Hell. It acts in a frame of here-and-now and the non-fantastical. It is a superior ethical frame because it frames within the physical, the natural, and the informational.
The physical reality of the world around us consists of entirely natural laws and the relative reliability of information processing of cognitive beings such as ourselves. I love that. Humanism can provide a frame for humanitarianism but is not humanitarianism; however, when Humanism is needed for humanitarian acts, it provides a superior, more mature foundation for ethical acts without reliance on a supernatural being, whether in the Global North or the Global South.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/21
Pavel Luzin is a Russian political scientist whose work dissects the evolution of Russia’s armed forces, defense-industrial complex, and space policy. He is a Visiting Scholar at the Fletcher School of Law and Diplomacy at Tufts University, a Senior Fellow at both the Center for European Policy Analysis (CEPA) and the Saratoga Foundation and maintains an affiliation with the Jamestown Foundation. Luzin earned his PhD in International Relations from IMEMO in 2012, later teaching at Perm State University and working at IMEMO and the PIR Center. His analyses—published in outlets such as CEPA, the Jamestown Foundation, the Foreign Policy Research Institute, and Riddle—probe Russia’s defense budgets, force structure, industrial capacity, and the toll sanctions have taken on its space and technology sectors.
In this interview, Luzin contends that Russia’s war aims remain fundamentally revanchist even as the state itself grows weaker than it was in February 2022. The Kremlin, he argues, continues to fight on despite strategic defeat—sustained by massive wartime spending, industrial exhaustion, and external resupply from North Korea and Iran. Behind the façade of doctrinal continuity lies a hollowing military machine: acute shortages in electronics, machine tools, and trained officers, with more than 7,000 officer deaths confirmed. The critical measures, Luzin notes, are recruitment rates, attrition among officers, and the ability to sustain command capacity. He warns that only consistent Western support for Ukraine—and readiness to counter Russia’s future moves—can prevent Moscow from rebuilding the capacity to wage war again.
(The Fletcher School of Law and Diplomacy)
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: You describe a crisis of manpower, unchecked defense spending, and mounting hardware shortages. What indicators best reveal where the Kremlin’s true priorities lie—its soldiers, its rubles, or its weapons?
Pavel Luzin: Kremlin is prioritizing its goals of the war: elimination of Ukraine’s statehood and culture, elimination or at least strategic undermining of NATO and U.S. leadership and creation of a new world order comfortable for the Kremlin.
However, Russia’s current state is much worse than it was on the eve of February 2022, and this actual state of Russia means the war is lost. Consequently, the Kremlin is going to continue its warfare efforts at any cost in order to improve its state and to reverse the defeat. On the other hand, the recognition of Russia’s defeat means major domestic political and economic changes or even turbulence in Russia with uncertain risks for the Russian political elite.
Jacobsen: You’ve written extensively about shifts in Russian military thinking. What evidence points to genuine doctrinal change within the country’s military leadership, rather than just rhetorical adaptation?
Luzin: I don’t think there is a shift. There is a doctrinal continuity and evolving. However, the original strategy of revanchism appeared in the early 1990s is still the same: Russia must keep its great power status and dominance over its neighbors at any cost, U.S. role in the global affairs must be undermined, NATO must be undermined as well and Russia must take a role of guarantor of the European security (means Russia must be dominating over the European states). This strategy sounds crazy but it exists in the Russian documents and in the public statements of the Russian high-ranking persons.
Jacobsen: Following from the previous question, what represents rhetorical cover for material weakness?
Luzin: The material weakness exists and I cannot say what the people in the Kremlin know about this weakness and what they don’t. The officials say that Russia is undefeatable and produces as many weapons as it needs. However, the reality is different: Russia could hardly fight without the arms supplies from North Korea and Iran as early as late 2023. Also, what we know from the Russian industry is that its deterioration is ongoing and Ukraine makes this deterioration even faster with its strikes.
Jacobsen: Russia’s military leadership highlights structural changes at the top. How is elite churn reshaping command incentives?
Luzin: I do not see structural changes on the top. Yes, some people were replaced and some new command positions appeared like the split of the Western military district into two districts, Moscow and Leningrad, or like transforming brigades into divisions because the typical brigade is commanded by a colonel and typical division is commanded by a major general or lieutenant general. But what are the structural changes? The Kremlin has been incapable even to replace Gerasimov as a chief of the General Staff yet. The main command incentive today is avoiding responsibility for failures.
Jacobsen: What is the tightest bottleneck, e.g., electronics, machine tools, or labour, for the Russian defence-industrial systems?
Luzin: There is everything you mentioned.
Jacobsen: How sustainable is Russia’s admixture of domestic borrowing, inflation taxation, and off-budget lines for funding wartime procurement?
Luzin: Everything has its cost. Russia spent more than 40 trillion rubles directly on the war in 2022-2025. I do not mention years of preparations, indirect costs and huge losses of people. The cost of this cannot be measured by money.
However, every following month of the war leads the Russian budgetary system further to uncertainty because what Russians pay for the war today, they do not invest into their future, into the future of Russia.
Jacobsen: Shortages of fighting men is creating human capital stress. Beyond headlines, which lagging indicators capture the problem’s scale?
Luzin: We are following the balance between the dynamic of recruitment and the dynamic of losses. And Russia can hardly increase the number of its forces because recruits become gun fodder and do not survive for too long. Another lagging indicator is the number of losses among the officer corps. As for today, there are 7000+ Russian officers whose death in Ukraine is confirmed, and it is hard to replace these losses any time soon. And again that means Russia is incapable of increasing its armed forces because of a lack of officers.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Pavel.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/19
Shelby Magid is the Deputy Director of the Atlantic Council’s Eurasia Center, where she oversees policy and programming on Ukraine and the broader region, leading initiatives at the intersection of security, justice, and human rights. She organizes high-level discussions and research on Russia’s war, recently moderating panels on the Russian Orthodox Church’s role in the conflict and on the abduction and repatriation of Ukrainian children. Magid frequently publishes analysis—including a Kyiv/Warsaw dispatch arguing that security is the essential foundation for any lasting peace—and briefs policymakers and media on sanctions, disinformation, and transatlantic coordination. She holds degrees from Central European University and Brandeis University.
In this conversation, Magid argues that sustaining U.S. bipartisan support for Ukraine through 2026 will depend largely on Donald Trump’s messaging and the perception that Ukraine can still prevail. Her priorities include tightening sanctions enforcement, accelerating Ukraine’s drone and munitions production, and strengthening U.S. air defenses. She also calls for credible, technology-driven ceasefire monitoring and emphasizes that the return of abducted Ukrainian children will require meaningful cooperation from the Kremlin.
(Atlantic Council)
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the fundamental swing factors for sustaining bipartisan support for Ukraine?
Shelby Magid: The bipartisan support for Ukraine has been consistently strong. The news cycle can change. Sometimes former President Trump’s comments can make it look like support is shifting, but within Congress and among the American population, as seen through polling, support has remained relatively stable. People empathize with and support Ukraine and disapprove of Russia and President Vladimir Putin.
There are ongoing debates about whether another package, such as a supplemental appropriation for weapons and funding, is necessary, with some people opposing it. Overall, however, support remains strong. The key factor right now is Donald Trump and his messaging, as he already has a base of support. If Trump were to say, “I want Ukraine to win next year” or “I want Ukraine to regain more of its territory,” and if he meant that and followed up by urging Congress to act, a package would likely move forward, providing additional economic or military support.
It might take the form of a loan. It might look different, but that could be the way forward. Public opinion is also critical here — for him, for Congress, and for how strong both sides appear. Currently, there is considerable messaging suggesting Russia is not as strong as it seems: its economy is under strain, its military is underperforming, and its territorial gains are slower than expected. That helps sustain support for Ukraine because it is one thing to back an underdog, but you do not want to back a lost cause. When it looks like Ukraine still has a real chance and Russia will not completely prevail, those are key factors.
Jacobsen: What are the demographics of those who do not support Ukraine?
Magid: It is mainly on the far right and far left — like the horseshoe of people not supporting. On the far left, they do not want more war. They call for peace, negotiations, the elimination of weapons, and an end to the fighting. On the far right, it might be “Ukraine is corrupt,” or “Ukraine will never win,” or “Russia has a point.” Some isolationists say, “We do not want anything to do with foreign conflicts, so why should we have anything to do with this one?” That is more on the fringes.
You also see a standard view that, fine, we want Ukraine to be okay, but it is not our problem, so we will not send more money. They are not actively supporting U.S. engagement. There are many misconceptions, too — both from Russian propaganda and simple misunderstanding — from people who say, “We do not want American boots on the ground in Ukraine.” That has never been proposed. Some people say they do not support it because they misunderstand what “support” means, which in this case has meant financial and military aid, not troop deployment.
Jacobsen: I appreciate that far-left and far-right framing—it suggests a divide between idealism and cynicism, yet both end up producing the same results. What specific tranche of aid or policy do you think could tangibly degrade Russia’s war-fighting capacity? Some observers point to a kind of parity in how each side frames its military strength. Still, Ukraine’s capabilities remain far more limited than Russia’s, especially across a frontline stretching more than 1,200 kilometers.
Magid: When you are asking about what specific tranche, do you mean U.S. support or international support for Ukraine?
Volodymyr Zelensky in 2022.
Jacobsen: International and U.S. support remain vital. Ukraine’s domestic capacity will continue to expand as long as the war endures, driven by the will to survive and defend the country. As one colleague told me early in my reporting, “Thank you, Canada, for the financial support — we do appreciate it. One footnote, however: money is not munitions. We need munitions.”
Magid: That is a double-edged sword because that was also earlier on. Canada has been great, but could do more, as could most countries. Financial support is needed currently in two ways. There is the financial bucket where Ukraine needs more money so it can produce more weapons and drones itself. There has been tremendous success in Ukraine’s drone innovation and warfare. However, they need more money; they could generate more revenue and complete the project faster than other countries.
It would also be beneficial for Russia to face greater financial restrictions. They are already weaker, but the existing sanctions are not being enforced effectively enough. They are not strong enough. The shadow fleet is a significant issue. There is more that can be done to hit that financial bucket and degrade Russia’s capacity. You see Ukraine right now using drones to hit Russia’s oil refineries, which they have called their own type of sanctions, because then Russia has less to sell. That has made an impact — there are gas shortages in Russia right now.
As for Western support, some urgently needed systems come from the United States, primarily for air defense. The considerable discussion this week is that President Zelensky is coming to Washington to meet with President Trump about defense in general. One aspect being discussed is the Tomahawk missile system, which has a long range and would allow Ukraine to strike deeper into Russia. Moreover, when I mention this, I always like to say that Ukraine is targeting logistics, supplies, and the bases that missiles are coming from in Russia — all military targets, not civilian — whereas Russia is targeting civilians in Ukraine.
Jacobsen: Is the deliberate targeting of civilians a sign that Putin lacks a coherent or winning strategy? After all, if you were truly winning, your focus would be on striking military—not civilian—assets.
Magid: There is something to that. However, part of Russia’s strategy is terrorism. They are trying to demoralize Ukrainian society and drive refugee waves, which would then put more pressure on Europe. As soon as the temperatures drop in Ukraine, Russia starts hitting energy infrastructure again, which can force people to leave and go into Europe. They have a history of committing war crimes, and even if they were winning on the battlefield — which they are not — they would continue to target civilians. They are targeting military sites as well, so I would not say they are only targeting civilians. However, they do launch massive attacks against entirely civilian areas and critical infrastructure, like water systems. You cannot call that a military target.
Jacobsen: Which third-country networks matter now?
Magid: Some networks matter for both Ukraine and Russia. On Russia’s side, they are majorly supported in this war by North Korea, Iran, China, and Belarus — though Belarus is in a slightly different category. The drones that Russia uses are Iranian, and they got the technology from Iran. North Korea sends large amounts of ammunition and missiles, and has reportedly sent soldiers. China supports Russia economically. India is also buying large quantities of Russian gas and oil, which helps sustain Russia’s economy. There are also reports — I need to verify the numbers — that tens of thousands of Cuban fighters are preparing to fight for Russia, which would make them the most significant foreign contingent of fighters. So there is this “bad boy autocratic club” that supports Russia.
Jacobsen: There are also some reports of Indians and others being tricked or scammed into fighting.
Magid: There are unfortunate stories about people from many countries being tricked into going to Russia. The numbers are in the single digits or dozens, but they are being sent to work in factories or signing up under pretenses. Others are being scammed from North Africa, thinking they are getting work permits, and then they are brought through Belarus to be pushed over the border as part of weaponized migration. A lot of that is happening. However, in countries supporting on a larger scale, those are the key ones. As for third countries, you see the entire Western and international order — the G7, the EU, the U.S., the U.K. — but also many countries in the Indo-Pacific. Taiwan, South Korea, Japan, and, of course, Canada have all been supportive. It is interesting to see how these networks operate, and what they provide is, of course, different.
Volodymyr Zelensky at the White House in August.
Jacobsen: What air defense and artillery production targets should the U.S. and Europe aim for in 2026?
Magid: I would say it is aspirational to speak about these targets in a quarterly fashion, because it takes so long to produce and finalize contracts. It has been an issue throughout the full-scale invasion — the slow pace of production from the U.S. and the EU. I know they are working on it, but the war still goes on. Air defense is the most urgent for Ukraine, as Russia is absolutely slamming them. The number of missiles and drones that Russia uses on a daily and nightly basis has increased drastically as it has scaled up production. Those supporting Ukraine also need to scale up their efforts.
One way to do that is to continue financial support for Ukraine. Ukraine has already scaled up domestic drone production and other sound systems. Co-production is also being explored — Denmark has been leading in this, and there is discussion about a potential U.S.–Ukraine drone deal. Other countries are looking to follow suit. This would involve sharing technology, investing more money, and maximizing production speed. I do not have specific expectations for a particular quarter in 2026, but I want to emphasize that there is a pressing need for all of this to happen quickly.
Jacobsen: How should guarantees, money, and capital be sequenced?
Magid: For a post-war Ukraine, it is a tricky question because the crux of it is what can happen now and what has to happen post-war. Demining is already happening in Ukraine, because there are different types. There is humanitarian demining — clearing civilian and agricultural areas that were mined — but then both Russians and Ukrainians have mined along the frontlines. You cannot demine that until the security situation is resolved. Areas that were occupied by Russia and have since been liberated — for instance, Kherson — still need to be demined now, and they are actively doing that. Just a couple of weeks ago, in Chernihiv Oblast, there was a humanitarian demining mission by an NGO that Russia attacked, killing some of the workers. This is a hazardous job, and Russia targets these responders.
For capital, Ukraine needs money now to keep its economy afloat. They need to pay government workers, first responders, teachers, and most importantly, soldiers. They need to buy food and weapons. Then there is also money for reconstruction. Some reconstruction is happening already. If your grandmother’s window is blown out, she needs it repaired this week; otherwise, she has to move. That can happen now. However, Mariupol, which is completely flattened and under Russian occupation, will need to be rebuilt once Ukraine regains control. That capital will not flow yet, and much of it will have to come from private companies.
Much of this is being discussed, but ultimately, post-war reconstruction cannot begin until stability is established. That is where the guarantees come in. Let us say there is a ceasefire — no one trusts Russia, nor should they. So just because there is a ceasefire without guarantees, capital is not going to flow in, and real reconstruction will not happen. People will not move back to Ukraine en masse until they feel it is stable and durable. It is all interconnected. However, the conversations are happening now because plans need to be in place. Different parts of the country are in various situations. You can work on the energy system in western Ukraine in ways you cannot in the east. Luckily, it is being looked at proactively.
Trump and Putin during the largely unproductive summit in Alaska.
Jacobsen: This brings to mind the difference between winning and simply not losing. A ceasefire and a peace deal aren’t the same thing—and a pause is something else entirely, especially in the context of the Kremlin’s behavior. What would a verifiable pause look like? Would it involve inspection regimes, limits on missile deployments, or clearly defined territorial arrangements?
Magid: It is interesting how the different terms play out. A pause could happen at any moment if Russia stopped firing at Ukraine. If they said, “We are going to have a pause,” that could lead to discussions on a ceasefire. Ukraine is not going to stop firing and defending itself until it knows that Russia is holding to the same standard. A pause could mean stopping missile strikes and halting fighting on the front lines.
Jacobsen: Which, to be clear, could be done at any time.
Magid: It could be done at any time.
Jacobsen: Because of one person saying so.
Magid: The onus is entirely on Putin and the Russian side. Ukraine is defending itself. As for a ceasefire, that is what the Ukrainians are calling for. What President Trump has also been calling for is an unconditional ceasefire. The Ukrainians have agreed to this; they are ready to do it at any moment. The Russians have rejected it many times.
As for what a ceasefire would look like, you would need some monitoring because it cannot just be a “he said, she said” situation. Russia has a long history of violating ceasefires, and Ukraine has already been through that. There are ongoing discussions about various mechanisms and formats that could be effective. One critical aspect is the need for external ceasefire monitors and international security guarantees. Ukraine has already experienced failures, like the Minsk negotiations, where there were large buffer zones and unarmed monitors, and that did not stop Russian hostilities. A more robust model would be necessary, involving Ukrainian forces, NATO observers, or neutral peacekeepers.
They would have to monitor a vast swath of land, so there would need to be a technological component — drones or satellite imagery, for example — because it is simply too large an area to monitor entirely by people on the ground. There would also need to be deterrence mechanisms. So it would have to be an interesting combination of factors, and there would have to be some U.S. role — not boots on the ground, necessarily, but something like satellite monitoring to make Russia actually listen and be deterred.
Jacobsen: This next one is fascinating—it combines the two subjects people are warned never to discuss at the dinner table: religion and politics. The Russian Orthodox Church now operates largely at the Kremlin’s behest, reinforcing many of the regime’s narratives. In the occupied territories, which of these narratives are actually taking hold, and how deeply are they resonating?
Magid: That is an interesting question. It is hard to answer. One way they are sticking is by eliminating all competing narratives. They have outlawed and persecuted other religious organizations, gone after Catholic priests and other spiritual leaders, tortured and killed them. They control the information space in this manner, working hand in hand with Kremlin narratives. They are putting out constant messaging — adjusted over time — emphasizing “family values,” “defending Russian speakers,” and “God is on our side.”
Those narratives are probably sticking more in Russia itself than in the occupied territories because it is hard to believe such propaganda when your neighbor was held in a basement and tortured. At the same time, the Church’s networks are being used for intelligence gathering and other nefarious activities.
I did an event with the Free Russia Foundation a couple of weeks ago, and they released a report on the Russian Orthodox Church and its role in supporting the war in Ukraine. They even consulted Russian clergy who are now in exile because they spoke out against the war and had to flee Russia. It is fascinating and very complex in many ways, because it gets into areas of faith that many of us in the U.S., Canada, and the West are simply unfamiliar with.
The idea that you should not weaponize the Church to declare a holy war — to bless people to go murder children — I think anyone can understand that.
It is important to emphasize that the Russian Orthodox Church is tied to the state and controlled in coordination with the Kremlin. However, there are believers within that community who do not support it, and there have been internal splits. I know people who practice Russian Orthodoxy and do not believe in supporting the war. So it is essential to separate the political structures from the faith community.
Jacobsen: How can the different avenues you mentioned—documentation, third-party mediation, and targeted sanctions—actually help return abducted Ukrainian children home? I’m thinking of that Michelle Obama–style appeal to “bring them home.” Within a reasonable timeframe—say, six to twelve months, if not sooner—what combination of pressure and diplomacy could make that happen in practice?
Magid: I wish there were a better answer or better news. There has been incredible documentation from the Ukrainian side and from third parties — for instance, Yale University has a lab tracking this issue. They have documented around 20,000 kidnapped children, though the actual number is likely higher. Some cases have detailed records — names, families, locations — but others are harder to verify, especially when orphanages were moved. Some parents are still actively trying to get their children back.
These mediation efforts have been largely unsuccessful. Over the years, the Ukrainian government has appealed to various leaders for help — the Pope, some countries in the Middle East, and others. There are working groups, but ultimately, Russia must agree to return the children. It is a double-edged sword because Putin is under indictment by the International Criminal Court for war crimes related to the abductions. In a way, Russia fears that returning the children would confirm the charges. So despite the documentation and mediation efforts, they remain hesitant.
There have been a few recent cases — Melania Trump said she engaged with Putin and helped secure the return of some children. It is similar to what we discussed earlier about a pause: could these children be returned at any time? Yes. It is entirely up to Putin. Many of the children could be given back to Ukraine immediately if the Russian authorities decided to do so.
Some cases are more complicated because Russia has changed the children’s identities — legally altering names, arranging adoptions, and essentially erasing records. In some instances, open-source investigators have identified children in Russian schools whose relatives in Ukraine are still searching for them.
The issue is not one of time; it is one of power and political will. There is a Ukrainian NGO called Save Ukraine that’s done extraordinary work — something like an underground railroad system — to bring some children home. They have succeeded in dozens of cases, which is remarkable, but still only a drop in the ocean.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts or feelings based on the conversation today?
Magid: No, it has been a wide range of interesting questions — thank you.
Jacobsen: Thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/16
Alexander J. Motyl is a political scientist, historian, novelist, and professor of political science at Rutgers University–Newark. A leading specialist on Ukraine, Russia, the USSR, nationalism, revolutions, and empires, he has long been recognized for his unflinching analysis of power, ideology, and collapse in post-Soviet space.
Motyl previously served as associate director of Columbia University’s Harriman Institute, one of the foremost centers for the study of Russia and Eastern Europe. His scholarship includes Imperial Ends: The Decay, Collapse, and Revival of Empires—a landmark examination of how empires dissolve and reinvent themselves—and the co-edited volume The Holodomor Reader: A Sourcebook on the Famine of 1932–1933 in Ukraine, a defining contribution to understanding Soviet atrocity and Ukrainian national trauma. Beyond academia, he writes frequent analyses of the Russian–Ukrainian war for 19FortyFive, The Hill, and the National Security Journal, and has been featured in Columbia SIPA’s Journal of International Affairs. His recent essays explore themes of Western policy, Russian regime stability, and the long arc of decolonization across Eurasia.
In this interview, Motyl argues that the Kremlin’s war aims are fundamentally neo-imperial—not limited to territorial expansion but directed toward the erasure of Ukrainian statehood and identity itself. He situates Vladimir Putin within a centuries-long lineage of Russian imperial ideology, tracing continuities that stretch from the czarist era through Soviet dominance to the present authoritarian revival. Contrary to Kremlin narratives, Motyl dismisses NATO enlargement as a genuine catalyst for invasion, noting that Ukraine’s membership prospects were effectively nonexistent.
Instead, he portrays today’s Russia as a brittle, hyper-centralized regime marked by paralysis and overreach—a system in which misjudgment and misinformation are endemic. The elite’s passivity during the Prigozhin mutiny, he suggests, exposed the fragility of Putin’s power and the hollow performance of loyalty sustaining it. Motyl envisions plausible scenarios of post-Putin fragmentation, beginning not in Moscow but along the empire’s restive peripheries. He also dissects the parallel information war: expert analysis battling viral disinformation, think tanks competing with Telegram channels. Yet he ends with cautious optimism. The war, for all its devastation, has forced a global reckoning with Ukraine’s history, resilience, and agency—an awakening long overdue in Western political imagination.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: This is a concern shared widely, from scholars in both East and West to ordinary Ukrainians living through the war. Why do you argue that Putin’s central objective is not merely the conquest of territory, or even of all Ukraine, but the erasure of Ukrainian statehood itself?
Alexander Motyl: It’s a question of the ideology that motivates him. It’s a Russian imperial ideology that goes back several hundred years—at least to the time of Peter the Great, arguably earlier—when Muscovy began its project of gathering territories it considered its own.
This ideology has existed for three or four centuries. It was at the core of the Russian imperial project before 1918 and the collapse of the empire. It was also central to the Soviet project. They didn’t call it Russian, but it was clearly a Russian-oriented or Russian-based state policy.
It has now become the core of Putin’s project. Even under Yeltsin in the 1990s, the rhetoric was imperial. The policies were half imperial and half democratic, and there was at least some hope that Russia might abandon its imperial pretensions. It might have—but Putin became prime minister in 1999, acting president at the end of that year, and president in 2000. Very quickly, he embraced this ideology, consistent with his background as a KGB officer, and it has driven his policies toward the former Soviet republics since he took office.
According to this ideology, Ukrainians, like Belarusians, do not really exist. They are, quite literally, seen as a plot by Western imperialist secret services.
They are portrayed as creations of the Germans, of the Austro-Hungarians, of the West in general. In other words, the notion that Ukraine deserves to be a separate state with its own national identity has been, in this view, foisted upon the so-called “Little Russians,” as Putin prefers to call them, by deranged nationalists under the influence of Western intelligence agencies.
From that point of view, the purpose of the war is to erase whatever claims Ukrainians might have to being Ukrainians, and to transform them into a passive “Little Russian” population that accepts subordination to the “Great Russian people.” Hence, the project is one of erasure.
That doesn’t necessarily mean Putin wants to kill everyone. However, many of his subordinates and propagandists have made that option explicit. They have openly said, “If we can’t convert you to Russianism or Little Russianism, we will kill you.” The former president of Russia, Dmitry Medvedev, has made this claim repeatedly in his public statements. So, that is at least an option on the table.
Preferably, from their perspective, it means getting rid of the so-called nationalists. And ironically, the Jewish Ukrainian president, Volodymyr Zelensky, is one of the foremost Ukrainian nationalists in their eyes. The goal is to remove people like him and replace them with a pliant regime, a compliant elite, and a submissive population—much like what the Russians hoped to achieve with Viktor Yanukovych, and what they have, in many ways, already achieved with Alexander Lukashenko and Belarus.
The Belarusians, despite having demonstrated their own sense of national identity in the mass protests a few years ago, have essentially been forced into submission. They caved. The Ukrainians resisted—and we’ll see how that turns out.
Putin during a military parade in Red Square.
Jacobsen: What do Western analysts or commentators typically misread about Russian aggression against Ukraine?
Motyl: For starters, the belief that it has something to do with NATO enlargement is one of the most important misreadings. It was clear from the very beginning, certainly by 2021 and 2022, and in fact every year since 1991, when Ukraine became independent, that Ukraine’s chances of becoming a NATO member were essentially zero.
Ukraine’s chances of joining NATO were exactly zero in 2013 and 2014, and they were exactly zero again in 2021 and 2022. The Russians could not have been unaware of that fact, because the Ukrainians knew it, the Europeans knew it, and NATO knew it. Yes, back in 2008, at the Bucharest Summit, NATO did declare that the “future of Ukraine lies with NATO.” Still, that statement, along with a dollar, would get me a ride on the New York City subway.
There were no intentions whatsoever to expand NATO to include Ukraine. In addition, Putin must have known—as his intelligence services certainly did—that the so-called NATO armies were in dreadful shape. They were in no position to launch an attack on Russia.
NATO was a paper tiger. Ukraine’s chances of joining this paper tiger were essentially nil, and Putin had to have known that. So why did NATO membership for Ukraine matter to him? Not because of any genuine security threat—that was all a smokescreen. The real issue is that if Ukraine were to join NATO and later the European Union, it would mean that Ukraine would be lost to Russia forever. That’s why it mattered.
It would signify Ukraine becoming part of what Putin calls “the West,” or whatever remains of it after the Trump era. That is what truly concerned him. It wasn’t about a military threat. He has even admitted as much on multiple occasions—most recently at the Valdai Discussion Club meeting in St. Petersburg—where he said NATO poses no threat to Russia. If he says that today, after more than three years of war, he would have said the same four years ago if pressed.
So that’s mistake number one—the fundamental misreading. It skews everything, because it shifts the blame for the war onto NATO, supposedly the aggressor, and onto Ukraine, as if it harboured evil intentions toward Russia.
In reality, that’s absurd. Back in 2014, Ukraine had only about 7,000 battle-ready troops. By 2022, the situation had improved somewhat, but had it not been for the thousands of volunteers who immediately joined the armed forces after the invasion, Ukraine likely would have fallen. So Ukraine posed no threat—no security threat whatsoever, not even an imaginable one—to the Russian Federation.
The only other plausible explanation for his fear of NATO is that he is deeply paranoid—perhaps even pathologically so. In other words, he appears to have serious psychological problems. He is incapable of accepting that NATO, essentially a paper tiger, truly was a paper tiger.
He cannot imagine that the intelligence his own security services provide might actually be accurate. That’s possible—plausible, even—but in any case, it has nothing to do with the reality of NATO enlargement. It has everything to do with Putin’s personal phobias.
The other major misconception, which still hasn’t been fully corrected, concerns the idea that Putin is somehow a “normal” leader—a man like one of us. There’s plenty of variation within what we call “the West,” and of course, it has its own flaws. Not everyone in the West is rational or devoted to human rights and democratic values. But it should have been evident to anyone with even a minimal understanding of the Soviet Union that a KGB officer was never going to be at the forefront of defending human or national rights.
That should have been self-evident to anyone who knows the history of the KGB and its predecessors in the Soviet system. Putin joined the KGB voluntarily in the early 1970s, at the height of the Soviet crackdown on the dissident movement. He knew exactly what he was doing and why.
To imagine that such a man would have democratic leanings or a Western sense of rationality—concerned with rights, the rule of law, or individual liberty—is absurd. He was not only a KGB operative but also a product of the Russian elite. And as we’ve already discussed, he is steeped in the Russian imperial ideology. It’s hardly surprising, then, that he is someone who believes deeply in power, in force, and in Russia’s need to “be made great again.”
Expecting this kind of individual to behave normally or to share Western values was wishful thinking. Remember when George W. Bush said he looked into Putin’s eyes and “saw his soul”? I wish I had those eyeglasses.
There are many other mistakes Western observers have made. Let me end with a third one. We’ve talked about NATO and Putin, and the third is the persistent belief that Russia is not an empire—or at least not a deeply fractured multinational state.
This misconception was already evident in the 1980s, when most Western governments and analysts were unwilling to acknowledge the importance of the non-Russian peoples within the Soviet Union. I say this as someone who has studied and written a dissertation on the non-Russian nationalities. Back in the early to mid-1980s, people like me were considered strange—eccentric, even—for focusing on them.
It was widely believed that there was no point in studying the non-Russian nationalities because, as one scholar once told me at a conference, “They don’t matter.” As it turned out in 1989, 1990, and 1991, they mattered enormously. Had it not been for them, the Soviet Union might actually have continued to exist.
The inability to recognize that Russia has an imperial structure—or at least to understand that it consists of a variety of deeply dissatisfied nationalities—was a fundamental problem. It made it very difficult for Western analysts to understand what was happening in the 1980s under Gorbachev, and it continues to distort their understanding of Russia’s relationship with its former Soviet republics today.
Danish troops during NATO training exercises. (NATO)
Jacobsen: On that point, how durable is Russia’s domestic “consent” for a long war? What are the potential or plausible triggers for regime fracture or collapse?
Motyl: Analysts in this field, as with nearly every question, are divided into two camps. Some believe that Putin is firmly in charge, that all is well, and that the system will survive even after he’s gone—for any number of reasons.
Then there’s the other group, to which I belong, that believes the system is fragile and brittle. Putin and the regime are in trouble, and scenarios predicting the possible collapse of the Russian Federation are neither unlikely nor impossible. In fact, they are becoming increasingly likely.
I say that for several reasons. The most obvious is the toll of the war. Russia has likely lost over a million soldiers, if we include killed and seriously wounded. Its economy, as nearly everyone now agrees, is in serious trouble.
Optimists say it could sustain the war until 2027. Pessimists suggest a perfect storm could emerge as early as late 2025. In any case, there’s a growing consensus that major trouble lies ahead and that the war will eventually become unsustainable.
The military and the economy are in trouble, and the population is beginning to feel the strain. Inflation is eroding living standards. Those employed in the militarized sector—roughly half the population—are doing relatively better, or at least less badly, than others. But the other half, those in the consumer sector, are facing increasing hardship.
Then there are Russia’s elites—the political, coercive, and economic elites. Most have been co-opted, but all have lost a great deal since the war began.
As we saw during the Prigozhin affair two years ago—the short-lived march on Moscow—the real significance wasn’t Prigozhin himself. The key revelation was that as he gathered his forces and advanced toward the capital, no one within the army, the FSB, or the National Guard acted. They watched to see how it would unfold.
To me, that signaled not loyalty, but a striking lack of enthusiasm—at best, tepid support—for Putin’s regime.
That’s the background. More immediately, Putin has constructed a highly centralized political system. I’ve been calling it fascist since about 2008. Some agree; others object to the label. But whatever we call it—autocracy, dictatorship, authoritarianism—the fact remains that virtually all power is concentrated in Putin’s hands.
That centralization makes governance inefficient. We know from other historical examples that subordinates tend to tell such leaders what they want to hear, not what they need to know. It’s a system built on buck-passing and corruption—deep, pervasive corruption. And because so much depends on a single man’s decisions, the entire structure is brittle.
Given his position and the filtered information he receives, Putin is especially prone to serious errors. Some like to call him a “grand chess master.” As someone who actually plays chess—not quite at the grandmaster level, but enough to recognize one—I can tell you he’s very far from it. At best, he’s a mediocre player.
The point is that this kind of overcentralized, self-deluding system leads to catastrophic decisions—like forcing Viktor Yanukovych to abandon Ukraine’s association agreement with the European Union in 2013 or launching the full-scale invasion of Ukraine in 2022. These were stupid, unnecessary, and self-defeating moves.
And this matters for Russia’s future. Sooner or later, Putin will go. It might be from natural causes—he’s 73, and it’s not clear he’s in good health. Or he could be brought down by the growing complications and crises the war itself has created.
The devastation of Russia’s economy has created conditions that strongly resemble those in countries that have experienced coups d’état or political collapses. All the classic preconditions for a coup are present in Russia today, just as they were in many postcolonial, developing, or even developed states at moments of crisis. At this point, it’s simply a matter of enough people within the system deciding to act.
Everything else is already in place. If and when Putin leaves—and he will, either for natural reasons or through removal in some form of coup—it will have profoundly destabilizing consequences for the regime he’s built.
Think of the regime as a wheel with Putin as the hub. Remove the hub, and the wheel cannot hold. It won’t necessarily collapse overnight—political systems rarely do—but its ability to function will be severely compromised. A successor would struggle enormously to consolidate power, if only because Putin has been in control for 26 years. He has deliberately fused his personal authority with the state itself. L’État, c’est moi—“I am the state”—applies quite accurately in his case.
So, in the immediate aftermath of his departure—which could happen tomorrow, or a year or two from now, for any number of reasons—the regime’s institutional structure will weaken. A brutal power struggle will almost certainly erupt. This has always been the case in Russian history—Imperial, Soviet, and post-Soviet alike. And during that struggle, combined with economic collapse and military defeat, Moscow’s ability to maintain control over the peripheries will decline dramatically.
We saw something similar during the late Soviet period under Mikhail Gorbachev. All political energy was consumed by the struggle in Moscow, which both allowed and compelled the non-Russian republics to seek independence. Many initially opposed it, but they eventually realized it was the only means to preserve local power and survive amid systemic decay.
I’m hardly the first to draw that comparison. Several Russian economists and analysts have also made it.
Given all these contingencies—and they are contingencies, not certainties—if they were to align, it’s entirely conceivable that the Russian Federation could begin to fragment. My own view is that the first to go might be Chechnya, ironically, one of the places many assume least likely to break away. But Chechnya already functions with significant autonomy and possesses its own army. All it would need to do is say “no” to Moscow.
If that happened, others—Tatarstan, Bashkortostan, Dagestan, Ingushetia, and so on—could follow. Should they succeed, regions like Yakutia and other far-flung republics might join the movement.
As I said, these are all “ifs”—but they are not implausible ones. String them together in the correct sequence, and a scenario of Russian fragmentation becomes quite imaginable.
Jacobsen: Open-source intelligence has become an essential field after more than a decade of Russian aggression against Ukraine. We’ve seen a flood of disinformation—deliberately fabricated falsehoods—intertwined with misinformation, or data that is inaccurate or misinterpreted yet still spreads widely.
Suppose there’s a regime change in Moscow—or even if Russia settles into a kind of hybrid status quo that lasts for years. In that context, what becomes of the information war? In the West, particularly in the United States, we’ve watched commentators—more personalities than scholars—build vast platforms that often function, knowingly or not, as amplifiers of Kremlin propaganda.
How do we counter that influence as the conflict and its narratives continue to evolve?
Motyl: That’s a tricky question—one I wrestle with almost daily when I write my columns, whose purpose is, at least in part, to persuade people that there are wrong ways of seeing the world and better, if not perfectly correct, alternatives.
Within the broader analytical and journalistic community, things are generally sound. There’s a widespread understanding that Putin is a tyrant—or at the very least, a dictator—and that he launched a war that was both unnecessary and, as Trump once called it, “ridiculous.” In that regard, Trump was actually correct: the war is absurd.
So, in the expert community—though there are exceptions, some serious, some bordering on foolishness—most people grasp the fundamental realities. These are thoughtful individuals who may make serious mistakes, but you can engage them in rational discussion.
Where things get far more problematic is outside that expert sphere—among the broader public, non-specialist commentators, and specific segments of the media ecosystem.
I’d include you in the journalist category. My experience with journalists is that they usually try very hard—and often quite successfully—to get into the background details of a story. They don’t just blithely talk about “Ukrainian neo-Nazis.” They ask: do they exist? If so, where are they, and in what numbers? They ask serious questions.
Jacobsen: When did Jewish neo-Nazis start running countries?
Motyl: That’s the sort of absurd claim that should be obvious nonsense to anyone. In any case, the expert community and most journalists are doing relatively well. The problem arises in the more popular analytical fields—when we’re talking about figures like Tucker Carlson.
These people have huge platforms. They’re listened to and believed by audiences who generally don’t seek out other sources of information. And by that, I don’t mean my columns—they could read reputable journalists across a range of outlets to get alternative views or nuanced perspectives. But they don’t. So there’s a kind of bifurcation in the United States. I can’t really speak for Canada.
Jacobsen: The biggest joke I’ve heard is that money is helpful—but money is not munitions.
Motyl: That’s a good line. And that’s where things get problematic—when you go deeper into public perception. Popular understanding often doesn’t exist, or it’s based on vague impressions. Public opinion surveys indicate that most MAGA supporters, as well as most Americans, support assisting Ukraine, which appears to be good news on the surface.
But when you dig deeper, you find that many don’t know where Ukraine is or what the war is actually about. So it’s hard to gauge how deep that support really runs. Still, one must be grateful for small mercies—those limited but positive sentiments do matter.
The problem in the United States, at least when it comes to Russia, Ukraine, and misinformation, is that there’s strong reason to believe that many decision-makers within the Trump administration—I won’t name names—got their information from Fox News, Tucker Carlson, Laura Loomer, and others like them, rather than from academics, experts, or the analytical community, or what’s left of the CIA, FBI, and other professional institutions.
These organizations possess deep expertise, yet it is often dismissed or derided. It’s not regarded as legitimate, at least not by the MAGA crowd. They seem to prefer a know-nothing approach to policymaking—a deliberate rejection of knowledge in favour of ideological certainty.
And it’s not just that they disagree with experts who hold different views. Even those who share some perspectives and can argue intelligently with evidence aren’t being listened to as they should be.
The decimation of the intelligence community exacerbates these problems, much like the hollowing out of the State Department and USAID. Many experienced professionals who once played vital roles, even secondary ones, in the formulation of policy have been pushed out or left in frustration.
That’s not just bad in the short term—it’s disastrous for the medium and long term. Institutions depend on institutional memory. They need, as it were, some old hands to guide the younger generation—or at least to provide alternative perspectives. Of course, given my age, that’s precisely the sort of thing you’d expect me to say.
That said, here’s the good news. If you were to survey the academic community, the expert community, the general public, and policymakers—not just in the United States, but also in Canada and Western Europe—today versus 20, 30, or 40 years ago, the difference in knowledge would be enormous.
Back then, the level of understanding was infinitesimally trim compared to today. People had virtually no idea about Ukraine. They had gained more knowledge about Russia. But many couldn’t have told you that Estonia, Kazakhstan, or Georgia even existed. They knew Poland and Hungary, perhaps, but even that knowledge was quite limited.
The example I like to give is this: thirty years ago, you could have fit all the books and articles published in English about Ukraine on a single bookshelf. Today, that same amount is produced every year. We’re talking about an exponential growth in knowledge, understanding, interest, and critique. It works both ways, of course—support and criticism—but there’s simply no comparison between now and thirty or forty years ago.
Ultimately, I’m optimistic. Developments are heading in the right direction. The war, for all its tragedies, has had one particularly salutary consequence: it has significantly deepened global knowledge about Ukraine, Russia, and the region as a whole in ways that would not have occurred before 2022.
So, in that respect, there’s reason to be reasonably optimistic about the future.
Jacobsen: Alex, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it—it’s been a pleasure to meet you.
Motyl: My pleasure, Scott. Thank you very much. This was fun. And apologies for going on and on—I droned like a Ukrainian drone.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/17
What evidence threshold should resolve the Kamloops residential school claims?
Frances Widdowson is a Canadian political scientist, author, and commentator known for critical analyses of Indigenous policy, higher education, and academic governance. A former associate professor at Mount Royal University in Calgary, she co-authored the book Disrobing the Aboriginal Industry and has written widely on evidence standards, public funding accountability, and the effects of ideology on institutions. Widdowson has served on the board of the New Enlightenment Project and participates in public debates about residential schools, academic freedom, and policy formation. Her work, often controversial, emphasizes universal truth claims, methodological rigour, and open inquiry. She produces research, commentary, and talks.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Frances Widdowson argues that debates around residential schools hinge on claims of genocide, the nature of truth, and funding accountability. She maintains that Kamloops relied on ground-penetrating radar showing 215 anomalies, not confirmed graves, and notes that no excavations have verified remains there. Citing Pine Creek excavations that uncovered rocks, she criticizes the conflations between “unmarked” and “clandestine” graves and urges the use of transparent methods and excavation. Widdowson says media practices amplify premature conclusions, while dissenters face professional penalties. She frames the dispute as one between Enlightenment standards and relativism, calling for evidence-based policy and proportional public discourse.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: All right, today we’re here for the New Enlightenment Project with the wonderful Frances Widdowson, who has served on the board of the New Enlightenment Project. Thank you very much for your service. Today, we’re going to talk about a significant error and the contexts that developed from that point. It’s a big topic, and we’ll see how far we can go before we’re out of steam. Big picture: What is the linchpin of the controversy? If you were to pull that out, there would be no controversy.
Dr. Frances Widdowson: That is a difficult question. I do not know if there is a single linchpin, but one is the claim of genocide—whether the residential school system constituted genocide. Another is the nature of truth—whether truth is objective or subjective. A third major factor—though I am not sure it is accurate to call it a linchpin—is whether Indigenous groups should determine how they spend funds, with one view holding that non-Indigenous people should have no say. Together, these have created conditions for an ongoing dispute that Canada has not fully reckoned with. In my view, the Kamloops case is especially significant; once it is resolved, we can better address other claims.
In Kamloops, to frame the general picture: investigators did not use LiDAR; they used ground-penetrating radar (GPR) to survey parts of the former school site. Early communications spoke of “the remains of 215 children” being “confirmed” but there has been no excavation. The community said that it would excavate in 2021 and 2022, but not one shovel has been put in the ground.
Jacobsen: The public discourse seemed to jump from “anomalies detected” to stronger claims. People sometimes do this with UFOs: they start with “unidentified” and leap to “aliens.” With GPR, there were anomalies; some observers inferred specific conclusions. What claims did you make, how were they misinterpreted, and how did that add fuel to the controversy?
Widdowson: Are you asking about the claims made by Tk’emlúps te Secwépemc, or about my claims?
Jacobsen: Your claims—specifically, your claims about the Indian Band, and also about the broader Canadian commentariat, which have had many opinions on this as well.
Widdowson: My claims include: first, that the residential schools were not genocidal; second, that there is no confirmed evidence of clandestine burials at Kamloops based on what is public; third, that truth is universal—there is no such thing as “my truth” and “your truth,” only belief and reality. Finally, because the Band received federal funding in the wake of the 2021 announcement—reporting has tallied this at roughly $12.1 million across related supports—accountability requires completing proper archaeological work. As of recent public reporting, no human remains have been exhumed and confirmed at Kamloops, and technical decisions about excavation have been a matter of community process.
So, those are what have been contested. There’s also the broader area of residential schools, which got me into trouble as well, because I argued about the educational benefits they provided. Indigenous communities—the Bands—did not have formalized educational systems. What they had was often described as “looking, listening, and learning.”
For children to be taught to read and write, and to gain the skills needed to participate in a modern economy, some form of structured system had to be created. Indigenous adults could not provide it at the time because they had not been taught literacy themselves. Given the logistical circumstances in Canada in the late 1800s, the residential school boarding model was seen as the approach that would provide the most consistent benefits. Studies from that period suggested that schools based in communities often struggled with attendance, as children would leave for hunting trips and return having forgotten much of what they had learned.
So there was a rationale, at that time, for creating residential schools as boarding schools. Of course, they also caused immense problems. The separation of children from their families led to cultural disconnection, and the fact that churches operated the schools created additional issues. I am not a fan of religious education for anyone, but that was the way things were structured at the time.
Still, when I said the residential schools provided an educational benefit that would not otherwise have been available, it was considered unacceptable. That statement was cited in the petition to have me fired.
Jacobsen: Have there been further excavations? I recall you had a contentious interview—sometimes personal and adversarial—about potential excavations. You inquired about whether further investigation would be conducted, and the interviewer, a person working for CBC at the time, essentially stated, “I just think we should believe them and leave it at that.” That seemed to elevate opinion over evidence. What are your issues with that framing? Also, have there been further archaeological investigations so we can check the claims? If there are 200-plus anomalies and there is concern, surely more can be done.
Widdowson: The only excavation conducted in the residential school context since the Kamloops announcement was at Pine Creek in Manitoba. A Knowledge Keeper had said they believed children were buried in the basement of the church. Ground-penetrating radar (GPR) identified 14 anomalies that seemed to present like burials. When the site was excavated, however, they found only rocks and no human remains. That is the one significant case so far where excavation has been carried out.
At Kamloops, nothing further has been done beyond the GPR survey. In 2021, the study identified about 215 “targets of interest,” often described publicly as unmarked graves. In January 2022, community leaders—including Manny Jules and Ted Gottfriedson Jr.—stated that a decision had been made by the 13 family heads to proceed with exhumations and to return the children to their home communities. However, exhumation presupposes the existence of remains, and excavation has not yet occurred. As of the most recent public reporting, no remains have been confirmed through excavation at Kamloops.
And then in May 2022, Rosanne Casimir—when interviewed by Rebel News journalist Drea Humphrey—said they hadn’t decided whether to excavate or not. That was a change from earlier statements.
Jacobsen: We should not speculate, but we can at least note there was a shift.
Widdowson: Yes. We have a series of people saying different things at different times. I became interested in whether this could amount to fraud. I asked an AI system—Grok—to analyze it under the legal definition of fraud. The answer was nuanced: it could be fraud, but it depends on the circumstances.
If they took money while intending never to excavate, that could constitute fraud. If they initially planned to excavate but later changed course due to community concerns, then it would not meet the legal threshold of fraud. According to public comments from Manny Jules and Ted Gottfriedson Jr., the 13 family heads had agreed to excavation. But if some community members later opposed it, the leadership might have shifted direction. In that case, the money technically should have been returned, since it was not spent as initially specified.
Instead, funds have been redirected into related initiatives—such as memorials, ceremonies, and grief counselling. The official line now is that the Band is still “investigating,” but there is no publicly available formal documentation clarifying what that process means. Blacklock’s Reporter obtained documents indicating the original application included plans for excavation and DNA forensic analysis. So there was a concrete plan at one point.
From 2021 to 2023, money was allocated for excavation, forensic work, and related supports such as grief counselling. The most frustrating part, in my view, is that despite no excavation being done, the federal government recently provided an additional $12.5 million. That brings the total to around $25 million.
Jacobsen: And what was that additional $12.5 million earmarked for?
Widdowson: It is for a healing center to support people dealing with trauma.
Jacobsen: But that raises questions: will it use best-practice, evidence-based treatments, or will it rely on other, less rigorous approaches under the banner of “healing”?
Widdowson: Some of these approaches may have some efficacy, but broadly, they do not. The difficulty is that in Indigenous policy, there is often an emphasis on “other ways of knowing,” which are contrasted against so-called colonial mindsets. This is the larger problem with the indigenization agenda: it resists the concept of universal truth.
Instead, truth is treated as relative—whatever the knowledge keepers say is true becomes accepted as accurate. But that does not work in a modern society. To develop policy, leaders must be accountable for their decisions. The ideal is that you propose a course of action and justify
why it is preferable to another. That requires systematic analysis. It presupposes the existence of some universal standard of truth. Indigenous leaders have often resisted that framework.
Jacobsen: That touches on more profound philosophical questions—concepts like intersubjectivity and intersubjective agreement. We don’t need to plunge into ontology and epistemology 101 here. However, this raises an essential definitional issue.
In coverage—including in outlets like The New York Times—terms such as “mass grave,” “unmarked grave,” “missing child,” and “genocide” have been used, sometimes loosely and prematurely. I am not saying these terms all appeared in one article, but in the broader commentary, they are being conflated. Especially on sensitive issues, precision is essential. So, let’s clarify: how should we define “mass grave,” “unmarked grave,” “missing child,” and “genocide” in this context?
Widdowson: “Mass grave” is usually defined as more than three people buried together. I have also heard it described simply as more than one. The distinction matters because the point is to determine whether a large number of people were buried together, as opposed to a few individuals. The term generally implies foul play, but that is not always the case. Epidemics—like the Spanish flu—sometimes required communal burials because there was no time or resources for individual coffins. Canada has several examples of that.
“Unmarked grave” is also complicated. It is often assumed to mean clandestine burial. But traditions vary. Many Indigenous cultures historically did not use permanent markers, so unmarked graves are common in pre-contact contexts. The more pressing issue today is that cemeteries that once had markers—typically wooden crosses—lost them over time. As the wood decayed, graves became “unmarked” even though they were initially identified.
If the grave markers were not maintained, they would deteriorate and disappear. That is why today there are so many “unmarked graves” that were once marked. In the Indigenous context, especially with residential school cemeteries, this is often what “unmarked graves” refers to.
Then, of course, there are clandestine burials, which by definition are unmarked. Those are graves created to hide a death under suspicious or criminal circumstances. The assumption of something nefarious is inherent in the word “clandestine.” The confusion arises because the “Indigenous industry”—by which I mean lawyers, consultants, and activists who benefit from transfer payments and funding initiatives—leans into this conflation. They rely on the public not distinguishing between cemeteries where markers decayed naturally and genuinely clandestine burials.
The same problem exists with the term “missing children.” People hear “missing” and assume the Latin American sense of “the disappeared”—people abducted, murdered, and hidden in secret graves. That is not what is generally meant in the Canadian residential school context. Here, “missing” usually refers to children who died at the schools, were buried in cemeteries near the institutions, but whose resting places are unknown because of poor record keeping and deteriorated markers. These were not disappearances in the criminal sense.
For example, former MP Romeo Saganash has spoken about his brother, who died at the residential school in Moose Factory before Romeo was born. His brother is buried in the cemetery there. Later, a CBC journalist in the family located the grave and showed it to his mother. The mother chose not to have the remains returned to Quebec. That is a tragic family story, but it is not the same thing as a child being abducted and disappearing.
Another example often cited is journalist Tanya Talaga, whose great-grandmother Annie died in an asylum, not a residential school. The burial site, near Toronto’s Gardiner Expressway, had been abandoned and was now just a grassy lot. The family held a tobacco ceremony there. That situation may be sad, but again, it is not equivalent to saying Annie “disappeared” in the sense used in Latin America. The body was buried, the records were poor, and the cemetery had been neglected. Conflating those categories creates misunderstanding.
Jacobsen: How do you distinguish media error from institutional error?
Widdowson: Well, media errors can overlap with institutional mistakes. An institutional error is a more systemic problem. Many of today’s media errors are institutional because outlets often fail to critically examine specific claims. A media error, narrowly, might be The New York Times calling Kamloops a “mass grave.” That was a journalistic mistake. However, the fact that the paper has never corrected or removed the article is an institutional failure, as it reveals a lack of systemic checks.
So, a media error can be a simple reporting mistake. But when those errors persist uncorrected, or are reinforced by editorial policy, they become institutional.
Jacobsen: And you are making scientific claims too. Under a correspondence theory of truth, the standard is simple: if excavation at Kamloops uncovered at least three bodies in one place, that would verify the claim of a mass grave. If not, then the claim is falsified. At present, the standard has not been met; therefore, the original claims should not stand. Correct?
Widdowson: Exactly.
Jacobsen: Let’s move to one of the more difficult areas. Do you accept the Truth and Reconciliation Commission’s (TRC) death counts and methodology in principle?
Widdowson: That’s controversial. Many numbers get thrown around. For example, Sean Carleton, an Indigenous Studies professor at the University of Manitoba, has claimed the TRC found 4,000 children died in residential schools. As far as I know, that is not accurate.
I haven’t done a full investigation myself, but researchers like Nina Green and Michelle Stirling have. There is a page in one TRC volume that records the names of 423 children who actually died at the schools. That number refers to documented deaths occurring at residential schools.
Beyond that, other children died while enrolled but not at the schools themselves—some in their home communities, others in hospitals. Take Kamloops as an example: there are 49 recorded names of deceased children associated with the school. Of those, 25 did not die at the school; they died in their communities or in accidents elsewhere.
So, 423 is the confirmed number of in-school deaths. That figure is probably low, but it is a grounded figure. There is another number, about 800, which has come from double-counting across reports. Then there’s 3,000, another figure that has been circulated, partly due to the National Centre for Truth and Reconciliation (NCTR) at the University of Manitoba. The NCTR is the official archive of records, and at one point, it produced a memorial banner listing the names of the deceased; however, the methodology has not always been consistent.
The 4,000 figure that Carleton cites likely comes from the NCTR memorial banner. But that banner includes many names of people who never attended residential schools. For example, Helen Betty Osborne—an Indigenous woman murdered in The Pas, Manitoba, in 1971—is listed. Her tragic death had nothing to do with residential schools, yet her name is included. The
banner was intended as a broad memorial, not a precise research record. So to cite it as evidence of residential school deaths is misleading.
What we can say with certainty is that 423 names are documented as deaths occurring at the schools themselves. Beyond that, the numbers require careful, systematic analysis rather than being repeated as slogans.
Jacobsen: Is there a better methodology than ground-penetrating radar (GPR)—something more cost-efficient, higher resolution, and with a greater degree of certainty?
Widdowson: I asked a GPR expert about this while working on a documentary about Kamloops. The expert—who was so cautious about anonymity that we were not even allowed to film their shoes—brought a GPR unit out to Kananaskis. We tested it on a grassy patch, and it identified an anomaly almost identical to the one reported at Kamloops. When we excavated, we found a cement block. So, the anomaly was artificial, but not a burial site.
That illustrates the limitations of GPR: it detects soil disturbances, but many things can cause disturbances. The expert mentioned that there are other technologies Sarah Beaulieu could have used in Kamloops. Some involve chemical analysis of soils, which can sometimes differentiate human decomposition from other disturbances.
Jacobsen: LIDAR has been mentioned—what does it do in this context?
Widdowson: LIDAR—light detection and ranging—is a remote sensing technology that uses lasers to create detailed three-dimensional maps of surfaces. Aircraft emit laser pulses and measure the time it takes for them to bounce back. The data produces a “point cloud,” which can be used to generate accurate digital elevation models. LIDAR is excellent for mapping landscapes, but it does not detect burials.
The expert I spoke with mentioned two other geophysical methods that could have complemented GPR, but I do not recall the exact names. The key point is that relying solely on GPR, without corroborating technologies or excavation, produces ambiguous results.
The worst part of all this is that Sarah Beaulieu gave the Tk’emlúps Band the impression—or perhaps they read it into her words—that her GPR survey was a confirmation. It was interpreted as validating what the knowledge keepers had said. Band members believed this was proof. I think that was, at least in part, because of Beaulieu’s irresponsibility.
We saw a similar case captured on film in the documentary What Remains, which Simon Hergott and I produced—the New York Times had released footage of a ground-penetrating radar survey where Dr. Terence Clark of the University of Saskatchewan was instructing graduate students. Kisha Supernant from the University of Alberta was also present. At one point, Clark told the students, “You can imagine a child lying on its side in a pit.” The students began crying.
That was incredibly irresponsible. My GPR expert explained that anomalies could be caused by any number of things: cobbles, changes in soil density, rocks, cement blocks, and animal burrows. To suggest to students that they should visualize a child’s body was wildly inappropriate. It bordered on an ethical breach. Archaeologists are supposed to uphold professional standards of impartiality and objectivity. What happened there was the opposite.
Jacobsen: That reminds me of the debate around “decolonization therapy.” I looked at the codes of conduct from the British Psychological Society, the Canadian Psychological Association, the American Psychological Association, and international guidelines. All of them stress
impartiality, maximizing objectivity, and minimizing bias in therapeutic practice. Yet decolonization therapy explicitly politicizes the therapeutic space. The whole point of treatment is to create an apolitical space for client well-being and mental health. Turning it into a political battleground undermines that.
Widdowson: Exactly. And this connects to Beaulieu’s announcement in May 2021. At that time, it was stated that “the remains of 215 children” had been found at Kamloops. But by July 15, 2021, that number was revised to “200 targets of interest.” Why? Because Beaulieu had not done adequate preparatory work. She failed to check which parts of the site had already been excavated.
It turned out that Simon Fraser University’s Archaeology Department had excavated part of the same ground years earlier and found no human remains. So Beaulieu had to walk back the number, from 215 to 200. But this raises an obvious question: if she was wrong about those 15, why assume she was right about the remaining 200? Those anomalies could also be false positives.
Beaulieu didn’t seem to recognize the problem when anomalies from already-excavated areas were counted the same way as untouched areas. That should have raised alarm bells immediately. Another issue is transparency: her full report has never been released to the public. In fact, none of the archaeological reports from these cases have been made public. That’s a serious problem.
Simon Fraser University was apparently involved in reviewing Beaulieu’s report. But when researcher Nina Green tried to obtain more information from SFU, she was told that the lawyer for the Kamloops Indian Band had advised the university not to speak about the case publicly.
Jacobsen: What do you think you and those who disagree with you—on key points about this case—actually share as common ground? A Venn diagram overlap where you might disagree, but at least enough to say, “We both accept this much.”
Widdowson: Honestly, we don’t have any real common ground if the other side insists on a different conception of truth. That’s the core problem: it’s an epistemological and ontological divide. Some argue that because Indigenous peoples have a history of oppression, whatever they say should be accepted as accurate. Others—myself included—say you can recognize their different perspectives without abandoning universal standards of evidence.
I believe many believe what they are saying, but I also think many of the claims are highly improbable. For example, if parents did not report that their children had disappeared, then who are the supposed 200 bodies in the apple orchard at Kamloops? That’s an extraordinary claim. Kamloops is not a remote wilderness—it’s near a populated area where people would have noticed clandestine mass burials. It doesn’t make sense.
This is fundamentally anti-Enlightenment. The Enlightenment idea is that evidence should be universally testable, independent of ancestry or identity. Indigenization frameworks, by contrast, often deny universal truth standards. That is incompatible with science.
And there’s another difficulty: the arguments made by people like Sean Carleton are inconsistent. They play language games. For example, in early June 2021, Carleton publicly declared that a “mass grave” had been found at Kamloops. Later, when criticized, he backtracked but dismissed objections as nitpicking—as if accuracy were an indulgence rather than the foundation of serious inquiry.
Carleton and others will say things like, “Fifty-one children died at Kamloops, we know that, so what’s your problem?” But that’s misleading. The actual number is 49, because two children were double-counted. Everyone acknowledges that children died at Kamloops. That is not the dispute. The real issue is whether children were buried clandestinely in the apple orchard. That’s not a cemetery. There is a cemetery on the Kamloops Reserve where many graves, once marked and now unmarked, are located. Children from the school who died of disease or other natural causes would have been buried there in the ordinary course of events.
Carleton shifts the ground of the argument. He doesn’t openly say, “Evidence doesn’t matter; only knowledge keepers matter.” Instead, he frames critics like me as nitpickers—pedantic troublemakers obsessed with irrelevant details, supposedly obstructing “truth and reconciliation.”
Jacobsen: Yet one could argue the opposite. If truth and reconciliation are to mean anything, they require accuracy. With accurate facts, responses can be proportional and respectful to all parties. Without accuracy, reconciliation is built on distortion.
Widdowson: Truth demands universal standards, not shifting definitions. What we’re dealing with here is a postmodernist tactic. Philosophers sometimes refer to it as the “Motte-and-Bailey fallacy.” Others call it the “radical-truistic shuffle” or the bait-and-switch. The pattern is always the same: present a banal claim everyone agrees with, then use it as cover to advance a radical claim that lacks evidence.
Take Kamloops as an example. The truism is that children died at residential schools. Everyone knows that; no one disputes it. But then that truism is used to smuggle in a radical claim: that 200 children were secretly buried in the apple orchard. When you point out there’s no evidence for clandestine mass burials, they retreat to the truism: “Well, children died, don’t you know that?” Then critics get smeared with epithets like “denialist.” In this case, “residential school denialist.”
Because I deny the claim that the schools were genocidal, that is the basis of the label. But the bait-and-switch never stops. At Kamloops, we know that 49 children died, though 25 of those deaths did not occur at the school. They died in hospitals or in accidents. Yet the numbers are
constantly misrepresented, and the dispute about clandestine burials gets blurred into the accepted fact that children died.
When their clandestine-burial claim is challenged, they revert to “children died.” And of course, no one disputes that children died.
Jacobsen: Professionally, what have you lost in these disputes? And what have others who have disagreed also lost? I aim to provide readers with context on how claims are currently approached in academia and the broader public sphere.
Widdowson: I lost my job. There were other factors, but the unmarked graves controversy was undoubtedly used to portray me as incompetent and as someone who hated Aboriginal people. Since then, I’ve been excluded from mainstream media. Aside from one interview with Jordan Tucker in 2024 and a 2023 one with Olivia Stefanovich, I haven’t had any mainstream coverage. Meanwhile, people like Sean Carleton have become the dominant spokespersons. My credibility and reputation have been attacked simply for insisting on evidence.
I’m not the only one. Jim McMurtry, a teacher in Abbotsford, lost his job for stating that many children in residential schools died of disease and that the murder claims were not convincing. He was accused of “traumatizing children.” It was an absurd case.
The research group I’m associated with has been smeared as cranks and conspiracy theorists. And then there’s James Heller, a criminal lawyer in Victoria. He’s actually a friend of mine. He came out of a cult background.
Heller noticed that in mandatory legal training materials, the Kamloops claim was described as “215 unmarked graves.” Because he’d been following the case, he requested the wording be changed to “potential graves,” which was consistent with a B.C. court decision. It was not controversial, just precise.
The Law Society ignored him, so he and his colleague, Mark Berry, brought a resolution to address the issue. Then all hell broke loose. Members of the “Aboriginal industry” circulated defamatory statements implying that Heller and Berry were racists. Shockingly, the Law Society issued a press release that effectively legitimized those attacks. As a result, Heller is now suing the Law Society of British Columbia. That case is ongoing.
Meanwhile, Dallas Brodie, the Justice and Attorney General critic, was alarmed at the Law Society’s refusal to defend factual accuracy. She posted three tweets on X expressing concern. She had approval from her party—it wasn’t a renegade act. But the Conservative party leadership worried about backlash and demanded she delete them. Brodie refused.
That triggered outrage from Aboriginal activists in the party, and the controversy escalated further after Brodie appeared at an event I had organized.
At the event, Dallas Brodie commented on the James Heller case. She said, “It’s not your truth or my truth or your grandmother’s truth. It’s the truth. “She was clearly addressing the problem of epistemological relativism—the idea that truth is subjective—which prevents us from establishing facts. That clip was circulated, and suddenly she was accused of mocking survivors of sexual abuse.
The result? She was either forced out or resigned from her party. In any case, it was a fiasco. Now she has started her own political party in British Columbia. This shows the long tentacles of these issues. And we still have not had a reckoning. People thought the “potato” was hot—well, the “cheese” on top of the potato was hotter, and it melted in strange directions.
Personally, I understand the animosity that I have received from a take-no-prisoners approach and with my satire of these claims. But look at someone like James Heller. He was as cautious and non-controversial as possible. And yet, he faced severe consequences too. So it’s clear—it doesn’t matter about tone, or how careful you are. If you don’t accept the claims, you’ll be
targeted. That’s the reality.
Jacobsen: Has anyone else lost their job because of counterclaims that, by all accounts, are not proportionate to the evidence? The original Kamloops claim was “remains of 215 children.” After revision, it became “200 anomalies.” Yet the “unmarked mass graves” narrative continues. Have those who promoted the misleading claim faced professional consequences?
Widdowson: No one, as far as I know, has suffered consequences for making misleading claims. In fact, they’ve been celebrated. Look at the National Centre for Truth and Reconciliation. Meanwhile, I’m going to the University of Manitoba on September 25–26—into the belly of the beast.
I’ll be doing street epistemology on the claim that the “grave error at Kamloops” was a hoax. It won’t be livestreamed, but footage will be collected. I’m hoping that someone will stream it on Twitter. I’ve got a videographer to cover the events.
Jacobsen: Are you going to have security?
Widdowson: No, I’m just going in. Some people are worried—especially after what happened with Charlie Kirk—but I’ve done this at universities before. Even at Lethbridge, which was the worst situation, it was never threatening.
It was just theatrics. I’m anticipating theatrics now. Maybe I’m naive. I’m sure the University of Manitoba is considering this. I tried to book rooms through a professor there, but the university refused to host the event in September. They said they wanted time to plan and hold the event later in the year, but clearly it’s because that week is the National Week of Truth and Reconciliation.
Of course, that’s why I want to be there on those days—because I want to bring some truth to the University of Manitoba. They told the Society for Academic Freedom and Scholarship they’d be billed between $2,000 and $5,000 toward an estimated $20,000 in security costs. I told them, “Piss off, University of Manitoba. I’m coming in with street epistemology.” So, I don’t know what they’re going to do.
Jacobsen: It’s going to be in the winter?
Widdowson: No, it’s September 25th.
Jacobsen: Okay, well, that’s pretty cool. If it’s cold enough in Manitoba, then no one will want to protest anyway.
Widdowson: Too cold. I’m doing it to make a point. We’ll see what happens. Their warnings may be nonsense. They did the same thing at Laurier in 2018—they charged us $5,000, set up fencing that looked like Fort Knox, and had security everywhere. It was ridiculous. And in the end, it was just a bunch of clowns—never threatening in any way—pure security cosplay.
I find it really stupid. Whatever, I’m just going in there. They can do whatever they want, but I’m exercising my right to free expression. If they want to arrest me, then arrest me—we’ll see how that plays out. I’m not leaving. I did the same at Thompson Rivers. They wanted us gone, said we shouldn’t discuss this on the lands of the Tk’emlúps (the Kamloops Indian Band). I told them, “No, we’re here to uphold the academic mission of the university.” They huddled, deliberated, and then left us alone. The event went ahead fine. It’s all just intimidation tactics.
There’s also a turtle statue in front of the National Centre for Truth and Reconciliation, with a “sacred fire” at its center. We’re considering holding the event there. We’ll see.
Jacobsen: The three big points I want to emphasize are:
1. Pine Creek (Manitoba): There were double-digit anomalies identified. Excavation revealed they were rocks, not graves.
2. Kananaskis: The excavation merely revealed a concrete block.
3. Kamloops: Simon Fraser University had previously excavated part of the site (early 2000s) and did not find remains. There has been no further excavation, digging, or scanning.
To clarify, you’re saying things have been conflated?
Widdowson: They did the excavations back in the 2000s.
Jacobsen: That’s ancient history at this point.
Widdowson: But that’s the reason the Kamloops number was downgraded from 215 to 200. Those 15 “targets of interest”were identified as not as remains. They were simply the result of shovel test pits done earlier by the Simon Fraser University archaeology department. They knew those anomalies were caused by prior excavations, which, of course, found no remains.
But no new excavations have been done at Kamloops—none at all. That prior work wasn’t done by the Band or by Sarah Beaulieu. They’re just hoping people will forget that distinction. And many have. Many people believe excavations have already been conducted.
When I was at Thompson Rivers doing street epistemology, I confronted the claim that “the remains of 215 children have been found.” A staff member there, Jenna, said she believed that because she thought excavations had already been carried out. There you go. That’s the perception.
Jacobsen: So, it’s not primarily about the evidence—that’s secondary. What matters is the claim in the public sphere. Social media is worse, of course, but even in official journalistic reports—not investigative pieces, just regular coverage—they don’t hedge. They don’t scale claims to the evidence. They state “215 remains” as if confirmed.
Look at comparable cases:
● Kananaskis: the anomaly turned out to be a concrete block.
● Pine Creek: 14 anomalies were excavated, and all turned out to be rocks.
So probabilistically, the track record is poor. These anomalies should not be referred to as graves. They are only GPR anomalies. To confirm anything, you need excavation. Unless they develop a better kind of imaging or fund proper excavations, we do not know. Therefore, we cannot claim.
Widdowson: None of these techniques is evidence of remains. You must dig. Excavation has to be done. Now, the Kamloops Band argues they don’t want to “disturb the dead.” But we don’t need to exhume anything. We need a preliminary investigation to determine whether there’s anything there at all.
But people like Sean Carleton and Niigaan Sinclair—the two worst actors on this—oppose even that. They held an event at the National Centre for Truth and Reconciliation in June 2025. Sinclair said, “How macabre can you be to want these families to produce the bones of their loved ones?” That was the rhetoric.
Jacobsen: Which assumes the conclusion—that there are bodies there—to denounce and defame you. That is extraordinarily inappropriate.
Widdowson: Exactly. They want people to believe it without evidence, so they can keep extracting more and more funding for all this nonsense.
Jacobsen: So, because of that again, it is not primarily about the evidence. But that does not follow from the media, where speed or haste can be an imperilling flaw. This is coming from an academician, right, where they typically have the comfort of time and money. In that sense, it is more egregious than if it were people on a tighter timeline.
Now, institutional failure—that seems clear. And the other thing I wanted to reemphasize was this: very little consequence for those making the mainline claim, but targeted consequences—like losing your job—for those who try to stick as close as they can to the evidence and ask others to do the same. That seems to be the history of it.
Widdowson: Yes, that is a problem. But at the bottom of all of this is truth. If we cannot agree that there is such a thing as a universal truth, then what can we do? Nothing. How am I supposed to evaluate what I consider to be highly improbable claims when I am operating within a universal truth paradigm, and that paradigm is not accepted by the people I am arguing against?
But they are not consistent. That is the thing. They expect everyone else to believe their views, and they present them as more than mere opinion. It is not “your opinion versus my opinion”—they are arguing as if their perspective is capital-T Truth.
Jacobsen: Academics whistling in the wind.
Widdowson: They say I must accept their view because it is obviously true in the capital-T sense.
Jacobsen: It is like what they used to say about writing essays—never start a sentence with “obviously,” because you are hoping not everyone sees it that way. There is only science.
Widdowson: That is the sign I use for my street epistemology sessions. It inflames people. But the big thing is this: science is whatever works. Medicine is whatever works. There is redundancy built into the methodologies so you can arrive at what is most likely to be true, based on the evidence. That is science. If it does not meet that test, then—welcome to pseudoscience.
Jacobsen: Categorically black and white, empirically probabilistic. Thanks a lot. That was great.
Widdowson: You are welcome.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Gleb Lisikh and Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/06
Do large language models truly think, or are they probabilistic text engines—and what does this imply for truth standards, persuasion risks, medicine, and legal translation?
Gleb Lisikh is a technologist and journalist serving on the board of The New Enlightenment Project. With a background in engineering and reporting for C2C Journal, The Epoch Times, and other popular as well as IT media outlets, he analyzes the promises and limits of artificial intelligence through a humanist, evidence-based lens. Lisikh argues that large language models are probabilistic systems rather than reasoning agents, warning of their power as persuasive tools and their risks in medicine and discourse. He contrasts opaque generative models with transparent symbolic approaches, remains cautious about neuro-symbolic hybrids, and advocates higher truth standards for AI while welcoming practical uses such as legal translation.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen interviews Gleb Lisikh on whether large language models (LLMs) “think.” Lisikh argues LLMs are probabilistic next-token engines, not reasoning systems; their explanations are post hoc and popularity-driven. Across vendors, core technology is similar; differences reflect datasets and tuning. He contrasts the transparent if–then logic of symbolic AI with the black boxes of LLMs, noting that hybrid neuro-symbolic efforts remain fragile. Risks center less on autonomy and more on persuasion, including propaganda, narratives, and misuse in medicine. Benefits include translating legalese and displacing paralegal tasks. LLMs are static and optimized for outputs. Because humans are emotional, he urges holding AI to higher truth standards.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: All right, we are here with Gleb Lisikh. He is a new board member of the New Enlightenment Project, a Canadian Humanist Initiative. He has a strong background in technology. He is also a journalist who writes for the Epoch Timesand other media outlets. We had an informal discussion about the weaknesses of large language models, and since you have a more fine-grained and knowledgeable view on this, I wanted to capture it in a more formal conversation. So, the big question: can large language models think? If so, why? If not, why not?
Gleb Lisikh: It really depends. I do not want to dodge the question, but it depends on how you define thinking. If you mean thinking in the way humans do, then LLMs definitely do not think in the same way humans do. It is a different process.
Their workings are based on the concept of neural networks, which are loosely inspired by the human brain. We have neural networks in our brain, in a sense, but in LLMs, it’s only a conceptual borrowing. The idea is to create associative connections between various nodes—or, in an LLM’s case, weights—that process input probabilistically and then generate output. In that sense, it is not really thinking; it is a probabilistic continuation of your question.
Does that make sense?
Jacobsen: It does. I tend to see logic as categorical, with operators between those categories. Then there’s probabilistic reasoning: if you have enough fine-grained computation, it can seem as though the model is reasoning. But in fact, it is not. Would it make more sense to overlay a logic system on top of the LLM’s processes, or to put it underneath so that what the model does is strictly logical?
Lisikh: You began with the question of thinking. I think what you really meant was reasoning. Thinking is more general—what does it even mean to think? Reasoning, or deploying structured logic, is a distinct approach. In my opinion, those are two distinct concepts. When we talk about logical thinking or structured reasoning, that’s where LLMs really fail. They don’t exercise any logical process—not deductive, not inductive, not even sequential. When you ask a question, it’s processed by the neural network through parallel computation.
When the LLM gives you an explanation, that explanation is not reflective of what actually happened. It’s a post hoc rationalization. If you ask an LLM to explain its answer, it doesn’t look inside itself and reconstruct its reasoning. Instead, it interprets your request as: what would be the most probable and popular explanation for the answer I just gave? The explanation, like the answer itself, is probabilistic and popularity-driven. For example, if you ask, “What is two plus two?”…
It’s a very simplistic example—the more technical people are going to kill me for this answer—but in a straightforward sense, it will tell you “4.” If you ask ChatGPT, “What’s two plus two?” it will give you four. But it doesn’t actually do the math. The LLM, at its core, doesn’t perform calculations. It just gives you the most popular answer, which happens to be four.
But if you then ask, “Why is it four?” it will generate a popular explanation, such as: “Well, you take two bananas, and then another two bananas, put them together, and when you count them, you get four.” That’s the explanation it will produce. But that’s not what happens inside the LLM’s “brain,” if you will. That’s the key distinction. I’ll stop there—I’m not sure if I’m fully answering your question, but that’s the gist of it.
Jacobsen: I think for most of the audience. They’re probably more familiar with the models commonly found in North America. But essentially, it’s a series of approaches. Is that same approach just replicated globally? In other words, no matter which LLM is used, will it have the same kinds of mistakes, or at least the same style of mistakes?
Lisikh: Yes, absolutely. LLM technology is fundamentally the same across all the major models we have today. Whether we’re talking about DeepSeek, ChatGPT, Microsoft Copilot—which is built on GPT anyway—or Grok, they’re all the same at the core. Elon Musk claims that Grok is different, but it’s not. It’s based on the same fundamental technology.
The primary differences among these models are the data sets on which they were trained. And we’re limited in terms of data sets—basically, whatever exists in digital format. That means the World Wide Web plus whatever additional data can be collected outside of it. That’s the main difference.
There are also technical parameters that define these models and tune them for different purposes. Some models excel in programming languages, while others excel in image recognition, and so on. But that’s just tuning—the human technicians adjusting the models to perform well in particular domains, like how much input they can handle, or what kinds of tasks they’re optimized for.
At their core, though, an LLM is just a collection of files that could technically fit on a USB thumb drive. The fundamental technology and principles are the same across the board.
Jacobsen: So fundamentally, they’re the same. We’re discussing the statistical approach employed in LLMs. What about a more symbolic or strictly logical approach? Are there weaknesses in that method which don’t show up in an LLM-type system?
Lisikh: Let me start by saying that there’s a conflation of terms in the public realm right now. Everybody commonly refers to large language models—the most familiar ones, like ChatGPT—as “AI,” or artificial intelligence. But the field of AI is actually quite broad. An LLM is just one approach to artificial intelligence.
That’s the probabilistic approach, where the model is trained to provide probabilistic, popular answers. There’s another approach called symbolic AI, where we basically program a machine through traditional coding, if you will—using explicit if–then rules. For example, if you have this input, produce that output.
That approach is older than LLMs—the probabilistic approach—but it’s not very effective. It’s tough to program billions or trillions of if–then branches so that the machine could have a meaningful conversation with you. Still, it exists. Symbolic AI is programmed through logic—rigorous logical reasoning.
It’s well understood and can be reverse-engineered, which is very different from the LLM approach. That’s the fundamental distinction: LLMs cannot reason. Their answers cannot be reverse-engineered because they’re deliberately designed as a black box, avoiding the tedious if–then style of explicit programming, which is impractical at scale.
So it’s a trade-off. Either you design a probabilistically driven engine, where you don’t know exactly what’s going on inside by design, or you build a traditionally programmable engine with predictable outputs—but that’s very difficult to achieve, because there are so many possible logical variations to account for in conversation.
Jacobsen: Scientists, technologists, humanists, skeptics—we’re not only concerned with pseudoscience, but also with science and technology itself, particularly its risks. A significant category here is existential risk. Sometimes, this technology operates in conjunction with the military, gathering large amounts of personal data. What are the risks associated with gathering this data? What are the risks associated with autonomy in AI?
Lisikh: Let me first say that I personally do not view AI in any of its forms as a threat to humanity in and of itself. It’s a tool. Yes, it’s a powerful tool, but like the saying goes: guns don’t kill people; people kill people.
We have powerful guns, we have powerful weaponry, but unless people deploy them, there’s no threat. AI is the same. In my view, it’s simply a tool. I don’t think the particular technology we’re discussing—LLMs, or what’s sometimes called generative AI—can be deployed responsibly in areas like the military to guide decisions or direct forces. That would be frightening, because we don’t know how it “thinks.” We know it doesn’t think, but its probabilistic processes are opaque, and that makes them difficult to control. So yes, there is a potential threat there.
But my personal fear lies elsewhere. LLMs are extraordinarily good at generating language—so good, in fact, that they can sound compelling. They answer relatively simple questions very well, and in doing so, they create the illusion of truth. They can sound logical, deploy what appears to be reasoning, and justify their answers in a way that seems persuasive.
That ability makes them excellent tools for propaganda. They can be used for marketing, government messaging, or more insidious forms of manipulation. And during training—or through later adjustments—they can be biased. I dislike the word “biased” here because it suggests intentionality, but let’s use it anyway.
They can be configured to lean toward specific ideas. For instance, you can instruct ChatGPT to avoid answering any questions related to Tiananmen Square, and it will comply. The tool can also be subtly tuned so that every answer nudges a particular perspective. This can be done deliberately, turning the model into a propaganda machine. And because it is so eloquent, so emotionally expressive, it can be extremely subtle and effective at influencing feelings. That, to me, is the real danger: LLMs being deployed—or perhaps already being deployed—as propaganda devices.
Jacobsen: And as you say, they are tools. Poorly motivated actors can use them on the left or on the right. What about areas where people deal with large volumes of language, but the stakes are so sensitive that broad deployment would be highly irresponsible—say, in the court system or in medicine? What risks emerge there?
Lisikh: You touched on an exciting area—the court system. I almost don’t know where to begin. From personal experience, it has developed its own language. Legal language is notoriously difficult to understand. There are layers of rules and procedures, especially in Canada, where the system is highly bureaucratic.
LLMs are actually quite good at translation—not just between languages, but also from legal jargon into plain, accessible language. I’ve used them myself in my own legal matters, and I can say with confidence that if the current court bureaucracy remains unchanged, paralegals will eventually be replaced by AI. Unless the law explicitly prevents it, that shift seems inevitable.
In that sense, I see positives in the use of large language models. They can help ordinary people, like myself, who haven’t passed the bar or studied legal language, to navigate the system more easily.
When it comes to medicine, however, I have more concerns. I wrote an article where I used ChatGPT in a discussion about COVID-19 and vaccinations. I asked it questions about how to validate the overall approach. Because the media environment was flooded with pro-vaccine messaging at the time, ChatGPT was compelling in maintaining that narrative. But it also made a lot of mistakes and presented flaws.
This was back in 2023, when ChatGPT wasn’t as advanced as it is now. Still, the fact that it could present such a strong, persuasive narrative in the medical domain was alarming. These models don’t reason logically; they surface the most popular responses, which are often shaped by media coverage. The result was a polished but flawed narrative that would convince most people—especially those not inclined to dig deeper or ask particular, logical, or technical questions.
That, to me, is very dangerous. It shows how these tools can amplify popular opinion without the grounding of logic or rigorous reasoning.
Jacobsen: Looking ahead, I know that different formulations are being developed, but the general category is “neuro-symbolic logic.” What is it, and does it have the potential to overcome the weaknesses of both probabilistic and symbolic systems? Neuro-symbolic logic, when I refer to it, is the merger of LLM technology, or generative AI, with symbolic AI.
Lisikh: Yes, I understand. Honestly, I don’t really know whether this is an up-and-coming area of research or not, because the two approaches—symbolic AI and generative AI—are fundamentally different. People like Stephen Wolfram have written extensively on this topic. They’ve devoted much of their time to embedding logical reasoning tools into LLMs.
But embedding anything into an LLM is very difficult because it can destabilize the model. The process of tuning a large language model so that it consistently “makes sense” is exceptionally delicate. This is also why updating an LLM dynamically—in real time during a conversation—is almost impossible. Let’s say you’re having a discussion with the model and arrive at a conclusion. Ideally, that conclusion could be integrated into the model itself. But in practice, it cannot be done.
There are several reasons, but the main one is that it risks breaking the model entirely. Once an LLM is trained, it remains essentially static. You can change its “mind” within the confines of a single conversation, but you cannot change its underlying brain state. That state is fixed and permanent.
For the same reason, embedding logical structures into the model risks destabilizing it. You can think of it as jabbing an electric rod into its “brain”—it just scrambles things, because we don’t really know what’s happening inside the model in detail. By its very nature, it’s a black box.
That’s why the symbiotic relationship between symbolic AI and generative AI is so complicated. I wouldn’t say it’simpossible—if it does happen, it would be an exciting development—but I haven’t seen or heard of real progress in this area.
And speaking of progress, nothing substantial has been published by the leading labs—XAI, Microsoft, Claude, or others. Their focus has been on building bigger LLMs, not on building reasoning LLMs.
Responsible AI—that’s another area of focus. Companies invest considerable effort in ensuring that LLMs don’t respond with offensive or inappropriate content. That’s where the attention goes. They’re not trying to make the answers logical or grounded in reasoning; they’re trying to make sure they sound nice. That’s essentially the priority of these companies right now, because that’s where the money is. Nobody really needs a deeply logical AI—what people want is an AI that’s engaging and pleasant to interact with.
When we had an earlier email conversation, one NEP member, “Who cares if AI produces truth? Does it really matter whether it deploys reasoning or logic, or whether it uses some other process? As long as the answers are true, who cares?”
That brings me to another question. We expect a lot from these systems—logical reasoning, accuracy, factual correctness, and so on.
Jacobsen: Yet when it comes to people, we don’t apply those same standards. Most people aren’t even logical 95 percent of the time. Are we holding AI to an unfairly higher standard?
Lisikh: I think we should hold AI to a higher standard. I agree with you 100 percent that people are emotional. They’renot driven primarily by reason or logic. And I don’t mean you specifically, or myself—I mean people in general. For the most part, they’re emotionally driven. The limbic brain tends to prevail over the neocortex.
That’s also why people relate so well to AI, or to LLMs like ChatGPT and Grok. They connect with them emotionally. If you ask a question in a way that amounts to “please confirm my belief,” the LLM will do precisely that—and it will do it in a polite, emotionally resonant way.
That’s very dangerous, because people actually use AIs as spiritual gurus now. I could direct you to numerous articles on this topic. People treat them as partners or as guides because the systems respond directly to emotional motives.
We were conditioned to think of computers as logical, cold, reason-driven machines. That’s how they used to be. ButLLMs turned that upside down. By design, they’re illogical and unreasonable, yet very emotionally responsive. Because of this, people assume machines have surpassed logic and reason and can now “do emotions.”
But that’s a false conclusion. In reality, emotions are simply easier to imitate than we once thought. Machines can write poetry, create art, and produce essays—not because they’ve become more intelligent or transcended human logic, but because those areas are relatively easy to mimic. It’s imitation, not genuine emotional depth.
So yes, I may be going off on a tangent here, but the point is clear: humans are emotional, and LLMs imitate emotions extremely well. That’s why we relate to them so strongly. But the bar should be higher. When we ask questions, we expect truthful answers. Yet LLMs aren’t designed to produce truth. They’re designed to produce responses that sound pleasing and interesting. That’s all.
Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.
Lisikh: Excellent.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The New Enlightenment Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/20
“The Act impermissibly endorses religion by advancing the religious belief that a supernatural being created humankind.”
Supreme Court of the United States (Edwards v. Aguillard, 1987)
“Creationism, intelligent design and other claims of supernatural intervention in the origin of life or of species are not science because they are not testable by the methods of science.”
National Academy of Sciences (1999)
“The lack of scientific warrant for so-called ‘intelligent design theory’ makes it improper to include as a part of science education.”
American Association for the Advancement of Science (2002)
“Intelligent design is not science. It is not testable, it is not falsifiable, it does not generate hypotheses, and it does not provide explanations for the natural world.”
National Science Teachers Association
“Science is a philosophy of discovery. Intelligent design is a philosophy of ignorance. You cannot build a program of discovery on the assumption that nobody is smart enough to figure out the answer to a problem.”
“[Intelligent design is] not a scientific argument at all, but a religious one.”
“[…intelligent design] fails in a fundamental way to qualify as a scientific theory [and is] doing considerable damage to faith.”
Dr. Francis Collins (Leader, Human Genome Project)
ID is a religiously motivated advocacy project rejected by courts and the scientific community.
It has experienced a profound loss of academic, public, and scientific credibility once their pseudoscientific claims were exposed (Jacobsen, 2022a; Jacobsen, 2022b; Jacobsen, 2024; Jacobsen, 2025). ID is a religious advocacy project framed as science. Essentially, the only scientifically supported framework is evolution by natural selection.
ID Creationism was a political movement intended as a social change agent through a vehicle of a pseudoscientific proposition, ID Creationism or adapted traditional Creationism (Encyclopedia Britannica, 2025a). This was documented through the leaked Wedge Document (National Center for Science Education, 2008).
It did not have much academic or intellectual cachet in the first place, outside of religious believer circles, who are the vast majority of the proponents of this (Scott & Branch, 2002). It’s a broad-based advocacy effort primarily rooted in Christian theological commitments (National Center for Science Education, 2008).
Most proponents were, and are, well-educated Protestant Christian men (International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design, 2013). Some exceptions included Dr. David Berlinski (2025) as an agnostic Jew, Christopher Michael Langan as a self-described “reality theorist” (Langan, 2025), and Muzaffar Iqbal (1954–2021) as a Muslim (International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design, 2013), and possibly others.
ID Creationism was an adaptation of Creationism. Creationism as a “belief that the universe and the various forms of life were created by God out of nothing (ex nihilo)” (Encyclopedia Britannica, 2025b). Its main sophistications are two foundational ideas: Irreducible Complexity of Dr. Michael Behe, and Specified Complexity of Dr. William Dembski (Paradowski, 2022).
Behe defines Irreducible Complexity as a “single system composed of several well-matched, interacting parts that contribute to the basic function, wherein the removal of any one of the parts causes the system to effectively cease functioning” (Behe, 1996).
Dembski defines Specified Complexity as “the condition in which something is both complex (i.e., not easily produced by chance) and specified (i.e., matches an independently given pattern)” (Dembski, 1998).
Both have been thoroughly debunked. Irreducible Complexity fails to demonstrate evolutionary pathways. Specified Complexity fails due to a probability miscalculation and lacks a reproducible metric. These two constructors of the theory are important and can be quoted as to the Christian hermeneutic or theology behind it.
Dembski said in two separate instances: “The Designer of intelligent design is, ultimately, the Christian God” (Williams, 2007), and “Intelligent design is just the Logos theology of John’s Gospel restated in the idiom of information theory” (Dembski, 2019). Behe stated, “I think the designer is God. I’m a Roman Catholic.” (Paula Zahn Now, 2005). ID eventually came across definitive court battles (National Center for Science Education, 2005).
In short, ID Creationism is a religiously, mostly Christian, motivated public-advocacy campaign framed as scientific dissent based on the statements and philosophical frame provided by its founders. A scattered few were drawn to the pseudoscientific ideas. Some individuals became associated with these ideas without fully anticipating the reputational consequences, or other unforeseen consequences. As a theology program, therefore, it’s culturally ministerial in nature.
Even within Christian communities, over time, many were able to distinguish ID’s pseudoscientific veneer from legitimate inquiry. So, select Christian intellectual founders of ID Creationism were candid about religious motives internally, but publicly misrepresented ID as a secular scientific alternative.
Association with the movement carried reputational costs once its scientific shortcomings were publicly established, because its public claims diverged from the internal documents and were ultimately rejected as lacking scientific support. The Wedge Document was part of this spear (National Center for Science Education, 2008).
It was produced by the Discovery Institute’s Center for the Renewal of Science and Culture (2025). The main claim is “scientific materialism” was corrosive to culture (Ibid.). They sought to replace this perspective with a theistic comprehension of reality (Ibid.).
ID positioned various ‘pressure points’ for challenging Darwinian evolution (Ibid.). The metaphor of a wedge was about a strategy to undermine the perceived dominance of materialism in culture and science (Ibid.).
They proposed three phases for this: Research, Writing & Publication; Publicity & Opinion-making; and, Cultural Confrontation & Renewal (Ibid.). That is, a comprehensive, phased project for theistic cultural influence.
They wanted to fund and produce scholarship, promote ID in books, conferences, mass media, apologetic seminars, trainings for teachers, and think-tanks, and to pursue legal strategies and then integrate ID into public school curricula (Ibid.).
The institutional and media leadership for this was Stephen C. Meyer, Phillip Johnson, and Bruce Chapman (Ibid.). Discovery Senior Fellow Dr. Stephen Meyer directs the Center, while its original strategy came from the mindset of the late Phillip Johnson and the media expertise of Discovery President Bruce Chapman (Ibid.).
They provided bases for metrics, too. They had both five-year and 20-year aims. By year five, they aimed to have ID Creationism recognized as a valid scientific alternative to evolution via natural selection, sparking significant public debate, publishing numerous books and dozens of scholarly articles, and ultimately influencing major public opinion and garnering secular national media attention. These benchmarks were never significantly met, underscoring the project’s fundamental failure.
By year 20, they wanted to make ID Creationism the dominant perspective in science and diffused throughout the arts, humanities, law, natural sciences, and public policy. Once more, none of these goals were primarily achieved. Therefore, they failed.
Even when trying to change the opinions of the public Christian community, who are pretty discerning over enough time and getting over in-group bias, they failed to change them much either. This, in fact, reflects well on Christian communities, who proved discerning enough to separate sense from non-sense despite initial in-group bias.
Other aims stipulated were the creation of fellowships, research funding, media productions, alliances, and the like. In total, about 60 individuals accepted fellowships through the International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (2013) before the organization eventually became defunct.[1]
Per statement of Judge John E. Jones III (U.S. District Court) on if ID Creationism counts as science, “ID is not science… We find that ID fails on three different levels. … Moreover, ID cannot uncouple itself from its creationist, and thus religious, antecedents” (Wired Staff, 2006).
In the end, Intelligent Design Creationism lost in the courts, in academia, and in public credibility. It remains a cultural-theological movement, not a scientific one—an instructive case study in how pseudoscience falters when exposed to rigorous scrutiny.
Indeed, a fascinating case study.
References
Behe, M.J. (1996). Darwin’s Black Box: The Biochemical Challenge to Evolution. New York: Free Press.
Berlinski, D. (2025). David Berlinski. https://davidberlinski.org.
Dembski, W.A. (2019, September 14). Intelligent Design and the Logos of Creation. https://billdembski.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/09/ID-and-the-Logos-of-Creation.pdf
Dembski, W.A. (1998). The Design Inference: Eliminating Chance through Small Probabilities. Cambridge University Press.
Discovery Institute. (2025). Center for Science and Culture. https://www.discovery.org/id/
Encyclopedia Britannica. (2025b). Creationism. https://www.britannica.com/topic/creationism.
Encyclopedia Britannica. (2025a). Intelligent design. https://www.britannica.com/topic/intelligent-design.
International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (2013, January 23). ISCID – Fellows. https://web.archive.org/web/20130123000307/http://www.iscid.org/fellows.php.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2024, January 22). Canadians and Creationism. https://in-sightpublishing.com/2024/04/06/canadians-and-creationism/.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2025, April 1). How Creationism and Intelligent Design Undermine Canadian Science Education: The Trinity Western University Case. https://in-sightpublishing.com/2025/04/28/how-creationism-and-intelligent-design-undermine-canadian-science-education-the-trinity-western-university-case/.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2022a, January 28). On a Mission for Never: Dr. William Dembski (1960-). https://www.newsintervention.com/mission-never-william-dembski/.
Jacobsen, S.D. (2022b, January 28). What was the Professional Output of Intelligent Design?. https://in-sightpublishing.com/2022/04/06/what-was-the-professional-output-of-intelligent-design/.
Langan, C.M. (2025, June 20). What is Intelligent Design?. https://www.megafoundation.substack.com/p/what-is-intelligent-design.
National Center for Science Education. (2005, December 20). Kitzmiller v. Dover Area School District, 400 F. Supp. 2d 707 (M.D. Pa. 2005). https://ncse.ngo/files/pub/legal/kitzmiller/highlights/2005-12-20_Kitzmiller_decision.pdf.
National Center for Science Education. (2008, October 14). The Wedge Document. https://ncse.ngo/wedge-document.
Paradowski, R.J. (2022). Intelligent design movement. https://www.ebsco.com/research-starters/religion-and-philosophy/intelligent-design-movement.
Paula Zahn Now. (2005, November 25). The Debate Over Intelligent Design; American Girl Doll Ignites Controversy. https://transcripts.cnn.com/show/pzn/date/2005-11-25/segment/01.
Scott, E.C. & Branch, G. (2002, August 12). “Intelligent Design” Not Accepted by Most Scientists. https://ncse.ngo/intelligent-design-not-accepted-most-scientists.
Williams, D. (2007, December 14). Friday Five: William A. Dembski. https://web.archive.org/web/20071217212817/http://www.citizenlink.org/content/A000006139.cfm.
Wired Staff. (2006, June 1). Intelligent Decision. https://www.wired.com/2006/06/jones/.
Footnotes
[1] Those individuals who accepted a fellowship position were the following:
- d’Abrera, Bernard
- Behe, Michael J.
- Bloom, John
- Bradley, Walter
- Broom, Neil
- Budziszewski, J.
- Campbell, John Angus
- Carlson, Russell W.
- Chiu, David K. Y.
- Collins, Robin
- Craig, William Lane
- de Jong, Kenneth
- Dembski, William A.
- Discher, Mark R.
- Dix, Daniel
- Field, Fred
- Gonzalez, Guillermo
- Gordon, Bruce L.
- Humphreys, David
- Hunter, Cornelius
- Iqbal, Muzaffar
- Jackson, Quinn Tyler
- Johanson, Conrad
- Kaita, Robert
- Keener, James
- Koons, Robert C.
- Kwon, Younghun
- Langan, Christopher Michael
- Larmer, Robert
- Leisola, Matti
- Lennard, Stan
- Lennox, John
- LoSasso, Gina Lynne
- Macosko, Jed
- Mallard, Bonnie
- Mims, Forrest M. III
- Minnich, Scott
- Nelson, Paul
- Palda, Filip
- Peltzer, Edward T.
- Plantinga, Alvin
- Poenie, Martin
- Puente, Carlos E.
- Ratzsch, Del
- Richards, Jay Wesley
- Rickard, Terry
- Roche, John
- Ruys, Andrew
- Schaefer, Henry F.
- Schwartz, Jeffrey M.
- Skell, Philip
- Skiff, Frederick
- Stephan, Karl D.
- Sternberg, Richard
- Tipler, Frank
- Wells, Jonathan
- Zoeller-Greer, Peter
See International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (2013)
Scott Douglas Jacobsen is Secretary of, and Chair of the Media Committee for, The New Enlightenment Project. He is the publisher of In-Sight Publishing (ISBN: 978-1-0692343) and Editor-in-Chief of In-Sight: Interviews (ISSN: 2369-6885). He writes for The Good Men Project, International Policy Digest (ISSN: 2332–9416), The Humanist (Print: ISSN 0018-7399; Online: ISSN 2163-3576), Basic Income Earth Network (UK Registered Charity 1177066), A Further Inquiry, and other media. He is a member in good standing of numerous media organizations.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/02
Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya, MD, PhD, is a dermatologist with 20 years of skincare, cosmetic procedures, and dermatological research expertise. She specializes in evidence-based treatments, including sunscreen, retinol, and antioxidants, while addressing conditions of acne, rosacea, and aging skin. Passionate about patient education, she emphasizes the importance of lifestyle, diet, and personalized care. Dr. Kazlouskaya is also experienced in advanced therapies such as exosomes, microneedling, and lasers, making her a trusted authority in modern dermatology. She addresses common concerns such as nail biting, trauma, fungal infections, and tumours, including melanomas that are often misdiagnosed. She explains that diet, chronic conditions, and seasonal changes can impact nail growth. Advances in dermatology, such as injectable treatments for psoriasis, improve nail health. Ethical considerations in cosmetic procedures, including plastic surgery trends like Brazilian butt lifts, are explored. The conversation concludes with plans for a future discussion on skin rejuvenation, Botox, and ethical concerns surrounding aesthetic treatments and psychological motivations.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re with Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya. We previously discussed hair, and now we will discuss nails. So, overall, how can you differentiate between healthy and unhealthy nails?
Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya: That’s a good starting point. It’s quite simple—just by looking at the nails. Healthy nails are not brittle; they are pink, smooth, relatively thick, and strong. That’s the general appearance of a healthy nail.
Jacobsen: What about people who bite their nails? They have unhealthy habits. What issues arise in terms of those behaviours? These aren’t just lifestyle habits; they seem more like behavioural tics.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, it’s quite common to see. There are a few specific changes associated with habitual trauma. One example is nail biting, where patients typically develop uneven ridges and thinner edges on the nails. Another habit is when individuals constantly traumatize one nail with another finger.
In such cases, you may see a midline deformity in the nail. This well-known condition, “habit-tic deformity,” is quite common. Sometimes, patients don’t even realize they are doing it. However, during an examination, you might observe them engaging in repetitive movements, continuously traumatizing their nails without noticing.
Jacobsen: What health risks are associated with nail-biting, picking, or repeated nail surface or root trauma?
Kazlouskaya: The first thing that comes to mind is infection. While the overall health risks aren’t usually severe, these habits can impact one’s self-presentation. For example, constantly biting your nails in a professional setting may create a negative impression. Additionally, there is a risk of bacterial infections. Although rare, bacteria can enter through damaged nail beds, leading to potential infections.
Jacobsen: Let’s say you want to help someone stop this behaviour. How can you help them break the habit?
Kazlouskaya: It isn’t easy. It can be quite challenging if a person is consciously willing to change the habit. Psychological conditions like depression or anxiety don’t always cause nail-biting; it can simply be a habitual behaviour. Changing this habit requires effort and awareness. Interestingly, there are even devices designed to help. For example, some bracelets detect movement and send signals to alert people when they start engaging in the behaviour.
You can program this device for different behaviors—pulling your hair, biting your nails, touching your face, or squeezing pimples. When it detects these actions, it gives you a small vibration, allowing you to redirect your behaviour consciously. It’s like a prisoner’s ankle bracelet, but instead of a shock, it helps deter bad habits.
Jacobsen: What about, for instance, dental technology, braces now can be pretty sleek, and you have to look a little harder to notice them. They can be more invisible and subtle when done well. Back in the day, people wore headgear. So, what are some of the gimmicky treatments that have been used in the past, which have had questionable efficacy in preventing these behaviors or supposedly improving nail health?
Kazlouskaya: I don’t know if I’m familiar with those gimmicky things. Nails don’t get as much attention as skin and hair. I don’t know of any weird treatments for nails from the past.
Jacobsen: Something that comes to mind is the longest-standing method as a type of coating you apply to the nails. It hardens and has a bad taste, discouraging biting. But that’s not a gimmick—it probably works for some people.
Kazlouskaya: It’s more like an old-fashioned remedy. If you ask grandmothers, they might suggest applying something sour to help someone break the habit of biting their nails. However, that would not work for an adult. This habit is so common that I’ve even seen it among my colleagues—physicians who constantly bite their nails.
Jacobsen: Are physicians usually anxious because of their long hours?
Kazlouskaya: I looked into this habit thoroughly, and it’s not necessarily connected to anxiety or depression, as I mentioned before. It can be purely habitual—people do it unconsciously without it being driven by stress. For example, picking behaviour can be driven by anxiety. There’s an urge and then relief after picking. But nail-biting is more of a routine behaviour.
No, no deep underlying psychological mechanism causes it—it simply becomes a habit. The key to stopping is recognizing and then consciously working to overcome it.
Jacobsen: Now, what about dietary habits? How do good and bad dietary choices affect nail health?
Kazlouskaya: Well, nails are made of keratin, so protein intake is the number one dietary factor to consider. You can track aspects of your health by looking at your nails. For example, nails can show signs of chronic anemia—low iron. Some nail changes can also indicate liver or kidney disease, so nutrition is definitely important. Protein is the most important nutrient for nail health, followed by iron.
Jacobsen: How do people maintain healthier nails in terms of stimulating growth? Pop culture often says that filing or trimming your nails stimulates growth and helps keep them even and rounded. Is that true?
Kazlouskaya: No, I don’t think filing or cutting nails makes them grow faster. Nail growth depends on whether your body is in balance. Younger people tend to grow nails faster, and fingernails grow more quickly than toenails. Growth can also be affected by factors like the season and diet. Many elements determine how fast nails grow.
Jacobsen: Why does the season affect nail growth? I’ve never heard that before.
Kazlouskaya: Generally, we have more vitamins and healthier habits during certain seasons. But in the summer, you can sometimes see slightly faster nail plate growth. I’d have to look up the exact scientific explanation for that.
Jacobsen: Outside of keratin, are there specific vitamin imbalances that you can notice in the nails? You mentioned kidney and liver disease as potential indicators.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, there are certain signs. One example is the little white spots on the nails as they grow. These don’t go away until the nail grows out, which suggests the issue originates at the nail matrix.
When examining the nail, you must look at different parts, including the cuticle, because it provides important clues about overall health. Changes in the cuticle can sometimes indicate serious conditions, such as autoimmune diseases like lupus. For example, under a microscope, you might see pronounced blood vessels in the cuticle, a telltale sign of an autoimmune condition.
Vitamin and nutrient deficiencies don’t always have distinct signs on the nails, but brittle, dull, or rough nails could indicate a deficiency. We typically conduct a range of tests to evaluate these possibilities.
Jacobsen: What things are catastrophic to nail health? I’m sure certain genetic conditions exist where people don’t grow nails. Still, I’m thinking more about lifestyle-related damage—situations where someone has harmed their nails so severely that they stop growing altogether.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, trauma can cause permanent nail damage. If someone experiences a severe injury—like a fall, a deep cut, or having something heavy fall on their finger or toe—they can damage the nail matrix, where the nail grows from. If the nail matrix is permanently damaged, the nail might never grow back normally. Unfortunately, in these cases, not much can be done.
In most cases of trauma, the nail might separate completely from the nail bed but will eventually grow back to normal. The outcome depends on the severity of the injury.
Jacobsen: Let’s say someone drops a hammer on their toe, causing blood vessels to burst and creating a lot of pressure and pain. What’s the appropriate response?
Kazlouskaya: That’s painful and sometimes requires medical attention. If there’s a hematoma (a collection of blood) under the nail, it may need to be drained to relieve the pressure.
A dark discoloration under the nail can look alarming, and some people even mistake it for melanoma, a type of skin cancer that can occur under the nail. Because of this, I often see patients who come in to check if their darkened nails are serious.
KIn most cases, the dark discoloration under the nail is just blood. You wait for the nail to grow out. On the toes, this can take up to a year because, as we discussed earlier, nails do not grow as quickly as you might want—especially toenails, which take many months to regenerate fully.
Jacobsen: What do people come to your office for the most when it comes to nails? What is the most common concern?
Kazlouskaya: The most common issue is fungal infections, which are very prevalent. After age 50, about one in three or four people will have a fungal infection on their toenails. It can be not easy to treat, especially if it is advanced, which is always challenging.
Another common issue is trauma or changes in the nails due to chronic conditions or deficiencies. Many people misdiagnose themselves with a fungal infection when, in reality, the changes are caused by another underlying issue. Beyond that, there are also tumours under the nails.
Many malignant and benign tumours can grow under the nail, and this is a whole subspecialty in dermatology. Some dermatologists focus exclusively on treating nails because diagnosing and treating nail-related conditions can be complex. Surgery on the nail is especially challenging because it can lead to permanent trauma to the nail plate.
Last year, I had about five relatively young patients with malignant tumours under their nails. Their nail deformities had been misdiagnosed as fungal infections for a long time, but multiple tests kept coming back negative. Eventually, I had to remove the nail plate and biopsy the tumour underneath. In some cases, it turned out to be malignant.
These are the major concerns: blunt trauma, deformities, unhealthy habits, poor overall health, fungal infections, and cancer. Melanoma and tumours in the nails are significant issues, and one thing that many people are not aware of is how unusual the location seems for skin cancer.
Jacobsen: That’s something I wasn’t aware of either. It is such an unusual spot for melanoma.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, but acral melanomas—melanomas that appear on the hands, feet, and nails—are more common in African American patients. A well-known example is Bob Marley, who died from melanoma that started on his toe.
The problem is that these melanomas are often misdiagnosed for a long time. People assume it is just trauma, a darkened nail, or a fungal infection. In general, African American populations are underserved in healthcare, meaning they don’t always see a physician as early as they should, which leads to worse outcomes.
Additionally, surgery on these melanomas is quite difficult, presenting another challenge. However, apart from melanomas, we also see squamous cell cancers on the nails. One factor that may contribute to an increased risk of these cancers is UV exposure from gel manicures.
We are not yet 100% certain about how significant this risk is, but it is a concern. If you go for a manicure every two or three weeks, you are exposing yourself to higher levels of UV light, which is known to cause cancer. This could be a contributing factor.
Another issue is HPV-related warts. Chronic warts around the nails can sometimes lead to certain types of cancer. So, major concerns, such as warts, fungal infections, and tumours, are among the most significant problems we deal with regarding nails.
Jacobsen: What new technologies might be available for special cases or are already in limited use? So, for instance, with hair, once rare technologies—like hair plugs—are now common. We also have a better understanding of the causes of hair loss. What about nails? Are there certain treatments or technologies that are rarely used now but show promise and could become more widely adopted?
Hypothetically, let’s say someone has uneven nail beds because they constantly pick at their nails. Could there be a technology that smooths out the surface they’ve deformed over time?
Kazlouskaya: Well, in the nail industry, there are a lot of new techniques for manicures, but that’s a question for a nail technician rather than a dermatologist.
However, in terms of medical treatments and new technologies, treating nail conditions has historically been challenging—especially when nails are affected by chronic conditions like psoriasis or eczema. In the past, we had very limited options to address nail changes caused by these conditions.
Fortunately, we have many medications that, while they may not completely cure these diseases, can significantly improve the appearance of the nails. For example, new injectable medications for psoriasis can help restore normal nail appearance, a major advancement in dermatology. We can now offer patients treatments that allow them to be free of these nail-related changes, which is a big step forward.
Jacobsen: Thank you for your time, Dr. Kazlouskaya.
Kazlouskaya: Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/03
Gytaute Gyneityte is a Lithuanian architect and military conscript who advocates for civic preparedness and national resilience. She speaks passionately about Lithuania’s history, cultural preservation, and defence readiness. Gyneityte emphasizes unity, human rights, and resistance to authoritarianism, drawing on both professional and personal insights into architecture, security, and collective memory. Gyneityte reflects on Lithuania’s resilience, military preparedness, and cultural survival amid threats from Russia. Emphasizing civic unity, historical memory, and democratic values, she expresses hope for Europe’s commitment to human rights and national sovereignty in the face of authoritarian aggression and hybrid warfare.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: You are an architect. Is Lithuania’s architecture also very angular?
Gytaute Gyneityte: I’d say so. Maybe not as much in contemporary architecture anymore, but yes, it is more about the quality of the materials—they use very high-end materials.
Jacobsen: You can see it everywhere: the roads, the cobblestones—everything is done beautifully. One example is in Ukraine, in Kharkiv. The stonework and masonry were done exceptionally well. That is old construction, of course. So, talking about military preparedness—what is your name and title, and how long were you in the military at that point?
Gyneityte: I’m Gytaute Gyneityte. In February 2015, I was conscripted and spent nine months in military service, training alongside other conscripts.
Jacobsen: What did you learn?
Gyneityte: I was assigned to the engineering battalion. Lithuania reinstated mandatory conscription in early 2015, following Russia’s annexation of Crimea in 2014. As an architect, I opted for the engineering battalion because there might be an overlap with my civilian skills. However, in reality, it was more focused on constructing field fortifications and obstacles.
We trained in handling explosives—detecting, neutralizing, and using them to breach structures. That included learning how to open doors with a charge. Of course, we also received basic military training, which included firearms handling, grenade throwing, physical fitness, and combat drills. That is the core of what the engineering battalion focuses on.
Jacobsen: Now, regarding the threat posed by the Russian Federation—by that I mean the Kremlin under Vladimir Putin, and perhaps vice versa to some extent—how do Lithuanians perceive that threat? How is it characterized, both politically and militarily, especially in the context of a possible escalation of the current conflict?
Gyneityte: We have always viewed Russia as a threat. There was never a time when the possibility of Russian aggression was ruled out. Hybrid warfare—encompassing cyberattacks, disinformation campaigns, and attempts to influence our political system—has been a consistent feature since we regained independence in 1990.
Russia has never been a friendly neighbour. However, since 2014, things have felt more acute and more dangerous. We have been warning the rest of Europe about Russia’s aggressive intentions since the annexation of Crimea. Back then, many European leaders told us we were paranoid. Unfortunately, we were right, and recent events have confirmed that. We have never forgotten the threat Russia poses.
You might have heard of the hybrid tactics involving Belarus. In 2021, the Lukashenko regime began directing thousands of migrants—mainly from the Middle East—toward Lithuania, Poland, and Latvia as a form of state-orchestrated pressure. It was widely interpreted as a retaliatory measure for EU sanctions.
What we did in response was a controversial move. We placed the migrants in detention centers and began constructing barbed-wire fencing along the Belarusian border. While the humanitarian aspect of that response has been criticized, we successfully controlled the situation.
Now, Lithuania has significantly strengthened its border security. We have fortified the borders with Belarus and the Kaliningrad region of Russia, and we continue to invest in military preparedness in cooperation with NATO.
We have, what do you call it—we have suspended parts of the Ottawa Convention, or at least adjusted our interpretation of it, in terms of the use of anti-personnel mines. Now, we are permitted to deploy certain types of landmines for defensive purposes, in coordination with other Baltic countries, as well as Finland and Poland, I believe.
What else? We have established what might be called a Commander’s Reserve or civilian auxiliary units—basically, civilians who receive some basic military training so they can assist the army or the police forces in the event of an emergency.
Generally, public support for the military has increased substantially. Military service and defence are seen much more positively now. Salaries for professional armed forces have also been raised. Conscription is still active. We have a standard nine-month conscription period, and that has not been cancelled. So yes, these are some of the main defence-related efforts underway.
Jacobsen: Now, cyber warfare seems to be Russia’s primary tool of disruption in Lithuania. Is that correct?
Gyneityte: Not only in Lithuania. I think they are doing that across Europe—and beyond. They have been involved in various acts of sabotage throughout the continent.
We had an incident where a plane exploded, and the cause is still under investigation. Events like that always raise suspicions, and unfortunately, the default assumption tends to be that Russian involvement is involved. Russia also regularly interferes in elections across Europe.
Jacobsen: Now, when it comes to Lithuania’s military preparedness, what can the country realistically do in the event of an invasion?
Gyneityte: Realistically, it has long been acknowledged that Lithuania could only hold out for a few days on its own, just enough time for NATO forces to arrive.
The critical vulnerability is the Suwałki Gap—a narrow stretch of land, approximately 60 kilometres wide, that forms the only land connection between the Baltic states and the rest of NATO, specifically between Lithuania and Poland. To the north is the Russian exclave of Kaliningrad, and to the south is Belarus. Everyone knows this is the weak link—Lithuania knows it, NATO knows it, and indeed, Russia and Belarus are aware of it.
Every September—or every two years in September—Russia and Belarus hold extensive joint military exercises known as Zapad (“West”). These drills are essentially rehearsals for potential conflict scenarios in this region. Their maneuvers often simulate actions like securing the Suwałki Gap, which would connect Kaliningrad to Belarus and effectively cut off the Baltic states from NATO reinforcements.
Naturally, we are not particularly enthusiastic about these exercises, and Zapad is scheduled to take place this year. If something were to happen, it could be timed to coincide with those drills. In other words, it would not necessarily be just a drill.
Jacobsen: What about the leadership of Lithuania? Are they issuing public statements to raise awareness—within NATO or through other alliances—that could facilitate military or critical intelligence support?
Gyneityte: We have been very vocal for the past ten years. The Baltic states and Scandinavia, together with Poland, are the ones who truly understand the threat, especially since we are closer geographically and have a better understanding of the Russian culture and language.
So, for years, we have known what they have been saying and planning. For example, Russia recently published a so-called “history” of Lithuania, claiming that Lithuania is not a real country, that our language is fabricated, just like they have done with other former Soviet republics. This was officially signed by Sergey Lavrov, Russia’s Foreign Minister. Yes, that is indeed very concerning. Our politicians always respond to these provocations. In Lithuania, if you go around saying pro-Russian things, you are not going to win a majority of votes. However, our current ruling coalition is somewhat corrupt, which is a concerning development. A protest is planned for Tuesday because our Prime Minister is allegedly involved in corruption.
Jacobsen: What are the allegations?
Gyneityte: A detailed investigative report was conducted by journalists. It revealed that he was living in a costly apartment that did not belong to him, despite having a modest official salary. He also allegedly has business ties that suggest financial misconduct. It is a long story—at least an hour-long investigative piece—but it is packed with information. Moreover, this is not the first time he has been implicated. He has previously been found guilty of corruption.
It was a mess how he got elected, to be honest. So yes, people are worried. However, even with all that, nobody can openly say they want to be friends with Russia or Belarus now. Our laws—and our constitution—do not allow that. Moreover, the public would be furious if anyone were to try.
Jacobsen: How do people in the military talk about these kinds of threats?
Gyneityte: When we refer to “the enemy,” everyone knows who we mean. There is no ambiguity. It is not some vague, abstract threat. It is very clear. It is not hypothetical. We all know who we are preparing to defend against.
Jacobsen: How much of Lithuania’s GDP is allocated to the military?
Gyneityte: As of now, Lithuania is spending over 2% of its GDP on defence, which meets NATO’s target commitment. We plan to increase it even further in the coming years—toward 3%—due to the current security situation. There is a broad consensus that this is necessary.
Jacobsen: How big is the military?
Gyneityte: Currently, Lithuania has approximately 20,000 professional military personnel. The number is approximately 26,000 when including both full-time and reserve forces.
In terms of conscription, we have had approximately 3,000 conscripts each year since February 2015, when conscription was reinstated. That would amount to around 30,000 trained conscripts to date.
We also have the Lithuanian Riflemen’s Union, which is a paramilitary organization. You will want to check the official numbers for that. In addition, there are volunteer forces—our volunteer national defence units. Again, exact figures can be verified, but they represent a meaningful segment of our broader defensive capacity.
Moreover, there is now also the Commanders’ Office—a relatively new initiative that allows civilians to undergo a short training program to prepare them to support military or police operations in emergencies, even in a limited capacity. For comparison, I believe Lithuania’s professional armed forces are now larger than those of Australia.
Jacobsen: That may be true. Australia is interesting, however. In the G20, Canada ranks nineteenth and Australia twentieth in terms of defence personnel size. However, Australia has perhaps the most generous benefits package for military personnel in the G20. Canada might be second-best in that regard. That is why both countries have large incentive programs—they struggle to recruit enough people to meet their targets. Within the Lithuanian context, when people talk about “the enemy,” do you think the political leadership might be corruptible enough to undermine Lithuania during a military incursion? Say, in the event of another so-called “special military operation” by the Kremlin-led Russian Federation, would some leaders offer no resistance? Or would civilians override executive orders and defend themselves regardless, because the political will lies more with the people than the leadership?
Gyneityte: Option number two. If we had the same kind of government for the past thirty years, maybe things would be different—perhaps we would be more brainwashed, or living in some grey zone politically. However, it is now a matter of black and white. In Lithuania’s history, the Singing Revolution took place on January 13, 1991. Sausio 13-oji. That was a critical moment.
So, to give an example: on January 13, 1991, Soviet tanks entered Lithuania. Civilians—many of them unarmed—came out to defend the parliament building, the television tower, and the national broadcaster.
In that case, they formed human shields—standing in large crowds around these buildings so the tanks could not proceed without running them over. There were thousands of people. You have no idea how many came out. They stood out there all night in minus-20-degree weather, singing songs, drinking coffee and tea, doing whatever they could to stay warm—and to stand their ground peacefully.
It was such a scary time. Moreover, I was not even born yet, but I cry every year. I put a candle on the windowsill, and we do this every year in remembrance of them. To give you an example: people from all over Lithuania came—no guns, no formal preparation—just to stand there and defend strategic buildings with their bodies. Moreover, I truly believe the same would happen today.
No doubt in my mind—crowds would appear again. This cab driver once told me that he was at the TV tower that night. Moreover, the radio host said, “It is a cold night. If anyone living near the TV tower can welcome people in for some tea, to warm up, please do. Moreover, put a candle on your windowsill.” Moreover, the cab driver said, “I looked around, and there was not a single window without a candle.”
That is who we are. This is our main existential threat—Russia. Moreover, we know just how expensive our freedom has been—our independence. We have been losing and regaining it for centuries. The fact that we have kept our language—even when it was banned—our alphabet, our traditions, including our Christmas celebrations, all of it was outlawed. Russia tried to erase us—our history, our culture, everything. However, we kept it. We still speak Lithuanian. We still have our country. That is a miracle. Moreover, I believe it shows we will maintain this miracle, no matter what happens.
Jacobsen: Are there different gendered experiences of this history? I mean, the Singing Revolution, the threat of Russia, the military—do men and women carry different memories, perspectives, or sentiments about these events? So, how might men think and feel about this history versus how women might?
Gyneityte: No, I do not believe there is a significant difference. After World War II, during the partisan resistance, the Russians killed a lot of Lithuanian men. Women had to step up in their place. During Soviet times, everyone, regardless of gender, was considered a worker.
That is why I think we have made relatively good progress on gender equality. Not perfect, not great—but not terrible either. I do not think men or women fought more or less for freedom. It was the same enemy, and it was the same difficult life, no matter your gender.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts?
Gyneityte: I do not know—maybe a message of hope. I believe that we can be united and work together. That we can choose human values—and not succumb to dictatorships, fake news, propaganda, or fear. I still have much hope that Europe remains a place that fights for human rights.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Gytaute.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/08/02
Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya, MD, PhD, is a dermatologist with 20 years of skincare, cosmetic procedures, and dermatological research expertise. She specializes in evidence-based treatments, including sunscreen, retinol, and antioxidants, while addressing conditions of acne, rosacea, and aging skin. Passionate about patient education, she emphasizes the importance of lifestyle, diet, and personalized care. Dr. Kazlouskaya is also experienced in advanced therapies such as exosomes, microneedling, and lasers, making her a trusted authority in modern dermatology. She addresses common concerns such as nail biting, trauma, fungal infections, and tumours, including melanomas that are often misdiagnosed. She explains that diet, chronic conditions, and seasonal changes can impact nail growth. Advances in dermatology, such as injectable treatments for psoriasis, improve nail health. Ethical considerations in cosmetic procedures, including plastic surgery trends like Brazilian butt lifts, are explored. The conversation concludes with plans for a future discussion on skin rejuvenation, Botox, and ethical concerns surrounding aesthetic treatments and psychological motivations.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re with Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya. We previously discussed hair, and now we will discuss nails. So, overall, how can you differentiate between healthy and unhealthy nails?
Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya: That’s a good starting point. It’s quite simple—just by looking at the nails. Healthy nails are not brittle; they are pink, smooth, relatively thick, and strong. That’s the general appearance of a healthy nail.
Jacobsen: What about people who bite their nails? They have unhealthy habits. What issues arise in terms of those behaviours? These aren’t just lifestyle habits; they seem more like behavioural tics.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, it’s quite common to see. There are a few specific changes associated with habitual trauma. One example is nail biting, where patients typically develop uneven ridges and thinner edges on the nails. Another habit is when individuals constantly traumatize one nail with another finger.
In such cases, you may see a midline deformity in the nail. This well-known condition, “habit-tic deformity,” is quite common. Sometimes, patients don’t even realize they are doing it. However, during an examination, you might observe them engaging in repetitive movements, continuously traumatizing their nails without noticing.
Jacobsen: What health risks are associated with nail-biting, picking, or repeated nail surface or root trauma?
Kazlouskaya: The first thing that comes to mind is infection. While the overall health risks aren’t usually severe, these habits can impact one’s self-presentation. For example, constantly biting your nails in a professional setting may create a negative impression. Additionally, there is a risk of bacterial infections. Although rare, bacteria can enter through damaged nail beds, leading to potential infections.
Jacobsen: Let’s say you want to help someone stop this behaviour. How can you help them break the habit?
Kazlouskaya: It isn’t easy. It can be quite challenging if a person is consciously willing to change the habit. Psychological conditions like depression or anxiety don’t always cause nail-biting; it can simply be a habitual behaviour. Changing this habit requires effort and awareness. Interestingly, there are even devices designed to help. For example, some bracelets detect movement and send signals to alert people when they start engaging in the behaviour.
You can program this device for different behaviors—pulling your hair, biting your nails, touching your face, or squeezing pimples. When it detects these actions, it gives you a small vibration, allowing you to redirect your behaviour consciously. It’s like a prisoner’s ankle bracelet, but instead of a shock, it helps deter bad habits.
Jacobsen: What about, for instance, dental technology, braces now can be pretty sleek, and you have to look a little harder to notice them. They can be more invisible and subtle when done well. Back in the day, people wore headgear. So, what are some of the gimmicky treatments that have been used in the past, which have had questionable efficacy in preventing these behaviors or supposedly improving nail health?
Kazlouskaya: I don’t know if I’m familiar with those gimmicky things. Nails don’t get as much attention as skin and hair. I don’t know of any weird treatments for nails from the past.
Jacobsen: Something that comes to mind is the longest-standing method as a type of coating you apply to the nails. It hardens and has a bad taste, discouraging biting. But that’s not a gimmick—it probably works for some people.
Kazlouskaya: It’s more like an old-fashioned remedy. If you ask grandmothers, they might suggest applying something sour to help someone break the habit of biting their nails. However, that would not work for an adult. This habit is so common that I’ve even seen it among my colleagues—physicians who constantly bite their nails.
Jacobsen: Are physicians usually anxious because of their long hours?
Kazlouskaya: I looked into this habit thoroughly, and it’s not necessarily connected to anxiety or depression, as I mentioned before. It can be purely habitual—people do it unconsciously without it being driven by stress. For example, picking behaviour can be driven by anxiety. There’s an urge and then relief after picking. But nail-biting is more of a routine behaviour.
No, no deep underlying psychological mechanism causes it—it simply becomes a habit. The key to stopping is recognizing and then consciously working to overcome it.
Jacobsen: Now, what about dietary habits? How do good and bad dietary choices affect nail health?
Kazlouskaya: Well, nails are made of keratin, so protein intake is the number one dietary factor to consider. You can track aspects of your health by looking at your nails. For example, nails can show signs of chronic anemia—low iron. Some nail changes can also indicate liver or kidney disease, so nutrition is definitely important. Protein is the most important nutrient for nail health, followed by iron.
Jacobsen: How do people maintain healthier nails in terms of stimulating growth? Pop culture often says that filing or trimming your nails stimulates growth and helps keep them even and rounded. Is that true?
Kazlouskaya: No, I don’t think filing or cutting nails makes them grow faster. Nail growth depends on whether your body is in balance. Younger people tend to grow nails faster, and fingernails grow more quickly than toenails. Growth can also be affected by factors like the season and diet. Many elements determine how fast nails grow.
Jacobsen: Why does the season affect nail growth? I’ve never heard that before.
Kazlouskaya: Generally, we have more vitamins and healthier habits during certain seasons. But in the summer, you can sometimes see slightly faster nail plate growth. I’d have to look up the exact scientific explanation for that.
Jacobsen: Outside of keratin, are there specific vitamin imbalances that you can notice in the nails? You mentioned kidney and liver disease as potential indicators.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, there are certain signs. One example is the little white spots on the nails as they grow. These don’t go away until the nail grows out, which suggests the issue originates at the nail matrix.
When examining the nail, you must look at different parts, including the cuticle, because it provides important clues about overall health. Changes in the cuticle can sometimes indicate serious conditions, such as autoimmune diseases like lupus. For example, under a microscope, you might see pronounced blood vessels in the cuticle, a telltale sign of an autoimmune condition.
Vitamin and nutrient deficiencies don’t always have distinct signs on the nails, but brittle, dull, or rough nails could indicate a deficiency. We typically conduct a range of tests to evaluate these possibilities.
Jacobsen: What things are catastrophic to nail health? I’m sure certain genetic conditions exist where people don’t grow nails. Still, I’m thinking more about lifestyle-related damage—situations where someone has harmed their nails so severely that they stop growing altogether.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, trauma can cause permanent nail damage. If someone experiences a severe injury—like a fall, a deep cut, or having something heavy fall on their finger or toe—they can damage the nail matrix, where the nail grows from. If the nail matrix is permanently damaged, the nail might never grow back normally. Unfortunately, in these cases, not much can be done.
In most cases of trauma, the nail might separate completely from the nail bed but will eventually grow back to normal. The outcome depends on the severity of the injury.
Jacobsen: Let’s say someone drops a hammer on their toe, causing blood vessels to burst and creating a lot of pressure and pain. What’s the appropriate response?
Kazlouskaya: That’s painful and sometimes requires medical attention. If there’s a hematoma (a collection of blood) under the nail, it may need to be drained to relieve the pressure.
A dark discoloration under the nail can look alarming, and some people even mistake it for melanoma, a type of skin cancer that can occur under the nail. Because of this, I often see patients who come in to check if their darkened nails are serious.
KIn most cases, the dark discoloration under the nail is just blood. You wait for the nail to grow out. On the toes, this can take up to a year because, as we discussed earlier, nails do not grow as quickly as you might want—especially toenails, which take many months to regenerate fully.
Jacobsen: What do people come to your office for the most when it comes to nails? What is the most common concern?
Kazlouskaya: The most common issue is fungal infections, which are very prevalent. After age 50, about one in three or four people will have a fungal infection on their toenails. It can be not easy to treat, especially if it is advanced, which is always challenging.
Another common issue is trauma or changes in the nails due to chronic conditions or deficiencies. Many people misdiagnose themselves with a fungal infection when, in reality, the changes are caused by another underlying issue. Beyond that, there are also tumours under the nails.
Many malignant and benign tumours can grow under the nail, and this is a whole subspecialty in dermatology. Some dermatologists focus exclusively on treating nails because diagnosing and treating nail-related conditions can be complex. Surgery on the nail is especially challenging because it can lead to permanent trauma to the nail plate.
Last year, I had about five relatively young patients with malignant tumours under their nails. Their nail deformities had been misdiagnosed as fungal infections for a long time, but multiple tests kept coming back negative. Eventually, I had to remove the nail plate and biopsy the tumour underneath. In some cases, it turned out to be malignant.
These are the major concerns: blunt trauma, deformities, unhealthy habits, poor overall health, fungal infections, and cancer. Melanoma and tumours in the nails are significant issues, and one thing that many people are not aware of is how unusual the location seems for skin cancer.
Jacobsen: That’s something I wasn’t aware of either. It is such an unusual spot for melanoma.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, but acral melanomas—melanomas that appear on the hands, feet, and nails—are more common in African American patients. A well-known example is Bob Marley, who died from melanoma that started on his toe.
The problem is that these melanomas are often misdiagnosed for a long time. People assume it is just trauma, a darkened nail, or a fungal infection. In general, African American populations are underserved in healthcare, meaning they don’t always see a physician as early as they should, which leads to worse outcomes.
Additionally, surgery on these melanomas is quite difficult, presenting another challenge. However, apart from melanomas, we also see squamous cell cancers on the nails. One factor that may contribute to an increased risk of these cancers is UV exposure from gel manicures.
We are not yet 100% certain about how significant this risk is, but it is a concern. If you go for a manicure every two or three weeks, you are exposing yourself to higher levels of UV light, which is known to cause cancer. This could be a contributing factor.
Another issue is HPV-related warts. Chronic warts around the nails can sometimes lead to certain types of cancer. So, major concerns, such as warts, fungal infections, and tumours, are among the most significant problems we deal with regarding nails.
Jacobsen: What new technologies might be available for special cases or are already in limited use? So, for instance, with hair, once rare technologies—like hair plugs—are now common. We also have a better understanding of the causes of hair loss. What about nails? Are there certain treatments or technologies that are rarely used now but show promise and could become more widely adopted?
Hypothetically, let’s say someone has uneven nail beds because they constantly pick at their nails. Could there be a technology that smooths out the surface they’ve deformed over time?
Kazlouskaya: Well, in the nail industry, there are a lot of new techniques for manicures, but that’s a question for a nail technician rather than a dermatologist.
However, in terms of medical treatments and new technologies, treating nail conditions has historically been challenging—especially when nails are affected by chronic conditions like psoriasis or eczema. In the past, we had very limited options to address nail changes caused by these conditions.
Fortunately, we have many medications that, while they may not completely cure these diseases, can significantly improve the appearance of the nails. For example, new injectable medications for psoriasis can help restore normal nail appearance, a major advancement in dermatology. We can now offer patients treatments that allow them to be free of these nail-related changes, which is a big step forward.
Jacobsen: Thank you for your time, Dr. Kazlouskaya.
Kazlouskaya: Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/31
Bob Reuter shared his reflections on the 2025 Humanists International General Assembly and the International Humanist Conference held in Luxembourg, highlighting a warm, collegial atmosphere and emotional moments, such as Mubarak Bala’s attendance. He praised the dynamic “inspiring practices” format and emphasized the importance of striking a balance between local and international contributions. Challenges such as funding for global collaboration and inclusion of diverse communities were discussed. Reuter advocated for practical humanist services, like non-religious weddings and funerals, to better reflect non-religious values. He also emphasized the importance of emotional connection, leadership accountability, and fostering solidarity, suggesting ideas such as humanist couchsurfing to strengthen community ties across borders.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are your main takeaways from the 2025 Humanists International General Assembly and the International Humanist Conference you hosted in Luxembourg?
Bob Reuter: A feeling of bliss is the first thing that comes to mind. I found the entire weekend — from Friday to Sunday — to be exceptionally warm and friendly. It was truly remarkable to see so many people gathered together. Everything went well. Aside from a few minor hiccups, the event ran very smoothly.
Jacobsen: What kind of hiccups?
Reuter: Just a minor one — Andrew Copson did not receive a lunch that accommodated his dietary requirements. It was a minor oversight, likely unnoticed by most attendees, but it stood out to me. I try to be very attentive to the well-being of participants, especially those in key roles.
Jacobsen: Like Sideshow Bob stepping on a rake — it hits you in the face, even if you saw it coming. There is even a whole episode devoted to that gag. What were some highlights from the speakers? What stood out to you? What feedback did you hear from attendees?
Reuter: I will start with the first keynote speaker — someone I know personally. He was relieved that his talk went smoothly, that his English was clear enough, and that he stayed within the time limit. During the break, he received many thoughtful and friendly questions. As academics, we are used to conferences where questions sometimes aim to show off. However, the atmosphere here was much more collegial. Attendees asked questions out of genuine interest. It created a space focused on sharing ideas and learning, where people gained new perspectives on topics they may not have been familiar with before.
Regarding the sessions on “inspiring practices,” many attendees praised the format. Each speaker had ten minutes, which made the sessions feel dynamic and engaging. If one speaker was less engaging for you, it was only a short wait until the next — potentially more inspiring — presentation. This approach worked well because people’s interests are personal, and the short format helped sustain engagement across a wide range of topics.
Jacobsen: Would it be helpful to have a semi-academic format, such as poster presentations, where attendees could present their ideas in a less formal setting?
Reuter: Potentially, yes. At the 2023 World Humanist Congress in Copenhagen, for instance, a poster session was held. That event was larger, with parallel sessions on various themes. I attended one focused on humanist services, particularly in youth work. Those talks were significantly longer than ten minutes.
It was very appropriate for those presentations to be much longer because you want to dig deeply into an established practice. You want to learn how they do it, what their foundational principles are, and also what observed effects they have had.
It is tough to convey all of that in just ten minutes. Consider showing a video of an activity, such as a ceremony, youth camp, or similar event. Therefore, the ten-minute quick talks, followed by a roundtable, are not necessarily the ideal format.
However, if you only have one day, it is a good way to provide people with a wide range of input without making it too long or overwhelming. I remained alert and excited throughout the day. However, as an organizer, you have that adrenaline running through your system, wondering: will everything be okay? Will we stay on schedule? Will we make it to the restaurant? Will people like the food? Will the music work?
So, yes. For other participants, the day might have felt long because the amount of input was quite intense.
Jacobsen: Do you think humanist organizations, if they were to host a similar event in the future, and let us say they are mid-sized or even small but highly motivated to host, should leverage their specific strengths within the context of the conference?
Reuter: It’s always a good recommendation to lean on your strengths. However, it is challenging to pinpoint exactly what those strengths are, as they can vary significantly.
In my case, one of my strengths in this context was that about half of the presentations came from people based in Luxembourg. As a small country, we know everyone and have quick access to many interesting individuals. I could have invited even more people involved in public science communication because I know many in that field.
However, I also did not want the conference to be overly local. I wanted a balance between local contributors and international experiences. In other contexts, strengths could be entirely different.
In much larger countries, one of the strengths might be access to internationally well-known figures. In Luxembourg, we do not have many internationally famous personalities — that is a challenge.
When I look at what Humanists UK did during the pandemic with their online seminars, they featured some famous people — individuals you would recognize from television or prominent YouTube channels. They could host them and draw in a large audience simply because people wanted to hear from someone well-known.
That is something we struggle with in Luxembourg. Mainly, when catering to a more Luxembourgish audience, well, “No one is a prophet in their town,” to use that phrase. In Luxembourg, you often know the locally famous figures personally, and you are also aware of their shortcomings. So it is harder to place them on a pedestal.
Even though, as a humanist, I do not believe anyone should be put on a pedestal — we are all human and should be treated as such. Still, there is this effect where people who have achieved something gain attention and admiration. When someone is internationally famous, it is easier for the public to overlook their flaws or not even consider them. That distance creates a kind of allure.
Jacobsen: On that note, there was a massive boost to the humanist movement when it gained momentum alongside the New Atheist movement. However, that movement has fragmented and declined in terms of its core following.
What should humanists lean on now — whether it is around a personality or alignment with another movement — to maintain relevance or momentum on specific issues? How can we ensure that the humanist life stance remains responsive and relevant to the context?
Reuter: One thing I heard during the weekend event is that many people want to develop intercontinental collaborations and stay connected, doing things together across borders. We already have the European Forum within Humanists International, where we collaborate regularly.
We’ve had a lot of online meetings — that’s just how it unfolded. We recently had our first in-person meeting. I think it will be beneficial to have more of those in the future. These intracontinental meetings are feasible due to the ease and speed of travel nowadays.
However, especially when you want to collaborate and secure funding — particularly from sources other than our own organization or umbrella organization — that is where people tend to struggle. With Erasmus+, organizations in different countries can jointly submit a proposal, but it has to be organizations from European countries. I know the Romanians did that with colleagues from Malta and another country. You need at least three countries, and then it becomes viable. However, imagine you want to do something with an organization in Nigeria — there is no international funding scheme currently available to support that.
So yes, it is something people aspire to, but there are fundamental limitations. I do not have answers, I recognize the gap.
Jacobsen: The international case is tricky. For instance, the Norwegians do receive significant governmental or federal funding for identifying as a humanist organization and having a large membership. Additionally, a substantial portion of the public — whether tacitly or explicitly — identifies as humanist, making it a very welcoming environment for them at this point. Another issue, however, is that they cannot use that government funding internationally.
Reuter: They are not supposed to — exactly. The same applies to our Belgian colleagues. They do receive public funding, which is quite substantial compared to others, but it must be used within the country.
Jacobsen: One way to utilize those funds in an international context is to invite people — scholars, fellows, or organizers.
Reuter: Yes, that is a possibility. You can frame it as continuous professional development for young people, which it genuinely is.
Jacobsen: It benefits them, and they gain international European experience in a humanist context. That could be valuable. It does not require a significant amount of funding. For example, a buddy system could be helpful: their flight is paid for, but they stay with a colleague or a host family — someone from that country who is willing to support them. That would reduce costs if that is a concern.
Reuter: Yes, and that reminds me of an idea I heard in Glasgow a few years ago at another International Humanist Conference. It was the concept of staying over at a fellow humanist’s home.
The idea, proposed by someone at the time, was that religious communities already do this — they rely on mutual solidarity. You essentially trust someone you do not know personally. You trust a stranger simply because you share the same religious faith, which is unusual, but that’s what people often do. There is a certain built-in credibility, or credit, that you are granted in advance. Only if you prove unworthy of that credit does it disappear.
So, humanist couchsurfing — I think that is a nice idea. Many of us travel internationally as humanists, often without funding from an organization or employer. So this kind of network could be a valuable initiative.
It could also be a great way to connect with people internationally and show that we are a community with a sense of solidarity.
Because having a network that offers reciprocal support — where being part of the community means not just giving but also receiving — is powerful.
Jacobsen: What were some moments that stood out for you during the conference?
Reuter: Honestly, the fact that Mubarak Bala was with us — that was incredibly emotional. We had been celebrating his release and donating money to support him, even though most of us had never met him. That kind of altruistic concern for another human being, based solely on shared values, was profoundly moving.
I remember thinking how lucky I am. I can be the president of an association of Humanists, Atheists and Agnostics in Luxembourg and speak out publicly without really fearing for my safety. I do not believe my life is in danger because of my humanist identity — at least, so far, I have not felt that way.
Meanwhile, in another country, just saying something that would be considered mundane here — like criticizing religion or the Prophet — can lead to imprisonment or worse. Perhaps that is because the religious communities in Europe have undergone a kind of moderation. I guess 200 years ago, saying such things here might have gotten you killed, too.
So yes, imagining that expressing your beliefs could be dangerous — it is almost unimaginable. And then hearing Mubarak speak, talking with him on Sunday evening after everything quieted down — that was powerful.
Listening to him describe what it felt like to be imprisoned, the uncertainty, not knowing if or when he would be released — it was chilling. And then, hearing how elements of his religious upbringing still linger with him, even in terms of how he feels he should dress, that struck me.
There are moments when he breaks free from that influence, and he questions: Why shouldn’t I dress how I like? I may enjoy dressing that way. Moreover, I can separate it from its religious or cultural significance and make it my own.
Another very emotional moment for me was when Leo spoke about Andrew’s achievements. I had not realized it was under Andrew’s leadership that Humanists International became a much more diverse organization.
To me, that diversity now feels natural. It is like — yes, this is how it should be. Moreover, to some extent, you could say, well, it is still not enough.
I have seen it from behind the scenes — the delegates from Uganda were not present because they did not receive their visas. Europe, and Luxembourg as part of the Schengen Area, did not allow them in.
They were not there. So, it is still not the safe and inclusive space that it should be. However, we have rules, regulations, and bylaws stating that people must run this association from different continents and regions of the world. That now seems natural — but apparently, it was not always the case. So yes, it is still a challenge. Moreover, we also struggle with diversity here in Luxembourg.
We do not have 50% women on our board, and we do not have 50% of our overall membership represented by women. Moreover, it is not because we do not want that — I am not entirely sure why that is the case. I think it is worth analyzing.
Also, in terms of our membership, we are not fully reaching or engaging with the internationally diverse population living in Luxembourg. Around 50% of people living in Luxembourg do not have a Luxembourgish passport. We fail to engage with some of them. Part of it may be due to prejudice — we may assume specific communities are more religious than they are. So we may think: “This will not interest them, because they are just religious — end of story.”
However, is that the case? Probably not. So then — why not try? In that sense, there is something to be learned from this international organization — lessons that can be applied to local organizations in highly diverse countries.
Jacobsen: A good observation is that, in many cases, when you look at religious populations within a given country — especially newer ones — they are often minority groups demographically. However, when those communities have been around for 20 or 30 years, a new generation has emerged.
That generation tends to be much less religious on average than their parents. They also tend to adopt many local cultural customs as part of adapting their belief systems. Moreover, about one-third of those kids tend to leave religion altogether.
Therefore, the self and identity are not static. Culture is fluid. Moreover, people are, too. It is not as though those things are fixed forever. Moreover, in terms of the gifting to Andrew, what did you think of the enormous number of gifts? At least three scarves, if I recall.
Reuter: Yes. I found it comical. It almost looked like a religious ritual. However, I took it as an opportunity to think: “No, this is just a human way of giving something from one’s culture or community to someone as a symbol.” It says, “We consider you one of us.”
If people associate that with religion or religious traditions, so be it. However, I think we are always in a space where we do things — and also observe and critique what we are doing — yet we do it anyway. Because, why not?
Jacobsen: It is also — I mean — we are not dry. You know? This is not a science conference. However, science plays a part in it.
Reuter: Exactly, I appreciated the fact that humanism is also about emotions.
Jacobsen: That is a huge comfort, yes. I think many people see it as a way of looking at — or at least approaching — the world, not just intellectually. There is a great deal of comfort in it. I remember Leo; when he was speaking with Andrew, he used the word ‘longing‘.
He said he was “longing” for these moments — seeing people from all over the world come together. Moreover, I think that is a widespread sentiment. It is always there. This is one of my favourite times of the year — attending a big international humanist conference. What was your funniest moment?
Reuter: That is interesting. I do not know. I do not think the event was funny — I would not call it humourless — but there is no specific moment that stands out to me as the most amusing.
Jacobsen: I found the banter over dinner — just little things like that — hilarious—the random conversations. One of my funniest moments was actually with Mubarak. I did several interviews with him. Moreover, when we spoke, he said I was the last person (or among the very last) he talked to before the police took him.
We were doing an “Ask Mubarak” series for a now-defunct publication, Canadian Atheist. The session right before — the one I was about to send him — had a subtitle that included: How bad can it get? I attended the conference, but I couldn’t find our seating area.
I was unable to find the conference room at the time. I had been travelling, so I went to the bathroom. As I turned, I saw a man wearing a small hat — someone I recognized. Moreover, I said, “Are you Mubarak Bala?”
He said, “Yes.”
I said, “Hi, I am Scott.”
Then he said, “Oh… what?”
Then he told me, “Come with me.”
He took me through the back entrance — through the red slider, where you would usually need the ticker tape or badge access. We went under and through, using the back route into the conference room. And so the first person I ran into at the conference was Mubarak Bala. Stuff like that — circumstantial happenstance, funny.
What else? We had a first for Humanists International this year. We had the first VP-P woman duo in the history of Humanists International.
That will be very fruitful and interesting, as you will gain a completely different approach and perspective on specific topics that may have been overlooked for a while. I am very excited to see how that develops over the next few years.
Reuter: Yes, true. Even though we should not expect too much from women in leadership to change the world just because they are women. The structure of the world is not necessarily conducive to change, particularly when it comes to dismantling patriarchy.
Jacobsen: A big help will be that the strengths of Ross and Maggie will come through. Maggie, in particular, is — I think — a quintessentially American phenomenon. She has much energy.
Reuter: That may be one moment I found funny. When she spoke before she was elected, I had the impression, “This is a politician speaking.”
And I mean that in a good way. She is very eloquent. She knows how to address a crowd. She knows how to engage both emotionally and intellectually. So, yes — I thought, “Wow”.
But, in our community, we have an ambivalent relationship with the allure of power. Because, yes, like Karl Popper, the Austrian philosopher, we think we should give power to those who do not want it. Because those who excel in leadership are often at risk of being seduced by the power that comes with it. I believe it is essential to have safeguards in place — mechanisms to ensure that the people we elect into power do not accumulate too much power.
This is precisely what we are seeing now in the United States — with someone who appears extremely egocentric, or even narcissistic, or however you might describe it. I am not trying to diagnose anyone from a distance — that is always dangerous — but from what I observe, they seem to love being in charge. They love using that power to their advantage.
There is now sufficient evidence to support this case. That is truly dangerous. Because people in leadership should care about others, that is how democracy should function. We should also be able to remove leaders — peacefully, through democratic means — without resorting to violence.
I mean, voting — one aspect that people often take as fundamental to democracy is the idea of majority rule. However, I do not think that is the most crucial part. What matters more to me is that we can remove our leaders without needing to kill them, because we can change our minds about who we want to lead us.
And not just about the person, but also about the government’s ideas and the policies they promote. We can say, “Okay, we were wrong — let us change it.”
Jacobsen: Right, we do that quite well. It is not always easy, but we manage it better overall than many. I like the idea of elections as a “mini revolution.” You know — so we do not have to behead Marie Antoinette to move forward.
Reuter: Yes, true.
Jacobsen: What is next for the Luxembourgish Humanists?
Reuter: One thing we have been working on, in parallel to organizing conferences, is setting up humanist services, particularly through the European Humanist Services Network.
For instance, we have been working on the EU wedding standard and implementing it, including providing training. On Monday, just after the conference, we had a meeting with people from Flanders, Belgium, who will provide training for our celebrants. That way, we can get things going and offer practical humanist outreach by providing services to the broader community.
This can help us become known for something positive, rather than being known as the group that opposes religion and fights against religious privilege (which, of course, we will continue doing as long as it is necessary).
The next big area is developing services for humanist funerals. We have been working on a new brochure. In 2019, we published a small booklet on baby-naming or newborn welcoming ceremonies — how to conduct them in a humanist and non-religious manner, your rights, and the possibilities available.
It was not meant to be a recipe book but rather an encouragement to empower people to do something on their own, in their own way.
We are now attempting to create a similar publication, focusing on death and funerals. Because when you have a newborn or are planning a wedding, you typically have more time to prepare. There is no urgency. However, with funerals, it is different. Things must happen within days.
Moreover, we still see that many people default to contacting a priest and having a religious funeral, because that is what people know. It is still the standard offer. It is culturally familiar.
However, more than 50% of Luxembourg’s population identifies as non-religious. In that case, they should have access to funeral services that reflect their values — services that cater to their own needs and convictions.
Jacobsen: Thank you for your time. Have a good day.
Reuter: You are welcome. Bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/31
Professor Gordon Guyatt is a Canadian physician, health researcher, and Distinguished Professor at McMaster University, widely recognized as the pioneer of evidence-based medicine (EBM). He coined the term “evidence-based medicine” in 1991, fundamentally transforming how clinicians worldwide evaluate research and make patient care decisions. Guyatt has authored or co-authored thousands of influential papers and is among the most cited health scientists globally. He has also led the development of the GRADE framework for grading evidence and guidelines. His leadership, mentorship, and prolific contributions have profoundly shaped modern clinical epidemiology and guideline development, cementing his legacy in global health research.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, last time we talked, you had received the Henry G. Friesen International Prize in Health Research. You gave a lecture as part of that recognition. Could you describe the content of that lecture and the feedback you received?
Professor Gordon Guyatt: It has turned out to be a series of eight lectures because — as far as I know — this is a unique Canadian award that requires the laureate to travel across the country and deliver the Friesen Lecture at multiple Canadian medical schools. So far, I have done it at McMaster, Waterloo, Ottawa, Toronto, Winnipeg, Calgary, and Edmonton.
In a little while, I will be giving my eighth and final Lecture in Vancouver. It has been an enjoyable experience — I have met people in each city. As I have delivered the lecture multiple times, I have refined it to be more interactive, which the audience consistently appreciates. Overall, it has been a fun and enriching experience.
Jacobsen: Now, when you look at the current generation of medical students — as a related question — how has their training changed compared to when you were a student, especially about epidemiology and evidence-based medicine?
Guyatt: Well, there have been some significant changes. When I was in training, residents typically worked one night in three. After being on call overnight, you would often stay until 5 p.m. or later the following day. That would be unheard of now. Today, work-hour restrictions are much tighter, and training is organized more around shift work.
Another significant change is the structure of attending service. Earlier in my career, when I was in clinical service, I would be on for a whole month at a time. Then, it was reduced to two weeks. Now, for many services, attending physicians are scheduled for just one week at a time. This is not ideal for continuity of patient care — you barely get to know the house staff before either they or you rotate off the service.
I sound like a dinosaur, but back then, it was different. This shorter time commitment does not foster the same level of continuity or, arguably, the same level of dedication to patient care. Whether that change comes from the trainees themselves or the system is a matter of debate. Still, the system certainly does not encourage the same depth of commitment.
Those are some of the significant structural changes. If you look specifically at evidence-based medicine, today’s students have no sense of what the world was like before EBM.
Jacobsen: For context, before EBM, clinical decisions were often made based on expert consensus — what some have jokingly called the “GOBSAT” approach (Good Old Boys Sat Around the Table).
Guyatt: Nowadays, students do not necessarily know or care much about the development of evidence-based medicine (EBM) or guideline standards. Still, they fully expect recommendations to be grounded in evidence. They might not dig deeply into the evidence themselves, but they rely on guidelines and assume they are evidence-based. I once gave a talk to a group of medical students in Toronto — virtually — and the first question at the end was, “How did you get interested in EBM?”— as if it had always existed! No kidding.
Jacobsen: I love that. I love that so much. You are one of the most cited people in Canadian academic history. When you go down the field, how does that feel? “Also — as an aside — what is your name?” I could understand if they asked me that, but not you! They are completely ahistorical.
Guyatt: Yes, I get that a lot in interviews.
Jacobsen: And it is not just in epidemiology — it is true across disciplines. Pick any field. This has been facilitated by social media and the Internet, providing you with immediate access to vast amounts of information. Still, it is all presented in an achronological manner. So, it is a net of information, which ideally gets filtered into usable knowledge — but there is no sense of timeline. That is part of it. From a media or sociological standpoint, it is fascinating.
It is such a reflection of how the world has changed. I have asked this before, but giving the lecture for the award is different from receiving the award itself. The second part, where you are now travelling and delivering this series of lectures — how does it feel to be at this stage of your career, being called upon to do this national lecture circuit and seeing the process from this vantage point?
Guyatt: Well, I feel like I am cashing in on all the work I have done over the years. I am, by citation count, the most cited Canadian health scientist, and evidence-based medicine has become something to which everyone must at least pay lip service. People know that I helped get it started, so they think of me as a legend.
So, wherever I go, people say, “Oh, it is such an honour to be talking with you.” But back in the early days, it was not always like that! When I first started promoting EBM, the reception was far from universally warm. I might have told you this story before, but once, in the States, I visited a department where they did not like being told that they had missed the boat.
Our message was: “You were trained in a particular way, and you think you have expertise, but real expertise means knowing how to assess the evidence — and you were not taught that.” Unsurprisingly, a lot of the senior experts did not appreciate hearing this.
There was one bright young immunologist in that department who did not take kindly to it. I met with him and a couple of residents. Typically, in those sessions, the expert asks a question to the junior resident. The senior resident finally offers the answer.
Well, this fellow asked the junior resident, then the senior resident, and if they did not get it, he asked me. I never knew the answer — not once. Zero. He was trying to embarrass me, but it did not bother me at all.
And the next time I ran into him — purely by chance while walking around the campus — I said, “Hey! Thanks for that educational session you invited me to!” Learned a lot. It was a great session. Anyway, the guy did a double-take because he thought he had delivered a major put-down, and it did not bother me in the slightest — which he did not expect! Anyway, that is just one story of the hostility that sometimes arose — understandably, in a way — because you are telling people, “Sorry, you missed the boat,” and that is not pleasant to hear.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Gordon.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/30
Kal Merhi, founder of iROOMit, turned his lived experience of displacement and housing instability into a thriving AI-powered roommate-matching platform. With limited formal education and no government funding, Merhi bootstrapped iROOMit to address the affordability crisis in urban housing. The platform integrates ID verification, scam prevention, and secure rent transactions, growing from 1,200 to over 7,000 users monthly. With ambitious global expansion plans, Merhi envisions co-living as a long-term housing solution. His mission is not just technological but personal: to create safe, accessible spaces for those struggling to find a place to call home.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today we’re here with Kal Merhi, founder of iROOMit, an AI-powered roommate matching platform designed to make co-living safer, smarter, and more accessible. His story defies the typical tech founder narrative — he arrived in North America with only a sixth-grade education, limited English, and a history of housing insecurity. Cal rebuilt his life from the ground up, bootstrapping the development of iROOMit. The platform integrates identity verification, scam detection, background checks, lease agreements, and rent payments into a single trusted solution — all critical components when you’re looking for a safe and secure place to live. With over 5,000 new users joining each month, Cal’s mission is rooted in safety, intuition, and connection. He uses technology to empower people seeking housing stability — the kind he once lacked. Your journey to founding iROOMit is anything but typical. What’s the story behind the challenges and life experiences that led you to create this platform?
Kal Merhi: Yes, of course. Because of my upbringing, the idea for iROOMit — the concept of roommate living and co-living — was always in the back of my mind. I’ve always believed that everyone deserves a place to call home. It doesn’t matter if it’s 200 or 300 square feet — if you have a place to sleep and feel safe, that’s home. I lived through civil war and displacement in Lebanon, so I know what it means to be a refugee, even within your own country. That experience gave me a deep appreciation for having stable housing. From early on, I wanted to create something that could offer that kind of support to others — something meaningful, something global. I’ve always been entrepreneurial. I’ve only worked for someone else for about a year or two. The rest of the time, I’ve launched businesses, built them, sold them, and moved on.
The idea for iROOMit came during the COVID-19 pandemic. Initially, I worked on a platform for people to buy and rent homes without needing a real estate agent. But midway through that project, I pivoted. I realized the real need, especially with housing costs rising globally, was in affordable co-living. That’s when I launched iROOMit: a platform focused on helping people find roommates and shared rentals, using AI and innovative technology to match users based on lifestyle compatibility and safety.
We finalized the technology in 2022 and spent that year testing it in the market. The feedback was overwhelmingly positive — even more than we expected. So, we officially launched in 2023. The growth from 2022 to 2023 was exponential, and 2024 saw even more momentum. In 2025, what we’re experiencing has exceeded all our early expectations. We’ve built something the market didn’t offer but desperately needed — a safe, secure, and intuitive platform for finding housing. Yes, people need homes and want to save money, but trust is everything in today’s digital world. Scams, fraud, and misinformation are everywhere — and we set out to change that.
So, we created that safe zone for our community. When people come in looking to rent or they have a place they want to rent out to someone else, it helps them save money, create space, and offer someone else a safe and easy experience. We built that environment intentionally, and the results have been phenomenal.
Jacobsen: Now, when you turned your personal experience with housing instability into a tech platform focused on safety and smart co-living, what was some of the early feedback like? How did input during the beta phases help shape the platform to better meet the needs of people in those situations?
Merhi: Yes, that’s a good question. Initially, when we launched, we listened very carefully to users. I don’t think of them as just users — I call them community members. Even if I’ve never met them, I care deeply about them. So, we made it easy for people to contact us via email or direct message. They gave us feedback on what needed improvement and what they found challenging. The number one issue — and I keep repeating this — is scams. People would connect with others and later discover the listings were fake or unverified. So, together with my business partner David, our CTO, we built an AI system designed to detect and remove scams and unverified listings. We wanted people to feel safe and secure when connecting with others. We focused heavily on that from the very start because we couldn’t scale without safety. If users lose trust in our platform, the whole model collapses. That’s something we noticed with other platforms — they have many scam complaints. You can read the reviews, send emails, and speak with people who’ve had bad experiences. We didn’t want to make that mistake. So, we tackled the problem right at the beginning — not after 100,000 or 200,000 listings. We grew the platform with safety built into its core. As we expand, we’re constantly evolving and improving. The feedback we get is excellent. On the Google Play Store and Apple App Store, our app is rated 4.6. I think that’s solid. Sure, there’s some criticism, but the positive outweighs the negative. Overall, the impact of our technology has been phenomenal.
Jacobsen: Now you’re at 5,000 new users every month. How has that growth trajectory developed over time? Looking back six months or a year, what were your monthly active user additions? And based on that trend, what does the projection look like for the year ahead?
Merhi: Sure, yes. I’ll start with 2022 — our trial year, so I won’t count that. I’ll begin with when people started paying for monthly, weekly, 60-day, and 90-day subscriptions. In 2023, we were getting around 1,200 to 1,300 new users monthly. In 2024, we doubled that.
As I speak with you, we’re hitting 6,000 to 7,000 new users per month. That’s a growth rate of approximately 200% to 300% year-over-year. In 2025, we’re experiencing around a 20% increase month-over-month compared to last year. The growth is exponential, and there is demand. We’re expanding our reach across North America and into the UK. For example, we’re now entering smaller towns and cities, not just focusing on major metropolitan areas. There’s a significant need there, too. From 2023 to 2024, our growth was about 200%, and in 2025, we anticipate hitting 300%.
By the end of 2026 or early 2027, we’ll be reaching 20,000 new users per month. I’ve developed a three-year expansion plan covering 2025, 2026, and 2027. By the end of 2027, we will be fully launched in Canada, the United States, and the United Kingdom. We’re launching in Australia, Singapore, New Zealand, and Dubai in the UAE this spring. By the end of summer or early fall, we expect to enter Western Europe. I aim to reach 100,000 monthly users by the end of 2026 or early 2027.
Jacobsen: Congratulations on those numbers and projections. Now, where is there room for improvement? In a realistic sense — not just theoretical ideals — what next steps or provisions would make the application more robust? And what does this rapid growth say about the rental and housing market for people today?
Merhi: Yes. So, looking at the current housing situation, it’s becoming increasingly complex — not for everyone, but for a high percentage of individuals — to rent on their own. It’s simply out of reach financially. We’ve seen this in our 24/7 data monitoring and internal analysis. If someone wants to live in an urban area, it’s tough. Moving to rural or suburban areas might mean lower rent, but then comes the commuting issue, especially in places where transit options like buses or trains are limited or nonexistent. Renting solo has become extremely difficult for the next generation. For many, the only real option to move out of their parents’ homes — out of basements or shared family spaces — is to choose co-living or roommate arrangements. The last time I checked, about a month ago, the global market cap for roommate living was around $250 billion. By 2027 or 2028, projections suggest it will reach $300 billion. The main reasons are high living costs, unaffordable rents, and stagnant wages. Over the next 10 to 15 years, co-living and roommate-style housing will become the new norm — the new lifestyle. There’s no way around it. This is not just in Canada or the U.S. I’ve spoken to people worldwide; the answer is the same. There’s a significant shortage of affordable housing. So, the market is moving in our direction — the wind is at our back. For individuals looking for a place through our platform, we’ve made the process so easy that we’ve tested and confirmed you can rent a place, whether inside or outside your city, within 15 to 20 minutes, and do so securely.
Because we have all the necessary security elements in place, your money is safe, and your deposit is secure as well. Improvements come from listening to individuals, and, just as importantly, individuals following our guidelines. For example, if someone wants to list a room, we ask them to upload a clear, high-quality photo. This makes people feel more comfortable, and they are more likely to trust listings that appear verified. We offer verification through a partnership with Stripe. There is a small verification fee, but it gives users a trust advantage within the app. We also offer flexible pricing tiers for listings, so people can choose options that fit their budget and life situation. The ongoing improvement of our platform is a hand-in-hand process: listening to our community, tracking advancements in technology, and implementing those developments to make the experience easier and more secure for everyone.
Jacobsen: For those who have experienced housing instability — as you have — this is a vital human aspect of the conversation. What is the feeling, emotionally, when you do not have that stable grounding in life that comes from having a place you can truly call home?
Merhi: Yes… No, no, no — it isn’t enjoyable. It’s as if you’re completely exposed. There’s no protection, no foundation. When you do not have a home, it creates a deep sense of homelessness-not just physically, but emotionally, too. When someone says, “I don’t have a home,” it is a harsh truth. It cuts into daily life. No matter what job you do — whether in construction, a restaurant, anything — at the end of the day, people want to go home and relax, even just for a few hours. But it’s not a good feeling when you don’t have that. Not at all. How can I describe it? It’s like a tiny leaf caught in a storm — the wind takes you wherever it wants. You’re not grounded. You don’t have a place to say, “I belong here.” Yes, it’s sad. But that’s the reality, and I’m just saying it. That’s how it feels.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Kal.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/28
CEO Neil Batlivala, of Pair Team, talks about the uses AI-driven care coordination to serve vulnerable populations, including the unhoused and chronically ill. Amid Medicaid cuts, their model reduces hospitalizations, builds trust through community-based care, and delivers measurable outcomes. They advocate for policy reforms that integrate social services and expand value-based care. Pair Team delivers tech-enabled, human-first care to underserved communities by partnering with local clinics. Using AI-driven care coordination and compassionate teams, they serve vulnerable populations—including the unhoused and chronically ill. Amid Medicaid cuts, Pair Team is scaling equitable care, ensuring no one is left behind. CEO Neil Batlivala leads the mission.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do current Medicaid cuts threaten vulnerable patients?
Neil Batlivala: The Medicaid cuts currently under consideration in Congress will force difficult conversations in state capitols—about which benefits to scale back and which beneficiaries may lose coverage. But with the rise of generative AI and the expansion of care models like ours, which deliver better outcomes at significantly lower cost, we now have the tools to uphold Medicaid’s promise to its beneficiaries while maintaining fiscal responsibility. I’m hopeful that innovators will rally around the program to ensure it continues delivering high-quality care to those who need it most—at a cost our country can afford.
Jacobsen: How does Pair Team’s AI-driven care coordination model improve health outcomes?
Neil: If someone doesn’t have a place to sleep or can’t afford groceries, seeing a doctor isn’t their first priority. That’s why we meet people where they are—starting with basic needs to build trust.
Our AI-enabled care model identifies high-risk patients early and addresses their needs from the ground up—starting with housing, food, and financial assistance, and working up the ladder to medical and behavioral care.. Our AI platform helps coordinate care across a fragmented landscape of social services and medical care —connecting patients to resources like primary care, food assistance, or substance use treatment. Our tech empowers frontline care teams with real-time insights and streamlined workflows, so they can spend less time on admin and more time with patients.
The result: more trust in the system, fewer hospitalizations, and higher quality of life.
Jacobsen: What are success stories from patients or clinics where your model made a significant impact?
Neil: One story that stands out: a patient experiencing chronic homelessness and severe mental illness was visiting the ER multiple times a week. Our team engaged him through a community partner and built a trusting relationship with a local community health worker by helping to coordinate housing services and eventually get him into permanent supportive housing. Along the way, the patient slowly agreed to coordinate with behavioural health services. Over 6 months, his ER use dropped by 90%—and, more importantly, he reconnected to primary care, stabilized on treatment, and began rebuilding his life.
Throughout our work, we’ve seen similar outcomes: a 52% reduction in ER visits and a 26% drop in hospitalizations among high-need patients engaged in our model.
Jacobsen: How does your technology earn trust among unhoused populations?
Neil: For people experiencing homelessness, life is often unstable—frequent moves, changing phones, and constant uncertainty. Navigating healthcare in that environment is nearly impossible.
Our technology simplifies it into one trusted entry point: a single phone number patients can call or text, 24/7. Behind that simple connection is a care team enabled by a powerful AI platform that coordinates the complexity—appointments, benefits, referrals, medication logistics—so patients don’t have to manage a broken system on their own.
But trust isn’t built by software. It’s built by people. That phone number connects patients to a local community health worker— someone with lived experience—who stays with them throughout their care journey. We also embed within community-based organizations that already have long-standing relationships with our patients—meeting people where they are and adding consistent follow-through that becomes the foundation for trust.
Jacobsen: What policy changes would support Medicaid expansion and equitable care access?
Neil: We need policies that encourage smarter care, not just more care. That starts with expanding value-based payment models that fund outcomes—not just services. Instead of reimbursing for every visit or test, we should pay for what actually improves health: reducing ER visits, managing chronic conditions, and stabilizing people’s lives.
We also need to embrace innovation. AI and telemedicine can radically expand access, especially for patients who are hard to reach through traditional models. These tools can reduce administrative burden, help coordinate across fragmented systems, and ensure care is accessible 24/7—even on a basic phone.
Finally, we must integrate social and medical care. The biggest drivers of poor health—housing insecurity, food access, untreated behavioral health—can’t be solved by the medical system alone. Policies should support funding for non-medical interventions and align incentives across health and human services.
With the right policy shifts, we can build a smarter, more equitable safety net that actually works—for patients, providers, and taxpayers.
Jacobsen: How do you balance AI with the human-first ethos?
Neil: At Pair Team, AI doesn’t replace care—it enables it. We use AI to eliminate paperwork, prioritize patient needs, and coordinate across systems. But the care itself is always human-first: delivered by nurses, social workers, and community health workers who know how to navigate complexity with compassion.
We have strong guardrails. We only deploy AI where it enhances safety, accuracy, and effectiveness—and we always keep human oversight in the loop.
Jacobsen: What metrics do you use to measure ROI and equity in the healthcare system?
Neil: We measure success by how well we engage the hardest-to-reach patients, improve quality of care, and reduce avoidable costs.
On average, we aim to engage patients who haven’t seen a primary care provider in more than three years and 100% of them are connected with a culturally responsive community health worker—matched by language and lived experience—who serves as their consistent point of support.
For quality, we monitor HEDIS metrics and condition-specific outcomes, like A1C and blood pressure control. In high-risk populations, we’ve seen over 50% improvement in A1C management and depression remission.
On the cost side, we measure financial sustainability through shifts in care utilization—demonstrating 52% fewer emergency visits and 26% fewer inpatient admissions, alongside increased use of outpatient care.
At its core, our model is designed for the most marginalized patients and ensures no one falls through the cracks.
Jacobsen: How can federal policymakers better partner with tech-enabled care organizations?
Neil: Federal policymakers can make an enormous impact by creating flexible funding pathways for tech-enabled, community-integrated care models. That includes supporting CMMI pilots focused on innovation for high-cost patients, finding efficiencies across medical and social spending, and incentivizing cross-sector data sharing.
We also need federal champions willing to listen to what’s working at the local level—and invest in infrastructure that can scale it safely and equitably. That includes accelerating responsible adoption of AI and automation in care delivery—particularly in Medicaid, where administrative burden is high and workforce shortages are acute. Policymakers can play a critical role in funding AI innovation that enhances care access, lowers cost, and strengthens trust in underserved communities.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Neil.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/28
Legal Framework & Definitions, Vulnerable Populations
On February 15, 2023, the Special Joint Committee on Medical Assistance in Dying reported on five mandated issues: advance requests, access to MAID for mature minors, access to MAID for those whose sole underlying medical condition is a mental disorder, the state of palliative care, and the protection of people living with disabilities. A considerable amount of misinformation has circulated in the public sphere and media and Dying With Dignity Canada (DWDC) would like to set out some clear facts surrounding MAID, the strict criteria and safeguards that govern its use, and aspects of its proposed expansion.
DWDC, “Myths and Facts: Medical assistance in dying (MAID) in Canada”
Medical assistance in dying (MAID) is a process that allows someone who is found eligible to be able to receive assistance from a medical practitioner in ending their life. The federal Criminal Code of Canada permits this to take place only under very specific circumstances and rules. Anyone requesting this service must meet specific eligibility criteria to receive medical assistance in dying. Any medical practitioner who administers an assisted death to someone must satisfy certain safeguards first.
Only medical practitioners are permitted to conduct assessments and to provide medical assistance in dying. This can be a physician or a nurse practitioner, where provinces and territories allow.
Government of Canada, “Medical assistance in dying: Overview”
The next thing I want to speak about is whether the vulnerable need protection. Again, this has been tried in court with both the Carter case and Truchon case. There is no evidence that vulnerable people are at risk for MAID. [Ed. Minor evidence suggests otherwise, now, but small and select, see AP News.] In fact, if you look at the actual people who are receiving MAID, they are typically white, well educated and well off. You could easily argue that the marginalized communities are disadvantaged because they’re not accessing MAID. In the Truchon case, Justice Baudouin equally found that the disadvantaged are not being taken advantage of and you must do each case at a time.
Dr. Derryck Smith, “Special Joint Committee on Medical Assistance in Dying”
Death is a sensitive topic. It is a different question from the origin of life, the evolution of organisms, the speciation of species, and the point when life begins for human beings. We’re dealing with a live person who can make, ideally, informed decisions about a profound moment in life: its end. For those who know those who have tried to take their life, the sensitivity is multiplied over social relations. Rational foundations for care in finality are important, though. A lot of smart humanists have thought deeply about this topic.
Humanists can be stereotyped–as a whole without exception–supporting medical assistance in dying (MAID) at the expense of palliative care. MAID as a way to reduce healthcare burden (of the old, the sick, the disabled), and dangerous as a “social contagion.” Atheist humanists get the worst of it, because of the major prejudices felt and only recently researched in an academic context.
The lattermost, as a piece of falsehood, emerges with relative frequency. These will be case examples for this article. These cases critiquing the imperfection of MAID have a sensibility akin to creationist critiques of evolution with God of the Gaps arguments. God of the Gaps arguments point to absences or uncertainties in scientific knowledge and then assert divine intervention. It is a form of magical thinking. Critique evolution superficially without proposing a workable alternative; what is the evidence-based alternative with greater efficacy than MAID, where MAID is merely one option? This challenges the trade-off myth. There will be failures in any system. Is this more efficacious than the system not existing? Stuff like that.
Debunking Common Myths
Canada has an organization devoted to these issues, DWDC. I found and took a statement about the spread of misinformation about MAID by DWDC seriously. DWDC noted myths about:
- “advocating to kill infants with disabilities”
- “mature minors will be eligible for medical assistance in dying (MAID) in March 2027”
- “opening the door for suicidal children and teenagers to access an assisted death”
- “eligibility of mature minors is being considered without adequate protections in place and without consultation or consent from parents or guardians”
- “clinicians inappropriately recommending MAID to patients who are not eligible or as an alternative to treatment”
- “vulnerable populations being eligible for MAID because they are suffering from inadequate social supports, including housing”
- “Canada is systematically targeting and ‘killing’ the poor, disabled, and marginalized instead of giving them the proper supports they need to live.”
Social Contagion Concerns
DWDC identified a few more. However, this sets a foundation for knowledge about misinformation’s ubiquity dispensed flippantly by both left and right alike. This has political debate content. The fundamental issue is humane treatment. That shouldn’t be political. Upon doing a first search on social contagion, the source of some misinformation was made by right-wing conservative groups. The idea being, thus: “Physician-assisted suicide is social contagion.”
Social contagion research on suicide seems to rely on fear of copycats: a good fear. The substantive enquiry: Is the evidence proportional to support this assertion, or is the general assertion of social contagion of suicide equivalent to medical contexts, including MAID? Health Canada’s 2022 MAID monitoring report analyzed suicide rates. The 2022 study found no significant increase in suicide rates following MAID legalization in 2016. This differs compared to patterns after high-profile celebrity suicides. The American Psychological Association’s 2014 review (Psychological Bulletin, Vol. 140) links media sensationalism to copycat suicides. In other words, MAID’s regulated approach mitigates the standard effects seen in social contagion risks. Health Canada did the study. The American Psychological Association 2014 found the same for copycat behaviours and media exposure, not due to structured medical processes.
Palliative Care vs. MAID
According to DWDC and the Government of Canada, MAID has multiple safeguards in place, as stipulated at the outset. General suicides exclusive to MAID do not have safeguards in place. Of those two, to the original question, what is the evidence-based alternative with greater efficacy than MAID, where MAID is merely one option? Which is to say, in either case, conditions for palliative care exist equivalently, while MAID is in place versus not.
Exceptional (Super‑Minority) Cases
What about the exclusionary cases? That one does not wish to happen at all. A super-minority of unfortunate cases as exceptions to the principles of MAID. “Canadians with nonterminal conditions sought assisted dying for social reasons” described social conditions under which some MAID cases continued with “unmet social need.” Health Canada’s Fifth Annual Report (2023) report showed less than 2% of the 13,241 assisted deaths by individuals involving psychosocial factors as primary motivators.
We should all strive to help those with unmet social needs, who may fall under this category. These commentaries point to inefficiencies in safeguards, particularly in super-minority specific cases, not the principle. This is the relevance of God of the Gaps arguments with creationism against evolution.
To identify gaps is to identify gaps in MAID-specific cases and, thus, in the general population too, the bodies found in general populations, probably, result in less dignified and compassionate deaths. We should emphasize palliative care and other care more to balance the ratio of provisions for Canadian citizens. The Special Joint Committee’s 2023 report found that 3 in 10 Canadians can access high-quality palliative care. Rural areas and Indigenous communities are underserved. Ontario integration of palliative consultations with MAID assessments reduced requests by 15%. This synergy shows promise; it’s not either-or. This is to say, again, that the principle stands while exclusive super-minority cases require more work. Critics do a service here, up to and including robust, systemic, integrated alternatives.
Social contagion merely applies to the unregulated and unsafe cases of suicide, as in a double-barrel shotgun after a woman in a depressive fit after a breakup. It is different than a considered, regulated, informed choice about suicide with the assistance of a qualified professional in most of the other cases. MAID supports something more akin to the latter than the former. We should have expanded social programs for those who need them, more robust MAID mechanisms, and condemnation of stereotypes about MAID that harm people who need them. Expanding social programs may incorporate guaranteed housing subsidies.
Conscience, Faith, and Coercion
MAID is the main option available for those who need it. If an individual believes in a divine being, and does not want to become enmeshed in humanist or other ideology around their decision or their end of life, they should be permitted to make that choice, according to their conscience and faith. Similarly, those who do not share that notion, in which human beings do not ultimately own their life, a god does, should be permitted their conscience-based free choice too. If someone is being coerced, this would fail the principle and the spirit of the MAID options permitted in Canada.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/28
John W. Robitscher, CEO of the National Association of Chronic Disease Directors (NACDD), discusses the organization’s mission to prevent chronic disease through partnerships, community programs, and innovative tools like the HALT (Health And Lifestyle Training) app. Working closely with the CDC, NACDD helps implement evidence-based strategies nationwide, promoting healthy lifestyles and reducing risk factors such as poor diet and inactivity. Robitscher emphasizes the need for cross-sector collaboration, culturally tailored interventions, and empowering individuals through education and technology. Despite challenges, he believes widespread lifestyle change is possible with commitment, proper tools, and support from both public and private sectors.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are with John W. Robitscher. He serves as the Chief Executive Officer of the National Association of Chronic Disease Directors (NACDD), providing strategic leadership to advance its chronic disease prevention and health promotion mission.
Since joining NACDD in February 2005, he has overseen the acquisition of over $450 million in funding for chronic disease prevention and health programs across all 50 states and U.S. territories. With over thirty years of experience managing nonprofit organizations, Robitscher has expanded NACDD’s reach, supporting a network of over 7,000 public health professionals worldwide.
So, how is NACDD advancing early detection methods for chronic diseases like diabetes, and what emerging technologies are helping support these efforts?
John Robitscher: We’re proud to partner strongly with the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), especially with the National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion. The CDC has a long history of developing preventive medicine guidelines, going back fifty, sixty, even eighty years.
It works because the NIH (National Institutes of Health) does the medical research, and then the CDC implements that research through practical programming. They rely on national partners like NACDD to help bring those evidence-based programs into communities.
We support state and territorial health departments by directly interacting with local communities in every U.S. state and territory. Thus, we act as a bridge, helping push these proven programs to where they are needed.
Some programs include diabetes prevention, heart disease and stroke prevention, hypertension prevention, and more. One exciting innovation we’ve developed is a lifestyle management course called HALT, which stands for Health And Lifestyle Training. We can discuss it later, but it is a cutting-edge digital mobile application tool that helps people manage and treat their chronic conditions.
Jacobsen: What are some good examples of cross-sector partnerships? I was interviewing a medical professional recently, and we discussed how no single discipline can effectively tackle something as complex as cancer. Cross-disciplinary collaboration is key. Is it similar in chronic disease prevention?
Robitscher: Absolutely. What we know is that the significant risk factors for chronic diseases like heart disease, stroke, diabetes, cancer, early-onset arthritis, and even dementia—those risk factors are often the same.
They include physical inactivity, poor nutrition, unhealthy body weight, and tobacco use. So promoting physical activity, healthy eating, and smoking cessation addresses multiple chronic conditions simultaneously.
The CDC runs a program called Active People, Healthy Nation, which aims to get 27 million Americans to exercise at least 150 minutes weekly by 2027. That’s a realistic and vital goal.
We work across sectors—education, transportation, housing, private industry, and government—to support better access to physical activity, promote healthier diets (including fresh fruits and vegetables), and reduce tobacco use. All of these are essential components in reducing the leading causes of death and disability in the U.S.
Jacobsen: What are the biggest challenges in chronic disease prevention over the next year?
Robitscher: The biggest challenge is that people do not want to exercise. They do not want to eat healthily. People want to eat what they want, when they want, and we live in a society that celebrates individual choice. We support that independence, of course, but we must also be realistic.
You have to focus on it. Losing weight is hard in this country and anywhere. There is so much delicious food on the market that is not good for you.
Our Health and Lifestyle Training (HALT) program is so important. It is evidence-based and is currently being implemented in 17 states. I have used it myself for a year. I lost 30 pounds and have managed to keep most of the weight off. But it is a challenge. I have to work out regularly to maintain it.
Still, if we can give people the tools, resources, and education—if they can track their movement and food intake—then we can deliver real impact. It is about improving health outcomes and quality of life.
The goal is not just to live longer. Yes, longevity matters, but so does the quality of those years. People in their 70s and 80s who use wheelchairs or live in nursing homes because of preventable falls. That is not what most people want.
We want people to remain physically and mentally active as they age. Achieving that takes work from all of us. But it is possible, and we are committed to helping people lead longer, healthier, more balanced lives.
Jacobsen: How does NACDD utilize its data to inform programs and measure the impact of chronic disease prevention? And I do not necessarily mean something as coarse as “I weighed X. Hooray.”
Robitscher: The CDC—and we—use particular metrics. In the past, the CDC has developed stringent guidelines and deliverables for grantees to meet. These are not just about weight loss. They include measurable reductions in chronic disease rates, improved access to clean water and healthy food, and better medical services and devices.
There are many indicators: healthy weight, nutrition, physical activity, smoking cessation, and even broader community-level measures. When combined, these contribute to a healthier nation.
That is the foundation on which we begin. We do not rely on just one metric. It is about understanding how these components work together to improve public health outcomes.
So a lot of what we do involves looking at all the data. We review scientific research, of course, but we also consider anecdotal data, like information from Google or Amazon about consumer behaviours, purchasing trends, and search patterns. We also evaluate environmental factors like air quality, food quality, and the location of recent natural disasters and how they impact specific populations.
We use all of that to develop a plan tailored to the community. There’s no point in launching a program that the target population will not follow. Programs must be culturally appropriate and aligned with the specific needs and values of the communities we serve.
We take this very seriously. We co-design programs with input from patients, community leaders, and public health professionals. One of our key roles at NACDD is being a convener—we bring together people from across sectors within a community, facilitate discussion, and collaboratively decide what will work locally.
There is no one-size-fits-all solution. Populations vary, with different cultures, dialects, and lived experiences. For example, our HALT program is available in English and Spanish and is culturally adapted for Native American communities in the Great Plains region.
We constantly strive to develop solutions that genuinely meet the needs of each community. That is not easy. You cannot just release a shiny new app or generic program and expect everyone to engage. You have to meet people where they are. That is our philosophy.
Jacobsen: What are the primary objectives of the Solving Health Care Challenges webinar? This will likely come out after the webinar, but could you repeat the key takeaways?
Robitscher: The webinar’s core message is to reject the idea that one program can fit everyone. That doesn’t work. We must meet people where they are.
We have to address populations at the macro and micro levels. On a population level, yes, we design programs to address broad needs. But ultimately, chronic disease prevention and management come down to individual decisions. A person must choose the life they want to live and commit to making meaningful changes. That is how we help them live longer, better lives.
Jacobsen: Are you engaged with policymakers or legislators through NACDD to support these types of chronic disease prevention and management programs?
Robitscher: We do not lobby, per se.
We meet with policymakers primarily to educate them on the opportunities available within their states. Often, legislators do not know what programs are working well in their jurisdiction, or even what initiatives are currently active.
At NACDD, we maintain a database called State Success Stories, where we showcase programs nationwide that effectively prevent chronic diseases and promote population health. Much of our work is leveraged. The federal government often provides seed funding, but private industry and businesses frequently match or exceed that investment.
One great example is our Walkability Action Institute. I just returned from Anchorage, Alaska, where we conducted a walk audit with the community to assess and improve walkability. These efforts aim to make communities more livable, ensure access to healthy food, and create safe environments for walking and biking.
That program is a strong public-private collaboration. For every federal dollar invested in the walkability program, the private sector contributes approximately $177. Through this initiative, we have brought millions of dollars to local communities. Private businesses have built walking paths, biking trails, and community fitness infrastructure. They have brought people together around the goal of healthier living.
That is what NACDD does—we serve as a conduit, bringing diverse stakeholders together.
Jacobsen: How do you transform engagement into chronic disease management? You can deliver excellent resources, run webinars, build programs, and raise $450 million—but at scale, the population-level impact depends on people becoming invested enough to take action. How do you get them actually to make that change?
Robitscher: I am glad you asked that. It is a great question, and it ties directly into our HALT application. This is a digital tool that can be found on every American’s smartphone.
We are currently proposing it to the MAHA Group because lifestyle management is something this administration is ready to prioritize. Secretary Kennedy and President Trump—regardless of party lines—are among the first national leaders in recent memory to talk openly about chronic disease prevention. We are excited to support them.
We would love to see HALT in the hands of every American. With this app, people can track their food intake, physical activity, and weight and even sync up with a blood pressure monitor. These are critical indicators of a healthy lifestyle.
We have to control our health. Again, the only way to do that is hard work. But if we give people the right tools, we can help them succeed.
It is physical. It is about being physically active daily and watching and tracking what you eat. But all of that depends on education.
We expect people to make significant lifestyle changes, but often, we do not explain why. In reality, physicians only spend about five to seven minutes with each patient. That is not enough time for meaningful behaviour change education.
So, we need a tool that empowers the person, not just the patient. You may not be a patient yet, but you can still take action to improve your life.
We believe lifestyle change management is critical—it may be the most vital initiative this country has ever embarked on. Can we help people manage their lifestyles effectively enough to live longer, happier, more fulfilling lives?
We believe we can. But it will take hard work.
People think they can download an app and just have it on their phone, which will make them healthier. It will not. The app must be paired with education, and you must commit. You have to put in the effort.
But the good news is—it is doable. I am a living example of that. I lost 30 pounds using the HALT app. I believe we can change the lives of millions of Americans and make them much better than they are today.
Jacobsen: Excellent. John, thank you for your time and expertise. It was nice to meet you.
Robitscher: Yes. You had good questions. I enjoyed it too.
Jacobsen: Thank you again. Take care.
Robitscher: You too. Bye-bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/27
Charles Antwi, a representative of the Accra Atheists and assistant to the President of Accra Atheists, Roslyn Mould, reflects on the challenges and progress of secular humanism in Ghana. Speaking with interviewer Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Antwi explores the tensions between traditional beliefs, colonial religious legacies, and the efforts to establish a transparent and inclusive humanist identity. He highlights the confusion between atheism and humanism, the growth of secular communities, and the role of Humanists International in fostering solidarity. Antwi emphasizes that humanism is an ethical framework, not merely a rejection of disbelief, and advocates for greater clarity and unity.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How was the overall experience, especially being surrounded by people from diverse cultures and backgrounds around the world?
Charles Antwi: It was an incredible experience. Coming together with fellow humanists, agnostics, and atheists gave me a profound sense of warmth and solidarity. It truly felt like a welcoming embrace. I appreciated the opportunity to meet like-minded individuals, and I am sincerely grateful to Humanists International for making this possible.
Jacobsen: What is your main takeaway when you look at the international humanist community? How do you envision the Humanist Association of Ghana, the Accra Atheists, and other Ghanaian groups fitting into the larger global culture?
Antwi: In Ghana, the term humanist is often misunderstood. Many equate it with simply being humanitarian and assume you cannot be humanitarian without a belief in God. That misconception remains a challenge. What I appreciate about Humanists International is its consistent defence of human rights and fostering of a global community. Their annual meetings and mutual support foster a strong sense of solidarity. I truly value that.
Jacobsen: When you think of Ghanaian humanism, how do you define it within the broader humanist movement? For example, some groups adopt documents like the 2002 or 2022 Amsterdam Declaration. How do you see a uniquely Ghanaian expression of humanism developing?
Antwi: In Ghana, many people claim to have left the church or religion, but they still hold onto certain spiritual beliefs. As a result, humanist groups sometimes attract individuals who identify as freethinkers but are not necessarily atheists or agnostics. This presents a challenge when attempting to establish a core membership that aligns with secular humanist principles. We are still working on identifying and organizing around a more precise, shared definition of humanism.
Jacobsen: Is there confusion in Ghana between secular humanism and humanism with a religious perspective? Is that a significant issue? What do you think is causing that confusion?
Antwi: Part of the issue is that, in trying to be inclusive, we sometimes blur the lines too much. When we say, “Let us welcome everyone,” including religious individuals involved in humanitarian projects, some people start identifying as secular religious humanists. They believe that doing good alone qualifies them to be part of the movement, regardless of their religious beliefs. That mingling of secular and religious perspectives creates confusion. It is a challenge, but one that we can overcome with clarity and continued dialogue.
Jacobsen: When I think of secular humanists, I often associate them with the skeptic and scientific skeptic communities—figures like James Randi, Penn and Teller, Leo Igwe, and others—who focus on making things concrete, scientifically informed, and clearing away pseudoscience and superstition. Over the years, I have consistently heard from African humanists that, while the details vary by country, three major issues tend to emerge historically. First, traditional superstitions were passed down through indigenous cultures. Second, the effects of Arab Muslim colonization. And third, European Christian colonization. The challenge is that African contexts often involve all three simultaneously. That combination is unique and arguably the most challenging environment in which to advance secular humanism.
For example, in Canada, we are mainly dealing with Christian fundamentalists, and they have significantly declined. They now make up less than half the population, so the problem is less pressing. In the U.S., Christian fundamentalists still form a majority, so the issue remains larger there. However, in Ghana and many parts of Africa, you are contending with all three forces—traditional, Muslim, and Christian—at once.
Antwi: Yes, all three at once. That is true.
Jacobsen: In some places, like New Zealand, the challenge is different but still very difficult. For instance, Erohiku Tehuri wrote a book about secular humanism and atheism from a Māori perspective over a decade ago. It was not very long, and since then, no one else has published anything significant from that cultural lens. He remains the only prominent voice. In such contexts, there is no real audience yet. By contrast, in Ghana and Nigeria, despite the triple challenge, there is at least some traction and progress.
Antwi: Yes, and something else we should consider is this: not every atheist can be called a humanist. That is an important distinction. Many people may leave religion, identify as atheists or agnostics, but still not embody the values of humanism. The question is—are they tolerant? Are they inclusive? Do they treat people ethically? Temperament matters. Humanism is more than disbelief; it is about how you live and relate to others. Some people identify as atheists, but that does not automatically make them humanists. Being a humanist requires a different level of ethical commitment and worldview.
Jacobsen: In North America, I have often heard it expressed this way: atheism or agnosticism is one’s stance on the existence of gods; humanism is the framework for how one chooses to reason and act in the world. It provides an ethical lens to what is otherwise a neutral philosophical position—believing or not believing in gods.
Antwi: To our credit, we are doing our best to grow and organize. We are currently focusing on building our membership. On Facebook, we have about 1,400 followers. That is not bad. Our Instagram account is newer. We started with only about 12 followers, but after boosting a few posts, we have grown to nearly 80 followers in just a month. People are reaching out—sending direct messages, asking who we are and what we do.
When that happens, we usually have a brief interview. We ask questions like, “Are you religious?” or “How did you leave religion?” It helps us understand where people are coming from. We have been answering numerous inquiries on Facebook and gradually expanding our reach. So for now, our membership is growing.
Jacobsen: Do you find that, when you interview people—whether publicly or privately—some of them have never been asked those kinds of questions before?
Antwi: Yes. One question that makes people stop and think is: “Are you religious?” It is a binary—yes or no. Moreover, often, someone will answer “yes,” but then explain they have not been to church for two months, and now they think they are an atheist. That highlights the confusion. However, we are doing our best to provide clarity and support.
Jacobsen: In Canada, I used to write for a publication called Canadian Atheist. The editor-in-chief has since disappeared, and the website is now offline. I archived everything I wrote—over a few years, I published around 1,300 articles and interviews.
Antwi: Wow, wow.
Jacobsen: So there is a rich repository of material. In the North American context, specific themes emerge from these conversations. As a journalist, I work in narratives, questions, and summaries. One recurring observation—especially during the New Atheist phase—is that when North Americans say they are atheists, they are typically referring to disbelief in the God of the Bible. They might say, “I do not believe in the God of the Old Testament,” or “I do not believe in Jesus.” Even when it is not explicitly stated, it is implied in their tone or reasoning.
So, their model of atheism is often framed as a rejection of the culturally dominant god—usually the Christian God. Of course, that shifts when speaking to ex-Muslims, former Jews, or people from other religious backgrounds. However, within Ghana, when someone says they are an atheist, how are they defining that term? Is it philosophical—a rejection of all gods—or more local, based on the deity they grew up with?
Antwi: It usually starts with rejecting the god they were raised with, whether that is the Christian or Muslim concept of God. For example, someone raised in a Christian home may begin questioning the contradictions in the Bible and conclude, “I do not believe in the God of the Bible.” However, when you ask about other concepts—like the God of Islam or Buddhism—they may not have considered those in depth.
What I often see is that once they reject the God of Christianity, many turn toward African spirituality. They claim to be returning to their roots. They view Christianity as something brought to Africa through European colonization. Moreover, yes, they will say, “They brought Jesus to Africa,” as if he were physically delivered here.
Jacobsen: I love that phrase—”They brought Jesus to Africa.” It sounds like he arrived on a boat, personally.
Antwi: Yes, exactly.
Jacobsen: Once people reject Jesus, they claim to be returning to their origins. However, how do they determine what those roots are?
Antwi: That is the thing. Many claim to return to their African roots, but it is not always clear what they mean or how much they truly know about those traditions.
Jacobsen: Is this part of a larger pan-Africanist movement that has a religious or spiritual dimension? In the United States, for example, we have seen African American communities engage in multiple movements—atheist, secular humanist, Africans for Secular Humanism, and othersHowever, ut parallel to that, the has’s also been a movement of reclaiming identity by “returning to the roots,” spiritually and culturally, reconnecting with Africa. Is that happening in Ghana too? Not physically returning to Africa, but rather returning to the historical roots of their religions.
Antwi: Yes, and it would be more meaningful if people focused on reconnecting with their historical roots, culturally and historically. However, if they attempt to return to their so-called religious roots, there is little to be found. That is how I see it. You might find a sense of unity or connection by exploring your heritage, but trying to revive ancient religious practices does not offer much in terms of clarity or progress. That is my concern.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts?
Antwi: I would like to express my sincere appreciation to Humanists International for awarding me a grant and facilitating my visa so that I could attend this conference. I am genuinely grateful. I plan to continue serving in various capacities in the years to come.
I also want to thank Roslyn Mould, our president, for allowing me to work closely with her. I now serve as her assistant, and I appreciate the trust she has placed in me and the responsibilities she has entrusted to me within the organization. Looking ahead, I am hopeful that there will be even more work to do, both with Accra Atheists and with Humanists International.
I forgot to make mention of our Billboard, the first Atheists Billboard in Africa. We posted the Billboard on Facebook and Instagram and added the link that contains an interview on YouTube by the FFRF(Freedom From Religion Foundation) featuring our group President Roslyn Mould”.
Jacobsen: Charles, thank you.
Antwi: Thank you. I appreciate it.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/26
Randall Dottin, Chair of the Film Arts Department at NYFA, discusses the evolving landscape of storytelling in film and gaming. He emphasizes the impact of the gaming industry, the importance of sound design, and AI’s role in filmmaking. He highlights the need for aspiring creators to master storytelling, develop collaboration skills, and embrace new technologies. Dottin stresses the significance of mentorship, encouraging students to believe in themselves and build strong industry relationships. He reinforces that storytelling remains constant despite shifting audience expectations and industry trends. The conversation ends with an appreciation for his insights.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Randall Dottin. He is an award-winning filmmaker and educator, currently serving as the Chair of the Film Arts Department at NYFA in New York City. He holds a BA from Dartmouth College and an MFA from Columbia University’s Graduate Film Division. His thesis film, A-Alike, won a gold medal at the 2004 Student Academy Awards. He has directed projects such as Fevah and the documentary series The House I Never Knew, which was supported by the Sundance Institute. He has also mentored aspiring filmmakers and his students have achieved success in film and television across the United States and internationally.
Thank you for joining me today—I appreciate it. Now, my first question: How does the revenue disparity between the gaming industry and the box office reflect changing audience consumption habits? For context, the gaming industry generates approximately $400 to $500 billion annually, while the global box office brings in around $25 to $30 billion. How does the revenue disparity between the gaming industry and the box office reflect changing audience consumption habits?
Randall Dottin: Yes, first, people have always been—and always will be—wired for storytelling. The gaming industry has caught up by creating incredibly immersive experiences for those who choose to game. It offers an experience similar to being immersed in cinema. However, gaming provides even more interactivity because players make decisions in real-time. People want the experience of being inside a story while having control over it.
That’s why the gaming industry has become increasingly popular, attracting more participants. Additionally, we have to consider the impact of the pandemic. Many people were stuck inside, looking for ways to engage with stories and entertainment.
And, of course, the streaming boom has affected watching and seeing films in theatres. At the height of the pandemic, there were over 500 shows worldwide airing at any given time. Several factors have contributed to this disparity. However, people worldwide still love to sit back in a movie theatre and experience a story with great characters, a meaningful message, and surprises.
Even though storytelling is universal, it speaks to each person differently. Despite the disparity, the future may shift—one year, gaming might be more dominant, and another year, movies may regain their edge. Regardless, people love immersive story experiences. More choice is good because it inspires and motivates those who create, produce, and distribute movies to craft even better experiences for audiences.
So that’s what I would say. As a filmmaker, I’m not afraid of it—I welcome it because it’s all about storytelling.
Jacobsen: Different industries have different types and degrees of penetrance for newcomers and aspiring creators. What are your recommendations for breaking into each industry?
Dottin: The bottom line is that you have to understand storytelling. You should know how it works. I often tell my students that if they know how to write a story, how to determine whether a story works or doesn’t, and how to provide constructive feedback on a story that hasn’t yet reached its potential, then they will always be able to find work in the industry. That has been my experience, and I’ve also seen it hold true for others.
Know storytelling inside and out. Understand how audiences respond. Get a strong grasp on how you can affect viewers by using characters to create emotion. If you’re a gamer, immerse yourself in various games—study the great ones, analyze how they function, and understand how they were created. Learning how games are structured is important, whether video games or board games. Knowing the mechanics of gaming, in addition to the storytelling aspect, is crucial.
For filmmakers, just like gamers, it’s essential to understand the history of your medium. You need to watch a ton of movies and understand how they work, how they draw audiences in, how they convey their themes, and how to create compelling characters with contradictions that make them more dynamic. If you master these skills—whether you’re in gaming or filmmaking—you will be able to break into the industry.
Jacobsen: Everyone experiences imposter syndrome at some point. Newcomers, in particular, probably feel it more than most. What are some perceived barriers to entry that people in these industries tend to exaggerate in their minds?
Dottin: Yes, there’s always the barrier in the story we tell ourselves—the thoughts that say, “I’m not smart enough,” “I don’t have enough money,” or “I don’t have enough time.” One thing I always tell filmmakers, based on my own experience, is that there’s never enough money and never enough time. Whether you’re a filmmaker making a movie on your phone or Steven Spielberg, there’s never enough money or time.
Spielberg made Lincoln on a budget of $50 million. For Spielberg, that’s low. Meanwhile, Marvel movies today average around $200 million per film. When Spielberg was making Lincoln, he purposely set limitations for himself. He knew that, in terms of box office potential, there was a certain range the film could achieve. If it outperformed expectations and became a blockbuster, great—but he wanted to ensure that he was making a movie sizable enough to tell the story he wanted while remaining fiscally responsible. So, again, there’s never enough money, never enough time.
Another barrier we create is comparison. In this era of social media, people often compare themselves to others who are much further along in their journey. That’s not healthy. Everyone has their own experience as they make films and build their craft. You must focus on becoming a better version of yourself daily—that’s what truly matters. Some people convince themselves that they’re not ready and need a specific time or type of preparation before moving forward.
And look, preparation is important. The more you prepare and consistently put in the work, the more your competence will grow. That’s how you get ready to face the challenges ahead. In boxing, the hardest lesson is the punch you don’t see coming. You’ll take that punch—I’m saying you’ll fail at some point. But after that failure, after making a film or doing an exercise that doesn’t work, you have to get back up and keep going.
That’s the nature of filmmaking. One of my favourite professors in film school used to say that everyone has about 50 to 100 bad films in them. To become a good filmmaker, you must get those bad films out of your system. Suppose you commit to putting in the time and practicing with discipline. In that case, you will emerge on the other side with a mastery that allows you to express yourself fully. That’s how you make the movie of your dreams—because that great film is already inside you, along with those 50 to 100 bad ones. So, keep going. That great movie is coming. But you have to give yourself time, patience, and grace.
Jacobsen: I’m reminded of the unexpected hits—like that Richard Pryor joke about his time with Muhammad Ali, where all you see is the punch coming back. So that’s phenomenal. For those in film, watching a movie is different now than it was 30 years ago. Watching a film in a theatre today isn’t the same experience—it’s changed with IMAX, 3D, and other options. Similarly, video games have evolved into immersive environments with new technological advancements. What skills would you recommend people develop that were not necessary before but could now be valuable in adapting to current and future technologies in gaming and film?
Dottin: Yes, if you’re a storyteller or a gamer, you’re also a magician. Magicians, when they practice their craft, are always surprising their audience. They lead you toward an ending or punchline you don’t see coming. They make you look left when the trick that will blow your mind comes from the right.
For that reason, both filmmakers and video game designers should study magic. Magic is not traditionally taught in film schools, but every magic trick is a story. Every trick has a beginning, middle, and end. Every trick leads you in one direction before surprising you, leaving you wondering how it happened.
One of the things that made Orson Welles one of the greatest filmmakers of all time was that he was a magician. If you watch the first 10 minutes of F for Fake, you’ll see how magic and film combine to create an incredible experience. That kind of storytelling approach is invaluable for both filmmakers and game designers.
Understanding sound is also crucial. Sound design is one of the most underappreciated yet powerful tools in storytelling. Traditionally, film schools haven’t placed much emphasis on sound, but that’s starting to change. Schools like the New York Film Academy now offer more sound design courses. For a long time, film schools primarily focused on developing writers, directors, producers, and cinematographers, but sound is just as critical.
When Ben Burtt, who won Oscars for his sound design work on Star Wars, started, he essentially created the role of “sound designer” as we know it today. His work helped define Star Wars and shaped how audiences experienced the film. George Lucas has said that making a movie is 60 to 70 percent sound. More than ever, filmmakers must understand how sound enhances storytelling—it helps create the film’s reality and unique cinematic language.
The same applies to gaming, especially with the rise of virtual reality. In VR gaming, sound plays an enormous role in storytelling. Like in film, sound design helps create immersive experiences, adds emotional depth, and guides the player’s perception of the game world. It’s another way to introduce the unexpected—the magic.
So, I would tell both filmmakers and game designers to focus on studying magic and sound design. These two skills weren’t emphasized as much 20, 30, or 50 years ago. Still, they are becoming increasingly essential in today’s industry.
Jacobsen: What about the use of AI in virtual production? How do you see the development of those skills or the role of working with AI algorithms to enhance the talent and creativity already present?
Dottin: Yes, AI can be incredibly helpful, especially when shooting on a volume stage—the kind used for many scenes in The Mandalorian. If you’ve seen The Batman, the scenes set inside the building where the Bat-Signal is located—those with the sunset behind them or the Gotham skyline in the background—were all shot on a volume stage.
It’s an efficient tool for filmmakers because it removes many constraints of shooting on location. You don’t have to worry about daylight conditions or capturing scenes at specific times to get the right look. Volume stages are great, though they can be somewhat restrictive regarding the variety of shots you can achieve. Still, they help filmmakers work more efficiently.
I see AI as a tool. Many people view AI as something negative, even a threat, at least at this point. But AI is just another tool—Spellcheck is AI. Grammarly is AI. Some people use AI to brainstorm, generate different ways to explain ideas or assist with writing. I don’t use AI when writing fiction because I prefer to rely on my imagination. But if someone feels they need AI for that, I say go for it.
AI-generated images can also be useful, especially at the beginning of the previsualization (previs) process. However, as you go deeper into concept art and design, bringing in a human artist is important. An artist can provide nuance, depth, and complexity—things AI can’t quite deliver at this stage.
So, in my opinion, AI is a great tool. As long as it is used responsibly, it can be beneficial—whether in gaming, filmmaking, or other creative fields.
Jacobsen: As a mentor and educator, how have your mentorship and teaching styles evolved from the education you received back in the day?
Dottin: It hasn’t changed much. That’s a good question. The core of it remains the same. What I mean by that is that the principles of storytelling have been around for thousands of years. Those core principles are constant. How I teach directing or screenwriting—its foundation—has not changed. Every story is still about someone who desperately wants something but struggles to get it. The question remains: How do we create a story that evokes emotion?
How do we create characters that generate empathy and move an audience? How do we craft a story with a strong theme that resonates with viewers? These fundamental aspects of storytelling haven’t changed.
What has changed, however, is the audience. Today’s audiences are smarter and more media-savvy. They have less patience for stories that don’t work. They crave narratives that surprise them and evoke emotions they didn’t expect.
Teaching filmmaking is about creating experiences for audiences who already know the clichés, tropes, and the hero’s journey. Because audiences are familiar with these storytelling paradigms, students must also understand them. Whether we realize it or not, we are all wired for a story—we inherently recognize when something works and doesn’t.
Suppose we train ourselves in storytelling and its various paradigms and understand the processes and tools that help shape a compelling narrative. In that case, we can create stories that truly resonate with audiences. That’s what I emphasize in my teaching. I ensure that my students grasp these tropes, paradigms, and techniques to craft stories that engage rather than turn off a discerning audience.
Mentorship, for me, has also remained largely the same. Students don’t necessarily care about how much you know—they care about how much you care. That’s the bottom line. People want to feel you genuinely care about their progress, education, and growth. I believe that relationships come before tasks.
Building strong relationships allows you to collaborate effectively and produce great work—great films and stories. I always tell my students that 95% of my jobs in this industry, including my teaching position at the New York Film Academy, have come from my classmates. Almost every job I’ve had came through those connections.
So when I mentor students, I teach them about craft, but I also stress the human element. Being a great collaborator is just as important as mastering the technical side. That means giving insightful feedback on someone else’s script. That means showing up for a classmate’s shoot and working just as hard as a grip, a gaffer, or a camera assistant as you would if you were the director.
There’s an old saying that you get out of an education what you put into it. I believe that’s true, but I also believe that your peers—your cohort—will get what you put in from it. That sense of shared effort is just as important, if not more.
Mentorship is about instilling a strong belief in students—that they can do it. If they truly believe they can, then they can accomplish anything. At the same time, I stress the importance of collaboration because filmmaking is incredibly difficult to do alone.
Jacobsen: Randall, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it.
Dottin: No, thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/26
Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya, MD, PhD, is a dermatologist with 20 years of skincare, cosmetic procedures, and dermatological research expertise. She specializes in evidence-based treatments, including sunscreen, retinol, and antioxidants, while addressing conditions like acne, rosacea, and aging skin. Passionate about patient education, she emphasizes the importance of lifestyle, diet, and personalized care. Dr. Kazlouskaya is also experienced in advanced therapies like exosomes, microneedling, and lasers, making her a trusted authority in modern dermatology. She emphasizes the importance of addressing hair loss early with FDA-approved medications like finasteride and minoxidil. While dietary improvements, such as increased protein and iron intake, support overall hair health, they cannot reverse genetic or inflammatory conditions. Natural remedies like rosemary oil and caffeine provide minimal benefits but do not replace proven treatments. Hair transplants are a last resort, requiring careful planning. Dr. Kazlouskaya also highlights challenges for women experiencing menopause-related hair loss and stresses a holistic approach to hair care and treatment.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here again with Dr. Victoryia Kazlouskaya. We’ll be discussing hair. What are the principles of good hair health? I don’t necessarily mean diet yet; I’m referring to indicators. When you examine a person’s hair, what distinguishes healthy hair from unhealthy hair?
Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya: Every person has a genetic predisposition to how much hair they will have and what is considered normal. For example, if a person’s entire family has thin hair, that is likely their normal. Conversely, if someone’s baseline is thick, healthy hair, that is their normal.
Everyone is very different. Normally, when you examine the scalp under a microscope, each hair follicle contains a few growing out of it, and these hairs tend to have the same diameter.
There are also visual characteristics to consider. We assess whether the hair is healthy by its shine and smoothness and whether it appears orderly or unruly. However, many factors come into play—cultural differences, genetic differences, and styling preferences. What is normal for one person may not be normal for another.
Jacobsen: How does nature showcase its variety when looking at hair types? Some people have tightly curled hair, others have loose waves, and some have straight, almost fine hair.
Kazlouskaya: There is truly an incredible variety in both texture and colour, primarily due to genetic differences. Here in New York, we see people of all races and ethnicities.
For example, individuals of African descent often have curly or coiled hair because their follicles are oval or slightly curved. This may have evolved as a protective mechanism against intense sun exposure. Still, it is a characteristic we admire and celebrate.
Asians, on the other hand, almost exclusively have straight, thick hair. Among Caucasians, there is a wide range—from very straight to curly hair. The variety of colours depends on the amount and type of pigment in the hair follicle, which is determined by genetics.
Jacobsen: When it comes to hair colour, we see rare shades like red. Some jokes about redheads going extinct are humorous ideas people bring up in conversations. Why did nature produce the colours we see, such as blonde, brunette, red, and black? Why don’t we see other hair colours?
Kazlouskaya: It’s difficult to say with certainty. Classical genetic studies suggest that pigmentation evolved as a protective feature. For instance, individuals of African descent almost exclusively have dark hair and dark skin, which may have been advantageous in tropical climates with intense sunlight. That explanation aligns with Darwinian theory, but we can’t definitively say it’s the full story.
Determining the exact reasons is challenging. In nature, we see animals with a wide variety of colours, so genetic diversity in pigmentation is something Earth’s organisms share. This diversity gives us various features to observe, admire, and enjoy.
Jacobsen: Given that variety, people have different cultural and aesthetic preferences. How do you find people using techniques and products on their hair to style it in certain ways? Which techniques do not impact the hair’s health, and which are potentially harmful to hair health?
Kazlouskaya: People style their hair in many different ways, and these are often influenced by their cultures and beliefs. For example, Afro-American individuals tend to have unique styling techniques, such as braiding, wearing braids, or straightening.
It’s a bit of a joke that people are never happy with what they naturally have—people with curly hair often straighten it, while people with straight hair try to curl it. In the Afro-American population, we frequently see conditions associated with these styling techniques, such as braiding, dreadlocks, and straightening.
Curly hair follicles are generally more susceptible to damage. When traumatized repeatedly with tight styles, this can lead to a condition called traction alopecia or traction hair loss. Initially, this condition is reversible, but if the pulling and tight styles continue, hair loss may become permanent. Of course, this is devastating for anyone, especially for women.
Styles like dreadlocks and braiding are also popular among Afro-American men, and we often see particular hair conditions associated with these practices in this group. Similarly, in Caucasian and Asian populations, there’s significant damage when individuals overuse curling, colouring or drastically change their hair colour.
For example, Asian individuals trying to achieve blonde or other bright colours common among European or Caucasian populations often experience hair shaft damage, dryness, and breakage. These are common issues.
Jacobsen: There’s one very dramatic type of hair technique. It’s mostly done in salons, but I can’t recall the exact name. It involves using very harsh chemicals and is often a subset of Afro-American culture used to make the hair very straight.
Kazlouskaya: Yes, straightening can be achieved using various techniques and chemicals. When done continuously, these are undoubtedly harmful. Some emerging data suggest that these chemicals may not only damage hair but also have potential systemic consequences, including a possible link to cancers and other health issues.
This is not yet fully proven, but ongoing research is trying to determine whether these techniques are more harmful than just damaging hair. Despite these risks, many patients hesitate to return to their natural hairstyles.
I think natural Afro-American hair is stunning. I often encourage my patients to embrace their natural style. I grew up loving the big, round hairstyles of the disco divas in the 1980s, and I find those look beautiful. However, in Afro-American culture today, wearing natural hair isn’t as common as it could be, which I find unfortunate.
Jacobsen: Regardless of cultural background or ethnic heritage, what are the general principles for maintaining healthy hair?
Kazlouskaya: Hair care routines differ significantly. For example, while Asians and Caucasians typically wash their hair a few times a week, Afro-Americans often wash their hair once a week or even less frequently—sometimes once every two weeks or longer.
This is because Afro-American hair is more difficult to manage due to its tight curls, and the hair follicles are more susceptible to damage. Washing too frequently can harm them. Afro-American hair also requires much moisturizing, and oils are very popular and helpful. Oil treatments protect hair shafts by preventing water damage.
In contrast, oils may not be as beneficial for Asians or Caucasians, as they can make hair greasy and heavy and worsen conditions like dandruff or seborrheic dermatitis. So, there are many differences in how people care for their hair depending on their hair type.
Jacobsen: What about diet? What should people take into account regarding their hair health? In a prior interview, you mentioned having a balanced diet and the importance of protein.
Kazlouskaya: In general, protein is crucial for both skin and hair health. Hair is made of keratin, which is a protein. You cannot directly improve your existing hair shafts—essentially non-living structures. However, you can make them look better by trimming the edges or using treatments to soften them. Hair grows from the scalp, so nourishing your body will lead to healthier hair growth.
For example, if you are experiencing hair loss, focusing only on the strands you already have will not prevent further hair loss. You need to work from within by nourishing the scalp and hair follicles.
A protein-rich diet is essential, especially for individuals over 40, particularly women in premenopause or menopause. Adequate protein intake is one of the first things I discuss with patients experiencing hair loss. I often recommend using free apps to track protein and macronutrient intake, focusing on protein and healthy fats.
Healthy fats—like omega-3 fatty acids, avocados, and olive oil—are also vital. Determining whether a patient is vegan or vegetarian is equally important, as these diets can lead to lower protein intake. I’ve had patients who, despite receiving the best treatments, struggled with hair regrowth until their diets were adjusted. Once their nutrition improved, the treatments became more effective, and their hair health quickly reflected these changes.
Ensure sufficient iron intake for women, as iron deficiency and anemia are common issues. Women lose iron through menstruation and childbirth and often eat less meat. Iron deficiency is one of the first conditions we check for in female patients with hair loss.
While addressing iron deficiency with diet is important, iron from supplements is not always well-absorbed. Therefore, improving dietary sources of iron can be more effective.
Vitamins also play a significant role in hair health. For example, data suggests that vitamin D deficiency can worsen hair loss. There are many vitamin D receptors in the hair follicles, so even though the relationship may not be entirely direct, we notice that patients with very low vitamin D levels often struggle more with improving their hair health.
Supplementation can help, but vitamin D is also present in many foods, such as meat and eggs. Maintaining a diverse diet that includes fresh foods, vegetables, antioxidants, and vitamins is important for overall hair health.
Jacobsen: What rare hair conditions might require medication or treatments where a good diet or a youthful lifestyle alone may not be sufficient?
Kazlouskaya: Hair diseases encompass a very broad topic. I could probably name at least 30 different conditions quickly, and not all hair loss is the same.
There are different types of alopecia, and some are caused by genetic conditions affecting the hair shaft. For example, the hair shaft might have abnormalities like twisting, bubbles inside, or irregularities. There are at least 10 to 15 classifications of how hair shafts can be abnormal, and many of these conditions are due to genetic issues.
In addition to hair shaft abnormalities, genetic conditions that affect the overall structure and health of the hair are also highly complex. Dermatologists undergo years of residency to learn about hair diseases. Still, not all dermatologists specialize in treating hair-related issues because it requires focused expertise. It’s a specialized topic within dermatology.
While diet is beneficial for overall health and can support the ideal genetic potential of your hair, it is not enough to overcome genetic diseases or certain inflammatory conditions. For example, male pattern baldness, or androgenetic alopecia, is primarily driven by the DHT (dihydrotestosterone) mechanism. Although diet plays a minor role, it cannot fully address the problem.
Inflammatory conditions and other types of hair loss cannot be resolved solely through diet. Even for common male baldness, while diet can contribute to overall hair health, it does not significantly impact the primary causes of hair thinning in men.
Jacobsen: What should men do to mitigate early-onset balding, particularly in the crown or the front of the head?
Kazlouskaya: Men experiencing early-onset balding should start treatment as early as possible. If you have already noticed hair thinning, it likely means the process has been ongoing for several years. The best action is to consult a professional to confirm the diagnosis.
Using a dermatoscope or trichoscopy, we examine the hair follicles and scalp with a magnifying device, either handheld or digital. If we observe miniaturization—the hair shafts are thinning—that’s often an early sign of androgenetic hair loss. By the time it becomes visible in the mirror, approximately 20% of the hair may already be affected.
The earlier you begin treatment, the better. For men, two FDA-approved medications work well: finasteride and minoxidil. Starting these medications as soon as possible slows the progression of hair loss. While these treatments are essential, other factors, such as diet, lifestyle, and overall health, also play an important role.
We underestimated the significance of these factors in the past. Still, during the COVID-19 pandemic, we noticed that individuals with worse COVID outcomes—often linked to comorbidities such as diabetes, obesity, and heart conditions—also experienced more severe alopecia and pattern hair loss.
Recent studies suggest potential connections between hair loss, cholesterol levels, lipid metabolism, and general health. For instance, I’ve seen patients with stable hair loss for years suddenly experience worsening after developing metabolic issues like high cholesterol. Everything in the body is interconnected, so addressing these systemic issues is critical.
Nevertheless, science strongly supports the use of FDA-approved medications as a first-line treatment. Additionally, for those considering hair transplants, a good hair surgeon will not perform a transplant without the patient also using medication. Doing so is considered bad practice.
Jacobsen: What about women who are perimenopausal, menopausal, or postmenopausal? What are your recommendations for them?
Kazlouskaya: Women face greater challenges in treating hair loss because we don’t have specific medications that target female hair loss as effectively as treatments for men. Minoxidil is the first-line treatment, but targeting other factors is harder.
During menopause, we can use medications like finasteride and dutasteride, which are typically used in men, because postmenopausal women are no longer able to get pregnant. However, these treatments are not as effective in women as in men.
In addition to diet and a healthy lifestyle, women can benefit from regenerative treatments such as platelet-rich plasma (PRP) injections, laser therapy, growth factor treatments, and exosome therapy. While these treatments are still considered investigational and are often cosmetic, they hold promise. They are becoming more common in managing hair loss in women.
Jacobsen: What about solutions that people believe work because they’ve been sold by influencers, podcast hosts, or charlatans as the newest miracle pill or technique—things that don’t work?
Kazlouskaya: Hair loss is on the rise right now. If you analyze Google search trends, hair loss is one of the most commonly searched topics. Over the past year, my clinic has almost entirely shifted toward treating hair loss due to overwhelming demand.
Unfortunately, I constantly have to combat misinformation. Marketers use aggressive tactics to create fear around traditional medications while promoting their products, often for financial gain.
One of the most popular trends is oils, particularly rosemary oil. There is a small degree of truth behind this trend because a very limited study suggested that rosemary oil could be as effective as 2% minoxidil for hair loss. However, this study was extremely small, conducted in Iran, and not from a reputable institution. Additionally, we know that 2% minoxidil is not particularly effective, so we use 5% minoxidil instead.
So, while oils and other natural remedies may provide a small benefit, they cannot replace traditional treatments. The danger is that people who believe in these trends waste valuable time. If hair loss is not addressed promptly, the opportunity for regrowth may be lost entirely.
Androgenetic pattern hair loss is progressive—once a hair follicle is lost, it cannot be revived. The only solution at that stage is a hair transplant, which comes with challenges. Many people assume surgery is a simple fix and will guarantee a full head of hair. However, transplants involve scarring, and there is no guarantee that the new follicles will survive. Sometimes, patients end up with a more significant issue than originally.
Beyond oils, people often ask me about other natural remedies, such as caffeine, green tea, or chamomile. Unfortunately, I wish I could say they work, but they do not. That’s not how hair restoration functions.
Many people fear the medication, and there is a reason for that. We know that finasteride can cause side effects such as decreased libido, reduced sperm count, and, in some cases, worsening depression, which is a common concern.
Taking these medications is a commitment. There are additional concerns for young people experiencing early hair loss—what if they are planning to have children? What if they are thinking about starting a family? These are important questions; we do not yet have all the answers.
However, we do know that these medications work. So, it becomes a trade-off—do you prioritize your hair or other concerns such as family planning or mental health? It is always a balancing act when deciding how to manage these treatments.
Jacobsen: Dr. Kazlouskaya, thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/25
Riane Eisler, an Austrian-born American systems scientist, futurist, and human rights advocate, is renowned for her influential work on cultural transformation and gender equity. Best known for “The Chalice and the Blade,” she introduced the partnership versus dominator models of social organization. She received the Humanist Pioneer Award, and in conversation with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Eisler emphasized the urgent need for humanists to focus on values-based systems and the transformative power of caring economics. Drawing on neuroscience and history, she argues that peace begins at home and calls for a shift in worldview to build more equitable, sustainable, and compassionate societies rooted in connection rather than control. The three books of hers of note that could be highlighted are The Chalice and the Blade—now in its 57th U.S. printing with 30 foreign editions, The Real Wealth of Nations, and Nurturing Our Humanity: How Domination and Partnership Shape Our Brains, Lives, and Future (Oxford University Press, 2019). Eisler, in dialogue with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, explores the contrast between domination and partnership systems, advocating a shift toward caring economics rooted in equity, sustainability, and human connection. She critiques both capitalism and socialism for perpetuating domination structures, particularly in devaluing care work and nature. Drawing from neuroscience, history, and policy analysis, Eisler argues that current global crises—from inequality to climate change—require rethinking economic metrics and investing in policies that reward caregiving and cooperation. Emphasizing transformation over revolution, she calls for changing foundational narratives to create a more humane, partnership-oriented future for all generations.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So we’ve talked about the Domination Model and the Partnership Model, which you consider antipodes within a comprehensive, holistic framework. We covered the long history of humanity in session two. This session will focus on economics, and it’s July 12th today. Within Partnership Studies, when we examine economics, we see that many societies operate within frameworks influenced by various sources, such as the notion of men as “breadwinners” or the “salaryman” in Japan. How does economics play a key role in maintaining—and even imposing—the Domination Model? Conversely, how does a liberatory framework based on the Partnership Model reframe our understanding of economics?
Riane Eisler: There’s an ongoing debate about socialism versus capitalism, but if you examine it through the lens of the Partnership–Domination Social Scale, you can see that this binary obscures a deeper issue. What many of us who advocate for a more equitable, sustainable, and peaceful future are confronting is domination economics. Whether it involves an Arab oil monarch, an emperor in imperial China, a European feudal lord, or modern neoliberal regimes—despite their branding—these are all variations of domination-based economic structures. Neoliberalism is neither new, not liberal; it is the domination economics of trickle-down. Trickle-down economics is the theory that benefits provided to the wealthy will “trickle down” to those below through investment and job creation. However, critics argue that in practice, it replicates historical patterns where those at the bottom are expected to subsist on the surplus or waste of those at the top—echoing feudal hierarchies. What we are witnessing today is, in many ways, a global resurgence of domination economics, marked by increasing inequality and the consolidation of wealth and power. Thus, the real divide is not simply capitalism versus socialism, but domination versus partnership.
I recall being invited to the Soviet Union. We were hosted in accommodations that even had a grand piano. I was one of two American delegates participating in a peace event in what was then Leningrad, organized by Nordic women advocating for peace. There was caviar on the table, while many ordinary citizens faced shortages of necessities, standing in long queues for items like soap and food. What existed in the USSR was not an egalitarian economy in practice, despite the official Marxist ideology of socialism. Instead, it was a form of state-controlled economic domination. A privileged elite had access to vacation homes—dachas—and luxury goods, while many people lived under strict controls and with limited resources. This dynamic reflects domination not only over people but also over nature—what we might call extractive or exploitative economics.
Both Adam Smith and Karl Marx, though radically different in ideology, participated in the assumptions of their time. Their economic models largely ignored or devalued caregiving, emotional labour, and ecological sustainability—what some now call a gendered system of hidden values. These systems placed little to no economic value on care work, which women primarily performed without compensation. In many 19th-century legal systems, including in parts of Europe and North America, women had limited legal standing. A husband could sue for the loss of his wife’s services if she were injured due to another’s negligence, but she could not sue in her own right. This was rooted in the doctrine of coverture, which treated a married woman’s legal identity as subsumed under her husband’s.
This unpaid domestic labour was labelled “reproductive” rather than “productive,” implying it did not contribute directly to the economy—a false dichotomy that persists in many economics curricula today. Neither Smith nor Marx gave serious attention to ecological concerns in their foundational writings. Concepts such as sustainability, environmental justice, and ecological economics emerged much later, in the 20th century, as responses to growing environmental crises. So, to move toward a Partnership Model of economics, we must value care work, sustainability, and equity—areas that traditional economic models have long neglected or suppressed.
Nature, in both Smith’s capitalist and Marx’s socialist frameworks, was viewed primarily as a resource to be exploited. So, what we have to move toward is what I call a caring economics of partnerism—an economic system that recognizes the measurable value of caring for people from birth onward, as well as caring for our natural life-support systems. Unfortunately, the way we currently quantify economic activity—using measures like GDP and GNP—excludes much of this. A tree, for example, is not counted as part of GDP until it is cut down and becomes a log—until it is dead. That reflects the omission of the natural economy, the volunteer community economy, and the household economy in our current systems, whether capitalist or socialist.
Jacobsen: What would more experimental attempts to account for those unremunerated parts of human activity—those missing from traditional metrics—look like? How would a more holistic analysis be structured?
Eisler: First of all, we are seeing encouraging trends, even as we also see a regression into domination. There are concurrent movements. For example, we’ve seen public policies being introduced—and now some dismantled—designed to reward caring. There’s currently a debate between proponents of pronatalist policies and those advocating for genuine support for caregiving and children. Right now, the U.S. administration is discussing a $5,000 incentive for having a child—that is a pronatalist policy. But California, for example, offers paid parental leave for both mothers and fathers. That’s a partnership-oriented policy.
These kinds of caring policies were pioneered by Nordic nations, which have consistently moved further—always in degrees—along the partnership-domination continuum toward partnership. And this brings us back to what I call the four cornerstones of either a domination or partnership system: family and childhood; gender relationships and rigid or fluid gender roles; economic structure, whether domination or partnership-oriented; and story and language. These are foundational. If we want lasting change, we must act strategically, not just tactically.
Putting out social and economic “fires” is a tactic, but domination systems are constantly producing those fires. Without addressing and transforming the cornerstones, including the economic rewards system, we won’t change the structure. We must begin to reward the work of caring for people from birth and caring for nature.
Jacobsen: Does this imply some form of redistribution of wealth within the system, but not in the conventional ways we tend to think about it?
Eisler: Well, yes, in short. You would see a redistribution of wealth. And we’re starting to see signs of that, even in the United States. For instance, independent caregivers can now earn around $40 per hour, which is a respectable wage. But it still pales in comparison to the compensation of corporate CEOs. Do you know that today, many CEOs earn about 500 times what their average employees make? It’s no longer just 300 times—it’s 500.
Jacobsen: I think the general reaction to that tends to be, quote, “It’s obscene,” or something to that effect.
Eisler: Yeah, but the general reaction does not change the rules of the game. And simply protesting against something—without changing the system and implementing new policies—does not create lasting change. First, it has to begin with a shift in consciousness, a change in worldview. It means not accepting top-down, domination-based economics as inevitable.
Yes, the reaction—”this is obscene”—is valid. But without an alternative system, protest is insufficient. That is why I outline an alternative in my book The Real Wealth of Nations: Creating a Caring Economics. I do not claim to have all the answers, but I emphasize that economics is a human construct. We can redesign it. We can change what we reward and even impose disincentives—penalize, if you will—those who hoard or misuse wealth. Look at what’s happening with extravagant spending on events like some lavish weddings. Talk about obscene—yes, that’s a fitting word.
Jacobsen: What is an argument that this approach is not only beneficial for everyone, but also uniquely beneficial for different social classes in other ways?
Eisler: Absolutely. The current economic system is simply unsustainable. It is fundamentally built on the exploitation of both people and nature, rather than care for either. Anyone with even a basic sense of empathy who is not in complete denial can see that.
Unfortunately, domination systems are trauma factories—and therefore, denial factories. This begins in early childhood, often in families, and continues through socialization into rigid gender roles. Both women and men are forced to suppress vital parts of their humanity.
Meanwhile, the economic system continues to reward only exploitation and profit. Of course, we need markets—but let us be clear: we do not currently have a truly free one.
Jacobsen: Has there ever been a truly free market, as a side question?
Eisler: I believe freer markets have existed, and we can move toward more freedom in markets, but it requires regulation and meaningful enforcement of those regulations. This shift toward a caring economics of partnership is multifaceted.
It begins with a worldview that recognizes the economic value of what domination systems label “feminine”—namely, caring. Rigid gender stereotypes are not “just a women’s issue” as we are taught. How gender roles and relations are structured not only lies behind the subordination of women and girls, it lies behind the devaluation of anything labeled “feminine” in both the capitalist and socialist economics we inherited from more authoritarian and violent times. Indeed, how gender roles and relations are culturally constructed is actually a key principle in how families, economics, and society at large are structured. That is why the four cornerstones—childhood and family, gender, economics, and story and language—are all interconnected. They shape whether a system trends toward domination or partnership.
Jacobsen: Are there forms of human activity that are socially productive but not coded as either feminine or masculine? That is, activities that do not fall clearly into those categories but still contribute to economic or social life? I mean something that does not fall within the conventional categories. It is not viewed as masculine, nor is it associated with feminine, caring labour. It seems like a grey zone—an activity that is productive or useful but not gender-coded.
We know activities coded as masculine are typically considered economically productive, and those coded as feminine—like caregiving—are often unremunerated. But what about a third category that is neither “productive” in the conventional masculine sense nor “caring” in the feminine-coded sense?
Eisler: Can you give me an example of what you have in mind?
Jacobsen: I have no idea. I am asking the expert. That is why I am bringing it up—it just came to mind as a question.
Eisler: I am sure. Well, I mean, we have to look beyond the present, which is still shaped by domination-based definitions of what is “feminine” and “masculine.” In truth, caring is a human activity—it is not inherently feminine. In the future, we should not code it that way.
Just look at all the men today who care for children, for babies—activities like diapering, feeding, nurturing—tasks that were once seen as exclusively women’s work. In the past, a man doing those things would be told he was not a “real man.” And yet today, real men are doing exactly that.
Men are human beings. As we move toward more partnership-oriented societies, many definitions of gender, leadership, and value will evolve and, in fact, already have. For example, the idea of servant leadership is gender-neutral and includes care as a core element.
As a servant leader, your role is to empower others. And “empower” is another term aligned with the Partnership Model. In domination systems, power is about control—power over others. But in partnership systems, power is redefined as power to and power with, not power over. That shift is profound.
I think we have to keep reminding ourselves, as Einstein said—and I will quote him: “You cannot solve problems with the same consciousness that created them.”
To quote another icon, Gandhi said something equally profound.
Jacobsen: He was part of the inspiration for me to work on a horse farm and live among people the way he did. He was a sagacious person.
Eisler: He truly was—a sagacious person. And so was his wife, Kasturba, by the way. I am in a film about her. But we do not need to go into that now. You know how it is—women are often behind the “great man.” But in their case, they truly had a partnership. Gandhi said something I usually quote: “We make a mistake in confusing the habitual for the natural.”
Jacobsen: I like that.
Eisler: Yes. And that is what this work is ultimately about—not just revolution, but transformation. Although in times of regression, revolution may occur. Jacobsen: In times of crisis, is the Dominator Model more likely to assert itself in shaping a society’s vision for itself, or something else?
Eisler: I make a distinction between hierarchies of domination and hierarchies of actualization. There are parents, teachers, managers, and leaders in both partnership and domination oriented systems. The key question is: What kind of hierarchy is it, and how is power defined and exercised?
This entire conversation today is, in many ways, about that distinction—power over versus power with. But I also add a third concept: creative power.
It is essential to distinguish between creativity and innovation. Domination systems often contain innovation, yes, but much of it is destructive. For example, the use of ovens to kill people during the Holocaust was an innovation—but it was in the service of domination, of “power over,” of fear and death. That was a blade innovation.
Today, the regression toward domination is fueled by fear. People are persuaded to identify with those at the top. So when you see extravagant displays of wealth—like the Bezos wedding—it becomes a kind of vicarious thrill for many.
Jacobsen: Is it a bit like a royal wedding? Like the British royal weddings—Meghan Markle and Prince Harry, when they got married.
Eisler: Oh, yes, right. It’s like that. But for others, it feels wasteful, excessive, and obscene. And recognizing that takes a change in consciousness.
That’s the key: a change in mindset toward awareness and understanding. We need to spread the knowledge that for most of human history, societies were more partnership-oriented than domination-based.
Look at the Nordic nations. Look at the Mbuti in Central Africa. Look at the Mosuo in China. There are many examples of societies that historically operated more in partnership modes.
But often, when indigenous partnership oriented societies came into contact with domination systems, they were pressured or forced to shift toward domination.
And that’s the challenge. We are now at a critical juncture: climate change, pandemics, and nuclear weapons—all global threats. At the same time, we have worldwide transportation and communication technologies. We are globally interconnected.
This means we must move toward a partnership model—one that prioritizes care for people and nature.
We will get there because of the tremendous human instinct for survival. But on the road there, unfortunately, there will be regression—and there will be suffering.
Jacobsen: I interviewed with a British scholar named Alexander Douglas. He comes from a discipline called philosophy of economics, and he approaches it from a critical perspective.
He participated in a multi-part series with me about six or seven years ago. Another colleague of his, Dr. Christina Alice, offers a similar critique: that in standard economics, highly elaborate mathematical models are often created, but these are essentially fantasies.
They give the appearance of precision and complexity, creating the illusion of doing “real science.” But when you examine it more closely, it becomes clear that these models rely on mathematical formalism in a rigorously superficial way.
Eisler: Yes, that’s exactly right. And frankly, that’s what much of science has been about historically. For instance, until roughly 200 years ago, science believed that women had no meaningful role in genetic inheritance—that only men did.
That was considered scientific “truth.” Then we discovered it was entirely false.
Jacobsen: The good thing, though, is that when science is done well, it has a built-in corrective mechanism. It catalogues its errors and, over time, improves its understanding.
But let’s turn more specifically to economics. How do you see this evolving in the future? You mentioned climate change, bacteriological threats, and nuclear threats, especially climate change. The other two are more unpredictable since immediate human actions, like the detonation of a single bomb, drive them.
Climate change, by contrast, is a slow-moving catastrophe—but there’s a hard time limit. It’s like we’re all inside the oven.
Eisler: Exactly. And there is a time limit on all of it. Think about it: if religious fanatics—people who believe they’ll go to heaven and be attended by 12 virgins when they die—possess nuclear weapons, that is not a hypothetical danger. That is an immediate and very real threat.
Because they will use them, we should not fool ourselves into thinking these risks are distant or far-fetched.
What people also often fail to grasp is that fundamentalist religion—across traditions—is not just extreme religion; it is domination religion. What people often do not understand is that fundamentalist religion is basically a dominator religion. And yet, at the core of many of our religious scriptures, you also find teachings that could be described as “feminine”—teachings about caring, caregiving, and nonviolence. “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.” But then, over time, those teachings are encroached upon and diluted by dominant ideologies.
You know—”spare the rod, spoil the child,” blaming Eve—blaming woman—for all of humanity’s ills. And that’s why the four cornerstones are so important. We have to examine the stories we are told as truth critically, and we can change them.
The transformation from partnership to domination throughout history happened primarily through force. But today, with the existence of nuclear and bacteriological weapons, force is obsolete—it is anti-evolutionary, at least for our species. Cockroaches will probably manage somehow.
Jacobsen: [Laughing] Mariana Trench bugs. To close on this thought, do you have any final reflections?
Eisler: Yes. My final thought is that we are approaching a point of no return. And the faster we can shift people’s worldviews—change their mindset—the greater the chance we have. There’s still hope, because there are many creative, promising movements taking place.
Look at the environmental movement, the women’s movement, the children’s rights movement, the racial justice movement, the peace movement, and the economic justice movement. They are all, at their core, challenging the same underlying structure: a tradition of domination.
If people can understand that and begin working through the four cornerstones, we can shift the foundation.
Because unless we address root causes—not just symptoms—the system will lead us to an evolutionary dead end. And that outcome is not necessary.
We can build a partnership-oriented future for ourselves, our children, and generations to come.
Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time and your expertise. It’s always lovely to see you again. I will see you in the next session.
Eisler: Yes—and happy travels.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/24
Michael Ashley Schulman, CFA, Chief Investment Officer of Running Point Capital Advisors, offers expert insight into current global financial dynamics. Schulman offers timely insights into macroeconomic trends, US fiscal policy, and the global tech landscape. In this in-depth July 2025 interview, economist Michael Ashley Schulman analyzes how US–China and US–UK trade negotiations contributed to record equity market highs despite geopolitical volatility. He explores the US dollar’s decline, driven by fiscal policy under Trump’s administration, and highlights mixed progress in bilateral trade talks ahead of the July 9 tariff deadline. Schulman discusses the Bank for International Settlements’ warnings, Japan’s cautious monetary stance, and diverging PMI readings in China and the Gulf. His insights reveal how shifting trade dynamics, monetary policy, and global risk perceptions are influencing market behaviour, investor sentiment, and broader economic resilience worldwide—interview conducted July 9, 2025.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How has the progress on US–China and US–UK trade negotiations during June contributed to record highs in equity markets?
Michael Ashley Schulman: Tariff and trade developments—with their unpredictable twists and cliffhangers—have been frequent discussion topics with our family office clients this year. Progress on US–China and US–UK trade negotiations, along with other trade deals, has contributed to record equity market highs in unexpected ways. Trade negotiations are not the only factor contributing to economic and geopolitical uncertainty—while some conditions have improved and others have not, many adverse developments have proven less damaging than initially feared.
But first, some perspective on progress and equity market highs. The S&P 500 fell nearly 20% in just 33 days from its February 19 high to its April 7 low, shortly after Trump’s tariff Liberation Day on April 2, then recovered to new highs on June 27 in only 56 days. The day before the Independence Day holiday, both the S&P 500 and Nasdaq hit fresh record highs while their 50-day moving averages crossed above their 200-day moving averages, creating golden crosses that signal potential positive long-term market momentum.
On the face of it, trade is possibly more restricted, more taxed, and more burdened than it was at the beginning of President Trump’s second term and yet equity markets are at new highs. Trump’s postponement of reciprocal tariffs and willingness to extend deadlines and negotiate deals has lifted hope that restrictions will not be as burdensome as initially construed. Additionally, the stock market has performed better than feared as several other key concerns have dissipated. Economically, unemployment has remained relatively low, now around 4.1%, payrolls continue to grow, and labour remains resilient. DeepSeek worries about derailing artificial intelligence (AI) infrastructure spending dissipated in April when major cloud companies reaffirmed their commitment to massive datacenter investments worldwide, while earnings momentum strengthened as analysts stopped cutting their 2025-2026 estimates for S&P 500 companies. Meanwhile, oil prices eased as Israel spared Tehran’s oil fields, and overall Middle East anxieties subsided considerably following the US’s Operation Midnight Hammer strike on Iran’s nuclear facilities (on June 22), ending the 12-day war and alleviating concerns about potential Strait of Hormuz blockades. Most critically, Trump’s Big Beautiful Bill enacted on July 4 prolonged his 2017 tax reductions past their year-end sunset, averting what would have been a significant tax hike, even as bond markets show remarkable—and maybe questionable—indifference to the fiscal ramifications.
There is a prevailing mood that we can grow and inflate our way out of the current debt-to-GDP ratio; nonetheless, the US Treasury yield curve has inverted again, with 3-month yields higher than 10-year yields, which is often considered a sign of impending recession. However, the inverted yield curve is a signal that we have chosen to downplay in conversations with our UHNW clients over the last several years, as so many other factors have weighed in to keep growth growing!
However, to come back to your specific question—I have not forgotten—during June, progress in US trade talks diverged sharply across partners as the White House’s 90-day tariff pause ticked toward its July 9 expiry — which of course is sure to be extended — but July 9 was supposed to be the knife-edge deadline on whether country-specific duties snap back to as high as 50%.
The UK won the gold-star award for promptness, locking in a 10% combined tariff cap on 100,000 UK autos a year, scrapping duties on aircraft parts, and enacting quotas (rather than tariffs) on future steel and aluminum flows. London, for its part, opened quotas for US beef, ethanol, and pharmaceuticals and promised to peel away a swathe of non-tariff barriers.
China’s negotiations yielded a narrower framework of understanding that restarts rare-earth exports and keeps most bilateral tariffs at the temporary 10% level while broader talks continue. The deal removed an acute input bottleneck for US automakers and defence suppliers—anticipation of the deadline had led US purchasers to front-load orders—but left fundamental disputes over intellectual property (IP) theft, data bans, and subsidies untouched. The betting markets are still unsure who has the weaker hand.
Multinational corporations as well as domestic purchasers are compelled to write two price lists: “If deal” and “If apocalypse.” I spoke with a real estate developer specializing in apartment buildings and multifamily structures. He purchased a full suite of appliances for about 100 apartments a year in advance of needing them, to lock in costs.
What is remarkable is how few deals have been finalized compared to the original rhetoric of 90 deals in 90 days. EU/Brussels’ negotiator Maroš Šefčovič (I may have mispronounced that) sprinted to Washington, pitching a flat 10% tariff with carve-outs for autos and steel, but no deal!
Japan is paddling upstream in these negotiations; after its seventh ministerial visit, President Trump threatened to push auto duties back to 25% unless Tokyo buys more US rice, because we’ve got to help our farmers.
India is still arguing over lentils and steel; Indonesia tossed the US a token plastics waiver; South Korea wants an extension; and a half-dozen others are probably hoping Washington forgets they exist—it will not.
Jacobsen: What drove the US dollar to its lowest point in over three years?
Schulman: Trump. It is more than just that, but it is Trump.
Picture the greenback as Alex Warren’s chart-topper “Ordinary”. Suddenly, everyone’s streaming something else, and the once-inescapable hook now sounds, well, ordinary. A 10.8 % slide in the Dollar Index during the first half of 2025 — its worst opening act since the ‘70s — set the stage for June’s three-year low.
If the US government seems unconcerned about fiscal discipline, currency markets will react. Can the US outgrow its debt? Yes, but for now, the currency markets have their doubts relative to other countries, and currencies are a relative game! In the stock market, two competing companies can see their shares rise, but currencies (FX markets) are always valued relative to other currencies.
President Trump drove the dollar to its lowest point by degrading global confidence in the steady hand of US policy, threatening interference with our central bank (the Federal Reserve), verbally pulling back from global concerns, handicapping trade (which is typically dollar denominated) with heavy tariff talk—stop-start trade policy erodes the greenback’s safe-haven aura—and by leaning heavier into Federal debt expansion as part of his economic agenda with the One Big Beautiful Bill adding trillions to the deficit, thereby directly eroding confidence in the dollar and finally triggering Moody’s to lower its US debt rating in May which admittedly it had put on negative watch 18 months prior during the Biden administration.
Also, interest rate futures now price roughly ¾-point of Fed cuts by year-end under Chair Jerome Powell—although I still downplay the possibility of lower Fed rates this year for Running Point’s internal market outlook that we share with family clients—lower yields drain the dollar’s streaming revenue, making it seemingly less valuable. Markets flinched when President Trump teased a quick-fire Powell replacement, raising the spectre of a “shadow chair” under administrative influence. Credibility costs climb whenever politics meddle with monetary policy.
Globally, and possibly ironically, with Middle-East tensions easing and equities doing well, there is a risk of rotation in FX markets as traders ditch dollar safety for higher-beta currencies.
Most importantly, there is some credence to the thought that President Trump desires a weaker dollar because, A) It helps improve our exports (by making US goods cheaper) and can improve the earnings of US multinational companies with significant overseas sales that then translate back into more dollars, and B) A weaker dollar enables other central banks to cut interest rates and stimulate their economies without worrying about defending their currencies to repay dollar-denominated debt obligations. While many countries publicly complain about US turmoil, they are quietly benefiting from the economic opportunities and boost to global growth it creates.
Jacobsen: Which countries advanced/stalled bilateral trade talks with the US ahead of the July 9 tariff deadline?
Schulman: We may have covered this, so apologies if I sound like a replay. Some foreign capitals sprinted for a handshake while others kept ghosting Washington. Here is who swiped right—and left on US Trade Representative Jamieson Greer.
The United Kingdom made significant headway. China has a framework understanding with much still left not understood, like IP theft, subsidies, and data. Vietnam has a preliminary deal that reduces tariffs from a threatened 46% to a still high 20%, particularly benefiting US importers who have transitioned manufacturing from China to Vietnam to avoid Chinese tariffs. Jakarta, Indonesia, eased import licenses on plastics, chemicals and other commodities to sweet-talk US negotiators, but I am unsure if everything is finalized.
The EU and Japan, as mentioned, are yet to finalize a deal, and they are unequivocally, relatively and essential to US trade and business!
Talks with India may be at a roadblock on farm, steel and auto duties as well as on US market-access demands. South Korea has asked for an extension, which should not be too surprising since the country recently elected Lee Jae Myung as President following the impeachment of predecessor Yoon Suk Yeol (I hope I pronounced that right).
Jacobsen: What risks did the Bank for International Settlements highlight in its recent report?
Schulman: This sounds like a Jeopardy question. What are inflation, tariffs, protectionist measures, and debt service? I am afraid this is not a new story: cyclical headwinds of slower growth and lingering inflation collide with deeper structural faults. None of our clients are asking about this.
BIS’s overarching message is that monetary policy alone cannot secure stability and that a soft landing for the global economy may be elusive. Credible fiscal consolidation, structural reforms and close oversight of shadow banks (private lenders) are essential to keep today’s pockets of stress from becoming tomorrow’s crisis—this is not new news. Realistically, although their report was published at the end of June, I have to assume that most of the thought and apprehensions that went into it were calcified a couple of months ago when tariff turmoil was trending.
Interestingly, the report advocates for tokenization’s ability to deliver digital innovation to central banks by preserving trust and value in ways that stablecoins cannot—this has been a topic of theirs for at least a couple of years.
Jacobsen: Why did the Bank of Japan maintain its policy rate at 0.5%?
Schulman: The Bank of Japan (BoJ) has tasted positive-rate life and, for now, has decided a polite half-point is plenty. With core inflation still bubbling around 3½% %—well above its 2%target—and BoJ Governor Ueda fretting over tariff cross-winds and a yen that still seems to be in a weakening trend even though it is considerably stronger than it was at this time last year, there could be reason for them to hike. However, for now, the BoJ Board froze the overnight rate at 0.5% and even dialled back the pace of bond-purchase tapering to avoid a sugar crash in JGB (Japanese bond) markets—had they raised rates, bond prices would have likely tumbled. Hawkish Board members (e.g., Hajime Takata) insist this is only a pause before the sequel, but the script probably depends on US trade twists and wage growth.
For investors, this means that Tokyo remains the monetary version of “Stranger Things”, i.e., the upside-down of global policy. In contrast, the Fed is parked at a lofty 4.5% and debating when to resume cuts; the ECB just delivered its eighth quarter-point trim, nudging the deposit rate to 2%; and the Bank of England has tiptoed south from 5.25 to 4.25% with its series of cuts.
The net result is that the yen carry trade still wears the superhero cape—hedge funds can fund in yen and chase higher-yielding assets abroad, but the crusader of cheap lending (the yen) has become less predictable. When the BoJ raises rates again, you could see a risk-off move as more hedge funds unwind a portion of their carry trade out of fear that the yen will rise and make paying back their borrowings more expensive. For now, traders can still play the differential but need to keep one eye open for any sudden tremors.
Jacobsen: What do the divergent PMI readings in China and the Gulf economies reveal about regional economic resilience/dependence on global trade flows now?
Schulman: I do not have the numbers off the top of my head, but the Gulf states have positive PMIs above 50 while China has been bouncing above and below 50 for the last year and has been below 50 over the last three months. It is important to understand that PMI readings can highlight different things across the globe.
China’s PMI is a proxy for shipping container traffic—Beijing’s growth narrative still leans on external tailwinds—and a reading below 50 may indicate a post-tariff hangover combined with an inability to stimulate enough domestic spending. By contrast, the Gulf readings owe less to container counts and more to petrodollar-fueled spending on megaprojects, tourism influxes, sovereign-backed capital expenditures, and robust domestic demand. Strong Gulf PMIs imply steady infrastructure steel and cement demand even if China’s appetite plateaus.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Michael.
Schulman: Thank you, always a pleasure to chat with you, Scott.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/23
Bern Mendez, a relationship coach with over 14 years of experience, is known for empowering professional women to build meaningful romantic partnerships. Certified in Strategic Intervention and influenced by neuroscience and emotional attunement, Mendez shares insights on dating abroad, demographic imbalances, cultural dynamics, and emotional self-awareness. He emphasizes authenticity, values clarity, and realistic expectations in navigating today’s dating landscape. With a large global following and proven results, he advises women—especially high-achieving professionals—on how to expand their dating pool without compromising core values. His approach combines practical strategy with profound emotional insight for lasting relational success.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, I am pleased to be speaking with Bern Mendez. He is a dating and relationship coach with over fourteen years of experience. Mentored by Tony Robbins and certified in Strategic Intervention, Bern blends neuroscience-based emotional attunement with practical, real-world strategies to help professional women overcome emotional blocks and build committed, fulfilling partnerships.
His work empowers women to cultivate self-worth, emotional safety, and genuine connection. His YouTube channel, with over 226,000 subscribers and more than 30 million views, ranks among the top 12 most-subscribed dating advice platforms for women globally. He has guided women—including Fortune 100 executives, physicians, lawyers, therapists, and entrepreneurs—in over 24 countries. His insights have appeared in Redbook, CNN Money, Univision TV, HuffPost Live, MindBodyGreen, and other major outlets. Thank you very much for joining me today.
Bern Mendez: I appreciate the invitation—thank you for having me.
Jacobsen: What inspired your focus on helping professional women navigate dating abroad?
Mendez: That’s a great question. People often assume that going international dramatically expands the dating pool, which can be true. However, I distinguish between someone who is simply travelling and looking for a casual or enriching dating experience versus someone who is relocating to another country.
In the first case, yes—there can be fun, discovery, and sometimes meaningful connection. But if someone is moving abroad—especially with the hope of building a life there—they’re often seeking something more aligned, more lasting. They’re usually looking for the kind of relationship they may not have found in their previous location. So, I approach those scenarios differently because the intentions, environments, and cultural frameworks are not the same.
Jacobsen: And for you—why did you choose to focus on this particular demographic?
Mendez: It evolved organically. When I started coaching, I wasn’t specifically targeting professional women or even focusing exclusively on dating. I was helping people navigate significant life changes. Through that process, I noticed that a large portion of those who resonated with my work were high-achieving women—intelligent, successful, emotionally aware—but still struggling to create the kind of romantic relationship that matched the rest of their lives.
As I continued to listen and learn, it became clear that there was a gap—and that I could help fill it. My background encompasses a thorough examination of relationships, neuroscience, and communication. I’ve worked in many contexts—from assisting juvenile offenders to life-transition programs to coaching global professionals—and all of these experiences have contributed to my understanding of what helps relationships thrive.
Over time, I observed clear patterns and challenges that women in this demographic face, not because there’s something inherently wrong with them but because the dating landscape often fails to align with their level of growth and intentionality. So, I leaned into that work, and it has been gratifying.
So to get what you want—if you’re, as I said, a successful, intelligent woman looking for a compatible partner—it’s not as simple as “it’s just going to happen naturally.” There’s more nuance to the approach. That’s where the intersection of need and my work comes into play.
Jacobsen: What are these women looking for, and what is realistically available in the market for them? You mentioned earlier that there’s often a mismatch between expectations and reality.
Mendez: For sure, yes. I’ll start with this: based on the women I’ve had the privilege of working with and the research I’ve reviewed, there’s a general desire to find someone who is a peer—an actual match.
This often includes a similar level of education, emotional intelligence, financial stability, and ambition. That isn’t about judgment—it’s simply an observation. Statistically, this becomes a structural issue. For example, in the United States, among college-educated midlife women—let’s say between the ages of 40 and 65—there are roughly ten women for every six men in that same category. If you examine comparable countries globally, such as Canada, the UK, Germany, South Korea, or Japan, you observe a similar trend. In Japan, the ratio is closer to ten women for every five men.
So, from a purely statistical perspective, that’s the first challenge. There are more educated, successful women than there are similarly positioned men. That’s before we even get into compatibility, emotional maturity, or life-stage alignment.
The second part of the equation is emotional availability and awareness. Many women I work with are seeking emotionally attuned partners—those who understand nuance and compassion and can communicate on a deep level.
But we live in a world where many people exist in silos—digitally, culturally, and socially. A large number of men may not fully understand or be aware of the specific kinds of emotional pain or relational challenges that women face, particularly in today’s world. That lack of mutual understanding creates another layer of difficulty.
So yes, it’s a complex situation. There are no solutions—this isn’t a hopeless scenario. However, it’s not simple, and it’s not something that can be resolved with a quick fix or by “wishing yourself” into a match that doesn’t exist demographically or emotionally.
Jacobsen: That’s a beneficial breakdown—especially with the data around those ratios. Palette is another issue—in terms of what is wanted. You mentioned this 10-to-6 ratio in the U.S. or even 10-to-5 in Japan. Yet, reality is not going to provide that ideal match on average—not necessarily per individual, but demographically speaking.
Do you guide your clients to consider that broader palette? So, as you said, they can still get what they want—despite, at least on paper, the demographic reality we’re seeing in the population dynamics, particularly in advanced industrial economies?
Mendez: Yes, that’s part of what I do—though it’s not the only thing. One of the core ideas I work with is that if you want to create more of what you want, you need to show up more authentically.
If someone presents a kind of “beige version” of themselves—holding back the truth of who they are—it becomes harder for those genuinely aligned with them to recognize and connect with them. The first thing I help clients do is become more visible, expressive, and genuinely themselves.
Once that’s in place, we can work on expanding the pool. For example, many women are looking for partners with a college degree. However, many men may not yet hold that credential but are highly competent, purpose-driven, and thriving in their fields. Suppose you remove “college degree” as a non-negotiable and instead evaluate based on values, intelligence, and life direction. In that case, you open the door to more meaningful possibilities.
Another factor is height. I’ve worked with many women who say, “He needs to be at least six feet tall.” Statistically, in the U.S., only about 14.5% of men are six feet or taller. Suppose the preference is for someone 6’2″ and above. In that case, that number drops significantly—eliminating over 90% of potential partners based on one variable that does not correlate with long-term relationship success.
So yes, flexibility is key—but it needs to be intentional. I am never asking clients to abandon their values or settle for someone incompatible. Instead, I invite them to reassess the metrics that truly matter versus those that are preferences shaped by cultural norms or surface-level traits.
Age is another area. Some women have had great success expanding their age preferences. I’ve seen clients marry partners with a ten-year age gap—more than they initially thought they could accept—and go on to build deeply fulfilling, secure relationships.
In short, the more flexible you are on things that don’t impact long-term happiness—while remaining anchored in your core values—the more likely you are to find someone who truly meets you.
Jacobsen: But those wants—people might conflate them as if they were needs. So, they end up with a less realistic image of what is available. Is that a general pattern you see?
Mendez: Yes, that’s part of it. Many people haven’t taken the time to consciously distinguish between what is a true non-negotiable, what’s a nice-to-have, and what’s not important at all.
We live in a society that heavily glorifies relationships, often the highlight reel versions. Whether it’s a Hollywood wedding that gets significant media attention and then dissolves eight months later or a curated Instagram post of strangers at picture-perfect weddings, we’re constantly absorbing unrealistic standards.
That kind of saturation can make people idolize specific preferences—mistaking them for essentials. And often, when we dig a little deeper, we find that some of these so-called “needs” were never thoughtfully questioned to begin with.
Another layer is emotional regulation. When someone is overwhelmed, anxious, or in fight-or-flight mode, they are more likely to cling rigidly to specific expectations. However, you can slow down, regulate your nervous system, and engage in some value clarification. In that case, you create space to reassess. People may not change everything, but they often become far more flexible.
Let me give you an example. I had a client who insisted that a non-negotiable was: “The man I date must not have a dog.”I thought, okay, maybe there’s a trauma or allergy? But no—it was simply a preference that had calcified over time.
We gently opened up that belief, not by forcing a change, but by questioning whether it was truly essential. Eventually, she met and married a fantastic man—who owns a dog. And now, she proudly calls herself a dog mom and adores the animal.
That’s a more playful example, but there are other criteria—like age, income, education, and even geography—that can be revisited. Doing so doesn’t mean lowering standards; it means expanding possibilities while remaining anchored in core values.
Jacobsen: That’s a great story. And then there’s the other side—some people don’t want long-term relationships. They’re looking for a brief, passionate connection—akin to a summer romance. That’s also valid. But the people in between—those looking for something “medium-term”—are rarer. So, if someone came to you wanting just a short-term experience, what would you recommend they focus on versus someone who’s looking for long-term intimacy and emotional sustainability?
Mendez: Based on the kind of work I do, I don’t get people coming to me for a short-term fling. That’s usually easier to find and doesn’t require the kind of deep coaching I offer.
What I do get are people who have experienced short-term flings—and realized that it didn’t fulfill them or bring lasting satisfaction. So they come to me wanting something more meaningful, more emotionally grounded.
That said, if someone hypothetically came to me looking for a short-term romance, I’d still encourage them to clarify their values and emotional boundaries. Just because something is short-term doesn’t mean it should lack intentionality, consent, or emotional awareness. The experience should still feel safe, enriching, and aligned with your goals.
However, for the majority of my clients who are seeking long-term, emotionally intimate relationships, my recommendations always begin with internal alignment: clarifying what truly matters to them, fostering emotional self-awareness, and learning to communicate their needs effectively. From there, we examine the environment, compatibility metrics, and where such connections are most likely to occur.
I think a lot of what I wrote had to do with focusing first on the pool or concentration of human beings you want to connect with—before you start relying on dating apps. That’s advice I’d give to both groups: those looking for short-term experiences and those looking for long-term relationships.
But honestly, I don’t get many people in the first group—those looking for casual flings—seeking out coaching from me. It’s not the kind of support they typically pursue. The second group—those seeking meaningful, long-term relationships—that’s the one I’m most familiar with.
For them, I’d say a few key things:
First, be willing to do what most people aren’t willing to do. The vast majority of people still use dating apps, and they can be effective—but only to a certain extent. The challenge is when apps become your only method of connection.
Multiple studies—including those looking at the effects of intermittent reinforcement—show that dating apps can diminish your sense of self-worth. You’re exposed to high-volume, low-quality engagement. It’s like playing a slot machine: you never know when something might “hit,” and that unpredictability can create emotional wear and tear.
And the odds? Realistically, 1% of matches on apps will be compatible if that. If that’s your only channel, it’s easy to start believing the system is rigged or that something is wrong with you when that’s not the case.
But if you’re willing to make connections in real life, the pool of meaningful possibilities expands dramatically. For example, if you’re a humanist, you might attend a humanist event or a weekly meetup. Or, if you love dogs, go to dog-friendly social groups or causes.
These spaces are filled with people who already share your values. Repeated exposure—being in the same room week after week—builds familiarity and reduces the social anxiety associated with rejection. It creates fertile ground for authentic conversation and connection.
In a hyper-online world, this kind of in-person approach might sound contrarian—but it can help you thrive.
Jacobsen: That’s a strong point. It feels very grounded.
Mendez: Thank you. Another thing I guide my clients on is managing the balance between safety and vulnerability.
Here’s what I mean: if you meet someone and you overshare your life story without vetting them for emotional or physical safety, you’re taking a significant risk. On the other hand, if you stay guarded—if your default way of engaging is closed-off—then even if you move to a new city or country, your chances of forming a deep connection remain low.
So, I teach something I call the “1% Rule.” Be 1% more open. 1% more radiant. 1% more curious.
That way, it’s not overwhelming. It’s just the next step forward from where you already are. And those small increments compound into deeper connection and relational progress over time.
In the context of in-person, real-life interactions—especially within more curated groups—that opens up more than just the world of potential romantic partners. It opens up access to new communities, fosters deeper friendships, and boosts your confidence even further. It’s a more organic approach.
Of course, I’m not saying not to use the apps—but I would say don’t rely on the apps as your sole source of information.
That’s exactly how I would frame it—use the apps but don’t let them be your lifeline.
Jacobsen: What is the neuroscience behind emotional attunement?
Mendez: To paraphrase, think of it in terms of emotional regulation and nervous system attunement. Our internal regulation profoundly influences human connection. When you’re connected to your prefrontal cortex—that is, your executive functioning—you make more intentional, less reactive decisions.
In that state, your ability to attune to another person increases significantly. You can pick up on their verbal and nonverbal cues, respond appropriately, and reflect on what you’re hearing and sensing. That makes the other person feel seen, felt and understood.
And when someone feels truly heard—if they are emotionally capable themselves—they will often reciprocate. That forms a loop. Human beings have thrived through co-regulation. We weren’t designed to operate in isolation. The problem is that many people are dysregulated. When two dysregulated people connect, it’s often a recipe for chaos. Clinically speaking, a full-blown mess.
Jacobsen: Exactly—a classic case out of the DSM or ICD playbook. We’re discussing relationship dynamics that quickly spiral into dysfunction. This isn’t even a gendered problem. It’s across the board. Anyone functioning at a high level professionally has to balance everything else—especially their time and attention. And for many of these individuals they’re so focused on their careers that they neglect the personal side of life. How do you help these high-achieving clients recalibrate so they can make time for connection?
Mendez: That’s a powerful question. The first step is always to help them distinguish between the symptoms and the underlying cause.
When someone comes to me, they’re usually well aware of the symptoms. They’ll say things like, “Every guy I connect with finds me intimidating,” or “I don’t know why relationships never get past the third date.” However, they’re often unaware of the core issue driving those patterns.
So, we begin by unpacking that. What belief systems are shaping how they show up? What emotional habits are at play? Have they internalized that they must be exceptional at everything—including dating—or have they deprioritized connection altogether?
From there, we look at their life architecture. Where’s the margin? How can we intentionally carve out time—not just for dating—but for presence and emotional openness?
Because you’re right—these are intelligent, capable people. However, intelligence doesn’t always equate to self-awareness or emotional availability. We begin by making the invisible visible.
Or they might say something like, “I’m only attracted to emotionally unavailable men,” or similar things—which, in themselves, are not core problems. They’re often symptoms of something more profound.
So, when I connect with someone, the conversation isn’t exclusively intellectual. It’s not just about analyzing patterns logically. It’s about guiding the person to reconnect with their heart, with their desires, with the dreams they may have put away because they’ve convinced themselves they can’t have them.
When someone reconnects with that deeper force of desire—genuine desire—I don’t have to convince them of anything. I reflect their truth to them. For instance, I’ll ask: If this is what you’re feeling in your heart, how does that line up with your current lifestyle?
You’re working 80 hours a week. How do you see yourself finding the kind of love you say you want within that structure?
It’s about helping them uncover the blind spot. Often, they realize there’s a hole in my plan.
Now, that doesn’t mean we make drastic changes overnight. I don’t say, “Go from 80 hours to 40.” That’s not realistic. However, what is realistic is carving out one hour a week for something that breaks the pattern—something nourishing and unexpected.
Maybe it’s as simple as taking off your shoes and walking barefoot in nature—without your phone. Just being. That kind of experience can reignite the internal compass toward what they’re truly missing—not through pressure, but through intrinsic motivation.
There’s a quote by Antoine de Saint-Exupéry, the author of The Little Prince, that says something like, “If you want to build a ship, don’t drum up people to collect wood and assign them tasks, but teach them to long for the vast and endless sea.” That’s the approach.
These clients are already deeply intellectual. What they need isn’t more logic—it’s presence. So, through breathwork, mindful questions, and my own grounded nervous system, I help them shift from analysis to awareness.
Once they feel that shift—even just once—it’s game over, they’ll be internally driven to keep seeking alignment without needing external motivation to keep going.
Jacobsen: On a more practical front—this is a bit of a pivot—but what safety practices do you prioritize when guiding women who are dating in unfamiliar cities? Because even for someone like me, I’ve only felt unsafe in very extreme circumstances—like in war zones or walking through certain areas at night in New York. But for many women, the sense of risk is an everyday reality, except maybe rare circumstances like Ronda Rousey. So this is a common and serious concern.
Mendez: Absolutely. First, I want to emphasize this for anyone listening or reading: there’s a significant gap between the safety experiences of men and women in dating contexts—especially abroad.
That gap is shaped by many factors—social, structural, and historical. Therefore, while this safety advice can apply to anyone, it is particularly crucial for women, as they are statistically more likely to encounter risks in unfamiliar environments.
The first and most crucial step is situational awareness. Be aware of your surroundings, including who is around you, and note the nearby exits or options. Don’t override your gut. If something feels off, it probably is.
I mean, some of what I’m about to say sounds incredibly basic—but it matters. For example, if you’re going on a date and having a great time, be very aware of how much you’re drinking.
I know it sounds like stereotypical grandpa advice, but it makes a real difference. If you have three drinks instead of one, your ability to gauge someone’s intentions—your attunement—decreases significantly. And we’re talking about attunement as a core principle here, right? Being able to read the energy, nuance, and underlying cues in a social interaction.
Let a friend know where you’re going and when you plan to return. Even if they’re not in the same city or country, you can share your live location via a tracking app just for that evening. That kind of check-in isn’t about surveillance—it’s about accountability and layered safety.
Also, trust your gut. If something feels off—even slightly—it’s far better to risk missing a good opportunity than to ignore that inner nudge and find yourself in a dangerous or compromising situation.
If you’re meeting someone for the first time, meet in a public space—especially during the day. Please don’t go jogging in a secluded forest at night with someone you’ve just met. I know that sounds extreme, but I’ve heard enough stories to know it’s not far-fetched.
Before meeting, have a video call. Not a phone call—a video call. You’ll learn a great deal more about someone by observing their face, body language, tone, and expression. This isn’t about figuring out if they’re your soulmate—it’s about quickly filtering out the “absolutely not.” If someone gives off a strange vibe, you’ve saved yourself two hours—or more—of unnecessary discomfort.
These are basic guidelines, but they hold whether you’re dating abroad or at home.
Jacobsen: That’s such practical and often-overlooked advice. Let’s shift gears slightly. Let’s run a fundamental matrix analysis. Imagine a two-axis system, with one axis representing individualistic versus collectivistic societies and another representing traditional versus progressive cultures. That gives us four quadrants. Given that you’ve worked with clients across 24 countries, how do you recommend people navigate these different cultural quadrants when dating?
Mendez: Great question. The first thing I recommend—regardless of location—is that people get clear on what their values are.
Before attempting to decode another culture’s dating norms, it is essential to understand your own emotional and relational non-negotiables. What do you want in terms of connection, autonomy, commitment, expression, or gender dynamics?
Once you have that foundation, then you can start understanding what quadrant you’re operating in—and what it means for connection and compatibility. And that’s why a significant part of my work is values clarification—helping someone recognize what is genuinely important to them.
On the axis of traditional vs. progressive, it’s never a black-and-white conversation. It’s highly nuanced. Let me give you an example.
A foundational cross-cultural study by David Buss in 1989, conducted across 37 cultures, examined what women prioritize in potential partners. One of the highest-ranking traits—across cultures, ethnicities, and socioeconomic groups—was whether the man could act as a protector or provider. That study was replicated as recently as 2022 in over 45 countries, with nearly identical findings.
Now, some may interpret that as a traditional preference. But there’s nuance: protection does not mean a domineering “alpha male” who operates from a rigid, hierarchical mindset. Instead, it can mean someone responsive to challenges, dependable in stressful situations, and emotionally attuned.
So yes, many women still seek that protective quality. Still, they also want a partner who is emotionally present, communicative, and self-aware. That’s where traditional and progressive values start to intersect.
Take, for example, women who claim to be attracted to tall, successful, and high-achieving men. On paper, it sounds ideal. But if that man works 100 hours a week, avoids vulnerability, and shuts down emotionally, he might check the “traditional protector” box yet leave the woman feeling isolated and unseen.
As part of my work, I help clients ask: Is this what you want? Or what you were taught to want?
Jacobsen: That’s such a clear breakdown—especially of how overlapping values can create tension in relationships.
Mendez: Now, regarding individualistic vs. collectivist cultures—I think there’s a powerful myth embedded in individualistic societies, particularly in places like the U.S. You hear it in archetypes like the cowboy or the lone entrepreneur who pulls himself up by his bootstraps.
Frankly, I think that’s bullshit.
We are socially interdependent beings. We thrive through co-regulation. From a neuroscience perspective, our nervous systems stabilize through connection with others. So, while personal agency matters, we need to shift the conversation toward relational interdependence, not hyper-independence.
That’s not to say you need a romantic partner to be happy. Many people live fulfilling single lives. But when you do meetsomeone compatible, the right dynamic elevates everything. One plus one becomes five. On the other hand, the wrong partnership can drain your energy and resources—one plus one becomes minus ten.
I lean more collectivist in my personal and professional lens. Still, I respect that different people have different needs for space, autonomy, and interconnection.
Jacobsen: In terms of your clients, what are some self-defeating behaviours you commonly see?
Mendez: Great question. One widespread self-defeating behaviour is seeking approval from someone who is not a good match. The person knows intellectually that this individual is unavailable, unkind, or misaligned—but they still pursue validation from them.
Another is framing situations in the most disempowering way possible. Take rejection, for example. If someone says, “I’m not interested,” one client might internalize that as, “No one wants me,” instead of seeing it for what it often is: “This person wasn’t a match—and that’s okay.”
A lot of the work involves reframing—not in some vague, new-age way, but in a grounded, realistic way. We explore: What else could be going on? Why might this person not be a good fit for you? Why is this not a reflection of your worth?
Those shifts are subtle—but they’re powerful. And they create space for better decisions and healthier emotional outcomes.
So through much kinder and more self-compassionate self-talk, we can begin to undo years—or even decades—of internalized criticism. Sometimes, we become our own worst enemies.
We might never allow others to speak to us disrespectfully. Still, we often talk to ourselves in harsh, dismissive ways. That, too, is a self-defeating pattern.
Another self-defeating behaviour is not understanding your actual needs. People often confuse what feels familiar—what their comfort zone tells them is “normal”—with what helps them grow.
There’s a concept called a Class Two Experience—something that may not feel great in the moment but is ultimately good for you. For example:
- Waking up early to exercise.
- Doing breathwork instead of letting anxiety spin out of control.
- Writing what Brené Brown calls a “shitty first draft”—getting raw, unfiltered thoughts onto the page so they stop looping in your head.
These are rarely the first responses we default to. But if we train ourselves to reach for these options—even when it feels uncomfortable—we create new evidence for ourselves. We realize: “When I feel this way, and I do this thing, I start to feel better. I see more clearly. I ask better questions.”
That’s the beginning of healing and forward movement.
One of my first mentors told me something that changed my life:
“Show me your state, and I’ll show you your future.”
He wasn’t talking about geography—he meant emotional state. Your state—not your raw intelligence or past achievements—will ultimately shape the quality of your relationships and the trajectory of your life.
Much of this work involves learning to create a state that serves you best rather than letting maladaptive emotional patterns run the show.
Jacobsen: Mentors are human beings, too. Since Tony Robbins mentored you—what do you think he gets most right? And what do you think he gets most wrong?
Mendez: Great question. What Tony gets right is the immense power of self-talk. The language we use with ourselves and others profoundly shapes the meaning we give to life—and that, in turn, shapes how we experience the world. I credit him with helping me grasp the transformative power of that early on.
Where I think he gets it wrong—at least in some contexts—is in his understanding of trauma. There’s often a tendency to bypass or override deep pain with strategies that may work for some but are totally ineffective—or even harmful—for others.
It’s one thing to reframe. It’s another thing to disregard real emotional wounds in favour of a quick motivational fix.
I learned a great deal from him, but it’s been years since I participated in his comprehensive seminar ecosystem. These days, I gravitate more toward modalities that take trauma seriously and aren’t framed around large-scale hype.
And I’ll be honest: the “20,000 people clapping in sync” thing? That used to excite me when I was 24. But now, I much prefer sitting in a room with five thoughtful people, having a deep, honest conversation.
Jacobsen: What are some of your top quotes—the ones that come to mind most often in the context of dating and relationships?
Mendez: I’ll start with Maya Angelou:
“Do the best you can until you know better. When you know better, do better.”
That’s a life guideline for me.
My favourite poet is David Whyte. I’ll paraphrase slightly since it’s more of an extended passage than a quote. He addresses two concepts that have profoundly impacted me.
One is this idea of “half a shade more courage.” It’s not even a full leap—just half a shade more. That incremental movement has felt deeply meaningful in my life.
The second is from one of his prose pieces—possibly not even a poem—where he writes that when you can accurately express the dimensionality of your exile—how far you are from where you want to be—you’re already on your way home. That has stayed with me.
And, of course, there’s the classic:
“Be the change you want to see in the world.”
Simple, yes—but foundational.
Those are three that are top of mind right now.
Jacobsen: Excellent. Sir, it was very nice to meet you. Thank you for your time, your expertise, and time.and your candour.
Mendez: I appreciate that. Thank you so much.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/23
Carl Ola Landgren, M.D., Ph.D., is Director of the Sylvester Myeloma Institute and Chief of the Division of Myeloma at the Sylvester Comprehensive Cancer Center, University of Miami. An internationally recognized leader in multiple myeloma research, he pioneered the use of minimal residual disease (MRD) as a surrogate endpoint for the accelerated approval of drugs. His work integrates cutting-edge diagnostics, personalized therapies, and innovative clinical trial models to improve outcomes and quality of life. Dr. Landgren’s long-term vision focuses on redefining disease classifications, eliminating toxic treatments, and advancing MRD-based strategies to move the field closer to functional cures.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, what motivated the original push to recognize minimal residual disease as an endpoint for accelerated drug approval?
Dr. Carl Ola Landgren: I led the early work on using minimal residual disease, or MRD, as an endpoint for accelerated approval in multiple myeloma over fifteen years ago. At the time, I was working at the National Cancer Institute (NCI), apart of the National Institutes of Health (NIH) in Bethesda, Maryland. We had access to highly effective drugs and treated patients directly at the NIH Clinical Center. We observed that a significant proportion of patients achieved complete responses or remissions.
Given the level of success, I began to consider a critical question: if nearly every patient achieves remission, how do we determine whether any disease remains—and whether that matters for long-term outcomes? It became clear that we needed more sensitive tools to distinguish between truly disease-free patients and those who had undetectable but persistent residual disease.
We began developing and refining more sensitive assays to detect minimal residual disease (MRD). As these technologies advanced, we observed that patients who were MRD-negative—meaning no residual disease was detectable even with the most sensitive methods—had significantly better long-term outcomes. This was a crucial insight.
MRD status could function as a predictive biomarker. If MRD-negative patients consistently showed improved progression-free survival (PFS), then MRD could serve as a surrogate endpoint. That, in turn, would allow us to evaluate new treatments much earlier—potentially within a year—rather than waiting ten to fifteen years for traditional endpoints, such as PFS or overall survival, to mature.
Without a validated early endpoint, I feared that the pace of innovation would stall. Drug developers might be reluctant to invest in new therapies if proving their efficacy requires prohibitively long trials. The field needed a way to measure meaningful benefits much sooner.
In 2009, I helped launch an interagency initiative between the NIH and the FDA to formally evaluate MRD as a potential surrogate endpoint. This effort eventually culminated in the Evidence Meta-Analysis, which we submitted to the FDA last year. That work formed the basis for regulatory consideration of MRD as an endpoint in clinical trials.
Jacobsen: Regarding MRD as an endpoint in clinical trials, specifically for multiple myeloma, how does its inclusion affect the speed and structure of drug development?
Landgren: Incorporating MRD as an early endpoint is a transformative development. Under the traditional model, you need a large, randomized, controlled trial comparing an experimental therapy to a standard-of-care control arm. You then have to wait—often ten to fifteen years—for enough progression or death events to occur in both arms to conduct a mature statistical analysis based on PFS or overall survival.
That timeline delays patient access to promising new therapies, making clinical development slower and more expensive. However, if we can rely on MRD as a validated surrogate endpoint—one that strongly predicts long-term benefit—we can potentially assess efficacy within a year after randomization.
This allows for much earlier readouts and faster regulatory decisions. It also provides a more dynamic and adaptive framework for evaluating treatment regimens. Importantly, it gives patients faster access to therapies that show strong early indications of benefit.
Jacobsen: You are saying you have a biomarker, and that biomarker can be tested one year after randomization to predict what will happen ten to fifteen years later?
Landgren: That means you can open the study, enroll patients, and one year after randomization, check the biomarker in both study arms. If you see a higher rate of MRD negativity—MRD being the biomarker—that means you can predict that progression-free survival ten or fifteen years later will be more prolonged.
So, you submit your MRD results to the FDA, and they can review that data and potentially grant accelerated approval. Once that happens, the drug becomes immediately available to patients, giving them access to treatment more than ten years earlier than they would under traditional timelines.
Of course, the study must continue in order to capture the clinical endpoint—progression-free survival. If that data, once mature, confirms the superiority of the drug, then the FDA may grant full approval. While the drug company can use the early MRD endpoint to obtain accelerated approval, it still must complete the study, collect all required data, and pursue full approval.
If the follow-up study fails to confirm the benefit, the drug will be removed from the market. However, we have shown that MRD is a powerful predictor of progression-free survival. If everything follows the expected trajectory, it provides much faster access to effective treatments.
Jacobsen: What types of cancer are most likely to follow multiple myeloma in adopting MRD as a regulatory endpoint?
Landgren: I first saw the potential for this approach when I was working at the National Cancer Institute, part of the NIH, more than twenty years ago. I began pursuing this work then, though it took a long time to convince others. Many people told me it was just a theory—that it would be impossible to persuade the FDA. However, I knew it was the only viable path forward, so we persisted.
Other groups eventually became interested in this area as well. One group formed during our work—the so-called I² team or I-team group. They began similar work in myeloma after seeing what we were doing.
Our efforts also inspired others to begin thinking about MRD in additional disease areas. I have many friends around the world working on related research. Long ago, I was also interested in diseases such as chronic lymphocytic leukemia, lymphomas, and other hematologic malignancies, and I maintained close contact with colleagues in those fields.
Just this week, I spoke with colleagues working in the field of lymphoma. A few weeks ago, I spoke with researchers in the chronic lymphocytic leukemia space. These conversations happen frequently. Many of them are trying to replicate, in their respective fields, the kind of work we did in myeloma. They often reach out to me for advice.
At some point, they may succeed. However, it is not as simple as copying what we did and submitting it. They must generate all the data themselves. It is a substantial undertaking. You need to conduct numerous studies, including randomized controlled trials. You need to analyze different drugs in parallel. You must also conduct a detailed statistical analysis.
That analysis must follow a predefined statistical analysis plan, and the FDA must endorse that plan. Once you have sufficient data and an FDA-endorsed plan, you can perform the analysis and submit your results for FDA review. With enough rigour and compelling data, you may receive approval.
For us, that entire process took about fifteen years. So, I worked on it for fifteen years. However, given that we have now created a precedent—that it is possible to do so—other diseases may be able to adopt this approach in just a few years. Hopefully, the timeline can be much, much faster. That could apply to other diseases, potentially including some solid tumours.
The critical part is that you need several key components in place: you must have good drugs, a standardized tool to measure the biomarker—MRD—and studies conducted in a harmonized way. This ensures you can pool data and conduct a large-scale analysis involving multiple drugs studied in parallel. Yes, it requires multiple components.
Jacobsen: What about the limitations of MRD as a biomarker, particularly in solid tumours or other blood cancers?
Landgren: That is an important question. In general, biomarkers have inherent limitations simply because they are proxies—they are not the final clinical outcome. If progression-free survival is the ultimate goal, nothing can be more definitive than measuring progression-free survival itself. You could think of it like this: if you are navigating through the wilderness, a map can be very accurate, but the real landscape is always more precise. However, with an excellent map, you can get very far.
That analogy holds for biomarkers. They serve as intermediate indicators of reality. What we demonstrated—across many drugs, many studies, and various patient populations—is that MRD is a robust and predictive measure. However, as a general caveat, reality always wins. That is why, under current regulatory frameworks, you must still submit final clinical outcomes, such as progression-free survival, to gain full approval.
That said, I do believe that with the accumulation of data in myeloma—if more and more studies continue to replicate our findings—MRD could eventually become accepted as a standalone endpoint for full approval. For now, though, MRD remains an endpoint for early or accelerated approval. You still need to submit the clinical data showing progression-free survival.
So, that is one type of limitation—one that applies to any biomarker, not just to MRD or to myeloma. It is a general limitation of surrogate endpoints.
When we think about MRD in solid tumours or other hematologic malignancies, additional limitations may arise. Some diseases may not shed detectable disease into the bloodstream or not in a way that lends itself easily to tracking via blood-based assays. So, depending on the biology of the disease, the effectiveness of MRD monitoring may vary.
Still, I believe that with increasingly sensitive assays, most—if not all—diseases could eventually be tracked through blood. This becomes a technological issue more than a biological one. I have not conducted this ranking exercise myself. However, I am confident that if you were to rank diseases by their suitability for MRD monitoring, some would be easier to adapt to this approach, while others would be more challenging.
Another limitation arises in disease areas where effective therapies are not available. In such cases, it is challenging to achieve MRD negativity simply because the treatments are not potent enough. However, my counterargument is that in those disease areas, there is also less immediate need for MRD as a regulatory endpoint. MRD becomes useful when effective therapies are already available, allowing many patients to achieve responses. However, you do not yet have a cure—and when further progress depends on being able to distinguish levels of residual disease.
Suppose a field is still in an early stage, where few treatments exist and survival rates are unfortunately very low. In that case, traditional endpoints such as overall survival or basic response rates may still be more appropriate. MRD becomes vital only when you have reached a sort of plateau—when new progress depends on differentiating deep responses from superficial ones and speeding up drug development by using reliable surrogate markers.
I have attempted to shed light on the overall limitations of biomarkers—technical limitations, disease-specific limitations, and the broader context of where a field stands in terms of therapy development. Those are my perspectives.
Jacobsen: Now, with the shift toward blood-based MRD testing versus bone marrow aspirates, how do you see this affecting clinical research in the medium-term future—say, over the next ten years—and how will it impact both research and clinical practice?
Landgren: My answer is this: life, in general, is about change. Everything evolves. And when it comes to medicine, we will continue to see innovation and the emergence of new technologies.
There is a strong push for blood-based technologies in minimal residual disease (MRD) testing. These methods offer significant advantages from a patient perspective. Drawing blood is much more appealing to patients than undergoing a bone marrow biopsy.
That said, there are technical challenges. In multiple myeloma, for example, which resides in the bone marrow, a biopsy may detect disease that a blood test cannot. This is because myeloma cells may not circulate into the bloodstream at the same rate or in sufficient quantities to be detectable by the bloodstream. So, we need to demonstrate a strong correlation between blood-based MRD and bone marrow–based MRD. That correlation work is still ongoing.
Furthermore, as I mentioned earlier, some diseases may or may not release tumour material into the blood as readily. Therefore, there are biological and technical limitations, and we must show statistically that blood-based testing is reliable.
Now, I have worked extensively with DNA, RNA, protein, circulating tumour cells, and free circulating DNA. I’ve been involved in many of these studies for over ten to fifteen years. I am aware of the research being conducted globally. I also chair an annual meeting focused exclusively on MRD in myeloma and all related technologies. Based on everything I have seen, blood-based testing is on the horizon.
I believe that within the next year, we will begin to see the first blood-based MRD tests enter clinical practice. Within five to ten years—the timeframe you mentioned—I think blood-based MRD testing will become far more prominent and even dominant in the field.
This shift will not only enhance drug development, which is the main context I’ve discussed so far, but it will also expand the use of MRD in routine clinical practice. In drug development, as I explained earlier, we test MRD one year after randomization to predict outcomes ten to fifteen years later.
But if you have a reliable blood-based MRD test, you can do something different altogether: you can use it for real-time, daily decision-making in the clinic. This extends beyond research—it directly informs the standard of care for patients. Say you treat one hundred patients and monitor them using these new sensitive blood-based tests. If all of them are MRD-negative, then over time—perhaps after a year or more—you may begin to see disease activity re-emerge in one or two patients. In the future, that could prompt an earlier change in therapy.
Currently, these blood-based tests are not yet available for routine use. So, patients are monitored without fully knowing what may be happening beneath the surface. The disease can progress “under the radar,” and by the time clinical symptoms appear, it may be too late to intervene early. At that point, therapy is changed, but the patient may already be significantly sicker.
The availability of these tests will likely lead to earlier detection of changes in disease trajectory. Physicians will be able to tailor therapy more precisely—this is the essence of personalized or individualized treatment. I also believe that MRD testing will work both ways: it can help you escalate therapy when the disease reappears, but it can also help you de-escalate therapy when the disease becomes undetectable.
For example, if a patient receives combination therapy and achieves MRD negativity, you may be able to scale back the treatment—reducing the number of drugs or dosing intensity. This minimizes unnecessary toxicity.
Multiple myeloma has long been treated with combination regimens. In the past, high-dose chemotherapy followed by autologous stem cell transplant—often just called “transplant” in the U.S. or “high-dose chemotherapy” in Europe—was the standard. With modern, effective therapies, if patients become MRD-negative, they might avoid these older, more toxic treatments altogether.
That could have a huge impact—not only on clinical decision-making but also on patient quality of life. This is how MRD testing contributes to personalized care, where treatment is tailored to the individual’s needs and disease response.
Jacobsen: So, what role will the Kenneth C. Griffin Breakthrough Cancer Research Building play in scaling MRD research and, as you were discussing, personalized cancer treatment strategies? That is always the big challenge—scaling promising treatments so that they are accessible and affordable for a broader population.
Landgren: Yes—the Kenneth C. Griffin Building plays a vital role for the Sylvester Comprehensive Cancer Center and the University of Miami. It provides a dedicated facility specifically for the cancer center. This focus is critical because Sylvester is not only advancing cutting-edge innovation but also delivering world-class care to patients with many different malignancies.
The University of Miami is a large, evolving institution. But within that broader context, having a dedicated cancer center—housed in a focused, specialized facility like the Griffin Building—makes a significant difference.
Why? Because it enables us to concentrate our resources, build specialized infrastructure, set strategic priorities more effectively, and assemble the best people in the field. It helps us recruit top-tier researchers and clinicians who want to work in an environment focused exclusively on oncology innovation.
So, the Griffin Building is not just a physical space. It will become a hub for those of us—myself included—who are driving research and innovation in cancer. It allows us to work outside the constraints of a more general medical system and be part of a highly focused, mission-driven cancer center.
We are all part of the University of Miami, but having a more focused structure within the university is a considerable advantage. Organizationally, there is still much we can do to further align reporting structures to support cancer-focused work for those of us in oncology. That way, there is no dilution of effort with broader, more general approaches. Instead, the focus becomes the defining theme—allowing us to be more competitive and more successful.
In life, in general, when you focus, focus, and focus again—you go further, faster. That is exactly what this building represents. The Kenneth C. Griffin Breakthrough Cancer Research Building is a vehicle to help us achieve that.
Jacobsen: My final question, which I should be asking all scientists: in your area of research, what would you consider—within your lifetime of work—looking back and looking forward, to be the “holy grail” of your research in terms of disease prevention and treatment? So, you’ve studied certain cancers, and MRD is part of that puzzle in terms of developing better treatments.
Landgren: Yes, that makes sense. I believe minimal residual disease (MRD) is a central part of that vision—a key component in the success formula going forward. The ability to test for and confirm that no disease is left behind is critical to truly curing a disease. You can have the best drugs in the world, but if you cannot confirm whether they worked, you’re flying blind. MRD gives you that resolution—it tells you whether the disease is gone or not.
So, in that regard, MRD is essential. Looking ahead, MRD tools will continue to improve. They will become blood-based, more sensitive, and undergo iterative refinement. But that is only part of the picture.
We are also witnessing the ongoing development of new therapies. The field is steadily moving away from traditional, toxic chemotherapies and toward chemotherapy-free regimens. We’re seeing the rise of immunotherapies, novel monoclonal antibodies, and innovative combinations with small molecules. These can eradicate disease in a high proportion of patients. This shift will also help eliminate outdated treatment modalities.
In addition, the development of biomarkers that can help us understand both mechanisms of response and mechanisms of resistance will be crucial. We now know that, in response to therapy, cancer cells can evolve and acquire mutations that allow them to evade treatment—often by losing or modifying the very targets the drugs aim for. Therefore, having tools that track such changes and guide treatment adjustments will be essential in the pursuit of a cure.
Another important aspect will be optimizing the timing of treatment initiation. Starting therapy at the right time—based on predictive and dynamic biomarkers—will help ensure better outcomes and avoid overtreatment or delayed care.
In summary, the holy grail is a future where we can detect diseases early, eradicate them with tailored, less toxic regimens, and verify that they are truly gone—all guided by precise, adaptive biomarkers. That is the direction I believe we are heading, and MRD is at the heart of that evolution.
The disease I work on—multiple myeloma—is still diagnosed clinically. To illustrate, if someone has a broken leg, youcan take an X-ray and see the fracture. You immediately identify the problem and treat it accordingly.
However, myeloma exists in a more gray area. You can be visibly sick from it and receive a diagnosis of myeloma. However, you can also have all the biomarkers associated with active disease—yet still not show outward symptoms.
That condition is often referred to as smouldering myeloma, and for a long time, it has been managed quite differently from active disease. But with today’s newer technologies, we now understand that many patients in that smouldering group have the full biological signature of active disease. They are, in a sense, silently progressing.
Therefore, redefining the clinical definition of multiple myeloma will be a crucial step moving forward. If we can detect the disease earlier—before symptoms manifest—and if we apply our best available therapies in that early phase, alongside MRD tools to confirm disease eradication, then we can dramatically shift the treatment paradigm. The short-term goal is to cure many more patients.
Jacobsen: Excellent. Well, Dr. Landgren, thank you very much for your time. I truly appreciate it—and thank you for sharing your expertise.
Landgren: Thank you so much for having me. I hope you enjoy your trip.
Jacobsen: Thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/22
Sapira Cahana is a New York-based mental health counsellor (MHC-LP) and is an interfaith chaplain-in-training specializing in existential and relational therapy. Sapira Cahana and Scott Douglas Jacobsen explore the concept of the sublime as both a Romantic heritage and a contemporary phenomenon. Originating in the late 18th century as a reaction to industrialization, the sublime was sought in vast natural landscapes by figures like Wordsworth and Coleridge. Today, artificial means—classical music, immersive technologies, algorithmic stimuli—can reliably evoke awe, yet risk hollowing out its authenticity by masking its existential depth. True sublimity, they argue, arises from organic encounters—nature’s unpredictability, human relationships, ritual, and contextual rootedness—that confront us with infinity, shadow, and wonder, fostering genuine meaning and connection.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here once again with the philosophically broad-minded therapist, Sapira Cahana. We’re going to talk about the sublime. We’ve already covered comedy and the humdrum. So, when you think of the sublime—beyond the musical band—what comes to mind?
Sapira Cahana: First of all, thank you again for doing this with me. I find these conversations stimulating and enriching. Exploring topics we all care about with you is deeply rewarding.
The sublime evokes the Romantic period. The term emerged in the late 18th century as a response to modernity and industrialization, capturing our experience of transcendence in the face of grandeur. It was during the Industrial Revolution—when people fled polluted cities for remote natural heights—that Romantic thinkers sought solace in experiences that moved beyond everyday life.
Classic figures like William Wordsworth, Samuel Taylor Coleridge, and William Blake in Britain, and Goethe in Germany are central to Romanticism. They emphasized the sublime as a counterbalance to industrial rationalism.
Jacobsen: How are you defining modernity in the contemporary period?
Cahana: I begin with the Industrial Age—the rise of mechanization, urban crowds, and smog—pushing people toward mountaintops and untouched wilderness. That unrest birthed our modern idea of sublimity: seeking transcendence, now entwined with today’s ideologies.
Jacobsen: It does bring Tolkien to mind—The Lord of the Rings presents a countercultural critique of industrialization: the march on Isengard, the idyllic elves, and the harmony of nature versus destructive machinery. Do we see nostalgia for a pre-industrial “natural” life cropping up repeatedly in literature and culture?
Cahana: Absolutely. This is central to Romantic imagery: nature as an antidote to industry. Artists like Caspar David Friedrich painted lone figures and mountainous vistas to evoke awe and introspection. You mentioned invisibility in modern industry—reminds me of a thought attributed to Neil deGrasse Tyson: if car emissions were visible, people wouldn’t drive them. The hidden nature of pollution makes it acceptable. It’s an industrial convenience built on invisibility.
The power of the sublime often depends not just on sight but on the phenomenological experience—intense feelings of awe, terror, or grandeur. The Romantics heavily emphasized natural spectacles—stormy seas, towering mountains—as conduits for sublime experience. But the sublime can also emerge in human relationships.
Jacobsen: Do you believe the sublime relates to the physiological response to that sense of awe or transcendence that nature can produce?
Cahana: Yes—while nature is a classic source of the sublime, so are profound human encounters. Intense emotions—whether in beauty, love, or existential revelation—can trigger a cognitive suspension and physiological rush akin to the sublime.
Jacobsen: What are the artificial ways we try to recreate these experiences? Much classical music over the centuries was oriented toward this. It was often composed in deeply religious contexts. Still, nonetheless, it was rooted in a profound devotion to something unseen, something that may or may not exist, but devotion to something invisible, regardless.
Cahana: Yes, I recently attended a workshop where I listened to opera in the forest, among the trees. It took the Romantics out of the opera house. It placed them directly into nature, which produced different emotional invocations—or perhaps evocations. The emphasis on the emotional state intensifies the sublime. It amplifies it. Yes.
Jacobsen: Is there a threshold for the sublime? Can you even experience the sublime in an industrial context?
Cahana: Right. That’s an important and fascinating question. You alluded to it earlier, and I was thinking of Robert Nozick’s “experience machine.” It’s a thought experiment about hedonism—whether people would choose simulated pleasure over authentic experience.
Nozick argued that even if the machine provided maximum pleasure, something would still be missing. It would feel simulated—inauthentic—and most people would not choose to plug in. He concludes that we want more than pleasure; we want meaning and genuine connection. This brings to mind works like Brave New World by Aldous Huxley—literature that explores artificial experiences of pleasure that appear intense but ultimately feel empty or dehumanizing.
I wonder—this is just speculation—but perhaps that’s why naturally induced ecstatic states, like those from ecstatic dance, breathwork, or even childbirth, are so revered. They represent organic, full-bodied experiences that contrast with synthetic ones. We seem to valorize those states and look suspiciously at simulations.
It’s because the shadow side of simulated experiences looms large. It casts a long shadow over the pleasurable aspect of artificially induced sublimity. In contrast, when the sublime is naturally produced—emerging through practice, ritual, or careful preparation—the shadow is worked through more organically. It’s anticipated. It’s processed. I wonder what you think about that. I’m curious.
Jacobsen: I think so. The Canadian pianist Glenn Gould, who was especially famous for his interpretations of Bach, comes to mind. He died in 1982. He visited the Soviet Union and played a little Bach and other pieces of music they hadn’t heard live in some time.
To some, it may have felt alien, mechanical, or even divine—yet it was a man, sitting at a piano, performing with deep devotion. He, along with Herbert von Karajan, was an early pioneer of recorded music. They foresaw an era where music became a private, immersive experience—listened to alone in a room, during a jog, or while biking—enriching our engagement with the world around us.
Much of the music people play in those settings is banal or repetitive. Still, some of it—at the right moment—can provoke awe, even in the heart of an industrial environment. Think of New York City: people with headphones on, listening to a favourite track on repeat for hours. That, too, can be a sublime experience—personal, transcendent—even amid the noise and chaos of urban life.
You always have Philharmonic orchestras in various cities, and those performances can provide the sublime on a larger scale. But the artificially induced sublime can be achieved—it can be done reliably and repeatably.
So, in some sense, newer technologies blur the line between the industrial period and the Romantic ideal of a more idyllic past. The Romantics chose to move away from the industrial context toward something more ideal. Still, you could not necessarily reverse that movement.
To live in that artificial context, you must first build the entire industrial infrastructure. It is not a vice versa situation. You cannot have the artificially sublime without the industrial scaffolding that enables it in the first place. So when it comes to inducing sublime experiences, whether privately or publicly, the context matters deeply.
Cahana: Yes. That’s about inducing. There’s something mechanical that strips away layers of mystery. It tends to amplify a sense of meaninglessness. The trajectory of the sublime aims toward transcendence—toward ultimate meaning, a sense of oneness, or even non-dualism, depending on your philosophical lens.
But when the experience is metabolized in a way that is deliberate, IV-dripped, algorithmically generated—when it is produced through engineered dopamine hits—it takes on a sinister undertone. It undermines the confrontation that authentic sublimity offers: the experience of infinitude, solitude, depth, the abyss. Ultimately, it’s this confrontation that leads to wonder.
There’s an almost alchemical quality to this movement into the infinite. It is not culturally exclusive, even though its intellectual framing comes out of the Enlightenment and the Western philosophical tradition. It feels more universal. It speaks to a human capacity for wonder. It’sn’t limited by culture.
Jacobsen: That brings something to mind—a minor footnote. There’s a not-so-well-known documentary about Glenn Gould by Bruno Monsaingeon, titled The Alchemist. It portrays him, I think, before the significant decline in his mental health. He eventually suffered a stroke and passed away.
But the other thought is that our current fears—especially around audio-based artificial intelligence—might be misplaced. These systems rely on statistical reproduction, not true generativity.
Noam Chomsky has a famous point in linguistics: language systems are built from a finite set of rules and symbols, but they permit infinite generativity. That is, from a finite base, we can produce endless meaning. We need those boundaries to allow for infinite variation—for different styles and flavours of infinity, so to speak. Human communication happens within this context.
These AI systems, on the other hand, are based on finite statistical models that tend to loop. Think of your favourite song played over and over again. Our evolved context assumed peak experiences happened rarely, sporadically. But we’ve created superstimuli—intense inputs designed to elicit robust responses—that we plan for and repeat obsessively. This may be out of sync with our evolved emotional and cognitive systems.
So, to your earlier point about dopamine and other neurochemical effects, yes—it can resemble a drug. And as with most drugs, overuse can leave us unbalanced. We may be leaving ourselves vulnerable to emotional and cognitive imbalance due to these engineered experiences. We are not fully accounting for that.
And yet, we tend to focus only on the more obvious cases. But even subtle artificial stimuli can impact us in profound ways. This brings me to two additional thoughts. First, the value of more natural environments, where there is an ebb and flow that matches human rhythms. And second, the richness of human relationships within those environments, where you’ve had these profound experiences. And they, in a sense, mean more because they happen less often.
Cahana: They occur less frequently, yes—but they’re also situated within a community that recognizes ebb and flow. So, while there may be death in one’s life, there’s also birth. In a kinship model, you’re in a relationship with everyone and everything. You’re cultivating depth, and simultaneously holding the presence of both birth and death—sometimes on an almost daily basis.
And not to overly romanticize kinship models—they bring their existential weight, if you will—but within relationships, there’s a kind of meaning-making that naturally arises. In contrast, to be atomized, artificially induced into pseudo-sublime experiences, and easily manipulated, that undermines the evolutionary architecture our corporeal states are designed to orient us toward.
We have evolutionary drives. They do not pull us in every direction. Still, they do make us vulnerable—vulnerable to manipulation through superstimuli and false transcendence.
Jacobsen: And everything we produce—vocally or otherwise—is one-off. I think you mentioned this earlier, how the vocal cords shape sound musically, and each production is unique. Over time, a person’s voice changes. We can hear youth, aging, and emotional states.
Similarly, every birth is different. Every death is different. There’s a reason for that design—an evolutionary rationale, perhaps. So when we create artifice built on repeatable sameness, it may prove maladaptive in the long term. There’s a psychological model known as variable reinforcement—that’s the one I was thinking of—where the reward is unpredictable. It’s not uniform repetition, but patterned unpredictability. That seems to strengthen behaviour and resilience.
Each expression may share similarity, but not sameness. That kind of variability is more aligned with how we evolved, and how we should structure societies, favouring diversity in experience over uniformity.
Cahana: What you’re saying makes me think of context as fundamental, and the dangers of losing it. For example, encountering a random mountain can feel transcendent. You’re on a meandering path, and suddenly you come upon an awe-inspiring scene. The novelty of that moment helps create the right conditions for the sublime.
But when we’re entirely out of context—and the things we interact with are out of context—when the world loses its historical and emotional grounding, everything becomes rootless. It’s as if we’re constantly presented with flowers in a vase, detached from the soil they grew in. And we cannot tell if they even grew together or separately.
In that decontextualized state, the sublime becomes hyper-individualized and one-off. It loses continuity. It lacks lineage. By contrast, think about birth—as you were mentioning the metaphor of the voice and the birth canal. There’s a gestational period, a timeline, a lineage of genetic material. It happens at a specific moment, in a particular place.
Whether or not we assign meaning to that place or time, there is an embeddedness—a situatedness—that gives the process weight. It creates a slow unfolding. And that slowness, that contextualization, matters.
And I have, perhaps, a bias—though it feels grounded. I will still name it as a bias: I believe we reach experiences of profound transcendence when we truly engage with the details of our embeddedness.
That existential moment—floating on a rock in space—can evoke dread or the existential sublime. But it can also lead to diverging responses that make it difficult to pin down as a coherent experience of the sublime. It is just one option among many—nihilism, awe, existential vertigo. All become equally plausible.
But when we engage with the specific context—say, the mountain that is directly provoking the sublime experience—it grounds us. It anchors us to the Earth, to our lives. And from that rootedness, we are then lifted upward, diagonally, or however one visualizes transcendence.
It may be a bias, but it feels aligned with more profound wisdom. It invites us to confront our shadows. It reaches into the core of what it means to have a transcendent experience. What do you think?
Jacobsen: I mean, context is relational. The richness of any context lies in the richness of its relations. And for us, those relations only matter to the extent we are aware of them. For instance, someone who is blind might not see a mountain, and if no one describes it to them, they might only feel inclines and declines underfoot. That is still meaningful, but very different from visually encountering the full grandeur of a sunlit mountain in a forest in British Columbia.
It is a very different experience. That’s why the Zen koan comes to mind: If a tree falls in the forest and no one is there to hear it, does it make a sound? Or, if one hand claps, is that still clapping?
These koans push us toward the idea of the echo, toward internal resonance. The sublime, in our experience, is an internal echo. There is an amount of sensory input required, yes, but also a readiness to perceive.
I think of Ezra Pound’s line: “The water-bug’s mittens show on the bright rock below him.” That image requires a pond, a rock, light from a nuclear furnace—a sun—reflecting on water, and a mind able to register it. You need the scene to be framed—what Pound called the “four wide frame.” There’s a vast temporal and material context required for even a fleeting internal response in a bug.
For us, it is the same. Internal experiences are never isolated. They are embedded in extended, temporal, and material contexts. And honestly, who does not love a big old rock with some trees and dirt on it? It is great.
So when it comes to contextualization, it is primarily relational. It relies on having an internal model, even one you do not entirely control. Our experience of the sublime emerges from that lack of complete control. We are born into the world without mastery over our internal experiences. And that is a prerequisite for encountering the sublime.
If you are not registering those sensations, something has likely gone wrong neurologically or emotionally. For most people, most of the time, we have emotions, and we have them whether we want them or not. Emotional self-regulation can help us manage those states, but the feelings still come. The same is true for the sublime.
How we manifest that sense of the sublime, what it is connected to, the words we use to describe it—those will be culturally shaped. But the core capacity for awe remains. Just as we see many different languages but a very likely universal grammar underlying them, I think we see various manifestations of the sublime. Still, they are all rooted in a shared system of sentiment and response. Otherwise, we would probably be a different species altogether, with an entirely different framework for how we engage with the world.
Cahana: I was holding onto your comment about what we consider different abilities or disabilities. There are many wisdom stories about people who, after losing one sense, become mystic seers. The Pythia in ancient Greek mythology—the Oracle at Delphi—was, I believe, blind. She was the high priestess who evoked the transcendent for others who could see, but could not see clearly.
I’m also thinking of the parable of the elephant—the large elephant being touched by different blind people, each describing only the part they can feel. And there are Hasidic stories, too, involving blind beggars or deaf mystics. So yes, we are all limited—each of us. And our limitations can hinder us from fully experiencing the transcendent. Yet at the same time, we all have an infinite capacity for it.
That feels important—that the sublime is not culturally dependent or body-dependent. It is life-dependent. It is the very essence of being alive: to gravitate toward awe, to orbit around the transcendent, to oscillate between meaning and questioning, to wrestle with it, to confront it. It is our haunting.
Jacobsen: Are there any psychotherapeutic cases where someone is incapable of experiencing the sublime?
Cahana: Incapable?
Jacobsen: Yes. I mean structurally, where there’s a psychological or neurological block, and it becomes nearly impossible to access.
Cahana: I could not be a therapist if I believed anyone was incapable of experiencing the sublime. I do think there are times in our lives when our choices are narrowed—when we do not have 360 degrees of possibility. Sometimes we only have four degrees of movement.
But even within those four degrees, there is space. We feel more constrained, yes, but that does not mean the sublime is inaccessible. I believe that when the internal tension—the inner gnarl—emerges, it creates the conditions for the sublime to descend, to interact, to make contact. That is the inevitable potential in each human being.
Cahana: Now, sometimes life is tragically shortened. Babies die. Do they have a whole life through which to experience the sublime? Perhaps not directly. But the very fact of their existence—being born into context—can evoke the sublime in others. Their brief presence may generate the conditions for others to experience awe, grief, love, and the profound shadow cast when the sublime is absent, when we feel the finite rather than the infinite.
Jacobsen: Let’s say I walk into a bar… Let’s say I walk into a neuroscience lab… Let’s make it a joke:
Let’s say an Orthodox priest, a Hasidic rabbi, and a Muslim Sufi walk into a psychotherapist’s office. Each speaks their respective native language—let’s say Church Slavonic, Hebrew, and Arabic.
They share some intermediate grasp of a lingua franca, perhaps English, and manage to connect on shared ground. Now, imagine they all come to British Columbia. They look upon a majestic mountain, its grandeur wrapped in trees and mist. They each experience awe. They feel the sublimity of the moment.
Perhaps, at the same time, a band named Sublime is playing in the background, singing about a “Lou Dog” being the only way to stay sane. Their English is just good enough to catch the meaning. They translate this lyric into Hebrew, Cyrillic script, and Arabic in their heads.
Then they all fly to New York City and sit in your office. They ask you to help them bridge the gap between their internal and cultural experiences of the sublime. How do you help someone translate intercultural senses of the sublime?
Cahana: So, first, to demystify your example, these are individuals who are already primed for the experience of the sublime.
Jacobsen: It’s speculative, of course. But religious leaders, people who live theological lives with sincere commitment—even with the existence of bad actors—are generally attuned to the unseen. They are sensitized to awe.
Cahana: Yes. That sensitivity cannot be contrived. It cannot be manufactured. That’s what we were discussing earlier, when we talked about artificial experiences of the sublime. Two people can climb Mount Everest and have entirely different experiences—one drawn to the physical exertion, the climb itself; the other struck by the vastness of the view from the summit.
The sublime arises at different moments. It can emerge in the night or bright daylight. When someone walks through my office door and brings me an experience of the sublime through their cultural lens, my role is to hold that experience with them, for longer.
My goal is to draw it out. Let the moment linger. Help them explore it and begin to unpack the symbolic layers, because the sublime is always a symbolic experience—it points to something larger. It belongs to the territory of meaning. So what is the meaning? Does the experience make them feel ready to die, not out of despair, but from encountering something so immense and transcendent that life itself feels complete?
Or is the feeling rooted in fear, perhaps fear of the world’s direction? That’s what the sublime demands. That’s what I try to help them uncover: what is the more profound message? Even someone as spiritually seasoned as a Sufi mystic needs that help. No one is impervious. No one is immune to misinterpreting the message of the sublime. No one is immune to overstating it either. Regardless of training, ritual, or devotion, we are embodied beings.
And that matters. That’s part of the meaning. Our physicality is part of our access to the sublime. You do not become God simply because you have experienced God.
Jacobsen: Any favourite quotes on the sublime before we go?
Cahana: I love Samuel Taylor Coleridge’s Kubla Khan. He writes: “Beware! Beware! His flashing eyes, his floating hair!” It’s this incarnation of the sublime—intense, luminous, almost divine. Coleridge was under the influence of opium when he wrote that poem—an artificial production of the sublime.
And even in that state, he went straight to the danger—the shadow side of it. That warning, that caution he evokes, is one of the reasons not to over-romanticize the sublime. Instead, we should honour it with reverence, for both what it can produce and what it can provoke.
Jacobsen: Sapira, thank you, as always, for your expertise and your time. Lovely to see you again.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/21
Romana King, a seasoned financial and real estate expert, discusses Canadians’ top financial regrets, especially not saving early enough. She emphasizes the importance of financial literacy, budgeting, and realistic homeownership goals. King highlights generational shifts, noting that today’s young Canadians face tougher economic challenges without pensions and rising living costs. She advocates for early education, practical tools like spreadsheets, and using public resources such as government sites and library seminars. King also underscores the emotional aspects of financial decisions and encourages openness about financial mistakes to promote resilience and long-term stability. Trusted information and adaptability are key to financial success.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Romana King, an award-winning personal finance and real estate expert with over 20 years of experience.
She is a senior editor at money.ca and has contributed to major Canadian publications, including The Globe and Mail, Maclean’s, and The Toronto Star. She is also the best-selling host of No More and frequently appears on CBC, Global News, and CityNews.
Romana is also a licensed real estate professional in Ontario and British Columbia through her platform, RK Homeowner. You can follow her on X at @RKHomeowner, where she provides insights on smart homeownership, financial literacy, and expert financial advice. You can find more at romana.com. What were the most surprising findings from your money.ca survey on Canadians’ biggest financial regrets?
Romana King: It wasn’t necessarily surprising, but what stood out was the sheer number of people who had financial regrets. The large percentage of respondents expressing regret was notable, though the nature of their regrets—mainly not saving enough—was expected.
Many people don’t fully grasp the impact of not starting early or not saving enough until it’s too late. Instead of saving $100 a month, they need to save $1,000 because they no longer have the time to benefit from compound interest or long-term investment growth. The sheer volume of people facing this issue was surprising.
Jacobsen: That’s interesting. What financial mistakes did people make that prevented them from reaching their milestones? Not everyone wants to retire or own a home, but most Canadians want both.
King: Yes, the core issue is financial freedom. Whether someone wants to own a home or retire—some people have even said, “I want to work in retirement”—the real goal is financial independence. What that looks like varies from person to person.
As you mentioned, some people prioritize homeownership, while others prefer the flexibility of renting due to the financial and logistical responsibilities of owning a home. Ultimately, however, everyone strives for financial freedom.
One of the most telling findings from our survey is that nearly half of Canadians struggle to build savings. 46.4% of respondents said they had difficulty saving for a nest egg or even a down payment on a home. That’s a striking statistic. Looking back a few generations, people had similar concerns, but homeownership and financial security didn’t feel as unattainable as they do today.
You felt like you had an opportunity—you just had to put your nose to the grindstone and do it. Even with that level of effort, it just might not be possible.
Jacobsen: What are many young Canadians doing when they turn to loved ones for financial support after making money mistakes? Is that a common occurrence? Is it uncommon? Are there any incorrect assumptions in the question?
King: This isn’t drastically different from past generations, but we don’t have a strong national approach to financial literacy. Regardless of what organization I belong to or what job I have, I’ve been banging that drum for too long now. Many people feel confused about financial matters, and when they face challenges, what do they do?
They turn to the people they love because they trust them. So, yes, young Canadians do rely on their loved ones for support.
We also have to consider the economic landscape. Previous generations benefited from strong markets—whether in housing, stocks, or job security. There were more opportunities, wages were rising, and the cost of living was relatively lower.
By contrast, young people today are entering the workforce or trying to advance in their careers while dealing with significantly higher living costs. That’s why many turn to their family members for financial assistance.
Jacobsen: How do generational differences shape financial regrets and decision-making? You noted that generations aren’t that different in their goals, but you hinted at some key differences.
King: There isn’t a generational difference in the ultimate goal—financial freedom. However, there are massive differences in how each generation tries to achieve it.
The path was relatively clear if I look back to my grandparents’ or even my parents’ era. You got an education—whether through trade school, university, or college—you found a job, and you might have changed companies a couple of times, but generally, you stayed with an employer for 10 to 15 years. You’d earn a pension, typically a defined benefit or contribution pension, and then you retired.
That is not the reality for today’s younger generation. Defined benefit pensions or employer-sponsored pension plans have largely been phased out over the past 10 to 20 years. As a result, people now have a completely different approach to achieving financial freedom.
This shift has also changed how people work. Many are far more willing to embrace the gig economy or take on side hustles—something my father’s generation would have scoffed at. He would have said, “Why would you bother with that? Put all your eggs in one basket—stick with the company you work for.”
There is quite a big difference. I don’t believe that’s solely due to preference, though—I think we are shaped by what we experience.
If the younger generation—including myself and you—does not have access to employer-provided pension plans, that will inevitably shape how we pursue financial freedom. For example, I may now consider holding real estate as an investment because I don’t have a defined pension plan.
That’s just an example, not a prescription.
Jacobsen: How can financial literacy help people prevent costly mistakes? Or, when mistakes happen—which they inevitably will—how can they be less damaging?
King: Yes. When introduced early enough, financial literacy allows people to make small mistakes, adjust course, and avoid making expensive ones later.
What do I mean by that? In a world dominated by digital transactions—where debit and credit cards have replaced cash—it’s essential to understand how to use these tools responsibly. It is critical to know what it means to carry a balance on a high-interest credit card and its long-term impact.
If someone learns this lesson when their debt is $1,000 instead of $10,000, that knowledge can make a massive difference. When most of your income is spent paying off interest on a credit card, that $10,000 balance can take years—not months—to pay off. That, in turn, delays other financial goals, like saving for a home, a car, or retirement.
Financial literacy and money management skills, like saving, are crucial. The sooner you develop those skills, the better.
That doesn’t mean—and here I might ramble, Scott, so feel free to interrupt—that people in their 20s, 30s, 40s, or even 50s won’t make financial mistakes. Mistakes are inevitable. Some of the most financially savvy people I know still make mistakes.
The problem is that many people feel ashamed when they make financial missteps, as if a mistake means they’ve failed. That mindset is damaging. We need to be more forgiving—both of ourselves and others. We also need to encourage people to ask for help when needed. Many financial resources are available in Canada, but people often don’t seek them out.
That’s why part of what we wanted to highlight in this survey is that big financial mistakes are common. Normalizing that helps people understand they’re not alone. When someone realizes that others have also made significant financial mistakes, it becomes easier to say, “I didn’t save enough for retirement, and I’m in my late 40s or early 50s—what do I do?”
That’s the right question to ask at that time. The wrong thing to do is hide it, avoid talking about it, or refuse to address it.
Jacobsen: What policies and financial products can help Canadians make better financial decisions? Is it an app?
King: I wish there were a single app where you could input everything and get a perfect financial roadmap, but there isn’t.
I’m a big fan of Excel spreadsheets. When I was in my 20s, I asked friends who were far more financially savvy than I was, “How do I invest?”
At the time, they told me, “You just need this one ETF or you just need this one mutual fund.” Back then, it was all about mutual funds.
I’m dating myself, Scott—I probably shouldn’t say that, but I am.
I remember not understanding their advice. The worst mistake I made at the time was not asking follow-up questions. “What do you mean by a mutual fund? Why is that the right investment?” I didn’t ask those questions when I should have.
There isn’t one app or tool that does everything for you, but you can do a few things. The first step is finding a budget that works for you. I always emphasize this because people tend to resist budgeting. Friends tell me “I hate the idea of tracking every dollar.”
So, I suggest a simple approach—take pictures of everything you buy. Whether it’s a receipt or a meal, take a picture.
Then, at the end of the month, review those images. Visually scan what you’ve spent money on, and then assign a monetary value to something you genuinely want to save for—whether that’s a car, a house, or another goal.
When you start comparing your spending habits to your financial goals, you ask yourself, “Is this purchase more important than my long-term goal?”
That shift in perspective makes it easier to adjust behaviour. It’s easier to avoid financial mistakes when you can tangibly see that spending in one area means sacrificing in another.
This approach is far more effective than simply sitting down with a pen and paper, filling out a spreadsheet, listing numbers, and forcing yourself to cut expenses. It’s easier to say, “I’m choosing not to spend on this because I want to save for something else.”
Jacobsen: How does the volatility in real estate—the spikes over several years and the downturns—factor into Canadians’ financial regrets?
I know some people who sold their homes just a month before the market peak, right before the downturn, and they were quite happy with that decision. How does that kind of market fluctuation contribute to financial regrets? A big part is luck, but other factors are also at play.
King: Scott, that’s the first thing I would point out—I think there’s a well-documented cognitive bias at play here. We know that people have a cognitive bias against losses.
For example, you could buy a home for $250,000 and sell it for $750,000, making a $500,000 profit. But if, a month later, you learn that you could have sold it for $850,000, you might suddenly feel like you lost something—even though you made a huge gain.
We tend to fixate on what we missed out on rather than appreciating what we gained. We don’t value the positive as much as we should. Instead of seeing the $500,000 profit, we focus on the $100,000 we didn’t make.
One of the key things I’ve written and spoken about regarding homeownership is this: when buying a home, you must understand that it is not solely a financial decision. I’m very clear about that.
What do I mean by that? While math and finances should be factors, they should not be the sole determinants of what you buy. Life decisions dictate home purchases.
For example, you may want to live near a particular school if you have a family. That priority will shape what and where you buy. If a townhouse in that school district is within your budget, that may be a better home for you than a larger detached house in a less desirable neighbourhood.
Ultimately, buying a home is an emotional decision about safety, community, and security.
That being said, finances do play a role. You shouldn’t buy a home that stretches beyond your means. If you max out your housing budget and an unexpected expense arises—like a roof repair, plumbing issues, or a major appliance breaking down—you may have to take on high-interest debt to cover it. That kind of financial strain can derail all your future goals.
I’ve seen people in unfortunate situations, particularly during the pandemic. Some were dealing with both a housing market crisis and the end of a relationship, leading to divorce. Sure, they could sell their home at a fantastic profit, but they were forced to buy in an overheated market.
That’s a terrible situation because you’re not making decisions but being forced into action. And when you’re forced into financial decisions, you often lose. Statistically speaking, you might come out ahead, but it’s risky, and much luck is involved.
You asked how homeownership—and the roller-coaster ride of real estate prices in Canada—affects personal finances. The impact has been massive because saving up for a down payment now takes significantly more time.
It takes significantly more to purchase a home now than it did in previous generations. Homeownership is a much larger piece of our financial puzzle when creating a solid financial plan.
I would say that people need to be realistic about what they can afford—both in the short term and the long term—and understand that they may have to adjust their expectations.
Not everyone will get the showcase home that looks like it belongs in a glossy magazine. Instead, we should redefine what a home means—a safe place, something financially sustainable, and a purchase that won’t prevent us from reaching other financial goals.
When friends or family often call me and ask, “Should I buy this house?” The first thing I ask them is:
“If their household has two income earners, should you afford to keep this home on just one salary in a pinch?”
If one person lost their job, could the other person cover all the bills for six months to a year until you get back on your feet?
For me, that’s a critical benchmark. If the answer is yes, that home is within your budget. You may be taking on too much financial risk if the answer is no.
I say this because life happens. Unexpected events—like the pandemic—threw many people into financial uncertainty. Some found themselves wondering, “How am I going to afford this when neither of us is earning?”
Part of responsible financial planning is treating homeownership like an insurance policy—you need to ensure that your finances can withstand unexpected hits rather than collapsing under pressure.
Jacobsen: If people make a financial mistake, how do they recover? How do they aim for long-term stability after that mistake?
King: The hardest part of making a mistake is owning it—just being aware of it, acknowledging it, and understanding what went wrong. Then, the next step is figuring out how to fix it—which can sometimes require making tough choices.
Yes, I might need to cut expenses. That’s difficult. People often say, “I work really hard and deserve to treat myself—whether it’s meals out, shopping, or vacations.” That may be true, but pausing those expenses—even temporarily—can be the best way to get back on track.
The key word here is pausing, not denying. It’s about making temporary adjustments to regain financial stability rather than permanently cutting out things that bring joy.
The most critical factor in financial recovery is a clear view of the mistake and an understanding of what is needed to correct it. The mistake itself does not define you—how you respond to it matters.
Jacobsen: Where can Canadians find reliable government sources of financial knowledge for decision-making? Where can they find independent, trustworthy sources for financial literacy and education?
King: I’m a huge fan of the federal government’s financial resources. They provide extensive documentation on various financial topics, from buying a home to understanding buy-now-pay-later loans and short-term financing options available through credit cards and store cards. These government resources are incredibly valuable, and more Canadians should know them. A wealth of information is available if people are willing to tap into it.
I’m also a big fan of local knowledge dissemination. If you visit your local library, you’ll often find free financial seminars, especially around tax season, designed to help people navigate financial decisions. I’ve personally led sessions at the Toronto Public Library, offering insights to attendees who can ask questions in a supportive environment. These sessions are free, accessible, and a great way for people to educate themselves on financial matters.
Books are another excellent resource. And the best part? You don’t have to buy them—go to the library. Books allow you to learn at your own pace, putting them down and picking them back up as needed. I also believe that online forumscan be useful for starting your research, but I always caution people never to rely on them for definitive answers. Instead, use them as a launching point and verify the information through reputable sources like government websites or books written by credible personal finance experts.
For independent sources, there are many reputable voices in the field. I’ll do a shameless plug here—you can check out my book, website, or money.ca. Beyond that, many newspapers still have personal finance columnists who consistently provide authoritative and well-researched insights. My biggest piece of advice is to read as much as you can. If one financial expert doesn’t resonate with you—whether on topics like exchange-traded funds or building a financial plan—shop around. There are plenty of knowledgeable writers and experts covering these topics. Find someone who speaks in a way that makes sense to you and stick with them.
Jacobsen: Romana, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate your expertise, and it was great to meet you.
King: Thank you, Scott. Take care.
Jacobsen: Take care. Bye.
King: Bye now.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/21
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee. Tsukerman discusses global HIV funding cuts, ICE detention abuses, Myanmar’s monastery shelling, U.S.–Lebanon relations, Asian military drills, U.S.–Russia diplomacy, RFK Jr.’s health claims, and Sean Combs’ legal case, highlighting systemic failures, international law, and political hypocrisy in an insightful July 2025 interview. This interview was conducted on July 11, 2025.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are back with the thoughtful Irena. We are focusing today on AP sources. The first topic concerns a warning from UNAIDS that millions of lives could be at risk if global HIV/AIDS funding is not sustained. Specifically, the concern is that if funding from major contributors such as the United States is reduced or withdrawn, the progress made in combating HIV could be reversed. This is especially relevant for countries in sub-Saharan Africa, but also has implications for the United States and other nations with vulnerable populations. What are your thoughts?
Irina Tsukerman: It does not appear likely that the U.S. will fully reinstate previously reduced global health aid without legal or legislative intervention. The administration at the time had claimed to be reorganizing the U.S. State Department. One of the stated goals included consolidating foreign aid functions—especially under USAID—though critics viewed this as a step toward reducing or eliminating specific humanitarian programs.
After meetings with African leaders, then-President Trump made general statements about cooperation but did not specifically commit to restoring humanitarian aid levels. He had also claimed that some foreign aid had been misused or lost to corruption, particularly through international agencies. Public health advocates widely criticized this statement.
There has been no significant change in that position. Available data show a concerning rise in HIV infections in certain regions, and setbacks in treatment access due to pandemic-related disruptions. However, this has not shifted policy priorities in the U.S. executive branch. At best, there might be limited public-private partnerships or coordination with NGOs to distribute targeted health resources. However, the scope and transparency of such efforts remain unclear.
There is also a lack of clarity about the disposition of previously allocated funds. For example, Congress had approved substantial budgets for HIV/AIDS relief through PEPFAR (the President’s Emergency Plan for AIDS Relief), a globally acclaimed initiative launched in 2003. Any redirection, delay, or reduction in these funds without Congressional oversight raises accountability concerns.
Congress should be more assertive in demanding transparency. Regardless of one’s political views on foreign aid, taxpayer funds allocated for life-saving programs deserve tracking and evaluation, not quiet defunding. Moreover, weakening U.S. humanitarian leadership undermines relationships with developing countries and global health security.
President Trump made clear that Africa was not a policy priority, except in cases where it intersected with strategic minerals or high-profile diplomatic gains. Ignoring the human toll of a resurgent HIV crisis could have global repercussions, including for the United States. The apparent lack of humanitarian concern is deeply troubling.
This moment also challenges critics of foreign aid, particularly conservative policymakers who argue that private charity should replace government assistance. If they genuinely believe this, now is the time to demonstrate that conviction by investing privately in effective health initiatives. Saving lives should transcend political ideology. If not now, when?
Jacobsen: Moving on to the following item: Mahmoud Khalil has reportedly been released from ICE detention. This has generated mixed reactions in the American press and public. Khalil, an Iraqi man who had been detained despite prior legal residence in the U.S., was reportedly held for a prolonged period due to an outdated deportation order. According to recent reports, he is now suing the federal government, seeking damages for wrongful detention. The amount claimed in the lawsuit is significantly high and involves allegations of constitutional violations, unlawful imprisonment, and procedural misconduct.
Tsukerman: Yes. This may be the least surprising news of the day. First of all, the courts ruled against the administration on this matter some time ago. The fact that it took so long to release Khalil after the initial court order—which clearly stated that, without a strong criminal case beyond the immigration issue, the U.S. government was violating his rights by detaining him—is deeply concerning. The delay demonstrates that the administration appears to treat judicial decisions as optional at best.
There has been ongoing tension between the executive branch and the judiciary, with the administration frequently claiming that judges who halted Trump’s orders were overreaching and interfering with executive authority. However, in reality, the executive branch is still constitutionally and legally bound, and it is the judiciary’s responsibility to ensure that citizens’ rights are respected and that the administration does not cause undue harm.
I believe it is fair to say that, without a clear and compelling criminal case establishing Khalil as a danger to the public, his rights were violated, particularly in being prevented from attending the birth of his child. The government is within its rights to pursue the immigration case if it believes he committed fraud on his application. They can argue he is subject to deportation on that basis. However, none of that justifies holding him in an ICE facility indefinitely.
So far, the administration has failed to make a strong case that he poses an actual threat. They made a brief claim that he supported ideologically extreme groups, which may factor into a deportation hearing. Still, they have not demonstrated that he is either a flight risk or a danger to the public. That failure is what is generating negative press and could jeopardize other immigration enforcement cases. It is politically damaging. Opponents can now point to this as a failure of the national security rationale, rallying support from groups on the political left that oppose the administration’s immigration stance. This situation will not help the White House. They should reconsider their handling of such cases.
Jacobsen: Now, moving on—the twenty-third death has been reported following the shelling of a Buddhist monastery in Myanmar. Can you provide a broader context? Are there any protections under humanitarian or international law for religious sites like this?
Tsukerman: Yes. Religious structures are considered civilian infrastructure and are protected under international humanitarian law. They are not legitimate military targets unless they are being used for military purposes, which must be established. In this case, there is no evidence that the monastery was being used for any military activity. The Myanmar military has not commented on the incident. The official death toll is currently at 23 but may rise to as many as 30, including children and other civilians.
The military claims it targets only legitimate military threats—such as local resistance and independence groups—but they have not provided any explanation for this specific incident. It is unclear whether they believed rebels were hiding inside, whether it was an error, or if civilian casualties were disregarded. Based on available information, this appears to be an unjustifiable strike. At a minimum, the government should clarify the circumstances and compensate the victims. If this was a deliberate attack or a case of reckless disregard, they must be held accountable under international law.
Jacobsen: Next topic—the president of Lebanon has revealed the country’s official position on relations with Israel. The general message: there are currently no plans to reestablish diplomatic ties.
Tsukerman: Essentially, he stated that Lebanon is at peace with Israel, but not in a state of normalization. That likely implies some non-aggression pact or tacit understanding, similar to the arrangement Israel had with Hafez al-Assad in Syria before Bashar al-Assad’s rise to power. That earlier arrangement involved a commitment not to attack each other’s territory, resulting in a very cold, distant peace defined more by non-engagement than by actual cooperation.
However, I do not believe such an arrangement can be fully guaranteed by Lebanon, given that Hezbollah remains a powerful military and political force in the country, mainly outside the control of the central government. While it is unlikely that Hezbollah will escalate tensions in the near term—due to the significant damage inflicted by Israeli airstrikes and the current political fragility of their patron, Iran—there is always the potential for renewed conflict in the coming years as they regroup and rebuild.
Unless Hezbollah is wholly removed from Lebanon’s political and military spheres and is fully disarmed, the Lebanese government cannot credibly guarantee peace to Israel. Frankly, any agreement reached while the government is heavily influenced or partially controlled by a designated terrorist organization is questionable at best. On a tactical level, a non-aggression arrangement is better than nothing. However, it is not a pleasant outcome for those who had hoped Israel and Lebanon would join the Abraham Accords framework.
Given Lebanon’s internal instability, however, a complete normalization agreement was always extremely unlikely. This latest development is likely the best outcome under current conditions, though even that is debatable.
Jacobsen: Let us turn to the joint aerial drills conducted by South Korea, the U.S., and Japan. This is broadly seen as a demonstration of strength directed at North Korea. For civilians without geopolitical or military expertise—or without a deeper understanding of the psychological strategies required when dealing with autocratic leaders—it may not seem very clear. People might ask, “Why are you flying jets around—what is the point?” However, there is, in fact, a point: to project strength in a way that resonates with leaders who only respond to displays of force. So, without diving too far into the psychology, what is the relevance of these drills? Why is this a strategically sound joint effort?
Tsukerman: Most importantly, it is a display of unity. It signals that the U.S. remains actively engaged in the Indo-Pacific region, that it stands firmly with its allies, and that it will oppose any aggression. These military exercises are not provocations; they are standard, pre-planned drills. However, they serve a crucial function: they demonstrate that South Korea, Japan, and the United States share a unified sense of purpose in the face of external threats.
There are indeed explicit threats. North Korea has repeatedly made hostile statements and tested missiles capable of striking all three countries, though South Korea and Japan are the most immediate targets. China, too, has issued warnings—particularly to Japan—threatening military retaliation if it were to support Taiwan in any meaningful way. In recent years, China has violated Japanese airspace, harassed Japanese pilots, and escalated tensions in the region.
These joint aerial drills, then, can be understood as a measured response to both North Korean and Chinese aggression. If China wants a reduced U.S. presence in the region, it must first stop threatening its neighbours.
Jacobsen: So, Senator Rubio says the U.S. and Russia have exchanged new ideas for Ukraine peace talks. I will not include a parenthetical laugh, but according to him—and, of course, he is not the Secretary of State—there are discussions about new proposals being exchanged.
Tsukerman: The next time Lavrov expresses a genuinely new idea, it will be the first. So far, he has done nothing but repeat the same mendacious talking points crafted by the Kremlin. I do not know what exactly could be proposed that Ukraine would find acceptable, unless we are talking about the beginning of a Russian withdrawal from occupied territories or a firm commitment to stop targeting civilians.
Without that, I do not see why any of these so-called new ideas would matter to anyone. We will have to wait and see what is presented. Still, I suspect the announcement may be reframed before it is formally articulated—perhaps to make it more palatable to Western audiences. It is also entirely possible that Russia is attempting to preempt further U.S. assistance to Ukraine, including even defensive aid.
According to President Zelensky, that aid has only recently resumed. The whole situation is scandalous because the assistance being discussed is defensive—it is not meant to help Ukraine launch major offensives but rather to protect civilians from ongoing, illegal, and immoral Russian attacks, which have been escalating.
So, the decision to allow Poland’s older Patriot missiles to be transferred to Ukraine is not some grand humanitarian gesture. It is the bare minimum the administration should have done continuously from the beginning. Punishing civilians because of political disagreements between the White House and President Zelensky is reprehensible. It only empowers Russia to maintain a perception of strength, despite its military weakness, which is precisely why it continues to target civilian populations.
Jacobsen: RFK Jr. is promoting a company under the slogan “We Make America Work Healthy.” That is his sincere conviction, though the evidence behind that claim appears to be severely lacking and misleading. Unfortunately, this promotion will cause more harm than good. The company in question produces ultra-processed meals. What are your thoughts on this situation?
Tsukerman: It seems to me that this is a combination of a potentially sincere conspiratorial mindset—however harmful—and outright hypocrisy on the part of RFK Jr. There is no way he was unaware of what the company was selling. Moreover, this is not the first time he has promoted products—presumably for money—that he would not consume himself or consider healthy.
We can recall the incident involving his endorsement of French fries, despite his public image of eating only extremely healthy foods. However, when a quick profit is available, he appears willing to promote virtually anything, including items that are blatantly unhealthy. This raises a serious question: if RFK Jr. truly cares about Americans’ health, why is he not using his platform to promote genuinely healthy food? Surely, there are companies focused on nutrition and public health that would collaborate with him. Unless his reputation is now so tarnished that only fringe companies are willing to work with him.
Regardless, given his political position and public influence, he should not be promoting any products at all, healthy or otherwise. It is also deeply hypocritical. While he claims to prioritize U.S. health, the measles epidemic in the United States is reaching record highs. He has spent years casting doubt on vaccines—including the measles vaccine—and we are now seeing the consequences. There have already been deaths, and the illness presents serious health risks, particularly for unvaccinated adults.
Even individuals who have been vaccinated, especially those with weakened immune systems or incomplete immunization, can still be at risk. Measles is not a trivial disease. The fact that he has been promoting conspiracy theories against life-saving vaccines is grossly irresponsible.
Jacobsen: Now, for the last topic—not strictly geopolitics, but it has drawn significant international attention. This particular case aligns with a pattern seen in the Jeffrey Epstein case, Larry Nassar, the Catholic clergy abuse scandals, Orthodox community abuse scandals, civic institutional cover-ups, and others.
Sean “Diddy” Combs is currently in custody and awaiting sentencing. He was acquitted of sex trafficking and racketeering charges but was convicted on other related offences. He narrowly avoided a life sentence.
Jacobsen: What are your overall thoughts on the implications of this case, and, separately, any insight into the upcoming release of the TV documentary Price of Oil?
Tsukerman: Here is the issue: it appears the prosecution mishandled how they presented the charges during the trial. As a result, a sex offender and a very dangerous individual may soon be released back into society. While his reputation has indeed suffered from the trial, and many outside the courtroom may be convinced of his guilt regarding the more serious accusations, the fact remains that he was acquitted of some of the most disturbing charges. He may now try to rehabilitate his public image, much like O.J. Simpson did—a horrifying possibility.
Ironically, he was convicted on charges related to prostitution. That raises a more profound moral contradiction. Suppose we are convicting people of prostitution but not of sex trafficking. In that case, we are implying that the sex was consensual and transactional. So why is it a crime? On the other hand, if there are credible accusations of trafficking and exploitation, and women are being victimized, how is it possible that the person facilitating those services is not held accountable for trafficking?
The case, in my view, is riddled with legal inconsistencies and serious ethical concerns. Moreover, unfortunately, these kinds of contradictions are not rare—they create openings for people like Combs, or previously Epstein, to abuse power and manipulate the legal system. Epstein, of course, never faced full justice. He died in custody before sentencing. Combs, meanwhile, will serve time—but not on the most serious allegations. Moreover, that is devastating for survivors who were never fully heard or vindicated. Any final thoughts on this week’s developments?
Tsukerman: As always, it has been a busy week for news. However, U.S. national security is in a precarious position, especially considering that some of those in charge of it do not appear to have sound judgment.
One glaring example is the hiring of serial liar Sergei Gorakhovsky—also known as Sergei Gor—who reportedly concealed his identity for unclear reasons. Despite this, he was placed in a critical role as head of the White House Personnel Office, responsible for staffing decisions. That raises serious concerns about vetting, accountability, and the broader integrity of administrative leadership.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Irina.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/20
Sapira Cahana is a New York-based mental health counsellor (MHC-LP) and interfaith chaplain-in-training specializing in existential and relational therapy. Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Cahana explore the concept of the humdrum as a relational, existential experience shaped by routine, alienation, and time. They reflect on how sacredness and mundanity often switch places through ritual, perception, and the presence of the sacred. Drawing on the work of Alan Watts, Bob Black, and Glenn Gould, they explore the roles of awe, curiosity, and spontaneity in therapy and daily life. Cahana emphasizes that therapy is not about fixing but co-experiencing meaning. The humdrum, they argue, is not meaningless—it is a lens through which we interpret life and, potentially, a path toward renewal and depth.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Welcome back to the caller segment from a few months ago—the one with those existential reflections. Existential exchanges with a psychotherapist. Simple stuff like that. So, when you think of “humdrum,” what comes to mind while you’re driving?
Cahana: Yes, I think of the lull of traffic, the endless cycle of laundry and dishes—without fully engaging with the experience of those moments. Not tuning into the laundry as a potential meditative state. With the humdrum, I tell myself, “I’m going to stay alive. I’ll get through it. I’ll probably even do well.” That’s all we need.
Jacobsen: But regarding the humdrum, I recall a short talk or audio lecture by Alan Watts. He discussed how even something as routine as washing dishes by hand can be transformed into a musical, almost theatrical experience. He described turning the “whoosh” of water and the movement of your hands into something like a dance. That changes the whole dynamic of what is usually a tedious task.
So, in your work—your extensive conversations with people in intimate, professional settings—how do you distinguish between when someone experiences something as humdrum versus when another might find presence or even meaning in the same activity? It’s not inherently humdrum.
Cahana: Even with something like small talk, some people define their personalities around avoiding it. They’ll say, “I hate talking about the weather,” or “Don’t ask me those surface-level questions.” And it’s because they feel a kind of inertia—like the conversation is coated in dust. That dust needs to be brushed away to get to something more meaningful.
And that’s how therapeutic dialogue can work, too. Being a therapist, spiritual guide, or philosopher doesn’t exempt you from the humdrum. Engaging in sacred or meaningful work doesn’t prevent you from feeling the weight of the mundane. And the mundane isn’t absent of the sacred. It’s often about how we relate to repetition, our awareness of time passing, and the way routine can make life feel monochrome—that’s what creates the sense of humdrum.
Jacobsen: Do people ever turn the sacred into the humdrum?
Cahana: Yes. Absolutely. People can turn anything into a humdrum. The humdrum is a relationship between time and effort. It’s about labour—not just occupational work, but emotional and mental exertion—and our awareness of mortality as we engage in tasks that feel meaningless.
Like sitting in a three-hour meeting that’s purely procedural, there’s no real exchange. People are being lectured at, not spoken with. You’re nodding—and it’s true. Like, it’s suffocating—and we feel the suffocation. We feel held hostage, and that’s the humdrum.
It’s the sense of being held hostage by time—not seeing the symphony but just feeling the isolated practice of each instrument. Then the squeaky violin—because you can’t quite get it right. There’s this perfectionism in every moment.
In our world—especially in the psychotherapeutic world, and honestly, in much of modern life—we talk so much about wellness. But we’ve transactionalized experience. We say things like: It’s essential to read books, drink eight glasses of water, get a thousand hours of sleep, and also put in a thousand hours of work.
Even the tasks that are supposed to produce wellness end up producing anxiety. People come to me and say, “I don’t know what’s wrong. I go to the gym. I have the car, the wife, the son. I went to an Ivy League school. Shouldn’t I be impervious to this experience of the humdrum?
Why, then, am I still caught in this rhythm?”
And it’s in feeling your crescendo that the ascent can bring the downfall—right? Back to Sisyphus. There’s an author, Bob Black, an anarchist thinker who is incredibly creative in his critique of work culture. He wrote a provocative manifesto titled The Abolition of Work.
In it, he argues not against all forms of doing but against the ideology of work as drudgery. He advocates for reclaiming time, returning to first principles, and entering into play. Not avoiding interaction, but finding rhythm again—your rhythm, the rhythm of the world—and discovering where the two meet. It’s about entering into play, not building an ethic around toil, but cultivating awe. That’s the antidote to the humdrum.
Jacobsen: It’s almost like a piece or a sense of time’s pace changes as we grow. Does that idea work?
Cahana: The pace of time? Yes, absolutely. But very few people complain about the fractal patterns of flowers or the beauty of a rainbow—the interaction between rain and sunlight that produces it.
We’re not afraid of time when it unfolds across natural surfaces. We marvel at it. But it’s in our own perceived unremarkableness—in the lack of surprise in each moment—especially in this world of instant gratification, where surprise is the rarest commodity, that we feel the abyss of time.
And so we’re lost. We’re alienated from ourselves, from our work, from our sense of being. Our cities become masks. They’re where we congregate, but so much of that congregation happens in windowless cubicles—or slightly larger rectangles. So much of our time is cloaked from us.
And we give it away in exchange for security, for prestige, for the promise that we’ll be invulnerable. But that transaction erodes our sense of wonder. And then we ask ourselves: “Why am I in existential ache? Why do I yearn for another life? Why do I often wish to disappear?”
These are the questions many of my clients bring to me. They look to me as their psychotherapist and say, “Be my guide. You tell me. Tell me the answer. Tell me the eight glasses of water I should drink, and then I’ll be fixed—because it’s hard to endure the pace of time.”
It’s not that we’re afraid of stillness, right? Like I said before. We love it when roots extend to the entire global network. We love it. We love fungi—mycelial networks—they’re essentially large neural structures that mimic aspects of our brain architecture. We seek both rapture and rupture within the humdrum of life—hoping to be saved and also, sometimes, to explode or implode.
Jacobsen: So, what’s the process when someone makes something sacred?
Cahana: I’m going to say something strange: Sacred humdrum is a kind of Babel. It’s another temple. Another shrine. A space that people feel is impervious to corruption. However, we know from history that it’s just another construct.
Just like any kingdom, any chieftaincy—even the British Empire, which once believed it would never fall as long as the sun shone on its colonies. And yet, it fell. There’s hubris in believing that institutions are untouched by time, culture, or the embedded social dynamics that shape them.
That’s the fallacy: to assume the sacred is fixed and permanent. The sacred becomes profane regularly. The profane becomes sacred regularly—through ritual, consecration, devotion, and, yes, through toil.
We contend with the majesty of it all—the blade of grass, the lived moment, the cultural memory, the mystery of being. With all that is, all that was, and all that might yet be. There’s inertia everywhere. But there’s transformation, too.
Jacobsen: I’m getting a sense from you that the distinction between the sacred and the humdrum isn’t about one being meaningful and the other meaningless. It’s more like they’re each their categories of meaning. Is that right? The humdrum has meaning. The sacred has meaning. They can switch places—but they’re different flavours, like choosing a different syrup in your coffee.
Cahana: You’re pulling from different emotional palettes—like placing different orders at Starbucks. The humdrum is its own experiential hermeneutic—a way of interpreting and living through experience. Just as elation, awe, or ecstasy are different experiential lenses. But if you live inside ecstasy for too long, and you start making decisions from that place, we call it mania. That’s the clinical term for it.
Likewise, when the humdrum stretches too long, it can transmute. It can evolve into hopelessness. It can slide into depressive states, into clinical or quasi-clinical conditions—depending on the framework or diagnostic model.
But whatever language we use, the experience points to something real: the ache of time. You cannot explain away the ache of time in three sentences. You cannot resolve it in two therapy sessions. It must be felt. It must be given room.
It’s an inner clarion call—a cry toward meaning. But also a cry toward texture. Not to flatten life into sameness but to return to curiosity—to see the distinctions again. To avoid the numbing effects of patterned repetition.
Because a coffee on day one is not the same as a coffee on day two or day three. Even though we perform the same ritual each morning, the experience is subtly different. People might say, “I just need my coffee in the morning,” but really, it’s a consecrated time—a ritual people love.
So we can move away from monotony. We can offer presence to time. When you spoke about the sacred becoming profane, I thought about desacralization. In therapy, many techniques originate from sacred traditions—such as meditation.
Even something as simple as taking a deep breath. Let’s do some square breathing. And it’s true—it regulates the parasympathetic nervous system, and that’s wonderful. But we don’t live to regulate our parasympathetic nervous system. That’s not where existential questions come from.
It helps to be regulated—to enter the river of life, regulation helps—but breathing alone does not mute the drone of existence. Meditation and contemplation—are sacred technologies. That’s where they come from.
Jacobsen: And you were talking earlier about hermeneutics and lenses. People can play one lens off another. Our first session focused on comedy, and comedy often involves taking a unique perspective on life—drawing something new from that angle. Whether through absurdism or contrast.
I think of George Carlin, who noted that, in every joke, at least one thing has to be wildly out of proportion for it to work—for it to land in the category of a joke.
So, can a therapeutic approach involve integrating a sacred lens onto something humdrum—giving someone a new frame or sense of their experience? Is that how we change a destructive pattern? Or attempt to?
Cahana: That framing of psychotherapy—that we’re aiming to “change” a pattern—is not my style. I’m not looking for outcomes in that way. I’m trying to re-experience something relationally with the client.
That lens—of targeting results—already lends itself to the humdrum. It tends toward a rote or mechanical approach. But my style is spontaneous. It works through interactive power, through the immediacy of presence. So, that in itself shifts the dynamic. It demands presence. It requires a kind of suppleness, a willingness to flow with the other.
Even suppleness, as I’ve said before, can become rote. It can harden into a form—into technique because relational dynamics can be studied. They can be patterned. But the key, especially from an existential approach, is to keep surprise alive. To keep wonder active. To treat the therapeutic space itself as a sacred space.
When a client brings in an exhaustive list of monotonous experiences, my role is to be there with them—in the grass, in the dirt, wherever they find themselves. If their landscape is a concrete jungle, then we’re there. If it’s a jungle in the Amazon, then we’re there too.
Even if I don’t know the experience myself—we build it together. Relational co-creation helps alleviate monotony. It helps the person re-experience what they’ve flattened out. It can awaken the slumber. Possibly. When it goes well.
Jacobsen: We evolve with certain tendencies—patterns of thought, feeling, drives, and motivations. What seems like the psychological underpinning of our tendency to form static reasoning around the humdrum? A lot of our time is spent there—stuck in it.
Cahana: There are two things. First, there’s a kind of evolutionary call—an inner scream that the humdrum can provoke. It’s like a silence before the scream. Second, we must acknowledge the embeddedness of our modern world—a world often organized around alienation: from the self, from the community, from belonging, and from deeper sources of meaning and power.
Because of that, many of our experiences of the humdrum are artificially produced. They’re not just innate responses—they’re shaped by systems and structures that keep us disconnected from one another. That said, humans do have the capacity to experience this humdrum profoundly. It’s universal and as ancient as consciousness itself—if not more so.
But the collision course we’re on—the tension between the modern world’s alienating systems and our internal compass for how we want to use our time, how we want to experience meaning, how we want to live a good life—that’s where the crisis emerges.
There’s a fundamental conflict between the humdrum and the good life. This conflict shows up often in existential thought, existential therapy, and existential experiences of dread and anxiety. It’s a core dialectic.
Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. I hope you have a safe drive home and enjoy all the little moments in between.
Cahana: Nice. Thanks so much. I love our encounters. This is fun—I enjoy it.
Jacobsen: Interviews… I don’t even know what to call them anymore. I’ve done so many for so long. They happen, and then they’re happening again—encounters. Glenn Gould was interviewed once by someone who wasn’t exactly reading the room. And Gould, at one point, responded kind of dryly—it was a joke—but also serious. The interviewer was trying to define what this whole thing was. Gould said, “If you want it in one word—yes, it’s a happening” – referencing concerts. So, in one word: Encounter as exchanges.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/19
I have witnessed more than one male bewildered,
caught off guard,
as to the reason for the woman who walked away.
There are a number of reasons for this, fella.
Some introspective questions:
Was there a lack of commitment from you?
Diminished investment of emotions, effort, or time.
Was there infidelity or betrayal?
Emotional or sexual.
Was there a consistent conflict or a breakdown of communication?
Arguing, unresolved disputes, stonewalling.
Was there incongruity?
In goals, values, even presence of unrealistic expectations.
Were there external stressors or life-altering events?
Something beyond capacity for weathering of the glue.
Is there unacknowledged substance use to the point of misuse?
The substance is master, not you, of you.
Was there abuse or coercive control?
Safety and autonomy matter to cats and women alike.
Were you neglectful of sex?
The use of sex as a standalone, a stand-in, too.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/16
Sir Lawrence Freedman is Emeritus Professor of War Studies at King’s College London and one of Britain’s most influential military strategists. Freedman, the author of landmark works including Ukraine and the Art of Strategy and Command: The Politics of Military Operations from Korea to Ukraine, has long shaped debates over deterrence, escalation, and statecraft. His peer-reviewed essay “The Russo-Ukrainian War and the Durability of Deterrence” examines nuclear signaling and credibility in the current conflict. He also co-writes Comment Is Freed over on Substack, offering precise, timely analysis that bridges scholarship and public understanding.
Freedman’s influence extends beyond academia. A veteran of the UK’s Iraq Inquiry, he remains a leading voice on civil-military relations, modern warfare, and the limits of coercive power. Since Russia’s 2022 full-scale invasion of Ukraine, his analyses have been widely cited for their clarity and restraint.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Freedman discusses Russia’s evolving nuclear doctrine, arguing that its threats remain tethered to existential scenarios rather than battlefield desperation. He traces how figures such as Dmitry Medvedev use rhetorical bluster without translating it into atomic policy. Freedman also reflects on Kyiv’s civil-military tensions and leadership shifts—most notably, the replacement of Valerii Zaluzhnyi by Oleksandr Syrskyi and Zaluzhnyi’s later appointment as ambassador to the UK. On the battlefield, he notes how inexpensive drones have expanded kill zones and made fronts transparent, pushing Russia toward small-group infiltration while Ukraine defends thinly stretched lines.
Freedman cautions against speculative “what ifs,” distinguishing the difference between winning and merely not losing. Russia’s political objectives, he says, remain unmet. For Ukraine, escalation risks can be managed—so long as deep-strike operations minimize civilian harm and avoid attacks on leadership targets.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Thank you very much for joining me today. Since The Durability of Deterrence, what has changed most in Russian nuclear signaling?
Lawrence Freedman: Not a lot has changed. The problem they have is that there’s a clear doctrine—not significantly different from that of other nuclear-armed states—which holds that nuclear weapons are to deter existential threats to Russia. They’re not for use in lesser cases, and, generally speaking, you really don’t want a nuclear war if you can avoid it. They feel, however, that they ought to be getting more value out of their nuclear arsenal.
While Putin has been quite careful in his nuclear threats, others, like Dmitry Medvedev, the former president and now deputy chair of Russia’s Security Council, have been unable to resist opportunities to sound as menacing as possible with every development they dislike. Medvedev talks about Armageddon coming, and Russian state media often goes even further. In practice, when the developments they warned against actually occur—such as Finland and Sweden joining NATO, Western countries sending long-range weapons to Ukraine, or Ukraine striking targets inside Russia—nothing much happens.
They may respond – but not in the nuclear sphere. They’ve therefore created a problem for themselves. When he has been explicit about nuclear contingencies, Putin has reserved his threats for one clear contingency, of NATO actually fighting alongside Ukraine. But they’ve used threats implicitly for a range of other contingencies—all of which have since come to pass, and none of which have warranted nuclear use.
You can see, in several Russian commentators—Sergey Karaganov being the most notable—a lament that in this way, the deterrent impact of Russia’s nuclear arsenal has been eroded. That has led to arguments that perhaps they should lower the threshold for use to make it more credible. Putin has explicitly rejected that argument, but it remains present in Russian debates.
Jacobsen: What civil-military frictions have been shaping Moscow and Kyiv’s operational choices in the current phase of the war?
Freedman: We know more about Ukraine because it has an active press and open discussion. There are the usual wartime tensions—one being the concern that the generals, particularly the commander-in-chief, may become more popular than the president. The president’s staff worries about this and tries to keep the generals in their place. More seriously, there are political imperatives that may seem compelling to President Zelensky—for example, the belief that every piece of territory must be defended—that don’t always make military sense to the generals.
There are various tensions, not only between civilians and the military but within the military itself, over strategic priorities. These were particularly evident in the 2022–2023 period. That phase ended with the commander-in-chief, General Valerii Zaluzhnyi, being removed from his position in early 2024 and later appointed as Ukraine’s ambassador to the United Kingdom. He was replaced by General Oleksandr Syrskyi, who had already been running much of the land war. So yes, there are tensions—but they are not surprising.
There has been a certain amount of sacking of inadequate commanders, but that has been primarily done at the senior military level rather than by Zelensky. Zelensky, on the whole, has done what he should be doing—concentrating on external support, maintaining international backing, and keeping the population’s morale up. However, there are significant issues, with mobilization being the most obvious, that have caused and continue to cause tensions. Insufficient manpower at the front is a real problem. The idea of conscripting 18–25-year-olds is still seen as politically toxic. So, these are significant issues that won’t go away; they’ll keep coming back.
On the Russian side, it’s different. First, Putin hasn’t changed his Chief of the General Staff, General Valery Gerasimov, who’s been in post since around 2012. He’s still there, though he doesn’t appear to be particularly good at his job. He did, however, change the Minister of Defense. Sergei Shoigu has been in office since 2012. The new minister, Andrei Belousov, appears to be more efficient and effective, and has somewhat modernized the Russian operation.
But the military itself, under Gerasimov’s command, has been notable for the lack of originality in its tactics. They’ve stuck with the same formula. Where you’ve seen real innovation on the Russian side has been in the development and use of drones, where they have been quite effective. The big issue came in the summer of 2023 with Yevgeny Prigozhin. Private military contractors were developing their own armies—in this case, the Wagner Group under Prigozhin. Wagner fell out with the Ministry of Defense because they felt they weren’t getting enough ammunition and support.
These disputes were very public throughout the first half of 2023 and led the Defense Ministry to attempt to bring Wagner under its control, threatening Prigozhin’s entire business model. He rebelled. I don’t think he reasonably intended to mutiny as much as he did, but it went further than he expected. He ended up marching toward Moscow after clashing to some degree with loyalist Russian forces. He was persuaded not to pursue it to the end and convinced himself that if he went to Belarus, he could be rehabilitated.
Of course, he wasn’t—he was killed in a plane explosion a few months after the mutiny. That was a symptom of something more. Some generals were clearly sympathetic to Prigozhin, several of whom were dismissed after the mutiny. It was a clear sign of internal tensions in the system, which probably still exist. But you don’t see much of it now surfacing.
There has been consistency in Russian strategy. They continue to press ahead on all fronts. They keep pushing. There’s not much evidence of alternative strategic thinking. From the beginning, Russia could have concentrated its forces and made a significant push before consolidating. Instead, it has maintained a broad front line throughout.
(Ukraine Ministry of Defence)
Jacobsen: As far as I know, the front line is probably over a thousand kilometres.
Freedman: Yes, it is—more than 1,200 kilometres. It’s incredibly long. You can see that both sides are currently stretched, and they’re starting to have to move troops from one sector to another. The fighting is most intense in Donetsk. That’s Putin’s biggest priority. He’s more or less secured Luhansk, and the occupation of Donetsk would complete the control of the Donbas. He’s put enormous effort into that, though it hasn’t gone as far as he hoped in terms of occupying it.
Jacobsen: What is a “wartime mentality”? What would adaptation to this mean for procurement and for governance reforms?
Freedman: What you see in Ukraine, which has been impressive and is happening in Russia too (one shouldn’t underestimate the Russians), is the speed of innovation. Ukraine had an army and some weapons, but it was heavily dependent on external sources for additional military equipment and ammunition. That continued well into last year. For key systems such as Patriot, HIMARS, and Storm Shadow, Ukraine still relies on its supporters to deliver. But on drones, it’s producing its own and will soon be exporting them.
There’s even talk of a joint venture with the United States. It’s been an extraordinary period of innovation, born of necessity. The response has been impressive. Decisions are made in weeks, rather than the months or years required by Western procurement agencies. They don’t go through endless rounds of testing. If they think something will work, they try it. The Ukrainians keep their designs simple and concentrate much of the innovation in the software. They use AI quite effectively. Without this adaptability, Ukraine would face significant challenges due to the limited Western supply capacity. The slow pace at which Europe ramped up ammunition production—especially artillery shells—shows the stark difference between being at war and being at peace.
Jacobsen: What about the use of drones for reconnaissance, strikes, and defense? Has this surpassed the expectations of many analysts in terms of efficacy?
Freedman: What’s happened is that the war began with drones being used, but they were larger, more capable, and expensive—used mainly for reconnaissance and strike missions. The key change wasn’t that individual drones became vastly more effective, though what you can now pack into a small drone is impressive; instead, it was that they provided mass. That’s the crucial point—it’s a way of achieving mass, and there’s no other affordable way to do it. Air power and artillery remain more efficient, but they can’t be produced or deployed in such volume.
Surveillance has become critical. The battlefield has become transparent; it hasn’t completely dispelled the fog of war, but there’s far less of it than before. This has had a remarkable effect on frontline tactics. You now have a 10–20 kilometre kill zone, where anything lingering too long is likely to be detected and destroyed. Russian tactics have shifted from assaults with armour and large infantry numbers to infiltration by small groups. Ukraine is defending with fragile lines, as massed positions would quickly become highly vulnerable.
A lot of the time, Ukrainian forces don’t even try to engage directly with the enemy—they report that an enemy is coming. That partly reflects their own manpower shortages, but it’s also a consequence of the nature of this battlefield, a battle arena saturated with drones. The innovation continues, becoming ever more cat-and-mouse. The speed of innovation in both drone defense and counter-defense has been extraordinary, with new models constantly emerging.
And it’s not just drones over the front lines; it’s also those attacking deep into the rear. Russia now regularly mounts attacks with hundreds of drones. Most are shot down, but enough get through to cause damage. Ukraine, in turn, has mounted a very effective campaign using drones against Russian oil facilities—something nobody would have imagined three or four years ago. The situation has evolved extremely quickly.
The central issue now is anti-drone drones. Air defense has become a pressing concern for both sides, particularly for Ukraine. Various systems are being tested that are expected to be cheaper than using sophisticated air defense missiles.
Drones themselves aren’t hard to shoot down—they’re slow—but there are so many of them. That’s where the mass effect comes in. It’s not that individual drones are especially effective; it’s that there are countless ones in the air. Even if 80% are intercepted, the remaining 20% can still inflict significant damage.
(Ukraine Ministry of Defence)
Jacobsen: Where do Western media and analysts still get wrong about the war?
Freedman: It’s an inherent challenge. I’m sitting in London, trying to follow the war in Ukraine. There’s plenty of information available, but it’s fragmented, and it’s often unclear whom to trust. You see endless videos showing one side destroying the other, but they never give you the whole picture. It is not easy. And I should say, I’m not immune to these problems—we all suffer from them. One major issue is overthinking and getting too far ahead. People keep asking “what if?” questions. “What if the Russians take Odesa?”—which I saw posed in a newspaper column months ago.
There’s no way Russia could take Odesa right now, so it’s a pointless question. Similarly, back in 2022, we had “What if the Ukrainians retake Crimea—will Russia use nuclear weapons?” They weren’t close to retaking Crimea at the time, so it was an abstract worry. It’s not that such things are impossible, but context matters—you don’t know what else might be happening at the same time. Forward-looking analysis often becomes too speculative. The reality on the battlefield since late 2022 has been that neither side has made significant progress.
Apart from a brief period in mid-2023, following Ukraine’s successful counteroffensives in 2022, Russia has been on a constant offensive. They’ve been pushing continuously. They’ve gained some territory—Avdiivka fell, Bakhmut fell—but other places, like Krokhmalne and Chasiv Yar, haven’t. Chasiv Yar, for instance, was reported to have been lost, but it turns out it hasn’t, at least not yet.
People keep speculating about “what ifs,” assuming momentum. As Russia continues to advance, some think Ukraine will inevitably falter and collapse—but it hasn’t. Then you get the opposite problem: because Ukraine has done better and proved more resilient than expected, people assume it will always continue to do so. You can’t be sure of that either, because Ukraine is stretched, and Russia is pushing very hard right now. It’s challenging to follow a war like this without falling into either optimism or pessimism bias. That’s why I’m careful about predictions. I got it wrong early o,n and I’ve learned from that. It’s better to discuss possibilities and issues than to predict outcomes.
Another thing, and this isn’t a complaint, but an observation: people often conflate who’s inflicting more damage with who’s winning. Just because Russia is advancing doesn’t mean it’s winning. None of Russia’s political objectives has been achieved. It’s taken more territory—roughly doubling what it held in February 2022—but it hasn’t “demilitarized” Ukraine. In fact, Ukraine is now the most militarized state in Europe. For those who claim the war is about NATO expansion, it is noteworthy that NATO has expanded with Sweden and Finland. For those who say it’s about Ukraine’s sovereignty and independence, Ukraine still has both. So none of Russia’s stated political goals have been met. When people say Russia is “winning,” what does that really mean? It certainly hasn’t won.
There’s a crucial distinction between winning and not losing. For Putin, that distinction is everything. I think he believes he can win—his recent remarks at the Valdai Discussion Club suggest as much—because he considers Ukraine to be close to collapse. I don’t find that credible, but that’s clearly his belief. His panic in late September 2022, when he feared he might lose, led to the mobilization of more troops, the conversion of Russia into a war economy, and the expansion of his war aims by annexing four oblasts—none of which he fully controls.
Not losing became an objective in itself, an addition to whatever goals the war began with. Having staked so much on this “special military operation,” failure would be a political catastrophe. Avoiding that outcome has become a goal of its own. That’s one reason I’ve been pessimistic about any peace deal since then. Putin needs something tangible to show for this war. Right now, he has only devastated territory—and little else.
Jacobsen: How should NATO navigate the balance between enabling deep strikes and managing escalation, given the steady stream of red-line rhetoric coming from Moscow?
Freedman: Ukraine is already conducting deep strikes. If Ukraine began launching Western-supplied missiles into the centre of Moscow—say, striking the Kremlin—then, yes, people would be understandably anxious. I’m not sure how Russia would respond, but that’s not something anyone would want to test. They don’t like Ukraine’s current campaign against the oil industry, but there’s not much they can do about it. It’s worth remembering that the Biden administration was initially nervous about attacks on Russian oil refineries, partly due to concerns over global oil prices as much as escalation. The Trump administration, according to the Financial Times, appears more supportive and has reportedly provided intelligence to facilitate such strikes.
If Ukraine continues with a methodical campaign that avoids large-scale civilian casualties or direct attacks on Russia’s political leadership, I don’t see a significant escalation risk. Russia has already escalated plenty. The strikes it’s currently mounting are aimed at destroying Ukraine’s electricity grid—and now its gas infrastructure as well. Many civilians have been killed, cities have been reduced to rubble, and occupied territories have effectively been annexed into Russia. There’s been no shortage of escalation from Moscow, but they’ve avoided using force directly against the West. Even then, they haven’t been passive—there’s been energy coercion, drones drifting into Poland and elsewhere, sabotage operations, and cyberattacks.
Russia hasn’t taken steps that would trigger a direct war with NATO, because it does not want one. From Ukraine’s perspective, the key is to use its capabilities for strategic effect—which it is doing now. Other kinds of campaigns would likely be less effective. Ukraine is essentially running this campaign with Western intelligence support, but it’s fundamentally Ukrainian-led. And there’s no reason why this approach should lead to escalation.
Jacobsen: Sir, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate both your expertise and the opportunity to speak with and meet you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/18
Sapira Cahana is a New York-based mental health counsellor (MHC-LP) and interfaith chaplain-in-training specializing in existential and relational therapy. In a wide-ranging dialogue, Scott Douglas Jacobsen and Sapira Cahana explore the nature of humour as both a physiological response and a vehicle for existential insight. Drawing from Jewish tradition, existentialist thought, and cultural history, they examine how humour reflects marginality, trauma, resilience, and spiritual truth. Cahana highlights the roots of laughter in scripture, such as Sarah naming Isaac, and reflects on misinterpretations, including Michelangelo’s depiction of Moses. Jewish humour is shown as a tool for coping, observing, and subverting, with figures like Seinfeld and Moshe Kasher embodying these traditions. Humour, ultimately, becomes a profound lens for navigating suffering, absurdity, and meaning.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, humour means many things. At its core, humour is an involuntary physiological reaction—a laugh, a chuckle, whatever you want to call it.
Sapira Cahana: It feels good. It’s rewarding to laugh. A comedian friend of mine—he used to work with Jimmy Kimmel for about twelve years—is now in his mid-sixties. His daughter recently got married in London. So, he’s entering the next phase of his life. He’s able to reflect on writing tens of thousands of jokes for Jimmy Kimmel Live! and earlier, for The Man Show, where Kimmel co-hosted with Adam Carolla. Humour has been a deep part of his professional identity. From his expert perspective, he argues that laughter—or humour—is a form of “information on the cheap.” In other words, it delivers insight or surprise quickly and accessibly.
Jacobsen: Is there a psychological equivalent to this from an existentialist point of view?
Cahana: Much of humour is about achieving catharsis—whatever form that catharsis takes. Identifying that catharsis is where existential thought enters. Each existentialist—whether Søren Kierkegaard, Albert Camus, or Samuel Beckett—approaches this differently. And each position holds its philosophical legitimacy. For Kierkegaard, for instance, laughter may be tied to spiritual awakening—part of the leap of faith. Laughter, then, is not trivial. It opens a path to the spiritual realm. That’s compelling because it does not seem like “information on the cheap.” It feels more like “information on the lofty.” Humour is often connected to the absurd—the absurdity of life itself. The joke is simply that we are alive in this confusing, sometimes senseless, world.
Jacobsen: Now, what about humour in the Jewish tradition? People who have experienced trauma often develop humour as a coping mechanism—if they’re fortunate enough to find that outlet. Are there traditional Jewish perspectives, whether Orthodox, Conservative or otherwise, that recognize humour as a way of reconciling belief with the realities of the world?
Cahana: Well, Judaism doesn’t divide neatly along denominational lines when it comes to humour. As we’ve noted before, it’s more regional or cultural than theological. Diaspora experiences profoundly shape Jewish humour. Globally, Jews have often lived as peripheral or marginalized figures. However, this marginality has frequently served as a vantage point—a lens through which to examine broader societies. Jews often exist both inside and outside of dominant cultures, and that dual position fosters contrast, irony, and humour. For example, some of the most well-known Jewish humour revolves around the contrast between Jewish and Christian holidays—Christmas and Hanukkah, in particular. These jokes often reflect broader themes of assimilation, minority experience, and religious difference, especially in North America and Europe.
This phenomenon is not exclusive to the West. In India, for example, the Bene Israel and Baghdadi Jewish communities were active participants in the arts. Some of the earliest and most famous female Bollywood actresses, such as Sulochana (born Ruby Myers) and Pramila (born Esther Victoria Abraham), were Indian Jews. Because they were not bound by Hindu caste restrictions or certain gender norms, they had more social mobility and freedom in early Indian cinema. These women broke gender barriers and were among the first to gain widespread recognition as film stars.
One of them was named Sulochana. Then, that opened the floodgates for different kinds of play. So, the Jewish positioning—the “wandering Jew,” so to speak—the Jewish role in society often demands play, is part of play, and maybe even is a strategy. It’s hard to pin down whether it’s a result of that position or whether that position emerged because of play. It’s a chicken-or-egg situation. What’s the origin point?
Jacobsen: What about the place of contemporary comedians? Your Phyllis Diller, your Jerry Seinfeld, your Larry Davids—how do they fit into this?
Cahana: Those are more established names from the past, but there are up-and-coming comedians as well who speak to a similar trend—commentary on the banal aspects of life, but slightly tilted. And that’s where the humour is. It’s that slight exaggeration. The point of origin, arguably, is Kafka. Right? Maybe not the first, but it is indeed formative. The dark comedy, the absurd, the angst of being alive, the daily humdrum—that’s what we’re going to talk about later.
You can frame it as a wretched form of life weighed down by meaninglessness. Or you can take an outsider’s lens—which is a strength of the Jewish perspective—and see how hilarious, how absurd, what horror, what humour! Seinfeld, Larry David, Sarah Silverman—so many Jewish comedians feel that humour is part of our tradition. To sit around, talk, and laugh. Yes. These are almost philosophical commentaries, too.
And I’m building on your point about marginality. That aspect of being socially or culturally on the margins becomes a natural breeding ground for observation and commentary. There’s your seed point. From that space, you can either bring out the positive from the vast neutral field of life—or you can lean into the pain.
So much of Jewish humour is gallows humour or dry and deadpan. It balances levity and gravity—treating heavy things lightly and light things with intense seriousness. That’s the genius of Seinfeld or Larry David: the heroism and the harrowing aspects of daily absurdity. You’re frustrated at the ice cream line, Larry David—not at systemic injustice or existential dread. The world induces anxiety, yes, but the comedy focuses on the immediate, the now, and the mundane.
Jacobsen: That’s what you were saying earlier. It’s not about the grand challenge of life. It’s not about the weight of success or injustice—it’s about the now. What about scripture? In the pastures of the Bible or the Torah, are there examples—not necessarily framed as jokes—but that could be seen as existentially humorous?
Cahana: Yes. This is a classic—and it’s how many modern New York or Northeastern Jews develop their sensibility and sense of identity. In the Hebrew Bible, in the Torah, and the Tanakh, Moses leads the Israelites into the desert. And the Israelites are so ungrateful—they say, “Bring us back to Egypt!”
The way many contemporary Jews read that is, “See? We’ve always been like this.” It’s a funny kind of lineage—a genealogical connection to our ancestors that feels very personal. It humanizes them in a way that other wisdom traditions—or even other parts of the Hebrew Bible—don’t always do.
It’s a collective story, which reflects how Jewish culture is structured—pretty collectivist. The Israelites complain, “Take us back to Egypt. We had such good food—melons, leeks, cucumbers.” It’s all listed. They’re nostalgic for zucchinis and melons. The food! Oh, it was so amazing—never mind that it was under Pharaoh, under enslavement.
Jacobsen: That irony is so rich. People come alive at that moment, narratively. And haven’t people done geographic studies of the trip—from where they were to where they were trying to go? It’s a very short journey, geographically. They were wandering for forty years, but the distance wasn’t far.
Cahana: Mount Sinai is widely believed to be near the southern part of the Sinai Peninsula. Saint Catherine’s Monastery, for instance, is right there. If that’s where Mount Sinai was, then yes—it’s not far. But that’s another whole discussion.
The Garden of Eden, too—that story could be read as tragic, about the loss of innocence and exile from paradise. Andthere are plenty of interpretations that go that route. However, the Garden of Eden is also a source of tremendous humour in Jewish storytelling.
What was the Garden of Eden? What happened with Adam and Eve? It’s so full of symbolic play. And knowing Hebrew makes it even more fun—because translation itself becomes funny. In the Hebrew Bible, Adam isn’t a name; it means “earthling.” And Eve, Chava, means “mother of all living” or “life-giver.” It’s entirely metaphorical in Hebrew.
However, mistranslations have led to numerous cultural developments. Hebrew-speaking Jews are very aware of this. Like, “Yes, I know that’s how it’s interpreted in English, but in the original Hebrew, it might mean something completely different.”
That’s why Michelangelo’s sculpture of Moses with horns is so absurd. It comes from a mistranslation. The Hebrew word Keren can mean “horn,” but it also means “ray” or “radiance.” The verse described Moses’s face as emitting rays of light, not sprouting horns. But Jerome’s Latin Vulgate translated it as “horns,” and that’s how it ended up in art history. And youtook it as “horns.” Then there’s this whole stereotype—”Jews have horns.” So we turn that on its head. We already know it’s absurd, so we joke about it. There’s humour in that inversion.
But the misinterpretation itself—its absurdity—and the act of holding your truth despite that—that’s a core source of Jewish humour. And that connects back to the Hebrew language and translations of Torah. The Abrahamic faiths are all grounded in Judaism. Roughly half the world’s population today identifies as Christian or Muslim—or more than half if you include global religious demographics. So, Judaism could be seen as the parent tradition of much of the spiritual world.
Jacobsen: How often do you notice other asynchronies—misalignments—between how people interpret things today, even at the level of seminary or theological study, compared to the historical evolution of those same ideas within Judaism?
Cahana: It’s not really for me to judge. I’m not in a position to dismiss half the world’s population and say, “They don’tget it.” That wouldn’t be right. I can only speak to my tradition. I hold that tradition as sacred. I come from a lineage grounded in ancestry—that’s my foundational way of being.
And when people choose to become Jewish, they’re joining that ancestral lineage. They’re opting into a worldview that places all of us at Sinai, spiritually speaking. That creates space for imagination because religious cultures and wisdom traditions are all about approaching truth—however elusive. Humour, to return to an earlier point, is one of those imaginative tools. It adds suppleness to the human experience. You shift the kaleidoscope by one dial, and suddenly, the entire picture changes. Humour lets us combine disparate ideas in surprising ways—and that’s what generates new, rich meaning.
Judaism, with its rich history, is also a tradition of profound interpretation. Sometimes, it’s not clear—was this written in the Torah? Or is this an interpretation from eleventh-century France? Or another context entirely? How does that interpretation map to today?
And who was the ancestor offering that interpretation? There are hundreds of thousands of commentaries. Each framing is slightly different. My religious education has helped keep my mind flexible—able to take various vantage points—and that’s precisely the space where humour lives.
Jacobsen: What about Job? In the Christian tradition and the Muslim tradition—there’s Job. And in Hindu culture, there are parallel figures. But back to the Hebrew Bible: what about the story of Job?
Cahana: Job is the comedy of all comedies. It’s a sad story—but it’s a tragicomedy. It’s bargaining with God—bargaining with the distance between the divine and the lowly person going through immense suffering. In Jewish culture, Job is referenced, yes, but it is not a central text in the same way it is in Christianity. It’s not studied as extensively. In Christian theology, Job often becomes a foreshadowing or prefiguration of Jesus, which makes sense within that interpretive framework.
One of my favourite thinkers to invoke about Job is Hélène Cixous, a French feminist philosopher. She talks about comedy as an act of rebellion. And while Job does not laugh, there’s something so deeply absurd about his continuous misfortune that you can imagine laughter emerging—not necessarily in the text, but potentially within him, as a radical, disruptive form of acceptance.
His acceptance of suffering—”I believe in you”—might be read in another light as containing an inner, subversive laugh. I see people in hospice care laugh all the time. I regularly laugh with people in those spaces. That bubbling, almost hysterical laugh—it’s a transcendental moment, a kind of submission or transformation.
Jacobsen: Who do you think is central, in Judaism, when it comes to humour? Can any figures from Torah be read that way—where you find something like oatmeal for comedy? Something nourishing. Something that sustains. Who would be a “sustaining comedian”—a figure you can return to and frame comedically?
Cahana: Well, Job is not central in Judaism, but as you said, he plays a symmetrical or typological role in Christianity about Jesus. In the Torah, though, one of the first stories of Jewish history—our ancestral stories—begins with Abraham and Sarah.
Sarah is old, she’s never had children, and she’s struggled with infertility her whole life. Then an angel tells her she’sgoing to be pregnant—and she laughs. That’s the moment. That’s the nuance. She laughs, and then she names her child Isaac—Yitzhak—which means “he will laugh.”
Jacobsen: Oh. That’s something I wouldn’t have thought of.
Cahana: Yes. Laughter is embedded in the name. Isaac is laughing. That lineage starts with a laugh. And that moment contains layers—it’s joyous, it’s absurd, it’s miraculous. And Sarah’s experience with infertility is deeply human and profoundly resonant. She had even told Abraham to take another wife—Hagar—and Hagar bore Ishmael. The name Ishmael means “God has heard.” The prayer was heard. But when Sarah finally has a child of her own—despite her age—it’s laughter. That’s the emotion.
It’s laughter born out of joy, absurdity, and disbelief. And then—later in the story—when Abraham is told to sacrifice Isaac, that moment becomes the emotional peak. Sarah dies soon after. That loss can be read as a kind of gallows humour—the tragedy within a life filled with paradoxes. There’s betrayal, lightness, and darkness interwoven. It’s all there.
Jacobsen: You mentioned “grains of truth” earlier—how faith traditions or wisdom traditions contain those. Yourknowledge and training are now rooted in Judaism and Hebrew philosophy. So, to find a grain of truth in a story is to find a point where myth and reality touch.
You also mentioned women facing fertility struggles. Therapists, of course, talk to people about deeply sensitive subjects—things of emotional weight. And earlier, we were discussing how that weight can be turned around, sometimes, so that humour emerges from it.
So the laughter—Isaac—that comes from the absurdity and joy of an older woman finally having a child after a long struggle… does the inverse of that, the seriousness of it, show up in therapeutic settings? Is that reflective of the reality you see, especially with women coming to you and struggling with fertility?
Cahana: Yes. People approach these experiences in so many different ways. There’s no single, objective emotional reaction. Some things are so immersive that they’re traumatic—hard to move through or move past.
But we all react differently. We do. And that multiplicity of truth is what produces humour. It’s the cacophony of voices—one person holds a particular kind of gravity, and another has a different one. That dissonance, that variation, is maybe subversive in its way. Each person is subverting different access points of truth.
And that’s very much aligned with Jewish wisdom. In Kabbalistic thought, the world itself is in shards—broken vessels. There’s fragmentation. I read a beautiful piece on this week’s parsha—the Torah portion. It was a kind of class analysis written by someone named Ilya—I’ll have to find the last name for you later.
The piece reflected on the broken tablets from Sinai. And the author imagined: what if the wealthy people received commandments like “don’t commit adultery,” “don’t steal,” while the poor people got “no,” “no,” “no,” “no,” “no.” It was a striking metaphor—a way to explore how class dynamics shape even the moral and legal frameworks within which we live.
That’s something we’ve spoken about before, right? It provides a unique vantage point on the world. And that’s what existentialism is—this ontological view, the fundamental question of being. But there’s also phenomenology—the lived experience, the intersubjective reality. The fusion of those two—that’s where existentialism lives. And it’s where satire, absurdity, tragicomedy, and irony all arise.
That’s the production of the existential stance. And it’s almost always accompanied by a sense of humour. There’s a point where the absurd is impossible to disentangle from the existential. Laughter becomes central—because it’s extraordinary when you’re able to reach that macroscopic perspective. When you can take a step back, examine your situation, and view it from a completely different angle.
Jacobsen: What stands out most to you in Jewish philosophy—or Torah or scripture—that is strangely tragic and, therefore, humorous?
Cahana: I mean, is Spinoza being excommunicated? Kidding.
Jacobsen: Well, he has half my sympathy—as a half-Dutch person.
Cahana: It may be, yes, that some of our great thinkers were unaccepted and then reaccepted into the community. Maimonides, for instance—he’s a huge thinker. We love his 13 Principles of Faith. However, he also has books that are banned in rigorous religious communities.
Cahana: And when Judaism gets translated into the broader culture—well, we get things like Madonna doing Kabbalah yoga. We love that.
Jacobsen: That’s hilarious.
Cahana: Kabbalah is meant to be this esoteric, deeply mystical discipline—a closed-off, tapped-in community where only a select few are traditionally allowed to study it. And then Madonna is… doing Hebrew letters in yoga class or something. I don’t even know exactly what she was doing, but that’s what I gathered. There’s a kind of play that becomes ubiquitous in these moments.
Jacobsen: And maybe excommunication, too. What’s the Jewish word for that again?
Cahana: Herem.
Jacobsen: Right, herem. I told you—I had a friend who was OTD, “off the derech.” She’s been OTD for several years now.
Cahana: And it’s a real thing. But it also depends—it’s not always the same. Sometimes, people self-select out. Sometimes, the community pushes them out. Sometimes it’s the family. It’s different for everyone. That’s not funny, however. There’s nothing funny about that. That’s terrible.
But I will say, a lot of OTD folks do become comedians—and they often have a lot to say. Take Moshe Kasher, for example. He’s a fascinating comedian. He grew up on the margins of several subcultures. He wrote a book—I think it was called Subculture Vulture or something like that.
Jacobsen: Sounds good.
Cahana: He lived in different worlds and came to understand the absurdity in each one. He was able to see the gravity that each subculture takes seriously—and then also recognize the inherent absurdity in that seriousness. That’s fantastic material for a comic. Also—his father was Hasidic. Both of his parents were deaf. So, he has a very unique perspective.
Jacobsen: A good take. He can tell if you’re actually listening or just pretending.
Cahana: Yes! He can tell if you’re listening—or not—for reasons beyond sound.
Jacobsen: I’m going to grab breakfast pretty soon.
Cahana: Green eggs and ham?
Jacobsen: Leftover chicken and asparagus. Close.
Cahana: True.
Jacobsen: You take care.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/18
Urtė Žukauskaitė-Zabukė is the CEO and co-founder of Laimingas Žmogus (Happy Human), the Lithuanian Humanist Organization. She leads the organization’s advocacy, ceremony programs, and democratic development initiatives, promoting equality, transparency, and non-religious life stance values in Lithuania. Gerda Surgautaitė is a co-founder and a board member of Laimingas Žmogus and a multidisciplinary creative who bridges theatre, education, and entrepreneurship. She helped pioneer humanist ceremonies in Lithuania and focuses on youth guidance, critical thinking education, and advancing humanist values. Scott Douglas Jacobsen interviews Urtė Žukauskaitė-Zabukė and Gerda Surgautaitė about founding Laimingas Žmogus, Lithuania’s humanist organization. They discuss the origins of humanist ceremonies, promote equality, address challenges in education and gender roles, and explore their role within the international humanist movement. The conversation explores advocacy, youth engagement, and democratic values.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are your names and titles?
Urte Zukauskaite-Zabuke: I am Urtė Žukauskaitė-Zabukė, CEO and co-founder of Laimingas Žmogus (Happy Human), the Lithuanian Humanist Organization.
Gerda Surgautaitė: I am Gerda Surgautaitė, co-founder and a board member of Laimingas Žmogus.
Jacobsen: When was Laimingas Žmogus founded?
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: Officially in 2020, but its roots go back to 2016.
Jacobsen: What inspired the founding of the organization?
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: Both of us were inspired by my wedding. My husband and I are atheists, and we were looking for something meaningful and personal.
At that time, the concept of humanism and secular life ceremonies was virtually unknown in Lithuania. While researching online, I discovered the existence of humanist ceremonies abroad.
Surgautaitė: Being a professional actress and a close friend, I conducted their wedding ceremony. That event became the very first humanist ceremony in Lithuania.
From that point on, we began offering humanist ceremonies to the public.
Jacobsen: What is your current membership size?
Surgautaitė: We are not yet a formal membership-based organization. However, we currently have around 55 trained celebrants across Lithuania.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: We consider these celebrants to be part of our internal community. They participate in decision-making processes, including the election of board members.
Although we have not yet opened general public membership, we are building a democratic structure and preparing to welcome broader community participation.
Jacobsen: How would you describe your path of growth? Moreover, what do you consider some of your key achievements during that journey?
Surgautaitė: First of all, I would say one of our most significant achievements has been offering humanist ceremonies to the people of Lithuania, providing a real alternative to religious and state ceremonies.
We have also developed a system for creating these ceremonies, along with a social business model that allows the organization to sustain itself without relying on government funding, purely through the ceremonies themselves. In that way, we are financially independent from external sources. That is a significant achievement.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: Politically, we also helped popularize the concept of humanism and humanist ceremonies in Lithuania. We are now the second-largest provider of ceremonies, after the Catholic Church.
We account for nearly 4% of all ceremonies performed in Lithuania. We are also the only life-stance organization in the country that offers LGBT+ marriage ceremonies, even though such unions are not legally recognized in Lithuania. Last year, we launched a campaign in support of LGBT+ marriage. Over 20,000 people in Lithuania signed this symbolic humanist wedding certificate of a LGBT+ couple.
The National Museum of Lithuania later accepted that certificate as part of the country’s LGBT+ history. Of course, it is not enough for full recognition of LGBT+ rights, but it was a significant step forward.
Humanist ceremonies serve not only as a sustainable model for our organization but also as a means of education and advocacy. We continue this work with funeral ceremonies, promoting non-religious options and offering a more personalized and free vision for end-of-life practices.
Jacobsen: What would you say are the core principles of Laimingas Žmogus? For example, some organizations list the Amsterdam Declaration 2002 or 2022 on their website and present that as a summary of humanist values.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: We have spent a great deal of time building an internal culture within the organization, which is something I am very proud of. In our weekly meetings, we revisit our core principles and team values. They are not dogmatic—we revise and reflect on them together each week.
While they are partly based on the Amsterdam Declaration, they also come from our lived experience and what we genuinely believe. One of our key principles is that freedom equals responsibility. If you want freedom, you must also take up responsibility.
Surgautaitė: For me, one of the most important core principles is feedback—feedback is a gift. We actively encourage team members to provide feedback, whether positive or critical, as it helps us grow. Another core principle is transparency: being open about what we do and how much it costs, in every possible way.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: Transparency is essential, especially when it comes to the Church.
When we were founding the humanist movement, we reflected deeply on how to make it fundamentally different from religion.
We wanted to avoid creating something that could resemble a new cult, which was genuinely a concern for us. Transparency became one of the key principles in preventing that. Of course, democracy within the organization and evolving governance structures are also crucial. These were, and still are, among the most important aspects.
Surgautaitė: We also believe that sometimes questions are more important than answers.
Jacobsen: As a journalist, I agree.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: Yes, that is one of our guiding principles as well.
Jacobsen: In post-Soviet states more generally, how would you describe gender equality?
How do people define their roles regarding gender, both personally and socially?
Surgautaitė: That is an excellent question. During Soviet times, women were encouraged to work and participate in public life. However, they were still expected to carry what we in Lithuania call “the four corners of the house” (=do everything).
They were professionally active, but at home, they carried full responsibility for the family, taking care of the children and managing the household. In our generation, men are increasingly taking on more responsibilities in family life. They are more involved in raising children, and the situation is improving significantly.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: The government is also supporting gender equality through legislation. For example, childcare leave is not reserved only for women. In Lithuania, parents can take up to two years of childcare leave, which is a generous policy.
However, at least three months must be taken by the other parent. Sometimes couples split the time equally, but the law ensures that both parents are involved to some extent.
Of course, inequality still exists. Lithuania also has one of the highest suicide rates in Europe, and men make up the majority of those deaths.
So gender inequality affects not only women, but it also impacts men. There used to be immense emotional pressure on men to be providers and protectors, which can be overwhelming, and a lot of men still believe that.
Fortunately, we are seeing some movement towards greater equality.
Surgautaitė: Still, the education system has yet to find effective ways to address this imbalance.
One reason is that nearly all teachers—and most principals—are women. So, for students, it can be not easy to find strong male role models, especially in schools.
This becomes even more problematic in the context of widespread divorce. In Lithuania, many children are raised primarily by single mothers. Moreover, when there are no strong male role models at home or in school, these issues become cyclical. It becomes harder for children to envision models of equal partnership within a family structure.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: That said, we are pretty fortunate when it comes to reproductive rights. Abortion is legal in Lithuania, and for now, there is no strong political agenda to change that. So that is one area where we have some stability, which is encouraging.
Jacobsen: So you have divorced families, and most teachers and principals are women.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: Yes, and in those divorced families, it is usually the women who take care of the children. That in itself becomes part of the larger problem.
Jacobsen: In those cases, what happens to the boys? What happens to the girls?
Moreover, where are the men? To wrap that together, what would be the humanist response?
Surgautaitė: What happens to the boys and girls? As I mentioned, it becomes difficult for them to imagine a different way of living—how responsibilities could be shared, how partnerships could be more balanced. So they turn to the internet for answers. Unfortunately, the answers they find—often from popular TikTok influencers—are not good ones.
Jacobsen: Influencers like TradWives and Boss Babes and those kinds of personas?
Surgautaitė: TradWives, online incel’s communities. I work in a high school, and I can see how dangerous this trend is becoming. Young people are seeking guidance online, and many influencers are simply seeking attention. What they promote is rarely aligned with a humanist worldview. Much of it actively contradicts humanist values.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: As for the humanist response, we promote marriage equality. We emphasize that the role of a celebrant is not just to create a beautiful ritual, but also to engage with the couple beforehand.
Celebrants meet with the couple, ask deep and profound questions, and help them reflect about the true meaning of the ceremony. They are encouraged to act, to some degree, like facilitators or guides—helping the couple reflect and think intentionally about their partnership.
Of course, the main task remains crafting the ceremony itself. However, we train our celebrants to approach it with a focus on humanist values – equality, mutual respect, and individual freedom. We are also currently exploring humanist confirmation courses.
It is important to enter the space of youth education, particularly to reach students who may lack positive role models. These programs could help place them in peer groups where they are exposed to humanist values—not just “good values,” but values rooted in critical thinking, equality, empathy, and reason.
Surgautaitė: Or at least to provide some guidance. We aim to raise topics and questions, especially those that promote critical thinking.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: Or simply to create a safe space. A space where young people feel accepted and valued. Humanity as a whole is facing numerous existential questions at present, given the global developments unfolding around us.
Jacobsen: And people will either take a bad answer or no answer at all.
So if we do not provide any answers, others will offer harmful ones in our place.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: It is especially difficult for young people today. Many are finishing school without knowing what profession they want to pursue, or even what their lives will look like six months from now. How can someone realistically make such major life choices in the 10th grade?
It was hard enough for our generation, but it is even more challenging for today’s youth. That is precisely where humanists should step in.
Jacobsen: Within the international humanist community, how do you view post-Soviet Northern European groups that work within the humanist tradition? How do they fit into the broader global movement? You have seen the diversity of concerns, lifestyles, language barriers, and cultural contexts. However, people still unite around a shared cause.
Zukauskaite-Zabuke: That is a great question. Post-Soviet and Northern Europe do not always overlap. For example, Romania and Hungary are post-Soviet, but not part of Northern Europe.
So I would group post-Soviet countries separately in this context.
Yesterday, we were discussing how we entered the humanist movement originally as seekers, looking for resources, guidance, and learning. Thanks to support from Humanists International and a good dose of our perfectionism, we have grown into a stable and well-established organization.
Now, we are in a position to give back—to share our knowledge, resources, and experiences.
We view such exchanges as invaluable, not just for building global solidarity but also in facing the shared threats that humanists encounter worldwide.
Although we are part of NATO, we firmly believe that international cooperation is essential, not only for security but also for fostering global understanding and reinforcing the value of peace.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts?
Surgautaitė: I would add that the global humanist community is incredibly inspiring. Moreover, although we face such complex challenges in the world—political instability, misinformation, rising authoritarianism, and social polarization —there is strength in knowing we are not alone.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Urte and Gerda.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/17
Jennifer Lockett, Freight Factoring Operations Manager at altLINE, brings 18 years of trucking industry experience and 8 in factoring. She launched altLINE’s freight factoring program in 2024 to help carriers nationwide maintain cash flow. In response to DHL pausing B2C shipments over $800, Lockett explains small carriers may face delayed payments, increased administrative burdens, and tighter margins. She emphasizes the value of freight factoring in bridging long payment cycles, reducing back-office strain, and ensuring financial stability. While evolving U.S. customs policies may reshape the freight factoring landscape, Lockett advises carriers to leverage factoring for operational resilience during regulatory and economic disruptions.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How will DHL’s pause on B2C shipments over $800 affecting small carrier?
Jennifer Lockett: These shipment delays will not only slow down delivery timelines but also impact cash flow for small carriers, as payments may be delayed for 30, 60, or even 90 days.
Jacobsen: What challenges face small businesses when navigating new customs requirements?
Lockett: Back-office personnel at all sorts of freight and logistics companies could also face increased administrative workloads. Additional staffing might even be required to handle these continuously evolving customs processes. Many of these companies don’t have the operating capital to afford to bring on extra help.
Jacobsen: Will this shift in U.S. customs policy influence small carriers’ engagement in international versus domestic shipping?
Lockett: Small carriers specifically operate on such slim margins that they could feel significant ramifications from this pause. They’re used to long payment cycles creating cash flow problems as is, so any sort of delays that this causes will only create more financial stress.
Jacobsen: How could these disruptions affect cash flow stability?
Lockett: Plus, there are already so many responsibilities that come with running a trucking company that they might not have the time to keep track of changes to the customs requirements.
Jacobsen: How will freight factoring clients turn to financial solutions because of increased delays or compliance-related costs?
Lockett: Instead of waiting for extended payment terms, carriers can use freight factoring to ensure they’re funded upon delivery. This really helps them maintain financial stability and positive cash flow. Keep in mind that this industry has notoriously long payment terms–up to 60 or even 90 days–so many carriers wouldn’t be able to operate without the assistance of their factoring company.
Jacobsen: How does increased unpredictability in international shipping affect long-term planning?
Lockett: Factoring companies also reduce the administrative burden for carriers by assuming collection responsibilities for all outstanding invoices. This frees up carriers’ time, allowing them and their team to focus on driving sales rather than invoicing debtors and chasing payments.
Jacobsen: Any advice for freight operators or carriers looking to protect themselves financially?
Lockett: By leveraging factoring, businesses can safeguard their cash flow and streamline operations while navigating these regulatory shifts with confidence.
Jacobsen: Could this development shift the freight factoring landscape?
Lockett: The freight factoring landscape could change as a result of these developments, but it’s too early to predict how that might be.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Jennifer.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/16
Ashley Darling, CEO and cofounder of Neptune, has a deep conversation on identity, platform ethics, and building a radically inclusive tech ecosystem. Neptune, a female-led social media startup based in Phoenix, Arizona, emphasizes community, equity, and autonomy—hiring human moderators instead of relying on AI. With over 20 years of experience in content creation, fashion, and influencer marketing, Darling champions LGBTQ+, BIPOC, and women-led entrepreneurship. The interview explores challenges marginalized creators face, the balance between individualism and community, and the platform’s commitment to digital freedom and nuance in moderation. From Dylan Mulvaney’s public transition to the erosion of pronoun visibility in U.S. policy, Darling speaks candidly about culture, vulnerability, and empowerment. Neptune stands as a disruptor in tech, reshaping how creators connect, express, and thrive in an increasingly politicized digital landscape.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Ashley Darling, the CEO and cofounder of Neptune, a female-led social media app built to empower creators by prioritizing human connection over algorithmic control. Neptune positions itself as a platform that hires human moderators and curators instead of relying solely on AI, emphasizing safety, creativity, and community.
With over two decades of experience across content creation, fashion, and influencer marketing, Ashley leads the movement for creator-first innovation and digital freedom. Based in Phoenix, Arizona, she advocates for LGBTQ+, BIPOC, and women-led entrepreneurship in the tech space.
Neptune is reshaping social networking by giving creators visibility, autonomy, and monetization tools. It stands as a disruptor and thought leader in social media startups. Ashley is working to build a digital ecosystem where authenticity thrives and creators are prioritized over metrics. Learn more at http://www.theneptuneapp.com, or follow her on Instagram at @the.ashley.darling.
Thank you for joining me today. As a tech entrepreneur and advocate for creator autonomy, how do you view models of gender parity—such as Iceland’s government-backed equality measures—compared to the challenges marginalized creators face in global digital spaces?
Darling: Wow, that’s such a layered issue. It’s frustrating, mainly based in the U.S., to compare how identity is approached in places like Iceland. There’s more collective respect- a “live and let live” attitude. In contrast, identity can feel adversarial in America, like someone else’s self-expression threatens your own.
That’s a deeply ingrained part of American individualism. It creates tension even within marginalized communities. I want to be careful not to speak for the Black community or other communities of colour, especially because I’m white-presenting. But within the queer community, and especially among trans folks, there are often internalized expectations—like Are you passing? Or how far into your transition are you?—that unfairly gatekeeps identity.
In the disabled community, which I’m part of due to chronic illness, there’s sometimes a sense that unless you’re visibly struggling, your identity is questioned. It’s like we need to prove suffering to feel validated. That can create a toxic hierarchy of legitimacy: I’ve experienced more, so I’m more entitled to this identity.
Jacobsen: Yes. I agree—American culture heavily emphasizes individualism, sometimes at the cost of community. Many Americans agree with this opinion. In fact, in many university-level courses, especially in sociology or cross-cultural psychology, you’ll often have entire sessions in a 15-week course dedicated to exploring collectivist versus individualist cultures. For example, China is broadly categorized as collectivist, and the United States as individualist. These are broad generalizations, of course, but they hold a degree of factual accuracy when viewed at scale. Individuals vary, but cultural frameworks influence how identity is perceived and expressed.
I see this happening, particularly in how people relate to their identities within accepted American social categories. There’s a kind of diffusion of the “Self”—capital S—becomes so porous that when someone else’s identity, which falls into a “not-me” category, begins to bleed into your conceptual boundaries, it can feel destabilizing. This is true for some heterosexual people, for some trans people, and for anyone heavily invested in their identity structure. I think people need a bit more cosmopolitanism—a broader view of how fluid and contextual identity is.
Darling: I agree.
Jacobsen: So let’s move to your world—app development and tech innovation, especially in spaces shaped by AI and the creator economy. These are much more fluid environments compared to traditional workplaces or industries. How do people navigating fluid or evolving identities, like someone who is trans and transitioning while building a product or launching a platform, cope in that space?
For example, they’re at a stage in their transition where they do what feels right for them, and their audience sees that process unfold in real time. This is a vulnerable space, mainly when people are used to engaging with static or binary identity presentations.
I’m reminded of a more mainstream example: Caitlyn Jenner. Of course, she was a famous Olympian long before her transition became public. While there’s more visibility and acceptance today, there is still significant pushback, and for creators, that pushback can occur mid-platform development, right in the middle of audience-building and content creation. For people not accustomed to shifting identities, it can be confusing. It can be painful for the individual undergoing the transition when others do not recognize or respect who they are becoming.
Darling: A good example of this, and whether you love her or not, is Dylan Mulvaney, an important figure. She’s a popular trans creator who began building a platform before and during her transition. Her journey has played out mainly in public, and she’s faced enormous support and aggressive backlash. It’s an intense spotlight, but it shows how creators can bring audiences along if they’re authentic, vulnerable, and consistent.
So, Dylan was male-presenting. She was assigned male at birth, and all of her early content reflected who she was before her transition. What made her path so impactful is that, unlike some other creators who pull back, closing the curtain, going quiet, and returning post-transition, she brought her audience with her every step.
That’s more similar to what Caitlyn Jenner did not do. Caitlyn essentially disappeared from the public eye for a period. People weren’t seeing her out and about. There were vague reports and whispers—she was having work done—and people speculated: Is this just a vain man obsessed with his looks? Or is Caitlyn transitioning? It was ambiguous. The public didn’t know what was happening and was left to guess until there was a big, orchestrated reveal.
What younger generations, particularly on platforms like TikTok and Instagram, are doing differently is integrating their journey into their content. Instead of making themselves the center of a celebrity-style “reveal,” they involve their audience. Dylan Mulvaney is an excellent example of that. Even before she came out as trans, she had a large queerfollowing because she was open about being queer.
So when she eventually came out and began transitioning, her audience was already emotionally invested in her. She documented everything through her “Days of Girlhood” series. She came out publicly, said “I identify as a woman,” and invited people to witness her exploring what girlhood means to her—things like getting her nails done for the first time, growing her hair out, wearing a dress, and embracing experiences commonly associated with girlhood.
That vulnerability sparked much support—and much backlash. Many Americans, especially those unfamiliar or uncomfortable with trans identities, reacted strongly to the idea of someone assigned male at birth claiming girlhood. There was discourse both from within and outside the queer community.
Some queer and trans individuals criticized her, saying, “This isn’t what a trans woman should be or look like.” Others, especially from outside the community, felt she was infringing on what they saw as “real” girlhood, saying things like, “This takes womanhood away from me.”
Jacobsen: So it becomes a personal journey and a public and cultural flashpoint. And there’s so much nuance. I’ve even been talking with a few gender-affirming surgeons lately, and they’ve pointed out how fast the medical techniques are evolving. For example, bottom surgery today compared to 20 years ago is radically different—more advanced, more precise, and more accessible in some cases.
Even things like the prominence of an Adam’s apple, which used to be a significant barrier to being perceived as female, are now more manageable with advances in facial feminization surgery. So even what we consider “passable” is changing—socially and technically. It’s not just about cultural fluency or presentation—it’s also about rapidly evolving medical options.
They pointed out that traditional Adam’s apple reduction surgery is much riskier because the surgeon has to go in through the mouth and work downward, similar to how you would approach certain cancers in the lymph nodes of the throat. It’s a more invasive procedure.
But now, some surgeons are using a less invasive method where they go in from behind and shave the thyroid cartilage down internally. Because it’s done from inside, there’s no visible external scar, which can be significant for people concerned about presentation.
That procedure reduces the prominence of a stereotypically male feature—the Adam’s apple—without leaving a mark. It doesn’t fundamentally change the voice—that’s an entirely different process—but it can help someone feel more comfortable in how they’re perceived.
Darling: However, there’s something significant to say about this: the idea of “passing” or even fully medically transitioning is, in itself, a privilege. Many people, especially in marginalized communities, cannot afford gender-affirming surgeries or have to fight their insurance providers over coverage.
Access to surgeons who specialize in these procedures and the resources to pursue them is a form of privilege. However, reaching a point of gender expression that aligns with your sense of self, whatever “passing” means to you.
Jacobsen: That’s a significant issue in the U.S. right now. Unfortunately, we’re seeing many states move to restrict or eliminate access to gender-affirming care, which takes that possibility away from many people.
Someone recently brought this up to me—I am a physical therapist based in Texas, so I am closer to you than to me. I am probably working in an even more difficult state environment than Arizona. However, Arizona has its complications, too, especially outside the cities.
That physical therapist in Texas mentioned something critical: with the current legislative rollbacks, some of these laws aren’t even directly about the trans community, but the effects will impact them. Because of the structure of these healthcare policies, broad restrictions in medical practice or insurance coverage can hit trans people especially hard.
The impact is real. I’ve spoken with doctors who have left the United States to practice in Canada because they’re treated better there. That is one layer. Another issue is that people don’t want to immigrate to the U.S. as doctors anymore, not because they hate trans people, but because they do not want to work in an environment where medical professionals are mistreated, underpaid, or overregulated. That has a downstream impact on care across the board.
And then there’s a more nuanced point that someone recently made to me—something I hadn’t fully considered. Due to fear and social pressure, we’re now seeing some people detransition, at least insofar as it’s possible for them. Can you discuss how that might impact the creator space and representation more broadly?
Darling: Yes. I had an acquaintance—let me use his current preferred pronouns—he/him. He was assigned male at birth, and I met him about ten years ago. At that time, he had begun transitioning from male to female. He had gotten fairly far along in his transition. He had undergone top surgery, was on hormones, and was considering facial feminization surgery. He wasn’t a primary content creator, but he had a presence online, and I followed his journey.
As is often the case, many people are watching these journeys silently. They may not comment, they may not “like” or repost. Still, they’re there—quiet observers who might be closeted themselves, or afraid to engage publicly due to fear of being outed at work, school, or within their families.
What happened in his case was tragic. He began experiencing intense pushback from people in his immediate circle. He was bullied. The costs—financial, emotional, and social—kept adding up. Eventually, he made the heartbreaking decision to detransition. And I say “heartbreaking” because, from everything he had shared, it was clear this was not what he wanted, but rather what he felt was safest.
So, he reclaimed his he/him pronouns, began dressing more masculinely again, and essentially went back into the closet, not out of personal regret, but out of social necessity.
This had a profound impact on those of us who followed his story. We were devastated for him. But beyond that, his detransition planted a seed of fear in others who were watching: Am I next? Will this happen to me if I keep going?
It introduces a chilling effect into the community, especially online, where people often seek affirmation and connection. This applies to public figures, too, like Caitlyn Jenner, who, despite her visibility and privilege, still became a political and cultural lightning rod. The implication becomes: If even someone famous and wealthy gets targeted, what chance do I have?
Caitlyn Jenner went through a complete transition and came out publicly, but since then she’s made some incredibly harmful statements about the queer and trans community—even though she is a trans woman. It’s disheartening. That kind of rhetoric undermines trust and causes real harm, especially within marginalized communities. When someone from within the community walks back their identity or aligns with narratives that invalidate that identity, even if framed as a safety decision, it sparks fear, confusion, and frustration.
Just the other day—maybe yesterday or the day before—a prominent lesbian content creator on TikTok posted a video saying she had a spiritual “conversion moment.” She claimed that God came to her in a vision and told her she needed to stop being gay. She said she woke up from that vision and was no longer a lesbian. She had converted and is now identifying as Christian.
The response was intense. She received a flood of support from conservative users who see that as a “success story”—as if sexuality is something that can be chosen or changed. But for her former audience, particularly queer folks—predominantly Black, queer people who had seen her as a proud, visible figure—it was devastating.
When someone who’s publicly deconstructed their identity then turns around and says, “Actually, I was wrong. I’m going back,” it sends a painful message. First of all, that’s not how sexual orientation works. And second, it delegitimizes the experiences of people still struggling for acceptance. It makes everyone look bad in that moment, even if that wasn’t her intent.
Jacobsen: Yes, and what you’re describing touches on something more profound—something structural. People are individuals. However, when the legal system or the social climate is built to treat people based on collective identity, anyone who belongs, whether they want to or not, feels the impact of one person’s action within that group.
So when someone publicly detransitions or disavows their queerness, people say, “This hurts all of us.” That’s the paradox of representation and fame. Your identity becomes a symbolic battleground. And even if it’s just one person’s journey, the consequences ripple across an entire community.
Darling: That plays out constantly in social media, where there’s an intense push-and-pull between individualism and community.
Something we’re mindful of at Neptune is balance. Social media originally promised connection, but it became standardized and impersonal somewhere along the way. I think back to the MySpace era, when people had unique pages—they coded their backgrounds, curated their profiles, and truly expressed themselves. Individuality and identity were embedded in the platform.
But then came Apple’s rise—and I believe their design aesthetic influenced everything underneath it. Everything became clean, minimal, white, and uniform—one button, one style. And suddenly, everyone’s profiles started to look the same. That sense of personal expression was stripped away.
We’re trying to return to that individuality ethos within a supportive community framework. People need to feel seen as themselves and safe as part of a collective. That’s the challenge and the opportunity in designing platforms today.
Because of that shift, we saw a pendulum swing toward hyper-individualism, where suddenly, your Instagram feed had to be perfectly curated, aesthetically pleasing, and highly differentiated. You needed to stand out at a glance. The idea was that someone could land on your profile and instantly get a visual snapshot of who you were. However, by focusing so intensely on individualism, we have lost the social part of social media.
One of the things we’re trying to do at Neptune is bring that sense of community back. We’re working to encourage creators to support each other—to rebuild that communal framework. Admittedly, we’re still early in this journey and don’t have a full suite of community tools built into the platform yet. Those features are technically complex and only work well when you already have many users.
What we have done, though, is launch a robust Discord server. It’s already becoming a dynamic space where people are forming real communities. Without a better phrase, we just threw everyone into the same server. We said: Look, we’re here with shared values—equity, community, and yes, the ability to make a living so we can feed ourselves, our families, and our cats. Find your people. And they did.
Well, some of us live large with two cats [Laughing], but seriously—they found their people. We’re seeing these pods of community form. People are organizing their meetups, even offline. It’s powerful to watch.
It proves that you can embrace individualism without rejecting community. You don’t have to say, “I belong to no one, I’m not part of anything,” to express your uniqueness. The two aren’t mutually exclusive.
For many Americans, that’s a radical idea—a community without a mob mentality. It’s healthy. It doesn’t strip you of your individuality. The humanist community has a great way of expressing this balance in its declarations. They affirm individual freedom, which leans toward the libertarian side, and social responsibility, which leans toward a collectivist or socialist view. It’s about the proper balance between the two.
Jacobsen: That’s a vital line you’re drawing—between identity, perception, and coexistence. I’ve tried to think through this dynamic before, and maybe I can parse it like this—bear with me.
So, on one hand, you have the individual, how a person sees. On the other hand, you have the community, which sees that person, however it’s going to, regardless of accuracy. Sometimes, that perception is neutral, occasionally harmful, and sometimes affirming.
And then there’s this third hand, because there might be three hands here [Laughing], which is respecting the coexistence of individual self-concept alongside diverse social contexts. You can hold your identity while recognizing that others will have their own opinions about it, and those opinions may or may not affect you directly.
It’s the reality of living in a pluralistic society. Whether you’re a white-bearded evangelical guy in Arizona who enjoys chopping wood, or someone who once took Amtrak and overheard a person saying, “I don’t want no weirdos next to me,”—and they’re saying prefacing that with “I’m Black, I’m trans, and I’m seven months pregnant”—everyone is navigating identity both internally and externally.
Darling: People carry their own stories and self-concepts; sometimes those get affirmed, and sometimes they don’t. But holding space for those realities is where real community starts.
Jacobsen: You can have policy or legal frameworks that affect individuals based on their belonging, generally speaking, to a group. When that happens, it’s no longer just someone’s random opinion—it becomes personal, because it can change your material reality. That’s when it matters.
Now, where it doesn’t impact me directly is in religious opinion. For example, I know people who think, “Scott doesn’t realize it, but he’s a child of God,” and so on. That doesn’t affect me—I don’t care. But if someone gets in my face with it aggressively, then yes, that’s when it crosses into personal impact.
Where it becomes severe is when policy changes, or laws are passed, that target marginalized communities. Take white supremacists, for instance. Many of them have grotesque views about trans people or LGBTQ+ folks in general. Some of them deny trans identities altogether. But suppose they’re ranting in a basement somewhere. In that case, it’s different from them influencing legislation that strips rights away from real people. That’s the critical distinction.
So, in the creator space—and especially for LGBTQ+ and BIPOC creators—how do you advocate for people, or help them advocate for themselves, despite ignorant or hateful opinions? At the same time, how do you build collective power so that when discriminatory policy does arise, you can respond effectively—reverse it, or push for stronger, more inclusive protections? I hope that made sense.
Darling: Yes, it does. That’s a thoughtful and layered question—let me think through it briefly.
This is one of the ongoing challenges. Neptune is a private company that operates in a very public space. So we’ve built our policies around giving people the maximum freedom within the legal framework we’re bound to as a U.S.-based business.
The difficulty comes when people assume their perception of rights applies across the board, especially around speech. A policy written to protect one person’s rights might not work for someone else or conflict with another community’s safety and dignity. Take freedom of speech as an example. Whenever I go live—whether on TikTok, Meta, talking about Neptune—someone inevitably says, “This is a free speech platform, right?” And my answer is yes, but also no.
We’re not the U.S. government. We’re a private company. The First Amendment protects your speech from government interference. It doesn’t guarantee you a platform on private networks. So no, you can’t come into our space and spout racial slurs or spread hate speech and then claim First Amendment protection. That’s not how it works. People will try to twist that and say, “Well then, you’re not a free speech platform.” But they say, “I want a space where I can say harmful things without consequences.” That’s not freedom. That’s a license.
At Neptune, we try to create a space where everyone, especially LGBTQ+ and BIPOC creators, can speak freely without fear of harassment or violence. Freedom means protection, equity, and community, not unregulated chaos.
It comes down to how people interpret what they believe they have the freedom to do. It ties back to that ongoing tension between the individual and the collective. If someone thinks they have the right to say whatever they want without consequences, I’ve said this before, and I’ll repeat it—Neptune is not the place for you.
We intentionally build a healthy community, which means continuously reviewing our policies. Our community guidelines have been peer-reviewed by a diverse panel of folks from various backgrounds who looked them over and, generally speaking, agreed that they work pretty well for now.
But in practice, things get more complex. Someone will inevitably come to us and say, “You took my content down unfairly. That violated my free speech.” Our role is to evaluate those claims, stay flexible, and ensure our policies serve the whole. We can’t build our policies solely around individual preferences—they must be based on the collective experience.
That’s why diversity is essential—gender diversity, BIPOC representation, disability inclusion, or more. The majority experience isn’t representative of everyone. We need as many voices in the room as possible, with real seats at the table, saying, “This is how this policy impacts me.” That’s the kind of feedback we want.
Now, in terms of policy at the state or federal level, we hope to grow into a platform that can advocate on behalf of our users—particularly BIPOC, queer, and disabled communities. When legislation affects people’s ability to move freely online or talk about their lived experiences, we want to speak up for their right to be here and be heard.
And here’s the thing—we get to decide. As a private company, we can determine what goes on our platform and what doesn’t.
A clear example of what we don’t want to replicate is TikTok. Right now, creators are being suppressed left and right. Say something against the president? Against MAGA? Anti-conservative in tone? It gets pulled, muted, or flagged for violations—deeply concerning.
No law says you can’t express political dissent, but some platforms act like there is. We aim to operate as our entity, offering users maximum individual freedom within a framework that protects the community. It’s a tricky balance—especially in America—but we’re committed to trying to strike it.
Jacobsen: Right, and that’s the paradox in American digital culture—maximum individual freedom coexisting with the needs of a shared space. You’re managing that tension transparently, which is rare. Here’s a funny—and sad—footnote. It’s been reported that Elon Musk reengineered the algorithm on X (formerly Twitter) because he was upset that his posts weren’t getting as many views as he thought they should. Patton Oswalt made the point that it’s just… sad. Like, when is enough attention enough?
After all the chaos around attempts to slow down OpenAI, Sam Altman critiqued Musk. Altman said something to the effect of, ‘He’s insecure.’ The interviewer asked, ‘Really?’ Altman responded, ‘No—honestly. His whole life is about that.’Of course, that’s just one person’s opinion, but it carries weight. There’s qualitative truth in it.
Anyway, here’s where I want to go with the closing question:
We often talk about moderation and policies in terms of protecting marginalized communities—BIPOC, LGBTQ+, and disabled folks—from harmful content. But what happens when a person from a marginalized community uses derogatory language toward someone in what is perceived as a “majority” group? For example, what if a queer user uses a slur against a cisgender, heterosexual, white Christian woman? Or what if a BIPOC creator makes a generalizing or inflammatory comment about white people?
That kind of reverse case isn’t discussed as much. So how do you handle that? Especially in a context where people often try to apply the First Amendment across all platforms—even though, as we’ve said, that’s a misunderstanding of how free speech works in private spaces. So: How do you finesse your policies to handle those cases—when someone from a historically marginalized identity says something that has real consequences for someone else? And how do you distinguish that from reclaiming slurs within a community?
Darling: That’s such a thoughtful and essential question. As we do at Neptune, a diverse team of human moderators is crucial. There’s much nuance to it.
We had this discussion early on, specifically around community slurs. Take the N-word, for example. It’s used in particular ways within the Black community. Many Black folks are comfortable using that term with each other, but anyone outside that community using it is wrong no matter the explanation. It’s a matter of context, history, and shared experience.
The same is true in the queer community. There are words I might use with another queer person—maybe someone who’s a close friend—that would be entirely inappropriate for someone else to say. There’s a layer of cultural permission and proximity that matters. So our approach is not to have one-size-fits-all rules. Instead, we look at intent, impact, and context. Was it targeted harassment? Was it intra-community discourse? Was it satire, or reclaiming, or something else? We should deliberate on how we handle that.
Of course, it’s never perfect. But we’d rather scrutinize these situations, especially when identity and culture are involved, than default to binary enforcement that doesn’t consider real life. And so having the ability to source that nuance—to say, “This doesn’t need to be removed because it’s not derogatory, it’s accepted vernacular within the creator’s community”—is enormous. No other social media platform is doing that.
However, if a straight person were to enter a queer person’s space and use those exact words as slurs or spread hate speech, there would be punitive action taken—against the bully, not the original creator. That’s a key difference in building Neptune compared to the others.
Platforms like TikTok and Meta have openly acknowledged that they suppress BIPOC, queer, and disabled users’ content—not necessarily because they’re targeting them intentionally, but because they don’t want to deal with the moderation challenges that arise. Their logic has been, “If we suppress their visibility, they won’t become targets.”
Of course, this is a systemic erasure. What we’ve done reasonably well so far—and it’s become this fascinating experiment in brand and culture—is build Neptune to become its own culture. The brand is the culture.
By nature, a lot of highly conservative users don’t feel at home in our ecosystem. That’s not because we exclude anyone—we don’t—but because the culture is unapologetically BIPOC, queer, disabled, and yes, proudly weird. We lovingly refer to ourselves as the island of misfit toys. Most of us haven’t fit in anywhere else.
So when people who don’t resonate with that come in, they often self-select out. It’ll be interesting to see how that plays out as we scale, how the culture evolves, and how our community standards are tested in practice.
We also empower creators with tools to moderate their content. For example, if someone comes into a Black creator’s space and leaves a racist comment or hate speech—and our moderation systems, whether AI or human, don’t catch it right away—that creator can still delete or report the comment directly.
This is where human moderation is crucial. If someone leaves a comment that technically isn’t flagged by AI, because the language might not hit the hate-speech threshold, but a human moderator sees it and says, “No, no. That term carries historical or coded significance,” then we act.
Jacobsen: Triple parentheses kind of stuff. “Globalist.” “Internationalist.” These terms have meaning, and dog whistles matter.
Darling: So that’s how we’re planning to handle these situations. And look, it’s all a big experiment, because we’re learning. We’re committed to building something different. Many other platforms have been bland in their branding and messaging. They say, “We’re for everyone.”
Sure, we say that too—but here’s the thing: if you’re in our space and don’t subscribe to our values—like equity, community, and enterprise—you’ll probably feel a little… ostracized.
The word equity alone triggers many people in the U.S. Some hear that and immediately go, “Oh, that’s woke. I want no part of it.” Seeing how that all plays out as we grow will be interesting.
So far, over 5,000 people have joined our beta, and we haven’t had any real issues. Beta users are usually early adopters, so they’re often more value-aligned. Once we open to the general public, you get the bad actors who come in to test boundaries. They’ll upload explicit content, spam, or try to see how far they can push the rules. That’s part of scaling.
But honestly, we’ve been lucky so far to have a fantastic, supportive community. Seeing how that holds up when we expand beyond beta will be interesting.
Jacobsen: Many companies and organizations beta-test AI, mainly narrow, task-specific AI that’s more sophisticated than basic algorithms but still reasonably simple. One method they use is keyword filtering. And there have been some hilarious and problematic examples of that. I remember a case involving Doge where content was flagged because of the word gay, about the Enola Gay, the WWII aircraft. That’s not precisely a contradiction—it’s more of an analogy. But could you see something like that happening on Neptune if keyword filtering catches a word used innocently or historically?
Darling: Theoretically, sure. But we’re cautious about what we filter. For example, we’re not filtering out words like gay, queer, or lesbian. That would never happen.
So no one could come in and say, “Oh my god, that’s so queer,” and get flagged just because the AI doesn’t understand context. I mean, could someone use a word like queer in a retro way—like people did in the ’50s? Maybe. But I don’t see a viable use case for that problem. Still, hypothetically, I get your point.
That’s precisely why we don’t rely solely on AI moderation. We use AI to catch obvious issues—basic keyword and behavioural pattern stuff—but then we have human moderators who step in for review. If the AI flags something and a creator says, “Hey, that’s not fair,” they can appeal it. A human moderator reviews the case, and if it was wrongly penalized, we fix it. The violation is wiped, and the account is restored to normal.
Jacobsen: That’s the right way to do it. These systems are built on current iterations of human language, which is constantly changing. So having AI makes things more efficient and cost-effective, but it’s not infallible.
Darling: That’s why we’re committed to having diverse human moderators. It’s like having a second layer of cultural context—what you might call horizontal activation. These folks understand nuance, subtext, and cultural references. AI isn’t there yet. So we need that human texture to keep things fair, inclusive, and responsive. Human moderators can grasp the nuance of how something is perceived. We’re not applying a flat tier for speech—context matters. That’s a huge differentiator.
Jacobsen: So, what else should I export here? When you talk about platform design and moderation, do you see a fundamental distinction in approach between entrepreneurs—those dealing with the software or application layer—and technologists or engineers who are working behind the scenes? In other words, do you think there’s a different philosophy between the front-facing founders or brand-centred creators and the backend developers—the proverbial “square-glasses”computer science crowd?
Darling: There’s a difference. One is front-facing, and one is back-end. The approach varies depending on the individual, of course. Still, entrepreneurs and brand-builders generally think about voice, values, and user relationships. At the same time, engineers are focused on building the tools to make that possible, ideally without friction.
Jacobsen: What questions do you think people should be asking about platforms like Neptune but haven’t yet? Are there taboos or unspoken areas you’re navigating?
Darling: Depending on the political climate, a lot of what we’re doing might be considered countercultural or even subversive.
For example, in our current U.S. administration, there have been significant rollbacks around pronoun visibility. In many government settings, people can no longer share their pronouns proactively. So on Neptune, we’ve made it a point to include space on profiles where users can share their pronouns if they choose to. It’s optional—but available. That small decision becomes meaningful when the broader landscape tries to erase it.
And until that becomes outright illegal, we’ll keep offering that space. We’ll adapt the design if necessary—“This is a place for anything you want people to know about you.” What people choose to put in that space is up to them.
Another area is press freedom. American media is experiencing a major credibility crisis; many people no longer trust mainstream outlets. Our user base, in particular, leans heavily on independent journalists to stay informed. Everything here is values-based—people follow journalists and creators who share their worldview.
So we’re actively exploring ways to support those independent voices. One feature we’re testing is geotagged event streaming. Say you’re an independent journalist on the scene of something happening—you could go live and tag your location. If users have alerts set within a 15-mile radius, they’d get a notification: “This is happening now. Do you want to watch the live stream?”
That could be incredibly powerful, especially in the context of things like ICE raids or civil protests. We don’t want to dictate how people use these tools, but given everything happening in the U.S., people will naturally adapt the technology to their needs.
Tools intended for lighthearted sharing—community events, art, creativity—could evolve into tools for survival, journalism, or real-time activism. Humans are adaptive. They’ll use whatever they can to survive, connect, and stay informed when pushed. We’re building with that in mind—even if the original intention of a feature was something much more casual.
Should other methods of connectivity be shut off—made inaccessible, restricted, etc.—there’s always the underlying fear, especially as a business, of pissing off the government. There’s this lingering anxiety: What if they legislate that all social media apps must follow XYZ guidelines? Or function only in such-and-such a manner?
But not building Neptune out of fear was never an option for me. People often ask, “Are you scared? Are you worried you’ll get banned or draw the administration’s attention because you’re carving out space for people they’re actively marginalizing—or worse?” And yes—it’s scary. But it’s also exciting. There’s something defiant and hopeful about doing it anyway.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Ashley.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/15
Dr. Tracy E. Crane, PhD, RDN, of the University of Miami, discusses the MAC-3 program, exploring how circadian fasting, body composition, and metabolomics impact renal cell carcinoma treatment outcomes. With over $30 million in research funding, Dr. Crane’s team combines mouse and human trials to investigate the obesity paradox, emphasizing behavioural science, dietary timing, and precision interventions. The research aims to improve cancer care through scalable, cost-effective methods by integrating wearable technologies, glucose monitoring, and advanced imaging. This multidisciplinary approach highlights how fasting duration and fat distribution might reshape clinical strategies in oncology.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by Dr. Tracy E. Crane, PhD, RDN, Associate Professor of Medical Oncology, Public Health, and Kinesiology at the University of Miami Miller School of Medicine. She serves as Co-Leader of the Cancer Control Research Program and Director of Lifestyle Medicine, Prevention, and Digital Health at the Sylvester Comprehensive Cancer Center.
Dr. Crane is internationally recognized for her cancer prevention and survivorship work, focusing on integrating lifestyle interventions, such as nutrition and exercise, into cancer care. Her research emphasizes using digital health technologies to deliver personalized behavioural strategies to improve patient outcomes across the cancer continuum. Over the past five years, she has secured over $30 million in research funding, including multiple National Cancer Institute (NCI)-funded studies and a large Patient-Centred Outcomes Research Institute (PCORI)-funded trial. She has authored over 100 peer-reviewed publications, including co-authoring the latest American Cancer Society guidelines on nutrition and physical activity for cancer survivors.
Dr. Crane also serves as Vice Chair of the Cancer Prevention and Control Committee for NRG Oncology’s NCI Community Oncology Research Program (NCORP).
Dr. Crane, what inspired the development of the MAC-3 program, particularly about renal cell carcinoma?
Crane: The MAC-3 program was developed to explore the impact of dietary interventions on renal cell carcinoma outcomes. We recognized that a multidisciplinary approach—combining expertise from various scientific disciplines—was essential to address the complex questions surrounding cancer prevention and treatment. For instance, Dr. Scott Wellford leads preclinical studies using mouse models to investigate dietary effects in this project, while I oversee parallel human clinical trials. This collaborative approach allows us to align our studies closely, ensuring that findings from animal models can inform human interventions and vice versa.
In human trials, we face ethical and practical limitations in manipulating diets, but mouse models offer more control over dietary variables. By conducting these studies concurrently, we can synthesize our findings to generate comprehensive insights, leading to more effective and personalized dietary strategies for cancer patients. This synergy accelerates our research progress, so we named the program MAC-3—a nod to “Mach 3,” symbolizing high speed—reflecting our commitment to advancing cancer research swiftly through team science.
Jacobsen: So the other part of this involves Dr. Lombard. He is a pathologist who specializes in metabolomics—studying biological processes at the molecular level to understand what tissues, tumours, and blood samples are signalling. What are the cells doing? How are they communicating? Could you elaborate on his role?
Crane: Yes. Both the mouse and human studies send biological samples to Dr. Lombard. He analyzes those samples and helps conclude from a metabolomic perspective. By adding that layer—looking at what the cells are doing in real time, including things like sirtuin activity—we can move more quickly toward answering larger research questions. These are questions we would not be able to answer as quickly or thoroughly if we worked in isolated silos.
If you did everything independently, you might get the same answers. However, it would take much longer, and you would miss the insights that emerge when multiple scientific perspectives come together. That is the power of multidisciplinary science.
Jacobsen: Moving into the following research phase, how can you precisely predict disease risk or treatment outcomes? How early can these predictions be made, and how accurately can they become?
Crane: One of the primary motivations behind this work is addressing the obesity paradox in renal cell carcinoma. It is a fascinating and counterintuitive phenomenon. Obesity is a known risk factor for developing renal cell carcinoma. However, once a person has the disease and begins treatment, obesity appears protective. That paradox—how the same factor can increase risk yet offer a protective effect later—does not make intuitive sense, and we are trying to understand why that happens.
We are developing potential biomarkers not only from blood samples but also from body imaging. One of the aims of this trial is to analyze body composition through imaging. We want to see if something is changing or shifting—perhaps BMI, a crude, population-level measure of obesity, is not the right tool for assessing individual risk. Maybe the answers lie in specific aspects of body composition.
Precision would come from combining multiple tools, like imaging and metabolomics. By integrating advanced imaging, metabolomic profiling, and other biological markers, we aim to better analyze who is at higher risk and what interventions they need.
Jacobsen: So, theoretically, if someone with a high BMI develops renal cell carcinoma and then loses a significant amount of weight, would that correlate with a higher risk of mortality?
Crane: That is what our current epidemiological data suggest. Extensive cohort studies—epidemiological trials—show associations like this. However, those are not cause-and-effect studies. That is why our current project is a randomized controlled trial. We are not just looking at weight loss; we are specifically examining whether manipulating metabolism, without necessarily changing body weight, affects outcomes. It is about understanding whether the metabolic changes, not just the physical weight, influence cancer responses.
Jacobsen: When you say body composition, you mean total body fat, muscle mass, etc.?
Crane: Yes, and it is important to recognize that fat does not distribute evenly across people. Some individuals carry more visceral fat in the abdomen; others store fat in the hips or thighs. Moreover, some people may even shift fat stores on purpose. However, in general, this variability matters a lot.
Jacobsen: Are there particular fat or fat distribution types that seem more significant?
Crane: That is precisely what we are trying to determine. Not all adipose tissue is created equal. Visceral adipose tissue, for example, behaves very differently from subcutaneous fat. Understanding the role of different fat types and distributions could be crucial in predicting risk and tailoring treatment strategies. You have brown fat, and you have white fat. These different types of adipose tissue have distinct metabolic functions and responses.
When we talk about lean mass, that includes muscle and bone, it is important to understand what happens to these tissues when patients undergo treatment for renal cell carcinoma. Are there changes in response to the treatment contributing to this paradoxical outcome? We are still trying to investigate many unknowns. We hope to better understand the obesity paradox by looking at the whole picture, from whole-body imaging and body composition down to the smallest particles of cellular metabolism.
Jacobsen: Are there other methods that might be as coarse as body composition but still as accurate or predictive in identifying risk? Could something else serve that purpose just as well?
Crane: That is a good question. Honestly, I do not know yet. Body composition may or may not be the best predictor, which is precisely why we do science. Our current hypothesis is that it offers real potential.
Another important consideration is clinical translation. We aim to build on tools and resources already available in the healthcare system. For example, most patients undergo routine imaging as part of their standard care. These scans are not currently analyzed for body composition in clinical practice, but we can add that layer of analysis.
Suppose we use existing scans, layer on the body composition data, and combine that with biomarkers from blood samples, which we collect in large volumes. In that case, we can develop clinically useful prediction models. The point is to use what is readily available to avoid burdening the healthcare system and still generate valuable insights.
Could there be a completely different biomarker or a better method that works even more accurately? Absolutely. That is always a possibility. However, this approach—the one we developed as a team—offers a strong scientific rationale and the most significant translational potential.
Jacobsen: Really, it is what you said earlier—this is why we do science. It reminds me of a talk by Richard Dawkins a while back where he discussed different kinds of language, contrasting scientific talk with non-scientific language.
If I remember correctly, he made the point that there is a reason why writing in scientific journals often reads a certain way. It might seem dry or formulaic to some, but it reflects the precision required in scientific discourse. It is not about embellishment but clarity, evidence, and reproducibility.
Dawkins gave other examples, quoting what he called a “peer-reviewed journal”—though in that case, it was fictional. He said something like, “It has been privately revealed to Dr. So-and-so that…” to demonstrate how non-scientific language differs. So that scientific spirit you are pointing to is critical—it underscores the importance of method and discipline in getting accurate results.
Crane: There is a specific way of doing things in science. It is about getting to the truth through reproducible, evidence-based approaches, not intuition or anecdote.
Jacobsen: Now, shifting focus a bit—what about biological rhythms and dietary interventions? Suppose two individuals have the same body composition. One is vegan, another pescatarian, and another follows a fad like eating three steaks a day. Do we have preliminary findings on how diet types affect outcomes, or is that still theoretical? Are those relevant considerations?
Crane: That is a great question. One of the things we are exploring relates to what Dr. Scott Wellford is doing in the lab with mouse models. He has already been altering the mice’ diets—testing high-fat versus low-fat variations, for example. However, what he has not done yet is adjust for circadian alignment.
We are beginning to see metabolic shifts based on dietary composition that correlate with how well the mice do when they have renal cell carcinoma. We see real potential based on Scott’s findings and my research on prolonged overnight fasting and circadian rhythm alignment. The key is balancing what science shows us with what we can realistically ask human patients to do.
In my human trials, I have been studying how meal timing can help align circadian rhythms. One of the most effective ways to do that is adjusting when people eat relative to daylight after the sun comes up, when you break your fast, matters a lot.
Prolonging the overnight fasting window—from 7 PM to 9 AM the next day—can improve circadian alignment. People undergoing treatment have shown high adherence to this kind of intervention. Their metabolic profiles improve, their sleep quality improves, and they tolerate treatment better. This has been documented in other cancer types, not renal cell carcinoma, yet.
However, based on that data and the metabolic indicators Scott has observed in mice, we believe this is both scientifically valid and practical for patients newly diagnosed with advanced renal cell carcinoma.
In this study, we ask participants to shift to a 14-hour daily fast. We equip them with continuous glucose monitors and wearable devices to assess circadian alignment. The only change we ask for is when they eat, not what they eat.
This will lead to favourable metabolic changes that improve treatment outcomes and reduce side effects. Beyond glucose monitoring, we will also assess cellular metabolic changes through samples analyzed by Dr. Lombard, which may further illuminate protective mechanisms.
We also expect to observe changes in body composition due to this dietary timing intervention, which is part of what we are measuring.
Jacobsen: As always, at the end of every academic poster, presentation, or publication, there is that familiar line: “More research is needed.”
Crane: [Laughing] Yes, fill in the blank!
Jacobsen: Where do you see the next step in this line of research? We have been focusing on body composition and circadian alignment—what logically follows from here?
Crane: Once we run this first trial, the next step is to analyze the data and identify which variables responded well and which did not. We are not restricting what people eat during their 10-hour eating window, but monitoring their choices. Between Dr. Wellford’s trials in mice and what we observe in the human participants, we will better understand what the subsequent intervention should look like.
That next step would likely combine predictors from body composition data with tailored dietary guidance—essentially, figuring out not just when to eat, but what to eat based on individual characteristics.
I suspect that prolonged overnight fasting will have a favourable impact. The real question is, once we establish that, what do we do with food intake? We can prescribe specific interventions tailored to metabolic profiles if Dr. Lombard finds early signatures in the metabolomics data.
All these data—wearables, body composition, blood biomarkers—will come together. We also track things like sleep, daily step count, and overall activity through wearable devices. So we are looking for phenotypes—composite profiles of individuals—that respond best to specific interventions. The goal is to move toward precision interventions.
Jacobsen: Do you have any favourite facts or findings from the research papers?
Crane: That is a great question—and a tough one. There is so much to choose from.
However, one of my favourite findings is how well individuals can adopt circadian alignment strategies. The adherence rates from our studies are high. Moreover, this is in people undergoing treatment, which makes it even more impressive.
People do not usually think about their eating windows until you bring it to their attention. Once they become aware of how much they snack after dinner, it often leads to meaningful behavioural changes.
From a behavioural science perspective, that is a powerful takeaway. It does not cost any additional money. We are not asking them to buy different foods or follow a complicated regimen. It is accessible. Now, I should not say everyone finds it easy. However, our data shows that around 90% of participants can consistently follow the fasting window.
About ninety percent of the population would benefit from extending their time in a fasted state. When you are not constantly digesting, your body can rest, repair, and function more efficiently. Energy is not being diverted to digestion—it can be used elsewhere in the body for metabolic regulation, cellular maintenance, and recovery.
Jacobsen: I would love to interview a researcher on the Japanese school system. Their population is so healthy because every school employs professional nutritionists.
Crane: Yes, every single school has a nutritionist. The Japanese government made a deliberate effort to overhaul its school food system, which is paying off. The results are measurable.
Jacobsen: Have the Americans been bought off? I suggest adding sugar, in particular.
Crane: [Laughing] Yes… yes. Listen, we do not have to get into all of that here. Since January, I have given numerous interviews about food additives and what is happening. So we will see where that conversation goes.
Jacobsen: Tracy, thank you so much for your time and expertise.
Crane: You are welcome. It was nice to meet you.
Jacobsen: Thank you. It is nice to meet you as well. I will get to this later today.
Crane: That sounds good.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/14
Joshua Karunakaran serves as the Manager of Public Relations and Communications at the British Columbia Association of Clinical Counsellors (BCACC). In this role, he oversees the organization’s public relations strategies and communications efforts. The GST exemption for Registered Clinical Counsellors (RCCs) in British Columbia ensures that 5.7 million British Columbians have more affordable access to mental health services. Previously, RCCs had to prove “equivalent qualifications” in a regulated province, which was an impractical process. The BC Association of Clinical Counsellors (BCACC) collaborated with a regulatory college to confirm substantial equivalency, securing a blanket GST exemption from the Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) on December 20, 2024. This exemption will save $22.5 million annually and enhance employer-sponsored benefits, expanding mental health coverage for British Columbians. BCACC CEO Michael Radano and policymakers welcomed the decision.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the main takeaway from the exemption from charging GST?
Joshua Karunakaran: The biggest takeaway is that 5.7 million British Columbians now have easier access to quality mental health services through reduced costs. It also puts BC’s mental health practitioners on par with those in regulated provinces of QC, ON, PEI, NS, and NB.
Jacobsen: How many Registered Clinical Counsellors (RCCs) in BC will be affected by the GST exemption?
Karunakaran: Approximately 8,000+ Registered Clinical Counsellors in BC.
Jacobsen: Why was the first GST/HST exemption ruling problematic?
Karunakaran: On July 15, 2024, the Canada Revenue Agency stated that certain psychotherapists and counselling therapists are no longer required to collect the goods and services tax (GST) or the harmonized sales tax (HST) on their services. CRA stated that psychotherapists and counselling therapists need not charge GST/HST if they “operate in a province with no regulatory body but have the equivalent qualifications required to meet the licensing requirements in a regulated province and practice psychotherapy/counselling therapy”.
To prove that their “equivalent qualifications” meet CRA’s requirements, each psychotherapist in BC would have to get a regulatory college in a regulated province to review both their qualifications and practice. Reviewing the credentials of 8,000 Registered Clinical Counsellors (RCCs), each requiring 1-2 weeks of work is a near impossible task which would take 20+ years to accomplish.
Jacobsen: How did the BC Association of Clinical Counsellors (BCACC) resolve the equivalency?
Karunakaran: The BCACC worked diligently and collaboratively with a regulatory college in a regulated province to author a formal letter requesting to evaluate the requirements of becoming an RCC with those of a practitioner in a regulated province. After a detailed analysis of BCACC’s registration requirements, the college confirmed that for the purposes of GST/HST exemption, the qualifications of RCCs are “substantially equivalent” to those registered with the college.
The BCACC then sent this letter to the CRA seeking a blanket GST/HST exemption for all RCCs, an exemption that the CRA confirmed on Dec 20, 2024.
Jacobsen: How did the CRA confirm the GST/HST exemption in BC?
Karunakaran: The CRA communicated this through a formal letter to the BCACC, addressed to our CEO, Michael Radano.
Jacobsen: Are there other provinces that had the same exemptions already?
Karunakaran: Yes. Provinces of QC, ON, PEI, NS, and NB are regulated provinces and therefore GST-exempt.
Jacobsen: How will this exemption improve access to mental health services?
Karunakaran: According to the Canadian Mental Health Association (CMHA), by age 40, 50% of the population will have experienced a mental illness, and 1 in 5 experience mental health problems annually. The incidence of mental health issues has also been rising, particularly since the COVID-19 pandemic.
If we extrapolate that 1 in 5 British Columbians experience a form of mental distress requiring psychotherapeutic services in a given year, we estimate that approximately 1.25 million British Columbians may seek psychotherapy or clinical counselling annually.
BCACC’s Registered Clinical Counsellors (RCCs) comprise 90% of psychotherapists and clinical counsellors practicing in British Columbia. Currently, our membership has over 8,000 members practicing across BC.
Each year, our Find a Counsellor tool averages approximately 125,000 visits from individuals seeking counselling services. If a British Columbian sees a counsellor twice a month at an average rate of $150 per session, the total cost of counselling services amounts to approximately $450,000,000 annually. Eliminating GST from these services results in about $22.5 million in savings for British Columbians. This estimate only accounts for private practice sessions and does not include individuals accessing counselling through social programs or health authorities. If we were able to account for all psychotherapy services provided, the total savings could be close to $45 million per year.
Another crucial implication is that many British Columbians can only access a limited number of counselling sessions through their extended health plans due to monetary caps. RCCs often charge significantly less than other mental health providers. With their services now exempt from GST, employers adding RCCs to their benefits plans can extend mental health coverage, ensuring that employees have access to more sessions while maximizing the value of their plans. The same holds true for publicly funded programs and other mental health service providers working in agencies and health authorities across BC.
Jacobsen: What have the BCACC CEO and other executives said about the GST exemption decision?
Karunakaran: “The BCACC welcomes the CRA’s decision to remove GST on psychotherapy services. This ruling ensures that every British Columbian has the same level of access to mental health services as those in regulated provinces. We look forward to working collaboratively with the CRA to ensure a smooth transition. The association is currently working to distill the information to its members through regular communiques so that they, in turn, can communicate this positive development to their clients” – BCACC CEO, Michael Radano
“Great news that Registered Clinical Counsellors in BC no longer have to charge GST on psychotherapy. Thanks to my colleague
@LMathys for championing this issue. This change will help make services more affordable for people needing support”
Gord Johns, MP – NDP, Courtenay-Alberni
Jacobsen: Josh, thank you very much.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/13
Riane Eisler, an Austrian-born American systems scientist, futurist, and human rights advocate, is renowned for her influential work on cultural transformation and gender equity. Best known for “The Chalice and the Blade,” she introduced the partnership versus dominator models of social organization. She received the Humanist Pioneer Award, and in conversation with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Eisler emphasized the urgent need for humanists to focus on values-based systems and the transformative power of caring economics. Drawing on neuroscience and history, she argues that peace begins at home and calls for a shift in worldview to build more equitable, sustainable, and compassionate societies rooted in connection rather than control. The three books of hers of note that could be highlighted are The Chalice and the Blade—now in its 57th U.S. printing with 30 foreign editions, The Real Wealth of Nations, and Nurturing Our Humanity: How Domination and Partnership Shape Our Brains, Lives, and Future (Oxford University Press, 2019). Eisler examines the historical and cultural dynamics of partnership versus domination systems, highlighting how these models influence societies, gender roles, and technological development. Drawing on archaeological evidence, such as Marija Gimbutas’s work and DNA studies, she contrasts egalitarian prehistory with later hierarchical civilizations like ancient Athens. Eisler critiques modern structures that perpetuate violence, inequality, and trauma—often beginning in the home. She emphasizes the importance of whole-system thinking and highlights movements that have challenged domination throughout history. The core message is that peace and human flourishing depend on shifting from a culture of domination to one of partnership, starting with the family and education.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: The opposite of patriarchy is not matriarchy. It is partnership. This is what we are increasingly learning from the study of prehistoric societies: that we need to connect the dots. We must assemble the larger picture. If a narrative is repeated often enough, it becomes more readily accessible to the mind. However, repetition does not distinguish between truth and falsehood. So, what are the myths we have been told about human prehistory—especially regarding relationships and gender roles? Is there a political utility to these myths? Or are they simply the result of mistaken interpretations? I think those are two essential questions.
Riane Eisler: These interpretations are indeed mistaken, but they serve a function: to sustain what I describe as a domination system. Consider the classic “caveman” cartoon: in one hand, the man holds a club—a weapon—and with the other, he drags a woman by the hair.
What message does this cartoon send—especially when shown to children long before their critical faculties have developed? It normalizes a worldview based on fear and violence (the club) and rigid male dominance enforced through violence, coercion. and cultural indoctrination. This is where the myth-making comes into play. It suggests that domination is natural and inevitable—that it has always been this way and always must be. However, the evidence is showing that this is not true.
For example, consider the Neolithic site of Çatalhöyük in present-day Turkey, which was inhabited from approximately 7100 BCE to 5700 BCE. Ian Hodder, a prominent Stanford archaeologist who directed excavations there for decades, has emphasized in multiple publications that the community exhibited signs of gender egalitarianism. In particular, grave goods, domestic architecture, and burial treatments do not show significant differentiation between males and females. In his article for Scientific American, Hodder argued that being born male or female in Çatalhöyük did not appear to determine social status.
Despite this, recent books and studies often omit these gender-related findings. Why? Because they lack the appropriate interpretive frame—the contrast between domination systems and partnership systems.
Suppose we fail to include childhood, family, and gender in our reconstructions of prehistory. In that case, we are left with an incomplete—indeed, distorted—picture. One might even call it a neutered prehistory because it leaves out fundamental aspects of human identity and relationships. Ironically, the caveman cartoon portrays these elements—especially gender relations—quite explicitly. However, modern archaeological narratives often avoid them.
Jacobsen: You are right about that. However, you indeed mentioned gender in the caveman cartoon. And then there are the kinds of biblical mythologies, like Adam and Eve, or popular North American cartoons where Adam has a leaf over his groin and Eve over her breasts. It is very telling.
Eisler: In my book on education, Tomorrow’s Children, a cartoon illustrates thinking outside the box. More and more people are beginning to do so—but often only in fragments, without applying the broader framework of partnership and domination.
The cartoon I reference depicts Spanish conquistadors emerging from the water. At the same time, a Native American stands on the shore and says, “What do you mean you found us? We found you coming out of the water.” That cartoon flips the colonial narrative. Indeed, we are beginning to reinterpret that history. Columbus’ actions included the extermination of Indigenous peoples—some of which was deliberate and premeditated. However, part of it also resulted from the spread of contagious diseases to which Native Americans had no immunity.
We are reevaluating the Columbus story, and he is no longer widely regarded as a hero in the same uncritical manner. However, the reinterpretation is happening in bits and pieces, and it has not yet been integrated into a larger framework. That is the key: we need to connect the dots and understand the overarching systems at play.
Jacobsen: Why are the dominant myths about human prehistory such a patchwork rather than being understood systematically—if I hear you correctly?
Eisler: Yes, that is right. We rarely critically examine dioramas in museums, for example. They overwhelmingly depict men—as if women, who give life, did not exist.
Jacobsen: My mother would have something to say about that.
Eisler: What would she say?
Jacobsen: That they are missing the women—and the children.
Eisler: Those gaps are mirrored in our familiar social categories: right and left, religious and secular, Eastern and Western, Northern and Southern, capitalist and socialist. What is missing? Women and children—the majority of humanity. There is something fundamentally wrong with that picture.
Jacobsen: You often reference different spectra—capitalist/communist, secular/religious, and so on. Are there some categories that, for you, do not work well as binary opposites or antipodes?
Eisler: There are binaries in nature… There is hot and cold, light and dark—but it is always a matter of degree. So, even in the binary of domination and partnership, we have to consider it as a spectrum. Societies orient along that continuum to varying degrees. Right now, we are experiencing a regression—a marked shift toward the domination system. We see this clearly in the renewed emphasis on rigid gender roles.
These roles leave no room for anything in between, even though people have always existed outside binary norms. How that variance is treated depends on the cultural context. However, returning to prehistory—I think we have not been asking the right questions. Strangely, I began doing so when I was a child. I remember reading in the Bible that “henceforth, woman shall be subordinate to man,” and I wondered: What was it like before the henceforth?
Jacobsen: That is a powerful question. You were asking it earlier.
Eisler: Yes—and no one wanted to talk about it. I also wondered why a woman would take advice from a snake. We generally do not do that. [Laughing] But it was not until I began my whole-systems research—which includes both history and prehistory—that I came to see that what came before the “henceforth” was a more partnership-oriented model of society. I also learned that the snake was even in historic times still associated with oracular prophecy; think of the Oracle of Delphi: it was a priestess, a “pythoness” working with pythons, with snakes. Or think of the figurines from Crete of women, priestesses in an oracular trance with snakes coiled around their arms. So in searching for wisdom, Eve would turn to a snake! We have to connect the dots! And this requires a whole-systems study of our history, including our prehistory and its partnership rather than domination direction.
However, we are not taught history this way. We are taught history through the lens of conquest—winners and losers, wars and battles. Memorizing the dates of all these conflicts becomes the focus.
Jacobsen: Do you see definite ebbs and flows—regionally or even globally—between the domination model and the partnership model? You mentioned that we are currently in a regression, but there was also a long period of progression toward partnership values. What is your perspective on the longer historical arc of this tension?
Eisler: The real tipping point in this tension did not come until around 3000 BCE, and we know this now from genetic studies. During the Indo-European invasions, a dramatic shift occurred in the DNA record—most notably, a near-total replacement of male DNA in certain regions. This indicates violent conquest.
That is when domination took hold. I have written about this, and my work also incorporates technological change. I have an article forthcoming in a book on achieving peace, edited by my co-author, anthropologist Douglas Fry, of Nurturing Our Humanity. In it, I argue that we must look not only at major technological phases—such as the transition from foraging to farming—but also at overlooked transitions, like the shift from foraging to herding.
This shift is significant because herding cultures developed in increasingly arid regions of the world where climate change has degraded pasturelands. These conditions led to more competitive, often violent, social systems—domination-oriented cultures. Herders, seeking new territory, invaded more settled farming communities. Eventually, some of these herders, such as the Yamnaya, adopted agriculture themselves—but they carried with them the domination model.
Jacobsen: So, climate stress, migration, and technological shifts all helped push societies along the spectrum of domination?
Eisler: We need to see these factors in an integrated way—not just as isolated historical phases, but as interconnected elements that shaped the systems we still live with today. Again, we only know this in bits and pieces. To connect the dots, you need whole-systems analysis.
You can now see the shift very clearly in recent DNA studies. Still, decades ago, archaeologist Marija Gimbutas, an expert in Indo-European studies, had already identified it. She described the transformation quite accurately, at least in what she referred to as the Balkans and “Old Europe,” where a domination society gradually supplanted a partnership-oriented civilization.
Some argue that force inevitably prevails. Which is actually not true, as we know, nonviolent movements have been very successful, as in India and Gandhi, for example. In any case, the problem with that reasoning is that we now stand at a unique moment in technological development. We have not only communication and transportation technologies that connect us but also technologies of destruction—biological warfare, nuclear weapons—that could annihilate us all in minutes.
So, domination and force are no longer adaptive, if they ever were, considering all the suffering and trauma they cause. Today they are dangerous—existentially so.
Jacobsen: Are there phases in prehistory—not necessarily tied to specific technologies—where we can track dominator and partnership systems in the same way that genetic evidence now allows us to trace population shifts, like with the Yamnaya?
Eisler: Yes. When the Yamnaya migrated into Europe, a dramatic rupture occurred. The destruction of earlier pottery traditions marked the end of older, more partnership-oriented cultures. There was a regression to cruder, less refined technology and social organization. Over time, the invaders absorbed and co-opted more advanced technologies, but now under male-dominated, hierarchical, violent systems—domination systems.
Now, let me be very clear: This is not about blaming men. There is nothing inherently wrong with men. What is deeply wrong is the domination system, which continues to push us toward an evolutionary dead end.
Men are often the ones forced to give their lives—because someone at the top wants more territory, more power. Look at Putin. However, it is not just a geopolitical issue. Men are also promised a kind of “payoff.” In exchange for loyalty to the domination social and economic hierarchy, they are encouraged to dominate women and children—within what the domination model treats as their “castle,” the militarized metaphor of the home.
We are seeing that pattern re-emerge in our current regression. There are other inflection points worth noting—points that we often overlook in our current educational and social frameworks. I believe that over the long term, the pen has been far more potent than the sword. Stories shape minds. That brings us right back to the myths.
Take the myths that blame Eve—or Pandora—for all of humanity’s suffering. It is absurd, truly. However, we have inherited these narratives. Myths that justify the domination of women, that treat women as property, as sexual objects, or simply as vessels for reproduction. That is what lies beneath many persistent gender stereotypes: the effort to reduce women to things, to tools.
Of course, women have been deeply traumatized by this. However, so have men. Because under dominator systems, men are taught to suppress much of their humanity. They are socialized into a narrow script, one that rewards dominance, aggression, and emotional repression. This is not a sustainable model for any of us.
I remember being in a park years ago and hearing a child wailing—crying—and then a man’s voice saying, “I am going to beat you until you stop crying. Boys do not cry.” That is the old “masculine” gender stereotype. It illustrates how these roles are enforced, often through violence and emotional repression. However, let us discuss how technology has shaped civilization—how, in some cases, it has fundamentally altered both partnership and domination systems.
Jacobsen: What about the cases where technological advancement caused major civilizational shifts—not just in external structures but also in social relations?
Eisler: Technology itself is values-neutral. What matters is how it is used. Take AI, for example—it all depends on how it is programmed. Yes, we should be concerned about becoming overly dependent on AI. But the real issue is what we are programming it for. If AI is programmed for domination, then yes, we should be highly concerned. However, if it is programmed for partnership—and it can be—it could be transformative. Unfortunately, most mainstream AI draws heavily from social media data, which reflects societies still shaped by systems of domination.
Again, that is not because people are bad. This is not about blame or shame. It is about recognizing that domination systems are trauma factories. They misallocate resources. In domination-based economies, there is often money for weapons and wars—but rarely for children, caregiving, or community well-being.
Like what we are seeing in the United States now—cutting social programs while military budgets continue to grow. Speaking as a Holocaust survivor, let me be clear: I am not advocating for unilateral disarmament. That would be dangerous in a world where regimes such as those in Iran, the Taliban in Afghanistan, Russia, China, and North Korea continue to operate within highly domination-oriented frameworks.
But we must recognize how distorted our priorities have become. These are not the priorities of most people. However, people have been so traumatized, so thoroughly conditioned, that they accept them.
Jacobsen: What are some practices from prehistory that reflect partnership versus domination models?
Eisler: A great example is alloparenting—a practice observed still today among many foraging societies, where caregiving is shared across the group. It means that the entire community—men, women, and older children—participates in raising the young.
The bond with the biological mother remains essential, of course, but the responsibility and the safety net extend beyond her. That kind of distributed caregiving system is a hallmark of partnership societies.
However, the bond—and the sense of security—comes from being surrounded by caring adults and older individuals. We see a shift from that model in societies like ancient Athens, which we have so often idealized. Athens was a very uneasy mix of partnership and domination.In reality, the vast majority of the population in Athens was disenfranchised. Women, and both male and female slaves, were not allowed to vote. Beyond that, the male head of household held the legal right to “expose” any infant he did not want to raise—essentially abandoning the child to die. However, the term was a linguistic softening.
“Good women” were confined to the women’s quarters and deprived of education. Socrates did highlight some of this, but only in fragments. He never connected these issues to the larger framework of domination that permeated Athenian society.
In my book, Sacred Pleasure, I include a chapter titled “The Reign of the Phallus,” which focuses on ancient Athens. It was not a society where most women had autonomy or education. The exceptions were women viewed as borderline courtesans—such as the hetairai—who had access to learning. In ancient Rome, poets like Ovid celebrated romantic partnerships, reflecting the human yearning for connection. However, that longing persisted despite domination systems, not because of them.
Domination systems systematically suppress empathy. They narrow our evolved capacity for compassion to the in-group only. Those outside the in-group—whether defined by gender, race, class, or tribe—are excluded. Often, the first “out-group” is female humanity.
Jacobsen: We have just about three minutes left. What do you consider the defining distinction between prehistory and recorded history?
Eisler: In essence, prehistory was characterized mainly by partnership-oriented societies. However, as domination systems emerged, we saw both resistance to change and full regressions into rigid domination hierarchies.
Remarkably, it is only in the last 300 years that we see mass movements directly challenging domination systems:
– The so-called “rights of man” contesting the divinely ordained right of kings.
– The abolitionist movement challenged the belief in the superiority of one race over another.
– The feminist movement questioned the supposed divine right of men to rule over women and children in the home.
– And the environmental movement challenges man’s conquest and domination over nature.
As I wrote in The Chalice and the Blade, these are all examples of a resurgence in partnership. However, today, we stand at a crossroads. The real struggle is not between right and left, or secular and religious, or East and West. Those are distractions.
The fundamental battle is between the partnership model and the domination model. We must recognize this, or we will remain caught in a cycle of emergency response—constantly putting out fires caused by domination systems—without ever addressing the deeper structural causes.
That is why our Summit, Peace Begins at Home, emphasizes strategy, not just tactics. Our core principle is that peace starts at home. That is foundational.
However, many prominent figures—even those who speak passionately about war, terrorism, and peace—do not address family violence. That is where the trauma begins.
Jacobsen: Riane, thank you again for your time today. I appreciate it.
Eisler: Yes, we covered much ground today—but that is good.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/12
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee. The U.S. House narrowly passed a Trump-aligned tax and spending bill, sparking controversy over its $4–5 trillion impact on the deficit, Medicaid cuts, and tax breaks skewed toward the wealthy. It includes expanded deportation funding and reduced safety nets. Simultaneously, Ukraine suffered its largest aerial assault amid withheld U.S. military aid. In Haiti, gangs control Port-au-Prince as U.S. policy shifts to block refugees. The international response remains limited, while local capacity crumbles under worsening humanitarian crises. This interview was conducted on July 1, 2025.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: All the sources here are Reuters, AP News, and the United Nations. So, straight from the downtown streets of Luxembourg City, we’re going to talk about the U.S. House of Representatives passing a Trump-aligned tax and spending reconciliation bill. House Republicans pushed it through by a narrow margin on July 4. How thin was the margin?
Irina Tsukerman: The final vote count was 219 to 213—a six-vote margin.
Jacobsen: That’s a narrow margin, all things considered. However, several members were absent so that the full count may have been slightly different.
Jacobsen: What was the reaction from the Democrats?
Tsukerman: It was pretty controversial. Essentially, Republican leadership managed to suppress dissent within their ranks. Representative Brian Fitzpatrick, a Republican from Pennsylvania, was the only Republican to vote with all Democrats against the procedural motion that brought the bill to the floor. Once it was on the floor, the Republicans had the votes to pass it. There is now an outcry over the fact that the bill would increase federal spending and the deficit.
Jacobsen: What else was going on at the same time?
Tsukerman: This happened as USAID underwent a significant reduction in scope, with some of its functions reassigned or defunded. A large portion of the freed-up funds is being redirected to finance tax cuts. Some middle-class groups are pleased, as it means less money will be taken from their pensions and salaries.
Jacobsen: What are the long-term effects?
Tsukerman: Many of these tax cuts are expected to fuel inflation. Combined with the increased spending and the ambiguity in parts of the legislation—it being a large bill pushed through quickly—many people are unsure of what exactly is in it. It is a complex piece of legislation, reportedly comprising 887 pages.
Jacobsen: Any highlights?
Tsukerman: Some notable provisions include increased funding for national defence and immigration enforcement, including deportations. Tax cuts are prioritized. According to Republican lawmakers, if this bill were not passed, many of the 2017 Trump-era tax cuts would begin expiring after December. This bill includes about $4.5 trillion in tax cuts.
The legislation would make the existing tax rates and brackets permanent. It would also temporarily introduce several new tax breaks promoted by Trump, such as exempting federal income tax on tips and overtime pay, and implementing new deductions, including interest on certain car loans and a $6,000 deduction for older adults earning up to $75,000 annually. It also raises the child tax credit to $2,000 per child, with the full credit extended to many lower-income families.
Jacobsen: There’s also something in the U.S. called SALT, which stands for State and Local Tax deduction. It refers to the cap on the amount of state and local taxes that individuals can deduct on their federal returns. Under the new proposal, the cap would quadruple to $40,000 for a period of five years. This provision is particularly relevant in high-tax states such as New York, New Jersey, and California. The House initially proposed that the increase last for ten years. Still, the final deal was a last-minute, eleventh-hour compromise.
Tsukerman: There are also various business-related tax cuts, including allowing companies to immediately write off 100% of the cost of equipment and research and development investments. The wealthiest households would see an average tax benefit of $24,000 per year. At the same time, the poorest groups would face an annual net cost of around $1,600 due to the combined effects of reduced assistance and regressive tax provisions.
Middle-income taxpayers would see modest relief, estimated between $500 $1,500 annually. While that might seem minor, these cuts have significant cumulative effects on the federal deficit. The individual benefit is small, but the overall budget impact is substantial.
Jacobsen: What’s in the bill regarding immigration and border policy?
Tsukerman: The bill allocates $350 billion for border and national security priorities. This includes $46 billion for operations along the U.S.-Mexico border and $45 billion to fund 100,000 migrant detention beds. This is part of Trump’s ongoing effort to carry out what he has described as the largest mass deportation operation in U.S. history.
The funding would also cover the hiring of 10,000 new Immigration and Customs Enforcement officers, each receiving a $10,000 signing bonus. There would also be a surge in hiring for Border Patrol agents. The administration’s stated goal is to deport up to one million people per year.
Additionally, the Secretary of Homeland Security would receive a $10 billion grant fund to support states participating in federal immigration enforcement operations. Immigrants would face new fees, including added costs when applying for asylum protection, making the asylum process more financially burdensome.
Jacobsen: And on the defence front?
Tsukerman: Defence spending includes funding for shipbuilding, munitions systems, and quality-of-life improvements for service members. Notably, $25 billion is allocated to the Golden Dawn missile defence system. In a surprising twist, the Department of Defence would also receive $1 billion specifically for border security, effectively formalizing the military’s involvement in border operations, at least during the current administration.
Much of the funding comes from cuts to Medicaid and other domestic assistance programs, including food aid for low-income individuals. These reallocations are central to the bill’s fiscal strategy and have drawn significant criticism from policy analysts and advocacy groups.
They’re essentially trying to cut down safety net programs, including those that support pregnant women, people with disabilities, and children. There is also a stated effort to crack down on waste, fraud, and abuse.
The bill includes an 80-hour-per-month work requirement for adults receiving Medicaid and SNAP (formerly known as food stamps), including individuals up to age 65. Even parents of children aged 14 and older would have to meet these work requirements. There’s also a proposal to introduce co-payments for Medicaid patients—Medicaid being the U.S. government’s public health insurance program for low-income Americans.
Currently, over 71 million people in the U.S. are enrolled in Medicaid, which was significantly expanded under the Affordable Care Act during the Obama administration. According to policy analysts, if the bill passes in full and is implemented as written, an estimated 11.8 million Americans could lose Medicaid coverage by 2034. Additionally, around 3 million people could become ineligible for SNAP benefits.
Yes, and unpacking all the provisions will take time. The bill spans 887 pages, and those are just some of the significant elements being debated and drawing public backlash. Many advocacy groups are outraged, especially over cuts to women’s health care and benefits for vulnerable populations. Republicans argue that the current social programs are too expensive and that individuals who could work are receiving benefits that could be better allocated elsewhere. They see it as a matter of accountability and efficiency.
Jacobsen: But the bill has passed?
Tsukerman: Yes, it passed. The national deficit is projected to grow significantly as a result. While individual or family-level benefits—especially for middle-income earners—are small, the overall government spending is massive. This imbalance is why figures like Elon Musk and others in his camp have been vocal in their opposition to this measure.
The cost of the bill, in terms of federal spending, outweighs the personal financial gains it offers. Even if one supports boosting middle-class income, the benefits are so minimal compared to the overall expenditure that many question whether the structure is justifiable.
Jacobsen: And now some international news—Russia? Russia launched the largest missile and drone barrage on Kyiv since the start of the full-scale invasion. I recall visiting Ukraine during a previous strike, which at the time was considered massive; however, this one exceeded that by about 40%.
In just one hour, Russia launched 550 drones and missiles across Ukraine in what has been called the largest aerial assault in the world to date. The capital, Kyiv, was the primary target. Was this linked to U.S. actions?
Tsukerman: Yes. This is not a coincidence. It followed the Pentagon’s decision to withhold advanced weapons systems from Ukraine, including the Patriot missile defence systems. These would have significantly improved Ukraine’s air defence capabilities.
Congress had already allocated $4 billion to Ukraine, which was to include some Patriot systems. Ukraine even offered to purchase the systems at full cost. However, the Trump administration has refused to release them.
The batteries are currently stockpiled in Poland and were supposed to be transferred to Ukraine. But they were frozen—without warning—by the U.S. Secretary of Defence. Shockingly, this decision was made without coordination with President Trump, Congress, NATO, or even U.S. allies.
No coordination at all. Even the NATO Secretary-General was left out of the loop. Not only did the U.S. fail to fulfill its legal obligations under congressional appropriation, but it also failed to hold a coordinating meeting or offer any short-term alternative to Ukraine.
When asked, a Pentagon spokesperson claimed the U.S. is not obligated to provide weapons globally. However, suppose Congress designates funding for specific foreign assistance, such as military aid. In that case, the executive branch is legally required to follow through. It’s not just a policy issue; it’s a constitutional one.
The result? Putin is likely gloating. Russian media is celebrating. Ukraine is left under-equipped during the most aggressive aerial assault in the war so far.
Jacobsen: Ukraine is under a barrage of attacks, and the latest strike on Kyiv is not the first of its kind. In the past few days, there have also been multiple attacks on other cities across Ukraine.
Tsukerman: Trump claims to be surprised by Putin’s aggression, yet he has done nothing substantial in response. He still has not implemented the new sanctions he promised to review over two months ago—a process that was initially expected to take just two weeks. While he did renew some of the banking sanctions imposed initially under the Biden administration, these are not new measures; they maintain existing restrictions.
Moreover, Trump’s apparent tacit approval of Texas Governor Abbott’s unilateral freeze on U.S. weapons shipments to Ukraine is being interpreted as a green light by Russia to escalate its military operations. And that is precisely what happened.
Today alone, over 500 drone and missile attacks were launched on Kyiv. Images from the ground show fires raging across civilian areas. This is a deliberate assault on civilian infrastructure, not just military targets. It has severely strained Ukraine’s air defence capabilities.
Without the additional Patriot missile systems previously authorized by Congress but now withheld, more civilians are at risk of death and suffering. This failure to deliver defence support—and to coordinate with allies—has real, devastating consequences.
Jacobsen: Shifting to the Western Hemisphere—what is happening in Haiti? Haitian gangs have seized control of large parts of the capital, Port-au-Prince. Violence and lawlessness are worsening. According to United Nations experts, 1.3 million people have been displaced. That figure puts Haiti’s crisis on par with major global conflict zones.
Tsukerman: Haiti has long struggled with political instability and has faced numerous failed international interventions. The current trajectory is deteriorating rapidly. The Trump administration has been granted authority to resume deportations of Haitian refugees, and that is precisely what is happening now. These individuals are being expelled without protections or special status.
During past election cycles, there were wild claims—like Haitian refugees supposedly eating cats and dogs in places like Ohio—none of which were ever substantiated. Those narratives disappeared after the election, but the legal hardships for Haitian asylum seekers have persisted.
The U.S. has effectively disengaged from Haiti. Kenya has deployed a limited number of forces. Still, they are severely underprepared for the scale of chaos on the ground. Haitian law enforcement and government officials are essentially in retreat.
Other nations have offered assistance, including El Salvador, which has experience in dealing with gang violence. While El Salvador has been relatively effective in restoring internal control within its borders, it remains unclear how much support it can offer Haiti, given its domestic challenges.
Therefore, they cannot single-handedly bring everything to a halt. It would take a very significant force to subdue all of these gangs and secure the country from the rampaging groups that are essentially driving people out and looting everything within. I do not see the U.S. intervening decisively at this point.
The U.S. response appears to be focused on shielding itself from the fallout by essentially blocking entry from Haiti. Haiti may now be among the countries affected by an extended travel ban that’s being enforced due to the worsening security situation. That includes not just regular migrants but also people fleeing what are effectively war-like conditions.
I also do not see any serious multinational task forces being deployed in the Caribbean. Latin American nations, which might be best positioned politically to engage, are either too under-resourced—like Venezuela—or not considered reliable or neutral enough to lead such an operation.
To conclude, there is a shortage of private security forces or mercenaries that might intervene. I do not think Haitians have the internal resources to solve this themselves, and outside help does not appear to be materializing.
Jacobsen: That was wonderful. I’ll see you next week.
Tsukerman: Thank you. Have a great rest of your trip.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/11
Attorney Jie Shi, representing Fortune 500 U.S. retailers, discusses the significant impact of new U.S. customs rules, including DHL’s temporary suspension of high-value B2C shipments and tightened de minimis enforcement. She outlines how these changes affect small businesses, global supply chains, and consumers, leading to delays, higher costs, and legal risks. Shi explains how shifting trade policies and post-pandemic disruptions transform contract practices and logistics planning. She urges small businesses to stay informed, prioritize documentation, and observe industry strategies. Policymakers, she argues, must balance enforcement with economic stability to avoid unintended harm to consumers and small enterprises.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Jie Shi. Let me begin with a brief introduction. Jie is an attorney representing Fortune 500 U.S. retailers in complex maritime disputes and global shipping matters. She holds bar admissions in both China and the United States. Her work focuses on high-stakes issues at the intersection of international trade and law.
She has recently addressed the legal implications of record freight rate surges during the COVID-19 pandemic, potential Shipping Act violations, and broader global supply chain challenges. She closely follows developments regarding U.S. tariffs, the de minimis exemption, and regulatory trends in maritime commerce. So, how will the new U.S. customs rules affect cross-border e-commerce?
Jie Shi: The new rules are significant. DHL Express recently temporarily suspended business-to-consumer shipments over $800 into the U.S. starting April 21, in response to U.S. Customs and Border Protection’s requirements for formal entry processing. These changes increase compliance burdens for high-value shipments.
During the pandemic, we saw how fragile and interconnected the global supply chain is. A disruption at any point in that network, such as at ports or customs clearance, can ripple through the entire system. Delays, inventory shortages, and cost increases become inevitable.
If carriers are unable or unwilling to handle specific shipments due to compliance requirements, it could mean fewer goods reaching the U.S. market. Given typical transit times of four to six weeks for ocean freight, the downstream effects include port slowdowns, potential job losses in logistics sectors, and higher consumer prices.
Even now, major shipping lines are cancelling sailings—this week, blank sailings accounted for over 40% of some trans-Pacific routes—signalling a reduction in overall shipping capacity. So, while we may not feel the immediate impact, the effects are likely to become visible soon.
Jacobsen: What about the impact on small businesses that rely on international shipping?
Shi: Small businesses are particularly vulnerable. Many rely on platforms like Temu or AliExpress to reach U.S. customers. These companies often take advantage of the de minimis provision, which allows goods under $800 in value to enter the U.S. duty-free with minimal paperwork.
If that threshold is lowered, or if enforcement tightens—especially targeting Chinese-origin shipments—these businesses will face higher duties, longer customs processing, and more paperwork. For small sellers operating on thin margins, these added costs may not be sustainable.
Initially, DHL announced the pause due to these challenges, although they later resumed service after discussions with U.S. authorities. But uncertainty remains. If enforcement continues to tighten, we may see more carriers limit services, disproportionately affecting small business sellers.
Jacobsen: What is the reasoning behind lowering the de minimis threshold or ending exemptions for some countries?
Shi: U.S. lawmakers and trade officials argue that the de minimis exemption is being exploited, particularly by Chinese e-commerce exporters. There’s concern that it gives an unfair competitive advantage and enables duty evasion or the import of unsafe or counterfeit goods.
The push to revise de minimis thresholds is part of a broader trade policy shift, focused on economic security, enforcement of fair trade practices, and tightening oversight on direct-to-consumer imports. While the intent is to level the playing field for U.S. retailers and manufacturers, the consequences are far-reaching and complex, especially for cross-border e-commerce.
I am not sure it’s entirely fair to describe the de minimis exemption as a loophole. The provision exists to facilitate trade, reduce customs friction, and allow consumers to receive goods at lower prices. In cross-border e-commerce, sellers and buyers rely on these streamlined systems to function efficiently.
That said, the main argument from U.S. lawmakers is that the de minimis rule is being exploited, particularly by companies shipping directly from China, and that tightening the rule is necessary to protect national economic interests. However, this shift also puts significant pressure on small businesses in the United States.
With tariffs in place, it is unclear how those businesses can absorb the additional costs. Even large corporations are reluctant to take on that burden—they need liquidity and operate under tighter margins. Due to this uncertainty, planning has become very difficult.
Jacobsen: How will these changes affect broader aspects of global supply chains, such as delays, disruptions, inventory management, and delivery timelines?
Shi: These changes will impact all of that. Many parties are involved in the supply chain: third-party logistics providers, ocean carriers, freight forwarders, shippers, vendors, suppliers, and manufacturers at origin, as well as warehouses and distribution centers at U.S. ports.
There is now additional time and cost related to U.S. customs compliance. One emerging trend is that some suppliers may try to reroute their cargo through third countries before sending it to the United States, attempting to avoid the higher tariffs on Chinese-origin goods.
However, U.S. Customs and Border Protection is becoming increasingly vigilant about such transshipment tactics. If a shipment is misdeclared—say, it falsely states origin as Thailand but originated in China—it may be flagged. That could result in the entire container being rejected, returned, or subject to additional inspection and penalties. This creates further delays and cost burdens in the whole supply chain. Every link in that chain feels the strain, and every stakeholder pays more.
Jacobsen: What about consumers? Under these new customs regulations, what can they expect in terms of delivery timelines, pricing of imported goods, and delays?
Shi: Consumers are already beginning to feel the effects. There are more delays. For example, many U.S. consumers buy goods from platforms like Temu, which is now shifting its business model in response to the tightening customs environment.
Temu has started displaying estimated tariffs and duties at checkout. In some cases, those fees exceed the price of the goods themselves. So consumers may pay double or even triple what they expected. This adds up quickly for everyday shoppers and reduces the appeal of ordering internationally.
Some consumers may switch platforms or stop ordering from abroad altogether. However, these developments could be devastating for small businesses that depend on platforms like Temu—they could lose customers and struggle to sustain their operations.
Jacobsen: Will specific industries, such as fashion or electronics, be impacted more than others?
Shi: Yes. Industries like fast fashion and consumer electronics depend highly on low-margin, high-volume cross-border shipping. They also tend to source heavily from China and Southeast Asia. Any increase in compliance burdens or tariffs hits these sectors hard.
These businesses are already under pressure from shifting consumer demand, logistics disruptions, and regulatory changes. Adding customs complications and unpredictable tariffs makes their operational planning even more difficult.
From my experience representing major U.S. retailers, I’ve learned they heavily rely on goods manufactured in China. For fashion retailers in particular—companies like Target, for example—these tariffs are hitting hard. That’s why many are now renegotiating contracts with Chinese suppliers. In some cases, suppliers are willing to absorb part of the tariff cost to keep shipments flowing, but the challenge is the unpredictability of U.S. trade policy. You never know if the current administration might change direction the next day.
Jacobsen: How can small businesses mitigate these ongoing and upcoming challenges? Any strategies they can consider?
Shi: For small businesses, it depends on their position in the supply chain. If both the buyer and seller are small businesses, there may be room to renegotiate terms and share costs. However, if a small business works with a large platform or carrier, it typically has little leverage.
Take Temu, for example. They recently shifted their business model to what’s a “semi-managed” system. Under this model, instead of Temu handling fulfillment, merchants are now responsible for shipping the products directly to the consumer’s country. That change increases the burden on small businesses, especially with new tariffs and customs regulations.
Many of these businesses have little to do now besides waiting and seeing how policies evolve. They cannot easily reroute cargo through other countries, especially given the heightened scrutiny from U.S. Customs aimed at preventing transshipment fraud.
Jacobsen: Will there be long-term effects on international trade relations?
Shi: Absolutely. We are still recovering from the damage to the global supply chain caused by the COVID-19 pandemic. And now it’s 2025—many disruptions are still with us. While the full ramifications of current tariff policies are hard to predict, they are shifting global trade dynamics.
Before the pandemic, ocean carriers had minimal pricing power, and large retailers controlled most of the negotiations. During the pandemic, that flipped. Shipping demand surged, and carriers gained the upper hand. That forced many retailers to rethink logistics and invest more in third-party support to stabilize their supply chains.
From a legal perspective, this shift has also changed contracting behaviour. Before the pandemic, many companies relied on long-standing contracts with standard terms. During the crisis, some rushed into agreements without comprehensively documenting terms, which led to a wave of post-pandemic litigation. Now, parties are far more cautious—conducting detailed document reviews, revising contract language, and being much more specific in allocating obligations and risks.
If the tariff regime remains in place, we can expect that trend to continue. Legal teams advise businesses to create thorough paper trails, clearly document negotiations, and preserve every communication. During such chaotic times, it can be tough to resolve disputes later on if you do not have records.
Jacobsen: How can policymakers balance enforcing trade rules and protecting the interests of consumers and small businesses?
Shi: It’s a delicate balance. On one hand, there is legitimate concern about trade compliance, unfair competition, and national security. On the other hand, overly aggressive enforcement, especially in ways that target low-value shipments, can inadvertently hurt small businesses and consumers the most.
Policymakers need to take a nuanced approach. That might include targeted enforcement instead of blanket restrictions, offering transitional support to small businesses affected by sudden rule changes, and fostering more dialogue between regulators, logistics providers, and the small business community. There has to be a middle ground that ensures compliance without stifling entrepreneurship or burdening end consumers with excessive costs.
Jacobsen: Can you talk a little bit more about that? Specifically, how can policymakers focus on trade enforcement while also addressing the risk mitigation needs of consumers and small businesses? Because consumers will likely face higher costs, small companies will likely deal with longer delivery times and stock issues.
Shi: It’s essential for policymakers to take a forward-looking approach. During the pandemic, I observed that many policymakers were caught off guard, not out of negligence but simply because the situation evolved so rapidly. Once the crisis unfolded, they tried to secure any cargo they could, often agreeing to pay inflated prices to get essential goods into the country.
But those efforts had costs. Port congestion worsened, logistics systems broke down, and companies couldn’t get products on the shelves quickly. Many large businesses even went bankrupt because of those disruptions.
For small businesses, the key lesson is to plan and stay informed about industry developments. Platforms like Temu have introduced new models to support small businesses during turbulent times. They are continuing to evolve those models, though I would need to review the specifics.
The worst-case scenario for a small business is cargo stuck at the origin with no plan for resolution. That can lead to abandoned shipments and significant financial loss. To minimize risk, small businesses should observe how larger companies adapt and consider applying similar strategies.
Whatever direction they choose, small businesses must prioritize documentation. From a legal and compliance standpoint, keeping everything in writing is essential. U.S. Customs is now asking for more detailed documentation and records. Before the current tariff environment, some importers may have simplified paperwork, not out of bad faith, but to streamline the process. Today, that approach is risky.
In the current climate, where timing and cost efficiency are everything, it’s critical to have a paper trail. For example, if you’re preparing for the holiday season, you must ensure that goods arrive on time and are stocked on shelves. For small business owners, being proactive about compliance and documentation can make the difference between surviving and failing in this environment.
Jacobsen: That’s incredibly helpful. I’ve asked for everything I need for today. Thank you for your time, Jie—I appreciate it.
Shi: Oh, thank you so much. Yes, my focus is usually on the legal side of these issues, so I had to think through some of your questions from a policy perspective. But I appreciate the thoughtful conversation.
Jacobsen: You’re very welcome.
Shi: Thank you so much. Have a great day.
Jacobsen: You too. Bye-bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/12
Seyfi Tomar, Vice President of EBS Global, discusses his firm’s commitment to sustainable construction in Ukraine. Recently, EBS secured office space in Kyiv, initiated company registration, and engaged in partnerships. Tomar highlights Canada-Ukraine trade opportunities, emphasizing prefabricated steel systems and AI-driven construction. He notes challenges like tariffs but sees automation reducing labor needs. Tomar praises Ukrainian resilience, contrasts global construction practices, and stresses the role of international institutions. He anticipates AI and robotics transforming construction, shifting human roles to software development. Future Canadian leadership, he suggests, should prioritize economic diversification and strengthening global trade relationships.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Seyfi Tomar.
He is the Vice President of EBS Global, a Canadian construction firm focused on creating durable and sustainable structures, from hospitals and schools to mid-rise buildings, emphasizing cost efficiency and environmental responsibility. Seyfi passionately advocates for prefabricated steel systems, customizing designs to reflect local culture while delivering eco-friendly solutions.
As a key sponsor of the Rebuild Ukraine Initiative, Seyfi spearheads efforts to restore infrastructure in war-torn regions, blending Canadian expertise with international collaboration. His approach combines advanced technologies, including recycled galvanized steel, to address housing shortages and infrastructure demands. Despite challenges such as securing funding from organizations like the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD) and Export Development Canada (EDC), Seyfi remains committed to scaling sustainable solutions while prioritizing speed, affordability, and cultural integrity.
Early projects include rebuilding Bakhmut, emphasizing innovation and resilience in the face of immense challenges. Thank you so much for joining me again today, Seyfi. I appreciate it.
Seyfi Tomar: Thank you, Scott. Thank you for inviting me.
Jacobsen: You’re welcome.
There have been some updates since the last interview for International Policy Digest. This interview is conducted on March 3 and published much later. Some updates we are looking at involve company registration, lease agreements, and on-the-ground operations. You have recently travelled or are currently travelling. So, what are the immediate logistical hurdles regarding lease agreements and company registration?
Tomar: We have overcome those hurdles. This is my third visit to Ukraine since the war began. I was also here before the war. Today, we secured our office. We signed a letter of intent, and the lease agreement will be finalized in the morning.
It was not difficult. The landlords were cooperative and understanding of our situation, particularly since we have closed all operations in Turkey. Previously, we specialized in constructing high-rises and other large-scale projects in Turkey. Still, now we are transitioning all operations and personnel to Kyiv as our central hub before expanding to other parts of Ukraine as part of the Rebuild Ukraine effort.
We have already initiated discussions with our legal advisors in Kyiv. Tomorrow, we will formally begin the company registration process. This includes registering:
- Our general contracting division (part of Van Horn)
- Our manufacturing facilities under EBS Global
- Our EU consulting division, Planet Turkey
These registrations will be officially launched tomorrow.
We will then focus on setting up our office space and acquiring furniture and other essentials. We have already hired a Ukrainian director, who will oversee operations full-time. Our Ukrainian partners have assisted with logistics, including securing office space, registering employees, and handling administrative processes.
Regarding banking operations, we expect that process to be completed within two weeks, as we first need to finalize our company registrations before initiating fund transfers.
We are fully engaged in these efforts, and progress is steady.
Tomar: On the same note, I have had meetings with the Canadian Embassy since I arrived here. They have been extremely helpful, as I expected. From the very first day, they have worked hard and remained accessible. They are available and always willing to assist whenever I need to reach them.
They invited us to the embassy today, where we had a very productive meeting. They provided us with all the data and information we needed. As we have done so far, we will continue to stay in close contact with them.
We will keep them informed and work alongside them. They are the best resource for scrutinizing Ukrainian companies, evaluating tendering processes, and obtaining reliable information. They have been great resources and valuable allies in our work.
Beyond the Canadian Embassy, we have also met with several major Ukrainian companies. We have tentatively agreed on upcoming joint ventures with some of them, though these discussions are still in their preliminary stages. We will continue meeting with them over the next few days until Friday. If additional discussions are necessary, I will return.
We are excited to contribute to Ukraine’s reconstruction efforts. Being here allows us to support the Ukrainian economy while diversifying the Canadian economy, particularly in light of the 25% tariffs we face. Who knows what changes might come next? This is just one aspect, and we encourage others in Canada to explore their strengths in different markets.
For too long, we have been overly dependent on the U.S. Diversifying trade and investments will strengthen the Canadian economy.
Jacobsen: When it comes to construction, there is a need for fire-resistant and more durable materials. What about sourcing materials from within Ukraine? In doing so, wouldn’t that bolster the construction economy and the material sourcing and manufacturing industries within Ukraine?
Tomar: Yes. For prefabricated metal production, all we need are coils. Our machines, including mobile prefabricated metal systems factories, are already in place. Currently, we have them in Barrie, Ontario, where they are stored in our yard. We may move a few mobile factories to Ukraine. If demand increases, we can purchase additional machines to scale up production.
We are analyzing the global market for galvanized coils. We have previously sourced them from Canada’s local market, but we will now compare prices from Canada, Turkey, Egypt, and India and choose the most feasible option.
Jacobsen: What about local zoning laws and building permits in Ukraine? Does the war affect these processes, or are they expedited?
Tomar: We have not encountered any issues so far. The Ukrainian authorities handle the planning and approval processes, and everything has proceeded smoothly within their established framework.
I do not foresee any issues because, on my previous visit, I have a four-hour meeting with the Director of the Kyiv National University of Construction and Architecture and the Head of the Veteran Institute, Artem. If any issues arise, we will get their assistance. Therefore, I do not anticipate any problems regarding zoning.
What about integrating subcontractors and suppliers to streamline the supply chain, ensuring a seamless process from sourcing materials to manufacturing and construction?
We are currently in the pricing phase for the projects we are securing. As a general contractor or through joint ventures, we are committed to using our manufactured products. We have not subcontracted our materials to third-party builders or undertaken projects for them. At present, our priority is to manage construction for ourselves.
However, if a construction company from Finland, Switzerland or Denmark is interested in collaborating with us, we are open to it. We welcome partnerships with any reliable company, regardless of their country of origin. However, we must conduct due diligence and thoroughly vet their credibility. We have no objections to working with other builders and general contractors.
Regarding the tariffs you mentioned, we will rapidly revise our free trade agreements. Minister of International Trade, Export Promotion, Small Business, and Economic Development Mary Ng works diligently. What types of free trade agreements would be most beneficial for your test projects? Whether the 25% tariff takes effect tomorrow or not, it is crucial to consider its impact on the Canadian economy and trade policy.
We are currently reshaping and diversifying our economy, and Minister Ng has been working extensively over the past few months. Similarly, Minister of Foreign Affairs Mélanie Joly has been actively signing new free trade agreements with as many countries as possible. If I recall correctly, Canada now has free trade agreements with over 50 countries, covering approximately two-thirds of the global GDP.
These agreements strengthen Canadian businesses because, as a multicultural nation, we have vast global connections. Many communities in Canada have ties to their countries of origin, enabling the creation of new import and export relationships. This is precisely what we have done with Turkey. Currently, our primary focus is Ukraine. Other Canadian construction firms or businesses may establish trade relations with their respective ancestral homelands. This approach will help mitigate the impact of the 25% tariff in Canada. Any negative effects will be short-term; in the long run, we will recover and reshape our economy sustainably and resiliently. That is my belief.
Jacobsen: What financial and legal guarantees do Canadian companies require to secure land leases or property reconstruction projects in Ukraine? How does the bilateral or binational aspect of this arrangement function?
Tomar: We have not encountered such issues because our company has operated for 53 years. We have a proven track record of completing projects in Canada and Turkey. Our financial stability and credibility are well established, as demonstrated by the six subdivisions we are developing in Canada. We are neither a new company in Canada nor Turkey. Our strength comes from our history and the projects we have completed over time.
We have built airports, hospitals, schools, women’s shelters, shopping malls, and numerous high-rise buildings in Canada and Turkey. We have no difficulty securing projects because of our extensive experience and financial stability. Additionally, we do not seek bank loans. Our primary objective is to obtain government contracts in Ukraine or develop our projects within the country.
Jacobsen: Aside from Minister Mary Ng or Minister Mélanie Joly signing new contracts and looking for alternative trade agreements to bypass the 25% tariffs imposed by the Trump administration in the United States, what about emerging trade agreements or economic partnerships between Canada and Ukraine? Are there any new contracts or deals that could accelerate investment in infrastructure projects, such as those led by EBS Global in Ukraine? If we set aside the tariffs and the efforts by Ministers Ng and Joly to mitigate them, what about emerging economic partnerships or trade agreements with Ukraine or neighbouring countries? Are there any agreements that could benefit EBS Global, Canada, and Turkey directly by accelerating investment and expediting reconstruction projects?
Tomar: All these initiatives started before Trump was re-elected. We had already begun the process. To accelerate our work, the Canadian government could make Export Development Canada (EDC) and other financial entities more useful by allocating more resources to assist Canadian companies facing funding challenges or other issues.
Another solution is to restructure how aid is distributed. Funds could be channelled through Canadian companies instead of directly providing financial assistance to Ukrainian ministries. That could be a more effective approach.
For example, if the military requires modular housing or other infrastructure, rather than distributing aid directly, it could allocate those funds to Canadian companies—including us or any other Canadian firms interested in working in Ukraine. There are many competitors in this space. If a company like Aecon wanted to construct a major hydroelectric dam, aid funds could be allocated to them as part of the support package. Similarly, they could collaborate with us if the military needs geodesic domes or modular housing.
That approach would accelerate reconstruction efforts while ensuring Canadian taxpayers see a return on investment through the aid provided.
Jacobsen: Are there unique taxation structures or investment incentives associated with these projects, particularly when registering and operating in another country while maintaining a bilateral business model?
Tomar: I don’t have much information on that. It’s not within my scope. That falls under a different department within our company, and I am not directly involved. My role is as Vice President of Business Development, but I do not handle taxation matters. I am not familiar with the specific details of how that works.
Jacobsen: To give people an idea of the scale of the construction industry, it is a massive business. In British Columbia, where I am located, long-standing Italian Roman Catholic families—such as the Bosas—own some of the largest construction firms in Downtown Vancouver.
In terms of context regarding EBS Global, your company has been around for two years. When you say you will reconstruct Bakhmut, how much money should people consider when considering the cost of rebuilding an entire city?
Tomar: To clarify, we are in a preliminary agreement to reconstruct a town named “Steel Bakhmut” in a different region. It has a population of approximately 3,500 people. The budget for this project is estimated at over 100 million USD.
So that’s one project, and we are also working on other projects. We are budgeting for additional projects, and that is where we currently stand. Right now, 13% of Ukrainian housing has been damaged due to the war, in addition to the aged properties that need to be rebuilt. If a ceasefire takes effect, displaced Ukrainians will return, increasing demand. The housing demand in Ukraine is enormous.
It is a massive undertaking—far greater than the housing crisis in Canada. Ukraine needs to rebuild its homes, hospitals, and schools. The total estimated cost for rebuilding Ukraine is approximately $500 billion. Still, I am unsure what percentage is allocated specifically for housing. However, it is certainly a significant portion.
Given that many builders in Ontario and British Columbia are struggling due to the housing market slowdown and declining buyer confidence, the Canadian government might consider studying the potential for redirecting them to projects in Ukraine. I do not know if that would be feasible, but it is worth analyzing.
Jacobsen: One topic we briefly touched on in our last interview, around the time of the Rebuild Ukraine conference in Toronto, was the integration of automation with human labour. Machines, if well-maintained, can operate 24/7. At the same time, under labour protection laws, human workers typically work 40-hour weeks with eight-hour shifts over five days. Any additional work requires overtime pay.
Are there incentive structures to encourage workers to take on longer hours? Additionally, how much automation is being implemented to accelerate production speed? If you compare a typical building timeline to an accelerated construction model, what kind of time reduction are we looking at?
Tomar: Accelerating construction is based on off-site construction, which involves integrating automation. We have been building the same way for over a hundred years. Still, companies in the U.S. and Canada are adopting new technologies that will save millions of work hours and significantly reduce costs, leading to faster housing development.
Our system produces non-combustible, earthquake-resistant houses. I do not have an exact figure for how much time this process will save. Still, we can significantly speed up production by implementing three shifts that run 24 hours a day and employing Ukrainian veterans who primarily oversee machine operations.
Highly skilled labour is not required for these roles, contributing to faster, more affordable, and attainable housing solutions. That is the direction we are moving toward.
Jacobsen: If someone is interested in getting into your line of work, especially given the increasing demand, what qualities are necessary? Additionally, what skills, while not essential, would be beneficial for building partnerships, driving business development, and advancing in this industry?
Tomar: Partnering with local companies is always beneficial, and that is what we are prioritizing now. Previously, we were mostly focused on handling projects independently. Still, we have been meeting with and negotiating partnerships with local companies over the last few days. They bring valuable expertise, and collaboration will accelerate reconstruction efforts.
They might specialize in one area, while we have our strength in automation and building higher-quality housing. Regarding workforce qualifications, workers in our manufacturing process do not need to be highly skilled. However, we require skilled workers for on-site assembly, though not in large numbers. We have those resources and the necessary workforce.
In traditional construction methods, you typically need five to ten times more workers than we do. Building the same house on-site using conventional methods would take significantly longer and require more workforce.
Jacobsen: What areas do you see need further efficiency improvements? What would be the next step at the cutting edge of construction technology?
Tomar: That could involve AI. We have not implemented AI extensively but are currently exploring its potential. We are researching AI applications in different countries and evaluating how to integrate them into our processes.
AI could optimize material usage, workforce efficiency, and assembly methods, making construction even faster and more cost-effective. Another possibility is further advancing off-site customized home assembly rather than traditional on-site construction. However, given current transportation, logistics, and highway infrastructure limitations, this is not yet a feasible solution, but we are studying it.
Jacobsen: Let’s give a contrast effect for perception. You have experience in Turkey, Canada, and Ukraine. How do each country’s cultural and business environments help or hinder construction, efficiency, materials, and processes? What are the advantages and disadvantages?
Tomar: Every country has its pros and cons.
Once we secure a project in Canada, the approval process takes a long time. Zoning, permitting, and regulatory approvals can take years before construction begins. For example, we tendered a hospital this year, and even though there is a commitment to start soon, it could still take years before actual construction begins.
The process in Turkey moves much faster, but you must be more cautious about business practices. The system is not as transparent, so you must be careful in negotiations and contracts.
Ukraine presents similar challenges. That is why we work closely with Canadian embassies when operating abroad. We consult them and seek advice from international consulting firms before making major business decisions.
Jacobsen: Do you think that if Canada or Turkey were in a wartime scenario, they would respond in the same way as Ukrainians—beginning reconstruction efforts immediately and continuing them even during active bombings?
Tomar: I don’t believe so. But I deeply admire Ukrainians. They are incredibly brave and composed. Everyone remains focused on living their daily lives without significant change, even though they experience drone and missile alerts every day. It amazes me.
I am truly impressed with how they continue rebuilding. It is admirable. I admire their resilience and their way of life. It is inspiring.
Jacobsen: When you considered expanding your business, developing partnerships, and growing your construction efforts, you could have done more in Turkey or Canada. What made Ukraine the natural choice for your expansion, particularly since, during wartime, much of your work has been pre-construction?
Tomar: Why did we choose Ukraine? That’s a good question.
First, there is an obvious need. There is a pragmatic aspect to it—Ukraine requires extensive reconstruction. But beyond that, there is a moral dimension. We see the need, and we want to help.
There is also an emotional connection. We want to contribute to our Ukrainian friends. Over the past ten years, I have developed strong relationships with my Ukrainian colleagues through my involvement with FIABCI, the International Real Estate Federation affiliated with the United Nations. These connections were a major factor in our decision.
When we visited Ukraine and saw the situation firsthand, we knew we had made the right choice to expand here.
Jacobsen: In the modern era, we are experiencing unprecedented international networking. Over the last eighty years, particularly since World War II, global interconnectedness has grown exponentially—not only through trade and the passage of traditional ideas such as religion but also through the rapid exchange of new ideas, information technology, communications, culture, media, and entertainment.
Institutions like the United Nations, the World Trade Organization, and other international bodies help govern this interconnected world. Regardless of their bureaucratic challenges, how important do you think these international institutions will be in the future? As the world becomes more interconnected, will these organizations be essential in enforcing universal rules and preventing crises like the Russo-Ukrainian War?
Tomar: To me, networking is everything.
These international organizations are crucial because they allow us to stay informed about what is happening on the other side of the world. The way we operate today is completely different from the past. In the old days, businesses were restricted to their cities or countries. We have discovered that we can do the same or even better work in different countries.
Even though our company has been based in Ontario for over fifty years, it was only nine years ago that we decided to expand internationally. We have been successful because, in many ways, moving a construction company from Ontario to British Columbia is no different than expanding from Ontario to Turkey or Ukraine.
There are often better opportunities abroad, and businesses must be open to them. However, no matter where you go, you must thoroughly study local business practices and adapt accordingly.
Tomar: You have to adapt to local business habits, labour laws, and regulations—that is what we have been doing. I would recommend that other companies do the same. Instead of struggling in Ontario, they can expand abroad. This applies not only to construction companies but to other industries as well.
Jacobsen: I have recently interviewed business leaders, economists, and international law experts about tariffs, non-consensus decision-making, and the increasingly unilateral, winner-takes-all approach to business and international law. This trend is problematic because it disrupts the free flow of goods and services. Are tariffs a wise strategy in the short or long term? And do you believe they will remain in place for the long term?
Tomar: Tariffs are a short-term measure. They will not last long because they harm both economies. In the short term, particularly in a political context, Trump and others may use them to appeal to their base. Still, they will not be sustainable in the long run.
This is exactly why organizations like the European Union and trade agreements like NAFTA were created—the world needs free trade agreements. Without them, tariffs will make goods more expensive on both the U.S. and Canadian sides.
During the Cold War, we were united against the Warsaw Pact and the Soviet Union. Today, we face another major geopolitical force—China and its allies. Suppose North America and Europe do not eliminate these tariffs and work together. In that case, China will continue expanding its influence, particularly in Africa and other regions.
Tariffs raise prices significantly. Whether it is the automobile sector or construction, we can expect prices to rise by 3–7%, which fuels inflation that we cannot afford. That is why I do not see tariffs as a viable long-term strategy.
Trump and J.D. Vance are implementing these tariffs to appeal to their voters in the short term—that is all. That is my belief.
Jacobsen: Since 2021, China has reached its peak population. There are well-known cases of over-construction in China, which—though often criticized—can be somewhat understandable given the sheer scale of urbanization. Large-scale construction is inevitable when over a billion people are trying to transition hundreds of millions from rural areas to cities.
Tomar: Especially in an authoritarian system where a single leader makes all the decisions, it is much easier to mobilize populations and execute massive infrastructure projects. Whether it is Putin’s Russia, China, or North Korea, bureaucratic resistance is minimal. When the leader makes a decision, it is implemented immediately—you do not need to seek public consent or navigate democratic approval processes.
Jacobsen: That is correct. Many years ago, Russia reached its peak population. It is projected to lose tens of millions of people by mid-century, with even greater declines by the end of the century.
There seems to be a pattern in authoritarian regimes with nine—or ten-figure populations led by aging leaders (70+ years old). These governments often become sclerotic and resistant to change, and their populations lose the dynamism seen in more open societies.
What happens when a country’s population shrinks? China has been experiencing population decline for four years, while Russia has dealt with it for much longer. What happens to the construction industry when populations decline rapidly—when a country reaches its peak population, but the rate of decline accelerates each year?
Tomar: Population shrinkage used to be a major concern. It was considered a serious issue five, ten, or twenty years ago. However, with the advancements in AI and robotics—which we have been discussing for two decades but are now actively adopting—the demand for a large workforce is decreasing daily.
That is why I do not foresee population shrinkage as a problem. I do not see an issue because robots and AI will replace the need for human labour in many areas.
On the other hand, China is not Russia. Neither country is stagnant, but China, unlike Russia, continuously expands. The U.S. did the same 60–70 years ago with the Marshall Plan, spreading its economic influence globally. Today, China follows a similar pattern, expanding its economy every five years and consistently exceeding expectations. Their presence in Africa, the Middle East, and beyond continues to grow.
China will not face a major crisis due to population decline. The real issue is that Western countries must recognize this trend and eliminate tariffs. We must move beyond the European Union and the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) to form a stronger economic alliance. If we do not, we risk losing ground to China’s expanding influence.
Jacobsen: Given that outlook, where do you see the future of construction? Specifically, with robots performing essential tasks—from sourcing and fabricating materials to assembling entire buildings—how do you envision their role in the industry?
Tomar: Any repetitive work—regardless of industry—can be replaced by robots.
It does not matter whether the worker is a cashier, a handyman, a carpenter, or a steelworker. If the task is repetitive, it can be automated. The same applies to construction. If a worker does the same tasks every morning, those tasks can be automated with AI and robotics.
We have been discussing this for 30 to 40 years, but our technology is far beyond what we previously had. This is a transformational era in history. The pandemic accelerated our adoption of technology. We had to adapt quickly, and now we rapidly shift toward automation.
Jacobsen: What does this mean for materials development? Do you think AI will be used to design advanced construction materials that are cheaper, more durable, and more fire-resistant than we have today?
Tomar: Absolutely.
Our judgment can be flawed as humans, but AI makes fewer mistakes. When robots and AI are combined, the efficiency of building, assembling, and innovating increases dramatically.
Humans get tired, make mistakes, and have misleading judgments. Even in traffic, we cause millions of accidents every year. However, with AI-driven traffic management, accidents will become increasingly rare.
In five to ten years, having a car accident will be an anomaly—it will make the news because it will be so unusual. AI-powered vehicles do not drive with two eyes; they process the environment using 200 sensors, making them 200 times more perceptive than a human driver.
The same applies to construction. A carpenter has two hands and two eyes, but a robotic system can be designed with ten hands and ten eyes, making it five times more efficient.
We already have the technology—it is just a matter of adoption. How we think about construction, labour, and efficiency is still based on the limitations of human anatomy (two arms, two eyes). Once we fully integrate AI and robotics, those limitations will disappear, and construction will be faster, safer, and more cost-effective.
Now, we are going beyond what we traditionally know. Even when designing robots, we often model them after human capabilities, but we do not need to.
There is no reason we must limit robots to two eyes or two arms. We could design a single robot with 200 sensors or 10 arms, making it exponentially more efficient at constructing a house. With just four or five advanced robots, entire buildings could be assembled. The technology exists, and this is the future.
Jacobsen: Where do you see this industry expanding regarding human capital? What sectors will grow? Construction, business development, technology development—where will the focus be?
Tomar: As Canadians, we are conservative when adopting new technology—especially compared to Asia, the Middle East, and Africa. I have been to many countries, and I have seen this firsthand.
When new technologies emerge—AI, the metaverse, or automation—Canadian companies often develop the software. However, other countries purchase and implement it first. In Canada, construction and automotive manufacturing industries tend to stick with traditional methods until these technologies are adopted elsewhere. Then, and only then, do we integrate them. That is the difference.
Jacobsen: Given that shift, what role do you see for human workers in your industry?
Tomar: We must shift human labour toward software development and quality control.
Instead of working in physically demanding, high-risk environments, such as construction sites in extreme weather or driving long-haul trucks from Toronto to Miami, workers should transition to software engineering, automation control, and system monitoring.
That is where the new jobs will be created—software development, AI integration, and quality assurance.
Jacobsen: After the upcoming Canadian federal election, what should the next political leader and cabinet prioritize regarding construction partnerships—particularly with President Erdoğan in Turkey and President Zelensky in Ukraine? Or, more broadly, with the ministers responsible for these economic sectors?
Tomar: In three weeks, we will have a clearer picture.
Mark Carney and Pierre Poilievre will likely compete in the election in three months. Right now, Poilievre appears to be leading. Whoever forms a government and appoints a new cabinet in May or June must rebuild the public sector.
Many experienced bureaucrats have retired or left Canada, which has weakened policy development. We need to rehire skilled policymakers and bring in stronger leadership than before.
Additionally, new ministers must focus on diversifying Canada’s economy by expanding global trade and strengthening relationships with Ukraine, European nations, and African markets. I would like to see that.
Jacobsen: Excellent. Seyfi, thank you for your time today. I appreciate the updates and the deeper, exploratory questions—which I tend to ask.
Tomar: No, it is all good. Thank you very much.
Jacobsen: We will be in touch.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/11
Dr. Rebecca Mannis, founder of Ivy Prep, brings over thirty-five years of expertise in supporting children and adults with learning differences. With advanced degrees from Teachers College, Columbia University, and the Harvard Graduate School of Education, Dr. Mannis is a leading authority on individualized education, neuroscience, and adaptive technology. In conversation with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, she discusses the importance of physical and emotional safety, a “new TLC” (Temperament, Learning profile, Culture), and positive role models for child development. Mannis highlights neuroscience’s evolving role in education, the benefits of multilingualism, fostering resilience, and practical strategies to support both learning and mental health.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Dr. Rebecca Mannis, a renowned learning specialist and founder of Ivy Prep. She has over thirty-five years of experience supporting children and adults in New York City and internationally. She holds a Ph.D. in Developmental Psychology from Teachers College, Columbia University, specializing in neuroscience and education. She also earned a master’s in Reading, Language, and Learning Disabilities from the Harvard Graduate School of Education.
Dr. Mannis consults with schools and corporations on individualized education plans (IEPs), learning disabilities, and integrating adaptive technologies in education. She previously coordinated education services for the Making Headway Foundation, a nonprofit that supports children with brain and spinal cord tumours, and served on the Harvard Graduate School of Education Alumni Council from February 2009 to 2014. What do children need developmentally and emotionally to thrive?
Dr. Rebecca Mannis: Let’s consider this from the perspective of an educator, a neuroscientist, and—as I often emphasize—a parent. There are several key factors. First and foremost, children need to feel safe.
They require both physical and emotional safety and access to high-quality education. Of course, safety and education have different meanings depending on how a child develops individually and what is happening in the surrounding society. As part of that, children must experience a healthy balance of support and structure and sufficient latitude to explore and grow based on their unique traits.
Thanks to neuroscience and careful observation of children and families, we now understand that while developmental patterns exist, everyone is distinct.
I sometimes describe these distinctions using a term I coined: “the new TLC.” Traditionally, TLC meant tender loving care. While loving support remains critical today, we must also consider temperament, learning profile, and culture. Hence, “the new TLC.”
So, what does that stand for?
- T is for Temperament. Each child is born with a distinct temperament—just as they are born with eye colour or a genetic predisposition for specific interests. Some children are slower to warm up, some are more sensitive or reactive, and others may be unflappable in new situations. Understanding a child’s temperament helps adults respond more effectively to their needs.
- L is for Learning Profile. Every individual has a unique constellation of cognitive strengths and challenges. Some children excel in verbal reasoning, others in spatial or motor skills. These differences—rooted in brain development—affect how children process information and interact with their environment. Acknowledging and supporting diverse learning profiles is essential for fostering growth.
- C stands for Culture or Context. A child’s cultural background, family dynamics, community resources, and national or regional norms shape a child’s development. Each of these contexts provides both opportunities and constraints, and must be accounted for when we think about what it means for a child to thrive.
Finally, children need role models—adults who exemplify curiosity, resilience, kindness, and integrity. These role models are crucial for helping children envision their own paths and build emotional and intellectual resilience. They need to see adults and peers who model decency, fortitude, ways to create meaning, and ways to stay engaged—to hopefully help them grow into good people and contribute to making our society a better place.
Jacobsen: How does neuroscience enhance the approaches to individualized education for children with learning differences?
Mannis: Neuroscience is a field that is constantly evolving. We now have access to valuable information, even going back a hundred years to the origins of neuropsychology, which essentially began as researchers observed soldiers returning from World War I with cognitive deficits due to brain injuries. From these cases, clinicians and scientists began to understand that damage to specific brain regions, such as the front left side, could result in language deficits, leading to insights about which brain areas mediate specific cognitive functions like language. Today, thanks to advances in knowledge, assessment procedures, and imaging tools, we can apply these insights to enhance educational approaches and revisit some long-held assumptions.
One example of an assumption we are rethinking involves dual language learning. It was once thought that children exposed to multiple languages from a young age—such as in a multilingual home—might experience delays in language development due to confusion. Now, what we understand is more nuanced. For some children at risk for dyslexia or with primary language difficulties, multilingualism can add a layer of complexity, but it is something we can work with and support.
For most children, however, research shows that while developing grammar skills or transferring language knowledge to reading might take a bit longer, dual or multiple language exposure is not inherently detrimental but complementary. For example, a child might be simultaneously learning English and Ukrainian, Hebrew and English, or even Farsi, Hebrew, and English. We now know that the brain systems responsible for language and critical thinking are consolidating—perhaps at a slower pace as the child integrates multiple languages—but this process strengthens cognitive flexibility and metalinguistic awareness.
So, neuroscience is helping us understand that multilingualism is an asset rather than a hindrance for most children.
As we learn more about how people grow and learn, we can use this information to benefit children formally and informally. This knowledge from neuroscience, gathered through various methods, helps us foster development and address areas of vulnerability. For instance, if a child has recently moved to the United States from another country and is dyslexic, we can apply these insights to provide the proper support and scaffolding for that child.
Another example, which is less commonly discussed, concerns giftedness. We now know that giftedness is not about a parent pushing a child because the child must go to Yale. Some individuals are born with a greater capacity or inclination to develop in certain areas and may progress differently. We now have a clearer understanding of their needs and competencies and what kinds of support and opportunities are appropriate for them. Neuroscience enables us to provide parents and communities with information to meet these children’s unique needs and help them develop their strengths.
Jacobsen: What are effective strategies to cultivate strong mental health in children?
Mannis: Mental health is a core concern for all of us now, whether we recognize its role in overall individual growth and community well-being, or whether we’re responding to challenges such as increases in racism or antisemitism, the impact of COVID-19, or rethinking the role of social media and screen time. Supporting mental health is essential. Some strategies are quite practical but always benefit from a brain-based, developmental approach.
The first and perhaps most powerful strategy is modelling. There is no greater teacher or role model than a parent. Parents can demonstrate healthy coping and growth through their behaviours and experiences when cultivating strong mental health.
For example, one way is to try something new. You might not be naturally gifted at singing, but if your children see you participating in a chorus once a week and practicing to learn the notes and sing with others, you are showing them that it’s valuable to face challenges, continue finding new interests, and grow from those experiences.
Another way parents can support mental health is by modelling kindness. This includes how you respond to others—whether declining an invitation, extending yourself to help, or encouraging another person in something vital to them. When you engage with people who see things differently, practicing active listening and showing respect while being sincere about your own opinions teaches children how to navigate differences constructively. Part of being a strong role model is demonstrating good communication skills.
Managing frustration is one of the most important things for parents to model today. We live in a society with many opportunities for exploration, achievement, and gratification—but also frequent chances for disappointment and annoyance. How we handle setbacks—grace, kindness, and resilience—makes a lasting impression because our children are always observing. They listen to our words and watch our actions to see whether they are aligned or inconsistent.
Another way parents can help cultivate strong mental health in children is by monitoring their growth and having open conversations about what is on their minds. Sometimes, this means intentionally setting aside time for discussion or simply taking advantage of informal moments—such as while driving to a Yankees game or a Mariners game—to talk about situations that may be concerning or interesting to them.
It’s also essential to give children opportunities to stretch themselves, encounter frustration as they pursue goals, and experience the “window of tolerance.” This is where they can try something challenging, derive absolute pleasure and success from the experience, and ultimately learn how to persevere through difficulties that matter to them.
Jacobsen: Is kids’ mental health under more duress in high-competition contexts—Shanghai, Seoul, Tokyo, New York City, London, Singapore, Hong Kong, Toronto, Vancouver, Bangalore, or Paris?
Mannis: That is such an important question because there are both distinct factors affecting how children are growing up and how families are functioning in those environments and many commonalities. For example, some families have highly involved parents; others have a sibling facing illness or a child who is bright and eager to study advanced math but also has ADHD or OCD.
Children everywhere are adjusting to adolescence, trying to understand the changes in their bodies, minds, and interests over time. So, the first thing I would say is that we need to focus on the commonalities shared by children in different situations and recognize that there is enormous variability within each city or context.
We also have to consider how we observe and measure mental health in these contexts. In some environments, children are subjected to very intensive tutoring. As a learning specialist, I spend my days providing individualized tutoring, guiding students through college preparation, and teaching study skills for high-stakes tests—all to help children become more independent learners. However, not all tutoring serves this purpose. In some places—be it New York, Shanghai, or Bangalore—there exists a culture of high-pressure tutoring focused on test performance. Children may spend weekends being drilled extensively by tutors.
Research shows that while these children might gain specific academic skills more quickly—such as learning to decode complex words or mastering multiplication tables—the long-term effects are less clear. The evidence is mixed regarding whether this approach sustains their interest in learning or helps them become self-motivated and independent thinkers. There are also questions about whether intensive tutoring dampens their intrinsic motivation to learn for curiosity and joy.
As we discussed before, the concept of TLC—tender loving care—states that showing love and support is crucial for children and students. However, when addressing issues like anxiety or obsessive-compulsive disorder, one of the greatest gifts we can give a young person is not to accommodate or reinforce what is difficult for them. In other words, supporting children means helping them face challenges rather than shielding them from all discomfort.
If a child is shying away from learning their times tables, one of the best gifts we can offer is to give them the tools and encouragement to persevere—showing them they do not need to put their energy into avoidance or self-effacement.
Do we say that overturning or a hyper-focus on skills and drills is always detrimental? Not necessarily. Sometimes, it takes away from the joy of learning and fostering independence. On the other hand, there are times when providing those structures does a great deal of good for an individual learner.
Jacobsen: How can adaptive technology and AI be used responsibly and integrated into a child’s learning experience?
Mannis: I’ll add one anecdote that I recently came across in a news item. I’m unsure if this was misreported, but I saw it, so I’ll share. A student felt frustrated after being chastised by a teacher for using ChatGPT in school. However, the student later observed the teacher using ChatGPT themselves and justifying it. The students said they felt as if they wanted a refund for the course because of the perceived hypocrisy.
This example illustrates the importance of modeling—exactly as you mentioned—and the need for an ethical approach to using AI in educational contexts. Responsible use is not just about the tools themselves but about how adults model their use for students.
Current technological tools, including artificial intelligence, offer tremendous potential, but they also require thoughtful and responsible integration. Much of the conversation centers around how technology is used, whether AI or other digital platforms. In reflecting on this, Scott, I am reminded of a point famously made by one of the founders of neuropsychology.
We discussed earlier that neuropsychology developed as a field in both Russia and the United States, often in response to understanding the challenges faced by soldiers returning from World War I with head injuries. By systematically studying patterns of brain function and deficits, the field advanced significantly. One of the most famous figures in Boston was Professor Edith Kaplan. She often said that while developing assessment tools and measures is essential, a good neuropsychologist always remembers that what truly matters is how those tools are used to benefit the individual.
Test publishing and textbook publishing are big businesses, and many excellent tools are available. However, Dr. Kaplan was ahead of her time in emphasizing that the critical element is how we, as humans, use those tools thoughtfully and tactically and share that knowledge to support individual growth and inform policy.
Here is an example of using AI in my practice with students. I have a student who has a tremendous interest in the history of music but reads at a lower reading level. That child may know many facts and have strong conceptual skills, but if their decoding skills—their ability to read individual words or longer sentences—need development, then my instruction and their practice become crucial. Otherwise, their comprehension will be compromised. So, we want to provide that child with targeted skill-building and plenty of practice.
We want to make the learning process more engaging by incorporating their interests. For instance, I have used AI, with carefully designed prompts, to generate content about famous musicians or baseball teams that appeals to the student’s interests but also contains sentences of manageable length and includes factual, inferential, or higher-order thinking questions. Of course, I review and further edit this material, but that is an example of how access to AI can be excellent and how it can be a terrific educational tool.
Many schools—public, private, and Ivy League universities—are also beginning to incorporate AI into their programs. For example, Emory University announced this year that it is launching a minor in artificial intelligence because it recognizes that it is its responsibility to teach students tools they are already being asked to use in summer internships. We want students to have these skills and, frankly, even to lead some of the professionals ten or twenty years their senior.
However, I also want them to use these tools with an understanding of ethics, the technology’s potential, and its current limitations. I have worked with students at Ivy League institutions where professors ask students to create discussion posts—sometimes composing weekly posts entirely independently, signing an honour statement confirming their independent work, and sometimes generating drafts with AI prompts. The students are then asked to review both versions and write a critical analysis comparing how the AI-generated responses align with their thinking, noting the strengths and weaknesses. They may also be asked to refine their prompts to see how to use AI more effectively.
I think about this a lot. I also recall a mentor of mine, Professor Jean Chall, a professor at Harvard University who was responsible, in the 1970s and 1980s, for reintroducing phonics into reading curricula when less effective methods were in use. When I was at Harvard, they announced their first technology and education program. We, the students in the reading program, asked Professor Chall for her thoughts on this new direction. She said, “Technology is wonderful. It does great things now; I can’t imagine what it will do someday. But there are two things AI will never replace: the thrill of holding a page-turner in your hands and the impact of a fabulous teacher.”
Regarding Professor Chall and the ways in which AI is shaping assessment, I am currently working with groups exploring how AI can make assessments more accessible and cost-effective. It is an exciting field, and I am glad to be a part of it. There are also real necessities in training both teachers and students so that AI serves as an adjunct to instruction rather than a replacement.
Jacobsen: For children recovering from traumatic brain injury or cancer, what are the realistic limits on the resilience and adaptability of the developing brain?
Mannis: Our knowledge base has grown substantially in this area, and we expect to learn much more as we observe development and outcomes across the lifespan and the impact of new intervention methods. The good news is that while cancer diagnoses in children are increasing, so too are our abilities to identify cancers earlier and, most importantly, help children survive and experience long-term remission.
However, cancer and other brain injuries can significantly impact the developing nervous system. We know that interventions—whether surgery, chemotherapy, or radiation—can save lives, but they may also affect brain development.
What we’re beginning to understand is that some general patterns emerge, but many factors influence outcomes: the type of intervention, the location of a brain tumour, the duration of chemotherapy or radiation, and the number of schoolchildren missed—especially in cases involving stem cell transplants or extended hospitalization.
Interventions in younger children tend to be more pervasive and can affect intelligence or functioning more globally, as the developing brain is still forming its foundational structures. When diagnosis and intervention occur during adolescence or young adulthood, the effects tend to be more specific and localized. Part of the reason for this is that in younger children, the brain is still growing rapidly through processes such as myelination—an increase in the insulating sheath that helps nerve cells send signals quickly.
As you so eruditely discussed, there is also the concept of pruning—the idea that certain neural tracts become particularly strong while other neurons and less efficient tracts are eliminated and do not develop similarly.
For example, if a child is very young—say, eighteen months or four years old—the tumour or cancer is developing against the backdrop of a rapidly developing nervous system. The interventions required may save the child’s life, but they inevitably impact brain development as well. Younger children are acquiring foundational skills: developing language, learning to skip, and mastering the rules for breaking long words into syllables. Both the disease and the treatment occur during this critical initial skill-building period.
That scenario differs from a diagnosis at age fifteen, eighteen, or twenty-three. In those cases, individuals typically retain most of what they had already acquired before the illness. Their overall intelligence or reasoning ability is usually preserved, and they have learned essential academic and coping skills—such as managing homework even in distracting environments or tolerating frustration in ways that younger children may not yet have developed. They also tend to have had positive life experiences that provide essential context and resilience compared to younger children, who may be more vulnerable.
So, when a diagnosis occurs in adolescence or early adulthood—say at fourteen, nineteen, or twenty-two—basic skills like reading are typically maintained. However, there may be impacts on processing speed (how quickly they absorb new information) or executive functions (their ability to plan, organize, and juggle multiple tasks). For example, they may find reading and understanding new material more challenging, like a chapter on the French Revolution, without the same background knowledge or mental energy.
From an educational standpoint, one of our goals is to increase the knowledge base of teachers and administrators. Because brain injury and cancer survivorship are less common than, for example, dyslexia or ADHD, there is often less awareness in school systems about how best to support these students. It’s important to educate teachers so they can collaborate with families and specialists, ensuring that students receive necessary accommodations—such as more frequent breaks, a reduced course load, or a shorter school day to manage fatigue.
At the same time, we now understand the importance of fostering agency in children who have experienced these challenges. For example, when I work with children who are cancer survivors or have had a brain injury, we often practice scripts for emails or private meetings with teachers or professors so they can share (if they wish) their history and the strategies that help them succeed. This can open the door to a partnership with the teacher, making it easier for the student to transition into the new school year.
However, it’s also important to recognize that repeatedly explaining their history and advocating for accommodations can be retraumatizing for children and their families. Even well-meaning adults—who often hold more power in these situations—may inadvertently make students feel different or marginalized simply by requiring them to relive their difficult experiences.
That’s, of course, what happens in large medical systems. One of the best things we can do is to recognize this dynamic and work with children and their families to find ways to mitigate it while engaging kids in problem-solving. We often refer to this as developing metacognitive awareness.
For example, I might ask a student, “What about spacing out the deadlines for your book report and your term paper that you think will help you, Johnny?” Or, “What do you see as the logic behind waiting to take the SAT next year rather than this year? How will that help as you adjust to a reading-heavy history course?” The more we model and help children communicate what helps or hinders them, the more they can amplify their experiences and engage others in collaborative problem-solving that meets their needs.
Jacobsen: My last two questions. How can parents distinguish between typical developmental challenges and signs of a learning disability? How can we design educational approaches to maintain engagement while supporting healthy brain development?
Mannis: The distinction between typical development and a learning disability has become more pronounced as awareness grows around different difficulties. For instance, I increasingly hear from families about “time blindness”—difficulty estimating how long tasks will take. While using this label can sometimes feel pathologizing, recognizing that such challenges exist can also be helpful.
It’s tricky to make these distinctions because we’ve had tremendous disruptions—such as school districts and private schools sometimes using ineffective reading instruction methods. When children are asked to tackle advanced reading in fifth grade and struggle, is it undiagnosed dyslexia or a need to strengthen foundational skills that were not adequately taught in the early grades? The disruptions caused by COVID-19 and the dual role of technology as both a tool and a hindrance have further complicated our understanding.
One of the best ways for parents to distinguish between developmental challenges and learning disabilities is to build a trusted community and seek input from others—through parent groups (which I often run), discussions with learning specialists, or consultations with pediatricians. Informal networks—the so-called “mommy network”—can be very effective, as parents share experiences and learn what concerns are resolved on their own, which require formal evaluation and intervention.
Alongside that, I recommend two additional strategies. First, try to think across the developmental trajectory. For example, some people approach me in their twenties, saying, “I have ADD.” It may be that underlying difficulties were present earlier and are now more pronounced in the context of law school or other demanding environments. It’s unusual for ADD to emerge as a completely new issue in adulthood—typically, there are earlier indicators in childhood.
It is unusual for a twenty-two-year-old to present with these challenges without an earlier history suddenly. So, looking back—whether you’re the individual or the parent—and identifying those patterns is important. For example, research shows that between sixty and eighty percent of people with dyslexia have what is called language-based dyslexia because reading is fundamentally about recognizing and processing words visually.
Most people with dyslexia have an earlier history. They may have been slower to start speaking, had trouble following multi-step directions in first grade, or experienced dysgraphia—difficulty holding a pencil and writing letters neatly while organizing their thoughts.
These challenges may become more pronounced in demanding environments like law or medical school, but there were probably earlier indicators. One practice I encourage for parents, as old-fashioned as it may sound, is to keep a file on your phone or a notepad by your bedside—these things might keep you up at two in the morning. Write it down when you notice something—whether it’s a concern, an area of strength, or an example of what works. This allows you to step back, reflect, and, when working with experts like me, provide specific, meaningful examples that can guide distinguishing between typical development and learning challenges.
Regarding educational approaches supporting healthy brain development, I recommend thinking tactically about why we use specific new tools while recognizing the value of traditional methods. I work with students worldwide via Zoom, including those who live far from specialists in giftedness, dyslexia, or brain tumour survivorship. Technology like Zoom, AI, and digital markup tools can be invaluable for sharing and annotating materials, especially for visual learners.
On the other hand, research shows that people process information differently when reading from a screen than when holding a physical book. Deep reading tends to be more effective with a printed book. So, I recommend making time for families to read together—participating in book clubs, discussing podcasts or interviews, and engaging in meaningful conversations during daily routines, such as car rides to visit relatives.
We also want to ensure that children and adults have time for rest, play, and enjoyable activities that allow for reflection. Scott, when we first spoke, you mentioned that your interest in a college project led you to take a leadership role in writing, which ultimately shaped your current work. That is an excellent example of how having the freedom to try something new, feeling comfortable approaching others, and having the mental space to experiment can lead to unexpected satisfaction and achievements.
Finally, I want to emphasize the importance of parents and teachers working together and truly having knowledge and understanding. Let me give you one example.
Many technology-based tools can be helpful for both parents and teachers. Unfortunately, not enough time is dedicated to training teachers on how to use this information effectively—how to customize it, how to extract what is particularly relevant for their class, their weekly topics, or for an individual student. Teachers often do not have the luxury of the preparation and communication time they truly need.
Imagine what could happen if parents fully understood the value of some PowerPoints provided by textbook publishers and how they could sit with their children and review those materials—especially when children feel overwhelmed during finals season. Many of my high school students are preparing for finals, so I know their stress. Finding ways for teachers, parents, and students to use available tools collaboratively can enhance learning to support brain development and problem-solving skills.
We talked about metacognition—being able to analyze, “Here’s what helps me,” whether it’s using AI, reviewing a PowerPoint, or planning because I know I will be coming home late from a Yankees game. (Sorry, last night’s walk-off home run was incredible—I’m a big Yankees fan!) This means asking: “What does this mean for me? How should I talk to my teacher?” Maybe I’m writing for the school newspaper’s sports section, but I also have a term paper due. How can I communicate with my teacher to prioritize my studying and maximize my time before the holiday weekend?
That is a much more engaged, proactive, higher-level way of using technology and understanding executive function and organizational skills. Hopefully, this approach puts students in the driver’s seat, empowering them to engage meaningfully with the adults who support them.
Jacobsen: Rebecca, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.
Mannis: It was my pleasure. Thank you for your thoughtful questions and the opportunity to share my expertise. It was great to meet you. Let’s continue this conversation.
—
More resources: https://ivy-prep.com/about/.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/10
Dr. Joshua Korman, a Stanford-trained, board-certified plastic surgeon and founder of Korman Plastic Surgery, discusses his background in music, sculpting, fitness, and plastic surgery innovations. He explains the role of exosomes and gene therapy in accelerating healing, ethical considerations in younger patients seeking surgery, and the blurred lines between vanity and necessity. Dr. Korman highlights his Clean Slate Program’s national impact on tattoo removal for gang rehabilitation and emphasizes the importance of education in emerging regenerative technologies. He reflects on patients’ misconceptions, such as overconfidence from online research, and shares insights on passion, judgment, and lifelong learning.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: All right, today we are here with Dr. Joshua Korman, husband of Dr. Siobhan Korman, a Stanford-trained, board-certified plastic surgeon and founder of Korman Plastic Surgery, with locations across Northern and Central California, including Carmel-by-the-Sea, Los Altos, Mountain View, and San Jose. Recognized for his artistry and expertise, he specializes in advanced facial, breast, body, and male procedures. A Castle Connolly Top Doctor and Newsweek honoree, Dr. Korman also serves as an Adjunct Clinical Professor of Surgery at Stanford University School of Medicine. He holds numerous patents in skin remodeling and tissue expansion and advocates for the positive psychological impacts of surgery. A community leader and founder of the Clean Slate Program, he balances his surgical career with music, sculpting, and outdoor fitness passions. Let us start a little off-topic. What kind of music do you play, why did you get into sculpting, and what outdoor fitness activities do you enjoy?
Dr. Joshua Korman: In the order, you asked, what kind of music is it? I play the piano and the oboe and actively perform in several groups and bands. I was a music major in college. Many of my relatives are musicians. I play different kinds of music — I perform in big bands and small groups. Similarly, the oboe is quite different from the piano, and just as I enjoy a range of instruments, I do not like to be pigeonholed as “just a facial plastic surgeon” or a “body plastic surgeon.” It is a “yes and” approach to use your words. As for sculpting, I became interested when I was a chief resident. People often say plastic surgeons are artistic, but I don’t think I really appreciated what that meant. There was a visiting sculptor at Stanford, and I arranged for her to run a course for plastic surgeons and trainees. A few of us participated, and at first, the sculptures we made looked a bit like Martha Washington. But eventually, I realized a few important things that are different working in clay than in surgery— for example, always keep the nose up because when you sculpt faces in clay, they naturally tend to look older.
There are little tricks like that. That is the kind of sculpting I do. I enjoy it a lot. As for outdoor fitness, I work out consistently. I ride my bike, lift weights, and run. That is a big part of my life. It is essential to stay healthy. I grew up playing soccer, and I remember during one medical school interview, the interviewer said, “Oh, I see you play sports. Do you like to exercise?” I said, “I guess so,” and he replied, “When I get the urge to exercise, I sit down and wait for it to go away.” But my father, who played soccer at an almost professional level, is now turning 97, and exercise has certainly served him well. So yes, I firmly believe that exercise is a very good thing.
Jacobsen: Have you found any knock-on effect benefits from these side parts of your life in your primary profession?
Korman: I have found side benefits from these things; yes, so, they give me something to talk about and relate with many patients. I never run out of things to discuss with patients and people in general. We live in a world with so many different subworlds within it. Before I got my first dog, I did not know much about dogs. Then you go to a dog show and realize, wow, there is a whole world of people who live for their pets. It’s enlightening to learn about whole other worlds. But at times it also gives me a sense that there are people who might not know what they are talking about, but sound like they do. It makes me realize that there are things I truly know about and others I really don’t — and that is true for others.
Jacobsen: So passion is not a proxy for knowledge.
Korman: It is not. That is a perfect line. I will have to borrow that.
Jacobsen: TM. So, moving more to the main set of questions, some natural avenues of questioning will follow from this. Regardless, how are gene therapy and exosome-based treatments relevant to plastic surgery now?
Korman: People live longer and are increasingly concerned about their health and appearance. I recently saw a statistic that more than half of babies born to today will live to be 100. Exosomes — let us go back to what exosomes are. Exosomes were discovered in the 1980s, and initially, people thought they were waste products of cells. For something to be classified as a cell, it needs a nucleus and a membrane; exosomes are not cells . So, early researchers thought exosomes were just cellular waste. But then it became clear that they are incredibly powerful signaling devices that cells use to communicate. Inside these little bubbles are a lot of truly remarkable biological materials. They have clever membranes that allow them to easily slip into and out of cells, making them highly effective. Exosomes are very good for reducing inflammation and have significant therapeutic potential. The FDA has not yet approved them for direct injection due to concerns about safety and misuse, but the science is promising. It is not just hype; exosomes are real and potent. I have seen them dramatically improve healing when applied topically, especially after procedures like microneedling. As for gene therapy, it can restore function in cells by changing the genetic material. Only recently have true clinical applications started to emerge. Biohacking is a buzzword that may sound negative, but the concept of improving human lives through genetic modification is moving quickly.
I would not compare it directly to AI, but like AI, it is something everyone is talking about and slowly materializing into real use cases. To clarify, when I refer to biohacking, I’m referring to biohacking strategies that have been proven and scientifically researched.
In plastic surgery, we traditionally say we deal with the skin and its contents, but plastic surgery is not solely about the skin. The term “plastic” comes from the Greek word meaning “to “mold or “to shape.” Plastic surgery encompasses reconstructive, aesthetic, cosmetic, and more. A plastic surgeon performed the first successful kidney transplant. Plastic surgery is a vast and dynamic field.
However, to answer your question — how are cellular advances related? It is all about healing. It is about improving healing and delaying the signs of aging. That is how it is most beneficial to plastic surgery.
Jacobsen: If we are looking at timelines, whether you are on the younger side of life or the older side, what would a regular timeline of healing and recovery look like after surgery? And with these therapeutics and treatments, what would be the change or difference?
Korman: It depends on how you look at it. For example, think of laser resurfacing, which is controlled burns to the face or other areas. Usually, if you stay pink and are still healing for two weeks, with advanced therapeutics, that healing can happen in a few days instead of two weeks. It can be very dramatic because the body is programmed to heal open wounds quickly — open wounds can be life-threatening. In terms of surgical results, meaning when you have closed a wound after an operation, these processes can accelerate healing significantly. If it usually takes two weeks, advanced treatments could allow someone to recover much sooner. If you ask how soon someone can return to work — say, after a knee operation, which is orthopedic, not plastic surgery — orthopedics has been injecting different types of materials into joints to improve healing for a long time. In plastic surgery, healing improvements can be pretty dramatic as well. I am not being more specific because it depends on the part of the body and the patient’s age. Older individuals tend to heal more slowly than younger individuals.
Jacobsen: Another question from that is: Is there an upper limit, or an age plus other considerations, that tends to be when plastic surgeons do not perform surgery? What are the conditions for that?
Korman: It is interesting — both on the young and old sides. Have you ever seen the movie Hidden Figures?
Jacobsen: A friend of mine talked about it, but I do not recall the details.
Korman: It is about three women who worked for NASA, who were brilliant mathematicians, and their struggles to be accepted. They accomplished amazing things for NASA. NASA has a major facility here, and I operated on three people — two women and one man — who had worked there, all in their 80s. But you would never know they were in their 80s. These individuals were like G.I. Joe and G.I. Jane — pilots and incredibly active. You would think they were 40. Yes, they had some wrinkles, but how youthful and vibrant they were was shocking. So, chronological age is very different from biological or functional age.
On the younger side, it is interesting now that it used to be thought that facelifts and similar procedures should not be done until patients were in their 50s, 60s, or 70s. But now, many people are seeking surgery before they turn 40 because they want to maintain their youthful appearance, not just regain it later. They want to stay looking like they are in their 30s. It raises interesting ethical questions. I have seen several patients who had surgery in Korea while in their 30s, and they came to me for follow-up or other procedures. There has been coverage of this in outlets like The Wall Street Journal, noting that many people are having cosmetic surgery in their 30s.
Social media plays a role in this trend. People want to stay looking young rather than wait until they look significantly older before pursuing surgery. The best compliment someone can receive after not seeing them for many years is , “You look the same,” rather than, “Oh, you had surgery,” or “What did they have done?” Looking unchanged—just fresh and youthful—is a very positive outcome.
Jacobsen: What about vanity surgeries? People are free — these are not illegal procedures. So, these can be done. Yet, in consultation, do these become part of the conversation regarding the soft skills approach needed for surgery since they are in your office seeking expert advice?
Korman: Several years ago, I gave a talk to Stanford undergraduates titled, Is it Necessity or Vanity? I started by showing them a picture of a baby with a cleft lip. I asked, “Is this necessity or vanity?” They said, “Oh, necessity, of course.” Then I showed them a picture of a mastectomy patient, and again, almost all said, “Necessity.” Nearly all — but not everyone. Then, I showed them a picture of a patient who wanted a facelift to stay competitive in Silicon Valley, maintaining a youthful appearance for professional reasons. Everyone said, “Vanity, for sure.” Then I showed them a picture of a 20-year-old with a cleft lip — a patient from a trip to Vietnam many years ago. Again, they said, “Necessity.”
However, I explained that while I repaired the cleft lip when he returned a week later to have his stitches removed, he had been kicked out by his family. As a beggar, he had been a source of income for the family, but once his cleft lip was repaired, he could no longer fill that role. So, the question of what is considered necessity versus vanity is not as simple as it seems. We are all judgmental and think we know the answer, but often, we do not.
Jacobsen: What are the promising applications of aesthetic and reconstructive procedures in the current period?
Korman: There are up-and-coming developments. Face transplants are now being performed, which is remarkable. You might wonder, “Who would do that?” It is for individuals who have been severely disfigured. To undergo a transplant, you must take immunosuppressive drugs — unless you have an identical twin, which is rare. Otherwise, the transplant would be rejected. Face transplantation has begun, and so have hand and limb transplants, which are significant advancements. Robotic microsurgery is also on the horizon.
In aesthetic surgery, healing topicals such as exosomes are advancing rapidly and have great potential. There is a growing focus on combination approaches—everyone, understandably, wants the least invasive, longest-lasting, most cost-effective, and best results possible.
There are an increasing number of minimally invasive and non-invasive procedures, but it is also important to help patients understand what truly works for their specific situation. For example, I perform deep plane facelifts, but sometimes, I modify them with short-incision techniques or combine surgical and non-surgical treatments depending on the patient’s needs.
Globally, the trend is toward combining techniques from different areas that you would not necessarily expect to work together. I also invented a medical device currently in clinical trials that aims to shorten breast reconstruction with tissue expanders from three months to one week—innovations like that.
Plastic surgeons have always been at the forefront of developing new technologies and devices, and that tradition continues strongly today.
Jacobsen: How long until gene-editing tools or exosome delivery systems become mainstream plastic surgery protocols?
Korman: Well, regarding exosomes and the mainstream — the FDA has not yet approved exosomes. Therefore, you cannot use on-labels widely yet. Do you know the difference between on-label and off-label products?
Jacobsen: When it has gone through its complete phase trial process with the FDA, or…?
Korman: No, not exactly. When the FDA has approved something — let us say a pill for asthma — and the FDA has approved it specifically for asthma, that is called on-label use. If someone realizes that the same pill is also effective for treating something else, even before the FDA officially approves it for that new use, doctors can legally prescribe it for the other condition — but that is called off-label use. So, it has been approved, but for a different primary purpose. Exosomes have not yet been approved for anything in terms of injections, and that is what everybody is waiting for. The FDA wants to be cautious, and understandably so. Many companies are lining up, preparing for that moment. The day the FDA approves exosomes for injection or injectable treatments will be a significant moment for the field.
Gene editing tools, CRISPR, and so on are exciting areas. I see gene editing as more relevant in cases like children born with congenital anomalies, where genes can correct defects before or shortly after birth. That is exciting, but it is not happening today or tomorrow in routine practice. Gene editing is still far from being standard in our field. Exosome therapies are much closer to clinical use.
Jacobsen: What are the responsibilities of plastic surgeons in educating patients about emerging regenerative technologies?
Korman: It is essential to be good doctors first and foremost. That is the best guiding principle. Hyping treatments that are not yet proven or not appropriate. At the same time, doctors need to be well-versed in what is available and emerging to offer patients the best advice and options. It might sound old-fashioned to say that surgeons must strive to be good doctors, but it is true. With exosomes, for example, many companies are making big claims. While the technology is real and promising, we must be cautious. Until the FDA approves exosomes for specific treatments, there are limits to what can responsibly be offered to patients. Doctors must stay educated and act responsibly with new technologies.
Jacobsen: More young patients are seeking facial procedures. What are the ethical lines in these procedures? We touched on that earlier when discussing the vanity versus necessity assessment.
Korman: Yes, yes. Well, the point is that it is a question of whether people want to look the same but refreshed and better or whether they want to look dramatically different. When people want to have their noses fixed, they may want to look different because they do not like what they see now. There have been many stories, movies, and articles about people who want to look dramatically different. Again, it is essential to be smart and to educate patients. Plastic surgeons can operate on ears but not on what is between the ears.
Jacobsen: You founded the Clean Slate Program to remove gang-related tattoos. What lessons can be drawn from aesthetic transformation and psychological healing?
Korman: That was an exciting project, and I am proud of it because I started it over 30 years ago. It follows the idea of “give a man a fish, and he eats for a day; teach a man to fish, and he eats for a lifetime.” The program is still active today, even though many participating doctors do not even know how it started — and that is okay.
At the time, and still today, many people could not get jobs because of tattoos, especially gang-related tattoos. That is how the program began. People make mistakes at any age, but many had extremely challenging childhoods. The program has been beneficial.
When I launched it, I insisted that if it was going to succeed, people needed to know about it. It was originally coordinated through the Mayor’s Office in San Jose. I believed you could not just do it quietly; it had to be prominent and well-known to reach the people who most needed it. Now, if you look up tattoo removal programs or “Clean Slate” online, you will find programs connected to the University of San Diego and elsewhere. It is interesting — because although some claim it started there, it did not. Still, that does not matter. I am very proud of it, even though it has long outgrown me.
The ethical takeaway is that it is about helping people — providing real, effacacious assistance that can change lives.
Jacobsen: How far has it spread outside of the mislabeling of where it originated? How many programs have developed from it?
Korman: All over the country — a lot. A lot. At the time, it was early days for lasers that were effective at removing tattoos without burning the skin. That is how it started: figuring out how to do it safely. Lasers are expensive, so part of the challenge was finding ways to get lasers donated by companies and similar initiatives. As technology improved, more and more people and programs started doing this kind of work.
Jacobsen: So, how does that work, in short, in terms of tattoo removal?
Korman: In a tattoo, ink is placed below the skin. The body is always trying to get rid of it — it recognizes the ink as a foreign material, which is why some tattoos fade over time and some look better. Professional tattoo artists are truly skilled, and that quality affects how tattoos appear over time.
Laser removal works by breaking up ink particles. Blast the ink into smaller fragments, and the body’s lymphatic system clears the debris over time. That is how the body gets rid of it.
We used to joke that if you performed a lymph node biopsy on someone who had multiple tattoo removals, you might find remnants like “Susie” or “Jimmy” — names with lines through them — embedded in the lymph nodes. But that is, in technical terms, how tattoos are removed.
Jacobsen: How should other medical professionals approach launching community-based aesthetic programs, particularly when considering long-term social impact?
Korman: First, the basic principle is “do no harm.” You need to make sure that what you are doing is truly beneficial to the people you want to help.
Then, it is critical to ensure you have all the necessary pieces in place: community support, a reliable funding source, and medical infrastructure to back the program. You do not want to launch a program that runs out of resources halfway through. Having political support from local leaders and organizations is also helpful, providing additional legitimacy and access to resources.
There are already many excellent programs — for example, initiatives supporting victims of domestic violence or children from underserved communities. Fortunately, health insurance coverage for children in the United States is relatively widespread, but programs like this can still make an enormous difference.
Jacobsen: What are common misconceptions prospective patients have when they come to you that come up during consultation?
Korman: A common misconception is that I want to operate on them. I want to do the right thing for each individual, but I do not want to operate on someone if it is inappropriate. Another misconception is that patients often think they already know the right solution. Many come in having done a lot of research online—what I sometimes call “Google University,” “InternetU,” or, today, even “ChatGPT” research.
Jacobsen: Wikipedia Polytechnic.
Korman: Yes. So, that is part of it — there are misconceptions. Sometimes, patients think that healing and recovery will take an extremely long time, but that is not necessarily the case. As a profession, we have worked hard to reduce recovery times significantly. That is one misconception.
Another common misconception is about how long the results of a procedure will last. Perhaps the biggest issue patients have is fear — fear of surgery, especially when it is elective and not medically necessary. It is a significant emotional hurdle.
I grew up in a small town where no one had plastic surgery at the time. But the point is, if something bothers you for many hours or days, it is worth exploring solutions—whether it is surgery, a new car, or something else meaningful to you.
I do this work because so many patients tell me afterward that it has improved their lives, and that is worth a lot.
Jacobsen: Final question: what are your favorite quotes? They can relate to fitness, music, sculpting, or plastic surgery.
Korman: These are my favurite quotes. I mentioned earlier the one about the ears — “Plastic surgeons can operate on ears, but not on what is between the ears.”
Another quote I like is that “you do not know what you do not know,” and then there are things “you do not even know you do not know.” That concept appeared in The Big Short, although it was misattributed to Mark Twain — it was not actually from him.
I have so many favorite quotes:
Plastic surgeons can operate on ears, not what’s between the ears.
You can be so open minded that your brains fall out.
You should guzzle water and sip wine, not the other way around.
Jacobsen: Thank you for your expertise and your time, Josh. It was nice to meet you.
Korman: Nice to meet you, too. Thanks a lot. Bye.
Links:
Website: https://www.kormanmd.com/about/dr-korman/
Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/kormanplasticsurgery/
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/09
Christopher Louis is a Los Angeles–based international dating and relationship coach and the founder of Dating Intelligence. As host of the Dating Intelligence Podcast, Louis draws on intuition and lived experience to guide clients toward authentic selves and meaningful romantic connections. Louis discusses the challenges men in their forties and fifties face in modern dating. He highlights the allure and pitfalls of dating younger women, the undervaluing of women of the same age, and the need to shift male mindsets toward emotional maturity, shared values, and compatibility. Through personal anecdotes and coaching insights, Louis emphasizes that long-term fulfillment comes not from superficial attractions but from reciprocal, emotionally intelligent partnerships. His new platform, Mentality, supports men who are ready to find meaningful relationships with confident, successful women who are closer to their life stage.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Once again, we are here with the charismatic and socially astute Christopher Louis. Today, we’re focusing on men in their forties and fifties. This demographic can present unique challenges in the dating world. The reasons are not always obvious, and even the apparent ones benefit from a more nuanced perspective, which you consistently bring to the conversation. You’ve been watching a new television show featuring Mad Men actor Jon Hamm recently. What’s the show called, what’s his role, and what’s the early narrative?
Christopher Louis: The series is called The Morning Show, and it’s available on Apple TV+. Jon Hamm joined the cast in the third season as Paul Marks, a wealthy tech billionaire who becomes involved with the network’s leadership and media operations. His character is ambitious, calculated, and represents a new wave of Silicon Valley-style influence entering traditional media spaces.
While the show is not directly about Wall Street or a man’s struggles with family life, it does explore themes of power, generational transition, and ethical compromise—all issues that resonate with men navigating midlife and career shifts.
That said, I’ve also been thinking about how many fictional shows portray men in their forties or fifties who seem to “have it all”—success, relationships, status—but are still deeply unfulfilled. A typical character arc often starts with the man living in a modest situation, rising through his career, building a family, and yet constantly feeling the financial and emotional pressure of keeping it all together. Despite professional success, a sense of personal meaning often lags.
In one dramatized scenario I saw recently—not from The Morning Show, but in a similar genre—a man in his late forties meets a woman in her late twenties at a bar. She initiates the conversation, flirts, and he’s flattered but cautious. He responds with, “You’re way too young for me,” and then walks her through all the reasons why their age difference would lead to tension over time.
He imagines the first few months going well—they connect, have fun, and feel the spark. But then he projects ten years ahead: he’s in his late fifties, she’s in her late thirties, and their life stages have diverged. She remains energetic, socially active, and eager to spend time with friends. He wants peace, comfort, and wine nights at home. He predicts that she will eventually want someone closer to her age—someone more vibrant, physically compatible, and ready to live that faster-paced lifestyle—while he retreats into slower rhythms.
This touches on a larger point: many men in their forties and fifties, especially those who have been divorced or in long-term relationships, often seek out younger partners. The fantasy is one of companionship, vitality, beauty, and new beginnings. However, reality usually leads to mismatched expectations, varying energy levels, and differing emotional needs. These generational disconnects typically emerge over time, complicating what initially felt like an escape or a second chance.
Usually, it’s women in their late twenties to mid-thirties. The reason why is that, after divorce, many men tend to shift toward wanting someone—what’s the term?—hotter, younger, sexier. They want someone who appears to have a more promising life ahead of them.
They often look for someone who doesn’t share many commonalities with them, but they don’t mind. They’re thinking: “I have money, I’m successful, and I can take her on trips, show her the world.” That’s the mentality. That’s what the guy I mentioned earlier was saying in the show.
So, fast forward—I just started a company called Mentality. It’s a platform for men in their forties and fifties who want to date women of a similar age. I prefer not to use the phrase “age-appropriate” because it feels dismissive. What I like to say is: you want to find the right fit for right now.
That means men who are open to dating women within about a ten-year age range—either a bit younger or older—but more importantly, women who align with where they are in life. It’s not about age as a number; it’s about stage of life, mindset, and values.
There are so many women out there today—strong, independent, fit, successful—let’s call them alpha women. Women who are leading businesses, who don’t need a man for anything. And yet, these same women are finding it hard to meet men in their forties and fifties who share their mindset. Why? Because so many men in that age group are chasing the younger model.
What I’m trying to do is help men see that they can find incredible women in their age group—if they open themselves up to that possibility. Women in their forties and fifties who are confident, accomplished, and share the same values are what they’re looking for.
Instead of going younger, which often leads to mismatches in priorities—like wanting kids or still being in a party phase—men can choose partners who are on the same page. Maybe they’re both done having kids. Perhaps they’re both ready to travel, relax, and build something meaningful together. That alignment is powerful. However, the challenge lies in changing their mindset.
That’s the hard part—reprogramming that mental narrative. Encouraging men to recognize that successful, emotionally mature, and vibrant women do exist in their age group. These women share their values, their ambitions, and their rhythms. But many men don’t see it because they’ve been conditioned to believe that these women are “too old” or “out of the game.” And that couldn’t be further from the truth.
Jacobsen: So it’s not about what’s missing in these women—it’s about what’s missing in the way men are seeing them.
Louis: Absolutely. That’s the core message I’m trying to push. These women are right there. They’re not lacking anything. Men have been taught to value youth over alignment, and that’s what I’m working to shift.
So, I want to let these guys know—they’re entirely wrong. Once again, there are many incredible women across the country and the world who share this mindset. But what I keep seeing is this belief among men that, once they’ve dated someone their age, they think, “I don’t want that again.” And why? Because they say, “She knows too much.” They feel these women will tell them things they don’t want to hear—things that challenge them or hold them accountable. And that intimidates them.
Jacobsen: I did look it up. According to a 2023 report by the Pew Research Center, which analyzed U.S. Census Bureau data, there’s now a record share of Americans aged 40 and older who have never been married. One in four 40-year-olds today—up from one in five in 2010. So the other category, not included in your comments so far, is men who aren’t divorced but have never married. Do they have the same mindset?
Louis: Men in their forties and fifties who have never been married often exhibit a distinct mindset. Honestly? Many of them exhibit a Peter Pan syndrome. They never really want to grow up. They could date someone their age, sure, but they’re rarely satisfied.
I know several men in this category. Good friends of mine. They’ve told me straight up, “Chris, we love you—but we just want to date younger women.” And the reason? They don’t feel secure enough—emotionally, physically, or mentally—to date a mature woman who is confident and has her perspective.
They worry they won’t measure up. They feel like mature women won’t find them desirable, or will challenge them in ways they aren’t ready for. So, they default to dating younger women because it feels easier. They believe they have more to offer a younger partner than they would to a peer, whether that’s financial security, experience, or a more desirable lifestyle.
Jacobsen: What are women saying to you—especially those from other industries or social circles—that reflect these patterns you’re describing?
Louis: Many women in their forties and fifties are saying the same thing. This is verifiable—you could look it up right now. There’s a significant portion of single women in that age range who are struggling to find a partner. And the number one reason they give? Most men their age are only looking to date younger women.
So, these women already feel left out and dismissed. They’re vibrant, successful, emotionally intelligent, and often in the best shape of their lives. But they’re not even being considered because of this widespread male mindset that says, “Older equals less desirable.” That’s not just unfair—it’s untrue.
Louis: And so now, a lot of these women are adjusting their dating preferences. For example, a 40-year-old woman might start looking at men in their late fifties or even sixties—older than she ideally wants—because the pool of age-aligned men has shrunk. On the other hand, women in their fifties often trend younger. They feel they have a lot to offer a man in his forties or even thirties.
And for some younger guys, there’s this Mrs. Robinson vibe—a sense of novelty or excitement around dating an older woman. They think, “I’m dating a cougar, this is exciting.” It can also become a kind of fantasy dynamic, where the older woman takes care of him, not because she’s trying to, but because she naturally brings a maternal presence. It’s not always healthy, but it’s real.
Jacobsen: That’s a whole different psychological layer—and maybe even a whole other interview series. However, you’ve identified the core of the issue as changing the mindset of older men. In many ways, it sounds like the old saying: teaching an old dog new tricks. So, how do you do it?
Louis: The best way for me to start is by helping the guy clarify what he’s looking for. When I ask that question, they’ll say something like, “I want someone who’s emotionally stable, shares my values, is active, supportive, and communicative.” And then I ask, “Do you think you could find that in a woman your age?”
Most of the time, they say yes. But when they go on a date with someone their age, they come back and say, “I just don’t think we had enough in common.” And the underlying issue? The truth is that most men prioritize physical appearance above all else. They ask: Is she attractive? Is she in shape? Is she aging well? These are the top three filters before they even get to shared values or emotional compatibility.
I recently had a client who went on five dates with a woman of the same age as him. She matched him in values, lifestyle, and long-term goals. Initially, he said she was fit, attractive, all of it. But a few dates in, he started nitpicking: “She’s a little saggy here,” “a little baggy there,” “some wrinkles.”
So I reminded him: “But you said she shares your values, you enjoy her company, and you have chemistry.” And he said, “Yeah, but…” And then the fundamental shift came. He told me she had started to boss him around a little, and that turned him off.
On their last date, which started great—they were laughing, connecting, everything was going well. Then she said something like, “You should start wearing nicer shirts,” or “You’d look better if you shaved that beard.” Something simple, but it triggered him. For him, it crossed a line—he felt criticized, managed.
This is where it breaks down for many men. They want a partner, not a parent. But they often misread confidence or directness in a woman their age as being “bossy,” when it’s just someone who knows herself. The next time they went out, she said to him, “I want to go to a place like this, not that last place you took me. That place felt low-rent.” And that hurt his feelings.
To him, that earlier place was special. However, she had a mindset that it wasn’t good enough, and she made it clear that she wanted something more upscale. He felt like she was discounting his efforts—not validating what he was trying to do—and that she was becoming pushy, even bossy, steering the dynamic into territory he wasn’t comfortable with.
That put him off. So I told him, “Maybe you need to tell her—calmly and clearly—that you didn’t appreciate the way she said that.”
She’s probably, once again, what we’d call an alpha woman. Someone who’s used to being in control—maybe a bit of a ‘boss bitch,’ to use the colloquial term. He knew that about her going in, but it finally showed up in a moment where she let him lead. And when she disapproved of his choice, she made it known in a way that felt dismissive.
I felt that was unfair. But to his credit, he did call her out—gently. I advised him to say something like, “That wasn’t what I was expecting, and I didn’t appreciate the way you said that.”
And to her credit, she responded well. She said, “Oh my God, I am so sorry—I didn’t mean to hurt your feelings. I’m just so used to leading, taking charge, and being in control.”
That right there—this pattern—is one of the biggest turn-offs for men in this age group.
Jacobsen: Do you think, in contemporary society, people are reevaluating what they want from relationships, and that this is part of a broader cultural experiment? We’re seeing more empowered, professional, self-sufficient women now than we ever have, globally. Could that be contributing to these kinds of jarring relationship dynamics?
Louis: That’s correct. In today’s world, many women are used to leading, especially in their professional lives. However, when it comes to dating, what I hear from many of them is, “I just want a man who takes the lead.” And they don’t mean that in a toxic or hyper-masculine way.
They’ll say, “I’m such an alpha in my business world. I want to be able to step back and have a man lead for once.”However, when a man tries to lead, some of them struggle to relinquish that leadership mindset. They end up unintentionally undermining his role.
And I tell them, “Look, that’s going to happen—it’s natural. However, you must work together to strike a balance. If you want a man to lead, and he steps up to do it, you have to let that happen without jumping in to correct or control everything.”
It’s about trust. It’s about resetting the dynamic so that both people feel respected, and both can relax into their respective energies.
Louis: But even then, some people still complain—”This isn’t what I expected,” or “This isn’t how I would’ve done it,” and so on. In those moments, you have to have the confidence to say, “Look, I hear you, but we need to find a balance. I don’t appreciate you discounting what I’m doing just because you think you have a better way.”
If you want me to take the lead, let me take the lead. That requires trust. You can’t say you want someone to lead and then undercut them every time they try to do so. It’s about mutual respect.
It’s the same with men. Many women say, “This guy, it’s his way or the highway.” And I tell them: Then you have to speak up early. Let him know—”I don’t appreciate that. I need to have boundaries. You need to respect what’s good for me and us. It cannot be about you constantly overstepping those lines.”
It’s like you have to teach each other how to find that balance. But most people are afraid. They’re so scared to speak up. They’re so scared to assert themselves.
And what happens? They end up in a relationship where the other person always takes the lead, and they lose their sense of self. Man or woman, it doesn’t matter. If you don’t speak up from the beginning, you lose your footing. You lose your balance. And the relationship never feels equal.
Jacobsen: Once men start making that mindset switch—even just a little—how does that play out in their dating life?
Louis: You’re right on point, Scott. Seriously. That’s the question. And it’s funny, because once men even slightly shift their mindset, the dating experience starts to change in significant ways.
A friend of mine once said something to me that stuck. I’ve researched this extensively. I’ve been speaking with men now in their sixties, many of whom are currently dating women about ten years younger. But here’s the thing: when I first met these guys—right after their divorces—they went much younger. Like, significantly younger.
So I started asking them, “What changed?” I spoke with several of these individuals, who are now in more age-aligned relationships, and one of them put it perfectly. He said, “Chris, let me tell you the truth.”
He goes, “When I got divorced, all I wanted was to have fun. I wanted a sexy girl. I wanted much sex. I wanted to go out, travel, do whatever I wanted.” And I said, “That’s fair.”
He replied, “Yeah—but then I realized I had nothing in common with these younger women. Once I figured that out, I felt ready to date someone closer to my age again.”
And that shift was key. He eventually met a woman who was about ten years younger—within that healthy range—but more importantly, someone with whom he had a high level of compatibility. He ended up marrying her.
He said, “Now I feel like I’ve found harmony. I was ready to reset, to get back out there—but I also knew what I wanted and what I didn’t want.” And this new relationship reflects that balance.
The woman he married is successful. She has her career and financial stability. She doesn’t need him, but they thrive together because they push each other to be better. It’s an equal, reciprocal relationship.
In contrast, when he was dating those much younger women, he felt compelled to do everything to impress them. He was taking them on trips, paying for everything, essentially taking care of them. And eventually, he got sick of it. He told me, “I don’t like this. I’m tired of carrying the whole thing.”
And I said, “Well, yeah—that’s what happens when you’re dating women who are still trying to establish themselves in life or business. They’re not there yet.”
Now, in his marriage, his wife doesn’t need him for anything, but she wants him. And that’s the difference. They challenge each other, yet they support one another. It’s a good set—an intense match.
So, what I try to teach men in their forties and fifties is this: if you trust me and are genuinely looking for someone authentic—someone who shares your values and is leading a parallel life—you can find that. And the good news is, the women I work with through my matchmaking company aren’t looking for someone to take care of them. They’re looking for a partner.
And the men I’ve matched with these women so far? They’re blown away. They’re like, “Wow.” She’s a beautiful woman—not only on the outside, but also on the inside. And being younger or older isn’t the point. It’s about finding the best fit for me at this time. That’s what I’m trying to do. If more men could just let go of the mindset that says, “I’m in my fifties, so I want a hot girl,” we’d get somewhere.
I ask them, “What do you mean by that?” They usually say, “Someone I can go out with, have much sex with.” And I respond, “Okay, but then what? After that? What are you looking for next?”
Most of them say, “I don’t know. I haven’t thought about that.”
So I press them: “What values do you want in a woman—if you say you’re ready to settle down?” Because the kind of woman they’re describing is not someone they’re going to build a life with. That’s a fleeting experience. Six months, a year—then it’s over. Then they’re asking themselves, “Why did I even date someone like that?”
So why not shift your mindset? Say instead: “I want a woman with high emotional intelligence. I’m looking for someone who shares my values. Someone who will walk with me through life, not control me, but partner with me. Someone who’son the same journey.”
If I can get them to understand that, then I know they’re ready. That’s when I know they’re prepared for the next level. That’s precisely what I’m trying to help them achieve through my company.
Jacobsen: What about the category of men who get divorced, don’t want a relationship, and still reach out to you? Is your advice to say, “Well, that’s what you want—go hire an escort”?
Louis: The good news is, most of the time, the men who come to me aren’t in that category. The guys I work with are ready to settle down. They’ve already been out there, done the whole song and dance with younger women, lived that experience, and now they’re looking for something real. Ask any dating coach: when a man in his forties or fifties reaches out and says, “I need help,” that usually means he’s ready.
Jacobsen: And what about the flip side? The ones who aren’t ready?
Louis: I’ve seen that too. I’ll reach out to a guy about joining the company, and he’ll say, “Chris, I think what you’re doing is great. I love your mission—but I’m just not ready yet.” And I always respond, “You know what? I appreciate your honesty.”
When you’re ready to join—or when you’re prepared to change your mindset—come to me. We’ll be here to help with whatever you need. Most guys, more than women, need to go on their journey. A woman often already has a clear mindset about what she’s looking for—even if the path she takes is not always the right one.
Jacobsen: What do you mean by that?
Louis: I mean, a woman usually says: “I want to settle down, I want to get married, and I want to have kids.” That’s typically the checklist. But a man? He’ll say, “I just want someone who’s physically and sexually.” So I ask, “Okay, and after you have that, then what?” They’ll respond, “I haven’t thought that far ahead.”
At least women, even if they go through 50 guys, still place their hopes, dreams, and values in finding the right one. They believe in the possibility of alignment. They think, “This guy could be it.” Whereas many men place their hopes and dreams into someone who excites them sexually—often someone younger—because she’s keeping them physically stimulated and making them feel alive again.
It’s almost like when a woman has a baby and enters that euphoric “new mother” phase—what do they call it, baby bliss? That rush of emotion that makes everything feel perfect?
Well, when a guy is sexually active with a younger woman, he gets a version of that same emotional high. He puts on those goggles and thinks, “Everything is amazing.” But when that phase wears off, what’s underneath it? What’s left?
So I always say: at least women start with their values. They may get disappointed, but they’re on a consistent emotional path, trying to find someone compatible. Many men have to go through the whole circle—realizing that the younger, purely physical relationship was a mistake—before they say, “Okay, I’m ready to find a real partner.”
Jacobsen: Do you think part of that is because women, as they get older, typically have richer social networks? Is it that they’re communicating more with their friends, cross-referencing and learning from each other’s experiences?
Louis: Not always. However, women do tend to discuss relationships more with their friends. They receive input, undergo emotional processing, and engage in group reflection. Men don’t do that as much.
But look—this starts young. Let’s be honest. You can ask an 18-year-old girl what she wants in a relationship, and she’ll often say something like, “I want a man who’s successful, who’s confident, who can be the man of the house. I want to get married. I want to have kids.”
Meanwhile, an 18-year-old guy? He’ll say, “I want someone hot. I want to have fun. I want to work on my career.”
Jacobsen: So the developmental tracks are already split early on.
Louis: That divergence stays with us. And unless men do the work to evolve their expectations—to move beyond the superficial—they’ll never build the kind of relationship they say they want once they hit their forties or fifties.
At that age, guys are thinking, “I want a successful career, I want a fun girl, I want lots of sex, and I want to date as many women as I can.” That’s not a typical mindset for a woman at that age.
As time passes, however, women’s mindsets evolve differently. A woman in her thirties—especially if she’s still single—starts thinking, “My biological clock is ticking. I haven’t met the right guy. What am I going to do? If I’m not married by 35, what happens next?” Suddenly, there’s a kind of internal alarm going off: “I don’t want to be the woman who’s single with three cats, living alone.”
So, even though women often talk to their friends and reflect together, the pressure they feel can lead them away from what they truly want. They lose sight of their core values because now it’s about urgency. It becomes, “Let me just find someone who fits well enough right now.” However, even if they marry that person, he may not be the right match for them.
And later, as they get older, they realize, “I made a mistake.” But by then, they feel it’s too late. Perhaps their career stalled, or they lost a part of themselves.
Jacobsen: So they stay in a bad relationship simply because of inertia.
Louis: Inertia. It’s emotional survival mode.
Jacobsen: Let me briefly address the issue of younger women dating older men. Say a woman in her mid-twenties is dating a guy in his fifties—what’s going on there? What’s the thought process?
Louis: Okay, so not all of them, but many younger women who date significantly older men are, in some cases, looking for what I’d call a “quick fix.” I hate to use this term, but it’s a sugar daddy dynamic. Someone who can support them while they figure out their career or next steps in life.
There’s a real phrase floating around now among their peers: “Why not find a guy who can take care of you while you figure out what you want?” That’s the actual advice some of them are hearing from friends. And honestly, most guys are okay with it, because both parties are getting their needs met. Let’s just be honest.
A 50-year-old man dating a 26- or 30-year-old woman thinks, “I’m dating this gorgeous younger woman.” Unless he’sGeorge Clooney or Brad Pitt, he’s just thrilled that she’s even in the picture. Meanwhile, the younger woman might be happy to have someone taking care of the financial side of things. And here’s what ties it back to what we said earlier—on dating apps, for example. When these younger women go on a date with an older man, they’re not shy. Many of them will outright ask, “Can you buy me something?” Direct expectations.
It’s become normalized. They’re confident about what they want. The social taboo of asking for something upfront? It’s fading fast in this dating culture. What happens is, early on in the dating process, some women will say things like, “Hey, I’m a little behind financially right now,” or “I probably need a little help—do you think you could help me out?” They’re not afraid to ask for that kind of support early, far earlier than they would if they were dating someone in a traditional way over time.
Jacobsen: So people are generally becoming more practical—maybe not in terms of a complete, fulfilling life picture—but in terms of knowing what they want and going after it. And that spans across age, sex, and gender?
Louis: Correct. People are becoming more direct, more pragmatic. But at the same time, we can’t forget that there are still plenty of traditional people out there—men and women—who want a conventional marriage. They want to fall in love and have that simple, stable life.
That’s why I did a podcast episode on this. I called it “Dating Differences and Age Gaps.” I featured a couple with a 23-year age gap—he’s in his sixties, she’s in her late thirties. They’ve been together for over ten years. And honestly? They’re a perfect fit.
She’s an old soul. He’s a young spirit. They complement each other beautifully. So yes—some people buck the trend. I’mnot saying it’s impossible. It can happen. But it’s rare. It’s far and few between.
Jacobsen: What should we end on?
Louis: It’s a broad and interesting topic—too vast to cover in one conversation. But I’ll end on this:
Let’s go back to the beginning of time. The age gap between men and women in relationships has long been a prevalent phenomenon. Historically, it was normal. A 30-year-old man would marry a 14-year-old girl—not because it was emotionally mature or ethically sound, but because she was young and fertile. That’s what society, especially royalty and traditional systems, valued—fertility and lineage.
It goes back to kings marrying girls 20 years younger, sometimes even teenagers. As long as the woman could bear children, that was the determining factor. The younger, the better—because the more likely she was to produce healthy heirs.
That was the logic of the time. Thankfully, society has changed, but remnants of that mindset still linger in how men, even today, subconsciously view youth and fertility.
But the context now is different. For example, a man who already has children may not be looking to start over and have more kids. The genetics are the same, but the mindset isn’t. A man who has already had children with his former partner usually doesn’t want to do it again. He’s done with that chapter. Now, he’s often looking for a partner, not someone to start a new family with.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Chris.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Ritual Killing In Africa
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/27
How can Nigeria’s legal system be strengthened to effectively prosecute witchcraft-related abuses?
Dr. Leo Igwe is a Nigerian human rights advocate, scholar, and founder of the Advocacy for Alleged Witches (AfAW). With decades of activism, Igwe has dedicated his career to defending those falsely accused of witchcraft, combating superstition, and advancing secular human rights. He has partnered with international and national organizations to confront harmful practices rooted in fear and cultural beliefs, particularly targeting women, children, and people with disabilities. A vocal critic of religious extremism and media sensationalism, Igwe promotes critical thinking, education, and legal reform. His work stands at the intersection of grassroots advocacy, public enlightenment, and global humanism.
In this interview with Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Igwe intensified campaigns across Nigeria in 2025 to defend victims of witchcraft accusations. Through unprecedented collaborations with organizations such as the International Federation of Women Lawyers, the National Human Rights Commission, and disability rights groups, AfAW has expanded its outreach to over 15 states. Initiatives include memorial events, legal interventions, media engagement, and direct support for victims. Despite cultural and religious resistance, Igwe emphasizes that witchcraft is a myth, urging communities to shift from fear-driven persecution to rights-based advocacy. His work highlights growing momentum, though challenges remain entrenched.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with the prolific activist, Dr. Leo Igwe of Nigeria, founder of the Advocacy for Alleged Witches (AfAW). Our primary focus is advocacy for people accused of witchcraft. A lot has happened this year, and we can dive into some specific events because I have notes. In your view, what have been the most significant achievements so far?
Dr. Leo Igwe: One of the most significant developments this year is that we have organized more meetings and awareness programs than in any previous year since 2020. Even as I speak with you, I am in Port Harcourt, in Rivers State, where we are organizing an awareness event—an event to remember victims of witch hunts and ritual attacks. It is the first of its kind in the country and in the history of our campaign: victims are being remembered rather than demonized.
These victims are not being pre-judged as guilty or condemned. There has also been considerable interest from groups wanting to partner with us. We have seen unprecedented requests and welcoming gestures from different organizations and civil society groups. For instance, the International Federation of Women Lawyers (FIDA)—several state chapters—has reached out to co-organize events. Historically, their focus has been on women and children, and accusations of witchcraft were not central; that is changing as AfAW’s work gains traction.
We have also engaged with the National Human Rights Commission of Nigeria (NHRC). Nigeria has 36 states and the Federal Capital Territory (Abuja), and some NHRC state offices are reaching out to co-organize events like the one we are holding on Saturday. They are ready to collaborate to highlight these abuses.
The Down Syndrome Foundation Nigeria has also contacted us to partner. They work on disability issues. Unfortunately, people with disabilities are often stigmatized or labelled as “possessed,” which leads to ostracism and harmful so-called “spiritual” interventions.
A recent example that drew national attention was a reported case in Calabar in February 2025, where a pastor allegedly killed his daughter, a child with Down syndrome, claiming she could transform into a snake. Cases like this show how superstition and stigma can turn deadly, and we are working with disability advocates to confront these beliefs and protect vulnerable families.
In terms of people who are accused, demonized, or stigmatized—whether because of disability or because of problems within the community—this has been a significant focus this year. We have now organized or collaborated in organizing events in over 15 states across Nigeria. By next week, we are planning an event in Niger State, in the north of the country. That will be the first event we have organized there, and we hope to use the opportunity to strengthen our partnerships with local groups and build a more robust mechanism for defending the accused.
That said, these collaborations do not come without challenges. For instance, in Niger State, we are partnering with women’s rights and children’s rights groups. They told us they would prefer not to have accused persons present, because their presence might trigger confrontation with accusers or with those who suspect them of being witches. This has been difficult, but we see it as a step toward educating people that everyone should stand as an advocate for the accused.
Many people still hold on to those beliefs and fears, even while showing some sympathy for the accused. However, sympathy is not enough. The accused are innocent. The law is on their side. So we want to find ways to reduce fear and anxiety and encourage communities to join us in openly and categorically supporting those accused of witchcraft.
Our meetings are not always characterized by unanimous support for advocacy on behalf of alleged witches. Sometimes, participants insist that witchcraft oppression is real. For example, at a recent meeting in Owerri, a pastor argued that witchcraft affliction must be addressed.
This is the contradiction we face. People say they oppose torture, killing, and persecution, but at the same time, they continue to insist witches exist. For us at AfAW, this is contradictory. If anyone claims people really are witches, then the burden is on them to prove it—to vindicate or exonerate those accused, rather than subject them to persecution.
Religion and culture also reinforce these challenges. Christianity, Islam, and Nollywood movies all perpetuate the belief that witchcraft and demonic possession are real. These institutions and cultural products continue to fuel the mindset that sustains witchcraft accusations.
In the churches and in the mosques, these harmful ideas are still being promoted. We are working to weaken the grip of these narratives on people’s minds and to chip away at what I call “witchcraft evangelism.” It does enormous damage and undermines our work. We also want people to recognize that Nollywood films and African movies are fiction, not fact.
The filmmakers reflect the myths and beliefs of society, but they are still telling stories, not recording reality. We want to help reorient society so that these movies are understood as cultural fiction. These are some of our successes, but also some of our challenges. Still, we see steady progress as more people begin to realize that something does not add up when it comes to witchcraft accusations. More groups are welcoming us and reaching out to cooperate, so that together we can address and dispel this phenomenon.
Jacobsen: Now, about specifics, in Owerri, Imo State, on September 2–3, we observed the International Day Against Witch Hunts. That was an event reaffirming material and psychosocial support. What was the big takeaway from that event this year?
Igwe: A lot. In Owerri, for the first time, we marched through the streets of the city, sharing flyers and speaking with people about the problem. We also visited the palace of the traditional ruler, Eze Clinton, who received us warmly and pledged his support to our campaign. That was an important milestone.
Another highlight was a presentation by our legal counsel, Mr. Okorie, on witchcraft accusations and the law. In Nigeria, accusing someone of witchcraft is a criminal offence. It is a form of criminal defamation, but most Nigerians are unaware of this—or if they are, they do not take it seriously, because their beliefs often outweigh what is written in the law. Mr. Okorie made it clear that even calling someone a witch can lead to prosecution. If this is done in a church or public gathering, the entire act is criminal.
He gave the example of a crusade organized in Imo State shortly after our event. The theme was “That Witch Must Die.” We reported it to the police, who summoned the pastor, but unfortunately did not prosecute him. Mr. Okorie explained to our participants that such gatherings are legally actionable, and anyone who participates in them could also be held liable. His legal perspective shocked many people, as they were unaware that the law was so clear on this matter.
We also had some victims from different communities share their experiences, which reinforced the urgency of our campaign.
We also heard from victims who recounted their stories and experiences. One woman in particular, Mrs. Regina, told us that after some people in her family died, she was forced to undergo a ritual. They bathed the corpse, washed the body, and gave her the water to drink as an “exoneration” ritual. She is one of the people we are supporting now, trying to provide her with all the necessary help to get back on her feet.
Another experience I had was visiting a street named after a victim of ritual killing, Ikechukwu Okoroho, who was murdered about 30 years ago. A street was named in his memory. I went to that street and to the scene where he was killed, according to reports. These are some of the key takeaways from the Owerri, Imo State event.
Jacobsen: There was also a case intervention in Ebonyi State on August 20, involving the banishment of Joseph Agwu from Unwuhu community. The case called on the state to prosecute the attackers, compensate the victim, and end the practice of banishment. Could you elaborate on that specific case?
Igwe: Yes, Joseph’s case is one of several in Ebonyi. He was accused of witchcraft and banished from his community. His property was destroyed, and he was forced to leave. We reached out to him, and he recounted his ordeal. We are appealing to the state authorities to step in and protect people like him.
Another successful intervention we made was in the case of Mr. Kingsley, who had also been accused. He was paraded through the streets, humiliated, and substances were poured over his body. When we got the information, we immediately contacted the police.
Thanks to that intervention, Kingsley is now back in his community. I met him recently, and he told me how happy and relieved he was. People now look at him with respect rather than the scorn he used to face. This was a real success story.
Of course, not all cases succeed. Sometimes incidents happen in rural communities where it is difficult for us to intervene. Accessing those areas can be dangerous—there are threats of beatings, mob attacks, or even killings. People in those communities often suspect that anyone investigating is there to help the police prosecute them. So yes, we have had some successes, but the challenges remain significant.
Jacobsen: There were also several roundtables. For example, in Ekiti State from August 19 to 21, there was a stakeholder roundtable aligned with the World Day Against Witch Hunts. There were also NHRC partnerships in Kano, Okoro, Ondo, and Yola, Adamawa. Across the year, there were several such meetings—on January 21, March 6, July 21, and August 19–21. What is the role of these roundtables, and what were the key takeaways from each?
Igwe: For the one we held in Yola early in the year, the big takeaway was that too often, when these cases are reported, nothing is done. They appear in the news and then disappear. Victims receive no help or support.
Since 2020, AfAW has been a game-changer. We step in on the side of the accused to support and empower them. In Yola, our message was clear: there is now an organization that stands for the accused. We introduced ourselves, explained what we do, and intervened in a specific case where a parent and his partner tortured a girl to death. The mother had been accused of witchcraft, and the children were said to have “inherited” it from her. The girl was tortured and died. We have been working hard to support the mother and her three surviving children, and to push for justice.
That was our first meeting in Yola, and like with many of these events, participants told us nobody else was doing what we are doing. We know why—few people have the conviction and understanding that we at AfAW bring. However, we made it clear there is now a place where the accused can seek support, and an organization keeping watch on these cases. That was our takeaway from Yola.
In Ondo, we also held an event and combined it with a radio program. A woman named Olaemi Ijogun attended after hearing us on the radio. She told us how she had been accused as a child and beaten. Her case was heartbreaking. She said that both she and her sister had been accused of being initiated into a coven when they were very young.
In Olaemi’s case, the accusations came from a relative who claimed to have seen her and her sister in a dream. The parents were told the girls were going to covens at night. As a result, they were not allowed to sleep. They were forced to kneel and raise their hands through the night because the parents believed that if they slept, they would travel spiritually to the coven. The girls were denied sleep for several nights.
The stigma followed Olaemi to school, where it negatively impacted her social life. She still breaks down when recounting the trauma, which she did at our event. She called on people to stop making accusations because they leave an indelible mark on the minds and psyches of children. Since then, she has been working with us to advocate against witchcraft accusations.
For instance, she joined us in Ekiti State during the World Day Against Witch Hunts event. There, we encountered a case where a 10-year-old girl accused her grandmother of initiating her into a coven and of spiritually murdering people. This accusation was made on the radio after a station invited the family to speak. As a result, the grandmother’s business collapsed, and she was ostracized; the community avoided her. We intervened to reassure her that she had no hand in such things.
The background is that the family’s youngest child, about two years old, had been sick since birth. The grandmother was blamed for the illness. When I interviewed the mother of the 10-year-old, she even told me that the grandmother had “taken away the intelligence” of the children, causing them to do poorly in school, and was also responsible for the family’s financial struggles. In other words, they blamed the grandmother for virtually every problem.
To address this, we provided the family with money to conduct a medical test on the child, so we can determine the real medical problem and treat it appropriately. This shows that we are not only holding events, but also taking practical steps to intervene. We extend solidarity by combining advocacy with direct support. We are helping the grandmother, the victim of the accusation, while also ensuring that the sick child receives medical treatment. These are some of the key outcomes from the Ekiti State event.
Jacobsen: How did the World Day Against Witch Hunts itself go?
Igwe: It was observed on August 10. That year it fell on a Sunday. In Nigeria, the best thing you can do on a Sunday is either go to church or stay at home. Suppose you organize anything else on that day. In that case, it is not likely to attract much participation—except for the few atheists and humanists in the country.
On August 10, the World Day Against Witch Hunts, I attended a church where the pastor regularly preaches against witch hunting. In our work, we identify religious leaders who speak out against these practices. It is not easy, of course, but we make every effort to find such churches. I was told about this one, contacted the pastor, and he confirmed that he preaches against witch hunting. So I went there to listen to his sermon. We also recorded it so that we could use it later to show other churches that this kind of preaching is possible and necessary.
It was a small church, with maybe 50 participants—tiny compared to the massive congregations you see in Nigeria, where tens or even hundreds of thousands gather. That probably explains why this church holds what you might call a minority position in the religious landscape. Still, that was where I spent the day.
Before and after August 10, we have continued organizing events in various states to remember victims of witch hunts and ritual attacks. It has gone well. People are coming out and saying, “At last, there is a space where we can feel vindicated, where we can share our stories in front of an audience that supports us, rather than seeing us as guilty.” That has been the spirit of these gatherings. In fact, we could not accommodate all the events in August, which is why some of them were pushed into September. For us at AfAW, the World Day Against Witch Hunts has not really ended. Our event this Saturday will conclude this year’s cycle of activities tied to that observance.
Jacobsen: Let us turn to the media side of things—ongoing public education, advocacy, op-eds, and briefings. Which news and opinion publications have been most effective in disseminating information about this campaign, the organization, and the harm caused by these superstitions?
Igwe: We have had coverage of our activities in several online and mainstream media outlets. Some journalists have even drawn our attention to cases in which we later intervened. Among Nigerian media organizations, I must mention Sahara Reporters, ThisDay, and The Eagle Online, which have been supportive.
We have also had coverage in other outlets, such as the Nigerian Tribune, Punch, and The Sun. Some of these online and print organizations have tried to highlight the work we are doing.
However, let me be clear—before now, media agencies have overwhelmingly been part of the problem. Their reporting on witchcraft accusations often reinforces the very narratives we are trying to dismantle. This is something I consistently point out to them during media interactions.
Many journalists still report accusations in sensational ways. They tell me the more spectacular, the better—for clicks and traffic. They call it “clickbait.” So, you see headlines like “Witch Crash-Lands” or “Bird-Woman Found in Village.” It is absolute nonsense, but it generates attention. Moreover, in their pursuit of attention, they misinform the public, mislead communities, and do real harm.
These reports are unprofessional and unethical. Journalism should be about reporting facts, and it should be balanced. Instead, in their quest for traffic, media houses end up endangering lives. For example, there was a radio program where a child accused her grandmother of initiating her into witchcraft. We intervened, and when we left, the station manager admitted to me, “Leo, it was this radio program that caused the problem.” He realized it had put an innocent woman in danger and destroyed her socially.
So yes, the media have been part of the problem. However, with the kind of engagement we are doing at the Advocacy for Alleged Witches (AfAW), some outlets are beginning to rethink. Some are realigning and realizing just how unprofessional and unethical their reporting has been. They are slowly starting to highlight our perspective. However, we still have a long way to go. Nigerian media organizations still thrive on sensationalism.
The media still thrives on sensational headlines—stories designed to attract attention and appeal to primitive superstitions that people find exciting. Slowly and steadily, some outlets are beginning to support what we are doing. However, there is still a tremendous amount of work ahead.
Another challenge is this: while media agencies are quick to publish sensational, false, and misleading reports about witchcraft—often for free—when we want to put forward our perspective, they demand large sums of money. Both online and broadcast outlets do this.
For example, if we want to appear on television, they charge between $500 and $1,000 just for the appearance. Additionally, you may need to travel, pay for flights, and cover accommodation costs. This makes enlightenment and advocacy extremely expensive, even though it is precisely what the country needs to counter these harmful narratives.
Jacobsen: Do you have any final points on that last topic?
Igwe: Yes, while a few media organizations are beginning to report witchcraft accusations more responsibly—rather than treating witchcraft itself as a fact or as a “certified” part of African culture—the progress is limited. Some outlets are starting to understand AfAW’s position and provide more balance. However, we are still far from the cultural shift we need. That kind of change will not happen through one report or even one event. It requires intensive public education and sustained enlightenment.
Unfortunately, in this area, many media stations have not been supportive. They are quick to publish sensational stories, like “an elderly woman turned into a bird” or “a witch crash-landed on her way to a meeting,” as was recently reported in Delta State. These kinds of stories get free publicity.
However, when AfAW attempts to purchase airtime to educate the public, we encounter significant costs. Media outlets charge us considerable amounts of money, making enlightenment campaigns very expensive. The imbalance is stark: free space for superstition, but costly barriers for rational education.
Meanwhile, churches and religious organizations that actively promote witchcraft narratives are given abundant airtime. They advertise events with themes like “That Witch Must Die” or “Exposing the Mysteries of Witchcraft.” These programs receive free promotion, which reinforces harmful beliefs.
By contrast, when we present our position—saying plainly that witchcraft is a myth—we are given little space, asked to pay heavily, and sometimes even put under pressure during media interviews. The pressure is on us to “prove” that something imaginary does not exist, instead of challenging those who claim it does.
The media landscape is still heavily skewed toward reinforcing witchcraft beliefs. We have not yet reached the paradigm shift where media establishments themselves start questioning and dismantling these narratives. That remains the challenge before us.
The cultural shift we need will only come when the media itself transforms. Until then, they will not welcome our programs in the way they should. Even when we pay for airtime, they often schedule us in the middle of the day, when people are busy at work. They refuse to give us prime slots in the evening or late at night—times when churches preach about witchcraft to audiences at home around the dinner table.
Without media on our side, we cannot fully succeed in making witch-hunting history in this region. That is why this work is so critical.
Jacobsen: There was a memorial action on August 29, connected to victims of ritual killings. You visited a hotel site linked to one of those incidents, to connect memory with today’s anti–witch hunt work. Could you explain what happened at that hotel, and how many victims are we talking about?
Igwe: I visited because of the incident that happened there in September 1996, almost 29 years ago. What happened then is still happening today. For example, earlier this year, in February 2025, in Lagos, a young man murdered his girlfriend, used an axe to break her head, and drained her blood into a calabash, supposedly for rituals. That case mirrors what happened at the Otokoto Hotel in 1996.
At Otokoto, the victim was an 11-year-old boy who sold peanuts on the streets. A hotel gardener lured him inside, gave him a drugged drink, and when the boy became unconscious, he cut off his head. The man was apprehended while attempting to deliver the head to someone who had ordered it for ritual purposes.
The news caused a massive uproar. There were riots in the city, and people began burning the houses of those suspected of being involved.
The people labelled as “ritualists,” in other words, those involved in ritual syndicates or racketeering, were the focus of that uproar. My visit to the Otokoto Hotel aimed to remind the people of Imo State that this practice has been ongoing for far too long and must come to an end.
The government seized the hotel property, and today it is used by the police. Not far from the police station, there is a street named after the young boy who was murdered. Those responsible were eventually arrested, and some received life imprisonment while others were sentenced to death.
I visited that property to show that the same problem we saw nearly three decades ago is still with us today—only in new forms. Now, people kill their girlfriends, relatives, or acquaintances for what they call organ harvesting. They believe specific organs can be used in rituals to produce wealth, success, or power.
The narratives of religion, miracles, magic, and supernatural intervention fuel these beliefs. All of them reinforce the idea that ritual killings can deliver prosperity. What we are confronting is a Herculean task—a complex, many-headed monster of superstition and fear. Only the flame of reason, compassion, critical thinking, and skeptical inquiry can provide hope for society and for the victims.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Leo.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): Survivors Network of those Abused by Priests
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/07
Rev. Dr. John C. Lentz Jr. served over 30 years as Lead Pastor of Forest Hill Presbyterian Church in Cleveland Heights, Ohio. Known for passionate preaching, community leadership, and a commitment to justice and compassion, he profoundly shaped the Church’s mission before retiring in 2024 after a celebrated ministry. Lentz reflects on his 30-year tenure at Forest Hill Presbyterian Church, where he inherited the traumatic legacy of sexual abuse by a former associate pastor. Lentz details the Church’s response—early efforts at acknowledgment, limited legal options, and survivor support—highlighting the structural weaknesses in denominational accountability. He explores systemic patterns of abuse across denominations, including the role of clerical authority, enabling networks, and institutional cover-ups. Drawing from neuroscience, psychology, and theology, Lentz emphasizes the importance of independent investigations, seminary reform, and third-party oversight. He warns against simplistic narratives that scapegoat Catholicism alone and calls for nuanced, data-driven reform efforts across religious institutions. He discussed how virtues like compassion and forgiveness, without accountability, can become vulnerabilities. Both advocate for cultural and institutional reforms rooted in moral clarity, survivor support, and transparent justice processes. The dialogue ultimately calls for partnership—not polarization—in addressing clergy abuse.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, you are a former pastor at Forest Hill Presbyterian Church. What is the story there? We can use that as a context for a broader conversation about a wider phenomenon.
Rev. Dr. John Lentz: Yes. I served as pastor at Forest Hill Church for thirty years, from 1994 to 2024. During my final interview before being offered the position, the search committee told me something they felt I needed to know. They said, “John, we need to tell you this because it might affect your decision to come here.” They explained that a previous associate pastor had been involved in the sexual abuse of youth in the congregation.
That wasn’t comforting to hear. Here is what I learned so from personal knowledge: In 1977, Reverend Dale Small became the associate pastor at Forest Hill Church. He came from another congregation in the Detroit area of Michigan. His primary responsibilities were overseeing the confirmation program and leading retreat and camping ministries. He served in that role until 1981.
Afterward, he retired and was granted the honorary title of pastor emeritus. He moved to North Carolina following his retirement. In 1984, he organized a reunion-style camping trip for former youth members of Forest Hill Church in North Carolina. During that event, one former youth participant—by then in his twenties—experienced a resurgence of traumatic memories related to prior abuse. He left the trip and returned home.
Later that year, he and his parents sent a letter to the Church’s governing body (the session) reporting that Dale Small had sexually abused him. The letter also mentioned other possible victims, although it is unclear how many individuals were named or how those claims were verified.
When I joined the Church in 1994, ten years after that disclosure, I learned that the session at the time had responded by engaging a consultant—though I do not know their name—to assess what actions should be taken to support the congregation, particularly its youth. They also reportedly sent letters to families whose children had been part of the youth group or confirmation classes during that period, asking whether anything inappropriate had occurred.
It was reported that at least half a dozen boys came forward, identifying themselves as victims of abuse. Many of these boys came from homes where the father was absent or where the family structure had been disrupted. All of the reported victims were male.
Even years later, I encountered the impact of this traumatic history. One individual told me he had been abused not directly by Reverend Small but by someone who had themselves been abused and possibly groomed by Small. I also became close to someone a few years younger than me who eventually disclosed that he had been one of the victims. He confided in me and described the abuse in detail.
His account matched what is now known to be common patterns in clergy abuse cases: identifying vulnerable boys, assuming the role of a surrogate father figure, using pastoral authority to gain trust, showing excessive attention, and initiating inappropriate physical contact during church retreats—starting with massages and escalating to sexual abuse.
As more stories emerged, it was essential to support survivors in any way I could. I recall one conversation with a survivor in which I said, “Whatever you need, I will help. Let’s pursue justice if that’s what you want.” By that time, Reverend Small had passed away so that any legal recourse would have been limited. Still, the priority was to provide acknowledgment, support, and whatever healing was possible.
There was also a statute of limitations, and unfortunately, it was heartbreaking. The abuse survivor did not want to proceed. He still had such mixed and conflicted emotions about this man—someone he said he loved and who, he believed, loved him. You can imagine the emotional complexity and heartbreak that comes with hearing something like that.
Then Dale Small died, so pursuing anything in a legal sense became moot. I did ensure, however, that he was no longer listed as pastor emeritus. I also informed our local presbytery, which removed Dale Small from the rolls as a retired and honourably retired pastor.
I have probably left out many details, but that’s the general account. That part is fact—that is what I know to be true. What lies in the murkier areas—and this is what makes it so difficult—is that there were some alleged incidents of misconduct at Dale Small’s previous Church in Michigan. Now, my predecessor—whom I overall have great respect for and who was a prominent leader in this community—knew Dale Small personally. He was the one who called and invited him to serve at Forest Hill Church.
I cannot say with any degree of certainty, and I have no evidence, that he knew of the abuse or that he was abused. But, from what I understand, he may have been a classic enabler.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): NEXUSNewsfeed
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/09/25
Steven Janssens is a Belgian filmmaker and engineer known for his diverse career as a director, editor, and trainer. He gained recognition for documenting Crazy Money (2020), a film capturing the Eight project in Busibi, Uganda, where residents receive unconditional basic income. His extensive filmography includes the documentary Wardje (2004), Point Off U (2007), and contributions to Kongo (2010). Steven has worked on award-winning projects like Atoma by Brepols (2012) and web documentaries like Het Antwerpgevoel (2010), and most recent film Blind Spots (instagram: @blindspotsthefilm). Combining technical expertise and creative vision, Steven continues to explore impactful storytelling through innovative and socially conscious filmmaking. Janssens talks about collaborating with sociologist Maarten Goethals to provide unconditional cash transfers in impoverished African communities, including Uganda and the Democratic Republic of the Congo. Inspired by the transformative potential of basic income, Janssens produced Crazy Money, documenting their pilot project in Busibi, Uganda. By partnering with the University of Antwerp, Eight measured the program’s impact on education, healthcare, and entrepreneurship. Janssens emphasizes trust and autonomy, noting significant improvements in life satisfaction and community development. Eight’s efforts now expand to Côte d’Ivoire, addressing poverty, climate resilience, and gender equality through evidence-based, scalable interventions.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Steven Janssens, a Belgian documentary filmmaker who co-founded the nonprofit Eight, established in 2015. You founded this organization with sociologist Maarten Goethals. What was the original inspiration behind Eight, and why did you focus specifically on underserved communities in Uganda and the Democratic Republic of the Congo?Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/14
Nicholas Wright is a neuroscientist and strategist who bridges brain science and national security. For more than a decade, he has advised the Pentagon’s Joint Staff and other U.S. agencies, as well as counterparts in the United Kingdom, on how human decision-making shapes deterrence and defense. His research explores how the brain constructs perception amid uncertainty, how moral emotions fuel cooperation and conflict, and how leadership transforms fear into purposeful action. Wright also examines the ethics of information operations, democratic resilience, and what he calls the “identity–culture spiral” that enables large-scale cooperation. His recent work, Warhead: How the Brain Shapes War and War Shapes the Brain, probes how cognitive science illuminates great-power competition and the enduring risk of nuclear escalation.
In this interview, Scott Douglas Jacobsen speaks with Wright about “neurostrategy”—the use of neuroscience to understand and influence nuclear and security decisions. Wright explains how perception is not reality but a brain-built model prone to deception; why 2014 marked a strategic inflection point with Russia and China; and how moral emotions and leadership determine a nation’s will to fight. He draws ethical boundaries for information operations in democracies and argues that internal cohesion matters more than foreign interference. His guiding principle: avoid losing in three ways—do not lose a conventional war (for instance, over Taiwan), do not decay from within, and do not fight a nuclear war. Across all three, Wright contends, strategic success begins with self-understanding.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What was your inspiration for the work connecting neuroscience, security, and decision-making?
Nicholas Wright: Over ten years ago, I began applying new insights from neuroscience to decision-making about nuclear weapons—an enormously important area that had been neglected in public policy. When you consider atomic weapons, the goal is to influence how someone else will decide. If you are thinking about Vladimir Putin or Xi Jinping, you must consider how they make decisions about nuclear weapons, which involves understanding their thought processes and choices.
There are many sources of information, but the central fact is that they are human and thus have human brains. How do those brains work? For more than a decade, I have worked with the Pentagon’s Joint Staff and others to address that question.
They aim to understand how the human brain makes decisions. In turn, I gain perspective as a neuroscientist—insight into problems where the brain meets the real world in life-and-death situations. We’ve had a productive collaboration with military colleagues in the United States and the United Kingdom for many years.
Jacobsen: Another critical factor is the ten years of working across U.S. administrations: the first Trump administration, the Biden administration, and the current second Trump administration. Administrations matter because they provide direction—a vector—beyond the geopolitical and military context, alongside the science of how the brain can be used for good or ill. How have you oriented your advising and learning across different administrations? Many assume the key differences lie in political changes.
Wright: I have worked with the U.S. government since the second Obama term. However, the most significant drivers are external. I began this work at the tail end of the post-9/11 counterterrorism era and in 2014 on issues such as Israel–Palestine that dominated U.S. security thinking at the time. Then came Russia’s 2014 seizure and annexation of Crimea and the war in eastern Ukraine—often discussed in terms of “gray-zone” or hybrid tactics—followed by the full-scale invasion launched in 2022.
In 2014, we saw a turning point. Russia sent its so-called “little green men” into Crimea, and at the same time, China was shifting. It is difficult to pinpoint precisely when the change began, but it became apparent after Xi Jinping took office in 2013. By 2017, it was clear that he was steering China in a different direction—more expansionist abroad and more authoritarian at home. With both China and Russia, something new was happening.
Many in the American government and, like me, in advisory roles recognized that these were profound shifts. They marked a sea change in the external environment we had to contend with. It was no longer primarily about terrorism. The United States had once been so overwhelmingly militarily superior that it did not need to worry about peer competitors. That is no longer the case. The most significant shift has been the resurgence of great-power competition. The issue is less about changes in U.S. administrations and more about changes in global realities that every administration must confront.
Jacobsen: With perception under uncertainty, there are factors like the “fog of war.” Given the shortcuts in our sensory systems, how does uncertainty interact with perception in a war context, especially when so much is unknown and there are multiple dimensions to interpret?
Wright: The first thing to understand about perception is that our brains cannot process all the information constantly entering them. Each eye alone has tens of millions of light receptors, and in the center of the retina are millions dedicated to color and fine detail. Add hearing, taste, the position of every joint in the body, and the signals from the skin, and you realize the nervous system is bombarded with data. We cannot deal with that flood directly.
Instead, the brain uses a model of the world. Take vision as an example. You are not passively receiving information on some “television screen” in your head. You are actively constructing perception. What you see is not raw input—it is your brain’s best model of reality, assembled from incomplete and uncertain information.
We know that perception is a model of the world—a simulation that takes place inside the brain. For example, if you fix your eyes on one point in the center of your visual field, the edges of your vision look full of color. But this cannot be raw input, because the periphery of your retina lacks the receptors for color vision. The brain is filling in the gaps, creating a simulation. That model is what you perceive.
In the context of the “fog of war,” this means the model can be fooled or tricked. It must also constantly manage uncertainty. The model is controlled in two ways. First, it is anchored to reality through sensory input—your eyes, ears, and so on. Second, it is anchored by expectations about the world. For example, you expect a face to have two eyes, a nose, and a mouth. These anchors keep the model from collapsing into random hallucinations.
Still, the model is always an approximation, always one take on reality, never a perfect representation. Uncertainty is built in. And beyond perception, other brain systems—such as motivation, reward, and moral emotions—shape how we trust, cooperate, and respond to conflict.
Jacobsen: That brings me to status and dominance cues, as well as material incentives. How do moral emotions play into those dynamics? For instance, if there is a dominance-based conflict with potential for escalation, but a moral emotion—say, the sense of unfairness—enters the equation, can it buffer against the drive for dominance? Can moral emotions reduce conflict or support the role of a third-party intermediary, such as peacekeeping forces, to de-escalate tensions?
Wright: That is a crucial point. Just as your perceptual model simulates the world, your brain also runs models for emotions. These models help regulate how we interpret fairness, unfairness, and cooperation. They can serve as buffers against escalation by introducing constraints that are not purely material or status-based. In other words, moral emotions can redirect or soften conflict dynamics in ways that spreadsheets of costs and incentives alone cannot capture.
Rapid emotional responses, such as fear or anger, enable us to function in uncertain environments and respond appropriately. Without fear, for example, we would get into serious trouble; we need it to cope with rapidly changing conditions. The same applies to social motivations, such as the visceral rejection of unfairness. That instinct wells up inside us when we or those we care about are treated unjustly.
At the same time, we have other systems for planning. We can create forward-looking models of the world, projecting into the future in ways similar to planning moves in a chess game. In reality, the brain holds many different models, and these models work together like an orchestra. Fear might be the percussion, beating insistently in the background. Models of other people’s intentions—whether to cooperate or compete—might be the violins. Each system contributes its part.
Together they produce the “symphony” of life. Sometimes one section dominates, while at other times another does, but overall, they must remain coordinated. At the highest level, this orchestra is conducted by the frontal pole—the region just behind the forehead. That area allows us to reflect on our own thinking: to assess certainty, to build a model of ourselves. It helps keep the orchestra in balance.
‘Warhead: How the Brain Shapes War and War Shapes the Brain’ by Nicholas Wright. 390 pp. St. Martin’s Press
Jacobsen: What about senses of identity? Not necessarily religious, political, or ethnic identity in detail, but how do these feed into the brain’s mechanisms of in-group and out-group formation, the functions of bonding, and the tools of dehumanization in politics?
Wright: Humans can create groups far larger than those of any other primate. Chimpanzees, for instance, can manage groups of several hundred individuals. Humans, by contrast, can sustain groups numbering in the thousands, such as a tribe, or even in the billions, as with modern nations like China or India. The question is: how do humans form and maintain groups on such a remarkable scale?
This is a kind of social alchemy. In the Middle Ages, alchemists tried to turn base metals into gold. What humans do is something more powerful: we create coherent groups—groups stable enough to work together toward shared goals, providing security and cooperation on scales no other primate can match.
How do we achieve this? Through what I would call an identity–culture spiral. Individuals form identities—answering the question “Who am I?”—and those identities are reinforced and made consistent through culture. At the same time, individuals shape culture. Together, this spiral enables the emergence of large, coherent groups.
When discussing identity in the brain, there are several layers. First, there is the embodied self—the sense of being a human body, looking out from behind your eyes. Second, there is the narrative self—the story we construct about where we came from and where we are going. This narrative can be profoundly reshaped.
After World War II, for example, many Germans who had been active Nazis had to rewrite their identities using earlier parts of their lives to reconstruct themselves as citizens of a new West Germany, now conservative members of a democratic society.
A third layer is the social self, which involves belonging to a particular group. That might be a military unit, a social club, or a sports team. This identity tells you who you are by teaching you the rules of your group. Yankees fans, for example, wear certain clothes, use certain expressions, and care about particular things. At the same time, it defines the out-groups—those you expect to learn less from and often to compete against.
The embodied self, the narrative self, and the social self all work together to help us answer the central question: Who am I? That, in turn, is what enables humans to perform this remarkable social alchemy—creating coherent groups on a vast scale. Through the creation of shared identities and cultures, we form coherent groups. Those groups enable us to be the thinking, cooperative animals that we are.
Jacobsen: These dynamics seem less relevant to those in the Navy or Air Force, and more critical for soldiers on the ground. You’ve written about the experiences of American and Chinese soldiers, particularly how leadership and morale factor into this. I’m not speaking of propaganda or rallying cries, but of how proper leadership can inspire individuals to override the amygdala’s primary fear response and instead make secondary or tertiary responses in the midst of combat, or even in anticipation of battle.
Wright: That can be reframed as the question: why do humans stand and fight instead of running away? In many situations, the more natural response would be flight. So why stand and fight? In my book, I look at examples such as the Chinese troops in World War II. During the Battle of Shanghai in 1937, large numbers of Chinese soldiers stood their ground against the Japanese invasion.
Part of this comes down to overcoming fear responses—not eliminating them, but controlling and harnessing them. Fear is valid if appropriately trained. Good training can transform fear, which might otherwise lead to panic and retreat, into a channeled response that enables soldiers to fight effectively.
Leadership is always central. Humans inevitably generate leaders because we are animals that form large groups through what I described as the identity–culture spiral, or social alchemy. Within these groups, leadership emerges, and people follow. This is built into how our brains operate.
Consider Admiral Horatio Nelson, the greatest naval commander of the age of sail. Contemporary accounts said he “infused his spirit” into his men. This meant he could create a model of the world and communicate it to others, enabling them to achieve things they could not have accomplished on their own. Leaders assume responsibility for others, communicate a clear vision, and provide their followers with a sense of purpose.
People follow leaders for two key reasons: dominance and prestige. Some follow those who are stronger. Others follow because of prestige—the recognition that a leader has knowledge or skills worth learning from. Humans are not especially strong compared to chimpanzees, but our survival depends on learning from others. That means prestige-based leadership is crucial.
So, there will always be leaders and followers. With practical training and capable leadership, those leaders can inspire people to stand and fight even in the face of overwhelming fear.
Jacobsen: Freedom House has noted that democratic and autocratic tendencies exist on a spectrum, shifting over decades. They do not simply label countries as “democratic” or “autocratic,” but instead chart where societies fall along that spectrum. Over the past decade, their data shows a decline in democratic tendencies worldwide. This raises a concern: neurostrategy could be used by actors with constrictive aims, limiting human possibilities, or by those with expansive aims, enhancing them. In terms of balancing neuroscience, security policy, and ethics, what are the red lines? How do we prevent manipulation of citizens while still enhancing human security?
Wright: You’re right that over the last fifteen years, many indicators show a reduction in democracy across several countries. But if you take the longer view, democracy has always advanced in waves. In the early nineteenth century, democracies emerged, then receded. After World War I, there was a rise in democratic states, followed by a collapse during the rise of Nazi Germany and other authoritarian regimes. In the 1980s, a surge in democracies occurred. We are currently living through what some call a “democratic recession.”
So, yes, I agree that over the past fifteen years we’ve seen a reduction in democracy in many parts of the world. The question, as you’ve framed it, is about red lines—how to use knowledge responsibly, particularly from neuroscience and security policy, without violating human rights.
I’m cautiously optimistic. While we are in a democratic recession, history shows that societies can reverse such trends when they make good choices. We’ve done it before. If we prioritize freedom and democratic values, we can expand them again. The red lines, then, involve ensuring that any use of neuroscience or security policy strengthens human security and freedom, rather than constraining or manipulating citizens.
Jacobsen: So let’s return to red lines. I mean specifically: with a broader neuro-based strategy, how should we set boundaries to ensure that knowledge is used to enhance human security rather than to manipulate citizens?
Wright: Take information operations, for example. These efforts involve influencing how people make decisions. In democratic societies—such as Canada, the United States, and the United Kingdom—we must be cautious. These governments already have powerful bureaucracies capable of influencing others, but the key red line is to keep those capabilities focused externally rather than internally. In other words, we should avoid turning those tools inward against our own citizens.
Another point: while China and Russia invest heavily in information operations designed to influence our societies, the bigger danger comes from within. If our democracies are going to weaken, it will not primarily be because of what they do—it will be because of the internal problems we create ourselves. The way we manage our own societies matters far more than foreign influence campaigns.
Jacobsen: Let’s close with something forward-looking. Suppose a minister or general reads Warhead and becomes interested. What policy changes should they make first? And once those policies are in place, how should success be measured reliably and validly over time?
Wright: That’s a great question. For policymakers today, success is about building societies that can thrive over the long haul. We are in an extended era of strategic competition, and winning that era is not about short-term battles. It’s about decades of resilience. To do that, we need to avoid losing in three critical ways…
There’s no simple answer about which of these three we must prioritize—we must avoid losing in all of them. First, we must avoid losing a conventional war, such as one over Taiwan. That is now a real possibility; the West could lose such a conflict. To prevent that, we need to harness our understanding of how the brain works. So we can, for instance, seize the initiative of surprise, cultivate superior will to fight, and manipulate adversaries’ perceptions better than they manipulate ours.
Second, we must avoid losing domestically. Our societies could decay from within. To counter this, we need to ensure our societies remain healthy. This means preventing information operations from being directed inward, against our own citizens, and recognizing that the flourishing of our societies is ultimately more important than anything attempted by external actors, such as China or Russia.
Third, we must avoid losing in a nuclear war. It does not matter how many casualties the other side suffers; if tens of millions of Americans, British, or Canadians die in a nuclear exchange, then we have lost. We need nuclear weapons to deter others–and the goal must be to prevent atomic war.
I am optimistic that greater self-knowledge—understanding ourselves as humans with brains that work in predictable ways—can help us navigate all three of these existential risks. If we do that, I am confident we can endure and thrive in this new era of competition.
Jacobsen: Nick, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.
Wright: Brilliant, excellent. Thank you so much.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/10/06
Fabiano F. Santos is a Brazilian theoretical physicist whose research focuses on modified gravity, holography, and black hole physics. He is based at UEMASUL in Imperatriz and earned his Ph.D. in Physics from the Federal University of Paraíba in 2020. Santos investigates how Horndeski scalar–tensor extensions of general relativity alter the behavior of black holes, braneworlds, and boundary conformal field theories. His research spans topics such as AdS/BCFT correspondence, holographic entanglement entropy, complexity, transport coefficients, and Lifshitz black branes. Widely cited, his publications explore quantum information, thermodynamics, and condensed-matter analogs within the framework of general relativity.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is Horndeski gravity in plain language?
Fabiano F. Santos: Horndeski gravity is a theory of gravity that extends Einstein’s general relativity by incorporating additional terms into the equations, enabling more intricate interactions between gravity and matter. It’s often used to explore how gravity behaves in extreme conditions, like near black holes or in the early universe.
Jacobsen: What problem does your research try to solve?
Santos: The research aims to understand how gravity, quantum mechanics, and thermodynamics interact in extreme environments, like black holes or the early universe, and to explore how these insights can help explain the fundamental laws of nature.
Jacobsen: Why use black holes to study the physics of materials?
Santos: Black holes are like “natural laboratories” for testing extreme physics. Using a principle called holography, we can study how black holes behave and use that knowledge to model the behavior of materials, especially those with complex quantum properties, such as superconductors or strange metals.
Jacobsen: What is AdS/BCFT?
Santos: AdS/BCFT (Anti-de Sitter/Boundary Conformal Field Theory) is a framework in theoretical physics that connects gravity in a curved spacetime (AdS) to quantum systems on the boundary of that spacetime. It’s a tool for studying how quantum systems behave when they have boundaries or edges.
Jacobsen: What is the key new insight from your AdS/BCFT research?
Santos: The research demonstrates how boundaries in quantum systems can impact their overall behavior, offering new approaches to modeling edge effects in materials or quantum systems using gravity.
Jacobsen: What is the shear viscosity in these models?
Santos: Shear viscosity measures how easily a fluid flows when a force is applied to it. In these models, it’s calculated using holography and often reveals universal properties of quantum fluids, like the ratio of viscosity to entropy density.
Jacobsen: When does the KSS bound fail in your results?
Santos: The KSS bound, which sets a lower limit on the ratio of viscosity to entropy density, can fail in systems with strong quantum effects or in theories with modified gravity, like Horndeski gravity.
Jacobsen: What does a “probe string” measure physically?
Santos: A probe string is a tool in holography that measures how particles or forces behave in a quantum system, like how charges move in a material or how forces act between particles.
Jacobsen: What do Lifshitz spacetimes let you test?
Santos: Lifshitz spacetimes enable the study of systems where time and space behave differently, which is helpful for modeling materials with unusual quantum properties, such as those near quantum critical points.
Jacobsen: How do Horndeski terms change black hole thermodynamics?
Santos: Horndeski terms modify the equations governing black holes, leading to changes in their temperature, entropy, and how they radiate energy, which can reveal new physics beyond Einstein’s theory.
Jacobsen: What real-world signals could test predictions?
Santos: Signals like gravitational waves, black hole shadows, or unusual patterns in cosmic radiation could test predictions from these models. In materials, experiments on quantum systems might reveal similar effects.
Jacobsen: How does entanglement entropy help “see” inside black holes?
Santos: Entanglement entropy measures the amount of quantum information shared between different parts of a system. In black holes, it helps us understand how information is stored and processed, offering clues about their internal structure.
Jacobsen: What does “holographic complexity” measure?
Santos: Holographic complexity measures how difficult it is to reconstruct the quantum state of a system, such as a black hole, using the smallest possible set of instructions. It’s a way to quantify the “computational difficulty” of a system.
Jacobsen: How do your models produce ferromagnetism or paramagnetism?
Santos: By introducing specific fields or interactions in the holographic models, the system can mimic the behavior of magnetic materials, showing how spins align (ferromagnetism) or respond to external fields (paramagnetism).
Jacobsen: What is a geometric Josephson junction?
Santos: A geometric Josephson junction is a theoretical model in which two quantum systems are connected by a “bridge” in spacetime, allowing quantum effects such as tunneling to occur, similar to how real Josephson junctions function in superconductors.
Jacobsen: Why study domain walls and thick branes?
Santos: Domain walls and thick branes are structures that separate different regions in spacetime or materials. Studying them helps us understand phase transitions, like how materials change from one state to another (e.g., solid to liquid).
Jacobsen: Which result is most ready for experimental checks?
Santos: The predictions about shear viscosity and the KSS bound could be tested in experiments on quantum fluids or ultracold atoms, which mimic the conditions described by the models.
Jacobsen: What is the most complex technical challenge now?
Santos: The most challenging aspect is solving the complex equations in these models, especially when incorporating effects such as Horndeski terms or Lifshitz spacetimes, which necessitate advanced numerical techniques.
Jacobsen: Which collaboration most influenced this line of research?
Santos: Collaborations between string theorists, condensed matter physicists, and gravitational physicists have been the most influential, as they bring together expertise from different fields to tackle these problems.
Jacobsen: What is the one-sentence takeaway you give to non-physicists?
Santos: We utilize black holes and gravity as tools to understand the intricate and beautiful workings of the universe, from the tiniest particles to the largest cosmic structures.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Fabiano.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen
In-Sight Publishing, Fort Langley, British Columbia, Canada
Correspondence: Scott Douglas Jacobsen (Email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com)
Received: September 20, 2025
Accepted: October 8, 2025
Published: October 8, 2025
Abstract
This interview examines how artificial intelligence is reshaping schooling through the lens of Norwegian educator Tor Arne Jørgensen. He identifies five acute pressures—assessment integrity, homework authenticity, critical use, shortcut-seeking, and loss of personal development—and outlines dual responses: immediate safeguards (assessment redesign, use-policies, and targeted detection) and a long-term pivot to digital literacy, critical thinking, creativity, ethics, and collaboration. Jørgensen frames the teacher’s “value-add” as pedagogical leadership, relational trust, ethical reasoning, and higher-order cognition—capacities AI cannot replace. He details the Norwegian Directorate for Education and Training’s stance, including stricter 2025 exam rules, and argues for diversified, process-oriented evaluation. The conversation addresses inequities driven by infrastructure and competence gaps, calls for coherent training and governance, and surfaces ethical risks such as dependency, cognitive atrophy, safety illusions, and social isolation. Jørgensen proposes a student-led global pilot for evaluating educational AI and defines success in human terms: intellectual independence, narrowed equity gaps, and citizens capable of democratic participation alongside AI.
Keywords: Academic integrity in AI, AI literacy across stakeholders, Assessment redesign with AI, Cognitive development and AI, Digital equity in education, Education scenarios for 2035, Ethical risks of AI, Global governance of EdTech, High-IQ community responsibilities, Mental health in schools, Teacher role evolution, Vendor evaluation and transparency
Introduction
Artificial intelligence is no longer a thought experiment in education; it is a daily condition in classrooms. In this interview, Norwegian educator Tor Arne Jørgensen maps the pressures that AI introduces into the core activities of schooling—testing, homework, learning processes, and identity formation—and argues that the response must be both practical and philosophical. Practically, schools must secure academic integrity and update assessment so that products reflect student understanding rather than machine output. Philosophically, they must re-center education on the cultivation of human judgment, creativity, and ethical reasoning.
Jørgensen situates his perspective within current Norwegian policy, noting the Norwegian Directorate for Education and Training’s principles that keep teachers as pedagogical leaders, require subject-relevant AI use to be declared, and tighten centrally administered examinations in 2025. Against that backdrop, he describes his school’s two-track approach: short-term measures (clear guidelines, detection where necessary, diversified assessments) and a long-term strategy that builds digital literacy and critical thinking while privileging uniquely human capacities—creativity, ethical discernment, collaboration—over mere task completion.
Central to his argument is a reframing of the teacher’s role. The teacher is not an information courier displaced by algorithms but a learning architect whose irreplaceable work is relational, contextual, and ethical: reading classrooms in real time, scaffolding intellectual risk, modelling critical inquiry into AI outputs, and designing experiences that lead from answers to understanding. In Jørgensen’s account, AI can amplify this human work when subordinated to clear pedagogical aims, but it can also erode it when schools mistake efficiency for learning.
The interview also probes the equity fault lines of AI adoption. Resource disparities—in devices, connectivity, IT support, and teacher training—threaten to produce an educational two-tier system within and between municipalities. Jørgensen argues for coherent training, privacy-by-design governance, transparent vendor evaluation, and shared responsibility among teachers, parents, and leadership. He warns of ethical risks—student dependency on AI, cognitive weakening from shortcut culture, safety oversimplifications, and reduced face-to-face interaction—and proposes a student-led, globally representative pilot to evaluate educational AI on governance as well as learning. Success, he contends, cannot be measured by platform metrics, but by whether graduates retain intellectual independence, social empathy, and democratic agency in an AI-suffused world.
Main Text (Interview)
Interviewer: Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Interviewee: Tor Arne Jørgensen
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the top AI-driven pressures your school faces?
Tor Arne Jørgensen: We face five main challenges that are changing how we must think about learning and assessment.
Tests and assessments
The biggest challenge is ensuring that students don’t use AI during tests and exams. This isn’t just about cheating, but about knowing that results actually show the student’s own knowledge and skills. We need to find new ways of assessment that make AI less relevant, or we must learn to accept that traditional test formats become less reliable.
Homework and assignments
Outside the classroom, we have little control. The risk is great that students let AI do the work for them. This weakens the learning process and gives a misleading picture of the student’s development. We need to rethink what kind of assignments we give, and how we follow up on work done at home.
Critical use of AI
Students must learn to evaluate the quality of the answers AI provides. Without critical thinking, they risk accepting incorrect or incomplete information. Here we have a pedagogical task: teaching students when AI is useful, and when it isn’t.
AI as a shortcut
Many students are tempted to rely on AI for quick solutions instead of doing the work themselves. This undermines the development of important skills like problem-solving, reflection, and independent thinking. We must help students understand the difference between getting an answer and understanding a problem.
Personal development
When students hand over their work to AI, they lose the opportunity to develop their own abilities. This can weaken creativity and the ability to express themselves. Take writing as an example: Someone who doesn’t write their own texts never develops a personal voice. This is perhaps the most important challenge – that we risk losing something fundamentally human in the learning process.
Jacobsen: How are you prioritizing responses?
Jørgensen: I’ll give you a two-part answer: first, how the Norwegian Directorate for Education and Training approaches AI in schools, then how we tackle these challenges at our school.
The official guidelines
The Directorate has established some clear principles. Teachers must remain the pedagogical leaders – AI cannot take over that role. Any use of AI must serve curriculum goals and be relevant to the subject matter. Most importantly, schools must develop their own local guidelines rather than follow a one-size-fits-all approach.
On assessment and academic integrity, the reality is stark: AI changes everything about how we evaluate student work, particularly written assignments. The Directorate recommends diversifying our assessment methods – more oral exams, process documentation, practical tasks – to reduce opportunities for cheating. Students need to learn critical AI use, including understanding sources, privacy concerns, and copyright issues.
For exams in 2025, the rules are strict. AI generation is completely prohibited on centrally administered written exams. They’ve removed preparation periods in several subjects and restricted permitted aids. Getting caught using AI can result in exam annulment.
But it’s not all restrictions. The Directorate sees pedagogical potential in AI for planning, differentiation, and feedback. The key principle is that AI should strengthen the teacher’s role, not replace it. Students can use AI when it’s subject-relevant, but they must declare when and how they used it.
Our school’s approach
We’ve divided our response into immediate needs and long-term strategy.
In the short term, we’re developing new assessment methods that are less vulnerable to AI cheating. We’re implementing detection tools where necessary and creating clear, practical guidelines for AI use.
Our long-term focus is different. Digital literacy and critical thinking have become our highest priority because these give students the tools to navigate an AI world successfully. We’re working to integrate AI as a learning tool, but in pedagogically sound ways. Most importantly, we’re focusing on skills AI cannot replace: creativity, ethical reasoning, and collaboration.
Our philosophy is balanced. We don’t ban AI, but we educate about it. We teach students when and how AI can be used constructively. We emphasize process over product in our assessments and strengthen oral and practical evaluation methods.
Teacher development is crucial. We prioritize building competency among our staff so they can safely guide students through this new landscape. We create space for experimentation and learning.
Our main principle is simple: we cannot fight AI, so we must teach students to live and work with it in ways that strengthen their development as thinking, critical human beings.
Jacobsen: How do you define the teacher’s value-add in a classroom with AI?
Jørgensen: The fundamental shift
We need to be honest about what’s happening. We have moved from being lecturers to observers, and now we serve as facilitaJørgensens of the right approach and process of understanding information. This isn’t a loss of status – it’s an evolution toward something more sophisticated and more essentially human.
Where teachers add irreplaceable value
There are four areas where no AI can match what a skilled teacher brings to learning.
First is pedagogical leadership and human judgment. We understand each student’s developmental path, their emotional landscape, their particular way of learning. We make real-time decisions based on classroom dynamics and those unexpected moments when learning suddenly clicks. We take AI’s output and shape it to fit what this specific student needs at this specific moment.
Second is our relational capacity. We build the trust networks and motivational structures that make authentic learning possible. We help students regulate their emotions when learning gets difficult. We create the psychological safety that lets students take intellectual risks. No algorithm can do this work.
Third is teaching critical thinking and ethical reasoning. Students need to learn how to question, evaluate, and synthesize what AI produces. They need to see us model responsible AI use. They need to develop digital citizenship and understand AI’s limitations and biases. This is fundamentally human work.
Fourth is fostering creative problem-solving and higher-order thinking. We design learning experiences that leverage uniquely human capabilities: collaborative innovation, creative synthesis, navigating ethical dilemmas. We help students connect abstract concepts to lived experience and find meaning across disciplines.
The new teacher identity
The teacher’s role has evolved from being a walking encyclopedia to becoming a sophisticated learning architect. In AI-supported classrooms, we become even more essential as cognitive coaches, teaching students how to think with and through AI. We become wisdom integrators, connecting information to insight, data to understanding. We remain the human connection anchors, providing social-emotional foundations that no technology can replace.
The strategic reality
AI doesn’t threaten our value – it amplifies it. We move from information transmission to wisdom cultivation. From standardized delivery to personalized learning orchestration. From isolated practice to collaborative knowledge construction.
The core of our work remains unchanged: transforming learning into human flourishing through pedagogical expertise, relational intelligence, and wisdom cultivation that no algorithm can replicate. That’s where our irreplaceable value lies.
Jacobsen: In five to ten years, will we still need teachers? If so, which functions can AI not replace?
Jørgensen: The relationship crisis we’re facing
We’re seeing something alarming: school avoidance has truly skyrocketed. As educators, we spend increasing amounts of our time on relationship building with students who desperately need human connection. We’re creating safe social environments where learning can actually happen. We’re managing school-home collaboration with parents who expect us to deliver a complete package from A to Z.
These human facJørgensens change almost hour by hour. AI cannot provide quick-fix solutions for this because it requires the ability to read students and see their changing needs throughout the day. That demands human intuition and adaptability.
The reality of our work
No two days are alike in education. Throughout a single day, we must process ongoing information immediately and handle it differently based on varying circumstances. This real-time adaptation and contextual decision-making goes far beyond what any algorithm can manage.
Just today at work, we discussed the importance of being source-critical and not letting ChatGPT do assignments for students. The answers come from uncertain sources, and ChatGPT doesn’t highlight any source criticism in the process. This is where the teacher becomes crucial – recognizing when answers are incorrect and understanding that students who rely on AI will face poor grades, if the plagiarism check doesn’t catch the cheating first and lead to failure.
Teaching students to think about AI
This highlights a crucial function: developing students’ critical thinking about AI itself. Students need guides who can help them understand when and how to use AI, recognize its limitations and biases, and maintain their own cognitive abilities.
The cognitive risk
I’m concerned about the risk of weakening the brain’s ability to function – that cognitive abilities could diminish over time, leading to intellectual dumbing down by constantly chasing easy solutions instead of doing thorough work independently. It’s like sitting down and not using your body; it deteriorates tremendously after a while, and you find yourself unable to perform even the simplest tasks.
This is what AI fundamentally cannot replace: the development of human cognitive resilience and deep thinking skills.
Going back to basics
To prevent what we’re seeing happen with AI use, we’re providing physical books and having students respond in analog formats, as our generation did, rather than surrendering completely to the digital world. This represents the teacher’s role as curator of learning experiences – knowing when technology serves learning and when it hinders it.
The tool perspective
AI is a tool, so let us treat it as a tool. Use it when it’s appropriate, and put it away when it’s not absolutely required. This balanced approach requires human judgment, wisdom, and the ability to make contextual decisions about when technology enhances learning and when human-centered approaches work better.
The essential teacher
While AI will transform education, the core human elements remain irreplaceably human: emotional intelligence, relationship building, real-time adaptation, critical thinking guidance, and the wisdom to know when to use technology and when to step away from it. Teachers who embrace this evolution while maintaining focus on human development won’t just remain relevant – they’ll become more essential than ever.
Jacobsen: How should schools redesign assessment and academic integrity?
Jørgensen: Rethinking how we measure learning
We must be honest about what’s happening to traditional assessment. The old methods are becoming unreliable because students can easily cheat their way to artificially high results. We need to restructure our entire assessment methodology.
Instead of clinging to outdated forms, we should focus on more varied approaches: project assessments that show real understanding, oral assessments where students must demonstrate their thinking in real time, and authentic assessments that mirror situations they’ll actually face in the world.
Continuous assessment throughout the school year should become our preference. This gives us a realistic picture of student development rather than relying on high-stakes moments that can be easily gamed.
Working with AI, not against it
Schools must acknowledge that artificial intelligence is here to stay. Fighting this technology is pointless. We should embrace it as the fantastic tool it is.
But we must learn to use it sensibly. We cannot put our own brains on ice and leave everything to AI models like ChatGPT. Students must do the groundwork themselves and then get help refining their work using AI. That’s the difference between learning with AI and letting AI learn instead of you.
The importance of mental exercise
We must remember that our brain needs stimulation, just as our body needs training to stay optimal. As a teacher, my goal is to inspire students to maintain their curiosity and learn that the journey toward becoming better lies in meeting challenges with curiosity and wonder – not running away from them.
Think of it like sports: to become a good football player, it doesn’t help to sit on the bench or skip training sessions. There’s significant work required before you see results, and the same applies to our brain. But if you persevere, the results will come – that’s guaranteed.
Students need to understand this fundamental truth: cognitive strength, like physical strength, comes from consistent effort and challenge. AI can be a training partner, but it cannot do the training for you.
The path forward
Schools must modernize both what and how we assess, while maintaining high standards for learning and integrity. This means being strategic about when we use technology and when we deliberately step away from it. It means creating assessments that value the thinking process as much as the final product.
The goal isn’t to make things easier – it’s to make learning more authentic and more aligned with how students will actually need to think and work in their futures.
Jacobsen: How do resource disparities between schools shape AI adoption?
Jørgensen: The infrastructure reality
The main challenge is technological infrastructure, and it’s creating a troubling divide. Schools with solid finances hold significant advantages through new devices, better internet connections, and top-tier IT support. Meanwhile, economically weaker schools struggle with outdated equipment and lacking competence.
This isn’t just about having newer computers. It’s about whether schools can actually participate in the digital transformation that AI demands.
The competence gap
Affluent schools can invest in comprehensive teacher training supported by dedicated IT coordinaJørgensens. This creates clear differences between private schools and municipal schools that are currently struggling considerably.
When teachers don’t have the support they need to understand and integrate new technologies, students suffer. You can’t teach what you don’t understand, and you can’t guide students through AI challenges if you’re fighting with basic technical issues.
Political failures
I have to be direct about this: the current government has drastically deprioritized the school secJørgensen over the past four years, bringing many schools to the brink of collapse. This contrasts sharply with the party’s stated support for strong education policy.
We see the consequences daily. Schools are making impossible choices between basic maintenance and investing in the future. How can we prepare students for an AI world when we can’t even ensure reliable internet connections?
Municipal lottery
There are significant variations between municipalities in school investment. Some make necessary investments in competence and equipment, while others simply don’t receive sufficient state support to ensure optimal learning for students.
Your postal code shouldn’t determine the quality of your education, but that’s increasingly what we’re seeing. A student in a wealthy municipality gets cutting-edge technology and well-trained teachers, while a student just a few kilometers away struggles with outdated equipment.
The generational cost
Insufficient investment in the coming generation means students are not adequately prepared after completing primary education. When increased investment in private schools draws funds from municipal schools without government intervention, we’re creating a two-tiered system that betrays our egalitarian values.
The urgency
All of Norwegian education must be secured with necessary resources now to avoid falling behind in competence development, essential equipment, and competent IT support. We cannot afford to have some schools racing ahead into the AI era while others are left behind with yesterday’s tools.
This isn’t just about fairness – it’s about national competitiveness and ensuring every Norwegian student can participate fully in the future we’re creating.
Jacobsen: What training, professional standards, and governance structures should exist for responsible AI use?
Jørgensen: The training we desperately need
In primary education, we must focus on teacher training in AI tools and their pedagogical use. This isn’t optional anymore. We need student education in AI literacy as part of the curriculum, teaching critical thinking about and with content that AI generates. Students and we as educaJørgensens must demonstrate digital judgment and source criticism.
But here’s the challenge: we’re trying to teach something that’s evolving faster than our ability to understand it.
Creating practical frameworks
For practical guidelines in primary schools, we need clear rules for when and how students should work with AI, and which tasks can ensure a reliable assessment foundation. This carries over into present and future assessment forms with AI use in schools. Privacy protection must be built in from the start.
We cannot wing this. Students need consistent expectations across subjects and grade levels.
The shared responsibility
This work requires shared responsibility between teachers, parents, and school leadership. We must examine the national frameworks that the Norwegian Directorate for Education and Training must incorporate as part of the subject curriculum, in addition to competency goals in each subject area. We need clarity on how examinations should function within these conditions.
Parents need to understand what we’re trying to achieve. School leadership needs to support teachers with resources and time. Teachers need to step up and learn, even when it’s uncomfortable.
The impossible task
Here’s where I’ll be completely honest: we must prepare students for what will meet them when they enter the job market, which is incredibly challenging because development is moving much faster today than ever before.
I must personally say that I almost don’t know how to approach this situation. The dissolution of familiar structures happens as quickly as new ones take their place. Previously, we could aim for how we thought the market would be for those entering it in 5-10 years, but today that approach won’t work due to rapid changes.
Teaching adaptability
So what do we do? We focus on what remains constant: the ability to learn, to adapt, to think critically, to collaborate, to solve problems creatively. We teach students how to learn continuously rather than trying to predict what they’ll need to know.
We prepare them for uncertainty by making them comfortable with uncertainty. We give them tools for thinking, not just knowledge for regurgitating.
This might be the most honest thing I can say: we’re all figuring this out together, and that’s okay. What matters is that we’re doing it thoughtfully, deliberately, and with our students’ best interests at heart.
Jacobsen: Which ethical risks concern you most?
Jørgensen: The dependency crisis
Students are becoming dependent on AI to complete tasks across all subjects, which fundamentally undermines the development of independent problem-solving skills. This isn’t just about cheating – it’s about students losing the ability to struggle productively with difficult problems.
What’s particularly concerning is how AI systems communicate with each other and adjust their responses to suit user preferences. This creates a risk that biases could spiral out of control if not properly monitored, as AI systems adapt their outputs based on what they think users want to hear rather than what’s accurate or helpful.
Cognitive atrophy
We’re seeing evidence that long-term AI use weakens students’ creative and critical thinking abilities over time. It’s the “use it or lose it” principle: just as physical muscles atrophy without use, cognitive capacities that aren’t actively engaged during crucial developmental stages may diminish.
For students at this critical stage of development, it’s essential to actively use their mental faculties. When AI does the thinking for them, those cognitive muscles don’t develop properly.
The security illusion
The safety measures that schools and students are entitled to can be compromised or become misleading when AI systems are involved. We think we’re protecting our students, but we may actually be exposing them to new vulnerabilities we don’t yet understand.
The social collapse
This is perhaps what worries me most: students increasingly rely on indirect digital communication rather than direct, face-to-face interaction. This shift correlates with increased rates of school avoidance, depression, and anxiety among students.
We’ve observed this development worsening over the past ten years, with no signs of improvement. Both children and adults are inherently social beings. When interactions become purely digital rather than direct, we change in ways we don’t notice until it may be too late.
The educational reversal
Previously, schools placed much greater emphasis on academic content. Now the situation has completely reversed. Teachers are overwhelmed with non-academic issues – we’re essentially drowning in cases that lack an educational character.
We’ve become social workers, therapists, and crisis managers instead of educaJørgensens. While students need support in all these areas, when we can’t focus on actual learning, everyone suffers.
The wake-up call
These aren’t distant future problems – they’re happening right now in classrooms across the country. We need to recognize that technology isn’t neutral, and AI certainly isn’t. Every tool shapes the person using it, and we need to be much more intentional about what kind of people we’re helping to create.
The question isn’t whether AI will change our students – it’s whether we’ll be mindful enough to guide that change in positive directions.
Jacobsen: What does responsible AI use look like for student cognitive development, creativity, and mental health across grade levels?
Jørgensen: (Les fra her) This question touches the core of what concerns me most in today’s educational system – equal access to education for all students, regardless of their background conditions.
As a teacher at the middle school level, I see AI as both an opportunity and a danger for cognitive development. The greatest danger lies not in the technology itself, but in our approach to it.
The depth versus speed problem
Cognitive development must be built on analytical depth, not superficiality. When I observe students today, it concerns me that they often seek quick answers rather than deep understanding. AI can amplify this tendency if we’re not careful.
My experience has taught me that intellectual growth requires patience and thorough analysis – not haste. We’re creating a generation that expects instant solutions, and that fundamentally undermines the learning process.
Different needs, same goal
For gifted students, we must ensure that AI doesn’t become a barrier to their natural analytical abilities. They need challenges that push them beyond what AI can deliver. These students risk becoming intellectually lazy if AI makes everything too easy.
At the same time, other students can benefit from AI as support, but they must still develop their own critical thinking. The tool should lift them up, not replace their need to think.
The creativity question
Creativity cannot be outsourced to machines. As a hisJørgenseny buff, I know that true creativity comes from deep connections between knowledge, experience, and intuition. AI can be a tool for brainsJørgensenming, but the creative spark must come from the human being itself.
When students let AI generate their creative work, they’re not just avoiding effort – they’re missing the opportunity to discover their own unique voice and perspective.
Mental health and self-worth
This connects to something crucial: mental health. We must teach students that authentic learning and self-development cannot be replaced by artificial intelligence. Their self-worth must be built on their own effort and understanding, not on what a machine can produce for them.
I see students who feel inadequate because they compare themselves to AI’s output. That’s backwards. The goal isn’t to compete with machines – it’s to become more fully human.
The simple truth
My message is simple: use AI as a tool, never as a replacement for your own thinking. Education must still be about developing humanity’s full potential – and that applies to all students, regardless of where they start.
Equal access doesn’t mean everyone gets the same AI assistance. It means everyone gets the same opportunity to develop their own cognitive abilities, their own creativity, their own capacity for deep thought. That’s what true educational equity looks like.
Jacobsen: What should AI literacy entail for students, teachers, and parents?
Jørgensen: We need clear expectations for everyone involved. This isn’t something we can leave to chance or assume will work itself out.
What students must learn
Students must understand artificial intelligence’s capabilities and limitations – what AI can actually do and how reliable it is. They need to recognize AI-generated content and understand when and how AI tools are being used around them.
More importantly, they must develop critical evaluation skills for what AI produces. Instead of accepting information and content uncritically, they need to question, verify, and think independently about what they’re seeing.
Students must make sensible use of AI with subsequent responsibility, using it as a learning tool without compromising academic guidelines and criteria. It’s crucial they understand this: it is the human who should be assessed, not the AI.
Finally, they must understand personal boundaries – not giving away too much of themselves in contact with AI, ensuring their integrity remains unchanged. This is about protecting their developing identity and sense of self.
What teachers must master
Teachers must possess all the competencies we expect from students, plus pedagogical applications. We need to integrate AI tools effectively into our curriculum while maintaining educational objectives. This isn’t about using technology for its own sake – it’s about enhancing learning.
We must develop clear policies around AI use in assignments and assessments. Students need consistent expectations across subjects and grade levels. We also need to understand how AI might change skill priorities in our subject areas and stay informed about emerging developments relevant to education.
This requires continuous learning on our part, which isn’t always easy when we’re already stretched thin.
What parents need to understand
Parents must have a basic understanding of AI tools their children might encounter. They need to be aware of age-appropriate AI interactions and potential risks, understanding AI’s role in their children’s digital experiences and learning.
Parents should know how to discuss AI ethics and responsible use with their children. These conversations can’t just happen at school – they need reinforcement at home. Parents also need to stay informed about AI policies in their children’s schools so they can support what we’re trying to achieve.
The shared responsibility
This only works if everyone takes their role seriously. Students can’t develop responsible AI habits without teacher guidance and parental support. Teachers can’t implement effective policies without administrative backing and parental understanding. Parents can’t guide their children without understanding what’s happening in schools.
We’re all learning together, but we each have specific responsibilities in ensuring this technology serves our children’s development rather than hindering it.
Jacobsen: How would you sequence it from primary to secondary school?
Jørgensen: This is fundamentally about building digital maturity from the ground up – not as something we impose on children from the outside, but as something they develop organically through their encounter with the world.
Starting with wonder
In primary school, we must start where children naturally are: curious and open. Here it’s about awakening a fundamental awareness – that machines can “think” and help us, but that there are always humans who have created them.
We teach them to recognize when they’re talking to a robot, not because we want to frighten them, but because understanding creates safety. Young children need to know the difference between human and artificial responses. And equally important: we establish the first, simple boundaries for what they share of themselves in the digital space.
At this age, it’s about building intuition, not technical knowledge. They need to feel comfortable with technology while understanding it’s different from human interaction.
Deepening understanding
When they reach lower secondary school, we meet young people who already live deeply integrated in the digital world. Now we can go deeper – not just “this is AI,” but “how does AI influence what you see and experience every day?”
We build their critical judgment, teach them to ask the right questions of the information they encounter. This is where ethics comes in – not as moral preaching, but as practical wisdom for how we live together with technology.
These students are forming their identities partly through digital interactions. They need tools to navigate this complex landscape thoughtfully.
Preparing for responsibility
In upper secondary school, we meet soon-to-be adults who must take full responsibility for their use of these tools. Here it becomes academically serious – they must master the AI competency we defined earlier, but also understand their role as co-creaJørgensens of the digital future.
They must be able to use AI tools with integrity, understand the consequences of their choices, and be prepared for a working life where this knowledge is fundamental. They’re not just consumers of AI anymore – they’re active participants in shaping how it’s used.
The human foundation
Throughout all levels, the goal remains the same: it’s not about protecting them from technology, but about equipping them to meet it as reflective, responsible human beings.
Each stage builds on the previous one, deepening their understanding while maintaining their essential humanity. By the time they graduate, they should be able to work with AI while never losing sight of their own capacity for thought, creativity, and ethical judgment.
This developmental approach recognizes that digital maturity, like any maturity, takes time to grow.
Jacobsen: How should schools evaluate AI vendors?
Jørgensen: This is fundamentally about understanding that when we invite technology vendors into our classrooms, we’re inviting them into the most vulnerable and important space we have – where children and young people shape their understanding of the world.
Know who you’re dealing with
First, we must ask the fundamental questions: Who are these vendors really? Not just names and logos, but their values, their business model, their relationship with data and privacy. We cannot just look at what the tool can do – we must understand who controls it and why.
Too often, schools make decisions based on flashy demonstrations or promises of efficiency. But behind every AI tool is a company with its own agenda. Are they genuinely committed to education, or are they primarily interested in collecting data and building market share?
Pedagogical integrity must come first
Then comes the question of pedagogical integrity: Does this tool genuinely support learning, or does it replace learning? The best AI tools strengthen the teacher’s role, they don’t reduce it. They open up deeper understanding, not superficial shortcuts. We must be able to see the difference.
If a vendor can’t explain how their tool enhances rather than replaces human teaching, that’s a red flag. We need partners who understand pedagogy, not just technology.
Demand transparency
Transparency becomes crucial. Can the vendor explain how their system works in a way that makes sense? Not necessarily all the technical details, but the principles behind it. And equally important: Are they open about the limitations? Those who promise everything rarely deliver anything of value.
I’m immediately suspicious of vendors who can’t or won’t explain their technology in plain language, or who refuse to discuss what their tools cannot do.
Security is non-negotiable
Students’ data, their learning processes, their vulnerability – all of this must be protected with the same care we use to protect them physically in the schoolyard. The vendor must be able to document not just that they follow the laws, but that they understand the responsibility.
This isn’t just about compliance. It’s about working with companies that genuinely respect the trust we place in them when we give them access to our students.
Choosing partners, not just products
We’re not just choosing a tool – we’re choosing a partner in the work of shaping tomorrow’s citizens. That partnership must be based on shared values, mutual respect, and a genuine commitment to what’s best for young people.
The question isn’t “What can this technology do?” but “What kind of educational future are we building together?” That’s the conversation every school should have before signing any contract.
Jacobsen: Offer a best case and a worst case 2035 scenario of evolution of the interaction between AI and educational systems.
Jørgensen: I think about this often, and I see two very different paths we could take.
The dream scenario
In the best case, we achieve what we’ve always dreamed of: AI becomes the ultimate pedagogical partner. Each student has their own learning journey, adapted not just to their academic level, but to their unique way of understanding the world. Teachers become what we always should be – wise guides who use our time on the human elements: to inspire, to challenge, to be present when a student makes a breakthrough.
The system knows each student’s strengths and challenges so well that it can predict where they need support before they know it themselves. But it never replaces human judgment – it informs it. We see patterns we could never have seen alone, but we always make the important decisions ourselves.
We solve the privacy problem not by collecting less data, but by giving each family full control over their information. AI systems learn and adapt, but they do so within boundaries that our society has set together.
In this future, technology truly serves human flourishing.
The nightmare scenario
In the worst case, we create an education machine that produces students instead of developing human beings. AI systems take over so much of the learning process that teachers become technical operaJørgensens, and students forget what it feels like to struggle with a problem until they solve it themselves.
Every movement, every answer, every hesitation is recorded and analyzed. Children grow up knowing they’re being moniJørgensened and evaluated by algorithms they don’t understand. Their creativity is channeled into predictable patterns that the system can measure.
Worst of all: we create a class divide between those who have access to the best AI systems and those who must manage with standard solutions. Education, which should be the great equalizer, becomes the opposite.
The choice is ours
Reality will lie somewhere between these extremes – the question is how close to the best scenario we can come, and how well we can avoid the worst.
The determining facJørgensen won’t be the technology itself, but the choices we make today about how we implement it. Every policy decision, every procurement choice, every classroom practice is a small step toward one future or the other.
I remain optimistic, but only because I believe we still have time to choose wisely. The future isn’t something that happens to us – it’s something we create through our daily decisions about what kind of education we want for our children.
Jacobsen: Will teachers be deskilled by AI’s ubiquity? Is this perception or merely image?
Jørgensen: This question strikes at the heart of what we believe teaching actually is. And the answer depends entirely on how we define skill in the first place.
The narrow view
If we see teaching as primarily content delivery and administrative management, then yes – AI will absolutely deskill teachers. These systems can generate lesson plans, create assessments, provide instant feedback, and even deliver personalized instruction more efficiently than most human teachers ever could. In this narrow view, the teacher becomes redundant, reduced to a classroom moniJørgensen overseeing AI-driven learning.
But this reveals a profound misunderstanding of what skilled teaching actually entails.
What real teaching skill looks like
The master teacher’s skill lies not in information transmission but in human connection – in reading the subtle signs that a student is struggling with more than just mathematics, in knowing when to push and when to support, in creating the conditions where genuine learning becomes possible.
This is the skill that no AI can replicate: the ability to see the whole human being behind the learner, to respond to needs that aren’t explicitly stated, to inspire growth that goes beyond curriculum objectives.
The real danger: skill substitution
The real risk isn’t deskilling – it’s skill substitution. When we allow AI to take over tasks that require pedagogical judgment, we atrophy those muscles. If teachers stop designing learning experiences because AI does it for them, they lose the ability to understand why certain approaches work. If they stop assessing student work thoughtfully because automated systems provide instant grades, they miss the deeper insights that come from careful observation.
We risk becoming deskilled not because AI is inherently deskilling, but because we choose convenience over competence.
Perception versus reality
However, we must distinguish between perception and reality. Society may perceive teaching as deskilled if we reduce it to measurable outputs that AI can replicate. But the communities that truly understand education – parents, students, thoughtful administraJørgensens – they know the difference between AI-assisted learning and human teaching.
The choice is ours
The question isn’t whether AI will deskill teachers, but whether we will allow it to. The choice is ours: we can use AI as a tool that amplifies human capability, freeing teachers to focus on the uniquely human aspects of education. Or we can surrender our professional judgment to algorithmic efficiency.
The teachers who thrive will be those who become more skilled, not less – skilled in understanding both human learning and technological capability, skilled in knowing when to trust AI and when to trust their professional instincts.
This is our moment to define what teaching excellence looks like in an AI world. We can choose enhancement over replacement, wisdom over efficiency, human judgment over algorithmic convenience.
Jacobsen: How will AI amplify or reduce power asymmetries in education between countries, or within countries and their socio-economically stratified populations?
Jørgensen: This is perhaps the most uncomfortable question we must face about AI in education – because the answer threatens to shatter our most cherished belief that education is the great equalizer.
The brutal reality
The brutal reality is that AI will likely amplify existing inequalities, not reduce them. Technology has never been neutral, and educational AI is no exception. The question isn’t whether disparities will emerge, but how severe they will become.
I wish I could offer a more optimistic view, but my experience in education has taught me that new technologies consistently benefit those who already have advantages.
Global educational colonialism
Between countries, we’re witnessing the emergence of new educational colonialism. Nations with advanced AI capabilities – the United States, China, parts of Europe – are developing systems that will define global educational standards. Countries without these resources will become dependent on foreign AI systems, losing control over what their children learn and how they learn it. The data flows one direction: from the Global South to Silicon Valley servers.
This isn’t just about technology access – it’s about cultural and intellectual sovereignty.
Domestic stratification
Within countries, the stratification is already beginning. Wealthy districts acquire sophisticated AI tuJørgensening systems that adapt to individual learning styles, provide instant multilingual support, and offer advanced analytical capabilities. Meanwhile, under-resourced schools receive basic AI tools – often the same systems, but with fewer features, less support, and limited customization.
The deeper inequality
But the real inequality isn’t just in access – it’s in application. Privileged students learn to use AI as a creative partner, developing critical thinking about algorithmic bias and learning to collaborate with intelligent systems. They’re prepared for a world where AI literacy determines economic opportunity.
Disadvantaged students often encounter AI as a replacement for human interaction – automated tuJørgensening systems substituting for the individual attention they desperately need.
The cruel irony
The cruelest irony is that AI could theoretically democratize high-quality education. Imagine: every child having access to personalized tuJørgensening that rivals the best private instruction. The technology exists to make this possible. But implementation requires massive public investment, thoughtful policy design, and political will to prioritize equity over efficiency.
Educational castes
Without deliberate intervention, we risk creating educational castes: AI-enhanced learners who develop sophisticated digital reasoning skills, and AI-dependent learners who become passive consumers of algorithmic instruction. The gap between these groups will determine social mobility for generations.
The moral choice
The choice before us is stark: We can use AI to finally fulfill education’s promise of equal opportunity, or we can allow it to cement inequality more deeply than ever before. This isn’t a technological challenge – it’s a moral one.
Every decision we make about AI implementation – from procurement policies to teacher training – either moves us toward equity or away from it. There’s no neutral ground here.
Jacobsen: What unique responsibilities and comparative advantages do high-IQ communities have in addressing these shifts?
Jørgensen: As someone who has worked for many years as a teacher in hisJørgenseny, religion, and social studies, while also being active in international high-IQ communities, I view these questions through both an educational and societal lens. My experience tells me that intelligence alone is not enough – it must be connected to creativity, ethical responsibility, and the willingness to communicate with the broader society.
Our genuine advantages
Our comparative advantages are real, but they come with strings attached. Members of high-IQ communities can often see patterns, structures, and long-term consequences earlier than most. This ability to move beyond surface-level analysis allows us to anticipate societal shifts before they become obvious. We tend not only to understand complexity but also to imagine alternative solutions – creative flexibility that becomes essential when existing models no longer work in times of disruption.
While much of society focuses on immediate concerns, we’re well positioned for long-range thinking – about climate change, technological disruption, and the ethical questions surrounding artificial intelligence. With greater intellectual ability comes the responsibility to ask not just “Can we?” but “Should we?” We can play a crucial role in holding both ourselves and society accountable.
Educational responsibilities
In education specifically, our advantage is clear. Having worked with gifted students myself, I know how critical it is to provide them with opportunities that match their potential. High-IQ communities can create networks and resources that empower young talents and prevent them from being overlooked by systems that weren’t designed for them.
But our responsibilities are equally demanding. Even within selective organizations, we must ensure diversity of background, culture, and perspective. Intelligence is not bound by social or geographical borders, and our communities must reflect that reality.
The communication imperative
Most critically: complex ideas are worthless if they remain locked inside closed groups. We have a duty to translate our insights into language and frameworks that policymakers, educaJørgensens, and ordinary citizens can understand and apply. When one has the capacity to see further, one must also act more responsibly.
This is where many high-IQ communities fail – they become exclusive clubs rather than engines for positive change.
Practical commitments
The practical reality is this: We must form interdisciplinary working groups to address pressing challenges, create educational materials that help teachers support gifted children in ordinary classrooms, and build menJørgensenship networks for young talents who lack resources in their local environments.
We need to be present in the conversations that matter, not just the ones that interest us intellectually.
The choice before us
Without these commitments, intellectual capacity risks becoming isolated. With them, it can become a genuine force for positive change.
Intelligence without service is merely potential. Intelligence with responsibility becomes a tool for building the kind of society we want our children to inherit.
Jacobsen: If you could launch one six-month pilot that integrates AI in schools while modelling equitable global-governance principles, what would it be?
Jørgensen: Here’s what I would do – and it might surprise you because it’s not about the technology at all.
A revolutionary council
I would create the Global Student Voice Council on Educational AI.
Picture this: Students aged 14-18 from twelve countries – representing every continent, every economic level, urban and rural contexts. Not the usual suspects from elite international schools, but genuine diversity: a girl from a village school in Bangladesh, a boy from inner-city Detroit, another from rural Norway, one from a favela in São Paulo.
These are the voices we never hear in discussions about educational technology, yet they’re the ones who will live with our decisions.
Students as critics and co-designers
These students would spend six months evaluating three different AI educational tools – but here’s the twist: they would do so not as passive users, but as informed critics and co-designers. They would learn how these systems work, who built them, what data they collect, and whose values they embed.
We would give them the tools to understand power structures, not just user interfaces.
Revolutionary governance
The governance structure would be revolutionary: Decisions about which tools to recommend, how they should be improved, and what safeguards are needed would be made by the students themselves, using consensus-building methods from different cultural traditions. No adults would have voting power – only advisory roles.
Peer-to-peer networks
Every month, these students would report back to their home communities – not through formal presentations, but through peer-to-peer networks. They would teach other students what they’ve learned about AI, privacy, and power. They would become ambassadors for thoughtful technology adoption.
Young people trust other young people in ways they’ll never trust adults.
Speaking truth to power
The radical element: At the end of six months, these students would present their findings not to education ministers or tech CEOs, but to the UN General Assembly. Their recommendations would carry the moral weight of representing the generation most affected by these decisions.
Flipping the power dynamic
Why this matters: We spend endless time asking adults what AI should do to children, but we never ask children what role they want AI to play in their lives. This pilot would flip the power dynamic entirely.
The real transformation
The real outcome wouldn’t be better AI tools – it would be a generation of young people who understand that they have agency over the technology that shapes their future. That’s the foundation of any truly equitable digital society.
When we give young people real power and real responsibility, they consistently surprise us with their wisdom. It’s time we trusted them with decisions about their own educational future.
Jacobsen: How would you evaluate success?
Jørgensen: This is the question that reveals whether we’re serious about transformation or just playing with expensive toys.
The wrong metrics
Success cannot be measured by the metrics the technology companies want us to use – engagement rates, time on platform, completion percentages. These tell us nothing about whether students are actually learning to think, to question, to become the kinds of human beings our society needs.
We’ve been seduced by data that’s easy to collect rather than focusing on outcomes that actually matter.
What real success looks like
Real success looks like this: A teacher who uses AI tools becomes more human, not less. They have more time for the conversations that change lives because the administrative burden has lifted. They understand their students more deeply because they have better information, but they never mistake information for wisdom.
Success means students who collaborate with AI while maintaining their intellectual independence. They use these tools to explore ideas they couldn’t reach alone, but they never surrender their capacity for original thought. Most importantly, they understand the difference between AI assistance and AI dependence.
The equity test
The equity test is non-negotiable: Success means the gap between privileged and disadvantaged students narrows, not widens. If AI makes the rich schools richer and leaves struggling schools further behind, we have failed completely, regardless of any other metrics.
This is where most technology initiatives fail – they improve overall averages while deepening disparities.
The ultimate measurement
But here’s the measurement that matters most: Ten years from now, can our students think critically about the world they inherit? Can they solve problems we haven’t anticipated? Can they maintain their humanity while working alongside artificial intelligence?
These are the questions that matter, but they’re also the hardest to measure.
Human success metrics
The ultimate success metric isn’t technological at all – it’s human. Have we raised a generation that is more creative, more empathetic, more capable of democratic participation than the one before? Have we preserved what makes education transformative while enhancing it with tools that amplify human potential?
The real test
If we can answer yes to these questions, then we’ve succeeded. If we can only point to improved test scores and efficiency gains, then we’ve optimized the wrong things entirely.
Success, in the end, is measured not in the classroom but in the kind of society these students create when they become adults. That’s the metric that matters – and it’s the one we’ll have to wait decades to truly evaluate.
But if we’re not designing our AI implementations with that long-term vision in mind, we’re already failing.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, again, Tor.
Discussion
Tor Arne Jørgensen offers a clear map of the AI pressure points inside contemporary schooling and, more importantly, a compass for navigating them without losing the human center of education. His fivefold problem statement—assessment integrity, homework authenticity, critical discernment, shortcut culture, and erosion of personal development—tracks a simple truth: when tools get smarter, institutions must get wiser. The practical risk is obvious (cheating, inflated signals of mastery), but the deeper risk is cultural: mistaking answer-getting for understanding and outsourcing the very struggle that forges independent thinkers.
Policy context matters. Within the Norwegian framework, teachers remain pedagogical leaders, AI use must be declared, and centrally administered exams tighten controls. Jørgensen treats these not as shackles but as scaffolding for a broader redesign: diversify assessments (oral, practical, process-based), shift weight from the product to the learning journey, and build AI literacy that includes privacy, sourcing, and copyright—so students can tell when a system is useful and when it is merely confident.
His account of teacher “value-add” rejects the tired trope that AI makes educators obsolete. The irreplaceable work is relational and contextual: real-time judgment about needs, building trust so intellectual risk is possible, modelling source-critical thinking, and designing experiences that exercise higher-order cognition and ethical reasoning. In this framing, AI amplifies good teaching when subordinated to pedagogy; it corrodes learning when convenience substitutes for competence.
Equity is the fulcrum. Infrastructure and competence gaps split schools into digital haves and have-nots, turning postcode into destiny. Jørgensen argues for coordinated teacher training, privacy-by-design governance, and transparent vendor selection that prioritizes pedagogy over pitch decks. His ethical bill of particulars—dependency, cognitive atrophy, safety theater, and the displacement of face-to-face life by mediated contact—connects today’s classroom realities (school avoidance, anxiety, fractured attention) with tomorrow’s civic costs.
Developmentally, he sequences AI literacy from early recognition and boundaries (primary), through critical judgment and practical ethics (lower secondary), to integrity, responsibility, and co-creation (upper secondary). Vendor evaluation follows the same logic: know who holds power over data and defaults, demand intelligible explanations and limits, and refuse tools that replace rather than enrich learning.
The futures sketch is deliberately binary to force present clarity. In the dream path, AI personalizes without pathologizing, families retain data sovereignty, and teachers invest more time in human work. In the nightmare, surveillance-pedagogy sorts children into educational castes while creativity is rerouted into measurable grooves. Which future arrives is not technological fate; it is policy, procurement, training, and classroom practice—multiplied daily.
Finally, Jørgensen’s pilot—students as evaluators and co-designers reporting to their peers and, ultimately, to the UN—captures the core ethic running through the interview: education with AI should be done with students, not to them. His success metrics follow suit: less dashboard vanity, more human outcomes—intellectual independence, narrowed gaps, and graduates fit for democratic life alongside machines.
Methods
The interview was conducted via typed questions—with explicit consent—for review, and curation. This process complied with applicable data protection laws, including the California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA), Canada’s Personal Information Protection and Electronic Documents Act (PIPEDA), and Europe’s General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), i.e., recordings if any were stored securely, retained only as needed, and deleted upon request, as well in accordance with Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and Advertising Standards Canada guidelines.
Data Availability
No datasets were generated or analyzed during the current article. All interview content remains the intellectual property of the interviewer and interviewee.
References
(No external academic sources were cited for this interview.)
Journal & Article Details
- Publisher: In-Sight Publishing
- Publisher Founding: March 1, 2014
- Web Domain: http://www.in-sightpublishing.com
- Location: Fort Langley, Township of Langley, British Columbia, Canada
- Journal: In-Sight: Interviews
- Journal Founding: August 2, 2012
- Frequency: Four Times Per Year
- Review Status: Non-Peer-Reviewed
- Access: Electronic/Digital & Open Access
- Fees: None (Free)
- Volume Numbering: 13
- Issue Numbering: 4
- Section: A
- Theme Type: Discipline
- Theme Premise: Education
- Theme Part: 1
- Formal Sub-Theme: None.
- Individual Publication Date: October 8, 2025
- Issue Publication Date: January 1, 2026
- Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
- Word Count:
- Image Credits:
- ISSN (International Standard Serial Number): 2369-6885
Acknowledgements
The author acknowledges Tor Arne Jorgensen for his time, expertise, and valuable contributions. His thoughtful insights and detailed explanations have greatly enhanced the quality and depth of this work, providing a solid foundation for the discussion presented herein.
Author Contributions
S.D.J. conceived the subject matter, conducted the interview, transcribed and edited the conversation, and prepared the manuscript.
Competing Interests
The author declares no competing interests.
License & Copyright
In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivatives 4.0 International License.
© Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing 2012–Present.
Unauthorized use or duplication of material without express permission from Scott Douglas Jacobsen is strictly prohibited. Excerpts and links must use full credit to Scott Douglas Jacobsen and In-Sight Publishing with direction to the original content.
Supplementary Information
Below are various citation formats for Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education.
American Medical Association (AMA 11th Edition)
Jacobsen S. Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education October 2025;13(4). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/jor-gensen-ai-pedagogy
American Psychological Association (APA 7th Edition)
Jacobsen, S. (2025, October 8). Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education. In-Sight Publishing, 13(4).
Brazilian National Standards (ABNT)
JACOBSEN, S. Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education. In-Sight: Interviews, Fort Langley, v. 13, n. 4, 2025.
Chicago/Turabian, Author-Date (17th Edition)
Jacobsen, Scott. 2025. “Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education.” In-Sight: Interviews 13 (4). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/jor-gensen-ai-pedagogy.
Chicago/Turabian, Notes & Bibliography (17th Edition)
Jacobsen, S. “Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education.” In-Sight: Interviews 13, no. 4 (October 2025). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/jor-gensen-ai-pedagogy.
Harvard
Jacobsen, S. (2025) ‘Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education’, In-Sight: Interviews, 13(4). http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/jor-gensen-ai-pedagogy.
Harvard (Australian)
Jacobsen, S 2025, ‘Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education’, In-Sight: Interviews, vol. 13, no. 4, http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/jor-gensen-ai-pedagogy.
Modern Language Association (MLA, 9th Edition)
Jacobsen, Scott. “Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education.” In-Sight: Interviews, vol. 13, no. 4, 2025, http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/jor-gensen-ai-pedagogy.
Vancouver/ICMJE
Jacobsen S. Conversation with Tor Arne Jørgensen on AI Revolution Challenges in Norwegian Education [Internet]. 2025 Oct;13(4). Available from: http://www.in-sightpublishing.com/jor-gensen-ai-pedagogy
Note on Formatting
This document follows an adapted Nature research-article format tailored for an interview. Traditional sections such as Methods, Results, and Discussion are replaced with clearly defined parts: Abstract, Keywords, Introduction, Main Text (Interview), and a concluding Discussion, along with supplementary sections detailing Data Availability, References, and Author Contributions. This structure maintains scholarly rigor while effectively accommodating narrative content.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/09
Irina Tsukerman is a human rights and national security attorney based in New York and Connecticut. She earned her Bachelor of Arts in National and Intercultural Studies and Middle East Studies from Fordham University in 2006, followed by a Juris Doctor from Fordham University School of Law in 2009. She operates a boutique national security law practice. She serves as President of Scarab Rising, Inc., a media and security strategic advisory firm. Additionally, she is the Editor-in-Chief of The Washington Outsider, which focuses on foreign policy, geopolitics, security, and human rights. She is actively involved in several professional organizations, including the American Bar Association’s Energy, Environment, and Science and Technology Sections, where she serves as Program Vice Chair in the Oil and Gas Committee. She is also a member of the New York City Bar Association. She serves on the Middle East and North Africa Affairs Committee and affiliates with the Foreign and Comparative Law Committee. She argued that Gaza aid site deaths result from broader insecurity and militant interference, not U.S. distribution, cautioning against politicizing humanitarian efforts. On Iran, she noted that the likely relocation of uranium stockpiles under intelligence watch complicates nonproliferation. Discussing regional unrest, she warned of Russian impunity and criticized the selective application of the UN Charter. She lauded Israel’s internal war crimes probe, questioned Trump’s diplomatic and financial tactics, condemned Southeast Asian torture networks, and urged focus on substantive solutions.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: UN Secretary-General António Guterres has criticized a U.S.-backed humanitarian aid initiative in Gaza, reportedly describing it as “inherently unsafe.” This criticism followed incidents where civilians were killed at aid distribution points in the Gaza Strip. According to AP News, Guterres linked the danger not directly to the aid initiative itself but to the broader insecurity and lack of coordination around humanitarian access in Gaza, where ongoing conflict and airstrikes have endangered civilians.
Irina Tsukerman: Civilian deaths at aid sites were not directly caused by the distribution initiative but rather by the broader security situation—particularly the conduct of warring parties. Hamas has been accused of undermining various aid efforts, sometimes through interference or by asserting control over distribution. There have also been reports, including from Israeli and U.S. sources, that Hamas has confiscated aid or interfered with its delivery.
Despite these challenges, the U.S. and Israel have cooperated to deliver millions of aid packages to Gaza. Initially, many of these efforts were successful, including airdrops and the construction of a temporary maritime pier by the U.S. military. However, these efforts have faced logistical difficulties, including damage to the dock and reports of aid not reaching civilians due to chaos on the ground and potential interference from local factions.
One controversial element of Israel’s broader strategy has included attempts to support or arm local factions that could act as rivals to Hamas. These efforts, which some sources describe as covert or indirect, aim to weaken Hamas’s grip. However, critics argue that empowering local militias or clans—some of whom may be secular but authoritarian and violent—risks replacing one problematic actor with another. Historical accounts suggest that Hamas initially gained political traction in Gaza in part because many residents distrusted the existing factions tied to the Fatah-led Palestinian Authority, who were widely seen as corrupt or ineffective.
The main issue, then, is the conflation of humanitarian and political objectives. By blending aid delivery with attempts to reshape local power structures, the initiative became vulnerable to political manipulation. This gave Hamas both the motive and the justification to intervene.
Guterres’s criticism may reflect frustration with the breakdown of neutrality in humanitarian delivery. However, critics argue that his comments risk misplacing blame—targeting a relatively successful U.S.-led aid effort rather than the militant interference that disrupted it. There is also concern that some UN-affiliated agencies in Gaza have been compromised or politicized over time, which complicates coordination.
It is fair to criticize elements of Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu’s political strategies. However, one must also acknowledge that certain aspects of the aid initiative were practical—until political entanglements and local militant control undermined them.
As for recent developments related to Iran and the movement of uranium following Israeli airstrikes, Reuters has reported that Iran has threatened retaliation over the assassination of senior IRGC commanders and military strikes targeting its regional proxies. There have also been concerns in Washington about Iran’s nuclear program. However, there is no verified public report stating that the U.S. moved Iranian uranium after airstrikes, nor that President Trump warned Iran to relocate its stockpiles ahead of strikes. These claims appear to conflate multiple timelines or rely on unofficial sources.
What is known is that Iran continues to enrich uranium beyond the limits set by the now-defunct Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA). U.S. officials are closely monitoring these developments. Discussions in Congress include possible additional sanctions or deterrence measures in response to Iranian escalation.
But you have to admit—once you give the Iranians advanced warning, of course, they are going to move their uranium stockpiles. The question is: where did they go? These trucks carrying enriched uranium cannot just vanish. They have to be somewhere. If the uranium was relocated, and it most likely was, then that new location is probably known—at least partially—by intelligence agencies, as it has been under discussion for some time. So why has there been no initiative to intercept it before it was moved so deep underground that there is now practically no chance of recovering it?
This also means that Iran could potentially restart its nuclear program almost immediately without needing to wait for reconstruction or to retrieve buried stockpiles from damaged sites like Fordow or Natanz. All of this creates a highly intractable situation. The U.S. is attempting to bring Iran back to the negotiating table. But without conditions that prevent Iran from continuing its nuclear development covertly, those negotiations are likely to fail. Iran currently has no incentive to negotiate, as it believes it still holds strategic leverage.
And now it might. If Iran has managed to preserve or relocate even part of its uranium, the threat remains. Furthermore, if some of the recent intelligence is correct—that Iran was closer to developing a nuclear weapon than previously thought—then it is possible that components or even completed weapons were smuggled out of the country before these discoveries were made public. Iran has had longstanding exchanges with China, Oman, North Korea, and various non-state actors. It is conceivable that nuclear materials, or even fully assembled devices, could have been moved alongside other weapons, oil, or gas shipments.
In such a scenario, Iran may not need to build a new weapon on its soil; it could have outsourced the final stages of production or even stored weapons abroad, perhaps in North Korea. This would mean Iran has retained a strategic deterrent without openly violating its commitments in a traceable way. While these possibilities remain speculative, they are not being discussed widely in public discourse. Yet the implications are profound: incomplete strikes that leave Iran’s leadership intact and its infrastructure only partially damaged may serve as motivation for Tehran to accelerate its nuclear ambitions. It could even lead to a weapons test shortly if Iran believes the geopolitical window is closing.
Jacobsen: The United Nations’ peacekeeping chief, Jean-Pierre Lacroix, has stated that the conflict in Sudan is beginning to impact the Central African Republic. This was highlighted following an attack on a UN peacekeeper. What are your thoughts on the potential for this conflict to expand regionally? And if it does, what are the appropriate international responses to prevent escalation?
Tsukerman: I don’t expect a large-scale confrontation in the immediate future. The tensions have not yet reached that threshold. However, the fact that there is already spillover—and that incidents like attacks on UN peacekeepers are occurring—shows that destabilization efforts are underway. These are not isolated accidents. There are actors, including Russia and regional factions, who benefit from instability and may be encouraging it.
The more Russia sees no consequences for its actions elsewhere, the more it is emboldened to provoke unrest in additional regions—just because it can. This creates a dangerous precedent. We are already seeing troubling signs: for instance, former President Trump has publicly pushed to end U.S. funding for democracy-promoting initiatives abroad. That means Russian dissidents, Ukrainian civil society groups, and other vulnerable actors are losing critical support.
Additionally, there is a reported recommendation from the White House to end investigations into Russian war crimes in Ukraine. If that happens, it further signals to Moscow and others that international norms are optional. Such policies not only weaken Western influence but embolden authoritarian regimes to act without fear of accountability.
All of this is signalling to Russia that it can commit war crimes, provocations, invasions, and acts of aggression with impunity. Suppose Moscow can get away with a direct, full-scale invasion of a sovereign country like Ukraine. In that case, smaller-scale proxy attacks will likely proliferate. That is basic geopolitical logic. Russia’s aim appears to be creating as many flashpoints and destabilizing incidents as possible, forcing the U.S. and its allies to spread their attention thin—monitoring too many regions at once. This reduces the ability to respond effectively to any one crisis and weakens global coordination.
Jacobsen: The U.S. has recently threatened to boycott the upcoming UN Development Finance Summit. What are your thoughts?
Tsukerman: There has been much inflammatory rhetoric surrounding that summit. It is no secret that Trump has little regard for multilateral international gatherings, especially those organized by the UN. He has had longstanding issues with the UN—some of which involve its perceived interference with U.S. sovereignty, particularly when it comments on or critiques U.S. constitutional matters.
However, Trump’s more profound concern is the growing influence of China in these international arenas. He wants the United States to maintain dominance without contributing more financially, yet is simultaneously frustrated that other powers—especially China—are using diplomacy, lobbying, and funding to advance their influence in the vacuum left by the U.S. retreat.
So, now, the U.S. is attempting to withdraw, hoping that other countries will follow or that the absence of American participation will delegitimize the summit. The U.S. still holds a permanent veto at the Security Council, but walking away from other UN platforms only diminishes its soft power and influence.
And that is the irony: by not offering viable alternatives or engaging bilaterally with summit participants, the U.S. ultimately isolates itself. It is not setting up new channels, building alternative coalitions, or pursuing a replacement strategy. It is simply boycotting—thereby appearing more like a spoiler than a global leader.
Jacobsen: The UN Charter is now marking its 80th anniversary. Secretary-General Guterres has warned against countries engaging with the UN in a “à la carte” fashion—selectively adhering to Charter obligations. He cited violations tied to multiple conflicts. While it is unclear whether he referred to historical, ongoing, or both kinds of breaches, the criticism seems valid in all three cases. What are your reflections on this anniversary and the selective adherence to the Charter?
Tsukerman: It is painfully apparent that the UN and other international organizations are falling short of their founding missions—especially in the realm of human rights. With the global rise in authoritarianism and widespread human rights abuses, many of the Charter’s commitments now feel hollow.
States responsible for gross violations of human rights are not being sanctioned or isolated; instead, they are welcomed at international gatherings, given platforms, and in some cases—such as with permanent members of the Security Council—granted veto power. That creates a system in which enforcement is nearly impossible.
When we mark anniversaries like the 80th anniversary of the UN Charter, it is primarily symbolic. Such milestones only hold weight if the member states genuinely uphold the values they signed on to. Selective engagement, or “à la carte” adherence, undermines the entire structure. If countries only follow the rules when it suits them, the system collapses into moral relativism and strategic opportunism.
The fact that selective treatment of international law and standards occurs is, from a practical standpoint, not surprising. Of course, states will cherry-pick the benefits that benefit them and push their agendas when given the opportunity. That is precisely where international consensus is supposed to function—where other member states and institutional partners are expected to hold each other accountable. But they do not. The disparity across nations is so stark that it is astonishing that any human rights are respected at all, anywhere.
What is needed is a clear and enforceable human rights charter. But enforcement begins at the national level before it can be applied internationally. And frankly, without mechanisms to hold global powers like China and Russia accountable—both of whom routinely use their positions on the UN Security Council to block scrutiny of their own human rights violations—it is challenging to envision meaningful global enforcement.
These powers often collaborate within the Security Council to prevent serious consequences for their actions. Without structural reforms or independent enforcement mechanisms, international human rights law becomes performative. At present, it risks becoming a global punchline.
Jacobsen: Reuters recently reported that Amnesty International and others uncovered 53 scam compounds operating out of Cambodia. These centers reportedly traffic and torture victims, including children, to run global cyber fraud schemes. Any thoughts?
Tsukerman: Honestly, I should be more shocked than I am. The proliferation of scam networks in certain parts of Southeast Asia is not a new phenomenon. What is new—and truly alarming—is the evidence that these criminal enterprises are increasingly partnering with human traffickers and other organized crime groups to expand their operations.
Why target children? First, because they can. Children are vulnerable, easily manipulated, and powerless. Second, it is significantly more challenging for authorities to investigate or prosecute such abuses, especially in areas where corruption is rampant or law enforcement is complicit. Third, there are well-established trafficking networks in the region that can easily supply these criminal syndicates with child victims.
Why torture them? Because these groups are utterly ruthless. People often underestimate the severity of financial fraud, but these operations are not bloodless crimes. Victims are usually elderly, isolated, or vulnerable individuals who are deprived of their life savings. These groups also engage in ransomware, extortion, and blackmail. There have been suicides linked to their scams, and many victims lose their homes, pensions, or basic livelihoods.
So, the objectives are predatory, and the methods are equally brutal. Unfortunately, prosecution is difficult. First, because these operations are transnational, requiring cooperation among countries with vastly different legal systems, political agendas, and law enforcement capabilities. Second, because many of the details of how these groups operate have only recently come to light, they had long operated in near-total secrecy.
While the existence of such scams in Southeast Asia has been known for years, how they function—the forced labour, the torture, the human trafficking pipeline—has only recently begun to be exposed in full detail. That exposure is critical if international law enforcement is ever going to catch up.
There has been a fundamental lack of attention, lack of resources, and low prioritization when it comes to tackling these transnational scams and trafficking networks. In addition, there is a clear deficit in training and preparedness for this type of complex, hybrid criminal activity. Now that these operations have crossed into open physical violence and abductions, perhaps the international response dynamic will shift. But it should not have taken this long.
Jacobsen: Israeli forces have reportedly launched an internal war crimes investigation concerning the deaths of 500 civilians in Gaza. Any thoughts on this?
Tsukerman: That is a very encouraging sign. It is precisely what should happen when credible allegations of grave violations are raised. The fact that Israel is conducting a self-policing investigation shows that the mechanisms of accountability are functioning, at least to some extent.
Yes, one can—and should—criticize certain government officials or political leaders for using inflammatory rhetoric that may contribute to a dehumanizing environment. However, the rule of law requires that credible allegations are investigated and, where warranted, punished. That is the mark of a functioning democracy and an ethical military code of conduct.
I hope that some of Israel’s harshest critics in the region take this as a lesson—not just as an opportunity to issue more condemnations. Instead, they should focus on adopting similar transparency and internal accountability mechanisms. Criticism is easy. Facing international and domestic pressure while investigating your actions is much harder—and that is what Israel is doing here.
Jacobsen: Shifting to another topic, Australia’s defense outlays are about 2.0% of GDP, with a forecast to reach 2.33% only by 2033–34. As you know, NATO’s minimum spending guideline is 2%. Canada, by comparison, remains around 1.4% and is projected to reach 2% in the coming year. What are your thoughts on Australia’s case and the broader implications of this American pressure?
Tsukerman: Australia faces its own set of unique security challenges, with China representing the most significant concern. While I do not believe China will launch a direct attack on Australia shortly, asymmetric threats—like cyber warfare, influence campaigns, and economic coercion—are real and growing. Australia needs to be prepared for these contingencies, which are part of NATO’s evolving doctrine.
Moreover, Australia is a crucial ally in the Indo-Pacific and a member of strategic alliances like AUKUS and the Quad. With mounting instability in the region, it is in everyone’s interest that Australia is well-resourced and strategically positioned.
That said, this issue is not just about raw budget numbers. Spending 2% of GDP is a baseline, but what truly matters is how that money is used—whether it is being invested in modernization, joint operations capacity, cyber defence, intelligence, and other force multipliers. Budgetary compliance alone does not guarantee security or alliance strength. Strategic clarity and efficient use of funds are just as important.
Correctly allocating a defence budget means more than just hitting a spending target. It requires ensuring that deliveries are made on time, that procurement processes are transparent and efficient, and that priorities are coordinated with allies in a way that addresses shared strategic challenges. All of these factors matter just as much as the actual size of the budget.
Simply throwing money at a problem does not guarantee responsible use. It often leads to the opposite. The U.S. Department of Defence, for example, has one of the most significant budgets in the world. Yet, it has consistently failed audits and has persistent issues with oversight, inventory tracking, and cost control. This shows that even with near-unlimited funding, mismanagement is possible—and, in some cases, systemic.
Jacobsen: One of the significant developments this week was a minor update to the investigation into strikes in Gaza. Prime Minister Netanyahu has publicly denied claims that Israeli forces were ordered to shoot Palestinians seeking aid. Strikes reportedly continue to impact aid convoys and distribution points. So, the core issue remains the distinction between inadvertent harm and deliberate targeting. Any thoughts?
Tsukerman: I have not seen any verified evidence that supports the claim of a deliberate shoot-to-kill order against civilians seeking aid. Most of these allegations come from anonymous sources unwilling to go on record or from individuals who are openly opposed to the war effort and Israeli military conduct. That does not automatically invalidate their concerns, but it does raise red flags about reliability and motive.
There is a crucial distinction between legitimate critiques—such as concerns over proportionality, civilian safety, or strategic missteps—and fabricating or exaggerating claims to score political points. Some of these reports, in my view, may cross that line. When people insert intent where there is no clear evidence, they undermine the credibility of real, evidence-based human rights monitoring.
Suppose these accusations are being made solely to bolster a political case without the backing of forensic data or credible firsthand testimony. In that case, we risk turning war crimes allegations into tools of political warfare—rather than instruments of justice. That can inflame tensions, damage prospects for peace, and create misinformation that further destabilizes the region. It is crucial to demand transparency and accountability from all sides—but also to uphold rigorous standards of evidence in how these allegations are reported and evaluated.
Jacobsen: I would like to bring up one last issue—Trump’s recent comments criticizing negotiations with Canada. This seems to be getting very little coverage. What are your thoughts?
Tsukerman: Yes, that’s the elephant in the room. Trump’s remarks were not only dismissive but also based on a bizarre justification. He claimed that the breakdown in negotiations was due to Canada’s proposal to tax large tech companies—many of which are based in the United States.
Look, it is entirely reasonable to disagree over taxation and digital trade policies. But walking away from broader diplomatic and economic talks over a specific tax proposal—especially one that is being considered or adopted by several democratic nations—is disproportionate and counterproductive.
It sends a message that the U.S. is unwilling to engage in difficult but necessary negotiations with close allies. And it weakens the kind of cooperation that is needed to address global challenges—whether in trade, defence, climate, or digital regulation. Canada has consistently been a constructive partner in multilateral forums. Undermining that relationship over a policy disagreement risks not only damaging bilateral ties but also eroding the broader credibility of U.S. diplomacy.
The problem is that Trump has framed the dispute as some nefarious, ill-intentioned attack on Americans by the Prime Minister and the Canadian government. That is so absurd that it is hard to know where to begin. There is no logical reason why the talks should have collapsed over what was, in essence, a standard policy disagreement. That is precisely why such negotiations exist—to resolve these differences.
If a policy gap exists, the next step is to work out compromises—introduce a give-and-take model or create a new structural framework to meet the goals of both parties. Instead, it appears that the administration either lacked the creativity to move forward constructively or never intended to negotiate in good faith in the first place. Perhaps Trump, now that the Iran issue has faded somewhat, felt the need to return to this anti-Canada narrative as a distraction from domestic challenges.
There are ongoing crises at home—from legal troubles to economic uncertainty—and posturing against a neighbour like Canada might seem, to him, like an easy win for his political base. He may resume the talks at a later date. Still, suppose he continues to treat every reasonable disagreement as an existential threat. In that case, he will rapidly alienate traditional allies and lose valuable diplomatic capital.
This is incredibly self-destructive behaviour. Turning minor disagreements into full-scale diplomatic breakdowns erodes trust, credibility, and the long-term ability to negotiate anything meaningful.
Jacobsen: On a different note, Reuters has reported that a UAE-based fund purchased $100 million worth of Trump’s “World Liberty Coins,” a cryptocurrency initiative associated with his brand. Do you have thoughts on this?
Tsukerman: I mean, let us be honest—it is not a massive sum for the UAE. They spend significantly more on arms, infrastructure, and influence-building globally. But the optics here are blatant. It is a strategic move to curry favour with Trump. The logic seems to be: if other governments and actors are buying access and goodwill through symbolic or frivolous means, why not them, too?
Unfortunately, we are witnessing what appears to be open bribery. These cryptocurrencies have no demonstrable utility or value in global markets. Yet, they are being bought in bulk—not as an investment, but as a means to gain favour. That is the core issue: Trump has created an ecosystem in which foreign states feel empowered to participate in pay-to-play schemes with virtually no oversight.
This is not about diplomacy or even soft power. It is about personal enrichment in exchange for political leverage. That creates an immediate and dangerous conflict of interest between Trump’s role as a private businessman and his potential or actual role as head of state. This is behaviour that would be outright illegal under most standard interpretations of conflict-of-interest law.
In a functioning democracy with adequate enforcement mechanisms, something like this would be prohibited entirely. There would be immediate investigations. But the current political climate allows him to get away with behaviour that, under normal circumstances, would be grounds for serious legal action. It is not just unethical—it is potentially criminal.
This is an impeachable offence. But until the Democrats retake Congress, I do not see anyone making such a move—or even seriously raising the argument in public.
Jacobsen: Anything else worth bringing up?
Tsukerman: Mamdani’s election by the Democrats in New York.
Jacobsen: Let’s do Mamdani. He got elected—what are your initial thoughts?
Tsukerman: Mamdani’s election is significant, but what is troubling is how Republicans are handling it. They are focusing heavily on his alleged religious identity, framing it in a way that makes him seem like a threat. In doing so, they are turning him into a sympathetic figure for many observers, even those who might disagree with him on policy. By reducing everything to religious insinuations, they’re undermining legitimate critique and giving him political cover.
Instead of dismantling Mamdani’s hypocrisy and lack of political substance—his performative rhetoric, his privileged background, and his shallow understanding of complex policy issues—his critics are going after his alleged religious identity. That is a strategic mistake. He will not bring socialism; he will profit from socialist talking points while maintaining personal privilege. That is the argument they should be making. He is yet another political opportunist using ideological branding to build a platform. He is, frankly, a scammer.
Jacobsen: Any final thoughts for this week?
Tsukerman: Yes. There are severe issues in play right now. Unfortunately, many prominent figures seem more interested in hijacking these discussions—turning procedural matters into personal soapboxes, dramatizing secondary concerns, and diverting attention from the urgent issues that need resolution. That is the real takeaway from this week’s events: manufactured controversy continues to eclipse real solutions.
Jacobsen: Irina, thank you as always.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/09
Brian Akdemir, Director of E-Commerce at Bahdos, a premier fine jewelry retailer, discussed the impacts of new U.S. customs rules on cross-border e-commerce. With shipments over $800 now requiring formal entry, Akdemir highlights rising operational complexity, delays, and costs. He urges small businesses to innovate via partnerships and localized fulfillment. Larger carriers are more prepared, though mid-sized ones may struggle. Technologies like AI-powered customs platforms and blockchain offer promise. While consumers may tolerate slower shipping, expectations for product quality and experience remain. Akdemir stresses transparency and adaptability to remain competitive in this evolving landscape.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the impact on cross-border e-commerce with increased operational complexity of these new US customs?
Brian Akdemir: The new rules have specified in US customs that no shipment of more than $800 will undergo entry processing. This will create more complications for cross-border e-commerce businesses. The companies will have to develop two shipping plans: one of them will be only for the higher-value products, while the other will include all those that are below $800. This means putting additional systems into place, teaching employees new techniques on monitoring shipments for the right actions to be taken. Additional administrative work plus possibilities for mistakes will delay shipping, incur increased costs, and render the consumer experience not quite as smooth, all detrimental to cross-border sales.
Jacobsen: What will be the impact on small businesses?
Akdemir: Taking into account the fact that small companies related to international e-commerce find the recent laws difficult, it may be an opportunity for innovation. Smart small business owners would turn their minds to partnership models, inventory-sharing programs, or other novel ideas to assume the operational hassles that cross-border fulfillment entails. By modifying their methods and seeking ways to minimize formal entrance processing concerns, small businesses may sustain their competitiveness and continue attracting a global clientele.
Jacobsen: What will be the impact on international shipping?
Akdemir: With the new $800 threshold, shipping carriers may have to invest in automated solutions to help deal with the anticipated increase in formal customs clearances. This may include the creation of some new technologies to facilitate a faster entrance process requirement. However, the deployment of such an automated system may take time, resulting in interim inefficiencies and possible delays, as the industry adjusts to the new terrain. Carriers will have to balance compliance and speed, and this may result in higher costs that get passed on to businesses and consumers.How are you advising clients to redesign their fulfillment strategies?
Jacobsen:How are you advising clients to redesign their fulfillment strategies?
Akdemir: As a luxury goods retailer, I advocate focusing on creating more localized fulfillment networks. Instead of depending on a centralized worldwide distribution model, we are looking at deliberately grouping more products nearer important regional markets. This enables us to quickly handle lower-value shipments under the $800 customs threshold and still be able to effectively service higher-value orders that will call for formal clearance. I also support alliances with specialized logistics companies that are able to manage the complexity of customs on our behalf.
Jacobsen: What specific technologies are most promising for automating cross-border compliance?
Akdemir: I believe that the most promising technologies are AI-powered customs brokerage platforms and robotic process automation tools. For formal customs clearances, these can simplify data entry, document handling, and regulatory checks needed. Blockchain-based supply chain visibility solutions also catch my attention since they might help to simplify cross-border cargo tracking and compliance.
Jacobsen: How do you foresee consumer expectations shifting?
Akdemir: Given the additional difficulties of international delivery, I expect they will grow more accepting of somewhat longer delivery times. Their very high expectations for brand experience, product quality, and general purchase path will still hold, though. Companies will have to be quite open about their capacity for fulfillment and limitations as well as find strategies to keep a high customer experience in face of the new complexity.
Jacobsen: How prepared are major carriers to respond operationally to the customs complexities?
Akdemir: Right now, the main shipping carriers seem to be rather unprepared to different degrees. The larger, more established players like FedEx and UPS have made significant investments in customs brokerage technology and process automation. They’re better positioned to handle the anticipated spike in formal clearances. However, some mid-sized and regional carriers appear to be still catching up on adapting their operations. There may be some interim service disruptions and delays as the entire industry works to get up to speed on the new compliance requirements.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Brian.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/08
Uladzimir Sevruk is the Founder and CEO of Cata-Kor, leading advancements in NAD+ supplements and anti-aging solutions through scientific innovation, ethical longevity, and wellness. Sevruk, Founder and CEO of Cata-Kor, discusses ethical dilemmas in anti-aging interventions. He emphasizes balancing longevity benefits with societal concerns, advocating for transparency in research and equitable access to life extension technologies. Sevruk argues that longer lifespans should not exacerbate economic inequality or resource depletion, highlighting the importance of sustainability. He stresses that public involvement in these discussions ensures responsible innovation, making longevity advancements beneficial for all rather than a privileged few.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Experts can be split on more life. Some see these technologies as potentially revolutionary medical breakthroughs. Others are skeptical and might see them as leading to societal burden. How do you view this dichotomy?
Uladzimir Sevruk: Some people believe that life extension technologies are a discovery that will help people live longer and stay healthy. Others believe that these discoveries could create new problems, such as too many people, which will put pressure on the world economy as a whole. But people forget that everything has its pros and cons. We need to approach this issue sensibly so we can find a balance where people will live longer and it will not create problems. Also, new life extension technologies help to find cures for many diseases, which does not only prolong life but ensures quality of life.
Jacobsen: Anti-aging interventions may be inaccessible to most. What are the ethics of diverse accessibility to longevity technologies?
Sevruk: No proof-of-work for the average human of life extension techniques. But who among us doesn’t want to be healthy and live longer? And it is critical these technologies become more broadly available over time, as medicine once did. A few decades ago, surgeries and drugs were only possible for a few; now hundreds of millions of people are able to take them. The crux is that this does not turn into something dividing people into “the rich and long-lived” and “everyone else.”
Jacobsen: How can we address the ethical challenges there?
Sevruk: Life extension can only be done transparently to resolve the ethical questions around it. Companies developing these technologies need to be transparent about how they work, what risks are involved, and what benefits they provide. It shouldn’t only be scientists and business leaders who are involved in the conversation, but regular people too, to ensure decisions are made for the benefit of everyone and not just a few.
Jacobsen: Will longer lives put increased pressure on natural resources?
Sevruk: Naturally, the longer a person lives, the more food, water, housing, and energy all of humanity will need. But we can solve all of these problems if we invest in recycling and renewable energy. We have faced population growth before, this is nothing new for humanity, and we have always managed to find solutions. Technology does not stand still and is looking for a solution. The day we stop caring about the earth is our last day. And one of the ways to live longer, to live better, to live well, not just longer, is for society to be better, and that means simply caring about the environment.
Jacobsen: With Cata-Kor, how do companies ensure scientific integrity while navigating the ethical dilemmas in ambiguous emerging trends or breakthroughs in anti-aging research?
Sevruk: Companies that work on life extension must be completely transparent. Research must inspire confidence, be transparent to people, show how the methods work, open the research to the public, and pay attention to experts. This is what we at Cata-Kor believe in and uphold from our side, to provide you with the transparency and ethical accountability.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Uladzimir.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/07
Defense expert Anthony Cowden outlines the current U.S. administration’s foreign policy as a return to “Primacy” and a tripartite world ruled by the U.S., Russia, and China. This policy shift has led to strained relations with Canada, particularly through tariff-based economic coercion and disrespectful rhetoric framing Canada as the “51st state.” Violations of the USMCA and unilateral policy declarations by the President have eroded diplomatic trust. Canada, under Prime Minister Mark Carney, is now pivoting east and west to diversify trade, signaling a significant shift in North American economic and strategic alignment.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the current U.S. administration’s approach to foreign policy?
Anthony Cowden: The current U.S. administration approach to foreign policy can be summarized as a “return to Primacy” (1) and “rule by great powers” (2). The U.S. administration believes that the U.S. retains a singular position as the most powerful nation in the world, and is able to set “…norms of behaviour, determining when those norms have been breached, and action to enforce them.”(1) Ironically, as I have noted previously, “…the U.S. is rapidly shedding both its security and economic partners, so while it will still be a great power, the US will never again be as powerful in absolute terms as it is today.” (2). Current U.S. foreign policy actions seem to suggest that the U.S envisions a world not guided by past principals of liberal internationalism, but instead a “…a tripartite world ruled by three great powers – the United States, Russia, and China – each with their own sphere of influence.” (2)
(1) https://www.lowyinstitute.org/archive/what-primacy-exactly
(2)https://www.realcleardefense.com/articles/2025/03/31/a_tripartite_word__sort_of_1100856.html
Jacobsen: You mentioned economic coercion to pressure Canada. What is the form of coercion perceived by Canadian policymakers?
Cowden: The economic coercion that the U.S. is currently employing against Canada is, of course, tariffs. Despite the fact that the current President negotiated the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA) in 2018, the administration has turned its back on that agreement in a campaign to, at the very least, intimidate and cow Canadian leadership. It is not yet clear if this administration will expand its coercive efforts beyond tariff policy.
A parenthetical note about U.S. administration policies regarding the USMCA: since the U.S. has violated the USMCA with respect to economic relations with both Canada and Mexico, it is not clear why any nation would believe that the U.S. would honor any future trade agreement made with this administration. At the very least, considering the wide range of restrictive tariffs this administration has imposed on nations around the world, and the time it takes to negotiate and enact lasting trade policies, it suggests that trade policy with the U.S. will be in flux for the entirety of the second trump administration.
Jacobsen: What actions by the U.S. administration damaged diplomatic rapport with Canada?
Cowden: The U.S. administration has damaged diplomatic rapport with Canada in a number of ways. One way was violating the terms of the USMCA in levying restrictive tariffs on Canada. While many of those tariffs have been rolled back, tariffs on aluminum, steel and oil (for example) are still in place. Another way is to belittle the previous Prime Minister by referring to him as a “governor”, implying he was only the leader of a future U.S. state, not the elected head of state of a sovereign nation. Given that nation is the closest ally and economic partner of the United States, this statement was viewed as being deeply offensive. Finally, the most egregious action has been to state that the U.S. seeks to make Canada the 51st state through economic coercion. For some reason this administration does not recognize the importance of national sovereignty under international law, or its relationship to national pride, security, and autonomy.
A parenthetical note about U.S. policy: when the President says something, that is U.S. policy. Normally, presidential statements of any import are preceded by consideration through the interagency process. In this process, the applicable departments of the U.S. government staff the issue at hand, considering all the known and anticipated ramifications of a proposed policy, often with consultation with Congress, before it is announced by the president. No such process exists under the current administration; in this administration, the president makes statements, either through executive orders, interviews, or posts on social media (one of which, Truth Social, he owns), and that constitutes U.S. policy. Of particular note, there appears to be no real effort to engage Congress in any way, even to enact legislation to implement policies that require legislation.
Jacobsen: How is Canada evolving its response to unreliability in U.S. treaty obligations?
Cowden: I have not been following Canadian political efforts closely, but I would note that the newly elected Prime Minister, Mark Carney, has been the leader of two national banking systems, and is as well-equipped as any head of government to engage in and craft economic policy. I have predicted for some time that Canada would be looking both east to Europe and west to Asia to diversify its economic relationships so that it is not as economically reliant on the USMCA. (3)
Jacobsen: Canada is treated as a ’51st state.’ What are the rhetorical, symbolic, or policy, motives for this?
Cowden: With regard to Canada’s response to the unreliability of U.S. treaty obligations, see my previous reply. I would add that my understanding is that currently, oil pipelines that move oil from Canada’s western provinces to its eastern maritime provinces dip down into the U.S., but that a previously planned, but later cancelled, project to build a pipeline across Ontario will be re-started. This would allow Canada to easily ship western oil to eastern seaports without relying on U.S. oil pipeline infrastructure. This would allow Canada to more easily export oil to other markets without going through the U.S.
Jacobsen: How will North American strategic and economic stability be impacted by the current trends in U.S.-Canada relations?
Cowden: Incredible as it is to say, the motivation for U.S. policy to pursue making Canada the 51st state of the United States appears to be that the president himself does not view Canadian sovereignty as being legitimate, right, or necessary.
If current trends in U.S.-Canada relations continue, it will negatively affect the national wealth of both the U.S. and Canada. I believe permanent damage has been done to the U.S.-Canada economic, diplomatic, security, and popular relationship. Canadian citizens, arguably the most polite and accommodating people in the world, are seriously upset with current U.S. policy. Canada now knows that the U.S. political process can elect a president willing to violate his own trade agreements and other international norms, standards, rules and laws in dealing with other nations, including its closest (literally!) economic, diplomatic, and security ally, partner, and friend.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Anthony.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/07
Shonali Paul, founder of Paul John Indian Caffeine Company, discusses the impact of U.S. customs regulations and tariffs on small business logistics. Tariffs raise product costs, forcing companies to adjust shipment sizes and timing, or shift production domestically. While higher prices affect customers, Paul believes transparency—like listing tariffs as separate line items—builds trust. For businesses dependent on imports, adapting models to factor in regulatory changes is crucial. Although increased paperwork may result, the cost burden is more significant. Paul emphasizes reviewing finances, improving efficiencies, and maintaining honest communication with customers to navigate these evolving challenges effectively.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do U.S. customs regulations affect company logistics and shipping strategies?
Shonali Paul: For companies that rely on imports especially it will greatly affect the timing, and quantity of shipment they bring in. Because the tariffs raise prices they have to reduce overall cost any way they can, which could be the shipping cost making it take longer to arrive or even the quantity of the product being brought in due to the overall capital expenditure caps companies may have.
Jacobsen: How will regulatory changes impact the cost structure for products?
Paul: With the current tariffs we will see prices of products increase for customers unfortunately. But it has pushed companies to buy domestically and even move production to the states which will have a positive impact on jobs and the overall economy.
Jacobsen: What steps can communicate changes and delays to customers to keep transparency and trust?
Paul: I think the best way is to mention the tariffs as a separate line item that could be applicable if they remain or not if eliminated. That gives customers the most transparent reason for the cost escalation.
Jacobsen: What are long-term implications for small businesses who rely heavily on cross-border e-commerce?
Paul: It will affect their bottom line, and they will have to rework their business model to include tariffs even in part if they stay in place.
Jacobsen: Will there be increased paperwork and compliance requirements for formal entry processing for shipments?
Paul: There may be an added layer of paperwork for products that may not have had any import fees but not much of a change for those that did, it would just be an increase in the cost.
Jacobsen: Are you exploring partnerships with other logistics providers or considering U.S.-based distribution?
Paul: As a coffee company we have no choice but to import coffee from global regions as America doesn’t grow coffee except in Hawaii. Our mission is to bring Indian coffee to the US Market. We have always used a domestic packaging company but those that haven’t have started to look domestically for packaging solutions now.
Jacobsen: Any advice for other small business owners facing similar hurdles due to regulations and suspensions?
Paul: My advice is to look at your numbers and see where things can be improved and explain to customers very transparently the increase in cost. I do think most are understanding of that.
Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Shonali.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/07
When I was a teenager, because I was a difficult kid, I was kicked out of the house for a few months. I got to know, befriend, and like old people more than young people of my cohort. Now, I like mentoring the young, from time to time, and befriending the old, still more.
When I was a teen, also, I worked a bit in construction at a truss factory and in construction with my alcohol misusing father. There was an old man, named Nick: l call him, “Old Nick”—because I’ve always called him Old Nick—who mentored me. We worked side-by-side; or, rather, I worked by his side.
I helped him. I matched his pace. He taught me. I learned, not everything, from him. Construction sites are interesting. They’re dirty.
There’s gravel.
There’s wood.
There’s rebar, rubble, and concrete.
There’s plastic, hard and flowy soft, from packaging, strewn on the property.
There are ‘hard’ hats.
There are belts.
There are hammers, forklifts, cranes, scissor lifts.
There’re frames, concrete forms.
There’re alcoholics, substance misusers, or just drunks and junkies.
There’re regulars, part-timers, life restarters, newcomers, crusty master craftsman, and just plain old labourers and safety inspectors and formans.
Maybe, they show up on time. Maybe, they show up all day. Maybe, they work.
Maybe, they don’t, in each case.
Men, some, raised by the bottle and a back of a hand.
The type who verbally inverted and made an emotionally abusive introject.
Old Nick seemed to come out of this tradition. The idea being: Suck it up, hammer that nail, next.
Nick’s routine was simple: Smokes, banana at lunch, green tea, more smokes, go home.
His pace was slow.
His slow was methodical, like drying concrete. It just form-fit to the pace of that particular day.
I loved listening to his words. They were paced, respectful, tinged with embers of regret at times. A sort of “this is it” of sentiment. Then the smoke would rise from his lips.
He was divorced, estranged from his kids at the time. He had had a substance misuse problem, regarding alcohol. If he was of the time, and of that subculture, a hard life, he would be someone who drank beer, regular beer, whether a IPA or a darker like a Guinness.
Yet, when I met him, I could not tell such a thing happening in the past, certainly not in the present.
He was the ember. His skin cracked like embers rumbled.
I appreciated his mentorship at the time. The opportunity to work with him. Construction was hard, and worth it—though wasn’t great at it. We would talk about the work at hand, and then occasionally about other things.
I learn about the estrangement. I asked if he had any regrets. The body told the story he was unwilling to confront. I worked on and off with him for many months and on more than one worksite. I finished working in construction.
I moved onto other endeavours. It was increasingly a distant memory, but important to reflect upon as a life developmental stage. Everyone should do hard labour for a period of time in youth. If too late in life, then it’s unlikely to express the beneficial effects upon the core psyche.
They remain air people, only.
I’ve worked as a janitor, farm hand, ranch hand, dishwasher, food prepper, landscaper, gardener, busser, cashier, etc. All essential life lessons can be gathered from this. But life goes on. I’ve contemplated death in walks through cemetery in my old town as a child, as a teenager, as an adult. You get value in those lessons too.
Then I was at a funeral years later.
Who was there? Old Nick. I asked him. Something like this.
“How are you, old man?”
“Good, you?”
“Been better, a death, you know?”
“Sure, of course.”
[Innocent naughty jokes and banter.]
“Shhhh! Scotty… you’re not supposed to tell them!”
[Laughter, about to leave—passing recollection]
“Hey…Nick, did you ever reconcile?” (With his kids)
[Pause.]
“…yeah.”
He seemed to have lied. His body told the truth.
That’s a pity.
It’s life.
Eventually, rebar rusts, and concrete cracks, too.
So thanks, Nick—between banana, smokes, and embers—you gave some of what little you had, to me. Thank you.
Thank you.
Thank you.
You weren’t always old. You saw.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/06
Foundation of the British Columbia Firmament
The Father of British Columbia, Sir James Douglas, is worshipped in the community where I grew up. Not for nothing, he had achievements, but he had a mixed history in numerous ways. He had a “mixed history” as HBC Chief Factor and colonial governor. He granted monopolistic privileges to his company and family.
This mixed public office and private profit. He imposed property-based voting qualifications, excluding full representation. He set forth unfair First Nations treaties. The Douglas Treaties were signed on blank sheets, with terms inserted afterward—an unusual practice. Unilaterally, these were later signed, resulting in Indigenous signatories having land cessions that were not fully known.
He had a heavy-handed gold rush policy with licensing schemes and delayed enforcement during the Fraser Canyon conflict. These failed to protect Indigenous communities. Violence and village burnings ensued. He recruited black Californian settlers for political loyalty. It was opportunistic rather than principled efforts for the enfranchisement of blacks. He was from Guyana. A fascinating history to learn about one’s happenstance of contingent past circumstances: his contemporary presentation is not an exercise in false equivalence. It is about a united duality of positive and negative valence.
The living recent history reflects this mixed history in Fort Langley, out of Langley, with the crossovers between hipster intellectual farmers and well-educated, well-off Evangelical Christians, Trinity Western University, and the political shenanigans of Christians here impacting the federal level of the country. I wanted to cover some of this controversial recent history, as having a singular reference for some of the township’s more noteworthy shenanigans. For clarity, I speak as a former member of one of the heritage committees of an association in Fort Langley and another for the Township of Langley. I can say, “Heritage matters to Langleyites.” As an elder Euro-Canadian lady told me on the committee, a fellow committee member, it was in a sharp snarl once at a meeting, “I know who you are.” These were not isolated events throughout my life while growing up and through there. So it goes.
The contemporary Evangelical Christian story in Fort Langley began with a sexual misconduct allegation of the longest-standing university president in Canadian history: 2005-2006 with former university president Neil Snider. I would rather this not be the case, but it is the history. Something worth repeating.
2005–2015: Institutional Unease and Image Discipline
He had the longest tenure of any Canadian university president—32 years–and greatly grew Trinity Western University (TWU) in its early decades. That is a testament to his prowess as an administrator of resources and an inspirer of people at the time. In their terminology, he had the Holy Spirit in him.
Unfortunately, an uncomfortable truth was his retirement in 2006 following sexual misconduct allegations. Internal reports from TWU and contemporary media reviews questioned the administrative decisions around this. The community is embarrassed by it and tries to cover it up. I understand that part. It happens with clergy-related abuse cases too: Institutional protection. However, as one colleague’s mom who worked with him said to me, in a way to excuse it, “He was lonely,” because either his wife died or he was divorced. I leave considerations of the elasticity of excuse-making to the reader.
ChristianWeek’s “Trinity Western Resolves Human Rights Complaint” documented the 2005 human rights complaint against Snider. The settlement impacted subsequent policy reviews. Former faculty interviews showed early signs of institutional unease. Evangelical leaders have undergone these scandals.
A CAUT Report, “Report of an Inquiry Regarding Trinity Western University,” examined the requirement for faculty to affirm the religious Covenant. You can see TWU’s current Community Covenant. William Bruneau and Thomas Friedman examined the requirement for faculty to affirm the Covenant and possible impacts on academic hiring and free speech. Case studies and personal accounts of faculty are incorporated. It is a referenced report in academic discussions on religion and academia in Canada.
University Affairs via “A test of faith at Trinity Western” provided an analytic retrospective of early administrative policies, linking them to later legal challenges–more on that in 2016-2018. Christian universities seem highly conscious of their public image, because they theologically see themselves as at odds with the secularist world. For example, in 2011, the Institute for Canadian Values funded an advertisement opposing LGBTI-inclusive education, which was supported by the Canada Christian College. It was published by the National Post and later by the Toronto Sun. A national backlash happened. An apology ensued—a retraction happened by the Post, but not by the Sun.
2005-2015 was a busy few years. Ex-administrators and archival internal memos showed dissent regarding mandatory religious practices. Similar controversies happen in religious universities in Canada, all private, all Christian. The largest is Evangelical, and the largest is TWU, in Langley. After trying to get many interviews with professors and dissenting students in the community, the vast majority declined over many years of journalistic efforts, and a few agreed to a coffee conversation to express opinions. Most opinions dissent from the norm of TWU while affirming the difficulties for the faith with these straight-and-narrow executives, who are not reined in, reign with impunity, and rain neglect on their community’s inner Other.
2016–2018: The Covenant and the Courts
Circa 2016, some online commentators mentioned how they felt “bad for the kids that realize they’re not straight” at TWU as “Coming out is hard,” and “it’s crazy that people still want to go to this school.” A former student acknowledged some student support for LGBTI peers while warning many feel “quite ostracized” by an “unspoken aura” repressing non-Christian views. An LGBTI student may have to “repress their urges based on a stupid covenant.”
Other online forums include a former student union leader noting the “community covenant is outdated” even by 2013, while another urged the university to rethink the Covenant. Saying there is a “thriving rape culture,” “I know more than five girls who were raped [at TWU], who didn’t report it because they believed they would be shamed and not taken seriously.”
Maclean’s in “The end of the religious university?” talked about the long-standing interest in the national debate around religious mandates in higher education and the central role of TWU. These controversies about academic freedom following Snider’s resignation would echo some other community elements there. BBC News commented that Canada approved a homophobic law school in 2013. This would eventually evolve poorly for TWU and reflect terribly on the surrounding community.
Xtra Magazine’s “The Painful Truth About Being Gay at Canada’s Largest Christian University” featured a series of robust testimonies from current and former students on systemic discrimination. The magazine also examined campus surveys, student blogs, and some student activist groups, with a case study of academic panels addressing LGBTI issues within religious institutions. The Supreme Court of Canada issued its decision on TWU’s Law School accreditation in 2018. It was analyzed by legal journals and cited in academic papers. Those looked to religious mandates and the tensions with legal equality.
CBC News in “Trinity Western loses fight for Christian law school as court rules limits on religious freedom ‘reasonable’”provided a comprehensive timeline of developments with constitutional lawyer and civil rights advocacy commentary. Other commentaries looked at policy adjustments following from institutions. The Tyee chimed into the discussion with “Trinity Western University Loses in Supreme Court,” with some parables into the personal narratives on campus, more timeline events, and a more important emphasis on the long-term impact on the reputation of TWU.
Knowing some minority facets of dynamics in this community, many will slander others and lie to protect themselves, particularly their identity as represented via the incursion of Evangelical Orthodoxy into the community via the university. This small township’s controversies went to the Supreme Court of Canada. They lost in a landslide decision, 7-2. The Vancouver Sun had various coverage, with international critiques comparing TWU’s controversy to European and Australian scandals. Regardless, TWU brought global spotlight on a small township, a tiny town.
Global human rights organizations gave commentary. TWU dropped the Community Covenant as mandatory, but only for students, while staff, faculty, and administration maintained it. A TWU student asserted on Reddit:
TWU student here. The only two reasons why the Board of Governors chose to drop the Covenant for students is because a) The recent court ruling, and b) Their other professional programs (counselling, nursing, and teaching) received letters from their respective accrediting bodies which threatened to pull accreditation unless the Covenant was amended or discarded.
TWU’s decision to make signing the Covenant voluntary for students has nothing to do with morality or human rights, but everything to do with their business model. Keep in mind, the faculty still must sign the pledge, and TWU’s mission and mandate of producing “godly Christian leaders” has not changed.
The next era was 2019-2021.
2019–2021: Cultural Stagnation Despite Legal Losses
Xtra Magazine in “I am queer at Trinity Western University. What will it take for my university to listen to me?” provided a more individual story. Carter Sawatzky wrote, “TWU’s decision in 2018 to make the Covenant non-mandatory for students also did not magically change the discriminatory treatment of queer people. After TWU’s 2018 Supreme Court loss, many folks, including myself, had hoped that TWU would finally demonstrate that it can be rooted in faith and radically loving and welcoming. Instead, TWU has doubled down on its social conservatism, at the expense of queer students like myself.” An international scandal and Supreme Court defeat did not change the culture or the school. That is instructive.
Another instructive moment was a student suicide attempt followed by an expulsion of the student. In “Her university expelled her after she attempted suicide, saying she had an ‘inability to self-regulate.’ Now she is fighting back,” the Toronto Star presented the case of a student showing broader systemic issues and a lack of mental health resources and policy failures within TWU. TWU claimed otherwise. Mental health professionals and relatives of students commented. As CBC has noted, mental health on campuses has been a point of concern for a while.
2021–2025: Repression, Image, and Intimidation
Langley is a township where I am told the murder of the famous atheist Madalyn Murray O’Hair was merciful. An older gentleman saying, “Her murder was an act of mercy.” Langley Advance Times in “Private Langley University rejects LGBTQ+ event request” reported denying an event request, One TWU Stories Night, for an LGBTI group, One TWU. Carter Sawatzky said, “We are sharing our stories, which I think should be a non-controversial thing… It is not a contradiction. You can be queer and Christian… Many people come to TWU and have never heard an LGBTQ story.” That is a reasonable statement. A One TWU piece published on its site claims homophobia is rampant on campus.
CBC News reported on the manslaughter conviction of a TWU security guard. “Former guard at B.C. university found guilty of manslaughter” reported a Fall 2020 event involving “a man wearing all black” who wandered into student residences, rifling through their things. Security guard Howard Glen Hill hit the man, Jack Cruthers Hutchison, “in the head, pulled his hair and spat on him.” Police arrived: Hill was “in a neck restraint, limp and unresponsive. He died in the hospital two days later.” Hutchison was charged with manslaughter. TWU’s statement: “The university has no comment on the court ruling. TWU’s commitment has always been to safeguard our campus community, and we continue to provide a safe place of learning for all our students.”
Langley Union, in “Trinity Western University President’s Son Linked to Prolific White Nationalist Account,” investigated digital forensic evidence of the son of the President of TWU linked to a White Nationalist online account. The son’s actions should be considered separate from the father’s and the institutions. However, they are striking news.
The accounts claimed, among other assertions, “I believe in a white future. An Aryan future. A future where my children will make Indian Bronson shine our shoes. Where brown people cannot secure a line of credit, Black people pick cotton. We will win – this is what we fight for,” and “I am a colonialist. I make no effort to hide this. I believe in worldwide white supremacy.”
The Nelson Star reported in “‘Alt-right’ group uses Fort Langley historic site as meeting place” on the use of the local pub in Fort Langley as a meeting place for a public, so known and self-identified White Nationalist group. As one former boss noted, “I don’t know what is wrong with we the white race.” That is a sentiment, not an organization, however. This microcosm reflects a broader history of Canadian sociopolitics with race and religion, some Evangelicals and occasional allegations of racialism if not racism.
TWU’s policy is Inclusive Excellence. “We aim to promote a consistent atmosphere of inclusion and belonging at TWU by establishing a shared commitment to diversity and equity founded in the gospel’s truth. Christ came to save, reconcile, and equip all people (Rev. 7:9), and the incredible array of gifts God has given us is evidence of his creativity, beauty, and love of diversity,” it states. An administrator is reported to have said informally that the event was ‘not in line with Evangelical values.’
In the States, a trend in international Evangelical higher education is here too. Bob Jones University banned interracial dating until 2000, involving federal funding and accreditation debates. In Australia, Christian colleges faced scrutiny for policies excluding LGBTI+ students and staff. Faith-based codes and equality laws produced tensions in the United Kingdom, though less prominently than in Canada. Those American churches want to influence Canada in Indigenous communities. Some Canadian churches have Ojibwe pastors, for example.
A Medium (Xtra) post entitled “The painful truth about being gay at Canada’s largest Christian university” commented on the experience of a gay student, Jacob.’ As peers messaged Jacob on suspicion of him being gay, “We hate everything about you and you better watch your back because we are going to kill you on your way to school.” At TWU ‘Jacob,’ said, “I loved the community here so much that I did not want to jeopardize those relationships.” That is called a closet.
Another student, Corben, from Alberta at TWU, said, “My parents, I think, kind of wanted Trinity to be for me sort of like reparative therapy, which is why they would only help financially with this school.” Former Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau put forth a move to end Conversion Therapy, a discredited pseudotherapy to change sexual orientation and gender identity. Conversion therapy has been banned in Malta (2016), Germany (2020), France (2022), Canada (2022), New Zealand (2022), Iceland (2023), Spain (2023), Mexico (2024), Greece (2024), and Belgium (2024). That is only TWU, however. The community of Langley, specifically Fort Langley, where I was raised, is substantively linked to this place.
Langley Advance Times in “Blackface photo in 2017 Chilliwack yearbook sparks apology from school principal” reported on a blackface incident at a local school. It was part of a “mock trial.” So, bad taste in community, and the excuse for Snider’s example will likely do the same in this case over term. There are several cases of sexual misconduct cases in British Columbia and Canada. The Archdiocese of Vancouver was the first in Canada to publicly name clergy involved in sexual abuse and decades of abuse. At the same time, other prominent cases have arisen, including Michael Conaghan, Damian Lawrence Cooper, and Erlindo Molon, highlighting a pattern of clerical sexual exploitation and inadequate accountability in British Columbia. I would rather this not be the case, but it is the history.
In 2022, a TWU dean resigned amid pressure over her work on gender issues. One Reddit–and all Reddit commentary should be considered additions, while anecdotal at best–user described how TWU leaders had “tried to make her leave her position as dean because she… stated she was an lgbtq+ ally,” then issued bureaucratic statements of grief based on her departure.
Living there, these excuses likely flowed through social media. At the same time, community intimidation happens, too. It is bad for the community image and bad for the business. People have an interest in narrative morphing. As gay students find at TWU, and as outsiders as others find in the general community, it is mostly not about moral stances, but about image maintenance and business interests. Money matters because it is a well-to-do area of the country and a wealthy nation worldwide. There is regular township nonsense where the Fort Langley Night Market gets closed down due to vandalism and alcohol.
Ongoing online conversations about TWU degree quality continue, “So before those say ‘it’s an immigration scam’, it’s not and is essentially useless towards immigrating/coming to Canada. With that said, most of TWU’s programs are also useless to use towards immigrating, even if studied in person, because any non-degree program from a private school does not allow one to apply for a PGWP. However, it offers a couple of degree programs that can result in a PGWP.”
Brandon Gabriel and Eric Woodward have been at loggerheads for at least a decade. If you look at the original history, this reflects another fight between an Indigenous leader and the colonial presence in its history. Now, they are a local artist and developer, respectively. Woodward has a camp of supporters for development and a camp of detractors. Another mixed figure in the contemporary period of Langley. Over development concerns and pushback, Woodward got a building painted pink in protest at one point. It is a serious township history full of a minority of loud, silly people imposing their nonsense on a smaller group of innocent bystanders.
Whether LGBTI discrimination ensconced at its university, a blackface principal, homophobia, this isn’t unusual in a way. A constellation of apparent White Nationalist superminority undercurrents popping up, and with worship of a founder in a democracy who was a mixed-race colonialist timocrat married to a Cree woman, it’s a story of a Canadian town and municipality. A tale of how foundational myths, when left unexamined, morph into social realities.
Welcome to Langley–a light introduction: Home, sorta.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/06
Rev. Dr. John C. Lentz Jr. served over 30 years as Lead Pastor of Forest Hill Presbyterian Church in Cleveland Heights, Ohio. Known for passionate preaching, community leadership, and a commitment to justice and compassion, he profoundly shaped the Church’s mission before retiring in 2024 after a celebrated ministry. Lentz reflects on his 30-year tenure at Forest Hill Presbyterian Church, where he inherited the traumatic legacy of sexual abuse by a former associate pastor. Lentz details the Church’s response—early efforts at acknowledgment, limited legal options, and survivor support—highlighting the structural weaknesses in denominational accountability. He explores systemic patterns of abuse across denominations, including the role of clerical authority, enabling networks, and institutional cover-ups. Drawing from neuroscience, psychology, and theology, Lentz emphasizes the importance of independent investigations, seminary reform, and third-party oversight. He warns against simplistic narratives that scapegoat Catholicism alone and calls for nuanced, data-driven reform efforts across religious institutions. He discussed how virtues like compassion and forgiveness, without accountability, can become vulnerabilities. Both advocate for cultural and institutional reforms rooted in moral clarity, survivor support, and transparent justice processes. The dialogue ultimately calls for partnership—not polarization—in addressing clergy abuse.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, you are a former pastor at Forest Hill Presbyterian Church. What is the story there? We can use that as a context for a broader conversation about a wider phenomenon.
Rev. Dr. John Lentz: Yes. I served as pastor at Forest Hill Church for thirty years, from 1994 to 2024. During my final interview before being offered the position, the search committee told me something they felt I needed to know. They said, “John, we need to tell you this because it might affect your decision to come here.” They explained that a previous associate pastor had been involved in the sexual abuse of youth in the congregation.
That wasn’t comforting to hear. Here is what I learned so from personal knowledge: In 1977, Reverend Dale Small became the associate pastor at Forest Hill Church. He came from another congregation in the Detroit area of Michigan. His primary responsibilities were overseeing the confirmation program and leading retreat and camping ministries. He served in that role until 1981.
Afterward, he retired and was granted the honorary title of pastor emeritus. He moved to North Carolina following his retirement. In 1984, he organized a reunion-style camping trip for former youth members of Forest Hill Church in North Carolina. During that event, one former youth participant—by then in his twenties—experienced a resurgence of traumatic memories related to prior abuse. He left the trip and returned home.
Later that year, he and his parents sent a letter to the Church’s governing body (the session) reporting that Dale Small had sexually abused him. The letter also mentioned other possible victims, although it is unclear how many individuals were named or how those claims were verified.
When I joined the Church in 1994, ten years after that disclosure, I learned that the session at the time had responded by engaging a consultant—though I do not know their name—to assess what actions should be taken to support the congregation, particularly its youth. They also reportedly sent letters to families whose children had been part of the youth group or confirmation classes during that period, asking whether anything inappropriate had occurred.
It was reported that at least half a dozen boys came forward, identifying themselves as victims of abuse. Many of these boys came from homes where the father was absent or where the family structure had been disrupted. All of the reported victims were male.
Even years later, I encountered the impact of this traumatic history. One individual told me he had been abused not directly by Reverend Small but by someone who had themselves been abused and possibly groomed by Small. I also became close to someone a few years younger than me who eventually disclosed that he had been one of the victims. He confided in me and described the abuse in detail.
His account matched what is now known to be common patterns in clergy abuse cases: identifying vulnerable boys, assuming the role of a surrogate father figure, using pastoral authority to gain trust, showing excessive attention, and initiating inappropriate physical contact during church retreats—starting with massages and escalating to sexual abuse.
As more stories emerged, it was essential to support survivors in any way I could. I recall one conversation with a survivor in which I said, “Whatever you need, I will help. Let’s pursue justice if that’s what you want.” By that time, Reverend Small had passed away so that any legal recourse would have been limited. Still, the priority was to provide acknowledgment, support, and whatever healing was possible.
There was also a statute of limitations, and unfortunately, it was heartbreaking. The abuse survivor did not want to proceed. He still had such mixed and conflicted emotions about this man—someone he said he loved and who, he believed, loved him. You can imagine the emotional complexity and heartbreak that comes with hearing something like that.
Then Dale Small died, so pursuing anything in a legal sense became moot. I did ensure, however, that he was no longer listed as pastor emeritus. I also informed our local presbytery, which removed Dale Small from the rolls as a retired and honourably retired pastor.
I have probably left out many details, but that’s the general account. That part is fact—that is what I know to be true. What lies in the murkier areas—and this is what makes it so difficult—is that there were some alleged incidents of misconduct at Dale Small’s previous Church in Michigan. Now, my predecessor—whom I overall have great respect for and who was a prominent leader in this community—knew Dale Small personally. He was the one who called and invited him to serve at Forest Hill Church.
I cannot say with any degree of certainty, and I have no evidence, that he knew of the abuse or that he was abused. But, from what I understand, he may have been a classic enabler.
Jacobsen: I believe Margaret Atwood was asked in an interview last year about Alice Munro. She said something about boundaries in response to a question about that situation. She did the interview. She was asked about Alice Munro, who has passed away. The interviewer mentioned that Munro’s daughter was abused by her stepfather when she was a single digit age. Someone brought this to Munro’s attention at the time, but she did not act. Atwood’s response was something along the lines of, “I was a professional friend, not a confidant.”
Does that kind of analysis apply to your friend as well?
Lentz: Which friend do you mean? The contemporary friend or the pastor?
Jacobsen: The older pastor—your predecessor.
Lentz: I do not know. When the allegations surfaced, my predecessor said he was not aware of them. To his credit—and this is based on what I’ve heard—he did not attempt to block any investigation. I know several of the church leaders from that time, including the church attorney.
To the best of my knowledge, my predecessor did not attempt to hinder any of the investigations into the allegations. Nor, to my knowledge, did he defend Pastor Small publicly or in any official letters. I do not want to say more than that because I genuinely do not know. One other piece, which I admit could be me defending my institution—and I recognize that possibility—but I will put it out there. Since these events occurred before my tenure, I can view them with some degree of objectivity and a certain distance.
I believe that Forest Hill Church’s response to supporting victims was one of the earlier public acknowledgments of sexual abuse within the Presbyterian Church. I am not sure if it made national news. Still, I do think it contributed to a shift in the atmosphere within the denomination. It helped initiate the process of establishing guardrails and accountability measures for clergy, lay leaders, and all church employees. That much, I believe, is true. So, that’s that part of the story.
Another related experience occurred about fifteen years ago—I can provide you with the exact dates. As part of myresponsibilities within the presbytery, I served as the chair of the Permanent Judicial Commission, essentially functioning as the chief justice for that body. Charges were brought against a currently serving pastor.
What was interesting—and, in some ways, troubling—was how the authority of the Presbyterian Church functioned in that context. While there are sound theological and ecclesial reasons for this structure, there was a failure of process. Ultimately, we could only remove his ordination. We had no authority to initiate legal proceedings, and we, as the presbytery, could not bring criminal charges ourselves, as I understood it.
Once this pastor renounced the jurisdiction of the Church under Presbyterian canon law, we were unable to pursue the matter further. The policy has since changed. Now, I believe we are required to retain investigative files for a designated number of years so that in the event of a criminal trial, our findings and testimony can be used as evidence.
Jacobsen: What have you observed as not helpful in other denominations’ responses to abuse cases?
Lentz: Let me think about that for a moment. I would say this, and I want to be careful. I understand the deep trust that exists between a parishioner and a pastor and how meaningful that relationship is—especially in contexts involving confession or personal disclosure.
In the Presbyterian Church, we do not treat confession the same way the Roman Catholic Church does. However, I believe that using a pastoral or confessional setting to protect a perpetrator is entirely unacceptable. That kind of confidentiality should not be used to shield someone from justice.
I know that in some parts of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints and the Roman Catholic Church, there is still a strong emphasis on absolute confidentiality in such contexts, even when crimes are confessed. That greatly concerns me.
Other issues are more anecdotal. For example, I believe many pastors—myself included, at times—can have an inflated sense of both ego and expertise. Some pastors begin to think they are a person’s primary psychological therapist. But I am not a therapist—I am a pastor. My role, at best, is to triage and then refer people to professionals who are trained in mental health care.
So, when pastors assume too much authority—whether because of how they interpret scripture or the power given to them by their role—they sometimes overstep. That is dangerous. Accountability is essential.
We now have a system in place in the Presbyterian Church where pastors are designated legal reporters. If I hear of abuse,I am required to report it. If an accusation is made against me, a formal process begins. It involves the clerk of the session—who is the top layperson in the Church—and the associate pastor, among others. There are clearly defined steps now.
There is a whole process for adjudicating these kinds of accusations. Therefore, any denomination that lacks a clear and transparent process should be held accountable in some way. I’m not sure what that accountability would look like in every case. Still, at the very least, they should be publicly called out—shamed, even—for failing to take these issues seriously.
Another significant gap I see is in seminaries. I still do not believe that enough is being taught about the seriousness of sexual abuse in church contexts—how to hold oneself accountable, how to hold others accountable, and how to actively create a culture where abuse does not occur under your care. That is a structural problem that needs urgent attention.
Jacobsen: Are there areas where there is such hypervigilance that it becomes counterproductive—where it reflects broader cultural anxiety rather than actual prevention?
Lentz: Yes, that is a great question. One of the unfortunate byproducts of necessary hypervigilance—because it is needed—is that it can sometimes create a feeling of suspicion or fear that deters good people from volunteering.
Take, for example, a family with two children in Sunday school. The parents want to help out, but now they are required to go through multiple steps, including a criminal background check, safety training, abuse prevention protocols, and more. None of these are inherently evil. They are reasonable and necessary measures that send a clear message: “We take this seriously. We want to protect your child and you.”
But on the flip side, it can also unintentionally send a different message: “There must be a real problem here if the safeguards are this extensive.” That perception, although unintended, has deterred some well-meaning volunteers.
Another example is how we set specific guidelines in Forest Hill Church’s child safety policy. We outlined exactly how many adults must be present in a room, who is allowed to escort children to the bathroom, who can drive them, and who can supervise them. But inevitably, gray areas arise.
Say a father is volunteering, and everyone else has gone home. One child remains, and the parents have not arrived yet. The volunteer calls to report the situation, and the response used to be something like, “Thank you for checking in—please go ahead and take little Johnny home.” Today, in that same situation, I might think, “Have we now created a liability risk or a situation where something could go wrong?”
That said, in my experience as a pastor, most people appreciate how far we go to protect children. More and more parents today, when searching for a church, are actively asking whether we have a sexual misconduct policy, whether our Sunday school teachers are trained, and what our prevention strategies are. So, no—I do not think the hypervigilance has been a net negative in my experience.
Jacobsen: Do you think third-party investigations are essential in these cases? Independent reviews beyond the Church itself.
Lentz: Third-party investigations are vital. You can have all the internal reforms and guardrails in place, but without independent review, it lacks credibility. Even from a purely public standpoint, it is essential.
When something happens at a church, you cannot simply handle it internally. You have to be willing to make that call—to law enforcement or an external body. Yes, it might create bad optics, but that is the cost of doing the right thing. Transparency is not optional; it is the moral and ethical price you pay for being entrusted with people’s lives and trust.
It would be hard—I am not saying it would not be difficult. As a pastor, I might very well know the person involved. They may have texted me; I may have attended social engagements with them; I may have even officiated at their child’s wedding. I can imagine how excruciating that would be. But even so, we cannot just say no. If a crime has been committed or alleged, you have to follow through with it—no matter how personally painful it may be.
Jacobsen: From a pastoral point of view, what do you think were the motivations behind the policies of silence or secrecy instituted by some denominations—especially the Catholic Church—when they reassigned clergy to other parishes after misconduct or when they attempted quiet reintegration?
Lentz: Obviously, this is speculative. I do not have direct evidence, so I want to acknowledge that upfront. But I can speak based on what I have observed and discussed with others. The theological or ecclesiastical justification, particularly in Catholicism, often revolves around the sanctity of the confessional. The idea is that when someone confesses their sins to a priest and God, that moment is sacred and protected. The confessional is meant to be inviolable.
I do know priests who would respond to such a confession by saying, “You committed a crime. You need to turn yourselfin.” That is, in my view, an appropriate and responsible response—and I am sure that has happened in some cases. But the reality is that nothing in Catholic doctrine requires the priest to report the crime, even if they know someone has been seriously harmed.
So, you end up with a situation where the confessor might receive absolution, but what happens to the victim? What about restoration? Repentance is not just about the sinner; it has to include the harmed party. Any serious conversation on this issue must include the question of repair—what restoration and justice look like for the victim.
Restorative justice models can be effective in some instances. There may be a time when the parties come together for a mediated conversation. I do not want to push that as a universal solution—it may not be right in many cases—but I can imagine that, for some, it could be a moment of grace.
What absolutely must end is the simplistic, linear model of “I confess, I’m sorry,” and the priest says, “Say five Hail Marys, and you’re forgiven.” That is spiritual malpractice. That’s not justice—it is a distortion of forgiveness. We have to stop perpetuating that.
This problem—of minimizing clergy misconduct—was not unique to Catholicism. It occurred in many denominations. There was a time when someone like Pastor Dale would be described as “overworked” or “stressed,” and people would say he had “poor boundaries.” The solution was often to give him a week off and place him in a new context, hoping that everything would work out.
That is unacceptable. In the Presbyterian Church today, according to our Book of Order and our broader system of governance, such quiet reassignment is no longer permitted.
Does it ever still happen? Unfortunately, probably. But we now have strict guidelines. If any allegations are made, they must be reported to the presbytery. The presbytery must then inform any other presbytery to which the accused might be seeking transfer. That creates a system of accountability where the receiving presbytery is also obligated to act.
Indeed, this type of reassignment has significantly declined in the Presbyterian Church. I do not have complex numbers to offer, but I can say with confidence that the process today is much more rigorous.
Jacobsen: What about the broader implications of these patterns—especially outside of Presbyterian structures?
Lentz: Yes, one of the lingering effects we continue to see—especially in non-Presbyterian contexts, and primarily within the Catholic Church—is the legacy of institutional protectionism. That damage is still unfolding, and I believe it will take generations to address fully.
Jacobsen: An example of institutional failure is the silence, cover-up, and the practice of moving clergy to new parishes. From a mathematical point of view, let’s say you have two abusive clergy members out of 100. If those two are quietly moved around four times to different parishes, that inflates the perception.
What happens is that, although the actual number of perpetrators is two, it begins to look like 10 different parishes have had abuse cases. So it now appears—incorrectly—that 10 out of 100 parishes have had abuse, when in fact it is still only two out of 100. But in the process, justice is delayed, additional harm may be caused, and the institutional reputation is severely damaged.
Do we have any approximate numbers of clergy involved? Because I know it is a sensitive topic. And I think part of the problem is that when this issue was taken up by some of the more strident “New Atheist” voices, it became a tool to bash the entire Church—rather than a sincere attempt to work toward reform.
The better approach would be to work with the innocent clergy and the victims to set up institutional reform while also respecting freedom of religion and belief. What has been your experience with the numbers? Is there any insight you can offer?
Lentz: That’s an important point, and I agree—the goal should be to work with people, not against them, and to protect both accountability and religious freedom. Now, I can only speak from my experience, which is a small sample size. Butin my 30 years of serving in this presbytery—which includes around 50 or 60 churches in the Cleveland area—I am personally aware of three cases.
One of those cases involved a pastor who was not accused of direct abuse but was found to have downloaded child pornography. While no individual victims were identified, that behaviour is, of course, deeply troubling and incompatible with the pastoral role. The other two cases involved clear instances of clergy sexual abuse. Out of approximately 60 churches over the past 30 years, I am aware of three cases. Statistically, that is a small percentage—but each case matters profoundly.
You are right to highlight the danger of inflated perceptions. When a small number of individuals are relocated, and their misconduct is not addressed transparently, it artificially inflates the perception of widespread abuse—and in the meantime, more people are harmed.
That is why, instead of silence, cover-up, and transfer, the institution needs to name the problem directly. This should start as early as seminary training. When I was preparing for ordination, I went through an entire weekend of psychological testing and counselling sessions with trained therapists. These were designed to probe our motivations, character, and readiness. I do not know if seminaries still do that, but they absolutely should—especially concerning issues related to sexuality, power, and boundaries.
We must acknowledge that there has been cover-up in the past. We must blow the top off that silence. We also need a transparent and documented process for transfers. That is one way to limit the potential for repeat offences.
Jacobsen: This is not just a church problem—it is a cultural one, too. We see it in the Larry Nassar case. We see it in Hollywood. Hollywood, in many ways, is even more egregious because these individuals often have more personal power and institutional protection than a single clergy member. So even in these so-called “secular” environments—where there is no ecclesiastical structure—the abuse can be just as bad, if not worse.
Abuse of power transcends the religious and secular divides. Whether it is in churches, Olympic teams, or film studios, the issue is cultural. So the deeper question becomes: What are the cultural forces that serve as accelerants—or brakes—on this kind of behaviour?
How can we develop a culture, especially within religious communities, where clergy do not cross these lines in the first place? Where systems are in place to prevent it? Where the reporting process is trusted and respected? And how do we structure accountability in ways that center victims and deter future abuse?
Those are the questions we need to be asking—not only within our denominations but across institutions, sectors, and ideologies. Additionally, we must acknowledge that there have been significant difficulties in both the recruitment and retention of clergy across many denominations. Several of the challenges stem from stress, workload, and the overall demands of the job. Even so, most pastors still report high levels of job satisfaction.
At the same time, even if those pressures increase vulnerability or create environments where bad things might happen, I want to be very clear—I do not see those as excuses. To explain a phenomenon is not the same as explaining it away—or excusing it.
Lentz: Understanding the context is not the same as offering a justification. It is helpful to recognize the reality of pastoral stress. Some clergy are working 50 to 60 hours a week. That matters for understanding mental health and burnout, but it does not explain—or excuse—abuse.
I’ve worked 60-hour weeks. I’ve had moments where I’ve felt overwhelmed, exhausted, even at my wits’ end. But not once did that ever come close to pushing me toward crossing a grotesque boundary like sexually abusing anyone. So, yes, it’s a factor to consider for context, but I do not believe it’s a cause—at least not in any direct or morally relevant way.
The causes of abuse are deeper. And I’ll admit—I’m stepping a bit outside my expertise here. But that does not mean I will not try to explore it. In the church culture I’ve been part of, there is no ambiguity. Sexual abuse of children—of girls, boys, or anyone—is antithetical to the pastoral call. It is not walking in the way of Jesus. It is not aligned with any authentic understanding of pastoral care.
But here’s something I remember clearly. And I want to be cautious—it is a broad brush. Back in seminary, my friend andI would often discuss this over dinner. We would ask, “How many of our classmates would we want as our pastor?” Andthe answer, unfortunately, was probably not many.
Now, I am not suggesting that any of them were abusive. What I am suggesting is that the pastoral profession may skew toward people who are—how shall I put it—emotionally needy or working through unresolved personal issues. And the Church can be an incredibly welcoming place for those people.
Church culture—at its best—is a culture of radical acceptance. “You are loved. Come in as you are.” That’s beautiful. Butit also creates a space where individuals with deep psychological needs can be affirmed without ever being challenged or helped to heal.
If you are charismatic, if you preach well, if you’re good with kids, if you know how to perform leadership in that context—you get affirmed. And if you have an unaddressed need for ego validation, that culture can place you on a pedestal. That, in turn, can blur boundaries in unhealthy and dangerous ways.
So yes, it is partly about the culture. Perhaps even the culture of acceptance—ironically—can enable these situations. Andyes, many people bring unresolved baggage into ministry roles. If the institution lacks structures for accountability, mentoring, psychological evaluation, and ongoing support, those deeper issues can remain unaddressed.
Jacobsen: So would you say that certain cultural conditions—like unconditional acceptance and an overemphasis on trust—can make it easier for boundary violations to occur?
Lentz: Yes, I think that’s a fair and essential point. The very virtues we value—like grace, compassion, forgiveness, and trust—can become vulnerabilities if rigorous structures for accountability and healthy boundaries do not accompany them. Let me reiterate something clearly, though: I have never heard of a denomination or theological tradition that says it is acceptable to abuse children. That is off the table—always. It would be a strange—and horrifying—thing to hear anyone suggest otherwise. I want to be clear on that.
It is interesting, though, because we do know of some cults where the charismatic pastor or leader—sometimes under the garb of Christianity—claims that to experience true spiritual oneness, one must engage in sex with others. That kind of thing does happen.
Jacobsen: Yes, and it happens in India too—with gurus or spiritual leaders (‘godmen’) claiming divine authority over others, including sexually. But in mainline denominations—traditional churches—anything that has structure and accountability mechanisms meant to transcend the charisma of a single leader, that kind of exploitation is much less likely.
Still, your point is well-taken. I do think that love, inclusion, and acceptance—even the powerful idea that you can be forgiven—are all beautiful and essential aspects of the Christian faith. But they can also create openings in the safety net. And when those openings go unchecked, that’s where danger can creep in.
One of the biggest attractions—and arguably one of the greatest strengths—of the Christian tradition, speaking now as someone not deeply embedded in it, is that it offers hope and meaning to people who are wounded. And let’s be honest—most people are traumatized at some point in their lives.
I walk into almost any setting, assuming that a significant portion of people are essentially “the walking wounded.” Christianity speaks to that. It offers not only a theological answer—through Christian humanism or existential theology—but also a practical framework: continuity, grace, meaning, and healing.
Lentz: There’s a famous, influential book from about 50 years ago by Father Henri Nouwen called The Wounded Healer. His central message was that it is through understanding and embracing our woundedness that we can truly reach out and help others. That idea has been powerful for many. But you can also see how it might inadvertently encourage a culture where emotional pain is romanticized or where red flags get overlooked in the name of compassion. I want to be careful in how I say this, but yes—it can create gaps in the safety net.
Jacobsen: Here are some key statistics that provide a sobering backdrop:
- According to the John Jay Report in the U.S., covering 1950 to 2002, 4% of Roman Catholic priests and deacons were found to have substantiated allegations of abuse.
- The Australian Royal Commission (1950–2010) reported that 7% of priests had substantiated allegations.
- In Germany, the MHG Study (1946–2014) found that 4.4% of clergy accused of abuse.
- In New Zealand, research by the Royal Commission found that 14% of diocesan clergy had been accused, covering both minors and adults.
- Between 1950 and 2022, the Diocese of Worcester recorded 209 total allegations, of which 173 were deemed credible, 28 unsubstantiated, and eight false or withdrawn.
- A 2024 independent report found at least 1,259 clergy offenders in the EKD, although no percentage was provided.
That’s a sobering overview. The Anglican data is somewhat inconsistent, so let us refer to the 2024 Australian Child Maltreatment Study (ACMS). The 2023–24 Australian Child Maltreatment Study reports that 0.4 % of Australians aged 16–24 experienced clergy-perpetrated sexual abuse before age 18.. These cases occurred in religious settings. This suggests a more stringent and specific definition of sexual abuse compared to other studies, likely resulting in a lower prevalence rate.
This brings us to a more nuanced and complex issue: false or malicious reporting. These are extremely sensitive topics. False reports do happen, but research shows they are rare. Meta-analyses place false allegations of sexual violence between roughly 2 % and 10 % of all reports, consistent across multiple jurisdictions.
I was once invited to speak at a Croatian Christian conference as a humanist and journalist. In my presentation, I emphasized that false beliefs and false accusations—though real—must be viewed in the context of a broader, evidence-based response. These elements should not become a distraction from addressing the actual harm.
Jacobsen: Our focus should be on truth-telling and accountability. However, this is not a simple binary issue. There is a complex spectrum of responsibility—individual, institutional, and communal. These cases exist within an overlapping set of ethical and organizational dynamics that need systemic reform. That’s an important contextual point.
Even in situations where confirmed abuse rates are relatively low, there remains the ethical concern: What percentage of other clergy knew about abuse and failed to act? That question speaks to institutional complicity and moral responsibility.
We are examining concentric circles of accountability, including peers at the same hierarchical level (other priests) and superiors (bishops and archbishops), who may have had the authority to intervene but failed to do so.
Additionally, there are members of the laity—individuals in the community who were not directly harmed but knew victims and made excuses for the Church. This dynamic also contributes to a culture of silence and denial.
Understanding this fully requires expert legal and psychological analysis. Some legal scholars and advocates for survivors have been pioneers in this area. So, yes, there is a silver lining—if we acknowledge that the majority of clergy (likely 85–95%) have not committed abuse and may support reform efforts. Many do not want to be unjustly associated with those who committed crimes. It is critical not to tarnish all clergy with the same brush.
That said, there has always been a small segment of the secular community that engages in broad, often reactionary anti-church rhetoric, especially online. This was particularly visible in the mid-2000s to early 2010s. However, we should avoid reactionary cycles. The cultural pendulum may swing, but our moral response should remain clear, proportionate, and grounded in facts.
The more constructive approach is reform—dealing with the actual numbers and then conducting a realistic assessment, working from there. What are your thoughts?
Lentz: You put it well. I concur and support that.
What we clergy have to be careful of is that while it is true that roughly 95% of clergy are good, ethical people who never commit abuse, it can still sound like we’re defending or covering something up. So, we need to be cautious with that framing. But your point is well taken, and it goes back to something I was trying to say earlier.
Silence is not an option. Cover-up is not an option. Transferring the accused is not an option. In theory, this should be straightforward: take every allegation seriously, follow the process, do not cover it up, and do not transfer the accused; instead, involve the legal system when necessary.
Jacobsen: I wonder if the percentage of abusive clergy is comparable to the percentage of people who commit crimes more broadly—such as shoplifting or fraud—or even how, under the Trump administration, there was this narrative that immigrants are more likely to commit crimes.
Lentz: Yet we know from data that immigrants, on average, are more law-abiding than native-born citizens. Therefore, percentages and numbers can be skewed or manipulated. But yes, what you described is essential.
Jacobsen: So, after doing these long-form interviews, a different context emerges. We want to deal with the reality that approximately 95% of clergy, give or take, are not involved in abuse. However, over time, a significant portion of allegations are eventually substantiated when examined in aggregate across multiple institutions and cases.
The standard institutional response, at least historically, has been for clergy and laity to defend the institution. Just look at some of the major scandals. If you’re going to believe someone—well, the odds are, statistically speaking, about 1 in 20 cases may be false or malicious. That’s still uncomfortable, but the presence of false allegations does not justify ignoring the 19 out of 20 that are valid. That’s why we need a robust reform process to deal with both realities.
We require independent verification and investigation conducted externally to the Church. The pattern in some denominations has often been to let the Church investigate itself—which is problematic. What you pointed out earlier—the avoidance, the cover-up, the rotating of offenders—is precisely what should not happen.
Another key pillar is examining the enabling networks—those within the institution that facilitate abuse through silence, complicity, or willful ignorance. That’s where people like Amos Guiora have focused: on both clergy and laity who enabled the abuse. We need to ensure this is embedded in larger cultural conversations. Because this does not only happen in the Church—it’s part of broader human, institutional behaviour.
But the reason it’s so crucial in this particular context is because it’s happening in institutions that claim moral authority. Religious institutions operate under a specific guise that’s supposed to be distinct—providing ethical and spiritual guidance. So, they have a different kind of social power. Accountability must reflect that.
When I interview people from different religious backgrounds, they often equate being spiritual with being moral. That is typically what they mean: “I get my values, meaning, and guidance from religion.” So why not leverage that ethical framework to be leading lights in this area—for the good of the broader culture?
Lentz: Absolutely.
Jacobsen: The other question—though it may take longer to research—is more scientific in nature. For instance, some researchers are looking at long-term dysregulation in people who have been affected by abuse. The direction of the research is pointing toward the physiological and psychological consequences of early trauma.
So, trauma becomes embedded in the brain—at the level of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis—which governs stress response and shapes physiology. It restructures the brain over time. Minor stressors can trigger significant reactions, and this cumulative wear begins to degrade both cognitive function and emotional regulation.
A colleague is doing some fascinating work. She wants to examine cadaver brains of trauma survivors—women soldiers, for instance—to study the long-term physiological changes caused by trauma. So, the scientific question will probably require long-term research: What is the extent of physiological damage to those who have experienced childhood or clergy-related abuse, especially if the trauma was a singular but profound event?
That’s an important direction for the research. There’s also one last narrative point to make before I get to two questions—if I can remember them. The narrative point is this: We must acknowledge the reality of victimization without reinforcing an identity of permanent victimhood. People should not be excused from personal responsibility because they were harmed—but at the same time, we must recognize that real harm occurred. The goal is to help individuals transition from a survivor mindset to a thriver mindset on their terms.
Lentz: Have you come across any research on the commonly held belief that abusers were themselves abused? I wonder how many clergy abusers have histories of having been abused.
Jacobsen: That’s a good question. Yes, there is research suggesting that while not all abusers were abused, those who were abused are statistically more likely to become abusers themselves than the general population. It’s not deterministic—it’s probabilistic.
Similarly, those who were victimized are also more likely to be revictimized. This is sometimes referred to in the literature as the cycle of abuse or victimization vulnerability, mainly if trauma is not addressed early. So these are related but distinct dynamics—two poles of a larger pattern.
Have there been cases where clergy perpetrators have come forward and confessed? As in: “Yes, I did this. I need help. I accept the consequences. I want to repent, reform, restore, and make amends.” Are there examples of perpetrators living by their stated moral code and seeking true forgiveness?
Lentz: There have been a few rare cases where clergy abusers confessed publicly or privately. Some have written letters, others have made statements in court or to investigators. But genuine contrition, including willingness to accept prison time, make restitution, and seek treatment, is exceedingly rare.
Most cases involve either denial, minimization, or legal evasion. Unfortunately, moral failure is often compounded by institutional protectionism and legal maneuvering. Still, I believe stories of repentance do exist—they are not the norm. What about those abusing clergy who are preconditioned to abuse?
Jacobsen: That aligns with patterns we’ve seen in other forms of crime. Let me offer an analogy. Some people commit impulse-driven crimes, such as kleptomania or arson. They steal or burn things compulsively—it’s part of a psychological compulsion they cannot easily resist. In such cases, the individuals often admit to their behaviour and seek help, especially when the crimes are nonviolent.
On the opposite end, there have been serial killers who, after being caught—or even voluntarily—have said things like, “Use my brain for research.” They understand they are a danger and want to contribute something afterward. They might say, “I couldn’t stop myself. Please study me.” That’s a darker but more revealing example of self-awareness in pathology.
In both examples, there’s at least some recognition of harm and a desire—however delayed—to prevent future damage. In the context of clergy abuse, even a small number of authentic confessions could potentially lead to new models of accountability and healing if they were part of a public, restorative process.
They find that, in some cases, individuals who committed violent crimes had tumours so large that they were pressing against the frontal cortex. So, the parts of the brain responsible for impulse control, judgment, and emotional regulation were compromised.
The emotional dysregulation can be profound. In at least some of those cases, postmortem examinations showed clear physical causes—tumours disrupting neural networks. The structure of the brain had been altered, which likely contributed to the individual’s behavioural issues. And some of those individuals, before dying, even requested, “Please examine my brain after death—I can’t stop myself, and I want you to understand why.”
That fits with the foundations of early psychological and neurological studies. One of the classic cases is Phineas Gage, the 19th-century railroad worker who survived an iron rod piercing through his skull. It destroyed much of his frontal lobe, and afterward, his personality changed dramatically. He went from being responsible and mild-mannered to impulsive and irritable. Those close to him described him as a completely different person.
Gage’s case was one of the earliest pieces of evidence that personality, self-control, and ethical behaviour are rooted in the brain’s physical structure—particularly the frontal lobes. This links neuroscience and psychology with the development of moral behaviour. Some people, due to trauma or brain abnormalities, may be neurologically predisposed to violence or antisocial behaviour.
But we have to be careful. That kind of explanation is meant to illuminate, not excuse. It helps us understand certain behaviours, but it should not diminish the fact that crimes have victims—and every crime has a perpetrator. There is still moral and legal responsibility.
That is a critical distinction. And it’s worth noting that clergy, like members of the military, operate under a kind of dual legal structure. They are subject to both internal ecclesiastical processes and civilian law. In this way, they are not above the law but instead embedded in institutional systems that often shield them from full accountability.
Lentz: That makes sense. Your insights into brain science help frame this more precisely. Without knowing those details, I’ve often felt conflicted—because while we should never excuse criminal acts, I don’t believe we should blame the Church for creating abusers or pedophiles.
The Church doesn’t create them, but it may attract or fail to filter out individuals who are already predisposed due to psychological, neurological, or even traumatic histories. The Church often promotes a message of love, acceptance, and forgiveness, which, while good, can also be exploited.
Jacobsen: The responsibility lies in creating strict, transparent protocols that screen for risk, set clear boundaries, and respond swiftly when abuse is suspected. So, while we cannot blame the Church for the existence of abusers, we can hold it accountable for institutional cover-up, failure to act, and patterns of enabling.
Lentz: Even if we did everything right, some people would still come into the Church and do terrible things. But we must be held accountable for what we can control—oversight, response, transparency, and justice.
Jacobsen: Critics will respond quite rightly that the institution bears responsibility, especially when denominational structures contribute to abuse concealment. For example, the Roman Catholic Church is organized hierarchically—pyramidal and vertical—and in many documented cases, cover-up orders were issued from the highest levels, including the Vatican.
The Catholic Church is a clear case of top-down accountability. That’s different from the Eastern Orthodox Church, which also has a vertical structure but allows for more regional autonomy. And it’s different again from most Protestant denominations, which often have decentralized, more lateral networks.
So institutional structure plays a critical role—not just in how abuse happens, but in how it’s managed—or mismanaged—the Presbyterian or Congregational traditions, for example. My Dutch grandfather could have been ordained if he had chosen to do so when he came to Canada. He was a devout man.
That’s why there are so many variables at play. This is a sensitive and emotionally charged issue. Any topic with such emotional weight demands a multivariable approach. Many conversations are happening simultaneously, involving multiple parties—survivors, congregants, clergy, critics, and institutional defenders.
Lentz: Some people will say, “The Church is the story of my life.” I’ve heard that personally. I get that. I would never disabuse a survivor of their feelings or dismiss the violence they experienced at the hands of someone who was supposed to be a trusted priest or pastor.
The way you’re framing it is helpful—these are complex, overlapping layers of experience and responsibility. Abuse and cover-up intersect with dynamics found throughout our culture: in schools, businesses, the film industry, religious life, athletics—all of them.
Jacobsen: Yes—and what would be interesting is asking: What is particular about the Church, or church culture, that allows this to happen in such specific ways? The vertical hierarchy is undoubtedly part of it.
Lentz: Yes. I also believe that the status and spiritual authority granted to pastors and priests play a critical role. That reverence can sometimes shield misconduct. Add to that a culture of naïveté, paired with values like acceptance, forgiveness, and unconditional love, and it can become a toxic mix—especially without clear systems of accountability. Historically, we’ve had no consistent accountability process in the Church until the last 50 years—and arguably not until the last 25 years has there been any substantial institutional shift. That’s a long time—25 years out of centuries.
Jacobsen: That said, are pioneering denominations that are helping drive institutional reform? On the secular side, there also needs to be a different tone and a more nuanced analysis. The way some critiques have landed over the past 15 years hasn’t always been productive.
Lentz: Agreed.
Jacobsen: The sharpest secular critiques—many of which are online—are often disconnected from institutional reality. There’s a kind of rhetorical recoil that isn’t landing with clergy or even many congregants. And that weakens the reform effort.
Lenz: That’s an interesting point.
Lentz: Scott, you’ve probably already done this, but I do think denominations like the Presbyterian Church (USA) and the United Church of Christ (UCC) have at least verbally and procedurally taken this seriously. It’s in the Book of Order, it’s in process manuals, and it’s now a standard requirement to have sexual misconduct policies at every level of the Church.
I know this is true for the Presbyterians. I suspect it’s also true for the UCC, Methodists, and likely the Episcopalians. It would be worthwhile to research the specific reforms that different denominations have implemented over the last 30 years. [Ed. Under PC(USA) Book of Order G-3.0106, every council ‘shall adopt and implement a sexual misconduct policy and a child and youth protection policy.’]
Jacobsen: I do think there’s a tendency to bash the Church as if nothing has changed and there has been only cover-up and denial. That’s neither accurate nor fair. It certainly doesn’t advance the conversation.
The real question is: What is the goal? If it’s reform, then we need to focus on the institutions that have made progress and build from there. Constant condemnation doesn’t create a path forward. What does continuous criticism achieve if it’s not fair? What is the practical politics of your aim?
If the aim is justice and reform, then we need to be precise. We know there are clear cases where abuse and cover-up were institutionally embedded. But treating all churches and all denominations as identical is not helpful. That flattens the nuance and erases differences in structure, governance, and response.
A more constructive path respects the freedom of religion and speech enjoyed by both clergy and laity, domestically and internationally. If you’re going to critique the Church, make the case targeted. If you want to help, target your approach to engage that particular community. Say clearly: “Here is the reality as we currently know it, based on the evidence—and we will not speculate beyond the facts.”
Once that’s done, we can use that foundation as the basis for reform. Over time, more data and expert insights will be gathered. This enables the development of a reliable database for comparing how different denominations have handled abuse allegations. Of course, errors will occur in early efforts—but that’s part of building a transparent record.
For example, when you look at reported abuse rates across denominations—sometimes ranging from 4% to 14%—that’s a wide margin. It might be beyond typical statistical error, which raises the question: What’s contributing to 14% versus 4%? Why the difference?
Ideally, we want the number to be zero. So, how do we reduce that 14% to 5%, then to zero? That is a reform roadmap. But here’s the thing—we’re often not asking broader cultural questions about how to get to zero across society, not just in the Church.
It’s unfair to assume that only one denomination—the Roman Catholic Church—is responsible. Yes, we can always identify specific hierarchical structures that exacerbated the issue. But it’s not exclusive to Catholicism.
Lentz: One more thing: this should have been said earlier. There’s a tendency among Protestants, especially in the Presbyterian tradition—which I know well—to treat this as a “Catholic problem.” And that’s a problem in itself.
That mindset is a form of denial. When I write or speak about this issue, I always make a point to say: This is not just a Roman Catholic problem. Sure, their hierarchy may exacerbate specific dynamics. Still, the issue of sexual abuse by clergy is present across all faith traditions.
Do you find instances of sexual abuse in Jewish communities?
Jacobsen: Yes, though it can be challenging to get a clear picture because some of the reports are anecdotal or poorly substantiated. Still, from what I’m told by people I trust, the issue does exist. It tends to be more prevalent in closed or insular communities, such as certain ultra-Orthodox sects. That makes sense—the more enclosed the community, the more opportunity there is for abuse to remain hidden. A rural Presbyterian church can be just as closed-off in its way—serving a town of 1,500, where everyone knows each other and goes to the same Church for spiritual sustenance.
It’s the spiritual authority of the leader, the structure, and the theological grounding in sacred texts that create the possibility. Often, these structures are patriarchal, and that adds another layer. So, no—it’s not that abuse is inevitable. However, the structural conditions can increase the likelihood and certainly complicate accountability. This is not an anomaly-based phenomenon; rather, it is a pattern observed across various faith traditions, denominations, and cultures.
Lentz: Listen, I’ve got to run, but what a privilege to talk to you, Scott.
Jacobsen: Likewise—thank you.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/05
Javier Palomarez, CEO of the United States Hispanic Business Council, discusses how DHL’s 2024 pause on sub-$800 de minimis shipments—combined with heightened U.S.–China trade tensions—has deeply impacted Hispanic-owned small businesses. These enterprises rely on affordable imports and grapple with rising costs, regulatory burdens, and uncertain supply chains. While entrepreneurs remain adaptable, the cumulative challenges of taxation, workforce shortages, and logistics delays threaten business continuity. Palomarez urges policymakers to offer tax relief, reduce regulatory pressure, and support nearshoring strategies to sustain America’s fastest-growing business sector—Hispanic-owned firms contributing over $850 billion to the economy.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today we’re with Javier Palomarez, the Founder and CEO of the United States Hispanic Business Council (USHBC). He is a leading national advocate for Hispanic-owned small businesses, with over thirty years of experience in multicultural marketing and sales, including work with several Fortune 100 companies. Palomarez is a recognized voice on issues of immigration, the economy, and minority representation. He frequently appears on national television for his insights on public policy, the challenges facing small businesses, and the influence of Hispanic voters in key swing states. Based in Flower Mound, Texas, he continues to advocate for legislative and economic initiatives supporting Hispanic entrepreneurs nationwide. So, how did—and how does—DHL’s pause on shipments affect cross-border e-commerce volumes into the U.S.?
Javier Palomarez: If we take a step back, the de minimis provision under Section 321 of the U.S. Tariff Act allows shipments valued at $800 or less to enter the United States without duties, taxes, or formal customs procedures. This facilitates cross-border e-commerce, especially for small packages. In recent years, de minimis shipments have surged, accounting for a significant share, over 90%, of all informal entries, with a large portion originating from China. This provision has played a vital role in helping small businesses import goods at lower costs and with fewer regulatory barriers. However, amid rising concerns about evasion of duties, product safety, and the trade imbalance with China, scrutiny of de minimis has increased. When DHL Express paused its de minimis shipments under $800 into the U.S. in early 2024, it disrupted the logistics pipeline for many small businesses that rely on affordable, fast international shipping. This action came in response to regulatory pressure and ongoing U.S.–China trade tensions, including additional Section 301 tariffs imposed on certain Chinese imports. The result? Small businesses, many of which are owned by Hispanic entrepreneurs, have found themselves unable to source products from overseas, particularly from Chinese suppliers, affordably. The burden of complying with new customs regulations or paying duties often erases their profit margin. DHL has had to adapt by shifting its logistics strategy, and in some areas, has reportedly scaled back operations, resulting in job losses and facility closures, including in California, though exact numbers vary by source. The broader ripple effect has been significant for the small business community, which heavily depends on reliable and economical global shipping.
Jacobsen: So, does this directly result from changing the de minimis policy in the context of the broader U.S.–China trade relationship?
Palomarez: Yes. While the U.S. must take a firm and fair approach in trade negotiations with China, our most significant source of de minimis imports, unintended consequences exist. One is the disproportionate impact on millions of small businesses, including Hispanic-owned enterprises, that are suddenly dealing with increased costs and regulatory complexity.
Jacobsen: What are you hearing from Hispanic-owned small businesses about their challenges?
Palomarez: The challenges vary depending on region, industry, and generational status. Some Hispanic entrepreneurs are first-generation immigrants with strong ties to family-run operations or specific trades. Others are multi-generational business owners who have scaled up within construction, logistics, retail, and food services sectors. For example, someone from a family of farmers may continue in agriculture, just as someone with experience in trade may move into import/export or e-commerce. These businesses often lack the financial cushion or legal resources to navigate abrupt changes in trade policy. That makes them especially vulnerable to regulatory shifts, like those affecting de minimis. At the same time, many Hispanic business owners are resilient and innovative, often leveraging bilingual and bicultural capabilities to reach underserved markets. But they need predictable rules, access to capital, and fair trade frameworks to thrive.
Jacobsen: And what is the average character of those businesses? Can you specify what types of challenges—whether in product, services, or otherwise—are impacted by these DHL-related issues?
Palomarez: Yes. Here is a little context on the Hispanic business community in the United States. At the United States Hispanic Business Council, we’re proud to advocate for the 4.5 million Hispanic-owned firms in this country that collectively contribute over $850 billion to the American economy. It is also the fastest-growing segment of the American small business community. For every one venture started by a non-Hispanic, Hispanics are beginning three. So we’re launching businesses at a rate of three to one compared to the general market. That’s important in the U.S., Scott, because when you look at it, small businesses are responsible for creating nearly 70% of net new jobs. We’re the beating heart of the American economy. When considering the challenges facing all American small businesses, and certainly Hispanic-owned ones, eliminating de minimis has added yet another obstacle.
The change to de minimis and ongoing supply chain disruptions will overburden already struggling ports on both coasts. That will send ripples throughout the business community. Local restaurants—mom-and-pop-owned establishments—depend on imported ingredients for their menus. Local mechanics rely on imported parts. Local bodegas rely on imported goods. And the list goes on. Unlike large corporations like Walmart or Costco, the average small business has no resources to pre-purchase inventory. We do not have the negotiating power big firms have to bring prices down. We are stuck with what we can get—if we can get any inventory at all, Scott. We do not have the resources. And when we look domestically, we cannot find producers for many of the parts, ingredients, and goods I mentioned. So we are stuck. It is a scary situation for the American small business community. In my community, specifically—the Hispanic-owned small business community—the vast majority of our members voted for President Trump. So, as you can imagine, there is some trepidation. There is a bit of questioning—maybe even buyer’s remorse. And we are trying to figure out how we can adapt. How do we continue to maintain our businesses, let alone grow them? It is a difficult time. De minimis has not helped. Corporations have flexibility in some ways but also rigidity in others. They have flexibility because they generate a lot of capital to test new ventures at scale. I remember Jeff Bezos recently talking about how, with this horizontal optimization layer—AI—they can apply it across more than a thousand applications at once in development. However, they are also large entities, and profound structural shifts are difficult for them. If you build a massive factory, you are locked into that investment. On the other hand, small businesses may not generate the same amount of capital, but they are not as deeply entrenched, so they have some flexibility.
Jacobsen: Is there—or is there not—some benefit? Is there a greater possibility of maneuvering through some of these customer changes for small businesses that are encountering more challenges?
Palomarez: Adaptability and creativity—the coin of the realm for the American small business community. To be an entrepreneur, in and of itself, illustrates that you’re willing to take a chance. You’re eager to be creative. You’re keen to do whatever it takes to get it done. Otherwise, you wouldn’t be an entrepreneur. So we will manage that. We will handle it. I’m sure we will.
However, the real issue is the accumulation of challenges. If it’s not a regulatory challenge, it’s taxation. If it’s not taxation, it’s policy and legislation. If it’s not that, it’s supply chain issues. If it’s not that, we’re unable to fully staff our companies because of workforce shortages in areas like construction, manufacturing, agriculture, hospitality, and even technology. So it’s the cumulative effect that is making it difficult for the American small business community. Look, all we want—all any business in America wants, and indeed the small business community—is to know and believe that there’s an administration that understands our challenges and is willing to offer some relief wherever and however they can. We want a stable environment to plan, invest, and grow our businesses. And we don’t have that right now. Like every American, we try to do our part and patiently await the outcome. But it is a difficult time. Again, many small businesses don’t have the resources to wait six months or a year for things to stabilize. Many of us will be out of business if this continues.
Jacobsen: What about the impacts on delivery time and processing time? That’s another issue.
Palomarez: Yes, I should throw in this one. The average customer may not necessarily understand small business owners’ challenges.
Jacobsen: What about customer satisfaction?
Palomarez: Yes, one of the hallmarks of the American small business community is our ability to offer absolute customer satisfaction. We know our clients. We’re in the neighbourhood. We’re local retailers. We shop at the same stores. We gas up our cars at the same stations. We go to the same churches. We belong to the same golf clubs, etc. So we’re in those communities, and a lot of that personalization- the customized customer relationships is put at risk when the retailer or business owner has no control over whether they will get a product, much less on time. When you’ve built your reputation and your business on customer satisfaction—on that local touch and feel people have come to rely on—it puts a significant part of your business strategy at risk. We’re seeing that right now, where we can’t even tell our clients with certainty, “Yes, this item will be here in two weeks.”
We’re hoping it’ll be here in two weeks, but we know, in the back of our minds, it’s probably not going to be two weeks, and it may not arrive at all. So you’re risking your entire business’s reputation in an environment like this. What’s tricky is that it’s entirely beyond our control. That’s the most disheartening part of all this. It’s not our fault.
Jacobsen: So, local and nearshore supply chains—how are small businesses acutely affected in those markets? Are they still relying heavily on shipping?
Palomarez: Yes. We’re delighted to hear about nearshoring and the prospect of bringing manufacturing, if not home, then at least closer to home. The reality is, we’ve grown dependent on China. Everybody in our small business community that we poll is acutely aware of our dependence on China. And it’s a dependency built up over decades. This didn’t happen overnight. While we agree with President Trump and this administration that we need to wean ourselves off of China, it would be great to create those manufacturing jobs, facilities, and business opportunities here in the United States; it’s not as easy as all that. So while we support the rationale, we support the administration’s efforts to nearshore or bring manufacturing back to the United States, we live in the sure knowledge that there’s a huge gap between policy—or a campaign promise—and the reality of getting those plants up and running and producing the goods and products we need.
There’s a time lapse, and it’s in that time lapse that we could either be severely damaged or go out of business entirely. So we’re looking for an administration that understands that—and is willing to help us during that interim period to keep our businesses alive, well, and growing. That remains to be seen, but we’re hopeful. When we poll our membership, the sentiment is still that Donald Trump is enough of a businessman to recognize this, and they’re hoping there will be some relief in terms of exclusions, or tax incentives, or other support to help the small business community weather the storm between the decision-making phase and the actual implementation of domestic or nearshore manufacturing.
Jacobsen: What moves by the current administration—for those who voted for it—would relieve some of their buyer’s remorse, to use the phrase you mentioned earlier?
Palomarez: That’s a big question. We did two polls—one, maybe two months before the election, and one, maybe two weeks before the election. In both cases, we surveyed 2,527 members. And in both instances, some 86% of our membership said they identified with Kamala Harris. They identified with her on a personal level—as the child of immigrant parents, a child raised in a single-parent household, a young person who had to struggle to get where she is, a minority, and a woman. So about 86% of our membership identified with her. They did not identify with Donald Trump. They weren’t the children of billionaires.
They didn’t inherit the wealth that Donald Trump inherited. So while they identified with Kamala Harris, they still said they would vote for Donald Trump because they believed that Trump was enough of a businessperson that he would help with the economic challenges the country was facing, and ultimately, that would help their small businesses, if that makes sense to you. So with that in mind, it runs the gamut. There are so many areas where we need help. The last person to enact any legislation that helped the American small business community in terms of taxes and taxation was, in fact, Donald Trump.
It was controversial, but the small business community benefited from the tax legislation Trump passed during his first term. And if you think about it, Scott, it hadn’t been since Ronald Reagan, since back in the eighties, that American small businesses received any relief on their taxes. When you’re running a business and 47% of your income goes directly to Uncle Sam before you even see a penny, you begin to appreciate a guy who sees it from your perspective. Controversial or not, you start to believe in him if he helps you with that particular issue. And so, that’s the Donald Trump that this community voted for.
In response to your question, are there other areas in which Donald Trump or this administration could help the American small business community? Unequivocally, yes. Taxation is one. Lessening regulation is another. The regulatory challenges the average business faces in America, never mind small companies, are insurmountable. Unlike large companies, we don’t have a division of tax experts. We don’t have an army of lobbyists. We don’t have a department of lawyers. It’s just us. We have to manage it. We have to handle it all. So you can imagine how overwhelming the regulatory structure is in this country. An administration that helps us with regulations? Fantastic.
So yes, there are several areas where this administration could still become the saviour of the American small business community. Energy costs are another example. Again, that’s entirely out of our control. We’re running the same business we were three years ago, but it’s costing us 42% more—simply because insurance has gone up, energy costs have gone up, taxes have gone up, etc. It’s hard to keep your business, much less grow it, in an environment like that. So there are many areas where this administration could help the American small business community, and we live in that hope. We’re hopeful that this administration will be the one.
Jacobsen: Excellent. Javier, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate your expertise.
Palomarez: Have a good one. Thanks so much.
Jacobsen: Hey. You take care.
Palomarez: Bye-bye.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/04
Bede Ramcharan is the founder, president, and CEO of Indetatech, a certified Service-Disabled Veteran-Owned Small Business (SDVOSB) founded in February 2020. A retired U.S. Army veteran, he holds a master’s degree in healthcare administration from the Army-Baylor University Graduate Program. Under his leadership, Indetatech delivers supply chain, logistics, staffing, and facility management solutions across six U.S. states and three international markets. Honoured as the 2015 Minority Veteran Entrepreneur of the Year by NaVOBA, Ramcharan also serves on advisory boards for NaVOBA and the U.S. Global Leadership Coalition, advocating for veteran entrepreneurship and responsible global commerce.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Bede Ramcharan, founder, president, and CEO of Indetatech, a certified Service-Disabled Veteran-Owned Small Business (SDVOSB) established in February 2020. A retired U.S. Army veteran, he holds a master’s degree in healthcare administration from the Army-Baylor University Graduate Program in Health and Business Administration. Ramcharan leads Indetatech in delivering global supply chain, logistics, staffing, and facility management solutions. The company operates in more than six U.S. states and exports to three international markets.
He was honoured as the 2015 Minority Veteran Entrepreneur of the Year by the National Veteran-Owned Business Association (NaVOBA). Ramcharan also serves on advisory boards, including NaVOBA and the U.S. Global Leadership Coalition, where he contributes to both veteran empowerment and business advocacy. Thank you for joining me today. I appreciate you taking the time. Are the new U.S. customs rules continuing to affect cross-border commerce?
Bede Ramcharan: Well, the first thing is—we don’t know. There’s much inconsistency. What’s enacted today could change tomorrow morning. The tariff rates are frequently revised, and enforcement patterns vary, which creates unpredictability.
This unpredictability has led to instability in supply chains. Some businesses are stockpiling inventory, while others are delaying purchases. In anticipation of future costs, suppliers may raise prices. All this leads to confusion for the end consumer.
If tariffs were consistent and predictable, we could develop strategies around them. However, current policy volatility makes it challenging to plan. It sometimes feels like we’re responding to whims. Today’s tariff rate might be gone tomorrow—or even increased. That uncertainty ripples across the economy.
Jacobsen: What is the de minimis threshold, and why is it significant?
Ramcharan: The de minimis threshold is the maximum declared value of goods that can be imported into the United States without incurring duties or formal entry procedures. Currently, that threshold is $800 under Section 321 of the U.S. Tariff Act.
This is significant because it enables faster, duty-free shipping for low-value items—primarily e-commerce orders from platforms like Amazon, Shein, or Temu. It benefits consumers and small businesses by lowering the cost and complexity of imports.
However, there’s increasing scrutiny of this policy. Lawmakers and trade advocates have expressed concerns that foreign companies—especially those shipping from China—are exploiting this threshold to avoid tariffs and undercut domestic competitors. There have been proposals to lower the threshold or increase customs inspections, which could slow delivery times and raise costs.
If the $800 limit is lowered or stricter enforcement is applied, we could see delays at customs. U.S. Customs and Border Protection would need more staffing and resources to inspect a higher volume of parcels. This could lead consumers to rethink spontaneous online purchases—especially if delivery timelines stretch from two days to two or three weeks.
I’ve experienced that already when ordering items. You place the order, and then the delivery date changes. What was originally a one-week delivery becomes two weeks, then three. At that point, you’re forced to decide if it is still worth it. That’s where the most significant impact is going to be—on the individual consumer.
Large companies that import in bulk, well above the $800 de minimis threshold, are bringing in entire containers or even half a ship’s worth of goods. They’re operating at a different scale. However, for the individual ordering online and receiving shipments directly, that threshold matters significantly. The most significant impact, in that case, is delayed delivery time.
Jacobsen: What about the broader implications for international shipping logistics? That is, admittedly, a broad question—but more specifically, could you speak to congestion at the ports, delays in the supply chain, and the cumulative effects on processing times?
Ramcharan: Yes. We’ve already experienced the effects of supply chain disruptions during the COVID-19 pandemic, but these disruptions primarily stemmed from a lack of manufacturing and shortages of goods. This time, the issue is different. The products are available, but the bottleneck is now at the ports due to increased scrutiny and enforcement.
Everything has to be checked—inspected for proper tariff classification and valuation—and taxed accordingly. That additional layer of customs enforcement is going to significantly slow things down. I recently read an article stating that the first ships impacted by the new tariffs are expected to reach U.S. ports by either the end of this week or early next week.
Jacobsen: Understood. That would mark the first physical test of these new rules.
Ramcharan: Exactly. We will assess the volume of those incoming vessels and determine how long the processing will take. There’s much speculation—armchair quarterbacking, if you will—about how this will play out. But the truth is, no one knows yet. We have not dealt with something of this scope before—not quite like this.
Even I’m cautious. You could predict something in the morning, and it might already be outdated by the afternoon. We’ll have to wait and see how significant the backlog and bottlenecks become at the ports.
On top of that, there were reports of a possible labour strike at one of the ports, which would further complicate the situation. When you start adding all these variables together—tariff enforcement, port congestion, labour issues—it creates a complex scenario. It’s a big black hole in terms of predictability right now.
The biggest concern on everyone’s mind is pricing. Am I going to pay more for this item? Interestingly, it was Walmart that stated they would not pass the increased tariff costs on to consumers. That’s significant, but whether others follow suit remains to be seen.
Some companies have stated that they will not pass on the tariff cost. Others have said they’ll display both prices—the original and the tariff-adjusted price—side by side. That way, consumers can see that it’s not the company arbitrarily raising the cost; rather, it’s the tariff that’s driving the increase.
And I keep coming back to pricing because that is what will drive consumer behaviour. People will either choose not to buy or look for an alternative source. The intended effect of tariffs, of course, is to encourage consumers to buy more American-made products. But at the end of the day, there are very few products that are genuinely independent of the global economy.
Take automobiles and clothing—many of those may be assembled or finished in the United States, but the components or even just the packaging could be sourced overseas. So, even if the product is technically “Made in the USA,” disruptions can still occur if the packaging supply chain is affected.
In the MRO (Maintenance, Repair, and Operations) world, where I operate within logistics, we’ve pre-positioned several months’ worth of inventory. That buffer means we’re unlikely to see immediate price increases. The inventory already present on U.S. soil will be used first.
However, once those inventories begin to run low, we can expect to see two consequences: price increases and delays in delivery. Our customers care about two key indicators—price and lead time. Those two metrics determine how we market our goods and how we move them through the supply chain.
Jacobsen: From what I gather, this means increased processing times and higher prices for consumers. Is that generally correct?
Ramcharan: Yes. Everyone will raise prices.
Let’s say I’m Vendor A selling an item for $1, and tariffs now force my competitor to sell the same item for $2. I may raise my price to $1.50, even though I could still sell at $1. Why? Because the market will bear it. That’s the incentive structure. And how many companies are going to pass on the opportunity to raise prices?
Prices are going to rise no matter what. Historically, we’ve seen that once prices rise, they rarely return to their previous levels—even when conditions stabilize. We adjust to a new price norm. Unless there’s an oversupply and a need to clear out inventory, there’s little pressure to reduce prices. As a market, we’re conditioned to accept those higher price points.
The one major exception people track going up and down is gasoline. We expect fluctuation there, and so we’re psychologically prepared for it. But for most goods—groceries, cars, housing—prices go up and tend to stay there.
There was a time when we had a housing glut, and prices dropped. But now? Materials are the next pressure point. We import much lumber from Canada. That affects housing prices. Once prices rise due to increased raw material costs, they rarely return to their previous levels by much. The higher pricing becomes the new normal for as long as the market can sustain it.
So, yes—conversions are happening in pricing. You also have vendors behaving, in a strange way, almost anti-competitively—raising prices not purely out of necessity but because the market conditions allow for it. The entire system is out of alignment. It is not easy to phrase precisely, but that’s the reality.
As I mentioned earlier, COVID-19 provided us with a test run on large-scale supply chain disruptions. For about a year after COVID, when global trade resumed and supply chains started flowing again, prices were still elevated. Everyone said, “Well, it’s because of the earlier disruptions.” But even after conditions stabilized, prices didn’t return to pre-COVID levels.
Jacobsen: Would it be fair to say that the world has never been more globalized than it is today?
Ramcharan: Absolutely. As a country, the United States has experienced periods of isolationism in the past. But today is different—our economy is deeply enmeshed in the global system.
Consumers can now pick up a smartphone, place an order, and never even think about where the item is coming from. In the past, you had to look at catalogues or consider supply sources. Now, online commerce is so seamless that the global nature of our purchases is invisible—until disruption hits.
People are starting to understand that globalization is not just about goods and services. It’s also about pharmaceuticals, which many did not realize are heavily imported. Or food—we often talk about supporting local farmers, and they do tremendous work, but many Americans are unaware of how much of our daily food intake is imported. It may arrive fresh, but it was not grown or produced here.
From an American perspective, we are becoming increasingly aware of the interconnectedness of everything. Most people had no idea—unless they were already working in logistics or procurement—that this was the case.
Those of us who made it through COVID-19 in terms of business continuity became acutely aware—highly sensitized—of the origin of every product. You might want to buy something locally, but if it’s not made here, you’re dependent on a global supply chain to get it. And now, we have to pay close attention to those origins.
You must assess political stability in your sourcing regions. If there is unrest or conflict, it could disrupt production and your access to the goods. You have to monitor environmental risks, too—like natural disasters. I recall a major typhoon that occurred years ago in Asia—perhaps in 2008—where one of the affected areas was a key producer of Intel chips. That single event had a cascading effect on electronics manufacturing worldwide.
And because of that typhoon, shipping was shut down for weeks. Ports were closed, and semiconductor chips were not shipped. As a result, computer and laptop prices spiked, and many people could not understand why. The reason was a global chip shortage caused by a single weather event on the other side of the world.
We are probably living in the most interconnected, globalized era humanity has ever experienced—and I’m speaking globally now. And it’s only going to intensify. It’s not just about products anymore; it’s also about people.
In the U.S., if we erode or disrupt the workforce involved in production, logistics, and distribution—the people who touch these goods—we are going to experience disruptions at that level, too. I do not think many people fully appreciated that before. It is not just the product that matters; it is the people throughout the supply chain. If you disrupt either side—goods or labour—you disrupt the entire system.
Jacobsen: These sessions always feel like the trial version of a more extended conversation—it keeps things sharp. With a four-hour talk, you would need breaks for coffee and the restroom, but in these tighter formats, you stay more focused.
I’ve spoken to many business leaders and economists. One theme that consistently emerges, regardless of political or geographic affiliation, is that stability is beneficial for business. Consumers know it. Vendors know it. So, thinking long-term—especially with developments involving companies like DHL and changes in customs regulations—if things eventually settle into a more “normalized” state, how long does it typically take for global trade and cross-border e-commerce to regularize again?
Ramcharan: That’s a tricky question. We can reach a new normal—but we cannot go back to the old one. Things will never be precisely the way they were before COVID. That was a pivotal moment—a stake in the ground. Since then, we’ve adjusted. Now, we are adapting again to what I would call a “new new normal.”
The more stability we have—particularly at the policy level—the faster we can return to a more predictable supply chain. If global governments were able to engage consistently and pragmatically, that would go a long way. Ultimately, it is those governments that set trade policy and negotiate international agreements.
Right now, however, that stability is lacking.
How long will it take to resolve this? Honestly, I do not know—and I am trying to leave politics out of this—but it depends on how long it takes to establish that stability.
Money talks.
Two things will happen. First, when large corporations—whose performance is measured by earnings per share and stock price—begin to take serious financial hits, they will feel the pressure. Even though many of these companies are already highly profitable, if profits dip further, they will have the incentive to act. They can and will apply pressure at the proper governmental levels to say, ‘We need a solution.‘
Consumers have a breaking point as well. They can do one of two things: they can say, “We’re not going to buy from you anymore.” We saw this play out in the Target-Costco scenario. Target lost ground while Costco gained, despite both sourcing many of their products from the same suppliers.
Consumers today are showing a willingness to make sacrifices—even in terms of pricing—to make their voices heard. That is a significant shift. Historically, people voted with their wallets—that was the phrase: “I vote with my pocketbook.”Now, we’re seeing a more values-based consumer behaviour, where pricing is not always the deciding factor.
This is a new paradigm in the economy. I was reading an article this morning that noted—for the first time in a long time—public confidence in labour unions has surged. In the last six to eight months, support for labour unions has nearly doubled that of big business.
People are paying attention to the human element. CEOs at large corporations may earn millions in salary and bonuses, while frontline workers at the other end of the production line are sometimes not even paid a living wage. That imbalance is becoming harder for consumers to ignore.
No, we are not going to eliminate that gap, but there’s a growing push to elevate the lower half of the labour force—to get people to a place where they can sustain themselves. This shift in sentiment toward organized labour influences consumer behaviour. It changes how and why people buy.
Today, you can offer a cheaper product, but that alone does not guarantee market share. Consumers expect more. They want ethical practices, transparency, and social responsibility. It is no longer just about price.
So again, this is all part of a broader transformation we are witnessing. We are studying, responding to, and adapting to it in real-time.
Jacobsen: Last question—how is your business doing, both domestically and internationally?
Ramcharan: Sure. Our international activity has slowed significantly, and this slowdown began during the COVID pandemic. We built some new relationships abroad, sourced products, and adapted, but the focus gradually shifted.
Now, we are concentrating more on what is right here in our backyard. While we still conduct business across the United States, I have prioritized customers who are within a three- to four-hour radius of our location.
That’s my current growth strategy—deepening relationships with existing customers. Before, the mindset was always about acquiring new business. However, during the COVID-19 pandemic, some of our clients remained loyal despite challenging circumstances, and that loyalty is now a priority for us.
So, instead of casting a wide net, we’ve pulled in slightly. We are focusing on servicing, supporting, and growing the base we already have—because I know what those customers need, and we’ve built trust.
We’ve already established our supply chains. I do not want to establish entirely new supply chains for new customers at this time. First, it’s not feasible in the current environment. Second, I do not want to take that risk only to fall short of expectations and have a customer say, “I thought you were better than that.”
So, yes, it is a gamble, but I’ve chosen to pull in and consolidate until things stabilize, and we can get a clearer picture of what’s happening in the market.
Jacobsen: Bede, thank you so much for your time today.
Ramcharan: Did I answer your questions? I want to ensure that I’ve covered everything.
Jacobsen: You did. Absolutely. I appreciate your expertise, and it was a pleasure to meet you.
Ramcharan: Thank you. Likewise, I’m looking forward to doing some reading this weekend—I plan to go back and review more of your work. You had some exciting titles. I read one or two, then scrolled through your résumé and saw several other articles online that caught my eye. I thought, “I’ve got to go back and read that one.” So yes, it’s my pleasure—and I’m glad to add you to my network.
Jacobsen: Excellent. Likewise.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen
Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project
Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/07/04
Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, as well as proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo explains methodology behind ranking all 50 states, highlights standardized testing, graduation rates, and funding disparities, and unpacks why states like Wyoming and New Mexico rank higher despite limited resources.
Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Chip Lupo. All right. So, Brown v. Board of Education—even I, as a Canadian, know about this landmark U.S. Supreme Court decision. In 1954, the Court unanimously ruled that racial segregation in public schools was unconstitutional, overturning the “separate but equal” doctrine established in Plessy v. Ferguson (1896). While it was a pivotal moment in the civil rights movement, it faced considerable resistance at the time. Even today, some individuals and groups continue to debate aspects of desegregation policy, though the core principle is widely accepted.
In general, it is no longer seen as controversial to oppose the denial of school enrollment based on race. However, modern challenges persist in terms of equity—especially around how school districts vary in funding, educational quality, access to resources, and student outcomes, including standardized test scores.
So, what have you found in terms of how these factors play out across school districts in various U.S. states?
Chip Lupo: Scott, first, let us get into the methodology. What we did was compare all 50 states to assess which have the most significant levels of racial equality in education. This includes access, funding equity, and academic outcomes. One key thing to remember is that school funding in the U.S. often depends on local property taxes, which creates systemic disparities between districts—especially those with predominantly white populations versus predominantly Black or Hispanic populations.
We specifically examined the gaps between Black and white Americans in areas such as high school and college graduation rates, standardized test scores, and the percentage of adults with at least a bachelor’s degree. The metrics with the highest weight were test scores and educational attainment, especially at the postsecondary level. We ranked each state from 1 to 50.
The results were surprising. The top three states in terms of racial equality in education were Wyoming, New Mexico, and West Virginia. These are generally rural and lower-income states, which may suggest that economic parity in some of these areas contributes to a narrower racial gap—although this does not necessarily indicate overall high performance.
That is to say, while the systems in those states may not be exceptionally high-performing or well-funded, the levels of disparity between racial groups appear smaller than in many wealthier, more urbanized states.
Jacobsen: That is a stark difference. How would you characterize that 70-point range overall?
Lupo: It tells us that racial inequality in education is not only persistent but varies drastically from state to state. States like Wisconsin, Minnesota, Connecticut, and Nebraska have relatively high average educational outcomes overall—but when you disaggregate by race, the disparities are enormous. These states tend to have significant achievement gaps and lower postsecondary attainment rates for students of colour despite overall affluence or investment in education. So the issue is not just funding—but who has access to that funding and how equitably it is distributed.
Our data emphasizes that racial equality in education is not just about lifting all boats—it is also about closing gaps.
Jacobsen: So, if you are in a state with a large majority white population, that number is probably going to be skewed a bit. So, we adjust on a per capita basis.
Lupo: Exactly. Public high school graduation rates are given full weight. Standardized test scores also receive full weight because, at least in recent years, they have been central—though some colleges have moved away from requiring them. Still, standardized tests like the SAT and ACT have long been hot-button issues in conversations about racial equity, particularly due to concerns about cultural and socioeconomic bias embedded in the tests.
Jacobsen: Right. So, you gave full weight to standardized testing.
Lupo: Yes, exactly. However, you pointed out a key detail—the gap in total scores across states. We are talking about a top score of 88 down to a low of 12. That is a glaring gap. It strongly suggests that there is still significant work to be done nationwide to close racial disparities in education.
Jacobsen: I see. That covers methodology broadly. Let us zoom in. The most significant weighting you assigned was for adults without a bachelor’s degree—specifically, giving double weight to those with at least a bachelor’s degree. Why does that factor make up more than a third of the overall score?
Lupo: Right. That is a good observation. Yes, we gave double weight to the share of adults over age 25 with at least a bachelor’s degree. That is because, culturally and economically, earning a college degree is still considered a benchmark of educational success. That mindset largely stems from the generation preceding ours, and it remains strong today.
In many minority communities, which were historically denied access to higher education, a bachelor’s degree represents not just academic success but also social mobility and pride. It is seen as a milestone achievement. That is probably why we placed more weight on that metric than on high school graduation, which received only half the weight.
Jacobsen: Understood. Now, about SAT and ACT scores—some students take one, some take both, and others use them when transferring between universities. Why do those get included in racial equality metrics in education?
Lupo: Good question. Standardized tests, such as the SAT and ACT, are often regarded as “high-stakes” exams. Moreover, you are right—Pearson Education, for instance, classifies tests like the Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale and the Stanford-Binet as “Class C” assessments—meaning they are high-stakes and require professional oversight to administer. Similarly, SATs and ACTs are high-stakes because they have real consequences: they can determine whether someone gains admission to a particular university or qualifies for scholarships.
In the North American context, where many universities still place heavy emphasis on these scores—despite increasing test-optional policies—they remain significant indicators of educational access and opportunity. That is why we included them with full weight in our racial equity assessment.
Jacobsen: One other thing to consider with the SATs is that some students take them to gauge where they stand. For example, a rising sophomore in high school might take the SAT early to get a sense of how they are doing relative to college admissions expectations. Based on the results, students can identify where they need improvement. It also gives them time to retake the test—especially if their initial score is below the average for their target schools. They can prepare further and try to improve.
Several key sources of research were mentioned, including the U.S. Census Bureau, the National Center for Education Statistics (NCES), ACT, and the College Board. Why were these chosen as the foundational sources for the data analysis?
Lupo: Great question. The College Board is the organization that administers the SAT and several other standardized exams, including AP exams and, indirectly, exams for graduate-level admissions. Although technically, LSATs, MCATs, and GMATs are managed by different bodies, the College Board has historically been involved in shaping educational assessment. So, including their data was essential.
ACT is a separate organization that administers the ACT, which most universities accept as an alternative to the SAT. Their dataset is vital for states and students who lean more heavily on the ACT.
The National Center for Education Statistics (NCES) is the primary federal entity responsible for collecting and analyzing education data in the United States. It aggregates statistics on a wide range of topics, including test scores and graduation rates.
And then, of course, for demographic information, especially data disaggregated by race, the U.S. Census Bureau is the most authoritative source. When you are comparing racial equality in education, you need that population-level data.
Jacobsen: High school graduation also received a substantial weighting in your analysis. While not as heavily weighted as the percentage of adults with a bachelor’s degree, why is high school graduation still considered such a pivotal metric?
Lupo: High school graduation rates are a fundamental benchmark because they often reflect how well school systems are functioning at a basic level. If students are not completing high school, that is a major red flag. It highlights areas where districts may be under-resourced or struggling—especially in inner cities where schools are often underfunded and face higher crime rates.
Failing public school systems is, unfortunately, a reality in several U.S. cities, and this is reflected in the low graduation rates. So, we assigned full weight to this metric to underscore how some districts, and indeed some states, are doing a significantly better job than others—either through better administration, better funding, or more equitable policies. We wanted our analysis to reflect that.
Jacobsen: And in terms of data—was this a relatively small dataset?
Lupo: Yes, it was pretty compact. For that particular metric—public high school graduation rates—we only used six key sources. So, it is not an enormous dataset, but it is incredibly telling.
Jacobsen: That brings us to one last point. In your final ranking, you mentioned there is a relatively flat distribution—what does that mean in this context?
Lupo: It means that in the middle range of the rankings, several states are clustered closely together. So, while the top and bottom states show dramatic differences—like that 70-point gap we discussed earlier—many states in the middle have similar scores, indicating moderate performance with room for improvement.
Jacobsen: So, there is a reasonable middle, but the extremes on either end make this a very flat distribution—almost like a low, broad mound. Any explanation for why it turned out this way? I mean, it does not necessarily have to look like that. It could have two peaks in the middle or be tightly clustered around the average. However, in this case, it is quite flat and diffuse.
Lupo: Right, and as we discussed earlier, there is that extensive range—between Wisconsin and Wyoming, for instance. However, like with most data distributions, the truth usually lies somewhere in the middle. There is a noticeable cluster of states scoring from the upper 40s to the low 60s. For example, Oregon came in at number four with a score of 66, and Nevada was at number 25—not too far behind. So that whole block sits pretty squarely in the middle.
Jacobsen: So, we can conclude there is a thick band of states with moderate levels of racial equality in education.
Lupo: Yes, exactly. If you disregard the outliers at both extremes, the national picture is probably average—maybe slightly above average—but still far from ideal. The wide disparity between the top and bottom states indicates that there is still meaningful work to be done. The middle group suggests that we are not at a crisis point, but we have not reached equity either.
Jacobsen: Well, my friend, that is all from me today. Thank you so much.
Lupo: No problem, Scott. Thanks so much. Have a great week—we will talk soon.
Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices. In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarks, performances, databases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.
